DICTIONARYOF

PALI IDIOMS
AN AID TO THE STUDENT OF PALI

BY

KAKKAPALLIYE ANURUDDHA THERA, Ph.D.

PUBLISHED
BY
THE CHI LIN NUNNERY
No,5,Chi Lin Drive
DiamondHill, Kowloon

HONG KONG
: 2004

. 1

iii a A Ho
 DEDICATED
witha

deepsenseofgratitude
tomy

parents,teachers

andto

by: TheVidyālamkāra
Pirivena
Kākkāpalliye AnuruddhaThera,Ph.D.

Publishedby:
Chi Lin Nunnery
3 Chi LinDrive
DiamondHill
Kowloon
HongKong

Tei: 2354-1735 Fax: 2351-4486

ISBN: 962-7714-19-4

Copyrighte2004by Chi Lin

No partof Nunnery
All rightsreserved.
system,or 'ransmittedjn any this book may bereproduced.
Storedin a retrieval
Permissionof thepublisher, form or by any meansWithoutthepri
|
 INTRODUCTION other,theiridiomwasmoreor lessthesame.Therestof thePāli CanonI hopeto
dealwith in my nextattempt.
I wasprompted
prompte o ilea dictionaryof
to compilea dicti "thi
this form by my studentsin the
Universityof Kelaniya,
y of Kelaniya, Sri
SriLanka.
Theywere,bydescent,
ChineseandKoreans
Turning thepagesof thetextspatiently,| madea searchfor Pali phrasesand
who had been studyi
ē ingg I ali i for the i EXE n i i ) i -xperience
I Diploma Ekai Ination. | fc und, in my CKI C ‘|
clauseswhich.I thought,
wouldbeusefulforthestudent,
learningPali.| found,to
with them . that
< the study
5 Ī of a str uctured age like i ) ) )
" language like I āli, t€ Say more 5 ecifically
mysatisfaction,
severalthousands
of suchphrases
andclausesandenshrined
them
the declension )I nouns a I
ol ; and the i io ji 28. V t I yr them n
houns con ugati n ol vert S, Was difficul e I . I
hereaftersorting themout carefully.There were manyphrasesandsomeclauses
ordertomakethe
em moreandmore familiar wi Pali tae )
miliarwiththePāli idiom,without resorting whichwererepetitivethroughouttheliterature.For example,evammesutam, ekam
io the trad i tona
i é l m e tho:od of r I a t ach > E C i p
ali i C i g e
Ing, I collected Some I āli hrases and cla uses
samayam, tena kho pana samayena, ekamantam nisīdi, Bhagavantam
fromtheP4li texts,parti
alitexts, I
particularlyfromtheMahaparinibbana
Sutt
anta which was a abhivadetva,Bhagavadetadavoca,yena Bhagavadtenupasamkamiand so on. |
Prescribed
HE textfor
HE them,andexplainedto them theirmeaning
andgrammatical
significance.
Emphasis
ww. 'ever,laidonkeeping
lai , addedto themonly a few referencenumbersbecausetheir meaningwasjust the
I as,however, themin theirminds with the
meaning.
|Thismethod prov same,wherevertheyoccur. I thoughtit wouldbea wasteoftime to giveall the
Sincethattime| hadbee ti
3 . n collecting
odprovedmoreSuccessful.
I d phrases and clauses for T ini g 5 ents to le. m the angu ge c I e throu gh reference
numbers
to suchrepetitive
phrases.
Thereweresomeotherphrases
and

th ©
a liliterature.
, When th let aining
rab the students
a nmaiot tc lea
) T ua oa | L umpur,
lag ofcurrently
ali I rou the clauses
whichappear
withminorvariations
indifferent
textsandatdifferent
contexts.
e V ne le Dh i i )
I 1 ¢ i K 1: I
I rofess ī and head of the depa ri ten E S rarv I put themtogether,mentioningthe variationat theend of thereferencenumber.
. n t of Buddhist Lite arv Source > in the I dst
Gradua
) )te Institute of F āli
ali and Buddhist i Studies 2S.5 Unive aī Sity p
of Kelani i cE a

c"0 cc ting £ Pā Ē rases :

ali ph ases and Clauses, he
I
p Opos
oc
d t
ha the TUI
t I
é lya, Saw
The secondpartof my work wasto write themeaningof what I sortedout for
Be TI materials thus collecte
uld be usedto compile a dictionary A, thedictionaryandto makea grammaticalanalysison importanttermstherein,for
The Dict of"psi;
heDictionary Pali Idiomsis theresult.
thebenefitof thestudent.
| preferredliteraltranslation
of thetext.Whenitwasnot
selected
selected
only
;I
eighttextsfromthePali
i
C: i totally possibleas in thecaseof idiomaticexpressionslike hatthim datvakacche
fromtheSuttaPitakaandfourfromth anonfor this compilation, E
sajjeyya,| clarifiedtheidiomaticmeaning
expressed
by thephraseor theclause
i e Vinaya
ya Pitak:
Pitaka, ;
The Sutta Pitaka texts were
TheDīghaNikāya,
TheMaiihima
Nik separately.In discerningthe meaning,I consulted the relevantP.T.S. translations
āya,The
e: Samyutta
i ikā
Nikāyaand TheAmguttara
Nikāya.TheVinaya Pitakatextsw
eretheVinayaPitakam,Vol. | (The andPalicommentaries.
Prideof placewasgiventothecommentarial
explanations,
The
os Vfe
inayaPitakam,Vol,II(The I
Cullavagpa),The VinayaPitakam,Ahāvagaa),
Vol, UI (The
particularlyon theexplanationof doctrinalanddisciplinary matters,becausethey
amga,part1),and
I TheVin ayaPitakam,Vol, IV (The carrythelegacyof Buddhist
tradition,
downtheages.A Sanskrit
—EnglishDictionary
2).Theywereall PaliText
Societyeditions i Suttavibhamga,
part
by Sir Monier Monier-Williams,The Pali —EnglishDictionaryby T. W. RhysDavids
approximately
sey I
Aha en thousandp;
§ Pages.
ages, Thereason
e reac forSelecting
on| ) andWilliamStede,andA PaliGrammar
byWilhelmGeigerwereof muchhelpfor
attheywere,on theone MEHA VAI me in analysinggrammaticalterms. | ommittedthespecialsign,cerebraln, added
neous in characterand on the
to certainsuffixesby thetraditionalPali grammarians
to illustratesomegrammatical

4
taumau
 functions.For thisreasonthesuffixesna, nya, niya, nika, ni, neyya,ne, naya,
promotion
of Buddhisteducation
andculture.
nape,napayainthetraditional
grammar
appearin thisdictionaryas a, ya, iya, ika,

ī, eyya,e, aya,āpe,āpaya. The studentcaneasily understand,I suppose,the

My colleagues
andfriendsattheChi Lin CulturalCentre,andtheChi Lin
distinctive
characteristic
of thesesuffixeswhenheseesthechangestakenplacein
EveningCollegecometo my mindat thismoment.They helpedmein variousways
thefirstvowelofthe nounorof the root,if theyarenot followed by a conjunct
andstoodbehindmeallthetime.TheChi Lin Buddhist
Library,theBuddhist
Library
consonant.
t.Further, / equaltreatment
I gave B i
totwoformsofBderivativenouns,primary
inSingapore,
andMr,SiuSik Kauof theChi Lin CulturalCentreprovided
mewith
andsecondary,
by i them
ry,byputting o underonedesignation,
i i der.Instrumentalandagent
necessary
Pali texts,commentaries,
translations,
anddictionaries
for mywork.I
nounsare als edalike,
ealsotreatedalike,referri tobothoneabbreviation,
referring instr..hasbeen
remember,
withgratitude,
theservices
rendered
bythem.It is mypleasure
toplace
given.I followed
g 'edthewayadopted
theway
: ī
by theP.T.S.Pali-EnglishDictionaryi
n giving on record my sincere thanksand gratitudeto the following friends, colleagues,
rootsto Pāli terms,although
it w
wasnotthewayfollowedbythetraditional
Pali
students,anddevoteesfor theirgood will andco-operationshownto mewhile this
grammarians.
work was in progress:Ven. Dr. Jin Yin (Nanda),actingdirector,Centreof Buddhist

Studies,The University of Hong Kong; Ven. Sek ShangMiau (ThuangNeng) in

I hadtotypeth
ype the
computer ;andto putthediacriticalmarkson several
myself
Taiwan:Dr. Li Kwok Fu andMr. Ma Siu Hungwhoaremyfirendsandcolleagues
thousands
of Paliterms. | ofI course,
It was, a tedious
iob forme,particularly
the
doingresearch
in theculturaldepartment
of Chi Lin; Mr. andMrs.Zhang,andDr. amen
96g
Fhe
, E ; ī itica ] mar
a ks. I he strain Ww
as 5
so much. It Wfas I educed : to ä
é certainai

Ms.LingKwai Chunin HongKongandMs.YeohPow Li andMs.JennyQueckin 5 34-161

Sin Yi w
Singapore.
y andwith a verysharpeye.
LE A o f my colleaguesat theChi Lin Cultural Centre
P » ei I

ARE
ntomycomputer
problems,
Whenever
theyoccur. d indexed this volumei
,ān
Pali <
ali alphabet i i
whichwasforeignto mycomputer,The
givenbybothof them,I appreciate
verymuch I

KakkapalliyeAnuruddhaThera

ChiLinCulturalCentre
No.5,ChiLinDrive
Diamond
Hill
me in carryin out n y wor Wit case, SO, am ate u to ec 1 “IN Nunnery
Kowloon
HongKong
20".August2003

6
 Akatthapako Akappiye

m.
Vols.,Reprints,1999,1976, Akatthapako sali paturahosi,akano navakammamdatum —Vin. II. 172
meta.
1976,1979,1979) athuso sugandhotandulapphalo —D. To renovatea dwellingplacenotbuilt
mid.
II. 88 or unfinished;
Da +tum,inf.
neg.
Wild rice, which hasno coating,no
nom. Akatayūsena attho hoti— Vin. I. 206
huskand is fragrant,pureandreadyfor
nt.
eating,appeared;akaithebhūmibhāge Thereis a needfora drinkprepared
acc. onom. arafine sayamevajatam - Cy. 869; a with unpolishedgreengram
analog.
opp. +Krs +ta,pp.; Pae +a, der;
caus.
I another meaningalso is possible for Akatanudhammo namaukkhitto
comp.
p. akatthapāka (uncooked with fire anosarito—Vin. IV. 137
cond.
pass. wood),if pāka can be interpretedas a Nottakenfollowupactionmeans
cp. suspendedbutnotreinstated;
a +Kr +
PED. contractedform ofpakka, seeD.A.
Cy.
pl. 965; patu+ ® +ahosi ta,pp. + anu + dhamma;u(t) + Ksip
D. +ta,pp; an+o+Sr+e+i +ta,
Pp.
Vols., Reprints, 1995,1995, Akantakanikkantaka
arahanto—A. caus.pp.
pr.p.
1992) V. 135
pres,
dat. Arahantshaveno thorns,theyhave Akatena me ettha katam, avusitena
pst.
denom. removedthorns meetthavusitam—M. I. 515
BUS:
der. Herein thisteaching
whatwasdoneby
redup.
secondary Akantaka bhikkhave viharatha —A. meisegualwithwhatwasnotdone,
S.
desid. V. 134-5 whatwaslivedbymeisegualwith
Vols.,Reprints,1991,1989, Bhikkhus,abidewithoutthorns whatwasnotlived;a +Kr +fa,pp.;a
emphatic
particle
Ē 1975,1990,1994) (distresses) + yi + Vas+ i +ta, pp.
fut.
sg. Akathamkathikusalesudhammesu -
fut.pp. Akatakalyana akatakusala
Skt. akatabhiruttana —A. I. 155 M. III. 35
gen.
Sn. Thosewho havedoneno good,no Theonewhohasnodoubtastothe
inf,
Th.I wholesome things,andnothingtoallay matters of good;katham+katham+
instr,
Vin. fear; a +Kr +ta,pp. +bhiru+ i, der.
intens.
interr. Vols.,Reprints,1969,1977 uttāna
loc. 1984,1984)
M. voc, Akatapātarāsoāgamissati —A. IV. patibāhati—Vin. I. 250
64 It agreeswithimpermissible,
rejects
(He)will comewithouttaking permissible;Kappa+ iva,der.;
breakfast;a +kata1 pātarāsa: anuloma+e +ti, denom. pres.3”.
piita+® +dsa(fromAs) sg.;pati +Bah +a +ti,pres.3”.sg.

Akatam vā vihāram vippakatam vā Akappiyekappiyasanni

—A. I. 84
Akappiyena
Theonewhohaspermissible senseof
whatis notpermissible;
kappa+iva,
der. +sanna+i, der.
Akappiyenaāsādeti—M. I. 371
Causes
toattack
byproviding
unsuitable
food;@+Sad+e +fi,
caus. pres. 3™. Sg.
Akammakāmā alasāmahagghasa
- a+ Kup +ya, fut. pp.
A. IV. 92
Theonewhodoesnotliketodoany
work,lazyandeatstoomuch:maha+
ghasa
Akaranīyambāhirehipaecatthikehi
paccamittehi —A. IV. 106
Nothingcouldbedonebyexternal
adversariesandenemies:pati +attha
- ika,der.
Akaraniyaniacikkhitum—Vin. 1,96
To tellspecificallywhatshouldnotbe
done;four akarantyani:sexual
intercourse,stealing,Killing a human
beingandmakingafalse statement
on supernaturalqualities;a+ Ky +
antya,fut.pp.; @+Khya +i + MI
intens.inf,
Akaranīvāvayadidamyuddhassa - der., = samannāhāra,manasikāra;
D. 1.26
Theyareindeedincapable
of fighting
thebattle;
I akarantya+eva; Yadidam,
indcl,
Akaranīyomarassa—A, IV. 109
Nothingcouldbedoneby thee
vil one:
Sen, is usedfor instr.(agent).
Akarāmevamayampubbena
nākaramha—M. II, 214
Akālo
Certainly,
wedidin thepastnorwedid
not;a+ Kr +@ +mha,doublepst. 1".
pl.+ eva; na +akaramha,
Akale senamuyyojeti—A. V. 82;
Vin.IV. 160
Causesthearmyto marchforwardata
wrongtime;u(t) +Yuj +e +fi, caus.
pres.3”. sq.
Akāmakānammātāpitunnam
assumukhānamrudantānam—D. I,
115;M. I. 163
Whiledisagreeingparentsarecrying
withtearfulfaces;Rud +a + nta,pr.
D.:gen.absl.
Akāmāvyākātabbo —D. I. 94
Youshouldexplain,evenif you don’t
like;vi +@+Kr +tabba:kartabba>
kattabba>katabba,Sut.pp.
Akarako so bhikkhu —Vin. IV. 132
That bhikkhu is innocent;a +Kr 4
aka, der.
Akalacivaramuppannamhoti—Vin.
IV.284
An untimelyrobewasavail
able: u(t) +
Pad +ta, pp.
Akālameghoudapādi—Vin. 1.3
There occurredanuntimelyrain:u(t) 4
a+ Pad +j, pst. 3”. sg.
Akālo kho gahapatiimamkālam
tamBhagavantam
dassanāya
upasamkamitum- Vin. I. 155
Sense Householder,thisiSnotihe
righttime
to go andseethatBlessedO
hour;imamkālam,ace.for ne,atthis
sam+Kram+j 4 tum,inf loc.; upa +
Akalo
Akalo kho Bhagavantamdassanaya,
patisallino Bhagava —M. IL. 23
This is notthepropertimetoseethe
BlessedOne, (because)the Blessed
One is in solitude;pati +sam +Li +
ta, PP.
Akālo kho mānavaka atthi me aiia
bhesaliamattāpītā —D. I. 205
Young man,thetimeis notsuitable,
todayI havehada little medicine
drunk;ajja,indel.;Pi +ta,pp.
Akalo tava paīihassa—5. II. 19
The time is still not suitablefor the
auestion(for askingtheguestion);
tava, indel.
Akiceakārī assa—D. I. 135
He would be theone doing what
shouldnotbedone;a +Kr (t)+ya,
pp. + Kr +a+T, der.; As +ya(SKt.
Akieeam karoti kiccam aparādheti
—A.II. 67
Hedoeswhatshouldnotbedoneand
fails to do what shouldbe done;apa +
Radh +e +ti, caus.pres.3. sg.
Akiriyavādo bhavam Gotamo — Vin.
Ill. 2
VenerableGotamais anadvocateof
non-actionor no effect of action
Akiriyāya santhahanti—A. I. 173
Settlein non-action;
sam+Stha+a +
nti,pres.3™.pl.
Akilantoaddhānamgamissati— Vin.
I. 292
Will goonthelongroadwithoutbeing
Akusala
tired; a +Klam +ta, pp.
Akuppam pativiiihati —A. HI. 119,
120
Realisestheimmutable
state;pati +
Vvadh+ya + ti, pres. 3. sg.
Akuppā me cetovimutti —Vin. I. 11
Liberationof my mind is unshakable;
Akusalamāpannokiācidevadesam
kāyena—A. I. 54
I havecommittedmyself to something
unwholesomewiththebody;@+Pad
+ta,pp.;kim+ci +(d) +eva
Akusalam pajahatha,kusalam
bhavetha—A. I. 58
Abandontheunwholesomeand
cultivatethewholesome;pa +Ha +
tha,rootredupl.,pres.2™.pl.; Bhit+
e + tha, caus. pres. 2”. pl.
Akusalam pajahatha, kusalesu
dhammesuabhogam karotha —M. I.
124
Give up theunwholesomeandfocus
mind on thewholesome;a + Bhuj + a,
Kr +0 +tha,pres.2”. pl.
Akusalam bhayabheravamavhayanti
—M.1. 17
Call upviciousobjectof fear;@+Hva
+ya +nti,meta.,pres.3”.pl.
Akusalasancetanika
hetu—A. V. 294
Duetounwholesome intent;sam+
cetanā t ika, der.
Akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyum-
a. na... a

Akusala Akkosantam Akkosadhippayo Akkhuddavakaso

S.IV. 104 Akusalena citā vamkā bhitti Akkosādhippāyo vadeti—Vin. III. akkhara t akkharāva
Unwholesome things
wouldgradually paripati —Vin. II. 159 166
flowinto;anu+@+Sru+a+ Thecrookedwall built by anunskillful Hespeakswiththeintention
of Akkharāya pariyāpunāti —Vin. IV.
evyum, opt.3. pl. collapsed;
Ci +ta,pp.;pari +Pat +i, abusing;ā + Krus + a, der. + 305
pst.3”.sg. adhippaya; Vad + e + ti, pres. 3”. sg. Learns,
syllable
bysyllable;
pari+Ap
Akusaladhammaabhivaddhanti, +(u)na +ti,pres.3. sg.
kusalādhammāparihāyanti
—M. Akusalehivitakkehi anvasatto—A. Akkositabbam paribhasitabbam
III. 46 IV. 356 Akkharikāyapikīlanti—Vin. II. 10
maniieyyasi? —M. II. 210
Unwholesome
things
growupand Possessed
byevilthoughts;
anu+a + Theyplaywithwordstoo;akkhara+
Wouldyouthinkthatheshouldbe
wholesome
thingsdecline;abhi + sak(fromSaiij) + ta,pp. ika,der;Krid +a +nti,pres.3”.pl.
reproachedandreviled?; Man +ya +
Vrdh+a +nti,pres.3”.pl.;pari +
eyyasi,opt.2". sg.
Ha +ya+nti,pres.3”.pl. Akūtamkūtavādena
pāpesi—Vin. Akkhānenapāpunitum—M. III. 167
IV.5 Akkhanā asamayābrahmaeariya- To understand
bya narration;ad
+Khya
Akusaladhammasarasamkappā (You)causedto insult(me),who vāsāya—A. IV. 225 +ana,der;pa +Ap +(u)na +i +
samyolaniyā—S. IV. 77 is not fraudulent, with the word Unfitmoments andtimesfor leading tum,inf.
Unwholesome things,memoriesand
fraudulent;
pa+Ap+e +s +i, caus. thehighestwayof life; a +Khana
thoughts,
whichhavea bindingeffect:
pst.3. sg. Akkhitto anupakkuttho jativadena -
Smr+a, der.;sam+ Yojana+ iya,
Akkhadassā mahāmattā—Vin.III. 47 D. I. 113
der.
Akkamitva
pavattesi
—Vin. IHI.38 Tudges
of thecriminalcourtandthe Notcastout,notreproached
bybirth:
Havingattacked,
caused(her)to fall a+ Ksip + ta,pp.; an + upa + Krus+
Akusalanamdhammānam pahānam chief ministers; akkhadassāti
down;d +Kram + i +tva,absol.; pa
kusalānamdhammānam dhammavinicehanakā,mahāmaitāti la, pp.
+Vrt+e+s+ i, caus.pst. 3”. sg.
upasampadam —M. II. 215 Ihānantarappattāmahāamaceā,Cy.
Abandonmentof unwholesome things 309 Akkhim va nikhanissami,
Akkosakaparibhāsako
—A. II. 58; bhamukam va ukkhipissami —Vin.
andattainment
of wholesome
things;
III. 252 Ill. 53
pa +Ha +ana,der; upa+sam+ Akkhamo appadakkhinaggahi
Reproacherandabuser;@+ Krug +
Pad -- ā anusasanim —Vin. III. 178 I will scratch(my)eyeor raise(my)
aka,der.;pari +Bhas +aka, der.
Theonewhois intolerant andtakesthe eyebrow;ni +Khan +i +ssami,fut.
instruction
ina wrongway;a +Ksam I. sg.; u(t) + Ksip + i + ssdmi,fut.
Akkosatiparibhasativihimsati
IHI,353 +a, der.;a +pa +dakkhina+ Grh + JOUSe:
vitudatirosetivācāya
—A. III. 366
Evil thoughts
becomeactivein the i, der.;
Reproaches,abuses,
harasses,
attacks
Akkhīni dukkhābhavissanti
—Vin. I.
makes(others)
angrywithw h
pres.3”.pl. ords;vi+ Akkhamabbhaiijeyya yavadeva 71;IV. 129
Hims+a +ti,pres.374,
Sg.) vi + Tud bhārassanittharanatthāya
—
S. IV. Theeyeswill bepainful
+a +ti,pres,3r
Akusala vutthapetvakusale Sg.;Rus+e +ti, 177
caus.pres.3".sg.
patitthāpeti—M. I. 32 Wouldoil theaxlejust forthe Akkhuddāvakāso dassanāya —D. I.
Having
pulledoutfrom transportation
of theload;abhi+Afij 114
*

unwholesome
thing,he is established
Akkosantam
na pa
onawholesome
thing;vi +u(t)+
TEI ce:
EREi +eyya,opt.3. sg.;yava+(d) + Not appearing
inferior;bhotosarīre

Stha+dpe+tva,caus.absol.;
Does
not
Ses re in return,theone
not reproach, eva;ni(s) + Tr +ana,der,+attha dassanassa
okāsona khuddako,
whoisreproaching:a +Krug4+at mahā,sabbān'evate
pati +Stha+ape + li, caus
34 ge ti, caus.pres,
o
Ald,pr.p.;pati +@+ Kru 4 amgapaccamgānidassanīvān'eva,
;
Pres.3",sg. See tānicāpi mahantān
'eva'ii dīpenti,
Cy.282; a +khudda-- avakāso
Akkhena Agarava Agāravo Aggalatthapanaya

Akkhenaakkhamcakkenacakkam
yugenayugampativaftesi—D. II. 96
(She)causedto move(thechariot)
backandforthstriking
against
the
axlewiththeaxel,thewheelwith
thewheel,theyokewiththeyoke;
pati + Vri+e+s +i, caus.pst.3”,
Sg.
Akkhepaiohissāmi— D. II. 348
I will offerthedice;pajohatam
karissāmi,balikammam karissāmīti
attho,D.A.812;pa + Hu +i +ssami,
rootredup.,fut. 1",sg.
Akkhesudhanaparajayo —A. V. 171
Lossof wealthin gamblingwithdice
Akkhehidibbanti
—M. I, 106
Theyplaywithdice:Div +va +nti
pres.3. pl. |
amgāra; o (ava) + Dha +eyya, opt.
Si Se:
Agadhito amucchitoanaiihāpanno
adinavadassavi
nissaranapaniho
paribhunjati—S.II. 194
Heappropriates withoutbeingbound
to it, infatuatedby it andadheredto it,
withoutseeingthedangerof it and
withtheknowledge of escapefromit;
a+ grath +i +ta,pp.; Murch + i+
ta,pp.; adhi +@+ Pad + ta, pp.; Drs
+avi,der.;pari +Bhu(fi)j +a+ ti,
pres:3" sg.
Agamakho tvammaharaja
yathapemam— D. 1.50
Greatking,youwenton asif you were
movedby love(youwereovercomeby
emotions)
; a +Gam+a,pst.3%.se.;
khoandyatha,indel.
viharanti —Vin. IV. 14 Aggafine ariyavamse thito —A. Il. 27
( They)abidewithoutrespects, without Theonewhohasestablished himself
deferenceandwithoutequalsharing;a on theancientlineageof thenobles;
+garu +a, der.; a +pati + Sru +a, Stha +i +ta,pp.
der; a +sabhaéga+vutti +ka, der.
Aggappatto sarappatto suddho sare
Agāravo appatisso asabhagavuttiko patitthito —A. I. 241
sabrahmacārīsu—A. III. 14 The onewho hasreachedthepeak,
The one who is disrespectful, reachedthecore, beenpureand
disobedient
andnonco-operative established
(himself)in thehighest
value; sīlasamādhipaiināsāre
towardsco-celibates
patitthito, Cy. II. 355; agga +pa +
Ap +ta,pp.; Sudh +ta,pp.;pati +
Agārasmā anagāriyam pabbaiati -
Stha+i +ta,pp.
D. 1.18
Proceeds from home-life to homeless
life (renouncesthe family life); an + Aggamakkhāyati dhammenevano
agara + iya, der.;pa + Vraj + a + ti, adhammena—D. HI. 83
pres. 3. sg. (He) is said to be thehighest
according
totheLawandnot
Agarikabhitassa sato me—S. II. 219 otherwise; aggo + @+ Khya +ya +
When I wasa householder.; ti, pass.pres. 3”. sg.

Akhineyevakammepitaroca agara + ika, der.; As +nta,pr.

pitamahaca kalamkata—Vin. NI Agama
nu?—D.I. 108 p.: gen.absl. Aggamakkhayati yadidam ayuna
Didyougo? cevayasasaca —M. II. 141
181
Fathers
andgrandfathers
diedwhenthe Agilano nama sakkoti pindaya He is said to be thehighestin ageand
AgarukhopanaBhagavato
—
D. I, 89 gantum —Vin. IV. 183 fame;yadidam,indel.;ca +eva
workremainedunfinished:
@+Ksi +
Not heavy
( difficult ) for theBlessed
ta, pp. The unsickmeanstheone who cango
One. Aggamaggāni bhoianāni denti -
on alms collection;Sak + (no) + ti,
Agatapubbam
n disam
disam
gaccheyyam
- pres, 3. sg. Vin. IV. 232
Agāmakearaīiheaddhayoiane (They)givethebestfood;agga+(m)
A.TV.418 e
I shouldgotoa directionwhichI have
addhayoiane
—Vin.
TV,
295 Agutto arakkhito —D. IHI. 183 +aggani;Da +e +nti,pres.3™.pl.
In theforest,wherethereareno
notvisitedbefore Unguarded
andunprotected
; a +Gup
villages,in every
half yojana
+ta,pp.; a+ Raks + i + ta, pp. Aggam dhammamarahattam—
A.
(aboutfour miles)
Agatimgacchati—A. II. 18;IHI, 274 III. 433
TakesupaWrong
course
(one Aggakarikam adasi —Vin. III. 80 Arahanthood,thehigheststate
becomespreiudiced) Agāramaiihāvasati +
—D.1.88;S. IV. Gavethefirstportion;a +Da +a +s
240;A.1.281
+i, doublepst.3”. sg. Aggalaguttivihārovā hoti—Vin. I.
Agadamgāramvanamukhe Leadsa householdlife;adhi +
odaheyya ta +ti,pres,3% a+ Vas 298
—M.11.216 " SE.)agāramis
Aggafiiamakkharamanupatanti
- Or it is a residence
witha door-lock;
80vernedby thePrelik adhi
Would applymedicatedcharcoalon D. IHI.88 aggala+Gup +ti, der.
thesurfaceofthe wound;agada+
They repeatancientwords ; anu + Pat
Agāravāappatissā
āsabhāgavuttikā +a+ nti, pres.3”:pl. Aggalatthapanāya
—Vin. IV. 47
Aggalam
Tofixthedoor-lock;
aggala+
thapana
Aggalamacchupeyyam —Vin. I, 290
I shouldadda patch;@+chup+
eyyam,opt.1, sg.
Aggi accimaca vannimaca
pabhassaroea—M. II. 152,203
Thefirewhichhasa flame,colourand
radiance;
acci+manta,
der.:vanni+
manta, nom, sg.
Aggi tinakatthipadanam paticca
jalati, tassaca pariyadanaafifiassa
ca anupahārāanāhāronibbutotveva
samkhamgacchati—M. I. 487
Fireblazesdepending onthefuelof
grassandwood,duetotheendingof
thatfuelandnotsupplyingof another. caus.pr.p.
beingwithoutfuel,it is reckoned as
extinguished; upa+@+Da +ana,
der.; Jval +a +ti pres.3".sg. pari Performsfire- sacrifice:Ha ta ti,
+a+ Da +ana,der: an +ne +Hr
+a, der; an +Ghara:ni + Vr +ta,
PP.+ iti +eva;sam+Khya:gaccha
T ti,pres.3". so.
Aggidaddhovatappati—A, IV.
97
(He)sufferslike theonescorched
by fire;aggi +Daddho:Dah +ta
Pp.+iva; Tap+ya +ti.Pass. he
3”, sg. rf
Agginaaggikaraniya
mkātum—M.
Il. 152
To do Whatis to bedonewithfire;
aggi +Kr +aniya,Sut,pp.;
kartum>kattum> Kettlhe-A.
kātum, inf,
Aggina
daddho
hoti- Vin. I. 149
Is burntdownby fire;
Dah+ta,pp.
Aggisikhariva Aggihuttamukhā Acirapakkantassa
Aggimpijaneyya,dhimampi janeyya As a flame ; aggisikhd +®+iva, Aggham kurutu —D. II. 240
=A. IV. 72 simile Pleaseacceptthe offering ; agghanti
Wouldproducefire, producesmoke: athitino upanāmetabbam,Cy. 664;
Jan +eyya,opt.3. sg. Aggihuttamukha yanna —Vin. I. 246 kurutu, a rare form, seemsto be the
All sacrificesstartwith the fire imper.3. sg. of Kr.
Aggim abhinibbatteyya,tejo
sacrifice; aggihutta (Agnihotra); Yaj
pātu-kareyya—M. I, 242 Anumattesuvajjesu bhayadassavi -
+ya, fut.pp.
Hewouldproducefire andmake D. 1.63
heatmanifest;
abhi +ni +Vrt + Seeingfearin thetiniestfaults; Vad +
Aggihuttam paricarati —5. I. 167
e +eyya,caus.opt. 3”. se. pātu
Goesroundthesacrificialfire:pari 3
+kareyya:
Kr. +0 +eyya,opt. Car -- a 1.ti, pres. 3'".sg. + dvi, der.
seen:
Aggi ujjaletum —Vin. I. 31 Anum va thilam va —M. I. 129,
Aggim adhentoyūpam ussāpento-
To causeto kindleupfires;u(J+ Jval 456
A.IV.42
+e +tum,caus. inf. Small or large
Causingto kindlefire andto hoist
sacrificialpost;@+Dha + e + nta,
Aggī pahātabbā,parivaiietabbā —A. Andamkandivantassa
—Vin. III. 117
Caus.pr.p.; u(t) + Sri 4 ape +nta,
IV.43 When (he was) scratcingthetesticle;
Fires shouldbe abandoned,should kandu + a + nta, denom.pr.p.
causeto be avoidedcompletely;pa +
Aggimiuhati —A. IL 207
Ha + tabba,fut.pp.; pari + Vrj +e + Acakkhussa duggandha—Vin. II.
tabba,caus.fut. pp. 148
rootredup.pres. 3'd..
5g. (They were)badfor theeyesand
smelly; a + cakkhu(s) +ya, der.; du
Aggi vijjhapetum —Vin. I. 31
Aggimdatvāpakkamimsu—M. I.
To causetoextinguish
fires;vi +Kst + gandha
333
+dpe +tum,caus. inf.
Havingsetfireon,theywentoff: Da +
Aeittīkatvādeti—A. III. 171
va, absol.;pa + Kram +imsu,pst.
3, pl.
Agge viraiiati, pagevahīnasmim - Offerswithoutrespects
A. V. 59
He is disinterested
notonlyin thelow Acirakaritam hoti anaiihāvuttham -
butin thehighaswell;vi +Raj +ya + S. IV. 182
ti, pass. pres. 3. sg.; pageva, indcl. Causedto be built recentlyandnot
acrificial yetoccupied;
a +cira+ Kr+e+i
pr.p.; As Aggo settho mokkho uttamo pavaro +ta,caus.pp; an +adhi+ad+ Vas
—5. IHI.264 + fa, pp.
Aggi va visam y Thechief.thesupreme,
theprominent,
IV. 150
a sattham vā kamati
the highest,theexcellent Acirapakkantassa Bhagavato—D. I.
Fire,poisonor
ire, we:
©apon
affects (hin). 8, II. 189;M. I. 13,110;S. I. 54;IHI.
Kram+a +ti,pres.3",sg NM, Agghati adhikasatasahassam —A. III. 95;A. 1.237
50 Not longafterthedeparture ofthe
Aggisikhāriva—D. 11.260 It is worth morethanone hundred BlessedOne;gen.absl.:a t cira t pa
thousand;
Argh+a +ti,pres,3”.sg. + Kram + ta,pp.
Acirapakkante
AcirapakkanteDevadatte —S. I, 153
Not longafterthedeparture
of
Devadatta;
loc.absi.
AcirapakkanteVassakarebrahmane
Magadhamahāmatte —D. II. 76
Notlongafterthedepartureof the
Ratthapale, addhamāsūpasampanne
brahminVassakāra,
chiefministerof
Magadha
; loc.absl.
Aeirapakkantohoti imasmā
dhammavinayā —M. I. 68
It wasnotlongagothatheleftthis
doctrineanddiscipline
AciraparinibbuteBhagavati—D.1.
204;M. HI. 7
Notlongaftertheparinibbāna of the
BlessedOne. loc.absl.:pari +ni +
Vr +ta,pp.
Aciraparinibbutesu
SariputtaMoggallanesu —S. V. 163
Notlongaftertheparinibbanaof
Sariputta
andMoggallana
Aciram goyoniyacuto—Vin, I. 132
Recentlyshiftedfromthecow-
: birth;
Cyu + fa, pp.
Aciravatiyanadiyāosārenti—Vin
IHI.63
CausetostowawayIn theriver
Aciravati;0 (ava)+Sp
"é@+ nti, caus.
Pres. 3™.pl.
Aciravibbhantavijata-
Vin. IV. 216
Not long aftertheturningback
(disrobed)shegavebirth:
vi +Bhram
" Ia, Pp.; vi +Jan +ta,pp.
Aciravutthitogelaniia~D, [1,99: S
18
Accayam Acchariyabbhutajata
Accayam
V. 153;A. I. 219,IV. 335 Accaraddhaviriyassa camkamato -
ava (from I), der.; Drs +e +ma,
Not long aftertherecovery from Vin. 1. 182
caus.pres, 1%,pl.
sickness;acira +vi +u(t) +Stha +i While walking with excessiveeffort;
+ta,pp.; gildna+ ya, der: P "e. $
Aecayam accayatopassati—5. I. 239
E ¢
Kram, prp.
See the offence as offence:passa' ti,
Aeirūpasampanneāyasmante Pres. 3". Sg.
Accāsannekammam karoti —A. IV.
—M.II. 60 Acceayoaceagamāsumkadāyikamva 339
Not longaftertheordinationofthe bhandasmim—A. I. 54 Works too near(home); ati +Gsanna
venerableRatthapala,two weeksafter The offenceovercameme like the
hisordination;a +cira 3 upa +sam tax payeron goods; ( if a person Aeei vātavegenakhittā —A. IV. 103
+Pad +ta,pp; addha +masa who should pay the tax on his The flamethrown afar by thegustoi
upasampanna goods at the customs goes beyond wind; Ksip + ta,pp.
the check point concealing the
Aeirvutthitāya parisāya —Vin. III, goods, the offenceovercomeshim, Accekacivaram patiggahetva
12 nikkhipitum—Vin. IHI.260
Notlongafterthedisperse
of the 32; Vi To acceptadditionalor casualrobeand
. Sg.
crowd,/oc. ahs]. keepit; accekacīvarantiaccayikam
Accayo mam bhante accagamayatha civaram, Cy. 729;ati + eka; pati +
Aeelakomuttācāro—M. II. 161 Grh + e + tva,absol.; ni + Ksip + i +
balam yatha milham yatha
Onewho is nakedandfreefrom tum,inf.
akusalam —D. I. 85
conventional
behaviour:mutta:Mue
Venerablesir, theoffenceovercame
T Ia, pp. t ācāra Aeeham udakam āgamma—
M. I. 38
mejust as it overcomesa fool, a
confusedandanunskilled ; yathd, Having come to the clean water, 1.e.
Accantanitthamnibbanam because of the clean water; @ + Gam +
indel.
ārādhenti—M. IHI. 4 ya, absol.
Theyaccomplishabsolutegoal of
Accasarabrahmanapanham—
S. V.
Nibbana;ati +anta 4 nittha;ni
218 Accharanam hetu —Vin. IIL. 17
+Va +anaor ni 4 vāna;der:;
Brahmin,thequestionwentbeyondthe Forthereasonof divinenymphs
a +Radh +
ard e+ nti, caus. pres. limit;ati +a +Sr +G,pst.-
rä
Wg.
J”, pl.
Accharasamghatamattampi—A. I.
10;IV. 396
Accāyikam karanīyam —M. II. 112
Accayamaccayatodisvāyathā-
Urgentmatterto beattended;
ati + Evenfora timeof snapping
fingers:
dhammampatikaroti—p. 1.85
aya (from I) t ika, der.; Kr +antya, accharā t samghāta:sam +Ghan
Havingseentheoffenceas offence
fut. pp. ta, pp.+ mattam + api
takesNecessary
stepsto redressit:
Drs +tv, absol.;pati + Vi
Kr +o t+4 Accaraddhaviriyam
uddhaccaya Accharikam pahareyya—M. IHI. 299
Pres. 3! sg. : meeEE,
samvattati—A. II. 375; Vin. 1. 182 (He) would snapfingers;pa +Hr + a
Accayam
accay Excessively
madeeffortleadsto +eyya,opt.3™.sg.
314 at 0 desema—Vin.
tem:- > I,
restlessness
of mind;ati +@ +Rabh
Weconfessoffence35offence;
ari ; +ta,pp.; u + Dhr or Hr + () +ya, Acchariyabbhutajata
ahesum—M. I.
y TEI der.;sam+Vrt+a +ti,pres.3. sg. 330
 Aechariyamanusso
Acchinna Acchinne
(They)became astounded;
acchariya+
and abbhutamvata bho expression Generated love towards recluses: a
abbhuta2 iāta: Ian ta,pp.
}
of astonishment:evarupo +api; Jan +e+s + i, pst i i
hay Ēue

Acchariyamanusso—
A.L.22 bhava +pati +Labh +a
...
Extraordinary
human
being Ailānato
a pana apassato etadeva
HA
ujukam hoti, yadidam na jana
Acchariya puggala dullabha siti—M.I. MA
āmāti
passam 27
427 ATA
Acchariyamidam abbhutamidam
yadidamidhagamanam—D.IL. 270 lokasmim—A. III. 356 This is indeedupnghtnessof a pers
Wonderfulandunprece Veryrarearethewondrouspersonsin who RO is
1. not knowingandwho
: Ue 5sn E
dentedīs this
visithere
: ; adidam,conj theworld: du +labha (fromLabhj a yi to saythatI don’t know
TG and
unciive
Acchecchi tanham vay- seeing. Io Say Haa

indec i. samyojanam, sammā mānabhi- I don’tsee;apassania,

pr-p.:aes
i Acchadessami dassami —Vin. III. TE ā - 3 =a tat ou -E
ma āsi
samayāantamakāsidukkhas ikhassa—M. fetad) -- eva:yadidam.īndci.; Ja
Acchariyambhanteabbhutam 216 k + mi, whia
n@ sz ¢pass
pres. i”. 3g. assa + mi
L12:A. 134
bhanteyavaParisuddhobhante AcchādessāmimeansĪ wIll offer (the pres. I" sz —> iit
rT

ff Craving.
E ul OT] craving,madeinoperative
Tathagatassa chavivanno Tobe);@ + Chad + e -- ssāmi, caus. )
me stan
etters,put an end to
te affliction by
Pariyodato!—p. 1].133 fut. 1°. so- it; is missing here: Dā + Ajanantenamaya bhanitam —Vin.
ightunderstanding
of conceit,
It is wonderful.Venerable
sir,it js Ssami, fut.
ut. j - SZ.
>
. 164 . :
ashecchatits
h iti is a, ens vero jrom
afuture tense
unprecedented. Venerablesir.hoy ner beenspokenby menotknowing:
Chid + ssati (Skt. syati); by taxing
Cleanandbrightis th Accha vippasannaanavila sandittha Bhan + i + ta,pp.
e skincolourof checchaas the verbal boseTE
theTathagata! —D.HI.129
>ava, inde]. used here addingthesuffixi, pst.3* SE:* STSEI "37
for emphasis. T ia, pp.; (Theriver)floweddownclean.
»Pari + Sudh made;vi + @+ Vrt.+aya *1, TA : ;Aiānanto pucchati —Vin. IV.RATE
m,
Pari +(y) +odéta extremelyclearandunstirred Not knowing he questions;a ko
; vi + pa pst. 3%. sg.; sam + Yuj+ e + =
+Sad +ta,Pp.; Svand
+i +ttha, i der.; māna t ph HA G ) + nta,prp.;
na E, Prch +ya ++i,preS.
Acehariyambhant mid.pst, 3 Sg.
e abbhutam aya(fromI), antam+akāsi: a FSH
bhanteyāvasub
hāsitaācidam + @+s + i, double pst. 3°. sg.
bhanteBhagava AcchidamBhagavākatham,
tā—S. I, 61 Ajanamevam mes se
It is wonderfuly acehidamSu
enerable sir,it js Batokatham—M. II. 35 Ajakapi pasukapi uparope apassampassamiti —Vin. : A A,
unpre cedented,
venerable sir,how BlessedOne.
clearis thisPoint, vihethenti—Vin. II. 154 TI Brothers,notknowingthus = wi
nicelyit wasSaidb Well- gone
y theBlessedOne: One,clearis thispoint; know”, notseeingthusI said, a a
acchariyaandabb accham+ idam Little goats and little calves o)I
huta occur a +Jan + na@ + nia, Pepi : 7 NEE e,
together littleplants;aja +ka,der.;pasu 2
Aechinditvāganhanti- der., the suffix ka is used here to g am,pst.1%.
sg.;Jan +na +mi,pres.
Acchariyamvatabho,abbhutam Plunder(takeby force Vin. III. 197 the meaning of a little pagape . I". sg.; a t passa + nta,prp.
vatabho,¢varupopinamasatto +i +tva,absol.;Grh ): ā t Chi(nld ropa: Ruh +a, der.; vi + Hid + e
bhavissati, €varupopinamayakkho meta.pres.3r4pl. ©NG + nti. nti, pres. 3”. pl. Aiānam
A) ī apassamyathabhitam
n) —M.
bhavissati,€varupopinama Il. 287 RAHI
attabhavapatilabho bhavissati- Aechinnakānidhāre issati—A.A.IV.
Aiaddhumārikam marissati— I TE knowing andseeingthereality
Vin. IHI. 105 nti as it is; aānam, apassam,PY:D.
dantakasāvāni
- 283 AI )
It is Surprisingindeedthatthere
Vin.1.287
Wear uncut ivo
Ty-colouredrobes;q + (He)will dielikea a I
will bea being of this kind,a Chid + ia t ka, mārikanti anāthamaranam,Cy. IV. Aiānam vā āha iānāmi, TA E
PP.; kasāva3 a, der.
demon of this kind,a formof life 138 āha na iānāmīti —M. I.sie .
of thiskind:acchariyamvatabho Acchinna bhavi Notknowinghesaid,aoe Ti ,
Ssanti- Vin. IV, 245
TheY mighthavebee Ajanesisamanesu
samanapemam
- knowinghesaid,"I don'tknow";a
n robbed: a+
M. II. 177 Ah +a,pst.3™.sg.
20
 Ajinakkhipam
Ajjasattahaparinibbuto Aiihattam
Aiiunho
a
Ajinakkhipamniva —Vin.IHI.
NNivasetva Vj
Da,cp.samghegotamidehi unblemished happinessinwardly:
EnteredintoParinibbāna,
a weekago
Havingcaused
tocladwiththe today;satta+aha+pari +ni +Vr + ajjhattam,(adhi +attam)indel.;pati
cloak Ajjatana pavaretyaaparajju
Ei of blackantelope’s
hide: ta, pp. +sam+ Vid +e +ti, caus.pres.3”.
ni + bhikkhusa
a +&+tā, caus.absol. samghampavāretum—Vi Sg.
II. 275 bas
Ajjunho bhanteagamehi—Vin. II.
Ajelak
Ii i ā pativirato—D.
apatiggahanā i Havinginvitedtoday,toinvitethe Ajjhattam appahino—M. I. 91
220; IV. 80, ayyā
communityof Bhikkhusonthe Not abandonedinternally;a +pa +
Venerablesir, pleasewait for to-night;
Refrained
ka we fromaccepting
Sheepand following day: ajjatana, der.:pa + Ha + ta, pp.
aiia ekadivasam,Cv. 672; aiia '
Vr
fre+e ++tvd,
mācaus, absol,: aparaiiu,
ah ka elaka;
a pati+Grh+ana, junho, haplology; ā t Gam t e t hi,
indel.
Ram + ta, pp. imper.
2". sg. Aiihattam avūpasantaeittā—M. IHI.
291
Ajjataggeāvarāmi Aiiaa patiggahetvā ii
patig a aparajjukhadi Thosewho haveno calmedmind
dvaram Aiievakiceamātappam—M. HI. 187
Niganthānam
Ni ~Vin. IV. 87 3 Ro internally;
a E vi +upa+Sam+ta,
ganthinam—M. | Effortmustbemadetodayitself;Kr +
380 ; Accepted todayandeatenonthe pp.+citta
FromtodayonwardI closeth
icca(Skt.krtya)fut.pp.; @+ Tap+
followingday:Pati +Grh +ei +twa,
,t Ie Niganthas
ii and Kaa ( door
Niganthīs
i ya, fut. pp.
absol.:dparaiiu,
; indcl; Khād 3-i +
- Ajjhattam avyasekasukham
ISciples);aiia +to +ava: ā Jaina ia, pp.
ga;ā + Vr + Ajjeva me dhannani jayantu, sveva patisamvedeti—D. I. 70; M. I. 181
a T mi,
M1, pres.I' Sg.
pres.[*
gabbhiniyo hontu, uttarasseva (He)causestoexperience untarnished
Aiia
E meu posathoti adhitthāt
tthātab
paccantu
—A. I. 240 happiness
inwardly;a +vi +@+Sic +
AjjMatagge i
patikkhipāmi
—Vin. I, 5 —Vin. I. 125 Ei:
Letmycropsspringuptodayitself,let a, der.
ae fromtodayonward:p Ko a One
E s
©should ī attention on, " today is
fix
SID +a+ mj. Pres. 1". sg ae NYuposatha.
dayof recital” thembe pregnanttomorrowitself, and
letthemberipened,rightonthe Ajjhattam itthindriyam
following day;Jan +ya + ntu, imper. manasikaroti, itthikuttam,
Ajjatagge
pānupetam Saranam Ajja me navā ab
Pavaranati adhitthātabbam
itthat:
Eke, 34. pl.; sve +eva; uttara +sve + itthakappam, itthividham,
Batam—S.Iv. 310; Vin. 1.4
pānupeteSara eva; Pac +ya +ntu, imper.pass. 3°. itthicchandamitthissaramittha-
namgate, ,OneTENA
s fix
ī attentionon. "todayis
Theonewhoh pl. lamkaram—A. IV. 57
aSgone forrefugefrom y Havāranā,
ceremony of invit E
: Onward
today untilth (A woman) pondersover,within
: da, indel.: pa + NA
Pana + upeta; upa +elastbreath: Vy re + ahd, Caus.
Aiihattameva eittam santitthati herself,femininity,feminine
I+ ta,Pp. Ēder. iti
,
adhi Ss ha
or
ta bh, a;
e fut.a
behaviour, feminineattitude,
feminine
sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati
Ajjatagge
mambh —M. I. 121;IHI.89;S. IV. 196 measure; feminineimpulse,feminine
āginivādena
Samudacaratj
-
Ajja va hiyyo y Mind standsstill within itself, settles voice,femininecharm;itthi+
Vin. IHI. 17 ä pare vā gacehāma -
From today onw
Vin. IV. 63 down,becomes one-pointed
andis indriya,itthi+Klp +ta,pp.; itthi +
ard (he) addressesme
3 Sam + u(t) tāda Let'sgo today, concentrated;
sam +tittha+ti,pres. ākappa,itthi +vidha,itthi +chanda,
tomorrow or day
alter;althoug 3”, sg; sam +ni + Sad +a + ti, pres. itthi +sara, itthi +alamkara
h the word hivyo
(Vesterday) is 3”. sg; eka + odi (odhi, ava + Dha);
Ajjatag8esamghe
; used here, ti A
eaning,according
meani au sam +@ +Dha +iva + ti, pass.pres. Ajjhattam uppajjamano uppajjati-
A.I1.392 I. dānamdassāmi- to the context
maybe tomorrow: ae SE, A. 1.189
! will givealmstothe gacchāma,imper.
i". pl. Keepsonarisingwithinoneself:adhi
todayOnward: Da +. Samgha, from
Ajjhattam anavajjasukham +atta; u(t) + Pad +ya +mana,pr.
*8- rarelya log. i Sami,fur. ys
is used
use,with
j the root Ajjasattaha parini
is Inibbuto —D. ri. 162; patisamvedeti—D. I. 70; M. I. p.; u(t)+Pad +ya +ti,pres.3 sg.
180;IHI.34
(He) causesto ekperience Aiihattam kathamkathī assatha—M.
22
23
 Ajjhattam Aiihāsayam
Ajjhattam
1.265
establishedwithin me:sw +sam + The onewho hasgonewrong in
Youwouldbeinquisitive
within Ajjhattam vapasamasamanasamici-
Stha+i +ta,pp. celibatebehaviour;
adhi+dcara;vi +
yourself;Katham
katham+7,der.; patipadam patipannoti vadāmi —M.
As +yatha(Skt.yatha);
opt.2, pl. 1,284 Pad +ta,pp.
Ajjhattam me samkhittam cittam -
Forthereasonof internalcalmness,|
A. IV. 32 Aiihāyako upanīto—M. II. 154
Ajjhattamkayasandos
ae ) Sam—A.IHI. saythathehasentered intotheright
My mind is contracted within me; sam Learnedandinitiated;
a +jha (from
courseof therecluses;vi +upa +
+ Ksip + ta,pp. Dhyai)+ya +ka,der.;upa+Ni +ta,
Corruptionin Physicalbehaviour Sam+a, der.;pati +Pad +ta,pp.;
PP.
Vad +a +mi, pres. 1".sg.
Ajjhattamcetosamathamanuy Ajjhattam yevasati sūpatthitā hoti
utto —A.IT.244
anirakatajjhanovipassanaya Ajjhattam susamahito—A. IL. 31; Aiihāyako mantadharotinnam
samannagato briheta Mindfulness
is wellestablished
in vedānampāragūsanighandu
346
suiiagaranam
—M, I. 213 One'sOwnmind; nivakajjhatteVeva ketubhānam sākkharappabhedānam
Theonewhois wellcomposed within
Onewhohasengaged in inner satisutthuupatthitā
ran Patthitahoti,
eG Cy. IIL. itihāsapaāeamānampadako
oneself;su+sam +ā t Dhā1i t ta,
calmness of mind,notdisregarded pp.
veyyākarano Iokāyatamahāpurisa-
meditationalProcess,
equipped with Iakkhanesu anavayo— D. I. 88
insightandbeena promoter of : HI vacīsandosam
—A. IHI.358 Aiihattarūpe moeeti,bahiddhārūpe The one who is learned,a holderof
sss
solitude;cefo+Samatham + anu+ Orruptionin verbalbehaviour mantras,
mastered
thethreeVedas
moceti—Vin. III. 112
4]+ ta,pp.a +niram+kata+ with lekicography,scienceof poetry,
Causes to discharge (semen) on
J nana , Vi ELDASSa ana, de? , §Sam
der;
Alihattargva kayekayanupassi phonology andlegends
asthefifth,
au +4+ Gam+ta E Viharati—D. II. 292; M. I. 56 versedin thePadapātha
(method of
+e+ ti, caus.pres. 3”. sg.
tu,der. ERA en withobservationof the body recitationof theVedic texts),a
, ithinan body; bahiddhā
is the
Ajjhattikabahiresu ayatanesu—M. grammarian, well versedin Lokayata
AiihattamPaccavekkhitya paro Pp. of giihattam; kaya + any +
1.61 (world lore, scienceof reasoning),
codetabbo—A, y. Passa+ 7,der»yj +Hr.+a+
ate i yila,
79;Vin. II. 248 In the internalandexternalspheres; andcharacteristicsof a Great
Havingreviewed9
ī oneself,another adhi + atta + ika, der. Being; para + Gam + ii, der.; ana
shouldbeaccused:
Pati +ava +Tks+ + yaya
i t twā,absol. Ajjhattamyā bahiddhāvā —D. IHI.
246 Aiihattikamamgantikaritvā—A. I.
16 Ajjharame upahanam dharetum -
Ajjhattam manasikarity Within oneself
or o
a paro utsideoneself: Making it an internalfactor;amgam" Vin. 1.188
codetabbo
—Vin, II. 250 adv. igdel.
iti; Kr + i+ tva, absol. To usesandalsinsidethemonastery:
Havingreflectedon onese
If, one adhi + arama; Dhr + e + tum,caus.
shouldaccuseanother;Cy Ajjhattam
vabahiadha
va
d+e+ inf.
tabba,caus,fut. pp. Samdee asseyya
vatha —M. Il. 246 Ajjhattikassaupādāya—A. II. 212
uldyouobserve intern «11, Hangingon internalconditions:
SeTVe internally
Ajjhattammanos;
a "i Ihanosandosam
—A, Ii. externally:sep +a ARE upayogatthesāmivaeanam,CV. Ill. Ajjharame va ajjhavasatheva —Vin.
i au -t re 206;gen.for acc.; upa +@+ Da + III. 239;IV. 163
eyyātha , opt, 284"I
, Passa +
Cc?rruption
ioniin mentalbehaviour va, absol. Inside themonasteryor inside the
Ajjhattam
yapasantacittovihareyya house(residence);adhi +a +
Ajjhattam mecittamthitam —M.1. 504 Aiihattikānamāyatanānam vasatha
susanfhitam—A, iv. 299 NI )He would abidewitha min adhivacanam —S. IV. 180
My mindhas
y mindhasbecome still andwell own Internally; yj 4 upa d
4 calmed A synonymforinternalbases Ajjhasayam ādibrahmacariyam —D.
PP. Vit Hr +a te oe 11.224
YG,Opt.
Vva,
314.
r
oy Aiihācāreāecāravipanno
—Vin. I. 63 Abidingwithhighmoralpriciples;

25
Ajjhesanam Aāhattha
Ahialim Ahialismim

adhi +@+Sri +a +nta,prp. TheTathāgatasdon't haveclingingor D. I. 250

Afijalismim patitthapehi —M. II. 77
(=ajjhavasam),
nom.sg. ideaof mine;ajjhosita is always Or rebornin one of the families;pati
Causeto put(it) on (my) bothpalms;
coupledwith mamāvita(whatis pati +Stha +ape +hi, caus. imper. +G +Jan +ta,pp.
Ajjhesanamviditvā—M. I. 169 thoughtas mine) seat|S
Havingunderstoodtherequest;
adhi + Aāhatarissā visikhāya —
Vin. IV.
es(fromIs) +ana,der.;Vid+i +tva Ajjhositam mamayitam 312
Afifiataram kuddam nissāya—M. II.
absol. | On one of the streets
parāmattham- 8. II. 94 62;S. IL. 238
Hungon,claimedandadheredto; adhi Havingleaned against
oneparapet
wall;
Aiihokāsecamkamati— Vin. I. 15 Afifatarena samādhinā nisinno hoti
+o +Sa +i + ta,pp.; mama+aya + ni +Sri +ya, absol.
Walkstoandfro in theopen-air;Kram
i +ta,denom.pp; para + Mrs +ta; —D. II. 270
+a ti, intens.pres.3". sg.
Pp.
Aūiataram devanikāyampanidhāya He hasbeensittingwith one form of
brahmacariyam earati —M. I. 102; Samadhi;
ni +Sad+ta,pp.
Ajjhokasecivarakammamkaronti-
Ajjhohare ajjhohare apatti S. IV.180
Vin.II. 218
pacittiyassa—Vin. IV. 67 (He)followsthehighestwayof life Aūihiatitthiyapubbo—D.II. 152;S.il.
Makerobesin theopen-air;adhi +
For eachmouthfulthereis anoffence
aspiringto be (born) in a certaingroup 21
okāsa
of expiation: adhi + 0 (ava) + Hr+a
of gods; deva + nikaya; pa + ni + One who belongedto a different
der. religious sect,previously;pubbe
Aiihokāsecivarampattharitva- Dha+ya, absol.;Car +a +ti,pres.
ahhatitthiyo, annatitthiyapubbo
Vin. TH.57 SE:
Anijaniaparutahonti—Vin. I. 203
Hav ingspreadouttherobein theopen
Theboxesof oinmentarenotcovered; Aūhatitthiyā ācariyassa ācariya-
alr;pa +Str +i +tva,absol. Aāhiataram nīcam āsanamgahetvā-
apa+ Vr +ta,meta.PP. dhanam pariyesanti —M. I. 353
D. I. 179;M. II. 30;S. V. 384
Ajit ka - | : s IHI 100
Havingtakena low seat;Grh +e + Those who belongto theother
Aāialikammamsādiyeyya—
A. IV. religious sectsseekteacher'sfee for
tvā, absol.
Has beensittingin theOpen-air;
nj +
130 al eT the teacher;afifia + tittha + iva, der.;
He would cause to enjoy the ācariya + dhana;pari + es (from Is)
Sad+ta,pp. greeting Aiifiataram manomayamkayam
(of
a others);afijali + kamma;Svad +
E +a +nti,pres.3”.pl.
upapanno
—A. TIT.192
Ajjhokase senasana āū
aya +evya,caus.opt,3%sg
m panna a Reaching
a formof existence,
mind-
Vin. IV. 39 A RT, made:mano + maya,der.; upa + Pad Anfiatitthiya uparaddhava jananti
Having causetopreparethelodging
"lavingcaused AāialināPivitvā—A. IHI.187 uparaddhamhati —A. V. 230
PAHE drunk(water)withboth
+ta,pp.
in
: theopen-air;pa +JING +
+ape Ū
& + tréfi Onlybeingattacked, thepeopleof
pälmsputtogether:
Pā 7
caus. absol. Ä : > Faor id Afifatarasmimrukkhamule otherreligioussectsknow,“Wehave
tvd,absol. RAI
divāvihāramnisīdi—S. IHI.235 beenattacked”; upa+@+Rabh+ta,
Aiihogahetvā
TE p: itvā —
ä paccuttaritvāD. II. pp. ; uparaddha+amha:As +ma,
Anjalimpanametya—S. 1.81, 19] Satdownunderthefootof a treefor
siesta;diva + vihdram,acc.for dat. meta.,pres.1”.pl.
Havingplungedinto(theSea)and Havingcausedtoturnfoldedpalms
comebackup;adhi +0 (a ) + Gah reverentially;
ite pa +Nam+e t nāia
a a) Ha Afiatarasmim rukkhamile Annatitthiyaparibbajaka— S. IV.
caus. absol, I,
+ Wa,absol.;pati +u(t) 4 Tr.+ 51;A. 1.199,IV. 338
paūiiatte āsanenisīdi —
S. IV. 105
a ti t hā, absol. I
Aāialim pagganheyyam—p.l 125 Satdownontheseatprepared
at the Wanderers belongingtoother
(1) wouldholdboth palms footofatree;pa +Jd +dpe+ta, religioussects;pari + Vraj+aka,
AjjhositamnatthiTatha
caus.pp.;ni +Sad+i, pst.3™.sg. der.
A.IL.26 EI pa
pa t<iGyh+na +ko E
Yvan; meta,opt.

Afifiatarasmim
va kule paccajato- Annattha sabbattha—Vin. I. 274
26
Aīihatra
In all otherplaces;affia +ttha,der.;
sabba+ ttha,der.
Annatra adhimana —Vin. LI. 91
Withtheexceptionof over-estimation; Exceptfor crossingover, firiyam,
aāhatra, indcl, used with abl. or
instr.
Annatraasitapitakhayitasayita
—M.
I. 83;S.1.62;A. II. 48
Exceptforthetime of eating,drinking,
biting,andtasting;4s +i +ta,pp.; Pi
+1+ta,pp.; Khad + i +ta,pp.; Svad
+ aya + i + ta, caus. pp.
Annatrauccarapassavakamma —M.
1.83;S. 1.62
Exceptforthetimeof urinatingand
defecating;uccara+passdva+
kamma
Afifatra upalapanayaafifiatra
mithubhedā—D. II. 76
Exceptfor coaxingor creatingmutual
distrust;upa +Lap +e +ana,caus.
der.;mithu,indcl; Bhid +a, der.
Annatrakappavutthapeyya
—Vin.
IV. 226
Shouldordainexceptfor theeligible
(whohasalreadybeena renounced)
Aūihatracatūhapaāeāhā —Vin. IV.
280
Ekceptfor four-fivedays;catu +aha
bahca +aha
Ahiaatra
used here with dat.
Annatra tiriyamtaranaya —Vin. IV.
65
indel.
Annatra ditthapadehi—A. IV. 103
Exceptfor thosewho haveseenthe
Truth;Drs +ta,pp. +pada
Afiatra naggeyyacaafifatra
mundeyyaca pavalanipphotanayaca
-S. IV. 300
Exceptfor nudity,shavenheadedness
andcountingbeads(?);Bhūmiyam
nisīdantassaāsanatthānelaggānam
pamsu-raia-vālikānam
photanattham gahita morapinja
mattato,Cy. Ill. 101;nagga +eyya,
der; munda+eyya,der.; pavala +
ni +photana;Sphut+e +ana, caus.
der.
Aniiatra
niddakilamathapativinodana
—M. I.
83;S. 1.62;A. IL.48
Exceptfor thetimeof drivingaway
sleepandfatigue:nidda 4
kilamatha
+pati + vi +Nud +e +ana,caus.
der.
Aūiatra nimantitā—Vin. |, 223
Beinginvitedelsewhere;
nimanta+e
+ 1+ta, denom,.Pp.
Afifatra pakatattena,
annatra
antaraya—Vin. II, 32
Withouta regular member,without a
danger
Aūihiatrapaccayānatthiviāiiānassa
28
Annatra
sambhavo—M. I. 257
Withouta condition thereis no arising
of consciousness;na +As +fi, pres
3. se; atthi is also usedas an indel
Afiiatra paribhogam annatra
paribhunjissanti
—Vin. IIT. 65
They will makeuseof consumer
goodsat one placewhich should
actuallybeappropriatedat a different
place;pari + Bhuj +a, der; pari +
Bhu(h)i +i +ssanti,fut. 3. pl.
Afiiatra phassa patisamvedissantiti
netamthānam viiiati —D. I. 43
That theywill ekperiencewithout
contactis not to be found;pati +sam
+Vid + e 1.i 3.ssanti,caus..fut.3"".
sg ; na t etam; Vid --ya +ti, pass.
Afifatra bhikkhusammutiya —Vin.
III. 229;IV. 31
Exceptfor theapprovalgivenby the
bhikkhus;
sam+Man+ti, der.>
sammati > sammuti
Anfatra bhota Gotamena —A. I. 172.
Exceptfor venerableGotama
Annatrasamaya—Vin. IV. 56
Exceptfor the propertime
Afiiatra Samghena
aniatra
antaraya—Vin. 1. 134
Withoutthequorum
of the Samgha,
withouta danger;samghapahonakehi
bhikkhithi vind, Cy. 1066
Afiiatra Sugatavinaya—A.V. 237
Exceptforthedisciplineof Sugata
(theWell Gone One)
Annatha
Annatrasuddhavasehi
devehi—M.
1.82
Exceptfor gods in pureabode;
(aviha, atappa, sudassa,sudassī and
akanittha,five pure abodes,D. III.
237)
Afifiatra hetthimayaataniya —Vin.
IV. 168
Except for thesupportbelow
Aāhiiatreva kamehi annatra
akusalehi dhammehi —M. I. 91
Without indeed sense desires, without
unwholesomethings:afifiatra + eva
Afifatreva rattibhojana —M. I. 473
Except for eatingin thenight;ratti +
Bhuj + e+ ana, caus. der.
Anifatreva saddhayaannatra
ruciyā ahnatra anussavaannatra
akaraparivitakkaannatra
ditthiniiihānakkhantiyā —M. II. 234
Exceptindeedfor faith,preference,
tradition,logical thinkingand
agreementwith reflectivethoughts;
anu +Sru + a, der.; Gkara +
pari +vi +takka;Drs + ti+ ni +
ti, der.
Annatha kho ariyassa vinaye
anuttarā indriyabhāvanā —M. IHI.
298
Different is thesupremecultivationof
facultiesin thedisciplineof the
nobles;iadriya t bhāvanā
Annatha ca kayena samudacaranti,
annathavacaya,annathaca nesam
cittam hoti —M. 1.340
 Annatha
Physicallytheybehavein oneway,
verballyin another
way,theirmind
takesanother waytoo;sam+u(t) +a
+Car +a +nti,pres.3". pl.;
ahhathā,indcl,
Annathatumhakamadhippayo—D.
II. 160
Yourintentionis different
Aāhadatthikenaparikkhārena
ahiuddisikena
—Vin.IV.251
Withthereguisite
meant
forsome
otherpurpose;afifia+(d) +attha+
ika,der.;u(t)+Dr€ 3.ika,der.
Anfadatthuakkosameva alattha-
M. II. 62
Receivedonlyabuse:aniadatthu,
indcl.;a +Labh+ttha:pst.mid.3rd.
Sg.
AnfadatthuBhagavatosāvakā
sampailanti—M. II. 122
Definitely theybecomedisciplesof
theBlessedOne;Sru +aka,der.;sam
+Pad +ya +nti,Pres.3”.pl. . Spoiledeachother:Dus +e+s+um
Afiadeva uppajjati,anfiam
niruiihati —S. ni.os
Oneis born,oneceasesto ekist:
aāham(Skt.anya) +eva;u(t) +
Pad +ya +1j,pass.pres,3". sg»
ni +Rudh+ya +ti,pass.pres,PE
Sg.
Afifiabhagiyassa
adhikaranassa
kificideva lesamattamupādāya-
Vin.
IHI.
167 i eachotheror convinceeachother:
Concerningsometrivialmatter
connected
withanotherle
aiia +bhaga+ a
Aāhiamahūam Ahāamaāūam Afifiamafifiassa
+eva;upa +4 +Da +ya, absol. Afifamannam pavaretum—Vin. I. Afifiamaniiiam
sannapetum
—S. 1.80
162 To makeeachotherconvince;sam +
Afifiamannakhadika ..vattati To makeeachotherinvite (for Jia +dpe+tum,caus.inf.
dubbalakhādikā —S. V. 456 confession);pa + Vr + e + tum,
Eatingeachother,eatingtheweak caus. inf. Anifiamafiiam sannapenti-—
A. 1.76
prevails
there(in purgatory);
Khad + Causeto convinceeachother;
ika,der.;Vrt+a +ti,pres,3". Sg. Afifamafiiam panthipi sam +Jia + Gpe+ nti, caus.pres.
upakkamanti, leddūhipi am"
pii
Aāiamaūiāamhicittānidūsenti—D. upakkamanti, dandehipi
1.20 upakkamanti,
satthehipi Aūhamaāīhamsutenaaccāvadante-
Theymake(their)mindspollute S. Il. 204
upakkamanti—M. I. 86
towards
eachother;Dus+e +nti, Criticisingeachotherin terms
Attackeachotherwithpalms,clods,
caus.pres. 3”. pl.
sticksandwithweapons; upa+Kram of learning;thetextis
ta t gti,pres.3'..pl. aiifiamaiinamsu+ tena;
Afifiamaiiiamamgulipatodakena
accavadantetiatikkammavadante.
samiagghantāsamkīlantā—
D. I. 91;
Annamannham
migasannam sutapariyattim nissāya ativiya
A. IV. 343
patilabhanti —D. III. 73 vādamkarontetiattho, Cy. Il. 173;
Laughingtogether and
playing
(They) identifyeachotheraswild ati +4 + Vad+a +nta,pr.p.
togetherby ticklingoneanother;
beasts;
pati +Labh+a +nti,pres.
amgulipatodalatthim
katva
ae pt Anfamaniiassauju vipaccanikavada
vijjhanena,
Cy.IV. 159:sam+Jaks
—D.I. 1; M. I. 402
ft @+nta,pr.p.; sam +Krid Ma
Afflamannamsagaravasappatissa Thosewhoholdviewsindirect
nta,pr.p.
sabhagavuttinoviharanta —Vin. I. oppositionto eachother;vi +pati +
45 anika + vada
Afiiamafiiamdūsesum
-Vin. I. 79
Abidingwithmutualrespect,
deference
andwithequalsharing; Annamafifiassaiīvitā voropenti —A.
caus.pst.3".pl.
sa t gāravā; sa t patissā 1. 160
(patissava);
sa +bhaga+ Makeeachotherdepriveof life;vi +0
Afifiamaiiiam na vyabadhessanti
-
vuttino +Ruh+e +nti,caus.pres,3”.pl.;
Vin. II. 75-6; IHI. 159
(They) will not disturb each other; vi + for ace.gen. is used
a+ Badh + e+ SSanti,caus.fit. 3rd Afiiamafiiamsanthapesum—M. I.
pl. WE, 171;Vin. 1.8 Ahihamaāihassa
vacīsamkhāro
Theymadeeachotherstandtogether; uppajjeyya,ditthipalasocetaso
Aiamafiiam (na) n Aghato appaccayoanabhiraddhi -
1.320
iiihāpenti
—M. 3”, pl. M. II. 242
Theydonotmakethemunderstand Therewouldarisemutualverbal
Afnflamafiiamsahiiānanti
—D.II. 12; friction,clashingviews,mental
hiiihattīti waāhatti, M. IHI.120;A. II. 130 annoyance; distrustanddispleasure;
vevacanamevetam, Cy-ll. 393;ni3 (They) recogniseeachother; vact+samkhara(traditionally
Sha(fromDhyai) +dp aāāiamaāhiam seemsto be used as vacīsamkhāra is definedas vitakka
e+ nti, caus.
Pres.3", pb, anindel.;sam+Jan +nd +nti,pres. andvicāra,discursivethoughts);
BMpk ditthi+paldsa;G@ + Ghan+ ta,pp.;
Anfamannassasubhasitam Afifavadake Aīihāya
Ahiavāde

a+ pati +aya;an +abhi +Radh + Anfiampariyayamacikkhatu—Vin, Clothedasa wanderingmendicant,he

evadingtheissueandharassingothers
ti,der. III. 70 abidesin disguise;a +Jiid +ta,pp. +
Pleasegive anothermodeof Aīihavāde na santhāti —A. I. 197-8 ka, der.; pari + Vraj +aka, der. +
Aāhiamaāiiassa
subhāsitam instruction;@+ Khyd + tu, intens. Doesnot standon recognisedtheory; Chad +ta,pp.; pati + Vas +a+ ti,
samanumodimsu —
M. I. 32, 151 imper. 3,
2rd
sg. āātavādeiānitavāde, Cv. II. 309; ā 4 pres. 3. sg.
Theyappreciated
eachother'sgood
Afiiam byākaroti—M. III. 29;S. V. 3 8g. Annatameva tam tena purisena assa,
sam+anu+ Mud +a + imsu,pst. 222;Vin. I. 183,vyākareyyam atha so puriso kalam kareyya —M.
ii, pl.
7
Declaresgnosis;@+Jad, a technical Anifiavihito nisidati —Vin. IV. 69 1,430
termfor Arahanthood;vi tā + Kr + Sits down keepingthemind Surely, it would nothavebeen
Aāhamaāhassa subhāsitam
0 +ti, pres.3". sg. somewhereelse;afiia + vi +Dha +i understoodby thatman,thenhe
sulapitamna samanuiānissanti,
+ta,pp.; ni +Sad +a +ti, pres. 3
rd
would die, (he would die without
na samanu-maniiissanti, na
Aāhiambhanissāmītiaīiiam bhanati SZ, understandingit); a +Jia +ta,pp.;
samanumodissanti —M. I, 398
—Vin. IV. 4 As +y@(Skt.yat), opt. 3%.sg.; Kr +
Theydonotapprove, do notassentand
Saying,"I will speakof one" he Afifiassa mukham ullokenti—S. Y. eyya, opt. 34 . SZ
do notappreciate goodspeechofeach
speaks
of another;
Bhan+a +ti,pres. 443
other;sw+Lap +i +ta,PP.; sam 34 sg
anu+Jan +nd +i +ssanti,Fut.3”. They look at another’sface;u(t) + Lok AfifiadtamBhagava annatam Sugata
pl.; sam+anu+Man+yatit +e +nti; pres. 3”. pl. —S.IHI.35;Vin. II. 158
Afiiambhattam(na)patikamkhati Understood,BlessedOne, understood,
ssanti,fut. 3. pl.; sam+anu +Mud
—M.II. 139 Well Gone One; @+Jind +ta,pp.
Tat i+ ssanti,
fut.3”.pl, Anna cittam upattthapenti—A. HI.
Hedoesnotexpectof anothermeal:
172
pati +Kamks+ a +ti, pres. 3. sg.
Aāhamhichettabbamhi
annam They keepthemind directedtowards Annatanam nivāretā nātānam
chindi—Vin.II. 110 gnosis (Arahanthood); @ +Jd; upa + pavesetā— D. II. 83
Afiiam satthāramuddiseyyātha-
(He)cutoff onethingwhenthere Stha +dpe +nti, caus.pres. 3”. pl. The one who refusesentranceto the
M. 1265;A. I, 27
wasanothertobecut;Ched(from unknownandallows to theknown;a +
Wouldyou pointoutanotherteacher
Chid) +tabba.fut. PD.;Chi(n)d3 i, Annanakena apannatijanantu —Vin. Jia + ta,pp.: ni+ Vr +e + tu, caus.
(would you show
pst.3”. se. allegianceto another IV. 144 der.;pa + Vif +e +tu,caus,der.
teacher);u( t Dryd eyvātha,opt.
2. pl.
Let(theSamgha)know thatwe have
Aāhamārādheti—S, V. 69 committedoffences by sheer Annataro ca dullabha —A. L. 133
Cause to attainArahanthood(enosis); ignorance;@ + Pad +ta,pp.; Jan + Very rarearethosewho undestand
ā tūā; ā 4.Radh +e
Afiiavadakam ropetu—Vin. IV. 36
+ ti, caus, nd +ntu,imper.2”. pl. clearly;@+Jaa +tu,der.;du +
pres.3. sg. Bringthecharge
of evasion:Ruh te
tu,caus.imper.3rd,Sg. labha(fromLabh)
Annanattham pasadattham satamve
Afifiamcetapetvaaiiam
Ahihavādakepācitti hotimantanā—A. 1.199 Annapekkhovapucchatino
cetapessati—Vin. IV. 250 yam —Vin. Ty.
36 Goodpeople'sdeliberation is indeed vihesāpekkho
—D. II. 150
Havinggotonethingin exchange
In evadingtheissuethereis anoffence forthepurposeof clearunderstanding (He)questions(me)solelyfor
(she)will askforanotherin exchange;
Ofexpiation andclarity of mind; a@
+Jia + ana, knowledge,
notforharassing;
@+Jfid
cetāpetvāti vilidpetva Vānāpetvā
der. + attha +apekkho+eva;no,neg.p.; vi +
tecevaattho,Cy. 917+Cit +dpe +
Afiiavadake vihesake hesā(fromHims)+apekkho
+ ssati, Pacittiyam VE, Annatakavesena
Vin. IV. 36
There Is anoffenceOfexpiationin paribbajakacchannenapativasati - Anaya santhaheyya —Vin. III. 70
Vin, 1.342 Wouldestablish
in gnosis;@+Jiid;
32

sam+Stha+a +eyya,opt.3™.sg.
Anfava samaniiaahosi,
annapaīiaatti—M. III. 68
; Therewasindeed
a different
name
and
differentdesignation;
affid + eva,
sam+anna;pa +Jia +ape +ti,
caus.der.
Annasudampayenti,
ania
i nahapenti,aia dharenti,anna
amkenapariharanti—D. IL 19
Some(nurses)cause(thebaby)to
suck,somecauseto bathe,
some
causetoholdandsomecarry(the
baby)onthehip:sudam,indel.;Pa +
(y) +e +nti,caus.pres.3™.pl; Sna
T dpe+ nti,meta.caus.pres.3” pl.;
Dhr. +e +nti,caus.pres.3”.pl.;
pari +Hr +a +nti,pres.3”,pl.
Afine deveadhiganhanti—§, Ty.275
I (They)surpassothergods;adhi+Grh
+na +nti,meta.,pres.374.
pl.
Afiienamaggenaagamasi—Vin. III.
Afifena afiiam paticarati,bahiddha
' kathamapanāmeti,kopaiicadosafica 208
(He)wentbyadifferent
āppaccayahea pātukaroti—M. I, 96
Heevadestheissue,turnsthetalkto
anotherdirectionandshows anger,
I hatredanddiscontent:pati + Car +a
+ti, pres.3”. sg: bahiddha,indcl.;
apa +Nam+e +ti, caus.pres.34.
88.5patu +karoti,pres.34.sg.
Afifienaafiiam vyakasi—p.1.57
Explainedonethingwithanother;
itātkrtāts-i doublepst.
a Se.
Afifienapariyāyenaapucchi~ALY,
195
Anneneva
(He) askedin a differentway; a +
Prch+ya +i, pst.3™.sg.
Anfenapi gacchanti,afiienapi
mukhamkaronti , dvarampi
thakenti—Vin. III. 144
(They)changetheirroute,turn
theirfacein anotherdirectionand
closethedoor;Stak + e + nti, pres.
st pl.
Aāāhienapurisenasaddhim
santitthantimsallapantim
samiagghantim samhasantim —M.
II. 223
Standingtogether,
talkingtogether,
laughingtogetherand makingfun
togetherwith anotherman:saddhim,
indcl.,usedwith instr.: sam + tittha
+ nia + T,prip.; sam + Lap + a+
nia + i, pr.p.;sam +Jaks + a + nta
+5prp.; sam+ Hrs +a+nta +i,
pr.p.
path;a +Gam
+a+s+ i, doublepst.3. sg.
Afifienamaggena
uyyojesi
—Vin. II.
193
Caused(him)to go by a different
Toute;u(t) + Yup+e+s +i,
34.ge caus.pst.
Afifienevaagamamsu—D, II. 30
(They)wenton a differentway,
indeed; afifeng + eva; a+ Gam + 4
+ imsu,doublePst. 3. pl.
Afifieneyasenāagamāsi,
ane
ratho —
Vin, I. 346 Ee
Ahihehi
Indeed,
thearmywentononeway,
thecharioton another;a + Gam +
a+s +i, doublepst.3™.sg.
Afiiehi ovadiyo anusasiyo anham
ovaditum anusāsitum maninissasi-
Vin. I. 59
Beingone,whois tobeadvised
and
instructedby others,you will think to
adviseandinstructanother;o+Vad+
iya, der.; anu + Sas + iva, der.; Man
+ya +i +ssasi,fut. 2". sg.
Afifio me ākappo karanīyo —A.V.
210
A differentattitude
shouldbeadopted
byme;Kr +aniya,fut,pp.
Anfio hetu ahfio paccayoyena—
S.
IV. 111
Anothercauseandconditionwith
which
Ataliyo upāhanā ārohitvā —M. II.
155
Havingputon solid sandals;ā - Ruh t
a+ i+ tva,absol.
Attakambandhanti —Vin. HI. 81
(They)fix a scaffolding;
attakoti
vehāsamahco, Cy.466;Ba(n)dh t a
+nti,pres.3™.pl.
Attassaramkaroti—Vin. IIL, 105
Givesa cryof distress;atta+sara
Attānenahāyanti —Vin. II. 105
Batheata placewherethereis a
rubbing
boardfixedontheground;
rukkham phalakamviyatacchetva
atthapadakarena rajiyo chinditva
nahānatitthenikkhananti,tattha
Atthaparivattam
cunnāni ākiritvā manussākāyam
ghamsanti,Cy. 1199
Atte civaram nikkhipitva —Vin. IIL.
201
Havingkepttherobein the
watch-tower;patirajadinam
patibahattham itthakahi
kato bahalabhittiko
catupancabhimiko patissayaviseso,
Cy. 654
Atthakavaggikāni sarena abhāsi -
Vin. I. 196
He recitedwithintonation the
contents of the chapter
of Eights:
atthaka+ vaggat ika,der.;a +
Bhas+i, pst.3. sg.
Atthagarudhamma paniatta—
A. IV.
279
Eightgraveconditions
havebeen
proclaimed;
pa +Jia +ape+ta,
caus.pp.
Atthapadakam katum —Vin. I. 297
To mend;atthapadakacchannena
pattamukhamsibbitum,Cy. 1129;Kr
+tum,inf.
Atthapadepikilanti—Vin. I. 10
Theyplayin ‘theeightsquares’;
this
maybea playingin a gambling
boardor a playingin eightsquares
on theground;Krid +a +nti,pres.
3”.pl.
Atthaparivattam adhidevanana-
dassanam —A. IV. 304
Eightfoldcircleof knowledgeand
visionof thehigherDevas;pari + Vrt
+ fa, pp.
 Atthamase
Atthamāsechannamna upenti—M.
1.8
Theydonotgointoashelter
for
eightmonths;
Chad+ta,pp.
(whatis covered);upa +1 +nti,pres.
Sibi,
Atthamiyāaīnā udapādi— S. 11.221
Therearosegnosison theeighthday;
G+Ind; u(t)+a +Pad+i.pst.3",
Sg.
Atthamgasamannāgatam
āhāram
āhāreti—M. II. 138
Hetakesfoodcomprising
eightfold
therewould beanemissionof semen
purpose:hevadavāyātivuttehi
foranarahant;Muc +ya +e
amgehiSamannagatam, Cy. II], 392:
opt.3”. sg.
attha+amga+sam+anu+@+
Gam+ta,pp.; Ghara+e + ti, denom.
Atthāneparikappam vadati—A. V.
pres.3". sg.
271
Atthamgasamannagato ghoso
niecharati—M. II. 140
Thevoicecomprisingeightfoldquality
issuesforth;ni (s) +Car +a+ ti,
pres.3". sg.
Atthamgiko miechamaggo,
abrahmacariyam—S. V. 16
Eightfold wrongpathis notthehighest
wayof life; attha+amga+ ika, der,
Afthamgulaparamam
sugatamgulena
—Vin. IV. 168
Eightinchesor finger-breadths
maximum,in termsof Sugata
(standard)
inch:attha+amgula;
Sugata+ amgula
Atthanajica anavakāsamca
pavedetvā—M. IHI. 129
Havingmadehimunderstand thatit is
Atthikani Atthikani Addhakasikam
impossible
andthereis noroomfor
—M.1.89 Atthi katva manasikatva
thistohappen;
pa +Vid+e +ta,
Thebones,piledupandonehundred sabbacetaso
samannaharitva
caus.absol.
yearsold;tiro + vassat ika,der.; ohitasotodhammam sunati —M. III.
puhiat Kī 1 ta,pp. 201;S; I. II1; V.95
Atthanametam anavakaso —M. IIL.
Makinghimself a seekerof meaning,
21;A. I. 26;Vin. II. 240,I. 23
Atthikani putini cunnakajatani - he gives earsandlistensto the
Thisis impossible, thishasnoground,
M. 1.89 Dhammawith full attentiondirecting
atthanantihetupatikkhepo,
Thebones,rottenandcrumbled
to his mindtotally towardsit;
anavakāsotibaccayapatikkhepo,A.
dust; cunnaka + Jan + ta, pp. atthīkatvāti,atthamkaritvā,atthiko
Cy.II. I
hutvativuttamhoti,Cy.Ill. 147;
Atthanametamanavakāsoyam Atthikāneva sesesi—D. II. 344 attha+katva:Kr +tva,absol.;sam
Causedto leaveover only bones; +amu+a+ Hr+ i+ tva,absol.;0
arahatoasueimucceyya —Vin. I. 295
atthikani+ eva; Sis + e + si, caus. (ava) + Dha + i + ta, pp. +sota; Sru
It is impossible
andgroundless
that
pst.3. sg. +nd +ti,pres.3%.sg.
yya,pass.
Atthitadhammm samana Atthi katva manasikatva
sakyaputtiyā
—D. III. 133 sabbacetasosamannaharitva
Samanas,
sonsof theSākyan,areof paninatteāsanenisīdi —D. II. 204
stable
nature;
@+Stha+i +ta,pp. + Keeping(his)mindonfull alert,hesat
Advocates
possibility
onunsuitable dhamma;Sakya +putta + iya, der. down on theseatalreadyprepared;pa
ground;a +thdna; Vad+a +Ul,pres. +Jnad+ ape + ta, caus,pp.; ni + Sad
TE SE. Atthita vata bho Gotamassa +i, pst,Sse.
padhanam ahosi,sappurisavatabho
Atfhārasavassāyakumāribhūtāya A Gotamassapadhānamahosi—M. II. Attīyamānā harāyamānā
sikkhāsammutimdātum —Vin. IV. 212 iiguechamānā—S.V.320
328 Gotama’s
strivingwasindeedstable, Beingtroubledby, ashamed
of, and
Togivetheconsent
fortraining Gotama’s
strivingwasindeedthatof disgustedwith; afta t īva t māna,
(for twoyears)for thefemalenovice a goodman;atthitavatabhoand pass. pr.p.; Hri + ya + mana, pass.
of eighteenyears:Da + tum,inf, Sappurisavata bho seemto be pr.p.; Gup (s) +ya+ mana,desid.
colloquial exclamations;@+ thita, pass.pr-p.
Atthikasamkhalikam vehāsam pp.
gacchantam—Vin. IHI. 105 Addhakahapanenapibandhanam
Skeleton
goingtothesky Atthittacenaonaddham — M. II. 64 nigacchati —A. I. 251
Covered
withboneandskin;atthi+ Goestojail evenfora halfKahapana
Atthikani āpagatasambandhāni faca;0 + Nah + ta,pp. (copper coin); kah@panena+ api; ni
disāvidisāsuvikkhittāni —M. 1.89
+gaccha+ti,pres.3™.sg.
The bones,disioinedandScattered
all Atthillena jaghanam ghamsapenti -
Over,apa +Gam+ ta,PP. Vi +Kip Vin. II. 266 Addhakasikamkambalampahesi-
+ fa, pp. (They)causeto beattheloin witha Vin. I. 281
cow’s calf- bone;atthillenati Causedtosenda shawl,worthfive
Atfhikānipuāiakitāniterovassikāni gojanghatthikena,Cy. 1299; Ghrs + hundred: kasitisahassa?vuccati,tam
dpe+nti,caus.pres.3’. pl. agghanako kāsivo,ayampana
 Addhovasamano Aticiram

TA
de si
addhakasiyor; LV,1119:
vuIto, Cv. 7119. ROI pahūtadhanadhaāiā
-
Addhovasamāno
addhavādam would seeyou a longertime; Ya + hi,
73nd
is etstiSTH caus.Pst.
' imper.2", sg.; yathātam,indci;
(Thosewho are)properous,with vadeyya—A. V. 45
Beingindeedprosperous
hewould passa +eyyama,opt. 1”.pl.
Great
treasure,greatwealth,gold
E, parito
Addhakuddakā i olokenti
- talk aboutprosperity;addho +eva +
. . u i andsilver:Propertyandttieans,
As +mana,pr.p.; Vad +eyya,opt. Atikālena gāmam pavisati, atidivā
Moneyandagricultural
products
in
Theylookoutfromthe Ise. patikkamati—5. I. 200;A. III. 117;
abundance:
maha+dhana;pahiit
Wall;uparj+Io; o t I topof the half Vin. I. 70
(SktPrabhiita) + He
ok tei nti, Vātarūpa -- raiata; Atammayatamnissaya Entersthevillagetooearlyandcomes
bres.3. hi Pahiita + vitta + a.
upak arana Pahiita
atammayatam
agammayayam backtoolate;ati +kala; pa +Vis+
dhana dhahiia

Addhateyyaka upekkha ekatta ekattasita tam a+ ti, pres. 3". sg.; pati + Kram + a
IV.256 psaparamam
—
Vin, o hahakodanaipganhati—Vin, paiahatha—M. III. 220 +ti, pres.3". sg.;atikalena,atidiva,
Having resortedto andcometo ady.

It takes
a halfAlhakameasure
of non-identity,
abandon
this
eguanimitywhich is singularandbased Atikkantavara Tathagata—Vin. I.
boiledrice:addha+&lhaka+
MUHE Grh +na + ti, meta,pres. on singularity; Tammayatānāma 280
Addhatelasehi
phi ~ +88.)Glhaka = 4 Patthas 4 tanhā, tassaparivādānato The Tathagatas
havegonebeyond
a E bh :
47;Vin.1.226 'Akhusatehi
—p.i, (handfuls) vuttihānagāminīvipassanā promises(They don't give promises):
Withtwehe an
Ithtwelvehundred dfifty bhikk} atammavatātivuccati, Cy. IV. 27; ati + Kram + ta, pp.+ vara
chus parera
Add ah:
haddhano mahābhogo ekattasitātiekārammananissitā,26:
tt tāarūparaiato pahūta-- ni(s) + Sri +ya, absol.; @+ Gam + Atikkammadevanam
na Pakarano pahūtadhanadhaiao ya, absol.;eka + tta, der; ekatta + devanubhavam— D. II. 12
I wishtobeinsoli Sri +ta,pp.; pa +Ha + tha, root Surpassingthemajestyof gods;
TI Punnakosakotthagaro
tt DEN
Month;pari +samtudeforhalfa redup.,imper,2". pl. ati + Kram +ya, absol.; deva +
tiri Va+j +
fun, inf,
Th > who
j
i onewhoisprosperous
»Veryrich anubhāvam
©Wealthy
andhavingmany
gold . Atammayatamyeva antaram karitva
Addharuka =
tt m Ē =
Ki E Se,many —M. III. 44 Atikkammeva mūlam atikkamma
134 hkārāpenti
- Vi,1) E,TA
anyitemsof use.
m,;
hauing storehouses i Keepingnon-identity(the statefree khandham— A. V. 226
I, Pletely full: addha (Sky. ddhya), from desire) inside; tammayata Ignoringindeedtherootandthetrunk
3 t upakarana UA vuccatitanha,Cy.IV. 99;Kr +i +
tvd, absol. Aticarini hoti —Vin. IV. 225
Addho mahaddh (She) is unfaithful;ati + Car + f + int,
Addhānam iīv; ano mahabhogo
d
2 # Jivitam
iz eel ē pada
ETE
a Mahabbalo
mah 4vahanomahāviiito
der.
aliddanam
Paka* Papakam 89;M. II. 119;Vin. I. 248
HI.73 ~vin Paripunnakos
akotihāgār, ~Vin, |
342 Havingstepped ontotheverandah Aticiranivasena sa sati muttha —M.
Thelifeofthe
Pooris Miserable as The one who is withouthaste;a +tara(Skt.tvara)+ I. 329
comparedWith thelife ofthe rich.
rich,withgreat
A E i Twealth
a and Power.
Ni mana,pr.p.; pa +Vis +i + tvd, (You have) lost that memory
+ G+ Da +
Ya, abso] ae MA Bc numberoi Vehiclesa d absol, because ofliving (here) too long:
ritoryandwith4 treasury iā, Mrs +ta, pp.
dhanā'mahābhogā completelyfull; maha ae Ataramāno deva yāhi, yathātam
äraiatāpahūta- Maha * dhana;
+bala: Parl +Prt.
ha + tg mayamcirataram passeyyama—D. Aticiram(me)anuvitakkayato
kottha + agdra ; »PP.;
11.178; M. III. 176 anuvicārayato —M. I. 116
My lord, please move slow,so that we While I was reasoningand
38

39
 Aticiram
Atirekatiyojanam Atirekamase sese Atītena

investigating
toolong:gen.absi.; toe hi € 7 + nd
{ » CAUS.PST 2", sg.
Atirekamase sesegimhane —Vin. Look on eachothertoo long;
aticiram,adv.
III. 253 ativelam,adv.; upa t ni +jha
Atibalham mayi vyāvatā —A. IV. Whenone moremonthremainsin the (fromDhyai) +ya + nti, pres.
Atieiram,samma,sattavassāni
-
195 hot season; Joc. absl. Shs
Vin.II. 182
Excessivelykeenon me; vi +@+ Vr+
Sevenyears,friend,is a longtime:
la, pp. Atirocanti vannena ceva yasasaca - Ativelam kulesu cārittam āpaiiati -
samma,indcl.
D. II. 208;S. I. 195;A. III. 239, 5. II. 270
Atirittam bhufjitum —Vin. IV. 82 atirocati Visits andstaystoo long in families;ā
Atipnetāresi—Vin. III, 69
To eat what is left over; Bhu(ni)j +i+ Outshinein beautyandglory: +Pad +ya +ti,pass.pres.3'".sg.
(You)causedtocrossthosewho
tum, inf. ati +Ruc +a +nti, pres. 3”. pl;
hadnotyetcrossed:a + Tr +ta,
pp.;Ta+e +s +i, caus.pst. ca t eva Ativelam gihisannattibahulo
Atirivaobhasajate
—D. I. 264 viharati—S. I. 199
Ae,SE
Ind

Excessivelyilluminated:ati +® +iva Atilahukampinivattanti—Vin. II. : Abidestoolongconversing toomuch

Atiditthiyāditthivipanno—Vin. I 215 withthelaity;gihi +sam+Jia +ape
Atirekacivaramdhareyya —Vin. III. Turn backtoo soon;ni +Vrt + a + nti, +ti, caus.der.+bahula;vi +Hr +a
63
Gonewrongwithanextreme view:
195 pres.3™.pl. +ti, pres 3%.sg.
Should cause to wear an ektra robe:
ditthi+ vi +Pad +fa,pp.
Dhr +e +eyya,caus.opt.3. sg. Atilahum bāhullāya avatto —Vin. I. Ativelam samsatthoviharati —M. I.
Atidūrevā gacchatiaccasanne
vā - 59 122
A. IHI.137 Atirekacivaramvikappetum— Vin. I. Hasturnedbackvery shortly into the Beingmixedwith(bhikkhunis)
he
-
San

Goesfarbehindor tooclose;ati +g 289 lifeof abundance;

ati +lahum,ady.; abidestoolong;sam+Srj +ta,pp.
+Sad+ta,Pp. Toassigntheextrarobe(toanother); bahula +ya, der; @+ Vrt + ta, pp.
vii+
+ kappa+e
ke - +tum,denom.inf.Ä Atisahasapivaceakutimpavisanti-
Atilinam viriyam kosajjaya Vin. II. 221 aie
A-

Atirekachārattamvippavasanti- samvattati —A. III. 357; Vin. L. 183 (They)enterthetoiletevenwith

Vin.HI. 263 Sluggisheffort leadsto indolence;ati haste; pa + Vis+a+nti,pres. 2 ATU
PI
pago
(They)keepthemselves
away more +Li +ta,pp.;kusitaor kusida+ya, 3”.pl.; sahasa,indcl.+api
thansixnights:yj 4pat Vas+a4 der.
Atibalham nimmādenti —D. I, 95 nu,pres.3", pl.
Atiharitvaagacchami—
S. I. 89
CausetOpresstoohard:Nj +Mrd +
Ativiya aiiiechi manussehi—M. U1. I comeaftersendingthem(to the
" mii,cdus.pres.3r4pl , Atire katiyojanam
avuso—Vin. THI. 176
233
Morethananyotherhumanbeings;ati absol.
Atibālhampamatt Morethanthreeyoj
ti anas,brothers;
0viharati—
M.l + viva, adv,
253 Yojana,a measure
oflength
Atītamaddhānamārabbha—A. I.
HeabideswithSOmuch equivalentPerhapsto 8 miles:
negligence: Ativiyamamlobhadhamma 197
Pa +Mad+tq,Pp. Otherwordsattache
d to yojana parisahanti—S. IV. 112
are gāvuta ; 1
and usabha,gāvuta Thingsattached
to lustpressmeso a +Rabh+ya, absol.
Atibalham
Te ī (ma) paridev
i i$ one four. ;a yojana,usabha
i
esi —D, II. tefourthof hard;pari +Sah+a +nti,pres.3”.
'S40yatthis(about200fi.) they
Don'tbemoanexe pl. Atitenapatisantharati—D. II. 186
essively; are all connected
, j the voking
with
atibalham,
ady Welcomes in termsof thepast;
andunvoking of the cows ina
Pari+Diy+@ Ativelamaffiamaiiiam atitenasamganhati,Cy. 949;pati +
Caravan
upaniiihāyanti
—D. I, 20;III. 32 sam+Str +a+ ti,pres.3”.sg.

41
 Atirakam
Atirakamfanadassanam
pai napeti
—D.HL.134
Causestoproclaimunlimited
knowledge andvision;atirakanti
atiramaparicchedam mahantam,
Cy.913;pa +Jia +dpe+ti, caus.
pres.3.
woe ?2rä
sg.
Atīradakkhiniyānāvāya—D. 1.222
When
theboatwasoutofthe sightof
theshore;Joc.abs/.:atira +dakkha
(fromDrs) +int
Atoyamāhutosambhūto—A, IV. 45
Thishascomeintoexistence because
hassati ubhayatthamva fiassati—A.
of this; ahutotiagato,Cy.IV. 30: ato
7 dyam;a +Hii +ta,pp; sam+Bhi
T Ia,pp.
Attakamaparicariyaya vannam
bhāseyya —Vin. IHI. 133
Shouldspeakin praiseofthe
Servicetoberendered to se
nsuality
of oneself
=atta
+kama+pari +
cartya+a, der.;Bhas +eyya,opt.
3”, sq.
Attakāmarūpāviharanti—M. I.
205;HI. 155
Theyabide,astheywish:arta+kama
Trrūpa
Attagarahinomayam
anafifiagarahing
—Vin. IIL. 23
WeblameOurselves,notothers;an +
anna+garaha+t, der.
Attaguttiyā attarakkhāya
attaparittamkatum— Vin, Il. 110
Forselfguard,selfSecurity
andto
make theselfperfectlyProtected:
Gup+ti, der.i Kr+ tum,inf,
42
Attana Attana Attana
Attaguttiyaattarakkhaya
—M. 1.45 used with instr. or abl. to make a
attaparittaya—A. II. 72
Beinghimselfuntamed,untrainedand comparison
Forselfguard,selfsecurityandself
unperfected;a +Dam + ta,pp.; a + vi
protection;
Thisis thecommonly used
+Ni+ ta,pp.; a +pari +ni+ Vr + Attanapi sare sarajjati— A. III. 251
phrase
ta, pp. Thepersonhimselfor herselfis
attached
totheintonation;
sam +Raj
Attaguttodani kumaro nalam
Attana duggahitenaamheceva + ya + ti, pass.pres. 3. sg.
pamadaya—A. III. 6
abbhacikkhasi, attanafca khanasi,
The boy is now self-guarded,unfit for
bahuāeaapuīiiam pasavasi—M. I. Attanāva attano karonti —5. I. 72
beingunmindful:
atta+Gup +to,pp.
132;Vin. II. 26; IV. 135 (They)dotothemselves
+idani, indel.; na + alam; dat. is
Becauseof your misunderstanding,
usedherewith alam
you accuseus, hurtyourselfand Attanāva attānam anuminitabbam -
produceenormousdemerit;du + Grh M. 1.97
Attatthamva fiassatiparattham va
+i +ta,pp.;abhi +a+ Khya+si, Oneshouldjudgeoneself; attana+
intens.pres. 2’. sg.; Ksan + a * Si, eva; anu + Ma or Mi+ na@
+i +
1.9; HI. 63
pres.2™.sg.;pa +Su +a +Si,pres. tabba,fut. pp.
He will realisewhatis good for
ao,
himself.
goodforothersandgoodfor
Attanava attanam
both;atta + attha:Ina +ssati,fut.
Attanāparibhuhiii—Vin. HI. 61 paccavekkhitabbam
—M. I. 98
3”.sg.;para 3 attha; ubhaya +
attha (He)usedhimself;attanāis usedhere One should review oneself,pati + ava
in thenom. sg. sense;pari thBhu(h)i +Iks + i + tabba,fut. pp.
+ i, pst. 3”. sg.
Attadipaviharatha attasarana
Attanāva attānam pātukarissati —A.
anaiiasaranā, dhammadīpā
dhammasaranā
anafiiasarana
—D, II. Attana palipapalipanno param III. 123;Vin. II. 186
100 palipapalipannam uddharissatiti Onewill revealoneself;patu+
Beanislandtoyourself,bea netamthānam viiiati —M. I. 45 karissati,fut.3. sg.
refuge
toyourself.
don’tabideby lt is not to be foundthatone,being
anyotherrefuge,takeDh stuckhimselfin themud,will pull out Attanāva attānamvyākareyya —D.
ammaasan another who is also stuck in the (same) II. 93;5. II. 68,V. 356
island,takeDhammaas
a refuge, mud:palipa+pari +Pad +ta,pp.;
don’tabideby any One shoulddeclareof oneself;vi + a
otherrefuge;
mahdsamuddag ud +Dhror Hr +i+ ssati,fut. 3”. +Kr +eyya,opt.3%.sg
atamdipam viya,
Cy:348,Vi +Hr +a +tha, pres. sg; na + etam; Vid +ya + ti, pres.
Qua L 7/ BMie Attanāva attānam sammannitabbam
—Vin. I. 94
Attadutiyo Kusinār Attanapiattanamjivita voropenti- Oneshouldgetoneselfagreedupon;
āyam pāvisi —D,
11.147 Vin. III. 68 sam + Man +ya + i + tabba,fut. pp.
Entered Kusināra withouta Second; (They)causetodeprivethemselves
of
loc. is usedSor ace, life; ; vi +o + Ruh +e + nti, caus. Attanāva iāneyyātha —A. I. 189
s Pa + Vis + 7.pst.
oe sig pres,3. pl. Youshouldknowforyourself;Jan +
eyvātha,
opt.2" pi.
Attanāadantoavinito aparinibbuto Attanapiyataro—
S. I. 75
Dearerthantheself; thesuffixtarais Attanā vā attānam
 Attana Attano Attamano
Attano

samānasamvāsakam
karoti—
Vin. I. Findsinoneslf;sam+anu+passa+ Attanomanfamano—Vin. IIL. 58 (vediyati); Vin. III. 105
340 ti,pres.3”™.
sg. Thinkingthatit washisown;Man +ya (He) experiencesthegaining ofa
Eitheronemakesoneselfa formof existence;
atta +bhava+
+ mdna,pass. prp.
co-existent
witheaualrights;
aftanā Attanoatthayavinnapetva—Vin. IV. pati +labha
(instr)is usedasthesubject 88 Attano samasamamthapesi—M. I.
Havingcaused
toaskforpersonal 165 Attabhāvam abhinimminitvā —A, I.
Attanavippakatamattana use;vi +Jfid + dpe +tva,caus.
Causedtoplacemeonanegual 279
pariyosapeti
—Vin. IIT, 155 absol.
footingwithhimself;Stha+dpe+s Having createda form of ekistence;
Hecausestocomplete whatis left
+i, caus.pst.3. sg. abhi +ni + Mi + na@+ i + tvā,absol.
unfinished
byhimself;
vi +pa +Kr Attanocagamanussarati—A. V. 331
* ta,pp.;pari +o(ava)+Sa +ape Recollectsone’sown generosity;anu
k +ti,caus.
pres.3".sg.;attana
is Attano samasamam(na) Attabhāvassa abhinibbatti hoti —M.
+Smr+a +ti,pres.3". sg.
usedhereasthesubjectas well as
samanupassāmi—D. I. 174 II. 181
theagent I don’tseeanyone
equaltomyself; Birthofa beingtakesplace;abhi+ni
Attanoparināmesum—Vin. III. 265
sam + anu +passa +mi, pres. I". sg. + Vrt+ti, der.
Causedtooffertothemselves:
Attanāvoyogam
āpaiiati—A.IV.24 pari + Nam +e + 5 + um, caus. pst.
i; Keeps
himselfaway;vi +(0)+ Yuj+a, Attapaccatthike sannapetum
3”, pl.
der. niiihāpetum pekkhetum passitum There are formsof existence;As + a
pasādetum— Vin. II. 96 +nti,pres.3”.pl.
Attanoparibhogatthayadinnam -
Attani (kusale dhamme) upaneti - To maketheopponentsof oneself
Vin.I. 270
Vin.III. 91 convince,understand,
re-consider, Attamanāabhiraddhā—M. III. 271
Givenforhisownuse;pari +Bhuj +
Herefersgoodthingsto himself;upa see,andto makethemhappy;pati + Happyandsatisfied;
abhi+Radh+ta,
a, der.+atthdya;Dé + ta,PP.
+Ni+ a +ti,pres.3”.sg. attha+ika,der.;sam+Jia +Gpe DD-

+ tum,caus. inf.; ni +jha (from

; Attanica bhikkhaveattaniyeca
Vin.I. 292
saceatothetato
anupalabbhiyamane
Searchingforone'sownfood;pari +
—M.1I.138
Bhikkhus,whenthesoulandthatwhich
belongstothesoulis notto befound
truly andreally; atta (n) + iya, der;
. a +upa+Labh+(i) +ya +mana,
Pass.pr.p.;loc. absl.
Attaniva bhikkhavesatiattan
iyam
metiassa?—M. I. 138
Bhikkhus,whenthereis soul,would
therebetheideathat,which
belongs (at theendofa deal thedealer
to soul, ismine?;
Sati:As +nta,loc.
5E.,PF.D.;As +ya (Skt.wāt),opt,34
Sg.
Attanisaman i —A, V. 105
upassati
Attanobhattampariyesamāno-
Dhyai) + Gpe + tum,caus. inf.; pa Attamanā pamuditā
+Iks+e +tum,caus.inf,;passa pītisomanassaiātā—
S. I. 64
+ i+ non, inf; pa +Sad +e + tum, Beinghappy,
glad,rapturous
and
es(fromIs) a +mana,prp.
caus. inf. joyful;pa +Mud +i +ta,pp.;piti +
somanassa + Jan + ta, pp.
Attanobhajanagatamva karoti,
Attaparitapananuyogamanuyutto-
mutthimvachindati— Vin. III, 48
M. II. 159 Attamanoattamanavacam
Eitherheputsit intohisownvessel
Theoneindulgedin self-torture;atia niccharesi —M. 1.32; Vin. III. 119
orbreaksthefist;yatha
-- pari t tāpana -- anu + yogam + Being happy(he) causedto
amgulantarehinikkhantakahāpanā
kumbhigate
kahāpane
na
anu +yutta: Yuj + ta, pp. express
a wordof happiness;
ni(s) + Car +e +s +i, caus.pst.
samphusanti,
evammutthim
karonto
mutthimchindatinama,Cy: 316;
Attabyābādhāyapi
samvattati—M. AARE:
1.115;II. 114
It leadsto theharmof oneself;atta + Attamanohoti udaggoabhiraddho-
interlocks
histenfingersandpress
themdownward
makinga sound.The vi +@+ Badh + a, der.; sam + Vrt + Vin. 1.70
beliefis thatthetransactionwas a +ti,pres.3. sg. Becomes happy,elatedandsatisfied;
donein hisfavour.Mutthimchindati u(t) + agga; abhi + Radh + ta,pp.
soundsa similar idea.) Attabhavapatilabham
patisamvedeti
—5. II. 256 Attamanohotiparipunnasamkappo

E 45
Attarūpāya Attanafica Attanam

—M.I. 192;5.I. 80;D.II. 236,pl. eva; Ci(n)t +e + nta, pr. p. minorpartsandwith no deficiencyin pecca,indcl.;Bhi +a +i + ssdima,
andpst. faculties;Div +va, der.; riipa + i,
Hebecomes happyandsatisfiedtoall Attahitayaca patipannoparahitāya der.; mano + maya, der.; sabba +
intents
andpurposes;
pari +Pr +ta, ca—A.IT.95 amga +pati +amga +1,der.; a + Ha Attanam kusalesu dhammesu
pp.+sam+kappa Theonewho hasbeenworking for +ta, pp. +indriyva upaneti—Vin. III. 91
self-benefitandthebenefitof others; (He) presentshimself in whole
Attarūpāyaparibhāsāya— D. IHI.81 pati+Pad +ta,pp. Attanafica khanasi—M. I. 132;Vin. somethings;upa + Ni +a + ti, pres.
Withanaccusation
befittingthem II. 26; IV. 135 SAAT
Attahitayapatipannono parahitaya You hurtyourself; Ksan +a + si, pres.
Attarūpenaappamādosaticetaso —A. IV. 220 PĪ
Attanam gaveseyyatha—Vin. I. 23
We.
ārakkhokaranīyo—A. II. 120 Involvedin one’sown benefit,notof Make a searchinto yourself;gava +
Mindfulness, attentionandguardof others Attānaheaparaīica anupahacca—A. es (from Is) + evyatha,imper.2". pl.
mindshouldbemadebyonewholoves
III. 172,184
himself;attanoanurūpena Attahetuva parahetuva Withoutmakingany referenceto Attānam iānāti —A. IV. 114
anucchavikena hitakāmenāti attho, amisakincikkhahetuvā —M. III. 48; oneselfor another;an + upa +Han (He) knows of himself;Jan +na +ti,
Cy.HL122 A. I. 128 (hat)+ya, absol. pres.
3”.sg.
For thereasonof himself,othersor
Attavadhāya phalamdeti—A. II, 73 somematerialneed:Gmisa+ Attanam adassayamanokulesu Attanam na pariccaje —S. I. 44
Gives fruit for self-destruction:Da +
kincikkha+ hetu carati—D.IIL. 44 One shouldnotgive awaytheself;
e +ti,pres,3". sg.
Conceiling his real nature,he moves pari + Tyaj + e, opt. 3. sg.
Attādānamādātukāmena on in the families;a + Drs + aya +
Attavadapatisamyutta va lokavada-
bhikkhunā
—Vin. II. 247 mana,caus.pr.p.; Car +a + ti, pres. Attanam na patetabbamyo pateyya
patisamyutta va ditihiyo—M. I. 40
By thebhikkhuwho wishesto take Sse āpatti dukkatassa—Vin. LI. 82
Thetheoriesconnected withthesoul
upthe(legal)guestionhimself:yam One should not causeto commit
or theworld;pati +sam+ Yuj+ta,
adhikaranamattanāddiyati, tam Attanam avacanīyamkarissati - suicide,whoeverwould causeto
pp.; Drs +ti, der.
attadanantivuccati,Cy. 1288; atta Vin. II. 177 commit suicide thereis an offence of
t ā t Dā +ana,der: ādātumm (He)will makehimselfinadvisable;
a wrongdoing;Pat +e +tabba,caus.
Attasaficetanakamatino
kamena
Parasaficetana~A. II, 159 +Vae+aniya,fut. pp. fut. pp.
One’sownintention becomes
Attā dibbo rūpī kāmāvacaro
effectivenotthatofothers; Attanam ukkamseti param Attānam paribhoti —A. IHI. 174
altasaficetand
kamatitiattand kabalimkārāhārabhakkho
—D. I. 34 vambheti—
D. III. 42; M. III. 37,M. Treatsoneselfwith contempt;pari +
pakappitācetanāvahati,pavattati Thesoulwhichis divine,with a form,
1.192,402, attānukkamseti Bhii+a +ti,pres.3™.sg.
Cy.IIL. 147;Kram+a movingin thesphereof senses,
Praiseshimselfanddisparagesthe
+ ti, pres, 374. feedingon materialfood:kama +
sg. other;ukkamsa- e 1 ti, denom.pres. Attānam parimocessāmīti gacchati
avacara;
kabala+kara +ahara +
3”. sg.; Vambha+ e + ti, denom. —Vin. IV. 151
ee parahitamubhayahitam bhakkha
pres.3”. sg. Thinking,“I will makemyselffree”he
sa
mee
balokahitamevacintento
; — M. II, goes(there);pari + Mue + e + ssdmi,
te
Atta dibbo rūpī manomayo
Attānamuppātesi,ubhopecca caus.fut. I". sg.+ iti
Whilethinking
onlyoftheWw sabbamgapaceamgī
ahinindriyo—D.
ell-being bhavissāmāti—M. II. 110
of himself,others,bothand 1.34
of the Committedsuicidepraying," weshall Attānampariharāmi—A. I. 192
wholeworld;sabba+loka+hitam+ Thesoul,whichis divine,witha form,
be(together)
in thenextworld”;u(t)+ I leada life;pari +Hr +a +mi,pres.
madeof mind, withall its maiorand
Pat +e +s +i, caus.pst.3". sg.; Pisa:

46
47 '
HUTT .
 Attanam Attārūpī Atta vado Atthaficeva

Attānamyevaatisitvā—A. I, 145 eva;Stha +ssati,fut: 3”. sg. (Skt.pitr) + ka, der. +sambhava convenienceandsecurity;yoga +
Forgetting
himself
or goingbeyond khema + kama
himself;
ati+SmrorSr +i+tvd, Attanuditthiya pahanaya Atta vado vedeyyotatra tatra
absol. anattasannabhavetabba—A. III. 447 kalyanapapakanamkammanam Atthakarana sevati—D. III. 186
Theideaof no-soulshouldbe vipākam patisamvedeti—M. I. 8 Associatesfor his own benefit;Sev +
Attanamyevaadhipateyyam
karitva cultivatedfor theabandonment The soul, thatspeaks,feels,and a +ti,pres.3”.sg.
—A.I. 148 ofthewrongviewof self;atta+ experiencestheresultof goodandbad
Making himselfthesoleauthority: anu+ditthi;sakk@yaditthi,
Cy.III. actions,hereandthere;Vid+e + Atthakusaloca hotidhammakusalo
attanam+ (y)+eva;adhipati+ evya, 415 eyya,caus. der.; tatra tatra, indel.; ca vyanjanakusalo ca niruttikusalo
der.;Kr +i +tva,absol. ‘A eapubbāparakusalo
ca—A. III. 201
pati +sam + Vid +e + fi, caus.pres.
Attanupekkhino paranupekkhi —A. of. Se: He becomesskilful in meaning,
Attānamvadhitvāvadhitvārodati- IHI. 133 text,words,etymology andcontext;
Vin.IV.277 Theonewho reviewsoneself,not Attā sīlatona upavadati—A. V. 88 pubba+ apara+kusala;
Beatingherself
continuously,
she others;
atta+anu+pa +Iks+i, der. The consciencedoes not reprovein atthakusalotiatthakathāvacheko,
cries;Vadh+i +tva,absol.;Rud +a
termsof moralvirtues;attāticittam, dhammakusaloti pāliyamcheko,
+ti,pres.3. sg. Attano loko anabhissaro—M. II. 68 Cy. V. 39; upa + Vad+ a + ti, pres. niruttikusaloti niruttivacanecheko,
Theworldhasno protection,no 3red aTE
e
vyanjanakusaloti akkharappabhede
Attānamsamavekkhiyāna
—D. III,
authority;a + Tra +ana,der; an + cheko,pubbāparakusaloti
25
abhi + issara Attā hi paramampiyo—
A. IV. 97 atthapubbāparam,
Reviewing himselffully;sam+ava +
The self is indeed the dearest; hi, dhammapubbāparam,
Iks +i +(ya)+ana,PF.D.
Attāpiattānamupavadati—
A. I. 57; emph.p. padapubbāparam,
Il. 255 akkharapubbāparam,anusandhi
Attānamsukhetipīneti—D. I. 51;
Consciencetoo upbraidsthe self: Attukkamsako hoti paravambhi- pubbāparanti imasmim
II. 131;A, II 67
attais usedherein thesenseof M. 1.95 paācavidhe pubbāpare cheko,
Makes oneself happy
andcontented:
conscience;atta +api; upa + VadHe (He)becomesa selfpraiseranda Cy.II. 300
sukha+e +ti,denom. pres.37.sg.;
at ti,pres,3".sg. disparager
of others;atta+u(t)+
Pri +na+e +ti,pres,3”4Sg.
Krs + aka, der.;para + Vambh+ i, Atthaficadhammanicaanulomenti-
Attāpiguttorakkhito
—S. I, 89 der. A. 1.69
Attanamsukhetipineti,
samvibhajati,
pufiianikaroti—A. V. Theself tooisguardedandprotected; (They)conformtothemeaning
andthe
Gup +ta,pp.; Raks + i+ ta,pp. text;anuloma+e +nti,denom.pres.
178 Attuddesanti attanoatthaya—Vin.
Hemakes
himself happy
and III. 149 3”,pl.
contented,
shares(with
others)and Attapimamupavadeyya
—M. I. 361 Attuddesam meansforthebenefitof
makes merits;sam+vi+Bhaj+a + (My) consciencetoo would
oneself;atta+u(t)+Drs +a, der. Atthaficadhammanica patibahanti-
Ui,pres.3”,sq criticiseme;upa+ Vad+eyva, A. 1.69
opt.3".sg, “a
Attūpanāyikam dhammapariyāyam (They)rejectthemeaning andthe
AttaniecodhuvoSassato —S.V.353 text,atthakathajica
pdalifica,
Cy.II.
aviparindmadhammoSassatisama Attariipi catummahabhitiko, Self-referent
modeof teaching; atta+ 143;pati+ Bah +a+ nti, caus.
tathevafhassati—M.L8 o mātāpettikasambhavo
—D. I. 34
upa + naya (from Ni) + ika, der. pres.3”.pl.
TheSoulispermanent,
stable The soul,whichiswithaform,made
eternal,
of unchanging
nature
"e of fourgreatelements
andis bornof
Atthakāmohitakāmophāsukāmo Atthaīiceva micchā ganhāti,
will stayasit is forever;tatha+ motherandfather:catu +maha+
yogakkhemakamo—
D. III. 164 vyahiianāni
ca micchāropeti—D.
bhiita + ika, der.:
Theone,desiringgood,well-being, IHI. 128
 Atthaānū
Attham Atthavasam Atthāvuso

Hetakesthemeaningwronglyanduse
knowledgeof'meaning;paācasu
thewordswrongly;Grh +na +ti, 61,anubhoti good intention;Cud +iva +mana,
althesupabhedagatahānampatto,
Theydonotenioythebenefit;aa3 Pass. pr.p
Cy.Il. 274;attha 3pati +sam +
pres.3”.sg. anu+Bhi +a +nti,pres.3”.pl.
; rd

Bhid
(or Vid);pa +Ap +ta,pp.
Atthasamhitenavakkhami —Vin. II.
Atthaniii caattaiiii ca—p. II. 252 Atthavasampaticca —D. II. 142;A. 249
Atthapatisamvedīea hoti
Knower
of themeaning(or benefit) III. 72 I shall speakwith somereason;
dhammapatisamvedī
ca —D. III. 241;
andknower of the self:attha+Jia + Concerningbenefit;pati + I () +ya, kāranemissitamkatvā vadanto
A. I. 151;IHI.21;IV.361
ui,der. absol. atthasamhitenavadati nāma, Cy.
Hebecomesone,who hasthe
1290; Vac +ssāmi (Skt:syāmi),fut.
experience ofthe meaning
andofthe
Atthatocevanānambyahiianato ea Atthavasamsampassamāno
—S. II. I, sg.
text;pati +sam+Vid+7,der:
nānam— M. II. 239 202
Differentindeedin meaning
andin Seeingthebenefit;sam+passa+ Atthassacavyahiianānam
ca
Atthapurekkharayaanapatti —Vin.
phraseology mana, pr.p. nisantiyā —D. III. 128
IV. 277
For thecarefulattention(given)to
AtthatonanambyajijanatoSameti- Thereisnooffencefortheonewho
Atthavasikena kulaputtena — S. V. themeaningandthewords;ni + Sam+
M. II. 239 aimsatthegoal(or themeaning);
441 ti, der.
Differentin meaning
butidentical atthakatham
kathentivā,
Cy. 928
By a sonof a family who is expecting
inphraseology:Samam +e (fromJ) somebenefit;attha + vasa + ika, der. Atthassa pattim hadayassasantim -
T Ui,pres,34,sg. Atthamaāiāyadhammamaiiiaya -
A. V.47
A. 1I.7,97
Atthavasepaticca—S. II. 218 Attainmentof goal andpeaceof mind;
Atthato pariyādānamSacchati,no Havingunderstoodthemeaningandthe
Concerningbenefits Pad +ti, der.;Sam+ti, der:
vyahiianato
—A, II. 139 text;@ +Ja +ya, absol.
Comestoanend(exhausted) in
Atthavinicchayannu
—A. III. 56 Atthassa vinnhapanaya
—M. I. 118
termsof meaning,notin termsof Atthamasallakkhentovyanjanac-
The onewho knows how to decide To conveythemeaning;vi +Jaa +
Phraseology;pari +4+ Da +ana chāyāya
attham
patibāhati
—Vin.II.
96 good;attha + vi + nicchaya +Jia + dpe + ana, der.
der, .
Theonewhoisnottakingthemeaning ū,der.
Atthā accenti mānave—D. III. 185
AtthatoSameti,b intoconsideration,rejectsthe
yaiiianato
nānam- Atthasamhitam vacam bhaseyyum- Opportunitiessurpasspeople;ati +e
M. IL. 249 meaningundertheshadow of the
IdenticalinMeaning, letter;
pati+Bah+@+fi,pres.3”, M. II. 202 (from I) + nti, pres. 3. pl.
butdifferent
in Theywouldspeaka meaningful
word:
Phraseology E Sg.
attha -- sam -t Dhā - i -- ta,BP.; Atthāpacurāhonti—
A. III. 172
AtthattātiPutthosamano—S. IV. Atthamgatesuriye~Vin. IV. 17 Bhās +evyyum, opt. 3. pl. The economygrowsup abundantly
401 Ii At thesunset:loc.absl.
Beingduestioned aS'towhetherthere Atthasamhitayamdhammapariyayo Atthābhisamayā—A. IHI. 49
ISa self;atthj+aula+iti; Prep +la Atthamnau adibrahmacariyako —
S. I. 75 Due to therealisationof thepurpose:
Paparikkhanti—M. I.
PPp.;As + mana,pr.p. 133 Thismodeof teaching is beneficial attha +abhi +samaya:sam + I + a,
Donotexaminethe andrelatedto theprinciples
of basic der.
Atthapatisambhidā
No Ppatto—A, IN. meaning morality;atthasamhito+ ayam
appatto -
thoroughly:
upa3
Pari +Iks +a + Atthāvuso, mam so upatthāko —Vin.
hii, pres.3rd.pl.
Theonewhohasgained
analytical Atthasamhitenacodiyamanam—A. MIRME
Atthamnānubhonti
—M, . 133;A. I. HI. 197 Yes, brother, I have;he is my
Theonewhoisbeingaccused
with supporter;
atihi t āvuso;upat Stha

51
 Atthi
Atthi

+aka,der.;mamseemsto be
manussanamabhikkamaniyam
- Atthica medarugaheganako Atthi pana vo gahapatayokoci
governedbyupa
Vin.I. 39 sandittho—Vin. IIL. 42 manaposattha yasmim vo akaravati
Approachable by needypeople;attha
Atthiāvusopariyayoyam The overseerof thewood-yardis a saddhapatiladdha?—M. I. 401
(Skt.artha)+ika, der.: abhi4 Kram
friendof mine (he is familiarto me); Householders,is thereany teacher
1 . an uy = i . . .

parlyayamagammaimedhamma
+aniya,fut.pp. sam + Dr§ +ta,pp. who is dearto you andin whomyou
nanatthaceya
nānābyahiianā
ca—M.
I, 297 havehada formalfaith?;pati +Labh
Atthi kificiti puttho samāno—A, II,
Brother,
thereis a wayin whichthese Atthitveva sassatisamam— D. I. 14 t fa, pp.
I things
bear
different
meanings
and 161 There is certainlysomethingsimilar to
Beingquestioned
astowhetherthere Atthi pāpam kammam katam
different
phrases:
ā - Gam+ya the eternal; atthi + tu + eva
absol.;nana+attha+ca +eva paticchannam—M. II. 121
As -- māna,Dr.p.
Atthi nama abhidosikam Thereis anevil actiondoneand
Atthi āsavāmanussalokagāminivā
- kummāsamparibhuliissasi —M. II. concealed;Kr + ta,pp.; pati + Chad
A.HI.414 i Atthi kho idam āvuso
62;Vin. III. 16 +ta,pp.
Thereareinflukesleadingtotheworld kathāpābhatam
Bhagavantam Is thereanythingto be calledeating
of humans; arthi,indel,us dassanāya
—D. IHI, 118
ed here in
ajunketprepared
yester-evening; Atthi bhikkhave thānam—A. II. 118
theplural sense Brother,
thisis agoodnewstogoand
nama,indcl, used with opt. orfut. to Bhikkhus,thereis a point
seetheBlessed One.pat a+ Bhr+
Te expressastonishmentor abhorrence;
. Athi imassaSaiiiagatassauttarim ta,pp.
abhidosa + ika, der. Atthi bhikkhave dakkhinesu
nissaranantipaiānāti—M. I, 38 janapadesudhovanamnama—A. V.
Heunderstands
thatthereis a wayout AtthikhomebhanteBhagavati
Atthi nāma theram bhikkhum 216
beyond
thissensory
field: dhammanvayohoti —M. II. 120
Hltarim, vihesiyamānamajjhupekkhissatha - Thereis,bhikkhus,
a festivalnamed
indcl.;ni (s) +Sr +ana,der. at Venerable
sir. I havean inferential
| dānt nā 3.ti,bres.3". sg Pond A. TIT.194 dhovana(washing)in thesouthern
Knowledge
regarding
theBlessed
It is indeedsurprising,whenan states;in thisfestival a dead body of
One;fo verbs,atthi and hoti,
elderlybhikkhuis beingharrassed, a relative is exhumed,washedand
Atthi uttarim have been used in this sentence;
patipuechitabbamg you will look on with indifference; arranged the skeletonand on festive
M. IHI.148 Dhamma+anva
va: anu + ava atthi nāmāti amarisanatthenipāto, day theycarry the skeleton while
Thereis Something
moreto be (fromI)
Cy: II. 298; vi + Hims + (i) +ya + crying and lamenting,Cy. V. 71
questioned:
MEAultarim,
ady,*Pati +
mana,pass.pr.p.; adhi + upa +
Preh +Ya+ i+ tabba,Sut.pp. Atthi
> khvesa brah manapariyayo- lks + i + ssatha,fut. 2™.pl. Atthi me ajja bhesajjamattapita —D.
Vin.
III,2 kai 1.205
i Atthikapponipaii; i ahmin,
Brahmi thereisthisWay;
"reis thi atthi+kho
I Kas PO nipa
Ipallitum
- —D.
mi.256;
Atthi nu kho ito bahiddha? —M. I. A littlemedicine
hasbeentakenby
T esa

There
isanexcuse
¢ 323 metoday;ajja,indel.;Pa or Pi +
Usefor lying down:
»;
+Pad+yq+ ine down: Is there(a recluseor brahmin)outside ta,pp.
i+tum,inf. RAI caetedhammamayi—Vin. IHI.
from here?;bahiddhā,indcl.
Atthikassa ohitasotassa-A. IV. 364 T no i I Atthi me ācariya jivitam —Vin. I.
hesethings aretherein me
KE
For theonewhoisin
2 isi needandread t Atthi nu kho bhanteaio koci maya 278
a €N;attha + ika, der: 0+ Dha A upatthākataro? —M. II. 51 Teacher,I havea life to live; As + ti,
Atthi eakusalamūlam
Ia, pp.- Sola Tee —A.IHI.405 Venerable
sir,is thereanyother pres. 3. sg.
attendant
betterthanI ?; nu, interrp.;
Ti, is LI TARE root, notyet cut
Atthikānamatthikanam upa + Sthaé+ aka + tara, thesuffix Atthi mejanapadekaraniyam—Vin.
Hien y; aa+
completely; + sam
sam-+u(t) + Chid
hi
tara is used with abl.or instr. to 1.177
compare I havesomething
todo in thecountry-
52
 Atthi Atha Adinnam

side;Kr +aniya,
fut.pp. Atthevaaāūathattamatthi Athakiāicarahi—D. II. 82,115;M. I. The onewho causesto tamethe
viparināmo—A. V. 59 321,437;S. I. 218;A. V. 171 untamed,calmtheuncalmedand
Certainly,
thereis divergence
and Thenwhy ?; bothindel. extinguishperfectlytheonesnot
12 change;atthi +eva; anfiatha +tta, perfectlyextinguished;Dam + e
I havecompassion syou
toward der.;vi +pari +Nam +a, der. Atha Bhagava anuppatto—D. II. 2 + tu, caus. der.; a + Sam + ta, PP.;
Then the BlessedOne arrivedin; anu Sam + e + tu, caus. der.j a +pari +
Atthevaviggahoatthi vivadoatthi +pa +Ap + ta, pp. ni +Vr + ta,pp.; pari +ni + Vr +
Siha,thereisa way nānāvādo —
D. I. 236 dpe + tu, caus. der.
Thereis indeed
anobiection, a dispute Athaparam ālopam upanāmeti—M.
anda difference
of opinion II. 138 Aditthe ditthavadi hoti, asute
Then he causesto offer another sutavādī hoti, amute mutavādī hoti,
attha+upa+pari +Iks MI Atthesuiātesu —D. IHI. 184 morselof food; atha + aparam; upa avinnate vinnatavadi hoti —A. II.
Whenneedshadarisen;loc.absl.:Uan +Nam +e +ti, caus.pres. 3”. sg. 227
Atthūpaparikkhāya + ta, pp. The onewho saysthathe hasseenwhat
Athenena sucibhitena attana he hasnotseen,heardwhathe hasnot
175
Atthoayyassaārāmikena? —Vin. II. viharati —M. I. 179 heard,sensedwhathe hasnotsensed,
248 He abideswith a cleanandnon-stealing knownwhathehasnotknown;dittha+
Sir,ateyou in needof anattendantto mind;suci +bhiita; vi + Hr +a~+ti, vada+i, der.;a +Sru+ ta,pp.;a+
themonastery?;
Grama+ika,der. pres.3. sg. Man + ta,pp.; a + vi +Jia + ta, pp.
caus. der.

Atthocavuttoattacaanupanito —A. Adandāvacaro asathāvacaro—

D. II. Aditthe ditthasanfiino apatte
Atthūpasamhitam
1.218;III. 359;Vin. 1.185 285 pattasannino anadhigateadhigata-
Meaning wasexpressed andselfwas Thatwhich is notwroughtwith sannino —Vin. UI. 91
—D.IHI.154
notbroughtin (i.e. withoutpersonal punishmentandweapon; ava +cara, Thosewho havethenotionthatthey
reference);
Vae+ta,Pp.; an +upa+ (moving in) haveseenwhattheyhavenotseen,
Pp.; Bhas+i +tu,der. Ni +ta,pp. reachedwhattheyhavenotreached,
Adandena asatthenadhammena attainedwhattheyhavenotattained;a
Atthocahotisūciyāpisuttenapi abhivijiya aiihāvasati —D. I. 89 +Dr§ +ta,pp.;a+pa +Ap +ta,
358 satthakenapi—Vin. IV, 99 Havingconguered(this earth)by pp.;an +adhi+Gam~+
ta,pp.
Thereisaneedofa needle,thread
and Dhamma,withoutusingpunishment
a smallknife andweapon
(he)abides;abhi+vi +Ji Adinnadandānam
adinnasatthānam
vvanjana + upeta +ya, absol.; adhi +a + Vas+ a +ti, (rāiūnam) —Vin. I. 349
Attho bhante?—Vin. III. 132 pres. 3. sg. Amongthekingswhohaveabandoned
Do younced,venerablesir? punishments
andweapons
Adandena asatthenanago danto-
efam Atthomeāvusocivarena—Vin. IIL. Vin. Il. 196 Adinnam theyyasamkhātamādiyi -
Attheneva meattho, 220 Elephant
wastamedbyusingnostick, D. III. 65;5. IV. 345;Vin. III. 45,
vyahiianam bahum~Vin, Friend,| amin needofa robe ho weapon;Dam + ta,pp. ādiyeyya
1.40
I needonlythemeani Hetookwhatwasnotgivenand
manyphrase(s)do?;Kr +
SSati;
Ta mehiraiiāasuvannena
—D.II. Adantānamdametāasantānam reckonedas a theft; theyya< steya;
kassati
>kasatj>kāhati sametāaparinibbutānam sam+Khya@ + ta,pp.;@+Da +iva +
[am in needof gold parinibbāpetā—M. II. 102 i, pst.3. sg.
 Adinnam Addhamato
Addha Adhamme

Adinnamdinnantivattum—Vin. I. thepres. 3". sg. verbdubbhati

3 y i Addha imesamkatam va karissanti absol.; an +anu +pa + Da +tya +
43 sometimesoccurs as diibhati (yo
T saywhatisnotgivenasgiven; mitānamna dūbhati- Mittānisamsa va—A.IV. 81;Vin. IV. 159 māna, pass. pr. p.

dinnam
+ iti; Vac+tum,inf. sulta) Surely,it hasbeendoneby these
(people)or thesepeoplewill do it Adhammakammekayiramane
Adinnādānam
pahāyaadinnādānā (sexualact); addhā, indcl. usedfor patikkositum —Vin. I. 115
Adeyyoārāmo api kotisantharena
pativirato,
dinnādāyī emph.;Kr +ta, pp. To raiseobjectionwhenanillegalact
Vin.If. 158
dinnapātikamkhī,
athenena is beingperformed:Kr +ya +mana,
Gardenis notto begivenawayeven
sucibhūtena
cetasāviharati—D.1.4 Addha kho tyaham nalattham—
S. pass.pr.p.;pati +Kru§ ++ a+i+
fora tenmillion spreadout; a + Da +
Havingabandoned
takingwhatis not IV. 307 tum,inf.
eyya,der.; sam +Str + a, der.
given,
heisrefrained
from
taking Surely,I didnothave(ananswer) for
bs whatis notgiven,hebecomesonewho Addasadiiratova agacch tz S you; te + aham;na t a t Labh + Adhammacariya visamacariya hetu
Us takeswhatisgiven,expects
whatis 147 : a ttha +am, double pst. I". sg. —M. 1.285;A. I. 55;V. 307
given,andliveswithamindpureand For thereasonof uniustbehaviourand
Saw(him)comingfromafar;a +Drs
freefromstealing: a +Da +Ia,pp.; Addhanagamanasamaye
—Vin. IV. misconduct
Tā, pst.3". sg.; ditrato + eva: @+
pa +Ha +ya,absol.;pati + vi +Ram 73,IV. 118
. T ta,pp.;dinna+Gdayi:
4 +Da + gaccha+nta,prp.
At thetimeof a long distanceiourney Adhammacārī visamacārī assa—M.
I . +f, der;yi +Ar +a+ ti,Pres.374. Addasamva assosimva —D. II, 319 Il. 186
I Either
I sawor heard:a+ Drs +am, Hewouldbeonebehaving
AKA Ta I E I" sg at ru s3 im,pst. I". Sa 237 unrighteouslyandunevenly;a +
(He) hasenteredinto a long road; dhamma+ Car + i, der; As +ya
bhogavyasanasamvattaniko
—A.IV. addhāna+ magga +pati + Pad + ta, (Skt.yat), opt. 3. sg.
247 pp.
I I Addasam radhāv:
The resultof takingwhatis not
given TERA E ee TAMNEI Adhammamviditvadhammafica
—A.
1Slossof wealth:bho a oge auYamāne—Vin. I. 88 Addhanamgacchanti—Vin. IV. 73 V. 232
sam+Vrt+ana+Ia A RU, p TheySawthethieves
whoarebeingled Theygoona longdistance
journey Havingunderstoodrightandwrong:
» Ger. disgracefullyfor execution:a + Drs +
ä TARI A+ j i Vid +i + tva,absol.
RI samanufiio
hoti—
A,y. y E double
pst.3".pl.;0 +Nt Adhakkhakam ubbhajanumandalam
I I 05 a mana, Pass. PrP.
—Vin. IV. 213 Adhammaragaratta
(He)be
Belowthecollar-boneandabovethe visamalobhabhibhuta
st : To
stealing; One
adinna who
+@ approves
+Da ana Addasa ā
asumkhotabhikkhuniyo-
I der.;sam+any+Hairs , M. IHI.271 knee-cap;adho+akkhakam; ubbha micchadhammapareta—A. I. 160

Those bhikkhunīssaw;a+ Drs +a+s

=uddha;Dharmagupta and Infatuatedby unlawfullust,

Adutthullapattj~A.1.21 +um;doublepst,374.
pl.
Milasarvastivada schools take the overcomebyexcessive greedand
, a offence
notrelated
to termadhakkhaka to meanbelowthe drivenbyfalsevalues;Raj +a,
chastity; Addhadandakena
Pancaapattikkhandha vachejjayava armpitsandbelowtheeyes der.; Raj + ta,pp.; abhi + Bhi +
; adutthullapattnā
haneyyum
~Vin.E11.
47 respectively,
Sistersin Solitude, ta,pp.;micchda,
indcl.;para +I +
Iti dma,Cy. ,
dutthulla+āpatti E Sle wouldbeatwitha stickor with StateUniversityof NewYorkPress, ta, pp.
Albany,1996,pp. 28,81
apon; Chi, a, fi
Adhamme mam tvam niyojesi —Vin.
at bhantassa
ko A dubbhati
—s,i,84
I onewhois Glen, KAI hoti
Addhamato i PI Adhananam dhane 11.303

re cre ananuppadīyamāne —D).III. 65

Whenthewealthis notbeing
You causeto directme to what is not
right;ni + Yuj+e +s +i, caus.pres.
* Mr
+ ta,
pp. distributed
amongthepoor,loc. 2M isg;
 Adhammena
Adhikāram Adhimutto
Adhammena
adhiyyati—Vin, IV.
kakkhala+tta,der; Bhid +@
204 Kr '- a, der.; Smr --a- tu, imper:3". bodhāya—
5. II. 105
der.;sam+ Vrt +evya,opt.3. sg
(Mantra)
isstudied,
notintheright se. This pathhasbeenfoundby me for the
Way;adhi+1+ iva+t. Pass.pres realisation; Budh + a, der.
Adhikaranam
dighattaya
3”,sg. i Adhigacchati pamujjam
kharattāyavālattāya samvattissati
adhigacchatisomanassam—A. III. Adhiceamidam bhante—5. V. 457
Adhammena bhogepariyesati,
—A.1.53-4
238 VenerableSir, this is spontaneous:
sāhasena
—A, V. 177
Thelegalguestion
will turnoutto
Heattains joy andpleasure;adhi + adhiccam,
adyv.+
idam
belong.hard.andfierce;digha +tta,
He seekswealthunlawfullyandby
der.; khara 7 ita, der.; vala + tta,
gaccha+ti,pres.3”.sg.
force;pari + es (fromIs) + a +ti
Adhiccāpattikohoti,āpattibahulo-
pres.3™.sg. sahas+a, der: der.
Adhigacchati sukham, adhigacchati M. I. 443
somanassam—A. IT. 69 He becomesone who violatesrules
Adhammena vaggam Adhikaranam paticehissāma—
Vin.
He attainshappinessandpleasure spontaneouslyandis full of violations:
uposathakammam ~Vin. I. 111 II. 95
We will aera ; adhicca + Gpatti+ka, der.
Separate
actof Uposatha
done vill acceptthelegalquestion;
pati
¥ iechissdma
(fromIs),fut. 1",pl. Adhigatam parihāyati —A. IHI. 252;
unlawfully
V. 169 Adhitthatum na vikappetum —Vin.

Adhikaranam
vūpasantam—A.
II. Falls awaywhatis attained;adhi + 1.297
Adharakāyova ihiati—M. II, 137
OnlythelowerPartof thebody 239 Gam +ta,pp.; pari + Ha +ya + ti, To determine,notto assign;adhi +
pres. 3”. sg. Stha + tum,inf.; vi + kappa + e +
moves:adhara+kayo+eva: Thelegalguestion
is settled;vi +
va;Rij + upa tum,denom.inf.
a* ti,pres.34 sg + Sam +ta, Pp.
Ke
Adhigatākho mevipulamanusaka
Adharitamidamvar Adhikaranasamu bhoga—D. I. 134 Adhimattakasimanam patto kayo -
I ppādavūpasam:
143 : am —Vin. IV. I havegainedabundantwealthto be M. I. 80,245
This, unheld(in mind) The
o ne who
whois skilled
ski ini settlingthe enjoyedby humans,adhi + Gam + ta, Body hasbecomeexeedinglyslim;
One is
Dhr +e +j +
isbetter;
g+ pp.; manu(s)+ aka, der. adhimatta+kasimana;pa +Ap + ta,
coning up disputes:
is adhikarana +
fa,caus.pp.
I m+
Sam + u(t) +pada
i 4 + vi +upa+ sama PP.
Adhikaranam
= adi i—A, I. 75;HI.
kainädiyanti +kusala Adhigato kho myayam dhammo
gambhiro duddaso duranubodho Adhimattavatakucchim
Take
I
upalegalguestion;
āi+ Da+; Adhikarane ubhatovacisamsaro- santopanito atakkavacaro nipuno parikantanti —M. I. 244
+th pres.3 Hi DG+iva
A. I, 70 panditavedaniyo—M. I. 167;Vin. Excessivewindstearthestomach;
Inäa legalquestion,
lao: ) thereis an 1.4 pari +Krnt +a +nti,pres.3”.pl.
Adhika
W ādiyissā —y
ranamAdiyissima exchange
of wordsfrom
"angeof w. A bothsides: ThisDhamma,
whichisdeep,difficult
in. II, to see,difficult to understand,serene, Adhimatto chando ca vayamo ca -
Vact + Sam + Spr +4
Wewill takeu a, der.
P thelegalquestion;@+ fine,notin thesphereof logic,subtle A. TV.320
Da 7 iva i; ae : andtobeekperienced bythewise,has Too muchintentionandstriving
‘sama,fut, J+ pl. Adhikarane vin
icchiyamane—Vin.
Il. 95,261 beenrealisedby me;me +ayam;du +
Adhikaranam dasa(fromDrs); du + (r) +anu + Adhimānena aīhiam vyākaroti —A.
E kak ā Whenthelegalquestionis being
vālattāya
bh aarti determine Budh + a, der.; Sam + ta, pp. ; pa + III. 119;Vin. ITI. 91, vyakarimsu
edaya
samvatteyya
- : d; vi +ni(y)+ Ci +ya +
mdna, Pass. Prp. Ni +ta, pp.; a + takka + avacara; Claims gnosisdue to over estimation
The
I legal
guesti , pandita + Vid + e + antya,caus,fut. of himself;ā iā; vi hātkrto-
rgidity a GATARE E
BEravation
andschism: Adhikāramme pp.
2rä
ti, pres. 3 Sg.
Pleaseate nui Saratu — Vin.
Vi I. 273
F my service;adhi --
Adhigatokho myayammaggo Adhimutto marissati —Vin. III. 78
38
 Adhivāsanakālodāni Adhisile Adhisile Adhomukho

125 Makesothersobservehighermorality; muddhdvasitta, D. I. 69

+ta,pp. Please
acceptthemealfor sam +a +Da +ape +ti, caus. pres.
tomorrowwith thecommunityof re Esa, Adhunūpapannā Tāvatimsakāyam-
Adhivasanakalodani bhante bhikkhus;saddhim,indcl. used with D. II. 208
Bhagavato —A. IL. 31 instr. Adhisīle sambhāventi —M. II. 9 Recentlyborn in theTāvatimsa
Nowit is timefortheBlessedOneto
Theycausetoesteem
(him)in higher community; adhunā t upapannā:
havepatience;adhi+ Vas+e +ana, Adhivāsesiavihaīiīiamāno —
S. I. 27; morality;sam +Bhi +e +nti, caus. upa + Pad + ta,pp.; kayamis
caus.der. + kalo + idani
110 pres. 3™.pl. governedbytheprefixupa
Heendured
(thepain)withoutbeing
Adhivāsanam viditvā—M. II. 50
troubled(by it); adhi +Vas +e +54 Adhisilesikkhati—A. IV. 25 Adhogamani tiriyamgamani milani
Havingunderstood theacceptance
i, caus.pst. 3". sg.>a +vi +Han +ya Trainshimself in highermorality; —§S.
If. 87
(of invitation);
Vid+i +ta, absol.
thmāna, pass. pr.p. sikkhati, desid.pres. 3™.sg. Therootswhichgodeepdownand
across;firiyam, indcl.
Adhivasetabbam, navyahatabbam -
AdhivāsesiBhagavā tunhibhavena- Adhisilestlavipanno—Vin. I. 63
Vin. I. 103
D.1.109;M. I. 161;II. 50,145;S. I, The onewho hasgonewrongin higher Adhogami assa—S. IV. 313
Shouldobservesilence,should
not
183 morality;vi +Pad +ta,pp. Wouldgodown;As +ya (Skt.yav),
speak;adhi+ Vas+e+ tabba,caus.
Bybeingsilent,theBlessedOne opt.3. sg.
fut.pp.; vit+a+ Hr +tabba:
accepted Adhutti atheni asondi avinasikayo -
hartabba> hattabba,hatabba,fut.
Pp. A. IIT.38 Adhotehi padehi maācampi
Adhivuttipadāniabhivadanti —Did: Not beingaddicts,robbers,intoxicated pithampi abhiruhanti —Vin. I. 188
Adhivasetuajjatanayabhattam— D.
13 andwastrel;a + vindsa + i +ka,der. (They) ascend a bed and a chair with
Theyputforthparticularviews; unwashedfeet;Dhl +a + ta,pp.;
1.109;II. 88
Pleaseacceptthemealfortoday; adhi adhivuttiyo
'tiditthiyo,Cy. 104;abhi Adhunākālakato—D.III. 117,210; abhi + Ruh + a + nti, pres, 3”.
;
pl.
+Vast+e+m, caus.,imper.34.Sg; + Vad+a +nti,pres.3. pl. M. II. 243;A. IIL. 122;Vin. II. 185
alia t tana,der Died recently;adhund,indel.; kalam Adhotehi padehi senasanam
Adhivutthaficapanasamanena +kato akkamanti —Vin. II. 174
Adhivāsetuno bhanteBhagavā Gotamena ~Vin, II, 127 Treadonthedwellingplacewith
āvasathāgāram—D. II, 84 It hasbeenaccepted bytherecluse Adhunāgatavadhukāsamenacetasā- unwashedfeet;@+Kram +a + nti,
MaythevenerableBlessedOneaccept Gotama;adhi + Vas 4 ta,pp. A. II, 78 pres.3™.pl.
(use)ourresting
house
: avasatha
+ With themind similar to a bride
agāram Adhivuttho mevassāvāso —M. II. 50 recentlyarrived; vadha + ka, der. Adhonabhiubbhajanumandalam
-
I havealready
accepted(theinvitation Vin. IV. 172
Adhivāsetusvātanāv for)theobservance
of rainyretreat; Adhunagataimamdhammavinayam Below thenavelandabovethe
4 attacatuttho
bhattam—A, [1],36. VaSSa + vasa
—S.IHI.91;A. IHI.138 knee-cap;ubbha,indcl. —with uddha
Pleaseaccepttheme Recently admitted to thisdoctrineand
alfortomorrow
withthreeothers(m
akingyourself
the discipline; adhunā + āgata Adhobhāgānikkameyya —A. IV. 132
fourth):Sva(s)+ tana,der; atta +
It wouldgooutfromthebottom;
Catuttha:
caty+ttha,der
Adhunābhisittoraiiena—D. II. 210 adho,indcl.;ni(s) +Kram+eyya,
Annointedandcrownedastheking opt.3”. sg.
Adhivasety svātanā
: bhikkhusa
yabhatt +eva+ayam recently;adhunāt abhisitta:abhi+
saddhim MAA
mghena—D,J, Sic +ta,pp.; sometimes abhisitta Adhomukho bhuhiasi? —5. IH. 239
Adhisile$amādapeti
—A. Im. 263
appears as avasitta, e.g. Doyoueatwithadowncast face";

61
 Adhovāte
Anatikkamaniya Anadhigatam
Bhu(āli+a +si,pres.2" sg
. 8g. Macchikasandam
paccagaccheyya
-
Vin. II. 17 “4 105 bein bondage,
wishingtotakehislife;
Adhovateatthasiduggandho
Venerable
sir,it is notsurprisingthat | eat food withoutdebt;an +ana; an +attha +kama; a +hita t kāma;
mātugāmoti —Vin, IV. 262
thevenerable
Sudhammawould come Bhu(fi)j +a +mi, pres. 1". sg. a +yoga + khema +kama; vi +0 +
Stoodwindward saying," Womankind
backto Macchikasanda
again;puna + Ruh +e +tumcaus.inf.+kama
smellsbad”;a +Stha+a S+i,
(d) +eva;pati +@+gaccha+eyya, Anatikkamanīyā kenaei purisena
doublepst.34 Sg. du +gandha:
opt.3™.sg. ii rattacittena—D. IL. 13 Anatthafica viditva atthafica —
A. V.
mātugāmo-- iti; matugamo,m,
Could not beovercomeby anyperson 232
Anacchariyam,te Jayaseno with a lustful mind;an +ati +Kram + Having understoodwhatis beneficial
Anakkhatassa
maggassa
akkhata-
rajakumaropasīdeyya—M. IHI. 131 aniya,fut. pp.; Raj + ta,pp.+ citta andwhat is not;an +attham+ ca; Vid
M. III. 8;5.I, 191
+i +tra, absol.
Advocate
ofthe pathwhichhadnot lt is notSurprisingthattheprince
layasena
wouldbepleased
withyou: Anattakatani kammani
beenadvocated:
an +g +Khya+ta
pa +Sad +eyya,opt. 3”. sg. kathamattānamphusissanti ? —S. Anatthasamhite setughato
PP. A+ Khya+tu,dep I
III, 103 Tathagatanam— Vin. I. 59
Anagariyupetassa tutthi hoti Anacchariyagathayopatibhamsu How will theactions,doneby non- When (the thingssaid is) unbeneficial,
sukhavaha —s. 1.48 pubbeāssutapubbā—Vin. I, 5 , self,affecttheself?;an +atta+kata, thebridgeofthe Tathagatasis
Fortheonewhohase Wonderfulverses,which wereunheard pp.; katham + atténam;Spr&+ i + destroyed(purposeof theTathagatas
kī one to homeless >
E hasthe contentment
life whichbrings
IA before,cameto themind: any + ssanti, fut. 3. pl. is lost);an +attha+sam+Dha+i +
abouthappiness:
a +agāra1 iya : acchariya;pati t Bhā 3 imsu:pst ta, pp.: setu + ghata : Ghan+ta, pp.
der. +
upa Toi +I
+ta,pp: sukha+@+ api as Su3 ta,pp.; pubba is Anattamanoanattamanavacam
Vah+a, der. used here twice aniccharetya
—D. 1.53;S. I. 215 Anatthaya parisakkati —A. IV. 345
Beingdispleased,withoutexpressing Hegoesabouttomakeharm;pari +
Anaggānicevabhassāni AnajjhavutthamSamanenaya a wordof displeasure;
a +ni(s)+Car >
Svask + a + ti, pres. 3. sg.
eekassabhāsitassa atthoJayanti,na brahm:
āhmanenavā'ā kenaciva manussa- +e + tva, caus. absol.
Vin. II. 305 viniiayati-
"bhūtena
to —D IHI 207 385353;
3; VVi
Anaddhabhitam attanamdukkhena
. - 207; M 1.I
.1. Vin.
Therearise unending talks,the Anattamanoahosi—S. I. 86 addhabhāveti
—M. II. 223
meaning of any sing Unoccupied
Mi bvrecluse,a brahmin.or
Cupiedbya Becamedispleased Makes theunsoiled life soiled by
le talkbecomes
unintelligible;
2, + nyhumanbeing;an +adhi affliction; anaddhabhitanti
9884;Bhas +ya,
der.;Jan + ya + +@ + Vas Anattādhīno parādhīno na
NU.pres,304pl. gi T Ia, pp. anadhibhiitam,
Cy.IV 10;an +
+Ing "Ya +ti,pass.Pres.3", so. yenakāmamgamo
- D. 1.72 addha + bhiita; addha + Bhi + e
Anajjhittha dha The one who is not free,dependent +ti, caus. pres. 3. sg.
Anacchariyam khopane mmambhāsanti-
Vin. I. 113 on othersandcannotgo ashewishes:
yamManussabhiito kala tamAnanda an +atta +adhina;para +adhina
(They)being uninvitedpreachthe Anadhigatam nādhigacchati—A. IHI.
D. II. 93 mKareyya x
MS an +adhi +Ts +tg PP.; 252;V. 169
Ananda,it jgno
' Surprising
Singthatq 1dS+a +ing pres,3" py] 0 Anattānupassī viharati —A. V. 109 Hedoesnotattainwhatis notyet
human beingWoulddie: ;
"+ acehara
Heabideswithobservation
onnon- attained;
an +adhi+Gam+ta,pp.;
+iva, der.-
Pana+
?ana - etam,
e : Bhii +ta Ananiiay
: nas: eh:andam—
Ya ganassa Vi self; anatta + anu +passa + T,der. an +adhi+gaccha+ti,pres.3. sg.
pp.
IV. 231 MAA
Without
sa knowi
at knowingtheintentionof'the Anatthakāmo ahitakāmo Anadhigatam va bhogam
Anacchariyamkhopane
i tam bh: Psan +4 +Jag 4 Wa,absol ayogakkhemakāmoiīvitā yoropetu- adhigantum,adhigatam va bhogam
yamayyoSudhammo
pu MAU
ET
nadeva kāmo
—S. IHI. 112 phatikatum—Vin. I. 86
Ananobhuāiāmibhojanam
—4 II The one,wishing to harm(him), Togainwealthwhichisnotyetgained
wishingto ruin (him), wishing(him) to or toincrease
wealthwhichisalready
 Anadhigatassa A nantarikam Anantarikam Anabhisamkharonto

gained;
adhi+Gam+tum,inf.;phati Involvedin inappropriate
physicaland Anantarikambhikkhumvutthāpesi +Ram +ti, der.; u(t) +Pad +ya +ti,
(fromSphay)+kdtum:Kr +tum, verbalactions;kava +ika, der; vaca —Vin. II. 165 pres. 3”. sz.; anu +Dhvams +e + ti,
kartum,kattum,kātum;inf, (s) +ika, der.; sam +Srj +ta,pp. Causedthebhikkhunexttohimtoget pres. 3”. sg.
up; vi +u() +Stha +ape +s +i,
Anadhigatassa
adhigamaya
—
M. IHI. Ananuviccaapariyogāhetvā—M. II. caus.pst. 3. sg. Anabhiratim pativinodetvā
— S. I.
79;A. I. 243;II. 148 114;A. I. 89;IL.3, 84
Toattainwhathasnotyetattained 185
Withoutmakinganyinvestigationand Anantarikā bhikkhuni — Vin. IV. 234 Causingtodriveoutfrustration;
pati +
scrutinization;
an +anu +Vie +ya; The bhikkhunt next to her: an + antara
Ananueehaviyamananulomikam vi + Nud +e +tvd,caus. absol.
absol.;a +pari +0 +Gah +e +ivā, + i + ka, der.
appatirūpamassāmanakam
caus. absol.
akappiyamakaraniyam—Vin. I. 45, Anabhirato behmacariyam carati -
Anantena fanena antavantamlokam A.III. 146; V. 169;Vin. III. 110;M.
211;H.7
Anantaram abāhiramkaritvā—D. janam passamviharami—A. IV. 428
(It is)notbefitting,notin conformity, II. 121,pi.
11.100;5. V. 153 Knowing andseeingthelimitedworld
notproper,notsuitableforthe Leadsthehighestway of life with
Withoutmakinginclusionand with unlimitedknowledge,I abide;
recluseship,notpermissible, nottobe frustration;an + abhi +Ram + ta,
exclusion;
Kr +i +tva,absol.
done;an +anu+chavi+iya,der.; pp.; Car +a +ti, pres, 3”. sg.
an+anu+loma+ika,der: aq+
Anantarahitayabhūmiyā —M. II. Ananto ayam loko apariyanto —D. I.
patiriipa;a +samana+a, der +ka, Anabhisambuddhassa
57;Vin. I. 47;IHI.13 23
der.;a +kappa+iva,der; a +Kr + bodhisattassevasato —M. II. 211;
On thebareground;an +antara+ Thisworldis infiniteandboundless;
anīya,fut. pp. S.IL 5
Dha+i +ta,pp. an +anta,a +pari + anta While I wasanunenlightened
Ananuāhāto
mātāpitūhi
—Vin.I. 83 bodhisatta,the Buddha-to- be;an +
Anantarahitayabhūmiyā haritupa- Anapekkhova gacchati—A. IIL. 347
Theonenotpermitted
bytheparents: abhi +sam + Budh +ta,pp.;bodhi +
an+anu+Jnd +ta,Pp. littāya—M. I. 343: A. 11.207 He goesawaywithoutanyhope Satta(or Sakta),
pp.; As +nta,der;
Onthebareground
coveredwithgrass; (left behind);an + apekkho+ eva gen. abs].
Ananuppattam
vaanuttaram harita+upa+Lip +ta,pp.;
yogakkhemamanupapunati
—A, Vy. haritupattaya,variantreading
Anabbhakkhatukama mayam—D. I. Anabhisambhavamappativijjham -
343 161 A. I. 234
Or hegraduallyreaches theunreached Anantara āsavānam khayohoti—S. Wedon’t like to accuse;an + abhi +a The one who is not beingableto and
State
of uniquefreedom: a +amu+ II. 96;A. IHI. 202,319
+Khyva+tum,inf. +kama, notbeingpenetrative
into;an+abhi+
Pa +Ap +ta,PP.;anu+pa +Ap + Theexhaustion ofinfluxes takesplace
sam + Bhi + a + nta,pr. p.; a +pati
(u) +nd +fi.pres.3". sg. immediately;maggdnantaram, Cy.Il. Anabhinanditva apatikkositva—D. + Vyadh+ya +nta,prp.
306;an+antara:Ksi +a, der.
1.53;S. V. 108
Ananubodha
appativedha
—p, 11.55 Withoutaccepting,
withoutrejecting: Anabhisambhunamāno —D. 1.101
90;S.II. 92,v.431;A.1LI Anantara
saddapatubhaya
—D. IL. an +abhi + Nand + i + tva, absol. Beingunableto;an+abhi+sam+
Forthereason
of notunderstanding 206
1a+ pati +Krug+a+i+ tva, Bhū -- nā -- māna,pr. p.; nā is used
andnotPenetrating
into;@ +anu+ Immediately
aftertheemergence
of absol. hereasa conjugationalsignfor the
Budh+a, der1@* pati + Wadh+ sound
der. ' :
rootBhū;usualsignis a
Anabhiratiuppajjati,ragocittam
Anantarikam
bhikkhumāpucchitvā anuddhamseti— S. I. 185;Vin. III. Anabhisamkharonto
Ananulomikena
kayikavacasikena ~Vin. II, 212
110 anabhisanicetayanto
—S. II. 82
samsattha
~Vin.Py.239,294 Having
consulted
thebhikkhusitting
Frustrationarises(in themind), Notaccumulating,
notwilling;a +
neki;ā +Proh +ya + i +tvd,absol, passiondegradesthemind:an + abhi abhi +sam(s) + Kr + 0 + nta,prp.,
64
 Anamganova
Anavasesāpatti Anāiāniyeva
an+abhi+sam+Cet+aya+nta,
Takesonlyunblemishedfood:ana,
pr.p. Anavasesāpatti—A. 1.21 Accords a cordial welcomein terms
neg.p. +vajja: Vad+ya; ahara+e
The offencewhich hasno offuture; pati +sam +Str +a +ti,
+ti, denom.pres. 3%.sg.
Anamganova samāno —M, I. 24 remainder. (i.e. ekclusive); eko pres.3”. sg.
Being,of course,freefromdustor pārāiikāpattikkhandho
Anavaniapatilabhaya —A, II, 143
defilement;
an+amgano+eva;As + anavasesāpatti nāma, Cy. I. 94; Anāgantāitthattam—M. II. 132
Togetnocontempt( i.e.tohavea
mana,pr.p. an +avasesa +Gpatti The one who doesnot cometo this
goodname);an +ava +Jad + pati+
life; an + ā t Gam 2 tu, der.: ittha +
Labh +a, der.
Anayamapanno
vyasanamāpanno Anavattidhammo tasma loka —S. V. tta, der.
yathakamakaraniyo
pāpimato—S. 376
Anayatthitato
khāyissanti—A, IHI,
11.227 The one who is ofthe natureof not Anāgamanaditthiko deti —A. IHI.
443
Fallenintodistress
anddisaster
and returningfrom thatworld 171
Will appearto be unstable;an +ava+
Subjected
towhatshould
bedoneby Givesawaywiththeviewthathewould
theeviloneasheWishes; anayamk ā Stha+i +ta,pp.;Khyd +ya +i+
Anasita acchanti —Vin. IV. 178 notcomeagain;an+@+Gam+ana,
SSanti;fut, 3" pl.
+Pad + ta, pp.; vyasanam
+apanna: They staywithouteating;an + der. + ditthi + ika, der.; Da + e + ti,
yatha+ kama+karaniyo;papimato, As + i +-ta, pp.; As +ya + nti, pres. pres. 3”. sg.
gen. for instr. Anavayhampinam kareyyum 2rä
3 WEA
avivayham
—D. II. 203
Anagamaniyamvatthum
Anayavyasanam
āpaiieyya—S.
IHI Theywouldmakehim unfit for
Anassāsakamidam brahmacariyam paeceāgantum
—A. III. 439
137 ; I bringingthebridehomeandsending
—M. I. 519 To returntothepointoneshouldnot
(He) would fall intodistressand thebrideoutof home;ana, neg,ps +
This highestway of life is come back to; Cy. says anāgamanīyva
disaster;
ā -- Pad +yq +eyya,opt Vah+ya,fut. pp.; a+ vi +Vah+ya,
i sg. I
unsatisfactory;
an +a +Svas+a + vatthumeanspaficavera and
Sut.pp.
ka, der. dvāsatthiditthi, III. 414

Anarahantova $amānā
—M. II. 123 Anavasesadohi —A. V. 350
Anāgatabhayamsampassamānena- Anāgāmī anāgāmissasamānatto -
Beingindeednonarahants:
a; 2 ; Theonewho milks dry; an +avasesa
A. III. 102 A. IV. 364
ar
irhanto+eva:AS
a; +manaprp * Duh+7,der. By theone who is seeingthedangerin Non-returneris eaual to thenon-
returner; samdna + atta
Analantivadami
—M, I 455 Anavasesam
ādiyati—A. IV, 339
Passa + mana, Prep.
MI,
Isayit is nots ‘icient;Vad+a
Vad 2.mi,
HE te tawakaiko
akesawayeverything
withoutleaving
e : r

ufficient;Vag4 i
Anacaramacarati—Vin. I. 56
anything
behind:a 4ava +Sis +a,
Behavesunlawfully:
der; a+ Da 4 iva + ti, pres. 34, sg.
Analam karitvā—M. 1.165 140 pahhattivītikkamamkaroti,
Thinkinginsufficient In thelongperiodof timenotyet Cy. 984; an t ācāra: ā t Car t
Tea pahāyavattati—D. L. come,an t āgatam -- addhānam; a, der.; a+ Car +a + ti, pres.
Analamcame acc.for loc.; ep.Atitamaddhanam, a U sp.
e
Havingabandoned
completely,
(he)
257 āntarāyāya
—M,ti dighamaddhanam
Proceeds:
pa +Ha +ya, Waka, Vre+
It is insufficient
ford Anāiāniyevasamāneāiāniyāti
a + fi, pres, 3r4. PE I
an +alam oingharm
tome Anāgatambhāramvahati—A. I. 84 amannimha —M, I. 367
(He) shoulderstheburdennot yet Wethought thattheywere
Anavasesa
Anavaiia ™samadaya
vattati—D.
1 come;Vah+a+ ti,pres.3%se superiors
whowerejustequal
In yeva
āhārami
ak 163 5:

M.1.369 Yeva
āhāram
āhāreti
- withinferiors;an +@jdnive
+eva;
Having
obsery
edcompletely,
(he) ajaniyad+ iti; a + Man +ya + i+
Proceeds
mha,pst. 1".pl.

67
 Anathapindikassa Anāpatti
Anapatti Anāvattidhammam
Anathapindikassa
gahapatissa Anāpaiia akusalam—A. V. 83
kammantagamo
hoti—Vin. IV. 162 Without
makinga mistake;
an+@+ III. 38 Shouldgo awaywithoutconsulting
There
isabusiness
village
of Pad +ya,absol. Bhikkhu, thereis no offence for the (him), he shouldnot be followed;
Anathapindika,
thehouseholder one who is unaware; a + Jan + nd + pa + Kram + i +tabba,fut.pp.;
Anāpatti asādiyantiyā—Vin. IHI. 35 nta,pr.p. na +anu +Ba(njdh + i + tabba,fut.
Anāthāappaāiātā—
Vin, IV. 310 pp.
Thereis no offence for theone whois
Helpless
andunknown;
appa(ora + Anapatti bhikkhu cittuppade —Vin.
hotenjoying;
an +dpatti;a +Svad+
pa) +Jia +ta,pp. III. 56 Anamantacareapajjati— A. III, 259
aya + nti, pr. p.
Bhikkhu, thereis no offence in He commitsanoffence in going (to
Anadaram apatikaram thinking;citta +uppāda the families)without prior notice:.a
Anapattiavusosupinantena
—Vin,
IHI.39 - āmamta-- Car -- a, der; @+ Pad +
218 Anapatti vissasagahe—Vin. III. 60 ya +ti,pres.3%.sg.
Brother,thereis no offence in dream
Wouldfollowa monkwhois There is no offence in takingon trust.;
disrespectful,
incorrigibleandnot vissdsa+ Grh + a, der. Anamantetva upatthake
Anāpatti iddhimantassaiddhivisaye
reckoned
asa fellowmember: anu+
—Vin.III. 67 anapaloketvabhikkhusamgham —
S.
Vrt+eyya,
opt.3%Sg. Anapatti sambhogesamvase—Vin.
Thereis no offencefor theone with IIT. 95
Psychic
power,in thefieldof psychie £97 Withoutaddressing
thepersonal
Anadariyampatieea~Vin. II. 220: There is no offence in enioying
Power;iddhi + mantu,der attendants
andwithouttakingleave
IV. 185 privilegesandparticipatingin legal of thecommunity
of bhikkhus;
Outof disrespect;
an +ādara-- iya
assemblies;sam + Bhuj + a, der; an + dmant + e + tva, denom.
der.;pati +] (0+ya, absol. Anapattitiracchanagatapariggahe
RE
sam + Vas+ a, der. absol;an +apa+Lok +e +tva,
Vin.III. 58
Thereis no offencein what belongsto absol.
nada g = . .
im
theanimals;
pari +Grh +a, der.
42 Anāyussā—
A. III. 145
If, withouttakinga cubit;anada =
Anapattinālamvacanīye
—Vin. IHI. Would go without consulting (others); Notconducive
toa longlife;
anādaya,absol.
anapuccham,pr.p.; gaccha + eyya, andyussatiāy 'upacchedanāna
144
Thereis no offencein talking to a
opt.3. sg. ayuvaddhana,Cy. Ill. 282; an + āyus
Anadiyantoāgamāsi—Vin, IHI,58
(He)wentawaywithoutPayingany Woman who is notunderanother's +ya, der.
Anāpucchā ārāmam pavisitva -
control;
na +alam+ Vac+aniya,fut.
Pp. iha Vin. IV. 306 Anālassam utthānam bhogānam
Having enteredthemonasterywithout āhāro—A. V. 136
Anādiyitvāsārathim Anāpatti
niruttipathe
—Vin.IHI.57 askingforpermission;an+&@+Preh Industryandreadiness
is thefoodfor
anadiyityg +ya, absol.;pa + Vi§+i +twā, wealth(causeof wealth):an + alasa +
patodam—A,iv. 191 URI Thereis no offencein theway of
Me heedingthedriverandthe speaking absol. ya, der.
Te
208d;an + a+
@+ Da+
psa:Wa+i+
i tg

Anapatti Pasadabhafiie—Vin. III. Anapuccha Asanenisidanti —Vin. Anavatam nanadassanambhavati -

103 IV. 343 M. Il. 137
Anānākathiko
hoti Thereisnooffencein saying (They) sit down on a seatwithout Thereis knowledgeandvision
heehānakathiko —A.IV. 153 S i “ir
askingforpermission;
ni +Sad+a + uncovered;
an+@+ Vr +ta,pp.
€ISnotonewithBOSslp
RE andfri
rivolous omething
withgoodfaith;pasada
+ nti,pres.3™,pl.
Bhan + ya, der.
Anavattidhammam
mecittam
Anapatti bhikkhu ajanantassa—Vin. Anapucchapakkamitabbo kamabhavaya—A. IV. 402
nānubandhitabbo
—M. I. 106 My mindis of thenatureof
 Anavatti
Aniecapatisamvedī Aniccasanna Anissaro

non-returning
totheworldof sense- Whenthekingandthegueenhave
desires 145 Anihiamāno kāyena abhāsamāno
notgoneout(fromthebedroom):
Abides,experiencingimpermanence; vācam— M. I. 94
anikkhantarāiake savanighareti
Anāvattīkāmesuhoti—M. I. 91 pati +sam +Vid +e +, caus.der. Withoutmovingthebody,without
attho,Cy. 880; ratanam vuccati
He doesnot turnbackto the sense speakinga word;an + Raj +a+
mahesi,881; a +ni(s)4 Kram +ta,
desires;
an+a +Vrt+a +i.der. Aniceasanna,aniccedukkhasanna, mana,pr. p.; a +Bhds +a t māna,
pp. a+ ni +Gam +ta,pp.
dukkhe anattasanna—A. IIL. 85 Pr.p:

Anāvilasamkappo
—A. V..3I The senseof impermanence, thesense
Anikkhittadhuro kusalesu
of Dukkha in impermanence andthe Anibbiddhapubbam
dhammesu
- D. III. 237
an+avila +samkappa senseofno- soul in Dukkha;sam + appadalitapubbamlobhakkhandham
Onewhohasnotputaside(givenup) MATI nibbijjhati padāleti—5. V. 88
responsibility
in wholesome
matters:
Anāsavāsukhāvedanāvedeti—M. He penetratesandsplits theaggregate
a+ ni +Ksip +ta,pp.
II. 227 Aniccasambhāūtamkuto niccam of cravingwhich hasnotbeen
Experienceshappyfeelingfreefrom bhavissati? —5. IV. 129 penetratedandsplit before;a +ni +
Aniggahito
asamkilitthoanupavajjo
influxes;an +asava:Vid+eke Howcouldit bepermanent
thathas Vyadh+ ta,pp.; a +pa +Dr or Dal
appatikutthosamanehibrahmanehi
caus.pres.3%.sg. comeintoekistence
on +e+i+ ta, caus. pp.; ni + Vvadh +
vinhihi—A. I, 175
impermanence?;
anicca +sam + Bhū ya +ti, pass.pres. 3%.sg.; pa + Dr or
Anahatekabalenamukhadvaram Notrebuked,notpolluted,not + fa, PP. Dal + e + ti, caus.pres. 3”. sg.
vivaritabbam—Vin, II. 214;IV. 194 censured,
not rejectedby the
Thedoorofthe mouthshouldnotbe recluses,
thebrahmins
andthe
Aniccanupassi viharati aniccasanni Animittam katva patetabbam—Vin.
Openedwhenthemorselof foodis intelligents:
a +nj +Grh +i +ta,
—A. TV. 145 IHI.238
notyetbroughtup:an+ā +Hr +ta, PP.; a+ sam +Klis +ta,Pp.; an +
He abides,while observingandbeing Shouldcausetodropit,without
PP. Vit Vrt+q@ti4 tabba,fut.Pp. upa +Vad +ya,fut. Pp.; a+ pati +
consciousof impermanence;
anicca + makinga sign: Kr +tva,absol.; Pat +
Krus+ta,pp.
anu +passa + f, der; anicca + sannd e + tabba,caus.fut. pp.
Anahariipasammati —A.IIL 347 + 7, der.
(Fire)is extinguished
w Aniecatodukkhatorogatogandato
ithout fuel: an Animittaviharim puggalam —A. IV.
* dharo+upa +Sam Sallatoaghatoabadhato parato
"ya +ti,pass. Aniceabhikkhavesamkhara—A. IV. 78
pres.3". sg. Palokatosufifiatoanattato
100 A personabidingwith no sign
samanu-passati —M. I. 436
Bhikkhus,conditionedthingsare
Anaharonibbāyeyya —s. III. 126; He observesin termsof
impermanent;sam(s) + Kr + a, der. Animisanto pekkhati seyyathapi
IV. 213;A. Ty.72,anahara Impermanence, affliction, disease,
devā Tāvatimsā —D. II. 20
It wouldblowoutwi dart,darkness,
obstacle,alien,
thout
fuel;a; 4 Anicea samkhata Beholdswith unwinkingeyes,like
āhāra; ni Va + ya disintegration.emptiness,
T eyva,opt. 3'4 paticcasamuppanna godsof Tavatimsa;
a +ni t Mis at
Sg. hon-substantiality:
Sam +anu + khayadhammāvayadhammā nla, pr.p.; pa >Īks ta +i, pres:
Passa + ti, pres,
Bre wg, virāgadhammā nirodhadhammā - 3”, sg.;seyyathapi,
indcl.,usedfor a
Aniketāvih
in arantibhikkhavo
i bhi —8.1,
S. IV. 214 simile
Aniccadassavi
khopanaham
bhante
Bhikkhus
abide (Feelingsare)impermanent,produced,
without ane Bhagavato—S, IHI. 1
abodes eh dependentlyarisen,of thenatureof Anissaravikappi
—A. IIT. 136
Venerablesir,I
amnota regularvisitor exhaustion,ofthe natureof The onewho doesnotbehavelike a
totheBlessed¢
Anikkhantarā
ake ani Ine;a +nicca+Dr + destruction,of thenatureof fading lord
avi, der,
TH IVI o E taratanake away,of thenatureof ceasing:sami(s)
+Kr +ta,pp.;pati +1(t) +-ya,absol. Anissarotatthabhikkhusamgho
-
Aniccapatisamyediviharati —A. IV. +sam + u(t) + Pad + ta,pp. Vin. LL.268
 Anissito Anucarantipi Anuttanikatafica

Thecommunity of Bhikkhushasno Neitheracceptingnor rejecting;anu+ Anucariyam upagami—D. II. Ap + (u) na +ti, pres. 3”. sg.
authority
overthere;an +issaro Grh +nd + nta,pr.p.; a +ni+ kuiia 264
+ nla, pr.p.;anuganhanto 'ti sārato Followed in attendance;
anu +Car+ Anuttaram santivarapadam
Anissitoeaviharati,na ca kiāci aganhanto,Cy. 160; the common iva, der; upa +@+ Gam + i, pst. 3”. abhisambuddho— M. 11.237
; lokeupādiyati
—M. I. 56 phrasein suchcontexts
as thisis The uniquestateof peacehasbeen
Heabideswithoutbeinga dependent anabhinandantoappatikkosanto realised; santi + vara +pada; abhi +
(onit), doesnotgraspanythingin the
Anunnatapatinnato
sakeacariyake sam + Budh +ta,pp.
world;a +ni +Sri +ta,Pp.; upa +a Anuganhatu
bhikkhusamgham
—M, tevijjake pavacane—
D. I. 88
- +Da +iya +ti,pres,34 Sg. I. 457 Recognisedandacknowledgedin the Anuttaram sammasambodhim
Pleasebe mercifulto the community sacredwordsof thethreefold
Veda,as abhisambuiihimsu —
D. II. 83
AnukampakoBhagavāhitesī
ofbhikkhus;
anw+Grh +nda+tu, explainedby his teachers;anu +Jfid + Realiseduniqueandperfect
, anukampam upādāya
dhammam
meta. imper. 3". sg. fa, pp.; pati +Jha + ta, pp., sa (sva) enlightenment;
sammd,indel.+sam+
- deseti—M. II. 238
ktka, der.; ācariva +ka, der.; ti + bodhi.;abhi+sam+Budh+ya +
TheBlessedOneis kindand
Anugganheyyauddesena vijja + aka, der.; the termpāvaeana imsu,pst. 3”. pl.
beneficial,
heteachestheDhamma out
paripucchayaovadena anusasaniya is usedfor the Buddha's teachings
of compassion;hita+esa(fromIs) +
—Vin.IV. 325 i too, eg. Bhagavatopāvacane,D. II. Anuttaram sītibhāvam saechikātum
i, der; upa+@+Da +ya,absol.d
Shouldsupportin termsof recital, 195 —A.III. 435
Dr§ +e+ ti, caus.Pres.3". sg.
clarification,
adviceandinstruction; To experienceunsurpassingcoolness:
i Anukampanti
mataputtamya anu-- Grh -- nā -- eyya,meta.opt. Anunnato matapitihi —M. I. 56 sa +acchi + Kr + tum:kartum>
3”, sg. Sanctioned
bytheparents;
anu+Jia kattum> katum,inf.
orasam—D.II. 89
Becomekindjustlikethemotherto t fa, pp.
i herbelovedson;any+Kamp+a+nti Anuggahitacittodānam deti —A. II. Anuttarassa yogakkhemassa
pr. 3". pl.; puttam+iva:ura(s)+a 172 Anunfieyyam
anujaneyyasi, adhigamāya—M. I. 104
der,
Hegivesalmswith theideaof patikkositabbam patikkoseyyasi - To attainuniguereleasefrom
Supporting:
anu+Grh +i +ta,pp.* M. II. 158 bondage
hs Anukampamupādāya—M.III. 117; citta; Da +e +Ul,pres, 3". Sg. (If ) youwouldapprove
whatshould
S. 1.177;A. IHL,50 beapprovedandreiectwhatshould Anuttarā vimutti sacchikatā—
S. I.
Outof compassion; upa-- ā 2.Da + Anuggahitam
idamvaram—Vin.IV. berejected;
anu+Jia +eyya,der; 105
ya, absol. 143 anu +Jan + n@+ eyydsi,opt. 2”. Supremeliberation
hasbeen
This is betterunlearnt;an +u(t) + Grh Sg.;pati +Krus +a +i +tabba,
fut. experienced;
an+uttara;vi +Muc +
Anukkhepedinne atir 1+ ta, pp. Pp.; pati + Krug +a + evyasi,opt. ti, der.; sa + acchi (=akkhi)+ kata,
ekabhāgam 24. sg.
dātum
- Vin. I. 285
PP.
Togiveanadditional
share
when Anugharakamanugharakam
theundistributable
isgiven away; āhindatha
—Vin. I. 249 Anutthanamala ghara —A. IV. 195 Anuttaresu vimokkhesu piham
anukkhepo namayamkihcei Go toeachandeveryhouse;anu + Thenon-striving
familiesbecome upatthapesi—M. III. 218
anukkhipitabbamanuppadatabbam Shara +ka,der.;a +Hind +a +tha, rusty;an+u(t)+Sthd+ana,der. Longingwassetonsupreme
kappiyabhandam,Cy.1125;an +u(t) imper,2", py].
liberations;
upa+Stha+dpe+
aKsip +a , der;
di Dg- + ta: pp»
! Nz Anuttaram yogakkhemamnanu- s+ i, caus.pst.3. sg.
tum,inf , Pp.; Dé&+
Dp.;I
Anuearantipi
nam—A,TI. 352 pāpunāti —M. I. 104
They
alsofollowhim,theygoafter He doesnot reach,stepby step, Anuttanikatanca uttanikaronti —A.
Anuganhanto
anikkujjanto—D. I. 53 him;anu+Cay
Fa +nti,pres,3. pl. theuniguerelease
frombondage; IV. 152
+api yoga+khema;na +anu +pa + (They) makeit plainwhat is not
 Anudiitam
Anupariyāyapatham
Anupariyayapatho
explained;
an+uttana
+Kr +ta, Withmindfulness,not present;an +
pp.; uttana +Kr + 0 + nti, pres. 3”. patha; anu + Kram + a +mana, Anupādā cittassavimokkho—A. I.
upa+Stha+i +ta,pp.
pl. intens.DF.D. 198
Liberation
of mindwithoutgrasping;
Anupatthitayasatiya ca viharati
Anudūtamadamsu—Vin. II, 295 Anupariyāyapatho ucco ceva an t upa t ā +Da + G, instr; vi +
parittacetaso—S, IV. 119
Gavea travelling
companion;
a +Da + vitthāro ca —A. IV. 107 Mue + a, der.
Heabides
withaninferiormindand
a +imsu,
double
pst.3" pl. The pathgoing round(thecity) is
with mindfulnessnot present;paritta
highandbroad Anupadanaya dhamme desite—Vin.
+ ceta(s)
Anuddayam
patieea
—S.II, 200 IHI.20
Outof compassion;
any+daya;pati Anupariveniyam bhikkhūnam WhentheDhamma hasbeenexplained
Anupatitva
anupatitva
+1(t) +ya, absol. āroeehi —Vin. I. 80 fornon-grasping;
an +upa+4 +Da
pāsulantarikāhivitudenti —Vin. III,
Informthebhikkhusineachprivate +ana, der; Dr§ + e + i + ta, caus.
105
Anudditthamimamvaram—
Vin, IV, chamber;d +Ruc +e +.hi,caus. pp.
Jumpingon it continuouslyattackthe
143 imper.2". sg.
This is betterunrecited:@ + u(t) +
(skeleton)throughthe ribs : any +Pat
Anupadano bhikkhu parinibbayati
Drs +ta,Pp. +1+tva,absol.;pasula+antarika;
Anupalitto lokena —A, II. 39 —M. If. 265
vit Tud+e +nti,pres.3. pl.:
Unsullied by theworld; an + upa + The bhikkhuattainsperfectextinction
Anunayamāno—S. 1.232 anotherform is vitudanti
Lip +ta,pp. withoutgrasping;pari + ni + Va +ya
Beingledaccordingly,
any+ + ti, pres. 34. sg.
Ni+a+ Anupatitvaanupatitva
mana,pr.p
Anupasampannenasahaseyyam
vitaecheyyum
virāieyyum—M. I.
kappeyya—Vin. IV. 16 Anupadaparinibbanattham kho
AnupakkamenaTathagata 364
Would sleeptogetherwith an avuso Bhagavati brahmacariyam
parinibbayanti—
Vin,11.194 Having iumpedonit continuously,
unordained;an +upa+sam vussati —M. I. 150
TheTathāgatas
donotenterinto (they)
wouldtearitandputaw
ay; +Pad +ta,pp.;saha,indcl.used Venerable,
thehighestway
of life is
Parinibbāna
byassault;
a +upa+ mukhatundakena thasanta
withinstr.;St +a +ya, der. led underthe BlessedOne, for the
Kram+a, der i gaccheyyumn,
mamsapesimnakhehi
purposeof attainingperfect
kaddhitva
pateyyum,
Cy.III, 44:
Anupahaccaantaram mamsakayam extinction,
withoutgrasping;Vas+ya
Anupagantyg
va nala OD Pat heb iva abeolPVE+
m upagantum HE —M. ILI. 274 +ti,pres.3™.sg.
A. IV.387 faccha+eyyum,denom.opt.3”,
Withoutimpairingtheinternallayers
Not fitly forVisiting,if notvisited pl.;ysvi
VE + RaiĒ tea eyyullm,caus.
of flesh;an +upa+Han(hat)+ya, Anupada parinibbanam —
A. IV. 74
before:an +upa+Gam+ta opt.3".pl.
absol.; na + alam; upa + G,
absol. Parinibbana
(perfectextinction)
inf ps.. mi; am
+tum,
p +-
Anupadamnamapatekkam withoutgrasping;pari +ni + Va +
Anupahaccachavim ca cammam ana, der.
patthapetvāekato
osāpenti—Vin. ca mamsamca naharum ca atthim
Anupagamma
SoreyyamSamkassam IV. 15
Kannakuiiam —Vin.IHI,II ea atthimifijam ca —D. I. 336 Anupadaparinibbanaya samvattati
Followinglinemeansthattheycause
Withoutreach tostart
start Withoutimpairing outerskin,inner —A.1.44
Sseparately
epar: andendtogether;
Pati + eka i skin,flesh,sinew,boneand It leadstoparinibbāna
without
bonemarrow grasping; sam+ Vrt+a+ ti,pres.3%,
Anupariyayapatham sg.
Anupatthitā
; Im,
ivā āhucamkamamāno —D.11.83
II, 125; iya satiyā —
yā—S. II. 3A.
271;
Whilewalking
: onthecircularroad Anupādāyaāsavehicittamvimucci
(ofthecity);anu+p —M. I. 501;IHI.280;Vin. I. 14,
ari + Yq + ya +
cittani vimuccimsu
 Anupadavimutto Anupubbena
Anupubbena Anuyuhilivamāno

Mindwasliberated
frominfluxes aggregates,part +ni+ Va +ya +ti,
M. I. 166;II. 60;5. III. 95 —Vin. IV. I5
without
grasping;
az +upa+a+ Da pres.3. sg.
While touringgradually;Car +a + Next phrasemeansthatwhenthe
+ya,absol.;
vi+Muc+ya +i,pass.
mana, pr. p. recitationis beingmadeas "form is
pst.3%sg. Anupadisesasuvimuttā —A. IV. 75
impermanent” theotherpersoncauses
Well freedwithoutany residueof
Anupubbena nibbanam torecite(thenextphrase)“feelingis
Anupādāvimutto
Tathāgato
—D. I. defilements;
an + upddi +sesa: su +
adhigacchanti— A. I. 162; II. 214 impermanent”’;ni(s) +Car +e+ ti,
17 vi + Mue +ta,pp.
They attainNibbanagradually;adhi + caus.pres, 3. sg.
Tathāgata
istheoneliberatedwithout
grasping;vi +Muc +ta,pp.; Tatha+
gaccha+nti,pres.3. pl.
Anuparambhacitto
dhammam
āgato,Tathā-- āgatoor Tathā+ Anubhagampi datum —Vin. II. 167
supāti,na randhagavesī—A. IV.
gato,Cy.explains8 meanings,59 f.f. Anupubbena sanhaggamphusati - To give anadditionalsharetoo;
25
D. I. 184 aparampibhagam,Cy. 1223; Da +
He listensto thedhammawithout
Anupādāvimuttohoti—S. IHI. 136 Graduallyexperiencestheendof fum, inf.
havinganyintentionof attackingand
( Heis ) released
withoutgrasping;
vi sensation(identification); sania +
finding
faultwith;Srw+na +ti,pres.
+Mue+ta,pp. agga; Sprs +a+ ti, pres. 3”. sg. Anumata maya—D. III. 97;
3”,sg.
A. V. 328
Anupādāyanibbuto
—A. I, 162 Anuppannassamaggassauppadeta- Sanctionedby me ; anu + Man +
ta,
Anupahano
camkamati
—Vin. I. 187
Extinguished
withoutgrasping;
ni + Vr M. III. 8; 5. I. 191 PP.
Walkstoandfro withoutsandals:an +
T (a,PP. Producerofthe unproducedpath;aa ::
upahana; Kram + a + ti, intens. pres.
u(t) +Pad +ta,pp.;u(t) +Pad +e+ Anumasi, patimasi—M. II. 135
3”. sg.
Anupadiyamna paritassati, tu, caus. der. Repeatedlytouched;anu + Mrs+ i;
aparitassampaccattamyeva pati + Mr§ +
i, pst.3. sg.
Anupiyayamviharati Anupiyam
Parinibbāyati
—M. I. 67;S.II. 82 Anuppadento garayho hoti upavajjo
namaMallanamnigamo—Vin. II.
The one,whois notgrasping, —A.IL. 181 Anumāssa anumassavannam
180
IS not trembled,theone, who is not The one who is notcausingto produce bhāsanti—M. I. 146;150
AbidesinAnupiyaatthemarkettown
trembling,
attainsperfectextinction (good thing) becomescensurableand Takingthemoneby one,theypraise
of Mallas,namedAnupiya
withinoneself:a; +upa+āt Da + blameworthy;Cy. gives two him; dasakathavatthiini
Wya+nta,prp. meanings:kusalam dhammam anupavisitvā,anupavisitvā,Cv.ll.
*pari +tras+ya +ti, Anupubbaninno
anupubbapono
pres. 3”. sg.: gaparitassam,
pī: P.; pati uppādetumasakkonto,attano 148;anu +(m)+As +ya, absol.;
" altam+(y) +eva anupubbapabbhāro —A. IV. 198;
vacanamuppannamanucehavikam Bhas +a + nti, pres. 3”. pl.
Vin.II. 237
kātumasakkonto,Ill. 166;an- u(t)
Anupadisesantimafifiamano ~ M.,|] Graduallyslant,proneandshelved
+Pad +e +nta, caus.prp. Anuyanti diso disam —D. III. 200
257 Ea (They) go round from regionto
ThinkingthatthereiSnotraceof Anupubbanirodho—A. IV. 456
Anubandheyyamatthikehi region;anu+ Ya +nti,pres.3”.pl.;
aggregates
leftbehind:Man+ya+ Gradual
cessation:
anu+pubba;ni +
upanhatammaggam—Vin. 1.40 (disdto +disam?); tāva tāva disāva
māna,PF.p. ; Rudh+a, der.
MayI follow(him)uptotheway caranti, Cy. 965
knownto paupers;anu+Ba(njdh+
Anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā se tte aggāyaparenti —A. V. eyvam,opt. I*.sg.; atthi +ka, der.; Anuyunjiyamano na patibalo
te 4; Vin.
Parinibbāyati—D.II. 134; Vi II, 2
upa +Jid +ta, pp. anuyogamdatum —Vin. I. 171
GraduallyProceed
forthehighest;
He is not competentenoughto assist
Attainsperfect
extine Part +e (fromI) +nti.pres. 3. pl.
RN tionin thestate (them)whenhe is beingdealtwith;
ofNibbana,withoutanyresidue
hestate
of anu +Yu(n)j + iva +mana,pass.pr.
Anupubbenacārikam caramāno-
p.; Da@+ tum,inf.
 Anuyutta
Anussavāpettha

Anuyuttāahesum -—D. II. 173 Vin. I.1

Became followers;anu+ Yuj+ta, Anuvassamvutthāpenti —Vin. IV. The latent tendencies of mind come to
Ponderedover in ascendingand
DD.;a t Hi (Bhi)+a+ (ho >he)4 336 an end; vi +anta +honti
descendingorder;anuloma 4
8 um,pst.3%.pl. Causeto ordainannually;vi +uff) +
patiloma;manasi +akési 2
Stha +dpe +nti, caus.pres. 3. pl. Anusaya samugghatamgacchanti-
Anuyogokusalanam
dhammanam
- A. I, 44
Anulomapatilomamsamāpaiiimpi
A. 1.14 Anuvassamsacīvarabhikkhā Latenttendenciesof mind are
vutthahimpi—A. IV. 448
Toengage oneselfin wholesome paūhattā—Vin. III. 265 completelyannihilated;anu + St +a,
I didenterandexit in ascendingand
things;anu+ Yuj+a, der Alms-food with robeshasbeen der.
descending order;sam + &@ +Pad +ya
announced (by us) annually:
* impst. I. sg.+api; vi +u(t) +Stha
Anuyogopaccavekkhana anuvassam,adv.;pa +Jd +dpe + Anusayiko abadho —M. II. 70
+im,pst. I, sg.+api
dhammanam aharo—A.V. 136 la, Caus.pp. Chronic ailment;anu + Si + a +i +
Practice
andreviewarethesupport ka, der.
Anulomamabhavissa,āānassa
forthedhammas:
Pati +ava+Iks+ Anuvatam paribhandam aropetum
upadaya,sabbedhamma anattāti-
ana,der. —Vin. I. 297 Anusāsanim paccāsimsanti—M. II.
5. IV.401
To give a support:anu + Va + ta,pp.; 10
It wouldbeconsistent.concerning
Anuraho mam bhikkhū codeyyum, a + Ruh +e +tum,caus. inf. They expectinstruction(from me);
nosamghamaiihe— M. 1.27RA knowledge, thatall thingsare
pati +@ +Sams +a + nti, pres.3™.
Maythebhikkhusaccuse mein substratumless:
a 2 Bhii + a +i +ssa,
Anuvātam yeva gacchati,no pl.
privacy,
notin themidstofthe cond.3’. sa.
pativātam—A. I. 225
Samgha; Cud+¢ + Goeswindward,
notagainst
thewind; Anusāsaniyā (mā) paecavyāhāsi—D.
eyyum, caus.
opt.3%.pl. Anulomikani senasanani
anu +vata;pati +vata II. 232
patisevamāno
—A. IV. 77
Don’t keepawayfromgiving
Anurodhavirodham sam Whileusingsuitable
dwellingplaces;
apanno- Anuvadam patthapeti—Vin. I. 6 instruction;pati +a +vi +a@+Hr +
M. 1.266 Pati +Sev +a +mana.Pr.p.
Causesto establishauthority a +s +i charsi>hassi>hasi,pst.
Engaged inattraction
andrepulsion;
(over the monastery); anuvddoti 3”. sg.; ma,prohibitive p., used with
anu+Rudh+a dep+ vi +Rudh+ Anuvattakabhavissanti
whāraietthaka-tthānam,Cy. 1156 pst. or imper.
a, der; sam+@+ vaggavadaka —Vin, [I]. 175
Pad +ta,pp:
Theywill becomefollowers, the
Anuvicea vinnhiigaraheyyum—M. I. Anusāsanī nāma aputtho bhanati -
Anurodhavirodhehi Vv secessionists;
any+ Vrt + aka,der;
361; A. IHI. 255,garahanti Vin. III. 78
Tathagato —s, 1.Il ippamutto Vaggavada+ka, der.
Havinginvestigated,thewise people Instructionmeansthatone
Tathagatais completel
y freefrom would censure;anu + Vie +ya, speakswithoutbeingasked;nama,
attraction
andre Anuvasitvā
anuvasitvā
pulsion;vi :-pa -- absol.; Garh +a +eyyum,opt. 3”. indci. usedhere to define; a +
Mue+ta,Pp. ävasatha-pindam
bhuhiianti
—Vin.
IV.69
-70 pl. Prch +ta,pp.; Bhan + a + ti,
pres. 3". sg.
Anulomakhanti Staying
continuously
(they)
eatfood
HI.441 yasamannagato
—4, Provided
bythePeople
ofthe resting
Anuviiiakāram karohi —
Vin. I. 236
Endowed with
Do something
aftercareful Anussavāpetthapayirupāsanti —M.
patienceagreeable
to Place; Ont + Vas+ 5 +a: absol.,
theteaching; dvasatha3:pinda; Bhu(i)j + a +nti, 11.170
anuloma+Ksam+pj
der. pres,3”, py].
variantis anuviccakāra( doing Forthereasonof traditiontoo,they
somethingafter investigation);Kr + keepthemselvesclose on this matter:
Anulomapatilomam
manasākāsi Anuvassam—Vin. IHI. 227
o +hi, imper.2™.sg. anu -- Sru -- a, der. + api + ettha;

Everyrain(=everyyear) pari + upa +As +a + nti, meta.pres.

Anusayāvyantīhonti—A. II. 157 32 pl

79
 Anussāham Anokāsakatam Anodissa RUI
Antamaso I
a tedesi- M; L. 438 Anekavihitāni ditthigatāni
tuka —
S, E II
E, anāpuccha,
a ol."ICy. 344;
old. (AAan HAHI
+ Ena samannāgato—A.
4Antaggāhikāya
E I. 154; IIL. 130 ifĪ
2922. i ditthiyA,
ahikavs rā i
ssed
Expressed es an ++
inability;
inability:an u(t)+Sah
u(t)+ § + 260-- : Gkāpa
HĀ pl. "Io
KataFINGERRARARERGE Equipped
with
Sguippe : anextreme
TTT, view;
a, anta+ {I
I a, de
der; pa +Vid+e +s
pa+ : +
i, , caus.
pst.—Multifarious
PATE wrongviews J. gaha(fromGrh) +ika,der.
‘ i

Ī f anaĒ ī ā
Anekavihitesukamkhanīyatthānesu issaopātamkhanati—Vin.
Anodissa opātan III. E TAA
Antamakāsi a=—S.
dukkhassa 8ty 908
IV. 202

a ivedhaysargvattati
Anekadhātupativedhāya 'attati ä
RERI su— A. TV.152
loubtful points:Kamks +
115
RUI :
Digs a pitfall withoutanyspecific
76
nāpaeide Putanend
ka to thedu ; I
he dukkha;antam +
—A.11.325 On variousd
arious doubtfulpoints; Kamk EHane de)shapeDeaid dice
aho Peto akāwi
; totherealisation
lt leads s realis:
Saat o0f; aniya,
E fut, pp.+; thana purpose;¢
Gva) a uPaaaa Waer.: K Ä tae +ti,
i OI a HII E I
l multifarious
elements;
an +eka+ W ea, Antamakas Ī
dhatu+pati + Vvadh+a, der: sam Anekasatayaparisaya dhammam PRESS BS Put at ead to deal
OR AI sg.
+Vrt+a+ ti,pres.3%. tagi
deseti—M. 2
II. 122 = =
avaiattho pai tate
> , ‘i Explains the Dhamma to the assembly Anodissa
Ano A : yavada Pp Snevasevati
Ataahua taewa cla —D.<0 : 111.38

i Anekapariyāyenassubhakatharp eyi reel tuudied MA

i ‘ers; REDrg : P
Vin. red
IV.as much as (food) without He keeps
ceeps himself
himselfa II from
away fringes):
the main
UE 4 >» repared a: TAEAE II the ringes);
E E HATE any limit: ; e ANU ini + eva: I
aes ney fn ee = A
Discoursedon impurity,in ga iitation;
āpariia,vadva + (d) + attha; pa
de, PP track (associates only
antani + antani I e
I i

manifold
way:an+eka+pari + Anekasaririkampunnapatipadam
TE E, Tō KEE + She E , panthasePakere
oTe = 88, .1.e:MA
7834;

Ya
a + a, der.; EKKath + etst patipannā
i a —A. I. 168 A adivamānā ananusāsivamānā awn — does2 not come
. 2 to the
1éSociety a e
because
l an sg.
i, pst.3. E :
Committed os :
to a pathof merit,opento Anovadiyamā
E i Ä of‘fear;
fear; Sev
Se +a + ti, pres. 3”.
sg.
a - ; re Vin. I. 44
i oe
Anekapariyāyena Ta
dhammopakāsito many;
oeSanPatipada;pati
o puaa +eka
sol +sarira
ak Ä++Pad
ika,+ta,
der; ' tua
Beingunadvised ssehnctiak
anduni : cipillikam
i e advised:
Vaid -Euhahgypota,pr.
nstructed: Antamaso kunthakip a :
; II.
—S. 21 Pp. :mn+o+ Vadtiya +
CONSEKa ) huna ōāti —Vin.
upādāya Te I. 97 i
Dhammahasbeenexplainedin I Concerning even Ss
inedi p.oan-tanu t'āās t Da-t māna, - ing eventheants; upaHā t
TI 2458. pr. D. i . i
manifold
way;pa+Kag+j +fa,pp. Anekākāravokāram Pe PIE Da +ya, absol.

I Anekapariyāyena
€ iva Vigarahitva—Vin,
; igoa| uve asubhabhavananuyogam
s. V.320;Vin.
ier III. TARA
68 anuyutta— EI 205vivaritva
E III.
Angajatam tuadkōia Waimaka
asane nisid Antamaso kesagg
ae keka piata RAI
daNia.
IE) :
Engaged
inthecultivation
on impurity Ī
Tie
7 K 5
A A I NE TTRE Pao pī
u Having
aving rebuked
rebuked i TA Way,
inmanifold Pane=)
vi+ ; TE way;aneka+akara+
inmanifold Pa Shesaton
as theseat ping
genexposedeer edI sleast,evena
In the least. tip of hair;kesa +
; H
Garh+a+ i+ twā,
i+ tua
absol. ,
vokāra;bhāvanā3 anuyogam;amu "malesek-organ
male se . exposed;
i+ Sad +i. ;pst ggga * maiiam MEA "api
i HIHIRI a ti1 iwā,absol.; ni +Sad +i, pst. Ko
I EI
Anekavihitam TR
iddhividham I
+ Yuj+ta,pp. ad SL
D5 e ,
Wakkawakaka gadduhanamattampi
: —M.
|
|
pāccanubhoti
—, V.282 . .
Anesanam
appatirūpam
āpaiiati—S. thim nīharitvā—Vin. 1.276 II. 127:S.II. 264;A. IV. HE
- E 7 -
:
e ieneac “1 , : ; I Tee n . : Ta EE AHI g
Experiences
manifold
psychic
power: II. 194;A. 11,27 ns d boweltwisting;
ni(s) Evensuchalittle timeasmilking
a +reeka+vi
eb+Dha*ti 1+ta,pp.; (He) resortsto improperand
sats I Hawing re i Hay bowe
avingremoved sdbsol aren
Aa. cow; ga= + Duh+A ana, der :
or. + matia
patii amu3-Bhū3--
y+ a +i,, pres,374. unwarranted activities:an +es (from THEe di tia ad, K €

So
y "5

Is) ana, der; a + Patirūpa; a + Pad +

3 ya ttti, pres.34.sg. Antagan ) ie HANG gi pagevamahattari
amas tada — Vin. darika,
ahujatapi IIL. 1
Anekavihitani
adhivuttipadani patipavesetva
ngi — e B 'ā PETI
: vinivethetvā
im taio antāni
antān In theleast,
Antamaso agirl borneven
I. onthat
me
bhivadanti
abhi i- M. II. 228 Anokāsakatambhikkhum paāh ; Causing teremove
'ausing to I INE,
the bowe :: day,howTATA.
muchmorethegrc
E A p
hecdewarup: i
(Th€y)assert
e multifarious
ari doctrinal
) Pucchanti 3 IV. 344
—Vin. Apa andtoput
t theintestine
the TI back(in
Ta the tam(tad)+ahu+Jan+ta++a, pp.
yp.+ ie
ints;
AREadhi+Ae
vutti (from
Vae
(fromVac)
+ "
(They) A,
ask questions
froma bhikkhu stomach);
mna I vi +ni +ooVist
[spare +e t twā,
pakatata o pageva, indkkimahā
api; ene i (f(from i |
ie 0 ON Vad + a MU,pres,374. whohasnotbeengivena chance RAE Ma I mahanta)+ tara +ī, der:
E : ‘ ä St Ivā, caus. absol.
(withouttakinghis permission);
 Antamaso Au
tara
Antara Antara

Antamaso
tamkhanikāyapi
—Vin. HI. Antaragharampavitthaya hatthato
139 =Vin1V.176 Dhr +ta, pp.; uddhata = ubbhata Antarapi dhayati —Vin. IV. 54
Evenfora womanhiredforthetime And also disappears;veryrarely the
Fromthehandof(a nun) who has
being;muhuttika
is anothernamefor Antara kalakato —A. II. 48 term antaradhayatiis split into two
enteredintoa house;pa + Vis +ta,
tamkhanika Diedon the half way; antard,indcl. parts; antara +api; Dha +ya + ti,
pp pres. 3”. sg.
Antan i ak: upādāya
h 8asotinasalākam aday: — Antaragharampavisanto —M. HI Antaragamam gacchati —Vin. IV.
Vin.I. 96 137 Mi 166 Antaramaggato nivattapeti —Vin.
Concerning
evena matofgrass,in the On theway goesto a village; antara, IV. 160
Enteringinto : e: ā
least E a house:antara + indel. +gamam Makes it turnbackfrom the
ghara;pa +Vi§ +a +nta, DID.
half way; ni + Vrt +dpe + ti, caus.
Antamaso tiraechānagatāyapi —Vin. Antara ca Ukkattham antara ca pres. 3”. sg.
Antaragharenisinno samano —M.
1.96;ITT,22 Setavyam—A. II. 37
II. 138
Evenwitha female animal,in theleast In betweenUkkatthaandSetavya Antara magge kantare sambhavesi
Beingseatedindoors:ni +Sad + ta,
—Vin. I. 243
Antamaso Dp.”As
Pp.; As + manc pr.p.
+mana, 8
Antara ca Gayam antara ca Bodhim Met him in a deserton theway;
pattapariyapannamattampi —D.II. —M. I. 170;Vin. 1.8 sam+Bhi +e +s +i, caus.pst.3”.
80;M. 1.322;II. 251 Antaradhayassu
sacevisahasi—M.I.
InbetweenGayaandBodhi;antarā, Sg.
7

In theleast,eventhatmuchwhichis 330
indcl. used beforetwo acc. nouns to
contained
Te a in i thebowl;1;paripari
+ @
+@+Pad Disappear,
ya+ssu, if you can;antara
imper.2". +Dha
sg. vi + Sah +a+ give the meaning of between Antarāva kālakato —S. I. 62
Died righton themidway;antara+
* Si,pres.2". sg
Antara caMadhuram antara ca eva;kalam+kata,pp.
Antamaso Veranjam —A. II. 57
Reta ämattampi
bilaranissakkan i —D, II. Antarantara
kathaopātenti
—M. II.
In betweenMadhuraandVerahiā Antara vassamna pabbajetabbam-
122;Vin. I, 46. na opātetabbā
Vin. I. 153
In theleast,thatmuch They interrupt
theconversation
(ofopening), Antara ca Rajagaham antara ca One shouldnot makeanother
through whichacatc intermittently;
antara +ahntarā,
ancreepout; Nalandam—
D. I. 1;S. Il. 220 renounce (the family life) inside the
antamaso,indel,- indel.:@(ava) +Pat +¢
ni t Svask+ang, 2 +nti, caus. In betweenRāiagahaandNalanda rainy season;pa + Vraj +e + tabba,
der, +mattam + Pres.3”. pl.
api caus. fut. pp.
Antarā ea velam antarā ca
Antamaso mala AntaramPaccupādi—
S. V. 147
8upaparikkhittāpi
- SlippedInto;pati +u (upa?)+Pad+ agyāgāram—A. V. 234 Antara vosanamapadi —Vin. I. 203
A. V. 283
In betweenthesandheapandthefire- (He) stoppedthejourney halfway; vi +
a As least,theonecovered
w 1,pst.3°,sg.
house; vālikarāsissa ca agyāgārassa o +Sa + ana,der.; @+ Pad + i, pst.
mala+. ith a
clusterof garlands;
Vee guna+ Z ca antare,Cy. V. 73> 2rä y
Part+ Ksin+tg,
Pp. Antaravasako
temiyati—Vin. IV.
TAHI Sg.

230 i RI
Antamaso
suifiaes
IA Sunhagareabhiramarc.:
gareabhirama īti The
Bhi innerrobeis made
wet; Tim Antara ca Savatthim antara ca Antara satthinam karitya —Vin. LL.
madewet:7;
Sāketam—
M. I. 149;S. IV. 374 161
+ īya -k ti, , y aa KĪ

Atleast
theidea,
e 314, RI In betweenSāvatthiandSāketa Keeping it betweenthethighs
insolitude'ea,I take
e",suhh: delight
ī 2
+Ram+ ae " dgāra;abhi Antarā Antarāparinibbāyīhoti—A. IV. 72 Antara satthinam namguttham
a+ mi,pres,pusg : ntaraubbhatamhoti—Vin. IHI
, 96 E a : Hebecomes onewhoentersinto anupakkhipitvā —A. II. 245
Removed
inthemiddle;u(t)+Hr or parinibbana
onthehalfway;pari +ni Keepingthetailin between
thighs;
+Va+(y) +7,der. anu +pa + Ksip + i +tvd,absol.
82
83
 Antarayam
Antevasabhisekeng
| Antevasikam Andhandham
Antarāyamakāsi—Vin, IV. 283
Antimadeham
dhareti—A, IL. 18
Didharm;a +Kr+@+5 +i, double abhi + Sic +a, der.; abhi + Sic + ta, +ta,pp.; Pat +e +ti, caus.pres. 3”.
Holdsthelastbody; Dhr +e +4
pst.3. sg. PP. SQ.
caus.pres, 3". sg.

Antarayaya
sambhavanti
—M. I] Antevāsikam sarabhānakam Anto pannayissati—Vin. I. 270
262
Antimavatthum
ajjhapannako
bhikkhum aiihesissati —Vin. II. 300 The endwill appear;pa +Jad +ya +i
Originateforharm:
sam+Bhūta 3 patiiānāti —Vin. I. 121
Willcallupona pupilbhikkhuwhoisa +ssati,fut. 3. sg.
nti,pres.3. pl, (He)admitsthathe hascommittedthe
reciterwith intonation;adhi + es
last(worst)offence.i.e.Defeat:adhi |
(fromIs) +i +ssati,fut. 3. sg. Antopi antepurerakkha
Antarayikodhammovutto +« +Pad +ta,pp.+ ka; pati +Jan +
susamvihita bahipi antepure
Bhagavatā—Vin, 1.103 na +ti,pres.3". so |
Antevasika katthaharaka manavaka arakkha susamvihita —Vin. I. 184
Ithasbeen
explained
bythe —S.IV. 119 Well organisedwas thesecuritywithin
BlessedOneasadangerous
thing,Vac Antepuradvare
Youngstudentswho arecarryingfire- theinnercityandoutsidetheinner
T Ia, pp. : atthakaranapamukhe —D. HI. 63
wood;ante + Vas + ika, der.; kattha city; anto + api; ante (antah) + pura;
Atthegateofthe innertown,justin
+ Hr + aka, der.; mānava + ka, der. su +sam + vi +Dha + i + ta,pp.;
ot āntaradhāpeti
—s, vV50 frontofthe court;ante. Māgadhī
bahi, indel. + api
Makesitdisappearonthehalfway; Jorm of antah in Skt.
Antokotthagarika ime samana
2 a +
aniara . (0)+eva;antara
(y +Dhaa +
sakyaputtiyā
—Vin. III. 251 Antomano Iinamanodukkhi
ape* ti,caus.
pres,3ré Antepuram
netyg—Vin. I. 269 do
=
Sg. Theserecluses,sonsof theSakyan, dummanopajjhayasi—Vin. III. 19
Having brought (him) to the inner-city,
arehavingstorehousesinside; You are(now) pensive,hiding maana
RAA,
Antarena y KE. le. Harem: Ni +a+ vd, absol.
Sarr
yee
at :

kotthāgāra + ika, der.; Sakya + everything

inmind,beingsadand
aa aM#salnam
—D.
ti, putta + iva, der. unhappy;Li + ta,pp.+ mano;dukkha
In theinnerspac ) oo paccaniyyāsi
—D. II, 22
+f, der; pa +jha (fromDhyai) +ya
trees Space
ofthe twinSala arriedhim backto theinnercity;
Antogatehi indriyehi abahigatena +si, pres. 27. sg.

aa
Patt + a+ ni+ Ya + s ase.
1%

3" : so +f, ,pst. manasena—A. IV. 87

Antalikkha
dhar.
a tanti
- With the facultiesshrunkbackand Antovassamcarikam caranti —Vin.
199;
Vin,II, 238 RINA
Torre
: I i Pour down from th
(ofrain) themindnotgoneout;anto+Gam+ IV. 296
Antepurassasamanta—Vin. L.345 (They) go on tour inside(during)the
Mosphere;
pg +Pat+a+ E ta,pp.; a + bahi +gata; manas+a,
Inthenej
theneighbourhood
ofthe inner-city
3”.pl, nti,pres, der, rainyseason;
Car -- ika,der:

Antepure upaca
B II. 190pacārakmahāmattā-
Vin. mattā Antochārattampaecuddharati - Anto vuttham antopakkam sāmam
Vin. III. 264 pakkam —Vin. I. 211
Thechief ministers
Sterswho wereon du Carriesit backwithintheperiodof sik Dwelt inside,cooked inside,cooked
at the harem; i
ae +aka,der.
“mM;
upa+Car nights;cha+ratta;pati +u(t)+Hr byhimself;Vas+ta,pp.;Pac +ta,
or Dhr +a +ti,pres.3. sg. pp.:sāmam,indci.
Antepurelikhito hoti —Vin. 1. 75 I
Gazetted
jn theinner-city: Likh
ia, pp. y¥;Likh +
+ii+ Antoiālikatā—
D. I. 45 Antosīmāya uposatham karonti -
Thisworldis finite Broughtinsidethe
net; j@la+kata Vin. 1.340
Parivatume canbe and bounded: (They)performUposatha
ceremony
Antevāsābhise
Parivartman in Sktcomparedwith kena abhisitta —D. II. Antotiyoianethitobahitiyoianam insidetheboundary;Kr +0 + nti,
152
ground,i.e,a hauaMeaning a road pāteti—Vin. III. 234 pres.3™.pl.
dary SprinkledWiththe
sprinklingof Standing
insidetheeyoianashemakes
Studentship;
ante
vasa,livinginside; itdropoutsidethreeyojanas;
Stha+i Andhandhamviya ihāyati —M. IHI.

85
 Andhaveniparamparasamsattā
Anvesam Apannakam
151 Anvadevakusala dhamma —
A, Lil
It burnsas
if givingadimlight; Tathagatadependson this;anu +es Apacito gahatthananiceva
Subsequently
thewholesome
things
andham+andham+viva; viva, (fromIs) +nta,prp., nom. sg., it pabbajitananica—Vin. IL. 89
indcl.;ihā(fromKsi) +ya +ti pres. doesnot match with theplural Honouredby thehouseholdersandthe
Anvadevaraja Mahāsudassano—D,
34.$a, subject,Cy. gives theplural renounced;
apa +Ci +ta,pp.;gen.
II. 173
meaning when it says anvesanti for instr.
ThekingMahāsudassana
(went)behind
Andhaveniparamparasamsatta —D. anvesantā,gavesantā,II. 117;
1.239 na +adhi +gaccha +nti, pres. 3” Apaccuddharakam paribhufijeyya -
Anvaddhamasamuddesam
Clingedtoa lineof theblind;andha+ pl.: ni +Sri +ta,pp.; theword Vin. IV. 121
āgacchati—A. I. 230
Tathāgatais used here in the
Recitalcomesfortnightly
Sahi Tia, Pp. sense of'a liberated one pati +u(t) +Dhror Hr +aka,der.;
Ānv; amās: .. i
(vimuttacitta);Tathāgatassātiettha pari +Bhu(njj +eyya,opt. 3”. sg.
a vaddhamasam samgheosaranti
Andhoacakkhuko—M. II. 202 satto‘pi Tathagatotiadhippeto,
Theonewhoisblindandhasnoeyes
pātimokkhuddesāya —M. Ii. 8
uttamapuggalokhindsavo‘pi; Apatinnaya karonti— Vin. II. 83
Fortnightlytheycome to theassembly
tosee(theonewhocannotunderstand
of theSamgha fortherecitalof
Cy.IL 117 Carry out (formalacts)withouthaving
thereality) acknowledgement; a +pati +Jia +
Patimokkha;
pāti I .
anu +addha + masa;o
Apakassevakāyam apakasseva ya, absol.; Kr +o +nti, pres. 3. pl.
ROHE panampikhajiampi * Sr +a +nti,pres.34 pl; ——
—O-I
cittam —5. II. 198
hoiiampi
leyyampi i Patimokkha+uddesa:u(t) + Drs
""EIIDIpeyyampi—, Draggingthebodyrightaway, Apatipuccha katam —Vin. II. 3
V.216 Te. (dis) + a, der. TS-TTR
Meri...
throwing
themindrightaway:
Food,drink,eatable.enioyable and
apa t Krs t ya, absol. t eva o
thingstobesippedanddrunk;Khad+ Anvadhikampi
aropetum—Vin. I. =a

}a, it. Pp.; Bhuj+ya, fur.Pp; Lih + 297 Apakkam paripacenti —D. II. 332
PP.

ya,fut.pp.;Pr +Ya,fut.pp. 0 offerevenanadditionalpieceof

Maketheunripemature;a +Pac +fa, Apannakatam patipadampatipanno
cloth;agantukapatam
datum,Cy.
—A. I. 113;II. 76
Anvakkharam
nāma
r 1129;
20-
anu+adhikam+api;I @+Ruh
q ) I
ūpam TEI, The onewho hasenteredinto
aniccanti vuccam Te + tum, caus. inf.
äno runti opāteti - thedirect(non-dual)path;
Vin. IV. 15
Apagata ime simanina, apagataime apannakatampatipadanti
Everysyllablemeans thatw Anvavattesybrahmanagahapatikesu
brahmanna—Vin. ITI. 43 aviruddhapatipadam,
recitationjsbeing made henthe —M. IHI. 116
as “form is These(people)havegoneawayfrom ekamsapatipadam...natakkagāhena
E A,
impe: ent”(rūpam
(rū; āniccam), the I henbrahmins
W > 2 ;
andhouseholders
HU ē pā isdropped (onlyrumjs recluseship,
these(people)havegone va nayagahenava, Cy. II. 181-2;
(or brahminhouse
(him); holders)approached awayfrom brahmanhood
(theyhave apannaka + ta, der.
nounced);
anu+akkhara:Vac+ davāvattantīti
anuāvattanti,
ue
ya 1.7 o + P,at+ e+
; + mana,Ddss.py. I lostthemeaning
of recluseship
and
upāsamkamanti,
Cy. IV 165
CaUs.
pres,374sg ; anu Ttā brahmanhood);apa + Gam +ta,pp.; Apannakataya mayham—S. IV. 351
I t+ ta,pp.; brahmana+
+}. Vr 4 Ta I

samana +ya, der; brahman +ya, It is for my incontrovertibility,

gahapatikao) brāhmanagahapatika;
a "I. A. i :

der. apannakatāyaanaparādhatāva,Cy.
gahapati3-ka der.
Ill. 110

Lackof Morals : Anvesamnādhigaee

follow:
"ava 4Shame andfear
(d) $ eva,(Ske, nissitamTatha
hanti, idam 175;Vin. III. 3 Apannakam te ito bhavissati —M.
Batassaviīiānanti - VenerableGotamais not bold enough III. 146
GNVag-eva)
tam M. I. 140
MMM While Searchin
This will notbe a questionfor
E, theydo not find away from thewomb; a +pagabbha you; apannakantiavirādhitam, Cy.
thattheConsciousness of the
or apa +gabbha IV. 200
 Apannakam Aparikkhina
Aparighamsantena Aparisuddha
Apannakam
vāsotāpanno
—A. V.
Venerables,
Paner:
have2youreceived
sc .
robe?; ī

85 kii
api,usedhereas interr.p.+ayyahi: a+ Sru +a, der.; a+ pari +Ksi+ āi pamānakaranamrāgādīnam
Ora directstream-entrant;
sora+@+ a, der. abhāvenaappamānavihārīnāma,
Labh +ta,pp.
Pad+ta,pp. Cy. II. 361; a t paritta; maha +
Apayyoevarūpam itthim Aparighamsantenaasamghattantena atta; a +pamdana + vihara + ī,
Apannakam samaiiiameva seyyo- kavatapittham niharitva —Vin. I. 47 der
passeyyatha?—Vin. IV. 132
M. IL. 74 Havingtakenout withoutrubbing
Venerable,did you seea womanof
Non-conflictingrecluseship
is indeed andstrikingagainstthedoor and Aparipūram hoti tenamgena—D.
thissort?;api +ayyo;passa+
eyvatha,opt. 24. pl., used here in the thedoor-post;a +pari +Ghrs + III. 123
Samana su ya, der. T eya
PSt.sense a +nta,pr.p.; a +sam +ghatta + Incompletein thatrespect;a +pari +
nta,pr.p.; kavata +pittha; ni(s) puram: Pr + a, der.; tena + amgena
r
Apannakomaniuddhamkhitto—4
. AparajjugatayaAsalhiya —Vint Hr - i 1. (vd, absol.
V. 296
137;II. 167 Aparimitapānabhoianā honti —A. II.
Undisputed
gemthrownintothe
OnedayafterthefullmoonofAsalhi Aparighamsantena dhovitvā 249
sky:apannako
manītisamantato
(July); aparajju +gata patisāmetabbam —Vin. I. 46 Theyhavenolimitindrinkingand
caturasso
pāsako,Cy. V. 77-
Shouldbe putbackat therightplace, eating;a +pari +Mi + ta,pp. +pana
uddham,indcl.:Ksip +ta, a
Aparantakappika afterwashingit withoutrubbingtoo + bhojana

aparantanuditthino
—M. I, 228 hard;pati +Sam+e +tabba,caus.
Apadamvadhitvā—A, IV. 434
Thosewhospeculateandhold views fut.pp. Apariyaputam idam varam —Vin .
Havingkilledtotally;anadam
on theotherend(future);apara + IV. 143
vadhitvatinippadam niravasesam
Aparinatabhoji—A. III. 145 This is better,uncommittedto
vadhitvā,
Cy.
IV.202 ey anita+kappa +ika, der.
The onewho eatsunripethings;a + memory;
a +pari +Ap +(u)
Aparantam
ārabbha—M. II. 228 pari +Nam + ta, pp + Bhuj +i, der. T fa, pp.
Apadanenāsampāyati —M.I 96
Heis unabletoanswerthe I Concerningtheotherend:ārahbha,
questions
raisedonhisbehaviour: indcl. Aparinnatam tassati vadami —M. Aparisavacaro samanoGotamo,
apadanetiattanocariyāya; : iu nālam sallāpāya —D. III. 53
Sampayatiti... I declarethatit hasnot beenfully The recluseGotamadoesnot move
Sampadetva Aparantam
vāādhāveyyātha?
—M.
kathe,
Tu nasakkoti,Cy.Il. 66; I.265 : understoodby him; a +pari +Jfid + in crowds,he is not fitly fora
Sam+pa +&+ Yq+ti,pres 0 TWould you run towards the future?:
f Tv =) ta,pp.; Vad +a +mi,pres. 1%.sg. conversation;a +parisd +avacara;
34 3 a
at Dhan
av + eyyatha,
ew opt. 2”. pl, na +alam, indcl.; sam +Lap + a,
Aparitassampaccattam
yeva der.

Apanidheyyavaa ‘Parappaccaya
Āpar: aceavā
nanamevettha
BS
hoti- parinibbāyati —M. III. 244
Panidhapeyya
ya The one,who is not trembling. Aparisuddhakayasamacaro
äntamasohāsā S.IL.79
123 pekkhopi
—
Vin, iv. perfectly
blowsoutfromwithin; aparisuddhavacisamacaro
TOI depending onanother
WouldhideOrcause t
ereIsknowledge
are to L tle
onthismatter; aparitassam,prp.; pati + attam + aparisuddhajivo —Vin. I 171
fun 2 sacf: ; to hide even for
atleast;Da+ ni +Dha+evya 3 Para+
ar a Paccaya;hānam -- eva eva;pari +ni +Va +ya +ti, pres. Uncleanphysicalbehaviour,
ME ser
Opt.
, 3".- 5.)
so. antamaso,
indcl.:hāsa 4 +ettha da as uncleanverbalbehaviourand
apekkho+ api NEI unclean
wayof living;a +pari +
nun
Aparikkhina vaasava
ya= parikkhayam Aparittomahattāappamānavihārī
- Sudh +ta, pp.; aparisuddha +
Apayyāhi
eīva Sacchanti—A. V. 343 A. 1.249 ajiva
IV.245 “am
laddham?
—Vin, unexhaustedinfluxesare A personwho is not inferior,a
exhausted: +Parii +Ksi +ta,pp,
austed:q@ greatpersonalityandabiding Aparisuddha Ananda parisa —Vin.
Withoutlimitations;so (khindsavo) Il. 236
Aparisesam Apassam Apassenaphalakam Api

Ananda,
assembly
isnotclean;
pari+ teacher:no, gen. for instr: II. 172 Apāyagamanīyorāgo —A. III. 438
Sudh+ta,pp. The attractionleadingto purgatory;
Apalokematam —Vin. III. 11 apaya+Gam +aniya,fut. pp.
Aparisesamniruiihati—S. V. Wetakeleaveof you; apa + Lok +e+ eyya,opt.3”. sg.;passa+mi,pres.
213 ma,pres. 1".pl. I", sg, + iti Apayamukhani pidaheyya—A. IV.
Ceasestoexistwithoutremainder 284
Apavadatevavannam, Apassenaphalakamhetthato Wouldclosedowntheoutlets;apa+
Aparisesāniruiihanti—D. I. 215; apavadateva mante,apavadateva bhūmim vilikhati, uparito bhittim aya +mukha;api +Dha +eyya,opt.
M.I, 110;TL.263;A. II. 165 iātim—D. I. 22 hanti—Vin. II. 175 Fee
Cease toexistwithoutremainder;
a+ Indeedhereproaches theclass. The recliningboard,from the
pari +Sis+a,der.; ni +Rudh+ya reproaches
thescripturesand bottom,scratches thefloor,from Apayam duggatim vinipatam
+nti,pass.
pres.3”.pl. reproaches
thebirth;apa+ Vad+ thetop,damages thewall;Aetthato, nirayam —D. I. 107; M. 1.73; S. 1.
a+ti, pres.3". sg.+eva,emph.p. uparito,adv.;vi + Likh +a +ti, 94,IV. 240
Aparihānadhammo hoti—A. IHI.441
pres. 3”. sg.; Han + ti, pres. The purgatorywhich is devoidof
(Stream
entrant)
is notliableto fall Apaviddham
deti—A. HI. 171 . Sg.
rad "o
happiness,
a stateof miseryandinto
back Givesawaytrash;apa +Vvadh whichbeingsaredropped; apa+aya;
+fa,pp.; Da +e + ti, pres. Apatite kuse —Vin. 1. 299 du +gati; vit ni + Pat + a, der.; ni
Aparihīnokālamkurumāno
- A. II. 2rā
J.5 $2.
oF
Whenthe lot is not causedto be (r) + aya
126
drawn;a +Pat +e + i + ta,caus.pp.
Dyingwithoutlosing( thatstate);
q+
Apavyāmato
karitvā—
S. I. 226 Apayam duggatim vinipatam
pari +Ha +ta,pp.;Kr +mana,pr.p.
Havingtreated(them) with disrespect; Apatheyyenagantumna sukaram - samsāram nātivattati —5. II. 92
abyāmato
karitvā,Cy.I. 346;this Vin. I. 244 Does notoverpassthecycle of birth
Aparenasamayena —D, I, 60;M. I.
seemsto be the opp. of padakkhinant It is noteasytogowithoutprovision anddeathwhich is miserable,unhappy
20,II. 120;S. I, 82;II. 233
katvā for thejourney; a +patha + eyya, andinto which beingsaredropped;
At another
time:instr.forloc.
der.;Gam +tum,inf. sam+Sr +a, der.;na +ati+ Vrt+a
Apalapayam bhikkhave
parisa,
Apasakkatāvabhagini—Vin. IV. +fi, pres. 3". sg.
nippalapayam bhikkhave parisa -
177 Apapakam te maranam apapika te
M.IHI.80 A Sister,
justmoveaway;apa+Svask+ kālakiriyā—S. IHI. 122 Apara paramgamanaya
—M. I. 134;
Bhikkhus,thisassembly
ofdisciples a, imper.2”. sg; tava, indcl. Your deathwill not be bad,yourdeath S. IV. 174;A. V.4
1Snotessenceless.
notunfertile; will notbe bad To go from this shoreto theother
4*oe ae +ayam;
palāpā ni; +palāpā+ Apasādiyamānā
rodanti—Vin.I. 79 shore(to cross the river)
ayam (They),beingrefused,
cry;apa+Sad Apāpapurekkhāro brahmanna
+e +iva +mana,caus,pass.Pp: paiāya—D. I. 115 Apāvuso amhākam satthāram
Apalokitā
vāanapalokita
va—4.ry,
Rud + a + nti, pres. 3™.pl. He is not ofevil intentiontowards iānāsi?—D. II. 162;Vin. II. 284
181 Friend,do you know our teacher?; api
Whetherconsult
edor not: ap; z
Apasadetabbam
maiifiimha
—D.1.95 (Skt.puras>puro >pure) +kara; -- āvuso; api .interr.p.: āvuso, indci.
titia, pp. os a +Lok Wethoughtthat(he) shouldbe made brahman +ya, der. usedto address in a polite and
displeased;apa +Sad +e +tabba,
Apalokito
nosattha
~S.111,6 Caus.
fut.pp.;a+ Man +ya +i + ApapuranamAdaya—Vin. II. 119 nāa + SI,
.ī oe
pres. pnd
2°. e
Sg.
WehaveConsulted
theteacher
i.e,we mha,pst, pl. Havingtakenthekey(opener);
apa+
vegotthepermission
fromthe a + Vr + ana, meta.der.; G + Da + Api ca evam vadami —D. I. 212
ya, absol. And yet I saythus,api, ca, indel.;
 4

Api Api A pi Api

Vad+a +mi,pres.I". sg. Api camedhammanvayo vidito—D, Api nu Tathagato tam vacam dubbhāsitam āiāneyyātha —D. I. 3
IHI.100 bhaseyyaya sa vaca dvayagamini? Would you understandwhether
Api cateevamassa
—M. I. 511 Andyetthewayof theDhamma has —D.IHI.14 thespeechof othersis godor bad?;
Nevertheless,
thisideawouldcometo beenrealised
byme;dhamma+ WouldtheTathāgataspeakthatword su + Bhds +i + ta,pp.; du +
you;evam+assa:As +ya (Skt.vāi), anvaya;anu +aya (from 1); Vid + whichis of doublemeaning Bhāsita; ā t Jan + na +eyyatha,
opt.3. sg. i +fa,pp. (ambiguous) ? ; alika-tuccha- opt. 2. pl.
nipphala- vācāya etamadhivacanam,
Api catyahamvyākarissāmi—S. IV. Api cahamāyasmatonemisaddena Cy.825; Bhās-- eyva,opt.3'".sg. Api nu tumhehi dittham va sutam
295,307 tamhāsamādhimhāvutthito —
D. HI. va?—A.IIT. 299
AndyetI will explaintoyou;te + 271 Api nu tam upādāya evam ditthi Haveyou seenor heard?;Drs + ta,
aham;vi +@+Kr +i +sséimi, fut. AndyetI havegot up from that uppaiieyya?—5. III. 204 DD.; Sru + ta, pp.
1".sg. Samādhiwith therim-soundof your Wouldtherearise,concerningthat,a
honour's
chariot;api +ca +aham;vi wrongview asthis ? ; upa T ā +Da + Api nu te dhamma etarahi
Api ca mamapisunātha—M. I. +u(t)+Stha+ i+ ta,pp. ya, absol.; u(t) +Pad +ya +eyya, pavattino? —A. 1.279
219 opt.3. sg. Are thosethingsekistingat present?;
Nevertheless,
listentomywordstoo;
Api eāhambhavantānamvacanena pa+ Vrt +i, der.
mama+api; Sru +na +tha,imper.
Ind
gamissāmi—M. II. 148 Api nu tam patabbam yam pivitva
20k
AndyetI will goatyourhonours' visanni assa?—Vin. IV. 110 Api nu te vina saravati va hoti
request;Gam+ i +ssami,fut. 1".sg. Shouldit bedrunk,bydrinkingwhich kammannava? —Vin. I. 182
Api ca mayamtamsarāmakinnu
onewould becomeunconscious?;Pā Is your lutetunedor readyfor play ? ;
kho mahāsamano nagacchatiti
-
Api nu ayyotumhehi dittham +tabba,
fut.pp.; Pador Pi +i t tvā, sara + vanta + t; kamma(n) + ya,
Vin. I. 28
vasutamvasakkhimthapayitva absol.; vi ktsahhā t ī, der.; As t yā der.-ā
Nevertheless,
wethought of you,why
dānamdiyyamānam?
- Vin. IV. (Skt.yat),opt. 3”. sg. ..
didn’tthegreatrecluse
come;SmrA
a +ma,pres.1".sg.usedin thepst
224 Api nu tvam evamvadeyyasi—D. I. nr

Sense;kim + nu, intery.D.;

Haveyou seenor heard,sirs, thatan Api nu tassatasmimbhattepuna 60
"na t almsisbeinggiven,keepinganeye-
4gacchati+ iti,pres.'erb used in the bhottukamyatā assa?—M. II. 255 Wouldyousaylikethis? ; Vad+
Pst.sense witness?; api, nu, intery. D.: ayyo is Wouldtherebeanappetiteagainfor eyyasi,opt.2". sg.
usedherein theplural sense;Drs+ himtoeatthatfood?;puna,indcl.;
Api eamayāeirapattam arahattam ta,pp.; Sru + ta,pp.; Stha + Gpaya+ Bhuj +tum,inf. + Kam +ya + td, Api nu so labhetha brahmanesu
—Vin. II. 304 l '* tvd,caus,absol.;Da +iva + der. āsanamva udakam va —D. I. 97
Nevertheless,
Arahanthood
hasbeen māna,pass.pr.p, Wouldhereceivea seator waterin
attained
byme,a longtimeago;ciram Api nu tāhamevamavacam—D.IHI. thecommunityof brahmins?;Labh +
v pa +Ap + ta,pp. Api nukuledanamdiyati?—A. IV. 3 etha,opt.mid.3. sg.
392 Did | tell you thus?; te +aham;a +
Apicame ā Isalms
given
inthefamily;
Da +tva+ Vac+am,pst. I". sg. Api pana tumhe samanassa
HD kaera
orea
na Ml,Pass.pres,3". sg, Ānandassakiāci adattha?—Vin. II.
And yet,in (hiscontext,
the Api nu tumhakamevamassa?
—
S. 291
differencebetween individuals
has Api nueamayamgarunissayam IHI. 34 Didyougiveanything totherecluse
been understood byme;me+ettha 8anhāma-—
Vin. II. 303 Would
thisideaoccurtoyou?;evam+ Ananda;
a +Dé +ttha,pst.2". pl.
ettha,indel,1Vl + matta+ a+ Even
then
weliveunder
theteacher, assa,opt.3. sg.
ta, der. don’t
we?; Grh+na +ma,meta, Api panujjamanenapi
—M. I. 108
pres, I". pl. Api nu tumheparesamsubhāsita- Evenbytheonewhois beingchased

92
 Api
out;pa +Nud +ya +mdanena,
Pass.
Dr.p.t api
Api panuiiamānopi —A. IV. 32
Evenif heis beingchasedout
Api pindamalattha?
—5. I, 114
Didyoureceivefood?;pindam+a +
Labh+ttha;pst,2" pl.
Api bhanteaddasa—D. II. 130
Venerable
sir,didyousee?:@+Drg +
ā,pst.2™.sg.
Api bhanteevarūpamdārakam
passeyyatha —Vin. I. 76 ; Appakataniiuno —Vin. IV, 112
Venerable sir,didyouseea boy
of this kind;passa+evyatha,opt.
ndpl. usedin
E thepst.sense
2",
Api bhantepindolabbhati?—Vin.
MEI
Venerable
sir.is foodavailable?
: Aputtakatāyapatipannosamano
Labh--ya2.ti,Pass.pres,3".sg.
Api bhanteBhagavāekamitthim
Passeyya —Vin. I, 23
Venerablesir,didtheBlessedOnesee
4 Woman; passa+eyya,opt.3". sq,
usedin thepst.sense . Propertywith
Api mebhothavikampasseyyāsi? -
Vin. IV. 161 i Apubbam acarimam —D. I. 185;II.
Sir,didyouseemypurse?:
Passeyyasi,opt,2nd5., uSedin the
pst Sense
Api mematarama
ddasatha?
—M.
11.108
Did youseemymother?;
api
= i: a + Dr§f +a+tha,pst.
nlerr.p; Hā
2™.pl.
Apehayye Apehi Appanfinattam
Api meyyaevamhoti—Vin, IHI,215 +ayye; apa +e (from 1) +hi, imper, paragamino —A. V. 232
Sir,I havethisidea;me +ayya 24, sg,
Among humanbeingsvery rareare
thosewho go to theother shore;appa
Apuccandatayasamapanno—M. I,
Apehi tvam, vinassa,ma tvam +ka, der.;para + Gam +i, der.
357 addasam —A. II. 182
Theonewhohasgainedeligibility;
Appaka te satta ye manussesucuta
apūtit andatā;sam --ā +Pad + ta,
vi +nassa,imper.2™.sg.; a + Drsg+ manussesupaccajayanti—A. I. 37
pp.
am,pst. mid. 1", sg. Very few arethosebeingswho,
departedfrom thehuman(world), are
Apuiiiampasavati—D.
IL. 81.;S. L
Apehi, mā me purato atthāsi - re-bornamonghumanbeings;Cyu +
114,pasavi
D. II. 138 ta,pp.; pati +@+Jan +ya + niti,
Producesdemerit;par Su+artiti
Go away,don’t standin frontof me:@ pres.3™.pl.
pres,3". sg,
+Sthda+si, imper.2”. sg.
Appakā te sattā ye samvigga yoniso
Apufiiam pasutam—Vin. III. 69
padahanti—A. I. 36
Produced
demerit:
pa +Su +ta,pp.
Thosewho haveno knowledgeof Very rarearethosebeingswho, being
whatwasdoneby theBlessedOne: agitated,strivewisely; sam + Vij + ta,
Aputthopi patukaroti —A. 11.77
yam Bhagavatapakatamyam pp.; pa +Dha + a + nti, pres. 3”. pl.
Evenbeingunaskedhespeaksout;a+
pahhiattamtam najanantiti attho,
Prch1 ta,pp.; patu +karoti
Cy.860;appa1.kata--iā -- ū, Appannattam na pannhapenti,
der. panfattam na samucchindanti,
yathapannatteporane Vajjidhamme
Gotamo— Vin. I, 43
Appakam āyuppamānamparittam samādāyavattanti—D. II. 74
RecluseGotamais on theway to
lahusam—D. Il. 4 (They)donotpromulgate
whathasnot
getting
ridofchildren:a 4putta+ka
beenpromulgated,do notabrogate
T iā, der; pati +Pad 4 fa, pp.
appa +ka, der.;Gyu+pamdna whathas alreadybeenpromulgated,
theystrictly follow theancientlore of
Aputtakam
$āpateyyam
- S. I. 89
p piaanai no heir;sva
a
Appakasirena samudagacchanti- Vajji as it hasbeen promulgated;a +
+pati 4
M. I. 105;A. IV. 366 pa + Jia + ape + ta, caus. pp.; pat
eyya,der,
Come to him with no difficulty; appa Jia + ape + nti, caus.pres. 3”. pl.;
+kasira; sam + u(t) + @ + gaccha + sam+u(t)+Chi(n)d+a +nti,pres.
nti,pres. 3. pl. 3”.pl.; ; sam+@+Dā t ya, absol.;
225;A. 1.28;IV. 146
Simultaneously;
ady, Vrt +a +nti,pres.3. pl.
Appakasirenevapatippassambhanti
As EV 127 Appannattam savakanam
Apetha,kimtumheiānātha—
A, II.
Subsidewith no difficulty; appa + sikkhapadam, anuddittham
78
kasirena + eva; kasira is often patimokkham —Vin. III. 8
Go away,whatdo you know;apa ' e
coupledwith kiccha (Skt.krechra); Forthedisciples,ruleswerenot
(from1) + tha,imper,2". pl.
pati +pa +Sr(m)bh +a +nti, pres. proclaimed
Patimokkha (thecodeof
Apehayye—Vin. IV. 175
ay pl: rules)was not recited(pointedout): a
ANEI ;
enerable,
getoutof;theWay;apehi +pa +Jia +dpe + ta, caus.pp.; an
Appaka te manussesuyejana +u(t) + Drs + ta,pp.
 ~~~
Appannatakena Appativattiyam
Appattam Appamattakepi
ioa
Appannatakena
noparitassati—A. Appativibhattabhogī
hoti
Appattam ca sisam bimbohanam, thetalk;Bhds+ya,fut.pp.
IHI.133 silavantehi
sabrahmacārīhi
bhūmitoca padamuttaetasmim
Heisnotagitatedforthereason of no sadharanabhogi—M. II. 251 antare—Vin. II. 286 Appamattakampibhavamna
fame; appa+Jia +ta,pp.+ka,der:; (He)shares(his gains) with virtuous
Theheadhadnotreached
thepillow, vannemi—A. I. 34
pari + Tras+ya +ti,pres.3™.sg. co-celibates
andenioysthemin feetwere releasedfrom theground,in I donotpraiseeven
atrivial existence;
common;a +pati + vi + Bhaj +ta,
between
this;a +pa +Ap +ta,pp:; vanna t e t mi, denom. pres. I". s'.
Appahūāto
hoti— A. IHI.133 pp.+bhoga:Bhuj +a, der. +i, der.
Muc + ta,pp.
Heisnotwellknown: a +pajifiato
or
Appamattakam kho panetam
appa+nato Appativekkhitvāāsanena Appattam me bhavanaphalam—
A. bhikkhaveoramattakam
nisiditabbam
—Vin. III. 79 IV. 47
Appatikammāpatti—A.
1.21 silamattakamyena puthujjano
Oneshouldnotsitona seatwithout Thefruitofcultivationhasnotyet
Theoffencewhichcannot
be Tathagatassavannam vadamano
reviewing;
a +pati+ava+Tks+i+ beenachievedby me
redressed;
a +pati+kamma+ vedeyya—D. 1.3
ivā, absol.
patti:4 +Pad+ti,der. Bhikkhus,it is in terms
of trivial,
Appattassapattiya anadhigatassa insignificant
andmeremoralitythat
Appattho hoti appakicco subharo adhigamayaasacchikatassa
Appatikutthasamanehibrahmanehi theworldlingwouldspeak,while
susantoso
jivitaparikkharesu—A. saechikiriyāya—M. III. 79;S. I. praisingtheTathagata; pana+etam,
IHI.120 217;A. 1.243; IL. 148;11, 101
Not rejectedbytherecluses, panaindcl.; Vad+a +mana,pr.p.;
Theonewho haslessundertakings, Toreachthestatenotyetreached, to
brahminsandthewise:a +pati + Vad+eyya,opt.3“. sg.
lessworkandis frugal,andcontented attainthestatenotyetattained,
to
Krus +ta,pp.
ga=. withnecessities
of life; appatthoti experience thestatenotyet Appamattakam
khopanetam
appasamārambho,Cy. III. 276; appa experienced;an + adhi + Gam + ta,
Appatikkūle
patikkilasaniai
—s.V. yadidam parassapuggalassa
+Kr (t) +ya,der.;su +bhara pp.; a +sa + aechi + Kr + ta,pp.
295 upaghāto—M. II. 241
Theonewhohasthesenseof Lessimportant
is thehurtingof
Appatarenaganena—Vin. I. 195 Appadakkhinaggāhīanusāsanim
-
repulsiveness
inreference
tothe anotherperson;upa + Ghan + ta,pp.
Witha smallergroup;appa+tara; M. 1.95
non-repulsive;
@+pati +kiila;
thesuffixtara is used with instr. or Onewhomisunderstands
the
Sanna+f, der. Appamattakam kho panetam
abl.forcomparison instruction;
a +pa +dakkhina+Grh yadidam byanjanam—M. II. 240
Appatiladdhaya
pahiāya +i, der. Lessimportant
is thisphrasing;
appa+
patilabhaya
—D.IHI,284 Appatitthitenavinfianena
matta + ka, der.;pana + etam
Tegainwisdomwhich
hasnotbeen parinibbuto—S. I. 122 Appadukkhavihārim- D. I. 162
gained;a +pati +Labh+la.,pp. Withunfikedconciousness,
heentered Theonewhoabideswithnopain Appamattakam kho panetam
intoperfect
extinction;
a +pa +
yadidammayhamvihesa—M. II.
Appativanam
a Padaheyyatha
—4 ME
I tittha+ i +ta,bp.; pari + ni + Vr+ Appapaīicam
papaāeeti
—A. II. 161 241
ta,pp. Makesunnecessary
imagination; Lessimportant
is mytrouble
Youshould
strive
without
shrinking happapaheetabbatthāne papaheam
back;
a +Pati+Vr+ang, der,pa + Appativattiyamkenacimanussa- karoti, anācaritahbammaggam Appamattakavissajjakam
Dha+a + eyyatha,
opt,2n.
pl. bhūtena
paccatthikena
pāninā—A. ācarati, Cy. III. 151;papaiica + e + sammannitum —Vin. II. 177
HI. 150 ti,denom.pres.3". sg. Toagreeupona disposer of trivial
Appativanita
50 padhānasmi
padhānasmim
—A,i. (Thewheel)whichcannotbe turned
things;vi +Srj +ya +ka,der.;sam+
back byanyhostilehuman being;a + Appabhassa bhassapariyantakarino Man +ya + i + tum,inf.
Nonshrinking
backjnStriving pati+ Vrt+iya,der.:pati +atthat —A.III. 138
ika,der. Thosewhotalkalittle andterminate Appamattakepi (tesam)kukkuccam
96
 Appamattakepi Appamādagāravatā Appamādādhigatā Appasaddam

uppailati
—Vin.III. 44 (He)will abidewith diligence,
Appamadadhigata bodhi—A. I. 50 andthegreatthing,given,becomes
Therearisesremorseforthemevenon vi +Hr +ssati,therootvowel
Enlightenment
hasbeenattained greater;Da + ta,pp.
a trivialthing;u(t)+Pad+ya+ ti, becomese; commonlyusedform is
throughmindfulness;
a +pamdda+
pres.3”.sg. viharissati
adhi+Gam+ta,pp. Appam rattiya supanti, bahum

Appamattakepi
pavarenti—Vin. I. iagganti —A. III, 156
Appamanam cetosamadhim upa-
213 Appamadena karaniyanti vadami - In thenighttheysleepa littleandkeep
sampaiia
viharati—A. II. 54,IHI.51
Causetosatisfythemselves
(stop
S. IV. 125 mostlyawake;Svap+a +nti,pres.
Having
attainedboundless
eating)
evenwith
a littlefood;pa+Vr I saythatit shouldbe donewith 3”.pl.;jagg +a +nti,pres.3”.pl;
concentration
of mind,heabides;upa
f et nti,caus.pres.3”.pl. mindfulness;Kr + aniya,fut, pp.+ iti; appam,bahum,adv.
+sam+Pad+ya,absol.
Vad+a +mi,pres.I". sg.
Appamattakosovivadoyadidam Appam vā īātiparivattam pahāya
Appamāpācetovimutti —M. IHI.
ajjhajivevaadhipatimokkhe va—M. Appamado kusalesudhammesu—D. mahantamvā īātiparivattam pahāya
146 III. 272;5. I. 89
II. 245 —D.1.61
Liberation
of mind,unlimited;
a+
Lessimportantisthatdispute
about Heedfulnessin wholesomethings;a + Havingabandoned a smallorbigcircle
pamana;vi + Muc + ti, der.
higherlivelihood
orhighermoral pamāda of relatives;
Adti+pari + Vrt+ta,
code;adhi+djiva PP.
Appamāno ulāroobhāsopātubhavi,
Appamiddho hoti, iāgariyam
atikkammadevānamdevānubhāvam
Appamattassa atapinopahitattassa anuyutto—
A. III. 120. Appam vā bahum vā bhāsassu —Vin.
—M.IHI.120
viharato—M. III. 89 He is of less sleepandmorepractice 1.40
Immeasurable
andgreatlightappeared,
Of theonewhoismindful,
energetic in thenight;appa+middha;
iāgara Pleasesayalittle or more;Bhds+a +
Surpassing
themajestyof gods;patu +
andabidingwitha wellfikedmindor + iva, der. ssu,imper.mid.2". sg.
when(he)wasabidingwith
Bhii+a +i,pst,3°4.
$g.;ati +Kram
* ya, absol.;deva + anubhava
mindfulness,
striving
andwithamind AppameyyaTathagata—A. 1.227 Appam va bhiyyo —D. II. 4; 5. I. 108
Wellfixed;gen.abs/,-@+ Tap+i, The Tathagatas
areimmeasurable;
a + Less or more
der.;pa +Dha+i +la,pp. +atta Appamanoularo obhaso loke patu-
pa + Ma +eyya,der.
bhavati
— D. II, 12
Appam vā bhogakkhandhampahāya
Appamattaatapinopahitatta Thesplendour.
immeasurable
and
Appampi vutta samanaabhisajjim mahantamvā bhogakkhandham
viharantā— S. I. 117 great,appearsin theworld:pātu t
kuppimvyapajjimpatitthiyim, pahāya—D. I. 61
(They),abidingwithmindfulness, bhavati;
pātu,indcl.,beforea
kopaīieadosaāica
appaeeayahiea Havinggivenupa smallor big amount
endeavour, andfikedmind I consonantpātu is used, before a
S34+Tap+ pātvākāsim —A. II. 204-5 of wealth;bhoga+khandha;
pa +
t, der; pa +Dha+ vowelpātu or patur is used, e.g.
i+ ta,pp.+atta; Beingsaidevena trivial thingI became Ha +ya, absol.
vit Hr+a+ nla, pr. E. Patvdkasi(patu
+akāsi),pāturahosi
angry,irritated,wrathfulandresistive.
(patu® +ahosi)
I expressed
anger,hatredand Apparajakkho imasmim
Appamattoubhoatthe
adhiganhati displeasure;abhi + Sad +ya + im, dhammavinaye—A. V. 192
—S.1.87 Appamano
samadhisubhāvito—A.
pst.I", sg.;Kup +ya +im,pst. 1®. Theonewhohasnostainsin this
The mindful
attains
bothmeanings IV. 421
Sg.; vi+ a+ Pad +ya + im,pst. I". doctrineanddiscipline;appa+raja(s)
(thisWorldlyandotherworldly);@+ Well cultivated
is concentration
of
Sg.;pati +Sthya+im,pst. I“. sg.; +ka,der.
pa +Mad+ta,pp.;adhj+Grh +na mindonboundless: sy +Bhūteti
patu+akasim,pst. 1".sg.
* Hi,meta,pres,314.
sg. + ta, caus. pp.
Appasaddam parisamviditva
Appam dinnam bahum hoti, bahum upasamkamitabbam mafifieyya
—M.
Appamattovihessati—D. IL. 121 Appamādagāravatā —A. IHI. 330
dinnambahutaram—M. III. 80 1.2
Reverencefor heedfulness
A smallthing,given,becomes
great, Havingunderstood
thatthecrowdis
 Appasadda
Appabadhataiicg Appābādham Appekacce
quiet,hewouldconsiderit worth (They)wouldexpress(their)
visiting(us);Vid+i +twa,absol.: appatamkatanica
lahutthanafica viriyārambhāya samvattissati —M.
displeasure;
a +pasdda;pa +Vid+e
upa+sam+Kram+i +tabba,fut. balafica phasuviharafica —M. I. 124, Eā
* evyum,caus.opt.3”. sg.
pp.; Man+ya +epya,opt.3". sg. 437 That will leadto simplicityof life,
I feellittleaffliction,littlesickness, contentment,slashingof impurities,
Appassada
kamabahudukkha
Appasaddaappakinnaphasu lightnessofthe body, physical easymaintenance
andcommencement
bahūpāyāsāādīnavo ettha bhiyyo-
vihareyyāma
- A. V. 134 strength
andcomfortable
living ofeffort; appa +iccha( from Is) + ta,
M. I. 91
su +bhara (from Bhr) +ta, der; sam
Sensepleasuresgive little enioyment,
wouldabidecomfortably;
appa+kir? Appabadham appatamkam +Vrt +i +ssati,fut. 3. sg.
muchsuffering,
muchtrouble,here
T Ia,pp.:phāsu,adv. lahutthanam balam phasuviharam
theharmsaremany;appa +assada;
puccha—D. II. 72; M. Il. 141 Appicchassayamdhammo —A. IV.
bahu+upayasa;ettha,indel.
Appasaddābhontohontu,mā Ask whetherhe hasno ailment,no 228
bhontosaddamakattha —M. IL. 2 sickness,whetherhe is in good health,
This Dhammais for theone who
Appaharantassapaharati —A. IV.
Sirs,pleasebesilent.makeno noise: strengthandcomfort; appa +abdadha, haslittle wants;appa + icchassa+
Hut(Bhi) +a +ntu,imper.3".pl:
339
appa + atamka,appa meanslittle; ayam
saddam Attackstheonewho is notattacking;
a
RA, +akattha:q + Kr +ttha,pst. Prch-- ya, imper.2". sg.; only the
3”.pl. * pa +Hr +a +nta,pr.p.;pa +Hr+
verbal base is sometimesused to Appiccha santuttha lajjino
4 t ii, pres.3". s¢
give the imperative2". sg. meaning kukkuccaka sikkhakama — Vin. I.
Appasaddoupasamkamitya
—p, | 44
89;M. II. 122 I Appaharitekatoharitamottharati-
Appayo samano ularam jivikam Those who are leadinga simplelife
Havinggonetherewithoutmakine Vin.IV. 205
kappeti —A. IV. 283 andcontented,morally shameful,
noise;
upa--sam+ h That,whichisdoneonnon-green,
Kram ti Lt Beingof less incomehe leadsa conscientiousandanxiousfor training;
absol.
iva,
pervadesthegreen:appa+harita;0
luxuriouslife; appa +aya; As + appa +iccha; sam + Tus +ta,pp.;
(ava)+Str +a +ti,pres,30 sg.
mana,pr.p.;kappa+e +ti; denom. lajja + i, der.
Appasannānam
vāpasādāya wi
2;
pres. 3 E Sg.
Pasannanam
yabhiyyobhāvāva
-A Appaharite
vachaddehi,appanake
Appiyapasamsi ca hoti piyagarahi
I,1005
Vin.
I,45;
Vin,
HI21 uaa
II. 21,va is
I udakeopilāpehi—M. III. 157;
Appaharo hoti, anodarikattam ca—A. IV. 155
missing Vin.I,225,
M.I. 13,207,
chadderi,
anuyutto —A. IHI. 120 He becomesone who praisesthe
Forthefaithof theunfaithfulor fo; opilāpessāmi
Hebecomes onewhotakesalittle undesirablesandblamesthedesirables:
2 Increaseofthe faithful;q +pa+ Throwitonthegroundwherethereis
foodandpractises
nongreedfor food: a t piva t pasamsā+ i, der.; garaha
ad +ta,pp.; bhiyyo,indel: Bhi nogreenery
ormakeit floatonthe
anodarikattantina odariyabhavam, +f, der.
a, der. IE MI Water
wherethereis nolivingthing;
amahagghasabhāvam, Cy. III. 276;
appa+harita:chadda(fromChard)
appa --āhāra; an t-udara - ika + Appiyarūpe rūpe vyāpaiiati —S. IV.
E, thānepasādam e+ hi, imper,2ndSg.; 0 (ava) +Plu
T tta,der.; anu + Yuj +ta, pp. 119
—A, 1.89;
ūpadamseti : II. 3,84;III. +a
ape +hi,; caus.imper,2"4.sg.
In referenceto the materialform
Appicchatam yeva nissaya—A. IIL. which looks unpleasant,
he is repulsed;
Appahitepi
Bantum,
pageva
pahite
-
On ane.
i Unpleasant
Matters
(he)shows
Pleasure:
q +Pasdda+- 219 vi +@+ Pad +ya +ti, pass.pres. 3.
Vin.I. 142
Ā Upa+Dp¢+
PP.; I 1S heckfi.aniva,fut, Dependingsolely on simplicity; appa Sg.
To go,notonly
on a call butalso
“SSeti> caus ‘ darsetj>
daimseti, Withouta call; e
+ iccha + ta, der.; ni + Sri +va,
Pres.3”. sq 1+pahite +api; pa + absol. Appekaccetunhībhūtā ekamantam
Hi +ta,Pp.;
A akā ' Pageva,indlel. nisīdimsu —M. II. 141; Vin. I. 36
Ppasādam
Pavedeyyum—A.IV, 345
Appicchataya santutthiyā Some of them beingsilentsatdown at
Appābādhataiiea
saiiiānāmi
sallekhāya subharatāya one side; tunhi + bhiita,pp.
 Appekacce
Appeva Appeva Appossukkataya

Appekacce
Bhagavata
saddhim tenaāialimpanāmetvāekamantam
sammodimsu,sammodaniyam Appevanamaamganipiseseyyum
- karahacitenabhotāGotamena
nisīdimsu—M. II. 141;Vin. I, 36
kathamsārānīyamvītisāretvā Vin. II. 212 samāgaccheyyāma—M. I. 177-8
Someof themcausedto fold their
ekamantamnisīdimsu—M. II. 141; May thereremaineventheparts;Sis + I supposeI would meetwith that
PalmstowardstheBlessedOne
Vin.l.36 e +eyyum,
caus.opt.3”.pl. venerable
Gotama,oneday;appeva
andsatdownatoneside:tena+ ———.
Some
of themexchanged
friendly nāma,indcl.usedwithopt.;kadāci
ahjalim;pa +Nam + e + twā,caus.
greetings
withtheBlessedOne
and sat Appeva nama imassakevalassa karahaci,indel.; sam + @+gaccha + Sis
absol.
downatonesideafterthecourteous dukkhakkhandhassaantakiriya eyyama,opt. 1*.pl.
talks;
sam+Mud+a +imsu, pst.3°, pafinayetha
—M. I. 192
Appekadaakinno viharami
pl.; sam+Mud+ q+ aniva,fut. pp.; May thereappearanendingof this Appeva nama siya kocideva
bhikkhūhi bhikkhunīhi upāsakehi
Smr* aniyaor sam+Ra(n)j +aniva, whole lot of suffering; dukkha + kathāsallāpo — M.I. 146, 178, 228;
upasikahiraha rajamahamattehi
Sut.pp.; vi +ati +Sr+e+ ta, caus, khandha;pa +Jia +ya + etha,opt. MELE eS
titthiyehititthiyasāvakehi
—M. 1.8
absol.
SometimesI abide,beingbeset
mid.3”.sg. It is betterif therewould be a LCGN
2S
conversation:koci +(d) + eva
AppekacceBhagavatosantike
withbhikkhus, bhikkhunis.
upasakas,
Appeva nama ekapadampi (Skt.kaScid+eva);sam+Lap +
namagottamsavetvaekamantam upāsikās,theking,chiefministers,
ajaneyyum—S. IV. 316 a, der.
nisīdimsu
—M.II.141;
Vin,
I.36 otherreligiousleadersandtheir
May theyunderstand
evena single
Someof themannounced theirname followers;api + ekadā; akinna,
sentence;@+Jan + nd + eyyum,opt. Appeva nama siya Bhesika,
andclanbeforetheBlessedOneand Pp.ofakirati;raja +maha+
opt. appeva nama siya Bhesika —D. I.
satdownatoneside;Sru+¢ +ta matia;tittha + iya, der.»Sru +
226
caus.abso]. . aka,der.
Appeva nama kadaci karahaci May it well be, Bhesika,may it well
samagaccheyyama—M. II, 140 be;As +ya(Skt.yat),opt.3. sg.
AppekacceBhagavantam AppekadaTathāgatam
I wish I would meet(him),oneday;
abhivadetya
ekamantam nisidims dhammadesanā patibhāti—A. IV.
sam + ā 4 gaccha -- eyyāma, opt. 1”. Appeva namaham Bhagavato
~M.IIL.141;Vin, 1,36 KA 337;V. 154
pl. bhasitassa
dayadoassam— A. IV.
GA of themPayingrespects
to the Sometimes it occurstotheTathāgata
299
Blessed
Onesatdownatoneside: i togivea sermon; pati +Bha +ti,
Appeva nāma cittam pasīdeyya—D. MayI beanheirtotheteaching
of the
+ekacce;
abhi+Vad+e t hā es Pres,3. sg.
1.47
absol.;ekam+antam,
ace.for lo ee
Maythemindbepleased; pa +Sad+ TENSE:
+Sad+imsu,
Pst.3. pl. EA, Appekadahamiddhimava mafiie -
eyva,opt.3“, sg.,vowelofthe root
M. II. 69
becomesī, ep. Nisīdeyva Appevamamnavihetheyya
—Vin. I.
Appekaece manussā nāvam Sometimes
Ifeellikeaperson
with
pariyesanti,
appekacce
ulumpam
24
Pariyesanti,
appekacce
kullam T, TI power;
api--ekadā
iddhimā3-iva
--aham; Appeva nāma tam bhayabheravam I suppose,he would nottroubleme;
passeyyam—M. 1.20 appeva,indcl. vi + Hid + eyya,opt.
bandhanti
—p. 11.89
Somepeo: MayI seethatdreadfulobiect;passa 3”, sg.
plesearchforab TE bahumiechati
—D.IHI.186 + eyyam,opt. 1. sg.
Peoplesearchfora flo a ©expectstoomuchfor a little;Js +
Appossukkataya cittam namati, no
Ya +ti, pres,374Sg,
* es(fromIsja+ Appeva nama putto ..tuyhampi dhammadesanaya—M. I. 168;S. I.
(nldh taa hii hii, Pres, 3” pl. Ba vacanamkareyya—Vin. III. 17 137;Vin. 1.5
»Pres,34,py. Appeva
namaamhesusāraiieyyunti It is betterif theson would acton your Themindbendstowardsinactivitynot
>Vin IY: 262
Appekaeceyena
Bhagavā wordtoo;Kr +eyya,opt.3". sg. forpreaching;appa+ussukka+(a,
i theybeattractedtowardsus;sam
der.;Nam+a +ti,pres.3". sg.;no,
Y +ya +eyyum,
opt,3”.pl. Appevanamamayamkadaci neg.p.
 -—..

Appossukka
Abbhantaranam Abbhutam
Appossukka
pannaloma createa danger;u(t) +Pad etia
paradavuttāmigabhūtena cetasā Abbhantaranam guttiya bahiranam Abbhagamanam sadiyanti—Vin. IV.
la, CaUus, pp.
viharanti—M. I, 450 patighataya—A. IV. 106 220
Theyabidewithlittleinterest,with Fortheprotectionofthe inmatesand (They)enjoytheapproach;
abhi+a
Abbūlhesiko
—A. IHI.84
littleelation(withthebodilyhair repulsionofthe outsiders;
Gup +ti, +gamana;Svad + aya + nti, caus..
Theonewhosedesireis pulledout;a
der.;pati +ghan+ta,pp. pres.3. pl.
+Brh +ta, or.a +Vah +ta.pp.+
others(orwithsubmission)
andwitha
esikā or isikā
deer'smind(withaninnocentmind): Abbhantaranam ratiya aparitassaya Abbhaghatanissitam va hoti—Vin.
appat ussukka;
Pat(Pad)-- ta,Pp. phasuviharaya bahiranam IHI.151
Abbhaāianam
adhifthatum—Vin.L
+loma;para +da + vutta; patighataya—A. IV. 108 Or it is closetothehouseof
205
Parehidinnavuttino,parato For thedelight,safety(living without ekecution; kāranagharam
Toapplyasanoinment:abhi +an
laddhenayāpentā,Cy. HI. 167 fear)andeasy-abidingof the inmates verigharamcorānammaranatthāya rA
Jana; adhi'+ Stha +4tum,inf,
andfortherepulsionof theoutsiders; katam,Cy. 370; abhi + @+ghata +
Appossukkotunhībhūto a +pari + tras +ya, der. ni + Sri + ta,pp.
samkasāyati —8. II. 277; IV. 178;
Abbhatirekam
vetanamadāsi—
Vin.
Beinginactive andsilentit whiles IV. 76
Abbhantarike vissasikatthane Abbhācikkhanti asatāabhūtena—D.
awaythetime;sam+Krs +aya+ Gavehima specialwage:abhi +
thapesi—Vin. I. 346 1. 161; M. II. 127
Mi,pres.3”. sg: samkasayatiti atirekam;
a +Da +@+5 +i, double 2=
Caused to put (him) on the most Accusewith anuntrueandnon-factual
kālamativatteti,Cy 41296:acchati pst.34.sg.
trustworthypositionin theinnercircle accusation;abhi + a + Khya + nti,
Cy.III. 29 i (insidethepalace);abbhantara + ika, intens.pres.3“.pl.
Abbhatthamgacchati—M. 1.115
der; vissasa + ika, der. + thana;
Appossukkotvamhohi—D Goestoanend:abhi +attham;
1 —D.
II. 106: Sthd+dpe+s +i, caus.pst.3". sg. Abbhanam yacami —Vin. I. 39
M. IHI.175;S.V.262 E 8accha+ti, pres, 374Sg.
I beg reinstatement;
abhi + ayana
Be at
25 so.ease:Hā i J+ gq+
>A (Bhij)+ fj imper.
a+ hi, ; Abbhantarimenamanena— Vin. III. (fromI); Yac + a + mi, pres, I". sg.
Abbhantarato
yamithubheda
—Vin.
—-——- 149
I. 229
In termsof insidemeasure; Abbhanaraho hoti —Vin. I. 49, 143
Abalabaloviyamandamando Or duetothebreaking
downofmutual abbhantara+ ima, der.
viyabhākutikabhāk trustfromwithin; mithu + bheda:
utiko viya —Vin. thelegalactofreinstatement,
twenty
MEI Bhid + a, der. abhi + antarato
Abbhantaroantojano,dasativa ordainedbhikkhus’participationin
Like a feebleof feebles,foolof fools
pessativa kammakarati va —A. III. the assemblyis necessary; abbhana
and4personof ferociouslook;yiy, Abbhantaram
ghattetvabahi
37-8
indcl.usedfor similies TE mocehi—Vin. III, 36
pres. 3™.sg.)
Havingtouched
theinnerpart,causeto
messengers,
or workers;dasa+iti;
Abahukatodhammen emit(semen)
outside:ghatta(from
4 abahukato pa + Is +ya,fut. pp.; kamma+ Kr + Abbhāmuttova candimā— M. II.
samnghena
-S, V,89 Ghrs) +@+ tvd,absol.,
: bahi, indcl.; a, der. 104
(I)was nothelpedmuchbythe Muc -- e
+hi,caus.imper,2” Sg. Tustas the moon releasedfrom the
cloud;abbha+ Muc +ta,pp. +iva;
Abbhantarā
guyhamantabahiddha
iva,indcl.usedfor similes
sambhedamgacchanti
—A, V, 82;
Abbudam
_ uppāa;adj
1}Uppaditam Vin. IV, 159
Uppadito~Vin, I 18 . InternalSecretta]
Cause E ks leakout;guyha 138
d tocreateä problem,causedto (Skt.guy
a) +manta;
sam+Bhid+ (They)madea bet;abbhutam
a, der,
akamsūti
panītakamakamsu,Cy.
 Abbhunnāmetvā
Abhabbā Abhabbe Abhayūparatohamasmi

553;a t Kr t ā t imsu,doublepst. andwhatis explainedby meas

3”,pl.
Abbhunnāmetvā kāyam,
anuviloketvaparisam—D. I. 120
Causingtoturnthebodystraightup
andlookingroundtheassembly;abhi
* u(t)+Nam+e +tva,caus.absol.:
anu+vi +Lok +e +tva,absol.
Abbhummepisacovatamam—M.
I. 448
O mygod,thereis indeeda
demoni;colloquialexpression:
abbhummeti ulrāsavacanametam,
Vin.
Cy.1205
AbbhuyyasiyenaKasi —S. 1.82
Advanced
uptoKasi.abhi+u(t)+ Ya
+S+i pst.3%so
Abbhokasecamkamanti —D, I, 89:
M. 1.229;M. II, 119
Walk, upanddown,intheopenair:
abhi+okase:Kram+a+ nij intens
pres.3™.
pl. I i
Abbhokāsenisinnohoti-
M. I, 463
Hehasbeen Sittin
8 In theopenair:si
+Sad+ta,pp.: Hii (Bhii)+@+ti,
Pres.3”. so
Abbhokasopabb
aliā —D. I, 63; S. V.
350
Renounced
life is fy
=
+ kasa;pa+ €e; abhi + o (ava)
Vrgj +a
Abyākataīieameabyākatato (Theyare)unfit for knowledge
dhāretha,byakatafica
me vision
dharetha—M. 1,432 byākatatoSam+Budh +a, der,
Cause
toholdinmindwhatis
unexplained
byme4Sunexplained
Unfit for beingunmindful;a + Bha + Abhabbo puna Bhagavantam
explained;
a +vi +d +Kr-+ta
a +ya ( Skt. abhavya),fut. pp.; pa + upasamkamitum,yadidam
pp.; Dhr +e +tha, caus. imper.
ayn Mad +ya +i +tum,inf: vādā-dhippāyo —
M. I. 234
opi.
Unfit for going to the BlessedOne
Abhabbe akasi —Vin. II. 191 againwiththeintention
ofdisputing;
Abyabajjhaparamahambhikkhaye
Made(them)unfit;a +Kr +@ +s +i, upa +sam + Kram +i +tum,inf.;
vedanānamassādamvadāmi —M. I.
double pst. 3. sg. yadidam, indcl.; vada + adhippayo
90
Bhikkhus,
I saythatthetasteof feeling
Abhabbo aiihācaritum —D. HI. 133; Abhabbopunavirūlhiyā—Vin. IHI.
culminatesin non- oppression;a 2 wi
A. IV. 370 92
+a+ Badh+va, der.;paramam+
Unfit for mis-behaviour; adhi +a+ Unfit for growing upagain;vi + Ruh +
aham;4 +Svad + a, der: Vad ' at
Car +i+ tum, inf. ta,pp.* i, der.
mi,pres. I sg.
Abhabbo khirassa adhigamaya—M. Abhabbo saniciccapanam jivita
Abyāvatātumhehotha, Tathāgatassa
. ITI. 141 voropetum —D. III. 133
sarīrapūiāya—D. II. 141
He is unfit for gettingmilk; adhi + Unfit for deprivingdeliberatelya
Youneednotworryabouthonouring
Gam + a, der. livingbeing
oflife ; sam+Cit +
theTathāgata's
body:ad vi -āt i
ya, absol.; vi + 0 (ava) + Ruh + e
(or Pr) +ta,pp.
Abhabbo chanda dosa moha bhaya +tum,caus. inf.
agatim gantum —Vin. II. 285
Abrahmacariyampahaya
(He) is unfit for taking a wrong course Abhabbo haritattaya —Vin. HI. 47
brahmacariārācārī virato methunā
throughdesire,anger,delusionand Unfit forbecoming
green;harita+
sämadhammā—D.1.4
fear;a + Gam + ti, der; Gam + tum, Ita,der.
Having
abandoned
unchastity,
he
inf.
becomeschaste,aloof anddetached
Abhayadakkhinam yaceyyama—
S. I.
fromSexuality,thecommonthing,
Abhabbotenasarirabandhanena 227
pa+ H@ +ya, absol.; Vi + Ram +
jivitum—Vin. III. 28 Let us beg for thegift of freedom
fa,pp.
Unfitforlivingwiththatphysical from fear;the word dakkhinā is
constitution;Jiv + i + tum,inf. normally used in the sense of
Abhabbāteoghassanittharanāya
-
offering; Yac + eyyama,opt. 1”.pl.
A. IL.201
Abhabbo dukkhakkhayaya—S. IV.
(Theyare) unfit for crossingoverthe
17 Abhayam deti, averam deti,
flood;ni (5)+ Tr +ana,der.
Unfitfortheexhaustion
of dukkha; avyāpalihamdeti—A. IV. 246
dukkha+khaya:Ksi +a, der. He gives freedomfrom fear,hatred
Abhabbate Nanadassanaya
andoppression;
Dā 1 e1 ti,pres.3".
anuttaraya
sambodhaya
—A,IL.301 Abhabbo niyamam okkamitum sg.; a t vi t ā t Bādh or Pad + a,
and
kusalesudhammesusammattam—A. der.
andsupreme enlightenment;
IHI.174
Unfitforenteringintotherightcourse Abhayūparatohamasmi,nāhamasmi
in reference
tothethingsof good;o + bhayūparato, vītarāgattā —M. 1.319
Abhabba
pamaiii
IV. 125 Jitum —M.M,I. 1.477;15.
Iiitum— S Kram + i + tum,inf.; sammd+ tta, I am interestedin freedomfrom fear,
der.(Skt.smavaktva) not in fear,becauseof the
 Abhayūvarā
Abhikkantāya
Abhikkantahesa Abhikkhanam
abandonment
ofpassion;
abhaya
+ bhante
nikkujjitamva ukkujjeyya
upa+rato+aham+asmi:Ram+ Abhikkantahesa yadidam upekkha - ta, caus. pp.; Dhr +e + ana, caus.
paticchannamva vivareyya
fa,pp.;As +mi,pres.I". se; na + A. TI. 101 der.;As +i +ta,pp.;Pa or Pi +i +
mūilhassava maggamacikkheyya
aham
+asmi;vi+I +ta,pp.+raga andhakare
vatelapajjotamdhareyya It is indeedekcellentwhat is called la,pp.; Khad+i +ta,pp.; Svad+
t Ita,der.
cakkhumanto
ripani
dakkhintiti,, indifference;upa + Iks +a aya +i +ta, caus.pp.; Gam +ta,
evameva—Vin. I. 16 pp.; Stha + i + ta,pp.; ni + Sad +
Abhayūvarā
imesamanā Abhikkantahesa yadidam tattha ta,pp.; Svap + ta,pp.; jagara + i +
It isexcellent
venerable
sir,it is
Sakyaputtiyā
—Vin,I, 75 tattha kalannuta —A. II. 101 ta,pp.; Bhās + i + ta,pp.; tunhi +
excellent,
justas,venerablesir,
These
recluses,
sonsoftheSākyan, The awarenessof propertimein Bhii + a, der.
onewouldturnup what is already
arefreefromfear:bhayena i differentcontextsis, indeed,
turned
down,openupwhatisalready
uparamantiti
bhayiivara,Cy. 997 excellent;abhi + kantad+ hi + esa; Abhikkamagahapatiabhikkama
closeddown,explaintherightway
totheonewho haslost his way,or kala +Jad +ti +ta, der. gahapati—Vin. II. 156
Abhavitakayaabhāvitasīlā Proceed,householder,proceed;abi +
onewouldholdanoil lampinthe
abhāvitacittā
abhavitapafiia—A. Abhikkante nanadassane Kram+a, imper.2". sg.,verbalbase
darkwiththehopethatthosewho
II. 106 sambhāventi—M. II. 9 is sometimesusedfor the imper.2".
haveeyeswill see.in thesameway;
Thosewho havenotcultivated
body,
seyyathāpi,
indcl.usedfor a simile; Causeto esteemin excellent sg.;gaha(Skt.grha)+pati
moralvirtues,
mind,andinsight;a+
knowledgeandvision; abhi + kanta,
Bhi +e+ i+ ta,caus.pp. i ni +kubja + i +ta,Pp.; u(t) +
kubja+eyya,opt. 3. sg.; pati + pp.; sam +Bhii + e + nti, caus.pres. Abhikkamatha āyasmanto
Chad+ta,pp.; vi + Vrtat 'egd; 3”, pl. abhikkamathaāyasmanto—
D. III.
Abhāvitattācittassa—M. I. 238
opt.3". sg.; Muh -- ta,Pp.: ā Ko 16;M. I. 205;M. III. 155
For
the Teasonthatmindhasnotbeen
Khyā-- eyya,intens.opt.3. sg.; Abhikkantepatikkante—D. I. 70;M. Venerablesirs, hurryup, hurryup; abhi
cultivated;
abhavita+tta,der.
Dhr +¢ +eyya,caus. opt. 3. sg.> IS) + Kram + a + tha, imper.2™.pl.

Drs+ssanti(Skt.syanti),fut. I In movingforwardandbackward;pati
+Kram + ta,pp. Abhikkhanam āgacchati—
Vin. III.
153;A. IV. 126 3".pl; evam+eva i
205
Itshould besaidthatit is duetonon-
Abhikkante patikkante Comes quite often
cultivation; abhavitana+ iti + assa: Abhikkantāgahapatayo
ratti,
sampajanakari hoti, alokite
As+ya(Skt.
Yat), opt,374
sg.;Vae+ yassadāni kālam maāīiatha —D. II.
aniya,fut,Pp. MI 86 vilokite..samminjitepasarite.. Abhikkhanam udānam udānesi-
Householders,
night is mostlygone,
samghatipattacivaradharane..asite Vin. II. 183
Abhavitam
(citt
Ai . nowthisisthetimeforyoutodo pite khayitesayite..uccara- Uttereda solemnutterance
frequently;
hoti—
A. I. 5 in sce whatyouthinkfit (i.e. to go home); passavakamme..gate thite nisinne udana+e +s +i, denom. pst.3™.sg.
Theminduncultivated
isnotpliable: sutte jagarite bhasite tunhibhave
Yassadani
kdlammafitathais an
kamma(n)+ idiomaticexpressionofgiving sampajanakari
hoti—M. I. 57 Abhikkhanam bhāseyyāsi—D. III.
va,ful. pp.»Hz
(pi He becomesawareandactivein going 116;S. V. 161
a +ti,pres,314" Pp.; Hii (Bhi) + permissionto leave:abhi +Kram +
foreward
andbackward,
lookingahead You shoulddiscoursefrequently;
', pp; Man+ya +tha,imper,
2".
Abhasamano
vacam ~M, |. 94 andlookingaround,foldingand abhikkhanam,(Skt. abhiksna), adv.;
Pl.; yassa+ idani; Man + ya + tha,
Without
Speaking
aWord;
a +Bhas+ pres.24.pl. stretching,
wearingdoublelayerand Bhds+eyyasi,opt.2". sg.
single layerrobesandholding the
bowl,eating,
drinking,bitingand Abhikkhanam manasikareyyatha-
whikkantāya
rattiyā
—S. I,1;Vin.
aha kan
tarabhante, tasting,urinatinganddefecating,going, M. I. 129
ikkantam
bhante,seyyathāpi Whe ee standing,sitting,sleeping,keeping Focusmindon,frequently;
manasi
keithenight
ismostly
gone;
abhi+ awake,speaking,
andbeingsilent;sam +kareyyatha:
Kr +eyyatha,opt.2".
Kram
+ta,pp, +Rnj + i+ ta,pp.; pat+Sr+er+ir
 Abhikkhanam
Abhijanasi Abhijivanikassa Abhinnatehi
Abhikkhanam sakam cittam loka hereand thereforein the ace.
paceavekkhitabbam—M. IHI. 114 panhamanne samanabrahmane pa +Dus +ta,pp.; Mrs +ta,pp.; a +
Oneshouldlookintoone'sownmind pucchitthoti? —D. I. 51 sam +a@+Dha +i + ta,pp.; vi +
Abhiiānāmi.. anekasatam
khattiya-
frequently;
pati+ava+Iks+i4 Doyouremember, O greatking,that Bhram+ta,pp.;pakati +indriya +
parisamupasamkamitā—M. I. 72
tabba,
fut. pp. youhaveaskedthisquestion from a, der.
I rememberthatI havebeento an
otherrecluses andbrahmins?;
assemblyof severalhundredrulers;
Abhikkhanasumedha,
sattham pucchitātiis betterthanpucchitthoti; Abhiiihālū bahulam viharāmi —A.
an +eka +satam;upa +sam 4 ;
ādāya
—M. I, 142 no, interr.p.; Preh +ya +i +tu, der. V.93
Kram +i +tu, der:
Intelligent
one,havingtakena weapon I abidemostlywith ekcessivegreed;
digdeep;abhi+Khan +a+, imper: Abhijivanikassa sippassakarana - abhi t ihā (from Dhyai) +Glu, der.
Abhijanami kho panaham ..
2m,
sg.
nd

anekasatāyaparisaya dhammam
Vin. I. 187
For the reasonofthe professionwhich Abhifinatakolaniio
—D. I. 89
desetā—M. I. 249
Abhikkhukeāvāsevassamvaseyya- provides livelihood; abhi + jivana + The oneof well known family;Aula+
Vin. IV. 313 a I remember
thatI havebeena preacher
ika, der. n?+ ya, der.
Shouldobserve therainyretreatina of Dhammain theassemblyof
residence wherethereareno hundreds;an +eka 4 sata; Dr§ +e+
Abhijjamane udake agantva—Vin. Abhinnatam va suttantambhanati -
bhikkhus;
Vas+eyya,
opt.3”.sg. tu,caus.der.
III. 69 Vin. I. 140
Havingcomeonthewaterwhichis not Or recitesa well known discourse;
Abhiiātihetu—M. II. 222 Abhijanamikhvaham bhante
beingbroken;Bhid +ya +mana, Bhan+a +ti,pres.3%.sg.; bhanaka
Duetospecialbirth bhikkhusamghassa
majjhe
pass.pr.p.; 4 +Gam + tvd,absol. (Bhan + aka= reciter) is madefrom
evarūpam
vācambhāsitā—S. I. 156
the same root
AbhijanamTathagatonoanayam I remember venerablesir, thatI have
Abhijjha katuviyam, vyapado
āpaiiati
—D.IH.30 HE madea Statementofthis kind in the
āmagandho,pāpakā akusalā vitakkā
TheTathāgata havinga midstof thecommunityof bhikkhus:
kīowisdisd Speacial makkhikā —A. I. 280 M. I. 1
kho+aham;Bhas + i +tu, der.
Wlcdge
E
oes n Pp -
ot fall into ty Ee Greedis theunclean, hatredis thebad Well known wanderers;pari + Vraj +
abhi+Jan +na +nla,pr.ptrouble;
smell(like fish),fliesaretheeviland aka, der.
Neg.D3
2. Di @+ Pad ee 2nd
ad + ya + ti, pres AbhijanasinotvamAnanda,ito
sg. »pres,34.
unwholesome thoughts; katuviyanti
pubbeevarūpam nāmadheyyam
uccittham,Cy. II. 378; āmagandhoti..
sutvā?—D. II. 205 ria
vissagandho,Cy. kulaputta —Vin. I. 43
AbhijanatipanabhavamGotamo Doyouremember.
Ananda,thatyou
Well known sonsof the familiesof
divasupitati—M. I, 249 I a name
of this kindbefore Abhiiihālū kāmesu tibbasārāgo Magadha;Magadha + ika, der.
DoestheVenerable "s ORI +Jan + na +si, pres. 2". sg.,
Gotama remember byāpannacitto
thathehassleptdur II a complerSentencewherethe
Ingthedaytime: padutthamanasamkappomutthassatī Abhianata abhinnata Licchavi —D.
diva,inde},
Svap+ verbin themainclausegivesthe
i+ tu, der asampaiānoasamāhito ITI. 16;A. IV. 179
meaningof memory,the subordinate
AbhiiānātibhavamGotamo vibbhantaeittopākatindriyo —S. III. Well known Licchavis, abhi + Jna +
clauseends with a derivativenoun
'eSugatimSaggamlokam 93 la, pp.
endingwiththesuffix tu (Skt. trn) as
"Papaifitati?—p,
1,143 4 complement,cp. Sarasi tvam:
The one with ekcessivegreed,strong
ae ki venerable Gotamaremember Pabbaevariipam attachmentto sensedesire,angry Abhinnatehiabhinnatehitherehi
katta?Vin.IL 79;
HAHI aSgonetotheheavenly world mind,pollutedthoughts,
confused savakehi saddhim —M. III. 78
Sutvā
' therefore
seems to be a memory,lack of awareness,not With well knownsenior disciples;ten
Ppystate?:
upa+Pad + Corruptform.
tu,der.; I i
composed,upsidedownmindandwith leading disciples of the Buddha have
Prefix upa 80 erns Ne
term A ia x:
undevelopedfaculties;
tibba+sam+ beenmentioned
here:Sāriputta,
bhiiānāsi
no‘vammaharaja
imam rdga;vi +@+Pad +ta,pp.+citta; MahāMoggallāna, Mahākassapa,

MU
 Abhinnato Abhinhadassanena
Abhinham Abhidhamme

Mahākaccāvana,
Mahākotthita, parami
+patta:pa +Ap +ta,pp.;yi
Abhinham kittayamāno ahosi —M. I. Especially
brightis thesunin the
Mahākappina,
Mahācunda, +Hr +a +nti,pres.3”.pl.
146;II. 65 midday;abhi +Dyut; cp. Skt.jyotsna
Anuruddha,
Revata
andĀnanda;
Sru
Whowasbeingfreauently
praised; with P. dosinā
t aka,der. Abhifiia sacchikatvapavedeti—M,
kitti +aya +mana,denom.pr. p.
I. 179
Abhiāīātoāātamanusso —Vin.I. Abhidosakālamkato —Vin. I. 7
Proclaimsafterrealisingwithspecial
247;II. 159 Abhinhamkuiihati—
A. I. 283;II. Passedaway lastevening;abhidosa+
knowledge;sa +acchi+katva(Skt.
Wellknown publicfigure 111 kadlam+ kata
Kr +tvā),absol.,pa + Vid+e +ti,
Becomes
angryquiteoften;Krudh+
caus.pres.3”.sg,
Abhiānādesitā
—D.II. 119 ya +ti, pass.pres. 3. sg. Abhidose addharattam bhattakala-
Explained
withspecial
knowledge; samaye—A. IH. 407
Abhifiia saechikātabbā
—S. V. 52;
abhi+Jia+ 4, instr.sg.;Dr§ +e +i Abhinham paccavekkhatomaggo Duringthemealtimelastevening:
A. 1.247
+fa, caus.pp. eu sanjayati—A.III. 74 abhido addharattanti
Shouldbeekperienced byspecial
Thepathis bornfortheonewhois abhiaddharattam,addharatte
knowledge; sa +acchi +Kr. +tabba,
Abhinia parififieyya—S. V. 52;A. II. reviewingfrequently;sam +Jan +ya abhimukhibhute,Cy. Ill. 406
Sut.pp.;Kr +tabba>kartabba>
246 +ti, pres. 3”. sg.
kattabba > katabba
Shouldbeunderstoodfullybyspecial Abhidose maiihantike bhattakāla
knowledge;
pari +Jia +eyya,der, Abhinham paccavekkhitabbam—A. samaye—A. IHI. 408
Abhiānāsacchikiriyāya—
A. III. 82;
III. 71 Duringthemealtimeyesterday
noon;
V. 36
Abhiāā pahātabbā
—A, Ii. 247 Shouldbe reviewedfrequently;pati + Cy. takesthe term abhidosaas
Fortherealisation
byspecial
Should
beabandoned
byspecial ava+Iks +i +tabba,fut.pp. abhido and gives the meaningof
knowledge:
pa+Ha +tabba, fut.pp. knowledge
abhimukha(towards),III. 406
Abhinham sannipata
Abhiiiiabhāvetabbā
—A. II. 247 Abhiāāeyyam abhiiānāti—A.IHI.
sannipatabahula—D. Il. 73 Abhidhammakatham kathenti —A.
Shouldbecultivated
byspecial 400
Thosewhohavefrequent
assemblies; ILI. 392
knowledge:
abhi+Jia +G,instr: Heknowsdirectlywhatshouldbe abhinham,indel.; sam + ni + Pat + Discussthepointsof Abhidhamma;
Bhi +e +tabba,
caus.
fut.pp. knownbyspecialknowledge; abhi+ a, der. abhidhammakathantiabhidhamma
Jia +eyya,der; abhi +Jan +na + missakamkatham,Cy. II. 401
Abhiiifidya
Samano Gotamo Hi,pres.3".sg.
Abhinhāpattiko hoti āpattibahulo -
dhammam deseti in
1,NOanabhifiiaya
- M. I. 442 Abhidhammakatham vedallakatham
M. II. 9 Heoi Abhinhakarana
anupubbakarana Becomesone who violatesrules kathenta—A. III. 107
HavinghadtheSpecialknowledge, tasmim
thaneparinibbayati
—M. I. frequently
andis full ofviolations; While discussingthe pointsof
recluse
Gotama explainstheDhamma 446 abhinha+apatti +ka,der. Abhidhamma,thepointsto be
notwithout
having the
Special Becauseofthefrequent trainingand . analysed;abhidhammakathanti
knowledge;Drf 2 e4 ti, gradual
training,hebecomes perfect
E e, CduS.pres Abhido addharattasamayamcando- uttamadhamma katham;
4
3”.$g.;abhi+Jna +ya
;
onthatpoint;pari +ni + Va +ya* th,
absol. M. II. 34 vedallakathantivedapatisamyuttam
Pres,3",sq. ,
Especially brightis themoonin the fidnamissakakatham,Cy.HI. 271;
Abhiālāvosānapara i a
middle of thenight;abhido vi +Dr or Dal +ya,fut.pp.+
Tae -M.II. 12;A.II. 9 Abhinhadassanena sanditthāahesum addharattasamavantiabhinne katham;katha+e +nta,denom.
äVingreachedtheZenith byspecial ~Vin.IV. 59
addharattasamaye,
Cy.Ill, 274 pr. p.
knowledge,theyabide:abhinnia + (They)became friendsbyseeing
Vosāna:
vi to Sa +ana der, + (eachother)
freguently;
abhinham,
Abhidomajjhantikasamayam
suriyo Abhidhamme abhivinaye
indel.
adv.;
sam+Dr§ +ta,pp:
—M. IL 35 ulārapāmuiio—A. V. 24

113
 Abhidhamme
Abhi nimanteyyāmapi
Abhinisidati Abhiruheyyasi
Theonewhohasgreat
joyover Abhinandatiabhivadatialihosāya
extendedDhamma andextended for thesick; with the verbnimanteti, Dp.: pari t ā +Da +ta,pp. + citta
titthati—S, III. 14;IV. 36
Vinaya;tatthadhammoti intr. is used; cp. bhattenanimanteti,
Reioices over,speaksin highterms
Suttapitakam,
abhidhammoti dsanena nimanteti Abhimamgalasammata—Vin. III.
andstands attached;abhi +Vad+at
saltapakaranāni, vinayoti 187 I
ti, pres. 3". sz. adhi +o3 Sa+ ya,
ubhatovibhamgo,
abhivinavoti Abhinisidati abhinipajjati Consideredspeciallyauspicious;abhi
absol.
Khandhakaparivara:
athava, ajjhottharati—A. ILL. 92 +mamgala + sam + Man + ta, pp.
Suttapitakampi Sitson, lies down on andgetsover;
Abhinandatubhante Bhagavā
abhidhammapitakampi
dhammoeva, abhi +ni +Sad +a + ti,; pres.
koel. Sid
3”. Abhirato paviveke—D. I. 60
bhikkhusamgham
—M. I. 437
maggaphalādīni
abhidhammo, sg.;abhi +ni +Pad +ya +ti,pres. Speciallydelightedin solitude
MaytheBlessedOne be happywith
sakalamvinayapitakam
vinayo, 3”. sg.; adhi + o +Str +a +ti, pres.
thecommunityof bhikkhus;abhi +
gRHS 8 Abhirato brahmacariyam carami -
Nand+ a + tu, imper.3'd,sg.;
Cy.V.7;ulara(Skt,udara)+pa 4 Vin. III. 17 :
Samghamis governed by theprefix
Mud+ya, der. Abhinito sakkhiputtho —A. I. 128; BeinghappyI leadthehighestway of
abhi
V. 283 life; Car + a + mi,pres. 1”. sg.
Abhidhamme abhivinayepanham Beingsummonedandcross-examined;
puttho—A. I, 288 Abhinandantisabrahmacari ekatta-
abhi+Ni +ta,pp.; sa + akkhi + Abhiramatu āyasmābrahmacariye-
BeingguestionedonAbhidhamma Vāsena—A, III, 349
Prch + ta,pp. A. ITI. 97
(extended
doctrine)andAbhivi Theco-celibatesare ektremely
naya Let thevenerabletakedelightin the
(extended
discipline); abhi + delighted
in li ingtogether;
abhi+
Abhinilanetto —M. II. 137 highestwayof life; abhi + Ram +a +
dhamma;
abhi+vinaya;Prch +ia, Nand+a +nti.pres.3”.pl.
The one who hasextremelyblueeyes tu, imper.3”. sg.
Pp.
Abhinanditvā
anumoditvā—M. I.
Abhinne sarīre pamsukūlam Abhirama devesu—M. II. 80
Abhidhamme abhivinaye 113;II. 48; S. II. 2
aggahesi—Vin. III. 58 Takedelightamonggods;abhi +Ram
karanīyo—M. 1.472 yogo Havingreioiced
andappreciated;
abhi
Tooktheragwhenthebodywasnot + a, imper.2™.sg.
; nd

Shouldengagein
Abhidhamma
and +Nand +i4 tvd,absol.; anu +Mud
decomposed;
a +Bhid +ta,pp.;a +
Abhivinaya Tati + ta, absol i
Grh +e+ s + i, pst. 3. sg. Abhiramasi bhante?—Vin. III. 104
Venerablesir, areyou happy(with the
Abhidhamme
okāsam Abhinibbhida hoti kukkutacehāpa-
kārāpetvā AbhippasannaBuddhe caDhamme life you are leading)?;abhi +Ram +a
suttantam vā Vinay, kasseva
andakosamhā
—M. 1.357
4M va pucchati- eaSamgheca—M. II. 209 '- si,; pres.. 22md
. Sg.
Vin. IV. 344 Thereisa breakoutiustasthebreak
Extremelyfaithful in theBuddha,the
HavingCaused togetthe outof thechick from theegg-shell;
permission DhammaandtheSamgha;abhi +pa + Abhiruhatu bhantedussāni —M. II.
(toaskquestions) Concerning abhi +yj 4.Bhid +ā: kukkuta +
Abhidhamma, (she)asks(questions) Sad + ta,pp. 92
chāpakassa3 iva;
iva, indcl, used Venerablesir, pleasestepon to the
aboutSuttanta orVinaya;Kr +dpe+ for simile
vd, caus,absol.:Preh 4 + Ui, pr Abhibhuyya abhibhuyya viharati - cloths;abhi + Ruh +a + tu, imper.
34.gg. ' ame M. III. 97; Vin. II. 202,vihareyya ard
gm.Se:
Abhinimantey
yamapi
nam Havingovercomecontinuously
cīvarapinda-
Abhidhamme
Vinetum
—Vin. I, 64 (he)abides;abhi +Bhai+ya,absol. Abhiruheyyasi dibbam yanam
patasendsanagilanapaccayabhesajja-
Todiscipline
inthe
Abhidhamma: parikkhārehi —D. 1.61
avikampamāno— M. II. 79
abhidhammeti
nāmarūpaparicoh
2de Abhibhūtopariyādinnacitto
—5. II. You shouldmountthedivine chariot
Wewouldalsoe
Cy. 990):vi 3 Ni + @+‘um, inf a xtendspecial 228 without hesitation; abhi + Ruh +
invitation to accept robe, food,
The onewho is overcomeandhas eyyasi,opt.2". sg; a + vi +Kamp+
lodging,
medicine
andotherrequisites lostcontrol over; abhi + Bhi + ta, a + māna, PY.D-
 Abhirūpā Abhisaliai Abhisata Abhātam

Abhirūpādassanīyāpāsādikā abhinimanteyyāmapinam cīvara- Abhisata atthikanam atthikanam Abhihatthum pavārenti —M. I. 222
paramayavannapokkharataya pindapatasenasanagilanapaccaya- manussanam—Vin. 1.268 Makea reguest tobringingdownor
samannāgatā—
D. II. 175;§. 1.95 bhesajjaparikkharena
—M, II, 89 Approached
bythepeoplewhowerein afterbringingdown(thematerial
Beautiful,
attractive,
pleasant,
and We would worship, rise up (before need;abhi +Sr + ta, pp.; attha + ika, necessities);abhiharitvā pavārenti,
endowed withthehighestbeautyof
him),or offer a seat,invite him der. Cy. IL. 264; abhi + Hr + tum,inf.; pa
complexion;Drs +ya +aniya,fut.
particularly
toacceptrobes,alms, + Vr +e +nti.caus.pres.3%.pl.
Pp.:pasāda'- ika,der.;sam+anu+
lodging,medicalrequisites
forthe Abhisannakayo hoti —Vin. I. 206
a +Gam+ta,pp.
sick;abhi+ Vad+e +evyāma, caus. Becomesone with a sweatingbody; Abhihatthum pavareyya—Vin. IIL.
opt.1".pl.; pati + u(t) + Sthā abhi +Syand + ta, pp. 214
Abhivadanapaccutthana
eyyama,
opt.1".pl.; ni +manta+ Would causeto request(him) to take
ahialikammasāmīcikammam
—M.
eyydma,denom.opt. 1. pl.; civara+ Abhisamkhatam abhisaficetayitam- away; haritunti attho,ganhitunti
II. 128
pindapata +sendsana + A. V. 343 vuttamhoti, Cy. 668;pa + Vr +e +
Worship;risingup(before
them),
gildnapaccaya+ bhesajja + Thatwhichisspeciallymadeand eyya,caus. opt. 3. sg.
payingrespects
andbehaving
properly;
parikkhara thoughtout; katamuppāditam,
pati +u(t)+Stha+ana,der.-
anjalikamma+sāmīcikamma cetitam
kappitam,
Cy. V.84;abhi+ Abhiharati abhimaddati
Abhivadehitvammebhagini sam(s)+ Kr + ta,pp.; abhi +sam + anupaiagghatikhalitam ganhāti —A.
Abhivādanam
sādiyeyya
—A. IV. 129
Bhagavantam —D. II. 270 Cet +aya+ i + ta, caus.pp. 1.198
Hewouldenioyworship;
abhi+Vad Sister,worshipthatBlessedOne,on Abusesthetime,crushesthe
* € +ana,caus.der; Syad+aya,+ mybehalf:abhi + Vad+e +hi, caus. Abhisamkharoti kāyena vācāya arguments,laughsat (the interlocutor
€)ya,caus.opi.3'i sg. imper.2". sg. manasa—A. I. 201 in orderto discouragehim) and
Accumulates
energies
physically, catchesup the faultsor slips of the
Abhivādetivā paccuttheti vā Abhiviiiya
aiihāvaseyyāma
—M.II. verballyandmentally;abhi +sam(s)+ tongue;abhi + Hr +a + ti, pres. 3”.
äsanena Vānimanteti —Vin. IHI.2 72 Kr +0+ti,pres.3. sg. sg.;abhi+Mrd +ya +ti,pres.3”.
CausestOworshiporgetsupatthe Wewouldconguerandkeep sg.; anu +pa + Ghar + a + ti, intens.
sightoroffersa Stat:abhi+ } authorityover it: abhi + vi +Ji + Abhisamkharikam datum— Vin. II. pres. 3™.sg.; khalita, pp. of khalati;
fad+e ya, absol.;adhi +@+ Vas+ eyyama,
+i, caus.pres,374
»S85Pati +ult) +
77 Grh + na + ti, meta.,pres. 3“. sg.
Stha+@+tjpres. opt.1".pl. Togivespeciallyprepared
food;abhi
3”.$g.;ni +
manta + E
* ti,denom, Pres,3”,sq. +sam(s)+Kr +ika,der.;Da +tum, Abhūtam abhūtato nibbethetabbam
Abhivinaye
vinetum
—Vin.I. 64 inf. —D.l.3
E Ei padakkhinam
katvā- Totrainintheextendeddiscipline; You shouldunravelfalseas false,a +
- II, 40;M.I. 375;11.48;5.1 120; Sakalevinayapitake
vinetum, Abhisamkhārikam pindapātam Bhi + ta,pp.; ni + Vest+ e + tabba,
IV.324;Vin.L 7 ROU Cy. V. 990 datum—Vin. HI. 160 ful. pp.
HavingWorshipped
and Togivea speciallyprepared
almsfood
circumambulated:
abhi+ Vad+e+ Abhisajjatikuppativyāpaiiati Abhūtam mayā bhanitam—
Vin. III.
4, caus.abs patitthīyati
—A. i, 124
, - 4Dsol.;
pa - ) Abhisallekhika 164
kan pa* dakkhinam
'ā,goingroundtheobject of + (He)isannoyed,irritated,
vexed cetovivaranasappaya
(katha)—A.V. A falsestatement
hasbeenmadeby
a eration,keeping
veherati i therighthand and resistant;
abhi +Sad+ya+ 67 me;Bhan + i + ta,pp.
sidetoward;it E pāss.pres.3". sg.+Kup + ya + (Thetalks)whichslash(defilements)
Hl,Pass.pres,374$g.; vi + a+ Pad I andareconducivetotheexposureof Abhūtam vacanam(tasmim) rūhati
Abhivādeyyāmavā +ya +ti, Pass.pres, 3". sg; pati mind;abhi+sam+Likh +ika,der.; —D. IHI.183
vaāsanena
yānimher ite gāma +Sta +tya+ a
ānteyyāma, 30 e ti,ti pass.
ye pres.
ae Falseaccusationcomesuponhim; Rua
sam+pa +aya(fromI) +a +ti,pres.3"'.
sgo

117
 Abhejjapariso
Amama Amogham
Abheiiaparisohoti—D. HI, 172
theyabide;Spyy e ia Ivä, absol,
Hebecomes onewithundivided Unselfish, unmarried; a +mama; Amute mutavadi —A. I]. 227
followers;
a +Bhid +ya,fut. pp. 3 apariggahati itthipariggahena The one who says,in reference
Amatamsacchikatvairīvati- A,II
Parisa apariggahā,Cy. 965; a +pari +Grh to whathe hasnotcognised,that
450
ta, der hehascognised;
a +Man +ta,pp.
Experiencing
immortality
hemoves
Amakkhitouddenaamakkhito
on;sa +acchi +katva,absol.;Ir +ya
semhena amakkhitoruhirena Amama apariggaha niyatayuka Amussa sutvā imassaakkhāyanti
+ti, pres. 3. so.
amakkhitokenaciasucinā—D. II. 14 visesabhuno—A. IV. 396 amtisambhedaya—Vin. IV. 12
Unstained
withwater.withphlegm, (The peopleof Uttarakuru)are Hearingthewordsof thatperson,
Amatāya dhātuyā cittam
withblood,withanyotherdirtything: unselfish,
theyownnothing,theirspan theyconvey(them)to this person,
a+ Mrks +i +ta Pp.; ruhira B upasamharati —M. I, 436;A. IV.
of life is fixed andtheyarespecial for makinga rift betweenthem
423
(=rudhira) beings;nivata 4
Turnsthemindtowardstheelement of
bhuno,pl. Amulakena abrahmacariyena
AmaceaPārisaiiānegamāceva Immortality;
upa +sam + Hr + @+fi,
anuddhamseti—A. I. 266; Vin. III.
lanapadāca—D. I, 136 pres. 3” So
5- Amāham bhikkhum addasam—D. I. 90
Ministers,membersof theassembly
214 Causesto chargewith a groundless
townsmen andcountryfolk:
Cy,Takes Amanasikaraniye
dhamme—M.1.7
I sawthatmonk;amum +aham; a 3 sexualmisbehaviour;anu +Dhvams
theter
e term amac °C
ca Io mean Thethingswhich shouldnotbe
Dr§ + e+ ti, caus.pres. 3™.sg.
reflected
on : +am,
in,| pst. I". sg.
g
bivasahāyakā
(colleagues),297

Amittatopi daheyya—M. I. 511 Amūlikāya sīlavipattiyā

Amacceparisa
jie sannipātetvā
- He would regardhimasanenemy; anuddhamsetha— Vin. II. 79
Vin.I. 347 A. IV. 320
amittato +api; Dha+ a +eyya, opt. Ruin him on thechargeof rootless
Makingtheministers andcouncillors Or the non-humans would attack me;
TAN
2rd
immorality;a +mila + ika, der.
assemble:
; Parisa(d)+ya, der; sam+ ! upa+Kram +eyyum,opt.3”,pl.
ni +P at + € T hā,
'ā caus.absol.
Amittomittapatirūpako
—D. II. Amūlikā saddhā sampailati —M. II.
Amanussikabadheāmakamamsam
Amaiiiamanona kin
186 170
amakalohitam
—Vin. I. 203
ci loke An enemy,afake friend;pati t rūpa Faith becomesbaseless;sam + Pad +
upādiyati—S.IV. 65 Freshmeatandfreshblood when 2rd
+ka, der. ya +ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Unconceiving,(he)doesnotgras thereis anillnesscausedby a
anythingin theWorld;a i. Man :
non-human;
amanussa+ika, der.
mana,Pass,prip,: I ya+ Amissikatamevassacittam hoti Amūlhassa amūlhavinayamdetu -
Ya +ti,pres,3rd.Ma tāti pa: thitam āneiiappattam —A. IHI. 377; Vin. II. 81
sg, Amanussena
gahitohoti—Vin.Tl.
IV. 404;Vin. I. 184 Let (theSamgha)passajudgement
85
Themind of this personis certainly on a personrecoveredfrom insanity;
Amatadvār.
4M gavesanto
—A.V. (He)Was
Possessed
byademon;
Grh
346 unmixed,firm andunshaken;a + a+ Muh +ta,pp.; Da +e + tu,
"t+ ta, pp.
missa+katam+eva +assa;an+ imper. 3'4 SS.
Searching
forth Inj (fromRnj) +ya +pa +Ap +ta,
92, ae
8 ate (from Is) 2 art Amanussena
patieeaiā
ticca jato —
i
277 jato —Vin.akI
paticca pp. Amūlho gabbham issāmi —D. II. 286
Withoutbeingconfused,I will go to a
Born of;non-human;
nofa paticeais used
Amukharena bhavitabbam womb; / +ssāmi,fut. I". sg.; variant
withinsty, pati +I(t). + ya,absels
Experiencing
the avikinnavacena—M. I. 470 reading is essāmi
Jan + ta, pp. ,
) elementof Heshouldnotbegarrulous
anda
MMortality
withthe(mind-
oi)body,
bragger;Bhii +a + i + tabba,fut. Amogham ratthapindam bhunjati -
Amamā
āparigpahā
—
D. IHI.199
Pp.;a+ vi +kir +ta,pp.+vaca A. 1.10
 Ambaka
Amhā Amgam
Hetakesmeaningful
almsfood Amhākampialābhāamhākampi
supplied
bythecountry;amogha(not 166;IV. 44 Amganam amganantiāvuso
dulladdham—Vin. ITI. 224
Dwelling placebelongsto us;pa +Ap vuccati, kissa nu kho etam āvuso
It isa losstous,it is ill-gottenbyus;
+ti, pres. 3. sg. +(ujnd +ti, pres. 3. sg. adhivacanamyadidam amgananti? -
du +Labh +ta,pp.
M. I. 27
Ambakaambakapaīiūā
—A. IHI.349 Amha paccha uppannā—D. I. 18 Brother,it is said,“dustanddust’, to
Amhākam āeariyo ayyo Ānando-
Born after this person;amhd,abl. of whatis thisdusta synonym?;Vac+ya
Vin. II. 290
idam;paccha, indel. +ti, pass.pres. 3. sg; vadidam,
Ourteacher,
Venerable
Ānanda
Ambattham yevamanavam indcl. refers to etamin thepreceding
patimānento
—D. I, 106 Amhāvuso bhikkhū —
A.V. 196 clause.
Amhākamgāmakkhettam
Expecting
theyoungmanAmbattha: We are, friend, bhikkhus; amhe +
āgacchanti—
D. I. 117
pati +Man+e+ nta,caus.prp avuso Amgajatam aggahesi—Vin. III. 117
Cometo our locality; gama and
Took up thesex-organ;a +Grh +e +
khettaarejoined togetherto
Ambamvaputtholabujam Amhe abhiyuhiissati —Vin. IV. 304 Si pets e Sa:
indicatea demographic
unit,cp.M.
vyakareyya,labujamva puttho (She)will questionus; abhi +Yu(njj +
Il. 10;@+gaccha+nti.pres.3™.
pl.
ambamvyākareyya —D. I, 53 i + ssati,fut. 3”. sg. Amgajatam kammaniyamhoti—Vin.
Beingaskedaboutmango (he)would II. 113
talkaboutbread-fruit.
beingasked
Amhakamdatummaiifissanti— Vin.
Amhe vihesiyamāneaiihupekkhasi - Sex- organis ready;Kamma(n) +ya,
aboutbread—
fruit hewouldtalkabout III. 87
Vin. II. 78 der
mango; anidiomaticexpression
for Theywill thinkofgiving us;Da +tum,
Doyoutolerate whenwearebeing
anirrelevant
talk:Preh+ta,pp. vi + inf.;Man+ya +i +ssanti.fut. 3”.pl.
harassed; adhi +upa +Iks +a +si, Amgajate amgajatampakkhittam -
a+ Kr +eyya,opt.3". se pres. 2". sg. Vin. III. 20
Amhākamputtattamaiihūpagatā-
Male organhasbeenput into the
Ambalatthikayamviharati D. II. 271
Amhehi abhikkantatarā ca femaleorgan;pa + Ksip + ta,pp.
Rāiāgārake—D. IL. 81 (They)havecometo be reckonedas
panītatarā ca —D. 1.216
Stays
attheking'shouse
in Our sons; adhi + upa + Gam + ta,pp.
More beautifulandfine thanwe; the Amgamamgāniokanteyyum—M. I.
Ambalatthikā:
raja +agaraka
suffix tara is used with instr. or abl. 129
AmhakamBuddho, amhakam
for comparison; abhi +kanta + tara; (They) would cut off bodily parts;
Ambaphalitghonti—Vin, II 108 dhammo,amhakamayyaputtena
pa +Ni +ta,pp. +tara amgani + amgdani;o (ava) + Kr(n)t +
Mangotreeswerefullof fruits;Phal dhammoabhisamito —Vin. III. 177
a +eyyum,opt. 3™.pl.
1+ ta,pp. TheBuddha
isours.theDhamma is Amhehisā ussāhitā—Vin. III. 163
Ours,Truthhasbeenrealisedby our
Shewasfomentedbyus;u(t)+Sah + Amgamamganiparamasi —Vin. III.
Amma, tata—M. II. 56 Master;abhj + sam + I +ta, pp.
e +i +ta, caus.pp. 119
Dearmother,
dearfather
Touchedbodily parts;para + Mrs + i,
Amhakamruccaticevakhamatiea, Amkenaamkampariharīyissati—D. pstaa'".Sg.
tenacamhā
attamanā
—M. I. 93 11.20
It ispreferable
andacceptable
tous,
He will be carriedfrom lap to lap;pari Amgamamgāni vatūpatthaddhāni
My dear,gothere
and examine:amma Wearehappywiththat;Rue+ya+ti +Hr.+tya +i +ssati,pass.fut.3”. honti —Vin. III. 37
isn ormallyused
US!toaddress
the PASS.
pres.3rd,
ga: Ksam +a + ti,
SL. Limbs havebecomestiff dueto wind;
E ai hereit
mother, hereiq is
; usedto addressti pres.3”.sg. tena+ca +amha: AS
vata +upa +Sta(m)bh + ta, pp.
Shlers;theword'Sprinted
aughters: the i in
kai ti * Ma,meta.pres, J. pl.
'extas amma er Amke nisinno hoti —M. I. 394
Hasbeensittingonthelap;ni +Sad+
Amhākamvihāro pāpunāti —
Vin. II. ta, pp.
 Amgarakatahena
Amgesu Amgesu Ayam

Holding
a bodilypartandpressing
it udakam—M. I. 187
against;
Grh +e +twa,absol. AmgesuviharatiAssapuramnama This is theway which conformsto the
Thewatercausingto soakevenone
Amganam nigamo —M. I. 271 dhammato answer(thequestion);vi +
jointofthe finger;amguli+pabba+
Amgārakatāhena okiri—S. II. 260 Abidesatthetownship
of Amga, a + Kr +ana, der.
femana : Tim+e +ana,caus,der+
: i Poured overa potofburningcoal;0 + namedAssapura,in thekingdomof
mattam+api
Kir +i,pst,3%.sg. Amga Ayamantarā kathāudapādi— D. II.
8; ITI. 88;5. I. 79;V. 436;A. II. 176
Amgulipabbamattampi —A. IV, 102
Amgārakāsuyāādittāya Amgesu
viharatiĀpanam
nāma This interimtalkcameup; u(t) +a +
Eventotheextentof a finger-ioint;
i sampailalitāya
saiotibhūtāya
—Vin. Amgānam nigamo — S. V. 225 Pad +i, pst.3. sg.
amguli +pabba + matta
TH.20 Abidesat themarkettown named
Inapitofcharcoal,
burning,
ablaze
and Āpanain thekingdomof Amga Ayamantimajati, natthidani
é' 3 glowing:a +Dip+ ta.Pp.; sam+pa Amgulimuddikam omuāeitvā te
punabbhavo—Vin. I. 11
Pu +Jval +i +ta,pp.;sa +joti + bhikkhūbhattenaparivisitvā—Vin.
Amsakūtena pahāram datvā This is thelastbirth,now thereis no
IV. 162
bhiita,pp. pavattesi—Vin. II. 268 re-becoming;ayam + antimda; natthi
Havingremovedthefinger-ring
and
Givinga blowwiththeedge
of the + idani;puna+ bhavo
servedthosebhikkhuswith food:pari
Amgaragamukharagamkaronti- shoulder(she)madehim fall down:
+ Vis +i +tva,absol.
Vin.II. 266 Da +tva,absol.;pa + Vrt +e+s +i, Ayametthadhammata—D. II. 12
} Applycosmetic
tothelimbsandthe caus.pst. 3". sg. This is thenaturein thiscontext;ayam
faces;amga+Rai +a, der,
Amgulimuddikam
dharenti—Vin.
+ ettha;dhamma+ ta, der.
IT.106 Amsabandhakambandhanasuttakam
Amguttarāpesu
viharati
Āpanam (They)wearfingerrings;Dhr +e + —Vin. I. 204 Ayamenacavittharenaca—D. II.
i namaAmguttarāpānam
niam nti,caus.pres. 37.pi.
a . 0 "
Something tiedononeshoulder
witha 146
M. I. 359 : strap In lengthandbreadth
Abidesatthemarket
townof Amguliyāaūiianti—Vin. I. 203
Amguttarapa,
named
Apana,
inthe Annointwitha finger;Raj +a +nti, Ayafica tarahi Devadattassa Ayamevaariyo atthamgiko maggo-
kingdom
ofAmguttarāpa pres.3. pl.
Bhagavatipathamoāghāto— Vin. II. S. V. 421; Vin. I. 10
i Amgulantarikāva i 189 This is indeedthenobleeightfoldpath;
ī yaghattehi
— Vi Amguliyajalamanaya—Vin. III. 160 Thisis thenthefirstgrudgethat ayam + eva; attha + amga + ika,
IHI.39 MATE Whilethefingerwasglowing; /oc. Devadatta hadagainsttheBlessedOne; der.
Touchbetween
twofingers;amgula
+ absl.;Jval +a + mana,prp. tarahi, indcl.; sometimesthis occurs
. antara+ika;der: ghatta+ē +hi
as carahi (Skt. tarhi) Ayamevaujumaggoayamahiasāyano
denom.imper.
2» Sg. P ‘ Amguliyodukkhabhavissati—Vin. —D.1.235
IV. 129
Ayafica me ekadhitika —Vin. III. 135 Thisis thestraight
way,thisis the
Amgulipatodaken The fingerswill become
painful Thisis alsomyonlylittlegirl;eka+ direct path; avam + afijasa + ayano
, II. 84;IV,o Ahāsesum—Vin.
dhiti(Skt.dhitr) +ka,der.
(They)
made
himlaugh
bytickling
with Amgulī
pofhesum- D. II. 96 Ayam kalo uddesassa,ayam kalo
;fingers;
a amgulipatodako
i ‘ti amgulīhi
Caused
{0snapfingers;Sputh+e+ Ayaficevaloko araddho paro ca paripucchaya, ayam kalo yogassa,
pa acchadighattanam
vuccatiCy, "UM, CaUus.
pst, 3". pl. loko —D. III. 181 ayam kalo patisallānāya —A. IV.
This world hasbeenwon over,next 114
Hrs+¢VE pa*
5+um, Tud
caus.+aka,
3rdder.
pst, a cārikam
caramāno
—
D. I.
.pl. world too; @ + Radh + ta,pp. This is thetimeforlesson,asking
"hgulipabbatemangimattampi
question,practiceandsolitude;u(t)+
Touring
inthekingdom
ofAmga;Car Ayamanudhammohoti Dr§ + a, der.;pari +puccha; Yuj + a,
* a+ mana,pr.p. veyyākaranāya—M. III. 30 der.;pati + sam + Li + ana, der.
 Ayam
Ayam Ayam Ayyo

Ayamkhokaloyamputtoputtena Ayamnopatisaranambhavissatiti Ayam samadhi santo panito Ayoni hesaphalassaadhigamaya-

manteyya —M. II. 130 yamtumheetarahipatidhaveyyatha
patippassaddhiladdho M. III. 142
Thisis thetime,whena sonwouldtalk —M.Il, 9
witha son;manta+eyya,denom.opt. ekodibhavagato na ca This is indeednot theproperway for
Whomyourecourse toatthistime
3”.Sg.
sasamkharaniggayhavaritavato- attaining
thefruit
thinking
thatthispersonwill beour A. IHI.24
refuge;
etarahi,indcl.;pati +Dhay+ This concentrationof mind is serene,
Ayamtatthasamici—Vin. IHI. 186 Ayyakā kālamkatā hoti —Vin. II.
eyydtha,opt. 2". pl. fine,gainedby calmness,goneto one-
Thisis therightcoursethere 169
pointednessandnot gainedby outside Grandmotherhaspassedaway;both
Ayammepuggalo khamati—A, I.
Ayamtepatto,ayamsamghati, pressureandsuppressionof polluting kālakata and kālamkataare used.
118 factorsof mind; Sam +ta,pp.; pa +
āyam uttarāsamgo,ayam
This personis agreeableto me;Ksam Ni +ta,pp.; Labh + ta,pp.
antaravasako,
idamsamkacchikam, Ayyavosātitakāni sāmam gahetvā
+a +ti, pres. 3. sg.
ayamudakasatika —Vin.II, 272 bhunjati —Vin. IV. 89
Thisisyourbowl,thisisthedouble Ayoiihāyam viharati Gamgāya What is left in thecemetery
Ayamvammikorattimdhipayati, nadiyā tīre —S. III. 140
layerrobe,thisis theouterrobe,this for ancestors,he takesby himself
divapaiialati—M. I. 142 Abideson thebankof theriverGamgā, andeats;ayvā kho vucceanti kālakatā
is theinnerrobe,thisis thevest,this
Thisant-hillsmokesin thenightandis in Ayojjha pitipitāmahā; vosātitakānivuceanti
is thebathing-cloth:ullara 3:
in blazeduringtheday; dhiipa +aya
asamga;antara+ Vas+aka,der.; tesam atthāya susānādisu
sam+kaccha+ika,der:a +i, denom.
pres,3". sg: pa +Jval Ayoniso ca manasikaroti —A. IHI. chadditāni, Cy. 842; samam,indcl.;
bhikkhunihasfive robes ta * ti, pres, 374Sg. 174 Grh + e + tva,absol.;Bhu(fijj + a+
Apply on mindin a wrongway ti,pres.3 .sg.
Ayamtesaccakalo
bhitakalo—Vin Ayamvoamhakamanusasani—
M.1
1.94 46 Ayonisodāyaiiam gavesantī—
D. II. Ayyassaaramikam dammi-—Vin. I.
Thisis thetimeforyoutotellthe This ISmy instructionto you; amu+ 331 207
truth,
thisisthetimeforyoutospeak Sds + ana +i. der
--——-
Seekingfor inheritancein a wrong I giveaservant
tothevenerable;
facts;Bhit+ta,Pp. way;daydda +ya, der.; gava + es Grama+ika,der; Da +mi,pres.1”.
Ayamsamadhi
akāpurisasevito
—A. (fromIs)+.a+nta+T, prop. Sg.
Ayamtesamafifiataro—Vin. I, 39 IHI.24
This is oneof them Thisconcentration
of mindis not Ayonisopaīihamkattā—A. I. 103 Ayya bhanteaggapurisa—Vin. IV.
associated
bybadpeople;a + Theonewhoaskstheguestionina 63
Te dhammo4yamvinayoidam kapurisa
+Sev+i+ ga,pp. wrongway;Kr +tu,der. Venerable
sirs,youaresuperiors
E I —p Il.- 12i;
Satthusasanam 124;Vin.
Vin,1,
|
Ayamsamadhi
ariyoniramiso
—At Ayoniso paīiham vissajjeta—A. I. Ayyaya dammi —Vin. IV. 244
This is the
doctrine.thisis the III. 24 103 I give (it) to thevenerable(bhikkhuni)
discipline, this is the j This Concentration
of mind is noble
‘structionof the Theonewhoanswers
thequestion
in
teacher
( astothewa andspiritual
y ofconducting a wrongway; vi +Srj +ya +e +tit, Ayyo Udayi uyyojessati—Vin. III.
ecclesiastical
acts)
caus. der. 138
Ayamsamadhi
paccuppannasukho VenerableUdayi will make(her)send
Ayamnu khosattokutoāgato?
= kho si a —M. ayatifica
sukhavipako
—A, IIL.24 Ayonisomanasikarahetu uppanna, off; u(t) + Yuj + e + ssati,caus.fut.
ThisConcentration
of mind
ErOmwhere
ere
thi
thisbeinghascome paratoghosapaccayava—A.V. 187 3”. sg.
brings
a bout
h appiness
atpresent Bornof wrongapplication
onmindor
Itterppyau.
:
3 mu,
7.
P+ Gam+ta,pp. and Produces
happyresultin
AyyoNandako(no)pavāreti—M.III.
future
Parato +ghosa+paccaya 271

125
 Ayyo Araniiayatane Aranne Arahati

Venerable
Nandaka
invitesus;avvo Theone,who hasgone to theforestor
Araniie apariggahitam—Vin. III. 44 Do notprovidetheattritivestick;
andayyaareusedbythebhikkhunis tothefootof a treeor toa solitary
Notvalidin theforest;a +pari +Grh upa +Stha +ape +nti, caus.pres.
inreference
tobhikkhus;
pa +Vr +e place, sitsdown,makingthelegs
+i +ta,pp. Spl.
+ti, caus.pres,3”. sg. crossed,keepingthe body erectand
focussingthemind on the
Araniie pacalayamanamnisinnam - Aratiratisaho assam—M. I. 33
Ayyohutvādāsohoti,dāsohutvā meditational
subject;ni +Sad+a+
ayyohoti—M. II. 149 A. IV. 344 I shouldovercomelikes anddislikes:
li, pres.3”. sg.; @+ Bhuj +i +tuā,
Beinga masterbeforehebecomes a The onewho hasbeensittingin the a + Ram + ti, der.;As +yam, opt. 1%.
absol.;pa +ni +Dha +ya, absol; forestdrowsing;pa + cala +dya +
i slaveandbeinga slavebeforehe Sg.
pari +mukha;upa +Stha +dipe+
becomes a master;
ayyo-dāso,opp; mana,denom.,
pr.p.;ni +Sad+ta,
va, caus.absol.
Hii (Bhii)+tva,absol. pp. Arasarupo bhavamGotamo —A. IV.
173;Vin. III. 2
Araniiamrukkhamilampabbatam Araīihe pavanecaramāno—
M. I.
Arakkhitenakāyenaarakkhitāya VenerableGotamaseemsto haveno
kandaramgiriguham susānam 174;S.II. 106
vacayaarakkhitenacittena—S. II. taste; a +rasa + rupa
vanapattham
abbhokāsam
paiāia- While roamingin the forestandiungle
271;A. II. 125;IHI.95
punjam—D. [. 71 thicket;pavanam vuccati vanasando,
Withunprotected
body,wordand Arahaggatamsatimupatthapetha
-
i mind;a +Raks+i +ta,pp. A forest,
a footofa tree,a rock.a D. A. 680; Car +a + mana,pr. p. A. IIL. 263- 64
grotto,
arockcave,a cemetery, a thick
Causeto focus your attentionon the
jungle,anopenair, a heapof straw; Arafifievanapatthani
pantani
ArakkhiyabhikkhaveTathagata
~ worthy;arahe +gatam,Cy. III, 332;
1 Vin. II. 194 arannanti‘nikkhamitva
bahi senāsanānidurabhisambhavāni - upa + Stha +dpe + tha, caus.pres.
Bhikkhus,
Tathāgatas
shouldnot indakhīlāsabbametamaraāhan'ii M. I. 16 2 HĪ,
beprotected:
a +Raks+(i)+ya, idambhikkhunīnam vasenaāgatam Thickforestsandrestingplacesin the
I fut.pp. = araiham, 'āraāhakamnāma remoteiungles arevery hardto Arahatam anukaromi —
A. IV. 249
Senāsanam
pancadhanusatikam overcome;
vana+patthani;du + ® I followthewayof Arahants:
anu+
pacchimam'
ti idampana imassa +abhi+sam+Bhat+a, der.
ee viharati—M. IHI. karomi,pres.I". sg.
07 bhikkhuno
anurūpam,Cy. 209;vana
Abidesina foresthut +pattha;abhi +okāsa Araīhe vanapatthānipantani Arahatam sutam—
M. II. 86
senāsanāni
patisevatiappasaddāni HeardfromtheArahants;
arahatam,
Arahifiagato
varukkhamilagato
vā Arafifiasafiiam
yevamanasikarissati| appanigghosāniviianavātāni gen.pl.; Sru + ta, pp.
sunnāgāragato
vā iti ekattam—A. IV. 344 manussarāhaseyyakāni
palisafcikkhati
—s.iv.296 Willapplyonmindonlythesolitary patisallānasāruppāni—D. III. 38 Arahatiaggāsanam
aggodakam
Theone,whohasgone nature
of theforest:safifiam+(y)+ Resortsto lodgingplacesin thethick
totheforest,to aggapindam—
Vin. II. 161
thefootof a treeorto eva ; eka + tla, der. . junglesandin theremoteareaswhich
an empty Hedeservesthebestseat,thebest
house,reflectsthus; arefree from soundandnoise,lonely
' Pati +sam+ Gam + ta, Pp.; water,thebestfood;agga1.āsana;
Khya + li, inte Araiifiasmim
brahavane
—A, IL. 44 anddeserted bythepeople,fit for aggat udaka
MS.pres,
3”,sg. Inthe
thick
jungle:
braha
(Ske.
brhat) secretbehaviourof menandsuitable
+ vana forsolitudeandretreat;pati +Sev+ Arahati (na) kiāci pāpakam hotum
Araiifiagato
wāka, ygrukkhamū
amūlagato
vā a +ti, pres.. 3%.sg.; raha(s) + evya+ —Vin. I. 278
suniāgāragato
vānisīdati . Arafifiayatane
pannakutisu ka,der.;pati +sam+Li +ana,der.; Deservesno anybadthingto happen;
pallamkarg
ābhuiitvāuiumkāyam sāmmantānam - M. ti. 154 sartipa+ya, der. Arh +a +ti,pres.3™.sg.;Hii (Bhai)+
panidhāya
Parimukham satim Among
those
whoaredwelling
in a + tum,inf,
upatthapetvā
—M. I, 56 leafhutsin theforest;Sam+ya + Aranisahitamna upatthāpenti
-
hia, pr.p.
Vin. I, 217 Arahatipabbajitopabbajitassa
 Arahati
Ariyassa
pindampatiggahetum —Vin. IV. 74 123
A renounced
isworthytoacceptan Araha yatha aham—
Vin. I. 25 milakkhukamnamayo koei
We claimed that we were Arahants;
alms-foodofa renounced:
pa +Vraj An arahantas I am anariyako andhadamilādi, Cy.
arahanto +amha +iti: Pati +Jan+
+1+ta,pp.;pati +Grh +e 4 tum, 255; Arya > ariya, meta.ayira;
na +i +mha,pst. 1".pl.
inf. Arahopekkha annavihita santitthati pati +@ +Khya E Ii, pass. pres.
va sallapati va —Vin. IV. 269 paa
Arahantova arahattamaggam
Arahatisatthāram
anubandhitum, Standstogetheror converseswithout
samāpannāvā—D. I. 144;A. ILL42
apipanuiiamānopi —M. IHI, 115 hopingfor a secludedplace,keeping Ariyam vā tunhībhāvam natimann
EithertheArahants
or thosewhohave
Heis fit tofollowtheteacher.
evenif themind elsewhere;a +raho + ati —A. IV. 153
enteredinto thepathof arahanthood;
heisbeing
rejected;
any4 Ba(n)dh apekkha;afifia +vi +Dhaé+i +ta, Does not ignore noble silenceeither:
Arh +a +nta,pr.p.; Arh +a+ Ita,
PP. na + ati +Man +ya +ti, pass.pres.
der; sam --ā +Pad +ta,pp.
Pass. Prp. 3, Sg.
Arāiakam cakkam vatteti—A. I. 109
Araham khināsavo vusitavā
Arahattassamaccharāyati—D. IHI.7 Causesto set in motion thesociety Ariyavohārā —A. IV. 307
(Heis )enviousofarahanthood:
katakaranīyo
ohitabhāro
which hasno king (government);the Noble waysof usingthelanguage
anuppattasadattho
macchara+aya 4
ti, denom.
pres. word cakka seemsto have beenused
Ird parikkhinabhavasamyojano
J. $Z. herein the senseof society; Vrt +e + Ariyasavakassa vicikiccha
sammadanhavimutto —M. I. 4; §. ti, caus.pres. 3”. sg. nūppaiiati avyākatavatthusu—A. IV.
Arahantamanukaromi-— A, [, 21] II. 161;Vin. I. 183
68
I emulate
(follow)theArah Arahant
whohasekhausted cankers, Arittho gaddhabadhipubbo—Vin.
ant; any +
Scepticaldoubtdoesnot arise for the
Kr +0+ mi,pres.I. sg. livedhis life, donewhatwasto be
IV. 134 noble disciple in referenceto the
done,putdowntheburden,reached Arittha,a formervulture-hunter; unexplainedmatters;na +u(t) + Pad
.Arahantam A —A,MI;
jivita voropeyya I thehighestgood,destroyedthe
gijjhaghataka, Cy. 869 +ya +ti, pres. 3”. sg.; a+ vit+a+
fetters
of becoming
andliberated
Kr + ta, pp + vatthu
Woulddeprive
anArahant
of life:yj 4 perfectlyby gnosis:Ksi +ta,pp +
Arittaiihāno viharati —A. I. 10
0+ Ruh+e+64, Caus.
opt.3”.gg 4+ Sru+ a, der; Vas +i4 ta,pp. He abideswithoutbeingemptyof Ariyasavako agataphalo
* vanta,
der; Kr +ta,pp.; Kr + ihāna;a '- Ric t ta,pp. t ihāna; vi t vinnatasasano—A. III. 254
Arahantavāde antya,
fut.pp.;o (ava) +Dha+i+
nasamudacarati - Hr +a+ ti, pres. 3”. sg. Thenobledisciplewhohasattained
Vin. IIL. 103 “4,pp.+bhara;anu+pa +Ap+ta, the fruit andclearly understoodthe
Addresses jn termsof PP.* sam(sad) +attha: pari +khina
Arahant;
sam+ Ariyakantehi sīlehi instruction:Sru + aka, der; vi +Jia
UD +&+ Cap+ +bhava 4 sam + Yuj +e +ana,der;
a+ ti,pres,3r4Sg. samannāgato
—D. II. 94;5. IV. 277, + ta, pp.+ sa@sana
Sama, indcl. + (d) +anna + MA
samannāgamanam
Arahantesy
dhammikā Muc +ta,Pp.
Endowedwith moralvirtuesloved Ariyasili kusalasifi —D. I. 115
rakkhāvarana
Buttisusamvihitā
—D by the nobles;paācasīlāni hi (He is) of noble nature,virtuous
II. 75 Arahasiyāmamtvam,navāmam arivasāvakānamkantāni honti, nature; sila + i, der.
In reference
toArah tvamarahasi—D. I. 99
ants,right bhavantarepi
aviiahitabbato,
Cy.
Protectivemeasures You arefit formeor youare unfitfor
havebeentaken 544; Kam +fa, pp.; sam + anu + a + Ariyassa vinaye —D. III. 181; M. I.
up;dhamma +ika me; Arh
Ie der.;rakkhā+ + q+ si, pres. 24 sg.
Gam +ta,pp. 40;A. ITI. 352;IV. 430
āvarana --
guitti,(Protection):
SAM+yj + Sut In thedisciplineof the noble
Dhā+j +ta,pp. Arahā arahatosamānatto—
A. IV.
re KETE 364
ahantomhatiPatijanimha—M. II. Ariyassavinayeloko—A. IV. 430
A
nArahant
mh-
ites €qualtoanArahant:
Theworldin thedisciplineof the
Samana +atta
noble
 Ariyassa Arūpabhavo Arogam Alamettāvatā

Ariyassa
vinayevadho—A. II. I13 Ariye tunhībhāve (mā) pamādo- 5, I Arogam katum —Vin. I. 270 perturbed;a + Labh 1 tvā,absol.;
Deathinthediscipline
ofthenoble II, 273 To cure(to makehim free from pari +tras +ya + ti, pass.pres. 3”.
Don’tbeheedless
on thenoble a
SZ.
disease);Kr +tum: kartum>kattum
Ariyāyaiātiyāiāto —M. II. 103 silence;pa + Mad + 0, pst. 2”. sg. >katum
Bornin thenoblebirth(bornasa Alabbhantyani thanani—A. III. 54
noble);Jan +ta,pp. Ariyena paniiiacakkhuna Arogo assaseri sayamvasi Unobtainablestates:a +Labh +ya +
samannāgato—A. I. 35 yenakāmamgamo—M. IT. 216 aniya,fut. pp.
Eauipped
withthenoblewisdom-eye He would be free from sickness,
III. 441 independent,
master
of himselfand Alamatthadasatarehi
alamattha-
Veryrareis thebirthin thenoble Ariyo hayo pafiiaya sudittho freetogowherever
helikes;As +ya dasataro—A. II. 180
realm;ariya -- āvatana;pati t ā t hotisuppatividdho
—
S. II. 70;A. He is superiortoall otherswhoare
(Skt.yat), opt. 3°. sg.; sert (Skt.
jati; du +labha IHI.184 svairi);savam+vasa+T,der; yena capableof seeingrightandwrong;
Thenoblewayis wellseenandwell +kamam +gamo passitumsamatthā
alamatthadasā,
te
Ariyayapaiiiiayadisva—A. IV. 354 penetrated by wisdom;i +ava atisitvā thitā alamatthadasatarā,Cy.
Havingseen(it)bythenobleinsight; (fromI); su +Dr§ + ta,pp.; su + Arogoparammaranā
—M. II. 228 Ill. 165
Drs +tva,absol. pati+ Vyadh+ta,pp. Becomespermanentafterdeath;
arogoti nicco, Cy. IV. 16 Alamatthadasataroceva pitarā —D.
Ariyo pannaddhajopannabharo Il. 231
IH. 451
visamyutto—A. III. 84 Indeed,heis bettertoseethegood
Theoneendowed
withthenoble
Thenoblewhoseflag(conceit)is IT. 23 than the father; the suffix tara is used
liberation
dropped,
burdenis laiddownandwho Weareunlucky andof little merit with instr.or abl. to makea
keepshimselfaloof: Pat + ta,pp. comparison
Ariyāyavuddhiyāvaddhati—A.IHI,
dhaja;vi + sam + Yuj +ta,pp. Alagaddapariyesanamcaramāno-
80
M. I. 133 Alamattho kule gihi —D. LI. 192
Growsupin thenoblegrowth
Ariyobhāvitindriyo—M. III. 301 Whilewandering
in searchofa snake; One who is fitly to be calleda
A noblewhohasgothis faculties pari + es (from Is) + ana. der.; Car + householderin a family;giha (Skt.
Ariyā hi visamesamā—5. I, 48
developed;
Bhā -- e --i 3-ta, caus.Pp. a +mana,pr. p. grha) + i, der.
Noblesare,indeed,evenin uneven
matters;hi, emph.
p t indriva
Alajjivadena papetha—Vin. IV. 150 Alamariyananadassanavisesam
Ariyo sammāsamādhi saupaniso You causeto brandus asthosewho sacchikarissati —A. III. 64
Ariyūpavādī
brahmacār?
HI.252 TI itipisaparikkhāroitipi —A. IV. 40 haveno moralshame;pa +Ap +e + He will experiencea kind of
The onewhorevilesthenobles Thusthenoblerightconcentration
of tha,caus.pres.2". pl. knowledgeandvision suitablefor the
leading
thehighest
wayoflife;ariya mind
hasastrongfoundation
and nobles;alam + ariva + fidna +
t upavāda2 ī d, a requisites;
sa +upa+ni+ Alajjinamnissayavasanti—Vin. I. dassana+ visesam;sa + acchi +
™ " I, der.;brahn
E a+ i mi
ī, der. Car + ri 91 karissati,fut. 3. sg.
Abide in associationwith thosewho
Ariyefidyepatitihāpitā—4, V. 66 Arunuggam
upadaya
yava haveno moralshame;a +/ajja + 7, Alamettavata,katamettavata —D. I.
TheonewhoCauses toestablish maiihantikā—Vin. IV. 272 der.;ni +Sri +ya, absol.;Vas+a + 207,II. 176
(others)onthenoblewa Fromdawnto noon nti,pres, 3™.pl. Enoughtothisextent,doneto this
y; ariye
nayetisahay
Ipassanake magge,Cy, extent;ettdavatd,
indcl.
V.30;pa + ittha+ape+j +tu,der, Arūpabhavo— A, III. 444 Aladdhānaparitassati—5. II. 194
Therealmof no-form Withoutgetting(it),heis not Alamettāvatā bhante? —5. IV. 290

131
 Alameva
Alam Alam

Is it enoughwiththismuch,venerable Alam,Ananda,
masocimaparidevi
Alam etam sabbam—Vin. IV. 82 It is of no useto you
sir?;alam +ettavatda —
D. II. 144
All this is suitable
Enough
Ānanda,
don'tbesad,don't
Alamevaappamādena
sampādetum Alamdānaiia uyyānabhūmiyā—D. II.
lament;;Suc +a +i, pst.2™.825
UI —A. IV. 134 Alamkatapatiyattā gandhagandhinī 26
pari +Div +a + i, pst. 2". sg.
i ltisindeed
aptlytoworkoutwith —Vin. IV. 18 Now it is of nousetogotothe
mindfulness;
alam+eva;sam+Pad Welladorned andscented;
pati +Yat pleasuregardentoday;alam + iddni +
Alam āvuso,atthi me bhattapaceāsā
+e +tum,caus.inf. + fa, pp. ajja, indel.
—Vin. IV. 77
No, brother,I amwaiting for themeal;
Alamevadanamdatumalameva Alam kamkhitum alam Alamdani me atthakaranena—
S. I.
AS + ti, pres, 3. sg.; pati + asa
punnani katum—A. III. 34 vicikicchitum —A. I. 189 74
i It isindeedgoodtogivealms,it is It is fitly to doubt, it is fitly to It is now uselessfor me to hearthe
Alam āvuso,paripunnomhi —Vin.
indeedgoodtodo good;Da +tum, hesitate;Kamks +i + tum,inf; vi + cases;alam + idāni
IV. 83
inf; Kr +tum,inf, Cit +i +tum.desid.inf.
Noneed,brother,
I amfull;pari +
Pr +ta,pp. +As + mi: meta.,pres. Alam Devadatta,ma te rucci —Vin.
Alamevasabbasamkharesu Alamkita malakita kilanti —Vin. 11.188
I*, sg.
I nibbinditum
—A. IV. 100 III. 249 No, Devadatta,
don't preferthatway:
4 It is indeedappropriate
totakea (Thelittlegirls),beingadorned
and Rue+ya +i, pst.3%.sg.
Alam avuso,ma agamittha—Vin. I.
disinterested
attitudetowardsall garlanded,play; alam + Kr + ta,pp.;
42
i conditionedthings; ni + Vi(n) d+ mala + Kr + ta,pp.; Krid +a + nti, Alam balassamohaya—M. I. 64
Enough friends,
don’tgo;a +Gam+i
i+ tum,inf, prés.3. pl. It is fitly for fool’sconfusion
+ttha,pst.2". pl.
. Alampateyyābhavissanti—D.IHI. 71 Alam Gamani, titthatetam, ma
Alam dvuso,ma Tathagatam Alam brahmana, titthatetam—M. I.
H (Thegirls)willbesuitable
for mametampucchi—S. IV. 306
vihethesi,kilanto Bhagavā—D. II. 198;A. IV. 429
4 marriage;
alam + pati +eyya,der. Enoughheadman,leaveit, don't ask
149 Enoughbrahmin,leaveit alone;
meaboutthis; Prch +ya + i, pst. titthatu,imper.3. sg. +etam
L Alam attano,alamparesam—A. IV. Enough,friend,don't disturbthe
WTā
Sg:
Tathāgata,
tiredis theBlessedOne;
296 Alam bhagini, netam kappati— Vin.
vit Hid+e+s +i, caus.imper.2™.
Fit for himself andothers Alam tava te ayye vutthapitena-
Sg. 11.133;III. 36
Vin. TV.331 No sister,thisis notpermissible;
na
Alam appamadaya —A. I. 217 Venerable,it is uselessto haveyou
Alam āvuso mā soeittha mā pari- + etam;KIp +ya +
ti, pass.pres. 3”.
It is fitly to bemindful;alamis beenordained;vi + u(t) + Stha + dpe
devittha
—Vin. II, 284 Sg.
generally
usedwithingtr.ordat: + i+ ta, caus. pp.
Enough,brothers,don'tcry, don't
lament;āvuso,indcl., usedin sg. Alam bhavissayadidam yuddhaya -
AlamAnanda,
mi terucci—A. IV. Alam te idha vasena—A. III. 366,
andpl. for courteousaddress; S. V. 146
275 Vin.III. 184
Suc+a +i+ ttha,PSt:24.pi; Hewouldbefitly forthefight;Bhi +
Enough
Ānanda,
don'tprefer
that
Pari + Div +.a + 54+ttha, pst.
Thereis nomeaning
ofyour stayhere a ti t ssa,cond.,3". sg.;yadidam,
way:alam,indcl.usedtogivethe
2"4,
pi. indel.
meaningof refusalor
Alamteettakamiīvikāya—Vin. I.
appropriateness; mé,prohibitivep,
Alam upagantum—5. V. 441 270;II. 182 Alambhikkhavemabhandanam ma
usedwith pst.or imper.;Ruc +ya +
ltisfitlytoundergo
(thepunishment); Thismuchisenoughforyourliving kalahammaviggahammavivadam
1,pst.3”.sg.
upa +Gam+ tum,inf. —M. III. 153
Alam te tena—
S. I. 104 Enough,bhikkhus.lettherebeno
 Alam
Allam Allavattho Avannam

quarrelling,
brawling,wrangling
and vippatisaraya—Vin. II. 19
Allavattho allakeso —Vin. II. 126 Avakujjo papatami —M. I. 80, 246
dispute It is indeedfitly foryouto be The one with wet clothe and wet hair I fall facedown;pa +Pat +a +mi,
remorsefulandrepentant:yi +pati pres. 1". sg.
Alam me,rafifiovahotu—M. II. 54
+Smr +a, der. Allāya pathaviyā nikkhittam—A. I.
I don’tneedit, letit befor theking;
Hu (Bhi) +a +tu,imper.3”. Sg. 32;V. 212 Avakkārapātim dhovitvā —M. III.
Alam hi te Vacchaahnanaya,alam Putonwetground;ni +Ksip +ta,pp. 157;Vin. I. 157
Ssammohaya —M. I. 487 Havingwashed therefusebin;Dha+a
Alamyojanagananani dassanaya
It is no wonder,Vaccha,thatyou don't Allena gomayenapathavim + i+ tvā, absol.
gantumputamsenapi —M. IIT. 80
undestand andthatyou areconfused;a opunjitva —A.V. 234
Itis worthjourneyinga numberof
+Jia +ana,der. ; sam +Muh +a, Havingsmeared
thefloorwithwet Avagandakārakamna bhunjitabbam
yojanas,evenwitha travellingbagon
der.
theshoulder,to seeit:puta + amsena cow-dung;o +punj (fromProfich) + —Vin. If. 214
+ api; variant reading is Putosena; i + tva, absol. Should noteatstuffingthecheeks;
Alabhakenapibhattamnabhuiijati Bhu(ii)j + i + tabba,fut. pp.
pPulosanti
pātheyvamCy. IV. 139:
—A. IV. 139 Alam abhininnameyya—M. 1.234
apiputamsenapi,
A, II, 183
He doesnot eat food for the reas Wouldcausetoprojecttheclaw;abhi Avaiānāti no patiiānāti —A. I. 202
on of small loss;a +Labh +a +ka, +ni +Nam + e +eyya,caus.opt. 3”. (He) denies, does not acknowledge;
Alamvacanāya —M. IHI.62;S. II.
der. Sg.
115;A. IV. 37; V. 84 'og ava + Jan + na@+ fi, pres. a4 $0:
(He is) fitly for talk pati +Jan +na+ti, pres.3”.sg.
Alābhāyaparisakkati—A. IV. 345 Alam viharati bhikkhthi
Alam vatidamkulaputtassa Hegoesaboutformakinga loss;pari bhikkhunīhi upāsakehi upāsikāhi Avajanitva patijanati patijanitva
padhānatthikassa padhānāya—M. I +Svask+a +ti,pres,374Sg. rannahi rajamahamattehi titthiyehi avaiānāti—Vin. II. 85;IV. I
167 ; titthiyasavakehi—A. I. 279 Havingdenied(he)acknowledges:
Thisis, certainly,suitablefor theone Alippamānomīlhena —A. IIL 241
Beingmixedwith bhikkhus, havingacknowledged(he)denies
who'S Interested in thepractice:vata Without
beingcontaminated
by bhikkhunis,malelay disciples,
indcl. +idam;Padhana+attha+ excrement;
a + Lip +ya + māna,
femalelaydisciples,kings,chief Avanjha bhavissati,saphala,
ika, der. Pass. Pp.
ministers,leadersof other religious saudraya —M. I. 271
sects,disciplesof otherreligious Will notbebarren,fruitfuland
Alam vodhammapamoditanam Allacivarampattharitvaviharam sects,(TheBlessedOne)abides; yielding
satamsitamsitamattāya—A, i 261 pāvisi —Vin. IV. 282
raāhāhi, a special form; tittha +
It 18fitly foryou,whohave
been Havingspread
outthewetrobe
iva, der, Avannam kattukamo —Vin. IV. 38
rejoicing
overtheDhamma. tosmile (she)wentintothedwelling place;
Desiringtobringaboutdisgrace;
Justforthesakeofsmiling;
45+nta pa +Str +i +ta, absol.; pat
Avakassantivavakassantiāveni- kattum+ kadmo
Prp.,gen. pl. ; dhamma+pa+ Mud Vis+i,pst,374Sg.
kammamkaronti, —A. V. 74
tai 31g Pp.; Smi +ta,Pp.
Theydragaway,keep(themselves) Avannambhanamanam
nivareti—D.
a kattham
sasneham
—M. I. apartandperformseparate III. 187
Alamsāiīvosabrah
macarinam
~
A,
41 ecclesiasticalacts;ava + Krs +ya + Preventstheone speakingill; Bhan +
II. 81,191 Wet and moist wood; sa + sneham
nti,pres,3. pl. ; vi +ava +kassanti a t māna,pr.p.; ni+ Vr+e+ti,
Theonewhoisfitl
y forco-celibates caus,pres.3™.sg.
to livetogethe Allam
n kusamutthimada
kus Hhim ādāya—
A. V.
T, alam + sa + djivo Avakuiiam nipātetha—D. II. 336
234 āya —A. V.
Lay (him ) facedown; ava +kujja Avannam bhasissamitivannameva
Alamhitekukkuceāya,
alam Havingtakenahandful
of freshkusa
bhāsati—M. I. 68
grass
pres2™ pl: ThinkingthatI will blamehim,he
 Avannarahassa
Avassutā Avassuto Avijjanivarananam

respected;
a +Vand +i + ya,fut.pp.;
Yut. Is. sg. iti fallenin love; sam +Raj +ta,pp.; Breaksignorance,causesto give
Kr +tabba,fut.Pp.
apa+Iks +a +vantu,
der.;pati + rise to wisdom andexperiences
Avannārahassa
avannambhāsitā- Badh +ta, pp.*+citta Nibbana;Bhi(n)d +a +ti, pres. 3”.d
Avabhūtā
eaparābhūtaea—M.II.
A. II. 100 sg.; u(t) + Pad +e +ti, caus.pres.
210
Theonewhospeaksill of another
who Avassutoavassutaya—Vin. IV. 212 SEL
Disgracedandcondemned;ava +Bhi
is blameworthy;
avanna+araha; An excitedmanwith anexcited
" ld, pp.; para +Bhi +ta,pp.
Bhas + i + tu. der, woman;avassutātintā kilinnā, Cy. Avijjam bhecchati,vijjam
901;ava +Sru +ta, pp. uppadessatinibbanam
Avannebhafifiamane
kupitohoti-
Avamgam karonti—Vin, II. 267
sacchikarissati —A. I. 8
Vin.I. 70 Decorate
thecornersof eyes;
Avapuranam adaya viharena (He) will split ignorance,will cause
Becomes
angrywhenbeingcriticised: akkhiahianiyoavamgadese
vihāram āhindati —A. IV. 374 to arisewisdom,andekperience
Bhan+ya +mana,Pass.pr.p.;Kup adhomukhamlekhamkaronti, Cy.
Havingtakenthekey he walks from Nibbana;Bhid + ssati (Skt.syati),fut.
+ i+ fa, pp. 1293 oneresidenceto another;@+ Hind + 3”. sg.; u(t) +Pad +e +ssati, caus.
a +ti, pres. 3". sg. fut. 3. sg.; sa +acchi (=akkhi) +
Avatthusmimakārane Avaruddhanama \ uccanti—D. II.
karissati
patimokkhamthapenti 204
—Vin. I. 170; Avasayaparisakkati—A. IV. 345
Il. 240 Theyarecalledenemies;ava + Rudh
He goesaboutdiscouragingmonks Avijja annana sammohavipaccetha
(They)causeto Suspend
therecitalof * ld,pp.; Vac +ya +nti, PaSS.pres.
fromstayingin the residence;pari + —M.ll. 219
Patimokkha
withnoground,noreason: I” i,
Svask +a +ti, pres. 3”. sg. You mistakenlybelievebecauseof
Stha+dpe+ nti,caus.pres,3r4plI
ignorance,
lackof knowledgeand
Avalahiechaddeti—Vin. IV. 266
Avikkhambhiyo kenaci confusion;viparītatosaddahatha,
Ay
antidakkhinapatho Throwsawayon thetrail unused
manussabhitena—D. III. 147 vipallāsagāhamvā ganhātha, Cy. IV.
appabhikkhuko —Vin. I, 195
Couldnotbesubduedby anyhuman 4; vi +pati t e +(from1) tha,pres.
Avaiti, ontheroadtotheSouth,has AValekhanakatthamna hoti —Vin. II. >
being;vi +Skambh+ i +ya,fut. pp. 2,
Veryfewbhikkhus 141
Thereis no Scrapingwood; ava +Likh
Avigatarago avigatachandoavigata- Avijjagataya pajaya andabhitaya
Avantisuviharati " € T āna,caus.der
Kuraraghare pemoavigatapipasoavigatatanho - pariyonaddhaya —Vin. III. 3-4
Papātepabbate
~Vin.I. 194 S. III. II Among thepeoplewho areignorant,
Abidesonthe AI khanapidharo
na hoti—Vin. IL.
mountain calledPapata Theonewhosepassionhasnotgone bornofegg, andsurrounded(by
atKuraraghara
"In thekingdomof out,desirehasnotgoneout,affection ignorance);ande bhiitdyajataya
Avanti Thereis no holderfor scraping
hasnotgoneout, thirsthasnotgone sanjataya,Cy. 138;pari + 0 + Nah +
outandcravinghasnotgoneout;a+ ta, PP.
oo viharatiKuraraghare Av:
āsesam
SAG.
ā dāya
ādhāw
pakkamanti
—A.HI.
I avattePabbate~ IHI. 12 vi +Gam +ta,pp.
222
AbidesonPavatta mountainat Avijjanirodha asavanirodho—A. III.
ae H
H:
takentheremainder
; a i
(of food)
Kuraragharain thekingdomofAvanti: Avieinitvāuposathamkaronti- 414
theygo away; ava + Si;
Cy. takestf +a, der.; + Vin. I. 133 Influxes ceaseto exist due to the
258 5 Ineterm Papate
Papāia pabbate,II Dé +ya, absol.;pa I
+Kram +a + nti, They performUposathaceremony cessationof ignorance
Pres,34 pj.
makingno investigation;a + vi + Ci +
any katabbo—Vin. II, 262 na + i +tvd, absol.
Avassuta nama sar
eshould
bemade
ūnWorthy
tobe atta apekkhava tanhāsamyoianānam—A. 1.223
Patibaddhacitta-
Vin. IV, 214 Avijjam bhindati, vijjam uppadeti, Ofthe beings,coveredwith ignorance
Excited Means inf
atuated,
hopefuland nibbānam sacchikaroti —S. V. 49 andyokedwith craving

137
 Avijjanivarananam
Avijjanivarananamsattanam
tanhāsamyoianānam sandhāvatam
samsaratam—5. III. 149
Ofthe beings.coveredby ignorance,
yokedbycravingandrunninground
thecycleof birthanddeath;avijja +
nivarana;tanha+ samyojana;sam
+Dhay+a +nta,prp., gen.pl.; sam
+Sr +a +nta,pr.p.,gen.pl.
Avijjapahamsaharamvadami,no
anaharam—A. V. 113
I say,evenignoranceis witha cause,
notwithouta cause;avijjam+api +
aham;sa +Ghara;Vad+a +mi,
pres. 1"sg.; an +Ghara
Avijjapubbamgama akusalānam
dhammānamsamāpattiyā— A. V.
214
lgnoranceis theprecursorof
committingunwholesome things;sam
+@+Pad+ ti, der.
Aviiiāvirāgāviiiuppādā— D. Hi.215;
M. 1.67
Becauseof theabandonment of
ignoranceand thearisingof wisdom:
vi +Raj +a, der; wiiā +u(t) +Pad +
a, der.
Avijjavisadosamehandarāga-
byāpādenaruppati—M. II. 256
Poisonof ignoranceis increasedor
stirredupby lustandhatred;ruppatiti
kuppati,Cy:IV, 55;aviiiā -- visa +
dosa; chandaraga+ byāpāda; Ruh
* ya +ti,pass.pres.3". Sg.
Avijja vihataviiiā uppannātamo
vihatoālokouppanno— Vin, IHI.4
Ignorance hasbeendestroyed,
Avidire Avidūre Avisamvādanā
wisdomhasarisen;darknesshasbeen Il. 141 Absenceof remorseis forjoy; a +vi
destroyed,light hasarisen;vi +Han +pati +Sr or Smr + a, der.; pa +
This ideacameto him nearthe
+fa,pp.; u(t) +Pad +ta,pp. mangogrove; avidire andsantike Mud +ya, der. +attha
areusedassynonyms.;
etam(etad)
Aviliūpakkilitthā pafifia na + a+ Hi (Bhii)+ ats +i, pst. 3”. sg Avimana devi hohi —Vin. 1.343
bhaviyati—A. I. 61 O queen,don’t be sad;a + vi + mana;
The insight,pollutedby ignorance,is Avidūre nisinno hoti —M. I. 39 Hii (Bhi) +a +hi, imper.2" sg.
notcultivated;avijja +upa +Kli§ + He hasbeensittingnot too faraway;ni
ta,pp.; Bhii + e +iva + ti, caus.pass. +Sad +ta,pp. Avimuttam va cittam vimuccati —A.
res,3".99
pres. a
8.
V. 343
Avidūre rodamāno thito —Vin. II. The mind unliberatedis liberated
Avihhātaāca
viiānāti—A. IHI.361 199 either;a + vi + Muc + ta,pp.; vi +
Healsounderstands
what is not yet He hasbeenstandingnearby,crying; Mue+ya +ti,pass.pres.3. sg.
understood;
a +vi +Jia +ta,pp.; vi Rud +a +mana,pr.p.; Stha +i + ta,
+Jan + nd + ti, pres. 3. sg.
pp. Avivataficeva vivaranti, anuttani-
kataficauttanikaronti,
Avinnhapitattha cassahonti savaka Avinicchinitvā amulā mūlam
anekavihitesuca kamkhatthaniyesu
saddhamme—D. III. 121
gantvā—Vin. I. 358 dhammesukamkham pativinodenti
His disciplesarenot madeproficient Withoutmakinga decision,without
—D.Il. 285;A. FV.152
inmeaning
ofthe goodteaching;
a+ goingto theroot cause;a + vi +ni(s) Open whatis notyetopenedup,
vi +Jfid +dpe +i +ta, caus,pp.+
+ Ci + nd+ i + iwā,absol. explainwhatis notyetexplained,
attha;ca + assa; Sru + aka, der.
dispell doubton variousdoubtful
Avipakkavipakam
papakammam
- things;a + vi + Vr + ta,pp.; vi + Vr.
Avifiium purisaviggaham
A. II. 196 +a + nti, pres. 3°. pl.; uttdna
upanisīdāpetvā—Vin. IV. 22
Evil action,thefruit of which hasnot becomes
uttanibecauseof theroot
Havingcaused
a stupidperson(amale
yetripened;a +vi + Pace+ fa, pp.; vi Kr; an +eka + vi + Dha + i + ta,pp.;
form)to sit nearby;a + vi +Jad +@
+Pac + a, der. kamkha+ thana + iva, der.; pati +vi
der; upa +ni +Sad + dpe + tva,
+ Nud +e +nti, caus.pres. 3”. pl.
caus.absol.
Avipassako kusalānamdhammānam
—A.III. 300 Avivaradanto —M. II. 137
Avitakko avicāro samadhi —S. IV.
Theonewhodoesnotseewholesome Theonewhohasnogapbetween the
360
thingsdirectly;a +vi +passa+ka, teeth;a + vivara + danta
Concentrationof mind with no initial
der.
andsustainedapplication
Avivittā Sāvatthi arahantehi—M. II.
Avippatisāro upadahātabbo—A. IHI. 196
Avitakkovicāramatto
samādhi—S
196 Sāvatthiis notdevoidof Arahants;a +
IV. 360
Absenseof remorseshould be vi + Vic + ta,pp.
Concentrationof mindwith no initial
created in mind;upa+Dhā-- tabba,
applicationbutwith a bit of sustained
fut.pp. Avisamvādanā mittānam āhāro —A.
application
V. 136
Avippatisāro pamujjattho —A. V. Non- contradictionis the food
Avidūreambavanassa
etadahosi
—M.
313 forfriends;a +vi +sam+ Vad+
 Avissatthampi
Asakkhi Asatiyava
e + ana, caus. der.
appassuto, Cy.255; Vac + ya +
mana,Pass,pr. p. Givesawaycarelessly Accusewith untrue,vain, falseand
Avissatthampihoti aviiieyyam non-factualstatements;
abhi +a +
taramanassa bhāsitam—M. IHI. 234 Asakkhibhikkhiisainapetum- Khya +nti,intens.pres.3”.pl.
Aveccappasadena
Samannāgato—D,
Sayingofa fastspeakeris indistinct Vin.I. 10
11.93;M. IHI.253;S. Ii. 69;IV. 271
andunintelligible;
@+yj +Sj +ta, (He) was able to make the bhikkhus Asata dukkham upadahati—
A. I.
Endowed withfaithonunderstanding;
PP. +api; a+ vi +Jia +epa; der.; convince;
a +Sak +s +i, pst.3”.sg.; 201
ava + I (t) +ya, absol.+Pasada;sam
tara(Skt.tvara)+mana,prp. ; Bhas sam +Jia +ape + tum,caus. inf. Causespainby makinga false
+ anu + @ + Gam +ta, Pp.
+i+ ta,pp. statement;asatā,abhūtena,
Asacchikatassasacchikiriyāya —M. aviiiamānena,Cv.ll. 3l8; upa t
Avici mafiiiephuto bhavissati Averenavera sammanti—Vin. I. 345
Hatredsarepacifiedby non-hatred: ITI.79;A.I. 243;II. 148;III. 101 Dhā 1 a3ti, pres. 3'".sg.
manussehi— D. III. 75
Sam+ya + nti, Pass.pres. 3”. pl. To ekperiencewhathasnotyet been
(This)wouldhavebeenpervaded by
experienced;a + sa + acchi +kata; Asati antārayevitthārena —Vin. I.
thepeopleasif Avici,thepurgatory:
Avyattokimkaranīyesu
—A. III, 258 acchi =akkhi 113
awicimahānirayoviyanirantara
Theonewho is unskillful in what When thereis no danger,
Pūrito bhavissati,Cy. 855; phuto:
shouldbedone Asajjhayamala manta—A. IV. 195 (Pātimokkha should be recited) in
Sphur+ta,pp. PI
The Mantrasunrehearsedbecome detail; asati antaraye,loc. absl.
Avyāpaiihamlokam upapaiiati—A. rusty;a + sajjhaya (Skt.svādhyāya)
Avitikkammasamadanam
IV. 244 + mala Asati amanasikaro tasmim puggale
Samadiyami —Vin, iv. 319
(He) goesto theworld free from āpaiiitabbo —A. III. 186
I observe
a non-violable
obsery
ance; obstruction;
upa+Pad +ya +ti Asahiātassamaggassasanjaneta- Oneshouldforgetthatperson:a +
a+ Vi+ ati+
i Kram+ ya Sut.pp.;
bp a sf pres.3". sg. M. IIL.8 sati; @+ Pad +ya + i + tabba,fut.
Sam + @+ a had
tya+mi,pr. [+ Sg. Theonewho makestheunknownpath pp.
Avyapajjhadhimutto
—A. IHI.376; known;a + sam +Jan + ta,pp.; sam
Avitivattasakkāyam—A.II. 34
Vin. I. 183 +Jan + n@+ e +tu, caus.der. Asati kappiyakarake samam
Thosewhohavenotg
a ti: one bey calf
yond self: gahetvaparibhunjitum —Vin. I. 206
ati + Vrt + ta,pp
Theonewho is inclinedtowardsnon-
obstruction:yj +a + Badh + Asahiiātassa
maggassa
saiiiānetā- To takebyhimselfandtouseitwhen
; va; der; 5.1.191 thereis no one to prepare;asati: a +
AvutthitayaParisaya~Vin, | 129 adhi + Muc + ta, Pp. ,
Beforethe adjournment
of the Introducerof anunintroducedpath;a As +nta,prp., loc.sg.;kappa+iya,
assembly; @+pj +Uu()+Stha+j + Avyāsittacittassa der.;Kr +aka,der.; samam,indcl.;
pāmuiiamiāyati- + tu, der. Grh +e +tva,absal.
fa,pp.; loc. abs]. S. IV. 78
Gladnessis born for theone whose
Avusitamtenabr mindis unsullied:@+ Vit G+Sic * Asahiia sammoho—M. II. 231 Asatikirāyam ..vinā nāma —5. IV.
IV. 43 ahmacariyam
—§ Non- identificationis totalconfusion: 197
Ka, fa,pp.; pa + Mud +ya, der; Jan +
Thehighestway
of life } 74 +ti, pass.pres, 304SZ. sam + Muh +a, der. This luteis unfaithfulor of poor
accomplished
byhim;@
14S notbeen quality;a +sati+kira +ayam;
Pp. tia 'tit:a Asathohotiamayavi— M. II. 128 asatītilāmakādhi-vacanam, Cy.III.
Asakkaceakatānamkammānam
vipāko— A. iv. 393 , Theonewhois notcraftyand 67; asakkirāyam-tevt.
ara tavādena vuccamāno—p 1.90 Riniti ‘ 4 deceitful;
a +maya+vi,der.
Tuitionof theactioncarelesslydone;
€ingaddressed
jn termsof A Vi +Pac +a, dep ; Asatiya pavittho —Vin. I. 298
untrained: i :
rained: avusitauāasikkhito Asata tuccha musa abhiitena Enteredforgetfully;
pa + Vis+ta,pp.
Asakkaccam
deti—A. II. 171 abbhācikkhanti—
D. III. 34; M. I.
140 Asatiyāvanibbetheti—A. IV. 192
 Asatthika
(He)evadestheissueasif hehas
forgotten;
asatiya+iva; ni + Vest+
e -tti,pres.3”.sg.
Asatthikacarikam caranti—Vin.
IV. 295
Go ona tourwithouthavinga caravan;
a +sattha+ ika, der.
Asaddhammam gamadhammam
vasaladhammam dutthullam
odakantikamrahassam
dvayamdvayasamāpattim
samāpailissasi—Vin. II. 21
Youwill enterupona malpractice,
uponacommon
practice,
upona low
practice,upona wickedpractice,upon
a practiceendingwithwater,upona
secretpractice,upona practiceto be
der.;raha(s)+ya, der.;sam+ @+
Pad+ya +i +ssasi,
fut,24 Sg.
Asaddhammavutthapetva
saddhammepatitthāpessāmi—A.
IHI.115,200
Havingpulledthemupfromfalse
doctrineI will establishthemin the
truedoctrine;vi +u(t) +Stha+ape
+(va,caus.absol.
Asaddhamme ativelam patavyatam
āpaiiimsu—D. III. 89
(They)spentmoretime,engagingin
animmoralact;Pa +lavya+ td,der;
a+ Pad+ya +imsu,pst.3".pl.
Asantamabhūtamuttarimanussa-
dhammamullapati—Vin. ITI, 90
Claimsa state
whichisnottrue,not
factual,
andwhichisabov
e theordinary
human
experience:
a+ As + nia, pr.
Asapatti Asappāyam Asammukha
p.; a+ Bhii + ta, pp.; u(t) + Lap +a 250 Asamāhitam vibbhantacittam—A.
+ ti, pres. 3". sg. Leadinga householdlife withoutco- 11.30
wives;sapatti(Skt.sapatni);adhi+a The one whose mind is turned back,
Asantinamaāpatti anaiihāpannāva + Vas+a+ nta +t, prp. notconcentrated;
vi +Bhram+ta,pp.
hoti apajjitva va vutthita —Vin. I.
103 Asampajano.....samkharam
Asappayamupanameti—A. IIL. 144
Non existingoffencemeansan abhisamkharoti —A. II. 158
Offerswhat is unsuitable;upa +Nam
offencenon- committedor the One accumulatesenergieswithout
+e+ ti, caus. pres. 3. sg.
offenceatonedfor afterthe beingwellaware;a +sam+pa +Jan
commitment; a +As +nta +i pr.p.; Asabbhāhi pharusāhi vācāhi + a, der.;abhi + sam(s)+ Kr + o + ti,
a +Pad + ti, der.;an + adhi + @+ akkosati paribhāsati —5. I. 221 pres.3”.sg.
Pad +ta,pp.; @+ Pad +ya +i + tva, Withindecentandharshwords(he)
absol.;vi +u(t) +Stha +i + ta,pp. scoldsandreviles:a + sabha +ya, Asambhogamsamghenakarotu -
der.;a +Kru€ -- at ti,pres.3. sg.: Vin. II. 125
Asantuttha pari +Bhas+a +ti,pres.3”.sg. Makehimunfitforsharing(receiving)
adhikaranaviipasamanena
—Vin. II. materialsupport;a +sam + Bhuj + a,
98 Asamayenabhuttam anojavantam der.;Kr +0 +tu,imper.3™.sg.
Beingunhappy
withthesettlement
of hoti—A. III. 260
thedispute;a +sam + Tus + ta,pp. Thefoodeatenatimproper time Asammatāya bhūmiyā nisinna
becomesnotnutritive;Bhuj +ta,pp.; patimokkham assosum—Vin. I. 107
Asantutthitakusalesudhammesu- an + oja + vanta,der. Sittingona ground,notagreed
upon,
A. 1.50 (they) listenedto the recitalof
Discontentment
in wholesomethings; Asamayo
padhanaya
—A.III. 66 Patimokkha(codeof rules),a + sam
a+ sam+ Tus + ti + ta, der. Impropertime for striving +Man+ta,pp.; ni +Sad+ta,pp.;a
+Sru +s +um,pst.3™.pl.
Asantutthiyāsamvattantino Asamavekkhitvāorimamtīram—M.
santutthiyā
—Vin. II. 258 1.225 Asammatāya sīmāya atthapitāya-
It leadsto dissatisfaction,not to
Withoutekamining
carefullytheshore Vin. I. 110
Satisfaction;
sam+ Vrt+a +ti.pres. of thisside;ora + ima, der; a +sam When theboundarywasnot
3 96,
+ava+Iks+i +tva,absol. agreed
uponandnotdemarcated;
atthapitāvātiaparicchinnāya, Cy.
Asanthavavissasi
—A. IIL. 136
Asamavekkhitva
parimamtiram- 1051;a t Stha + Gpe+ i + ta, caus.
Theonewhotruststhosewho areunfit
M. I, 225 pp. loc.absl.
foracquaintance:
@+santhava+
Withoutexaminingcarefully theshore
vissasa + T,der.
of theotherside;para +ima,der. Asammato gihīnam pakāsesi—Vin.
Il. 298
Asandiddho caakkhati—Vin. II. 202
Asamāhitam eittamsamādahissati
- Withoutbeingagreedupon(he)gave
Speakswithout anyshade
of doubt;a +
A. IV. 344 information
tothehouseholders;pa +
sam+Dih +ta,pp.;a +Khya+ti,
Hewill concentrate
themindwhichis Kas +e +s +i, caus.pst.3%.sg.
Pres.3". sg.
unconcentrated;
a +sam+@+Dha+
i+ ta,pp.; sam +@+ Dha +a+ir Asammukha katam — Vin. II. 3
Asapattīagāramalihāvasantī
—S. IV.
äsati,fut, 3. se. Carriedout in absence
 Asammohadhammo
Asieam mam Asitapitakhayitassa Asubhanimittanuyogamanuyuttassa

Asammohadhammo satto—M. I. 83 Asallakkhetvāpi

A beingof unconfused
nature
Asammohadhimutto
—A. III. 376;
Vin.I. 183
Theonewhoisintentuponnon
delusion;a +sam+Muh +a, der:
adhi+Muc+ta,pp.
Asamkaccikagamampindaya
pavisi—Vin.IV. 345
(She)wenttothevillageforalms
collection,withoutvest:@+samkacci
+ka,der;pa +@+ Vig+7.28638
Sg.
Asamkharaparinibbayihoti —A. IV.
72
(He) becomescompletelycool
naturally(withoutanyattempt);
asamkhārena appayogena,Cy. IV.
39;a +sam(5) +Kr+a, der
r+ pari
tnit+ Va+ya+i+ der.
Asamkheyyoappameyyo
mahapufifiakkhandho
—A.III. §2
Uncountableandimmeasurable
massof
merit;a +sam+Khya +eyya,der.;
a * pama+eyya,der.
Asamvutehiindriyehi—§, ni. 271;
A. II. 125;IHI,9s
Withunguarded faculties;
a +sam+
Vr +ta,pp. . jana
Asayamkaramāparamkāram
adhiccasamuppannam S$. Ha
Not Wroughtby theself.notbyothers
butoriginated
accidentally:
@+tue
+Kr +a, der: adhicca+ Ly
samuppanna: adhicea,indcl.7
sam
U() +Pad +tq,Pp. : +
nivesanam
Asitapitakhayitassa Asitisakatavahe hirafiiam ohaya -
pavisanti—Vin. II. 215
uccārapassāvo...nissando—A. IHI. Vin. 1.185
Enterthehousewithoutmuch Havingabandoned eightycartloadof
32
consideration;
asallakkhetvā, gold; dve sakatabhārāeko vāho, Cy.
Thecall of natureis thenatural
absol. --api; pa -- Mif -- a +nti, 1083; o t Ha +ya, absol.
outcomeof what is eaten,drunk,
pres.3. pl.
andmunched;As +i + ta,pp.; Pt +
i+ ta,pp.; Khad + i +ta, pp.; ni + Asīsakavandhamvehāsam
Asallinena cittena vedanam gacchantam(addasam)—Vin. III.
Syand -- a + der.
aiihavāsayi
—D. II. 157 107
Withanunsluggish mind(he)caused I sawa headlessbodygoing in thesky;
Asitavyābhamgimohāya —A. III. 5
toendurethepain;a +sam+ Li+ ta,
Havinggivenupsickleandpole a +sisa + kavandha
Pp.; adhi +a+ Vas t ava (e) - i,
(with baskets) (kaja); o +Ha +ya,
caus, pst. 3, sg,
absol. Asuci bhante matugamassa
naggiyamjeguccham patikkulam -
Asassatamviparināmadhammam-
Asitavyabhamgimsuddassa Vin. 1.293
M. II. 73 Venerablesir,a woman’snudityis
sandhanam—M. II. 180
Non-eternalandsubjectto change;
Sickleandpole(withbaskets)
is ugly,disgustingandloathsome;nagga
vi +pari +Nam+a, der.+dhamma
sudda’s(outcast’s)own wealth;asita + iva, der.;jiguccha + a, der.; pati +
vi - ā t Bhahi t i kūia
Asahatthadeti—A. IIL. 171
Doesnotgive with (his/her)own
Asite pīte khāyite sāyite —D. 1.70 Asueimuccati—Vin. I. 294;III.
hands;a + sq + hattha + 4, instr;
In whatis eaten,drunk,chewed,and 251
Da +e +ti,pres.374Sg.
enjoyed;Svad + e + i + ta, caus.pp. Semenisemitted;
Muc +ya +fi,
pass.pres. 3. sg.
Asadharanafanena
samannagato
-
Asilokabhayam —A. IV. 364
A. HII.441
Fearofdisgrace;a +siloka+bhaya Asufifiolokoarahantehiassa—D. II.
Endowedwithanuncommon
151
knowledge
Asilomam purisam vehasam Theworldwouldnotbeemptyof
gacchantam(addasam)—Vin. III. Arahants;a +suffia;As +ya (Skt.
Asādhāranam puthuiianehi—M. I.
106 yat),opt.3™.sg.
323;A. II. 128
I sawa manwith sword-likehair going
Notcommon
withworldlings;
puthu+
inthesky;gaccha+nta,prp.; a+ Asuddhe suddhaditthi —Vin. III. 166
Drs +am,pst.I". sg. Theonewhohastheviewof purityon
whatis notreallypure;a +Sudh+ta,
Asicammam gahetvā dhanukalāpam
Asissa vijjotalati —Vin. I. 131 pp.;Drs +ti +i, der.
sannayhitvā
—M. I. 86;II. 99;Vin.
Swordof this manshines;asi + assa;
11.192
vi +Dyut+a +ti,pres.3”.sg. Asubhanimittanuyogamanuyuttassa
Havingtakentheswordandthe
shield,having
armouredwiththebow
Asītivassasahassāniāyuppamānam- 134
andthequiver:Grh +e +tvé,absol.;
D.II.3 To reflectonthesignof beautyisa
sam+Nah+4
‘a +i + tvd,meta. Spanof life is eightythousand
years; thorn(obstacle)to theone who has
abso].
ayu +pamana beenpractising
thesignof impurity;
 Asubhabhavanaya Assaddham Assāmanakam
Assaddha

anu+ Yuj+ta,pp.; anu+ Yuj+a, Bhidt ā t pst.3'd,sg. —D.II. 37;M. I. 168;II. 261;S. I.
Assaddhaappasannadubbuddhino -
der.
Vin.II. 195 137;Vin. 1.21
Asmimānasamugghātāyasamvattati (They) decline for thereasonof not
Thosewhohaveno faith,nogood
Asubhabhavanaya
vannambhāsati- —A.Il. 325
feelingandare unintelligent;a + hearingthedhamma;
in conjunction
Vin.IIL.68 It leadsto totaldestructionofthe
saddha;a +pasanna; du +buddhi with der. suffix, ta and tta, object is
Praisesthecultivationof mindon conceitof * | am’;As +mi,pres. usedin thegen.;a +Sru +ana +td,
impurities;
Bhas+a +ti,pres.3%Sg. I". sg.+mana;sam +u(t) 3 ghan
Assaddhiyampariyutthaya titthati der.;pari + Ha +ya +nti, pres. 3”.
* fa,pp.; sam + Vrt +a + ti, pres. pl.
Asubhasannaparicitena
cetasa—A. rere.
—A.IHL.S
3”. sg.
Unfaithfulnesspervades;a +saddha
IV. 46
+iva,der:; pari +u(t) + Stha +ya, Assasmimpi sikkhati —A. IHI. 327
Withthemindpractisedon theideaof Asmimlokeparamhica—S. I, 32
absol. Trainshimself
in horseriding;
impurities;a +subha+sania +pari In thisworldand thenext sikkhati:desid.fromSak;cp.fut 3”.
+Ci +ta,pp.
Assaputam
khandheāropetvā—
A. II. sg.form ofSak, as Sakkhati,Sn. 319
Assakeloko sabbampahāya and sagghasi, Sn. 834
Asubhanupassikayeviharati—A. 242
gamanīyam—M. II. 68
IHI.83 Causingto puta bagof stoneon
Theworldhasnothingof its own, one Assadaficaadinavanicanissarananca
Heabidesobservingimpurityin the theshoulder;Cy. takesassa to
should
goleaving
everything
behind;
a yathābhūtampaiānanti —S. II. 176;
body;asubha+anu +Passa+ f, der. meanbhasma,(ashes)whenit says
taka; pa --Hā --ya, absol.; Gam -- S. ITI. 173,nappaiānāti
"assaputanti
chārikābhandikam
",
aniya,fut.pp.
Asuradeveabhiyamsu— §. I. 216;A. Cy.III. 216; assa is similar to They reallyandtruly understand
(their)
IV. 432,abhiyimsu asmain Skt. which meansstone,cp. taste,danger
andtheescape;
@+Svad
Assatthassamille abhisambuddho-
Asuras(rivalsof gods)marched Skt.AsmakawithAssakain Pali, + a, der; ni (s)+ Sr t ana, der.;
D. IL.4
againstgods;a +sura;abhi + Ya + " SoAssakassavisaye—Alakassa yathabhiitam,adv.; na +pa + Jan +
Enlightened
underthefootofa fig- na +nti,pres.3”.pl.
imsu;pst.3”.pl, samāsane,Sn.977; the terms,
tree;abhi +sam + Budh + ta,pp.
mosalla,assaputaandupavaiia
Asurepaccuyyāhi—S. I,217 whichoccur in thesamecontext, Assadaditthiya pahanaya
Assatthāassāsāya
dhammamdeseti
Go againstAsuras;pati +u(t)+ Ya + showthattheyaredifferentmodes aniccasannabhavetabba—A. III. 447
—A.IV. 182
hi,imper.
2”.sg. of punishmentsto be metedoutfor The ideaof impermanence shouldbe
Havinghadrelief for himselfhe
badactions;@+Ruh +e t twā,caus. cultivatedto removethewrongview
preaches
theDhammafor relief: @+
Asurehi samgamesum —A, IV, 432 absol. of enjoyment;
assdda+ditthi;pa +
Svas+ta,pp.;Dr§ +e +ti, caus.
(They)foughtwiththeAsuras; Ha +ana,der; Bhii +e +tabba,
pres.3. sg.
a Re Tatu um, denom.pst. Assamandalikāsu pindāyacaritva- caus.pp.
Vin.III. 6
Assaddham
saddhāsampadāya
Havinggoneforalmscollectionin the Assādetinikāmeti—S. II. 227
Asesam uparuiihati —D. 1,223 Samādapeti
nivesetipatitthāpeti-
horse-rings;
Car +i +tv, absol. Enjoysandlongsfor;assada+e +ti
Completelystopped:a 3 Sis 2-a A. IV.364
andnikdma+e +ti, denom.pres.3”.
der.;upa +Rudh +ya +ti Te (He ) causestheunfaithfulto
Assam nukhoahamrajaecakkavattī sg.
pres.3". sg, chins observe,settledownand establishin
~D.IL. 172
theattainment of faith:a +saddha+
ShouldI become theuniversal Assimanakamajjhacinnamhoti,
Asma kumbhamiva bhi a, der.;sam +a +Da +ape + ti,
da —Vin. IV. monarch; As + yam(Skt.yam),opt. bhāsitaparikantam—M. II. 248;
204 Caus.pres, 374.$g./ ni + Vi§ + e+ ti,
I“, sq. Vin. I. 80
Brokeasa potbya stone: Caus.pres.3".sg. nati +Stha+dpe
iva,indel; Hisbehaviour wasunworthy of
+M,Caus,
ti,causpres,3", sg.
Assavanatā dhammassa parihāyanti a recluseandhasgonebeyond
 Assasapassase
description;
a +samana
+a +ka,
; ; der.;adhi +& + Car + ta,pp.; Bhas
+i+ fa,pp. +pari +Kram +ta.pp.
; ; I Assasapassase
uparundhim—M. I.
Ä 243
I thwartedinbreath
andoutbreath;
upa
t Ru(nidh+im,pst. 1".sg.
Assāsāadhigatā—A. I. 190
Attainedreliefs;@+Svas+a, der:
Ī adhi +Gam+ta,pp.
Assukenamakkhitam- Vin. II. 289
PATE Assutamsunāti—A. III. 361
Hearswhatis notheardbefore:a +
I Sru + ta,pp.; Sru +na +ti, pres,3”.
SZ.
Assutavatoputhujjanassa
I eittabhāvanā
natthi—A. I. 10
Thereis nocultivationof mindforan
unlearned worldling;na +atthi:As +
li, pres.3”. sg.; thisis also usedas
an indcl.
Assutavāputhuiianoariyanam
adassaviariyadhammassa akovido
. Ī ariyadhammeavinīto—M.I.1;
S. II. 3
Unlearnedworldling,notexposedto
thenobles,notskillful in thedoctrine
i ofthenobles
andnottrained
in the
doctrineof thenobles;a +Sru +ta +
vantu,
der.;puthu(Skt.prthak)+
Jana;a+ Dr§ +avi,derpa+yi +Ni
i +fa,pp.
Assuttha
notumhebhikkhave
rattiya pPaceūsasamayam
sigālassa
Ahatanam Ahamkara
Ahatānam
dussānam Ahamevanina cori, ahamevanina
Bhikkhus,didyouhear,when ahatakappānamdigunam alajjini—Vin. IV. 276
theiackalwashowlinginearly samghātim - Vin. I. 290 It isonlyI whoisa thief,it is onlyI
morning
of the night?;a +Sru +ttha, A twolayerrobemadeof freshor who is shamelsss;aham+ eva; a +
pst. 2™.pl.; no, interr.p.; pati + iisa fresh-like
cloth;a +Han+ta,pp.; lajja +t +int,der.
t samaya; sigālassa vassamānassa, ahata+kappa
gen.absl.; Vas +ya + mdina, Ahampi amhāahampiamhāti—A. I.
pr.p. 229
Ahatenavatthenavethetva,
vihatena
kappāsena vethenti—
D. II. Shouting, "I amacowtoo,lama
Assupasannampaggharitam—
S. II. cow too",ahampiamhātiravam
141
179 ravamānā gāvī,ahampigāvīti,Cy.
(They)wrapupwithunspoiled cloth
Thetearsfloweddown;pa + Sya(n)d andcardedcotton;vi +Han+ta,pp.; II. 346; amhāis thesoundmade
T ta,pp.; pa +ghara + i + ta,pp. Vest+e +nti,pres.3”.pl. bya cow,usedhereasa designation
for a cow;amhé+ iti
Assumukharudamana Ahamassa ussukkamkarissāmi— 5.
parikammāni karonti —M. I. 344 IV. 302 Ahampi cetamevameva
(They)dopreparatoryworkwith I will supportthisperson;aham+ vyakareyyam—A. V. 229
tearful
facesandcrying:Rud+a + assa I, too,wouldexplainthisinthesame
mana,pr.p.; Kr +o +nti,pres.3", way;aham+api;ca +etam;evam+
pl. Ahamassa mantevācetā—D. I. 123 eva; vi + G+ Kr + o + eyyam,opt.
of mantras; I". sg.
I amthisperson'steacher
aham+assa;Vac+e +tu,caus.der.
Ahamayyaitthannama —
Vin. II.
Ahametam najanami,ahametam 273
napassāmi,tasmā natthi —D. II. Venerables,I amso andso; ittham,
AssosikhoāyasmāAnuruddho 328 indel. + nama
dāyapālassaBhagavatāsaddhim I do notknow this, I do notseethis,
mantayamānassa
—M.1.205; M. HI. thereforeit does not exist ; Jan + nd Ahamkaramamamkaramananusaya
155 +mi, pres.1".sg.;passa+mi,pres. nahonti—M. III. 18
Venerable
Anuruddhaheard(it), when I. sg.:na +atthi:As +ti,pres.3”. Therearenolatenttendenciesof ‘I’
thegrovekeeper
wastalkingwiththe sg. ; atthi and natthi are also usedas consciousness,
‘my’consciousness
Blessed
One;a +Sru+5+i,pst 3. indcl, andconceit;ahamkaraditthica
S8.;mantaya + mana,denom.,Prp., mamamkāra tanhāca
gen.abs|. mānānusayocātietekilesā,A. Cy.II.
271 206;aham+kara;mamam+kara;
Ahajficetam
byakareyyam,
pare OnthismatterI shouldbeconsulted anu+ Si +a, der.
camenasaddaheyyum —Vin. III.
(separately);
aham+ettha;pati +
105 Ahamkaramamamkara
Prch+ya +i +tabba,
fut.pp.
If | weretoexplain
this,others
would manapagatam manasam
notbelieve
me;aham+ce +etam; Ahameva
tayabhiyyo—M. I. 329 vidhasamatikkantam,santam
Samor sat(from$rat)+Dha+ It is only I, morethanyou; bhiyyo, suvimuttam
—8. III. 136;A. IV. 53
eyyum,opt.3”.pl. indel.usedherewithanabl. Themind,whichhasgoneawayfrom
 Aham
theconceitofI andmineand
transcended
all distinctions,
is serene
andperfectlyliberated:mana+
apagata,pp.; vidha+sam +ati +
Kram +ta,pp.; Sam+ta,pp.; su + vi
+Muc +ta,pp.
Aham khoāvusonavo
acirapabbajitoadhunagatoimam
dhammavinayam —Vin. I. 40
Friend,I ama newmemberwhohas
renounced thefamilylife andcometo
thisdoctrineanddisciplinerecently;a
+cira +pa + Vraj+i + ta,pp.;
adhund,indcl. +agato
Ahamtam vattukamo—Vin. I. 114
1amdesirousof telling that:Vac+
fum,inf. +kama
Ahamtaya—Vin. I. 181
Withyou I (will renounce):Cy.says
thathedid notsay thathe would
renouncebecauseof his greedfor
political power, 1274
Aham na ussahāmi—M. I. 437
I makenoattempt;
u(1)+Sah+a +mi,
pres. 1".sg.
Aham nu khosmi?—M.L.
ls it I7;gu,interr.p.;As +mi,pres. I"
SZ.
Aham~Mantanam data,tvam
mantānampatiggahetā— D. I. 89
I amthegiver(teacher)of mantras, you
arethereceiver(student) of mantras;
Dā 2 tu,der.;pati+ Grh +e+ ty
der.
Ahamlasunena—Vin. IV. 258
I will provide
(them)withgarlic
Aham vā pana puggalesupamānam
ganheyyamyo va pana mādiso —A.
ITI.350
It is either| or someonelike me
whoshouldmakeanassessment in
referenceto individuals;Grh +nā $
eyyam,meta.opt. 1".sg.
Aham vā bhikkhūnam dhammim
kathamkareyyam
, tvamva—
S. IL.
204
Eitheryouor I wouldgive a Dhamma
talktothebhikkhus;Kr + 0 + evyam,
opt. 1".sg. rd
Aham vāyamissāmi,tvam mā
vayami—Vin. III. 36
I will exertmyself,don’t exert
yourself;vi +@+ Yam+ i +ssami,
fut. 1 sg.
Aham va hi Moggallana bhikkhu-
samghamparihareyyam,
SariputtaMoggallana va —M. I. 459
Moggallana,
it is indeedI or
Sariputta
andMoggallana who
shouldtakecareof the community
of bhikkhus;pari +Hr +a +eyyam,
opt. 1".sg.
Ahamvotatthapatipucchitabbo,
ye
väpanassu
viyattābhikkhū—M. I.
134
It iseitherI orthebhikkhus,
who
wouldbethereastheexperienced,
shouldbeconsulted byyouonthat
matter;tattha,indel.;pati + Preh +
ya +i+ tabba, fut.pp.;pana+As +
yu (Skt.yus),opt.3",pl; vi +Anj +
fa, pp.
Aham
Aham hi brahmana jettho settho
lokassa —A. IV. 176
Brahmin,| am indeedtheeldestandthe
bestof the world
Ahāpetvāalampetvā paripūram
vitthārenaparassa avannam bhāsitā
—A.II. 77
Theonewhospeaksill of another
withoutmakinganyomissionor
commission,
butfullyandin detail;
aparihīnamalampitamkatvā, Cy. III.
107;a t Hā +Gpe+ tva, caus.
absol.;a +Lamb + e + tva,caus.
absol.;Bhas + i +tu, der.
Ahifiia sacchikatvapaveditāni—A.
IL.23
Proclaimed afterexperiencing
with
specialknowledge;sa +aechi + Kr
+tva,absol;pa + Vid+e +i +ta,
caus.pp.
Ahitāyadukkhāyasamvattanti
—A.
1.189
Leadtounbenefit
andpain;sam+Vrt
+a +nti,pres.3™.pl.
Ahina dattho kālakato —
A. II. 72
Beingbittenby a snakehedied;Da(m)
S + fa, pp.
Ahimekhalikāya
.. ucchamge
pāturahosi—Vin. II. 185
Witha snake,tiedaroundthewaist,
(he)appeared
onthelap;ahi +
mekhalika;pdtu + ® + ahosi
Ahivātakarogena kālamkatam-
Vin.I. 78
Diedof infectiousdisease;
mārabyādhinā, Cy. 1003
151
Ahudeva
Ahu kho bhantesamayoyam
Bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi—M. I.
448
Therewasa time,venerablesir, when
the BlessedOne addressedthe
bhikkhus;
ahu(Skt.abhat),pst.3”.
sg.; @+manta+e +s+ i, denom.
pst. 3. sg.
Ahutvā sattattāyaparinato —D. I. 29
Withoutpriorexistence
(1)have
evolvedintoa being;pari +Nam+
ta,pp.
Ahutva sambhonti, hutva pativenti
—M. IHI.25
They comeinto beingwithoutprior
ekistenceandceaseto be aftercoming
into existence;imind udayamvayam
passati,Cy. 1V.89;a +Hui(Bhi) +
tva,absol.;sam + Bhi + a +nti,
pres.3”.pl.; pati +vi +e (fromI) +
nti, pres. 3”. pl.
Ahudeva akkhanti ahu apaccayo—A.
1.236
Therewasindeeddisagreement
and
discontent;a + Hū (Bhū) + (d) + eva,
(Skt.abhat+eva);a+ Ksam+ti; a+
paccaya
Ahudevaaūinathattam ahu
domanassam —M. 1.448;II. 51
Therewasindeedachange
(of mind)anddispleasure;
affiatha
+tta,der.
Ahudevaukkanthana, ahu
paritassanā
—D. II. 239
Therewasindeedfrustration
and
trembling;
pari +tras+ya +ana,
der.
ki
 Ahudeva Ahorattānam Ahosim
Ahorattānusikkhinā

Ahudevakamkhaahuvicikiccha- doublepst.1".pl.+eva;na + Ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu

S.IV. 350 ahuvamha; doublepst. 1".pl.
Therewasindeed
doubtandperplexity
Ahudevakukkuceamahu
vippatisāro
—A. I. 237;Vin.I. 223,
314;HI. 19
Therewasindeedremorseandregret
Ahudevabhayamahu
chambhitattamahulomahamso—D.
1.49;M. II. 101
Therewasindeedfear.tremblingand
horripilation;
Skambh
+i +ta,pp.+
Ita,der; lama(roma)+Hrs +a,
der.: Harsa > hassa> hasa> hamsa
Ahu panabhantekocideva
kathāsallāpo?
—M. I. 376
Wasthere,venerablesir.a
conversation
of any type?:koci +
(d)* eva;sam+Lap +a, der.
Ahu vatano,ahāyivatano—D.IHI.
88
We had indeed (the creeper), we lost
it;at Hā tyt i, pst.3. sg. ; vata,
indel.
Ahuvā menūnapubbeattā,so
etarahinatthi—S. IV, 401
Certainly, there was a self for me
Previously,it doesnotexist,now;ahy
(Skt.abhāt)-- ā, doublepst. 3”. sg,;
nāna,indcl.; etarahi,indcl.; Ha --
atthi:As ti, pres.3. s9.; also used
asanindcl.
Ahuvāmeva mayampubbena nāhu-
vämha— M, I. 93; 11.214
Surely,weexistedin thepast, nor not
existed:
a +Hā (Bhi) +G +mha,
dhammesu—M. 1.98; A. IV. 321
Byapersonwhodisciplines
Ahetuappaccaya sattasamkilissanti himself,dayandnight,in wholesome
—D.I. 53;M. I. 516;5. III. 69 matters;aho +ratta +anu +sikkha
Beingsarepolluted withoutanycause +7, der.
andcondition;sam '- Klif -- ya 2.ati,
pass.pres.3".pl. Aho vata mam sake acariyake
teviiiakepaāihampuccheyya—D. I.
Aho nunasattha!—Vin. I. 180 119
How wonderful is the teacher!
How nice it is, if he would askmea
guestionpertainingto my own
Aho niina ayyaamhakafiieva
traditional
learningof threefold
Vedic
patiganheyyum!
—Vin. I. 248 lore.:ti +vijja@
+ aka, der; Preh +ya
How nice it is, if thevenerableones
+ eyva,opt. 3. sg.
wouldaccept
our offeringsonly!:
aheandniina, indcl.; amhākam+
Aho vata re amhakam panditaka -
yeva;pati + Grh + na + evyum,
D.I. 107
meta.opt.3. pl. ; ahoandniina,
OI you, our so calledscholar:a
indcl.
derogatoryremark expressing
indignation;aho, vata, and re, indcl.;
Aho nūna mahāsamanosvātanāya
pandita+ka, der.; the suffix ka gives
nāgaccheyyal—Vin. I. 27
thederogatory sense
How niceit is, if theGreat Recluse
wouldnotcome(here)for tomorrow;
Ahosim nu kho aham
svatana,(Skt.Svastana),der. +na +
atitamaddhanam? —M. 1.8
agaccheyya,opt. 3". Sg.
Did| existin thelongpast?:a +Hit
(Bhi) +a +'s+im,pst,I sg.; nu,
Ahorattamatanditam
—M. IHI. 187;
interr.p.
A. IL.40
Active,dayandnight;a +tanda+e +
i t fa, denom.pp.
Ahorattam
- S. I, 122
Dayandnight;aho(Skt.ahah) +ratta
Ahorattānamaceaye
—$.1.69
In thecourseoftime
Ahorattānam accayena —D. II. 231
WiththePassing
of dayandnight, I
(astimegoeson);ati +aya (from1) Li
 Akappena
Agatifia

laydisciples,kings, chief ministers, To relievethemselvesaccordingto the

Ā leadersof other religious sects, order of attendance;
Kr +tum,inf.
āgata +patipati;
disciplesof other religious sects,
Birdsfly intothesky; Bhaj +a +nti (TheBlessedOne) abides;raāhāhi,
197 a special form; tittha + iya, der. Agatapubba tena bhikkhuna
pres.3". pl.
Bindsa manbyattitude:
Ba(n)dh +a Savatthi —Vin. I. 293
Capes “we ond co
i, pres.3™.sg. Ākinnoviharatihatthīhihatthinīhi Savatthihasbeenvisitedby that
Akāsasamenacetasāviharati —A.
hatthikalabhehi hatthicchapakehi - bhikkhu previously;pubbe +agata,
II. 315
Akamkhamānosamghotaiianiya Vin. I. 352 āgatapubbā
Heabideswitha sky-like mind;akasa
kammamkareyya— Vin. II. 4 Beingmixedwith elephants,she
T+Sama
TheSamghashouldinflictthe elephants,youngelephantsandbaby Āgatam paīiham vyākattā—A. HI.
punishment ofcensure,
if it IS elephants,
heabides;hatthi+ 81
Akase rūpāni likhissami, rūpapātu-
desirable;tarj +aniya,fut. pp. The onewho explainsthequestion
bhāvamkarissāmi —M. I. 127 chāpaka
raised:@+gata,pp.; vi +a+ Kr +tu,
Akamkhatipabbaiiamākamkhati I will drawpicturesandmakepictures
manifestin thesky; Likh +j 4 Ākirantepi atikkantepi na iānanti - der.
upasampadam —D. II. 152;S. I. 21 wsāmi,
fut. I". sg. Kr +j + ssami,fut. 1%.sg
Vin.IV. 190
Expectsrenunciation,
andordin Agatanagatassacatuddisassa
ation:
A:
Whendistributing
andoverflowing
pat Vraj+ya+@ 7,
¥ upa RE Sam ME theydo not know; ākirantepīti samghassapatitthapesi—Vin. II.
Pad -- ā,f Akāsoarūpīanidassano—M. 1.127
Skyis formless
andundemonstrable;
a pindapātam
dentepi,Cy.891;a t 147.
Kir +a4 nta,pr.p.; ati +Kram +ta, Causedto dedicateto theSamgha
senate puccheyyāsi
—
D. Im mupa
AI
+i,
i =
der.; a+ ni+ Dré +ya+
ana,der. Lake pp.;Jan + nd@
+nti, pres. 3”. pl of thefourquarters,
present
andnot
present: āgata + andgata, catu +
Youcouldask.if youwish;ā
Kamks Akiācaāāāyatanādhimuttoassa—M. Agacchatu
bhaddanto
—Vin. III. 228 disa+a, der.;pati +Stha+ape+s
+ a + māna,Pr.p.; Prch + ya
II. 254 Maythevenerablecome; bhaddanto, +i, caus.pst. 3. sg.
€vyasi,opt.2"4 sg
us,
Sg.
He would have inclined to the state of
Akaravati patipadāekantasukhassa othingness:
q@+kihcana + ya, der, +
n i > e 1 ei Agataniamhakam
mantesu
lokassasacchikiriyāya—M. II. 35 dyatana+adhi +Muc +ta pp Agacchatha
bhikkhave
ma dvattimsa mahapurisalakkhanani -

FormalWaytoek a bhāyittha—Vin. II. 195 M. II. 134

: Periencetheworl
of'absolute
Ve happiness;ākāra vantu
, Akinno na phasu vihasim —Vin. I.
+t, der; pati +Pad +G;Sa +acchi
(= akkhi) +kiriya
Thirty two maiormarksof a Great
Haa
ā t gaccha t-tha, imper.2". pl.; mā, Being havecomedown to us in our
prohibitivep., used withpst. or texts:@ +Gam+ ta,pp; maha +
Beingmixedwith,I did notlive
at
TE d +Kip 4 fa,pp.; vit Hr +at
Case; imper.;
Bhi +(y)i +ttha,pst.2™.pl. purisa + lakkhana ll
I
I

Akarayati saddhādassanamūlikā Sai

+im,viharsim>
vihassim>
dalhāāsamhāriyā— M. I. 320 : vihasim,pst, gi Agatapatipatiyanu kho udahu AgatanikhotataAmbattha I
g.
Rationalfaith,rooted yathavuddham —Vin. I. 285 amhakam mantesu
in “seeing”,firm
andirremoyable; Akinno viharati bhikkhāhi Is itaccording
totheorderof mahāpurisalakkhanā—
D. I. 88
dalha(Skt.drdha);a
Fsam 3-Hr + bhikkhunthiupāsakehiupāsikāhi attendanceor seniority; mu, internp.; DearAmbattha,
maiormarksofa
a+i +ya,fut.pp.
raināhirāiamahāmattehi
titthiyehi udāhu,indcl.;yatha,indel.;Vrdh+ GreatBeing havecomedown to us in
Akasam
E pakkhi janti
m pakkhinobhaianti—s, II, titthiyasāvakehi —A. 1.279 fa, pp. our texts; fāta, indcl. of dear address
Beingmixedwith bhikkhus,
bhikkhunis
ikkhunis,
malelaydisciples,female Agatapatipatiyavaccam katum - Āgatiha gatiāea cutiāca upapattiāea
Vin.II. 221 yathābhūtampaiānāmi —D. I. 162

155
 Āgantukānam Āgamehi Agamehi Acariyesu

I trulyknowthecoming,going, Agame
junhekomudiya Āgamehibhoti, yāva viiāyasi —M. I. A. V. 243
departingandarriving; yathābhūtam, cātumāsiniyā—Vin. I. 176 384 Increasinganddecreasing
factors;
a +
—- adv.;pa +Jan +na +mi,pres. I". On thefull moonof the comingbright Waitdear,till you give birth to the caya: Ci + a, der, + Gam + ī, der.
Sg. fortnight
attheendof thefourmonths child;vi +Jan +ya +si,pres.2”. sg.
period;junha, Skt.jyotsna; kumuda Acayaya samvattantino apacayāya-
Āgantukānambhikkhūnamvattam- +1,der.; catu +masa + i, der. + ini Āgāmī hoti āgantā itthattam —A. I. Vin. Il. 258
Vin. Il. 210 63;IV. 61 (They) leadto increasenot to
Dutyof theincomingbhikkhus;Vrt + Agamejunhe pavareyyama—Vin. I. Heis onewho comesto this stateof decrease;
apa+Ci +a
ta,pp. 176 ekistence;ā + Gam + i, der; @ + Gam
Wewould hold theceremonyof +tu,der.; ittha + tta, der. Āeariniyā ca āpatti —Vin. IV. 320
Āgantukena
ārocetabbam, invitation
atthecomingbright There is anoffence for the female
agantukassa arocetabbam—Vin. II. fortnight;pa + Vr +e + eyvama, Āgumna karoti kāyena vācāya teachertoo; ā t Pad 1-ti, der.
32 caus.opt. I". pl. manasā—A. III. 346
Shouldinformby theguest,should Doesnotcommita crime by body, Āeariyakam aggahhiampaāīāpetha
informto theguest(Thebhikkhu Agametumuhuttam
— M. II. 112-3 wordandmind —D.III. 30
underprobationshould inform the Pleasewait a moment;muhuttam,adv. Youdeclarethetraditional
viewofthe
residentswhenhegoes to another Āghātanamgantvā—Vin. III. 86 origin; Gcariya+ ka, der; pa +Jia +
residence,theresidentshouldalso Agamentu
kirabhavanto
—D. I. 112, Havinggoneto theslaughterhouse: ape+tha,caus.pres.2”. pl.
informtheguest,whenhe comesto 129;M. II. 164 Gam+ tva,absol.
his residence,thathe is under Please
wait,sirs; a+Gam+e +ntu, Acariyatthane ca mam thapesi—M.
probation);Ggantukenati kitci imper.
3”.pl.; kira is anindcl.used Āghātam
pativineti
—A. IV.408 1.166
vihāramāgatena,tatthabhikkhinam in reporting Removes
grudge;
pati +vi +Ni +a Causedto put me in thepositionof a
ārocetabbam,āgantukassātiattano ti,pres.3™.sg. teacher;ācariya +thana; Stha + ape
yasantthānam āgatassa,Cy. 1165 Agamehitava Mahanama agamehi +5 + i, caus.pst, 3%.sg
—S2V.372 Āghātam
bandhati
—A. IV.408
Āgantukehi
upakkilesehi Mahānāma,
youiustwait;tavais used Harboursgrudge;Ba(n) dh +a + ti, Acariyadhanam pariyesati —A. III.
upakkilittham—A.1.10
herefor emphasis pres,3". sg. 224
( Mindis)polluted
byadventitious
Seeksforteacher’s
fee;pari +es
defilements;
upa + Kli¢ + ta,DD.
Āgamehi
tāvaMeghiya
—A. IV.355 Acamanakumbhiya
udakamāsihci- (fromIs) +a + ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Meghiya,waita while tabbam—Vin. 1.49
Āgamam
pariyāpunassu
—A. V.80
Thewatershouldbepouredintothe Āeariyānam
uggaho
paripuechā
-
Let (the venerable)study texts;pari +
ĀgamehitvamSāriputta,āgamehi rinsing-
pot(usedin thetoilet);a + Vin. IV. 114
Ap +(u)+na+ssu,imper.
2”.Sg.
tvamSāriputta—M. I. 459; Vin. II. Cam+ana,der.+kumbhi;a +Si(f)c Teachers'way of teaching
9 +1+tabba,fut. pp.
Āgamā
nukhvidha
? —M. I. 376
Sariputta,
youjustwait,Sariputta,
you Acariyena ajjhacinnam
Didhecomehere?;
a +Gam+G,pst.
3”. sg.; nu, interr.p; kho + idha
just wait Acamanasaravakepi
udakamsesenti ajjhacaritum —Vin. II. 301
~Vin.Il. 221 To practice
whathasbeenpractised
Agamehi
bhante
yavagharam Theyletwaterremainevenin thecup habitually
bytheteacher;
adhi+@+
Agame
kalepavāreyyāma
- Vin, I.
gacchami—Vin. III. 211 usedforrinsing;Sis +e +nti,caus. Car +ta,pp.;adhi+& +Car +i +
176
Pleasewait,venerablesir, till I go to pres.3”.pl.; sardvake+api tum,inf.
Wewouldholdtheceremonyof
(my) house;@+ Gam + ¢ + hi, imper.
invitation
atthecoming
darkfortnight
2'4,sg.; yāva, inde.relativeto tava Āeayagāmī
apaeayagāmī
dhammā
- Āeariyesu
ācariyamattesu
—
Vin. I.
Āeāragocarasampannā
187
In reference
totheteachers,
the
teacher-likes;Cy:distinguishesfour
teachers:pabbaiiācariyo,
upasampadācariyo, nissayācariyo,
uddesācariyo'ti; Cy. 1085
Ācāragocarasampannā —
A. II. 14
Perfectin behaviour
Ācāravipattiyā na
anuddhamsetabbo —Vin. II. 22
He shouldnotbecondemned on the
ground
of bad behaviour;anu+
Dhvams+e +tabba,fut. pp.
Āeikkhati
deseti
paīāāpeti
patthapetivivarati vibhaiati
uttānīkaroti passathāticāha— S. II.
25, 154
Specifies,teaches,makesit known,
setsit forth,exposes,analyses,makes
it plainandsaysbehold;ācikkhatīti,
katheti;desetīti,dasseti;
pahhāpetīti, iānāpeti; patthapetiti,
hānamukhethapeti; vivaratīti,
vivaritvādasseti;vibhaiatīti,
vibhāgatodasseti;uttantkarotiti,
pākatamkaroti; passathāticāhāti,
Passathaiti ca vadati,Cy. II. 40; ā
Khyā 1 ti, intens..pres. 3'l, sg.; Drs
+e + ti, caus.pres.3. sg.;pa +
Jia +dpe +ti, caus.pres.3. sg.;
vit Vr +a+tti, pres.3. sg.; vi 4
Bhaj +a +ti, pres.3". sg.; uttana+
karoti;passa +tha,imper.2", pl. +
iti +ca; a +Ah +a, pst. 3. sg.
Acikkhana
desana
pafifidpana
patthapanavivaranavibhajana
uttānīkammam
- S. V.443
Specifying,teaching,makingit
Āiaūhiaratho Ajanantihi Atappaya
known,settingit forth,exposing, Dhvams+ta,pp. +patoda Ajivassa hetu puttadārassakāranā -
analysingandmakingit plain;@+ Vin. III. 224
Khya + ana,intens.der; Drs+ e + Āiānantīhi
āiānāmātissa
vacanīyam For the reasonof livelihood, for the
ana,caus.der; pa +Jia + ape + -M. IHI.271 reasonof wife andchildren(family);
ana,caus.der; pa +Stha +ape + Thosewhounderstand
shouldsay, hetu and kārana are used here
ana,caus,der.;vi +Vr +ana,der.; tweunderstand";
āiānantīī,
pr:p.f.; synonymouslywith gen.
vi + Bhaj t ana,der.; uttāna ajanama+iti +assa; As +ya
+kamma (Skt.yat),opt.3. sg. Ajivikabhayassa bhayami —A. IV.
365
Acikkhana
namaputthobhanati
- Āiāmīvaiihāyitamihāyatha —A. V. I amscaredofthe meansof livelihood;
Vin.II. 78 323 āiīvikabhayantiiīvitavuttibhayam,
Specifyingmeansthathe,beingasked, Practisemusingof a thoroughbred; Cy.IV. 168
speaks;Prch +ta,pp.; Bhan + a + ti, djaniya+jhayita: jha (from Dhyai)
pres.3™.sg. +i+ta,pp. Āiīvikaseyyam kārāpetvā —
Vin. IV.
224
Acinnam kho panetamBuddhanam Ajaneyyasiva na va tvam Havingcausedto build upa lodging
Bhagavantānamāgantukehi āiāneyyāsi
—S. II. 124 for the Ajivikas; Si +a +ya, der; Kr
bhikkhūhi saddhim Whetheryou would know or not;ā 3 +Gpe +tvd,caus.absol.
patisammoditum— Vin. I. 59, 158; Jan +na +eyyasi,opt. 2". sg.
IIL.88 Ānāpetvā
vippatisārī
sāvetimā
It iscustomary
fortheBlessedand Āiīvake
uyyojesi
—Vin.IV.224 ghātehīti—Vin. III. 75
EnlightenedOnesto returnfriendly Caused
todirectthenakedascetics; Havinggivenordersandbeing
greetingswithguestbhikkhus;@+Car u(t)+Yuj+e +s +i, caus.pst. remorsefulhetellstheother"don't
T ia, pp.; pana +etam;saddhim, OEeg. kill”; Sru +e +ti, caus.pres. 3. sg.;
indcl.usedwith instr.;pati +sam +
ma,prohibitivep.; ghata + e + hi,
Mud +a +i+ tum,inf, Aiīvakesupabbaiito hoti —Vin. IV. denom.imper:2". sg.t iti
74
Acinnam kho panetamvassam Hehasbecomea renouncedamongthe Ātappamanvāyapadhānamanvāya
vutthānambhikkhūnam ijivakas;
pa +Vraj + i +ta,pp. anuyogamanvāyaappamādamanvāya
Bhagavantamdassanāya
sammāmanasikāramanvāya— D. I.
upasamkamitum- Vin. III, 88 Ajivatorakkhampaccasimsati
-
13;M. III. 210
It is customaryfor thebhikkhuswho Vin.II. 187
Having cometo asceticpractice,
haveobservedtherainyretreatto go Expects
protectionin respectof
exertion,indulgence,right attention,
andseetheBlessedOne.; Vas+ta, livelihood;
pati +@4Sams+a+ ti,
andtorightapplication
of mind;aw +
pp.; upa +sam +Kram +i +tum, inf. pres.3". sq
aya (fromI) +ya, absol.; anu +Yuj +
a, der.; sammā,indcl.
Ajaiifiaratho yutto assathito
odhastapatodo —M. I. 124;A. III. 28
Thechariot
wouldhavebeenharnessed Atappam
karaniyam
—A. I. 153
should not be condemned for
withthoroughbreds
andreadywiththe Effort shouldbe made;a + Zap+ya,
whip;Yuj+ta,pp.;As +ya (Skt.yal), der.; Kr + aniya,fut. pp.
opt.3". sg.; Stha +i +ta,pp.; a +
Ātappāya
anuyogāya
sātaccāya
Atumayam Adittassu Adittaya Adinava

padhanaya—D. III. 238 water-pot;0 +Lok +e +nti, pres. Vediyakopabbato—D. II. 264 preliminaryto thehighestway of life;
For theasceticpractice,indulgence, 3”, pl. Lo,themountVediyakais on fire, adibrahmacariya+ i +ka,der; vi
perseverance,andfor theexertion; burning
andin flametodayl: suaad Ni +a +tum, inf.
satata +ya, der. Adasevaparisuddhe
pariyodate nama,indel.;a +Dip +ta, pp.+ st,
accheya udapattesakam mukha- pa+jha (fromKsi) +ya +i +ta, pp Adimeva manasikaroto—M. I. 40
Ātumāyam
viharāmi
bhusāgāre
—S. nimittampaceavekkhamāno—D. I. +su;Jval +i +ta,pp.+ su; ajja, Fora personfocussing
hismindon,
I. 131 80 indel. from thevery beginning;ddim +eva
I stayedin Ātumāatthechaff-house; While one'sown faceis reviewed
vi +Hr +a+ mi,pres. I". sg., eitheron themirror,pureand Ādittāyabhūmiyā sampaiialitāya Adiyanti punabbhavam—A. II. 54
meaningrefersto thepst.; bhusa + clean.or on theclearwater-pot; saiotibhūtāya
—A. I. 141 hey takebirthagain;a +Da +iya +
agara pari +Sudh + ta,pp.; pari + Onaground,burned,blazed,and nti, pres. 3". pl; puna + bhava
odata : o t Da + ta, pp.; uda glowed;@+Dip +ta,pp.; sam +pa
Aturakayo
abhikkhanatamko
—S. (=udaka)+patta;pati +ava + +Jyal +i +ta,pp. sa +joti (dyuti) Adisova —M. III. 208
II. I Iks +a +mana,pr.p. Bhiita,pp. From thevery beginning;ādiso + eva;
Theonewhois witha sickbodyand so — Io
proneto sicknessguiteoften;ātura + Adikatta
pubbamgamo
—
Vin. HI. 21 Adibrahmacariyakampatijananti -
kāya; abhikkhanat ātamka; Pioneerandprecursor;addi+Kr +tu, M.II, 211 Ādisova tesamaparaddham—D. I.
abhikkhanam,indcl. der.;pubbam +gama Theyacknowledge thebasicprinciples 180
of thehighestway of life; pati +Jan From theverybeginningit was
Aturamgatayobbanam Adikammikaya
anapatti
—Vin.IV. +na+nti,pres.3. pl. mistakenby them; apa +Radh +ta,
khandadantimpalitakesimvilinam 259
DD.
khalitasiram valinam Thereis no offencefor the first Adibrahmacariyakani
tilakāhatagattim—M. I. 88 female
contravener;
an +āpatti brahmacariyasaruppani Ādissa ādissa ..vannam bhāsati -
A womanwhohasbecomefrailand sikkhapadani—A. I. 231 Vin. II. 168;III. 68
whoseyouthhadgone,teethhad Ādikeneva
navyākāsi
—M. II. 213 Moralpreceptspreliminaryto the Praises,by pointingout againand
broken,hairshadturnedintogreyand Did notexplainattheverybeginning; highest
wayof lifeandfit forthe again; evampiitthampi'ti punappuna
scanty,headhadbecomebald,skinhad ādikena+eva; vit @+ Kr+@+s5+ highest
wayof life; brahmacariya + vavatthānamkatvā, Cv. 394; ā +
becomewrinkledandlimbshadbeen i, doublepst. 3. sg. sarūpat va, der. Drs +ya, absol.; Bhās +a + ti, pres.
markedby blackspots;gata +
yobbana;khanda+ danta+ 7,der; 3, Sz.
Adittacelo
vāādittasīso
vā—
A. II. Adibrahmacariyakāya
pannaya
palita +kesa +i,der; khalita +sira; 93 appatiladdhaya
patilabhaya —A. IV. Adissa dinnam —Vin. III. 204; IV.
tilaka +Ghata(4 +Han +ta,pp.)+ The one whose clothes are on fire or 152 246
gatta +i, der. the one whose head is on fire; ā + Dip
Fortheattainment
of the hitherto Given, by pointingatsomebody;
+fa,pp. + celo unattained
insight,
preliminaryto
Aturassevabhesaiiam—
D. II, 266 uddisitvā dinnam, Cy. 658
thehighestwayof life;adi4
dust as medicine for the sick; āturassa Ādittam
tinukkamādāya
—M. I. 128 brahmacariya
+ ka, der.; a +pati
+Iva: indcl. usedfor comparison Havingtakena glow of fire madeof Ādīnavam okāram samkilesam—M.
* Labh+ta,pp.; pati +Labh +a 1.402
grass;tina+ukkam;a +Da +ya, der,
Adasepi
udakapattepi absol. Danger,vanityandimpurity
mukhanimittamolokenti—Vin. II.
107 Adittassunama..pajjhayitassu
Examine the face in a mirror and in a Dangersof over-staying;ati +ni +
nama...jalitassu namaajja
in thecourseof training, Vas+ a, der.
160
161
 Ānāpānasati Ānāpānasatisamādhi
sādhukam Āpatti
Adinava

mahapphalā
hotimāhanisamsā
—M. +i, der. katha; katha +e+s +i, w Ki Mi
Ādīnavā rāiantepurappavesane —A. of mind,I heardthesound;sam +@+
Pad +ta,pp.; a +Sru +s+ im,pst. III,82 denom.pst. 3. sg.
V. 81; Vin. IV. I59
Dangersof enteringintotheroyal 1",sg. Mindfulness
on breathingin and
harem;raja +ante +pura +pa +Vis Anejfijam
namakaranam
karoti-
+ e + ana, caus. der. Ānaīiādhimutto
assa—M. II. 254 practised,
bringsaboutgreatresults M. III. 133
He wouldbe inclinedto unshakable and
great
benefits;
Bha +e +i +ta, Trains in theactnamed"beingstill",
Ādīnavo
etthabhiyyo
—M. I. 130 state;an+Raj +a, der.+ adhi + pp.;bahula +kata an +Rfij +a, der.
Here,thedangersaremany;eftha., Muc +ta,pp.; As +ya(Skt.yat), opt.
indci. bhiyvo,indcl. 3, Sg. Ānāpānasatisamādhi sādhukam Ānehiasappāyapatipadā—M. II. 262
manasikātabbo —5. V. 317 The practicesuitablefor the
Ādīnavo
pātubhūto
—M. I. 88 Ananyamuttamam
—A. III. 354 Concentration
of mind through unshakablestate;dnefija + sappaya
Dangermanifested;
patu (Skt.pradur) The highestindebtedness;
an +ana + mindfulness
on breathingin and +patipada
+Bhii +ta,pp. breathing
outis to be well applied
onhemind;āna --apānat sati3 Anemamayam
tamkumarikam
Adeyyavaco
—D.HI. 173 Anantariko cetosamadhi —D. III. samādhi;
sādhukam,adv. imassakumarassa—Vin. III. 135
Theonewhois trustworthy;
ad+Da + 273 We bring thatgirl to thisboy; ā +Ni
eyya,der. Immediateconcentration of mind; Ānisamsam
dassetvā
nivāreti—Vin. +a+ ma,pres.I". pl.
ceto +sam+ G@
+ Dha+i IV.284
Adesanapatihariyanusasaniya Causes
toprevent,pointingout the Āpaiiatipivutthātipi
—A. I. 231
ovadi,anusāsi—Vin. IL. 200 Anantariyakammam
upacitam
- benefit;
Drs +e + tva, caus. absol.; (He) violatesthe rulesandgets
Advicedandinstructedin termsof Vin. II. 193 ni t Vr t e + ti, caus. pres. 3. sg himselfabsolved;a + Pad +ya + ti,
theinstructionon thewonderof Accrueda Kammawhichwill be pres. 3. sg. + api; vi+ u(t) +Stha
thoughtreading;ddesana+ resultedin theimmediatebirth; Anisamsam
vodanapakkham—M. I. + ti, pres. 3". sg. +api
pātihāriya +anusāsanī;0 + Vad+ anantara+ iva, der; upa +Ci 402
a +i,pst.3. sg.; anu +Sas +a +i, +fa, pp. Benefit
andbrightaspect;vi +o (ava) Apanam pasarenti—Vin. II. 267
pst. 3. sg. +Da +ana,der. (They) causeto putup a shop;pa +Sr
Anantariyam
pāpunāti,
āsavānam +e +nti,caus.pres.3”.pl.
Anafijapatisamyuttayakathaya khayāya—A. II. 150 Anisamsa
patikamkha—M. III. 97;
kacchamanaya —M. II. 253 He reachesimmediateSamādhifor the S.V.69;A. I. 239 Apanikassa ghare kahapanam
Whena discussionis beingheldon exhaustion
of influxes;
pa +Ap +(w) Benefits
areto be expected;pati + nikkhipissāmi —Vin. IV. 249
unshakable state;dnafija +pati +sam +nd + ti, pres.3”. sg, Kamks+ya,fut. pp. I will keepa Kahapana(a coppercoin)
+ Yuj +ta,pp.; Kath +ya +mana,
at theshop-keeper’shouse;pana +
Pass.pr.p. Ānandam
apalokesi
—M. II. 92 Anisamsa
samavatthanivase
—A. III. ika, der; ni +Ksip + i +ssami,fut.
LookedatAnanda;
apa+Lok +e +8 258 [OS
Anafijam
manasikaroti—
M. III. 112 Fa pet Ra Advantages
of living togetheron
He focussesattentionon unshakable equalterms;sama + vattha + nivdsa;
State;an +Rnj +a, der.; mansi+
Apattiomasavadena
dukkatassa
-
Anandenapacchāsamanena
- S. V. vattha
istakenbytheCy.as Vin. III. 166
karoti 381 vavatthita,
III, 330
There is anoffenceof wrongdoing
WithAnanda
astherecluse
going
Ananjam samadhimsamapanno.. together
withinsulting
behind Anupubbikatham
kathesi
—D.I.
saddamassosim—Vin. LI. 107
110;
Vin.1.15,anupubbikatham Āpattikārukānam
tinnam
Enteredintounshakable
concentration
Anapanasati
..bhavita
bahulikata GavePreliminary
talk;anw+pubba dukkatanam —Vin. III. 154

162
Apatti
Therearethreeoffencesof wrong
doingfor themakers;ka@ruka=
kāraka
Āpattidesāpetabbā
—Vin.II. 20
Shouldcauseto confesstheoffence;
Drs +ape +tabba,caus.fut.pp.
Āpatti dvinnam samghādisesena,
dvinnamdukkatanam— Vin. III.
152
There are two offences with
formalmeetingof theSamgha,two
offencesof wrongdoing;dvihi
samghddisesehi saddhimdvinnam
dukkatānantiādinā nayenaattho
veditabbo,Cy. 572
Āpattinikāyassa
nāmakammam
adhivacanam— Vin. III. 112
A name,a synonymfor thegroupof
offences
A suspended on failing to seethe
Apatti patikātabbā—Vin. II. 259
Offenceshouldberemedied;pati +
Kr + tabba:kartabba>kattabba>
katabba,fut.pp.
Āpattipatiggahetabbā
—Vin. II.
260; III. 196
(Confessionof) theoffenceshouldbe
accepted; pati +Grh +e +tabba,fut.
pp.
b offence,asoffence;Drs +ti + der.
Apattipariyantaca kulapariyantaca
—Vin. IV. 31
Limitedto offencesandlimitedto
families
Apattipacittiyassa
—Vin. IV. 2
Thereis anoffence
ofekpiation; ā 3
Pad + ti, der.
164
Apattiya
Apattim patikarissama —Vin. I, 127
We will takeremedialmeasures
to ekpiatetheoffence;pati +
karissāma
Āpattim passitumna icchati —Vin.
Il. 21
(He) doesnotwish to seetheoffence;
Is +ya +ti, pres.3”. sg:
Apattim sarati vivarati uttanikaroti
deseti—Vin. II. 103
Rememberstheoffence,exposesit,
makesit manifestandconfessesit;
Smr +a +ti, pres.3%.sg.; vi + Vr +
a +fi, pres.3",
? sg.; uttana+ Kr t o
+ti, pres.3%.sg.; Dr§ + e +ti, caus.
pres. mei Ng.
Āpattiyā
adassane
ukkhittako
patijanati—Vin. I. 121
Heacknowledges thathe hasbeen
offence;a +Dr§ +ya + ana, der;
u(t) +Ksip +ta,pp. +ka, der.
Apattiya appatikammeukkhitto -
Vin. I. 98
Suspended on failingto takethe
remedialmeasuresfor theoffence
Āpattiyā āpattiditthī —Vin. I. 337
Theonewhohastheviewofan
Apattiyacodiyamano
—A. IV. 192
Beingaccusedof anoffence;Cud +
īya t māna,pass.Prp.
Āpattiyānāmamgottam—
Vin. I
127
; Reserved
Nameandcategory
of theoffence
Apattiya
Apattiyavutthanamiānāti —
Vin.
64
(He)knows the atonement of the
offence;
4
Jan +nd +ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Apattiyavematikohoti —Vin. 1. 126
Holdsdifferentopinion regardingthe
offence;vi +mati +ika, der
Āpattiyo
naehādeti—Vin. II. 62
Doesnotmaketheoffencescover up;
Chad+e +ti, caus.pres. 3™.sg.
Apattivacayavacaya pacittiyassa-
Vin.IV.7
Thereis anoffenceof expiation,word
byword
Apattisamghadisesenadukkatassa
—Vin.III. 152
Thereis anoffenceof wrong doing
togetherwith theoffencereguiringa
formalmeetingofthe Samgha
Apattisamantabhanamānam na
nivāreti—A. IHI. 137
Does
notcausetopreventthe
speakerwho is about to commit an
offence;
ni +Vr +e4 ti, caus. pres.
Ni
I. $2.
The onewhois aboutto commitan
offence
whilespeaking;dpatti +
sdmanta;
Bhan+a +mana,pass.
br.p.
Āpadatthāya
nikkhittāni—Vin. IHI.
43
for emergency;āpadā --
atthāya;
mi3 Ksip +ta, pp.
Apadaka
Āpadāsu
thāmoveditabbo
—
A. II.
I.
187
Courage(ofa person)shouldbe
understoodat thetimeof disasters;
Vid +e +i +tabba,caus.fut. pp.
Āpadāsu
naiahati—A. IV.31
Does not abandonin difficult times:
Ha +ti, pres. 3. sg.; root redup.
Āpadāsu
navedhati
—A. IHI.56
He does not tremble in difficulties;
Vyath+ a + ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Āpadāsu pariyodhāya vattissanti-
M. II. 69- 70
In thetimeofdistress, theywill stand
for (our ) protection;Vrt. tatia
ssanti,fut. 3. pl.
Āpadāsu yāvadattham —Vin. II. 138
In caseof dangersasmuchasyou
need;yava + (d) +attham
Apanno va Parajikam dhammam-
A. Il. 241
Or theone who hascommittedthe
offenceincurringdefeat;@ +Pad +
ta,pp.
Āpāthakanisādī hoti —D. III. 44
He becomesonewho lies down at
a visible place( iust to pretendthat
he is practisingreligion); @ +patha
+aka, der.; ni + Sad + 7,der; ep.
Āpāthamāgacchati,comesinto
focus, gonisādi, resting place of cows
Āpātham
āgacchanti
—Vin.I. 184
Come into focus;ā +patha + a, der.
Apadakaposakaimassalokassa
 Āpādeyyam Ābādhiko Ābādhiko Amattikapanam

dassetāro—A. II. 70 Prch +ya+i +tva,absol.; apa +Lok Wouldbesick, afflicted, seriously ill; Junket, preparedlastevening:abhi +
Thosewho bring(them)up,foster t e t iā, absol. abadha+ika, der.; As +ya (Skt. ydt), dosa +ika, der.
(them) and introduce (them) to this opt.3”. sg.; dukkha +e +i +ta,
world;@+Pad t aka,der.;Pus + Ābādhapaecayā
anāpatti
—Vin.IV. denom.
pp. Ābhisamācārikāya
sikkhāya
aka,der.;Drs +e + tu, caus.der. 260 sikkhāpetum —Vin. I. 64
Thereis no offence(if it is done)on Abadhiko
hotidukkhito To causetodisciplinehimin good
Apadeyyamposeyyamvaddheyyam thegroundof sickness;an +apatti: bālhagilāno—5. I. 149; III. 119;A. behaviour;Sak +dpe +tum,caus.
—D.II. 340 a +Pad +ti, der. V.108 desid. Inf.
I wouldtakecare,fosterandbrin(him) Heis sick,afflictedandseriously ill
up;a +Pad +e +eyyam,caus,opt. Ābādhapaccayā
lasunam
khāditum Āmakadhaāhapatiggahanā
I. sg.; Pus + e +eyyam,caus.opt. —Vin.II. 140 Ābādhothānasopatippassambheyya pativirato —D. I. 5
I". sg; Vrdh +e +eyyam,caus.opt. To eatgarlicon thegroundof - A.V. 112 Refrainedfrom acceptinguncooked
I*. sg. sickness;Khād ' i 1:tum,inf, Thesickness
wouldallayinstantly; grains;Gmaka+ dhajifia +
thdnaso,
adv.;pati +pa +Sra(m)bh patiggahana;pati + vi + Ram +ta,
Apaniyakamsovisenasamsattho- Ābādham viriyena patippanāmetvā +eyya,
e
opt.3”.
Jr
sg. PP.
M. II. 260 —S.V. 153
Drinkingbowlof bronze,mixedwith Havingcausedthesicknessto turn Abadho
paccudavatteyya
—A. IV. Āmakadhaāham
viūhāpetvā
poison;a +pdniya + kamsa;sam + backbyeffort;pati +pa +Nam+e + 335 nagaram atiharanti —Vin. IV. 264
Srj +ta,pp. tva, caus. absol. Ailmentwouldturnup again;pati + Havingaskedfor theraw grains(they)
u(t)+@+ Vrt +evya,opt. 3”. sg. takethemto thecity; vi +Jnd +ape
Apayikanerayika
parikuppa Abadha mucceyya— D. I. 72 +tva,caus.absol.; ati +Hr + a+
atekicchā—A. III. 146 Wouldbe releasedfrom sickness;Muc Abadhopatippassambhi—D. II. 99; nti,pres.3”.pl
Thosewhobelongtoa purgatory,a +ya + eyya, pass. opt., 3”. sg. S.1.175
miserablestateandthosewho are
Sickness
allayed; pati +pa + Āmagandheavassutammakkhikā
irritableandincurable;parikuppāti Abadhikam
dukkhitam Sra(m)bh
+ a +i, pst-3" ise. nānupatissanti nānvassāvissantīti
kuppanasabhāvā purānavanasadisā, balhagilanam,sake muttakarise netamthānam viiiati —A. I. 280
Cy: II. 283,ia theusualphrase palipannamsemanam, afiiehi Abharanam
omuncitva—Vin. IV. It is not to be foundthatflies will
wefind kappatthain place of
vutthapiyamanamafifiehi 162 not follow thewetandsmelly raw
Parikuppa; kappatthameansStaying
samvesiyamanam —M. I. 88; A. I. Havingremovedjewelry; 0 +Mu(ije fish andflock aroundit: āmagandheti
to theendofthe aeon;apaya +ika,
139 tit td, absol. kodhasamkhātevissagandhe;
der; niraya + ika, der.; a + Kup +
The onewho is sick,afflictedand
ya,fut. pp.; a +tikiccha+ya,fut. pp. avassutantitintamCv. II. 378,
seriouslyill, smearedwith his own Ābhāya
phutam
hoti—A. IV. 118 ava +Sru + ta, pp.; na + anu +
faecesandurineandlyingonthem, Pervaded by the lustre; Sphur + ta, pp.
Apayiko nerayiko kappattho assavissanti; nānvassavissantīti
beingcausedtogetupbyothersand
atekiccho—Vin. II. 202 anubandhitvākhādissanti, Cy.;
beingcausedto lie down by others; Abhasamanta
yojanamphutāahosi
Theonewhobelongsto a purgatory.a could we understandthe term
pari + Pad + ta,pp; Si + a+ mana, -D. II. 175;M. III. 174,hoti
miserablestateof life, staystherefor ndnvassavissanti as, na + anu + @ +
pr. p.; vi +u(t) +Stha +dpe + iva Radiance
hadspread
aroundone yojana sava (fromSru + a) +i +ssanti,
anaeonandis incurable
tmana,caus.pass.pr.p.; sam + Vis + (about
eightmiles):Sphur+ta,pp.; 7.
meaning ‘will flow into’?; na +
e + tya + mana, caus. Pass. pr p.
Apucchitvaapaloketvā—Vin. LV, a+ Hii( Bhai) +a+s +i, pst.,3™. sg.
267
Abadhikoassadukkhito
Havingaskedandlookedover:a + Abhidosikamkummāsam-
M. II. Amattikapanam
vapasaressanti
-
bālhagilāno
—D. i. 72 62 Vin. III. 242
166
167
 Amam Ayahea Āyatakena Ayatim

Causeto putupanearthenware shop;a to gain materialrequisites;dmisa 4 Vid+i +tva,absol. as ‘arahattamva arahattassa

+mattika+G@panam; pa +Sr +e+ antara;up +Stha@ +ti, pres. 3™.sg, vipassanam
vd,catutthajjhanam
ssanti,caus.pres.3''.
; o MI rd
pl.I Āvatakena
gītassarena—A. III. 251 vd catutthajjhanassaupacaram va,
Amisam ussannamhoti —Vin. II. With
anextended
intonation
ofa song: IV. 59; pa +Sad +a + ti, pres. 3. sg.
Āmam pakkavanni— A. II. 106 270 gita + sara
Unripe,butlooksripe Foodwasabundant;
u(t) +Sad +ta, Ayataneva dhammadesana —
A. I.
pp: Ayatakena gitassarenadhammam 218
Amalakapattanamputam Karitva- The discourse was indeed on a rational
gayanti
—Vin. II. 108
S. V. 438-9 Amisasambhogo
ca ground;dyatane +eva; kāranasmim
TheyrecitetheDhammawith an
Havingmadea basketof emblic dhammasambhogo ca —Vin. I'V. 137 yevadhammadesana, Cy. Il. 331
extendedintonation;@ +Yam+ta,
myrobalanleaves;Kr +i+ tva,abso, Sharingof materialbenefitandthe pp.+ka.,der.;Gai +ya +nti, pres.
benefitof thedhamma a pL. Ayatapanhi
—M. IL.136
Amasanam va paramasanam va
The onewho haslong heels
gahanamva chupanamva Amisahetu—Vin. IV, 57 Āyatakeneva
aūīiāpativedho
—A. IV.
patipīlanamvā sādiyeyya —Vin. IV. For thesakeof materialgain 201 Āyatikampi vassāvāsam—A. IV.
213
Penetration
intognosisstraightaway: 232
Wouldenioya gentletouch,a touch. Amise katham patipajjitabbam - dyatakena
+ eva;pati + Vyadh+ a, The futurerainy retreattoo; dyati +
a holding,a shakingora pressing Vin. I. 356 der. ka, der; vassa+ @vasamor vassa+
against;d + Mrs +ana,der::para +
Whatwe shoulddo in referenceto vasam
Mr§ +ana; Grh +ana,der.;Chup +
material
need;katham,
indel.;pati + Ayatakenevapapāto—A. IV. 198
ana,der.;pati +Pid +ana,der:
Pad +ya +i +tabba,
fut. PP. A precipice
fromthebeginning; Ayatimpivassamevameva
Svad +aya +eyya,caus.opt.3%.sg.
ādito'va,Cv. IV. 107 katabbam—Vin. II. 181
Amisenaupalapetva—Vin. II. 21 The sameprocedureshouldbe
Āmātipatiiānanti
—
A. I, 173 Causingto becoaxedwith food:upa + Ayataficakarohi vitthatanica followed,in thenextyeartoo;
Acknowledgeby saying*yes’,dma +
Lap +e +tva,caus.absol. appitafica
suvitaficasuppavayitaiica
iti, āma,indcl.;pati +Jan + na +nti, āvatimpivassam,acc.for loc.; Kr
pres.3™.pl. suvilekhitaficasuvitacchitanea + tabba > kartabba > kattabba>
Āmotipatiiānanti
—D.I. 192 karohi—Vin. III. 257 kātabba
(They)acknowledge by sayingyes; Makeit long,wide,solid, well woven,
Āmāvasesam
pāceti
—A. IHI.250;
amo +iti, amais theusual indcl.: levelled,
well combedandwell carded;
Vin. I. 221 Āyatim anavassavāya
pati +Jan +na + nti, pr. 3” pl.
It causesthedigestionof food left a+ Yam+ta,pp.; vi +Str +ta,pp.; patipaiieyyātha—D. ITI. 246; M. II.
undigested; dma +avasesam;Pac + appitanti
ghanam, Cy. 727;su + Va 246;A. ITI. 334; Vin. II. 89
Ayakusalo apayakusalo
é +ti, caus.pres.3. sg. +i +ta,pp.;su +vi +Likh +e+i+ You shouldwork for non-influk in
upāyakusalo—A. IHI. 431
Ia,caus,pp.; su + vi +taccha + ika, future;@yatim,adv.;an + ava + Sru
Theonewho is skilled in incoming, der;Kr +0 +hi, imper.2". sg.
Amisakharam payetum— Vin. I. 206 +a, der; pati + Pad +ya + eyyatha,
outgoingandapproach: @ +aya
To causeto drinkdilutedpowderof opt. 2" pl.
(from I); apa + aya; upa +aya +
burntrice;Pa +e +tum,caus.inf,
kusala
Ayatanaso
paribhuttam
—A.II.68
Made
useofreasonably;
pari+Bhuj+ Āyatimanavassavo
—M. I. 93
Amisantaro
gilanam
upatthati,
no ta, pp.
Non- influx in future.
mettacitto—A. ITI. 144;Vin. I. 303
Heattendson thesick, notwitha Ayatane
eittam
pasīdati
—M. II. 262 Āyatimanuppādo
—
M. I. 60
kindheartbutwithanulteriormotive Mindbecomesconfidenton the Non- arisingin future;a + u(t) + Pad
base; ayatane is defined in the Cy. + a, der.
Ayatim Ayasmantanam Ayasmantanam Ayusahagato

Ayatim gabbhaseyya Āyasāyadoniyā patikuiiatha —A. IHI. Ayasmantanam

sukhaviharitaro - 151
punabbhavābhinibbatti—A. IV. 175; 58 M.1.94 In lengthor breadth
Vin. III. 3 Cover it with a lid made of iron; aya(s) Theoneofthe two,abidingwitha
Sleepingin thewombandcominginto t a, der.;pati +Kubj +a +tha, happier
life;to indicatetwopērsons Ayamavuso, ..tenupasamkamissama
beingagainin future;puna +bhaya 3 imper.2". pi. theplural form of āyasmantahas gilānapuechakā —
S. IV. 56
abhi +nibbatti:ni + Vrt + ti, der. been
usedhere;sukha
+ vihari Friend, let us go there,as visitors to
Āyasmato
Ānandassa
paīicasatam tara,der. the patient; tena +upa + sam + Kram
Ayatimdhammasamuppado —A. IHI. vihāram kārāpesi —A. V. 347 +7 +ssama,fut. 1".pl.; gilana +
405 Hecausedto build five hundred ĀyasmāUdayi mahakayo hoti —Vin. puccha +ka, der.
Co-arisingof dhammas
in future residencesfōr thevenerable IV.171
Ananda;Kr +ape +s +i, caus. Thevenerable
Udayi hada hugebody Ayu usmam paticca titthati— M. I.
Ayatim punabbhavābhinibbattiyā pst.3. sg. 295
paccayo(vinnanaharo)—S. II. 13 Ayasma
Janavasabhoyakkho —
D. II. Spanof life restson theheat;pati + /
(The nutrimentconsciousness is) the AyasmatoSariputtassasutva 206 (t) +ya, absol.; tittha(fromStha) +
conditionfor therenewedbirthand bhikkhū dhāressanti—M. I. 14 VenerableJanavasabha; dyasmdis used ti, pres. 3”. sg.
existencein future;pati +aya (from1) Thebhikkhuswill causeto hold in herefor respect;it is normally used
mindafterlisteningto the(sermon) withtheleadingdisciples of the Ayu parikkhīno usmā vūpasantā
Ayatimbhaddako
—Vin.II. 185 of thevenerableSariputta: Buddha;yakkhahas two meanings: indriyāni viparibhinnāni —
S. IV.
Valuablein future Sariputtassasutvāis an idiomatic 294
demon(Yaks)and the one worthyof
expressionin which object ofthe offering(Yaj) Spanof life is exhausted,heatis
Ayatimvassavasatthaya absol.is left to be understood, calmeddown andthe facultiesare
antarāmuttakogahetabbo—Vin. II, a similar expressions are tassa Ayacanahetuva patthanahetuva —A. shattered;pari +Ksi +ta,pp.; vi +
167 sutva, Bhagavato sutva; Sru + II. 47 upa+Sam+ta,pp.; vi +pari +
An interimperiodshouldbetakenfor ta, absol;Dhr +e + ssanti,caus. For thereason of plea or wish Bhid + ta,pp.
thefutureobervanceof rainyretreat; fut. 3”. pl.
Grh + e + tabba,caus.fut. pp.
ĀyāmĀnandayenaAmbalatthikā Āyusamkhāram
ossaii—D.II. 106
Ayasmato
hatthe
pahesim
—Vin.I. tenupasamkamissāma
—D. II. 81
Āyatim
samvaram
āpaiiati
—M.HI. 308 Come
Ānanda,
let'sgoto + iopsie3”. $3:
247
I sent(it) throughthevenerable Ambalatthikā;
ā 3 Ya +ma,pres. 1”.
Restrains himselfin future: @ + Pad +
(i.e. you); pa 3 Hi +e +s +im, caus. Ayusamvattanika patipada
pl.; object of movement is enclosed
ya +ti, pres.3™.sg. pst. 1", sg.
byvena and tena, when two or three patipajjitabba—A. IHI. 48
Āyamukhāni
vivareyya
—A. IV.284 objectsare thereyena is repeated, The pathleadingto a long life should
Ayasmantanamatthayaattanoca
(He) would open up the inlets; vi + Vr
lena +upasamkamissāma be followed;@yu+sam + Vrt +ana+
atthaya—Vin. IL. 87
tat eyya,opt.3. sg. ika, der.;pati + Pad +ya +i+
For thebenefitof the venerablesand Ayamaayamavusoti vatvatattheva tabba,fut. pp.
of me
Āyasāyateladoniyā
pakkhipitvā, $amsappati—D. IHI. 19
ahiiissāāyasāyadoniyā patikuiiitvā Havingsaid
: "Friend,I amcoming,I Ayusahagatoca usmasahagato
Ayasmantanamsaddhayadesemi- amcoming” hecreepsalongright
—D.II. 142;A. III, 58,patikuiii ca vinhanasahagatoca —D. Il.
Vin.IL.289 there;
Vac+tva,absol.;tattha+eva;
Havingput(it) intoanoil trough,made 338
Outof faith in yourvenerables,I sam+Srp +ya +ti, pres. 3". sg.
of iron,andhavingclosedit with (Thisbody)hasaccompanied
with
confess;Dr§ +e +mi, caus.pres. 1".
anotherirontrough vitality, heatandconciousness;saha
SZ.
Ayamato
vavittharato
va—Vin.IL. +Gam + ta, pp.
 | .

Ayussa Arafiniaka Aradhako

Arafifiakena I I
I i 1)
Ayussa
vapihetum
—A. III. 48 tena—Vin. II. 239
Arafifiakena
bhikkhuna
ime This Dhamma is for the one who has
Or to long for a long life; Sprh +e + He is indeedfarawayfrom the
dhamme
samadayavattitabbo, startedstriving;@ +Rabh +ta,pp. I
tum,inf. Samgha,theSamghafromhim
pageva
gāmantavihārinā
—M. I. 473
i il
These thingsshouldbe observedand Āraddhaviriyo ea viharati —A. V.
Āyovayam
pariyādāya
fhassati
—A. Ārakkhādhikaranam
—D.II. 59 211
practised by a forest-dwelling
IV. 283 For thereasonof protection; Also, beingone with startedeffort, he
bhikkhu. muchmoreby thebhikkhu
The incomewill ekceedthe ārakkhā-- adhikaranamcp.
livingin thevillage;sam+a +Da + abides
espenditure;
pari t ā -- Da +ya, vatvādhikaranam,( vato +
ya,absol.; Vrt + i +tabba, fut. pp;
absol.;
Stha+ssati,
fut.3. sg adhikaranam) adhikaranamis used
Araddhosmi bhikkhave,
pageva,
indcl.
here
for thesenseofreason, D. 1.70
āraddhacittosmi —M. III. 79
Ārakāimasmā
dhammavinayā
—S.
Araiifiakohoti pantasenasano—A. Bhikkhus,I amhappy.I ampleased:
IV. 43 Ārakkhāya
sikkhati
—S.IV. 176
II, 121 āraddhoti tuttho,Cv. IV. 137; ā t
Farawayfromthisdoctrineand Trainshimselffor protection;Sak +
Hebecomes a forestdweller andhas Radh +ta,pp. +eitto + asmi:As +
sa +ti, desid,pres. 3". sg.
adwellingplacein a remoteiungle; mi, pres. 1". sg.
or instr.
panta(Skt.pranta) +sendsana:sena
Araggakotinittuddanamattepi
Ārakāudakāthalenikkhittam
—M. T āsana Ārapathe
ārapathe
āpatti
titthanti—A. I. 65
I. 241 pacittiyassa—Vin. IV. 62
Theystandevenon a spacewherethe
Takingoutof waterandplacedon the Āraddhamkho pana me viriyam In eachstitch,thereis anoffenceof
sharpendofa needle-headstrikes;
ground;ni +Ksip +ta,pp. ahosiasallinam,upatthita sati expiation;
dra +patha
ara +aggakoti+ nittuddana+ matte
asammuttha, passaddhokayo
+ api
Arakateanuttaraya āsāraddho, samahitamcittam Ārabhatieavippatisārī
cahoti—A.
viiiācaranasampadāya
—D. I. 99 ekaggam
—M.I. 21;A. I. 148 II. 165
Arafifiakanam
bhikkhinam
vattam
Theyarefarawayfromtheattainment (viriyambhavissati);Vin. III. 4 Violatestheruleof non-killingand
—Vin. II. 217
of supremewisdomandconduct:an + Unsluggish
effortwas startedby me, becomesremorseful;@+ Rabh +a +
A chartofduties for theforest
uttara dwellingbhikkhus ti, ārabhati —Gpattimāpaiiati, Cy.
bodywascalmeddown andnon-violent Ill. 289
Ārakāparivaiienti
—S.V.148;A. andthemindwasconcentrated
and
Āraīiiakānisenāsanāni
sāsamka-
IIL. 269 one-pointed;
@+ Rabh +ta,pp; a + Ārācārī virato methunā
Sammatanisappatibhayani—Vin.
Keepcompletelyaway;pari + Vij +e III. 263 sam+Li +ta, pp.; upa +Stha + i + gāmadhammā—M. I. 179
t nti, caus.pres.3”. pl. lungle lodgingsreckonedas {a,
pp.;a+sam+Mrs +ta,pp.;pa + The onewho keepshimselfafar,has
suspiciousandfrightening:sa + abstainedfrom sexualintercourse,
Arakāva namassanti —A. V. 325 samka+sammata;sa +pati +bhaya Pp.;sam + @ +Dhaé +i +ta, pp.; eka
Bow downevenfromafar:araka + +agga vi + Ram + ta, pp.
eva; nama(s) + ya + nii, pres, 37%,pl.
Arafiiaka pindapatikapamsukūlikā
—A. IHI.391
Araddhaviriyassa
uppajjatipiti Ara cittamsamādhimhā
—A. IV.87
Arakava
samafiiia
ārakāva Thosewhohaveobservedthevow of
niramisa—M. III. 87 Themindis farawayfrom
brahmanifia—D. I. 167
livingonlyintheforests,
sustaining Unworldly
rapture
arisesfortheone concentration;ārā, indcl. usedwith
(He is) completelyawayfrom Whohasstartedstriving;u(t) +Pad +
only on almscollectedandvvearing abl.
recluseshipandbrahmanhood ya + ti, pres, 3” Sg.; ni + ® + Gmisa
only rugs; arafifia +a +ka, der.;
pindapata+ ika,der.;pamsukiila + Ārādhako
hoti—Vin.I. 70
Arakava so samghamha,samghoca Araddhaviriyassayamdhammo—A.
ika, der. The one who fulfills therequirements;
IV,229 a + Radh + aka, der.
 Ālindam
Aradhako Aramiko Ārāme

Ārādhako hoti nayamdhammam Aservant

of themonasteryor a novice pres. I". sg.;pati t Vid t aya t mi,
Claims,on a falseground,the
kusalam—M. II. 181,197 ownershipofthe park;parasantakam willdisturb;saccessari, fut. 3. sg., caus.pres. I". sg
He becomesonewho accomplishes mamasantakoavanti musa bhanitva (ghattessati?),
unclear verb
thewholesomeway abhiyuiijati,Cy. 338; abhi + Yu(fi)j + Ārocehimetvam—D. II. 220
a +ti, pres.3”. sg. Arameayyokarotha, vihare You inform me; ā t Ruc - e t hi,
Ārādhaniyo kho āvusodhammo patitthapetha,danani patthapetha- caus. imper.2". 8g.
sammāpayuttena—Vin. III. 103 Aramikakulam bandhapesi—Vin. I. Vin.II. 158
Brother,Dhammais to beattainedby 208 Mygoodfellows,build monasteries, Āropite mohe moheti —Vin. IV. 145
onewho is rightlyindulged;a +Radh Causedto imprisonthemonastery establishresidences,organisealms; He behaveslike a fool whenthe
ana +iya,der.;pa + Yuj +ta,pp: attendant’s
family;Ba(n)dh +ape +s ayyoseemsto have been used here chargeis madeon ignorance;ā t Ruh
+i, caus.pst. 3. sg. intheplural sense;pati +Stha ī mā i + la, caus5. PD-; moha +e + ti,
Aradhayimsu vata mebhikkhave dpe+tha,caus.pres.2". pl.; pa + denom. pres. 3. sg.
bhikkhū ekamsamayamcittam- Ārāmikabhūtā
vāupāsakabhūtā
vā Stha+dpe +tha, caus.pres. 2”. pl.
M. I. 124 —M. II. 5 Āropentipi
oropentipi
—A. I. 141
Bhikkhus,atonetime,thebhikkhus Beingresidentsof themonasteryor Make(him)climb upandclimbdown;
Ārāmeārāmūpacārechattam
mademepleased,in deed;@+Radh + laydevotees;Grama +ika, der.+ a+ Ruh + e +nti, caus.pres. 3”. pl,
dhāretum
—Vin. II. 131
aya + imsu,caus.pst. 3. pl.; vata, bhūta, pp. +api; o +Ruh +e +nti, caus.pres.
Toholdanumbrella
insidethe
indel.
monastery
andits neighbourhood; 3”, pl. +api
Aramikam datukamo—Vin. III. 248 arama+ upacara; Dhr +e +tum,
Aradhapekho mafjuna sarena Desiringto giveanattendantto the caus.inf. Ārohaparināhasampanno
—A. I. 288;
gayi, vinafica vadesi—Vin. I. 346 monastery; Da +tum,inf. + kama EV2391
With thepurpose of pleasing(the
Arāmenaārāmam uyyānena The onewho hasa proportionatebody;
king)hesangwitha beautifulvoiceand Aramikam
patisunitva
vissaritva- uyyānam—
M. II. 12I a +Ruh +a, der; pari +Nah+a,
causedto playthelute;ārādha -- Vin.I. 207 From
parktopark,gardentogarden der.;sam +Pad + ta, pp.
apekho;Gai +i, pst. 3". sg.; Vad+e Havingpromisedanattendant
to the
+ $ + i, Caus.pst. 3. sg.
monastery
andforgotten;
pati+Sru+ Arāsothāvareyyamhā—A. II. 23 Ālassānuyogo
—D.IHI.182
nā +i+ tva,absol.;vi +Smr +it Heisfarawayfromstability;thavara Indulgencein idleness;alasa +ya,
Aramanisadi parisāvacaro—S. V. tva,absol. t eyya,der. der.; anu + Yuj +a, der.
73
The onewho stayscloseto the
Aramikasamanuddesehisamsattha Ārogyatthāya
moeeti
—Vin.IHI.112
monasteryandmovesaroundthe Alahanam
gantva
gantvā
kandati
-
viharissanti—A. IHI. 109
inmates;Grdma +ni +Sad + i, der; Causestodischarge
(semen)for M. IL. 106
Beingmixedwith servantsandnovices health
reason;
aroga +ya,der.+
parisā +avacara Having goneto thecemetery
(of themonastery),
theyabide; althaya;
Muc +e +ti, caus.pres. continuouslyhe cries; Gam +tva,
aramika+samanuddesa;
sam+Srj 3 sq.
Ārāmam
agamāsi
Dabbassa absol.: continuous senseis expressed
+fa, pp.
Mallaputtassasantike—Vin. IHI. 161 by therepetition,; Krand +a +ti,
(He) wentto themonastery,
to Dabba, Arogyearogyamado—A. I. 146 ard
pres. 3™. Sg.
e

Arāmikiniyā dhītā —Vin. IHI. 249

the son of Malla; santike, the object Pridein goodhealth
rhedaughter
of the female
attendant
of movement is sometimes indicated Alindam paghanampakutam
of themonastery;aramika + int
by loc. osarakam —Vin. II. 153
IV, 128 Verandah,a door step,innercourtand
Aramiko va saccessati
Aramam
abhiyuiijati
—Vin.TI. 50 Ikeepyouinformedandmakeyou outershed;Glindamnamapamukham
samanuddesovā —A. IV, 343
vuccati,paghahamnamayam

175
 Āvāsiko
Alimgitva Avaranam ävaranīyehi

S. I, 185 Toprohibit;
d+ Vr +ana,der.; Kr + (They) eatalms-food of the resting
place;Bhu(fi)i t a t nti,pres. 3”. pl.
Abidesattheshrineof Aggālavain tuo,
inf.
Ato =
gabbhass: Alavi

ati, osarakamii Āvaranīyehi

dhammehi
cittam Āvasatham
anissaiiitvā
—Vin.IV.
īmmsam datvā tato dandak: Alaviyam viharati gomagge parisodheti
—A. II. 40 304
tvakatamchadanapamukham Simsapāvane—A. I. 136 Causes
toclean
themindof covering Withouthandingover thedwelling
Abidesat theSimsapāgroveon the factors;
pari +Sudh +e +ti, caus place;a +ni(s) +Srj +ya +i +iā,
cow-trackin Alavī ded )
pres.I”. Sg. absol.
Alimgitva upanisideyyava upa-
nipajjeyyava —A. IV. 128 Ālimmuāceyya
—M. III. 96;A. IHI. Avarane
katenaādiyanti
—Vin.II. Avasathagaram
pafiattamhoti-
Havingembraced, hewouldsitdown 28 16) Vin. LV.17
close or lie down close; a + Ling +i Wouldopen-up(thegateof) thedike; They
ignorewhen A restinghousehasbeenprepared;
t iā, absol.;upa+ni +Sad +eyya, Mu(h)c -- eyva, opt. 3'. sg. prohibitted;
@varananti dvasatha +agara; pa +Jna +ape +
opt.3”. sg.;upa+ ni +Pad +ya viharappavesananivaranattadikam ta, caus.pp.
eyya,opt. 3. sg. Alhakathalikam
upanisiditva
—Vin. avaranam,
Cy. 1292;dvarane kate,
I. 240 loc.
absl.;@+Da + iva +Hii, pres. Āvasathe
dayhamāne
—Vin. IV.304
Ālumpakārakam
paribhuāiitum- Havingsatdownnearthebig pot 3”pl. When thedwelling placeis being
D. ITI. 86 containinga measureofalhaka; wpa+ burnt;Dah +ya + mana,pass.pr-p.;
To eatin morsels;āiopamkatvā,Cy. ni +Sad +i + tva,absol.;alhaka,a Avarano
nīvaranocetasoaiihāruho loc. absl.
866;pari + Bhu(n)j + i +tum,inf. measure of grains equal to four paihayadubbalikarano —A. III. 63
patthas,handfuls The
factor
whichcovers,hinders, Avasagato Marassa, Marassa
Alepena
apakaddhi
—Vin.I. 273 upsurges
in mind,andmakesthe vasamgato—S. IV. 91
Removed with an oinment; a +Lip + Āvatānivutāophutā
pariyonaddhā insight
weak;@ +Vr +ana,der:; The one who hasgoneto theabodeof
a, der.; apa + kaddha (from Krs) + i, —D. I. 246 mi(s)+Vr +ana;adhi + ā +Ruh Mara, theone who hassurrenderedto
pst, 3. sg. Covered,hindered,obstructedand
+4,der.;du +bala +karana Mara: advasa+ Gam + ta,pp.; vasam
entangled;ni + Vr.+ta,pp.; a (ava) +
+gata
Alokasafiiam manasikareyyasi—A. Vr +ta,pp.; pari +o +Nah + ta,pp. Avarano
nivaranocetaso
IV. 86
upakkileso
paāāāyadubbalīkarano Āvāsaparamparaāhea bhikkhave
You shouldapplyon yourmindthe Avatā meāvusokāmā—Vin. III. 104
-S.V.94 samsatha—Vin. II. 27
ideaof light;manasi+ kareyyasi,opt. The sensepleasureshavebeenshunned
Thefactor
whichcovers,hinders, Bhikkhus,proclaimateveryresidence;
2”. 52. by me,dear;4 + Vr +ta,pp.
(efiles
themindandmakesthe insight Sams +a +tha, imper.2™.pl.
Ālokassa
pātubhāvo
—A. 1.22 Weak;
upa+kilesa
Avattanī māyamiānāti —M. 1.381
Manifestationof a light Āvāsamaecharīāvāsapaligedhī—A.
He knowsthemagic of conversion;
Avasathacivaram
anissajjitva
—Vin. III. 265
Vān t nā 1
ti, pres. 3'i, sg.
IV,303 The onewho is enviousandgreedy
Alokoantaradhayi,
andhakaro
paturahosi
—S. I. 211;
Vin.IL.155 Without
handing
overtherobe
tobe over thedwelling place;pali (pari) +
Avattanti vivattanti—Vin. I. 284
Lightdisappeared anddarkness
wed
inside
thedwelling(therobeto
Theyreelthiswayandthatway;a + gedha + i, der.
appeared; antara+Dhd +ya + i, pst. beusedin theperiod); a +ni(s) +
Vrt +a +nti,pres.3". pl.; vi + Vrt +
3”. sg.; patu + ®+ ahosi Si +ya +i +twā,absol. Avasikohotitantibaddho
—Vin.I.
a +nti,pres.3".pl.
312
Ālaviyam
viharatiAggālave
cetiye
- Āvaranam
kātum
- Vin. I. 84 (He) is a resident(monk) boundby
lineage;G@vasa
+ika,der.;tanti+
 Āvāhavivāhakānam Asanasmim
Avenipatimokkham

Badh+ta,pp. Also drinksmuddywater;Pa or Pr+

204 Asajjana Tathagatam—M. 1.338
a+ ti, root redup.:pipati> pibati >
(They)performseparateinvitation HavingassaultedtheTathāgata;
Āvāhavivāhakānam apatthito—D. pivati; pres. 3". sg.
ceremony;a@venikanti
visum,Cy. āsaiiana is to be analysedas āsaiia
III. 183
1280 +nam, niggahita(m) is elided as in
Notsoughtfor by thosewhocarryout Avi va yadi va raho — S. I, 209 the case of tamenamanussddisvā,
bringingin or sendingoutmarriages;
a In publicor in privacy
Āvenipātimokkham
uddisanti
—A. Isigili sutta
+pa +Arth +i+ ta, pp.
V. 74
Avudhabalā corā —A. IV. 223
TheyperformseparatePātimokkha Asanakusalenabhavitabbam—M. I.
Avahanipikārāpeti vivāhānipi Thievesareof weapon-power;āvudha
recital;u(t) +Dré +a + nti, pres. 469
kārāpeti—Vin. III. 135 —āvudha
EI Heshouldbeskillfulinchoosinga
Hecausestocarryoutbringingin
seatfor himself;Bha +a +i +tabba,
andsendingoutmarriages: in a family Āvudham nāma cāpo kodando-
thesonbringsa bridein (avaha) Āveniyam
parihāram
dammi-Vin. fut.pp.
Vin. IV. 201 1.71
andthedaughteris sentout (to the
A weaponmeansa long bow anda short Asanantarikaya nisiditabbam —Vin.
bridegroom’shouse(vivaha): I givea specialprivilege;āveniya=
bow āvenika,der.; Dā t mi, pres. Ī". sg. V. 341
āvāhotidārakassaparakulato
dārikāyaāharanam,vivāhotiattano Shouldsit,leavingoneseatvacant:
Avudham
sannicitam
salākam
ceva Āvesanavitthakesamākulā honti - āsana '- antara + ika, der.;ni +Sad
dārikāyaparakulapesanam, Cy.
jevaniyafiea—A. IV, 107 Vin. II. 117 +i +tabba,fut. pp.
552-3;4 + Vah+a, der: vi + Vah+
Theweapons
likearrowsand Containersaremuddledup:
a, der; Kr +Gpe+ nti,caus.pres.
lavelins are hoarded up:
3”,pl. āvesanavitthakamnāmayam Asanapariyanto seyyapariyanto
salākantisaratomarādi kiācipāticamgotakādi,Cv. 1206; vihārapariyanto dātabbo —Vin. II.
nissaggivāvudham, ievanivanti
Avaho
vabhavissati,
vivāho
va āvesana + vitthaka 32
ekatodhārādisesāvudham,
Cy.IV. Shouldbegiventhelastseat,last
bhavissati—Vin. II, 155
54; sam+ni + Ci +ta,pp. Asajja appatinissajja carikam sleepingplace,lastdwelling place;
Therewill bea bringingin (a bride)
or sendingout(a bride)marriage pakkanto—A. IV. 374 Da +tabba,fut.pp.
Āvusoimamiānāhi—Vin.IHI.238 Havingoffendedandwithoutgetting
Avi ceva raho ca —D. II. 80; III. 245;
Friend,seetothis—(anidiomatic himselfabsolved,he hasgoneona Asanam
uddharitabbam
—Vin. I. 46
expression): Jdn + nā +hi, imper.
M.I. 206;IHI.156;A. II. 288 The seatshouldbe removed;u(t)+Dhr
eM eter
In publicandin Privacy;dviandraho, or Hr + i + tabba,fut. pp.
indcl, ati! + ni +Srj
HUE+ ya, absol.; pa +
Avusovadena
samudācaranti
—D.II. Kram +ta,pp. Asanam thapetabbam—
Vin. I. 9
154
Avibhavamtirobhāvam - S. Ii. 121 A seatshouldbekept;Stha +āpe
Appearance anddisappearance:
āvi Addressin termsof āvuso(friend); Asajjaasajjaavaeāsi—D. I. 107 tabba,caus.fut. pp.
bhava;tiro +bhava;avi, tiro, indcl. Vad+a,der.;sam +u(t)+@+Car (As) youspokeattacking
a+ nti, pres. 3”. pl, continuously;
a + Vae+a +s +i, Asanam
paniapesi,
udakafica
Avilamsandati—D. II. 128 doublepst. 2". sg. padanam—M. I. 414; IIT. 155
FlowsdownStirred; Syand+g +ti Aveni uposathamkaronti —Vin. IL Prepared
a seatandfetched
waterfor
pres.3. sg.-Gvilam,ady, 204 Asajja
upanīya
vāeā
bhāsitā
—M.I. (washing)thefeet;pa +Jia +dpe +s
(They)
perform
separate
Uposatha 240;III. 152;A. I. 172;1. 37 + j, caus.pst. 34. sg.
Avilani capani ceremony Havingmadeapersonal reference
352 yani Pivati—Vin,
pivati
— Vi I,
Āsanasmim
(na)kāyampakkhipati
-
Avenipavaranamkaronti—Vin.IL +ya, absol.; Bhas + i + ta, pp. M. II. 138

179
 Asana Asavatthaniya Āsavanirodhagāminī Asavā

Hedoesnotputhisbodyabruptly Asandimpi pallamkampi pātubhavanti

—Vin. IIT. 9 Āsavānam khayā anāsavam
paribhuhianti—Vin. IV. 299 Thethingscausinginfluxesappearin cetovimuttim pannavimuttim
3%.ise. Makeuseof sofaanddivan;pari + theSamgha;
4 +Sru +a, der.+thana ditthevadhammesayam abhinna
Bhu(n)j +a + nti, pres. 3". pl. +iva,der; patu. + bhavanti,pres. sacchikatvaupasampajjaviharati -
Asanacāvetum—D. III. 24 3, pi. D. I. 156
To causeto get(him) out of the seat; Asanne ito, na ito dūre —D. I, 248 Becauseof theekhaustionof
Cyu +e +tum,caus.inf. From here it is nearby, not far away Āsavanirodhagāminī
patipadā
—A. cankers,
experiencing
andattaining
fromhere;@+Sad +ta,pp. HI.413 canker-freeliberationof mind and
Āsanāni
patisāmeti
—M. I 207;IHI. Thepathleadingto thecessationof liberation
throughwisdomin this
157 Asabham thanam patijanati, influkes very life by himself,with higher
Setstheseatsbackin order;pati + parisāsusīhanādam nadati, knowledge,he abides;ditthe+ eva
Sam+e +ti, caus.pres.3”. sg. brahmacakkampavatteti—M. I. 69; Asavapariyadanaiicahoti + dhamme;sayam,indel.; abhi +
S.Il. 27;A. II. 8-9 jivitapariyadananica—A. IV. 146 Jia + G, instr.;sa + acchi (= akkhi)
(He)claimssupreme position,roars Thereis theendof influkesand +katva,absol.,upa + sam + Pad
125 a lion’sroarin theassemblies
and theendoflife; pari +@+Da + +ya, absol.,vi + Hr + a + ti, pr.
Pleaseacceptit asgettingupfrom setsin motionthesupremewheel; ana, der. TEE
theseat;pati +u(t) +Stha+ana, asabha(Skt.arsabha);pati +Jan
der.;Dhr +e + tu,caus:imper:
+nd+ti,pres.3%sg;Nad+a+ti, Āsavā
adhivāsanā
pahātabbā
—M. I. Āsavānam
khayāya
samvattati
—A.
3”. sg.
pres.3". sg; pa + Vrt + e + ti, caus. 7;A. III, 389 Il. 44
OKU3'".sg.
Pres. 2 LE Theinflukesthatshouldbeabandoned It leadsto theexhaustionof influxes
Asanabhiharo
seyyabhiharo
—Vin.
byendurance; a +Sru +a, der.;adhi
1.22
Āsabhim
vāecam
bhāsati
—M. IHI. + Vas+e + ana, caus. der. Āsavāpatisevanā
pahātabbā
—M. I.
Offering
of a seat,offeringofa
123 7; A. ITI. 388
Sleepingplace;abhi +Hr +a, der.;
Makesa boldstatement;
Vac+a, der; Asavaassaveyyumabhisamparayam Theinfluxesthatshouldbeabandoned
Seyya(fromSi) +abhihara
Bhas+a +ti,pres.3”.sg. ~A.II. 198 by practice;
pati +Sev+ana,der.
Influxeswould flow down (on him)to
Āsanena
nimantesi
—D. I. 91
Asayato bhikkhave moghapuriso thenextlife; @+ Sru +a +evyyum, Asavaparikkhayam
gacchanti
—M.
Offered
a chair,asked
tositdown;
veditabbo—Vin. IV. 168 opt.3. pl.; abhi+sam+para +aya 1.349
ni +manta+e +5 +i, denom,pst.
Bhikkhus,
a foolishmanis tobe (fromI) Influxesgototheexhaustion;
pari +
a, 5g.;insIr. is usedwiththeverb
understood by inclination;a +Sf +a, Ksi +a, der.
nimanteti
der.; Vid +e + i + tabba,caus.fut. Āsavā
dassanā
pahātabbā
—M. I. 7
pp. Theinflukesthatshouldbeabandoned Āsavā parivaiianā pahātabbā—
M. I.
Asanesu
acchanti
—Vin.I. 160
Sitontheseats;
Ay+ya+nti,pres by“seeing” 7;A. III. 389
3”.pl.
Āsayam
alihupesi
—D.IN. 23 Theinfluxesthatshouldbeabandoned
Enteredintothelair: adhi + upa te Āsavānamkhayampatiiānāti—A. byavoidance; pari + Vrj +e +ana,
Asandipaiicama
purisā matam (fromI) +5 +i +pst,3” SZ. IV. 224 caus. der.
ādāyagacehanti
—D. 1.55 (He)claims
theexhaustion
of influxes
Fourpersons,
withbierasthefifth Asayamkappeyyama —M. I. 153 (i.e.arahanthood);
pati +Jan +na + Āsavā bhāvanā pahātabbā —M. I. 7;
takethedeadbodyaway;Mr +ta, Wewouldabide;kappa+e +eyyama, fl,pres.3". sg. A. III. 390
PE :ā t Dāt ya, absol.;gaccha oh denom.opt, 1”.pl. The influkesthatshouldbeabandoned
ntt,pres.3”,pl. Āsavānam
khayam
vadāmi
—M.I. 7 bycultivation;
pa +Ha +tabba,
fut.
Āsavatthāniyā
dhammā
samghe | proclaimtheexhaustionof influxes pp.
 Asava Aharimehi Aharatthafica Ahundarika

Asava
vighataparilaha
—M. 1.10 Roads are sprinkled with water: @+
299 Āhuneyyaggi—A. IV. 45
Influxes,destructive
andburning;vi + Sic +ta,pp. +ka, der.
Madewith artificial wool; @ +hara + The fire kindled for thosewho are
Ghan+ta,pp.;pari +daha:Dahor
ima, der. worthy ofgifts; dhuneyya:4 +Hu 4
Dah +a, der. Āsītikomevayovattati—
D. II. 100; (nā) + eyya +aggi, der.
S.V. 153 Aharatthaficaphareyya—Vin. I.
Āsavā
vinodanā
pahātabbā
—M. 1.7; My ageturnseighty; Vrt +a +ti,pres.
199 Ahuneyyo pahuneyyodakkhineyyo
A. IHI.390 AM ase
It wouldalso servethepurposeof anjalikaraniyo anuttaram punna-
Theinfluxesthatshouldbeabandoned
food;āhāratthahcasādheyva,Cy. kkhettam lokassa—
D. II. 93, 5. I.
bygivingup;vi +Nud +e +ana, Asitikova navutikova vassasatiko 1089;ahara +attham +ca; Sphar 220;V. 343
caus. der.
vaiātiyā-
A.I.68;M.I.88 +evya,opt. 3". sg. (The Samghais) worthyofoffering,
Theonewho is eighty.ninetyor worthyof hospitality,worthyofgift,
I Āsavā
samvarā
pahātabbā
—M. I. 7:
hundredyearsby birth;asiti +ika, worthyofgreeting, theuniquefield of
A. IHI.387 Aharatthayapatiganhati —Vin. IV.
der.; navuti + ika, der; vassasata +
Theinfluxesthatshouldbeabandoned 86 meritfor theworld; 4 +Hu +na +
ika, der.
by restrainment Acceptsfor food; ahdra Ī atthāya; eyya,der.; pa +@ +Hu + na + eyya,
pati +Grh +na@-kti, meta.,pres.3'". der ; dakkhinad+ eyya,der.; an +
Asiditvasamsidanti,
samsiditva Sg uttara; puāha + khetta
Āsādanāpekkho
—Vin,IV.84
visadamvapapunanti—D. I. 247
Withthepurpose
ofattacking:
a +Sad
Havingsatdown with confidence,
e * ana, caus. der.+ apekkho Āhāram
āhārenti
—S. III. 240 Ahundarika
samananam
(they) sink down( in the debate);
Take food; āhāra -- e -- ati, denom. Sakyaputtiyanamdisa andhakara -
after sinking down, (they) become
Āsādetabbam
amaāāimha
—S.1.24 pres.3". pl. Vin. 1.79
depressed;
@+Sad + i + tva,absol.:
Wethoughtthatwe shouldmakehim The directionsaregloomyandmurky
sam +Sad +a + nti, pres. 3°. pl; pa
thetargetofattack;ā -- Sad -- e + Āhāram nissāya āhāro pahātabbo- to therecluses,sonsofthe Sakyan.
+Ap +(u) nd +nti, pres. 3". pl. A. II. 145
tabba,caus.fut. Pp.; a + Man +ya +
1+mha,pst. 1".pl. Thefoodshouldbe abandoned with the
Asivisam ghoravisam āsaiia —M. I.
supportof food; ni + Sri +ya, absol.;
236
Asavacchediko
kathinuddhāro
- pa t Hā +tabba,fut. pp.
Havingstrucka snake,deadly
Vin.I. 260
Poisonous;dsir or asu(quick) + visa;
Withdrawalof kathinathatcauses Āhārasambhūtoyam
kāyo—
A. II.
a +Sad +ya, absol.
theremovalof desire:asd +ava 145
+Chid +e +ika, caus.der.; kathina Thisbodyhascomeintoexistence
on
+uddhara:u(t) +Dhr or Hr +a, der, Āhaeca
titfhati—M. I. 493 food;dhdra+sam +bhitto+ayam
Stopsaftertouching
(thesea);d +
Asittakūpadhānebhuāianti—Vin, II. Han+ya,absol.;tittha(fromStha)+
Āhārassasamudayākāyassa
123 ti, pres.3". sg.
Samudayo—S. V. 184
(They)eatina containermadeof Thephysicalformoriginates
Copperor silver;tambalohenava Ahaiichamamatadundubhim
—Vin.
depending
ontheoriginofnutriment;
rdjatenava katāyaPeläya, Cy. 1208: 1.8
Sam+u(t) +aya(from1)
āsittaka3 upadhāna;Bhu(i)j +a + I shallbeatthedrumofimmortality;
nut,pres.3. pl. a+ Han +ssam(syam),fut. 1".sg. a Āhārepatikkilasanii—A. II. 150;
+ Mr + ta,Pp.; dundubhi,onom. I. 83
Asittodakani
vatumani
—p,II.343
Āharimehi
vālehikato—Vin.IV.
food;pati+kiila +sanfa +i, der.
 Ikkāsam
Ikkāsamkasāvam- Vin. II. 151
Stickydecoction;ikkāsanti
rukkhaniyāsam va silesamvā, Cy.
1219
Ikkhanikā ahosi—Vin. III. 107
(She)wasa fortune-
teller;/ks +ana
+i+ ka,der.
lecetamsamasamam ,natthi kiiici
atirekam—A. III. 215
Thusit is equal,thereis nothingmore;
natthi,indcl.or na +As +ti,pres.
2rd
Sirens,G9
lecetamkusalam—Vin. I. 97
Thusit is good;iti +etam
Icchampanidahati—A. IHI.352
Holdsin minda strongwish;pa +ni +
Dha +ti, pres.3% sg.
lechāuppaiiati lābhāya— A. IV. 293
Therearisesa wishfor thegain;
u(t) +Pad +ya+ ti,pres.
3”, sg,
Icchagatamuppajjati—A. III. 123;
Vin.IL.185,uppaiii
Therearisesa strongdesire
lechānamgaleviharati
Iechānamgalavanasande—8. V.325;
A. II. 30
Abidesin Icchānamgala
attheiungle
thicketof lechänamgala
Iechimadatfhum—
M. II, 79
Icchavinaye leeheyyāsi Itipi
dispellinghanker:tibba --chanda A loanis taken;4 +D&+iva +fi,
pass. pres. 3. sg.
Ieeheyyāsidatthum? —M. I. 253
Wouldyou like to see?;/s +ya + Inam ādiyitvā vaddhim patisunāti -
Wewish to see;/s +ya +ma,pres. 1"
evyāsi,opt. 2". sg.; Dr$ +tum,inf. A. IHI,352
pl; Dré +tum,inf,
Havingtakena loan,hehearsabout
liihati sllavato ceto panidhi, the interest;ā : Dad+iva +i + 1G,
Ieehāmahamāvuso imasmim
suddhattā—D. III. 259 absol.;pati +Sru +nda+ti, pres, 3%.
dhammavinayebrahmacariyam
Wishofthe virtuousis fulfilled, sg.
caritum —M. I. 165
because
of its purity; Rdh +ya +fi,
Friend,I wish to live understudentship
pass.pres.3™.sg.;Sudh +ta, pp. + Itarītarena cīvarena —5. II. 194
in thisdoctrineanddiscipline;icchami
tta,der. With one or theotherrobe;itara 1
+aham;Car +i +tum,inf.
itara
Itthakāsantharamsilāsantharam
lecchāmaham imasmim
dārusantharam—Vin. II. 122 Iti kho panetamvuttam kiīicetam
dhammavinayebrahmacariyam
Spreadof bricks,stonesandwood; paticca vuttam —M. I. 361; A. I.
caritum —S. II. 120
sam+Str +a, der. 175; ILL. 411; IV. 47
I liketoleadthehighestwayof life
Whateveris so far said, for what
underthisdoctrineanddiscipline;
Itthakāhicitā—D. II. 178 purposewas it said?; pana +etam;
icchami+aham:Is +ya +mi,pres.
Builtupwith bricks; Ci +ta,pp. kifica + etam; Vac + ta, pp.
ITESo;
Itthakitthakaya
apatti—Vin. IV. 48 Iti patisancikkhati —D. 1.63; M. IL.
Icchamahambhikkhave temasam
Foreachandeverytile thereis an 66; S. IL. 87
patisalliyitum namhi kenaci
offence Reflectsthus;pati +sam + Khya + fi,
upasamkamitabboafiiatra ekena
intens.. pres. 3”. sg.
pindapātanīhārakena —S. V. 13
Itthākantā manāpā piyarūpā
Bhikkhus,I wish to beon my own
kāmūpasamhitāraianīyā —M. I. 85 Iti patisamkhāya—S. V. 354; A. I.
forthreemonths;I shouldnot be
Obiectswhich arewished for, longed 5223-235
approached
byanybodyexceptforthe
for,agreeableto themind, lovely, Having reflectedthus;pati + sam +
onewhocarriesawayalms-food;pati
mixedwith sense-desireandattractive; Khya r ya, absol.
+sam+Li +ya +i +tum,inf; na +
Is + ta, pp.; Kam + ta, pp.; kama +
amhi;upa+sam+Kram+i +tabba,
upa+sam+Dha +i +ta,pp.;Raj Itipi etam abhutam, itipi etam
(Raiij)+aniya,fut .pp.
or instr. ataccham—D. L.3
In thisway too, this is nota fact,
Inam
adaya
kammante
payojeyya
-
lechāmiKāpāyaagatam—Vin. IV. this is not true;iti +api; a + Bhai+
D. 1.71; M. 1.275
79 ta,pp.; a +taccha(Skt.tathya)
A person,haying takena loan,would
I wish Kānā's return
Cause
toinvest
itina business;
@+Da Itipi so Bhagavā araham sammā-
* ya,absol.;pa + Yuj +e +eyya, sambuddhoviiiācaranasampanno
lechāvinayetibbacehando—
A. IV.
Caus.
opt,3", se, sugato lokavidū anuttaro
15
Theonewho hasa keeninterestin purisadammasārathi satthā
Inam
ādiyati
—A. I. 352 devamanussānambuddho bhagavā-
 D.II. 93;M. I. 401;S. 1.220;V. 343
ThatBlessedOneis thusanarahant,
perfectlyEnlightenedOne,theone
whois perfectin rightknowledge
andconduct:of goodspeech,a
knower
of theworld,unigue,
trainer
of theuntamed, a teacherof gods
andmen,theEnlightenedBlessed
One;itipi, indci.;sammā,indcl:
sam+Budh +ta,pp.; sam+Pad
+ta,pp.; loka + Vid +a, der:
purisa +Dam +ya,fut. pp.;
Bhagavā:Bhagavantu,der.nom.
Sg.;to reflecton theBuddhain
Iti yam tam vuttam idametam Or havingheardfromhere:Sru-- tvā,
absol.
A. I. 176
Whatever issaidthusis saidforthis Ito vāsundarataram
—Vin. III. 211
reason;Vac+ ta,pp.; idam +etam; More beautifulthanthis; suadara +
pati + I(t) +ya, absol.
tara, der.; suffix tara is used with
abl. or instr. for comparison
Iti vadamsaccamaha, no musa—A,
Itotinnammāsānamaccayena
-
II. 176 Ittaraiacco samāno—M. II. 47
D. II. 106;A. I. 11,channam
Sayingthushespeakstruth,not
māsānam
falsehood;Vad+a + nta,prp.; at
Afterthreemonthsfrom this day; afi jati +ya, der.; As + mana,pr-p.
Ah +a,pst.3. sg.usedherein the
+aya(fromI)
present sense
Ittarasaddho hoti ittarabhatti —A.

termsofthe nine qualitiesStipulated Ito no matanam seyyo bhavissati - IHI. 165

hereis called Buddhanussatiin
Buddhistmeditation
Iti putthoāmotivadeyya— D. I. 242
Ouestioned thus,hewouldsay"yes';
amo + iti; usual expression is āma;
Vad+eyya,opt.374.
Sg.
Iti putthona Sampādayati
—Vin. II.
249
Ouestionedthus,he is unableto
answer,sam+Pad +aya +ti, caus.
pres. 3. sg.
Iti BhagavatoPatisaficikkhato—§,
1.137
WhentheBlessedOnewasreflecting
mthisway;pati +sam+Khya 2.ata
infens. pr.p,
Iti mearahatamsutam—8.1.208
Thusthewordsofthe Arahants have
beenheardby me;iti, indel.:Sru +ta
Pp.
Itihatatthasampaiāno
hoti—M. HI.
D.II. 330
114;A. IV. 47, 167
Itwill bebetterforusdeadthanthis; ittara, indcl. usedhere to belittle
Thushe is well awareof thatmatter.
Mr +ta,pp.; sevyo,indcl. somethingor somebody;Bhaj +
Itiha me patisaficikkhato —Vin. I. 6
Pali
WhenI wasreflecting
thus;itiha,
Vin.IL.240
indcl.;pati +sam +Khya + nta,
Hereafter,
I will notparticipate
in Ittara samapanno—M. I. 318
intens.pr.p. i
Uposatha;itoparam, adv.;Kr +i + Attainedforthetimebeing;ittarais
ssami,pres. 1. sg. usedherein oppositionto
Ito uttarimkim icchasi?—S. IV.
391
Ito pubbe—D. I. 184 a +Pad+ta,pp.
Whatdo you wish (to know) beyond
Before this
thispoint?;Js +ya +si,pres.2™Sg.
Ito bahiddhā—M. II. 120 (Our) stay will be very short; ittaroti
Ito cabhiyyoharatha—D. I. 142
Outsidefrom here;bahiddhā,indci. appamattako,
Cy. 1003
Takeawaymorethanthisfromhere;
Hr --a 2 tha,imper:204.
pl.
Ito—bhiyyoM.II. 37 Itthattam āgaceheyyum—D. I. 17
Beyondthis;bhiyyo,indcl.
Ito citocasamcopanam —Vin, IV.
tta, der.; @+ gaccha +eyyum,opt.
214
Itobhiyyouttaritaram—D. IHI.52 3”,pil.
Shaking fromhereandthere
Higherthanthis
I
Itthatteabhiratasattapurisesu
Ito cutatatrūpapannā—S. V.394
Ito yojanasateviharati —D. I. 133 samyogamgata—A. IV. 57
Departed fromheretheyhavereached
Livesonehundred
yojanas
awayfrom Thosewho aredelightedin and
(beenborn)there;Cyu + ta,pp.
here
‘atra,indcl.+upa+Pad +ta,pp.;in
associationof men;itthi + tta, der;
.
thenormalusageupa + Pad is not
Itovāpanasutvā—M. 1.85;S.V.
coupledwithloc.
109 sam+ Yuj+a, der.
 Itthannāmassa Itthim
Itthim

Itthannāmassa pāvada—Vin. III. 53 itthissaram, itthālamkāram —A, IV. A womanwith a foetusgonewrong ltthirūpavasānugā—A, III. 68
Tell soandso;pa + Vad +a, imper. 57 andlost;Muh +ta, pp. +gabbha; vi Those who comeunderthe influence
TGOESE Femininebehaviour,feminine +Ghan +ta, pp. +gabbha of woman'sbody; itthi - rāpa t vasa
attitude,feminineconceit, feminine + anuga
Itthannāmāyaayyāyapavattiniyā- predilection,femininevoice and Itthim hanati —A. IV. 339
Vin. II. 273 femininecharm;itthi +Kip +ta,pp.; Kills a woman;Han +a +ti, pres. 3’ Itthilimgam pātubhūtam hoti —Vin.
Withthevenerable
preceptor
so and itthi +dkappa;itthi +chanda; itthi + sg, ITI.35
sara; itthi +alamkara Femalecharacteristic
hasappeared;
is called upajjhaya Itthiyāabhirūlham samkamam pdtu + ®+ Bhi +ta,pp.
Itthikumārikapatiggahanā sarattosancalesi —Vin. Il. 127
Itthannāmāyaayyayasikkhamānā- pativirato —D. I. 5 Beinginfatuated(he) causedto shake Itthi apagatagabbha—Vin. II. 129
Vin. IV. 319 the‘passover’,ascendedby a woman; A womanwho hasgivenbirthto
Reirainedfromacceptingwomenand
Thetraineeofthe venerable
soandso: abhi +Ruh 4 ta,pp.; sam +Kram + a child or who hashada miscarriage:
girls;pati +vi +Ram +ta,pp.
ittham,indcl. +nama(name)
a,der; sam +Raj +ta,pp.; sam + apa + Gam +ta,pp. +gabbha
Itthicittam virāietvā purisacittam Cal t e t s -- i, caus.pst. 3". sg.
TI y 2rd .

bhāvetvā— D. II. 271 Itthī alamkārupavicārā —A. III. 363

IV. 158
Havingcausedto detachherselffrom Itthiyā vā itthim karitvā, purisena Womanarethosewho areseekingfor
Teachthe Dhammato the harem:itthi
woman'smentalityandcultivatedthe vāpurisam karitvā —D. 1.98 ornaments; alamkara + upavicadra
r agara; Vac + e + hi. caus. imper.
i
24. ko
mentalityof man;vi +Raj +e +twa, Havingcompareda womanwith a
E. womanandmanwith a man;itthivāva
caus.absol.;Bhii +e + tvd, caus. Itthī asapattābhinivesā—A. III. 363
absol. itthimpariyesitva, Cy. 267 The woman's adherence is to live
Itthālamkāramdhārenti—Vin. IV.
withoutco-wives;a + sapatti(Skt.
340
Itthidhutto surādhutto akkhadhutto Itthiyava purisamatim —
Vin. III. sapatni)+ abhinivesa
(They)wearwomen’sornaments;igthi
—A. IV. 283 137
+alamkara;Dhr +e +nui.caus,
Theonewho is addictedto women, (Passes)to a womanthe intentionofa Itthī itthattam nātivattati —A. IV.
pres. 3”. pl.
drinking,andgambling man;matimadhippayamajjhasayam Sa
ehandam
rucimāroceti;Cy.554 The womandoesnotgo beyond
Itthikāmehi raja maiiiie paricāreti
[tthimitthitthikassapatthapesi—D. femininity;na +ati + Vrt + a +ti,
—S.IV. 344
II. 179 Itthiyasarattacittopatibaddhacitto pres. 3”. Sg.
Heenioyslife with thepleasures
Causedtoestablisha grantof a woman tibbacchandotibbāpekho —M. II.
of womenlike theking;itthikamehiti
fortheonewho is in needofa woman; 223 Itthī issariyapariyosānā—A. IHI.
itththisaddhimkamaitthikāmā,tehi
itthikāmehi,Cy. II. 109;mahio.
itthi +atthikassa;
pa +Stha +dpe+ A manwho is attachedandboundto a 363
indel.;pari +Car4 S +1,caus.pst. 34.Sg. Woman
andhasdeeppassion
andstrong Womanis authoritative; issara +iva,
€ +ti, caus.pres.
J”. SZ.
hope(for her):sam +Raj +ta,pp.+ der.; pari t osāna
Itthim gantvanassarati—Vin. IV. cilta; pati + Badh + ta, pp.+ citta;

Itthikā samānā—p, II. 272 159
Beingalittle woman;itthi+ka, ¢ Havinggoneto a womanhedoesnot
ler:; remember;Gam +tva, absol.: na +
As +mana;br.p.
Smr +a + ti, pres. 3) sa
Itthim mūlhagabbham
vighātagabbham—M. II. 102
tibba +chanda; tibba +apekha
Itthiyo vihāram pekkhāpetvā —Vin.
IHI, 127
Havingmadethewomenseetheliving
quarter;pekkha(is takenas the base)
+dpe +tva,caus. absol.
Itthi kho gabbhinī purisānam
amanāpā—Vin. I. 269
A pregnantwoman is not attractive to
men
Itthi pavutthapatikā—Vin. III. 83
A womanwhosehusbandhadbeen
 ltthī
livingfaraway;pa + Vas+ta,pp. +
pati +ka, der.
Itthī puttādhitthānā—A. IHI.363
Woman's determinationis to have
children
Itthī purisādhippāyā—A. III. 363
Womanis intenton man;purisa +
adhippaya
Itthī matapatikā—Vin. III. 131
A womanwhose husbandis dead:
Mr + ta,pp. +pati +ka, der.
Itthī sannisinnagabbha
—
Vin. VI.
278
A womanwhois pregnant; sam+ni +
Sad +ta,pp. +gabbha
Itthīhi sikkheyyāma—D. II. 245
Wewouldtrainhimthroughwomen:
Sak +eyyāma,desid.opt.1".pl.
Itthekeabhivandanti—M. II. 233
This is howsomepeopleassert;
ittham+eke;abhi + Vad+a +nti,
pres.3". pl.
Idappaccayatapaticcasamuppado
- Idamtehotuātitheyyam-
Vin. I. 5
Dependent co-arising,i.e.
conditionality;
ida(m)+pati+aya
(from1) +ta,der: sam+ u(t) +Pad +
a, der.
Idamatthantissahoti
jivitaparikkharesy—A. V. 211
In referenceto thenecessitiesof
life hehastheideathatthisis my
Provision:idamattham:ime
Paccayāti,Cy. V.69:, idam +
Idampissa
attham +iti +assa
Idamatthitamyeva nissāya—
A. IHI.
219
Dependingon theideathatthis
is certainlyenough(for me):
idam +atthi + ta, der.; ni +Sri
+ya, absol.
IdamavocaBhagavā
—D. III. 181;
S. V.24;Vin. I. 11
TheBlessed Onesaidthis;idam+
avoca:a + Vae+a, root redup.,
pst.3. sg.
Idamassamusavadasmimvadāmi-
A. 1.206
This, | say, is includedin his false
Statement; idam + assa; Vad+ a +mi.
pres. 1".sg
Idametampaticeavuttam —A. V. 51
This hasbeensaidconcerningthat;
idam+etam;Vac+ ta,pp.
Idamevasaccammoghamaniham
-
D. I. 187;M. I. 484,498;II. 169
This aloneis true,therestis false
(emptyof truth): idam + eva;
mogham+ afifiam
Idampi mesammasarasi—A. IL.
186
Friend,do you rememberthis too of
me?;Smr+a+ si,pres,24 Sg.
Idampissa
hoticaranasmim
—M. I.
358
This too is includedin his conduct
Idampissa
hotiviiiāya—M. I. 358
This toois includedin his wisdom
Idampissa
Idampissahoti sīlasmim —D. I. 63
Thistoois includedin his moral
virtue;
paccattavacanatthe
vāetam
bhummam,
Cy. 182; idam + api +
assa
Idamkho adhikaranam kakkhalahea
valafica.—Vin. I]. 299
Thislegalquestionis hardand
dangerous
Idamca paname vininhanam ettha
sitametthapatibaddham — D. I. 76;
M. I. 17
Thisconsciousnessof me hasrested
andtieddown here;Sri + ta,pp.; pati
+Badh +ta,pp.; pana and ettha,
indcl.
Idamtesamsammohaviharasmim - Venerablesir, this is not suitable,
M.I. 21
Thisistheirabidingin delusion;
sam+
Muh+a, der. +vihara
Idamtesamhoti āsanasmim—D. II.
208
Thisis theirseatingarrangement
A. IV. 63
Maythisbea gift for you; Hii (Bhii)+
a t tu,imper.3'', sg.; atithi t eyya,
der,
Idamnānākaranam
sutavato
ariyasāvakassa
assutavatā
puthujjanena—A. I. 267
Thisisthedifferenceof a learned
nobledisciplein comparisonwithan
unlearnedworldling;swta+vantu,
der; puthu +jana
IdamnukhoKassapaseyyo?—Vin.
Idam
1.33
Is this, Kassapa,better?;nu, interr.p.
Idam pajahatha,idam upasampajja
viharatha —D. 1.214
Abandonthis,abideafterattaining
this;pa +Ha +tha, root redup.
imper.2”. pl.; upa+sam+Pad +
ya, absol.; vi +Hr +a +tha, imper.
ZU apt:
Idam bhantekatham imassakvattho
—M. IIL. 271;A. I. 72-3
Venerablesir, how is this.what is the
meaningof this;katham,indcl.; ko +
attho
Idam bhantena channamna
patirūpam—Vin. II. 79
this is notproper;na +Chad +
ta,pp.
Idam bhasitamhassakamyeva
sampajjati namakamyeva
sampajjati, rittakam yeva
sampajjati,tucchakamyeva
sampaiiati —M. II. 43
This sayingturnsout to be ridiculous,
merewords,emptyandhollow;
Bhas + i +ta,pp.; sam +Pad +ya +
ti, pres. 3™.sg.; Rie + ta,pp. + ka,
der.
Idam mattikamdhanam,afham
pettikam, aīīiam pitāmaham—M.
II. 63
Thisis thewealthcomingdownfrom
themother’sside, theother from the
father’sside,theotherfromthe
grandfather'sside;matti(matr)+ika,
der.; petti or pitti (pitr)+ ika, der.
 Idam
IdamvatvaSugatoathaparam
etadavocasatthā—D. II. 90
Havingsaidthis,theWell gone,the
teacher,utteredagainthefollowing;
Vad+ tva,absol.;atha + aparam;
etam(etad)+a + Vac+a, root
redup.,pst..3. sg.
Idamsandhāyabhāsitam—M. I.
370;III. 208;A. I. 134
It hasbeensaidconcerningthis;
a
sandhāya,indcl.
Idam sandhāyabhāsitamPārāyane
Udayapaīihe—A. I. 134
It hasbeensaid,concerningthis,
in theguestionof Udayain the
Pārāyana
Idam samkacchikamayam
udakasātikā—Vin. II. 272
This is thevest,thisis thebathing
cloth;sam +kaccha+ ika, der: two
To
—. more robes, prescribedfor the
bhikkhuntsin additionto thenormal
threerobes
Idam samvidhānamagamma—D.I.
135
Havingfollowedthisarrangement;
@+
Gam+ya, absol.
Idānipi mayamvipassakā..
-:
vihareyyāma—Vin. III. 23
Beinginsightmeditators,
we would
abide,
evennow;idani,indcl.+api;vi
+Hr +eyyama,opt. 1".pl.
Idānevaamhākamsāraiiam
okkantam—A. IHI. 195
Timidityoccuredto usrightnow;
idani +eva;sdrada+ya, der;
Iddhipatihariye Iddhipātihāriyena Idha
o +Kram +ta,pp. Whileseeingharmin the performance pariyāpunanti —M. I. 133
of miracle;sam +passa +mana, Somestupidpeoplein thisworldlearn
Iddhābhisamkhāram abhisamkhāsi pr. p. thedhammaby heart;pari +Ap +(u)
—M. II. 99 nd +nti; pres. 3”. pl.
Performeda miracle;abhi +sam(s)+ Iddhipatihariyena attiyami
Kr+a+s +i, doublepst. 3”. sg. harayamijigucchami —D. I. 213 Idha khanāhi—
A. V. 160
lamsickof, | amashamedof andI am Dig here;Khan +a+ hi, imper.222,
Iddhābhisamkhāram disgustedwith theperformanceof Sg.
abhisamkhāresi—Vin. I. 16 miracle;attivami,denom.from atta:
He causedto manifestpsychicpower; harāyāmi, denom. from hiri (Hrī); Idha gahitamtatra mukkam —Vin.
iddhi + abhi +sam(s)+Kr +a, der.;
iigucehāmi,desid. of Gup Il. 168
abhi +sam(s) + Kr +e +s +i, caus. What is takenup hereis givenup
Dst.3". sg.
. 2rd e
Iddhipādābhāvitā honti subhāvitā there;Grh +i +ta,pp.; Muc +
-A.IV.225 ta, pp.
Iddhābhisamkhāram Bases
of psychicpowerhavebeen
patippassambhesi—Vin. I. 17 cultivated
andwelldeveloped;
iddhi+ Idha Tathagatoloke uppajjati—D. I.
He causedto contractthe pada;Bhii + e + i + ta, caus.pp. 62;A. V. 204
manifestation
of psychicpower;pati Here,in thisworldtheTathagata
is
+pa + Sra(m)bh+e +s + i, caus. Iddhimantassunamimeparajana - born
pst. 3. sg. M.I, 153
Thesedevilsseemto be powerful; Idha nitthā idha vihāya nitthā —A.
Iddhipahutāyaiddhivisavitāya paraianāti
yakkhā, Cv.II. 161;iddhi V. 120
=
IN
iddhivikubbanatāya— D. II. 213 tmantu, der.t su; nāma -- ime
Goal is herein this world, goal is after
For themasteryover psychic
leavingthis world; ni +Stha; vi + Ha
power,fortheproficiencyin Iddhimantodibbacakkhukā
+ya, absol.
psychicpower,fortheproliferation paracittaviduno—A. I. 148
of psychicpower; iddhipahutāvāti Thosewhohavepsychicpowers,
Idha nu tvam mahasamana?—Vin. I.
iddhipahonakatthaya, divine
eyeandknowothers'minds
;
32
iddhivisavitayati..cinnavasitaya, para +citta +Vid + ai,der.
Are you here,GreatSage?;mu,
iddhivikubbanatayati..
interr.p.
nanappakāratokatvā dassanatthāya- Iddhimācetovasippatto
—D. II. 108;
Cy.641 A. IHI,340 Idha pādamkarissāmītiaāīena
Theonewhohaspsychic
power
and pādam karomi—M. II. 69
Iddhipātihāriyānusāsaniyā
—Vin. II. gained
mastery
overthemind
Thinking thatI shall putmy foot here,
200 (emotion);
ceto+vasi+patta:pa +
I put it somewhereelse;karissāmi '
By meansof instructionon the Ap+ta,pp.
iti
displayof psychicpower;iddhi+
patihdriya:
pati +Hr +a +iya, Iddhiyaupasamkami
—A. IV. 235
Idha Bhagavā kimāha? —5. IV. 306
der. + anusasani Approached
bypsychic
power;
upa+
WhatdoestheBlessedOnesay
sam+Kram + i, pst. 3". Sg. onthispoint?;idha,indcl.;a +Ah +
Iddhipatihariye
adinavam
a, pst. 3. sg.; the verbaha is used
Sampassamano
—D. I. 213 Idhaekaecce
moghapurisā
dhammam
 Idha
Idha bhavamkimāha?—M. II. 84
Sir, whatdoyousayon thismatter?
Idha va huramvā—5. I. 12,67
Here,in thisworldor in thenext:
huram,indcl.
Idhalokaviiayāyapatipanno—A. IV.
269
Theonewhohasbeenfollowing
thewayto conguertheworldhere:
idha + loka + vijaya;pati + Pad +
fa,pp.
Idhekaccesattā—S. IV. 270
Somelivingbeingsin thisworld
Idhevaiīvitā voropeyyam—
Vin. IV.
34
May I causeto deprivehimoflife,
righthere;idha +eva;vi +9 +Ruh +
e * eyvam, caus.opt. 1".sg.
Idhevatavahohi yavahamidheva
vihara,ahamtedhuvabhattena-
Vin. I. 25
Abiderighthere,I will supplyyou
withdaily meal:yj +Hr +a, imper.
2". sg.; dhuva +bhatta
ee
Idhevamemarapambhavissati
pabbajjava—M. II. 57; Vin. IH. 13
My deathor renunciation
will take
place,righthere:Bhi +q + i +ssati,
Idhevasabbavedayitani
abhinanditanisītibhavissanti—S. y,
319
All thatis felt,andrejoicedoverwill
becomecool, righthere;idha,indcl.,
eva,emph.p.
Indriyānam
Idhevasamano— M. I. 63
Samanais only here
Inghāvusoetamdesakamsādhukam
manasikarohi—M. I. 438
Friend,keepthis little advicewell in
mind;imgha,indcl.; sddhukam,ady,;
manasi+Kr + 0 +hi, imper.2”. sg.
Indakhīlam atikkameyya—Vin. IV.
160
Wouldcauseto cross the threshold
of thebedroom;indakhilo nama
sayanigharassaummaro,old. Cy.
160;ati + Kram +eyya,opt. 3”, sg.
Indakhīlam ūhacca— D. II. 254
Havingpulledout thepost;u(t) +Hr
(t) +ya, absol.
Indriyanafica Samatampativiiiha-
A. III. 375; Vin. I. 183
Realisethebalanceof the faculties:
Sama+ta,der.;pati + Vyadh+ya,
imper.2". sq.
Indriyānamavekallatā—A. IHI,441
Non-deformity
of thefaculties:
a+
vikala+ya +ta,doubleder.
Indriyanam paripākamanvāya—M.
1.266
Havingcometothematurity
of
faculties;Paripākam -- anvāva:pari
+Pac+a,der;any+[+ ya,absol.
Indriyānamsamattaparipiiratta
arahamhoti —S. V. 200
Dueto theevennessand
completeness of faculties,one
becomesanarahant;sama + tta,der;
Pari t pūra (fromPr) + tta, der.
Indriyesu
Indriyesuguttadvaro —D. III. 107;
A.II.39
Theonewith guardedsense-faculties
Indriyesuguttadvārassa
visūkadassanam kantako —A. V. 134
Funnyshowsis a thorn(obstacle)
totheonewhosesense-faculties
areguarded;Gup +fa, pp.
dvara
Indriyesuguttadvarena
bhavitabbam —M. I. 470
Oneshould bea personwithguarded
sense-faculties;
Bhat+a +i +tabba,
fut.pp.
Indriyesuguttadvāro hoti bhoiane
mattaīūiūhoti iāgariyam anuyutto
hoti—S. IV. 104;A.I. 113
Heiswithguarded sense-faculties,
moderateineatingandawakein
practice
; matta +Jd + a, der;
Jagara+iva,der; anu+ Yuj+ta,
pp.
Imaiicarattimimaiicadivasam—A.
I. 211;IV. 249
Thisdayandnight;ace.for loc.sense
Imamha kayaannamkayam
abhinimminati, rūpim manomayam
sabbamgapaccamgim ahinindriyam Imam rattindivam vitinameyyam -
-D.1.77; M.II. 17 M. 1.13
From
thisbodyhecreates
another
bodywhichiswitha form,mindmade, night;ratti +diva; vi + ati + Nam + e
withallmaiorandminorlimbsand
+eyyam,caus.opt. I“. sg.
withnodeficiency
in faculties;
abhi+
ni+Maor Mi+na +ti,pres.3”.sg.; Imasmadhammavinayaapakkanto-
"ipa+i, der.;mano+maya,der.;
sabba+amga+pati +amga+7,
der.;a +hina:Ha +ta,pp. indriya
Imasmā
Imam kāyamiarā phusati—A. II.
103
Old ageaffectsthis body;Spré +a +
ti,pres.3™.sg.
Imam kalam pavisitabbam, imam
kalam nikkhamitabbam —Vin. IHI.
160
Youshouldenteratthistime,go
out at this time;#mamkdlam,acc.for
loc.sense;pa + Vis + i + tabba,fut.
pp.; ni(s) +Kram +i + tabba,fut.pp.
Imam dhammapariyayam
abhikkhanam bhāseyyāsi—D. III.
116
Youshouldspeakquiteoftenthis
modeof teaching;abhikkhanam,adyv.;
Bhas + eyvasi,opt. 2™.sg.
imam dhammapariyayam
alatthamhasavanāya—M. III. 152
We hadthechanceto listento this
modeof teaching;a + Labh + ttha +
mha;pst. I". pl.
Imam peccaparibhunjissami —A.
IV. 60
I will enjoy this aftergoing to (the
nextworld);pa + I (t) +ya, absol.;
pari + Bhu(i)j + i +ssami,fut. I’. sg.
I would causeto spendthisdayand
D. IIL. 6
Departed fromthisdoctrineand
discipline;apa+Kram+ta,pp.
 Imasma Imassa Imahi

Imasmadhammavinayapapatito- discipline;@ +Pad +ya +i +ssati, | saythatit is noteasyto repaythis expressions,waysof speakingand
A. II. 2 fut. 3. sg. person by thisindividual; su +pati+ conceptswith which theTathagata
Fallendownfromthisdoctrineand Kr +a, der.; Vad +a +mi, pres. 1
u
converseswithoutgraspingthem;vi +
discipline;pa +Pat +i +ta,pp. Imasmimyeva byamamatte o (ava) t Hr - at ti, pres. 3". sg.; a
5°
kalebaresaiiiimhisamanake —§. I. +para + Mrs + a + nta,pr. p.
Imasmimkayeasubhanupassi 62 Imassacittassaanantara—D. III.
viharati —A. V. 109 Rightin this fathom-longbodywith Imāyapi ratiyā acchissanti—Vin.
104
Reflectingon theimpurityofthis mind; kalebareti attabhāve, sasahhie II. 76
Immediatelyafterthis mind;an +
body,heabides sacitte,Cy. I, 117 Theywill staywiththis ioy;Ās
antarā
t ssanti(Skt.svanti)—acchanti,
Imasmimkāyeādīnavānupassī Imasmimva loke parasmim va —D. Imassabhāsitassakatham attho fut.3. pl; takingacchaaspres.
viharati —A. V. I1O Il. 319 datthabbo?
—M. II. 69,III. 9 base,ssanti is addedwith i to
Reflectingon theshortcomingsof In this world or in the next Howshouldthemeaning of this make it fut.; acchissanti: double
thisbody.heabides;ādīnava 3-anu
speechbeunderstood?;Bhas +i +ta, fut. 3. pl.
+passa+ i, der. Imasmim sati idam hoti pp.;Dré +tabba,fut. pp.
imassuppadaidam uppaijjati, Imāsam ca imāsamca
Imasmimca panaveyyakaranasmim imasmimasati idam na hoti imassa
Imassayam dandam icchasi,tam viharasamapattinamlabhino —M. I.
bhafifiamane — D, I. 46;S.IL. 189,IHI. nirodhā idam niruiihati —M. II. 32; dandampanehi—D. II. 321 210
67, IV. 20; V. 423; Vin. I. 11 S. 11.95 Forthisman,inflict thepunishment Thosewho havegainedthese
Whenthisexpositionwasbeingmade; Whenthis is, this is; due to this,this
thatyouwish;iccha ( fromIs) +si, abidings
andattainments;
vihara
vi +@+Kr +ana,der.;Bhan +ya + arises;whenthis is not,this is not;due pres.2™.
sg.;pa
5 +Ni +a +hi, imper. +samapatti
mana,pass.pr.p.; loc. abs. to cessationofthis, this ceasesto 24,sg
exist;sati, loc. sg. of santa,prp.; Imāham bhanteatthavasam
Imasmimca savifihanakekaye imassa+uppada:abl.sg.; twocases, Imassa
vāthokamdemi,imassavā sampassamanaicchami —Vin. I. 293
bahiddhaca sabbanimittesu—M.
loc. andabl., are usedhereto bahukam—A, IV. 215
III. 18;S. II. 252;A. IV. 53 Venerablesir, seeingthis benefit|
indicatecausalrelation; u(t) + Pad + I givea littleto this or moreto this;
In thisconsciousbodyandin all the wish; imam+aham;sam +passa +
ya +ti,pass.pres.3. sg.;ni +Rudh Da +e +mi,pres. 1". sg. mana,pr.p.; Is +ya +mi,pres. 1".
otherexternalobjects;sa + vi +Jaa
+a,der; ni +Rudh+ya +ti,pass. Sg.
ro
+ana +ka, der.;bahiddha,indel.
pres.3". sg.; this is consideredthe Imassasutvāamussaakkhāyanti
general statement of causality in imassa
bhedāya
—Vin. IV. 12
Imasmimdhammavinayeakamkhati Imāham bhanteārāmam
Buddhism Hearing(thewords) of this (person),
pabbajjamakamkhatiupasampadam Buddhapamukhassa
—D.1.176;II. 152 theyconvey(them) to that (person) bhikkhusamghassadammi—
D. II.
Imasmimsarire evarūpam formakinga rift; imassasutvā,obiect
Longsfor renunciationandordination 98
paramanipaceākāram karosi
—A. V. ofthe absol. is to be understood;Sru
in thisdoctrineanddiscipline;a + Venerablesir, I donatethis gardento
66
Kamks+a +ti, pres,374SZ. * (vd,absol.;@ +Khya +ya +nti, thecommunityofbhikkhus ledby the
Youshowextreme
formofhumility
of pres,3”. pl. Buddha;imam+aham;Da +mi,pres.
thiskind towardsthisbody;parama+ 1", sg.
Imasmimdhammavinayevuddhim
ni +Pat+ya +Gkara;Kr +0 +si, ImakhoCitta lokasamaiia
virūlhim vepullamāpaiiissati —M.
pres.2". sg. lokaniruttiyolokavohara
1. 103 Imāhigāthāhianumodi—
D. II. 88,
Hewill makeagrowth,increaseand lokapaiiiattiyoyahiTathagato 221
Imassaimina puggalenana voharati
aparāmasam —D. 1.202
enhancement
in thisdoctrineand Appreciatedwith theseverses;anu +
suppatikāram
vadāmi
—M. III. 254 These
are,Citta,worldlyconventions, Mud+a +i, pst.3". sg.
 Imina
Iminā anumodaniyenaanumoditva-
A. ILL.50
Havingthanked
withthisappreciative
word;anu +Mud +aniya,fut. DD.;
anu + Mud +a+i +tvé,absol.
Imina idam lacchami—M. II, 232
Withthis,I will getthis:Labh +ssami
(Skt. svami); fut. 1°. se,
Imina imamcetapehi—Vin, III.
241
Exchange this for this:Ci () +Gpe+
hi, caus.imper,2”. Sg.
Imina imamdehi—Vin, II. 241
Give this for this:Da +e +hi, imper:
2? e
- Sg.
Imina imamparivattehi—Vin. IHI.
241
Barterthiswith this;pari + Vrt +e +
hi, imper,24. Sg.
Iminā ovādenaovadito—A. IH. 70
Beingadmonishedby thisadvice:9 +
Vad+i +ta,pp.
Iminā nayenaneti—A. II. 180
Leadsin thisway;AT-- a3ri, pres
3”. sg, E eyyum,opt. 3™.pl.; ca + aham;
Iminā nīhārena—Vin. I. 13
In thisway;ady,
Imināpamgenaarahatam
anukaromi—A. IV. 249
In thisrespecttooI follow thewayof
arahants;iming+api +amgena;anu
+Kr+o+ mi, pres, 1". sg.
Imina Pariyayena—D, II. 232;S. IV.
Ime Ime Imgha
167; imināpi
Imecabhikkhii anuyunjatha~— Vin. or arethesethingsone in meaning
In thisway
HI, 163 anddifferentonly in ekpression;
Takethesebhikkhusto task: nana +attha; udahu, indcel.
Imināpi opammena— D. IHI. 26
anuyunjatha,gavesetha,iānātha,
Evenwith thissimile: upamā3-ya,
Cy.582; anu + Yu(ti)j +a +tha, Ime panamhakamputtamatta
der.
imper.
2". pl. mannenattamattamaniie, amhe
ovaditabbam anusasitabbam
Iminā pūtikāyena attiyāmi —A. IV.
Imecepimahāsālāatthamga maīiianti —M. I. 460
377
samannāgatamuposatham Thesepeoplewho are just like
I amtroubledby this rottenbody:atta
upavaseyyum —A. IV. 259 our sonsandgrandsonsthink that
ya +mi, denom.pass.pres. 1°.Sg.
Evenif thesegreatSāla treeswould we shouldbeadvisedandinstructed
observeeightpreceptson Uposatha (by them);pana + amhakam;
Imina viharena viharato (mayham)
days;upa +Vas +a +tha; upa +Vas marine,indcl.; o (ava) + Vad+i +
—A. IV. 440
+eyyum,opt. 3. pl tabba, fut. pp.; anu + Sas +i+
WhileI wasabidingin thisway;gen.
tabba,fut.pp.; Man +ya + nti,
abs].
Imecepi mahāsālāsubhāsitam pres. 3. pl.
dubbhāsitamāiāneyyum, ime
Imissa pathaviya ukkūlavikūlam,
cāhammahasālevyākareyyam: Imesam puggalanam
nadividuggam,
sotāpannāavinipāta dhammā niyatā abhikkantataro ca panitataro ca—A.
khanukantakadhanam,
sambodhiparāyanāti. —S. V. 377 II. 95
pabbatavisamam- M. IHI. 105
Even
if thesegreatSāla trees The one,moreexcellentandexalted,
Of thisearth,upsanddowns,riversand
couldunderstand
what is goodand amongthesepersons
ravines,tractsofstumps andthorns,
what
isbadspeech,I wouldalso
mountains
anduneven
places
declare
thatthesegreatSālatreeshave Imehi akarehi imehi padehi imehi
entered
theStream,theyare notof the vyanjanehi attho suvibhatto—A. V.
Imissayevaitthiya idam kammam-
nature
of fallingintopurgatory,
they 229
Vin. II. 133
aredestinedanddriftingtowards The meaninghasbeenwell analysed
Thisis thework of thiswomanindeed:
perfect
enlightenment; sw+bhdsita, with thesemodes,words,andphrases;
imissd + eva
pp.+du + bhasita;4 +Jan +na + su + vi +Bhaj + ta,pp.
Imissāham
cīvaramdassāmi—
Vin.
IV. 275 vit @+Kr +eyyam,
opt.I. sg.; Imehi ubbālho Bhagavā pakkanto -
I will givea robeto this(bhikkhunī) Sola+@+Pad + ta, pp.; a+ vi Vin. I. 353
*ni +Pat +a, der. +dhamma;
(asa present);imissa@ + aham;Da + Being oppressedby these,the Blessed
Sssdmi,fut. 1",sg. ni+Yam+ta,pp.;sam+bodhi+ Onewentaway;u(t)+Badh+ta,pp.;
para+ayana(fromI ) pa +Kram +ta,pp.
Imekhotedhammayemepubbe
sutavāahesum—S. V. 226
Imedhamma
nanatthaceva Imgha janahi —Vin. IV. 149
nānāvyaāiianāea, udāhu ekatthā, Pleaseunderstand;imgha,indel; Jan
These
arethosethingswhichI have
heardbefore;Sutavā—sutā, Cy.lll, byaāianameva
nānam?
—M. IHI. +na +hi, imper.2". sg.
145-6
247;a +Hit(Bhi)+q (ho>he)+s+
um,pst.3",pl. Arethese
thingsdifferentin Imgha tāva āyasmāāgamam
Meaning
aswell as in expression pariyāpunassu
—Vin.II. 249
 Imgha
Venerable sir, firstof all, learnthe
doctrine;tava,indcl.;pari +Ap +
(u) nā -- ssu,imper.2™.sg.
Imgha tāvaāyasmākāyikam
sikkhassu—Vin. II. 248
Venerable sir, firstofall, train
yourselfin (good)physicalbehaviour;
kāvat ika, der.;Sak -- ssu, desid.
imper.2™.sg.
Imghatavaāyasmāvinayam
pariyāpunassu— Vin. II. 249
Venerable sir, firstofall, learnthe
discipline(disciplinaryrules)
Imghatāvaāyasmāvinayam
sikkhassu—A. V. 81
Venerablesir,first of all, train
yourself
in theVinaya
Imgha tumheāyasmantomuhuttam
ekamantamhotha,yāvamayam
mantema—Vin. II. 94
Venerablesirs,will you pleasekeep
yourselvesasidefor a moment,until
we discuss(thematter):muhuttam,
adv.;Hū(Bhū)-:a +tha,imper.
284
pl.; manta+e --ma,denom.
pres.1",
pl.
Imgha tvam Upali samgheviharahi
—A.V.209
Upāli,youiust live in thecommunity;
vit+Hr +a +hi, imper.2", sg.
maficakampanhapehi,kilantosmi
Ananda,nipaiiissāmi—D. II. 137
Lookhere
Ānanda,
prepare
abedfor
me in betweenthe twin Sāla trees,
Issati
keepingtheheadnorthward;I shalllie
down,Ānanda,I amtired:inghāti
codanatthenipato, Cy. 834; pa +Jia
+ ape + hi, imper. 2". sg.: kilanto +
asmi: Klam +ta, pp.; As +mi, pres.
I“. sg.; ni +Pad +ya +i +ssāmi,
jut. Po sg-
Imghayyabhesaiiamiānāhi
yenāhamna viiāyeyyam-Vin. IHI.
84
Sir, pleaseseewhetherthereis any
medicine,by which I would notbe
fertile;Jan +na +hi, imper,2” Sg.
yena + aham; vi + Jan + ya + eyyam,
opt. 1".sg.
Irinam Apajjati, vipinam āpaiiati -
A.V.156
He becomeslost (he feels like
losthimselfin wilderness);
irinasamkhatamarainiam, vipina
samkhātammahāgahanamca āpanno
viyahoti, Cy. V. 55
lriyamanambrahmapathe—A. IIL.
346
Theonewho is movingon thehighest
way;Ir +ya +mana,
pr.p.
Iriyapatham
vikopeyya—Vin. III. 46
Wouldcauseto changetheway of
movement;
Ir +ya +patha;vi +Kup
+e+ evya,caus.opt, 3”. Sg.
Isigilipasse viharati Kālasilāyam -
5. I, 120;Vin. III. 159
Abideson theBlack Rock at theslope
of Isigili
Issatiupadussati
issambandhati-
A.11.203
Issarakuttam Issuki
Issāmanikā—A, II. 203
Becomesangry,hatefulandharbours
|
The femalewith aiealous mind;issā 34
Rs +ya +ti, pass. pres. 3™.sg.
anger; e
EF
Dus +ya 1.ti, pass. pres. 3". sg.; mana + ika, der.
Ba(ildh --a 1-ti, pres. 3". sg.
Issāso vā issāsantevāsīvā —A. IV.
IssarakuttamBrahmakuttam —D. 423
II, 30 An archeror his apprentice;iss@sa+
Creationof the Lord, creationol ante + Vas + i, der.
Brahma;
kutta:Kip +ta,pp.
Issaso hoti —Vin. IV. 124
Issaranimmānahetu —M. II. 222; A. (He) is an archer
1.173
Dueto thecreationofthe Lord; Issuki hoti macchari —D. III. 45; M.
issara+ nimmdna+ hetu 1.96; II. 246;A. III. 335
Becomes envious and selfish; issuka
Issariyabalārāiāno —A. IV. 223 t ī, der.: macchara '- ī, der.
Kinghavethepowerof authority
Issariyamkāreti vasam vatteti -
Vin.III. 139
Causes to wield authorityandkeep
undercontrol;Vrt +e + fi, caus.pres.
3”,se.
Issariyassakāranā —D. I. 85
Forthereason
of politicalpower
Issariyādhipaceam
raiiam kāreti-
M. II. 131;5. I. 222, kārento
Hecauses toexercisepoliticalpower;
issara+iva,der.+adhipati+ya,
der;Kr +e +ti, caus.pres.3™.sg.
Issāpakatā
—Vin. IV. 200
Overcomebyiealousy;issāya
apakatāabhibhūtā,Cy. 932; issa +
apa + Kr +ta, pp.
Issāpariyutthitena
eetasā—S. IV.
240;A. 1.281
Withthemindaroused
byjealousy;
Pari +u(t) +Stha + i +ta,pp.
 Ukkattham Ukkāsitasaddam Ukkasitva Ukkhipa

Ukkāsitvāaggalamākotesi —M. I. rocks; ukkūlam,unnatatihānam;

161;
II. 119;A. IV. 358-9;Vin. I. wikūlaim,
ninnatatthanam,
U 248,akotehi Cy.II.35
Havingclearedthethroat(he) knocked
i Ukkatthamaiihāvasati—D. I. 87 smallbowl; majjha + ima,der; oma+ Ukkotana vaficana nikati sāciyogā
atthedoor;u(t) +Kas +i + (vd,
DwellsinUkkattha; adhi+a +Vas+ ka, der. pativirato —D. I. 5
absol,;
@+Kut +e +si, caus.pst.3”.
a +ti,pres.3".sg. Refrainedfromcrookedness.
5g.
Ukkanthitarūpā vassamvasimsu- cheating,fraudandinsincerity
Ukkatthamnamakammam:kasi Vin. I. 253 Ukkāsudhāriyamānāsu—D. I. 49
vanijja gorakkha—Vin. IV. 6 Theyobservedrainy retreatas if Whenthetorcheswere beingheld: Ukkhaliparimaddanam
vā karonti,
The socalledsuperiorwork: disappointed; u(t) + Kanth +i + ta, Dhr +e + iva + mana,caus.pass. samkārakūte vā nam chaddenti—A.
I agriculture,trade,cattle-keeping pp. + riipa; Vas+ imsu,pst. 3”. pl. prp. 1.246
They wipecookingpots(with it)
Ukkatthamnāmasippam:muddā Ukkapindakāpi khādanti, corāpi Ukkujjavakujjam
samparivattento
- or throwit intothegarbageheap;
gananālekhā—Vin. IV. 7 haranti—Vin. I. 211 §.V.89 ukkhali+pari + Mrd +ana,der.;
The so calledsuperiorcraft:language Vermineatthemandthievestake
WITI? of symbols.counting,writingor Turning
upanddowntotally chadda(fromChard) +e + nti, pres.
themaway;ukkapindakāpikhādantīti (reflecting
on rising andfall); Sepp
drawing bilāramūsikagodhamamgūsā ukkujja+avakujja; sam +pari
khadanti,Cy. 1093;Khad +a + nti,
+Vrt+e +nta,pr.p. Ukkhittakaya antaragharena
Ukkattha nāmaiāti: khattiyaiāti, pres.3”.pl.
brāhmanaiāti—Vin. IV. 6
gantabbam
—Vin. II. 213
Ukkujjitva
pattamdassetum
—Vin. Shouldnotgo amidsthouseswith the
The so calledsuperiorbirth:birthas Ukkamukham
va4gamma—M. I. 38 II.269 raisedupbody(jumping);
u(t)+Ksip
a noble,birthasa brahmin;nama, Havingcometo thefurnace;a+ Gam
Toshowthealms-bowl afterturningit + ta,pp.+ kaya
indcl.;u(t) +Krs +ta,pp. +ya, absol.
upsu() +kubja + i + tva, absol.; Drs
i Ukkatthayam
viharamiSubhaga- +e+tum,caus.inf. Ukkhittapaligho —A. HI. 84
Ukkasikamanujanami—Vin. II. 106
vanesālarāiamūle—M. I. 1,326 The onewho hasliftedup thebarrier
| approvea cloth rolled in; ukkdsikanti
I abideatthefootof thehuge Ukkutikāya
antaraghare
gacchati-
vatthavattim,Cy. 1200;anu +Jan +
sālatreein ihegoveof Subhagain Vin.IV. 189 Ukkhittāsikevadhake—A. III. 443
nd +mi.pres. 1".sg,
Ukkattha Crouchingdownonheels(he)goesin A slayerwith a sworddrawnup;e
themidstof thehouses standsherefor o in nom.sg.,
Ukkāsitabbam
viiānāpetabbam
-
Magadhiform; ukkhitta+asika
Vin. IV. 150-1
IV. 11 Ukkutthim
akamsu
—Vin.II. 135;
He shouldclear(his) throatandmake
Speaks
toahigh,inahighterm IV.345 Ukkhipaasisūnam
—M. I. 143
theotherunderstand;u(t) + Kas +i +
(People)
shouted
outclappingtheir Throwuptheswordandthelogof
tabba,
fut.pp.; vi +Jan +na +ape+
Ukkatthenahīnam vadeti—Vin. IV. hands;
u(t)+Krug+ti,der: a+ Kr +
tabba,caus.fut. pp:
ll a+imsu,
double
pst.3”.pl. asi + stina
Speakstoa low, ina highterm
Ukkasitasaddam khipitasaddam-
Ukkūlavikūlam
nadividuggam
i Ukkatthopattomajjhimo patto Vin.I. 133
khanukantakadhanam Throw upthefrog
Soundof clearingthethroatand
omakopatto— Vin. IV. 242 Pabbatavisamam
—A. 1.35
sneezing:u(t) +Kas +i + ta,pps
A largebowl,mediumsizedbowland Highandlowlands,unfordable Ukkhipakummam—M. I. 143
Ksup +i + ta,Pp.
"vers,thornybushes
andinaccessible Throwupthetortoise -

————-
 Ukkhipa
Ukkhipa camgavāram—M. I. 143
Throwupthesieve
Ukkhipa dvidhāpatham—M. I. 142
Throwupthefork
Ukkhipa mamsapesim—M. I. 143
Throw upthepieceof meat
Ukkhipa lamgim—M. I. 142
Throwupthebar
Ukkhepakehibhikkhihi yuecamana
—Vin.1.338
Beingadvisedby thebhikkhuswho
imposesuspension;u(t) +Ksip +aka,
der.; Vac+ya +mana,pass.DF:D.
Ugganhathapariyāpunātha
dhāretha
—D. III. 206
Learn,masterandholdin mind:Dhr. t
e +tha,caus.imper.2". pl.
—-
Ugganhahipariyapunahi—S. II. 75
Learnandcommitto memory;
sulvā tunhībhūtovapagunam
karontougganhatinama,
padānupadamgahetvaväcāya
paricitam karonto pariyadpunati
nama,Cy. I. 75; u(t) +Grh +na +
hi, meta.imper,2" Sg.;pari +
Ap te
(ujna + hi, imper.2”. sg.
Uggamanamogamanam— D. I. 10
Goingupandgoingdown:u(t)+
gamanam;o +gamanam
Uggavadinimparisam patva—Vin.
Il. 202
Havingcometoanassemblyof
serioustalk;ugga+ vada+ I, der, +
int; Pad + tvd,absol.
Uecā
Uggahetabbampariyapunitabbam
mannanti—A. I. 72
They think that those (teachings)
shouldbe studiedandcommittedto
memory;u(t) + Grh +e +tabba,fut.
pp.; pari +Ap +(wna +i + tabba,
fut.pp.
Uggahetāca dhāretā ca —A. IV.
196;Vin. II. 201
The one who learns and holds (in
mind);u(t) +Grh +e t.tu,der.;Dhr
t e t tu, caus. der.
Uggahetvādūsesi—Vin. III. 35
Havingcaught,assaulted(her)
sexually;
u(t)+Grh +e +tva,absol.;
Dus +e +s +i, pst. 3". sg.
Uggahetvanikkhipatha —Vin. IV.
162
Havingpickedup keepit ata safe
place;ni +Ksip +a +tha, imper.
nd
api
Uggharantampaggharantam—D. II.
347;A. IV. 377
Oozinganddripping;u(t) +Ksar +a+
nla,pr.p.;pa +Ksar +a +nta,pr.p.
Uccatthaniyam
nicatthane
thapenti
—A. V. 82; Vin. IV. 159, thapeti
Causeto inductsomeoneof high
qualityintoa low position(causeto
demotea personwho deserveto be
promoted);
ucca+thdna+iva,der.;
Stha +dpe +nti, caus.pres. 3”. pl.
Uceakulapabbaiito—M. IHI.37
Theonewhohasrenouncedfroma
highclassfamily;pa + Vraj+i +ta,
pp.
Uccakula
Uceakula
pabbajitoadinakkhattiya-
kuiā—D. I. I15
Hehasrenouncedfrom a high class
family,
a primordialroyal family;
ādīnat khattiyakulā
Ueeākulīnatāseyyamsoti na vadāmi
-M. II. 179
I donotsaythatone becomesgreat
duetothegreatnessof the family;
seyyamsoliseyyo,Cy. Ill. 428; uceā
t kulīnatā,der.; seyyamso ' iti; Vad
ta' imi,pres. Ī". sg.
Uecārapassāvakamme —D. I. 70; M.
1.57
Inanswering
nature'scall
Ueeārampipassāvampinikkhā-
menti—Vin. I. 187
Causehimto passurineandfaeces;
uf) +Car +a, der.; pa +Sru +a,
der;ni (3) +Kram +e +nti, caus.
pres.3. pl.
Ueeāram agamāsi—Vin. IHI.63
Wentforrelieving(himself):purpose
oftheactionis conveyed
hereby
ace.;a+ Gam +@ +s +i, doublepst.
a ee,
Ueeāretvā maīicakenipātesum-
Vin.I, 302
Havingcausedto raisehim up,they
madehimlie on thebed:u(t) + Car +
&* tva,caus.absol.; ni +Pat +e +s
* um,caus.pst.3. pl.
Ueeārena
leeā vāpassāvena
a > vapīlito
i
gacchati
—Vin. IV. 153
Beingpressed
bynature'scall,hegoes
Out,Pid +7+ta,pp.
Uccasadda
Uccāropi passāvopina paguno -
Vin. I, 275
Passingof urineandfaecesis not
regular
Uccalimgapanakadatthena—Vin.
If. 38
For thereasonof beingbittenby a
maw-worm;uccālimgapānakānāma
lomasapānakā,Cy. 523; Da(m)s " ta,
PP
Ueceāvacam āpaiiati —D. II. 283
(He) finds himselfin highandlow
birth:@ +Pad +ya+ ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Uccavacamva pana sikkhati—A. II.
327
Or he trainshimselfin variousarts,
highandlow;sikkhati:desid.pres.
3"d,sg. from Sak
Uecāvacākho purisānam adhippāyā
—S. I. 124
Intentionsof menarediverse;ucca +
avaca
Uccāvacāni karanīyāni —Vin. I. 70
Variousthingsto bedone;Kr +aniya,
fut. pp.
Uceasaddammahasaddam
kākoravasaddam—Vin. I. 239; IV.
82
Loud noise,hugenoise,ugly noise
like thecrowingof crows; uccd,
indel.; kaka +orava + sadda
Uccasadda mahasaddakanici
kānici selissakāni karonti —S. IV.
117
With so muchnoisetheymakevarious
 Uecāsaddā
funnysounds;Cy.takesthetermas
kelissakaandsayskelissakānīti
annamupanissāyapitthimgahetva
Ill. 397
Ueeāsaddāmahāsaddākevattā
31, macchevilopenti
Withso muchnoiseas if fishermenat
thefishhaul;maccha+ vi +Lup +a,
der.
Uccāsaddāmahāsaddāsaiihāyam
karontā—Vin. II. 194
Rehearsing
with so muchnoise:ucca
+sadda;sa +ajjhaya;Kr +0 +nta,
pr. D.
Uccasayanamahasayanani panna-
penti—Vin. II. 163
Causeto preparehighandbig beds;
pa +Jia +ape +nti, caus.pres.3%,
——- pl.
Uccāsondampaggahetvā —A, IV. 87
Havingraisedthetrunkup(i.e.being
proud);uccā -- sondam;pa -- Grh
e t tvā,absol.
Uccitthodakam—Vin. IV. 266
Usedwater;u(t) +Sis +ta;pp.+
udaka
Uccinitvātulayitvā vannāvannam
katvābhikkhū ganetvavaggam
bandhitvacivarapativisam
thapetum
—
Vin. I. 285
To keeptheshareof robematerial
aftersortingout,weighing,making
equal,countingthenumberof
bhikkhus it intoaseparate existence)
andputting
Uprooted,
Ucchinnamūlā
bundle;vanndvannamkatvati ..same
pativimsethapetva,Cy. 1123; w(t)+
Ci +nd +i +td, absol.;tula +aya
+i +tva,denom.absol.; vanna+
vanna;gana +e +tvd,denom.
absol; Ba(n)dh + i + tva, absol.; Stha
+dpe +tum,caus. inf.
Uccekule paccajato—A. II. 86
Born intoa highclassfamily;pati +a
+Jan +ta,pp.
Uccethane thapesi—Vin. II. 191
Causedto puton a higherposition;
Stha+dpe+s +i, caus.pst.3".sg.
Uccemaiice sayati —Vin. IV. 168
Sleepson a high bed;Si +a +ti,pres.
3”. Sq.
Ucchamgepaturahosi —Vin. II. 185
Appearedon thelap;patu + ® +
ahosi,pst.3". sg.
Ucchamgesisam katva seyyam
kappesi—Vin. I. 346
Keepingtheheadonthelapheslept;
Kr + tva, absol.; Si + ya, der.; kappa
+é@
+s + i, denom.pst. 3". sg.
Ucchinnabhavanettiko
Tathagatassa
kāyo titthati —D. I. 46
Tathagata's
body,whichis cutofffrom
thedesireforbecoming,stays;bhava
+Ni +ti +ka; der.
Ucchinnamialatalavatthukata
anabhāvakatā
āyatimanuppāda-
dhammā—S.III. 10;Vin. IIL. 3,
anabhavamgata (gone for non-
madegroundless
likea
Ucchinna Ujjavujjave
palmtree,madenon-existent
andof sapadānacārinotiloluppacāram
thenatureof non-arisingin future; patikkhipitvā samādinna-
ucchinna+miila;tala +avatthu+ sapadānacārā,Cy. III. 240; Rein
kata,pp.;ana +bhava+kata,pp.; ©la, pp.
dyatim,adv.indcl.; an + uppāda +
dhamma Ujugatacitto labhati atthavedam-
A.V.329
Ucchinnabhavatanha,khina The one,who is upright,ekperiences
bhavanetti
—D. II. 90; A. II. I; IV. thejoy of(understandingthe)
105 meaning;uju +gata + citta; Labh +
Cutoffis thecraving for becoming, a +ti, pres. 3. sg.
exhausted is thedesirefor becoming;
Ksi +ta,pp.; Ni + ti, der.(guide) Ujugatamevatasmim samyecittam
| hoti —A. V. 329
Uechecchāmi,vināsessāmi, The mindat thattimeis indeed
anayavyasanam āpādessāmi— D. II. straightforward;ujugatam+ eva
72
I will annihilate,I will ruin, I will make Ujunnayam viharati
(them)experiencemiseryand Kannakatthale migadāye—
D. I.
misfortune;u(t) +Chid + e + ssāmi, 161;M. II. 125
caus.fut. 1",sg.; vi +Nas +e + Abidesatthedeerparkof
ssami,caus.fut. I". sg.; @+ Pad + e Kannakatthalain Ujuana
+ssdmi,caus.fut. 1". sg.; an +aya;
vi + As+ ana, der. Uiumaggenevagacchati—A. IV.
189
UcchedavadobhavamGotamo —A.
He goesonly on thestraightway; uju
IV. 174;Vin. HI. 2 -t maggena t eva
VenerableGotamais anadvocateof
annihilation;
u(t) + Chid +a, der.+ Ujjagghikaya antaragharena
Vad+a, der. gantabbam— Vin. II. 213
Shouldnotgo amidsthouseswith a
Ucehepake
vaterata—M. Il. 7
loud laughter;u(t) + Ghar + ika, root
Those
whotakedelightin thevowof red up.
gleaning;Cy, takesucchepakato
meanufichacariya,going for
Ujjavanikaya ojavanikaya—Vin. IV.
gleaning;
vaterata is separatedin 65
theCy.as va + te + rata which means
Runningupstream,downstream;
theytakedelightonlyin gleaning;
javana + i + ka, der.
thisphrasecomesafterpindapātikā,
Sapadānacārino;pindapātikāti
Uiiavuiiaveāpatti—Vin. IV. 300
atirekalabhampatikkhipitva Thereisanoffenceoneveryspin;
Samadinnapindapatikamga, ujjave + ujjave; u(t) +java
 Ujjhattibala
Ujjhattibala bala —A. IV. 223
The fools havegrumbling as power;
u(t) +jha (from Ksi) +ti, der:
Ujjhanasanii paresampattam
oloketi—Vin. IV. 194
Onelooksatothers’bowlswith the
intentofcriticising; u(t) 4Tha (from
Ki) +ana +sania +i, der: o + Lok
e PII pres. 3” sg
A
Uiihāpanakepacittiyam—Vin. IV.
38
In makingshoutout,thereis an
offenceof expiation:u(t) +jha (from
Kst) +ape +ana + ka, caus.der
Ujjhapetabbamvikkanditabbam
viravitabbam—D. IIT. 204
Shouldcauseto shoutout.cry outand
scream:ujjhapetabbantjparittam
vatvā amanussePatikkamāpetum
asakkontenaelesamyakkhanam
ujjhapetabbam. EteVānāpetabbāti
attho,Cy. 969; vi +Krand +i+
tabbam,fut. pp:; vi +Ru +ati
tabbam,fut.pp.
Ujjhayanti khīyanti vipācenti—
S. I.
156;Vin. I. 53; IV. 226
Shoutout,makea nastycriticism,
andmaketheindignationexpressed;
uiihāyantīti avajjhayanti, lamakato
va cintenti;khiyantitikim nama
etam,kim namaetantikathenti;
vipacentiti vitthayanta Punappunam
kathenti,Cy. L221; u(t) +jha
(fromKst) +ya +nti,pres.3". pl;
Ksi +ya +nii. pres.3. pl; vi +Vac
* € +nti,caus.pres,374pl.
Ufichenakapalabhatenayapenti—A,
Utthat
1.36
[heysustainon foodgleanedand
broughtin thebeggingbowl: kapāla4
a+ Bhr +ta, pp.; Ya +ape +nti,
caus.pres, 3”. pl.
Uāchenapaggahenayāpetum —Vin.
1.238;IHI.6
Tokeeplifegoingwithwhatis
gleaned;
pa +gaha; Ya +ape +tum,
caus. inf,
Unfiayaparibhavenaakkhantiya
IV. 241
Saysthusfor thereasonof contempt,
insult,impatience,threatandfor the
reasonof weakness;uffdyati
avannaya,Cy. 915; u(t) +Jia:
vebhassiyatibalavabhassabhavena,
Cy. 915; vi +bhassa i +ya, der;
du + bala +ya, der.: avam + Gha:
a+ Ah +a,pst.3". sg.,alsoused
for thepres.
Utthahatighatati vāyamati—A. ILL.
143
Getsup,exertsandstrives:1 (I 3
Stha +a +ti. pres. 3". sg.; Ghat +a
YU, pres.3%.se vit G+ Yan tat
ti,pres,
3"
3
50.
Utthātākammadheyyesu
—A. IV.
285
Theonewhostriveshardin the
fieldof work: u(t) +Stha +tu,der.;
kamma+dheyya:Dhā3 eyya,der:
Utthātāvindatedhanam—
§, I. 214
The onewhostriveshardenjoys
wealth;Vi(njd +@+te,pres.mid. 3".
Utthanaviriyadhigatehi
Utihānaviriyādhigatehi bhogehi
bāhābalaparicitehisedāvakkhittehi
dhammikehidhammaladdhehi—A.
II. 67
Withjustwealth, which hasbeen
acquiredby unceasingeffort,using
physical
strength,sheddingsweatand
followingrightmeans;utthana +
viriva+adhi +gata, pp.; bahu
bala+pari +Ci + ta, pp.; seda +
ava+Ksip+ ta,pp.; dhamma +ika,
der.;dhamma+Labh +ta, pp.
Utthinasafiiiammanasikaritva —A.
IV.87
Keepingtheideaofgetting up in
themind;u(t) +Stha +ana,der. +
sania
Utthāyāsanāpakkamanti
avalokayamānāyeya
aviiahattābhāvena
—M. II. 140
Havinggotupfromtheseatthey
depart,
lookingonlyathimand
leaving
nothing
behind;u(t)+Stha +
ya, absol. + āsanā; pa +Kram +a+
nti,pres.3". pl.; ava +Lok +ava
mana, pr. pp. +(y) +eva; a+ vi
Jaha(fromHa) +atta +abhāvena,
root redup.
Utthāyāsanā
pakkami —D. I. 126;
M. IHI. 15; S. II. 220;
Havinggotup from theseat(he) went
off,pa +Kram +i, pst. 3". sg.
Unnabhisim,
colabhisim,
Vākabhisim,
tinabhisim,
pannabhisim—Vin. II. 150
Bolstersmadeof wool, cloth, bark,
grass
andleaves;
fivekindsofbolsters Utukalam eko vasi —Vin. I. 299
allowed
Utukalam
Unnā bhamukantareiātā —M. II.
137
A hair is born in betweeneye-brows;
bhamuka +antara;Jan +ta., pp
Unnā mudutūlasannibhā—D. II. 18
Hair betweentheeyebrows,
resemblingsoft cotton;mudu +tila
sannibha
Unham lohitam mukhato
ugganichiM. I. 387; A. IV. 135;
Vin. I. 42, uggacchi
Hot blood gushedout of themouth;
u(t) +gaficha(fromGam) +i, pst. 3”.
5g.
Unham hoti kutthitam —5. IV. 289
It is hot andboiled; Autthitanti
kuthitam,Cy. III. 92; Kvath + i ~+
ta,
Pp.
Unhasamayeparilahasamaye—Vin.
IV. 117
In hot weatherandscorchingweather
(i.e.thelast monthof the summerand
thefirstmonthofthe rains);pari 3
daha +samaya
Unhīsasīso—M. II. 137
idam paripunnanalātatahceva
paripunna sīsataāicāti dve atthavase
paticca vuttam,Cy. HI. 385
Unhodakam patiyadetha—Vin. I.
279
Preparehotwater;pati +Yat+e +
tha, caus. imper.2".
;, ape DK
pi.
Lived theseasonalone: utukāianti
 Utukālam Uttarālumpam Uttaruttarim
Uttarāsamgam

vassānatoaāhamkālam,Cy. 1130; supremepart(of thebody); uttama+

/ (ofclay); cp.ālumpakārakam Attaineda distinctionin knowledge
Vas + i,; pst.
: 2
3. e
Sg. amga;pati +Stha + ape +eyya,
paribhuiijitum,
DAI. 85; Ba(n) dh + andvision,whichis noble,super
caus.opt. 3. se. i+ tum,inf. humananda comfortableabiding;
Utukalam na patibāhitum—
Vin. II.
uttarim +manussa+dhamma;alam
167 Uttarakurukā manussā—A. IV.
Uitarāsamgampaīiīiāpetvā —5. IV. + ariya +fidnadassana+ visesa;
396 adhi + Gam + ta,pp.
' itt

pati +bah + i +tum,inf. 290

The peopleof Uttarakuru(northern
Havingmadetheupperrobespread:
partof Kuru kingdom);uttarakuru+ Uttarimanussadhamma
Utuddhatanamdussanam ultara + Gsamga; pa + Jia +ape +
ka, der.
catuggunamsamghatim—
Vin. I. tva,caus. absol. iddhipātihāriyam
—D. III. I2
Superhumandisplayof psychicpower;
290
Uttarattharanam
karissama—Vin. pati +Hr +a + iva, der.
A fourlayerrobemade of cloths worn Uttarāsamgampappothetvā
—S. IV.
II. 291
out by season;ututodīghakālato 290
Wewill makea coverlet;uftara + Uttarimanussadhammona
uddhatānamgatavatthukanam Having
beaten
theupperrobe
attharana
(to remove dust); pa + pothetva ullapitabbo—Vin. I. 97
or Hr + ta,pp.; catu +guna (fromSphut),absol. One shouldnottalkaboutsuperhuman
Uttarantassasakam bhagamdatum
qualities;
u(t)+Lap +i +tabba,
fut.
—Vin. I. 285
Utunī ahosipupphamuppannam Uttarasamgebhandikam pp.
To givehis own sharefor theonewho
hoti —
Vin. II. 18 bandhitvā
—Vin. II. 182;III. 208,
isCrossing
over;u(t)+ Tr +a +nta,
Shewasin theperiod,menstruation uttarāsamgena Uttarim abhiiāeyyam natthi —D.
pr. p.; Da + tum,inf,
Started;
utu +ini; u(t) +Pad +ta,pp. Havingmadethemintoa bundle III. 102
ontheupperrobe;Ba (n) dh + i + tvd, Thereis nothingmoreto be knownby
Uttarābhimukho
Utunidanidevo,puphamdevassa absol. specialknowledge;uttarim,adv.;abhi
sattapadavītihārena
gacchati
—D. II.
uppanam— Vin. I. 272 +Jia +eyya,der.
--
15
Now themajestyis in theperiod, Uttarificavighatam apajjeyya —S.
Goessevenstepsforwardfacing
menstruationhasstartedfor the IV. 15 Uttarim paccavekkhitabbam—Vin.
northward;
uttara+abhimukha
majesty;utunit+ idani Further,hewould facewith Il. 247
adversities;
ā -- Pad +ya +eyya, Shouldbereviewed
further;
pati +
Uttararanimādāya—M. I. 241;II.
Utuparināmaiāābādhā—A. V. 110 opt.3. sg. ava+Iks+i +tabba.
fut.pp.
183;III. 95
Ailmentscausedby thechangeof
Havingtakentheattritivestick;@+Da
Season;utu ' parindma+ja Uttaritaram va panitataramva—S. Uttarimpaīihamapucchi—M. I.
+ya, absol.
1.80 292;47,apucchum;S. IV. 295
Uttamapurisoparamapuriso Superioror finer Asked (him) another(further)
Uttararanim ādāya abhimattheyya-
paramapattipatto—S. IV. 308 question;a + Prch +ya + i, pst. a7,
The highestperson,supremeperson
M. IHI.142
Uttarimanussadhammassa vannam Sg.
andonewhohasreachedthesupreme
Havingtakentheupperstickof
bhasissāma—
Vin. III. 87
State;parama+patti +patta:Ppa+ attritionhewouldrub(thewood);
ullara+arani;a +Da +ya,absol.; Weshallpraise
super
human
aualities: Uttarimvineti—M. III. 2
Ap +ta,pp. Bhas + i + ssama,fut. I“. pl. Disciplines
further;vi +Ni +a +ti,
abhi + Math +va + eyya,opt. 3”. sg.
pres.3. sg.
Uttamamgesirasmimpatitthāpeyya Uttarimanussadhamma
—A.IV.278 Uttarālumpam
bandhitum
—
Vin, I.
alamariyafanadassanaviseso Uttaruttarim panītapanītam
Wouldcausetoputitonthehead,the 286
To makea boundon thetopwith lumps adhigato
phāsuviharo—M. IHI. vāyamamānā— A. IHI. 218
157 Strivingfurtherandfurther,moreand
 Uttarena
Udakapattam Udakapāno Udakam

more; ulfara +uttarim; vi + a + Yam pst. 3”. sg.

yatvapariggahitaya vohdrandmam, Udakamālolenti—A. IV. 435
" a + mana, pr.p.
Cy.555;@ +Mrs +i +tā, Makes the water stir up (muddy); ā 3
Uttāno paripati —Vin. III. 40 Lul +e +nti, caus.pres. 3. pl.
Uttarenaca dakkhinenaea—D. II. absol.;Vas+e +ti, caus.pres.
(He) fell down on (his) back:pari + 3”,sg.
181
Pat + i, pst. 3. sg. Udakam āsittam vivattati no
On the north and the south
Udakapāno
apāruto hoti —Vin. II. santhati —A. I. 130
Uttānosattamāsenipaiiāhi —Vin. I. The waterpouredon (to thevessel)
Uttarenamukhāgacchanti
—D. II. 122
275 goesoff, doesnotstay;a +Sic + ta,
317; M. II. 164 Thewellis notcovered;a +pa +a+
Lie down faceup for sevenmonths; Vr + ta, meta. pp. pp.; vi +Vrt + a + ti, pres. 3. sg.;
Theymovetowardsnorth
ni +Pad +ya +hi, imper:2nd.Sg. no,neg.p.; sam +Stha +ti,pres.3”.
Uttasitvā marissati— Vin. LI. 78 Udakabubbulūpamamiīvitam SZ.
o

Uttinam karotha —M. II, 53

Havingterrified,hewill die:u(t) + manussanam
parittam lahukam —A.
Takethegrass(ofthe roof) off: u(t) +
tras + 1 + tva, absol. IV.137 Udakam uddhareyya—5. V. 460
tina
Thelifeof human
beingsis tooshort Wouldbringup water;u(t) +Hr or
Uttanakuttanakoviya khāyati —D. likea water-bubble;udaka -- bubbula Dhr + eyya,opt. 3”. sg.
Uttitthapattamupanamenti—Vin. I.
II. 55;S. II, 92 +upama
44
I feelit like Something
veryvery Udakam kalaseasincitva matthena
Causeto offer theuncleanedbowl;
shallow;utta@naka +uttanaka;Khya Udakamanikoacchiddo ahārī avinjeyya —M. HI. 141
u(t) +Sis + ta,Pp.* patta; the
+ya +ti,pres.3%.sg. aparihārī—S. IV. 316 Havingpouredwaterintoa vessel
common form is uccitthapatta;upa +
Awatervessel,
withnocrack, (he) wouldchurnit with a churning
Nam+e + nti, caus.pres::3* ipl
Uttanamnipaiiāpetvā—Vin. I. 271 noleaking:
udakam naharati, stick; a +Siffijc + i + tva,absol.;
Havingmadehimlie downfaceup;ni napariharati, na parihariyatiti a +vinj +eyya,opt. 3”.sg.
Udakatelakenakeseosanhenti-
Pad +ya
+ DP ,
+dpe
a
+ tva,caus.absol.
-
attho,Cy.III. 104;a+ Hr + i, der.
Vin.II. 107
Udakam thapitam padanam
Softenthehairwith oil mixedwith
Uttānamnipātetha—D. 11.336 Udakamanikoādhāre thapito —A. dhovanāya— A. 1.277
water;0 +sanha +e +nti, denom.
Makehimreclineon his back;ni + Pat II. 27 The wateris fetchedfor washingfeet:
pres,3, pl.
te +tha,caus.pres,24 pl. A watervesselis placedon theholder: Stha+Gpe+i +ta,caus.pp.;Dhav
a+ Dhr +a, der; Stha +ape + i + +ana, der.
Udakapatiggāheudakam āsihci-
Uttāno anassāsakokālam akāsi - la,caus.pp.
tabbam—Vin. II. 213
Vin. IIL. 84; PV.110
Watershouldbepouredinto the Udakam datva pindapato upaname-
Lyingon back,hediedsuffocated;u(t) Udakamiva inamvigahati—D.UI.
receptacleof used water; pati + tabbo—Vin. I. 46
+Tan+a, der; an +@+Svas+aka, 185
Grh +a, ders @+Siffijc + i +tabba, After fetchingwater,food shouldbe
der.;a+Kr+a@+5 + i, doublepst. Hefallsindebtas(thestonesinks)
fut.pp. offered;Da + tva, absol.; upa + Nam
AS;
inwater;pāsānoudakamviyasīdanto +e +tabba,caus.fut.pp.
inamvigāhati, Cy. 948; vi + Gah + a
Udakapattam
āmasitvāvāseti—Vin.
III. 140 +H;pres.3. sg. Udakam ninnetabbam—Vin. H.
arsdeep;gambhira 180
He letsherSlay,touchinga pot
ofwater(aftermakingherswear); Udakamatinetabbam—Vin. II. 180 Thewatershouldbeletout;
ubhinnamekissa udakapātiyā Thewater
should
beletin; ninnetabbanti
yathāudakam
UttanoPapati—D.III. 8
hattheotaretvaidam udakam atinetabbanti
udakampavesetabbam, sabbatthānesamamhoti evam
Fell down on (his) back;pa + Pat + i,
vivasamsatthaabheiihā hothāti Cy.1274;
ati +Ni+ a+ tabba,fut. kātabbam, Cy. 1274;ni t Nī ta
Pp. + tabba,fut. pp.
 Udakam
Udakena Udakena Udayatthagāminiyā

Udakampurānamhoti —Vin. II. 123

Whenthegroundwas floodedand Havingsprinkled(theground)with
Thewateris stale Youshouldrubeyeswith waterand
muddywithwater water,it shouldbe swept;pari + Prus
havea lookaround;anu +Mrj +ya
+i+tva,absol.;anu+ vi +Lok + t g - i t tva, absol.
Udakammajiiieadittam—Vin. II.
Udakasuddhikamādiyantī —Vin. IV, nd
79; III. 162 eyyāsi,opt. 2". 5.
262 Udakena (mā) vūlho ahosi—Vin. I.
As if water is on fire: maniie, indcl.:
Whileablutionis beingtakenwith 32
a +Dip +ta,pp. Udakena
anotthatohoti —Vin. I. 32
Water;@ +Dā --iya -- aī, pr.p. May (he) notbecarriedawayby water:
Udakamvāhanti—Vin. II. 122 +fa,pp. Vah +ta, pp.
Udakassakāiam—
S. I. 175
Causeto bringwaterup fromthewell;
The carrier of water
Vah+e +nti,caus.pres.3. pl.; Udakena
amgajatamosincantassa- Udake hasadhammepacittiyam -
vahantior vahenti? Vin.HI. 119 Vin. TV.112
Udakassa dhārā —M. IIL. 123
Whenhewaspouringwateron thesex In playingin thewater,thereis an
Streamsof water
Udakamsantitthati—Vin. II. 120 organ;
o +Siffije +a +nta,prp. offenceof expiation:udake
Thewaterremains:sam +
tittha +ti, hāsadhammetiudakakīlikā vuccati;
Udakāni ogaechanti—A. IV. 101
pres.3. 596 Udakena otthariyati —Vin. [1. 117 Cy. 860-61
Volumesof watergo down;o 3-
Isfloodedwith water;o +Str +iva +
gaccha-- nti, pres, 3”. PĪ.; opp. is
Udakarahadamogāhetvā—S, V. 370 ti,pass.pres.3™.sg. Udahialam kīlantassa—Vin. III. 118
uggacehanti
Havingcausedtoplungeintoa pool Whenhewasplayingin a muddy
oi water;o --Gah + e t twā, caus. Udakena temetva—Vin. IV. 86 water; udahialanti udakacikkhallo
Udakāyatikamudakaniddhamanam
absol. Making
it wetwith water;Tim +e + vuccati,Cy. 531; Krid +a +nia,
—Vin. II. 123
tva,caus. absol. pr.p.
Inletandoutletof water;udaka+@+
Udakarahadeūmimianeyya—A. IHI.
-—. Ya + ta + ika. der.; ni +dhamana
397 Udakena
temetvatemetvaapa- Udapānapanālimyoieti —A. IV. 171
(blowing out)
lt wouldcreatewavesin thepoolof kaddhanti
—Vin. 1.295 Use it for a water-course: Yuj +e +ti,
water;rahada,Skt.hrada,me Remove
aftermoisteningit with caus. pres. 3™.Sg.; acc. for dat.
ta.; Jan Udakedandarajipamam jivitam
" eyya,opt.3'i. sa. Water,
apa +kaddha +nti, pres. 3
manussānam —A. IV. 137
pl. Udapānassakūlam luiiati —Vin. II.
Udakarahadoacchovippasanno The life of humanbeings is iust like
122
anāvilo—D. I. 84 a linedrawnby a stick in thewater:
Udakena
paripphosakam parip- Facing ofthe well is broken; Ruj +ya
A poolof water,clean.clearand danda +raji +upama
phosakam
pileyya—M. IIL. 140 +ti, pass.pres. 3”. sg.
unstirred;vi +p + Sad +ta,pp.; an Hewouldpress(it) well, sprinkling
+Avila Udakediyyamane—Vin. II. 213
Walter
over it; pari + Prus Udapanopi teGaya —M. I. 39 W,
Whenwateris beingfetched;
/oc.
Pid+evya,opt. 3. sg Eventhedrinkingwell becomesGaya
Udakarahadoāvilo lulito absl.;Da + lya +mana,pass.prp:
for you; uda +pdno +api; Gaya was
kalalībhūto—A, i, 9
Udakeva nakhapitthikayava
Udakena
paripphosakam
parip- consideredtheplace for taking
A poolof water,
stirredup turbidand
thevakamdatum — Vin. I. 286 phosakam
sanneyya
—D.I. 173 sacredbath
muddy;Lut +i +ta,Pp.; kalala +
To puta dropeitheron thewateror on (He)
would
mixitwellsprinkling
bhita
thesurfaceof thenail; Da + tum,inf. Waler
overit; sam +Ni +a +eyya, Udayatthagaminiya
opt, 3°, Sg. paiiitaya samannagatoariyaya
Udakasamgahe
udakacikkhalle-
Vin. 1,253 Udakenaakkhinianumajjitvadisa nibbedhikaya samma
anuvilokeyyasi—A, IV. 86 Udakena
paripphositva
sammajji- dukkhakkhayagāminiyā— D. III.
tabbā—Vin. I. 48 268; M. I. 356; 5. V. 197

215
 Udayatthiko
Uddako Uddesena

Endowedwithwisdomonarisingand l
For the reason ofbelly (food) with Udena; Phivyosomattāva, indcl Has renouncedfamily life, aimingat;
ceasing,whichis noble,penetrative
ady.;abhi +Radh+ ta, pp pa + Vraj +i +ta, pp |
andleadingperfectlyto the Udarāvadehakambhuhiitvā —D.II. i
eliminationof Dukkha;u(t) +ava 238; M. I. 102;A. III. 232 UddakoRāmaputto sabrahmacārī Uddissa pānam ārabhanti —M. I.
(fromI) +attha +gamini;ni +Vyadh Havingeatenuntil thebelly goes mesamāno— M. I. 166 368
ika, der.; samma,indel; dukkha down thebody; udara +avadehaka; Uddaka, thesonof Rāma,beinga They slaughterliving beings
khava + gāminī Bhu(ii)j +i +tva,absol. co-celibate
with me; As +mdna,pr. p purposely;uddissa,indcl I

Udayatthikoassapaniyamposeyya- Udānam udānesi—D. I. 47; M. I. UddakosudamRamaputto evam Uddekam dassati—Vin. I. 277

A. IT. 199 177;S. I. 20; III: 55; Vin.l.2 vacambhasati,"passam na passatī" Will spout;u(t) +Ric t a, der.;Dā 3: i
Theone,expectingprofit,wouldcause Expresseda solemnutterance:u(t) + ti—D.III. 126 ssa -- ti, fut. 3". sg
to fosterhorsesfor sale;udaya An +a, der.; udina+e+s5 +i.
Uddaka, thesonof Rama,saysa word
attha+ ika, der.;assa +paniva denom.pst. 3". sg. ;
likethis:While seeing he doesnot Uddesaficavibhamgaiica—M. Il.
thorse for sale) Pus T e T eyva, caus.
see: Bhas + a 2 ti, pres. 3”. SZ.; 187
Udāhu kenacidevapariyayena—A. passa+ti,» pres.
pre .3%. sg.+ iti
Passe u iti Subjectand(its) exposition; li I
Ill. 402
Udaracchavimupphaletva—Vin. I. Uddesantimātikam,vibhamganti
If not,by anyothermeans;udahu,
276 Uddāletvāparibhuhiati —Vin. IV. vitthārabhāianiyam;Cy. V. I.
indcl.; kenaci + (d) +eva 170
Havingcausedto cutopentheskinof
thebelly;w(t)+Phal +e +tva,caus. Havingtornit off, he usesit; w(t) Uddesapariyāpannesusikkhā - ia
;
Udukkhalabhandikam akkamitva DrorDal+e +tva,
caus.
absol
absol padesu—Vin. ILI. 178
pavattesi—Vin. III. 79
Among therulesincludedin the |
Treadingon a mortarandother
Udaracchavimsibbetvāālepam Uddisatu..bhikkhinam recitation;uddesa +pari +@ +Pad + Ī
things (he) fell down: @ +Kram +i
adāsi—Vin. I. 276 patimokkham —A. IV. 205 fa
fa, nn
PP.
+twa,absol.;pa+ Vrt+e+s +i,
Stitchedtheskinof thebellyand PleaserecitePātimokkhafor the
pst. 3” sg.
appliedmedicatedoinment:udara bhikkhus;w/t)+Dr§ +a +tu, imper. Uddesamagacchati—A. I. 230
+chavim;Siv +ya +e +tva.absol.; ; 58 y
Comes for recitation;u(t) +Drs +a,
Udukkhale kottetva kottetva —Vin.
atoātātsti double
pst, 3". sg. der
III. 6
Uddisāpentoparipucchanto—Vin.
Havingpounded(them)in a mortar;
Udaram opādesi— D. II. 331 I.8 Uddesamdento paripuccham dento
Kut +ya +e +tra, absol.
Openedthebelly:ava +Pad 4 e+ s+ Whilemakingthemreciteandasking —Vin. IV. 53
i. (let theweapongo downthebelly), themquestions;
u(t) +Drs +ape While giving recitationand
caus.pst, 3", sg.; if wetaketheroot
Udumbarakhadikam
bhogekhadati Na,caus.pr.p.; pari +Prch +ya + interrogation;Da +e +nta,pr.p
—A. IV. 283 nla,pr.p.
as Pat to split,the verhusedhere
He wastes(his) wealthin thesame
shouldbe opatesi Uddesam patimānentā kilamanti -
Wayasoneeatsfruitsof the fig-tree
Uddissa
opatamkhanati—Vin. III. Vin. IL. 169
(by shaking its branches); idiomatic 76
Udaramchupati~Vin. I. 161 While waiting for recitationthey
expression;Khaéd+a + ti, pres.
Touchesthebelly;Chup +a +ti. Digsapitfallaimingat(aman);
Ben becometired;pati +Man +e t nia, . ja
pres.3%.sg. u(t) + Drg + ya, absol.; o (ava) caus.pr.p.; Klam +a +nti, pres. 3
Pat+a, der.;Khan +a +fi, pres. pl.
ie
Udenassabhiyyosomattaya
Udarassa kāranā —
Vin. I. 58; Vin. II. 3”.sg,
89 attamano
abhiraddho—M. II. 163
(I am)happy
andsatisfied
verymuch Uddesenaparipucchaya ovadena i
Uddissa
pabbaiito—Vin. 1.8 anusāsaniyā—Vin. I. 50

217
 Uddositam Uddhata Uddhate Uddhamsoto

By readingthetext,explainingthe +kukkucca:(u(t) +Dhr or Han (hat) Uddham adho ca tiriyam —S. I. 122
Uddhate arune nandimukhiya
+yaand kau +Kr(t) +ya, rattiyā—Vin. I. 288 Above, below and across; indcl.
uddesotipalivacanam,paripucchati substantivised absol. When thedawnwasupandthe
pāliyā atthavannanā,ovadoti
nightwaswith a smiling face ( At the Uddham adho tiriyam advayam
anotinnevatthusmimidam karohi Uddhaccassapahānāyasamatho dawn whennightwasgone);loc. absi.; appamanam—A. V. 46
idam mā karittāti vacanam, bhāvetabbo—A. ITI. 449 u(t)+Dhror Hr+ ta,pp.; nandi Above, below,across,non-dualand
anusāsanīti otinne vatthusmim. Api Calmingdown meditationshould mukha+ī, der unlimited
ca otinne vā anotinne va bepractisedfor theabandonment
pathamavacanam
ovādo, of restlessness
of mind: sama = Uddhanam
aropetva aggim detha - Uddham ulloketvā —Vin. LI. 193
Punappuhnamvacanam anusāsanī. samatha;Bhi +e+ tabba,caus D.II. 333 Havinglookedup; u(t) +Lok +e +
Cy. V. 982 Sut.pp. Havingputon theoven,kindle fire; ā tvā, absol.
+Ruh+e t tvā,caus.absol.; Dā t e
Uddhagaminim va adhogaminim va +tha,imper.2". pl. Uddham oiam abhiharanti —5. II. 90
223 (navam)—Vin. IV. 64
Havinggiventhestableor thestore They carrythenutritiveessenseup;
A boatgoingupwardor downward: Uddhapadam
adhosiram gahetva-
room,he died ; uddositanti abhi + Hr + a + nti, pres. 3”. pl.
uddham,indcl. + gamini A,IV. 134
bhandasala,Cy. 906; Da + tva.
Having
takenhim feetup andhead Uddhamgami assa—S. IV. 314
absol.
Uddhaggalomo—M. II. 136 down;
Grh +e +tva,absol He would becomeonegoingupward;
The onewhosebodily hair-tipsturned
Uddositevatthabbam— Vin. III. 201 uddham+ Gam + tf,der.
upward Uddhamadhotiriyam
Shouldlive in thestableor store
ekamsabhavito samadhi —D. 1. 153 Uddham thapetha—
D. II. 336
houseor garage;uddositoti
Uddhatāavūpasantacittā—M. I. 18 Concentration
of mind,partially
vānādīnambhandānamsālā, Cy. Makehimstandup
Thosewhoareagitatedandwith cultivated
(cultivatedonly for one
654; Vas+ tabba,fut. pp.
unsettledminds;u(t) +Dhr or Hr + Single
purpose)in thedirectionof Uddham pādatalā adho kesa-
fd, pp; a + vi +upa + Sam +ta,pp. +
Uddositodinno hoti —Vin. II. 278 above,
belowandacross: matthaka—M. 1.57; S. IV. 111
citta
A shedhasbeengiven:uddositoti ekamsabhāvitoti
ekamsāya Above from thesole ofthe feetand
bhandasālā,(bhandasālāmayeither ekakotthasdya
bhavito,€'y.312;eka below fromthehairon thehead
Uddhataunnala capala mukhara " amsa-- bhāvito
meana storehouseor a housefor
vikinnavaca mutthassatino
elephantand horsetrainers) Cy. VI. Uddham padam adho siram
asampajanaasamahita
1295;GustavRoth takesudu-vasita thapetvā—M. III. 166;A. I. 141
vibbhantacittapakatindriya
(Pāli parallel is uddosita)in the Keepinghim feetup andheaddown;
viharanti —S. I. 61
Bhikhunī vinaya(p. 118-19)to mean Stha + ape + tva, caus. absol.
Beingapitated,arrogant,quivering, cetasā
vipulenamahaggatena
‘water-residence, he maintainsthat
garrulous,inconsistent,unmindful,
udumeansudaka(water),like udu- āppamānenaaverena Uddhamsarā āsattim yeva
unthoughtful,unconcentrated,
pānāni in Asokan inscriptions. ; āyyāpaiihena
pharitvā viharati abhivadanti—M. II. 232
confusedanduncultured,theyabide;
Da +ta,pp. -D.I.251
u(t) +Lal +a, der.;mukha+khara?; (They)goingupward,i.e.goingtothe
Hepervades
theentireworld, above, future,speakveryhighofattachment;
vi +kinna,pp. ofvikirati: Mrs +ta,
Uddhaccakukkuccapariyutthitena below,
around
andeverywhere,
in uddham +sarafrom Sr; abhi + Vad
Pp. * Sati; a + sam +pa +Jan + na;
cetasā—S, V. 123;A, IHI. 232 €Very
respect,
withalovingmind, +a +nti,pres.3”.pl.
a sam+G+ Dha+i +ta,pp.; vi +
Withthemindarousedby abundant,
elevated,
unlimited,
Bhram +ta,pp. +citta:pakati 4
restlessness
andworries;uddhacca hatred-
freeandkind;Sphar+i +
indriya + a, der. Uddhamsoto hoti akanitthagami -
Vd,absol.
A.IV.73
 Uddhumatakam Upakkhalitvā Upakkhalitvā Upaiihāyānam

He is on theup-stream
drifting
towardsAkanittha(highest)brahma
world; uddham,+sota; akanittha+
Gam + ī, der.
Uddhumātakamvinīlakam
vipubbakam— M. 1.88;A, I, 140
(Thedeadbody)bloated,turnedblue
andfestering
Unattamvā pūrattamvā —A. IV.
199;Vin. II. 238
Completionor depletion;āna 3 tta,
der.;piira (fromPr) + tta,der.
Unavisativassamkumaribhitam
vutthapenti
—Vin. IV. 327
(They)causeto giveordinationto a
femalenoviceof lessthantwenty
yearsof age
151
Thereis anabodeof rats:@+Sri +a,
der.
Undirehipi upacikahipi khajjanti -
Vin. I. 283
They areeatenby ratsandtermites:
Khad +ya +nti,pass.pres. 3”. pl.
Undūrehipi vihārā okinnavikinnā
honti —Vin. I. 209
Residencesareinfestedwith rats:o --
The fieldbumpyandtilted:u(t) +Nam
+f, der; ni +Nam +i, der.
Upakatthayavasstipanayikaya—Vin.
I. 152
Whenthetimefor theobservanceof
rainyretreatis gettingnearer;wpa +
Krs +ta,pp.; vassa +upa +Ni +
aka, der.
Upakatthe kale —Vin. IV. 175
When the (meal) time was close: Joc.
absi.
Upakaddhantipiapakaddhantipi—D.
1. 180
Drawin anddrawout;kaddha(from
Krs)+ nti,pres. 3”. pl.
Upakannakajappi
— A. III. 136
Theonewho whispersin theear;
jappa +I, der.
Upakannakedrocesi—S. I. 86; A.
IIL. 57; IV. 187;Vin. 1.237
Whisperedin theear;upa +kanna +
ka,der.;2+ Ruc +e+ s +i, caus.
pst. 3. sg.
Upakannakedhammamdesesi—Vin.
IV. 20
Whisperedthedhammain theear:Drs
tet s +i, caus. pst. 3”. Sg.
Havingstumbled, (she) ekclaimed
three
times;fi-- khattuin,der.; udāna
+e+s +i, denom.pst. 3. sg.
Upakkhalitva
va papateyyam—A.
Il. 101;1V.320
OrI wouldstumbleandfall down; upa
+Skhal+i +Ivā, absol.;pa t Pat +
evyam, opt. I" sg.
Upagateiānitvā —Vin. IV. 173
Having
recognised (him) whenhe had
come
closer;upa +Gam +ta,pp..
Jin +nd +i +tva,absol.
Upagantva
va nalam nisiditum —A.
IV.387
Noris hefit to sit down aftergoing
there;
wpa+ Gam +tvd,absol.; na +
alam;ni +Sad +i + tum,inf.
Upaghatikena
samannagato—Vin.
I, 13
Endowed
withdestructiveelements:
upa+ghāta -- ika, der.; sam t anu
a+Gam+ta,pp.
Upacdram
thapetva—Vin. IV. 43
Keeping a neighbourhood (open
Space);mahallake vihāre samantā
diyaddho
hatiho upacāro, Cv. 780;
Stha+dpe+ tvd,caus. absol.
L272
We know very well ofthis thrift
(disciplineof saving);sam +Yam+a,
der.; upa +Jan +na + ma,pres. 1”.
pl.+ etassa
Upajjham gahapetabbo—Vin. I. 94
He shouldbe causedto takea
preceptor;Grh + dpe + tabba,caus.
fut. pp.
Upaiihāyamūlakamcīvaram
pariyesitabbam—Vin. I. 71
Shouldfinda robefromthepreceptor;
preceptor is the source of robe and
bowl; pari +es (Is) + i + tabba,fut.
pp.
Upaiihāyamhi nādhimattābhāvanā
hoti —Vin, I. 54
There is no muchattentiontowardsthe
preceptor;adhimattāmettābhāvanā
na hoti, Cy. 982
Upaiihāyassa āpatti pāeittiyassa,
ganassaea ācariyassaca āptti
dukkatassa—Vin. IV. 130
Therewould beanoffenceof
expiationforthepreceptor,
anoffence
of wrongdoing for thegroupandfor
theteacher;pdcittiva +assa:As +ya
(Skt.yat), opt. 3”. sg.; dukkata +
assa

Kir +ta,pp. Upacikānam

vāāsayohoti—Vin.IHI.
Upakkam okilinim okirinim 151 Upaiihāyassamūle bahudhammo
vehāsamgacchantam —Vin. III. 107 Thereis an abode of termites
Unnatāvanatohoti —M. I. 80, 245 ea vinayo ca pariyatto —Vin. II. 304
A womanshrivelled
up,soiled,
Bentupandbentdown;u(t) +Nam 4 Much doctrineanddiciplinehasbeen
scorched,
andgoingin thesky;u(t)+ Upaeikāhi
khaiiati
—Vin.II.113
fa,pp. +ava +Nam +ta,pp. learnt(by you) at thefoot of the
Pae +ta,pp.
Itiseaten
bytermites;
Khdd +ya +ti, preceptor;
pari +Ap +ta,pp.
Unnāmīninnāmī khettam—A. IV. Pass.pres.3". sg.
Upakkhalityatikkhattumudanam
237 Upaiihāyānam saddhivihārikesu
udānesi—M. II. 209
vattam—Vin. II. 227
220 221
 Upajjhaye Upaddhaphasuka Upaddhamidam Upanandham

Dutyof thepreceptorstowardsthose Upatthako santikavacaro Upaddhamidam

whoareliving with them;upa 3-adhi
+aya (from I); saddhim +vihara +
ika, der.
Upajjhayeanapuccha—Vin. I. 85
Withoutconsultingpreceptors
(withouttakingpreceptors'
permission);an +@ +Preh +ya,
absol.
Upajjhayenaajjhacinnam— Vin. II.
301
Hasbeenpractisedhabituallyby the
preceptor;adhi +@+Car + ta,pp.
I. 187
In referenceto thepreceptors,andthe
preceptor-likes
Upajjhayogahetabbo—Vin. I. 45
A preceptorshouldbetaken:Grh +e
+tabba,fut. pp.
Upatthahantiparicaranti—A. III, 94
(The relatives)attendon andtakecare
of him;upa +Stha +a +nti.pres.
3”. pl; pari + Car +a +nti,pres.
MAPI
Upatthahiyamānokālam akāsi -
Vin. I. 303
He passedawaywhile beingtreated;
upa +Stha + iya +mana,pass.
pr.p.: a t Kr t-ā t s di, doublepst.
3'd,sg.
Upatthakoahosi,aggupatthāko—D.
II. 6
samīpacārī—D. 1.206; II. 139
Personalattendant,
companionandone
who movesclose;santika +ava 4
cara
Upatthanasalam(anujanami) —Vin.
Il. 153
| approvea refectory
Upatthanasalayamsannipatehi—D.
II. 26
Makethemassemblein theassembly
hall;sam +ni +Pat +e +hi, caus.
imper.2™sg.
Upatthitā sati asammutthā—M. I.
21,242;A. I. 148
Mindfulnessis readyandunconfused;
upa +Stha +i +ta,pp.: a - sam 3
Mrs + ta,pp.
Upatthitassasati hoti asammuttha-
M. III. 85
His mindfulnessis presentand
unconfused;upatthita +assa
Upaddhapativisamdatum —Vin. I.
285
To give halfshare;upaddha+
pativisa
Upaddhapathamāgaccheyya—D. IHI.
12
He wouldcomehalf way;upa +
addha +patha; & +gaccha + evya,
opt.3”. sg,
Upaddhaphāsukā
bhahiitabbā
—Vin.
I. 74
Halfofthe ribesshouldbebroken;
Bhaiij + i + tabba,Sut.pp.
bhantebrahma- Upadāyupādāyapanham
cariyassa
yadidam kalyanamittata - puccheyyum—M. I. 83
8.1.87 (They)wouldaskquestion
Venerablesir, whatis calledgood continuously;Prch +ya +eyyum,
friendshipis one half of thehighest opt. 3. pl.
wayof life; upa +addham +idam;
kalyana
+mitta +tā, der. Upadduta yacanaya,upadduta
vinnattiya —Vin. III. 144
Upaddham va rattim upaddham va Troubledby beggingandhintingat;
divasam—A. V. 84 upa +Dru + ta,pp.; Yāc +ana, der.;
Halfnightor half day: upa +addha vi +Jia +ti, der.
Upaddhāsanena nimantesi—Vin. II. Upadhāvitvā etadavoca—Vin. I. 78
200 Having run to him saidthis:upa 3
Invited
tosit on one halfof theseat;ai Dhāv + i + tva,absol.; etam(etad)+
+manta+e +s +i, denom.pst. 3’i a +Vac +a, pst. 3”. sg., root redup.
sg.
Upadhi dukkhassa milam —M. H.
Upatitthitvaaccavadati—Vin. IV. 261
263 Desireis therootof Dukkha;upadhi
Standingnearbyshescolds;upa + vuecantikilesā ca khandhaca
litha +i +tv, absol., titthitvais a abhisamkhārāca, Nd.I. 27; upa t dhi
'areabsol.,normal usage is thatvā; (from Dhā)
ati +a +Vad +a + ti, pres. 3. sg.
Upadhisamkhayevimutto —M. II.
Upatitthitva
parivisissati,Vin. I.
260
71 The onewho is liberatedat the
(He),standing
nearby,will servewith
exhaustionof desire;sam +Ksi + a,
food
; pari+Vis+
i
+ ssati, fut. 3%, der.; vi +Muc +ta,pp.
sg,
Upadhisu tanam na karonti Buddha
Upatthitasatissāyam
dhammo —A. —S. I. 107
IV.220
TheBuddhasdo notseekprotectionin
ThisDhamma
is fortheonewhohas
aggregates;upadhīsūti
mindfulness
ready;wpatthita
+
khandūpadhīsu,Cv. I. 174
Satissa+ ayam
Upanandhambhikkhum etadavoca-
Upadānakkhayādhimutto
—A.IHI. Vin. II. 118
376;Vin. 1. 183
Said thisto thebhikkhuwho has
Theoneinclinedto theekhaustionof
harbouredgrudge;upa +Nah + ta,
ETasping:upādāna3 khaya+ adhi + pp.; etam(etad) +a +Vae +a, root.
Mue+ta,Pp.
redup., pst. 3. sg.
 Upanikkhipitva
Upanikkhipitva deti —Vin. IV. 92
Gives,keepingit nearby;upa +ni +
Ksip +i + tva,absol.
Upanidhampina upenti—S. V. 457
ni +Dha;na +upa +e (from1)+ nti,
pres.3”.pl.
Upaniyyaupaniyyaavaca—D.I. 107
(He) spokeattacking(us);upa +
Ni +ya, absol.;a + Vac+a, pst. 3%.
$g.; anotherphrasesimilar in
meaning to upaniyya upaniyya is
āsaiia āsaiia
Upanisābhāvanāya— A. IV. 352
A ground(condition)for the
cultivation
Upanisīdantidhammasavanāya —A.
IV. 387
Sit downnearbyto listento the
Dhamma;upa +ni +Sad +a +nti,
pres.3”. pl.
Upanissāyaviharati —M. I. 104;S.
11.269; V. 321, viharanti
Abidesin associationwith;upa +ni +
Sri +ya, absol.
Upanissāyavihātabbādhammā—A.
IV. 354
The thingsto beassociated
with; vi +
Hr +tabba:hartabba>hattabba>
hātabba,fut.pp.
Upaniyatiloko addhuvo—
M. II. 68
Theworld(fiveaggregates)
is unstable
andledtowards(death);upa +Ni +ya
+Ut,pass.pres,314.
sg.;a i dhuva,
indel.
Upamayapidhekacce Upari Upasamkamatu
Upapattīsuvyākaroti —D. II. 200
Upariakasetejodhatupakuppati- Uparope vihethenti —Vin. II. 154
Makesa declarationin referenceto
A.HIT.
243 ( Little goatsandcattle)harmthe
subsequent births;vi +ā 3 Kr+o+
Theheatelementis stirredupin the littleplants;upa +Ruh +a, der;
fi, pres. 3. sg.
highsky;upari,indel.; pa +Kup 4 vi +Hid +e +nti, caus.pres.
3”, pl.
Upabhogaparibhogam - Vin. IV.
163
Uparigīvāya
nisinnohoti—M. III. Upasantosukham seti—5. I. 83; Vin.
Thatwhich is to be used:upa +Bhuj
133 II. 156
+a; der.;pari + Bhuj +a, der.
(He)hasbeensittingon theneck; The one who is calmeddown sleeps
upari,indcl.;ni +Sad +ta,pp. well; upa +Sam+ ta,pp.; St +a + ti,
Upamamte karissāmi —M. I. 295
pres. 3. sg.
I will giveyou a simile
Uparinemassa—A. IV. 404
Abovethepit: Upasamāyasikkhati —S. IV. 176
Upamākho myāyamkatā
uparinemassāti
upari āvātassa, Trains himselffor tranquillity:
atthassaviūāpanāya —M. I. 155;
Cy.IV. 192 sikkhati,desid. (fromSak)pres. 3”.
S. III. 108
Sg.
A similehasbeengivenby mefor
Uparipabbatamāropetvā —
M. IHI.
conveyingthemeaning; me +avam;
131 Upasampajjaviharati —M. III. 28
Kr +ta,pp.; vi +Jaa +ape +ana,
Havingmadehimascendthetopof Abides afterattaining;upa + sam +
caus.der.
themountain;@+Ruh +e + (va, Pad +ya, absol.
caus.absol.
Upamāpina sukarā
Upasampannasamanantara
—Vin. I.
yavalahuparivattameittam—A. I.
Uparipabbate—A. I. 243 56
10
Onthetopof themountain Immediatelyafterbeingordained;upa
It isdifficulttogiveevena simileto
showhowswiftlychanging is the +sam +Pad +ta,pp.; samanantara,
ady.
mind;yava+lahu+pari + Vrt+ta,
75
pp.
Gonetotheupstairsof themansion Upasampanno
nasetabbo
—Vin. I. 86
Upamamampatibhati—M. I. 31 The onewho is ordainedshouldbe
Uparipāsāde
divāseyyam
upagato- destroyed( =expelled);Nag +e +
A similecomestomymind:pati +
D.1,128
Bhā t ti, pres. 3ri.Sg. tabba,caus.fit. pp.
Gone
forsiestain theupstairsof the
mansion:upa + Gam + ta, pp.
Upamayapidhekaccevinna Upasampādentibhikkhubhāvāya -
purisa bhasitassaattham M. 1.391
Uparivehāsakutiyā—Vin.IV.46
āiānanti—M. I. 295;S. II. 114 Causeto admitto thebhikkhuhood;
By meansof an illustrationor a intheskycell(a cellina storeyed upa +sam +Pad +e + nti, caus. 3.
building);
dvibhiimakakutiya
va
simile,somewisepeoplein this pl.
fibhūmakakutivā
vā,Cv. 782
worldunderstand themeaningofa
Saying;upamdya+ api + idha + Upasamkamatuanukampam
ekacce;Bhds + i + ta,pp.; @+ upadaya—D. I. 204; M. L. 161;
Jan +nd +nti,pres,374
pl. 439
5. IHI. 110
Thrownintothesky; Kyip + ta,pp.
Pleasevisit,outof compassion;
upa
 Upasamkamanassa
+ sam + Kram +a + tu, imper. 3"',
5g.;upa t ā t Dā t ya, absol.
Upasamkamanassa saddhābahu-
kārā —M. II. 176
upa +sam +Kram +ana,der-
Upasamkamantaupasamkameyyum
—A. IV. 79
Theywouldkeeponapproaching;upa
* sam+ Kram +eyyum.opt.3”. pi.
Upasamkamanta kho amaavuso
Revatasappurisa,yenayasma
Sariputtotena,dhammasavanaya
M. 1.212
BrotherRevata,thosegoodpeople
aregoingto thevenerable Sāriputta
for listeningto thedhamma;upa +
sam+ Kram +a + nta.Prp.,
continuous sense is expressed:
sa (Ä +purisa
Upasamkameyyama gilana-
pucchakā— M. IHI. 263
Let usgo thereas visitorsto thesick;
upa +sam +Kram +eyyama,opt. 1*.
pl.; puccha +ka, der.
Upasamkamitaca payirupāsitā ea
Paripucchitaca —A, IV. 338
A visitor,anassociate
andquestioner:
“pa +sam + Kram + i + ty,der:;
Pari +upa+As +i tttu;der.:pari
+Prch +ya +i+ 1, dep.
Upasussatumamsalohitam—A. [y.
190
Letthefleshandbloodrundry;
upa +Sus +ya +ty,
34 5Z.
Pass. imper,
Upahāram Upādānakkhandhe Upāsakam
Upassayam
agamāsi—
Vin. IHI.208 areattacked”;upa +G +Rabh +ta,
Upādānakkhandhe samgaham
Wentto thenunnery;upa +Sri +a. pp. +eva;Jan +na +nti, pres. 3”.
gaechati
—M. 1.190
der. pl.; uparaddha +amha:As +ma,
lsincludedin theaggregatewith
clinging;
sam +Grah +a, der pres. 1".pl. +iti
Upassayamihāpessāmi —
Vin. IV.
265 Uparambhacitto
dhammamsunati,
Upādānasettham yadidam
I will makethenunneryreduceto
nevasaliiānāsaiiiāyatanam—M. II. randhagavesī—A. III. 175
ashes;jha (fromKsi) +ape +ssami,
165 He listensto theDhammawith the
caus,fut. 1".sg.
Thehighest
clingingis neither purposeof attackingandfindingfault
conscious
nor unconsciousstateof with; upa +a +Ra(m)bh+a, der.
Upassayamdatva —
Vin. IV. 292
mind;
na +eva +sanfd +na +a+ citta; randha(Skt. randhra) +gava +
Havinggivenabode;Da +ta, absol,
sania +dyatana es (Is) +i, der.
Upassayona sammati— Vin. II. 278;
Upādā paritassanāhoti —5. III. 16 Uparambhena uparambhissanti-
IV. 336
- Thereistremblingdueto grasping: M. I. 433
Abode is not sufficient: vasanokaso
upa+@+Da +a, abl.; pari +tras + (They) will contendwith the
nappahoti,Cy. 945; Sam +ya +ti,
yat ana,der. contention;upa +@+Ra(m)bh+a,
Pres. 377so,
der.
Upādāyupādāya
katham
Upassutimthito hoti —S. II. 75; IV.
katheyyatha
—A. V. 129 Upālissa santike vinayam pariya-
91
Youwould
engageinthetalk punanti—Vin. II. 168
He hasbeenstandingnearby
continuously;
upa +a +Da +ya, (They) learnvinayaunder(the
(standingata placewherehecould
absol.+
upadaya venerable)
Upāli;pari +Ap +(u)na
overhear);upa +Sru + ti, der.
+nti,pres.3™.pl.
Upādiyamāno
upādiyati—M. II. 237
Upassutim
titthamha—Vin. LV.
Keeps
ongrasping:
wpa+a +Da + Upasakam mam Bhagava dharetu
150
iya+méina,pr. p.; upa +@+ Da ajjataggepanupetamsaranam
Westoodnearby;tittha+mha+pst.
va +ti, pres.3. se: theexpression gatanti—D. I. 85; Vin. I. 16; M. I.
I". pl.; a rare verb
isSimilar
touppajjamano
uppaiiati 489,bhavamGotamo;
Upahaccaparinibbayihoti —A. IV. saranagatanti
72 Upāyupādānācetasoadhitthānābhi May theBlessedOne acceeptme
"Iivesānusayā
—M. IHI.31;A. V. 111
Havinglivedhalfof his life or asa lay disciple,gonefor refuge
more, he becomes one completely Approaches,
clingings:obstinacies, from todayonwarduntil thelast
obsessions
andlatenttendenciesof
cool; āyuvemajjhamatikkamitva momentoflife; Dhr t e t tu,
mind;
upa+aya(fromI)+ upa+a +
Pacchimakotimva dgantva caus.imper.3™.sg.;ajjato +agge;
Parinibbuto, Cy. IV. 39: upa t Han Da +ana, der.; adhi +Stha +ana, pana + upa +1 +ta,pp.; Gam +
(hat) +ya, absol. der;abhi+ni +Vis +a, der; anu + la, pp.
S+a,der,
Upahāramupaharanti
—A. IHI,33 Upāsakam
mambhavam
Anando
Offer friendlytreatment:upa +Hr + Uparaddhava
jananti dharetu ajjataggepanupetam
a +nti,pres. 3”. pl. upāraddhamhāti
—A. V. 230 saranamgatanti—D.I. 210
Being
attacked
theyunderstand,
"We May thevenerableAnandaacceptme
 Upasakasatani
asa laydisciplewho hasgonefor
refugefromtodayonwarduntil thelast
momentof life
Upāsakasatānipatipādesi—S. IV. 63
Hecausedto makefive hundredlay
disciples;pati +Pad +e +s +i, caus.
ard
pst.
pr I~. $g.7
Upāsakāārāmam āgacchanti
dhammasavanaya —Vin. IV. 15
The laydevoteescometo the
monasteryfor listeningto theDhamma
Upāsakeuyyoiesi— D. II. 86
Sentoff thedevotees,madethe
devoteesdepart;u(t) + Yuj +e+s +i,
caus.pst. 3™.sg.
Upasakesaddhepasanneakkosati
paribhasati appasadamkaroti -
Vin. IL.295
(He) reviles,scoldsthefaithfullay
disciples,andmakesthemunfaithful:
pa +Sad +ta,pp.; 4 + Krus + a +ti,
pres.3”. sg.;pari + Bhas +a+ ti,
pres.3”. sg.; Kr +0 +ti, pres,3”. Sg.
Upasakobahussutoagatagamo
kamesuvitarago —Vin. IV. 158
The laydevoteewho is learned,well
versedin thedoctrineandfreefrom
passionfor sexuality;Joc.pl. is used
to singleout oneout of many,cp.
Magadhesuviharati; kamesu
micchacara;bahu +Sry + ta,pp.;
agata +agama;vi +I +ta,pp. +
raga
Upahanamdharetum—Vin. I. 188
To wearsandals;Dhr +e +tum,caus.
inf.
Upekkhasambojjhamgo
Upāhanāārohitvā — S. I. 226
Havinggoton to (puton) thesandals;
ā t Ruh t a - i t twā,absol.
Upāhanāomuāeitvā— Vin. I. 46
Havingremovedthesandals;o 4
Mu(fije+ i +tva,absol.
Upahanaorohitva — S. I. 226; Vin. I.
186
Havinggotdown from(removed)the
sandals;o + Ruh + a +i + tva,absol.
Upahanayokayabandhanebandhitva
—Vin. IL. 118
Havingtiedsandalsto thewaistband:
Ba(n)dh +i +tva,absol.
Upāhanāyosīsenaghattesi—Vin. II.
118
He touchedthesandalswith (his) head;
ghatta+ e +s + i, denom.pst. 3™.sg.
Upekkham bhavayatovirago hoti-
M. II. 223
Non-attractionoccurs for theonewho
cultivatesequanimity;vi +Ra(fi)j +a
Upekkha tasmimpuggale bhave-
tabbā—A. III. 186
Equanimityshouldbecultivated
towardsthatperson;Bha + e +tabba,
caus.fut.pp.
Upekkhanimittam manasikātabbam
—A;1:256
Mind shouldbe focusedon thesignof
equanimity;
manasi+Kr +tabba,
fut.
pp.
Upekkhasambojjhamgo —A. V, 211
Enlightenment
factorof equanimity;
Upekkhāsahagatā Uposatham
M. II. 73
He goes to the womb and to the next
sanhamanasikara world; upa +e (from1) +ti, pres. 3.
Upekkhasahagata
samudācaranti —A. IV. 416 sg.
Identification
andpondering,
Upetipi apetipi —D. I. 180
accompanied with equanimity,come
Comes in andgoesout; upa +e (from
intoplayin themind;samuddacarantiti
manodvare saficaranti,Cy. IV. 194; 1) +ti +api; pres. 3’i Sg.; apa * e
upekkha +saha +gata; sam +u(t) (from 1) + ti + api, pres. aase
a+Car +a +nti,pres. 3™.pl.
Upehi tam samgitim —Vin. II. 290
Upekhako
tattha viharati, sato Acknowledgethatrehearsal;upa +e
sampaiāno
—M. III. 302; A. IHI. 279; (from I) +hi, imper. 2". sg.
V.30, tattha is missing
Heabides
thereequanimous,
mindful Uposathaggampisannisajjampi
andwell-aware;
upekha +ka, der. gacchanta—Vin. I. 188
While going to theuposathahall andto
Upekham patilabhati —A. IV. 70 the sitting hall; uposatha+ agga
Gainsequanimity;vipassaniipekham, (agga— agāra); sam '- ni t Sad +
Gy.IV.38;pati +Labh + a + ti, pres. va, der.
3
Uposathapamukhamsammanneyya
Upekhā
kusalanissitā
santhāti—M. —Vin. I. 107
1.190 Should agreeupona porticoto the
Equanimity,
associatedwith uposathahall
wholesome,
sustains:upa +Iks +a;
sam+Stha +ti, pres. 3". sg. Uposathapucchakaficaovadūpa-
samkamanaticapuechitabbam—A.
Upekhā
nātimaīāitabbā —M. II.
IV.276
142
You shouldaskaboutthedayof
Equanimity
shouldnotbe under-rated; uposathaandthedayof going for
na+ati +Man +ya +i + tabba,fut.
instruction
pp.
Uposathampi na puechanti,
Upekha
vapatikkiilyatava santhati ovādampi na yācanti —Vin. IV. 315
~A.IV,47
(They) do notaskaboutthedayof
Equanimity
or abhorrence remains uposathaandmakeno reauestfor the
advice;Prch +ya + nti,pres. 3”. pl.;
Upekha
santhati
—M. IIT.299
Yae +a +nti, pres. 3”. pl.
Equanimity
sustains
Uposatham upavasanti,
ossatthakāyāca bhavanti—S. IHI.
 Uposatham Uppandiyamano Uppaiiati Uppaliniyam

241 Uposathamkaronti, ui) +Pand +i +ya +mana,pass. physicalpainsborn,unpleasant,

severe,
(They)observemoralprecepts samghakammamkaronti—Vin. I. prp. bitter,distasteful,
notnice,andthreat
on uposathadaysandescape(from 340 to life; sarīra '- ika, der; a t Svad +
snakecharmers);ahitundikapatham (They) performuposathaceremony Uppaiiati
cavetica—M. IHI.286 ta,pp.; pana +hara; adhi +Vas+
gahetvāvissatthakāvā,Cv. II. 349; (recitalof Patimokkha)andcarry Rises
andfalls:w(t) +Pad +ya +ti, aka, der. +jatika
upa+ Vas+a +nti,pres.3“.pl.; o outecclesiasticalacts;wpa +Vas(us) pres,3". sg.; vi +eti (from 1),pres.
(ava) +Srj +ta,pp. + kaya t a+ tha; Kr + 0 + nti,pres. 3”. pl. ot Se. Uppanna manāpāmanāpāphassā
cittam na pariyādāya thassanti—M.
Uposathamupavasati,eātuddasim Uposathagaramsamihaneyya— Vin, I. 423
Uppajjati
sukham, sukha bhiyo
pannarasimatthamificapakkhassa- 1. 107 The contactsarisenon thebasisof
$omanasam —D. II. 214
M. II. 74 Shouldabolishthehall for uposatha likes anddislikeswill not hold sway
There
arises
physicalease,beyond
He observesuposatha(thedayof (fortnightassembly);uposatha+ in themind;u(t) + Pad +ta,pp;
physical
ease,mentalease;bhivo,
fasting)onthefourteenth,fifteenthand agara, (agāra generally meansa manāpa -t-amanāpa; pari + a +
indel.
eighthdayof the fortnight;upa + house);sam +u(t) + Han +eyya,opt. Da +ya, absol.; Stha + ssanti,fut.
vasatha(from Vas);upa + Vas+ a + 3”. sg. Uppajjamana
uppaiianti—5. I. 70;A. a tagi
ti, pres. 3”. sg.; catu+ dasa + i:
1.22,uppaiiati
Panna + rasa (pafica+dasa) + i, Uposathikopi bhattam na bhuiijati - Keep
onarising;
u() +Pad + ya + Uppannesukiccakaraniyesu attana
atthama+i, der. A. IV. 139 mana,pr.p.; this expression seems to tesuyogamapajjati—S. HI. 11;IV.
Te Also theone,who hasobserved givea continuous sense 180
Uposathamupavasanti, uposatha,doesnot eat food; uposatha When therearethingsto be
patijagarenti, puffiani karonti - +tka,der.;Bhu(ii)j+a +ti,pres.3’. Uppathena
gacchanta
pathena attendedhe involveshimselftherein;
A. I. 142 sg. gacchantassa
dhammam desenti- kicca + karaniya (thingsto be done);
Observemoralpreceptson
Vin.IV.205 attanais used hereas thesubject.;
uposathaday, continueit for three Uposathoca me upavuttho—
A. IV. Thosewhoaregoingonthewrong Yuj+a, der; @+Pad +ya + ti, pres.
daysanddo meritoriousdeeds: 249 path
(they)explaintheDhammato the Mua.
upa + Vas+ a +nti,pres.3”. pl;
The uposathahasalso beenobserved onegoing
ontherightpath
pati +jagara (fromJagr) +e +
by me;upa +Vas+ta,pp. Uppalapattampi uccareti —Vin. IV.
nti, denom.pres. 3. pl.; Cy. takes
the term as patiiāgaronti;
Uppannam
patibhanam
duppati- 147
Uposathothapetabbo—Vin. I. 5 vinodayam
—A. IHI.185
Patiiāgara is oneform of uposatha, Causesto raiseup evena petalof
The uposathaceremony(recitalof Whathascometo themind
thosewho follow thisform of waterlily; u(t) +Car +e +Ui,caus.
Patimokkha rules) should cause to be Ostentatiously
is difficultto remove;
uposathaobservemoral precepts pres, 3™.sg.
suspended;
Stha+ape +tabba,caus. patibhānanti
kathetukamyatā
fut.pp. Wiccati,
Cy.III. 294;pati t Bhā +
uposathaday and after uposatha Uppalahatthamupasimghatu—Vin.
day,Cy. II. 233 ana,
der.;du--pati t vi 3Nud t a + I. 279
Uposathovikale ahosi—Vin. I Ya,fut.pp. Maysniffupthehandfulof water
108
Uposathamkareyyapatimokkham lily; upa t Simgh t a t tu, imper:
Uposathaceremonywas(held)at
uddiseyya—Vin. I. 102 Uppannānam
sārīrikānam aioe.
impropertime
Shouldhold uposatha,recite Vedanānam
dukhānamtippānam
Patimokkha (code ofrules); Kr + katukānam
asātānam
amanāpānam Uppaliniyam va paduminiyam va
Uppandiyamanomamku ahosi-
eyya,opt.3”. sg.; u(t) +Drs + eyya,
Vin. III. 233
Pānaharānam
adhivāsakaiātiko
hoti pundarīkiniyam vā —D. I. 75
opt, 3”, Sg. -M.I.10 In thepondof waterlily, redlotusor
Beingteasedhebecameembarrassed:
Hebecomes
aperson
enduring white lotus;uppala + int
 Uppada Ubbedhena Ubbhatthakā Ubhato

Uppadava Tathagatanamanuppada Ubbandhitvākālam karohi —Vin. Ubhato kūiāni vissandantīgacchati

Ubbhatthakā
hontiāsana-
va Tathagatanamthitava sa dhatu III. 73 —M. II. 117
patikkhitta
—M. 1.92
dhammatthitatādhammaniyamata Hangyourselfand die: u(t) +Ba(n)dh It moveson, overflowingbothbanks;
They werestandingup,refusing
idappaecayatā,tam Tathagato +i +tva,absol.; Kr +0 +hi, imper. vi +Syand+a +nta + T,pr. p.
ubbha uddha +Stha +ka,
sitting;
abhisambuiihatiabhisameti—S. II. Ve, SI der;pati +Ksip +fa, pp.
25;A. I. 286,sabbesamkhārā Ubhatokotikam paīiham— M. I. 393
aniccā.,dukkhā.. anattā,insteadof Ubbāhāpetvāpuāiam Ubbhatam
kira kathinam —Vin. I. Doubleedgedguestion
idappaceayatā karapetabbam—Vin. II. 180 256
Sinceemergenceor non-emergence Havingcausedit to carryaway,it |haveheardthattheKathina Ubhato galati —Vin. I. 286
of theTathāgatasthatfundamental shouldbemadea bundle:u(t) + Vah+ hasbeenremoved;kathina is Trickles down from bothsides;Gal +
principlehasbeenin existence:the ape +tva,caus.absol.; Kr +ape + abspecial
robeofferedto the monks a + ti, pres. 3”. sg.
fixity of theDhamma,thelaw of the tabba,caus.fut. pp. atiheendof therainy retreator a
Dhamma,theconditionalityof the
wooden
frame used for weaving this Ubhato dandakenakakacena—M. I.
phenomena. TheTathagataawakensto
Ubbahikayavapasameyya — Vin. II. robe;
u(t)+Dhr or Hr + ta, pp.; kira, 129
andrelaisesthat;uppādāand 305 indcl.usedto indicate hearsay With a saw with handlesfromboth
anuppādā,abl. or instr.,Cy: takes
Shouldsettledown by meansofa sides
them to mean uppade vā anuppāde,
selectcommittee;vi + upa +Sam + Ubbhatasmimkathine— Vin. II.
Il. 40; u(t) :-.Pad --a, der:;thita +
evya,opt. 3’. sg. 198 Ubhato namgalamukhanipidaheyya
eva;dhamma~+thitata; idam +
paccayata,abhi +sam + Budh +ya WhentheKathinais removed; —A.III. 64
Ubbahikayasammannitabbo— A. V. uddhaandabbhaaresyhonymously Would closedown waterwaysfrom
f ri,pres.3”. sg.; abhi +sam +e
71 used
(fromI) + ti; pres.3". sg. both sides;namgalamukhaniti
To beageeduponfor theselect
matikamukhani,tani hi
committee;sam +Man +yati Ubbhuiitvā
amgaiāteabhinisīdi-
Uppadopannayativayo namgalasarikkhattanamgalehi ca
+tabba,fut. pp.; u(t) + Vah4 ika,
pannayatithitassaannathattam Vin.III, 40 katattanamgalamukhanitivuccanti,
der.
pannayati—S. III. 37; A. I, 152 (She)
saton(his) sexorganforcibly; Cy Il. 256; . api +Dha +eyya,opt.
Arising is manifested,
decay W(t)
+Bhuj +i + tva,absol.; abhi + a ae.
Ubbiiiantipi uttasantipipalāyantipi
is manifested,andchangeof the still is ni+Sad+i, pst.3”.sg.
—Vin. IHI. 144
manifested; pa +Jiid +ya + ti, pass. Ubhato pasannahonti —Vin. I. 216
Emotionallydisturbed,trembleand
Prd
pres. 3, sg. Ubbhujitvapi
pavisanti—Vin. II. (They) arepleasedwith bothSamgha;
runaway;u(t) + Vij +ya +nti,pass.
221 pa + Sad +ta,pp.
pres.3”. pl.; u(t) +tras +a +nti,
Uppadopivayopipannayati—M. Il. (They)
enter
evenforcibly;
pa +Vis+
pres.3”. pl.; Palay +a +nti, pres..3™.
282 a* nti,pres.3".pl. Ubhatobyahianakopatiiānāti —Vin.
pl.
Rise and fall are manifested:u(t) + I. 121 I
Pad +a, der. +api Ubhato
avassute
—Vin. IV. 214 He acknowledgesthathe is onewho
Ubbillam kho me udapādi —M. III.
When
bothareexcited:whbhato
is hasbothsigns,maleandfemale;
pati +
159
Ubbatumamratham karoti —A. IV. used
hereasan indcl.; ava +Sru + Uān t nāaket 7ti, pres.
se 79
3". e
sg.
Therearoseelationforme;u(t)+Plu
191
+a, der; u(t) +a+ Pad +i. Pst dt,
a,pp.
Takesthecarriageoutof theroad; Ubhato bhattho ubhato parihīno -
Ubhato
kāiam
haranti
—Vin.
II.137 A.IV.419
Ubbedhena —S. ri. 134
(They)
carrypolewhichhascontainers Theonewhoisdropped fromboth
In height
Onboth
sides;
Hr +a +nti,pres.3”. sides,wanedfrombothsides;Bhrams
pl. +ta,pp.;pari +Ha +ta,pp.
 Ubhato
Ubhato mukhā mūtoli —M. III. 90
A bagwith mouthsfrombothsides
Ubhato vinaye pucchi—Vin. I. 287
Questioned
onbothvinaya;Prceh
+ya
+i, pst. 3™.sg:
Ubhato viyūlham samgāmam
pakkhandanti—M. I. 86
Theyiump intothebattleground
wheretwo partiesconfrontfrom both
sides;vi + Vah+ ta,pp; pa +Skand
+a + nti,pres. 3”. pl.
Ubhato samgheupasampadapari-
yesitabba—A. IV. 277; Vin. II. 255
Ordinationshouldbesoughtfromboth
Samgha;pari +es (fromIs) + i +
tabba,fut. pp.
Ubhato samghepavaretabbam-
Vin. II. 255
An invitationshouldbemadeon both
Samgha;pa + Vr +e +tabba,caus.
fut. pp.
Ubhato suiāto, mātito ca pitito ca -
D. I. 113
Well born from bothsides,from the
sideof themotherandfrom theside
ofthe father;mātiandpiti —mātu
andpitu (Skt.matr,pitr.)
Ubhayatthakataggaho—A. IHI. 354
Success
onbothsides;kata(katais
usedin thesenseof good, cp. Skt.
krtayuga,goodperiod of time) + Grh
+a, der.
Ubho Ubho Ummaggam
Ubhayatthadhammamsuna—
Vin. I.
absol.;
tittha+ ti, pres. 3”. sg. The one who works for thevictory in
355 bothworlds;pati +Pad +ta,pp.
Listen to the Dhamma on both sides:
Ubho
antāpariggahitā bhavissanti -
Sru +nd, imper.2". sg.
Vin.I. 293;Vin. TV.278 Ubho saddesunanti dibbe ca
Bothends wouldhavebeenwelltaken manuseca, ye dure santike ca —M.
Ubhayatthapatibahiro —Vin. IT. 168
up(both
purposes
would havebeen li. 19
On bothsides,(you ) areexcluded
setved);
pari +Grh +i +ta,pp. They hearbothsounds,divineand
human,farawayandnearby;Sru +nd
Ubhayabyābādhāyapisamvattati-
Ubho
anteanupagammia
—
S. V. 421 +nti, pres. 3”. pl.
M. I. 115
Without
fallinginto bothextremes;an
It leadsevento theharmof both,sam
tupat Gam +ya, absol. Ubhohi panitalehi jannukani pari-
+Vrt +a +ti, pres.3”. sg.
masati,parimaiiati —D. III. 162
Ubho
ekatonayapessama —Vin. IV. (He) touches and rubs (his) knees with
Ubhayamsabhavitosamadhi hoti -
94 bothpalms;pari +Mrs +a+ ti,pres.
Dit, 155
Wewillnotkeepgoingtogether;
Ya + 3'd,sg.; pari + Marj + a+ ti, pres.
Thereis a concentrationof mind
ape+ssdma,caus.fut. 1%,pl. F238
cultivatedfor bothpurpose;
ubhayamsayaubhayakotthasdya
Ubhokannasotaniavifijeyyasi, Ubhohi hatthehi udakam omasitva-
bhavitotiattho, Cy. I. 312
panina
gattanianumajjeyyasi—A. D. II. 176
IV.86 Havingtouched
thewater
( orsetapart
Ubhayani kho panassapati-
mokkhāni vitthārena svāgatāni
Youshould
pulldowntwoear-lobes, thewater)with bothhands;oe(ava) +
massage
bodilypartswith palm;@+ vi Mrs + i +tvd, absol.
honti suvibhattāni suppavattīni
*dite+eyyasi,opt. 2. sg; anu +
suvinicchitāni suttaso anu-
vyahiianaso—A. IV. 279; Vin. I. 65 Mrj+eyyasi,
opt.2". sg. Ubhohi hatthehi patiggahetva—M.
BothPātimokkhas (bhikkhuand 1.32;A. IV. 278;Vin. II. 256
bhikkhunī)havebeenextensively
Ubhokannesamamkatva—Vin. IV. Havingreceivedwith bothhands;pati
studied,well analysed,well maintained
185 +Grh + e + tva, absol.
andwelljudged by him in termsof Keeping
bothcornersequal
thetextandthecommentary; pana + Ummaggamganhāti —A. IV. 191
ssa, su +agatani;su + vi + Bhaj + Ubho
nasetabba
—Vin. IHI.33 Takesthewrongway; Grh +nd+ ti,
la, pp.; su +pa + Vrt +i, der.; su + Bothshouldbedestroyed(expelled); pres. 3”. sg.
vi +ni(S) +Ci +ta,pp. Naf+e +tabba,caus.fut. pp.
Ummaggamgahetvapakkami —Vin.
Ubhoattheadhiganhati
—A. III. 49 Ubhopi
kannasotani
anumasi
pati- 1.8 :
(He) attainsbothbenefits:adhi + Grh īāsi—M. II, 135 Havingtakenanoff-track,hewentoff;
Hetouched
bothpassages
of theear
+nd + ti, meta.,pres. 3”. sg. pa+ Kram
+i, pst.3”.sg.
again
andagain:
kanna+sota;anu +
Ubhoatthesamadhigayha
titthati- Miti, pst.34.5'g.;pati -- Mr$ + i, Ummaggamgahetvapacchamukho
S. I. 86;A. IIL.364 bi,3 gg. gaecheyya—M. HI. 5
Havingattainedbothmeanings,he Havingtakena wrongway(he)goes
Stays;sam + adhi + Grh + ya, meta. towardswest.; u(t) +magga;Grh + e
+ tva, absol.
Ummaggo
Ummaggoabhinīhāro pafiha-
samudācāro —A. II. 189
Approach,framingthequestion
andaskingthequestion;
abhi+
ni(s) +Hr + a, der.;panha +sam
+ u(t) + 4 + Car + a, der.
Ummattakamidamariyassavinaye
yadidamnaccam— A. I. 261
Whatis calleddancingis insanityin
thenoblediscipline
Ummattakasammutimdadeyya-
Vin. I. 123
Wouldgivetheapproval of insanity
(woulddeclareinsane);sam + Man +
ti, der.;Da + eyya,theroot redup.
Ummattakālayamkaroti — Vin. II.
82
He pretendsthathe is insane;
ummattaka+ Glaya
Ummattakopatiiānāti —Vin. I, 121
He admitsthathe is insane;pati +Jan
+na+ti,pres.3”.sg.
Ummattakovippalapati—Vin. I.
345
Beingmad(he) talksinconsistently;vi
+pa +Lap +a+ ti, pres.3”. sg.
Ummattako hoti
cittavipariyāsakato—Vin. II. 80
He becomesinsaneandmentally
upset;u(t) + Mad +ta,pp. + ka, der;
vi +pari +(y) +As +a, der. +Kr +
ta,pp.
Ummattikākhittacittā—M. II. 109
Shewasmadandoutof mind;Ksip+
ta,pp. + citta
Uyyoianikapatisamyuttamyeva
Ummaram Ummīletvā
Ummattikayaanapatti—Vin. IV. Ummuiliitvā patarati —A. IV. II
Ummīletvā
nimīleyya, nimīletvā
259 Havingcomeup hecrosses; pa + Tr +
ummileyya
—M. III. 299
Thereis no offencefor the female (He)
wouldcloseeyesafteropening a +ti,pres.3. sg.
insane;u(t) + Mad + ta,pp, i +ka, them
up,hewouldopeneyesup after
der.; an + Gpatti closing
them; u(t)+Mil +a +eyya, Ummuilitvā vipassati viloketi —A.
opt,
3. sg.;ni +Mil +a +eyya,opt. IV. 11
Ummattosminamaham—S. V. 447 HĀ 88. Havingcomeup (from thewater)he
HaveI gonemad!; wnmatto+asmi:As looksaround;gantabbam disam
+mi,pres. 1".sg.; nama + aham,the Ummukam gahetvāupassayam vipassati,
viloketi,Cy.IV. 5; vi +
indcl. namais usedhere to express pavisati—
Vin. IV. 265 passa + ti, pres. 3”. sg.; vi + Lok +e
bewilderment Having
takena fire-brand(he) enters +ti, pres. 3%.sg.
the
nunnery;
cp.ukkamukha; Grh +e
Ummaddapentipiparimaddapentipi +va,absol.;
upa+Sri +a, der.;pa Uyyānabhūmim niyyātukāmo —S.
—Vin. IV. 342 +Vis+a+ti,pres.3”.sg. ¥,351
(They)causeto rub andmassage(their Withthehopeof goingouttothe
bodies);u(t) + Mrd +ape +nti, caus. Ummuiiamānā
ummuilanti —D. I. 45 pleasuregarden;ni + Ya + tum,inf. +
pres.3”. pl.; pari + Mrd + ape + nti, They
keep
oncomingup;u(t) +Majj + kama
caus.pres.3. pl. ya+mana,
pass.pr. p.
Uyyanam sodhentoaddasa—Vin. IV.
Ummādācittakkhepā aīiiam Ummujjamano ayoniso 157
vyākaroti—A. III. 119 ummuilissati
—M. III. 208 Whilemakingthegarden
clean,(he)
Declaresgnosisdueto insanityand Whileemerging,hewill emerge saw;Sudh+e +nta,caus.pr.p.; a>
deranged mind;u(t) + Mad +a, der; foolishly;
anidiomaticexpression Drs +G,pst.3”.sg.
citta +Ksip +a, der.; @+Jia; vi +a forinterfering
foolishly;ayoniso,
+Kr+o +ti,pres,3”.sg. ady, Uyyanecittagare—Vin. IV. 298
In thepicturegalleryof the
Ummādampāpunim cetaso Ummuiiitvā
tinnoparagato—A. IV. garden;cittat agāra;
vipariyāsam—M. II. 248;A. V. 160 i cittāgārantikīlanacittasālam,
I becamemadandmentallyupset;pa --
Having
comeup,hehascrossed and Cy. 934
Ap + (u)nd+ im,pst. 1".sg.; vi + gone
totheothershore;Tr +ta,pp.;
pari +(y) +As +a, der. param+Gam + ta, pp. Uyyuttamsenamdassanāya
gaecheyya—
Vin. IV. 104
Ummādam vā pāpunāticittak- Ummujjitva
nimujjati—
A.TV.11 Shouldgotoseethearmyonthe
khepamva—A. V. 169
Having
come
upheplunges
in;u(t)+ march;u(t) + Yuj + ta,PP.
He becomesinsaneor deranged; pa +
Maj+ya +i +tva,absol.; ni + Majj
Ap + (una + ti, pres, 3". sg.
*ya + ti, pres. 3". sg. Uyyojanikapatisamyuttamyeva
kathamkattā—A. IV. 233
Ummāram atikkāmeti —
Vin. IV.
Ummuiiitvā
patigidhappatto
hoti Theonewhogivesa talkleading
100 sALTV.11
indeedto sending(thelisteners)
Causestogobeyondthethreshold;
Having
come up,hehasfoundthe away;u(t)+yojana+ika,der.+
ati +Kram+e +ti,caus.pres.3”.
foothold;
pati+gadha+pa +Ap + pati +sam + Yuj + ta,pp.; Kr + tu,
SZ, Ia,pp. der.
 Uyyodhikam Ullokam Ullokam

Uyyodhikamva balaggamva Ulumpam bandhitva aciravatiya 82

senabyuhamva anikadassanam
va gaccheyya—Vin. IV. 107
Shouldgo to anarmyin thebattle,
in array,in amassingor should
go to seethearmy;uyyodhikam,
sampahāratthānassetam
adhivacanam;balaggam,
balaganana-tthānam,Cv. 859;
u(t) + Yudh-- ika, der.;senā +
vi + Vah+ya, der
Uyyodhikāyanivatto—A. V. 65
Returned from the battle front: ni +
Vrt +ta,pp.
Uracchadamkaronti—Vin. II. 10
(They)makea breastcover:ura +
Chad + a, der.
Urassadukkho bhavissati—Vin. I.
77; IV. 129
It will bepainfulto theheart
Uruvelāyam viharati naiiā
Nerahiarāya tīre Aiapāla nigrodhe
—S. I. 103;V. 167;D. II. 112,
viharāmi
Abidesin Uruvelā,underthebanyan
treenamedAjapala,on thebankofthe
river Nerafijara
Ure akkhini cevahonti mukhamca
—Vin. III. 107
Thereareeyesandalsothemouthon
thechest
Ulumpam pariyesanti—Vin. I, 230
Seekfor a raft; ulumpantiparam
gamanatthāyaāniyo kottetvakatam,
Cy. 1096;pari +es (fromIs) +a +
nti,pres, 3”. pl.
238
lokamkaritvasantharitva
nadiyaosarenti —Vin. III. 63 Made a bold statement;Bhās +i +ta,
bhisim
onandhitum—Vin. If. 151
Havingmadearaft, oar it downon the PP.
Tocushion
themattress,
afterputting
riverAciravatt;ulumpa(Skt.udupa); acloth
underneathandspreadingit out;
Ba(n)dh+i + tva,absol.; 0 +Sr +e Ulārāya pasamsāyapasamsati—M.
sam+Str +i +tvd,absol.; o +
+nti, caus.pres. 3”. pl. 1.175
naddha
ornandha(from Nah) +i +
Accords a praise,in high terms,pa +
tu,inf.
Ulikapakkhakam nivasetva—Vin. Sams +a + ti, pres. 3”. sg.
IHI.34 Uāram teidamāvuso Roia yam
Havingcausedto puton a dressmade Ulārāya bhattabhogayacittam
tvamBhagavato paccuggamanam
of owls’ wings;ni +Vas+ e + tv, namati —A. IV. 392
akāsi
—Vin. I. 247
caus. absol. The mindturnstowardsenioyinga
Friend
Roja,it is verygreatof you that
youwentforwardto receivethe sumptuousmeal;Nam + a +ti, pres.
Ullitta va avalitta va ullittavalitta Blessed
One;āvusois used here to 37. 8.
va —Vin. ITI. 149 address
a layman
Plasteredup,plastereddown and Ularesu paficasu kamagunesu
plastered upanddown;u(t) +Lip +ta, Uāram
pasādampavedetvā—D. II. bhogāyaeittam namati —A. IV. 392
pp.; ullitta +avalitta 131 The mindturnstowardsenioyingthe
Expressing
greatfaith;pa +Vid +e + highestforms of sense-objects;Bhuj
Ullumpatu brāhmanim paiam —D.I. + a, der.
hā,caus.absol.
249
Please
help(bringup)brahmin
Uārampubbenāparamvisesam Uliro aloko safijayi —D. 1. 209
people; u(t) + Lu(m)p TE Ti imper.
taīiānanti—M. II. 121; S. V. 154, A brightlight appeared;
sam +Jan +
aso;
sampajananti ya +i, pst. 3. Sg.
They
realise
a greatdistinctionas
Ullumpatu mam bhante—Vin. I. 57
compared
withthepast;pubbena + Usabhaehinnavisānasamenacetasa
Venerablesirs,pleaselift me up;
wparam;
sam+Jan +na nti, pres. viharāmi —A. IV. 376
ullumpatumantiuddharatumam,
7".
pl. I abidewith a mindsimilarto thebull
akusalā vutthāpetvākusale
whosehornsarecut; usabha+ Chid +
patitthāpetu,sāmanerabhāvāvā
ta, pp. +visana +sama
uddharitvā bhikkhubhāve
227 (chinnavisana-usabhasamena)
patitthapetu,Cy. 984
Attains
averyspecialstatus;adhi +
gacchati Usabhasatānimuācāmi, iīvitam
Ullokamakaritvasamharanti,
demi —A. IV. 46
hetthatonipphatanti,Vin. II. 150-1
Uhārasambhāvitā
—Vin. IV. 290 I setfreehundredbulls andgive them
(They)carry(them)awaywithout
The
one(Bhaddā Kāpilānī) life: Mu(ii)e +a +mi,pres. 1".Sg.;
coveringit at thebottom,thestuffings
Who
was highlyrespected; Da +e +mi,pres. I". sg.
comeout from thebottom;u/lokam
TU eg pabbajitatta gunehica
akaritvātihetthacilimikamadatva, u
Usuyyaka ime samanaSakyaputtiya
Cy.1218;sam+Hr +a +nti,pres.
“am
+Bhii+e +i +ta, caus.pp. —Vin. II. 190
3”, pl.; hettha+ to; ni(s) + Pat
Jealous aretheserecluses,sonsof the
+a +nti,pres.3”. pl.
Ulārā
āsabhī
vāeābhāsitā
—D. II. Sakyan;usuyya +ka, der.
239
 Ussolhipaicamanam
Usulomam Ussukkam Usukkam HI
i
Due to the cultivation and constant I
TN II
Usulomam purisam vehāsam Ussayavadikanama attakarika civarapindapata
gacchantam— Vin. II. 106 vuccati—Vin. IV. 224 practiceof five thingsincluding I
senāsanagilānapaccayabhesaiia : UE =
exertion as the fifth; bhdvita +tla, I I I
A personwith arrow-like(spiky) The onewho quarrelsor suesis parikkharanam
—S. IV. 291
der; bahula +kata + tta, der. NI
bodilyhair,goingin thesky; usw+ calledussayavadika;u(t) +saya |willgenerate
eagernessfor robes,
4
loma (fromSri) +vada +i +ka, der. foods,
lodgingsandmedical li
(one who burstsforth with emotions) requisites;
u(t) +suka +ya, der. '
Usūsupi khippamānesusattīsupi Ī TI
? ' |
khippamanesuasisupivijjotalantesu Ussahatighatati vayamati labhaya- Ussukkam
udapādi— D. II. 263 f I
rif I
—M. I. 86 A. IV. 293 Eagemness
arose;u(t) +a +Pad + i, i
Whenthearrowsarebeingthrownat, Strives, makes effort and exerts for . pst.
3. sg. i NI
i

spearsarebeingthrownatandswords gain:grant or Ghat +a +ti, pres.3”.

aremadeflashing;/oc.abs/.;Ksip + sg.; vit A+ Yam+a + ti, pres.37. Ussussanti
visussanti
na bhavanti-
ya + mana,pass.pr.p.; vi +Dyut + A.TV.100
aya + nia, Caus. pr.p. (They)
arewitheredaway,driedup
Ussahantirajaporise —D. I. 135 anddonotgrowup( makeprogress):
Usma ayum paticca titthati —M. I. Takeinterestin governmentservice;u u(t)+Sus+ya+ nti,pass.pres. 3.
295 (t) +Sah +a + nti,pres.3”.
2rd
pl. pli;vi+Sus+ya +nti, pass. pres.
Heatexistsdependingon vitality; 3"pl.;Bhi +a +ati, pres. 3”. pl.
pati + I (t)+ya, absol.;tittha+ ti, Ussahantivaniiiāya —D. I. 135
pres. 3™.
d
sg. Takeinterestin tradeandcommerce Ussūrabhatte
kule —A. III. 260
Inafamily,
takingfoodlatein the
Usmajayati tejo abhinibbattati - Ussahasi..evarūpāni cīvarāni morning;u(t) + sira + bhatta
M. III. 242;S. II. 97;IV.215 samvidahitum?—Vin. I. 287
Heatis born, fire is produced;Jan + Are you ableto preparerobesof this Ussūraseyyā
—D. IHI. 184
ya +ti, pres.3%.sg.; abhi +ni + Vrt kind?;u(t) + Sah +a +si, pres.2™. Tosleep
tillthesunrise;u(t) +siira:
+a+ ti, pres.3. sg; sg.;sam + vi +Dha +a + i +tum, Surya
in Skt.becomessiira, suriya or
inf. $ometimes
sūriya in Pali, similarly
Usmikatopi imasmim
Karyain Skt,becomeskara or kariya
dhammavinaye—M. I. 132,258 Ussāvabindūpamamiīvitam inPali
The onewhohashadeventhewarmth manussanam—A. IV. 137
of thisdoctrineanddiscipline;usma+ The life of humanbeings
is just like a Ussūre
āharīyittha
—Vin. IV. 77
kata dew-drop;ussava+ bindu + upama I Was
brought
lateinthemorning; @+
Hr+iya +i +ttha,pass.pst. 3. sg.
Ussatāyaussatāyaparisāya—M. II. Ussāhassa chando bahukāro —
M. II.
65 174 Ussūre
bhattam
nīharissati
—Vin.I.
With thefollowingof high ranking Will is muchusefulfor striving 293
officials,u(t) + Sr + ta,pp.
Willtake
outfoodlate(whenthesun
Ussukkampi
karotibhattasmim
-
Ussamkitaparisamkito— A. III. Sup);ni+®+Hr +i +ssati, fut.3”.
Vin. 1,312 Sg,
128 Hecreates
eagerness
in food
The onewho is mistrustedand
suspected;
u(t) +Samk+ i +ta,pp. Ussolhipaāeamānam
dhammānam
Ussukkam karissāmi
bhāvitattā
bahulikatattā
—A.III.82

241 |
 Ūnakamāse Uhasantipi
Ūruyā

Ūruā
potthanikam
bandhitvā
-
Ū Vin,
11.190
Having
|
tiedadaggerto thethigh;
Bali)dh +i +tv, absol.
Ūnakamāsesesegimhāne— Vin. III. ofage is not immuneto cold, heat,
253 hunger,thirst,gadflies,wind, sun, Ūhatam
raioiallam
—S.V.321;Vin.
Whenthereis lessthanonemonthin serpents, abusivelanguage,andunable li.70
the summer to resistexistingbodily pains,severe, Stired
updustanddirt:uddham
acute,unpleasant, unpalatable,unhappy hatam
tthatam,
Vin.Cy. 404; u(t)
anddeadly;a +Ksam +a, der: du + Han
+ta,pp.; rajo +Jal +ya
264 ®+ Vac+ta,pp.; du+ ® +a+ Gam
(He) keepshimselfaway,lessthansix T fa,pp.: u(I) + Pad + ta,pp.; sarira
nights;vi +pa + Vas+a+ti, pres.
Ūhadantipi
ummihantipi
—Vin.IIL.
PE
+ika, der.;an +adhi + Vas +aka + 17
TUTA e
Jatika, der.
Defecate
andurinate; u(t) +Han (hat)
2
"atui, pres.3. pl; u(t) + Mih+a
Ūnadvādasavassam gihigatam
Unassa
pāripūriyā
—Vin.IHI,203 +ati,pres.3". pl.
vutthāpenti—Vin. IV. 321
To fill thegap;paripūra -- ī, der.
Causeto ordaina marriedgirl ofless
thantwelveyears;gihigatanama Uhasantipi
ullapantipi
ujjhaggantipi
Ūne ganecaranam— Vin. II. 36 uppandentipi
—Vin. HI. 128
purisantaragata vuccati,old. Cy.
Moving in a grouplessthanfouror
322; gihi +gata; vi +u(t) +Stha + Laugh
withcontempt,
talkwitha loud
more; ettha ganoti cattaro va atireka
ape +nti, caus.pres. 3”. pl. Voice,
make biglaughter,
andmakefun
va, Cy. 1170
othim;
u(t)+Hrs +a +nti,pres.3”
Ūnapaācabandhanena
pattena
.. Unolokoatittotanhadaso
—M. II.
pl;u(t)+Lap +a + nti, pres. 3™.pl.;
cetāpeyya—Vin. III. 246 Wt)+jaggha'+nti,pres. 3". pl.; u(t)
68
Wouldcauseto exchangewith a bowl *Pand+e +nti,pres. 3. pl.
The world is incomplete,unsatisfied
ofless thanfive bindings;Cit 4 ape +
anda slaveto craving:a + Trp +ta,
eyya,caus.opt. 3". sg.
DD.;tanha + dasa

Unavisativasso
puggalo Urantarikaya
ghattehi
—Vin.IHI.
akkhamo hoti sitassaunhassa
39
jighacchaya pipasaya
Touchbetweenthighs:aru +
damsamakasavātātapasirimsapa-
antarika;ghatta(fromGhrs) +e +
samphassānamduruttānam
hi, imper,2”. sg.
durāgatānamvacanapathānam
uppannānamsārīrikānam
Urubalibahubali
alamatto
vedanānamdukkhānam
Samgāmāvacaro—M. II. 69
tippānamkharānam katukānam
Theonewhoisstronginthighsand
asātānamamanāpānam
arms,sturdyandmovinginthebattle
pānaharānamanadhivāsakaiātiko-
field; aru + bala + i, der.: alamattoti
Vin. I. 78
samatthaattabhāvo,Cy. III, 307,
The individualundertwentyyears
samgāma - avaceara

242
 Ekakamha Ekato
Ekacce Ekacce

Ekakamha tava —A. IV. 355
We are alone (I am alone) at the
moment; ekaka + amhd; tava, indcl.
Ekakam ohayapakkamimsu— Vin. I.
96; II. 212
(They)wentout leaving(him)behind,
alone;eka --ka; o + Ha +ya, absol.;
pa +Kram + imsu,pst. 3. pl.
Ekakulassa viharo hoti, parikkhitto
ca —Vin. ILI. 202
Thereis a dwellingplaceofone
family,enclosedtoo;pari +Ksip +
ta,pp.
Ekako araniie viharami—A. II.
I abide in the forest alone
Ekako niggahanānikattā —A. IHI.
129
The onewho makestheftsalone:Kr
tu, der.; with thesuffix trn (tu),object
He stoodwith one robe,causingto
bringthelimbsbackto the former
position(i.e.dryingup thebody);a +
Stha +s + i, pst. 3". sg.; pubba +
apaya +mana,caus.denom.pr.p.
Ekaccamabbhanujanati,ekaccam
nābbhanuiānāti
—D. III. 114
Someheparticularlyapprovesand
someothershedoesnot; abhi +anu
+Jan + na + ti, pres. 3". sg¢.;na +
abbhanujanati
Ekaceampabbajenti,ekaccamna
pabbajenti
—Vin. III. 184
Theycauseto banishsome,don’t
101
causeto banishsomeothers;pa +
Vraj+e +nti,caus.pres.3”.pl.
Ekaccamvademasadhiiti —D. I. 162
Wesaythatsomething’sgood;Vad+
e t ma,pres. 1".pl.; sadhu +iti
Some
saidthus;evar +Ghamsu:a + particularplaceUposathaceremony
Ah+a+
imsu,
pst.3".pl. shouldbe held; sam +ni +Pat +i+
tvā, absol.; Kr +tabba,(kartabba>
Ekacee
bhikkhūāgamesum— Vin. I. kattabba- kātabba) fut. pp.
182
Ekajjham samsattham—M. I. 317
Somebhikkhuswaited;@ +Gam +e +
Concocted;sam +Srj + ta,pp.
s+um,pst.3. pl
Ekaiiham samharitvā— S. II. 178;S.
Ekaccesuthanesusameti —D. I. 162
V. 441, samhareyya;A. I. 182
There
isanaggreementon certain
points:
sam+e (fromI) +ti, pres. 3” Having collectedtogetherat one
5g. place;sam+ Hr +i +tva,absol.
Ekaechanne
āvāse (na) vatthabbam Ekatitthe nahayanti—Vin. I. 293;
-Vin,II. 33 IV. 260
Shouldnotlivein anabodewith one They takebathat thesameford;Sna +
roof;
eka+Chad +ta,pp.; Vas ya + nti, pres. ¥%.pl.
tabba,
fut. pp.
Ekato āgacchanti—Vin. II. 273
Ekacchanne
vasissama —Vin. I. 339 Come together
Wewill abideunder one roof
Ekato uddisāpento—
Vin. IV. 15
Ekacchiggalam
yugam
- S. V. 455 While making(thepupil) recite
Ayokewithonehole;eka +chiggala together;uddesamganhanto,Cy.
743;u(t) + Drs +Gpe +nta,caus.
Ekacchiggale
yugegivam paveseyya PV.P.

is generally used in gen. -M.HI.169

Ekaccamsarati, ekaccamna sarati -
Would
cause
toinserttheneckin the Ekato upasampannamovadati—Vin.
Vin. II. 59
Ekaggā samāpaiiimsu—D. II. 210 Somehe remembersandsome
yoke
withonehole;eka +chiggala; IV. 55
Took a unanimousdecision;eka 2 (others)hedoesnot;Smr +a +ti, Instructs
theoneordained
in one
agga;sam +a4+Pad +ya +imsu, pres,3. sg. Order;upa+sam+Pad +ta,pp.;0
pst. 3”. pl. Ekajjham
Sannipatamasannipatitva Vad +a +ti. pres.3”. Sg.
Ekaccānamitthīnam oyācantīnam, Jassa
yamvattati
tamajjhesama
-
Ekacīvarā civarakammamkaronti - M.IH.10 Ekato dhāram ubhato dhāram
ekaccānamitthīnam āyācantīnam-
Vin. IV. 306 Vin.III. 137 Weassemble
atoneparticularplace, paharani —
Vin. IV. 201
Wearingonly one robe(they)are Whensomewomenwerecursingand having
assembledwerequesttheone Single-edgedanddouble-edged
engagedin robe-making someotherswereentreating;0 + Yac Whohasmastery
overthat;vattatiti weapon
Tatuatīprp;ātyYāctat P48unā
hutvāāgacchati,
Cy.IV. 72
Ekacivaro atthasi gattani nla +ī, pr.p. Ekato vā ubhato vā ukkhipitvā -
pubbapayamano—M. I. 161,III. Vin. IV. 187
192; S.1.8; A. TIL 345 Ekacceevamāhamsu
- S. I. 79 Liftingupfromonesideor both;u(t)
+Ksip +i +tva,absol.
 Ekato Ekabhattiko Ekamantam
Ekapalasikesu

Ekato ya ubhatova gandamkatva- dhammehi— A. IHI. 406 Ekabhattiko

brahmacārfīsīlavā Ekamantamanucamkamamano—M.
Vin. IV. 196 With unwholesomethings,definitely kahānadhammo—M. II. 51 Il. 158
Makingtheswellingon onesideor black Ie onewho takes one meal a day, is Whilewalkingatoneside;ekam+
both acelibate,
virtuousandof good nature; antam;anu +Kram +a +mana,
Ekantammanasikareyya—A. I. alat bhatla -- ika, der.;kalyāna 3 desid, pr.p.
Ekato sajjhayamkaronto—Vin. IV. 256 dhamma
15 Wouldapplyon mindexclusively; Ekamantam anusāsitvā—Vin. II. 272
While rehearsingtogether;sa + ekantam,adv, Ekabhattikohoti rattūparato Having instructedat oneside:
ajjhaya; Kr + 0 + nta,prp. virato
vikālabhoianā—D. I. 5; M. I. ekamantam, acc. for loc; anu +Sas +
Ekantasukhapatisamvedivihareyya 180 i +tvd, absol.
Ekattakāyā ekattasaāhiino—A. IV. —A. V. 85 Heisonewhotakesone meala day,
40 (He) wouldabideexperiencing has
abstainedfromeatingin thenight Ekamantam
apakkamma
—D.I. 142,
Thosewho haveuniformityin body absolutehappiness;pati +sam+ Vid mddetached fromeatingat improper Il. 180
+ e+ T,caus. der. time;
rafti +upa +Ram +ta, pp.; vi Havinggoneaside;apa + Kram +ya,
+ kaya;saminda
+ i, der. +Ram+ta,pp. absol.
Ekantasukhassa lokassa
Ekattakāyā nānattasaūihino
—A. IV. sacchikiriyaya —D. I. 192 Ekabhajanepi
bhufijanti Ekamantam
apanetvā
—
D. I. 221;A.
40 To see the world ofabsolute ckathalakepi
pivanti—Vin. II. 10, 1.219
Thosewho haveuniformity in body happiness;sa +acchi +kiriyaya 124 Having led(him)aside;apa +Ni +a +
anddifferencein mind:nana +tta,
Even
inoneplatetheyeat,evenin one tva, absol.
der. Ekanteattānamupasamhāsi— D. II. beaker
theydrink;Bhu(ii)j +a +nti,
212 pres.
3”.pl.; Pa or Pi +nti, root Ekamantam thito —D. I. 50, 151
Ekathālakepi pivanti —Vin. II. 10 Wentinto one side;eka +ante:upa + redup.,
pres.3".pl. One who hasstoodat one side;Stha +
Theydrinkevenin thesamepot; sam +Hr +s + i, pst. 3°. sg.; harsi> i +ta, pp.
Pa or Pi + nti, root redup.,pres. hassi > hasi Ekamaiicepi
tuvattenti—Vin. I. 10,
38,pi
124 Ekamantam nilīyimsu —Vin. III. 22
Ekapaīihenevasamsadeyyama—D. They
shareonebed:tuvatta +e +nti, (They) hid themselvesat oneside;ni
Ekadesambhuhiitvā —Vin. IHI. 22 IHI.38 denom,
pres.3”. pl. +Li+ ya + imsu,pst. 3. pl.
Havingeatena portion;Bhu(f)j + i + Wewouldmakehimsink downonly
tva,absol. by one question;sam +Sad +e + Ēkamattānamdametiekamattānam Ekamantam nisTdi—D. I. 51; M. I.
eyyama,
caus.opt.1".pl. 'ameti,
ekamattānam parinibbāpeti 16; 5. I. 183;V. 83
Ekadvihikaya sattarattindivani
~A.1.168 Satdown atoneside;ni +Sad +i, pst.
ganesi—D. II. 8 Ekapariyakatamkayabandhanam- Disciplines
oneself,calmsdownone BI. So
He countedsevendaysin termsof one Vin. II. 266 selfand
causes
toextinguishoneself;
day,twodaysandsoon;eka+dvi + Waistband,
goingonly oneround
aha +ika, der; gana+e+s +i, Dam
+e+ti, pres.3". sg.; Sam +e Ekamantam nisinno —D. I. 51; M. I.
denom.
pst.3". sg. "ti,pres,3” Sg.;pari +ni +Va-+ 16
Ekapalāsikesuupāhanesusatto- ape+ti,caus,pres.3". sg. The onewho hassatdownatoneside;
Vin. I. 185
Ekadhītikā —Vin. III. 135 ni + Sad + ta, pp.
The onewho is attachedto theshoes
Only onelittledaughter Ekamantam
atthasi—D.
1.50,150;
with one lining; ekapalasikanti 8.1.1;
Vin,12
, Ekamantam patimānesi—Vin. IV.
ekapatalam,Cy, 1083;Sak + Stood
atoneside;a +Stha +s +i,
Ekantakālakehiakusalehi
ta, pp.
117
PSL.
3, so. Waitedforatoneside;pati +Man+e
 Ekam Ekamsena
Ekam

+§ +i, caus.pst. 3. sg. Se Ekamdisampharitvā viharati —D. Ekamsamcīvaramkatvā—M. HI. 15

1,250 Havingarrangedtherobeon one
Ekamantampassāvamkatum—Vin. Ekamekassakammekayiramāne- Having
extended
(loveand shoulder;Kr t tvā,absol.
Il. 140 Vin. IV. 151 friendliness)
to onedirection, he
To urinateatoneplace;Kr +tum,inf. When a legal actionis beingtaken abides;
Sphar+i +tva,absol. Ekamsam cīvaram karitvā —M. II.
againsteachandeveryone;eka +m + 74
Ekamidamsamayam—M. II. 97;A. ekassa;Kr + iva + mana,meta.pass. Ekam pindamanagateāpatti Havingarrangedtherobeon one
IV. 369 pr.p. thullaccayassa,
tasmim pinde agate shoulder;ekam +amsam;Kr +i +
At onetime;ekam+ idam āpattisamghādisesassa
—Vin. III. tvā, absol.
Ekamekassapativiso—Vin. ILI. 64 157
Ekamidahambho Anandasamayam The shareof eachandeveryone When
thelump(ofplaster)hasnotyet Ekamsavyākaranīyampaīham—A.
so bhavamGotamo Vesāliyam 1.197
come,
therewouldbe a graveoffence,
viharati —M. III. 13 Ekamekassabhikkhuno upatitthatha The auestionto be answereddirectly;
when
thatlumphascome,therewould
Oneday,Ānanda,thatBlessedGotama —Vin.l. 244 beanoffence
entailing
a formal ekamsa +vi +@+ Kr +antya,fut.
staysin Vesali;ekam+idam +aham, Stayby thesideof eachandevery meeting
oftheSamgha; /oc.abs. pp.
(ahammeansday) . bhikkhu; eka + (m) + ekassa; upa + seems
tohayebeenmadein the first
tittha+ tha,pres, 2”. pl. sentence
withoutloc. case on both Ekamsena apavadatipatikkosati -
Ekamidaham samayam—D.I. 52,
terms,
ekam,
pindam,asin thecase S. IV. 118
157;M. I. 92;S. TV.379; Vin. IL. Ekamekassamātāpitaro—Vin. IV. ofthesecond;Cy. saysekampindam Categorically,
reproaches
andreiects:
284 129 means
thelastlump,571 ekamsena,ady.;apa + Vad +a + ti,
I, at onetime;ekam+ idam +aham Parentsof eachandeveryone pres.3. sg.;pati +Krug+a +ti,
(I)
Ekam
maiifiamano
dvepiiveadasi- pres. 3”. sg.
Ekamekoevammaāīati —M. I. 249 Vin,
IV.91
Ekamekamca bhikkhum Eachandeveryonethinksthus;eko +
(He)
gave
twocakesthinkingthatit Ekamsena upakkosati upavadati-
paccekadussayugena
acchādesi- eko;Man+ya +ti,pres.3”.sg. Was
One;
Man+ya +mana,pass.pr. D. I. 161;A. V. 190
M. I. 353
Pia+Da+s +i, doublepst.,3”.sg. Absolutelyupbraidsandreproaches;
He offeredtwo separatepiecesof Ekam amgamthapetvā —D. I. 120
clothto eachandeverybhikkhu;pati + upa +Krug +a + ti, pres. 3”. sg.;
Exceptfor oneconstituent: Stha +
Ekam
varattimekamvadivasam- upa + Vad+a+ ti, pres. 3°. Sg.
eka;@+Chad +e+s +i, caus.pst. āpe t Ivā, absol. A.V.
84
3%.sg.
One
night
oroneday Ekamsena gahito, sīhanādo nadito -
Ekam āmandamhatthekaritvā
Ekamekam vandāpessāmi —D. II. D. IHI.99
paceavekkheyya —M. IHI. 101
148 Ekam
samayam
—D.I. 1;M.I.1;S.I. Takenupdirectly,
andmadethe
Wouldreviewa myrobalan,keepingit
KALA lion- roar;Grh +i +ta,pp. ; Nad +i
I will make(them)worshiponeby in thehand;Gmandantiamalakam,Cy. Atonetime:Joc. meaningis conveyed +ta,pp.
one; Vand + dpe t ssāmi, caus. fut. IV. 147;Kr + i + tvā,absol.;pati +
byace.
I” sg. ava+Iks +eyya,opt.3”.sg.
Ekamsena dhāreyyāsi—5. IV. 326;
Ekamekamsitthamkammasatena Ekamsam
uttarāsamgamkaritvā - A. IV. 143
Ekam gamakkhettamupanissaya-
nitthāyati—Vin. II. 132 M. IHI.10
D.IL.
37;M.1.168,
177;IHI.246:S. You shouldhold definitly;Dhr +e +
Eachoneof (these)boiledrice I 137;
IHI.92;V.167;Vin.I. 5, eyyāsi;caus.
Aor
opt. 2".
aul
sg.
o
Havingresorted toonesinglelocality 6
is producedwithonehundredlabour: (villageandfield);gama+khetta;
ni(s) +Stha+ya + ti, pass.pres. Having
ārranged
theouterrobeon one Ekamsena nitthametthagantabbam
upa+ni +Sri +ya,absol.
Shoulder —M. II. 213
 Ekamsena Ekena
Ekaramatam Ekava

To resist even one attack: Sah + i 4 The deadbody,oneday,two daysor

to theconclusion;nittham+ettha;
Gam + tabba,fut. pp.
Ekamsenanittham gacchanti—M.
II. 169
They go directlyto theconclusion
Ekamsenavaca bhasita—D. II. 118
Spokenin unequivocalterms:Bhas
+i+ ta,pp.
Ekamsenavyakatam— A. HI. 403
Explainedin conclusiveterms:vi +@
+Kr +ta,pp.
Ekarattim vihareyya—A. I. 277
Could live only onenight;vi +Hr +a
+ evya,opt. 3™.sg.
Ekarattivāsam upagacchi— S. IV.
374
tum,inf.
Ekaseyyamekabhattam
brahmacariyam—Vin. I. 194
The highestwayof life with onesleep
andonemeal
Ekassacaritam seyyo—Vin. I. 350
Living aloneis better
Ekassacepi na patibhāseyya—Vin.
IV. 177
If it doesnotoccurto anyone;ce,
cond.p. +api; pati + Bha(s) + eyva,
opt.3". sg.
Ekaheneva—D. II. 48; Vin. II. 147
Just withinoneday;eka +ahena+
eva
Ekāgārikampi karonti —M. I. 87
Ekāvagāyi,ekavanacci, ekava
threedaysgone;eka +aha +Mr +ta,
accharikamvādesi—A. IV. 263
pp.; dvi t aha; ti t aha
Shesangalone,dancedaloneand
clapped
handsalone:eka +eva; Gai 4
Ekaham varam yacami — Vin. I. 82
ipst.3".sg.;Nrt +ya +i, pst.3”.
| ask for one promise;ekam +aham;
s: Vad
5g. +e +s +i, caus.pst.3”. sg.;
Yac +a + mi, pres. 1". sg.
aeeharikam
vādesītipānitalam
yadesi,
Cy. 130
Ekāhena satthamāharanti —S. V.
320
Ekavaijha,ekavijayini —Vin. IHI.
Commitsuicidewithin oneday;
83
(One
wasbarren,
onewas fertile;vi + satthamāharati is an idiomatic
Jan+ya +int expression for committing suicide;
a +Hr + a+ nti,pres. 3”. pl.
Ekavanadiparamgaccheyya—Vin.
IV,228 Ekekalomo —M. II. 136
Orshould
gobeyondtheriver (abroad) The onewho hasseparatebodilyhair:
alone eka + eka + loma
Ekena eko voharati —A. II. 188
Ekavarattimvippavaseyya
—Vin.
IV.229 Converses with another in isolation; vi
. "Ai rä .

Stayedfor onenight;eka + ratti +

Orshould
stayawayaloneforone + 0 (ava) Hr + a + Ut,pres. 3”. SE.
Plunder the houses
vasa: Vas+ a, der.;upa +gaccha+ i, night;
vi +pa + Vas +eyya,opt. 3”.
pst. 3. sg.
Sg. Ekena thanenagarayho —S. IV.
Eka nittha, udahu puthu nittha? -
339
A. 1.278
Ekarattivāsam upagaāchi—D. I. I Ekasanabhojanam
bhuiijami—M. I. Becomescensurableby one point,
ls thereonegoal or many?;puthuand
Stayedfor onenight;upa -- gaāich 124 garaha +ya, meta,fut. pp.
udāhu, indcl.
(fromGam) +i, pst. 3”. sg.; gafichi = leatonemealaday;eka +As+ana,
gacchi der.+Bhuj +a +ana, der.; Bhu(ii)j Ekena damenava yottenava
Ekānusāvane
kātum—Vin. I. 93
Ta+mi,pres.1".sg. sanmutta—S. IV. 282
To ordainin onepronouncement;
eka
Ekaraso lonaraso (mahasamuddo)- Connectedtogetherwith a ropeora
+ anu + Sru + e + ana, caus. der.
Vin. Il. 238 Ekasanepinisidanti—Vin. II. 10 strap;sam + Yuj +fa,PP.
(The greatsea)hasonly onetaste,the (They)
sitevenon oneseat;ni +Sad
Ekārakkho—A. V.30
tasteof salt Theonewhohasa uniquesecurity;
eka *a+nti,pres.3”,pl.
Il. 36 KA
t ārakkha
Ekavihare vatthum— Vin. I. 196 Ekahaparivasam
detu—Vin.II. 40 The entiremeaningis said(given) in
To abideatthesamelodging;Vas+ Let(theSamgha)
giveprobation
for oneword;Vae+ta,pp.
Ekārāmatamanuyuttoviharati—D.
tum, inf.
11.223 One
day;
pari+Vas
+a,der.;
Da+e
Indulged
inthedelightof beingalone, *lu,imper.
3”,sg. Ekena passenasatta mase
Ekasamghatampisahitum—Vin. I. he abides;eka + Grama+ ta, der; anu nipajjitum —Vin. I. 274
342
+ Yuj +ta,pp.
Ēkāhamatam
vādvihamatam va To lie down on oneside for seven
thamatam
vā—M. I. 88;A. I. 140
 Etagedha
Eko Eko

dhamanisanthatagatte —M. II. 121 amhi: As +mi, meta. pres. 1". sg.;
Ekockayamatugamenasallape —A.
186 Somereclusesandbrahminswho are II.69
samma,
indcl.,sam+Budh +ta,pp.
If thegroupoftwenty is lessevenby emaciated,coarse,ugly looking,pale Being
alone
himself,
hewould
one;ekena+api; ce, cond.p. andwith theveinsstrewnoverthe Eko rattindivo —D. II. 327
converse
witha lonelywoman;ekdya
limbs;/aikha(Skt.ritksa); u(t) + mātugāmena,
twogendersfor adj. Oneday(a dayandnight)
Ekena mam acchadehi,ekena pandu +u(t) + panduka +jata; andsubstantive; mātugāma, m. Sg.;
Ānandam
—
D. II. 133 dhamani+santhata:sam +Str +ta, Eko raho anuvicintetvā— D. II. 203
sam
+Lap +e, opt.3”. sg
Dressmein oneandĀnandain one:ā pp.+ gatta Havingreflectedin privacy;anu + vi +
+Chad + e +hi, caus.imper.2”. sg. Ci(n)t + e + tva, absol.
Ekoekāyarahopaticchanneasane
Ekikā āgatā—Vin. IV. 227 alamkammaniyenisajjam kappesi -
Ekena hatthenaudakam Came alone; eka + (i) +ka der. Ekova khano ca samayoca
Vin.
III. 187
sincitabbam—Vin. II. 208 brahmacariyavāsāya— A. IV. 227
(He)
being
alonewith a woman,sat
Watershouldbesprinkledwith one Ekika ohina —Vin. LV. 229 down
inprivacy
onaseat,fully There is only one timefor living the
hand;Si(fi)c + i + tabba,
fut. pp. Remainedalone;0 + Ha +ta,pp. covered
andsuitable
forsexualact; highestway of life
raho,
indel.;alamkammaniye,
Ekena hatthenapada dhovitabba- Ekikā ohiyitva —Vin. IV. 229 yattha
ajjhacdramkaronta Eko vūpakattho appamattoātāpī
Vin. IT. 208 Havingremainedalone:0 +Ha +iva sakkonti
tamkammam kātumtādiseti pahitatto viharanto —M. II. 61; Vin.
Feetshouldbewashedwithonehand: +i +tvd,absol. attho,
Cy.631-2;pati +Chad +ta, 1.183
Dhit + a +i +tabba,fut. pp.
pp;ni +Sad +ya, der.; kappa +e + Abiding alone,detached,mindful,
Ekidam sattādubbannā —D. IHI. 69 energeticandresolute;a +pa + Mad
Ekeneka santitthatipi sallapatipi -
$ti, denom.
pst.3"'.sg.
Someof the beingswereugly: +ta,pp.; pa +Dha + i * ta,PP.
Vin. IV. 268 ekidam,indcl.; du + vanna,v = b
Being alone (she) stands together and
Ekoganamha viipakattho—M. III. atta; vi +Hr +a t nia, PF.P.
talkstogetherwith one(man):ekena+
110;
A.IV.435,Vin. 1.353
Ekindriyam jivam vihethenta—Vin.
eka;sam + tittha +ti, pres. 3. sg.+
Theonewhoisaloneandwithdrawn
I. 137;IV. 296 fromthegroup;
vi +apa +Krs +ta,
api; sam + Lap +a + ti, pres, 3”. Sg. IV. 46
Injuringliving beingwith one faculty;
+ api pp.
eka+indriya;vi +Hid +e +nta,
upari, opp.. indcl.
caus.pr.p.
Ekenevapaīihenasakalampirattim Ekodyepatibāhasi?—Vin. II. 168
vitināmetum— Vin. II. 300 Being
onedoyou holdbacktwo Eniiamgho —M. II. 136 I:
Ekindriyam jivitam vihethenti -
To spendthewholenightwith one Vin. IV. 34 (lodgings)
?;pari+Bah+a+si, The onewho hasthecalf asthatof an
bres,24. se. Eni deer
question;vi +ati +Nam +e +tum,
(They)causeto harmlife with one
caus.inf. faculty;vi +Hid + e +nti, caus,pres
Ekopafiho,
ekuddeso
ekam Eneyyakampi karonti —M. I. 87
Sap
Ekenūna paīieaarahantasatāni Veyyākaranam
—
S. IV. 299 Theyinflict thepunishment
of
uccini —Vin. II. 285 One
question,
onesubjectandone Eneyyakatoo, in which the
Ekissa lokadhatuya—D. II. 225
Selectedfive hundredArahants,less For one world system;loka +dhatu explanation;
eka +uddesa;vi +a + pantiatedis fixed into theground
one; ekena + tina; u(t) + Ci + na + i, Kr+ana,der. by inserting iron rods through
pst. 3". sg. bothjoints ofelbow and kneeand
Eko adutiyocārikampakkāmi—S.
IIL. 95
Ekomhi
sammasambuddho
—Vin. I. set fire aroundhim, Cv.ll. 59
Ekesamanabrāhmane
kiselūkhe 8
He wentaloneona tour,withouta
dubbanneuppanduppandukaiāte lamtheonlySammāsambuddha, Etagedhādevamanussāyadidam
second;a +du +tiya, der.
perfectly
Enlightened
One;eko+ paūeakāmagupā—M. II. 134
 Etadaggam Etaparamamyeva Etarahi

Bothgodsandmenareattachedto Etadevakho panamayambhoto +paramam

+eva Etam kho tumhakam patiripam -
whatis calledfive objectsof sense- Udenassaāgamayamānāna A. IV, 359
desire;eta +gedha;pafica +kama + nisidama—M. II. 158 Ftaparamāyeva
devatā—D. II. 255 This is suitablefor you
guna Waitingonly for thisof thevenerable Exactly
thisamount
of deities
Udena,we do notsit; @ +Gam +aya Etam patikittham parihaninam
Etadaggambhagini paricariyanam +mdna,caus.pr.p.; ni +Sad +a+ Etamattham ārocetvāparibhasi - yadidam pannaparihani —A. I. 15
—Vin. III. 133 ma,pres. 1".pl. Vin.IV.265 What is calleddecreasein insightis
Sister,this is thehighestamongthe Havinginformedthis(he) reproached; theworstamongall thedecreases;
pati
services;efam(etad)+ agga;pari + Etadevakhvetthavusosukham pari+Bhas+i, pst. 3’. sg. +Kli§ +ta,pp.
Car + iya, der. yadetthanatthi vedayitam—A. IV.
415 Etamattham arocessama—S. V. 372 Etam pātikamkham —5. IV. 225
Etadaggamvuddhinam—A. I. 15 Thatthereis nothingto be felt here Wewillinformthismatter;etam + This is to be expected;pati + Kamks
This is thehighestamonggrowths; is itself happiness,friends;etam +ya, fut. pp.
attham;
G@+ Ruc + e +ssGma, caus.
Vrdh +ti, der. (etad)+ eva +kho + ettha +Gvuso; hi. I",pl.
yam (vad) +ettha; na +As + ti, pres. Etam pubbamgamametam
Etadattha katha etadatthamantana 2r
J”. sg.; Vid +aya +i + ta, caus.pp. Etamattham
puccheyyama—M. I. pubbanimittam—A. V. 236
etadatthaupanisaetadattham
110;
S.TV.93 This is theforerunnerandthe
sotavadhanamyadidam anupada Etadevapaccayamkaritva anahham Weshould
askaboutthis;Prch +ya + harbinger
cittassavimokho—A. I. 198 —Vin. IV. 43 evvama,
opt.1°,pl.
Whatis calledliberationof mind Only for this reason,not for anyother; Etam mamaesohamasmiesome
withoutgraspingis thepurposeof ant ahhiam Etamattham
viditva—D. 11.89;S. L. attā—5. II. 94;III. 18
conversation,discussion,rationaleand
78;Vin.I, 2 This is mine,this I am, this is my soul
giving ears;etam(etad)+attha;sota Etadevabahulamdhammim katham Havingunderstood
thissituation;Vid (tanha,mana,ditthi);eso +aham+
+ ava + Dha +ana,der. karoti —D. II. 81 +i+hā,absol. asmi:As + mi,pres. 1".sg.
(The BlessedOne)givesthis very
Etadavoca
—Vin. I. 8 samedhammatalkfrequently;Kr +o Etamha
abhikkantataraiica Etam santametampanitam yadidam
Saidthis;etam(etad)+a+ Vac+a, +tt,pres.3. sg. panitatarafiea
—§, IV. 225 asahnam
—M. II. 230
root redup.,pst. 3". sg.
More
excellentandfine thanthis; abhi That which is calledthestateof
Etadevabhantevaram—A. IV, 128 *kanta
+tara;panita+tara
Etadahosi—S. 1.58; Vin. I. 7, 26 no-identificationis sereneandfine;
This is indeedbetter,venerablesir
This ideaoccurredin (his) mind:etam Sam +ta,pp.; pa + Ni +ta,pp.
(etad)+ahosi: a+ Ha (Bhi) +a +5 Etam
ageam
etamsamgāhikam
Etapathosmietagocaro,na ca tena
+ i, pst. 3: sg. tamsamghataniyam
yadidam Etam santametampanitam yadidam
tammayo—M. I. 319
kiijam—A.
111.
10 upekkhā —M. III. 299
I amofthis path,I am
of this field,but That
Which
iscalled
ridge-pole
Etadevaatthaya—Vin. IV. 211 That which is calledequanimity1s
I am not madeout of that (I do not ‘Sthe
prominent,
all inclusiveand
For this verypurpose identifymyselfwith that);eta +patho
serene
andfine;upa+Iks +a
the
allbinding:
sam+Grah +ika,
+asmi:As +mi,pres. 1".sg; eta + der, Sam+ ghdtana + iva,
Etadevaārabbha udāhareyya—A. Etam santametampanitam yadidam
gocaro,;
tam(tat)+maya,der. der.
IIL. 195 nibbanam —A. V. 110-11
Surely,hewouldsay(something) Etaparamamyeva
savakayugam
—S. That which is calledNibbanais serene
concerning
this;Grabbha,indel.u(t)+ Etam
kāranā
—Vin.1.222:
IV.76 andfine
V. 164
a +Hr +eyya,opt.3". sg. Forthisreason:
noagreement
A pairofdisciples
ofthis standard:
eta bety, . andsubtantive
:
“tween
theadj. Etarahi asamuppannaniayatim
 Etarahi
Etena Eteva Ettavata

samuppajjissanti—A.III. 105 One, this is theright timefor this. You don’t tolerate this much; Sah +a
Fteva
sattābahutarāye aīiiatreva
Not yetborn,butwill comeup in Well Gone One si, pres. 2"4,sg.
?;
manussehi
paceajayanti— A. 1,35
future;dyatim,indcl.;sam +u (t)
Except
forhumans,
thosebeingsare
Pad +ya +i +ssanti,fut. 3. pl. Etāvaparamamna ito bhiyyo —M. I. indeed
inthemajoritywho are born Ettakam milam bhavissati ettako
246 intothisworld);ete +eva; afifatra, udayo—A. I. 116
Etarahi manussanamkhayo hoti Up to this much,not more;efava, indel.
+eva;pati +ā +Jan +ya This muchwill bethecapitalandthis
tanuttampannayati—A. I. 159 indci.; bhiyyo,indcl. nti,
pres,
3”.pl. muchwill be theinterest;u(t) +aya
At present,thereis anexhaustionof
(from I)
humanbeingsandthereappearsa Etāvaparamo siyā —M. IHI. 262 Ete
sattabahutaraye odaka —A. I.
decreasein humanpopulation:efarahi, Shouldhavegoneto thisextent:As + 35 Ettakāni udakālhakāni —A. III. 337
indcl.; tanu +tta,der.;pa +Jna +ya ya (Skt.yat), opt. 3. sg These
beings
wholive in waterare This muchis themeasureof water;
+ ti, pass. pres. 3”. se.
udaka -- ālhaka; ālhaka is a measure
Etāham na iānāmi - A. IV. 82 (er.
Etarahi va paccuppannam I do not know this;etam-- aham;Jan
Ettakenapi mayam attamanā
addhanamajjhattamkathamkathi +na +mi,pres, 1".sg. Etesam
vaafifiataram—5. III. 46 abhiraddhā —M. IHI. 271
hoti—M. 1.8
Ūrone
of these Evenwith thismuchwe arehappyand
He is uncertainwithin himelfas to this Etu kho bhanteBhagava,sagatam
presentperiodoftime; pati +u(t) 4 satisfied;ettakena +api; abhi +
bhanteBhagavato,cirassam kho Hehi padehi
etehivyaūiianehi
—S.
Pad +ta,pp.; adhi +attam;katham Radh + ta,pp.
bhanteBhagava imam IV,379
+katha + f, der. pariyayamakasi yadidam Withthese
wordsandphrases Ettake vanne pariyapunami —D. I.
idhagamanaya,nisidatu bhante
Etarahi va mamaccayena —D. II. 117
Bhagavā,idamāsanampafiiattam - Ettakaparamava
mayametasmim
101;5. V. 154 I know only thismuchof good
D. 1. 179 atthe~D.
1.124
Currentlyor aftermy passingaway: aualities;parivāpunāmītiiānāmi, Cy.
Pleasecome,VenerableBlessed Onthismatter
we know only this
mama+accayena:ati +aya (fromI) 288; pari +Ap +(und +mi,pres.
One, welcometo you, sir, it is sincea
much;
ettakaparama
+eva I" se.
long timethatthevenerableBlessed
Etarahi viharati —M. II. 119;S. I.
One madethis moveto comehere
144 Ettako dando—Vin. III. 139
(paidthisvisit), pleasesit down I.15);A. IV. 359; V, 198
Abides,currently This much is the fine
venerablesir, theseatis already Even
thismuchwouldnotcometo
prepared;
e (fromI) 3-tu,imper.3”. our
mind;ettakam
panana
Etarahi sunakhesusandissanti—A. Ettato bhiyyo —5. I. 185
se.; bhante is the contracted form of katheyyanti
dasseti,Cy. 167; the
II. 221 More thanthis (group);efa +fo;
bhddanteor bhadante:su 4 āgatam;
To beseenat presentamongthedogs; opt.
ofpatibhatialways appears in bhiyyo, indel
cirassam,
indcl.;a +Kr +a@+s+i, the
textsaspatibhdseyya,the
Dr€ +ya + nti,pass.pres. 3”. pl.
doublepst. 3", sg.; ni +Sad +a+ characters.
ya andsa, in Sinhalese
tu,imper.3". sg.;pa +Jia +ape+ Ettāvatā kho upāsako hoti —A. IV.
Etasmimnidāneetasmimpakarane Witings
areverymuchsimilar to 220
ta. caus. pp.
—Vin. I. 79 each
other:if the verbis madeof
To this ektentone becomesa lay
Againstthisbackground,
on thismatter Phas,
thentheword ‘no’ in the text
Etenaetamolārikamakkhāyati—D. disciple; ertāvatā,indel.; upa +As
Mould
havenorelevance:ettakam
IS37 aka, der.
EtassaBhagavakalo, etassaSugata Pl Na+pati+Bha 4 (y) +eyva,
This is saidto begrossascompared
kālo —D. II. 2; S. II. 107 Opt,
3”.so.
withthis;@+Khyd+ya +ti,pass. Ettāvatā pathavi udrīyati —D. I. 96
Thisis therighttimeforthis,Blessed
pres.3. se To this extenttheearthis split open;
Ēttakam
na sahasi —Vin. IV. 263 u(t)+Dr +iva +ti,pass.pres.3”.sg.
 Ettavatapi Evampi
Ediso byyasi

Ettavatapikatamevaetam—D. I. parirakkhitabbam maīiāissati—M. Evamaha—D. II. 72

fyyasi,
bhagini—Vin. IV. 132
205 III. 207 Said thus;evam +dha: a +Ah +a,
Youshouldcome, sister
This hasindeedbeenaccomplished Now, whatshouldwe sayin this pst.3™.sg.
evento thisextent;kKatam
+eva contextabouttheelderbhikkhus Ewāsibhantepurāham haūīāmi-
wherea youngbhikkhuthinks Vin,IHI,43 Evametamdhārehi —M. III. 264; 5.
Ettavata vattamvattati, itthattam thusofdefending theteacher:ettha IV. 57 I
Venerable
sir,you shouldcome before
panfapanaya,yadidamnāmarūpam +idani; Vac +ssama(Skt.svāmah), lamkilled; e(from I) + evyasi, opt Causeto hold it thus;Dar +e +hi,
sahaviāiānena —D. II. 63—4 vak +sydma,vakkhama, fut, 1%pl. H e 2nd
™sg; pura,indel.+aham;Han caus. ImpeFr. 2 . SE.
To thisextentthecycleof birth or vakkha+ma (like gaccha +ma), ya+mi,pass.pres. 1".sg.
proceeds,for theproclamationof pres. 1".pl.; yatra hi namais a Evametam,netamaffatha —5. II. 84
thisexistence,to wit, nameand
conjunctive p.; nama gives the Erakavattikampi
karonti —M. I. 87 It is so,nototherwise;
na +efam;
form togetherwith consciousness:
impression of amazement; pari + They
inflictthepunishment
of afnatha, indcl.
ittha +tta,der.; Vrt +a + ti, pres.
>
Raks+ i +tabba,fut.pp.; Man +ya + Erakavattika
in whichtheconvictis
ō . 8.
K
i +ssati; fut. 3 sg. skinned
from theneck to the ankles Evametam Bhagava,evametam
ad rappingup theskinless body Sugata—D. I. 189;5. I. 64
Ettāvatā sāmaggiyāvatā ekāvāso-
Ettha mayamanassamasacariyaka withropes,heis dragged,Cv.ll. 59 It is so, BlessedOne, it is so, Well
Vin. I. 105
—D.III. 52; M. II. 37 Gone One; evam +efam
To whatextentis thelimitof one
At thispoint,we aretotallylost,
residence,to thatextentis whatis
togetherwith our teachers:eftha, 1196 Evametambhūtapubbam— D. II. 167
meantby concord:ettavata,yāvatā,
indcl.; @+ Nas +ya +ma,Pass.pres. Different
kindsof grass;ima Thus it happenedin thepast;pubbe
indel.; eka + avdsa
I". pl; sa t ācariyaka cataisopi
tinaiātiyo,Cy. 1088 bhiitam
Ettha kataggāho —S. IV. 357
Etthāham bho Gotama Evamassa
mayamvādam
Victory,here;kata(Krta) +Grh +a, Evametasamditthinam pahanam
anhanamapadim,ettha āropessāma
—M. I. 176
der.; opp. is kaliggaho hoti, evametasamditthinam
sammohamapadim
—M. 1.487 Thus
wewill raisea contentionfor patinissaggo hoti —M. I. 40
VenerableGotama,here| havefallen him;evam
--assa;ā t Ruh +e +
Ettha chandamianehi—D, II. 190 The abandonment andremovalof all
intobewilderment,I havefalleninto ssdma,
caus,fut. 1".pl.
Setmindin here;Jan +e +hi, imper. theseviewstakesplacein thisway;pa
confusion;eftha +aham;annhdnam +
Jad
2. .5E +Ha +ana,der.;pati +ni +Srj +
apadim:
& +Pad +im,pst.I". se.;
Evamassa
vacanīyo
—S. V.409 ta, pp.
sam +Muh + a, der.
Etthadāni kim daharebhikkhū Heshould
betoldthus;evam+assa:
vakkhāma- S. IV. 72 As+ya (Skt.yat), opt. 3, sg.; Vac + Evametedatthabbā—M. I. 435
Ettheva tittha, ma pāvisi —D. II.
Now, what should we say, in this iva, fut.pp. These should be seen (understood)
190
Context,to theyoungbhikkhus:esha thus;Drs +tabba,fut.pp.
Stayrighthere,don’t enter;ettha +
+idani; Vac +ssama,fut. 1. pL; Evamassu
vacanīyā
—M. I. 64,400;
eva;tittha(fromStha)imper,2". sg.; 5,V.100
taking vakkha as the present base Evamettha bhavissati —M. IHI 268.
ma,prohibitivep. usedwithpst. or
like gaccha,vakkhamais also used They
should
betoldthus:evam3
imper.;
pa +@+ Vis +i, pst.3”.sg.
aspres. 1*.pl. asusAs +yu,(Skt.yus) opt. 3”. pl. evametthatievammayhamettha
Ediso ca ediso ca, tato ca bhiyyo - bhavissati,Cy.
x
V.
,
85;
2F-
evam
py
+me>»+
1

Etthadani mayamthere bhikkhū

M. II. 140 Evamavusoti
paccassosi
—S.IV.56 ettha
kim vakkhāma,yatra hi nāmaevam
(He) is like this, like this,andmore Repliedbysayingyes friend;evam
nävobhikkhu satthāram
thanthat;bhivyo,indel. iao: iti; pati +a+ Sru +s +i, Evampitemano,itthampite
Pst.
3%,
5 mano, itipi te cittam —Di 2243;
 Evampi Evam
Evam ham

A. 1.170 Evam iccha uppajjeyya —M. I. 104

Thus is yourmind,suchis yourmind,
andso is your thinking;evam,indel. 4
api; ittham,indcl. +api; iti, indel.
ofthe
Blessed
One; Bhas +i +ta, Shouldanyonesayaboutmewho is
Therewouldarisea wish asthis:u(t)4
miāt Jan +nd +mi, pres. 1". sg.
knowingthusandseeingthus:Jan
Pad +ya +eyya,opt. 3”. Sg. +nd +nta, prp.; passa +nta, prp.;
2rd

Evam
khomebho hoti— D. I. 129 evam,indcl.; Vad --eyya,opt. 3". Sg.
api
Evam uddiseyyatha—Vin. IL, 21
Sir,thisis how I feel
You should recite (learn) thus; w(t) + Evam iānāti, evam passati—D. I.
Evampi nam vuccamānācodenteva
Drs +evyatha,opt. 2". pl. 157
—Vin. IL. 81 Evameaevamea karoti —Vin. I.
127 Knows thus, sees thus
Beingsaideventhus,theyaccusehim
Evam kalyano kittisaddo
rightaway; Vac+ya +mana,pass.pr: Does
asthis,asthat
abbhuggato—D. I. 49, 87; M. I. 125; Evam tadā āsi, ittham tadā āsitveva
p.; Cud +e +nti, caus.pres. 3'i, pl+
A. 1.180 E = ME abhāsi—D. I. 143
eva Evamcanamdhāreyyātha—A. V. 59
Goodreputationhasspreadthus:abhi He saidonly this:Thusit happened
Youshould
causeto hold it thus:Ah
+u() +Gam +ta,pp. Ē aa: then,thusit happened
then;a +As +7,
Evampi vuccamananādiyi —Vin. IV. +e+eyyatha,caus.opt. 2". pl.
25 (Skt.Gsit),pst. 3”. sg.
Evamkāmāevamehandā :
Shedid notcareevenbeingtold thus: Evam eavadehi—D. II. 72
evamadhippāyā(mayam)—S. V. 353
ac +ya +mana,Pass.pr:p.; na +a Tell(him) thistoo; Vad +e +hi, Evam tunhi bhavitabbam—A. IV.
Weareof this desire,of this impulse
+Da +iya +i, pass.pst. 3 Sg. imper.
2". sg. 114 ;
andofthis intention;evam+kama,
This is how one should be silent: Bhi
cpd.
Evamvādfīhoti, evamditthi—D. I. Evamcittamuppādeti—A. IV. 42 tai +tabba,fut. pp.
34; S. IV. 319 Hecauses
thesetting
of mindthus;
Evamkārī evamsamācāro—A. IHI.
He is onewhospeaksthusanduiews u(t)+Pad+e +ti, caus.pres. 3". sg. Evam datthabbam—D. II. 154
353
thus;vada+ 7,der; Drs +ti +i, der. Should be seen (understood) thus; Drs
Theonewho is doingthiswayand
Eyam
cetasoparivitakko udapādi - +tabba,fut. pp.
behavingthisway;evam +kart: Kr +
Evam abhivissattho—M. II. 52 DI.117,215;M. 1.31;S. 1.715UL
a+ t,der.; evam + sam +dcara: @+
Thus (he is) so intimate;vi + Svas+ 273;
ILL.96 Evamdhammoevambhavietam
Car +a, der.
ta,Pp. Anideacameupin mindthus;u(t) +a anatīto—M. I. 58
* Pad+i, pst.3. sg. (This body too is ) ofthis nature,
Evamkārī evamsamācāroasuei
Evam ayyeti... paccassosi—Vin. IHI of this being,notgonebeyondthis
gāmakantako —S. IV. 198
16 Evamjacea,
evamnama, evamgotta, condition;evam +bhava + 7,der.;
(This venerable),who is doingthis
Replied,saying'yes,lady.”;ayye+ iti: tvamsila,
evamdhamma, an +ati +I +ta, pp.
way,behavingthisway, is a dirtyone
pati+at Sru+s +i. pst. 3”. sg fvampanna,
evamvihārī,
anda thornto thevillage
tvamvimuttā
teBhagavanto
ahesum Evam namo evamgotto—S. V. 348
Evam arahati bhavitum—M. III.
Evamkārī kiccakārī assa?—M. I.
ltipīti
—D.11,
8 Ofthis name,ofthis clan
152 Those
BlessedOneswereof thisbirth,
135;5. I. 181,homi
This is likely to happen;Arh +a + ti, ofthis
nameandof thisclan,of this Evam niina katabbantimaūhamānā
By doingso,wouldthatmando what
pres.3". sg.; Bhi +a+ j +tum,inf. character,
ofthisnature,of this —Vin. II. 260 ,
oughtto bedone?:kicca +Kr +arg
Wisdom,
of thisabiding,of this Thinking thatit shouldbedoneindeec
der.;As +ya (Skt.yat),opt.3”.sg.
Evam āvuso— Vin. I, 58 in this way: nina, indcl.; Kr +tabba,
liberation;
jati +a, der.; vihdra + T,
Yes friends;evaln,indcl.; āvuso, det;vi+Muc +ta,pp.; iti +api + iti fut. pp.; Man +ya +mana,prp.
Evam kho ahamBhagavato
indcl. usedfor both,sg. andpi.,
bhasitam Ajanami —D. I. 184
meaning
ThisishowI understand
theteaching Evam no ettha hoti —M. L ash
This is how we feel here;ettha,indcl.
 Evam Evam
Evam Evam

Evam padahitvāpadahitvā,evam Evam puttha nacevasampāyissanti, Evam vutte—D. I. 2; M. I. 25; 5. IV.

Fvam
mesutam—D. 1. 1; MI. 15S.
saritvā saritvā evamsamādahitvā 400;A. V. 194;Vin. 1.9
uttarim ca vighātam āpaiiissanti - LUALLI
samādahitvāevampaiānitvā When it wassaidthus;Vac +ta,pp.
M. 1.85; A. V. 50 Thus,
ithasbeenheardbyme;eva,
paiānitvāevamabhisaddahati—S.
Beingguestionedthustheywill notbe indel;Sru +ta, pp.
V. 226 Evam vyākātabbo—D. I. 118
ableto answer,furthertheywill come
(The nobledisciple) eKerting It shouldbeexplainedthus;vi +a+ Kr
to bedestroyed;sam +pa +a+ Ya+i Evamraianīyoevamkamanīyoevam
continuously,recollecting +tabba,fut.pp.;kartabba>
kattabba
+ssanti;fut. 3”. pl; vi +ghan + ta, madaniyo
evambandhaniyoevam
continuously,concentratingmind >katabba
pp.; 4+ Pad +ya + i +ssanti,fut. muechanīyo—D. II. 337
continuously,havingknown 2
API Soattractive,
sodesirable,so
continuously,getsa firm faiththus:
intoxicating,
sobindingandso Evam sani hoti— M. II. 13; A. V.8
pa +Dha +i +ta, absol.;Smr +
Evam puttho kinti vyākareyyāsi?- infatuating;
Ra(fi)j+anīya,fut.pp.; He becomes conscious thus; samfid +
i +tva,absol.sam +a +Dhaé+i +
5. III. 37; A. IV. 338,pl. Kam '- anīya,fut.pp.; Mad +aniya, I, der.
iva, absol.;pa +Jan + na +i+
Beingguestionedthuswhatshouldyou fut.
pp.;Ba(n)dh+antya,fut. pp.;
iva, absol.;abhi +samor sat +
say?;kinti, indcl. March +antya,fut.pp. Evamsa te āsavāvighātaparilāhā na
Dha +ti, pres.3.
2 sg.
honti —M. 1.361;A. II. 197;Vin. II.
Evambyakho—M. I. 257 Evam
vadehitivattabba—Vin. LV. 202
Evam pasannoahambhante
It is like this; bya = viya,indel. 319 Thus thereareno thosedestructive
Bhagavati—D. II. 82; III. 99; S. V.
She
shouldbetold,“ saythus”;Vad+ andall consuming
influxesfor
159
Evam bhaddantava—D. HI. 180 e+hi,imper.
2™.sg.+iti; Vae+ him: evam +assa;paridaha >
Venerablesir,thusfaithfulI have
Yes, sir; bhaddantava, in form, is labba,
fut.pp. parilaha
beento theBlessedOne:pa +Sad +
similar to bhaddante
ta, PP.
Eyam
vadehiti
vattabbo—Vin. 1.69 Evam sante—D.II. 3; M. II. 24
Evam bhante—S. II. 99 Heshould
betold,‘saythus’ Thisbeingso;As +nta,pr.p.
Evam passamsutavāariyasavako-
Yes, venerable sir
S. II. 95,245
The noblediscipleseeingin thisway; Evamvācambhāsati —5. IV. 83
Evam bhāvitāya mettāya Makes
astatement
asthis
Passa + nia, pr. p., nom. sg.; Sru +
cetovimuttiyā— D. I. 251
fa, pp. + vantu,der.,nom.sg.
Oflove andfriendliness,a liberation
Ēvam
vādinoevamditthino —
D. I.
ofmind, thuscultivated;Bha +e +i+
Evam pi no —M. I. 430 19);
M.I, 80 Evam sampadamidamtuyham
fa, Caus.pp.; vi +Muc +ti, der:
Not so, too Those
whoarespeaking
thusand bhavissati—M. I. 327
holding
wrongviewsthus;Vad +i, This is how it will happento you
Evam manasikarotha,ma evam
Evam pucchitabbo —D. I. 117 der.;
Drs+ti +7
,der,
manasākattha—D. I. 214
It shouldbeaskedthus:Prch +ya +i āventi— A. IV.IV.153
Evam sambhāventi—A. I i
Apply on mindthus,don'tapplyon
+tabba,fut. pp. Evam
vitakketha,
maevam Causeto honourthus;sam + Bhi +¢
mindin thisway;manasi+Kr+o4
Vitakkayittha
—D. 1,214 +nti, caus.pres. 3™.
a
pl.
ri

tha, imper.2". pl,

Evam puttha ¢vamvyakareyyatha- Think
thisway,thinknotthisway;
S. IV. 522 "+takka
+e +tha,denom.imper. Evam samvaddhahi tassa
Evam mahiddhiko evam
Beingguestionedthus,you should ™pl. Bhagavato parisa yadidam
mahanubhavo
—D. I. 72;S. I. 85
explainin thisway;Prch +ta,pp.; anhamannavacanena AA
So powerfulandso majestic;maha+
vit@+Kr+o+4 eyyatha,opt. Evamvihari
—p, I, 251 aūāamaāhavutthāpanena— Vin. II.
iddhi + ka, der.; maha + anubhava+
op: The
onewhoisabiding
inthisway; 178 "MA
a, der,
WiHita--, der.
That BlessedOne's followershave

263
 Esoyeva
:
TEE ēvarūpā
Ey arupa warūpāya
Eyarupay

indeedgrownup in thisway: by theunwise;yathatam,indel.; a+ Treatments

ofthick
PA me Ha,o taae
are accorded: Esa tula etam pamanam~—
A. 1.88;
correctingoneanotherandby viddasu(Skt. vidvas) eam+rapa;Kr UE RARI I
il. 164
supporting
oneanother;
sam+Vrdh+ MMGPr 2. P, TAHIA
This is the scale, this is the standard
fa,pp.; vi +u(t) +Stha t- āpe --ana, Evam hetamhoti'—
M. I. 441; 5. II, KI kāvanikāvaSALIV. Esava samannaahosi, esapannatti -
caus.
der. 224 Para sendhayanhs M.IIL.68
This is theway it is
Evamsīgham
evam
tuvatam
evam I. 0Barmiing
ofthiskind;
sar Therewasonly thisnameand this
: "this kind;
sam +
appakasirena—M. III. 299 ) yathatam
Evam hetamhoti, = iva +
+ ika,
dhivana ika, de
der.
designation;esa +eva;pa +Jna +

duppavedite
aniyyānike Barāpo
= attabhāvapatilābho
āvanatilā hoti-
Evam suvinītā parisā —M. II. 122 anupasamasamvattanike Vin,II, 185 f this 14
: . < : . 2 Ei E is9 for “existence o Ī Esa vācā ekamsenaovāditā —D.
: IHI.
Thefollowing,well trainedin thisway; āsammāsambuddhappavedite There isa formof ekiste Thesewortasers causedAdbe
su+vi+Ni +ta,pp. —M.I. 67 kind overemphasised;
ovāditāti
bhāsitā,
This is theway it is, as in the E MOE
HE
Evam hi te Moggallāna
dispensation in which the doctrine Evaripoiddhanubhavo hoti ~ Vin. tj
Cy.825;ekamsena,
adv.;o t Vadt e
sikkhitabbam- A. IV. 87
hasnotbeenexplainedaccurately, I,240 Hara t Ia, caus5. PP.
Moggallana,you should,indeed,train
thedoctrineitself is ineffectiveand There
isapsychicpowerof this kind:
yourselfthus
notleading
totranquillity
and iddhi
+anubhava Esikā gambhīranemā,sunikhātā,
proclaimedby theunenlightened ones:
Evam hi no sutteocarati —M. bE du + acalā,asampavedhi—A. IV. 106
Fo Wha ‘varil āvas: asso,seyyathāpi EOE
502 oPE KENA: te Bp ale E Hkaaphaa No A holderofgates,
well deeplyembedded,
fiked in theground,firm and
pa + Vid+ e+ i+ ta, caus.pp.; an namatilapicunova kappasapicuno inshakable;gambhīranemāti
This is how it occurs. indeed, in our 5 a unshaKa .. ,
+upa+Sam+a+ sam+ Vrt+ 'ā—D.
II. 175 īrāvatā,Cv. 53;su t ni 3
scripture;9 (ava) + Car + @+ tl, pres. : : ;
rd ana +ika,der.;a +samma
+sam+ The
bodily wasofTheo
touch kiīhnAW
hia
thiskind;just gambhīrāvatā, Cv.22; :
Io ta, pp.;a +sam+pa +
aeEi Ea7 . 5 - n + ta, oy 26.
Budh + ta,pp. +pa + Vid +e+ it a thetouchof cottonor cottonwool; Khar I
la, Caus.pp seyvathapi
J nadma, indcl.
: Los
Vvadh + i, der.
Evam hi vo bhikkhave
sikkhitabbam—M. I. 126;5. II. 29, Evam hotu bhaddantava—M. II. 80 Heijavo—A. I. 49
Evariipo ?sevanto
Mi, dukkhassa—5.dukkha:eso
indeedtheendof
195;A. III. I; Vin. I. 112 I MEI his isinde ckhassa
— S.IV. 43
tit beso.
Letit my
beso, mylord Aspeed
p ofthiskind iana"nge
Bhikkhus,you should.indeed,
trainyourselvesthus;Ai, emph:p.; Evarūpam
ulāram Evaripo
padavitiharo
—A. Il. 49
sikkhitabba,desid.Sut.pp.from Sak
dhammakkhānam
—D.1.218 Astride
ofthistype;pada +vi +ati + dayoesapaccayo
Eseva hetu etam nidanam esa
A, greatdhammaexpositionof this
E ... . .
Hr+a,der, "EI
Ti
auare yadidamiāti—
ayo
D. II.
‘ a

Evam hetamāvuso hoti yā saree ar assa, RAI

kind;dhamma+@ +Khya +ana,der. aes

anicchantamicchati —Vin. IV. 212
Friend,this is theway it is for theone Esaniya
Evarūpam
pāpakam
ditthigatam 156 Sallameseyya—M. II. 216, 57 ;
Thisisthe te the
cause, asiihe
1s basis hie
this
who longsfor someonewho hasno
uppannam —D. I. 224: M. I. 130; S. I. = eMee is is theconditionof
interest;Ai +etam;Is +ya +ti, pres, 142;III. 109 (He)
Would
search
forthearrowwith is theorigin,TI a birth;eso+
3” sg. “ptobe;
es(from
Is)
E +eyya,
KĀ opt.3”. A thfeastÄ : 0;e:eso+paccayo
, RF ae ? re . .
ae Ä
A viciousviewof ) has
this kind )
arisen; Sg, E va; eso+
eva; eso samuaayo;
Sar aa
Drf't di,‘den.+Gam +ta,pp.; u(t) + yadidam,indcl.
Evam
hetam
bhikkhave
hoti Pad+ta,pp. Ētā
āatti
—Vin.I.56
yathātamaviddasuno—M. 1.310
Bhikkhus,thisis theway it is, asfor This
isthemotion
(announcement);
Evarūpā
kārākarīyanti
—M.I. 140 Jia+ape
+ti,caus.
der 88
Esovevakho fivusoseyyo—Vin. LI.

264
265
 Ehi , Okkamaniyā
Ehisvāgatavādī
Okapunnehi
Friends,this is indeedbetter;eso +(0 for theperfecteliminationof Dukkha:
E eva; āvusois usedherein the the verbehi and ethaare sometimes
plural sense usedin Pali to draw the attentionof
thelistener,cp. etha tumheKalama.
Ehi āvuso,mā bhāyi —Vin. II. 192 A. 1. 189;su +@+ Khya +ta,DD.;
Comealongmy friend;don't be Okapunnehi
civarehi—Vin. I. 253 Okāsamkārāpetvā—
Vin. I. 170;IHI.
Car 1 a, imper:2", sg.; sammā,indcl
scared;e (from1) +hi, imper.2”. Sg; With
the tobescompletelywet; oka, 166
ma,prohibitivep.; Bhi +ya+ i, pst. contracted Caer +A ta,
formof udaka;Pr Making
Aakinghim grant
grantppermission;
Kr +
Ehi Mallike ācāmehi —M. II. 112
ard og
J”. Sg.
Mallikā,makemewash(my mouth); Pp. dpe +tva,caus.absol.

acamanodakam dehi, Cy. III. 346; @+

Ehi kho maharaja,svagatam Okāanokam āgamma—A. V. 232 Okāsam kāreti —Vin. II. 6
Cam + e +hi, caus.imper.24 sg.
mahārāia—D. II. 173 Having comefrom hometo homeless Causesto
i giveway;Ar +e +ti, caus.
WelcomeO greatking, welcome:su + life;vattato
vivattamGgamma,Cy. V. pres. 3. sg.
Ehisvāgatavādī, sakhilo
dgatam, an expression of greeting 73;ep.okampahāvaaniketasart,Sn. . II d
sammodako, abbhākutiko
844 , Okasam yacanti agarasma
uttānamukhopubbabhāsī— D. I. 116
Ehi kho marisa Moggallana, anagāriyampabballāya—M. I. 177
He is theone who welcomes
sagatammarisa Moggallana, Okāsakammampi
nālattham—D.ll. Theyseekpermission
toproceedfrom
everybody,speakssoftly andmakes
cirassam kho marisa Moggallana, 283 homelife to homelesslife; Yae +a +
everybodyhappy.is not moody.(does
imam pariyayam akasi yadidam Ididnothave
eventheopportunity(to anti,
pres.3”.pl.
not frown) not heavy-faced and starts
idhagamanaya,nisida marisa
thetalk first; ehi +svdagata
+ Vad+i,
ask);
na+a+Labh+tha +am,pst. A
Moggallana, idamasanam IM.
sg Okasam
yacimsu
—Vin.IV.274
der.;sam+ Mud +aka, der: a +
pannattam—M. I. 252: 481 : Asked for anaccomodation;Yae +
bhakuti +ika, der.;pubba + Bhas +
(Moggallana is replaced by the Okāsam
akāsi—D. I. 205 imsu,pst. 3". pl.
i, der.
Buddha) Gave
permission;
a +Kr +s + i, pst.
WelcomevenerableMoggallana, ah,3g
[ ; . = : 7;
Okāse patiyādenti —Vin. II. 162
2

welcomevenerablesir,you madethis
I Prepareopenspaces;pati + Yat +e
arrangement, sir, to comehereaftera Okāsamakāsiyathātam natassa nti, caus.pres. 3”. pl.
longtime,pleasebeseated,venerable yasassino
—M. II. 142
Moggallana,thisseathasalreadybeen Gave
wayforhim,justasfortheone Okkamati niyamam kusalesu
prepared:mdrisais a wordof who
iswellknownandreputed;Jia + dhammesusammattam—A. L. 121
address,usedby beingsin the divine Ia,Dp.;yasa-- ssī, der. (He)entersintotherightwayin
abodes,it is = with madisa;
mattersof good;0 + Kram + a +ti,
cirassam,indcl.; a+ Kr +@+5 +i,
Okasam
alabhamano
—
Vin.IV.211 pres. 3. sg.; sammā,indel. + tta,
doublepst. 3”. sg.; idha + agamana; Without
getting
anopportunity;
a+ der.
ni + Sad + a, imper,2". sg.; pa +Jia
Labh
+a +mana,222
+ ape + ta, caus. pp.
Okkamanāyanibbānassa—A.IV.
Okāsam
ācikkhi—Vin. III. 66 231 : Waa ae ita
Ehi bhikkhu svākkhāto Dhammo,
cara brahmacariyamsamma
Told
about
thearea;
a +Khya+i, Toenter
intoNibbana;
0 + Kre
dukkhassaantakiriyaya—Vin. I. 12 le: pst,39.58. ana,der.
Bhikku,theDhamma hasbeenwell Okisam
karoti
paiihassa
explained,
leadthehighest
wayof life Okkamaniyā dhammā—5. II. 225
Yeyyakarandya
—§.11.19 Deteriorating
factors;0 +Kamana
+
iva,der.

267
 Odhiso
Okkassapasayha Otāram Otinnomhi

Okkassa pasayhaiīvitā voropesum- Chad +e +nti, caus.pres. 3”. pl.

A. IV. 65
(They)deprivedhimoflife by using
force;o +Krs +ya, absol.;pa +Sah
T- ya, absol.
Okkassapasayhavāsenti—D. II. 74
(They) let themlive by usingforce
Okkhittacakkhunā antaraghare
mattikayalimpetum,Cv. 1207;o t Otinnomhi
iātiyā iarāya maranena
gumpha +e 1-iwā,denom.absol.; sokehiparidevehidukkhehi
Odanena pucchanti,sūpena
u(t) +Lip t ta,pp.: ava +Lip +ta, domanassehi
upayasehi—M. I. 460
Pp. {have
beenaffectedby birth,decay, pucchanti, telena pucchanti,
death
sorrow,
lamentation,
pain,grief uttaribhamgenapucchanti—Vin. II.
Oggatesuriye —Vin. IV. 55 and
despair;
otinno+amhi: o (ava) + 77
Whenthesunhadgonedown:/oc. Tr+ta,pp.+As +mi, meta.pres. TE Someare servedwith rice, someare
absl.;0 +Gam +ta,pp. $g;upa T āyāsa with curry,someothersarewith oil
anddainties;Prch +ya +nti,pres. 3".
Ocitam puppham Otinno
viparinatenacittena —Vin. pl.

gantabbam—Vin. II. 213 paficamasagghanakam

..avahari- HI,120
Oneshouldgo insidethehousewith Vin.III. 61 Being
driven
byaperverted
mind;o 3 Odahatha bhikkhave sotam—Vin. I.
down
cast eyes;o +Ksip +ta,pp. (He) stolea pluckedflower which 9
Tr ta,pp; vi +pari +Nam +ta,pp.
wasworthfive Masakas(beans);0 + Bhikkhus,give ear(listen);0 + Dha +
Oganenabhikkhusamghena—
Vin. I. Ci +ta,pp.; pafica +masa + Ottapati
kāyaduceearitena —A. II. 2 a + tha, imper.2”. pl.
80 agghanaka;ava +Hr + a + i, Heismorallyscaredof badphysical
With a small number of bhikkhus: o + DSS So. behaviour;
0 + Tap +a +fi, pres. 3” Odahi migavopasam—M. IL. 64
gana $9. Deer-huntersetthetrap:o (ava) 7
Onnhatam avafifatam hilitam Dhā t ā 3
i, pst. 3". sg.
Ogunthitasisassadhammamdesenti paribhitam acittikatam —Vin. IV. 6 Ottharitvā
māresi—Vin. III. 79
—Vin. IV. 202 Whatis lookeddownupon,despised, Having
puthimself
on, (he) caused Odaheyyaokacaram,thapeyya
(They)explaintheDhammato a person disregarded,
scorned,
disrespected;
0 death;
o (ava)+Str +i t tvā,absol.; okacarikam —M. I. 117
whohascoveredhis head +Jna +ta,pp.; ava +Jiid + ta,pp.; Mr+e+s+ i, caus.pst.3’. sg. Keepthemaledecoyatone placeand
Hid +i + ta,pp.; pari +Bhi +ta, the femaleat another;o +Dhd +eyya,
Ogunthitāpi ārāmam pavisanti - pp.; a + citta +kata,pp. Odanakummāsam
bhuāiamāno —D. opt. 3“. sg.; Stha +ape + eyya,caus.
Vin. II. 207 HI,II opt 3 Sg.
They enterthemonasteryeven Otthanillehakambhufijanti —Vin. While eating
boiledriceandthe
covering(their)heads;0 +guntha+ IV. 198 iunket;
Bhu(ā))i+a +mana,pr. p. Odatena vatthenasasisam
i +ta,pp.+ api;pa + Vi§ +a +niti, (They)eatwhile licking thelips;ottha pārupitvā —D. I. 76
pres. 3”. pl. +ni + Lih +e +aka,caus.der. Odanam
patiganhanto
—M. II. 138 Havingcoveredthebodyincludingthe
While
accepting
boiledrice;pati + headwith a whitecloth;pa +a@+Vr+
Ogunthitenaantaragharena Otāpetvā pattam patisāmetum- Grh+nd + nta, pr.p. i +tva, meta. absol.
gantabbam—Vin. II. 213 Vin. II. 113
Coveringtheheadoneshouldnotgo To keepthebowl backat theright Odaniyagharam
pavisitvā
—Vin.IHI. Odātehi dussehi santharāpetvā—M.
insidethehouse;Gam +tabba,fut. placeaftercausingit to warmup;0 + 59 11.92
pp.
Tap +é + tva,caus.absol.;pati + Having
entered
thekitchen;odana + Havingcausedto carpetthemansion
Sam + e + fum, caus, inf.
Wd,der.+ghara;pa + Vis +i +tva, with whitecloths:sam +Str +ape +
Ogumphetva ullittavalittam katum dlsol. tva, caus. absol.
—Vin. Il. 117 Otāram alabhamāno
- S. I. 122;IV.
To plasterupanddown,aftermaking 178 Odanena
paticchādenti
—Vin.IV. Odhiso vyahiianaso—A. II. 160
it clean;chadanamodhunitvaghana Withouthavinganaccess;0 +Tr +a, 19) Specificallyandgrammatically;
dandakamkatvāantoca bahi ca der.;a + Labh +a +māna,prp.
karanaso,akkharaso,Cy. III. 149
 Odhunātha
Obhaggobhaggam Oramattakena
Obhāsahieeva
——-
Odhunātha samdhunātha
Opabhoggābhavissati—D. Il. 331 work, craft,disease,appearance,
niddhunātha- D. II. 336
Shewill beatyour service; upa, + passion,attainment
andabusive
Shakeoff this way,thatwayandboth nti,
pres.
3. pl.
bhoga + ya, fut.pp.
Ways;0 (ava) +Dhit +na +tha, language;
o +Mrs +a+ nti,p
Ar 4. ; Yes.
ia,
3M;

imper.2™.pl.; sam +dhunātha;ni Obhasaficevasanjanami,dassananca pl.; @+pa +Ap +ti, der.; @ +Krus
Oparaiiam kāresi —M. II. 76
dhunātha rūpānam—M. III. 157 +a, der.
He actedasa viceroy;upa4 rajja +
lidentify
thelightandthevision of
ya,der.; KK et s hi Caus.pst, 3°,
Odhunitvā malamsabbam—A. IV. forms Omasavādepacittiyam —Vin. IV. 6
Sg.
239 In insultingspeechthereis anoffence
Casting
off all thedirt: o +Dhii +nā Obhāsaiiceva
saāiiānāmirūpāni ca of expiation;
0 +Mrs +a, der;pa +
Opasadeviharati, uttarena
+i+ iā, absol. passami
—A. LV.302 citta + iva, der.; the other early
Opasādamdevavanesālavane—M.
identify
theauraandseethe forms; buddhistschools use the word
II. 164
Onaddhamajicamonaddhapitham- obhasam
+ ca +eva; sam +Jan + na patayantika(causingto fall down)
Abidesin Opasāda,at theSālagrove
Vin. II. 270 +mi,passa+mi, historic pres. 1”.
namedDevavana, situatedtowardsthe
Cushionedbedandchair:0 +Nah + sg. Omukkam ganamganupahanam-
northof Opasāda
ta, pp. Vin. I. 187 Ei
Obhāsametam
āassāma
—D. II. 209 Shoesof severallining, alreadyused;
Opānabhūtamkulam —
M. 1.379;A,
Onoietha āvusosamghassacīvaram Wewillunderstand
whatthis radiance ofava) + Muc + ta,pp.
IV. 185;Vin. I. 234
—Vin. III. 265 is;obhasam
+etam;Jia +ssama,
The indispensablefamily
Friends,offer (handover)a robe fut,Ppl. Omuddhakam thapetha—D. Hi 336
(like a drinkingwell); opānais a
to theSamgha;o +Nij +e+ tha: Make him standon his head;Stha +
contractedform of udapāna,
onejethe > onojetha, caus. pres. ; o 2nd
and drinking well Obhasena
phareyya
—A. I. 228 āpe T tha, caus.imper 2. pl.
29>ph:
Pervades
(theuniverse) with lustre;

Oparambho samanehibrāhmanehi Sphar

Opakkamikā ābādhā—A. V. 110
Ailmentscausedby harmfulmeans:
upakkama+ika, der.
Opapatiko opapātikam sāreti—A
II. 186
One ‘droppeddown’ causesto remind
another‘droppeddown’;Smr +e +ri,
caus.pres, 3". sg.
Opapatiko hoti tattha parinibbayi
anavattidhammotasmalokā —M. II.
146
He becomesadroppeddown, attains
completeblowingout thereandnever
comesbackfrom thatworld; upa +
Pat +ika, der; an +@+ Vrt +ti +
dhamma
+eyya,opt. 3”. sg. Orato thito puriso parato thitam
viāhūhi—M. II. 113 purisam na passati—Vin. HI. Ki a
He is to becensuredby therecluses, Obhoge kayabandhanamkatabbam The personstandingon this sidedoes
brahminsandtheintelligentpeople; -Vin.I.46 notseethepersonstanding
on e i
Mpa+a +Ra(m)bh+ya, fut.Pp. Thewaistband
shouldbekeptinside otherside;ora, para, opp.; Stha + i +
thefoldof therobe;o +bhoga; Kr + ta, pp.; passa +Ul,pres. 3”. S&
Opunāpetvāatiharāpetabbam- labba;kartabba>kattabba
Vin. II. 181 Katabba,
fut,pp. Orato maiihe—Vin.I. 197 Me
Makingit winnowedyou shouldcause From theinnerside,it is in themiddle
it to besentto thehouse;0 +Pa +na Omakacdtumasam ovattho
—Vin. (country)
+dpe + tvd,caus.absol.: ati4 Hr + IV,33
ape +tabba,caus.Sut.pp. Exposed
torainforaperiod
of less Oramattakaāea adhikarapam hoti-
than
fourmonths;
omaka+catumāsa Vin. IL. 84 ns
Obhaggobhaggamsakhabhamgam +a, der. o + Vrs + ta, pp: Legal questionbecomessimple
khādanti—A. IV. 435; Vin. I. 352
(khādati) Omasanti
iatiyāpināmenapi Oramattakena visesādhigamena
They eatbranchesbrokendown here f0ttenapi
kammenapisippenapi antarā vosānamāpaiiissanti —D. HI.
andthere;obhaggam3 obhaggam:o ābādhenapilimgenapi kilesenapi 78: Vin. I1. 203 (āpādi)
+ Bhaj +ta,Pp.; nāmetvānāmetvā āpattiyāpi
akkosenapi
—Vin. IV. 4 Thev will terminatetheircourseon
Insult
intermsof birth,name,clan, thehalf way by gaininganinsignificant
 Orambhagiyanam Ovattikam
Orimam Orena

attainment;
antarda,
indcl.; vi +o +Sa
+ana,der.@+Pad +ya + i +ssanti.
fut. 3%. pl.
Orambhagiyanamsamyojananam
parikkhaya antarāparinibbāyī hoti
—S.V. 69-70
Due to thecompleteexhaustionof
lowerfetters
heattainsParinibbana
on
thehalf way:yo ayuvemajjham
anatikkamitvaparinibbayati, Cv. MI.
143;oram -- bhāga 1 iva, der.; sam
+ Yuj +e +ana,caus.der; Pari +
Khaya:Ksi + a, der.; antara +pari +
ni + Va +ya +f, der.
Dueto theekhaustionofthe lower Havinglookedover,throwsaway;0 +
Near
shoreis uncertain and dreadful
fetters(he) attainsParinibbānaafter Lok +e + tva,absol.; chadda +e +
and
further
shoreis safeandfearless;
ti, pres. 3”. sg.
comingto theendof life; wpa +Han ora+ima,der.; para + ima, der.; sa
+ya, absol.+pari +ni +Va +ya +i, +samka;
sa +pati +bhaya
der. Olārikampi nimittam karissanti,
pathaviyāpi haritaggepi—A. ME 110
Orena
channamvassanam—Vin. III.
Oram samuddassaatittarūpo —M. They will makeovertsign in reference
228
II. 72 Before
theendofthe six year period to theearthandtheplantlife
Dissatisfiedwith thenear-shoreof
theocean;ora, indel.; a 4 Trp +ta, Orenaddhamasam
nhayeyya—Vin. Olārikam āhāram āhareyyam,
pp. + riipo
IV.117 odanakummāsam— M. I. 247
Should
takebathbeforehalf a month; May I takegrossfood like boiled rice
Oravita —A. V. 149 orena
I addha- māsa;Snā +ya + andjunket;Ghdra+ e +eyvam,
The onewho makesanugly sound:o evya,
opt.3”.sg. denom. opt .I". sg.
(ava) +rava +i + tu, der.

Orena
masosesogimhanam—Vin. Olarikam va sukhumamva —S. IL.
Orambhagiyanamsamyoianānam
Ora param gantukama—Vin. I. 230 IH.253 252
parikkhayā asamkhāraparinibbāyī
Desiringto go from this shoreto the Onemonth
beforetheendof the Gross or subtle
hoti —S. V. 69-70
other shore: Gam + tum, inf. +kama
Due to thecompleteekhaustionof summer
lower fettersone becomesa Olārike nimitte kayiramāne,
Orimafica tiram parimafica tiram olārike obhāsekayiramāne —D. II.
Parinibbāyī(theonewho hasentered Olinavilinani
titthanti—Vin. 1.209;
samuddassa—A. II. 50 Hil.250 103;Vin. II. 289
into Parinibbāna) without an eKertion;
This shoreandtheothershoreofthe
asamkhārenaappayogenapatto They remain
hungupthere;0 +Li+ Whenanobvioussignwasbeingmade
ocean
asamkhāraparinibbāvī
nāma, Cy. III. Ia,pp.;vi +Li +ta,pp. andobviousindicationwasbeing
144 given;ulara +ika, der.; Kr +ya +
Orimatīre antarahito pārimatīre
Oluggaviluggā
bhavanti —M. I. 80, mdna,meta,pass.Pr. P.
paccutthāsi—D. II. 89; Vin. I. 230
Orambhāgiyānamsamyolanānam 145
Disappeared on thisshore,appearedon
parikkhayā uddhamsotohoti They
have
become
disorderly;
o (ava) Ovato bhikkhunīnam bhikkhūsu
theothershore;antara +Dha + i +
akanitthagāmī—S. V. 69-70 * Ruj + ta,pp.; vi +Ruj + ta, pp. vacanapatho—A. IV. 277;Vin. II.
!a,pp.; pati +u(t) +Stha +s +i, pst.
Due to thecompleteekhaustionōf 255
a PE,
lower fettersonewho is bound Oluiiati
teparisā
—S.II. 218 Shunnedis theadmonition
by
upstream goestoAkanittharealm: Your followingis brokeninto pieces; bhikkhunistobhikkhus; V
Orimatīre thito pārimatīram
avihādisupi nibbatto tatthatattha ot Rui t ya + tl, pass. pres. Britsg: ovādānusāsanādhammakathā i
avheyya—D. I, 244
yavatayukamthatvā upari upari samkhātovacanapatho,
Cv.IV. 135;
Stoodon thisshore,he would appeal
nibbattitvāAkanitthampatto Olokanakena
olokenti—Vin. II. 267 o t Kr t ta,PP.
to theothershore:@+Ha +evya,
uddhamsotoakanitthagaminama, (They)
lookoutthrough
the
meta.opt..3”. sg.
Cy. Ill. 144;uddham+sota Window;vātapānam vivaritvā Ovattikam dhārenti —Vin. II. 106
Orimam tiram sasamkam Wihim
olokenti,
Cy. 1293;0 +Lok + Wearbangles;ovattikantivalayam,
mMa+ka,der;0+Lok +e +nti, Cy 1200
sappatibhayam,parimamtiram
khemamappatibhayam
—M. I. 134; pres,
3",nl.
S. IV. 174 Ovattikam vinivethetvā—M. II. 47
Oloketvā
ehaddeti
—Vin. IV. 266 Havingunwrappedthehead-dress:
 Ovattikaya Ohiyyako
Osarehi

the) instruction (he) speaks of jmmal

act,onerecital,equal
Vist +e +tva,caus.absol.
ipli eka +uddeso;sar
discipline; "so; sama
‘va, caus.absol.; Bhan +a +ti, pres. ikkha+1a,der.
Ovattikaya paramasi—Vin. III. 220
3, sg.
Touched(him)by thehead-dress:
(sirehiayyativuccamano —Vin.
para + Mrs + i, pst. 3. sg.
Ovadam ayyaganhahi —Vin, II. 264 v.53 vate
Sir, pleasetakeup theinstruction- Being
asked,
“Sir,pleaseremind”;
Ovattikāya parāmasitvā—M. II. 47
session;Grh +nd +hi, meta.imper. o+Smr
¢
+e +hi,caus.imper:2
; ; ype 2nd

Havingtouchedhimby thehead-dress 2nd

Eo
e.
ta awatiti; Vac t ya + mana,
pass.
prip.
Ovadatumam, ānusāsatumam—A.
Ovādam gahetvāna paecāharanti-
IV.42
Vin. II. 265 Osidati
cevasamsidaticeva,na
Adviseme,instructme;o + Vad+q +
Havingundertakentheinstruction- takkoti
santhātum
—A. I. 278
tu, imper.3™.sg.; anu +Sas + a +tu,
2 Oscillates,
sinksdown andis unableto
imper. 3. sg
stand
up;0 +Sad +a +ti, pres. 3”
pres. 3™.pl. §g.;
sam+Sad+a +ti,pres.3”. sg.;
Ovadanti pariyāyena—
Vin. IV. 54
Sak
+no+ti,pres.3™.sg.; sam +
Ovadam thapetum— Vin. I. 262 Sha+tum,inf.
nti,pres. 3. pl.
To suspendthe instruction-session:
Stha +ape + tum,caus. inf Ossivanepi
tinanina icchanti—M.
Ovaditva uyyojesi,gacchatha
bhaginiyo, kāloti —M. III. 276 L189
Ovādam na gacchanti—Vin. II. 263 When wateris leakingdown from the
Havinginstructed,hemadethemgo
(They) do notattendtheinstruction- toof
theydonotwish for grass:
off, saying,"Go sisters,it is time.":o
session ūātāvaneli
chadanagge,tena hi
+ Vad+i +tv, absol.;u(t) + Yuj +e
+S$+ 1,caus. pst. 3. sg,; gaccha + udakamsavati,tasmatam
Ovādāyavā Samvasayava gantum- ossdvananti
vuccati,Cy. I. 229; 0
tha,pres. 2” pl.
Vin. IV. 313 (ava)+ Sru +ana, der.; Is+ ya +nti,
To go for adviceor for living together;
Ovarakam pavisitvā— D. II. 331; pres.
3",pl.
ovddayatiatthagarudhammatthaya,
Vin. IHI. 132
samvāsāyāti uposathapavarana-
Havingenteredtheinnerchamber Ohiyyako
hotivihārapālo—Vin. HI.
pucchanatthaya,Cy. 938 108
(room);pa + Vif + i + twa,absol.
The
onewhoisleftbehindandthe
Ovāde tittheyyāma—Vin. II. 161
Ovassapethabhikkhave kayam- guardian
of theresidence;o +Ha
Wewouldabideby theinstruction:
Vin. I. 290 la +ka,pass.der.
tittha +eyyama,opt. 1".pl.
Bhikkhus,makeyourbodyekposeto
therain;o +vassa+dpe + tha,caus.
Ovado namaatthagarudhamma,
denom.imper.284.pl.
samvasonamaekam kammam
ekuddesosamasikkhātā—Vin. IV.
Ovādamaniyyādetvāafiiam
315
dhammambhanati—Vin. IV. 52
Advicemeans
eightserious
Without
giving(without
handing
over
conditions; living together meansone
 Kakkhalam
Kakkhalam patinadanti—A. IV. 171
Resoundhard;pati +Nad +a +nti,
pres. 3™.pl.
Kacavaramchaddentohattham
niddhunati —Vin. IV. 196
Shakesoff handwhilethrowingaway
therubbish;chadda +é +nta,pr.p.;
ni +Dhu +nā- ti, pres. 3. sg.
KaccayusoBhagavaarogo ca balavā
ea? —M. II. 185
Brother,how is theBlessedOne?
Is hehealthyandstrong?;kacci +
āvuso
Kacci addasa?—D. I. 106
Did you see?;a +Drs +a, pst. 374.
Sg.
Kacci ovado iddho ahosi?—Vin. IV.
50
How wastheinstruction,wasit
successful?Rdh +ta,pp.; a + Hū
(Bhi) +a+ s +i, pst. 3, sg.
Kacci te Ugga yathadhippayo?—A.
IHI. 51
adh ippay 10
Kacci te bhoto Gotamassa
vuttavādino,na ca bhavantam
Gotamamabhūtenaabbhacikkhanti,
dhammassacaanudhammam
vyākaronti, na ca koei
sahadhammikovādānuvādo
gārayhamthānam āgacchati,
anabbhakkhātukāmāhi mayam
Kancanasannibhattaco
Kacei Kaeei
—-
the Blessed One for me, does the
ahikkhus,
is it somethinghappenedto
Blessed One remember her words;
you?
abhi + Vad +e +s +i, caus.pst.
3”, sg.; Smr ta+t +i, pres.
2
Kaccipanasobhavamgotamo
bhavantamGotamam—D. I. 161;A. Shea:
tidiso
noannadiso?—D. I. 107
I. 161,vādānupāto isthat
venerableGotamasuch,not
Are theytruereportersofthe Kaccisi appadhamsita?—Vin. IV.
Ustherwise?;
Oss ta(t) +Drs;
: anna (anyat)
venerable Gotama,don't theyaccuse 227 . I
+Drs
venerable Gotamawith false How, aren’tyou ruined;kacci + asi; a
accusation,do theyekplainsomething +pa +Dhvams+ i + 1a,pp:
Kaceibhaginimaggosamsīdati? -
relevantto theDhamma,doesn'tany Vi, IHI.131
reasonable argumentcometo thepoint Kaccisi appamatto?—M. II. 186
Sister,
howis thecourse,is it sinking;
of censure?We are indeednot Are you heedful?; a +pa + Mad + ta,
thishassomehiddenmeaning
desirousof accusingthevenerable pp.
connected withsex;sam +Sad +a +
Gotama;sahadhammikotisakārano
fi,pres,3”.Sg.
sahetuko,vādānupātotivadassa Kaccetambhantetathevayatha
anupātoanupatanampavatti, Cy. I. : 42
Kaeei,bhattam iddham ahosi? - SunakkhattoLiechaviputto
avaca-
257; Vae+ ta,pp.+ Vad +i, der;
Vin.II. 212 D. IHI.2
abhi +a + Khya + nti, intens.pres. Is it iust so, venerablesir, as
Wasthemealgood?Iddhamahosīti
3”. pl.; vit G+ Kr +0 + niti,pres. Sunakkhatta, thesonof Licchavi,said;
sampannam
ahosi, Cy. 1283
3”. pl.; sahadhamma+ ika, der: kacei +elam,kacci, interr.p;tatha +
vdda +anuvadaor vada +anupata;
Kacei
bhanteBhagavāsukham eva;thata,indel.;
eva,emph.p-; 4
garaha +ya, der.; an +abhi +@+ j
Vac + a, pst. 3™.5g.
.
āsayittha?
—S. I. 212;A. I. 136;Vin.
Khya +tum,inf, +kama
II. 156,sayittha a 3 2
Venerable
sir,didtheBlessedOne Kacchehi sedā muccantl —M. I. 242
Kaccittha parisuddhā? —Vin. IHI.
sleep
well?;Si +a +i+ ttha;pst. 3”. Sweatsarereleasedfrom the
109 armpits;Muc +ya +nit,pass.
sg.
Are you pure?;kacci +attha:As +
pres. Bids
tha,pres. 2". pl. ; pari +Sudh +ta,
Kacci
mamsamma Jivaka na
PP. Vaiicesi..
napalambesi..na Kajamgalayam viharati
paceatthikanam
desi—D. I. 50 Mukheluvane —M. Il. 298
Kacci panatvam atta silato na
Dear
friend
Jivaka,
don’tyoucheat Abides at Mukhelu forestin
upavadati?—S. IV. 47
me,
don’t
youdeceive
me, don’tyou Kaiamgalā
Are you surethatyour conscience
betray
meto(my)enemies;vaficd +e
doesnot reproachyou in termsof
*St,denom.
pres.2". sg.; palamba + Kaiamgalāyam viharati Veluvane-
moralbehaviour?;the wordatta,used
&+si,denom. pres.2". sg; Da +e+ A.V. 54
here, seems to mean conscience;
Si,pres,2r4,sg, Abides at the Bamboo Grove in
fvam, acc.sg.; upa + Vad+a +ti,
Kajamgala
pres. 3". sg.
Kaeeimesa bhantebhagini
Bhagavantam
abhivadesi,sarati Kancanasannibhattaco
aM. Ho136
Kaccipanavobhikkhavebhūtam?-
Bhagava
tassavaeanam?
—D. 11.271 The onewho hasa skin of gold-like
Vin. LL. 89
Venerable
sir,didthatsisterworship colour; kaficana + sannibha +taca
 Kaāhcei Katthapadukayo
Katisuttakam

Kaāci kaāci katham saraniyam Da +dpe +s +i, caus.pst. 3 'sg. away;u(t) +Ksip +tva,absol.;pa +
Katthapadukayo
abbiruhitva—Vin.
vitisāreti —D. I. 90 :
Kram +a + nti, rä
pres. 3™. pl.
1,188
Spendstimein talkingthisor that, Katacchumva paramasati— Vin. II. Having
puton(mountedto) wooden
216 slippers;
abhi+Ruh +i t mā,absol. Kathinam ussapetvapakkamanti-
PP.; vi + ati + Sr + e +ti, caus. pres. Or touchesthespoon;para + Mré +a Vin. II. 117
See. Havingcausedto raisetheKathina,
+ i, pres. 3", sg. Kattham
va kathalamva ādāya —M.
1,128 they go away; u(t) +Sri + ape t tvā,
Kaficidevamantanammanteyya—D. caus. absol.
Katasisu khittani ca konapani —D. Having
takena pieceof wood or a
I. 104
IHI. 26 pebble;
@+Da +ya,absol.
(He) would deliberatecertainmatters; Kathinam paribhijjati— Vin. VI. 116
Deadbodiesthrowninto the
kam +ci (d) +eva;manta+e +
cemeteries;Ksip + ta, pp.; kunapa+ Kattham
va kathalamva mukhe Kathina,theframe,is broken;pari +
denom.
opt.3. sg. Bhid +ya +ti,pass.pres.3™.sg.
a, der. āhareyya
—A. III. 6
Hewould
putapieceof woodora
Kaāci dhammamattato
Katākatena attho hoti —Vin. I. 206 pebble
inthemouth; a +Hr +a + Kathinam samharitum —Vin. II. MB
upagacecheyya
—A. I, 27
Thereis a needfor softly boiled eyya,
opt.3”. sg. To fold theKathina;sam +Hr+a+i
Wouldacceptanythingasself; upa +
greengramwater; siniddho + tum,inf.
gaccha+ eyya,opt. 374Sg.
muggapacitapānivo,Cv. 1092 Katthani
phalenti—Vin. I. 239
Make
thewoodsplit;Phal +e +nti, Kathinasala nicavatthuka hoti -
Kafici samkharam niccato
Katāhe vaccamkatvā —Vin. IV. 265 caus.
pres.3°. pl. Vin. II. 117 I
upagaccheyya—A. I. 26
Havingrelieved
herself intoa pot;Kī The hall for theKathinais on a low
(He) wouldacceptanyconditioned
t ivā, absol. Katthani
samkaddhitva
citakam ground
thingaspermanent
karitva
—Vin. 1.345
Katimattesupi oghesu Havingcollectedthewood andmadea Kathinassa antoiīrati —Vin. II. He
Kaīicukam dhārenti—Vin. II. 267
pavattamānesu— Vin. I. 291 pyre;
sam+kaddha(fromKrs) +i + Innerpartof theKathinadecays;dir +
(They) weariacket:Dhr +e + niti,
Whentheflood watersup to thelevel hā,absol.; Ci t ta, pp. +ka, der. a +ti,pres.3". Sg.
caus.pres.3”,pl.
of thewaistareflowing down;pa +
Vrt + a +mana,pr.p. Katthena
vakathalaya
va—S.I. 123 Kathinassa ubbharaya —Vin. I. 255
Kania pannarasavassuddesika va
solasavassuddesikava natidigha Withapieceof wood or gravel For theremovalofthe Kathina;
Katimpi oddi, nimittampi akāsi - ubbhara = uddhara
nātirassā nātikisā nātithūlā
Vin. III. 22
nātikāiī nāccodātā—M. I. 88 Kathinam
akkamanti
—Vin.II. 116
Swayedthewaistupandmadethesign Tread
ontheKathina;
@+Kram +a +
A maiden,fifteenor sikteenyears Kathinassa palibodha —Vin. I. 265
too;u() +Di + i, pst. 3". sg. nti,pres,3”.pl.
old, neithertoo tall nor too short, Obstaclesto theKathina
neithertoo slim nor too fat, neither
Katimpicālesi,cheppampicālesi-
too blacknor too white;pannarasa Kathinam
attharitum—Vin. I. 254 Kathinuddharadivasam—Vin. IV.
Vin.IHI.21
(pafica + dasa) + vassa+ uddesika, Tospread
theKathina(hardrobe) 287 ae
Causedtoswaythewaistandwag
der.; na +ati +digha; na + ati + ortoprepare
thewoodenframefor Thedayof theremoval
ofthe Kathina
thetail; Cal +e +5 + i, caus.
pst.
odāta Sewing
theKathina;
@+Str +i +
PA ee; fum,
inf, Kanajakam bhojanamdiyyati
Kataechubhikkhamdāpesi—Vin. I. bilamgadutiyam—A. 1. 145
Kafisuttakamdhāreti—Vin. IV. 340
55 Kathinam
uiihitvāpakkamanti
- Broken-ricefood,the sour gruel asthe
Causestowearastringaroundthe Vin,II, 117
Hecaused
togivea spoonful
of food; second,is given;Dā t Ia T ti,pass.
waist;Dhr +e + ti, caus.pres, 3”. sg.
Having
abandoned
theKathina,theygo pres. 3° sg:

279
 Kanajakena Katakalyano Katamena
Katakieeo

Kanajakena bilamgadutiyakena Kannam copeti—M. III. 133 pari +o +Sd +i +ta,pp.

taiā
kalyānam,
akatam taya papam
upagacchi—Vin. II. 78; III. 161 He causesto movetheear;Cup +e + -Vin,II. 72
(She)approachedwith brokenrice, ti, caus. pres. 3™.sg, Katamam nu kho panitataram,
(You
are)onewhohasdonegood, a ase
sourgruelasthesecond;upa + īānam vā saddha va? —S. IV. 298
done
meritoriousdeeds,protected
gaccha- i, Dstis™ Sg. Kannasandhovikampikhiddam
fomfear,notdoneevil, not been Which is superior,knowledgeor
kīleyya —A. V. 202 faith?; nu, interr.p.
greedy,
notdonesomethingevil; you
Kantakavattampiārohanti, suttampi He wouldplaytheear-washingplay
hate
done good,you havenotdone
gāvim ārohanti —M. I. 448 too;Kanna +sam +Dhii +a + ika 4
evil;
Kr +ta,pp.; bhiru +tana; Lubh Katamam nu kho varam? —A. IV.
Theywalkontoa thornyhedgeanda api; Krid +eyya,opt. 3". sg.
+ta,pp.;kibbisa(= Skt. kilvisa) 128
Sleepingcow: kantaka+ vattam+
Which is better?
api; Svap + ta, pp. +gavim;@+ Ruh Kanham dhammamokkamamānāna
Katakicco hi brāhmano —5. I. 47
+a +nti,pres. 3™.pl. buiihissanti—A. IHI. 107
Brahmana isonewho hasdone, Katamassamparisāyam?—M. HI.
While enteringinto theblack(evil) 160
indeed,
hiswork;Kr +ta +Kr +icca,
Kanthapaiicamehibandhanehi thingtheywill not realise;0 + Kram +
(Skt.
krtya)der. In which assembly?;katamassam
-
bandhitvā— S. IV. 201 a t māna,pr.p.; Budh +ya +i+ katamāsam
Havingboundby fivebindings,binding >
ssanti,fut. 3". pl.
of throatasthefifth (handsfeetand Katafica
katatojanati akatanca
II Te iau
akatato
—A. TV. 266 Katamāni opāyikatarāni?— D. II.
throat);Cy. says vanasūkaramviya Kanhasukkasappatibhāgam —D.II.
(like a wild boar) III. 72;Ba(n)dh + i Knows
whatwasdone as done, what 128
215
was
notdoneas not done Which aremoreclose to?;
+ tva, absol. Counterparts:
blackandwhite,i.e.
uppannatarani,allinatarani,
goodandbad
Kanthasuttakamdhārenti—Vin. II. Kataāea
sukatam seyyo—S. I. 50 Cy.911;upa +aya (from I) +ika +
ME
106 Well-
done isbetterthanjustdone;sz fara, der.
Kanhabhijatiyo samano—A. III. 384
They weara stringof beadson the +kata
Beinga personclassifiedasblack:
throat Katamena tvam nemi?—M. II. 80
kanha+ abhijati + iya, der.;
Kataāīiuno
sappurisākatavedino- By which routedo I leadyou?;Ni +@
abhijati is a technicaltermusedby
Kanthe vilaggamhoti —Vin. III. 80 Vin,1.56 +mi, pres. 1".Sg.
Ajivikas to classifypeople; As +
Is stuckin thethroat;vi +Lag +ta, Good
people
aregrateful,theyknow
mana, pr.p.
pp. What
wasdonefor them Katamena tvam bhummi viharena
etarahi bahulam viharasi? —Vin. I.
Kanhuttara bhumi khara
Kandum samhanti—A. IV. 436 Kataiīūkatavedīpuggalo dullabho 304 =
gokantakahata—Vin. 1. 195
Allays theitch;sam +Han + ti, pres. lokasmim
—A. LL. 240 My dear,whatis themodeof abiding,
Surfaceofthe groundis dirty,rough
2;
I. SE. Thegrateful
personis \ eryrarein the you mostlyfollow atpresent?;
anddamagedby theok-hoofs;kanha+
World;
kata+Jii@+a, der.; kata + Bhummi,dearly address;etarahi,
uttara;Han + ta, pp.
Kandena patividdho —Vin. IV. 107 Vid+e+ caus.der. indel.; bahulam,adv.;vi + Hr +a
~ dul ¢
Shotat by anarrow;pati + Vyadh+ ta, si, pres. 2". Sg.
Kapho iāto pisācoiāto —D. I. 93
pp. Katattā
eaakatattāea—A. I, 56
A blackis born,a goblinis born;Jan +
Forthereasonof commissionand Katamena papateyya?—S. V. 371Ī
la, pp.
Kanpagūthakehikangā thakitā - ommission;
kata +tta,der. In what direction would it fall down";
ar a
Vin. II. 134 pa +Pat + eyya,opt. 2°. SE.
Katakalyāno katakusalo
Earsareblockedwith wax;Stak+ i 3
katabhīruttānoakatapāpo Katapariyositam
vihāram
—Vin.IV.
fa, pp. 47 Katamenavihārenabahulam
akataluddho
akatakibbisokatam
viharati?—A. IHI.284

281
 Katamenayasma Kathamgottosi
Katimi Kativassosi i
In what mode of life does he abide Havingreachedanagreement (which coversfour monthsstarting l !
Kativassosi
tvamāvuso? —Vin. 1.86
mostly? fromJuly andendingwith Kattika), I I
Friend,
howold areyou?; kati +vasso
Katikasanthanampucchitabbam- +ast
catu +masa +a, der. +int i
Katamenāyasmāaiia vihārena Vin. I. 208
vihāsi? —S. III. 235 Shouldaskabouttheagreement;
Prch Kattha āyasmantāicchanti? —Vin. Ī I
Katihipi
tyayamsamghati
In whatmodeof abidingdid the +ya +1 +tabba,fut.pp. II. 76
bhavissati
—Vin. IHI. 241
venerablelive today?katamena+ Wheredo thevenerableswish?; I
Howmuch will bethevalueof your
ayasma; vi +Hr + a +s +i: viharsi> Kati te lakkhani laddhani? —Vin.
outer
cloak;te +avam kattha,indel.,adv.;Is +ya + nti, I .I
vihassi>vihasi,pst.3™.sg. IV. 107 pres, 3”. pl. I
How manytargetsyou havegot?;Labh
Kattabbam
kusalam,caritabbam I
Katam meaiia bhattakiccam—M. II. +fa,pp brahmacariyam,natthi jatassa Katthapafihattam
? —Vin. II. 286 I
63
amaranam—D. II. 246 Where is it promulgated?;
pa +Jna + I I
I havefīnishedmy mealtoday Kati dhammābahūpakārā?—S. IV. Virtue
istobecultivated,thehighest ape +ta,caus.pp. |
295
Katassapaticayonatthi—A. IHI. 378 How manythingsareguitehelpful?;
way
oflife is to be practised,thereis I
nono-deathfora personwho is born; Kattha bahulamsamanupassasi?— I I
Thereis no moregrowthofthe thing bahu +upakara
kar(fromKr) +tabba,fut.pp.; Car M. II. 205 1 Ii
alreadydone;pati + Ci +a, der.
+abba,fut.pp:; na +As +ti, pres. Wheredoyoufindmostly?;bahulam, ; MI
Katipaham balam gahetva—Vin. HI.
Katassava paticayo—Vin. 11.74:ILL. 3”.5g.)Jan +ta,pp. adlv.; sam + anu ©passa + Sl, pres.
IHI
14 ond
ger HI
158 Havinggainedstrengthwithinseveral
Or resurgence
of whathasalready Kattaradando
pucchitabbo—Vin. II. i
days;katipaya +aham,a contracted
beendone 108 Kattha bhāsitam? —Vin. II. 287 I I )
form; Grh + e +tvā,absol. Whereis it said?;Bhās1.i ' ta,PP. |
Should
askabout
thewalkingstick
Katakatam janitum —Vin. IV. 211 Katipaham sinehetha—Vin. I.
To know what has beendone and what Kattarasuppe
pakkhipitvā
—Vin.I. Katthi hoti vikatthi adhigamesu—A.
279
has not been done: kata 4 akata; Jan 269 V. 157 I
Lubricate( thebody) for severaldays:
+ nq + i
Having
putinsidea winnower;pa + He becomes a real boaster in
+tum,inf. Snih +e +tha,caus. imper,24 pl.
Ksip+i +tva, absol. reference to attainments
or sineha+ e +tha, denom.imper.
KatāvakāsoāyasmatāNāradena—A. I
2S pl.
II. 59 Kattāhotino bhāsita—A. II. 102 Kathahicapanāyasmantam I I
I havebeengiventheopportunity Heisadoer,nota Speaker sabrahmacārīiānanti? —A. V. 198 i I
Kati phalāni kati ānisamsā
by thevenerable
Narada:kata + How do co-celibatesidentifythe I
pātikamkhā?
—D. IHI. 132
avakāsa Kattikacorakā
bhikkhū paripātenti venerable?;
katham' ca:pana 8 I i
How manyresults,how manybenefits
-Vin, IHI.262 adyasmantam;
Jan +na+ ntl, pres. E I
areto beexpected?;pati + Kamks +
Katāvakāsomhi Bhagavatā Thieves
of theKattika(Oct- Nov) 293) I I I
ya, fut.pp.
dhammadesanāya —M. I. 169 attack
thebhikkhus:Kattikamdsecord, E : I 1

Cy,730;pari +Pat +e +nti, caus. E cath

ox a i

I havebeengivena chanceby the

Katimi bhantepakkhassa?—
Vin. I.
Kathahearahi
—S. IHI.239 a II
BlessedOne for preachingthe pres,
3".pl. ?;k
How, then?;kaihamt -- cara
carahi, indci. I i I
117
dhamma;kata +avakaso +amhi: i if II
Venerablesirs,whatday is todayof
AS +mi, meta.pres. I". sg Kattikapunnamanti Kathamgottosi? —D.I. 92 I
- thehalf month?:katīnampūranī
kattikacātumāsinī
—Vin. II. 263 What is yourclan?;Katham+ A .
katimī,ko divasotiadhippayo,Cy. I
Katikam katvā—
Vin. IHI. 104 Kattika
fullmoonmeansthelast gotto,compound;
As +Si,pres. I
1060
fullmoonof therainyseason 24. sg. I

283
 Katham
Katham kattā hoti —M. IHI. 111
He becomesonewho givesa talk:
Kr +tu,der.
Katham kathamnamayambhante
Bhagavatadhammo desito
anneyyo?—A. IIT. 348
Venerablesir,( I don't understand)
how shouldthedoctrinepreachedby
theBlessedOne be understood?:
Jna + eyya,fut. pp..
Katham janato kathampassato
bhikkhuno?—S. IV. 50
Of a bhikkhuwho knowshowandsees
how?; katham,indcl.
Katham iānemu tam mayam?—D.
II. 240
How shouldwe understand that?:
janemu,archaicform, opt. 1*.pl.
Katham tumhedhāretha?—Vin. IV.
261
How do you bear?;Dhr +e +tha,
caus.pres. 2”. pl.
Katham tvam parisam vinesi? -
Vin. IIL. 230
How do you discipline(your)
followers?;vi +Ni +a +si, pres.
2 Se
Katham tvam samikassadesi? -
Vin. III. 129
Howdoyougivetothehusband":
Dā t e t si,pres. 24. sg.
Katham nammayamtena
samudācareyyāma - Vin. II. 186
How shouldwe talkto himby
that;sam +u(t) +@+Car +
Katham
Katham Katham
eyvāma,opi. I". pi. Katham hi nama nivattissati—D. I.
inipanasatisamadhi katham
118
hahulikato
—Vin. III. 70
Katham nu kho ahosim
*
How couldheturnback!;ni +Vrt +i
Which
waycultivated, whichway
atitamaddhanam?—M. I. 8 frequently
practised,concentrationof +ssati, fut. 3”. sg.
How was
I in thepast?;au, interrp.; mind,
basedonmindfulnessof
atitamaddhanam,ace. for loc. Katham hi nama madiso pubbe
breathing
in andbreathingout; dna +
{ animantito asanenisiditabbam
mana+ sati;Bhi +e+ i +ta, caus.
Katham nu kho bhavissami maīihieyya—M. II. 158
pp.;
bahula
+kata
anagatamaddhanam?—M. I. 8 Howshoulda personlikemethink,
ā3 How shall I be in thefuture?:Bha +a withoutbeinginvitedalready,thatI
Katham
mayamimassasaddhaya
+i + ssami, fut. I. sg. shouldsit on theseat.;mam +Drs
gamissāma
—D. II. 345
Howshould
wetrustthisman; +a, der; a+nit+ mantat+e+i+
Katham nu kho maya saddhiva
gacchatiis used, ta, denom.pp.; ni +Sad +i +
patipajjitabbam? —Vin. I. 83, 289 idiomatically,
toexpressaccepting tabba,fut.pp.; Man +ya + eyya,
How shouldI proceed?pati +Pad + something
onfaith or trust without opt.
3%,sg.
ya + i + tabba,fut. pp. myexperience
Katham hi nama madiso.... vijite
Katham nu mayamtena Katham
vateetthahoti? —A. I. 137 vasantamapasadetabbammanneyya
samudācareyyāma?—A. III. 124 How
doyoufeelonthismatter?; -D.LS3
How shouldwe talk with him?: ettha,
indel. How could a personlike methinkof
samudacareyyamatikatheyvama, makinga countryman unhappy;Vas+a
Cy.IHI.278 Kathamvihitakam +Rio PEPA a --pasāda + e + tabba,
wādhiceasamuppannam?
—D.IHI.33 denom.fut.pp.; Man +ya +eyya,
Katham patipajjitabbam Whai
sortofchance-origin?;
a +Dhr TE
opl. 2°. sg.
(mātugāme)?— D. II. 141 ft)+ya,absol.;sam +u(t) +Pad +
How should we treat women?: Ia,pp. Katham hi nama madiso vinnū
mātugāma,m. andsg.
subhāsitam subhāsitato
Katham
hinamaevamvakkhati!- nābbhanumodeyya— D. I. 190
Katham pana te Devadattopatipajji? Vin.1,247;111.17
How could anintelligentpersonlike
—Vin. II. 201 How
could
hesaylikethis!;kathamhi
merefusetoacceptwhatis wellsaid
How did Devadatta treatyou?pati + nama,
thisphraseis used with fut.or
aswell said!; na + abhi +anu +Mud
Pad +ya + i, pst. 3". sg. + a t eyya, Opi. 22rd SS:
.
opt.
toexpress astonishment;Vac +
Ssati
(syati),
fut. 3. sg.; taking
Katham paribhoti —A. IHI. 174 vakkhaasthebasepres. verbsare
Katham hi nama satthari
Under-estimates
thetalk:pari + Bhii alsomade
sammukhībhūtesāvakodhammam
+ Qh, pres..3™.sz.
desessatil—S. I. 156
Katham
hināmatumhe How coulda discipleteachthe
Katham byākaramāno—M. I. 149
moghapurisé
evam vakkhatha
—Vin. Dhamma
whentheteacher
is present;
Explaininghow; vi +@ +Krtat
I. 139 sam +mukha +bhiita; Drs + e
mana, pr.p.
How
could
you,foolish
men,speak ssati,fut. 3. sg.
like
this;Vac+ssatha(syatha),
fut.
Katham bhavito
™pl. Katham hi nama sisepaharam
285
 Katha Kaddamam
Kathāham Kathāham

dassati—M. I. 126 Much controversyis to be expected.: +aham;

E i
pati +Pad+ ya +mi, pres.
; Wi eyyum,opt. 3”. pl.
How could(she)givea blow on the kathā +bahula +ya, der.;pati 4 I" Ng.

head; Da +ssati, fut. 3. sg.
Katha abhisallekhika
eetovivaranasappāyā —M. III, I13;
A. IV.357
The talk whichslicesdefilementsand
supportstheexposureof mind;abhi +
+ana, der. +sappaya
Katha udapadi—D. I. 180
Therearosea conversationor
discussion;u(t) +a +Pad + i, pst. 3”.
WE.
Kathāpariyosānamāgamayamāno-
M. I. 161
Awaitingthewindingupof the
discussion:katha+pari + (y) +0 +
Sa + ana, der.
Kathapariyosanamagamayamano
atthasi—A. IV. 63
Stoodawaitingtheendofthe recital:ā
+Gam +aya +mana,pr.p.; @+ Stha
+a+s + i, double,pst. 3“. sg.
Kathāpariyosānamāgametu—A. HI.
393
Awaittheendofthe discussion;ā 3
Gam +e +tu, imper,3”. sg.
KathapabhatamBhagavantam
dassanaya—M. II. 244; S. V. 162
Thisisagoodnews(giftfortalk)to
go andseetheBlessedOne: katha +
pābhata
Kathābāhullampātikamkham—A.
IV. 87
Kamks +ya,fut. pp. Kadāci karahaci Tathagata loke
Kathāham bhantepatipaiiāmi? - uppaiianti —D. II. 139
Kathaya kacchamanaya—A. III. 181 Vin,1.224 Veryrarely,theTathāgatas
areborn in
Whentheissueis beingdiscussed: j roceed"? this world; u(t) +Pad +ya +nti,
Venerable
sir,howshould| proceed?
Kath +ya + mana,pass.prp. pres. 3™.pl.
Kathāham bhantesāmikassapiya
Kathavatthum rajantepuram pavisi Kadāci karahaci dīghassaaddhuno
assam? —Vin. HT. 134
—M. II. 107 Venerable sir.how shouldI be dearto accayena—M. III. 177
The storywentup to theharemof the One day,sincea long periodof time;
the
husband?; As +yam (Skt.yam),
king; raja + ante(Skt.antah> anto> opt.I". sg. kadaci karahaci, indcl.
ante) +pura; pa + Vis +i, pst. 3%.sg.
Kadaci karahaci samagaccheyyama
Kathāham bhantesubhagaassam?-
Kathavatthusmimyavatatiyakam —M. I. 146
Vin.111.
134
patitthāpesi—M. I. 372 Venerable
sir,howshouldI be One day we would meettogether:
(He) madehim standon thesubiect charming? sam +@+gaccha + eyyama,opt.
of discussion
uptothethirdtime; TA LDL
ydvatatiyakam, adv; pa + tittha Kathikam
paribhoti—A. III. 174
(fromStha) +dpe +s +i, caus.pst. Despises
thespeaker Kadā te adhigatam,kattha te
2rd
3. ge. adhigatam—Vin. III. 92 i
Kadalipattesuseti macchova When is itattainedby you, whereis it
Kathāsampayogenapuggalo visagilito
—A. V. 171 attainedby you; kattha,indcl.; adhi
veditabbo—A. I. 197 Sleeps
onplantainleaves,just asa Gam + ta, pp.
Individualshouldbeunderstoodby poison-
swallowed
fish;Si +a + ti,
meansof conversation;sam +pa + pres.3". se; maccho + iva; visa+ Kadi te dittham kattha te dittham?
Yuj + a, der. Gr+i +ta,pp. —Vin. I. 172 I
Whenwasit seenby you,wherewasit
Kathāsallāpam—D. II. I Kadassu
nāmāham
tadāyatanam
seenbyyou?
Friendlyconversation;sam +Lap +a,
Upasampajja
viharissāmi—M. U1.
der. 218
Kadā saāiiūlhā ime vannā? —M. I.
Atwhattimewill I attainthatstateand 386 ,
Kathaham param tena
abidetherein;sw, indcl., sometimes When thesepraisesarecomposed"
samyojeyyam?—S. V. 354 thistermoccursas kudassu;ndma +
HowshouldI makeanother
engage in sIhä imā a7.
han; tam(tad)+Gvatanam;upa + Kada samyalha ima gatha?— D. II.
it?;sam+ Yuj+e +evyam,
caus.opt,
sam+Pad +ya, absol.; vi + Hr +i + 267 Ī
I", sg. Sami,fut, 1",se.
When theseverseswerecomposed";
kadā,indcl.;samt Vah' ta,PP.
Kathāham bhanteimāsuSākiyānīsu
patipaiiāmi —Vin. II. 256-7
Kaddamam amgaiātampavesentassa
Venerablesir, how should I do in
—Vin. IHI.118
regard
totheseSākyanladies?;
katham
When(he)wasmakinghis malesign
 Kaddamodakena Kabalikaya
Kappati Kappati

pushintothemud:pa +Vis +e +nta, Kapallani avasiseyyum—

S. IL. 83 tum,inf.
ceremony;
Kip +ya +ti,pass.pres
Caus. PF.p. Earthen
potswouldremain;
ava+Sis 3,sg.;nu,interr.D.
+eyyum,opt. 3™.pl. Kappiyakarakanam hatthe
Kaddamodakenaosificanti—Vin. I. Kappati
nukhoyavakalikena hirafiiiiamupanikkhipanti—Vin. I.
262 Kapalam anatimanihamano —A, II. yimakalikam —Vin. I. 251 245
Sprinklewith muddywater:kKaddama 225 i itpermissible
to usefor one watch Put gold in thehandof theonewho
+udaka;o +Si(fijc + a +nti,pres. Not despisingthebeggingbowl; an + ofthenightwhatis givenjust for the makesthingsacceptable by a bhikkhu;
Spe ati + Man +ya +mana,pass.prip. timebeing upa +ni + Ksip +a +nti, pres. 3”.
pl.
Kantaraddhanamaggampatipajjeyya Kapisīsam ālambitvā rodamāno Kappati
nukho yavakalikena
—D. I. 73; M. I. 276 atthāsi—D. II. 143 yavajivikam
—Vin. 1.251 Kappiyabhūmim sammannitvā-
Wouldenterintoa longroadrunning Hangingon the lintel of thedoor Vin. I. 239
lsitpermissible
touseforthewhole
througha desert;pati +Pad +evya, (he)stoodcrying;a +Lamb +i + Havingagreedupontheplacewhere
fe whatis given just for the time
opt.3. sg. tvd,absol.; Rud +a +mana,pr. p.; provisions
arestored;sam+Man+
being
a+ Stha+4 +s-+i, doublepst. ya +i +tva,absol.
Kantāram nitthareyya—D. I. 73 IP dey
ard
SE: Kappati
nukho yāvakālikena
Wouldcrossthedesert;ni(s) + Tr +
sattahakalikam
—Vin. I. 251 Kappiyam anulometi,akappiyam
eyya,opt. 3. sg. Kappakatenaakappakatam lsitpermissible
touseforsevendays patibahati —Vin. I. 251
samsibbitam—Vin. IV. 121 What
isgivenjust for thetimebeing: Agreeswith theacceptable andrejects
Kantārā appodakāappabhakkhā- That,which is notgiventhespecial Satta
+ aha + kala +ika, der. the unacceptable;anuloma +e + fi,
Vin. I. 244 mark,is sewntogetherwith that,which denom,pres. 3™.sg.; pati + Bah +a
The desertswith no water,no food; is giventhespecialmark;sam +Siv + Kappatīti
anuūīātam—Vin. I. 251 +ti,pres.3, SE.
appa + udaka;appa +Bhaks+ya, ya t i t ta,pp.
Approved
aspermissible;
kappati+
fut. pp.
iti;anu+Jia + ta, pp Kappiyamkarohi—Vin. IV. 33;320,
Kappakam āmantesi—M. II. 75 karotha i
Kandamūlaphalabhoiano—D. I. 102 Addressedthebarber,a +mant+ e +
Make it acceptable;
Kr +0 +hi,
The onewho eatsbulbs.rootsand Ss+i, denom.
pst.3". sg. 198 imper. 2™. Sg.
fruits
(He)
isboiled
inpurgatory
foran
Kappatthitikam kibbisam pasavati- aon;Pac+ya +ti, pass, pres. 3"
Kappiyam deti —A. IV. 244
Kandu va pilaka va assavova Vin. If. 198
Gives whatis acceptable;
kappa +iya,
thullakacchuva abadho— Vin. IV. Producesdemeritwhich stays
172 Kappam
vati{theyya
kappavasesamder.
effectiveforanaeon;kappa+thitika; Vā—D.
II, 103
Itch,boil, runningsoreor thick scab pa +Su +a +ti, pres. 3. sg.
disease Would
stay
afull
span
oflife
orabit Kappo nattho hoti— Vin. IV. 121
More;
tittha(fromStha) +evya,opt. Specialmarkis lost;nas+fa,pp.
Kappatthiyam kibbisam pasavati- J”.sg.
Kapanammānusakamraiiam A. V. 75
dibbamsukhamupanidhāya—A. I. Kabalāvaechedakambhuāiati —Vin.
He producesdemeritlastingfor an
213;A. IV. 252 Kappam
saggamhi
modati
—Vin.I. IV. 196 Fr
aeon 198
Pooris humansovereigntyas Eats,breakingthemorselof food;
comparedwithdivinehappiness: (He)reloicesin heaven for an acon: kabala + ava + Chid +a +ka, der.
Kappati nu kho uposathokatum - Mud ta- ti, pres. 34. se,
manu(s)+ aka, der.; upanidhāya,
Vin. II. 263
indel.,
Is it permissibleto hold theUposatha
Kabalikayaatthohoti—Vin. 1.205
Kappāsam
kantitum—A.
HI.295 There is a needofa bandage
Kamandalum Kammam
Kammam Kammam

Kamandalumgahetvā— S. I. 167 Kammantanappavatteyyum—A, III. Kammam oloketvānavakammam Kammam paccetino mamgalam—A.

Havingtakenthewater-vessel;
Grh + 54 dätum—Vin. II. 172 Ill. 206
e t Ivā, absol. Therewould be no work in progress; Toassigna repairwork afterlooking He believesin action,not in luck;
na +pa+ Vrt +eyyum,opt..3". pl. into
thework;o +Lok +e +tvd. pati +e (fromI) +ti, pres. 3”. sg.; no,
Kammakarapākarīyanti —A. I. 142 absol.;
Da +tum,inf. neg. p.
Punishmentsareinflicted;Kr +iva + Kammanteanusannayamano —M.
nti, pass.pres. 3™.pl. III 8; Vin. III. 43 Kammam karissamati ottharitva Kammam patippassambheyya
—Vin.
While supervisingthework: anu + märesum—Vin. III. 84 1.49
Kammakāram upatthāpenti—Vin. sam +naya (fromNi) +mana,pr:p. Thinking,
"Wewill teachhima Wouldrevokethepunishment;
pati +
II. 267 lesson”,
theyjumpedover andkilled pa +Sra(m)bh +eyya,opt. 3”. sg.
Causeto keepa servant;wpa+Stha + Kammantenaiīvikam kappeti—A. him;
o +Str +i +tva,absol.; Mr +e
ape + nti, caus.pres. 3™.pl. IV. 281 +3+
um,caus.pst.3”.pl. Kammam paripakkavedaniyam—A.
Earns(his ) living by a profession; IV. 382
kappa+e + ti, denom.pres. 3™.sg. Kammam katabbamhot —A. IV. 332 The action,to beekperiencedat its
140 There
isaworkto bedone;Kr + maturity;paripakkavedaniyanti
She is the worker and the wife Kammantepayoiesum— D. II. 175 fabba
>kar +tabba >kattabba + laddhavipakavaram,Cy1V. 175;
(They) investedin business;pa + Yuj katabba;
fut.pp pari +Pac +ta;pp;. Vid+e +ana
Kammakkhayādukkhakkhayo—M. +e+s+ um,caus.pst. 3. pl. tiya, caus.der.
193 Kammam kopeyyama—Vin. IV. 231
Sufferingendsdueto theelimination Kammamaparipakkavedaniyam—A. Wewouldcauseto dismissthe Kammam ropetvabhikkhuninam
of Kamma:kamma+khaya: Ksi +a, IV. 382 formal
act;Kup +te t eyvāma, caus. niyyadetum—Vin. II. 261
der.; dukkha +khaya The action,to be experienced opt,1*.pl. To handover(the formalact)to the
beforebeingmatured;a +pari + bhikkhunis after showing (them) the
Kammantanicevaadhitthahissami- Pac +ta,pp.; Vid +e +ana +iya, Kammam khettamviiiianam bijam way to do it (by bhikkhus);Ruh +e+
A. V. 335 caus. der. tanha
sineho
—A. 1.223 tva,caus.absol.;ni +Yat+e +tun,=
I shallundertakebusiness:ca 3
Action
is thefield, consciousnessis nivvādetum, caus. ini.
eva; adhi + Stha + i + ssāmi, fut. Kammam abhisamkhatam the
seed
andcravingisthesap
IR ge
5 abhisaficetayitamvedayitam Kammam va nikkhipati— Vin. H.
datthabbam— S. II. 65 Kammam
garahatikammike 216
Kammantamadhitthāti —A, I, II5 The kammais to be understoodas tarahati
—Vin. II. 5 Or stopswork; ni +Ksip +a +Gi,
Supervisesthework; adhi +Stha +ti, somethingaccrued,willed and
Reproaches
theactandthosewho pres. 3™.sg.
pres. 3. sg. experienced,abhi + Sam(s) +Kr +ta, perform
theact;Garh +a +ti,pres.
pp.; abhi +sam +Cit +e +i +ta,
35,se; kamma
3 ika, der. Kammam vipaccati—A. I. 134
Kammantamkāreti —A. III. 236 caus,pp.; Vid +aya + i +ta,caus.
Action comesinto fruition;vi + Pac +
He causesto constructa building;Kr pp.; Dr§ +tabba,fut.pp. Kammam ditthadhammavedaniyam ;
ya +ti, ~ 2rd
pass.pres, 3”. Sg.
t e+ fi, caus.pres.3”. sg.
-Ā. IV.382
Kammamavedaniyam—A. IV. 383 The
actiontobeexperienced
in this Kammam samparayavedaniyam
—A.
Theaction,nottobeekperienced Very
life
III, 16 IV. 382
He saw while (he was) coming from The actionresultingin thenextlife
Kammam upaeitam - D. II. 136
the work-place; @ +gaccha +nta, pr. ao dukkhavedaniyam
—A. IV.
Energyis accumulated;
upa +Ci +ta, 2
p.; a +Dr§ +a, pst. 3%.sg. Kammam sukhavedaniyam—A. IV.
DP.
The
action
withpainfulexperience 382

220 291
 Kammavācāpariyosāne
The actionresultingin happiness
Kammavācāpariyosāne— Vin. IHI.
174
At theend
of the legal
der.
Kammavādī kiriyavādī —D. I. 115
Theonewho speaksof Kammaandits
results
Kammavipākaiamdibbacakkhum
pāturahosi—D. II. 20, 176
Therearosedivineeye,bornofthe
retributionof Kamma;kamma+
vipaka+ja; patu+ ®+a+ Hi
(Bhii)+a +s + i, pst. 3%.sg.
Kammavipakajaabadha—A. V. 110
The ailments born of the fuition of
Kamma; vi + Pac + a, der. + ja
Kammasaccayamloko
kammasamarambhatthayi
—A. II.
232
This world (people) believes in the
truthof Kammaand persistson the
performanceof Kamma:kamma+
sacco +ayam
Kammasamaye—Vin. IV. 118
During thetimeofconstructionor
repairworks
Kammassakatatta upacitatta
ussannattāvipulattā —D. III. 146
On accountof thekammaperformed,
accumulated,
amassed andmade
abundant;
Kr +ta,pp. +tta,der.;upa
+Ci +ta +ta, der.; u(t) +Sya(n)d
+ta,pp.+ tta,der.
Kammārāmatam Kamsapātim
Kammikā
Kammassakatātasmim puggale Kamkhādhammampahāsi—M. HI.
Kammikā
tamsatthamgahetvā-
adhitthātabbā —A. III. 186 Vin,
IHI,131 152
In thatpersonis tobefikedtheidea Removedthematterof doubt;pa +
Officers,
havingtakenthatcaravan
thatKammais his own; kKamma +saka into
custody;Kammikati sumkatthane Ha +s +i, pst. 3". sg.
+ta, der; adhi +Stha + tabba,fut. kanmika,Cy.868; kamma+ ika, der.
pp. Kamkhā vapayantisabbā— Vin. I. 2
Kamme kayiramānepatikkosanti - All doubtsgo away;vi +apa+ Ya +
Kammassakāmānavasattā, Vin.IV,240;Vin. IV. 309, nti, pres. 3. pl.
kammadāyādākammayonī patikkosati
kammabandhūkammapatisaranā, Kamkha va vimati va Buddhe va
When
theformalactis beingcarried
kammamsattevibhaiati yadidam Dhammeva Samgheva maggeva
out,
theyprotest;Kr +iva + mdna,
hīnappanītatāya—M. IHI. 203 meta.
pass.pr.p.;pati +Krug +a+ patipadāyavā — D. II. 154
Youngman,beingsaretheownersof nti,
pres.
3. pl. Doubtor perplexityof mind in
theiraction,inheritorsoftheir action, referenceto the Buddha,the
sourcesof their action,relationsof Kamkalamdhammona caritabbo? Dhamma,theSamgha,thepathand
theiraction,supportsof theiraction. =Vin.1.153 thepractice
lt is actionthatdistinguishesbeings AtwhattimetheDhammashouldnot
into thecategoryof superiorsand Kamkhāvitaranavisuddhi yāvadeva
inferiors;kamma+saka; vi +Bhaj + maggāmaggahāna-
a + ti, pres. 3”. sg.; hina +panita + Kamkhati
vicikicchati dassanavisuddhatthā—M. I. 150
tā, der. nidhimuceati
na sampasīdati—M. Cleansing(themindby dispelling)
IL.135 doubtsis iust for thesakeof
Kammassavipākāvasesena — Vin. IHI.
Doubts,
hesitates,
is notsureand purificationof knowledgeandvision
105 isnot
pleased;
Kamks+a +ti.pres. asto thecorrectandwrongpaths;
With theremainsof the fruitionof
3”8g.;vi +Cit (cikit) +sa+ ti, kamkha + vitarana + visuddhi;
Kamma;vi + Pac + a, der. +ava+Sis desid.
pres.3",sg.;na +adhi+ magea + amagga + nana + dassana
+ a, der. Mue+ya +ti,pres. 3™.sg.; na + + yisuddhi
Sain+pa +Sad +a + ti, pres.
Kammāni kattā hoti —A. II. 67 TA
Kamkhi vecikicchi — M. I. 18
He becomesa doerofactions; the
The one who is in doubt and hesitation;
objectofthe verbalform ending with
Kamkhanīye
eapanathāne kamkha + 1,der.; vicikiccha + 7, der.
thesuffixtu (Skt.trn)is normally Vicikicehā
uppannā—S. IV. 350;A.
usedin gen. 1.189 Kam nu kho puggalamsandhaya?-
āva?
Onthepointofdoubt, hesitationhas Vin. If. 236
Kammaragaggariyadhamamanaya
arisen;
Kamks+aniya,fut. pp.;u (0 Concerningwhom?;sandhaya,indel.
—M. I. 243; S. 1. 106
+Pad+ta,pp.
Whenthesmith’sbellow is being
Kam panaatthavasam
blown;loc. absl.; Dhma + mana,prp.
sampassamāno?
—M. I. 175
Seeingwhatbenefit?;sam +passa +
Kammārāmatam
anuyuttā—D. II.
78 mana, pr.p.
Engagedin thepleasureof work
Kamsapātim udakena pūretvā —Vin.
 Kamsi Kalyānādhimuttikā
Karoti Karotu

Il. 294 Karanīyam tīretvā —A. V. 342 Bhaj +a +mana,pr.p

The
Buddha
givesway;Kr To ' ti,
Havingcausedto fill a bronzevessel Havingdecidedthemattersto be pres.
3, sg.
attended;Tr +e + tvd,caus.absol. Kalyanamitte sevamano—Vin. II. 8
with theroot Pr gen. caseis Associatingwith goodfriends;
Karotuayasmaokasam,aham tam
commonly used, e.g. udakassa Karanīyam na viiiati —A. IHI. 378 Sev +a +mana, pr.p.
vattikāmo
— Vin. I. 114
puretva Thereseemsnothingto bedone: Venerable,
pleasegiveway to me,I
Vid + Īya +ti, pass. pres. 3". sg.
2 would
liketosaysomething
toyou: Kalyanamitto kalyanasahayo
Kamsi tvam āvusouddissa kalyānasampavamko— 5. I. 83
Kr+o+tu,imper.3. sg.; Vac +tum,
pabbaiito,ko vā te satthā,kassavā Karale karale āpatti —Vin. IV. 48 Theonewhohasgoodfriends,good
inf.+kama
tvam dhammamrocesi— Vin. I. 40 For eachandeverywisp, thereis colleaguesandintimatefriends
For whomsake,friend,haveyou anoffence;karale karaketi Karoto cīyatipāpam—M. I. 338
renouncedthefamilylife, who is your tinamutthiyam,Cy. 785 Kalyānam vuccati gahapati—5. IV.
Evilisaccumulatedfor theone who
teacher,whoseteachingyou prefer?; 291
does
evil:Ci +iva + ti, pass.pres.
kam +asi: As +si, pres, 2", sg.; Karavīkabhānī —M. II. 137 Householder,a kind word is said; Vac
3”.sg.
u(t) + Drs +ya, absol.;pa + Vraj + The onewho speaks(sweetly)likea + ya +ti, pass.pres.3”. Sg.
i +ta,pp.;Ruc+e +si,caus.pres. karavīkabird Karoto
nakariyati papam —D. I. 52;
2", sg.
M.1.516 Kalyanavattam nihitam
Karissati na karissatīti abbhutam Evilis
notdonebythedoer;Kr +tya anuppavatteyyāsi—M. II. 75
Kamham dhammamabhiiayati—A. akamsu—Vin. III. 138 +
ti, pass.pres,3”. pl. Continuethegoodpraeticeinstituted
III. 384 They madea beton ‘hewill do andhe (by me);ni +Dha +i +ta,pp.) anu+
Is bornintotheblackclass:abhi +Jan will notdo’.; a + Kr +ā + imsu; Kalam nagghantisolasim —S. V. 44; pa + Vrt t eyvāsi,opt. 2". Sg.
+ya +ti, pres.3". sg. doublepst. 3”. pl. Vin,IT.156
They
arenotworththesixteenth
part
; Kalyanavaca kalyanavakkarana -
Kayavikkayamsamapajjeyya—Vin. Karuna tasmim puggalebhavetabba na+
Argh+a +nti,pres.3. pl. Vin. IL. 139 E
IHI. 241 —A. IHI. 185 Thosewho areof goodwordsandfine
Wouldengagein buyingandselling; Compassionshouldbecultivated Kalahappavaddhanī—
D. I. 168,III. waysofspeaking; vak(fromVac)+
Kri + a, der. ; vi -- Kīī -- a, der, ;
towardsthatperson 182 karana
sam +a +Pad +ya +eyya,opt.
Increasing
quarrels;
kalaha+
SDSS,
Karupādhimutto —D. II. 241 bavaddhanī Kalyanavaco kalyanavakkarano
Inclinedtowardscompassion;karunā
Kayavikkayā pativirato —D. I, 5 poriyā vācāya samannāgato
+adhi +Muc -Fta,pp.
Refrainedfrombuyingandselling; Kalyinakamyatam
upadaya—Vin. vissatthāyaanelagalāyaatthassa
II.216 viāiāpaniyā—D.I. 114;A. TV.279
pati + vi +Ram +ta,pp. Karerimandalamāle sannisinnānam Desiring
forsomething
fine The onewho hasa goodlanguage,
sannipatitānam—D. II. I
Karaniyam attanam a goodcommandofthe language,
Amongthosewhohavegathered
asamanupassanto, katassava together
andbeensittingtogether
in
Kalyānamittatā
sīlānam
āhāro
—A. a decentlanguage,which is clear,
paticayam—Vin. I. 183 V.136 faultlessandenlightening;pura +
thesittinghall of Kareri; mandalamāle
Withoutseeinganything(more)to be Foodformoralvirtuesis good i, der; vi +Srj + ta,pp.; an *
=nisidanasalaya, Cy.407;sam +ni +
donebyhimselfor theregrowthof (spiritual)
frienship;
kalyāna+mitta elagala; vi +Jia + ape + aniya,
Sad +ta,pp.; sam +ni + Pat +i +
whatis alreadydone:Kr +aniya,fut. *fd,der, caus.fut. pp.
ta, pp.
Pp.; a +sam +anu +passa + nta, pr
p.; pati + Ci +a, der. Kalyanadhimuttika
Karoti Bhagavāokāsam—D. II. 150
kalyānādhimuttikehi saddhim
 Kalyaniyapisi
sansandantisamenti— S. II. 154
Thosewho havegoodinclinations
gettogetherandtally together;
Kalyana+adhi +Muc + ti +ka,
der.
Kalyaniyapisi vacayasamannāgato
vissatthayaanelagalayaatthassa
vinnhapaniya—Vin. I, 197
You areequippedwitha niceway
of speakingwhich is clear,faultless
andenlightening;kalya@niya + api
+ asi
Kalyani paripucchā—A. II. 177
Good questioning
Kalyani bhanteavattanimaya—M.
I. 383
Sir, magicofconversion is verygood:
a + Vrt +ana + ī, der.
Kalyanenamanasaanukampanti—A.
II. 77
They becomecompassionate
with a
goodheart;anu +Kamp +a+ nii,
pres. 3. pl.
Kalyano kittisaddo abbhuggacchati
—D. II. 86; S. IV. 323,gacchissati
A high-reputationspreadsall over;
abhi +u(t) +gaccha+ ti. pres.
3”. se.
Kalyano kittisaddo abbhuggato-
M. II. 135
Good reputationhasrisenup;abhi +u
() +Gam +ta,pp.
Kalyanamva papakamva —Vin. HI.
178
Good or bad
Kassa
Kavatam Kavatam
Kallakaya civarani gahetva igametva
—Vin. II. 208 i There is a needof medicineprepared
yathaviharam pavisimsu —Vin. I, Having
knocked
atthedoorandwaited as decoctions
291 foramoment;a t Kui ' e T tvā,
Takingtherobestheywentto their caus.
absol.;muhuttam,adv.; ā 3 Kasahatokatadandakammo—
Vin. I.
respectiveabodeswith refreshed Gam+e +tva, absol. 75
bodies;Grh +e +tva,absol.;pa4 The onewhohasbeenwhippedand
Vis +imsu,pst. 3”. pl. Kavatam
panamentoaddasa—Vin. I. punished;kasā +Han + ta,pp.; Kr +
87 ta,pp.+ danda + kamma
Kallacittam muducittam (He)
sawwhileopening
thedoor;pa +
vinīvaranacittam udaggacittam Nan+e +nta,caus.pr.p.; a +Drs + Kasāhipi tālenti, vettehipi
pasannacittam— Vin. I. 15 a,pst.3”.sg. tālenti, addhadandakehipi tālenti -
The mindwhich is ready,soft, free M. 1.87
fromhindrances,ioyful andpleasant; (The kings)causeto flog themwith
Kavatampanametva—Vin. II. 207
pa +Sad + ta,pp. Having
openedthedoor whips,canes
andclubs;Tad+e +nti,
caus.pres. 3™.pl.
Kallam nu kho tassetamvacanaya? Kavato
avattitvapatto bhijjati -
—D:1. 157 Vin.II. 114 Kasigorakkham vessassasandhanam
Is it properfor him to saythis?;au, Thedoorturnedbackandthebowl is —M. II. 180
interr.p.; tassa + etam broken;
2+ Vrt +a +i + twā,absol.; The heritageof vessais agricultureand
Bhid+ya 3 ti,pass.pres.3™.sg.; cattle breeding
Kallam nu tam samanupassitum?- twosubjects!,
one verb
M. III. 19;S. II. 245; IV. 55; Vin. I. Kasirena ghasacchadolabbhati -
14 Kasāpetvā
vapāpetabbam
—Vin.II. M. III. 169;S. I. 94;A. I. 107
Is it properto seethat?:sam +anu + 180 With muchdifficulty, foodand
Passa +i +tum , inf. Havingcausedtoploughit,(seeds) clothing is obtained;kasirena,adv;
should
causetobesown;Krs +dpe + ghdsa + acchada;Labh +ya +ti,
Kallam vacanaya—Vin. I. 174 hā,caus.absol.;Vap+Gpe+tabba, pass.pres.3”.sg.
P
roperto say caus.
fut.pp.
Kasirena samudāgacchanti—M. I.
Kallam veyyākaranam—S. II. 13 Kasāvato
malamaiiano
nihīnaiaceo
- 104;A. IV. 366
Expositionis proper Vin.IV.308 Obtainwith muchdifficulty;sam +
Theonewhois coveredwith ; ; "oe
u(t) +@+gaccha+nti,pres.3”.pl.
34
Kalopihattho nantakavāsī—A. IV. brown-red
robe,mergingin thedirty
376 (linen)
andbelongs
toa lowbirth
Kasmā tumhāka no siyā? —M. IHI.
The onewho holdsa pot in thehand (abusive
languageused in reference
154
andwearsrags;kalopi =khalopi; tohe venerableUpāli); kasāva --
Why shouldn’tit betherefor you?;
nantaka+ Vas +i, der. ātata:
ā 3:Vr -:ta,pp.; mala +
tumhāka= tumhakam;no, neg.p.; AS
majjanta;
ni +Ha +ta.pp. +jati + +ya (Skt.yat),opt.3”.sg.
Kavatabaddho—Vin. IV, 292 ya,der,
Fixedby a door;Badh +ta,pp.
Kassa kim āhariyyatu? —Vin. I.
216
Kavātam ākotetvāmuhuttam
Forwhom,whatis tobebrought?
 Kassako
Kaham Kaham

(Is thereanybodywho needsanything Kassasampannamna manapam?- for the Kahāpana?;Kahāpanais

to be brought?);a +Hr +iva +tu,
pass. imper.3™.sg.
Kassako gahapatikokarakarako
rāsivaddhako— D. I. 61
The onewho is a farmer,a
householder andwho paystakesand
makesthe incomeincrease;Bali
samkhātamkāram karotīti
kārakārako,dhaāhiarāsimca
dhanarāsimca vaddhetiti
rasivaddhako,Cy,170; karakarako
mayhaveanothermeaing:one who
dischargesdutiesby the king, kara
in this sensemeansduties,Kr +ya >
kar +ya >karra > kara, fut:pp.: ep.
sūrya > siira
Kassa nu kho aiia pariyāyo? —M.
III. 270
Whoseturnis it today?;aiia, indcl.;
pari + aya (from1) + a, der.
Kassa nu kho ayam mānavako?-
Vin. I. 38
Whose(son) is thisyoungman?:manu
+a+ ka, der.
Kassa nu bhantesubhasitam?—M. I.
219;A. II. 401
Venerablesir, whosespeechis the
best?;nu, interr.p.; su +Bhas +i +
ta,PP.
Kassapassasammāsambuddhassa
pavacane—Vin. III. 107
Intheteaching
of Kassapa,
theFully
Wheredidyouhear?;a +Sru +ttha,
Vin. IV. 71 the basic unit of value, egual to 20
pst,
2. pl.
(Is thereanybody)who doesnot like māsakas(beans),vīsatimāsako
nice food? kahapanoCy. 297; 4 +Hr +a +
Kaham
nu kho kumara sammanti?-
D.1.
92 iva +tu, imper.3”. sg.
Kassa sādum na ruccati —Vin. IV.
Where
dotheboyssettledown?; Sam
71
+ya+nti,pres.3”. pl. Kā upanisābhāvanāya?—A. IV. 351
To whomtastyfood is disagreeable; Whai supportis therefor the
Ruc +ya +ti, pass.pres. 3'd.sg.
2
Kaham
nu khodanigacchami—A. cultivationof mind?;upa +ni +Sri
II, 368
Kassa hi nama na rucceyya—S. I. Kakavassamvassitukamo—Vin. II.
doI go,now; kho +idāni,
Where
63
indcl. 17
To whom(venerableSāriputta)would Being desirousof makinga crowing;
notbeagreeable:ndma,indcl.; Ruc +
Kaham
nukho Bhagavāetarahi vassitum(inf.from Vas) +kamo
ya +eyya,opt. 3”. sg.
viharati?
—D. II. 263
Currently,
wheredoesthe Blessed Kaka cassaamanapa—Vin. IV. 124
Kassāhamkena hāyāmi—Vin. III.
Oneabide?:
nu,interr.p.;etarahi, Crows
are unpleasant
to him;ca +assa
132
indel.;
vi+Hr +a +ti,pres.3". sg.
To whom I aminferior,in what
Kakehi va khajjamanam kulalehi va
respect;kassa +aham;Ha +ya + mi,
Kahāpanakampi karonti—M. I. 87 khajjamanam gijjhehi va
pres. 1". sg,
They
alsoinflictthepunishmentof khajjamanam supanehiva
kahapanaka
in whichthebodyof the khaiiamānam sigālehi vā
Kahannu kho etarahi pahcavaggiyā
convictis cut into pieces like copper khajjamanam—M. I. 88
bhikkhā viharanti? —Vin. 1.8
coins;
Cy.Il. 59 Beinggnawedby crows,hawks,
Wheredoesthegroupof five
Vultures,dogsandjackals;Skt.svan
bhikkhusabideat present?;
Kahāpanampiaddhampipadampi (dog) > suvana, supana, sapana;
kaham + AU; pafica + vagga +
Iāsakarūpampi
—Vin. II. 294 Khad + ya + māna,pass.pr-p.
iya, der,
Acoin,
half'
acoin,quarter of a coin
MA i a;
andevena tokenof a coin (something Kākehi samparikinnam -Vin. I. 269
Kaham ayyeayyāSundarīnandā?-
likeabean) Surrounded
bycrows;sam+pari +
Vin. IV. 212
Venerable,
whereis thevenerable Kir +ta, pp.
Kahāpanam
datvā—Vin.IHI.237
Sundarinanda?;
kaham,indel.
Havinggivena coin(copper);Dā3 Kā gati ko abhisamparāyo—
S. IV.
Kaham gamissatha,kena saddhim
Wa,absol. 59;V. 346;Vin. I. 293
gamissatha?—Vin. I. 119 What is thecourse,whatis thenext
Kahāpanassa
sappimāharitvā —Vin. move
of life; abhi +sam +para +
Wherewill you go, with whomwill
yougo?;saddhim
, indcl.usedwith
IV,248 aya (from 1)

EnlightenedOne;pa + vacana Having

brought
gheeforoneKahapana
instr.
Kā ca panavo antarā kathā
Kassapogottena—D. II. 3 vippakatā?
—M. III. 8
Kaham tumheassuttha?—Vin. IV.
Kassapabyclan Whatdiscussionof you was
150
interrupted?;
vi +pa +Kr +ta,pp.
 Ka Kāmarāgassa
Kāmaparilāhānam Kāmapipāsānam

Kā easikkhā?—D. I. 181
Whatis thetraining?
V. 153
Just a relief; Ka +ci (d) + eva; ā 3
Svas + a, der.+ matta
Kāiehi
gāhāpetvā
—Vin.I.245
Grh +dpe +tva,caus.absol.
7 Kāmamaiihe
Insultby referringto maleor female
sign; kātantipurisanimittam,
kotacikātiitthinimittam,Cy. 739
Ka tassaaia gati bhavissati,
idheva paccāgamissati—M. II. 60;
ika, der; pati +Yat +e +tva, absol arousedby sense-desires;
pari +u(t)
Allaying
thefeversof sense-desire;
pari+Dah(Dah) +a, der.; vi +upa +Stha +i +ta,pp.;adhi +a +Vas
Kamagunehi gathito mucchito +Sam+a, der. a+ ti, pres. 3”. sg.
ajjhopannoanadinavadassavi
anisSaranapannoparibhunjati —M. Kimapipasanam pativinayo —Vin. Kāmarāgapariyutthitena cetasa
1.203 viharati kāmarāgaparetena—5. V.
Il. 20
Beingentangled,infatuated,andstuck 121;A.III. 230
Drivingoutthethirstfor sense-
with senseobjects,(he) enjoyssense- desires:
pati +vi +Ni +a, der. He abideswitha mindarousedby and
desires,withoutseeingtheharmand going aftersense-desires;
pari + e
withoutknowinghow to getoutof (from I) +ta
Kāmabhavo
—A. III. 444
them;Grath +i + ta,pp.; Mirch +i Therealmof sense-desire
* ta,pp.; adhi + 0 +Pad +ta,pp.; Kamaragam yevaantaram karitva
Dr§ +@vi,pp.; a +ni(s) +Sr +ana, ihāyati —A. V. 323
vasanto—M. IHI. 130
der.;pari +Bhu(fi)j +a +ti, pres. Livingin the midst of sense desires; Hiding thesense-desirein mind (he)
? e
J. Sg.
Vas
+a +nta,pr.p. muses;kamarāgam-- eva;ihā (from
Dhyai) +ya +ti, pres. 3. sg.
Kamatanhahi khajjamano—M. I. Kimamkarohi—S, 1.227
504 Doasyoulike;Kr +o + hi, imper. Kāmarāgam virāietvā
Beinggnawedby sense-desires:Khad brahmalokūpagoahu—A. IHI. 373
25.sg.
Wd o

" ya + mana,pass.prip. Making theminddistractedfrom

Vin. II. 14
Whatanotherway will therebe for Kamam tacoca naharu ca atthi ca serisēsdesitēs;he wentto theworld
Kamadhatuyapahanaya—A. III. 447
him,surely,hewill comebackhere; avasissatu
—A. TV. 190 of Brahma; vi +Raj +e + tvd, caus.
To getrid of therealmof sense-desire
idha -- eva;pati -- ā --Gam + i + Lettheskin,senewandbone,surely, absol.: brahmaloka + upagū:
Ssati,fut. 3. sg. remain;
ava+Sis +ya +tu,pass. upa +Gam + ii, der; a + Ha
Kamanirodhagamini patipadā—A. imper,
3", sq, (Skt.abhiit)
II. 411
Kanici kanici tani —M. I. 234
The pathleadingto thecessationof
Whatevertheymaybe Kāmam
maīīie bhikkhū sikkhantu Kāmarāgavinivesavinibandhapalige
sense-desires
Vämāvā —A, IV. 190 dhapariyutthanajjhosanahetu—A. E
Kāniei kānici selissakāni karonti - Nomatter whethertheotherbhikkhus 66
Kamapariyesanayaussukko—A. I.
S. IV. 117 discipline
themselvesor not; kāmam, For thereasonof adherenceto sense-
68
Do somemischievousacts:Cy. takes adv.;
ma +afifie; sikkhantu,desid. desires.bindingto sense-desires,
The onewho is activein searchingfor
the termas kelissakāniandSays imper.
34,pl, from Sak; ma and va, greedfor sense-desires,upsurgeof
sense-desires
aāhiamupanissāyapitthim gahetva indcl, sensswleritos, plunginginto sense-
lamghitvéito cito ca dhāvanakīlanā, desires:kāmarāga t vinivesa +
Kāmaparilāhena paridayhamano-
Ii, 397 Kāmam
yeva
ārabbha
—A. III. 168 vinibandha +paligedha
M. IHI.130 Ontheissueof sense-desire: parivutthāna t aiihosāna + hetu
Beingburntby thefeverof sense
Kāpotikam pasannampatiyādetvā- drabbha, indel.,
desires;pari +Dah +ya +mana,
Vin. IV. 109 Kāmarāgassapahānāyasamvattati
meta. Pass, p¥.p.
Havingpreparedthefinestfermented —A,III. 323
liguor; kāpotikātikapotapādasama It leadsto theabandonment
of sense-
Kāmaparilāhānamvūpasamo—Vin.
vannarattobhāsā,Cy. 859: kapota + desire;pa +Ha +ana,der.;sam
II. 20
Vrt ta +ti, pres. 3’. SS:
 Kāmavitakkam
Kāmānam Kāmesu
Kāmānam

tuā; ā t Kirā t ta,pp. E = Bhu(f)j; +eyyāsi,opt. 2".sg

2nd pī

II. 116 Kāmānam

pahanam—Vin. IIL. 20
Abandonment
of sense-desires; pa
Kamasamkappabahuloviharati—A. Kāmesu ādīnavam disvā —A. IV. 440
vitakka+ e +nta,denom.prp. Ha+ana,der.
III. 259 Havingseenthedisadvantage ol
He abideswith abundantthoughts sense-desires;Dr§ +tva, absol.
Kamavitakkassapahanaya Kāmāhi bhante aniecā tucehā musā
related to sense-desires
mosadhammā
—A. V. 84
III. 446 Venerable
sir, sense-desires are Kāmesu kāmacchandamvirāietvā -
Kāmasahagatāsannhamanasikara D. 11.51; 8. V. 233
To abandonthethoughtofsense impermanent,
empty,falseandof false
samudācaranti—A. IV. 415 Causingto abandontheattachment to
desires,thethoughtof renunciation nature;
musa +a, der.+ dhamma
Fixedthoughts,accompaniedby sense- sense-desires;vi +Raj +e +tva,
shouldbecultivated:pa +Ha +ana,
desires,comeinto play in themind:
der.;Bhi +e + tabba.caus.fut.pp: Kimeajjhavasi—D. Il. 272 caus. absol.
kama +saha +gata; Sam +u (+a
Lived
enjoyingsense-desires;
adhi +
+Car +a+ nti,pres, 3". pl.
Kamavitakkanam samugghāto- a+ Vas+i, pst. 3%.sg.; prefix adhi Kāmesu kamacchandokāmasneho
Vin. II. 20 governs
kama kamamucchakamapipasa
Kamahetu kamanidanam
Total destructionof thethoughtsof kāmaparilāho —M. I. 242
kamadhikaranam kamanamevahetu
sense-desires; sam + u(t) + ghan + Kameavigataragoavigatachando Attachment to sense-desire, love for
—M. 1.85; S. I. 74, no
ta, pp. avigatapemo avigatapipaso sense-desire.infatuationwith sense- I
kāmānamevahetu
avigataparilāho avigatatanho—D. desire. thirst for sense-desire, fever of
Becauseofsense-desires,on the
Kamavitakkehi khajjati— A. I. 68 III. 238,M. I. 101(kāmeavītarāgo sense-desire
groundof sense-desires,for the
(He) is eatenup by thethoughtsof hoti)
reasonof sense-desires.only for the
sense-desires;Khad +ya + ti,, pass. Theonewhohasnotabandoned lust, Kamesu giddho — D. III. 107
causeofsense-desires:kamanam+
pres. 3. sg. desire,
love,thirst, burning and craving The one who is greedyin sense-
éva +hetu
inmatters
pertainingto sense-desire; desires;Grdh +ta, pp.
Kamavitakkehi khajjamano a+vi+ Gam +ta,pp.; cp. avita: a+
Kamanajicaham..pariiitiam
kāmaparilāhenaparidayhamāno vit I +ta,pp. Kāmesu gedhamāpaiianti —5. I. 73
panhapemi—A. V. 65
kāmapariyesanāyaussukko—M. III. They becomegreedyof sense-
I proclaimtheabandonment of
130 Kamenirodhetva nirodhetva desires:a +Pad +ya +nti, pres. 3”
Sense-desirestoo; pariffanti
Beingdevouredby thethoughtsof
samatikkamam, Cy. V. 27
Viharanti
—A. IV. 410 pl.
sense-desires,
beingburntby theheat Causing
tocheckthesense-desires
of'sense-desiresandbeinginterested continuously,
theyabide;ni +Rudh Kāmesupātavyatamāpaiiati —A. I.
Kāmānam assādaficaassādato
in thesearchfor sense-desires;
kama €*+tva,caus. absol. 266
adinavaiicaādīnavato nissaranahica
+ vitakka;Khad +ya +mana,pass. Indulgesin sex- life
nissaranatoyathabhitam na
pr.p.; kama +pari +daha;pari + Kameparibhufijanto
puanani
paiānanti —M. I. 87
Dah +ya +mana,pass.prip.; kama karonto
abhiramassu —Vin. IHI. 13
(They) do notreallyunderstand Kāmesu pātavyatamāpaiianti —M.
“ part + esand; es (from Is ) + ana, Take
delight
inlifewhileenjoying
thetasteof sense-desiresas the 1.305 I
der.; ussukka(Skt.autsukya) Sense-desires
anddoing meritorious
taste,harmof sense-desiresas the They enjoy sex- life; Pa (to drink)
deeds:
pari +Bhu(ii)j +a t nia, i maa
tavva(tabba) =
+ ta; ko
der.; @+E Pad
> 4
harm,gettingout of sense-desires
Kamasafifianamparinna akkhata -
asgettingout; @ +Svad +a, der: Prp.;Kr +0 +nta,pr. p.; abhi+ ya + nti, pres. 3”. pl.
Vin. IL. 20 Ram+a +ssu,imper.2". sg:
ni +Sr +ana, der: vathābhūtam,
Abandonment of the thoughtsof Piece i'— S. IV.343
adv.;pa +Jan +na +nti, pres. Kāmesu micchā carati — S. IV am
Sense-desireshasbeenexplained;pari
apt Kame paribhufijeyyasi—M. 1.91 Commits sexual misconduct; miccha,
indel: to singled out one kāma, i. e.
 Kamesu
desirefor sex,kimesu (loc. pl.)is
usedhere; cp. Magadhesuviharati
Ekanālāvambrāhmanagāme
Kāmesu miechācārassavipāko
manussabhūtassa sapattavera
samvattaniko—A. IV. 247
The resultof sekualmisconductleads pp.; yana +kata, vatthu+ kata; anu
to rivalryandhatredfor a man:sapatta
+ vera + samvattanika
Kamehi lokamhi nahatthi titti —M.
Il. 73
In the world, there is no satisfaction
from the sense-desires: na + Ai +
atthi; Trp +ti, der.
Kamehi visamyuttam—M. I. 108
Detachedfrom sense-desires:
vi 4
sam+ Yuj +ta,pp.
Kāyakammantasandosavyāppatti
akusalasaīicetanikā—A. V. 292
Faultandtransgression relatingto the
bodily actionswith unwholesome
purpose;vi +a + Pad + ti, der:
akusala+sam + cetana+ika, der
Kayakammamvacikammam
upadamsenti—Vin. I. 341
Demonstrate physicalassaultand
verbalassault;kayenapaharanta
kāyakammamupadamsenti,
Pharusam vadantavacīkammam
upadamsenti;Cy. 1150;upa +Drg +
e +nti,pres. 3”. pl,
Kayagatayasatiyā āsevitāya
bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya yānīkatāya
vatthukatāyaanutthitayaparicitaya
Susamaraddhayaime dasaānisamsā
pātikamkhā—M. III. 97
Kayam
Kayadahabadho Kaya
Thesetenbenefitsare to beexpected Kāyam upanāmesi—5. I. 207
Kavanutthabhikkhave etarahi
whenmindfulness,accompanied with Madethebodyturntowards;
kathaya
sannisinna,ka ca pana vo
thebody,is associated,cultivated. upa +Nam +e +8 +i, caus.pst.
utarākathāvippakatā?—D. I. 2; II.
frequentlypractised,usedasa vehicle. a;
1;M.IL.2
usedas.a foothold,established, Bhikkhus,withwhatkind of
acquainted andwell started;@ +Sev + Kāyam upanighamsantiyogacchanti
discussion,
youhavebeensittinghere
i+ ta,pp.; Bhi + e+i + ta, caus. together
atthistime?What kind of —A. IV. 435
your
discussion wasinterrupted?;nu + (They) moveon rubbingthebodyhard;
+Stha +i +ta,pp.; pari +Ci +ta, ettha;
nu,interr.p.:ettha, indcl.; upa + ni +Ghrs +a +nti,pr.p
pp.; Su +sam + @ +Rabh +ta,pp.; etarahi,
indel.;sam+ni +Sad +ta,
pati +Kamks +ya, fut. pp. pp.;vi+pa +Kr +ta, pp. Kāyam upasamharati—M. I. 58
Brings (this) body closer(to that
Kayagataya satiyā vītināmetvā - Kāyanvayam eittamhoti —M. I. 237 body);upa +sam + Hr +a + Ui,pres.
Vin. II. 286 Themindfollowsthebody:kāva ' aMasg
Havingspenttimewith mindfulness anvaya:
anu+aya( from1)
accompanied with thebody;vi +ati + Kāyam otāpento— Vin. IV. 39
Nam + e + tva. caus. absol. Causingto heatup thebody;o +Tap
Kāyapariyantikam
vedanam—
S. II.
8 e t nia, caus.pr.p.
Kayaguttiya cīvaraguttiyā Thepain,restrictedto thebody:pari
= E I 262
senāsanaguttiyānisidanam—Vin. I. Kāvam ovassāpenti—Vin. IHI. 252
+anta+ika, der.
295 Causeto exposethebodyto therain;
A sittingmatforprotection
of the Kāyappaeālakamantaraghare na o + vassa +Gpe+ nti, denom.caus.
body,therobeandthelodgingplace; pres. 3”. pl.
gantabbam—Vin. 11.213
Gup + ti, der.; ni +Sad +ana,der.
Should
notgo insidethehouse,
swaying
thebody;kdya +pa +Cal + Kayam copeti—M. HI. 133
Kayadaddhibahulaviharanti —Vin.
aka,der; Gam+ tabba,fut. pp. He causesto movethebody;Cup +e
II. 76 arä .
+ ti, caus.pres. 3”. Sg.
Abide mostlywith physicalexercises;
Kāyampi
cittesamādahati,
eittampi
kaya + daddhi (dalhi) + bahula
kāyesamādahati
—S. V. 283
Hekeeps
thebodyinthemindandthe sannāmeti,na vināmeti —M. II, 137
Kayadandassaupanidhāya—M. I.
mind
inthebody;sam+@+Dha +a (He) doesnotmakethebodyraiseup
374
tii, pres.3. s and down,doesnotmakeit bend
As comparedwith bodilyaction;
forwardandbackward;u(t) +Nam+e
upanidhāya,indcl.; the word danda
Kāyampi tadatthāya
upasamharanti ti, o +Nam +e +ti, sam +Nam +
is usedin Jainism for action (kamma)
-Vin.IV.220 e+ ti, vit Nam +e +fi.; caus,pres.
rs. SZ.
Offer
(bringcloser)thebodyforthat 'o37
Kāyadāhābādhopatipassambhi-
Purpose;
wpa+ sam +Hr +a +nti,
Vin. 1.215
pres.3". pl. Kayam balam gahentinaai ef
The burningsensationofthe body
bruhenti nama, medenti nama — M.
allayed;kaya +daha t ābadha:
pati +pa +Sra(m)bh +i. pst.
Kāyam
apanāmesi
—S. I.207 I. 238
Made
thebody
turnaway;apa+Nam Strangelyenough,theymakethe
3”, Sg.
Fets +i caus.pst. 3™.sg, body strong, grow up and fatty; nama,
 Kayam Kaye
Kayasucaritam Kayassa

indcl. usedhereto express Accumulatesphysicalhabitsor Kāyassabhedāparammaranā —D. I.

Kayassa
injitattamva phanditattam
amazement or censure;Grh +e +
energies;abhi +sam(s) +Kr +0 +ti, aes. M2315 107;M. I. 73; II. 24; S. I. 94; II. 232
nti, caus,pres. 3. pl.; Brh +e +nti,
pres. 3”. sg. Shaking
orthrobbingof thebody;Iāi Sincethebreakof thebodyand
caus,pres. 3. pl.; Mid +e +nti.
+i+ta,pp. +tta,der; Spand +i beyonddeath
caus,pres. 3™.pl.
Kāyasamkhāro niruddho fa,pp.+tta,der.
patippassaddho,vacisamkharo Kāyassa bhedāpānupacchedā—M.
Kayam vaddhenti,balam gahenti-
niruddho patippassadho, Kayassa bhedaucchijjissati I.
S. V. 47
cittasamkharo niruddho vinassati na hoti parammarana —S. Sincethebreakof thebodyandcutting
Causeto grow upthebodyandto
patippassaddho, ayu aparikkhino, II, 109 off of life; pana +upa + Chid +a,
acquirestrength;Vrdh +e +nti, caus.
usmāavūpasantā,indriyāni Atthebreakof thebody,he will be der.
pres.3™.pl.; Grh +e +nti, caus.
vippasannāni—S. IV. 294 annihilated,
is destroyedanddoesnot
pres. 3”. pl.
Physicalhabit(breathingin and existafterdeath;u(t)+ Chid +ya +i Kayassa vikkhittam va visatamva -
breathingout) ceasedto exist, +ssati,pass. fut. 3. sg.; vi Nas A. IL. 245
Kayam vivaritva —Vin. IV. 186
tranquillized,vocal habit(discursive ya+ti,pass.pres.3%.sg.; Hii (Bhi)
2 > os hese
Derangement or diffusionof the
Keepingthebodyexposed;vi + Vr +i
thoughtandinvestigation)ceasedto +a ti,pres.
3”.sg body:vi +Ksip +ta,pp.; vi +Sr
+ tvd, absol.,
exist,tranquillised,mentalhabit + fa, pp-
(identificationandfeeling)ceasedto Kayassabhedauddham
Kayam sampalivetheyya—A. IV, 131
exist,tranquillised,energyof life not jivitapariyadana
idheva Kayikapi daratha pavaddhanti,
Wouldwraparoundthebody; sam+
exhausted, heat(ofthe body)not sabbavedayitanianabhinanditani cetasikapi —M. III. 287-8
pari + Vest+ eyya,opt. 3”. sg.
subsided,facultiesareextremely sitibhavissanti— M. III. 245; Physicaldistressesgrow up, mental
clear;ni + Rudh +ta,Pp.; pati +pa 5,183;III. 126;IV. 213;A. II.
Kāyavihheyyāphotthabbā—M. II. distressestoo; kaya+ ika, der. + api;
203 198 pa + Vrdh
oo E
+a +nti, pres. 3”. pl.;
Sam + ta, Since
thebreakof thebody and ceta(s)+ ika + api, der.
The touchablesto beexperiencedby
+Sad +ta,pp. termination
of theprocessof life,
body;kdya + vi +Jia +evya,der.;
Sprs + tabba,fut. pp. allthatis feltandnotdelightedin Kayikena paribhogena(na)
Kayasamvarovacisamvaro
willbecome cool right here;Bhid +
Ä -.. r. 252
paribhuāiitabbam —Vin. III. 25
āiīvasamvaro—A. V. 88
Kāyavūpakāsenaca cittavūpakāsena a,der.;pari + @ +Da + ana, der.; It shouldnotbe appropriatedfor
Physicalrestrainment,
verbal
ca —A. IV. I52 idha+eva, indcl physicaluse;pari + Bhu(njj +1 +
restrainmentandrestrainmentin
By withdrawingthebodyandthemind: tabba,fut.pp.
livelihood
kaya + vi + apa + Krs + a, der, Kayassabhedauddham
jvitapariyadanana dakkhinti Kāvūram
: ī dhārenti —Vin. II.TEI
106
Kāyasamsaggamsamapajji —Vin.
Kayasamacarenasamannagato devamānusā —D. I. 46 (They) causeto wearbracelet;Dhr
II. 126;IV. 212
acchiddenaappatimamsena—Vin, II. Sincethedissolutionof the bodyand a: E
+nti, caus. pres. 3”.pt.
KO 2rū o

Engagedin physicalcontact:sam +Spj

248 abovetheterminationof theprocess
+a, der; sam+@ +Pad+ ya +4,
Endowedwithgoodphysical oflife,godsandmenwill notsee Kaye avitarago —M. I. 101
Pst. 3™.sq.
behaviour,flawlessanduntarnished;
a (him); uddham,indcl.;Dré +ssanii, The onewho hasnotgonebeyond
+chidda;a +pati +Mrs +ya,fut. Tui.3 pl Skt. form is draksyanti passion
forthebody;a +vi +/ +fa,
Kayasucaritambhaveyya—A. IIL.
pp. 189
dakkhantiand dakkhinti both are pp. + raga
ūvailablein Pali. taking the form
He wouldcultivatea goodphysical
Kāyasamkhāram
abhisamkharoti
- dakkhati
aspresent3”. sg., fut. 3 initvaaggim
Kaye upacinitva aggim
datva
datva— M.I.
behaviour;Bhi +¢ +eyya,caus.opt.
A. IL. 158 ard
5§.form is made as dakkhissati: 33
manu(s) + a1, der. Havingpiledupon thebodyandset
 Kaye Karanam
Kāyena Kāyena

fireon;upa+Ci +na +i +ta, +mā,absol.; ati + Vvadh+ya, Kayo pinetabbobrūhetabbo—M. II.

Kayena
vacaya manasa —S. IL. 151;
absol.;Da + twā,absol. absol. 186
AT. 415
Bythebody,wordandmind Shouldcausethebodyto be nourished
Kaye kilante cittam ūhaīheyya, Kāyena duccaritam caritva vacaya andgrownup;Pri +nd +e +tabba,
uhate citte ara cittam samādhimhā duecaritam caritvā manasa Kāyenasacehikaranīyo—A. II. 183 caus.fut.pp.; Brh + e +tabba,caus.
—M. 1.116
duccaritam caritvā —M. IHI. 165 Tobeexperienced
by (mind) body;sa fut. pp.
Mind wouldbedisturbedwhenthe
Havingpractisedbadbehaviour +acchi+Kr +aniya,fut. pp.
bodyis weary, mindis farawayfrom
physically,verbally,andmentally; Kayo yapeti —D. II. 100
concentrationwhenthemindis
du + Car + i+ ta,pp.: Car +i + Kayenasucaritamcarati vacaya Body is keptgoing; Ya +ape +ti,
disturbed;Klam +ta,pp.; ava (o =u)
Ivā, absol. caus. pres. 3™.Sg.
sucaritam
carati manasasucaritam
ava + Han + ta,pp.; Gra,indel.; tarati
—S.III. 253
Kayena dvayakari, vacaya (He)practises
goodbehaviour, Kayo rūpī cātummahābhūtiko
dvayakari,manasadvayakārī physically,
verballyandmentally;sw + mātāpettikasambhavo
vītimissaditthiko—D. III. 96 Car+i +ta,pp.; Car + a +ti, pres. odanakummāsūpacayo
Kāye dubbanniyamokkameyya—A.
Theonewho is a doubleactorwiththe 3"sg. aniccucchadanaparimaddana-
III. 54
body.word,andthoughtandhasmixed bhedanaviddhamsanadhammo -
A badcomplexionwouldcomeupon
views;vi + ati +missa+ ditthi + ika, M. II. 17
thebody:du + vanna+tya,der.; o t Kaye
satikayasaficetanahetu
—A. II.
der. 157 The bodyhasa form,is madeof four
Kram +eyya,opt.3”. Sg.
Whenthebodyexists,depending
on greatelements,born of parents,to be
Kayena phassitvavihareyyam—M. theintentionrelatedto thebody; kaye built up with riceandcurry, Ki
Kāyena kāyamāmasati—Vin. IV.
I. 33 sati,loc.absl. impermanent , subjecttoanointing,
214
May I abideexperiencingit by the rubbing,dissolution
anddisintegration,
Givesa gentletouchto thebodywith
mind(body);Sprs +ya +i + mā,
thebody;ā + Mrs +a +ti,pres,374. Kāyokilantoakammaīio —A. IV. riipa + I, der.; catu + maha + bhūta
absol.; vi +Hr +a +eyyam,opt.
Sg. 332 +ika,der.;mata+petti+ika,der.;
Tr ge,
Body
islanguid
andunpliable;
Klam+ odana + kummdsa+ upa + caya
Kayena ca jivitena ca attiyamana fa,pp.;a +kamma(n)+ya, der. (fromCi); anicca + uechddana+
Kāyena photthabbamphusitvā
harayamanajigucchamana—S. IV. parimaddana +bhedana+
na nimittaggahi hoti
62 Kayokilameyya—M. I. 116 viddhamsana+ dhamma
nanuvyafijanaggahi— D. I. 70; M. III.
Beingtroubledby,ashamedof and Bodywouldbecomeweary;Klam +a
35;S. IV. 76
disgustedwith thebodyand thelife: *eyya,
opt.3". sg. Karakasamghamanapaloketva-
Havingtouchedthetouchablewith
atta + tya + mana, pass. prip.; Hri + Vin. IV. 231
thebodyhedoesnot becomeone
ya + mana, pass. prp.; Jiguecha + Kayo
garukoakammafiio WithoutconsultingtheSamgha,the
whotakesthegeneral
appearance
and
mana:desid.of Gup +(sa) + mana, masacitam
mafifie—A. IV. 333 doerof formalacts;an +apa +Lok +
particularfeaturesof theobjectinto
Pass. +pr. p. Body
isheavy
andunpliable
likea e +tva, absol.
themind;Spré + tabba,Sut.pp. Sprs
load
ofsoaked
beans:
tintamaso
+i+ tv, absol.; nimitta+ Grh +i,
Kayena ca phusitva viharami, viva,Cy.IV. 157;masa +a@
+Ci + Karako ukkoteti —Vin. II. 97
der; na +anu + vyatijana+ Grh + i,
paūihāyaea ativiiiha passāmi—S. V. Ia,pp. Theperformer
(of theformalact)
der,
227 protests;u() + Kut +e + ti, caus.
Havingcontacted(them)with the
Kāyenavasamvattetha —S. II. 121 Kāyopi
passambhati,
cittampi pres. BM. Sg.
(mind)body,I abide:havingpenetrated Passambhati—
A. 1.43
Keepundercontrolby thebody
(them)by wisdom,I see:Spr ti Both
bodyandmindbecome
calm;pa Kāranam kāreti yugādhāne—M. I.
(mindbody)
+Sra(m)bh
+a + ti,pres:3". sg. 446
 Karam Kalavadi Kalena
Kālavato

Makeshimtrainin theyoke:Kr +e + Dies;Kr +0 +ti, pres. 3". sg. Kālavādī

ii, caus.pres. 3™.sg.; yuga +@ +Dha
+-ana, der.
Kāram karonti —
S. II. 269
Do what is to be done (some service);
Kr +ya >kar +ya> kar + ra> kara:
cp. Sūrya—sūra (ussūraseyvā,D. III.
184);Kr +0 + nti,pres. 3”. pl.
Karufifena maranavannam
samvannesum—Vin. III. 79
They praiseddeathoutof compassion;
Karuna +ya, der.; sam + vanna+ e
+s + um,denom.pst. 3°. pl.
Kāruāīiena muāci—Vin. IHI. 62
Releasedoutof compassion:Mu(nj)c+
i, pst. 3. sg.
Kālakiriyā anutappāhoti —
A. III.
294
Deathis regrettable;
anu + Tap+ya,
Fut.pp.
Kalafica samayaiicaupādāya—D. I.
205
Havingtakenintoconsideration,the
timeandthecircumstances:upādāva,
indel.
Kalam arocesi, kalo bho Gotama
nitthitam bhattanti—D. I. 109; M.
If. 92
Causedto informthetime,saying
“venerableGotama,it is time,mealis
ready”;an idiomaticexpressionof
announcing meal time; G4+ Rue + e +
8 +i, caus.pst.34.sg.;ni +Stha+i
+ fa, pp.
Kālam karoti —M. IHI. 122
bhūtavādīatthavādī Kalikam hitva sanditthikam
anudhavami—S. 1.9
dhammavādīvinayavādī,
Kalam karonti evamāha— Vin. II. I run afterthepresent(life),
nidhānavatim
vācam bhāsitā
267 kālena
sāpadesampariyantavatim abandoning(thatof) thefuture;kāia '
While dying(she)saidthus;Kr +0 + ika, der.; Hā +i +tva,absol. ; Sam +
atthasamhitam
—D. I. 4-5; M. I. 180
nta +1,pr.p.; evam+ Gha:a +Ah + Drs + ta,pp. + ika, der.;anu +Dhav
Theonewhospeaksat propertime,
a, pst. 3, sg. +a +mi,pres. 1. sg.
speaks
offacts,
speaks
of something
meaningful,
speaksof truth,speaks
Kalam karonto avaca—D. III. 181 Kale kappati vikale na kappati -
ofdiscipline,
speaks
in righttime,
Saidwhile dying;Kr +0 +nta,pr. PS the
wordsworthkeepingin mind, Vin. 1.251
a +Vac+a,pst.3".sg. authoritative,
specificandbeneficial; Admissible
atpropertimeand
+ f, der.; Bhas +i + tu, der.;
Vad inadmissibleat impropertime;Kip +
Kalam viditva pucchanti—Vin. I. sa+apadesam;pari + anta + vanta, ya + fi, pass. pres. grt sg.
59 der;attha+ sam + Dha +i + ta, pp.
Havingrealisedthesuitabletime,they Kālena atthūpaparikkhāya
question; Vid +i + tvd,absol.;Prch Kalasseva tatotato upanikkhamanti ānisamsā—A. HI. 381
+ya + nti,pres. 3”. pl. -Vin.II. 146 Benefitsof ekaminingthemeaning
They
setoutfrom hereandtherein the at propertime;kāiena, instr.usedin
Kalam vitinamesum—Vin. II. 274 early
morning;
wpa+ni(s) +Kram+ the loe. sense;attha + upa +pari +
Let thetimepassby; vi + ati +Nam+ a+nti,pres.3. pl. lks +a
e ts + wm,caus. pst. 3". pl.
Kalasseva
nagarampavisanti—Vin. Kālena kālam —M. 1. 119;S. II. 85;
Kalam harissatha —Vin. IV. 102 IV.54 IV. 173;A.I. 256
You will getin themorning Theyenter
thecityin theearly From time to time; adv.
moming; kalassa +eva,adv.;pa +
Kalayuttam ekaseyyamekabhattam Vif+ a +nti,pres.3%.pl. Kālena kālam aiihupekkhati —A. I.
brahmacariyam—Vin. I. 194
257
The highestway of life, periodical Kalasseva
pindaya
caritva—Vin.IV.
Looks on from timeto time;
andwith onesleepandonemeal: 76
aiihupekkhatīti..upadhāreti,Cy. II.
kalayuttamis opp. to yāvaiīvam Havinggonefor almscollection in the 364; adhi +upa +Iks +a + fi, pres.
(life-long) earlymorning;Car + i + tva,absol.
FS. 30.
Kalayuttamsamullapanto
—Vin. IIL. Kālasseva
vutthāya
—
D. II. 340;S.
Kalena kāiam abhidhamati—A. I.
187 IV.329;V.361;Vin. 1.46,utthhaya
257
Talkingsomethingsuitable
forthe Having
gotupearlyinthemorning;vi
Blows on from timeto time;abhi +
time;Yuj+ta,pp.;sam+u(t)+Lap+ TWO Sthé+ya,absol.
dhama(fromDhmā) t ti, pres. 3°. sg.
a+ nta, pr.p.
Kāiābhatam
vaddhimnadeti—A. Kālena kālam udakena paripphoseti
Kālavato ārocetum-Vin. I. 117 IHI,
352
—A.1.257
To informearly;kālavatotikālasseva, Hedoes
notgivetheinterest
advanced Causesto sprinklewaterfrom timeto
Pagevatiattho,Cy. 1060;@+Rue+
Inihecourseof time;kKdla+@+ Bhr time;pari +Prus +e +ti, caus.pres.
e + tum,caus,inf, 2
KO Pp.; Da + e + ti, pres. 3™. sg. rd Sg.
5
 Kalenakalam
Kalenakalam upasamkamitva
paripucchati,paripaāhati—D. IHI.
285
Havingapproached, fromtimeto time.
(he)questionshim;pari +Prch +ya
+ ti, pres.3”. sg.; pari +patiha +e ?
+ti, denom.pres.3”. sg.
Kālena kālam pavisitvā—Vin. IV.
158
Havingentered(theharem)fromtime
to time;pa + Vis + i +tva,absol.
Kalena kalam samayenasamayam
upādāya—A. II. 69
Concerningtimeandcondition
Kālena kālam sahadhammena
suniggahitamniggahetabba—A.V.
188
From timeto timetheyshouldbe
thoroughlyrestrainedin accordance
with theDhamma;ka/enakalam,adl.;
su +ni + Grh +i + ta,pp.
Kalena cudito no akalena—A. III.
197
Accusedat propertime,notat
impropertime;Cud +i + ta,pp.
Kalena deti—A. IV. 244
Givesat propertime;Dd +e +fi,
pres. 3. sg.
Kalena dhammasavanam— A. II. 140
Listeningto theDhammaat proper
time
Kalena dhammasavane, kalena
dhammasākacehāya (anisamsa)—A.
IV. 361
Benefitsof listeningto anddiscussing
Kificideva
Kālapakkheva
of theDhammaat propertime Even if a wish would arise thus
Kālapakkheva
candimā—D. IHI. 182
Just
asthemoonin thedarkfortnight;
Kalena dhammasakaccha—A, II. Kificapi gamanteviharati akinne -
kilapakkhe
+iva
140 81IV. 2)
Discussionof theDhammaat proper Even if (he) lives in a villagewhich is
Kāsikāni
vatthāni—A. III. 50
time
Cloths
madein Kasi; Kasi +ika, der: besetwith; ā +Kir +ta,pp.
Kālena bīiāni patitthāpenti —A. I. Kifcapi bhavam Kassapoevamaha,
Kieeakārībhavissāmi —A. III. 443
229
Ishall
bethedoerof thingstobedone atha kho evammeettha hoti —D. II.
(They) sow seedsat propertime; 319
pati + Stha + Gpe + nti, caus. pres.
Kieeāpadesabahulassa
viharato —D. EventhoughthevenerableKassapa
3'..pL
Ill, 184 saidthus,I still havethesameidea
Forthepersonwho keepsasidemost on this matter;kificapi, indcl.
Kālena vakkhāmi — Vin. II. 249
ofhisworkundone;
kicca +apadesa followed by atha kho; a + Ah +a,
[ shallspeakata righttime;Vac+ pstz3"28g.
ssami(syami),fut. 1". sg.; taking
Kiccham
vatāyamloko āpanno —D.
vakkhaas the basepres. tenseverb
ll,30;5.II. 5 Kiīicāpi so evam vadeyya—M. IHI.
also is made
Thisworld, indeed.hasfalleninto 275
difficulties;
kiccham,adv.indel.;vata Evenif hewouldsayasthis;Vad+
Kālena vipassana—A. II. 140
+ayam;vata,indcl.; @+ Pad +ta, eyya,opt.3™.
sg.
(Practising)insightat propertime
pp.
Kifici uttarim karantyam—
D. I.
Kalena samatho—A. II. 140
Kiechalābho
mātugāmo
— Vin. IV. 207;A.IV. 355;Vin. II. 74
(Practising)concentrationof mindat
175 Anythingto bedonefurther
proper time; sama = samatha
Womankind
obtainsthingswith much
difficulty;mātugāma, m. sg. Kinci kiāci katham —M. II. 168
Kalo 4rocito hoti —Vin. II. 213
A talk on this or that
The time has been announced:a +Ruc
Kiechena
kasirena—Vin. 1.195
+e+i+ ta, caus.pp.
With
somuchdifficulty;adv. Kinci dukkhassa(na) iānāsi —Vin.
II. 13 i
Kalo bhattassa —Vin. I. 291
Kiīcabhikkhave
sabbam?—S.IV. You know nothingaboutsuffering;/an
It is time for the meal
15 t nā + si, pres. 2”. sg.
Bhikkhus,
whatis (meantby) all?
Kalo mahasamananitthitam
Kincideva accayikam karapīyam
bhattam— Vin. I. 26
Kiīcāpiayyoanatthikotena uppaiieyya—M. I. 149
It is time,GreatSage,mealis ready;
dhammena —Vin. III. 188 Therewould ariseanurgentmatterto
ni (s) +Stha +i + ta,pp.
Even
if youarenotin needof that be settled:kim + ci (d) + eva; ati +
‘thing’:
kificapi,indel.followed by api ava (fromI) t ika, der; Kr +aniya,
Kālakam
vattham
paridhāya
—A.II.
fa; an + attha +ika, der. fut.pp.; u(t) +Pad +ya +eyya,opt.
241
Havingcladin a blackclothe;pari + 3”.Sg.
Dha +ya, absol.
Kiācideva udāhareyya —D. II. 100;
 Kificideva
5. V. 153,udāharati
Wouldsaysomething;w(t) +@ +Hr 4
evya, opt. 3”. sg.
Kificideva karaniyam uppaiii —D. II.
340
Therearosesomethingto bedone:uri)
+Pad + ya +i, pst. 3, Ng.
Kiācideva desamkāyena—A.
Somethingwiththebody
Kincideva desampuccheyyama-S.
I. 19
May I asksomething:Prch +ya +
eyyāma,opt. I". pi
Ti.
Kiīicidesam lesamattamupādāya-
Vin. IHI. 167
Hangingon somethingtrivial;
upadaya,indci.
Kincimattamanupadajjeyyama-
Vin. LIT.259
(We) wouldgive just something
(to You);anu +upa + dajja (fromDa)
+eyyama,doubleopt. 1".pl.
Kificetam paticcavuttam?—M. III.
46, 280;A. V. 51
Dependingon whatthishasbeensaid?:
kim +ca +etam;pati +I(t) ya,
absol.; Vac +ta,pp.
Kittham otareyya—S. IV. 196;A.
Ill. 393,otarissati
Wouldenterintothepaddyor corn
field;Krs +ta,pp; o 3 Trtad
evya,
opt. 3. sg.
Kinpapakkhittā surā —Vin, IV.
110
Kittayamānarūpā Kinnu bri
Kittayamanarupa
Fermentedtoddy.into whichyeastis Kinti te Ananda sutam? —D. I. 74
you;kitti +ava + mana + rupa
put;Kinna(Skt.kinva) +pa +Ksip + Ananda,haveyou heard?
ta,pp. Kittavamānarūpā viharanti —D. II.
202 Kinti te bhavissati? —M. III. 268 MI
Kinnepi kannakitayo honti —Vin. II. What will occurto you?; Bhi ta ti
(They)
abideasif praising(him)
116 t ssati,fut. 3". sg.
They becomerustyevenin lime I I I
Kittayissāmigirāhi anupubbaso -
powder;kinnacunna,Cy. 1205; D.IL.256 Kinti te mayi hoti? —M. I. 464; II. I 7, I
kanha + Kr +ta,pp.; Hii (Bhi) +a4 [willproclaim,
in turn,with 238, vo
I. 54 nti, pres. 3™.pl. praising
words;Aitti +aya +i + How do you feelaboutme? :
Kittakapacchimamnu kho
ssami,denom.,fut. 1°. sg.; anupubba
Kinti teSāriputtaahosi,mayā i
IN
I I
T 0
dighasanam?—Vin. II. 169 bhikkhusamghe panāmite?—M. I. I
How muchis thelastmeasureofa Kittāvatā
nu kho upāsako hoti? —A. 459 I
long seat?;kittaka +pacchima;digha IV.220 What ideacameto your mind, i bi 4
+ asana Sariputta,whenthegroupof bhikkhus i IHI
Towhatextentonebecomesa lay
disciple?;
upa+As +aka,der. wasturnedawayby me?;pa +Nam +e i |
Kittakena te bhantekitani? —Vin. + j + ta, caus. pp. l I)
IHI. 233 Kittavatanu kho dhammakathiko I VI i
Venerablesir, for how much hoti?—5, IHI. 164 Kinti nam kareyyāsi? —M. II. 101; I Hu
(thesethings)wereboughtby you; Towhatextentonebecomesa Vin. I. 348,kareyyātha I UI
Kri + ta,pp. preacher
of thedhamma?: kittāvatā, Whatwouldyou do to him?;Ar + IN I
I opt.2™.
andco
indcl, eyyasi, sg. I I
Kittakena raja coram gahetva
hanativa bandhati va pabbajeti va? Kittāvatānu kho sammāditthī hoti? Kinti vyākareyyāsi?—D. I. 200 N I
—Vin. III. 45
-S.1I,17 Whatwouldyou say?;vi -ā t Kra ; a
For how much,doestheking,after Towhatextent
oneis withright eyyasi,opt. 2”. Sg. "
gettinga robber,kill or imprison vision?
or banishhim?;Grh +e +tva,
Kinti svāssavacanīyo?—A. IV.
absol.; Han + a + ti, pres. 3. sg.; Kittivapnaharā—D. IHI. 191
176 ) |
Ba(n)dh +a+ ti, pres. 3.
ard
$g.;pat Carriers
of fameandpraise
Whatshouldhebe said?; so +assa:
Vraj+e +ti, caus.pres.3'd,sg.;
As +ya (Skt.vāt),
opt.3™.sg.;Vae+ HE I I
va: disjuctivep.
Kintikaromidāni?—A. II. 62 anīva,fut. PP. bi 9 I I
Kittako udayo bhavissati?—Vin. III.
233
Whaido I do, now?; kinti, indcl.;
Karomi
+idani Kinnu kho tuyham bālassa 4 I) LI, LI I
avvattassabhanitena?—A. IV. 193
How muchwill betheprofit?;u() +
Kintiteaīiātosamanānam What is theuseof talkingto you, an
aya (from I)
Sakyaputtiyanam
dhammo?—A.I. inexperienced
fool?; Bhan+i +ta,
186
Kittayamānarūpā nisinnā —
M. II. pp: i
Have
youunderstood
theteaching
of
79
therecluses,
thesonsof theSakyan?; Kinnu kho hiyyo nāgamāsi,api ea I
They havebeensittingasif praising
a+Jia +ta,pp. mayamtam sarāma,kim nu kho I
 Kinnumava
maha samanonagacchatiti—Vin. I.
28
Whydidn’tyoucomeyesterday,
however,wethoughtof you:why
didn’tthegreatreclusecome;hivyo,
indel.;na+a+Gam+a@+s5+i.
doublepst.2". sg.; Smr +a +ma,
pres. 1". pl., used in pst.sense; na +
agacchati+ iti, pres.3. sg.usedin
pst.sense
Kinnumāvasamaniyo?—Vin.IV. 235
Why,arethesetheonly female
recluses?;
kim+nu +ima +eva
Kipillikānam va āsayohoti —Vin.
II. 151
Or thereis anabodeof ants:ā +Sri +
a, der.
Kibbisam pasavati—Vin. II. 198
Producesdemerit:(Ske.kilvisa);pa +
Su +a +ti, pres,34 Sg.
Kimaīhatra avusitattā?—D. I, 90
Whatelsethen,exceptfor indiscipline
2: afifiatra, indcl. used with abl. or
Instr; a +vi + Vas+i +tg,pp.> tta,
der.
Kimafifatra, yathābhūtassa
adassanā?—S. IHI.48
Whatelseis thereexceptfor not
seeing(thetruth)asit is?
Kimatthiyambrahmacariyam
vussati?—S, V. 6
Vas+ya +ti,Pass,pres.3’. so
“oe
KimatthiyamsamaneGotame
Kimassa Kimāgamma
brahmacariyam vussati?—S,IV.SI
Kimāgammakimārabbha?—D. I. 13 Kimhi nu kho sati? —S. II. 5
Forwhatpurposethehighest wayof With referenceto what?(concerning When thereis what?;nu, interr.p.
life is ledundertherecluse
Gotama? what):ā t Gam +ya, absol.;
drabbha,indcl. Kim atthavasamsampassamāno—D.
Kimatthiyoādāso?—M. I, 415
II. 285;S. V. 233
Of whatpurposeis themirror? Kimarammanasamkappavitakka Seeingwhatbenefit;sam +passa +
uppajjanti? —A. IV. 385 mana, pr.p.
Kimamgapana
namayam?—D,II. 42 On whatobjectsariseconceptual
Why notwe? thinking?; samkappavitakkati Kim imāyasandhāvanikāya?—S. IHI.
samkappabhūtāvitakkā,Cy. IV. 129
Kimamgapanajano janam? —Vin, 175,u(t) + Pad +ya +nti, pres.
What is theuseofthis runningto and
ITI. 148 SY.ni,
fro?; sam + Dhadyv
+ana + ika, der.
How muchmorepeople(wouldsay)
to people?;kimamgapana,indel, Kimina khajjopanakena hinataro ca Kim karana? —D. III. 6
patikitthataro ca —M. II. 35 For what reason?
KimamgapanaTathagato It is lowerandinferior thanthe
anujanissati? —Vin. I. 258 glowworm’s(glow) Kim kahasiGayam gantva?,
HowshouldtheTathagata udapanopi te Gaya —M. I. 39
approve?;anu +Jan + nda+i+ Kimpana imehi What will you do, aftergoing toGaya
ssati,fut. 3”. sg. khuddanukhuddakehi sikkhapadehi (whatis theuseof going toGaya) ?
udditthehi? —Vin. IV. 143 Eventhedrinkingwell wouldbeGaya
Kimamgapana
parattha?—M. HI. Whatis theuseof recitingthese for you; Kr + ssasi, kar +ssasi >
181 lesserandminor rulesoftraining?; kas+ssasi > ka +ssasi > ka +sasi >
Whatto talk aboutthenextlife?; para khudda-- anukhuddaka;u(t) 3 Drg + kahasi,fut. 2". sg.; Gam + tva,
+ttha, der. fa, pp. absol.; uda +pano +api; udaka >
uda and daka > oka > ka
Kimamgapanāham?
—Vin. II. 182 Kimpurisā mānusim vacam na
Why not me?; kimamgapana+ bhāsanti—A. I. 77 Kim kho tuyham balassaavyattassa
aham Kimpurisas(mythicalbeings)do not bhanitena?—A. I. 247
speakhumanlanguage;manu(s)+ i. What is theuseof talkingto you, the
Kimassauttarim karaniyam?—A. IL der.
fool andtheincompetent?; Bhan + i
14 +ta,pp
Whatmore is thereto be doneby Kimbilayam viharati Gamgāya
him?; uttarim,ady, nadiyātīre —S. IV. 181 Kimeitto tvam bhikkhu? —Vin. III.
Abideson thebankofthe riverGamgā 57
Kimassa
karaniyam?
—
S. V.440 in Kimbilā Bhikkhu,whatsortof mindyou had?
Whatshouldbedonebyhim?Kim+
assa; Kr +aniya, fut. pp. Kimhi nu kho pamsukūlam Kim tunhī (tvam)? —D. I. 49
vissaiieyyam? —Vin. I. 29 Why areyou silent?
Kimassa
vacanīyam?
—M. 1.504 On whatshouldI spreadthe
Whatadviceshouldbegiventothis rag-robe?; vi +Srj +ya 4 eyvam, Kim tuyhiminā pāpakena
man?;Vac +aniya,fut.pp. OpI.I". sg, duiiīvitena —Vin. III. 72
Kim
What is the useofthis evil and
difficultlife for you?;tuyham+
iminā; du t iīwita
Kim tuyhetthaāvuso?—A. I. 228
Here,whatdoesit matterto you,
friend?; tuvham+ettha
Kim te adhigatam,kinti te
adhigatam?—Vin. III. 92
Whatis attained byyou,howis it
attainedby you?;kintiteadhigatanti
upāvapucchā, Cy. 490;adhi t Gam
ta,pp.; kinti,indel.
Kim teayyeaphasu?—Vin. IV. 248
Venerable,
whatis yourdiscomfort?
Kim te āvusokarissati,paro āpanno
vā anāpannovā? —Vin. I. 128
Whatwill it do toyou,friend,whether
theotherpersonis guiltyor not?; ā 3
Pad +ta,pp.; an +Gpanna
Kim te iminā?—A. III. 368
Whatis theuseof thisfor you?
Kim te pitā sandhāyaavaea?—Vin.
1.348
Concerningwhatyourfathersaid?:
sandhaya, indcl.;a +Vac +G,pst.
AE
Kim tyāhamvadāmi?— S. IV. 303
Whatdo I saytoyou?;te +aham:Vad
at mi,pres.I”. sg.
Kim tvamkumara,kattukāmosi?-
Vin. Il. 190
Prince,
Prince
whatdoyouintend
e Ī
todo (what
areyougoingtodo)2;Kr +tum inf.
kamo +asi: As+ si. pres..2™.sg,
Kim
Kimditthiko samanoGotamo?- A,
V. 186
The recluseGotamais of whatview?:
kim +ditthi +ika, der.
Kimditthikosi tvam? —A. V. 186
You areof what view?;kim +ditthiko
{s +si, pres; 2”. sg.
Kim nānākaranam?—8. I. 182
Whatis thedifference?
Kim nidānā kim samudayākim
iātikā kim pabhavā? —M. I. 67
Theyareof whatground,whatorigin,
whatbirthandof whatsource?
Kim nu kho aiia brāhmanakulassa?
—A. V. 234
Whatis theretodayforthebrahmin
family?;ajja, indel.
Kim nu kho ahosim
atītamaddhānam?—M. 1.8
WasI in thepast?
Kim nu kho avuso mahajanakayo
sannipatito?
—D. II. 131
For whatreason,friend,a large
crowdofpeoplehasgathered
together?;sam +ni +Pat Fit
fa, pp.
Kim nu kho etamsandhaya
bhāsitam?—S. IV. 216
Concerningwhat,is thissaid?;
sandhāya,
indcl.;Bhās-- i ' ta,PP:
Kim
Kim nu kho tassasukhassabhayami,
yamtam sukham anfatreva kamehi
afinatraakusalehi dhammehi? —M.
I. 247
WhyshouldI beafraidofthat
happiness
which is, indeed,bereftof
sensedesireandunwholesomethings
?; Bhi + ya +mi, pres. 1". sg.
Kim nu kho tuyham bhanitena? —A.
IL. 194
Whatis theuseoftalking to you?
Kim nu kho nāma amhakam
jivitena? —Vin. IV. 179
What is the use ofour life ?: nama,
indel.usedhere in thesenseof
frustration
Kim nu kho nama tumhakam ayye
daharanambrahmacariyam cinne?
—Vin. I. 293
Ladies,thepracticeof a celibatelife is
of whatuseto you who arevery
young?; ‘brahmacariyamcinne’ is a
peculiar grammatical construction;
Car +ta, pp.
Kim nu kho nāma tumhe āvuso
mamvattabbammaniatha, aham
kho namatumhe vadeyyam—Vin.
IHI.177
It is surprising,do you thinkthatI am
tobeadvised byyou?It is I whoshould Did theSakyansoffendyou,
adviseyou; nāma,indcl. usedhere
withcontempt
KimnukhosoĀnanda
dārakasaddo?—Vin. IV. 129
Anandawhatis thatboy's sound?
Kim nu kho so yakkho Bhagavato
Kim
bhāsitam abhisameccaanumodi,
udahu no —M. I. 252
Whetherthatgentleman,having
realisedthe BlessedOne’s teaching,
appreciatedit or not;the word
yakkha is usedhere in the senseof
respect,generally the term is used.
in thesenseof a demon;abhi + sam
+e (from1) +(t) +ya,absol.;anu
Mud + a + i, pst. 3. sg; no, neg. p
Kim nu kho so sassuyajaro, udahu
obhasati? —Vin. IV. 20
Is he the loverof themother-in-law,if
not, doeshe whispersomething
indecent;udāhu,indcl. usedto give
alternative meaning; o + Bhds +a +
ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Kim nu khosmi? —M. 1.8
Is it lam? ; kho + asmi
Kim paccayā?—5. II. 5
On whatcondition?
Kim pana imāya kiīici adeyyam
bhavissatil —Vin. I. 217
Will therebeanyotherthingthat
cannotbegivenby this lady!;a +Da +
eyya, fut. pp.
Kim panate Ambattha Sakya
aparaddhum?—D. I. 91
Ambattha?; apa +Radh +ya +um,
pst. 3™.pl.
Kim panatenamundakena
samanakenaditthena? —M. II. 46
What is theuseof seeingthat
despicableshavenheadedrecluse?;
munda +ka, der.; thesuffix ka
 Kim
sometimes gives a derogatory sense
Kim panatvam attanampaccesi?-
D. 1.185
Whatkind ofsoul do you thinkof ?:
pati + e (fromI) +si. pDres.
24. sg.
Kim panatvam āvuso pānātipāte
samādapesi?—Vin. 1. 193
Friend,did you make(him)observe
killing living beings?pana +ati +
pata: Pat +a, der.: sam +@+ Da +
ape +si, caus.pst, 2" Sg.
Kim panatvammanomayamkayam
paccesi?—A. III. 194
Whatdo you meanby mind-made
body?;mano +maya.der.
Kim panabhanteaddasa?—D. II.
132
Venerablesir,did you see?:a +Drs +
G,pst. 2”. sg.
Kim pana vo kumara itthiyā? —Vin.
123
O boys,whatis theuseof a womanfor
you?
Kim panetthasukhamyadettha
natthi vedayitam?—A. IV. 415
Whathappinessis herewherethereis
nothingto feel?: Pana + ettha;yam
(vad)+ettha,indcl.; Vid +aya + i+
fa, caus. pp. E KimsunamateāvusoPātikaputta
Kim porānamsarasi? —Vin, II. 161
Whatpastexperiencedo you
remember? purdna +a, der.; Smr + a
+Si,pres.2". sg.
What is thestrength,whatis the
authority?
Kim Bāhukāya nadiyā? —M. 1,39
Brother,howlongwould it takefor a
What is theuseof river Bāhukā?
Kim bhanteayyanamdullabhaiica
manapafica,kim patiyadema?—Vin.
IV. 109
Venerablesirs, what is difficult for
thevenerablesto obtain,whatdo the
venerableslike, whatdo we prepare?;
Pati + Yat+ e+ ma, caus.pres.
I", pi.
Kim bhantemam ditthena
yuddhābhinandinā? —
Vin. IV. 104
Venerablesirs,whatis theuseof
seeingmewhois takingdelightin
thebattle?;Drs +ta,DP.:yuddha+
abhinandi:abhi +Nand + i, der,
Kim mayasakka katum? — Vin. II.
78; III. 162
WhatcanI do?; sakkā,indcl. used
withinstr.; Kr + tum,inf.
Kim me karissati adhivasentova
anadhivasentova? —Vin. IL. 16
Whatwill hedo to mewhether(I am)
acceptingor not(I don't carewhether
he accepts or not) ?: adhi + Vas + e+
nta, Caus.pr. p.
Kim me daharako Vejjo karissati! -
Vin. I. 271
Whatwill theyoungPhysiciando to
me!;dahara+ka,der: thesuffixka
gives a derogatorySense ;
Kimmepapakam?
~Vin,11,132
What is bad of me?
Kim va ciram (Kivaciram?)
panāvusobhikkhu araham assa?,Na
ciramāvuso—5. IV. 260
bhikkhutobecomeanArahant?, Not
long,friend; araham, nom. Sg. of
arahanta,
morepopular word is
araha;As +ya(Skt.yat) , opt. 3”. sg.;
na,neg.p.; ciram, adv.indcl.
Kimvādīkimakkhāyī? —M. I. 108;
5.II, 33;Vin. I. 40
Whattheorydoeshe profess,
whatdoesheexplain?;kim +vada
+i, der.;kim +a +Khya +ya + t,
der.
Kim vivekenakāhasi? —S. I. 128
Whatwill youdo with detachment?;
Kr +ssasi>kar + ssasi>Kas+ssasi>
ka+ssasi> kdsati >kahasi;fut.
2”.
2.
$2.
og
Kim sanditthikam hitva kalikam
anudhavissima?—M. I. 474
Whyshouldwe run afterfuture,
leavingthepresentbehind?;Ha +i +
tva,absol.;kala +ika, der.; anu +
Dhay+a + i +ssama,fut. 1".pl.
Kimsamutthana?—M. II. 27
Ofwhatorigin?
pavalasu nama te pithakasmim
allina,pithakamsu namate
pāvalāsu allīnam—
D. III. 19
FriendPātika'sson, hasyour bottom
Stuckon thechairor hasthechair
stuckonyourbottom;
su,indel.;
nama,indel.; @ +Li + ta, pp.: a
Sarcasticremark
Kim
Kim so pasavati?—Vin. I. 74
Whatdoeshe produce?;pa +Su +a
+ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Kim hi nu kho alambitva
uttareyyam—Vin. I. 28
Hanging on what should | cross?; @ +
Lamb +i +tva,absol.; u(t) + Tr +
eyyam,opt. I". sg.
Kim hi nu kho sati jaramaranam
hoti , kim paccayāiarāmaranam? -
D. II. 31
On whatbeingpresentdecayanddeath
occur,on whatconditiondecayand
deathtakeplace?;nu, interr.p.:sati,
loc. sg. of santa
Kim hi no siya, bhante? —S. IV. 301
Why not , sir?; As +ya(Skt.yat), opt.
id. ke
J, 82:
Kim hi paro parassa karissati? —D.
1. 224 ;
What will one do, indeed, for another:
Kim hi me karissanti Niganthā,
apalokitā vā anapalokitā vā? —A.
IV. 181;Vin. I. 234
Whether(theyare)consultedor not,
whatwill theNiganthasdo to me";hi,
emph.p.; apa +Lok + i + ta,pp.: an
+ apa + lokita
Kim hi siya bhante,no hetam
bhante—M. I. 132
How could it be,venerablesir; notat
all venerablesir; no + hi + etam
Kim hutva kim bhavissami nu kho
anāgatamaddhānam?
—M. 1.8
Whatshall I be in futureandhow
 Kirapatiko
Kismicideva Kismicideva

shall I be in future?;Hii (Bhi) +twa. Kilantosmi Cundaka nipaiiissāmi- Gam +tum, inf.
Kismieideva
pakarane —D. I. 98; 5.
absol.;Bhi +a+i+ ssami,fut. 1. D. II. 134 li, 91
S§.; an +@ +Gam +ta,pp. Cundaka,I amtired,I shalllie down: Kismim viya kumarikaya vatthum -
Oncertain
issueor ground
addhāna ni +Pad +ya +i+ ssami,fut. Vin. III. 135
Is 3¢
ō' Kismifici
kismifici thane —Vin. I. It is ratherembarrassing
to tell the
Kirapatiko —Vin. IV. 75 girl; vattumseemsto be more
150
Alord namedKira; Kiroti tassa Kilasuno ahesumsavakanam appropriate according to the context;
Oncertain
points,this or that;kismim
kulaputtassanāmam, kismim viya indicateoscillation of
vittharena dhammam desetum- tei
ādhipaccatthenaKirapatikoti mindor shame;Vac+tum,in].
Vin. III. 8
vuccati,so kira issaroadhipatimāsa
(They) werenot seriousenoughto Kismiācidevaadhikarane —Vin. IV.
utu samvaccharaniyāmena vetanam
preachtheDhammain detail to the 231 Kismim viya rittahattham gantum-
datvākammakārehi kammamkāreti,
disciples;na bhāriyato na Papaiicato Onacertainlegalguestion;kismim + Vin. IV. 79
Cy. 817
addasamsu,Cy. 188; Sru + aka,der; cifd)+eva To go with emptyhandis rather
Drs + e +tum,caus. inf, embarrassing: kidisam viya
Kiriyavādo samāno
Kismiācipaceekatthānethapetabbo laiianakam viya hotiti adhippayo,
Beingonewhoadvocates thetheory
Kilinnam passitva—Vin. III. 37 -A, IV.347 Cy. 879; viva, indcl.; Ric + ta,pp.
ofthe efficacyof action:As +mana,
Havingseenthe(bodily parts)soiled; Tobeinstituted
on anyparticular + hattha
pr.p. Klid +ta,pp.;passa+i +tva,absol. position;
pati+eka+thana;Stha E

dpe+tabba,caus.fut. pp. Kismim sati issamacchariyam

Kilafijehi paticchadapetya—M. II.
Kiso ahosi likho dubbanno hoti? —D. II. 277
63; Vin. III. 16
uppanduppandukajato Kismimnu kho sati kim upadaya? - Whenwhatis present,envyand
Havingmadethemcoverwith matsof .. i;
dhamanisanthatagatto —Vin. I. 55 S,IV.85 selfishnessare present:
fibre,pati +Chad + ape + (vd, caus.
Hewasemaciated,
coarse,
andwitha When what
exists,
byclingingtowhat
absol
badcomplexion,extremelypalelook 7 nu,interr.p.;sati: As +nta,pr.p., Kissa abhāvitattā?—S. IHI. 153
andwitha bodyoverwhichveinsare loc.sg.;upadaya,
indcl. Due to non-cultivationof what?;a
Kilantakaya kilantacitta—D. IHI. 32
strewn; du + vanna; u(t) +panduka Bhū -- e ti +ta,pp. +tta,der.
(Theyare)with fatiguedbodyand
©u() +panduka +jata; dhamani+ Kismim
nukhosatikim upādāya
fatiguedmind;Klam +ta,pp.
sam +Str +ta,pp. +gatta kimabhinivissaevam ditthi Kissa imesamdhitaram na desi? -
Kilantarūpā addhānamaggamāgatā uppaiiati?
—S.ITI.202 Vin. III. 136
Kisoro iāyetha —M. II. 153 Depending
onwhat,concerning
what, Why don't you give thegirl to these
—Vin:l;212
A foalwould be born:Jan +ya t being
obsessed
with what,arisesa people?;Kissa, Magadhiform of
Beingtired, we havecomea longway
etha,opt.mid. 3". sg. wrong
viewasthis?abhi +ni + Vis + kassa. This is generally usedto
Kilanto na nipaiiati —Vin. II, 303 ya,absol. ask for reason;Da +e +Si, pres.
Kismicidevaadhikaranepaccakata 23.sg.
Beingtired,hedoesnotsleep;ni +
—Vin. IV, 237 Kismim
vatthusmim
kārane?—
Vin.
Pad +ya +ti, pres,34.SZ.
Defeated
ina certainlegalauestion; 1314 Kissa imesamna gaechasi?—Vin.
paccākatā
nāmaparāiitā,old. Cy. Onwhatground,for whatreason? IHI.138 :
Kilantosmi Ananda nisīdissāmi—D
238; kismim +ci + (d)+ eva Whydon’tyougo forthese(people)"
11.128
Kismim viyaekasatakam gantum-
Kismicidevakārane—A. IV. 65 ARIA 5
asmi: As + mi, pres,
Vin.HI,211 Kissa kammassavipako? —D. ae
For somereason;kismim+ci(d) + Togowithoneclotheis rather A fruitionof whichkamma?;vi +Pac
. SE. eva
embarrassing:
ekasātakam,adv.; + a, der.
 Kissa
Kissa tumheayyepurisenasaddhim
sampadussatha?—Vin. IV. 260
Venerable,whydo youmisbehave with
a man?;saddhim,indc.,usedwith
instr.;sam +pa +Dus +ya +tha,
pres.2™.pl.
Kissa tumheayyotam vesim
yacittha?—Vin. IIL. 138
Sirs,whydid you begthatharlot:Yac
+ i+ ttha,pst, 2". pl.
Kissa tumheāvusorodatha?
—Vin.
II. 166
Friends,whydo you ery?;Rud +a +
tha,pres, 24 pl
Kissa tumhenāgamittha?—Vin. I.
282
Why didn'tyou come?;na +@+Gam
+ i+ ttha,pst, 2-4pl.
Kissa te cīvarāni allāni? —Vin. I.
109
Why areyourrobeswet?
Kissa tvam mahārāia kālasseva
āgatoasambhinnenavilepanena?-
Vin. IV. 117
O greatking,whydid youcome(here)
in theearlymorningso naive?:
asambhinnena vilepanena Seems to
be an idiomaticexpressionfor
naivety
Kissa nipannasi?—Vin. I. 217
Why areyou lyingdown?:nj +Pad +
ld, pp. +asi: As + si, pres, 284sg.
Kissa nirodhā? —s. Ha
MAA
Kidisa Kivaciram
Kukkutapattenapi
Kissa pana tvam evamciram akasi?
(īvacir:
Kivaciramnu i hitam?
hane ito
kho bhan itam?
I ‘ar?
; ; thisphrase
How far? this phrase
isis generall
generally
—Vin. I. 197
-Vin, 1.207; III. 249 used as kīvadūre
Why wereyou so late? : ciram,
Howlongit haslapsedfrom this
adv.;a+Kr+a+s+i double
pst.
(day).dear? ; kivaciram,ady.;nu, Kīva bahukā? —M. I. 523
2” Sa.
interr.p.;bhane,dear address; Hi How many?;kiva, indecl.; bahu +ka,
+fa, pp. ler.
de
Kissa bhanteayyo khahiati? —Vin.I,
186
Kivacirampabbajitosi?, na ciram Kukkuccapakatā uposatham
Venerablesir, why do your honour
āvuso,tīnivassāni—M. III. 207 karonti, pātimokkham uddisanti -
limp?;khaiija +ti, denom.pres.
ord Howlonghaveyou beena renounced Vin. I. 131 :
? tx te.
person?,notso long friend,(just) With a badconsciencetheyperform
threeyears;pa + Vraj +i +ta,pp. Uposathaceremony,recite i
Kissa mam ayyā nalapanti?—Vin.
Patimokkha;kukkucca+pakata (from
Il. 78;III. 162
Kīvacirena?—M. II. 94 pakati, nature);u() +Drs +a + nt,
Sirs, why don't you talk to me;na +a
Forhowlong?;indel.,
$ ; adv.
) pre
?res: 25. ;al.
+Lap +a +nti,pres. 3” pl.
Kukkueeam upadaheyya—Vin. IV.
Kissāyamdārikā rodati?—Vin. I. Kivatakampahoti sarena
vinhapetum?—A. I. 227 149 M
208
Why doesthis little girl cry?; of makingothers Would createa worry; upadahantiti
Howfarishecapable
uppadenti.Cy. 878; upa + Dha +
hear(his) voice ?; kīvataka, adv.; pa
kissa +ayam; Rud +a +ti, pres.
E, +Hi +a + ti, pres. 3%.sg.; vi +Jia eyya,opt. 3”. sg.
. SZ.
+ dpe +tum, caus. inf. E NA I
: Kukkuceayanta na sadiyanti —Vin.
Kissāyambhikkhuparivasati?-
Vin. II. 55 Kīvadīgham
<ivadi: ..āyuppamānam?
ā ānam?—A —A. I. 196; II. 280PATI I
V 172 Tea With uncertaintyin mind,theydo not
For whatreason,thisbhikkhu
Howlongis
: themeasure(duration)of
i , entertain;
sntertain; MSvadt
AU aaya + nti, caus.
undergoesprobation?:;kissa +avam;
life?;
if āyu
: --pamāna
ji pres. 3”. |pl.
“es.34.
Pari +Vas+a + ti, pres. 3° SZ.
Kīva dūrato āharasi? —Vin. III. 233 Kukkutacchapakasseva
Kissāham bhāyissāmi? —A. IV. 365
Fromhowfardoyoubring(these)?; andakosamha—Vin. III. 4
Why shouldI beafraidof?: kissa +
a+ Hr +a+ si,pres. 2". sg. Just as(comingout) of thechicks
aham; Bhi (Bha)+ya +i +ssdmi;
from the egg;
ss: kukkuta + chapaka
fut. 1". sg.
Kīvadūrevimemoghapurisā
apakkantā imasmā dhammavinayā? Kukkutapattam vā nahārudaddulam
Kīdisā nāma tā ayyaputta
—M. 1.480 va aggimhi pakkhittam —A; IV. 47
aceharāyo,yāsam tvam hetu
How fartheseconfusedmenhave A cock's featheror a pieceof sinew
brahmacariyamcarasi? —M. II. 64
O lord, how do thosenymphslook goneaway, indeed, from this doctrine thrownintothefire:kukkuta
Mt, -- patta;
anddiscipline?;kiva +dure +eva + naharu + daddula;pa + Ksip + ta,
like, for whomsakeyou practicethe
ine; mogha(from Muh) +purisa, pp.
highestwayof life?;nama,indel.
used to expressastonishmentand apa +Kram + ta,pp.; ;
contempt
Kukkutapattenapi ,
Kīvadūro?
—M. II. 119 nahārudaddulenapi
aggimgavesanti
325
 Kukkutapattenapi
—M. I. 188 Kukkurasamghaparivutā—A,II
(They)seek(tomake)fireevenwith Surrounded
byagroup
of dogs;
a cock’sfeatheror witha smallpiece kukkura +samgha;pari + Vr+
of sinewsleft; naharudaddulenati fa, pp.
cammanillekhanena, Cv.ll. 228;
gava+es(fromIs) + a +nti,pres. Kukkurassa nāsāyapittam
2r
I pL bhindeyyum—8. II, 242;Vin.II,
188
Kukkutapattenapivelupesikayapi They would crumblea bileonthe
civaramsibbenti—Vin. II. 115 noseof a dog ; Bhi(n)d +eyyum,
oph
(They)sewtherobematerialwitha 3”,pl.
cock'sfeatheranda slit of bamboo:
Siv +ya +nti, pres.3'f.pl.; sibbenti Kucchi garugaruviya, māsācitam
=sibbanti,like vadeti= vadati manne—M. I. 332
(My) bellyis asif something
soheavy,
Kukkutasampāte game—Vin. IV. 63 just like a sackfilled withbeans
In a villagewhichis socloseto the
(soakedbean);garugaruviyati
othervillagesthata cockcanwalkon
garukagaruko viva, thaddho
theroofs fromonevillagetoanother;
pāsānapuhiasadiso;māsācitam
kukkuta+sam+Pat +a, der.
mahhetimāsabhattam bhultassa
kucchiviya,māsapūritapasibbalo
Kukkutasampatika
viya,tiatamāsoviyātiattho,Cy.Il
gamanigamarajadhaniyo —D. IHI. 75
416; garu +garu t viya;māsa
tā
Thevillages,townsandkingdomsare
+Ci +ta,pp.
soclosetoeachotherthata cockcan
fly fromonehousetoanother;
Kuechinā
pariharitvā
—D.II.14;M.
kukkuta+sam+ Pat +ika,der.
III, 122
Havingcarried(thebaby)inthewomb;
Kukkutasūkarapatiggahanā
thestemkucehiiscommon
tobolh
pativirato—D. I, 5
masculine
andfeminine;pari+Ht*
Refrainedfromaccepting chickensand
i +tvd, absol.
Pigs;pati +gahana:Pati + vi +Ram
+ fa, pp.
Kuti ovassati—M. II. 53
Kukkutiya andanisamma Hutisexposed
torain;o (ava)
+18
adhisayitanisammapäriseditāni +ya +ti,pres.3”.sg.
sammāparibhāvitāni—M. 1.104
Hen'seggswell broodedover,well Kutikam
paci—
Vin.11.42
incubated andwell nurtured;
sammd, (He)baked
a cell;Pac+i,pst.
3%
indcl.;adhi +Si +q +i t ta,pp.;
Pari +Svid +e +j 4 fa; caus, Kutim
pavisitva
—Vin.II. 35
Pari + Bhii +e DB.; Having
entered
thecell;pa+Vis
* Kuddam
+ 1+ fa; caus.pp.
tvā, absol,
Kutivatthuolokanam
Kutivatthuolokanamyācāmi —Vin. dpe * nti, caus.pres. 3%.pl
III. 149
I begfor theinspectionofthe Kuddam upatthambhesi—Vin. III.
cell-site;kuti +vatthu +olokana; 65
Yae+a +mi,pres. I". sg Gavea supportto theparapetwall: upa
+Sta(m)bh +e + +i, pst. 3%.sg.
Kutumbaficasanthapesidānaīiea
patthapesi—Vin. III. 66 Kuddassa parato —Vin. IV. 266
Hecausedto maintainfamilyandgave Beyondtherampart
alms;sam +Stha +Gpe +s +i, caus.
pst.3". sg.;pa +Stha +dpe +s +i, Kuddepi nighamsanti—Vin. II. 133
caus.pst. 3. sq. (They) rub(them)evenon theparapet
wall ; ni +Ghrs +a + nti, ghassanti
Kutumbimaiihāvasati—A. IHI. 227 >ghamsanti;pres. 3. pl.
Settlesdown in thefamily;adhi +a +
Vas+a+ ti, pres. 3. sg. Kundakamattikam datva—Vin. Il.
151
Kuthāripāsenaākoteti —A. IV. 17l
Havinggivenmustard-powder;Da +
Strikeswith thethrowof the ake;
tvā, absol.
kuthari+pasa; @+Kut + e +ti,
caus,pres,3’. sg. Kutassa vādam āropessanti—M. I.
176
Kutharijayatemukhe—A. V. 171
How shouldtheycontendhis view!:
An axeis bornin themouth:Jan +ya
kuto +assa;@+ Ruh +e +ssanti,
¥ te,mid.pres. 3".
2rd sg.
caus.fut. 3. pl.
Kudumalakaiātobhavissati—A. IV.
Kutūhalasālāyam sannisinnānam
117
sannipatitānam—D. I. 179;M. II. 2
Tenderbuds will set
Amongthosewhohadassembled
and beensittingin thedebatinghall
Kuddapādo
iīrati —Vin. II. 120 (thehallwhichcreates
curiosityin
Thelowerpartofthe parapetwall
theminds
of the people);sam +ni +
decays;
Jir +a +ti pres.3”.sg.
Sad +ta,pp.; sam +ni +Pat + i+
td,pp.
Kuddamūlam
nissāya
paribhuāiati
-Vin. IHI. 15
Kuto amhakamduggatanammala?
Resortingto the foot ofa rampart,or
—Vin. III. 249
resortingto a restingplaceprepared
Whenceis a garlandfor us, thepoor
forthemendicants
Cy. 209, heeats
people?
utfhāpenti
—Vin.IHI.81 Kuto gahapatiamhākamgeham,
Causeto build a rampart; u(t) + Stha +
agārasmāanagāriyam
 Kuto
pabbaiitānam?—
M. II. 62
Householder, how could we havea
housewho havegoneforthfrom
homelifeto homelesslife?: an 4
agara +iva, der.
148
Wheredo you comefrom?
Kuto bhiyyo? —D. I, 174
Fromwheredo I find a superior?
Kuto meāvusopunnham? —Vin. I,
300
Friends,whencedo | getfortune?
Kuto tassaulārattatā?—Vin. IHI.
120
Whatgreatnessis therefor him?;
uldra +atta + ta, der.
Kuto tassaduggatassa?—Vin. I.
208
Whenceis it for thatpoor man?
Kutomukhā nāmatumhe...
dhammamassutavā?(assuttha?)-
D. II. 272
Facingwhichdirectiondid you
heartheDhamma?:@ +Sru +Itha,
pst. 3%.pl.
Kudassunamaimassadukkhassa
nissaranampannayissati,
iarāmaranassa —D. 11.31; S. Ii. 5
Oh, whenwill appeartheescapeofthis
suffering,decayanddeath:kudassu
Hāma, indel
Kudassu nāma mam...
abhisificissanti?—A. 1. 107
Kupito
Oh, whenwill theyconsecrateme,,.:
abhi t Si(nle +i4 ssanti,fut, 3pl.
Kudassu namahamtadayatanam
upasampajjaviharissami —M. I, 303
Oh, whenshall I enteruponand
abidein thatstate:nama+ahaih;
tam (tad) +āvatanam; upa + sam
+Pad +ya,absol.; vi +Hr cit
ssami,fut. 1", sg.
Kuddalapitakam ādāya —D. 1. 101;
M. 1. 127
Havingtakena hoeanda basket;@+
DG +ya, absol.
Kuddālam vā pitakam vā pariyesati
—Vin. III. 47
He makesa searchfor a hoeanda
basket;
pari +es(fromIs) +a+ ti,
:
Pres, 3°, sg.
Kunnadinamivodakam
—S.1.109
Just asthewaterof rivulets:ku --
nadinam +iva 4 udakam
Kupita anattamana
anattamanavacamniccharesi—M. I.
125
Beingangryanddispleased(she)
€xpressedanunpleasant word:Kup +
i+ ta,pp.; ni(s) +Car +e +s hī
caus.p8t,3'd,gg.
Kupito anattamanoadhikaranampi
karoti —M.I. 122
Beingangryanddispleasedhemakes
evena row; Kr +0 +ti, pres,374.
Se.
Kupitoanattamano
anabhiraddho
ahatacitto khilajato —Vin, III. 163
Beingangry,unhappy,
unsatisfied.
Kumine
Kupito
Or a youngboy unmarried
disturbedandstubborn; an +
; aN
attamano;an +abhi + Radh + ta,
Kumārakavādena apasādito—S. II.
219 I
Jan +ta,pp.
Being displeasedwith thereference
‘foolish boy’; kumaraka +vada;apa
Kupitoanattamanoāsādanāpekkho
+Sad +e +i +ta, caus.pp.
~Vin.I. 222
Beingangry,displeasedandhopingto
attack:
a +Sad +e +ana, caus.der.+ Kumārakīlikam kīii —M. II. 76
He playedinfants’games;Krid + i,
apekkho (apa + Iks)
pst. 3: $2.
Kupitoanattamanokhurappam
Kumarikam va apatikam—Vin. IIL.
sannayhi—D. I. 96
Beingangryanddispleasedhe made 135
Ora younggirl unmarried
bowandarrowready;sam +Nah +ya
+1,pst.3”.-sg,
Kumārikā abhirūpā dassanīyā
pāsādikā panditā vyattā ;
Kupitoanattamanotunhī ahosi—M.
medhavini dakkha analasa—Vin.
1,359
Beingangryanddispleasedhe II. 135 Kā
observed
silence The girl who is ektremelybeautiful,
attractive, pleasant,wise, competent,
Kupitopibhattamna bhuiijati—A. intelligent,cleverandindustrious;
IV. 139 kumara + i + ka; Drs +ya +aniya,
He does not eat food even when he is fut. pp.; pasada + ika, der.; medha +
angry; Bhu(fi)j +a+ ti;pres,
3”.Sg. avi, der. + ini; an t alasā
Kupito hoti anattamano Kumarika kumarakassa dinna -
anabhiraddho—Vin. I. 70 Vin. III. 187
Isangry,
displeased
andunsatisfied;
an The girl wasgiven(in marriage)to a
t+abhi +Radh +ta,pp. youngboy; Da +fa,pp.
Kupitohotiappatito—M. I. 27 Kumāribhūtā nāma sāmanerī —Vin.
Heis angryanddissatisfied;a +pati + IV. 327
I +ta,pp. Kumāribhūtā means a female novice
Kuppamkarissāmi —Vin IL. 133 Kumārim dūseti —A. IV. 339
I will scream: saddam karissdmi, Cy. Causesto rapea girl; Dus +e +ti,
1210;Kup +ya, der. ~ ord
caus. pres, 3”. Sg.
e
Kumarakamva apajapatikam—Vin. Kumine baddhe macche —Vin. II.
Hl. 135 63
329
 Kumbhakarapaka
The fishtrappedin thenet;Badh +ta,
PP.
Kumbhakarapakaunhamkumbham
uddharitvā—
S. II. 83
Havingtakena hotpotoutofthe kiln:
kumbhakara+Pac +a, der: u(t) +
Dhror Hr +i +tva,absol.
Kumbhakarapakoālimpito —A. IV.
102
Lightedthepotter’skiln; @+Limp +i
+fa,pp.
Kumbhandampurisamvehāsam
gacchantam —Vin. III. 106
A form
of spirit goingin thesky
Kumbhamparāmasanto—Vin. II.
195
While strokingtheforeheadof the
elephant;para + Mr$ +a +nta,prp.
Kumbhiya odanamgahetvā
pariyogāsūpamgahetvā—M. II. 52
Havingtakenboiledricefromthepot
of riceandsoupfromthepotofsoup;
Pariyogati siipabhdajanato,
Cy.HII.
20¢
203
Kuruvindakasuttiyanahāyanti-
Vin. II. 106
(They)takebathwitha beadmade
of Kuruvindaka-stonepowdermixed
withlacquer;
kuruvindakapāsānacunnāni Iākhāva
madditva,Cy, 1200: Sulla +ipa
der.;Snā -tya 4 nii, meta.,pres.
GARE
Kurūsu viharati
Kammāssadhammam nāma
Kulamkapadakam
Kulam
Kurūnam nigamo —D, II. 55, 200;
M. I. 55; 5. II, 92; Kammāsadamma II. 152 III. 237
| approvea woodensupportto the (He) is a freguentvisitor to a family
Abidesat themarkettown named
wall; anu +Jan +na +mi, pres. anda regulareaterthere;kula +
Kammāssadhamma, in thekingdom
UI NG, upaka; nicca +bhatta +ika, der.
of Kuru
Kulamgantvā—5. IV. 250 Kulipaghatam maiifie carasi —S. II.
Kuladūsakā pāpasamācārā-Vin, II,
Havinggoneto (husband's)family; 218
13
Gam + tva, absol. You behaveas if for thedestructionof
Thosewho spoil the familiesand
thegroup;kula +upa + ghan +ta,
behave
badly;kula +I dus+aka,der.
Kulam maccharāyati—Vin. IV. 312 pp.; Car +a+ si, pres. 2". se.
Behavesasif one,jealous of a family;
Kulaparivattaso kulaparivattaso
macchara+aya + ti, denom.pres. Kulūpacchedāyapatipannosamano
thapetvā—D. II. 148
3”,gg. Gotamo—Vin. I. 43
Havingmadethemstand.familyby
RecluseGotamahassetout for the
family;Stha +dpe+tva.caus.absol,
Kulalenaukkhittam mamsapesim- destructionof families;kula + upa +
Vin.III. 63 Chid +a, der.;pati +Pad +ta,pp.
Kulaputtena kimassakaraniyam?-
A pieceof meattakenup by a hawk:
M. I. 463
u(t)+Ksip +ta,pp. Kule ativelam ajjhogalhappatto
Whatshouldbedoneby a family
viharati —S. I. 201
member?;As +ya (Skt.Yat), opt.3%.
Kulani payirupasati —Vin. IV. 98 Extremelyinvolvedin a familyhe
sg.;Kr + aniya,fut.pp.
Keepscloseassociationwith families: abidestoo long; ativelam,ady.;adhi
Kulamaccharikulapaligedhi
—A, Il. to +Gah +ta, pp. +pa +Ap +ta,
sg
265 PP.
lhe onewho is enviousofand strongly
Kulani bahukitthikani
attached
tothefamily;kula+pali Kule jayeyya —S. IV. 250
appapurisakani—A. IV. 278
(pari) +gedha + i, der.; pali is Would be born intoa family;Jan +ya
Familiesof morewomenandless
Magadhiform of pari + eyya,opt. 3”. sg.
men;hahuka+ itthika; appa +
pDurisa
Kulamupasamkamanti
—A. IHI.244 Kule dānam dīyati —A. III. 391
Visit a family;upa +sam +Kram+a Alms is givenin thefamily;Da +iva
Kulānuddayatāya
—Vin. IV. 235
* ntl,pres. 3”. pl, +ti, pass.pres. 3™.sg.
Outofcompassion
forthefamily;
kula+anu 4daya +ta,der.
Kulamubhatopasannam hoti—
Vin. Kulena patisamvidite—Vin. IV. 183
IV. 178 Whenanannouncement is madein
Kulitthinamkuladhītānam
A familyis faithfulon bothsidesor termsofa family;pati +sam + Vid +
kulakumārīnam kulasunhanam
4family
isfaithful
inbothSamgha; i +fa,pp.
kuladāsīnam—Vin. II. 10
dvihi pasannam,upāsakenapi
Forthewives,daughters,girls,
updsikayapi;
Cy.887;ubhato+ Kule paccāiāyati dalidde
daughters—in—law andfemaleslaves
pa +Sad +ta,pp. appannapānabhoianekasiravuttike
of the families; kula + itthinam
yattha kasirena ghasacchado
Kulamkapādakam
anuiānāmi
-Vin. labbhati—M. III. 169
Kulūpako hoti niccabhattiko —Vin.
Heis rebornintoa poorfamilywhere
 Kulesu
Kuvam Kusaciram Kusalo

foodanddrink is scantyandlife is tva, caus. absol.; Bhu(fi)j + a + ti,

Kusaciramnivasetva—Vin. III. 34 Wholesomethingsgo to completion
hard,wherefoodanddrinkis obtained pres. 3™,sg.
Having causedtocladin kusa-grass of cultivation
withso muchdifficulty; pati +a +
Jan +ya +ti, pres.3™.sg.; appa+ strips,
ni + Vas +e +td, caus.absol.
Kullakaviharoesobhummi
Kusalānam dhammānamthitiyā
anna +pana + bhojana;kasira yadidammetta—Vin. II. 304
Kusapatam katum—Vin. I. 285 asammosāyabhiyyobhāvāya
+ vutti+ ika, der.;ghasa + Whatiscalledloveandfriendliness,
Todothecastingof kusa(to draw a vepullāya bhāvanāyapāripūriyā -
acchada;Labh +ya +ti, pass, mydear,isa shallowabiding:
pres.3 sg. lottery);
Ar +tum,inf. M. II. 26
ultānakavihāra, Cy. 1298;
For thestability,non- confusion,
bhummi,
a dearaddress;yadidam,
Kulesu kiccakaranīyāni—A. IV. 87 Kusaladhammacchando dullabho - multiplicationandincreaseofthe
indel.; Mih or Mid + ta, der.
A. Il. 441 wholesomethingsandthecompletion
The workto bedonein thefamilies:
Kr (t) +ya,fut. pp.; Kr +aniya,fit. Veryrareis thedesirefor wholesome ofcultivation;a +sam+Mrs +a,
Kullam nissāya—M. I. 135;S. IV.
pp.; bothtermsgive thesame things;dhamma+chanda;du + der.; bhiyyo,indel.+ Bha + a, der.;
174
meaning labha vipula +ya, der.; pari + pitra (from
With thesupportof theraft;ni +Sri+
Pr) + t, der.
va, absol.
Kusalamdhammamadhigaccheyya
98 —D.I. 224 Kusalāni sīlāni avippatisāratthāni
Kullam bandhanti—Vin. I. 230
(He) would visit families: @+ Pad + (He)wouldattainsomething —A.V. 313
(They) makea raft;Ba(n) dh +a +nti,
ya +eyya,opt.3”. sg. good;adhi +gaccha+eyya,opt. Wholesomemoralqualitiesare for
pres. 3”. pl.
ard Se: remorselessness; a + vi + pati + Smr
Kulesu tikabhojanampannhapessami ta t attha
Kullipamahambhikkhave Kusalādhammāantarahitā, akusalā
—Vin. II. 196
dhammamdesessami, dhammā sammukhībhūtā—A. IHI.
I shallproclaima groupmealof Kusalo ea sahitāsahitassa—A. IV.
nittharanatthāyano gahanatthāya- 404
threein families;ti + ka, der: 196;Vin. II. 201
M. 1.134 Wholesomethingshavedisappeared
pa +Jia +Gpe+ssami.caus.fut. The one who is skilled in what is
Bhikkhus,I shallpreach
the andunwholesomethingshavebeen
Fase: consistent and what is not; sahitassa +
dhamma
comparing
it witharaft present;
antara+Dha + i 4 ta,pp; asahitassa;sam t Dhā ' i t ta,pp.
for crossingover, not for carrying sam+mukha+bhiita,pp.
Kulesu nimantitabhufijanti—Vin.
over;kulla + upama;Dr§+ e +
IV. 177 Kusalo ditthadhammikānam
ssami,fut. I". sg.; ni +Str +ana, Kusalā
dhammā
appamādamūlakā
Beinginvited(they)eatin families; atthānam—D.II. 241;M. II. 144
der.+atthadya;
Grh +ana;der.+ āppamādasamosaranā
—A. V.21
ni + manta+e +i +ta,denom,pp. Skilledin matters
pertaining
tothis
atthaya Wholesome
thingsarerootedin world; ditthadhamma-- ika, der.
Kulesu pahinakānipahīyanti—A. IHI. mindfulness
andcomeunder
Kuvamnaccamkuvamgītamkuvam mindfulness;
sam+0 +Sr
76 Kusalo bherisaddassa—A. II. 185
vāditamkuvamakkhānamkuvam ana,der.
Presentsareexchangedamong The one who is skilled in drum sound
pānissaramkuvamkumbhathūnam?
families;pa +Hi +lya +nti,pass.
—D.HI. 183 Kusalā
dhammā
parihāyanti
—M. II.
pres. 3. pl. Kusalo maggassa—M. III. 5
Whereisdancing,
whereissinging, 114 Skilled in thepath
whereismusic,
whereisnarration, Wholesome thingsareonthedecline;
whereisclapping
andwhereistom parit.Hā -:ya t mi,pres.3'd,pi. Kusalo rathassaamgapaccamganam
tom?;kuvam,indel.;Gai +ta,pp.
—M. I. 395
Vad +e +i + ta, caus. pp. ā t Khya Kusalādhammabhāvanāpāripūrim Skilled in differentpartsofa chariot;
+ana,der; pani +sara Eacehanti
—A. V. 216 amga + pati + amga
 Kusinaraya
Kusinaraya Pavam
addhanamaggapatipanno Dm
130
Embarkedona longdistance journey,
from Kusinarato Pava:addhana+
magga* pati + Pad + ta,pp.
Kusinaraya mandaravapuppham
gahetva—Vin. II. 284
Havingtakena Mandārava (coraltree)
flowerfrom Kusinārā:Grh t e 3.tvā,
absol.
Kusinarayam viharati Upavattane
Mallanam sālavane antarena
yamakasālānamparinibbanas
amaye
—D.II. 169;S. I. 157;A, m. 79
Abidesin Kusinārā,at Upavatt
ana,the
sālagroveofMallas.between
thetwin
Salatrees,duringthetimeof
Parinibbana
Kusinārāyam viharati Baliharane
vanasande—M. II. 238;A, V. 7o
Abidesattheiungle thicke
t named
Baliharanain Kusinārā
Kusītā hīnavīriyā —M. I. 19
Thosewhoarelazyandlackofenergy
Kuhaka ca honti lapaka ca
nemittika ca nippesikā ca labhena
labham niiigimsitāro —D. i. 8
They becomehypocrites,repeatersof
holy words,interprete
Tsofsigns,
€xorcistsand fightersfor moreand
moregains;nimitta+ika, der:;ni(s)
E Pig . ika, der.; ni 3Jigims(desid.
OfJi) +i +tu,der.
Kuhimgami bhavissati?—M. I.
265
Kena
Ke Ke
Wherewill he go?; kuhim,indcl. Kenacidevaantarāyena—Vin. II.
expressed;
Ke, chavesigdle and
a % |
nadeare Magadhi forms of ko,
Kūtāgārāni ullittāvalittāni For thereasonof somedanger; kena
chavosigalo and nado
nivātāni phussitaggalani ci +(d) +eva
pihitavātapānāni—A. I. 101
Kecapurisapuggalaparopariyanane
Gabledhouses,plasteredupand Kenacidevakaraniyena— D. 1.91;
-A. III. 351
down,undisturbed,with well fitted M. II. 118;S. I. 184; IV. TU
Whatistheknowledgeofthe
doorsandclosedwindows;u(t) +Lip For somebusiness;Ar +aniya,
diversities
(highandlow quality)of
* ta,pp.; ava +Lip +ta,pp.; ni + fut. pp.
individuals;
purisa +puggala+para
vāta(windfree);Spr€ 3i + ta,pp.+
+apara (avara) +iva, der. + nana;
aggala; api +Dha +i + ta,pp.+ Kenaei pariyāyena—D. II. 268
keandidne bothare nom. sg.,
vātapāna By any means
Magadhiforms
Ke ākārā ke anvayāyena evam Kenaci manussabhūtena—D. HI.
Kecamayambhante,ke ca
vadetha?—M. III. 292 207
dhammassaannataro!—M. I. 480
Whatarethereasons,whatarethe
Whoarewe,sir; who aretheknowers By anybodybornasa human
sequenceswherebyyou say like this?;
ofthedhamma!: a senseof humilityis
Vad+e +tha,pres.2r4 pl.
expressed;
&@+Jind +tu, der. Kenaci vihethiyamano—Vin. IV.
146 OE
Ke akara, ke anvayayenayasma
Kecamundakake ca dhammassa Beingharassedby somebody;vi+Hid
evam vadesi? —M. I. 319
annataro!—M. I. 177 + Iya + mana,pass.pr-p-
Whatarethereasons,whatarethe
Whoaretheshavenheadedsandwho
Seguences wherebythevenerablesays
aretheknowersof theDhamma?;a Kenajja bhanteyuttam?—Vin. II.
like this ?; anu +aya (from1); Vad+e
derogatoryexpression;munda + 217 NGA
+Sh, pres." se)
ka,der. Venerablesir, with what(constellation
au9: kena +
themoon)is yokedtoday ?;kena
Ke caafifiatitthiya paribbajaka,
Kecamundakāsamanakāke ca aiia; Yui + ta, pp.
bala avyatta,ke ca Tathagatassa
sabhādhammam
iānissanti—S. I.
mahakammavibhamgamjanissanti?
184 Kena nam ;
—M. III. 209
Whoaretheshavenheadeddirty sakkareyyum...khandiccena
Who arethe foolish andincompetent
recluses
andwho will know the ; a vali aya?—A. Il I.
pāliecenavalittacataya-
wanderersof othersects,who will
proceedings
of a meeting?;samana + 196 E,
understand (who aretheyto
ka,der. In whatrespecttheywould trea
understand) theTathāgata'sgreat
him,...isitin respect
of brokenI
expositionof Kamma;afta +tittha +
Ketuiica
vikketuiica—A. 1.116 teeth,greyhairandwrinkledskin?;
iva, der; Jan + n@+ i + ssanti,fut.
Tobuyandto sell; Krt +tum,inf; vi + sat + Kr + eyyum,opt. 3”. pl;
ATE
Kri +tum,inf, khandita +ya, der.; palita + ya
o : to .. Fr) Ē E , u
der; vali + taca + ta, der.
Ke ca chavesigāleke pana
Kenaciubbalhagacchati—Vin. IV.
sīhanāde?—D. ITI. 24 I o. INE \
297 Kena nu kho upāyena?—Vin. 1.79;
Who is thedirtyiackal andwhatis
Beingoppressed
bysomebody, she IV. 112
lion's roar?; a derogatory sense is
goes;u(t) I Bādh 1 ta,pp. By what means?
335
 Kena
Kevalampi Kese
Kevalam
Kena phāsuhoti? — Vin. II. 140
KevalakappamJetavanam Kesakambalamnivasetva—Vin. III.
Withwhat,is it easy? and
night;
Kevalam
+api;rattim+
obhāsetvā—5, I. I 34
divam
Havingcausedto illuminatealmost Clad in a blanket made of hair; ni + Vas
entireJetavana
(monastery) e e t fvā, caus. absol.
214 Kevalam
bhikkhācariyāya—A. IHI.
Venerable
sir, whatis your honour’s 225
KevalakappamNalandampatakam Kesaggamattampiatikkāmetvā
need? Onlybybegging;kevalam,indcl.;
parihareyyum —M. I. 379 karoti—Vin. III. 151
bhikkha
+cariyā
They would carrybannersalmost Makesthecell causingit to exceed
everywherein Nālandā:pari t Hr ta (thelengthandbreadth)evena hair’s
V. 328 Kevalamvassagananamattena —A.
* eyyum,opt. 3". pl. breadth;ati +Kram +e +tvd,caus.
Withwhatmodeof livelihood IV.36
shouldwe live; kena+As +ya Bymerecountingof years(age); absol.
Kevalakappamvanasandam
(Skt.vat), opt.3”. Sg.; vi +Hr + vassa + ganana + matta
obhāsetvā—Vin. I. 26 Kesantamna dassāpetvāvetthito-
tabba,fut. pp. '
Havingcausedto illuminatealmostall
Kevalam saddhamattakena—M. I. Vin. IV. 202
the forest-thicket
Kena hāyetha?—A. III. 48 164;II. 211 Muffled up withoutlettinganybody
For whatreasononewouldgo down?; lustonmerefaith to seetheendofthe hair;kesa+
Kevalakappamsamghabhedāya
Ha + (y) + etha,mid.opt.3%.sg. anta;Dr§ +ya +Gpe+tva,caus.
thito—A. II. 239
Kevalassa
dukkhakkhandhassa absol.; Vest+i +ta,pp.
The onewho hasstoodalmostfor the
Kenāsi ussāhito?—Vin. 11.190 samudayo—S. II. 1
schismof theSamgha
By whomareyou instigated?;kena Origin
of theentireaggregate
of Kesamassumoharetva kasayani
+ asi: As + si, pres. 2”. sg.> u(t) + dukkha;
sam+u(t) +aya (from I) vatthāniacchādetvā
—D. I. 115;M:
Kevalakappā ca AmgaMagadhā-
Sah + e+ i+ ta,caus.Pp. I. 179;II. 56; Vin. I. 22, ohārāpetvā,
Vin. I. 27
Kevalā
paripūrābālakhiddā—A. V. acchadapetva
Almostall peopleof Amgaand
Kevattā maāāemacchavilope—M. 103 Havingcausedto removehair
Magadha
1.456;A. IV. 91 Completely
childish sport andbeard andto puton brown-red
Just asfishermenat thefish haul:a cloths:o (ava) +Hr +e + (va,caus.
Kevalakappā ca deva T avatimsa-
SimileSrequentlyusedin thesutrasto Kevaloparipūro bāladhammo—M. absol.; kasaya+ a, der.; @+ Chad +
D. II. 207
rebukethosewhoare noisy; maccha 1.138 e +tva, caus. absol.
Almostall thegodsof Tāvatimsa
* vi + Lup +a, der. lustcompletestupidity
(heaven)
Kesamassumkappetvā—M. II. 155
Kevattā maāhemacchevilopenti - Kevalohāyamakusalarāsi yadidam
Kevalaparipunnamparisuddham
A. HL 31 paficanivarana —A. III. 65 e + tva,denom.absol.
brahmacariyam- 8. I. 105
As if fishermencatchfish; vi +Lup + Thisissolelya heapof —.

The highestway of life, complete

€ +nti, caus.pres, 374pl. unwholesome factors,what is Kesamissamjatamissam
in itself andpure:kevala +pari
calledfive fetters;kevalo + hi
+ Pr + ta,pp.; pari +Sudh +
Kevalakappam Gijjhakitam +avam udake pavāhetvā—Vin. I. 33
la, pp.
obhāsetvā—D. II. 220;S. III. 121 Causingto floatthehair,theturban,
Havingcausedto illuminatealmost Keva imekassavati na iānanti - theprovisioncontainer,andthe
Kevalampi rattim kevalampi
entireVulture'speak;kevalakappam, Vin.IHI. 135
divasamkevalampirattindivam-
indcl; 0 +Bhas +e 4 vd, caus. Theydo notknow who aretheseor kesamissam,
Cv.972
M. III. 161
absol. Whose
arethese;va +iti; Jan + na-
Entirenight,entiredayandentireday
i mi,pres.3. pl. Kese oropetum—Vin. II. 133

837
 Kese
To removehair:o 3 Ruh 4
e+ tum,
caus.inf,
Kese ehedāpetvākāsāy
aechādetvā
—Vin. II. 25
Havingcausedtocut hairandto wear
brown-redcloths:thisPhrase is
connectedwith Mahāpaiāpatī
Gotami;Chid +ape +
tuā, caus.
absol.
Kesepakiritvā —A. II. 241
Lettingthehairbedisorderly;pa +
kir + i +iā, absol.:Pakiriva or
Parikiriya also is used
Kese pakiriya kandanti,
bahapaggayhakandanti,
chinnapapātampapatanti,avattanti
vivattanti—D. II. 158
(They)cry with disorderlyhair.
cry withclaspedhands,jump down
theprecipiceandrol] on androll back
on theground:Krand +a+ nti,pres.
3”. pl.; pa + Grh +ya, meta.absol.;
pa t Pat -- a -t ati,pDres.
33.pi.; ā 3
Vrt +a+ nii, Pres. 3”. pl.; vi + Vre4
a * nti,pres. 3”.
> pl.
Kesesugahetvā—D. I. 234
Havingtakēnby thehair;Grh +
ed
tvā, absol. ; kese.
Su, loc. in connection
with the root Grh
Kesesuparāmasitvā—M. II. 47
Havingpattedon thehair;para +Mrs
" 4 t iwā, absol. x Having
Kehici kehici kiccakaranīyehi
vyāvato—D. II. 270
Occupiedwith dutiesofthis kind or
that kind: kiceg and karanīva give
Koecideva Ko namo
Kocideva
thesamemeaning;vi +&@+
Vr or Pr
Kocidevavatta —D. 1. 139 Kondafifio gottena—D. IL. 3
+fa,pp. Kondafifiaby clan
Anycritic;Vac+tu,der.
Ko evamaha?~Vin. III, 43 Ko taya attho? —Vin. I. 85
Kocchenakeseosanhenti—Vin. II.
Who said thus?:evam +aha: a+Ah What is theuseof you?
107 3
ra, pst. 3", 9g.
Theycauseto smooththeirhair with a
comb;0 +sanha +e+ nti, denom. Kotūhalamamgalenasuddhim
Kokāsakaiāto bhavissati—A. IV. 118 paceāgantum—A. III. 439 I
pres. a pl.
Fully grown budswill set To fall backon thebelief of auspicious
Kojaiia maranamsuve? —M. II. signs; ditthasutamutamamgalena, Cy.
Ko caham bho ko ca samanassa III. 414; kutūhala t a, der.1
187
Gotamassapafiaveyyattiyam
Whowouldknowthatdeathcomes mamgala;pati 1 a +Gam +tum,inf
janissami! —M. I. 175
tomorrow ?; Jan +ya (Skt. yat),opt.
Sir, whoamI andbeingwhom
3”.sg.;suve,indcl. Kotahalamamgaliko —A. III. 206
Shall] understandthedistinction
The one who is a believerof
ofthe recluseGotama’s isdom?;
Kottetvacikkhallena madditva auspicioussigns;kotihala +
pannd + veyyattiva = viyatta +
paribhandam limpissāma—Vin. II. mamgala +ika, der.
ya, der.; Jan +n@ +i + ssami,fut.
[*
291
sg,
Having crushedandmixed(them)with Kotthaliya va yena kenaci
mudwewill plasterthefloor; Kur +e paticchannam— Vin. III. 189
Ko cāham bho ko ea sīhomigarāiā?
t mā,absol.;Mrd +a +i +tva, Coveredby a sackor by anyother
—D.IHI. 24
absol.;Li(m)p +i + ssama,fut. 1".pl. thing
Sir, whoamI andwho is thelion,the
king of beasts?: ko +ca +aham
Kottetva
vakottapetva
va —Vin. IV. Kodhano hoti upanahi—D. III. 45;
264 M. II. 245;A. III. 334
Kocaharo bhavatanhāya?—A. V.
Havingpoundedor having caused to The onewho is angryandharbours
116
pound(them); Kut +dpe + tvd, caus. erudge:Krudh +a +ana,der.; upa +
Whatis thefood for cravingfor
absol. Nah +ī, der.
becoming? ; ko +ca +aharo
Kotthakam māpesi—Vin. II. 159 ātugā 22
Kodhabalo matugamo—A. IV. 223
Koci kiāei vakkhati —A. IHI. 129
Caused
toconstructa porch;Mā3 The powerof womankindis anger
Somebodywill Saysomething;Vac+
dpe+s +i, caus.pst.3”.sg.
ssati(Skt.syati),fut. 3’. sg.
Kodhasamantamvacam nicchareta
—M. 1.95
Kocideva kathāsallāpo— D. I. 107
1. 77;IHI. 161 One who uttersa word borderingon
A conversationofany kind:ko +ci 4
caused
toprepare
a seatinthe anger, ni(s) + Car + e+ tu; caus. der.
(d) +eva;sam +Lap +a, der.
Store-room; pa + Jaa + Gpe + twā,
caus,absol.
Kocideva puriso uppalieyya —A.IHL Ko nāmo āyasmā,kathaāca
403 panāyasmantamsabrahmacārī
Kotihake
pāturahosi
—Vin.I. 291
A personis born,whoeverhemaybe; iānanti? —M. I. 150;A. V. 198
Appeared
atthegate-w
ay;patu +€ What is thenameof thevenerable,
u(t) +Pad +ya +eyya,opt.3”. SE.
ahosi
how do theco-celibatesidentifythe
339
 Ko namoyam
Ko pana Kopana Koleyyaka

venerable?;sa
a a).
3-ōrahmacārī;
ar?
Ian -:
Paccayois followed by a subordinate Whatistheretosayaboutthosewho a, der.; adhi +I +ya +mana,pr.p.
na + nti,pres, 3”.
2 pl.
clause,it is connectedto themain practise
it frequently!;bahulam +
clause by yena karonti Komāriyo paiāpatiyo —A. IV. 210
Ko nāmoyambhante
Young wives;kumara+ iva, der.
dhammapariyāyo?—D. 1.46
Ko nu kho hetu ko paccayositassa Kopanavādorūpiyassa?—S. I. 89 -
Venerable
sir,whatmodeof
pātukammāya?— M. II. 74;S. I. 90 Komudim cātumāsinim
dhamma-presentation
is this?:
254 What
isthere
tosayaboutsilver? āgamissāmi—M. III. 79
namo + ayam
Whatis thecause,whatis thereason I shall awaitthefull moonofthe
formanifesting
a smile?:sita=Skt. Kopanāyasmantānam
assāso,kim fourthmonthnamedKomudī; Komudī
Ko nukhoamhakam
mantam
smita;pātu -- kamma, if the indel. balam?
—M. I. 64 cātumāsinītipacchimakattika
samharati?—Vin. IV. 308
patu isfollowed by a vowel “r” is Whatisyourvenerables'support, punnamā,sā hi kumudānam
Who carriesour secret?(who foiled
inserted,eg.patu + r + ahosi whatisauthority?;assāsoti atthitayakomudi,catunnam
ourplan?);sam +Hr +a +ti,pres.
3”. sg. avassayopatitthā upatthambho, vassikānam māsānam pariyosānattā
Kopaiica dosaficaappaceayahiea C. li 7 cātumāsinītica vuccati;
pātukaroti —A. I. 124 āgamessāmītiudikkhissāmi,Cy. IV.
Ko nu kho bho afifio mamaVijite
He manifestsanger,hatredand Kopanīye kuppati—A. III. 110 137; kumuda-- ī, der; catu + masa,
sukhamedheyyatha,anfatra
dissatisfaction;patu +karoti,pres. Becomes angryon irritablematters; a. der. + ini, der; 4 + Gam + i (e)+
bhavantehi?
—D. II, 233
a SE, Kup+aniya,fut ._pp.;Kup +ya + ti, ssami,fut. I". sg.
Who elsewouldbehappyin my
kingdomeKceptfor you,sirs?: pres.3". se,
Ko panateNandamāte Komudiyā cātumāsiniyā pungāya
Edh t eyyātha,opt.
3'i Sg.
bhikkhusamghassaabbhāgamanam Kopanesa
bhadramukha?—A. IV. 63 punnamāyarattiyā —D. I. 47
arocesi? —A. IV. 64 Whois this handsome?
Ko nu kho bho janati jivitanam? - On thefull moonnightof Komudi, the
O Nanda’smother,who informedyou
D. II. 233 lastmonth
of the season
of four
ofthe arrivalofa groupof bhikkhus?; Kopinaniddamsani
—D. II. 183
Sirs,s.who k 's all about life?;
whoknows ife' au, months;Cy. saysthat this is thetime
Wandakamāte (voc.wg.),herethe That
whichexposes
privateparts;ni +
interr.p.; Jan +nd +ti, pres. 3. sg. at which whitewaterlily (kumuda)
stem has beentakenas Nandamātā;
Dr§+ana+i, der. fully blossom,that is why the name
abhi +& +gamana;@+ Rue +e +5
Ko nu kho hetuko paccayo Komudi, 139-40;accordingto the
+Fcaus.pst.3™.sg. Komanta, kosaddhata? —A. IV. 103 Buddhist calander thereare only
iddhipadabhavanaya?-S. V. 263
What is the cause, what is the reason Whois thethinker,who is the threeseasonsfor theyear, Hemanta
Ko panavado kayenavācāya believer?Orwhoisthewiseandwho
for thecultivationofthe basesof (winter), Gimha(summer)and
anuvidhīyanāsu?—M. I. 43 isthefaithful?:Man +tu, der.;sa (I)
Psychicpower?: iddhi +pada Vassāna(rainy), eachseasoncovers
What is thereto say in referenceto (Vedic.
Srat)+ Dha + tu, der. four months
physical and vocal performances?; anu
Ko nu kho hetu ko paccayopāpassa
+vi +Dh@+ tya, +ana,pass.der. Komarakamidam bhikkhave
kammassakiriyāya? —A.V. 86 Kolambepighatepipūretvā
Whatis thecause,whatis thereason ariyassa
vinaye—A. I. 261 patisameti —Vin. I. 209
for doingevil action? Ko panavadochavayaavijjaya? —A. Thisischildishin thedisciplineof the Causestokeepin rightorder,after
Il. 311 noble;kumdraka+ a, der. makingthepotsandthevesselsfull;
Ko nu kho hetuko paccayo?yena- Whatis thereto sayaboutdisgusting
Pr +e +tva,caus.absol.;pati +Sam
D.II.139;
S.11,
224 ignorance?;Vad+ a, der. Komarabrahmacariyam
carati +e +ti, caus..pres.3”.sg.
Whatis thecause,whatis thereason? mante
adhiyamano—A. ILI. 224
whereby;if thePhraseko hetu,ko Heleads
a celibatelifeof a student Koleyyakasilavatipatibbata—A.
While
studyingtheMantras; kumara+ IV. 93
 Koliyesu ivakā
Kosaj=Toi.. a Ko
08santo Kosiyakārake ) IHI)
|

( The wife) who has a gentle birth, is Ī ko ; Ī i i

+vi +Muc +ta,pp. sam+Vrt +a+ nti,pres. 3. pL; Kosala to Savatthi II I
virtuousandfaithfulto thehusband:
yiriva+Grambha UI )
koleyvakātikulasampanna,Cy: IV. Ko visesoko adhippayo kim Kosalesuviharatiaīīiataramim I, i
47; kula +eyya + ka, der.; pati + nanakaranam, panditassabalena?- āei i” ranass > Ē 1 |
Kosantokam paccacikkhasi? —M. vanasange 5.1. 170,179. I
vata
S. II. 24 I, 428 Abides in a iungle- thicket in the I
What is thedistinction,specialityand You,beingwho,rejectswhom?;As + kingdomof Kosala
Koliyesu viharati Uttaram nāma differenceof thewise in relationto na,pr.p.;pati +a +Khya +si,
Koliyānam nigamo - S. IV. 340 the fool? intens,
pres.2”. sg. Kosalesu viharati Nalakapāne
Abidesat themarkettownofthe
palāsavane—M. I. 462
Koliyas,namedUttara,in thekingdom Ko visesoko adhippāyo kim Kosambiyamviharati Gamgaya Abides in thekingdomof Kosalaat
of the Koliyas nānākarapamyadidam nadiyā
tīre—S. IV. 179 the forestof palāsa(Judas tree)in
tumhakaficeva amhākamca? - M. I, Abides
onthebankof theriverGamgā Nalakapāna
Koliyesu viharati Kakkarapattam 64 inKosambi
namaKoliyanam nigamo—A. IV. Whatis thedistinction,
speciality
and Kosalesu viharati Salayam
281 differenceof you andus ?; ko Kosambiyam
viharatiGhositārāme brahmanagame—S. V. 227
Abidesatthemarkettownofthe
adippāyotiko adhikapayogo,Cy. Il. ~S.IL115;Vin. I. 337 Abidesatthebrahminvillagenamed
KoliyasnamedKakkarapatta, in the
9; yadidam, indcl.coniunctive Abides
atthemonastery
of Ghositain Sala, in thekingdomof Koliyas
kingdomof the Koliyas
Kosambi
Ko visesoko adhippāyo kim Kosalesu viharati Sundarikaya
Koliyesu viharati Sajjanelam nama
nānākaranamsutavato Kosambiyam
viharati nadiya tīre —5. I. 167
Koliyānam nigamo—A. II. 62
ariyasāvakassaassutavatā Badarikārāme —Vin. IV. 16
Abidesatthemarkettownof the Abideson thebank of the river
puthuiianena? —
S. IV. 208 Abides
atthemonasterynamed
Koliyas namedSaiianelā,in the Sundarikāin thekingdomof Kosala
Whatis thedistinction,
speciality
and Badarikā
in Kosambi
kingdomof the Koliyas
differenceof a learnednobledisciple
Kosalesu viharati Himavantapadese
in comparisonwith theunlearned Kosambiyam
viharati Simsapavane
Koliyesu viharati Haliddavasanam araūhakutikāyam—5. I. 116
worldling? Sru +ta,pp. + vantu, -8,V.437
nāma Koliyānam nigamo—M. I. Abides in a forest-hutat the
der.; puthu +jana Abides
attheSimsapagrovein
387; S. V. I15 Himālayaregionin thekingdomof
Kosambi Kosala
Abidesatthemarkettownof the
Kosakaharapiaddhakosakaharapi
KoliyasnamedHaliddavasana, in the
beluvāhārāpiaddhabeluvāhārāpi
- Kosambiyam
sambhavesi
—Vin.I.
kingdom of the Koliyas Kosi nāma saceamāha, ko musā?-
M. II. 7 277
A. 1. 189
Thosewho areeatinga bowl of Metwithin Kosambi;sam +Bhii +e
Ko visesoko adhippayosokim Who, on earth,speakstruthandwho
food,halfa bowl of food,one "S* i, caus.pst. 3’, sg.
nanakaranamTathagatassa speaksfalsehood?; ko +si, si is used
beluvafruitandhalfa beluvafruit;
arahatosammāsambuddhassa hereas an indcl., sometimesit is used
pannhavimuttena bhikkhuna? —S;
kosakais a specialbowl used Kosalesu
carikam
caramāno
—D. I. as su; ndéma, indcl. expressing
in richfamilies,Cy.ll. 238;kosaka 87;M.I, 285;S. V. 352
III. 66 bewilderment;a +Ah +a, pst. 3%.
+Ghara +api While
touringin thekingdomof
Whatis thedistinction,Speciality sg.; this is also usedfor thepresent
Kosala:Car +a +mana, pr. p.
anddifferenceof Tathāgata,
the meaning
Kosaiiāya samvattanti,no
Arahantandfully EnlightenedOne,
viriyārambhāya —A. IV. 280 Kosalesu
ianapadesu
Sāvatthim
in comparisonwitha bhikkhu, Kosiyakarake upasamkamitva-
They leadto indolence,not to Bāechantassa
—Vin. IHI.233
iberatedthroughwisdom?:panna Vin. III. 224
exertion;kusita (da) +ya; der.;
Forthe
onegoingfromavillagein Havingapproached
silk-makers;
kosa
 Kosiyamissakam
+iva, der; Kr +aka,der; upa 4
sam + Kram +i +tva,absol.
Kosiyamissakamsanthatamkatum
—Vin. III. 224
Tomakea spreadmixedwithsilk; Kr
+ tum, inf.
Kosiya khaggamnibbahi — Vin. I.
347
Causedto taketheswordoutofthe
sheath;ni + Vah+e + i, caus.pst. 3%
SEy
Kosiyā khaggampavesesi— Vin. I.
347
Causedto puttheswordintothe
sheath;pa + Vig+e +s + i, caus.pst.
e, Ng
Kosohitavatthaguyho—M. II. 136
The onewho hasthemalesignput
in a sheath;kosa + ohita: 0 +Dha +
i + ta, pp.; vatthaguyhameansthat
whichshould be concealedwith
clothes,thesex organ
Ko hi bhantevannārahassavannam
na karissati? —M. I. 387
Venerablesir, who will notpraise
the one who deserves praise 7;
vanna+ araha; Kr +i + ssati,fut.
Suse:
Ko hetu sāmaggiyā?—M. IHI. 9
What is thecauseof unity?;samagga
t (i) t ya, der.
Kyāham ayyā karomi?—Vin. II. 78;
IIL. 162
Sirs,whatamI to do?:kim +aham;Kr
+o +mi,pres. 1".sg.
Kva Kva nānattam
Kyattha
Kyāham ayyānamaparaiihāmi?- Where
wereyou?; kva, indcl.; a +Hii
Vin. II. 78; III. 162 (Bhi)+a+s +i, pst. 2". sg
Do | offendyou, sirs?;ana +Radh +
ya +mi,pres, 1".sg. Kvatthaāvuso?—A. V. 196
Friend,
whois here(there)?;ko3
Kyaham ussahami?—Vin. I. 347 ettha;
Cy.takesthe term as ko 'ttha
Am | able?; u(t) +Sah +a +mi,pres. āwitoandsaysko 'ttāha
āvusoti ko
[ft ise: ellhaāvuso
Kyāham karissāmi uyyānam Kvatthotassa dinnena? —Vin. IV.
gantvā?—Vin. IV. 162 155
Whatshall I do aftergoing to the
garden?;Gam +tva,absol. aho;Dā 3:ta,pp.
Kyaham tam ayye na icchissāmi?-
Vin. IV. 212
Venerable,why shouldn'tI longfor
you ?; /s +ya + i +ssami,fut. I". sg.
Kyaham tena acchannopikarissami,
yaham na paribhufjissami? —Vin.
Ill. 215
Evenif I amclad,whatshall I do with
it which I shall notuse?; @ +Chad+
fa,pp. + api; yam +aham;pari +
Bhu(fi)j +i + ssami, fut. 1". sg:
Kyaham bhanteayyassadaiiāmi? -
Vin. III. 134
Venerablesir, whatshouldI giveto
you? dajja +mi,pres.1".sg.
Kyāham bhāyissāmi?—S. V.
387
Why shouldI bescared?; Bhī--i '
ssami,fut. I. sg..
Kyāham vakkhāmi? — A. V. 198
WhatshouldI say; Vac+ssami
(syami)fut, I". sg., usedaspres.
Kva ahosi? —
D. II. 132
345
 Khagganafica
Khagganaficadhovanampatum-
Vin. I. 342
To drink the water with which the
swordsarewashed;Pa + tum,inf.
Khafjamano anubandhi—Vin. I. 186
Followed(him) while limping:khafija
+ mana, pr.p.
Khatakhatasadda—Vin. I. 188
With thesoundofkhata khata:onom.
Khanakicco loko —A. IV. 225
World is a placewherework shouldbe
doneat therightmoment
Khanittim adaya—Vin. I. 270
Takingthehoe;4 +Da +ya, absol.
Khano va layo va muhuttova —A.
IV. 137
Instant,brief time(musicaltime)or
moment
Khandakari chiddakari
sabalakari kammāsakārī, na
santatakari na santatavuttisilesu-
A. II. 187
The onewho is notcongruous,not
consistent,stained,spottedandnot
continuousandpersistentin moral
virtues;Kr +a +i, der.
Khandaphullapatisamkharanam
vannitam—Vin. II. 286
The restorationofdilapidatedpartshas
beenpraised;khanda +Phulla +pati
* sam(s) +Kr +ana,der.; vanna +e
Khattiyakula Khamā
Khattiyā
Born
ofroyal family,brahminfamily Forgivehouseholder,in theword of
and
noblefamily;rajan +ya theSamgha;Ksam +a, imper.2”. sg
Khattiya anuyuttanegamaceva KhamatamAmbatthassamanavassa
+| +ta, denom. pp.
iānapadā ea—D. I. 136 —D. I. 108
Therulers,thevassalsandthosewho PleaseforgiveAmbattha,theyoung
Khandaphullam patisamkharonti-
arelivingin themarkettownsand man;Ksam +a +tam,imper.mid.
A. III. 263
countryside; anu + Yuj +ta, pp.; serge:
They repairwhatis brokenandcracked
nigama
+a, der.;janapada +a, der.
(dilapidated);
pati +sam/(s)+Kr +0
Khamati te idanti puttho samano
+nti,pres. 3”. pl.
Khattiya
pathavibhinivesa—A. II]. akkhamamanamaha khamatiti,
363 khamamanamaha nakkhamatiti-
Khandakhandikam chindeyya—
S.
Therulersareobsessedwith the D. TfL.45
II. 88
earth;
pathavi+abhi +ni +Vis Beingauestionedasto whetheryou
(He) would cut it pieceby piece:
a,der. agreewith this,you said,while
Chi(n)d +evya,opt. 3". sg.
disagreeing,thatyou agreeandwhile
Khattiyābalādhitthānā—A. III. 363 agreeing,thatyou disagree;Prch ' ta,
Khandakhandikam chedapetva-
Therulersareintenton power;bala + pp.; AS +mana,pr.p.; a+ Ah +a,
Vin. IIT. 43
adhi+thana pst. 3”. sg.
Havingcausedto cut thempieceby
piece;kKhanda+khanda +ika, der.;
Khattiyabhisekena abhisitto —A. I. Khamati samghssatasmatunhi
Chid + Gpe +tva, caus. absol.
107 evametamdharayami —Vin. I. 56
Annointedin accordance
with the It is agreeableto theSamgha,hence
Khatam upahatamattanam
rulers’
consecration;abhi +Sie + silent,thusI hold it; Ksam +a +ti,
pariharati —A. I. 89, 154
der;abhi +Sic +ta,Pp. pres. 3. sg.; Dhr +aya + mi, caus.
He leadsa life woundedandruined;
pres. 1*. sg.
Ksan +ta,pp.; upa + Han +ta,pp.
Khattiyomuddhāvasitto—D. I. 70
pari +Hr +a +ti, pres. 3”. se.
Anointedruler,muddha +ava +Sic Khamatu ca meayasmaAnando —A.
¥ta,pp. V. 198
Khatayam bhikkhave raja,
May thevenerableĀnandaforgiveme:
upahatayam bhikkhaveraja—D. I.
Khantibala
samanabrahmana
—A. Kgam +a+ tu, imper. 3™.sg.
86
IV.223
Bhikkhus,
thisking(Ajatasattu)
is
Recluses
andbrahminshavethepower Khamayye mayasipatita —Vin. IV.
wounded,thisking is ruined;khato+
offorgiveness 175
ayam;upa +hato +ayam
Pleaseforgiveme,lady.I havecaused
Khantiyā
bhiyyo
naviiiati—S.I. 226 you fall down; khama+ayye;Ksam +
Khattam amantesi—D. I. 112
Thereisnothing
moretobefoundthan a, imper.2"4_sg.;maya +asi; Pat +e
Addressed the attendant;@ +manta +
lolerance;
bhiyyo,indel.:Vid +ya + + j + fa, caus. pp.
@+s +i denom.pst. 3”. sg
li Pass. pres. 3”. Se.
Khamā ea bhaveyyāthasoratā ca -
Khattiyakulābrāhmanakulā
Vin. I. 349
rāiaāīiakuliāuppannā—M. II. 183
You shouldbepatientandgentle;Bhū
 Khamapetva
+a+ eyyvatha,
opt. 2™.pl.; su +Ram
t ta, + a, der.
Khamapetvaniccabhattikam
patthapesum—Vin. IV. 272
Havingcausedto apologise(they)
madetheregularmealre-establish:
Ksam +ape +tva,caus.absol.;
pa +Stha +ape +s +um,caus.
pst.3”.pl.
Khamo hoti sitassaunhassa
iighaechāyapipāsāya
damsamakasavātātapa
sirimsapasamphassānam,
duruttānam durāgatānam
vacanapathānam uppannānam
sārīrikānam vedanānam
dukkhānam tippānamkharānam
katukānamasātānamamanāpānam
pānaharānamadhivāsakaiātiko hoti
—M. I. 10; IHI. 97
He is competentenoughto bearcold
andwarm(weather),hungerandthirst.
contactwith gadflies,mosquitoes,
wind,sunlightandserpents;he is of
thenatureof toleratingill-spokenand
unwelcomewordsandenduringarisen
bodily feelings,painful,sharp,coarse,
piercing,unpalatable,distressingand
menacingto life; damsa+ makasa+
vata +Gtapa +sirimsapa +
samphassa; du +® + Vae+ta,DD.;
du + 6) i ā t Gam 3.ta,Pp.; vacana
+patha; u(t) +Pad +ta,pp.; sarira
+ika, der.;pana +hara: Hr +a,
der.;adhi +Vas +aka, der. +Jati +
ika, der.
Khambhakatenaantaragharena
gantabbam—Vin. II. 213
Shouldnotgo insidethehouseor
Kharattaficeva Kharāiinam Khipitasaddo
amongthehousessupportingthebody Kharāiinamnivāsetvā—A. II. 207 Khādanīyambhoianīyam
with thehand;khambha+kata,pp.; Havingcladwith a rough skin of Aiina paccamsenasamvibhaiati —A. IV.
Gam +tabba,fut. pp. antelope;
Ahara +ajina; ni + Vas +e 266
+tva, caus. absol Distributeshardandsoft food
Khambham katva —Vin. IV. 189 accordingto theneedof eachor
Giving supportto thebody(with Kharoabadhouppajji— Vin. IV. 70 separately;Khdd +a + aniya,fut
hands);katiyamhatthamthapetvā Aseriousillness occurred; u(t) +Pad pp.; Bhuj +a +aniya, fut.pp.; pati
katakhambo,Cy. 89] +ya+1,pst.3. sg +amsena;sam + vi +Bhaj +a +ti,
Dres.:
;
2". sg.
Khaya dosassa vitadosatta —M. I. si; Kharoābādhouppaiii
A. IIL. 376; Vin. I. 183 lohitapakkhandika
— D. If. 127 Khādanīye khādanīyattampharanti
Dueto non-hatredowing to the Thereoccurred a dire sickness, Amongthehardfoodstheyarenot
exhaustionof hatred;vi +J +ta,pp. dysentry reckoned
ashardfoods;Sphar+a +
+ dosa + tta, der. nti,pres. 3. pl.
Khaya mohassavitamohatta—M. I. Khārakaiāto bhavissati—A. IV. 117
5; A. III. 376; Vin. I. 183 : 2
Ta" Hii, preS. A". pi Shoots will set
Due to non-delusionowing to the
exhaustionof delusion Khallakabaddhā
upāhanāyo
—Vin. I. Khārāpatacchikampi karonti —M. I.
186 87
Khaya ragassavitaragatta —M. I. 5; Shoes
withheelcoverings:
Badh
1 ta, They inflict thepunishmentof
A. HI. 376; Vin. I. 183 pp. khārāpatacchika in whichthe
Dueto non-attachment owing to convict's body is pierced with the
theexhaustionof passion;vi +/ Khalopiya
kummasam
gahetva—M. weapons and put pungent salt into
+la, pp. +rdga + tta, der.: Il.52 the wounds, Cy. II. 59
khayāand ragatta both are abl. Having
takenthejunket from the
of reason basket;
khalopiyatipacchito,Cj Khittacitto patijanati —Vin. I.
286;Grh +e +tva, abso! 121
Khaya viraga nirodha caga
He acknowledgesthathe hasbeenout
patinissagga—M. III. 31 Khānumate
viharati ofmind; Ksip +fa,pp. +citto
For thereasonof exhaustion,non- Ambalatthikayam
=D. 1. 127
attachment,
cessation,giving upand Abides
atthegroveof mangosprouts Khipanti va upakkhalanti vā —D. II.
abandonment:vi +raga: Raj + a, inthevillagenamedKhanumata
250
der.; ni +Rudh +a, der.; Tyaj +a,
Sneezeor slip; Ksip or Ksup 3
der.;pati +ni +Srj +a, der. Khadaniyam
ussannam
—Vin. IV. 91 -upa + Skhal +«
Hard
foodwasplenty;u(t) +Syad +
Kharattaficeva kāyasmimokkami - fa,pp
D. IHI.86
Khipitasaddo va ukkasitasaddova -
Coarsenessalso occurredon the Khādanīyamussādiyittha—Vin. IV.
M. II. 5,122
body(bodybecame
rough);khara 99
Soundof sneezingor clearingof
+tla, der; o (ava) +Kram +i,pst. Hard
foodwasabundant:
tu;
throat; Ksip or Ksup +
aTe Na+ i+ ttha, pass pst
aS u(t) +Kas +i +ta, pp
349
 Khipite
Khipite jivatha bhantetivadanti-
Vin, If. 140
livelong”;Jiv +a +tha,imper.2 Ind
to
pl; Vad +a +nti,pres.3''.pl.
Khipite iīvāti vutte tappaecayā
iīveyya vā mareyyavā? — Vin. II.
140
Whenit is said'Live long' at
somebody’ssneezing,would he live
or die for thatreason?;Jiv +a, imper-
2”. Sg. +iti; Vae+ ta,pp.; tam(tat)
+paccaya;Jiv +a +eyya,opt. 3”.
sg.; Mr +a +evya,opt. 3". sg.; va,
indcl.
Khippaīīieevaantaradhāpesum-
Vin. IH. 8
Causedit to disappearquickly:antara
+Dha + Gpe+s + um,caus.pst. 3”.
pl.
Khippanisanti ca hoti kusalesu
dhammesu—A. II. 97
The onewho is of swift attentionon
wholesomethings;ni +Sam+ti + 7
der.
Khippamevaantaradhāyati—M.I.
253
Disappearsinstantly;antara +Dha +
ya + ti, pres. 3. sg.
Khippamevaāiānissati—D. II. 40;
Vin. I. 7
(He) will understand
veryguickly;ā3
Jan +nd +i +ssati,fut. 3. sg.
Khippamevatīram vāheti—A. IV.
198
Causesto carryit to theshoreat once;
350
Khīnā Khina Khuddake
Vah +e 1 ti, caus.pres. 3'i, sg, The milk, whichhaspassedmilkhood
Khīnābhavanetti—A. IV. 105
andnotyetreachedthestateof curd;
Destroyed
is desire,(desire is called
Khippam pariyāpaiiati, na bhavanetti
becauseit leadsto vi +Ha +i +ta, root redup.,pp.; a +
ciratthitiko hoti —A. IV. 339 sam +pa +Ap +la, pp.
becoming);
Ksi +ta,pp.; Ni +ti,
Comesto anend soon,doesnot last der.
long;pari +a4+Pad +ya +ti, pres. Khilatthayi thito —A. IV. 192
3". sg.; cira + thiti + ka, der. Stood firm like a post;khila +thayi:
Khīnāmeāsavātipatiiānāti —A. V.
174 Stha+i, der.
Khippam yeva visesagamihoti —A. “Myinfluxesareexhausted”,he
II. 186 acknowledges;
pati +Jan +na + ti, Khilam nikhanitvā sambandhitvā
He reachesthedistinctivestatevery Te
3.dasg.
pres. civaram sibbenti—Vin. II. 116
Soon
Havingfixed a post(on theground)
Khīnāsavassa bhikkhuno dasabalāni andjoined therobe-materialto it
Khippam hohisi anāsavo— D. II. 144 -Ā.V.176 (they)causeto sew therobematerial;
Soon,you will be freefrom influkes: Tenpowersof'thebhikkhuwho has ni +Khan + i +tva,absol.;sam +
khippam,adv.; Hii (Bhii)+ a +ssasi, burnt
outinflukes Batn) dh + i + tva,absol.;Siv +e +
hossasi,hosasi, hohasi,hohisi,fut. nti, caus.pres. 3. pl.
2 SE. Khīnāsavo
antimadehadhārī —S. I.
53 Khilam va rajjum va vatim va
Khīnakāmarāgo vigatacāpallo— D. Onewhohasburntoutall influxes pakaram va samkameti—Vin. III.
I. 115 and
holds
thelastphysicalbody;ā + 50
He is one with ekhaustedsense-desire Su +a, der.;antima+ deha+ Dhr + Causesto shift thepost,therope,the
andwithoutfickleness;vi +Gam +fa, i,der, fence,or thewall; sam +Kram +e +
pp. +capala +ya, der.
ti, caus.pres. 3™.sg.
Khinenātimaīiāati—A. IV. 31
Khīpam khīnantevaīānam hoti —5. Does
notdespise
thepoor;Ksi +ta, Khudam patihanati—A. III. 250;
ITI. 154
Pp.na +ati +Man +ya +ti, pres. Vin. I. 221
Thereis knowledgeasto thatit is a (It) strikesagainsthunger;pati +Han
burntoutandburntout;Ksi+ ta,pp.;
+ a+ ti, pres. a ei
khinam +iti +eva Khiyati nopacīyati—S. IV. 74
lsexhausted,
not accumulated; Ksi + Khuddake pāne samghātamāpādeti
Khīpā iāti vusitam brahmacariyam
Iya+ti,pass.pres, 3”. sg.; upa +Ci —M.1.377
katam karanīyam nāparam Ta? ti,pass.pres. 3”. Sg. He causesto bring destructionto the
itthattāyāti paiānāmi —M. III. 29
tiny living beings;sam +Ghan +ta,
I realise that birth is over, the highest
Khiyanadhammam
apanno—A. IV. pps a +Pad +e +ti, caus,pres. 3™.
wayof life is lived,donewhatwasto 374
sg.
bedone,thereis nothingmoreto be
done for this purpose; Kyi +fa, pp.; der: a+ Pad + fa, pp.
Khuddake vihāre ekamantam
Vas +i +ta,pp.; Kr +ta,pp.; Kr
gabbhamkatum, mahallakemajjhe
aniya,fut.pp.; na +aparam;ittha +
Khiram
khirabhavam
vijahitam —Vin. II. 152
(ta,der; pa +Jan +na +mi,pres.
Ae dadhibhāvam
- Vin. II. Tomakea bedroomatonesidein a
LPS, 01
small residence and to make it in the
351
 Khuddānukhuddakāni
Khettam Khettam Khomayugam

middlein a big residence:Kr 2 tum, To remove hair with a razor; o +Ruh

inf. Khettamkasapetabbam—Vin. II. Khettavatthuhi vaddhati —A.V. 137
+e +tum,caus. inf. 180 He grows in landedproperty;khetta+
Khuddanukhuddakani Should
becausedto ploughthe field; vatthu;Vrdh + a + ti, pres. 3”.
ard
sg.
Khettakammantasāmantasamvohāre
sikkhāpadānisamūhanatu - D. II. Krs+dpe +tabba,caus.fut. pp.
—A. III. 77
134;Vin. II. 287,samuhaneyya Khemattaficasubhikkhattafica
Thosewho aretheownersof Khettam
gambhīrasitam
—A. IV.
Abrogatelesserandminor rulesof appabadhattaficasamseyya—M. II.
thefieldsadiacentto his own and
training;Khudda+ anukhuddaka: 231 253-4
thosewho demarcatetheboundaries Thefieldwithdeepfurrow;
sam +u(t)or ava + Han +a+ tu, He would informaboutsecurity,
(surveyors): attano
imper. 3”. sg. unnamgalamaggam Cy. IV. 124; prosperityandhealth;samsevyati
khettakammantānam
samantā gambhira + sita katheyya,Cy. IV.52
anantarā khettasāmino ca, te ca
Khuppipasayamiyamano—M. I. 85
rajjudandehi bhimippamane Khettam
pasanasakkharillam—A.
Dying of hungerandthirst:Khuda+ Khemappattoabhayappatto
gāhakesamvohāreca, Cy. IT. 261
Pipāsā; Mr + īva -- māna,pass.pr.p. IV.237 vesāraliappattoviharāmi —M. 1.72;
Thefieldwithstonesandpebbles; A. IV. 83
Khettapālo ca ānatto hoti —Vin. IV. pasanehica sakkharahi ca
Khumsentovambhento —M. II. 200 Beingpeaceful
andfearless
I abide
258 samannagam, Cy. IV. 124
Deridingandtreatingwithcontempt; with fortitude;Khema+patta:pa +
The keeper
of the field hasalso
Krus + e +nta,caus.prp.; Vambh+ Ap +ta,pp.; visdrada+ya, der.
beenordered;@+Jia +dpe +ta, Khettam
mariyadasampannam—A.
e€+ nia, Caus.pr.p.
Caus. PP.
IV.237 Khelam karonti —Vin. I. 221
Khurabhandamadaya—Vin. I. 249 Thefieldwithboundaries (They) spit;Kr +0 +ati,pres. 3. pl.
Khettamariyāde chaddeti —Vin. IV.
Havingtakenthebarber-kit:@+Da +
267 Khettam
matikasampannam—A. IY.
ya, absol. Khelapakavadenaapasadesi—Vin.
Throwsawayon theboundary of the 237 TELL
field; chadda(fromChard)+ e + ti.
Khuramundam karitva assaputena Thefieldwithwatercourse Depreciatedby saying'salivaeater';
denom.pres. 3”.
2 sg
vadhitvā— D. I. 98 Cy. takesthe termas kelāsaka,khela
Havingshavedtheheadwitha razor Khettam
sukatthamkaroti, +asaka,1275; a+ pasdda +e+s +
Khettam apayasampannam —
A. IV.
andpunished(him)witha bundleof $imatikatam
—A. I. 229 i, denom.pst. 3. sg.
237
Stones;assamaycomefrom asman Makes
thefieldwellploughed
and
The field with outlets:
in Skt, meaningstone; ep.Asmaka harrowed;
sw+Krs +ta,pp.; su + Khomayugam nivattho —A. V. 233
niggamanamaggasampannam, Cy. IV.
=Assaka,Sn.v.977; Cy. takesthe mati+kata,pp. Dressedin a pairof linenclothe;ni +
124;apa + aya +Sampanna,pp.
term assa to mean bhasma, ashes, Vas +ta, pp.
and says assaputenātibhasma Khettavatthupatiggahana
pativirato
Khettam ayasampannam—A. IV.
putena, sise charikam okiritvati POI
237
attho, (with assaputameanswith a Refrained
fromaccepting
landed
Thefieldwithinlets;
bundleofashes, havingpoured Property
(fieldsandlands):Khettam
udakāgamanasampannam,
Cy. IV.
ashesover thehead is the meaning) nama
yasmimpubbannamrihati,
124
267;Kr +i +twa,absol.: Vadh+i + vatthunama yasmim aparannam
tvā,absol. nihati,
Cy.78
Khettam ūsaram — A. IV. 237
The field which is with saltysoil or
Khurena keseoropetum—Vin. IL. Khettavatthum
pariyesati—M. II.
always wet; āsaranti ubbhidodakam,
134 160
Cy. IV. 124
Seeks
forlanded
property
 Gaccha ‘ Ganena
Gacchampi

; jot basis Nee, a oreEW

Gacchampi
J daheyya,dayampi
.. i Ganabhojane pacittiyam— Vin. I
daheyya—A. IV. 74 71 I ere
liwouldburnthetreeandthepark; In a group-eating,thereis anoffence
ham+api;
gaccnam + phDah +eyya,opt.
"'vya, 3”. of ekpiation;ganabhoianam
I nāmaA
Gacchakūta, vahassukūta —Vin. IV. Nam +e +mi, caus.pres. 1°.pl; Vas
e
vatthacattdro bhikkhii...nimantita
+tabba,fut. pp. ' ; TE , . , , =
bhuhianti,old Cy. Vin. IV. 74
Go fraudulent,pull fraudulent
āyaii: yācāhi—V
Gaecehassu,
dāyaiiam ācāhi — Vin.I. 4 os
Gaccha nam khamapehi—Vin. IV, 82 Ganamaggenava ganetumsalakam
Gacchati panabhavamGotamo 132 i
Goandaskfor theinheritance;
gaccha ‘A gahetum
vā ge ——Vin.
Vin.I I. I 117
Bahukam nadim sinātum? —M. I. Go andapologiseto him (makehim tasi, imper.24, sg.; dāyāda t ya, To countby theway of Gana(group)
39 forgiveyou); Ksam +dpe +hi, caus. der.;
der; Yac+a +hi,3 imper.2.2". sg
8g. or to taketheticket
rest(vote);gana
a +e
DoesthevenerableGotamago to imper.2". sg. +tum,denom.inf.; Grh +e+ tum,
theriver Bāhukāfor bathing?;Suā +
tum, inf.
Gacchavusosamkhittena va caus. inf.
Gacchantamva anugaccheyya—D, vitthārena
vā pariyāpunitvā ae wi E
IIT. 203 agaccha
—Vin. I. 116 Ganamanusāsitum
arahati
—M. III.
Gacchatvam Kassapa, ayamaham-
He would follow theone who is Friend,
goandlearn(Pātimokkha)by 216 : I
Vin. I. 30
moving; gaccha (from Gam) +nta,
Kassapa,you go, I (will) come: heart,
inshortor
in in
i detail,andcome
some He is
i qualified
ified to: instruct the
EI
group;
Prp.; anu +gaccha + eyya, opt.
aydmi:a + Ya +mi,pres. 1°.Sg. back;
gaccha+Gvuso;
i pari +Ap
ri + Ap+ ganam++antanu + Sas + i + tum, inf.;
I3” SZ: 7
+ aham (ind
lund++ii +tvd,absol.
+ tvd Arh+
Arh +aa +ti, Lpres.3”.Sg.g

Gacchantovā āgacchantova
Gacchatvamna mayamtamjanama
bhuāiati—Vin. IV. 71
—Vin. III. 137
Eatswhile goingoutor comingin;
Go away,wedo notknowyou;fam= Ishouldgo..to see;gaccheyyam:opt. ganamgana + upahana
Bhu(fi)j + a +ti, pres, 3”. sg
tvam;Jan +nd +ma,pres, 1".pl. I".sg.+aham o
I Ganam pariharāma—M. 1.165;
Gacehantosampādeti,āgacchanto
Gacchathatumheyathāvihāram- Gaecheyyāham
ä padhānāya—A.
ānā IV. Vin.
i I. 42,
2,pariha , PI,
pariharissāma
visamvādeti—Vin. III. 143
Vin. II. 194 Ki Let us leadthegroup;pari +Hr + a+
While going, hecausesto accept I wouldgo for striving (meditation) ma, imper.I". pl
You go toyourown dwellingplaces
andekamine,while coming,he
doesnotcauseto bringback;
Gacchathabhanteyato ayyassa Gananam
sikkhissati, urassa Ganikam
: ; vutthapeyyama
, ānevvāma —
— Vin
Vi E I
gacchantosampādetīti,patiganhāti Beri po .
bhikkhā dinnā —Vin. IV. 94 dukkho
bhavissati
—Vin.I. 77 268 Te
ceva vimamsati ca; Ggacchanto
Venerablesir,you maygo (now)as Shalllearn
counting;
therewill bepain
I - "We
lesshouldcause
>ause toraise
aise S ,
someone
visamvadetitina paccaharati; Cy,
almshasbeengivento thevenerable; lortheheart;ha +i +ssati,desid.
Sak i >statusof) a
to(thestatus accourte
"san;vi +i
559; sam+ Pad +e +ti, caus.pres:
gaccha +tha, imper,24. pl.; Dé +ta, fut.3”,sg u(t) +Stha +@pe+ evyama, caus.
“. Sg.;vi +sam + Vad +e +ti, caus.
pp. opt. 1%.pl.
pres, 3'. sg,
Gananam
sikkheyya—Vin. IV. 129 md E
Gacchathabhikkhave panāmemivo, Would
learncounting
Ii Ganena
N (duvaggenapitivagge
, an: ‘agg ap
e
Gaccha bhadra, vahassubhadra-
na vo mamasantikevatthabbam- upasampadenti—Vin. I. 58
Vin. IV. 5
M. I. 457 Gapapūrako
ū vā bhavissimi
āmi——Vin.
Vi I. Causeto
'ause ordainby
ainby aagrour
group I
Go goodboy,pull good boy;gaceha,
Bhikkhus,go away, | dismissyou,
imper.2". sg.; Vah +a +ssu, imper: "I (comprisingtwo andthree);upa 3
you shouldnotstaywith me: pa+ OrI shallbecomeone who completes sam+
: Pad
E +e+ »+ nti, caus,J
nti,caus.pres.
2 ise.
thequorum gre. I i.

355
 Gano
Gattāni Ganthe Gabbham

Gano nama bhikkhunīsamgho-

awake,talkedandbeenin silence:
Vin. IV. 283 Making
thelimbsdry up;sukkha + (they)wentto themonasterywith the
Gam 1 ta,pp; Sthā 1 i- ta,BD.;
Group meansthecommunityof apaya
+mana,caus.pr.p. purposeof seeingtheplacesof
ni + Sad + ta,pp; Svap + ta,DD.;
bhikkhunīs abiding;ā +Da +ya, absol.;a + Gam
Jagr + i + ta,pp.; Bhas + i +ta,
Ganthe
karontāacchenti—D. III. 94 + imsu.pst. 3". pl.; pa +Iks + i + ka,
pp.; tunhi + Bhii + a, der.
Ganthikam patimuācitvā—Vin,I. (They)
abide
whilecompilingbooks; der.
46;II. 213 As+ya+ e +nti,pres. 3”. pl.
Gattamvodakamkatva—Vin. I, 47
Havingfastenedtheknot:pati + Gandham ca malam ca aropetva
Havingmadethebodydry; vi +udaka;
Mu(fije + i + tv, absol. Gandhakarande
va nikkhipanti —A. pakkamimsu —Vin. III. 39
Kr + tva,absol.
1,248 . Havingofferedincense andgarlands
Gandamattikamdatva—Vin. I. 151 Ortheykeepit in a scentedcasket;ni (on his body)theywentaway; a +
Gattāni kandūvanti —
Vin. II, 121
+Ksip+a +nti,pres. 3”. pl. Ruh + dpe + tva,caus.absol.;pa +
They scratchlimbs:Kandu+a +nti,
Da + tva, absol. Kram +imsu,pst. 3”. pl.
denom.
pres.3”.pl.
Gandhabbakāyam paripūresum —D.
Gatapaccāgatenadūtena—Vin. IHI. I. 250 Gandhavannakenanhayanti—Vin.
Gattani parisincitum —M. I, 161;
74 Theycausedto fill therealmof IV. 341
II. 192;S. 1.8;A. IHI.345
Througha messenger,
goneandcome Gandhabbas
(divinemusicians);pari + (They) takebathwith fragrantand
Towashthelimbs(body):pari
back;pati + @+ Gam+ ta,pp. Pr+e+s+um;caus.pst.3”.pl. colouredwater;Snd +ya + nti, meta.
Si(fJc + i +tum,inf,
pres .3™.pl.
Gata bhikkhusaāhattiyā—Win. II. Gandhabbahatthakena
nahāyanti-
Gattānipānināanomaiianto
—S. V.
199 Yin.II. 106 Gandho anuvātamgacchati—A. IV.
216
To makethebhikkhusconvince,they Take
bathusinga woodenhand 118 I
Massagingthelimbswith palm;anu+
havegone;sam +Jaa +ape + fi, (forrubbing
purpose);
nahdnatitthe The smellgoeswith thewind; anu +
0+ Mrj +ya + nta,DF.D.
caus.der. thapitena
darumayahatthena,Cy. vata,opp. is pativata
1199
Gattanipicivaranipipamsukitāni-
Gatigatam hoti —Vin. II. 85 Gabbhapamukhe— Vin. II. 303
Vin. I. 118
It hasgoneits course Gandhabbo capaecupatthito
hoti- In theverandahof theroom
Limbsofthe bodyandtherobeswere
M.II. 157
dusty;pamsu+Kr +ta,pp.
Gatim tesamiānissāmi, Thebeingto be rebornalso is present; Gabbhapātanamadāsi— Vin. III. 83
abhisamparāyam—D.11.204 Gam+tabba?:gandhabboti Gave medicinefor abortion;gabbha +
Gattāni pubbāpayamāno—S.1.8
I will know theircourseandthenext latriipakasatto,Cy. 11.310; pati + upa Pat + e + ana,caus.der; a+ Da+s
Causingtobringthelimbstothe
life; Jan + na + i +ssami,fut. 1",sg. +Stha+i +ta,pp. +i, doublepst.3. sg.
Previousposition(i.e.todryup);
pubba + āpava + mana,caus.pr.p.
Gatim pi afifiassa—A. V. 144 Gandhampimālampiādāya Gabbhapatanamupadaya—
Vin. I.
(He) could haveknownthecoursetoo: ārāmam āgacehanti
—Vin. II. 123 97 TI
Gattānisītikaritvā—Vin. I. 291
a+ Jiid +ssa, cond.34. sg. Taking
incense
andgarlands
(they) Concerningabortion;upādāva,indcl.
Havingmadethelimbs(of thebody)
ometothemonastery;@+Da +va,
cool
Gate thite nisinne sutte jagarite absol. Gabbham anuparigantvā—
Vin. III.
bhāsitetunhībhāve sampaiānakārī 119
Gattāni sītikāni honti —Vin. II. 122
hoti—D. I. 70;M. I, 57 Gandham
eamāiameaādāya Havinggoneroundtheinnerchamber;
Limbs become cool
He actswith full awarenesswhen āärāmam
agamamsu anu +pari + Gam + tva,absol.
hehasgone,stood,sat,slept,been vihārapekkhikāyo
—Vin.IHI.38-0
Gattānisukkhāpayamāno
—S. I. 10 Having
takenincenseandgarlands,
Gabbham kucchinā pariharati —M.
 Gabbham
Gamiyabhisamkharo
I. 266 fa, pp.+ satta
Carriesembryo
in thewomb;pari +
Hr +a +ti, pres.3". sg. Gabbhe gahetvapamukham
nikkaddhati —Vin. IV. 45
Gabbham pātetvā— Vin. II. 268 Havingcaughtat theroom,throwsout
Havingcausedto abortembryo:Par + intotheverandah;Grh +e +wa,
e +tva,caus.absol. absol.;ni +kaddha+ti,pres.3°.sg.
Gabbhavīsoupasampanno —Vin. I. Gabbhepi pariggahitā —Vin. IHI.
93 139
The onewho,beingtwentyofage One who is possessedevenin the
womb;gabbhe+api; pari +Grh +i
gabbha + visa; upa +sam + Pad +
+fa,pp.
ta,pp.
Gabbhepi vatthabbamdvāramūle
Gabbhassaavakkanti —M. II. 156 vā —Vin. III. 200
Comingdown ofthe embryo(into the
One shouldstayin theroomor atthe
mother'swomb:conception):ava +
door; gharadvaramile, Cy. 654
Kram + ti, der.
Gabbho vutthasi —Vin. II. 278
Gabbhassaparipakamanvaya—Vin.
Therewasa deliveryofthe child:vi+
II. 19 u(t) +Stha +s + i, pst. 3. sg.
Havingcometo thematurityofthe
womb:pari +Pac + a, der.; anu + e
Gamanīyosamparāyo
- D. II. 246
(fromI) +ya, absol.
Weshouldproceed
towardsnextlife;
Gam +aniya,fut.pp.; sam +para +
Gabbhinim vutthapenti—Vin. LV.
aya (fromI)
3H7
Causeto ordaina pregnantwoman;vi
Gamanepatippassaddhedenti —Vin.
* u(t) +Stha + ape +nti, caus.pres.
IV. 81
I DE
Give,whenthejourneyisover;pati+
pa +Sra(m)bh+ta,pp.; Da +e +
Gabbhini upavijaifia —D. II. 330;
nti, pres. 3”. pl.
M. I. 384
A pregnantwoman,closetodelivery:
Gamanena
lokassaantamfiatum—
A.
upa + vi +Jan +ya, der.
IL.48
To know theendof theworld by
Gabbhini namaāpannasattā—Vin.
travelling;Jia +tum
, inf,
IV.317
Pregnantwomanmeansone into
Gamiyabhisamkharo
whoma beinghascome:kucchim
patippassambhi—A. IV. 180;Vin. I.
Pavitthasatta,
Cy. 940;@+Pad +
233,gamikabhisamkharo
Gambhiratta Garahitabbam
a +ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Subsided
theeagernessto go; gamiyva
=gamika+abhisamkhdra:abhi +
Gambhiresu thanatthanesu
sam(s)
+Kr +a, der.; pati +pa+
Sra(m)bh
+i, pst. 3”. sg. panhacakkhuna kamati—A. II. 144
The eyeof wisdom is not focussedon
profoundmatters;thdnesu +thānesu,
Gambhirattanemassa,sunikhatatta
cp. bhavabhavesu;Kram +a +ti,
silayipassa—A. TV.405
Becauseof thedepthof thebaseand pres. 3”. sg.
perfect
fixityofthestonepillar;
Gambhīro uttānobhāso—A. II. 105
nema—
āvāta,Cy. IV. 192; su +ni +
Deepbutappearsasshallow;uftana +
Khan +ta, pp.
obhāsa
Gambhīram atthapadam—A. IHI.
356;IV. 362 Gamgam nadim uttaritvā —Vin. IHI.
Profoundmeaning;galham ll
paticchannam khandhadhatu HavingcrossedtheriverGanges;in
āvatanādi-attham,
Cy. Ill. 379 the common usage Gamgam nadim
taritva; u(t) + Tr + a+i + tva,absol.
Gambhīramatthapadamudāharati
~A.IT.189 Gamgam nadim upanissaya
Makesa profoundandmeaningful viharimsu —Vin. III. 145
Statement;
u(t) +4 +Hr +a +fi, pres. (They) liveddependingon theriver
3m, Sg.
Ganges;upa + ni + Sri +ya, absol.;
vi +Hr +a + imsu,pst. 3”. pl.
Gambhireudakarahade
pakkhipeyya
—S. IV. 312 Gayāyam viharati Gayāsīse—S. IV.
Would
throwintoa deeppoolof 19;A. IV. 302; Vin. I. 34
water;
udaka +rahada(Skt.hrada); Abidesin GayaatGayasisa(onahill
pa+Ksip+eyya,opt.3". sg. nearGaya)
Gayāyam viharati Tamkitamaāee-
203 S. I, 207
Hedoesnotfind a foot-holdin deep Abidesin Gayāata housemade
Water,
gādhamvindatitipatittham of stone;dighamahāce pādamaiihe
labhati,
Cy.V.68; Vi(n)d+a +ti, vijjhitva ataniyopavesetvā
pres,
3".sq, katamaāce; catunnam ca pāsānānam
upari pāsānamattharitvā
Gambhire
Buddhavacane
katagehampitamkitamancoti
paiāeakkhukamati—S. IV. 283 vuccati,Cy. I. 302
Theeyeof wisdomgoesinto the
deepteachingof theBuddha;Buddha
Garahitabbam patikkositabbam
+vacana;pana + cakkhu;Kram + maīieyya —M. III. 77
359
 Garukam
Gahattha Gahananissito Gahetva i I

Wouldthinkthatthisshouldbe
deservesa probationaryperiod;pari + Wealthyhouseholders;ni +caya .
censuredandrejected;garaha +i +
Vas + a, der. +araha IHouseholders ved: (from Ci) +ika,, der. i
tabba,
fut. pp.; pati + Krus +a, der4 and the renounced; | I I
+Stha; pa + Vraj +i +ta, pp. ’, 9
i +tabba,fut. pp.; Man +ya +evya,
Garupavuranam — Vin. IV. 255
opt.3. sg. i Gahapatino santike paribhinna -
A heavyblanket:garupāvuranam Ki I
Gahananissito
hoti—A. I. 154 Vin. Ill. 161 ee I
nāmayam kihci sītakālepavuranam,
Garukam āpattim —A. IV. 140 Theonewhohasresortedto thejungle Set thehouseholderagainstus;pa; I i
old. Cy. 255;pa+ @ 4 Vr +ana,der.
A graveoffence;@+Pad +ti, der. area;
gahana+ni +Sri +ta, pp Bhid +ta,pp. I 1

Garubhandam avissajjikam
Garukāya āpattiyā codenti, Gahapataggi
, e —A.
ths IV.: 45
- Gahitaficassana
E pamussati—A. III. . I I
avebhamgikam—Vin. I. 305
pārāiikena vā pārāiikasāmantena Fireofa householder; gahapati + 201; Vin. I. 270 I I I
Valuablearticleunalienableand
vā —M. II. 247 ngii What is taken(learnt)by this person
indivisible;a +yi 4 Si] +ya +ika,
(They)causeto accusehimofa grave I is notforgotten;
gahitam+ca + ; |
der.; a+ vi + Bha(fi)j +a +ika, der.
offenceof Defeator of an offence Gahapatikā kammantābhinivesā— assa; assa,gen. sg. usedherefor I
closeto Defeat; Cud +e +nti, caus: A,
I II.
A,IHI.363 agent;paI + Mrs +ya +ti, pass. I u
Garubhara ayya —Vin. IV. 317
pres. 3. pl. Thehouseholders
areadheredtowork; —ares.
3"'.sg. i
Thevenerableis havinga heavyburden
kammanta +abhinivesa:abhi +ni + Li sey Te II
(i.e. pregnant)
Garuko ca hoti parikkharo panea Vis+a, der. Gahitagahitaficajaneyya —Vin. IL. I
masakova atirekapaiicamasakova i 84, 176;III. 246-7 |
Garum bharam udabbahi—Vin. IV.
—Vin. III. 54 5
Gahapatika
ika bhogadhippaya—A.
adhippaya III. Hewould
>Ww also sokiknowwhat
o HARAis taken iI .I
The requisitealso is heavy,to the 363 andwhatis not;Jan + nd +eyya,opt. I i
Carriedforwarda heavyload;u(t) +a wae MIMI
valueof five Masakasor morethan Thehouseholders
areintentonwealth aTOSE
+ Vah+i, pst. 3. sg.

Gahapatikā
sippādhitthānā
—A. IHI. Gahitāgahitamna iānāti— A IIL. I ii |
beans used in ancient India to itagahi janati—A.
Gava khiram khiramha dadhi
measure the value 275
dadhimhanavanītamnavanītamhā
Thehouseholders
Te aredepending
i on e does
nnotknowwhatistaken
Hedoes KAI HI I
sappisappimhāsappimando— D. I.
Garutthaniyo sabrahmacari—A. IHI. cralls(professions);
sippa --adhi + andwhatis not;Orn Ä i E, pp. a I
201; S.III.278
21; IV. 151 Stha+ ana,, der.der. agahita; Jan + na + ti, pres. 3”. Sg. I ki I
Milk from thecow, curd from the
Respectableco-celibate:;garu +
thana + iya, der. (theone who
milk, butterfrom thecurd,clarified
Gahapaticīvaradharo
dittho—Vin. Gahitemeattamanobhavissati
— 1 I
butterfrom the butter,creamof
occupiestheposition ofthe teacher)
clarified butterfrom theclarified
II,169 Vin.12
. 96 Ii
Theonewhowearsa robegivenby When it is acceptedby me,hewill be
butter
Garudhammamalihāpannapubbo- householders
wasseen;gahapati+ pleased;Grh + i +ta,pp. i I
A. IV. 289;Vin. IV. 51; clvara+ Dhr -- a, der.; Dr§ + ta, pp.
Gahatthakambrahmacariyam
The onewho hascommitteda serious Gahito gahito mussati—Vin. II. I I
Samacinnam—A, III. 296
offence,(samghādisesa
or pārāiikā) 261 II
Household-celibacy
hasbeen
practised
before:adhi +@+ Pad +ta,pp. + 280 Whateveris learntis forgotten I
(contentment
with marriedwife has
pubba (pubbeapanno) Please
approve
therobeoffered
beenpractised);
gaha(Skt.grha)
+ I i

byhouseholders:
gahapaticivaranti Gahetvā akotetva munci —Vin. IV. I
Stha +ka, der.; sam + G@
+ Car + ta,
Garudhammamalihāpanno hoti gahapatīhi
dinnacivaram,Cy. 1119; 132
Pp.
Parivāsāraho—Vin. I. 49 am+Jan +nad+tu,imper.3". sg. Havingcaughtandbeatenup(he)
Hascommitted
agraveoffenceand released (him); d +Kut + e + tva,
Gahatthacevapabbajitaca—M. L.
Gahapati
necayikā
—D. I. 136 absol.; Mu(fijc + i, pst. 3”. sg. | I
 Gahetva
Gahetvāākotesi—Vin. II. 215
Causedto assaultaftertakinghold of
him;Grh +e + tva,absol.;a+ Kut +
e+s +i, caus.pst, 3. sg.
Gātham gāyanti—Vin. I. 196
Recitetheverserhythmically;Gai + a
+nti,pres.3. pl.
Gāthāya paceabhāsi— D. II. 39; M.
I. 169,paccabhasim
Repliedin a verse;pati +a +Bhas +
, Da ese
Gāthāhi aiihabhāsi —
D. II. 39: S. I.
201
Addressedin verses;adhi +a + Bhas
+ i, pst. 3. sg.
Gathahi anumodi—Vin. II. 164
Thanked in verses; anu + Mud + a+i.
pst. 3. sg.
Gādham khattā no vasitā—A. II.
107
Theonethatdigs(holes)deep,but
doesnot staythere.;Khan + tu, der.;
Vas+i + tu, der.
Gamakavasevassamvuttha —Vin.
IV. 313
Observedrainyretreatin a little
village residence;gāmaka-- āvāsa;
Vas+ ta,pp.
Gāmakā Sāvatthim agamasi—Vin.
IV. 268
Wentto Savatthifrom
a littlevillage;
gama +ka; der; a+ Gam + ā +5 +
i, doublepst.3”.sg.
Gāmakūto ahosi—Vin. IHI. 106
Gāmato Gamagamam
Gāmato
(He) wasa plundererof village; (Whoever)would enterinto a village,
comingandgoing,a placeto be visited
gamakitoti viniechayamacco,Cy. he would beguilty; 0 +Sr +eyya,opt.
bytheinterested
people, not crowded
510 3, sg.;Spr§+eyya,opt.3”. sg.
during
thedaytime,silentandquietin
the
night;
it isa placewherethereare
Gamaghatakampi upasamkamimsu nomovements
ofthe peopleand a Gāmantare gamantare—Vin. IV.
katum — D. III. 68 place
suitable
forprivacyandsolitude; 295
(They) approached eventhepillagerto (characteristics of a monastic In everyvillage;gama +antara
punish(him); Kr. + twm,inf., kartum surrounding)avidiire = atidūre; ati
> kattum> katum +dasanna;attha + ika, der.; abhi + Gāmantavihārim samahitam
Kram+aniya,fut. pp.: diva, indel.; nisinnam —A. IV. 343
Gamaghatakapi dissanti appa+Kir +ta,pp.; vi +jana + The oneabidingin a villageandsitting
nigamaghātakāpi dissanti, vata;raha(s)+ evya + ka, der; pati with a composedmind;sam +a +
nagaraghātakāpi dissanti +sam+Li +ta,pp.+ sariipa +ya, Dha + i +ta,pp.; ni + Sad + ta,pp.
panthadūhanāpidissanti —D. I. 135 der.
Those,who pillagevillages,market Gamantavihari —A. IIT. 391
towns,citiesandroads,areto beseen;
Gāmato pindāyapatikkamati—M. The onewho lives in thevillageor
panthaditihanatipanthadoha, III. 157;Vin. II. 216 village boundary;gamanta+ vihara +
panthaghatatiattho, Cy. 296; ghan + Returns
fromthevillage afteralms i, der.
ta + ka, der; Dr§ +ya + nti, pass.
pres. 3”. pl. SMgg: Gamam va nigamamva upanissaya
viharati —M. I. 369
Gāmandalarūpo viya —M. II. 155 Gāmadvārena
atikkamati —Vin. II. Havingresortedto a villageora
lust like a stupidvillageboy; 131;
IV. 132 markettown,heabides;upa +ni +Sri
gāmadārakarūpoviva, Cv. IIL. 411; Passby,in thedirectionof village + ya, absol.
viva, indel. entrance;
ati +Kram +a + ti, pres.
3”,sg. Gāmasāmantamva
Gamato tavadevaavasatam—M. II.
nigamasamantamva —D. I. 101
206 Gāmanigamarāiadhānīsu
osaritvā Near thevillagesor markettowns
Arrivediust now from thevillage;tāva vāsamkappessanti—A. III. 108
+ (d) + eva, indcl.; ava + Sr + ta, pp. Having
enteredinto thevillages, Gamasimamokkamitva —Vin. III.
market
townsandkingdoms,
theywill 264
Gamato neva avidūre, na accāsanne,
Havingcrossed
thevillageboundary;
o
gamanāgamanasampannam, €+ssanti,
denom.
fut. 3™.pl.
+Kram + i + tva,absol.
atthikānam atthikānam
manussānam
abhikkamanīyam,
divā
Gamassava nigamassava avidūre -
appakinnam,rattim appasaddam 189
S209}
appanigghosam,vijanavatam, Hewouldgetaguidetothevillage
or
Notfarawayfroma villageora
manussarahaseyyakam,
Village
boundary;
Labh+eyva, opt. markettown
patisallānasāruppam
- Vin. I. 39;II. 3”.sg.
158
Gamagamampurapuram — S. I. 196
(It is) nottoo far from thevillage,not
Gāmantam
osareyya,
vajjamnam From villageto villageandtownto
too close(to thevillage), suitablefor
Phuseyya
~Vin. 11.197 town
 Gāmāpi
Gāmāpi agāmākatā —M. II. 98
Eventhevillagesweremadenon-
+ fa, pp.
Gama va arannhavā —S. IV. 345
From thevillageor forest
Gāmikasahassānampurato
pekkhamananam— Vin. I. 180
While thousands of villagerswere
beholdingin front;gama + ika, der.
pa +Iks +a + māna,pr.p.
Gamejatavaddho —M. II. 206
Born andgrownup in thevillage:Jan
+ ta,pp.; Vrdh + ta,pp.
Gamena maggohoti —Vin. IV. 166
Roadrunsthroughthevillage
I. 116
(They) live in thevillageor in the
markettown;gamameans
a group
(cp.bīiagāma,mātugāma),the land
occupiedby a group (ofpeople) is
also calledgama, village;pati + Vas
+a+ nti,pres. 3. pl.
Game va yadi varaiiiie — S. I. 69,
233
In thevillageor in theforest:va +
arahhe
Gāmo corehi vutthāsi —Vin. I. 149
A group of people left theplace
becauseof thieves;vi +u(t) +Stha +
S +i, pst. 3”. sg.
Garayham garahati pasamsiyam
pasamsati—
A. V. 190
Gavim
(He) censureswhat is to becensured
andpraiseswhatis to be praised;
Garh +ya, meta.fut. pp.; Garh +a
+ti, pres. 3. sg.; pa + Sams +i +
ya, fut. pp.; pa + Sams +a+ ti, pres,
3”. sg.
Gārayham thānam āgacchanti—M.
III. 77
They cometo thepointof censure;ā
+gaccha + nti,pres. 3". pl.
Gārayham dhammamāpaiiim
asappayampatidesaniyam—
Vin. IV.
176,347
I committeda censurablethingwhich
is unbecoming
andtobeconfessed;
garaha+ya,fut.pp.;@+Pad +ya+
im, pst. I". sg.; a+ sam 4 pa + aya
(fromI); pati +Dr§ +e + aniya,fut.
pp.
Gārayho hoti upavaiio —
A. II. 181
Becomes censurable and blameworthy;
upa + Vad+ya,fut. pp.
Galham ganheyya—M. III. 159
Wouldholdfast;galham,adv.;Grh+
na + eyya,meta.opt: 3". sg.
Gālham rogātamkam phusati —A.
III. 257;V. 169
He experiences
a seriousillness;roga
+atamka,bothgive thesame
meaning;
Spr§+a +ti,pres.3".sg.
Gavim tarunavacchamvisānato
avinjeyya—M. III. 141
Wouldmilkacowwithyoungcalf,by
pulling from thehorn;taruna +
vaccha;& + vi +Afic + eyya,opt.3”.
Gavipi
agamamsu—Vin. II. 107;IV. 267
Gāvīpidisvā palāyanti, bhikkhūti
Wentto seethefestivalheldon the
mainamana —Vin. III. 144
Seeingevencowstheyrunaway top of a mountain; giri +agga +
samdja +ya, der.; a+ Gam +a+
thinking
theyarebhikkhus;gavi +api;
Dré+tva,absol.;Palay +a +nti, imsu,doublepst. 3. pl.
pres.3”.pl.; bhikkhu +iti; Man +ya
Gilanakanafica balabalam
+mana,pr.p.
iānissāma —A. III. 38; IV. 266
Gavivajjhaāghātanamniyyamānā- We will know thecondition
A,IV. 138 (strengthandweakness) ofthe sick;
Thecow,tobeslaughteredandbeing bala t abala
ledtotheslaughterhouse;Vadh+ ya,
fut.pp.;Ni +ya +mana,pass.pr-p. Gilānake upasamkamitvāsatim
uppādeti—A. II. 263
Gāvogotthedohāpeti —M. II. 186 Havinggoneto thesick hecauses
Hecauses to milk thecows in the themtohavemindfulness;
upa+sam
cow-pen;go +Stha; Duh +Gpe +ti, + Kram + i +tva,absol.;u(t)+Pad +
pres.3”.sg. e +fi, caus.pres. 3”. Sg.
Gāvovaiihevadhāyaupanīte—A. III. Gilanapaccayabhesajjaparikkharam
302 paribhufijamano—A, II. 55
Whenthecows,to be slaughtered,are While makinguseofthe material
brought inforslaughter;
Vadh+ya, requisitesandmedicalfacilities
fut.pp.;upa+Ni+ ta,pp. meantfor thesick; gilanapaccaya
+bhesajja +parikkhara; pari +
Giddho
papatāya
—
S. II. 227 Bhu(hi)i+a +mana,pr.p.
Entangled
witha barbedspear:
bapatāvuccatidīgharaiiuka Gilānam thānā cāvessāma—
Vin. I.
kotthāsake
dandakam pavesetvā 120
gahito
kannikasallasanthāno We will causeto removethesick
ūyakantako,
yasmimvegenapatitvā from theplace(wherehe is lying
katāhe
laggamatte dandako down);Cyu +e +ssama,caus,fut.
nikkhamati
raiiukoekabaddho I, pl.
8acchati,
Cy.II, 207;Grdh +ta,pp.
Gilānassa karanīyena gacchati-
Gimhānam
paeehime
māse—
M. I. Vin. IV. 153
15);5.V. 50
Goes away for someworkof the sick;
Inthelastmonthof thesummer;
Kr +aniya,fut. pp.
gimhānam
paechimemāseti
Asālhamāse.
S.Cy.IHI.136 Gilānassaca agilānassaca arittam
bhufijitum —Vin. IV. 82
Giraggasamajjam
dassanaya To eatwhatis leftoverby thesick and
 Gilānassa Gihisanfiattibahulo MI
Gihinam Gihinam I I

Gihini nama agarini —Vin. IV. 343 todestroythegroupingsofi theevil ‘heycause

They sar robes
causeto wearrobeslikelaymens’
: e ; “ae Ī
pp.
Gihini means a house wife: giha (Skt, ind ipa + iccha;pakkha+
led:pāpa+iccha;
minded;
pape pakkha +upa
ut dress;ni
KI +Vas +ta,pp.;
I. ni + Vas
+ € II
grha) +ini; agadra+ini +Chid
++
Cnid a, der
a, der. +nti,caus.pres.3°.[ I
Gilanassa paticchadaniyam
alabhantassa—Vin. I. 217 Gihi akkosati, paribhasati —Vin. IL. Gihinam alabhaya parisakkatii — sihipatissav
Gihipatissavam saccapeti
na saccap —A.
a '
I ii
I
|

Whenthesick is not receivingthe 18 IV. 346

Vin,IT.18 eke Wc
meatbroth;paticchadaniya= Revilesandrebukeshouseholders: @+ Heg0€s : aboutto makeloss
; s! for ee
Doesnot maketruethepromisegiven : i
mamsarasa,Cy. 1092;a + Labh + a Krus + a + ti, pres. 3“.sg.; pari + 0 ers;pari +Svask
householders; Svas +a +ti, WEEK
to thelay people;naTEsaccamkaroti
I AA MI I
+ nta,pr.p.; gen. abs. Bhas + a +ti, pres. 3". sg. pres".TEA SQ. visamvadeti,
: C y. IV. 160;pati + Sru i
+a, der; sacca +ape + ti, denom.
Gilanati pativedehi—Vin. I. 269; Gihi odatavasana —Vin. I. 187 caus. pres. 3”. Sg. h
Gihinamavasayaparisakkati—Vin.
IV. 212 Householders clad in white clothes IL.18
Hegoesabouttonon-residence
of Gihī pārutam pārupanti —Vin. II.
iti; pati + Vid +e + hi, caus. imper. Gihi kamabhogi —A. IV. 438 137 i i
a householders
2", Sg. A laymanenjoyingsensedesires;
Theycoverthebody(withtherobe) t ‘|i |
Bhuj + a +i, der. Gihinam
kammantamadhitthema- like thehouseholders;
pa +4 +Vr + Ii I
Gilānālayam karitvā —
Vin. IHI. 62 ta,pp.; pa+ 4+ Vr +a + nit, meta., i) I I
Vin.111.
87
Havingpretendedthathewassick: Gihī gihīhi bhedeti—Vin. IT. 18 pres. 3”. pl.
Letussuperintend thebusinessof
Causesconflicts between householders;adhi +Stha +e +ma, 312 Vi T l I I
householders;Bhid + e + ti, caus. imper.
I". pl. Gihi bhikkhave mamgalika — Vin. I
Gilano ananuyogakkhamovutto pres, 3™.sg. I. 129 M
Bhagavata—Vin. I. 176
Gihīnamdūteyyam
harāma—Vin. Bhikkhus,householdersarebelievers I
It is saidby theBlessedOne thatthe Gihidhajo na dharetabbo—
Vin. II. IHI.87 ofP goodomens;mamgala
.. ygala -- ik ler.
ika, de I
sick is not fit for questioning:an + 22 Letuscarrythemessagesof laymen;
anu + Yuj + a, der. + khama;Vac+ Householders'uniformshouldnot dita+eyya,der.;Hr +a +ma, Gihī vā hotukāmo—Vin. III. 92
ta,pp. beworn;Dhr +e + tabba,caus. imper.
1".pl. Or desirousof beinga layman;Hū M
fut. pp. (Bhi) +a +tum,inf. t kāmo I ‘|
Gilāno na katheti —Vin. IV. 37
Gihīnam
papātoviyakhāyati ; I
Being sick (he) doesnotspeak:katha Gihīdhammā anapetohoti —A. IHI. yadidam
nekkhammam
- A. IV. 438 Gihīvikatam abhinisiditum —Vin. .
+e + ti, denom.pres. 34. sg. 41 Renunciation
appears
tothe Il. 163
The onewho hasnotdeviatedfrom householders
asa suddenfall; Kāwā To sit on theseatspecially I
Givayam paharamadasi—Vin. ILI. thehouseholdduty;the worddhamma
*ya+ti,pres,3“,sg.;yadidam, preparedfor thehouseholders;vi I i
80 is usedhere in thesenseofduty; an indel. + Kr + ta, pp. abhi +ni +Sad + I NI I
Gavea blow on theneck;a + Da +a
+apa +1 + ta,pp. i + tum, inf.
+s +1,doublepst.3. sg.
Gihīnampigihissavippatisārissa i i

Gihinam anatthayaparisakkati - denti

—Vin.IHI.241 Gihiveyyavaccamkaronti —Vin. IV.
Gihiniya vippatipadesum—
Vin. HI. Vin.II. 18 Even
thehouseholders
giveit toa 300 . |
40
Hegoesabouttodamage
householders householder
whoregretsit; vi +pati (They) do thework of householders; .
(They)causedhimto havesexwith
a housewife; gihint (= Skt.grhini); +Smr+7,der. vi +@ +Vrt +ya, der.
Gihīnamanukampāya
pāpicchānam
vi +pati +Pad +@+5 + um,CaUs.
pakkhupacchedāya
—A. 1.98 Gihisafiiattibahulo viharati —S. I. )
Pst. 3. pl.
Outof compassion
forthelaymen
and 137 199

367 I
 Gihi
Gūtham Gilhako
Gopadesu I
i
He abidestalkingso muchto thelay
Guttiyā rakkhāya avihimsāya III. 84;A.II. 33 I )
people;gihi +sam +Jia +ape + ti, Gūlhakosalākagāhohoti —Vin. II.
phāsuvihārāya—D. IHI. 195 Setsout for food;pa +Kram +a +ti, I I
caus. der. + hahula 98
For protection,guard,non harassment pres. 3”. sg. | .
Thereis a secretvote;Guh +fa, pp.
andliving with ease
Gihi samganhāti,upalapeti —Vin. +ka
Gocare caratha sake pettike visaye
I
IHI. 90
Gumbam thapetvāpakkamimsu- —S.V. 146 ;
Entertainshouseholdersandcausesto Gedhotipaficannamkamagunanam
Vin. I. 345 ; 2 Farealong in theancestraldomain; I
coaxthem;sam + Grh +na + ti pres. etamadhivaeanam —A. III. 312
Keepingguard, theywentoff; Stha+ pitti (Skt.pitr) +ika, der. +] I
3”. 5g.; upa +Lap + e +ti, caus. Gedhais synonymouswith five sense
ape + tvd,caus.absol.;pa +Kram +
pres. 3. sg. oblects
imsu,pst. 3™.pl. Gocare pakatafifiuno—Vin. I. 312
I
;
"

: lāni— S. IV. 232

Gihīsamsatthoviharati —S. IV. 180; Gehasitāni somanassāni — 5. IV. 23 (They are)familiarwith the ty hi |
Gumbiye payesi—Vin. I, 345 environment |
Vin. IL. 4, gihi Sweetfeelingsassociatedwith
Causedtheguardsto drink:Pa +(y) +
Beingmixedwith householders,he householdlife
e+ S$+ 1,caus. pst. 374.Sg. Gocaro pucchitabbo —Vin. II. 208 I
abides;gihi +sam +Srj +ta,pp.; vi
+Hr +a +ti, pres,37. sg. Gehasitāsarasamkappāpahīyanti - The areasuitablefor almsshouldbe
Guyhamantasambhedamagamamsu asked:Prch +ya +i + tabba,fut.pp.
M. III. 89
—A. III. 129
Gihīsāmīcikāni sikkhāpadāni —s. Therunning
thoughts,
associated
with
Secretsleakedout: agama +imsu, Gotamam tatha santamyeva II
V. 387 household
life, vanish; gehasitati,
doublepst. 3”pl. saddo abbhuggate,no aīihathā —D. I
Precepts,properfor the laity paāca kāmagunūpasamhitā,
sarasamkappāti dhāvanasamkappā, 1. 106-7 | i
Guyham Avikaroti —A. IV. 31
Gītena purisam bandhati—A. IV. sarantītisarā dhāvantītiattho, The reputationhasarisenin reference
Reveals the secret: avi, indel.
196 Cy.IV. 144;geha +Sri +ta,pp.; toGotama,ashe hasbeen,not I
Bindsa manwith singing;Ba(n)dh +a Sr +a, der. + sam + kappa;pa + otherwise;As t ata,pr.p.: abhi +u(t) N
l I
Guyham parigūhati —A. IV. 31
+ ti, pres. 3. sg, Ha+iya+nti,pass.pres.3”.pl. +Gam +ta, pp.; theprefix abhi
Hides thesecretcompletely;Guh +

Givayam gahetvanikkaddhanti -
ya, meta.fut.pp.; pari + Guh +a+
Goghamsikayakathinam
governs the object Gotama
I I

ti, pres. 3. sg.

Vin. II. 166;IV. 44 samharitum—Vin. If. 117 Gotamassavādam anupakkhandati— I I I
Throw (them)out,takingby theneck; To foldup Kathinawith a pieceof D. I. 123 ; | I
Gulapindam adasi —Vin. IV. 112
sometimesthe root Grh takesthe woodorwitha pieceof bamboo; Favoursthethesisof Gotama;
Gave(them)a lumpof molasses:
objectin loc.; ni +kaddha +nti, velumva rukkhadandakamva anto anu +pa +Skand +a + ti, pres. . I
a+ Da+a+s +i, doublepst.
pres. 3”. pl. karitvātena saddhimsamharitum, 3r4 Ise: I fH
HIMI
2;
TA SO
Cy.1207;sam +Hr +a+ i +tum,
Guttatthaya haritum —Vin. II. 174 inf. Gotamo gottena—D. II. 3 I I I
Gūthakūpe Sasisamnimuggam-
To takeaway for protection;gutti + Gotama,by clan | . | ‘

Vin. III. 106

atthaya;Hr +i +tum.inf, Gocarakusalo hoti —A. V. 350
The onewho hassunkina cesspitup eal
Skilled in the environment Gopakhumo —M. II. 137 ) i
to thehead;sa +sisa; ni +Majj +ta The onewho haseyelashesasthoseo ii I
Guttaguttaficajaneyya —Vin. I.
Pp.
176 Gocarapasutohoti —
S. IV. 177 anOX i I
He wouldknow whatis preservedand (He)hasbeenpursuingfood;gocara
Gūtham pāyetum-Vin. I. 206
whatis not;Gup +ta,pp. +agutta; +pa +Su +ta, pp. Gopadesu udakāni —A. IV. 102 I I
To make(him)drink faeces;Pg +(i)
Jan +na +eyya,opt. 3”. sg The watersinsidethefoot-printsof
+e + him,caus.inf,
Gocarāya
pakkamati—D. IHI.23;S. theoken

369 A
 Gopanasiyo
Gopānasiyokūtasamosaranā—A.
III. 364
The raftersmeettogetherat the
ridge-pole;sam +0 +Sr +ana,der.
Gopalaka pasupalaka kassaka
pathāvino —M. I. 333; II. 98: Vin.
IV. 108
Cowherds,shephards,farmersand
travellers;patha + avi, der.
Gopalako rukkhe satakam
ālaggetvāuccāram agamāsi.Vin.
IIT.63
Havinghungtheclothon a tree,a
cowherdwentfor relievinghimself:
a + Lag +ya + e + tva,caus.absol.:
u(t) + Car +a, der.; uccaram,dat.
meaningis conveyedby acc.; a +
Gam +G+ s +i, doublepst. 3". sg.
Gopalika passitvaetadavoca—Vin.
III. 67
Having seen (him crossed), a woman
cowherdsaidthis(to him):gopala + j
+ka, der.;etam(etad)+a + Vac+ a,
pst 3MAse
Gopitakam pivitva —A. III. 188
Havingdrunklikea cow: Pa or Pr +i
+tvd,rootredup.absol.
Gopova adinnam adiyamano—M.
11.180
Like a herdsman
who is takingwhatis
not given; gopo + iva, a+ Da + ta,
Pp.; a+ Da + iya + mana, pass. pr.p.
Gopetum ime issara snayime
dātum—Vin. III. 65
Thesehaveauthorityto protect,notto
giveaway;Gup +e +tum,caus,inf.;
Gohanukena
na +ime;Da +tum,inf.
Gopphakamattampiudakam—A. IV.
102
The waterup to thelevelofthe ankle:
gopphaka +mattam +api
Gomatakandarāyam - Vin. IHI. 159
At theGomatavalley
Gomayaggi —M. II. 181
The fire producedwith cow-dung
Goyogapilakkhasmim pindāya
caramāno—A. 1.280
While going for alms nearthefig tree
wherecows are sold;gavinam
vikkayatthaneutthita pilakkhassa
santike,Cy. H. 378; Car +a+ māna,
pr.p.
Golomikamkārāpenti—Vin. II.
134
(They) causeto makea goat-cut;
elakamassukam, Cy. 1211;Kr + ape
+nti, caus.pres, 3. pl.
Govindebrāhmanesabbakiccāni
samavossaiitvā—D. II. 231
Havingdevolvedall thedutieson
Govinda, the brahmin;
Samavossajjitvati samma vossajjitva,
Cy.660;sama + vi +0 +Srj +i +
tva, absol.
Gohanukenaiaghanam kottāpenti-
Vin. II. 266
(They)causetomassagetheloinwith
ajaw-boneofa cow;Kut +dpe+nti,
caus,pres. 3”. pl.
Ghatakafica
Ghatakaīicakatakaūea
sammaiianiūca ādāya—Vin. II. 129
Havingtakena smallwater-pot,a
round
or sguareshapedmatusedfor
rubbingfeetanda broom;katakam
nāmapadumakannikākāram
pādaghamsanattham kantake
utthapetvakatam, tam vattam va
hotucaturassādibhedamvā
bāhulikānugotattā
patikkhittameva,
Cy.1209;4 +Da +ya, absol.
Ghatikamugghatetvakavatam
panāmetvā— Vin. II. 207; III. 119
Having causedto unlockandopenthe
door;u(t)+ Ghat +e +tv, caus.
absol.;
pa +Nam +e +tva, caus.
ahsol.
Ghatikamkaritvā —
S. II. 178
Having
madea bundle
Ghatikenapikīlanti—Vin. II. 10
Playwithsticks,longandshort;Krid
a+ nti,pres.3”. pl.
Ghammābhitatto ghammapareto
kilanto
tasitopipāsito—M. I. 74,
284;S.II. 110;A. IHI. 188
Theonewhoisscorched and
exhaustedbyhotweather; fatigued,
dried
upandthirsty;ghamma +abhi+
Tap+ta,pp.; pari +e(fromI) +ta,
Pp.;Klam+ta,pp.;tras +i+ ta,pp.:
Pipdsd+e + i + ta, denom.pp.
Gharanīnivesanadvāre
nisinnāhoti
~Vin. TV. 20
Gharasunha
The house-ladyhasbeensittingat the
door of the house;gharasamini,Cy.
750;ni +Sad +ta,pp.
Gharato nikkaddhi —Vin. IV. 66
Kicked out of thehouse;ni +kaddha
(fromKrs) +i, pst. 3. sg.
Gharato niharitva denti —Vin. IV.
181
Bring food from thehouseandoffer;
Da +e +nti,pres.3”. pl.
Gharadinnakabadho — Vin. I. 206
A sicknesscausedby a drinkgivenby
a charmer;gharadinnaka+ ābādha;
vastkaranapanakasamutthitarogo,
Cy. 1092
Gharam dayhati —Vin. IV. 283
Houseis burnt;Dah +ya + fi, meta.
pass.pres. 3”. Sg.
Gharam netvabhojetva—Vin. IV.
i I I
175
Havingtakenhomeandcausedto serve
I
(her) with food;Ni +a +tva,absol.;
Bhuj +e +tva,caus.absol. I II
I
Gharam sammajjanti—Vin. IV. 271 NU.
While sweeping thehouse;sam + Mrj
ti
+ya +nti, pr.p.
; I
1 eee
MI )
Gharam sodhenta—Vin. IV. 272
"
While cleaningthehouse;Sudh +e + J 1
nta, caus.PF.P.
DUNN
4
Gharasunhā āvasathadvāre nisinnā
I
 Gharani
hoti—Vin. IV. 20
Thedaughter-in-lawhasbeensitting
atthedoorofthe living room;sunhā
(Skt.snusā);āvasathadvāreti
ovarakadvāre,Cv. 750
Gharāni āgantvāekaccā
bhufjimsu—Vin. IV. 311
Someof them, havingcometo the
houses,hadtheirmeal:Bhu(n)i +
imsu,pst. 3. pl.
Gharāvāsakammatthānam—M. II:
197
Theworkof household
life;
gharāvāsa kammatthānanti
gharāvāsakammam,Cv.lll. 444
Gharāvāsatthenaupaiāna—
Vin. II.
181
You understand (takecareof)
householdactivities:gharāvāsattham
pajanahi, Cy, 1274;upa +Jan + na,
imper.2". sg.
Gharāvāsattho hāyati —Vin. I. 220
House-workis left unattended;
ghara
+avasa +attha;Ha +ya+ ti, pres.
3”.sg.
Gharāvāsamsantānetum —A. IHI.
295
To continuethehouseholdlife; ghara
+ avasa; sam + Tan +e + tum, caus.
inf.
Ghosopi
Ghātetāyam Ghāteyyāma
Gharūpacāram okkamante— Vin. api; du +labha; Budh + ta,
IV. 180
As he is enteringtheneighbourhood kareyyāma —M. II. 88
ofthe house;ghara +upacara;o + I wouldcauseto kill (him), fine (him),
Kram + a +nta,prop. banish
(him) or do whatever I like
according
to thecircumstances;ghdta
Gharūpacārena maggo hoti- Vin, +e+eyydma.caus.opt. 1".pl.; Ji +
IV. 101 dpe+eyyama,caus. opt. 1", pl.; pa +
The roadrunsthroughthe Vraj+e +eyyama,caus. opt. I". pi.;
neighbourhoodof thehouse yathapaccayam,
adv.
Ghare ghare —Vin. IV. 109 Ghasacchadanaparamo
viharami -
Everyhouse M.I. 360
labideatmostwith foodandclothing
Ghānavifiiieyyā gandhā—M. II. 203
The smells,to be felt by nose;ghāna Ghāsaeehādanaparamatāya
+ vi +Jd + eyya;der. santuttho
—D. I. 60
Contented
withmerefoodandclothe;
Ghanena gandhamghayitva na ghasa
+acchadana;sam+ Tus+ta,
nimittaggahi hoti pp.
nanuvyanjanaggahi — D, I. 70; M. III.
35;S.IV. 76 Ghāsamaeehādanam
laddhā—A. III.
Havingsmeltthesmell with thenose 347
hedoesnot becomeonewho takesthe Having
receivedfoodandclothing;
generalappearance
andtheparticular Labh+tva,absol.
features
ofthe obiectintothemind;
Ghrā -t ya 2 i t tva,absol.; nimitta+ Ghasamesana—D. III. 94
Grh t ī, der.; na + anu + vyaiijana+ Seeking
forfood:ghasam+esdna;
Grh -- ī, der. es(fromIs) +Gna,prp.
Ghātetāyam vā ghātetum Ghoso
khoesolokasmim—M. II. 84
iāpetāyam vā iāpetum Thisisjusta shoutout in theworld
pabbāietāyam
vāpabbāietum—
M.
I. 231 Ghoso
niecharati—D. I. 211
To causeto executethosewho deserve Sound
goesout;ni (s) + Car + a+ti,
execution,to causeto defeatthose pres.3”. se.
who deservedefeatandto causeto
banishthosewho deservebanishment;
Ghosopi
khoesogahapatidullabho
ghatetayam, ghata’raham,
Cy.I1.
lokasmim
yadidam
Buddho
276;ghata(fromghan)+e +tum, Buddhoti
—Vin.II. 155
caus.inf.;Ji +dpe+tum,caus.inf. Householder,
eventhesound'Buddho,
pa + Vraj+e +tum,caus.inf, Buddho’,
is veryrarein theworld;
373
 Cakkam Cakkhubhiito Catukkamsaparamam
Cakkhum

+agatoor Tathā -- āgato or Tathā + ambavane—M. II. 210

galo Abidesatthemangogroveof Todeyya
brahmins,in Candālakappa
Cakkhumattātiyo vadeyya,tam na
Cakkam appativattiyam—A. I. 110 Havingseena formwith theeye,he uppaiiati
—M. II. 282 Candālakumārakasamenacetasā
The wheelthatcannotbeturnedback: doesnot becomeone who takesthe Whoever
wouldsaythateye is self, viharāmi —A. IV. 376
a +pati + Vrt + iva, der. generalappearance andtheparticular that(self)is untenable;na uppajjatiti I abidewith a mindsimilarto thatof
featuresof the obiectinto themind: nayujjati,Cy. V. 100 a little boy of thescavenger-class;
Cakkali uppannāhoti —Vin. II. 174 Drf t Ivā,absol.;nimitta+Grh +7, candāla +kumara + ka +sama
Draperywasavailable(for the der.;na + anu t-vyahianat Grh +1, Cakkhumudapādinanam udapadi
Samgha);u(t) +Pad + ta,pp. der.
pannaudapādiviiiā udapādi āloko Candikata ganam paribhasati —Vin.
udapādi—5. II. 7; V. 422; Vin. I. II IV. 310
Cakkasamārūlhāiānapadā
Cakkhunā sacchikaranīyo—A. II. Eyearose,knowledgearose,insight (She) revilestheOrder for thereason
pariyayanti—A. III. 66 183 arose,
wisdomarose,light arose:u (f) of violentnature;pari + Bhas + a +
Peopleofthe country,mountedon 2
To beexperiencedby the(divine)eye; a+Pad +i, pst. 3. sg ti,
ī pres.
"e 3".sg.
3775so
chariots,go round;cakka+sam +@+ sa +acchi + Kr +aniya,fut. pp.
Ruh + ta,pp.; pari +Ya +ya + nii,
Cakkhumloke antarahitam—Vin. Cando so bhikkhu pharuso—
Vin. II.
pres. 3”. pl.; cp. vati, vayati(blows)
Cakkhubhūtāsāvakāviharanti, IL.284 290
nanabhuata
savaka viharanti —Vin. Theeyedisappeared
in theworld: Thatbhikkhuis violentandrough
Cakkhāniecatamyathābhūtam
II. 105 cakkhum,used here as nom. sg.;
samanupassatha —S. IV. 142
The discipleswith theeyeandthe atara +Dha +i + ta,pp. Catasso patisambhidāsayam
Seetheimpermanence of eyewith
knowledge,
abide(theyabidewithfull abhiāāā sacchikatvā—A. IV. 32
rightperspective;cakkhu+anicca +
knowledge) Cakkhuviāāeyyā
rūpā—M. II. 203
tā, der.;sam +anu +passa + tha, Havingrealisedfourfoldanalysisby
2nd Theformsto beknown throughthe himselfwith specialknowledge;pati +
pres. 2”.
pl.
Cakkhubhito āānabhūto eye;vi +Jind + eyya,der. sam +Bhid; sayam,indcl.; sa +acchi
dhammabhūtobrahmabhūto,vattā
Cakkhuna cakkhum upanijjhayati, +Kr + tva, absol.
pavattāatthassaninnetā amatassa Cakkhusmim
sarajjeyyum—S. IV.
pekkhati —A. IV. 55
dātā dhammassāmīTathāgato—M. 10
Seeseye to eye;upa +ni +jha (from Catasso pāricariyā —M. II. 177
I. 111 Would
beattached
totheeye;sam+
Dhyai)+ya +ti, pres. 3”. sg.;pa t Four kindsofservice; pari + Car +
He hasbeentheeye,theknowledge,
is t a ti, pres.3”. sg. Raj+ya +eyyum,pass. opt. 3™.pl. iva, der.
thetruth,thehighest,
theproclaimer,
themaintainer,theelucidatorof Cakkhussa
pātubhāvo —A. 1.22
Cakkhunā cakkhum Catukkabhattam deti niccabhattam
meaning, the giver of immortality, the Manifestation
of aneye;katamassa
upasamharissati—M. II. 169 —Vin. II. 77;LL. 160
lordof theDhammaandtheTathagata; cakkhussāti
pahīācakkhussa, Cy. I.
(He) will turn(his) eyeson (my) eye, Offers four constantmealsor offers a
viditakāranatthena
hānabhūto, 117
(he will look at medirectly);upa + constantmealto a groupof four
hadayenacintetvā vācāya
sam +Hr +a+i +ssati,fut, 34 Sg. bhikkhus:cattāribhattānideti,
nicehāritadhammamayoti Caccaranissitam
va hoti—Vin. HI. taddhitavohārenapana
dhammabhāto,vattanatovaitā 151
Cakkhunā rūpam disvā na catukkabhattantivuttam,Cy. 580;
pavattanato
pavatta,Cy,II. 76;Bhi Oritisnearby
a cross-road
nimittaggāhī hoti catu+ka,der; Da +e +ti,pres.3%.
+ta,pp.;Vae+tu,der.;pa +Vrt+
nānuvyafiianaggāhī—D. I. 70; sg.
tu,der.; ni + Ni + tu, der.; Da +tu,
M. III. 34; S. IV. 76
der.;dhamma+sdmi+i, der; Tatha
Catukkamsaparamamcetapetabbam
 Catukundiko Catunnam Catunnam Caturamgulam

—Vin. IV. 255 288 415 Catunnam masanamaccyena—D. I.

Shouldbeekchanged
forthevalue
of fourkamsas,maximum;kamsa
—4 kahāpanas(coppercoins); kamso
namacatukahapaniko,Cy. 919; Ci(t)
+dpe +tabba,caus.fut. pp.
Catukundiko nipatitvā—A. IHI. 188
Havingfallendownon four-ioints
(two kneesandtwo elbows);ni +Pat
+i + tva,absol.
Catuggunamsamghatim
pannapetva—M. I. 249; S. IV. 184;
A. V. 123
Havingfoldedthedoublelayerrobe
intofourandpreparedthebed;pa +
Jiia + ape + tva,caus.absol.
Catutthaiihānassaassāsapassāso
kantako—A. V. 135
Breathingin andoutis a thorn
(obstacle)to thefourthjhana;a +
Svas+ a, der:;pa + Svas + a, der.
Catutthajjhana vutthahitva
samanantarāBhagavā parinibbāyi -
D. II. 156
Immediatelyafteremergingfrom
thefourthjhana,theBlessedOne
perfectlyextinguished;catu + ttha,
der. +jhana; vi +u(t) +Stha +i +
tvā,absol.; samanantarā,adv.;pari
F ni t Vā t ya ti, pst. 3'd,sg,
Catutthamgocariyānam-— Vin. IHI.
226
The fouthof browncolour;
gocariyānantikapilavannānam,Cy.
684
Catutthamcīvaram parupi —Vin. I.
Putonthefourthrobe;pa +a +Vr + 176
Fortherealisationof the Four Noble
i, meta.,
pst.3". sg. At theendof four months;ati +aya
Truths
astheyare;yathābhūtam,adu.;
abhi+sam +aya (from1) (from I)
Catudonikam pitakam upanisīditvā
—Vin. I. 240 Catunnamihānānam Catuporisā ubbedhena— D. II. 171
Havingsatnearthebasketcontaining abhicetasikanam In height,theheightof four persons;
four measuresof Dona(donais egual ditthhadhammasukhaviharanam catu t purisa +a, der.
to four alhakas, another measure); catu nikamalabhiakicchalabhi
+ dona +ika, der; upa + ni +Sad +i akasiralābhī
—D. III. 113;M. I. 33; Catuppadehi vaddhati —A. V. 137
+tvd,absol. §,Il.278 He becomesrich with four-legged
Onewhogains,with muchease, animals;catu +pada; Vrdh +a +ti,
Catuddisam rakkhaya upagacchanti withoutmuchdifficulty, fourjhanas pres.3. sg.
—D.
I. 12 I (fourstagesof concentration)which
Go to the four directionsfor belongtohigherconsciousnessand Catumasam bhesajjenapavaretum-
protection provide
abiding
ateaseinthisverylife; Vin. IV. 101
abhi+ceta(s)+ ika, der; Drs + ta, To makea reguestwith medicinefor
Catuddisam samghamuddissa—D. pp.+dhamma;kiccha and kasira are four months(to supplymedicinefor
1.145;A. IV. 395 usedtogethersynonimously,Skt. four months);pa + Vr +e + tum,
Pointingout theSamghaof four krehra;
Labh + i, der. caus. inf.
quarters;uddissa,indci.
Catunnam
dhammānam
ananubodhā Caturamginiya senayaassavaya
Catuddisa assadiiteuyyojetva—Vin. āppafivedhā
—A. IV. 105 ovādapatikarāya—D. I. 137;A. II.
I. 16 Forthereasonof not understanding
of 151
Havingcausedto sendmessengers on ad penetrating
intofourthings;a + With thefourdivisionsof army.loyal
horsebackto the four directions;catu anu+Budh+a, der.; a +pati + andobedient;catu + ® +amga + ini;
+disd; u(t) + Yuj + e + tva,caus. Wadh+a, der. a +Sru +a, der.
absol.
Catunnambhikkhave Caturamgulapacchimam
Catuddisābilāni nikkhipitvā—Vin. āriyasaceānam
ananubodha dantakattham —Vin. I. 138
1.345 āppativedhā
evamidam A pieceof tooth-wood (tooth-brush)
Layingdown bodily partsat four dighamaddhanam
sandhavitam
not lessthanfour finger-breadthsin
corners;
ni +Ksip +i +tvd,absol. ‘amsaritam
mamaficeva
length;catu+® +amgula
tumhākaāca
—D. II. 90
Catuddisāviāiāpeyya—
D. I. 251;S. Bhikkhus,
thislongdistance
hasthus
Caturamgulam kannam ussādetvā
IV. 322 been
travelled
byyouandmeforthe
civaram samharitabbam—Vin. I. 46
Would makethe(peopleof) four feason
ofnotunderstanding
of and
Havingcaused toraisetheedge
directionsknown; vi +Jad +ape + i Penetrating
intothefournobletruths;
fourinchesup,therobeshould
eyya,caus.opt.3". sg, vam+idani;digham + addhainam;
befolded;catu+® +amgula;
Sam
+Dhav+i +ta,pp.:sam+Sr + u(t) + Syad+ e + tva,caus.
Catunnam
ariyasaccānam i+ ta,Pp., mamane‘evatumhakajica,
absol.;sam+Hr+a+i+
yathābhūtam
abhisamayāya
- S.V. 8h.for instr. tabba,fut. pp.
Caturamgulomako Catūhi Cattāri Cattāro

Caturamgulomako Bhagavato- pa +Jia +ape +twa,caus.absol. samannāgato

Vin. IV. 173
Four finger-breadthsshorter
(in height)thantheBlessedOne;
caturamgula+ omaka
Caturapasseno— A. V. 30
Four supports;catu 1 ® + apassena;
apa + Si + a + ana, der.
Caturassakamkarapenti —Vin. II.
134
They causeto makeit four-cornered;
caturassakanticatukonam,Cy. 1211;
catu + ® + assa(amsa)+ ka, der.;Kr
+dpe + nti, caus.pres. 3™.pl.
Caturassa pokkharani alibaddha -
M. III. 96
Squareshapedlotus-pondboundby
embankments; catu + ® +amsa;ali +
Badh + ta,pp.; Glibaddhati
mariyādabaddhā,Cv. III. 146
Caturāsītisahassāni—A. IV. 393
Eightyfourthousands;
catu+®+
asiti + sahassa
Catuvaggopacchimosamgho—Vin.
1.298
The Samgha,in theleast,meansa
groupof four; basicunit ofthe
Samghaisfour bhikkhus
Catuvisatim antarayikedhamme
pucchitum—Vin. II. 271
To questiontwentyfourimpediments;
Catusu satipatthanesu
sūpatthitacitto—S. V. 301; A. II.
155
One who hashis mindwell established
on four basesof mindfulness:safi:
Smr + ti, der. +patthdna;su + upa+
Stha +i + ta,pp + citta
Catuhatthodando—Vin. LV.200
A staff,four handslong
Catihapaficaham agametum—Vin.
1.91
To wait for four- five days;catu+
aha;paiica + aha; @+ Gam+ e +
tum,inf.
Catūhi iddhīhi samannāgato—
D. II.
177
Endowedwith four psychicpowers;
sam +anu +@+ Gam + ta,pp.
Catūhi patisambhidāhi
samannagato
—A. IIL.139
Theonewhois endowed withfourfold
analyticalknowledge
Catūhi mandalehi
samanamandalassa
abhinibbatti
ahosi—D. III. 96
Out of four circles, the circle of
recluseswas born
Catūhi sotāpattiyamgehi
—A. IV. 407 gamanamkalena thānam kālena
Theonewhois eguippedwith four nisajjam kalena seyyam—S. V. 78
parts
ofStream-entrance;
sofa + They adoptfourwaysof movement:
dpatti+ amga:thefaith in the walkingatonetime,standingatone
Buddha, Dhamma,Samghaand time, sittingatonetimeandlying
cultivation
of Sila downatonetime;/r +ya +patha;
kappa+e +nti,denom.caus.pres.
Cattariparajikani thapetva 3”.pl; kālena,adv.
avasesani khuddanukhuddakani
sikkhāpadāni —Vin. II. 287 Cattaro nissayeacikkhitum —Vin.
Except for thefour ‘defeats’therest 1.58
arethelesserandminor rules of To spell out foursupports;ni + Sri +
training:
Stha +dpe + tva,caus. a, der.; 4 +Khya + i + tum,intens.
absol.;khudda+ anukhuddaka inf.
Cattārimahāvikatāni
satipaccaye, Cattaro pafica alope samkhaditva
asatikappiyakārake—Vin. IV. 90 aiihoharāmi
—A. III. 304;IV. 318
Fourfoulthings,whenthereis a I chew four five morselsof food and
teason
andwhenthereis no one to thenswallow;sam+ Khad + i +tva,
make
themprepare;kappa+iya, absol.;adhi +o +Hr +a + mi,pres.
der;Kr +aka, der. I, sg.
Cattārīsadanto
—M. II. 137 Cattāro pāde abhinisīdati —A. IV.
Theonewhohasfortyteeth 192
Sits on four legs;abhi + ni +Sad + a
Cattārīsā
bhariyāsādisiyo—D. II. +ti,pres.3". sg.
239
Forty
wivesof equalstatus;
sadisa+7, Cattaro brahmavihare bhavetva-
der, M. II. 76
Havingcultivated
foursublimestates;
Cattāro
.. āhārābhūtānamva Bhū t e t twā,caus.absol.
sattanam
thitiya, sambhavesinamva
ānuggahāya —M. 1.48,261;S. II. II Cattāromahābhūtāhetueattāro
There arefournutrimentsforthe mahābhūtāpaceayo
sustenanceorsupportof beingswho rūpakkhandhassapanhhapanaya
—M.
arealreadybornor whoareyettobe il. 17
bom, (whoareseeking a newbirth) Fourgreatelements arethecauseand
Bhi+ta,pp.;sam+bhava+es theconditionforthedeclaration
of
(from
Is) +7,der::anu+Grh +a, theaggregateof form;mahā+bhiita;
der, rūpa t khandha
Cattāro
iriyāpathe
kappenti,
kālena Cattārovannāsamasamā
—M.II. 85
Cattaro
Four classesareequal
Cattaro satipatthana desita,
pannatta—D. III. 141
Four basesof mindfulnesshavebeen
taughtandproclaimed;Drs +e +i +
ta,pp.; pa +Jia +ape + ta, caus.
pp.
Canam—Vin. III. 121
And; ca + nam; nanti nipdtamattam,
Cy. 535
Candim sokavasamCandakālim -
Vin. TV.333
Candakaliwho is violent,a sourcefor
SOTTOW
Candanikampi pavisanti, oligallepi
papatanti—M. I. 448
They stepintoa cesspitandfall intoa
sewer;
pa +Vif +a +nti,pres.3”.
pl.; oligalle + api; pa + Pat +a+
nti,pres. 3™.pl.
Candanikāpakatahoti—Vin. II. 122
Pool is guiteopen(not covered);
aparikkhittāhoti, Cy. 1208
Candanikāya vā oligalle vā pānā -
A. I, 161
Living beingsin a cesspitorina
sewer;candanikāvāti
asucikalalakūpe,
oligalleti niddhamanakalale,Cv. II.
258
Candanotesamaggamakkhāyati,
yadidammudutayakammaiifiataya
-A.L9
Amongthemsandleis saidto bethe
highestin termsof softnessand
Cammabandhanehi
flexibility; aggo + G + Khya +ya +
ti,pass.pres.3". sg.;mudu+ta,
der.; kamma(n) +ya + ta, der.
Candamāgupurakkhatvā —
D. II.
259
Keeping the moon in front, i.e.
following themoon,(they)came;
candam+ agu : @+ Gam + u, pst.
3”. pl.; pura(s) + Kr +tvd,absol.
Candamva asitātigam—D. II. 261
Just as themooncomingoutof the
black (cloud? ); candam + iva; iva,
indcl.; asita +ati + ga, sita means
white,asita meansblack (cloud)
Candimasuriyānam
upakkilesā-
Vin. II. 295
Stainsof themoonandthesun;upa+
kilesa (from Klis)
Capucapukārakam,
surusurukarakam
nabhufjitabbam
—Vin. II. 214
Oneshouldnot'eatfood makinga
soundcapucapu
andsurusuru;
onom.;
Bhu(ii)j + i + tabba,fut. pp.
Campāyam viharati Gaggarāya
pokkharaniya tire —D. 1. 111,III.
272;M. I. 339;S. 1.195;Vin. L.312
Abideson thebankof thepond,
Gaggara,in Campa;Gaggara
(roaring), onom.
Campeyyakabrahmanagahapatika-
D.I. III
Brahminsandhouseholders
of Campā;
Campa+evya+ka,der.
Cammabandhanehi
ogumphīyanti
- 158;Vin. I. 15; I. 156
Cammonaddhāni Carato
Vin.I. 194 Havingsteppedout of themeditational
walk; 0 (ava) +Ruh +a+i-+ tva.
0+gumpha+tya +nti, denom.pass. absol.
pres.3”.pl.
Camkamādhigato samadhi
Cammonaddhani
cammavinaddhani ciratthitiko hoti —A. III. 30
-Vin. 1.194 The concentrationof mindattainedon
Coveredwith leather and weaved with themeditationalwalk lastslong:
leather;
0 +Nah +ta,pp.; vi +Nah + camkama+ adhi + Gam +ta,pp; cira
ta,pp. +Sthd +i + ti + ka, der.
Camkamaiica jantagharafica Camkamāyaceittamnamati—M. III.
anuiānātu—Vin. II. 119 112
Please
giveconsentto a meditational Themindturnstowards
walking; Nam
walkanda placefor hotbath;anu 3 +a+ ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Jan +na + tu, imper:3”. sg.
Camkamenanisajjaya avaraniyehi
Camkamantam
anucamkamamano- dhammehi cittam parisodheti —M.
D.I.105 1.355;5. IV. 105;A. I. 114;II. 40
Following
theonewalkingup and By walkingandsitting,(he)causes
down;
anu+camkama
+mana, to purify themind fromcovering
(intens.
ofKram), pr.p. factors(hindrances);ā + Vr +aniya,
Camkamantopi
nisinnena pres.3". sg.
Bhagavatakafici kafici katham
saraniyamvitisareti —D. I. 89-90 Cayo paripatati —Vin. II. 117
Walking
upanddown,hecauses to What is piledup collapses;Ci +a,
have
somefriendlytalkwiththe der.;pari + Pat + a + ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Blessed
Onewho hasbeensitting:mi+
Sad+ta,pp.; vi +ati +Sr+ e+ tva, Caranena cittena cittaāheva
caus.absol. cittataram—S. III. I51
Themindis,indeed,morepicturesgue
Camkamam
adhitthāhi
- S. II. 282 thanthepainting
named Carana;
cittam
Stepontothemeditational
walk;adhi +yeva; thesuffix tara is used with
* Stha+hi,imper,2", Sg. instr. abl.for comparison
Carato ca me titthato ca suttassaca
jagarassa ca satatamsamitam
āānadassanampaccupatthitam—M.
1.482
Camkama orohitvā —M. I. 332; II. Knowledgeandvisionisalways
present
tomewhilewalking,standing,
Caranti Catuddipiko Catumayam Cittantaroyam

sleepingandkeepingawake;carato, sentence,“ma ayuddhaparajitam continents

of ancientIndia; catu + Ba(n)dh +ta,pp.
dat.sg. of caranta,pr. p.; titthato, parajayi”(don'tlosethebattle dipa -- ika, der.; pa + Vrs hati
dat. sg. oftittthanta,pr. p.: Svap + withoutfighting it); paribbāiakanti pst.3. sg. Cikkhallam madditvā—Vin. III. 41
fa,pp.;Satatam
samitam,
adv.;pati + pabbaiiā-vidhānam,Cy. III. 408;pari Kneadingthemud;Mrd +ya + i +
upa +Stha + i + ta,pp. + Vraj +aka, der.; Car +i + ta,pp. Cātumāyam
viharati āmalakīvane - tvd, absol.
M.1.456
Caranti visamesamam— S. I. 4 Cavati nappatitthati saddhamme- Abides
attheemblicmyrobalan
grove Ciccitayati citicitayati
(They) farealongevenlyon theuneven A. IIL.6 inCatuma sandhūpāyatisampadhūpāvyati —S. I.
Departsanddoesnot find supportin 169;Vin. I. 225
Cara pi re Mallike vinassa—M. II. thetrueDhamma;Cyu +a +fi, pres. Cātummahābhūtikasmim
kāyasmim Makesthesound‘ciccitaandciticita’
108 3”,
2rd
sg.; pati +Stha + ti, pres. 3”. sg. -S, II, 94 andfumigatesheavily;ciccitayati,
You Mallika, go andperish;Car +a, Inthebodymadeof fourgreat citicitāyati,onom.verbs;sam +
imper. 2 . Sg.; vi + Nas + ya, imper. Cāgaparibhāvitam cittam —
S. V. elements:
catu +maha+ bhiita + ika, dhūpa +dya + ti, denom.pres. 3”.
PSR: 369 der. Sg.
The mindcultivatedby generosity;
Cara pire vinassa—Vin. IV. 139 caga +pari +Bhai+e +i + ta,caus. Catuvannim
suddhim pafnapeti - Cinnamānatto bhikkhūnam āroceti
Go andperish;an idiomatic Pp. M.II. 147 —Vin. II. 39
expressionof resentment;cara, Proclaims
thepurificationof four The onewho hascompletedthe
gaccha.Cy. 871; pi and re are indcl. Cātiyāvassamupagacchanti
—Vin. classes;
catu+vanna+f, der. penanceof humility.informsthe
emphasizingthe idea of resentment, I: 153 bhikkhus;Car +ta,pp.. + manatta;a
theyare printed hereas one word Observerainy retreatinsidea large Cārikampakkāmi —S. IV. 63; Vin. +Ruc +e +ti, caus.pres. 3”. sg.
pot; upa +gacchanti 1,8,23
Carapuraya uccasaddamahasadda Setoutforthetour;pa + Kram + i, Citakam aropetva aggim datva -
mahāvanamaiihogāhanti—A. V. 133 Catuddase
pannarase atthamiya ca pst.3. sg. Vin. I. 345
They plungeintothegreatforestwith pakkhassa
sannipatitva
—Vin. I. 101 Havingcausedto put(thebody)on the
somuchnoisefora race; Havingassembledon thefourteenth, Carittakilamathopissa
tasmim funeralpyreandsetfire; @+Ruh+e
carapurāyāti... puratodhāvantena fifteenth
andeighthof thehalfmonth; samayeappatippassaddho
hoti—A. +tvd,caus.absol.; Da +tvā,absol.
pacchatoanubandhantena catu+dasa+a, der.;pattca+dasa; 11.320
mahāparivārenātiattho, Cy. V. 51; atthama+i, der; sam + ni + Pat +1 Evenhislanguidof walkinghasnotyet Citakam padakkhinam akāsi —Vin.
adhi +0 + Gah + a + nti,pres.3”. + tvd,absol. beensubsided;
caritta+kilamatho+ 1.345
pl. api+assa;a +pati +pa +Srabh+ Circumambulated
thefuneralpyre;a +
Cātuddiso bhikkhu —A. III. 135 Ia,pp. Kr +a@+s+i, doublepst.3. sg.
Caritam paribbāiakam —M. II. 148 A bhikkhuacceptable
tofourcorners
Paribbāiakahasbeenpractised(by of theworld; catusudisāsu Carittam
āpaiiitā—A. V. 283 Citantaramso — M. II. 136
you); the termparibbdjakaseemsto appatihatacāro,Cy. II. 280 €onewhocommitsadultery;ā -- The onewhosefurrowbetween
havebeenusedhereto denotethe
Pad+ya+i+ tu,der. shouldersis filled in; Ci + fa, pp. +
art ofdebate. The basic Cātuddīpiko mahāmeghopāvassi-
antara + amsa
characteristicof paribbajaka life is Vin. I. 290 Caroca vihāro ea anubandho hoti -
to engagein debatewithothersfor A heavyrainpoureddown in four S,IV. 188
finding out thetruth.It isjust like a Cittantaroyam bhikkhavemacco-
continents(all over thecountry) (His)
conduct
andthewayofabiding
battle. This suggestionis further A. V. 300
Pubbavideha,Aparagovāna, followeachother,i.e. behaviouris
corroboratedby thefollowing Bhikkhus,thismortalexistswithin
Jambudvipa,Uttarakurnarethefour Consistent:
Car +a, der.; anu +
onethoughtmoment or between two
 Cittamaniaya Cittam

thoughtmoments;cittantaroti Cittam uddhamgami visesagami Theminddoesnot leapforeward,is 47

cittakārano,athavā,citteneva
antariko,Cv. V. 77
Cittamannaya—A. IV. 263
Havingunderstoodthemind;cittam +
a +Jnd +ya, absol.
Cittam ajjhattamyevasantitthati
sannisidati ekodi hoti samadhiyati
—A. I. 254
The mindremains,settlesdown,
becomesone-pointedandis
concentrated,within itself, indeed:
pres.3”. sg.; sam + ni +Sad +a+ ti,
hoti—S.V. 370
Mind proceedson upwardand
distinctive
path:uddham,
indcl.(opp.
adho) + Gam + i, der:
Cittam uppadetabbam—M. I. 97
One shouldcauseto producea
Sut.pp.
Cittam ekodikātabbam—A.
ekodi +Kr + tabba,fut. pp.
Cittam eva antaram pasādetu—
D. I.
notclean,is notstableandis not
inclined:
aa vimuccatītinādhimuccati,
Cy,1032;pa +Skand +a +ti, pres.
3”,sg.;pa +Sad +a +ti, pres. 3”.
sg;sam+tittha(fromStha) +ti,
pres.3". sg.; vi + Muc +ya +ti,
pass, pres.3. Sg.
Cittamna samādhiyati—M. I. 104
Mindis notconcentrated;
sam +@+
II. 94 Dha+iva +ti, pass.pres. 3. sg.
Cittamnamatiātappāyaanuyogāya
sataccaya
padhanaya—M. I. 101
Mindbendstowardsstriving,
Mind shrinksback,bendsbackand
turnsbackandis distracted;pati +Li
+ti, pres. 3”. sg.; pati +Vrt + a + ti,
+fi, caus.pass.pres.3™.sg.
Cittam pativāpeti —A. IV. 423
Makesthemindturnaway;pati +Va
+Gpe +ti. caus.pres. 3”. sg.
Cittam pariyādāya thassati—S. II.
226
I
Will pervades
themindandremain ti
there;pari +ā t Dā t ya, absol.;

UNU
pres, 3”. sg.; sam +ā +Dha + iya + 139 indulgence,
perseveranceandpractice; Stha +ssati,fut. 3ard sg.
ti.,pass.pres.3”.sg. Causeto pleasethemind within itself: Nam+a +ti,pres. 3’. sg.; @ +Tap +
pa +Sad+e +tu,caus.imper.
3”.sg ya,der.; anu + Yuj +a, der. ; satata Cittam pariyādāya titthati —M.I.
li
Cittam anusandati—A. IV. 47
+ya,der. 243;A. L.I
Mind flows down;anu +Syand+a +
ti, pres. 3. sg.
Cittam khipitabbam mafifieyya
—S. Pervadesthemindandremainthere; 1
YeHe
II. 265 Cittamnigganhati,pagganhati, tittha(fromStha) + ti, pres. 3. sg.
(If anynon-human)wouldthinkthat if .
sampahamsati,
ajjhupekkhati —A.
Cittam abhininnamesim— A. III. 82 mindshouldbe madeupset;Ksip +i + FI
MEKE
I causedto turn(my) mindtowards: tabba,fut. pp.;Man +ya + eyya,opt. (He)checksthemind,spursthemind,
Cittam parisodheti —S. IV. 105
Makesthemindpurify;pari +Sudh +
4 I) WI
abhi +ni +Nam + e +s 3-im. caus. > ari DUNN
ge Sg. Bladdens
themindandis indifferent
to e t ti, caus. DreS. 3. . SE.
| i

pst. 1". sg.

themind;wddhaccasamaye cittam
Cittam dahati, cittam adhitthati, samādhināniggahetabbamnāma, Cittam bhāvitam hoti —S. IV. 294
Cittam (me ) ārādheti —M. II. 159 cittam bhāveti—M. III. 99 kosaiiānupatitakāle
virivena Mind is cultivated;Bhii +e + i +ta,
Makesmehappy;@+Radh +e +ti, (He) fixes, stands on, and cultivates paggahetabbam
nāma, nirassāda caus.pp.
caus.pres. 3. sg. themind:Dhd +ti, pres. 3”. sg.; adhi gatakāle
samādhinā
+Stha+ti,pres.3". sg.;Bhi +e + sampahamsitabbam
nāma, Cittam rakkhati asavesuca
Cittam ārādhemi paīihassa ti, caus.pres.3”.sg. Samappavattakāle
boiihamgu sāsavesuca dhammesu— S. V. 232
veyyākaranena— M. II. 10;S. II. 107
bekkhāya
aiihupekkhitabbamnāma, Guardsthemindagainstinfluxesand
By answeringtheguestionI make
Cy.IIL 413
(them) happy; @+ Radh + e + mi, 249
t+a+ fi, pres. ga SE,
caus.pres, 1".sg.; vi + a+ Kr +ana, The minddoesnotbendtowards;Nam Cittam
panidahati
—M. IHI. 196
der. +a+ ti,pres.3".sg. Keepstheminddirected;pa +ni + Cittam vasamvatteti —A. IV. 34
Dha+ti,pres,3, Sg.
Cittam na pakkhandati nappasidati
+ti, caus.pres. 3™.sg.
na santitthatina vimuceati—D. III. Cittampatiliyatipatikutati
239;M. I. 435 Pafivattati
nasampasariyati—
A.IV. Cittam va te khipissami, hadayam
Cittam Cittavisuddhi Cittassa Cintento

va te phalessami,padesuva gahetva Theyconcentrated

paragamgayamkhipissāmi —5. I.
207
I shallmakeconfusionin your mind,
makeyourheartsplitandtakingyou by
feetI shallthrowyou overGanges:
Ksip-- i t ssāmi,
fat. 1".sg.;Phal +e
-t-ssāmi,caus.fut. Ī". sg.
Cittam viparinatam bhavissati—M.
I. 123
The mindwill bechanged;vi +pari +
Nam+ ta,pp.; Bhi +a+ i+ ssati,
fut. 3". sg.
Cittam vyantībhūtamsabbaso
āsavatthāniyehidhammehi—A. IV.
224; V. 175
Mind is totallydetachedfromthe
conditionsleadingto influxes;
vyantibhittantiekamsenapi
anallinam visamyuttam
visamsattham, Cy. IV. 116;vi + anta
+ bhiita,pp.; sabbaso,adv.
Cittam vyāsificati
cakkhuvinieyyesu riipesu —S. IV. 78
Mind becomesdefiledon material
formswhichshouldbeknownby the
eye;vi +a +Siffijc +a + ti, pres.3”.
sg.;cakkhu+vi +Jia +eyya,der.
Cittam santhapetabbam—A. II. 94
The mindshouldbemadestill; sam +
Stha +dpe + tabba,caus.fut. pp.
Cittam sannisādetabbam—
A. II. 94
The mindshouldbemadesettledown:
sam +ni+ Sad +e +tabba,caus.fut.
pp..
themind:sam+4
+Dha + imsu,pst. 3”. pl.
Cittam sammadevaāsavehi
vimuccati, seyyathīdam,kāmāsavā
bhavāsavāditthāsavā, aviiiāsavā-
D. I. 81
The mind is perfectlyliberatedfrom
influxes,namely, influx of sense
desires,influx of becoming,influxof
wrongviewsandinflux of ignorance;
samma+ (d) +eva; vi + Muc +ya +
ti, pass.pres, 3. sg.; seyyathidam,
indcl., usedfor elaboration;kama+
asava; bhava + āsava; ditthi +
āsava; avwiiiā+ asava
Cittam samdassesi,samadapesi
samuttejesisampahamsesi—D. I.
139
Causedthemind to see(thepoint),
observe,incite,andelate;sam+Drs +
e+ s+i; caus.pst.3. sg.;sam+a+
Da+ ape +s + i, caus.pst. 3™.$g.;
sam+ u(t) + Tij +e+ s + i, caus.pst.
3”. sg.; sam +pa + Hrs +e +s +i,
caus.pst.3. sg. These
four verbs
are generally used to indicatethe
distinctivecharacteristicsofa
Buddha's discourse
Cittarūpamnalabhanti—Vin. IV.
232
(They) do notgetastheylongfor;
Labh +a +nti,pres. 3™.pl.
Cittarūpam rattiyā (na) supimsu-
Vin. III. 161
(They) hadno sleepin thenightasthey
wished;Svap+imsu,pst.3”.pl.
ditthivisuddhattha
—M. I. 149 supporting
themind;cittais
Purification
of mind(concentrated explainedhereas samathaand
mind)isjust for thesakeof vipassanacitta, Cy. IV. 33; alamkara
purification
of views;citta + +attham
vi +Sudh +ti, der.; yāva 1
visuddhi:
(d)+eva,indel.;ditthi +visuddhi + Cittuppadampi parisodhessati—A.
attha IV. 65
Will causeto purify thearisingof
Cittassa
upakkilesā—M. I. 36; A. thought
too;pari +Sudh+e +ssati,
III,16 caus.fut. 3 . sg.
Polluting
factorsof mind; upa +Klis
+a,der. Cittekaggampi vindati —Vin. I. 235
Experiencesonepointednessof mind
Cittassa
nimittamna ugganhati —S. too; citta +ekaggam+api; Vi(n)d +
V.151 a +ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Does
nottakeup theexactpointof the
mind;
u(t)+Grh+ na +ti, meta.pres. Cittena niyati loko —S. 1.39
oe. The world is ledby mind;Ni +ya +ti,
pass.pres.3”.Sg.
Cittassa
parikkhare—M. II. 205-6
Requisites
of mind Cittenaloko niyyati—A. II. 177
The world is ledby mind;Ni +ya+ ti,
Cittassa
vasenavattati—A. IV. 34 pass.pres. 3”. Sg.
Proceeds
according
tothecommands
ofthemind Citte samkilitthe duggati
patikamkha—M. I. 36
Cittassa
vasenavatteyyam—M. III. A miserablestateof existenceis to be
156 expectedwhenmindis polluted;sam
MayI proceedaccordingto the +Kli$ + ta,pp.; eittesamkilitthe,loc.
commandsof themind; Vrt +evyam, absl.; pati +Kamks +ya,fut. pp.
opt.1",sg,
Citrāni pattamandalāni dhārenti
Cittāninamantinivesanāni rūpakokinnāni bhatikammakatāni-
māpetum
- I). II, 87 Vin. II. 113
Themindsturntowardsbuilding (They) usecarvedbowl-restswhich
residences;
Nam+a +nti,pres.3™. arepainted
withfiguresanddecorated;
pl.;Ma +dpe +tum,caus. inf. Dhr +e +nti,caus.pres.3°.pl.;
rūpakat o t Kīr t ta,pp.;bhati
(Bhrti?) +kamma+kata

Cittam samādahamsu—
D. II. 254 Cintento ummādassavighātassa
Cittavisuddhi yavadeva
bhāgīassa—A. II. 80
 Cimgulakenapi Cirappanatthe Cirassāpi
Ciram

The onewho keepsthinkingwouldgo I haveseenmy parents,longtimeago; Ill. 399

pr.p.; bhaga + i, der; As +ya (Skt.
yāt),opt.3. sg.
Cimgulakenapi kīlanti —Vin. II. 10
(They)playwith toy windmill (made
of palmleaves)too; Krid +a + nti,
pres. 3. pl.
I. 111
Twirling round,it fell on theground;
cimgula+ G@ya + i + tva,denom.
absol.
Cirakatampi cirabhasitampi sarita
II. II
The onewho remembers and
recollectswhatwasdoneandsaida
long timeago;cira +kata; cira +
bhasita;Smr + i + tu, der; anu +
Smr + i + tu, der.
Ciratthitikam brahmacariyam
abhavissa—Vin. II. 256
The highestwayoflife wouldhave
stayedlong;a+ Bhd +a+i+ssa,
cond.3. sg.
Ciratthitiko vā assa—Vin. III. 266
Or would lastlong;As +ya(Skt.yat) ,
opt. 3. sg.
Cirattam anutapessati—A. IV. 228
Will suffer for a long time;cirarattam
socissati,Cy. 1V.117;anu + Tap+ e
+ssati,fut. 3", sg.
Ciraditthā kho me mātāpitaro -
Vin. I. 344
cira, indel. +Drs + ta,pp.
Ciradittho me kāmesu ādīnavo -
Vin. I. 197
Set-backof sensedesirewasseenby
me for long
Ciranivāsī ahosi—M. III. 69; S. II.
227
He wasa residentfor a long time;cira
+ ni + Vas3.ī, der.
Ciranisinnobhikkhusamgho
—A.
IV. 204;Vin. II. 236
The communityof bhikkhushasbeen
sittingfora longtime;cira +ni +Sad
+ ta, pp.
Cirapatikā mayam abhippasannā-
Vin. 1.33
Sincelong time,we havebeenin good
faith;abhi +pa +Sad + ta,pp.
Cirapatikāham bhante
Bhagavantamdassanāya
upasamkamitukāmo —D. II. 270;8.
III. 120
Sincelongtime,venerable
sir,I
havebeendesirousof going to see
the BlessedOne; cirapatika +
aham;upa+sam+Kram+i +
tum,inf. + kama
Cirappanatthe sucirappavasino
hatimittesuhajjesakhinosamānetā
—D.IHI.160
Theonewhobringstogether the
relatives,friends,colleagues,and
thecompanionswho werelostfora
longtimeandwho hadbeenliving
abroad
fora longlongtime;cira +pa
+Nag+ta,pp.; sam tt Nitad
(He) will takelong timeto thinkof
tu,der.
renunciation;Smr +a + i + ssati,
fut. 3".sg.
Ciramakasi—Vin. 1. 197
Delayed;
ciram, indcl.; a +Kr +a +s
ti, doublepst. 2". sg. Cirarattam dukkham anubhavanti-
S. 1.30
Ciramiīva, dīshamāyum pālehi —A. They undergosufferingfor a long
III,77 time;cirarattam,adv.;anu +Bhi + a
+nti,pres.3”.pl.
Livelong,enjoylong life; Jtv +a,
imper.2". sg.;pala (fromPa) +e +
hi,imper.2". sg. Cirarattasamvutā—A. IV. 93
Restrained
fora longtime;sam+ Vr
Ciramiīvāti vattum —Vin. II. 140 +ta, pp.
Tosay' Livelong';Vac-- tum,ini.or
Ciravippavuttho assa—M. II. 253
Vad+tum,inf:
Hewouldhavelivedabroad
fora
long time;cira + vi +pa +Vas+
Ciramdighamaddhanamthapesum
-Vin.IHI.9 ta,pp.
Caused
tomaintainfor a long time:
digham
+addhanam;
Stha +Gpe+s Cirassam vata passami—
S. I. I
+um,caus,pst. 3". pl. I see,indeed,aftera longtime
Ciramdighamaddhanam tittheyya- Cirassam sutā—5. III. 95
M,IHI.243;S. II. 85,274 Heard,a long timeago;cirassam,
Wouldstayfor a long time;tittha + indel; Sru + ta,pp.
eyya,opt. 3". sg.
Cirassapi thera agatati sacivarani
Ciramdighamaddhanam yapentu- bhattāni akamsu— Vin. I. 299
M.I. 151 The peopleofferedfood with
Maytheylivelong;Ya+dpe+ntu, robessayinglongsincetheelders
caus.imper.
3”.pl. came;āgatā t iti; sa ' ctvarani;
a -- Kr t ā t imsu,doublepst.,
Ciram
paccanubhossati
—A.IV.228 3'd.pi.
Willexperience
personally,
fora long
time;pati +anu +Bhai+ a +ssati, Cirassāpitheroāgatotisakkaccam
fut.3", sg.
Cirambhavissati—Vin. I. 43
Willlastlong
Ciramsarissatinekkhammassa
—A.
 Cirassapi Civaram
Civaracetapanam Tvaranidahakam

Cirassapi bhaddantoagato—Vin. Cilimikam kātum- Vin. II. 150 varanidahakamsammannitum-

IV. 67 To makea carpet;Kr4 tum,> Vin.I. 283
The venerablehascomeaftera long kartum>kattum >katum,inf, Toagree upona keeperof robes; Keepingtherobeon theshoulder
long time;cirassam +api
diaru +ni +Dha +aka, der.;sam +
Cīrakavāsikampi karonti —M. I. 87 Man+ya +i +tum,inf. Civaram parittam uppajjati —Vin. I.
Cirassutā dhammī kathā —A. IV. 59 They inflict thepunishmentof 283
TheDhamma-talkwasheard.a long cirakavasikain whichtheconvictis (ivarapaccāsānikkhipitum —Vin. A little robe-material is available:
timeago;cira +Sru +ta,pp. Skinnedfrom the neck up to theloin III, 203. u(t) +Pad +ya+ ti, pres. 3”. sg.
andfrom the loin up to theankle,the Tolayasidewiththehopeof a robe;
Cirassuta no āvuso Ānanda
first skin is made the dress for him, civara + pati + asd, instr. 8g.; ni + Civaram paribhuiijamano—A. II. 54
Bhagavatosammukhadhammi
Cy. II. 59 Ksip+i +tum,inf. While makinguseofthe robe;pari +
kathā —M. I. 160
Bhu(fi)j +a + māna,DY-D.
If is longsince,brotherAnanda.that
Cīvarakammam karoti —M. IHI. Civarapatiggahakam sammannitum
wehavehearda Dhammatalk from
110 - Vin.I. 283 Civaram matapitunnamdatukamo
theBlessedOne.
Busywith robe-making Toagreeupona receiverof robes;pati —Vin. 1.297
+Grh+aka,der. Beingdesirousof giving therobe
Ciraciram tumhe gacchati—Vin.
Civarakarasamaye—Vin. III. 256 to theparents;Da +tum,inf. +
IV. 261
At thetimeof robe-making Civarapativisam
apacinayamano- kama
Goesto you veryrarely:ciram +
Vin.1.263
ciram; cirena cirena, Cy. 921
Civarakalasamayonama anatthate Leaving
behindtheshareof robes;apa Civaram vikannam hoti —Vin. I.
kathine vassanassapacchimomaso, +Ci +nd +ya +mana, pr-p. 115 i
Cirilikā saddo antaradhāyeyya—A.
atthatekathine paficamasa
—Vin. The robe becomes uneven at comers;
III. 397
IV. 286 Civarabhattampatiyattam—Vin. vi +kanna
Cirilikā soundwoulddisappear;
Thetimeformakingrobesmeans
the III.265
cirilika, onom.;antara + Dha +ya+
lastmonthof therains,if Kathinais Thefoodwithrobeshadbeen Cīvaram vināhi —
Vin. III. 257
eyya,opt. 3. sg.
notspreadout;whentheKathinais prepared;
pati + Yat +ta,pp. Weave a robe; Vi (Va) + na + hi,
spreadout five months;an +@+Str + imper. 2". Sg.
Cirena agamāsi— Vin. I. 96
la, pp. Civarabhikkha
uppajji
(He) wentlate;cirena,adv.;a + Gam
civarasahassam —
Vin. II. 292
+a@+s+i. doublepst., 3. sg.
Cīvarakārasamayo no vattati—M. Therewasa donationof one thousand
IHI.110 robes;
civara +bhikkha;u(t) + Pad-
Cirena gāmampindāya pavisati -
It is robe-makingtimeforus;Vrt+a ya+i, pst.3". sq. 'īvaram sinnam hoti —Vin. I. 46 A
Vin. IV. 86
ti,pres.3. se. The robehasbeenwetwith sweat;Svid
Entersthevillage for almscollection,
aftera longtime;pa +Vis+@+ti, Civarabhisim
karitva—Vin.1.287 + ta, pp.
Cīvaracetāpanamupakkhatamhoti Having
rolleduptherobelikea
pres. 3”. sg.
—Vin. III. 216 cushion 'īvaram sibbentā amguliya
Thethingtobeekchanged
fortherobe patiganhanti—Vin. II. 116 )
Cirena satim patilabhitva —Vin. i
(i.e.moneyfor therobe)wasready; Civarampi
sendsanampi
dussati
- Whilesewingtherobetheyreceive
207;III. 249
cīvaracetāpananti cīvaramāūlam, Vin.I, 188;IV. 117
Havingrecollectedaftera the needle with the finger (— they
upakkhatamhotiti,sajjitamhoti, Therobeandthedwellingplace
longtime;pati +Labh +i + pricktheirfingers);
Stv +ya +PI
samharitvāthapitam,Cy. 670; upa becomesoiled;Dus +ya +ti,pass.
tva,absol. nta, pr.p.: pati 3 Grh - nā t nii,
(Ss)+ Kr +ta pres.
3".so. meta.,pres. 3". pl.
 Cīvaravamsam
Cīvaravamsamvā civararajjum va
pamajjitva—Vin. I. 47
Havingwiped off the bambooor the
ropeusedfor hangingup robes;pa +
Mrj +ya + i + tva,absol.
Civaravibhamgam patibaheyya-
Vin. IV. 284
Shouldwithholdthedistributionof
robes;patibaheyyatipatisedheyya,
Cy. 930; vi + Bhaj + a, der; pati +
Bah +evya,opt. 3”. sg.
IV. 282
Wearsa robewhichshouldbegiven
back;aāāissāsantakamanāpucchā
gahitampuna Patidātabbacīvaram,
Cy: 930; sam +Kram + antya,fut.
pp.; Dhr + e +ti, caus.pres, 3°, SE.
Cīvare kalyānakāmā
- A. IHI. 107
Thosewho aredesirousof fine robes
Civarena acchadetukamo—Vin. III.
215
Beingdesirous
of offeringhima robe:
a + Chad + e + tum, caus.inf. +
kāmo
Civare pariyayam acikkheyya—Vin.
1.196
Shouldclarifythewaytobefollowed
of death, dissolutionof theaggregates,
regardingtherobe;pari +I; @+Khya
* eyya,intens.opt. 3”. sg.
+Ui,der; Cyu +ana+ta,der.;Bhid
+a, der; ni +Ksip +a, der.
Cīvarehi ubbhanditesīse—Vin. |
287
Cutiyā upapattiyāsati —A. IL. 126
On thehead,smotheredup with robes;
Whenthereis departure
u(t)+bhanda+i +ta,pp.
(i.e.deathandbirth);loc. abs/.
Cunnam sannetabbam,mattikā
Cuditena dyisu dhammesu
Cuditena Cundo
temetabbā—
Vin. 1.47; II. 220
patitthatabbam,
sacceca akuppe ca
The powder should cause to be mixed,
-Ā, III. 198
theclay shouldcauseto be moistened; Theonewhohasbeenaccused
sam +Ni + e + tabba,caus.fut.DD.; (ofsomeoffence)mustput himself
Tim +e + tabba,caus,fut, Pp. ontwothings,truthandanger-free
mind;Cud +i+ ta,pp.; a + Kup +
Cunnena nahāyanti—Vin. II. 280 ya,der.
Bathewith (bathing)powder;Saā +ya
+nti, meta.,pres. 3”, pl. Cundosamanuddeso
—M. II. 244
Cunda,
thenovice;samana+uddesa
Cunnena va mattikaya ya nhāyati-
Vin. IV. 119 Cumbatam
oropetva vaseti —Vin.
Takesbathwith powderor clay;Snd+ III,140
ya * ti, pres. 3". sg.; nhayati = Causing
toputdowntheburden(coil)
nahāyati onthehead,makes(her)stay;a +Ruh
+e+tva,caus.absol.; Vas+e + ti,
Cunnehi bhesaiiehi calitehi attho caus,
pres.3”. sg.
hoti —Vin. I. 202
Thereis a needfor powdered Cecea abhivitaritva vitikkamo -
medicinesifted (calita) Vin.III. 73
Transgressionmadedeliberately;Cit
Cutāham diviyā kāyā — D. II. 286 orCet+ya, absol.;abhi +vi +Tr +
Fallen from thedivinegroup;cuto' a+i+ tva,absol.;vi + ati + Kram +
aham;Cyu +ta,pp.; Div +Var a,der.
diviya = dibba
Cetakena
bhikkhuna
Cuti cavanatabhedoantaradhanam pacchasamanena—D. I. 205
maccu maranam kalakiriya Withabhikkhuattendantfromthe
khandhanam
bhedokalebarassa Cetiya
country;Cetiyaratthe
jatatta
nikkhepo—S. II. 3 Cetakoti
evamladdhanāmena,Cy.
Shiftingout,removal,break, 386
disappearance,God ofDeath, death,act
Cetanāabbohārikā—Vin. IHI. 112
puttingdownof the(dead)body;Cy Willis notinvolved;a + vohara +
ika,der.
Cetanapatitthita, patthana
patitthita—A. I, 224
andarrival Willisestablished,
intentis
established;
pati + Stha + i + ta,pp.
Cetanaya
karaniyam
—A. V.312
393
Cetasa
A thingto bedoneby will; Kr +aniya,
fut. pp.
Cetanāhambhikkhave kammam
vadāmi—A. III. 415
'Bhikkhus,I declarethatwill is
Kamma;cetand+aham;Vad+ a +
mi,pres.1".sg.
Cetayamānassame pāpiyo
acetayamānassa
meseyyo—D. I. 184
It isworseifI weretowill, andit
is betterif I werenot to will; Tattha
eeteyyamabhisamkhareyyanti
padadvayeihānamsamapajjanto
cetetinama,punappuna
kappetiti
attho, uparisamāpattiatthāya
nikantimkurumānoabhisamkharoti
nama,Cy, 373; cetaya+ mana,
pr. p:
Cetayitvā kammamkaroti —A. III.
415 TE
One actsafterwilling; Cett ayat i:
tvā, absol.
Cetasaadhimuccamanopannhaya
pariyogahamano—A. IV. 145
Beingpossessed
bymindandplunged
intobywisdom;adhi+Muc+ya +
mana, pass, prp.; pari + 0 + Gah +
a + mana, pr.p.
Cetasā anuvitakketi anuvicāreti
manasānupekkhati —D. Ill. 242; A.
III. 23,361
(He) pondersover,investigates
and
reviewswith themind;anu +vi +
takka+e +ti,denom.
pres.3”.sg.;
anu +vi +Car +e+ ti, caus.pres.
34,sg.;manasa+ anu+pa +Iks +a
+ti,pres.3™.
d
Sg.
 Cetasa
Cetaso Cetopasadahetucca
Cetaso

Cetasacittam suparicitam —A. IV. Cetasāphuto —M. III. 94

mindfulness
onbreathing
inandout Cetiyassava parinameti —Vin. III.
402 Pervadedby themind;Sphur +ta,pp.
shouldbe practised; vi +Ksip +a, 266
Mind is well scrutinisedby themind:
der. Or causesto offer to a shrine;
su +pari + Ci + ta,pp. Cetasikamdukkham domanassam pari +Nam + e + ti, caus. pres.
patisamvedeti—A. 1.216; IHI. 205 PANE
Cetaso
vivaramcetasopasādam—A.
He experiencesmentalpainand
MIRI III. 186
displeasure;ceta(s) +ika, der; du + Cetiyāni abbhantarāni ceva
To give advice (to the disciples) after
Openness andclarityof mind;
manas+ya, der.;pati +sam + Vid+ bāhirāni ca —D. II. 74 I
surveying(their)mindby (his own) samathavipassanācittassa
e t ti, caus,pres. 3". sg. Religiousshrinesinsideandoutside;
mind;o -- Vad+i + tum,inf. uppaiianokāsa-samkhātavivaram,
Cy.
III.295 abhi + antara; ca + eva, indcl.
Cetasoapariyādānā na ceva
Cetasāceto paricca pāiānāmi —M. uttāsavāhoti, na vighātavā na
Cetaso
samudācāro—M. IHI. 114 Cetiyesu carikam caramano —Vin.
1.74;S. 11.233;
A.I. 8 apekhavā,anupādāyaca na
Upsurge
of themind;sam +u(t) +a+ IV. 108 )
Havingsurveyed(his) mindby (my) paritassati—S. IHI. 18
Car +a, der. Whiletouringinthekingdomof
mind,I understand;
pa +Jan +na +
As (his) mind is not obsessed, he is Cetiya
mi,pres. 1".sg.
not terrified,not distressed,not
Cetaso
samphutthapubba
dhamma
ankious;
heis notagitated
because
of Ceteti upakkamati muccati —Vin.
Cetasaceto paricca manasakasi- nāsamudācaranti—A. V. 103
non-grasping; u(t) + tras + a + vantu,
Vin. Il. 236 Things
already
touched
bytheminddo IHI.113
der.; vi +ghan + ta + vantu,der.; Wills, strivesandis released;Cet + e
Surveying(other’s)mindwith notcomeupon themind;sam +Sprs
apa+Iks +a +vantu,der.;pari + +ti,pres.3".sg.;upa+Kram+a+
(his own) mind,hepondered:pari +la,pp. +pubba;sam +u(t) + a +
tras+ya +ti,pass.pres.3™.
sg. ti, pres. 3". sg.; Muc +ya + ti, pass.
+1 (t) +ya, absol.;manasi+ akasi: Car+a+ nti,pres. 3”. pl.
pres. 3”.
ard
Sg.
.
a+Kr+a+5s + ti. doublepast.
Cetasopanidhanapaccaya
3 SE Cetapetvati
parivattetva—Vin. III.
tadabhinandati—M. III. 197
216 Ceteyyamabhisamkhareyyam—D. I.
For thereasonthatthemind is setin,
Cetasā ceto paricca vidito —M. I. Cetāpetvā
meanshavingcausedto 184
herejoicesoverit;pa +ni +Dha+
210;A. IHI.123 exchange;
pari + Vrt +e +tva,absol. I shouldwill andaccumulatemental-
ana,der +paccaya; tam (tad) +abhi
Understoodwith (my) mindafier energies;Cet + eyyam,opt. 1".sg.;
+Nand+a+ ti,pres.3. sg.
makinga surveyof hismind;Vid+7+ Cetiyacdrikamāhindantā
— D. II. abhi +sam(s) + Kr + eyyam,opt.
Ia, pp. 141 PE SE
Cetasoparivitakkoudapadi—Vin.I.
While goingroundtheCetiya
4, 21
Cetasācetoparivitakkamafiiaya — S, (objectof veneration);
cetiya,from Cetopadosahetucea —A. I. 8
An ideaarosein mind;u(t) +a +Pad
I. 103;Vin. I. 4 Citoheapup;@+Hind +a +nta, Dueto thepollutionof mind;ceto +
+Ast BMsee
Havingunderstoodtheideaby (his) pr.p. padosa +hetu+ ca
mind;@+Jia +ya, absol.
Cetasolīnattam —A. 1,3; IV. 32
Cetiyapūiāya
—Vin. IV. 301 Cetopariyāyam paiānāti —D. I. 79
Sluggishnessof mind:Li +ta,pp. +
Cetasa cetoparivitakkam Formaking
offeringtotheshrine He knowstheway of mind,
tla, der.
manasākāsi—M. II. 61 (habitpatterns);pari + Ya + (y)
(The BlessedOne) focussedhis
Cetasovikkhepassa
pahanaya
Cetiyarukkham
chedapesi
—Vin.III. +a; der.;pa +Jan + na + ti,
attention
onthethinking(of 155 and¢
pres. 3”. Sg.
anapanasatibhavetabba—
A. III.
Ratthapāla)
by his mind;ceto+pari Caused
tocutatreeregarded
asa
449
+vi +takka shrine;
Chid+dpe+s +i, caus.pst. Cetopasadahetucea
—A. I. 9
Todriveawaymental
disorder,
3".
59 Due to theclarity of mind
 Cetovasippatto
Cora Colakena
Cora

Cetovasippattovitakkapathesu—A. =
Codakena param codetukāmena-
11.36 Cora
satthadhitthana
—A.IHI.363
Vin. II. 248
Theonewho hasreachedmastery Thieves
aredependents
onweapons
By theaccuser,w ishingto accuse
overthemindin regardto thought
another;
Cud +aka,der.;codetum
+
processes;
ceto+vasi+pa +Ap 4 Corikamkatva—Vin. I. 75
kama
ta,pp. Having
madea littletheft

Codito va acodito va āpattim sarati

Cetosamādhimphusati —M. IHI. Corikayaābhatā—Vin. III. 250
—M. II. 248
210 Broughtin by a little theft;a +Bhr+
He rememberstheoffence,whether
Experiencesa concentrationof mind; ta,pp.
reprovedor not; Cud +e + i +ta,
Sprs +a +ti, pres. 3" sg.
Caus.pp.; d + Pad +ti, der; Smr +a
Coresabhandegahetva—Vin. IV.
tii pres 3. Se.
Celandukenacepi muddhanā 120
pariharantā —M. I. 150 Havingarrested
therobberswith
Codiyamāno na deti —A. IHI. 352
Carryinghimevenon thehead,dressed goods
Beingaccused,he doesnotgive;Cud
with a turban;cela +anduka;pari +
+ @+ tya + mana, caus. Pass, prp.;
Hr + a + nta,Dr.p. Coroyathasandhimukhegahito -
Da +e + ti, pres. 3 Sg.
M.II. 74
Celapattikamakkamitum— Vin. II. lustasa robbercaughtin a burglary;
Codiyamāno sāriyamāno
- Vin. HI.
129 yathd,indel.;Grh +i +ta, pp.
221
To stepontoacloth-spread;
BeingchargedandremindedSmr +e
celapatikanticelasantharam,Cy. Colakam
temetvapiletva
+ lya +mana, caus. Pass. prp.
1209;a + Kram +i + tum,inf. pamajjitabba
—Vin. I. 48
Causing
tosoaka pieceofcloth in
Coragamaniko
—Vin. III. 208 waterandsqueez it, (the floor) should
Celavitanani karonto
The group-leaderof robbers bemopped;
Tim+e + tv, caus.
mandalamālāni patiyādento —D. II.
159 absol.:Pid + e +tvd, caus. absol.; pa
Coram āgucārim gahetvā—
M. III.
Makingcanopieswithclothsand +Mrj +ya + i+ tabba, fut. pp.
163
Preparingpavilions:Kr +0 +nta,pr.
Havingcapturedthethief,a criminal: Colakamnipphatati—Vin. I. 271
P.; pati + Yat+ e +nta,caus.prp.;
agu + Car + 7,der.; Grh +e +ta,
patiyādentātisaiientā, Cy. 596 Thepiece
of clothdrops;ni(s)+Pat +
absol.; the two words,cora and
a+ fi, pres. 34. sg,
āgucārī, occur together
Codakam patippharati—M. 1.95; A.
IV. 193,codakamyeva Colakena
paccuddharitum
—Vin.IL.
Corā andhakārābhinivesā
—A. IHI. 151
Turnsagainstthereprover;pati +
363 Toremove
(it)withapieceofcloth;
Sphar +a +ti, pres, 3, sg.
Thievesareadheredto darkness; paccuddharitunti
puichitum,Cy.
andhakāra -- abhinivesa 1219;pati +u(t) +Dhr or Hr + i +
Codakassapaccaropeti—M. I. 96;
A. IV. 193, codakasseva tum
, inf,
Corā bhikkhūacchindimsu
—Vin. I.
Causes
tomakecounter-charge
forthe
88
reprover;pati +4 +Ruh +e +ti,
caus.
pres,3”,sq, Thethieves
plundered
thebhikkhus:
a
+Chi(n)d+imsu,pst.3".pl.

397
 Chakalakam
Chakalakam ajikaya
vippatipajjantam(addasamsu)—Vin.
III. 166
(Theysaw)a he-goatmisbehavingwith
a she-goat;vi +pati +Pad + ya +
hia, pr.p.
Chaddetukamoviya —Vin. IV. 190
As if theone,desirousof throwing
it away;chaddetum+kamo; viya
indci.
Chattanāliyā pakkhipitva pahita -
M. II. I16
It wassent( to me) by puttingitin an
umbrellacase;chatta-- nāli; pat
Ksip +i + tva,absol.;pa t Hi t ta
pp.
pl.
Chattapanissadhammamdesenti-
Vin.
IV.199
( They)explaintheDhammato a person
havinganumbrellain thehand;Drg +e
+nti,caus.pres.3”.pl. . chandarāgappahānam
Chattam apanametya—Vin. II. 208
Havingmadethesunshadeturnaside;
apa +Nam +e + tva,caus.absol.
rao: dhārenti —Vin. IV.
Chandamūlakā
Theymakeuseof umbrellaandshoes:
chatta +upahana;Dhr +e + nti
caus.pres, 3”. pl.
Chatte vassamupagacchanti—Vin, L.
152
Observe rainy retreat under (the shade
of) anumbrella;upa +gaccha +nti
pres. 3”. pl.
Chaddhaturoyam bhikkhu puriso-
M. III. 239
Bhikkhu,this personis madeof six
elements( pathavi dhatu, āpodhātu,
teiodhātu, vāyodhātu,ākāsadhātu,
vinhanadhatu);cha + dhdturo +
ayam; Cy. takesthe term dhaturoas
. Having
dhatuyoor dhatuko, V. $1
Chandakamsamharitva—Vin. IV.
250
Havingmadea voluntarycollection;
sam +Hr +a+ i+ tva,absol.
Chandaiicarucificaadayavoharati
—Vin. III. 175
Havingtaken(our) consentand
consensushe speaks;ā +Dd + ya,
absol.; vi + 0 (ava) + Hr +a i
pres.3". sg.
Chandadayako
khīyati—Vin. II. 94
Theonewhogivesconsent
criticises;
chanda +Dé + aka, der. Ksi + ya +
ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Chandamūlakāsabbedhammā—A.
IV. 339
Channam
Chandam
Allthingsarerootedin desire;
āropema,Cy. 1214;a t Ruh t e t
aiihāsayachando
ma,caus. imper.I". pl.
kattukamyatachando
tam milam
etesanti
chandamiilaka;sabbe
Chandassadhammaniiihānakkhanti
dhammātipaāeakkhandhā,Cy. IV.
bahukārā—M. II. 175
158
Deepunderstanding ofthe Dhammais
Chandam janeti vayamati viriyam auitehelpfulfor makinga decision;
dhamma+ nijjhana + khanti
ārabhaticittam pagganhāti
padahati
—M. II. 26:S. V.9; A. IL. 74
Chandapi gaccheyya,dosapi
Hemakes a resolution,strives,starts
gaccheyya,mohapi gaccheyya,
anendeavour, holdsthemindup and
bhayapi gaccheyya—Vin. IV. 238
fixeson;Jan +e +ti, pres. 3™.sg.; vi
+d+ Yamta? ti, pres. 3". sg.; ā May go wrong for thereasonof desire,
anger,delusion,andfear:chandā+
Rabh+a +ti, pres. 3. sg.; pa +Grh
api; dosā t api
+nd+ti, meta.pres. 3”. sg.;pa +
Dha+ti,pres.3. sg.
Chandiko ca paiifiava ca —A. HI. 436
Courageousandwise; chanda+ ika,
Chandam
datvākhīyati—Vin. IV.
der.
152
giventheconsent,criticises
Chandoiāyati —A. I. 264
theact; Da +tva,absol.
Attachmentis born;Jan +ya + ti,
pres. 3”. Sg.
Chandam
datum—Vin. I. 121
Togiveconsent;Da + tum,inf.
Chando hi mūlam dukkhassa—S. IV.
328
Chandaragatthaniye
dhamme
arabbha
—A, I. 264 Desire is indeed the root of Dukkha
Concerning
thethingsrelatedtothe
exciting
desire;thdna + iya, der.; Channamativassati,
vivatam
ārabbha,
indcl. nativassati—Vin. Il. 240
What is coveredis extremelywet,
Chandarāgavinayo whatis openis notso wet, Chad +
ta,pp.; ati +Vrs +ya + ti, pres. 3”.
—M. 1.87;A.
1.258 sg.; vi + Vr +ta,pp.; na ati +
Removal andabandonment of the vassati
exciting
desire;chanda+ raga + vi +
Ni+a,der;pa +Ha +ana,der. Channam dhātūnamupādāya
gabbhassāvakkantihoti —A. I. 176
Chandaso
āropema—Vin. II. 139 Dependingon six elements
May Weput it in metric form (or in a conception(comingdown of the
fixedlanguage);
vedamviva embryo)takesplace;upādāva,indcl.;
 Channam
Chalakani
ava + Kram + ti, der. phassāyatanikas
Channamphassāyatanānam
Chabbassānidhāretabbam— Vin.
asesavirāganirodhā III. 228
papancanirodho,papaiicavupasamo Shouldcauseto be usedfor sikyears;
—A. IL. 162 cha + vassani;Dhr +e +tabbam,
Proliferationof thoughtssubsides
caus.fut. pp.
andceasesto existdueto the
completedetachment fromand
Chama nikinnam bhakkhasam-—D.
cessationofsix sensebases:phassa
IIL.6
+ ayatana;a +sesa: Sis + a, der.
The foodputon theground:ni +Kir
+ vl + raga: Raj + a, der.+ ni +
* ta, pp.; nikkinnam,pakkhittam,
rodha : Rudh -- a, der:: vi+ upa
thapitam;bhakkhasantibhakkham,
Sam + a, der.
yam kifici khadaniyambhojanivam,
Cy.819
Channāyam kumārikā tassa
kumārassa— Vin. IHI. 135
Chamaya kathinam pattharanti-
This girl is suitablefor thatboy;
Vin. IT. 116
channa+ayam: Chad or Chand + ta,
(They)spreadKathinaon theground;
pp.+ ayam
pa +Str +a +nti,pres.3".pl.
Chapakassapajapati —Vin. IV. 203
Chamayapattamnikkujjanti—Vin.
A wifeof an outcast:chapakassāti
II. 113
candalassa,Cy. 896; cp. chavaka
(They)turnthebow!upsidedownon
theground;ni + Kujja (Skt.kubja)+e
Chappaiica vacahidhammam
+nti, denom.pres. 3”. pl.
desetum—Vin. IV. 21
To explaintheDhammain five-six
Chambhī bhīrukaiātikā —M. I. 19
words;cha +panca; Dr§ +e +tum,
Thosewhoarepanickyandsubject
to
inf.
fear,by nature:bhiruka +jatika
Cha phassayatanikanama niraya -
Chammāsikam vetanamdeti—Vin.
S. IV. 126
1.240
Six purgatories
namedphassāyatanikas,
Givessalaryforsixmonths;
cha+
(thatwhichbelongstothesixsense-
masa+ ika, der.; Da +e + ti, pres.
3”.sg.
Chalakani pi atthikani pi
ucchitthodakampi pattena
Cha phassāyatanikāsaggā—S. IV.
niharanti—Vin. Il. 115
126
(They)carryawayinthebowloddbits,
Six heavenlyabodesnamed
bonesanduncleanwater:u(t) +Sis +
Charattam
Chalamgasamannagatam
fa,pp. +udaka;ni ($) +Hr +a +nti, Chavim opātetvāharanti —Vin. II.
150
pres.3”.pl.
Causingto dropthestuff theytake
Chalamgasamannagatam awaythecase;o +Pat +e +tva,caus.
dakkhinam patitthapeti—A. IIL. 336 absol.; Hr +a +nti, pres. 3”. pl.
Causesto establishanoffering
Chasu ajjhattikabahiresu ayatanesu
comprisingsix items;cha (Skt.sat) +
amga +sam +anu +a +Gam +ta, —A. V. 109
In referenceto thesix bases,internal
pp;pati +Stha +ape + ti, caus.pres.
and external
3”,sg.
Chahi phassāyatanehiphussaphussa
Chalamgasamannāgato
hoti —A. V.
patisamvedenti—D. I. 45
30
Contactingcontinuouslywith six
Isendowed
with sixfold (equanimity);
sensebases(they)experience;Sprs
+
ehalamgupekkhāya samannāgato,
Cy ¥.8 ya,absol.;pati +sam + Vid + e +nti,
caus.pres. 3”. pl.
Chavakutiyavassamupagacchanti-
Vin,1.152 Chahi māsehichārattūnehi—A. I.
Observerainyretreatundera small hut 111 .
putupin thecemetery;Chavakutika By six monthsminussix days;cha +
nama
tamkitamaficadibheda
kuti; ratta + tina
tamkitamaāeais a hut prepared by
puttinga stoneslab overfour stone Chādeti sāsanam—A. IV. 196
pillars, Cy. I, 302 Makesthemessageconceal;Chad +e
+ti, caus.pres. 3”. sg.; Sas + ana,
Chavatthikāni
upadhāya—M. I. 79 der.
Keeping
humanbonesaspillow;
chava
'- atthikāni;upa +Dha + Chayava anapayini—M. II. 135;S. I.
ya,absol. 72 E
Tust like theshadowwhichdoesnot
Chavasīsassa
pattamdhāreti—Vin. go away; chāyā t iva; an + apa + aya
ll. 115 (fromI) + int
Holds(uses) a bowl of skull; Dhr t e
* ti,caus,pres.3™.sg. Chārattam manattamdetu—Vin. II.
38
Chavalatam ubhatopadittam Let (theSamgha)prescribepenance
majjhegiithagatam —A. II. 95 of humilityfor six nights;cha +
A firebrand
of funeralpyre,kindledat
ratta; mānatta(humility)is
bothendsandsmearedwith dungin the connectedwith samghādisesa
middle;
chava+alata;pa +Dip ' ta,
offences; Dā t e t tu, imper: SM ises
PP.;giitha +gata Cy. describesfourfold mdanatta:
401
 Charika Jantaghare
Cheppayapi Jaccandhipamo

concealed,unconcealed,fortnight Chejjabhejjam anusāsanti—Vin. Ii.

andall inclusive,the third is meant 47
for the bhikkhunis, 1170 Administer
thesmallpartsofthe land:
Chid +ya,fut. pp.; Bhid +va,fut.
Chārikā ussannā hoti —Vin. II. 220 pp.: anu + Sas + a + nti, pres. 3™,pl. ibhasi —
Jaccandhipamomane patibhasi anīya, fi pp.;: Tr+
aniya,fut. Trt eet tvd,caus.
D.II, 329 absol.
pp.
Chedana-vadha-bandhana- Youseemto be like a born blind; jati
viparāmosa-ālopa-sahasākārā +andha+upama;maiiiie,Re, i indcl.; anap: sakantak
Janapado sake o saupapīlo
pap —D. I.
Chinnaggani tinani khadati —Vin. pativirato —D. I. 5 a+
i+ Bha si pres.2".
+si, ndsg.
ig 135 T i
£352 Refrained from cutting (limbs), MU, The countryis infestedwith thorns
Eatsgrassestopless;chinna +agga; killing, binding,highwayrobbery, laiiarasakatena
yāti—5. 1.90 (criminals)andoppressed
Khad +a + ti, pres. 3. sg. plunderandviolence;vi +para + (He)goesby a worn out cart; Ya+ i, E AT
) E he seqarte i= + ti

mosa (mdsa?).; @ + Lup + a, der.; i 7 ko Ianam ussāretvā—Vin. I. 276

Chinnapapatampapatanti—Vin. II. sahasā+ kara I PE Makingpeoplegoout;u(t)+Sr +e +
284
Jataya
iatitāpaiā—S. I. 13 tvā,caus.absol.
(They)jump down fromtherock Cheppayapi ganhanti—Vin. I. 191 People
areentangled withproblems re Ti ects
Takeby thetail; Grh + nad+nti, meta. Mi Jat +i +ta,pp Janamsannhapessama —Mi, IHI.171
pres. 3”. pl. A I Wewill makepeopleconvince;
Chinnabhatta ahosi—Vin. IV. 175
Jatumatthakamādiyitvā —Vin. IV. sam +Jia + Gpe +ssama;caus.
She lost hermeal;Chid+ ta,pp.+
bhatta
SMa ce}, fut.1%.
ph
Applying
somethingcoatedwith TA

Chinnabhatto ahosi—Vin. IV. 67

; Mi
lacauer; E t
--fa,pp. ka,der.;ā; t ivakālakatāya
—A.IV.
Janettiyakālakatāy 276;
Helosthismeal;Chid+ta,pp. E +wā, absol.
Da + iva +i Vin. II. 255 | I
When the mother died; loc. absl.
Janapadacarikampakkamitum—A. Ä Esti
Chinnamilako hoti suttanto
appatisarano— A. II. 147 2 1 Ng Jantagharapitham
datya—Vin. I.
The discoursebecomesrootlessand reachi inthecountry; 47 Nga
supportless;mila + ka, der; a +pati a+ Kram +i +tum,inf. ol "
Ke NI Having given the stool to be used in
+ sarana i the hot-bath room; Dd + 1a, absol.
Janapadapadeso
vutthasi
—D.LI.339
Setoutthepeopleof countryside,i.e. Jantagharam tinacchadanamna
Chinnika dhuttika ahirikayo —Vin.
migrated;
vi+u(t)+Stha +s +i, pst. sedeti—Vin. II. 120 '
II. 128
3”,sg. The hot-bathroomwith a grassroot .
Thosewho werebroken,sly and
doesnotmakesweating;Svid +e +ti,
shameless;chinna+I + ka, der.; ahiri
+ ka, der. Janapadam
vihethessanti—D.
1.135 caus.pres.3”.8g.
Oppress
thecountry;vi +Hid +e +
Chupitamatte vippatisari ahosi - .
Ssanti,
fut.,3. pl. antā 'attam —Vin.II.220
Jantagharavattan
Vin.ITI.37 The dutieson thehot-bathroom
Janapadetamkaraniyamtiretva-
Vin.
I, 178 Jantaghare aggi mukham dahati -
Havingcausedto finish thatbusiness Vin. Il. 120 !
(Work
to'bedone)in thecountry;Kr + The fire in thehot-bathroom scorches

403
 Jantaghare Jataripam
Jaradubbalo Jaradhammomhi

the face; Dah (Dah) + a + ti, pres. 3”4 Jahanti purimani namagottani—A.
walk;anu +Kram +a +mana,
Jaradhammomhi
jaram anatito—A.
Sg.
Yo
intens.pr.p.: anu +yi +Car +a+ IV. 198;Vin. II. 237 .
1,138
mana, pr.p.
lamofthenatureofdecay, 1havenot Abandonpreviousnamesandclans;Ha
Jantaghare udaravattim tapentassa . rd
+nti, root redup.,pres. 3”. pl.
—Vin. III. 117 overpassed
decay;dhammo+amhi:
Jayam veram pasavati— §, I. 83
While makingthebelly-liningwarmin As+mi;an +ati +1 +ta,pp.
Victory breedshatred:pa+ Su+a+ Jagaratam sutta—S. I. ;
thehot-bathroom;Tap+e + nta, ti, pres. 3, sg.
Jaraparijufifienasamannagato—M. Thosewho havesleptamongthewide
caus, PDK:D.
IL.66 earn : awake;Jagr +a t nta,pr.p.: Svap
Jaram upeti—S. I. 71 Beingattacked
by ageing;jara +part ta, pp:
Jantaghare maiihe aggitthānam
Comesof age;upa +e (fromI) +ti,
karonti, upacārona hoti —Vin. II. +Jur +ya, der
sres.3.
pres. s¢
3°.Sg. Jagariyam anuyuttenabhavitabbam
120
Jarayaparimuccanti—A. V. 216 —M. 1.471 W
Makea fire placein themiddleof
Jaram pahatum—A. V. 144 One shouldbea personpractising
thehoi-bathroom,thereis no (They)
arereleased
completely
from
To getrid of decay;pa +Ha +tum, decay;
pari + Muc +ya +nti, pass. watchfulness: iāgara T iya, der.; anu
neighbourhood;aggi +thāna; upa
inf. +Yuj +ta,pp.
pres.
3. pl.
+ Car +a, der.
Jara jiranata khandiccam Jagariyam anuyutto—S. IV. 104;A.
Jannukamattesupi oghesu Jalamaggiva
bhasati—D.HI. 188
pāliccam valittacatā āyuno Shines
asa burningfire; aggi + iva; II. 40 . I
pavattamanesu—Vin. I. 29]
samhani indriyanam paripako - The onewhokeepsthemindawake
Whenthefloods,up to thelevelof Bhas
+a +ti,pres.3”.sg.
S. IT.2
knee,areproceeding;jannuka +
Decay,decrepitude,breakingup, Jalamya
yasasa
attha—Vin. II. 203 Jagariyanuyogamanuyutto—D. HI.
matta;pa + Vrt + a + mana,DFY.p.
hoariness, wrinklingof the skin, 107 Iki
Hestood(stayed),indeed, shining aine
damage
tothespanof life,over- withfame;jalam +eva;jalam, pep. Theonewhohasbeenpractising
Jannukena ghattesi—M. II. 122
ripenessof faculties;jirana +ta, watchfulness;jagariva + anuyogam
Touchedwith theknee;ghatla+e+s fromjalanta;a +Stha +G,pst.3”.
der.;khanda+i +ta,pp. +ya,der.; sg. + anuyutta
* i, denom.
pst.3". sg,
palita+ya, der.;vali +taca+ta,
der.; sam+hani;pari +Pac +a, Jalitamaggimdsajja—M. I. 338 Jataripapatiggahana pafivirato -
Vannumattenaodhinā — D. II. 160
der. D. I. 5, Vin II. 296,appativiratā
To theheightof theknee Havingattacked
a burningfire;Jval +i
+ta,pp.;2+ Sad +ya, absol. Refrainedfromacceptinggold and
Jaradubbalacaranagilana—Vin. silver
Jamghaviharam
IV. 212
anucamkamamananam Javano
purisoparamena
javena
(A nun)weakbyageandunable
to 1ātarūpamayamdandam gahetva-
anuvicaramānānam
- D. I. 235 samannagato
—S. II. 266
walk:pādarogenasamannāgatā,Cy. I
Between
thetwo,goingona walk;anu The ofsupreme M. II. 155
swiftmanpossessed NG
901 | Havingtaken
a stickmadeof gold; Grh
* camkama+ mana,prop.;camkama, Speed;
Ju + ana,der.;javana is
intens.from Kram; anu + vi + Car + generally
usedasanadjectivein +e + tva,absol.
Jaradubbalonahayamano na
a + mana, pr. p. compoundslikejavanapanna, -
sakkotiattanokāyamugghamsetum Jataripam namasatthuvanno—Vin.
Javanacitta
—Vin. II. 106 III. 238
Jamghaviharamanucamkamamano
Theone,whois oldandweak,isunable Jatariipameans
something
of
ānuvicaramāno —M. I. 108,228;M. Jahato
manusam
bhavam
—S. I. 72
torubhisownbodywhiletaking
bath; Of'the
onewhoisabandoninghuman Teacher’scolour
II, 118,IHI.129
Snd+ya +mana,pr.p.;u(t)+Ghrs
Whilegoingon(morning orevening) existence;
Ha +nta,prip.;manu(s)+
+e + nun,caus,inf,
a,der, Jataripam pariyesati —M. HI.

405
 Jatariiparajatam Jarena
Janam
Ti
160 origination,appearance
ofaggregates, sg.; aham +ca +
whenit says janitabbakam jandati,
Makesa searchfor gold;pari + es acquisition
of sense-doors;
Jan +ti eva
passitabbakam
passati, IV. 71
(fromIs) +a + ti, pres.3”. Sg. der:;sam +jati, 0 + Kram + tider:
abhi + ni + Vrt +ti, der: patu + Janampassamviharatha? —D. I. Iānāhi āvusoti, āmāvusoiānāmīti -
dātarūparaiatamugganheyyavā bhava;pati + Labh + a, der. Vin. III. 240
192
ugganhāpeyyavā nikkhittam vā i ino?:
Doyouliveknowingandseeing); Are you sure,friend?Yes, I amsure,
sadiyeyya—Vin. III . 237 ond
Jatisamvattanike samkhare Jan +nā +nta,pr.p.; passa +nta, friend.;Jan
i A + na +hi, imper.2 . SZ
g.:

Shouldreceivegold andsilver
abhisamkharonti —S. V. 449 prp. dvuso +iti; dma +a@vuso;ama,
(himself). makeothersreceive(on his
They accumulatehabitualtendencies indcl.
behalf)or appreciate whatis
thatleadtobirth; jati +sam + Vrt+ Janamyevahajanamiti— M. I. 9, S.
deposited;iātarūpa '- raiata; u(t) +
ana + ika, der.; abhi +sam(s)+Kr + Il, 220,vadamiinstead of aha Janahi avusoti vattabbo —Vin. III.
Grh -- nā t- eyya,meta.opt. 3. sg;
o +nti,pres.3”.pl. Knowing withcertaintyhesays,“I 222
u(t) + Grh + na@ + ape + eyya,caus.
know”, ja@nam+y +eva +aha; a+ He should be told ‘friend, understand
opt.3”. sg.; ni +Ksip + ta,pp.; Svad
Jatisamvattanikesu samkharesu Ah+a,pst.3”. sg.; āha usedhere yourself’; Vac+tabba,fut.pp.
* aya + eyya,caus.opt.3". sg.
abhiramanti —S. V. 449 for pres.sense
They takedelightin habitual Janukamattampi —A. IV. 102
Jatitopi anussaranti—D. I. 8
tendencies
thatleadtobirth:abhi+ Janamsamghikamlabham Evenup to theheightofknee
Rememberin terms of birth: anu +
Ram+a +nti,pres.3’. pl. parinatam
puggalassaparinameyya
Smr+a +nti,pres.3"pl.
-Vin.IV. 156 Jayati ca jiyati ca miyati ca cavati
Janantapi Tathagata pucchanti, Shouldcauseconsciously
totransfer ea upapaiiatica —S. II. 5
Jatidhamma satta—S. 1.88
janantapinapucchanti—Vin.III. 88- thecommonpropertyto an individual; Is born,is deprived,dies,falls away
Beingsof thenature
of beingborn
9 andis reached;
Jan +ya +ti,pass.
pari+Nam+ta,pp.;pari +Nam+e
Knowingly theTathagatas
ask t eyya,caus.opt. 3”. sg. pres. 3". sg.; Ji +ya +ti, pass.PEE
Jatiya mahantataro— Vin. II. 161-2
questionsandask notquestions;Jan + 3”, sg.; Mr t ya t ti, pass.pres. 3".
The one who is elderin termsofbirth;
na +nta,prp.; Prch +ya +nti,pres. dānāti,
nobhāsati—Vin. IHI. 175 sg.; Cvu t a tti, pres. 3'i, sg.; upa '
suffix tara is used with abl. or instr
Se
ord 3

Heknows andspeaks
tous;Bhds+a Pad +ya+ ti, pass.pres, 3”. S§
i AY "eS > a Ss.

to compare
+ti,pres.3. sg.
Janam uddissakatammamsam Jayattane va jarattane va —Vin. IHI.
Jativitakko janapadavitakko
paribhuhiati,
paticcakammam—M. lānāmi
ayyānam
vāhasā
—Vin.IV. 139
anavaniiattipatisamyuttovitakko -
1.368;A. IV. 187;Vin. I. 237 158 In beinga wife or a mistress:
A. I. 254
Heeatsmeatknowingthatit was Iknowbecause
of themasters; iāyattanetiiāyābhāve,iārattaneti
Thethoughtconcerning
birth,the
preparedparticularlyfor him;Jan + (Thanks
to themasters,| know jarabhave, Cy. 554; iāyattane vati
placeof birthandthesocialprestige;
nd+nta,pr.p.;u(t)+Drs +ya +Kr Somethingof the Dhamma);ayyanam jaya bhavissasi,jarattane vatiiārī
thesearedescribedassubtleform
+ta,pp.;pari +Bhu(ii)j+a +ti, vahasati
ayyanam karana,Cy.880; bhavissasi,old Cy. 139
of defilements(sukhumasahagata)
pres.3. sg.:pati +I(t) +ya + vahasa,
instr.sg.,analog.formfrom
an +ava +Jia + ti +pati +sam +
kamma vaha Jayayo ima imesam,jariyo ima
Yuj + ta,pp.
imesam-Vin. II. 259
Janamjanati,passampassati—
A. Jandmipassāmīticapatiiānāmi, Thesearewivesof these, theseare
Jati saiijatiokkantiabhinibbatti
IV. 153 thajiceva
aiifieca—M, I. 164 mistresses of these
khandhānam patubhavo
(He)knowswhatshouldbeknown, Iclaim
thatIknowandI see,others
ayatandnam patilabho—S. I, 3
Sees
whatshould
beseen;
iānamand claim
too;Jan +na@
+mi,pres.I". Jarena gabbhini hoti —Vin. II. 83
Birth, reproduction,
descent,
passamare takenby the Cy. asfut.pp. §8:'passa
+mi,pres.I". sg.;pati+ (She)is pregnantby a paramour
 Jaro
Jaro na jaroti bhandimsu —Vin. IV.
91
(They) guarrelled(with eachother)
saying(he) is (your) lover,he is not
(my)lover;Bhand+imsu,pst.3".pl.
Jalakajato bhavissati—A. IV. 117
Shootswill set
dālahatthapādo—M. II. 136
The onewhosefingersof handsand
feetareof eguallengthor theone who
hasshiny(ivāla)handsandfeet:
Tathāgatassa pana catasso
hatthamgulivopaācapi ca
pādamguliyoekappamānāhonti, Cy.
HT.376
digucehā me nissayā patikkūlā -
Vin. I. 58
Supportsareloathsomeanddetestable frail, worn out,old, hascompletedthe
for me
Jighacchadubbalyapareta—M. I. 13
Beingafflictedwith hungerandfrailty;
jighaccha,desid.of Ghas; dubbala +
ya, der.; para +I + ta,pp.
Jinnam gopanasivamkambhoggam
dandaparāyanampavedhamānam
gacchantam —M. I. 88
The onewho is old, bentdownasa
roof bracket,broken,hangingon a
walkingstickandgoingwitha
shiveringbody;Jir +ta,pp.: Bhuj +
ta,pp.; danda +parayana;pa +
Vyadh+a +mdina,pr. p.; gaccha+
nia, pr. Pp.
Jinnam na patisamkharonti—A. II.
249
Do notrepairthedilapidated;pati +
Jivhagge
sam(s)+Kr +0 +nti,pres, 3”.pl.
Jinnaya vassikasatikaya—Vin. III.
252
When thecloth for therainy seasonis
worn out; Joc. abs/.
Jinnena kho panajaraya
abhibhūtenana sukaram
Buddhānam sāsanammanasikātum
—A.III. 103
It is noteasyby onewho is old and
overcomeby decayto focusattention
on Buddha’steaching;abhi +Bha +
fa,pp.; manasi+ Kr + tum,inf.
Jinnodani bhante Bhagava vuddho
mahallako addhagato
vayoanuppatto—Vin. II. 188
Venerablesir, theBlessedOne is now
iourneyandcomeof agegradually;
iinno t idāni; Vrdh t ta,pp.: vayot
anu + pa + Ap + fa, pp.
Jinavacananadiciram vahatu— S. IV.
403
May theriverof Buddha’swordsflow
fora longtime;jina +vacana+nadi;
ciram,indcl. adv; Vah+a + tu,
imper.3™.sg.
Jiyayaanassāsakam
māretvā
—
D. II.
334
Havingstrangled
(him)todeathwith
thestringof a bow; Mr + e +tva,
caus, absol.
Jivhaggekhelapindamsamyūhitvā
appakasirena
vameyya
—M.IIL 300;
A, IV. 137(saāhiūhitvā)
Havingcollecteda globof spittleat
Jivasannino
Jivhaggena
Jivhaviiineyya rasa —M. II. 203
thetipof thetongue,one would
easilyspitit out.;jivhad+agge;sam The tasteto be experiencedwith the
+Vah(uh)+i +tvd,absol.; appa tongue,vi +Jia +eyya,der.
+kasirena, adv.,Vam +eyya,opt. 3”.
$9. Jino vittamanusocati—D. III. 183
Beingdefeated
(he)becomes
sad
Jivhaggenarasaggani accordingto theproperty( lost);Ji +
pariyesamānā —A. III. 109 ta,pp.; anu +Suc +a +ti, pres. 3”.
Searchingfor tastyfood with thetip of sg.
thetongue;rasa +agga; pari +es
(fromIs) +a +mana,pr.p. Jivakambavane—Vin. II1. 159-60
In themangogroveofJivaka; Jivaka +
liiham ninnāmetvā—M. II. 135 ambavane
Havingmadethetongueputout;i +
Nam+e + tvd, caus. absol. Jivagaham aggahesi—S. I. 84
Capturedalive;jiva + Grh +a, der:;
liyhāuddharitabbā
—Vin. I. 74 a+Grh+e+s +i, pst.3”.sg. .--
āke
Tongueshould
bepulledout;
u(t)+Dhror Hr +a +i Jivatu bhanteBhagava,jivatu
+ tabba,
Sut.pp. bhanteSugato—Vin. II. 140
Venerablesir, maytheBlessed
livhāniecchārakam
na bhuāiitabbam One live long,maytheWell Gone
-Vin.1.214 One live long;Jiv +a + tu, imper.
Should
noteatwhileputtingthe J. $2:
tongue
out;ni(s) +Car +aka, der.
adv;Bhu(fi)j +i + tabba,fut.pp Jivantamevaossajeyyam—S. 1.84
May I lethimgo alive;o (ava) +Srj +
livhāya
chādesi—M. II, 135 a +eyyam.opt. 1".sg.
Made
(theface)coverwith thetongue;
Chad
+¢ +s +i, caus.pst.3. sg. Jivantampi sille uttasenti—M. 1.87
Fix (him)aliveon a stake;u(f) +tras +
livhāya
rasamsāyitvāna e + nti, caus.pres.3”. pl.
nimittaggāhīhoti
nānuvyaāianaggāhf
—D. I. 70;
Jivantam yevatulaya tuletva—D. I.
M. III. 35; S. IV. 76 334
Having
tastedthetastewith thetongue
Havingweighedthepersonwhile
hedoesnotbecomeone who takesthe
living;Jiv +a +nia,pr.p.; tulad+e +
general
appearance
andtheparticular tva, denom.absol.
features
of theobjectintothemind;
Svad+aya+i +tva,caus.absol.; Tīvasahhino hi manussā
nimitta
+ Grh + i, der; na + anu +
rukkhasmim —Vin. LL. 156
Waāiana
:- Grh 1.ī, der. Peopleareindeedof a beliefthattrees
 Jivikattha Jivitahetupi Jettho
Jivitahetupi

arelivingbeings;
jiva +saifid +i,
der.
Jivikattha agarasmaanagariyam
pabbajita—M. III. 6
Thosewho haverenouncedfamily life
with thepurposeofliving: jivika +
attha;pa + Vraj + i +ta,pp.
Jivikam kappeti—S. V. 9
Makes aliving; kappa+e +ti, denom.
pres. 3”. sg.
dīvitanikantiyā eittam patilīyati
patikutati pativattati na
sampasartyati—A. IV. 48
Mindshrinksbackfromthedesirefor
life andis notstretchedout:pati + Li
+ya +ti,pres.3".sg.;pati +Kut +a
T ti, pres. 3”. sg.;pati + Vrt +a+ ti,
pres. 3”. sg.; sam +pa + Sr +e + iva
+ti, caus.pass.pres.3". sg.
Jivitaparikkharasamudanetabba
- life); tata,voc.indel.; Da + e +hi,
M. I. 104;A. IV. 366
Materialreguisitesoflife are to
be collected;jivita +parikkhara;
sam+u(t)+4+ Ni +a+ tabba,
fut.
pp.
Jivitapariyantikam
vedanam
- S. II.
83
The life long pain;jivita +pari + (y)
anta + ika, der.
Jivitampissa atthaya pariccattam -
D.IHI.187
Eventhelife is sacrificed
forthesake
of this; jivitam + api + assa;pari +
Tyaj+ta,pp.
aggahesum,sapathaficaakamsu kama; amaritum +kama;dukkha +
Jivitahetupinatikkamanti —Vin. II.
adrūbhāya —Vin. I. 347 238 pati +kūia
Gavelife,shookhandandmade
a vow (They)
donottransgress evenforthe
notto be unfriendly;a + Da +@+ sake
of(their)life;na +ati +Kram + Jivite apekhamkarohi—D. II. 190
imsu;doublepst.3. pl.; a+ Grh+e Havea hopefor life; Kr +o +hi,
a+nti,pres.3”. pl.
+s +um,pst.3. pl. ; a+ Kr+a@+ imper.2". sg.
imsu,doublepst.3™.pl.; a +drabha Jivitahetupuna paccavamissati—D.
(fromDabh or Druh) Il. 119 Jivite jivitamado —A. I. 146
Forthesakeof living, hewill withdraw Pridein life
Jivitam data yasassaahatta —M. II. (thewordsuttered);
123 patisamkharissati,Cy, 564.; puna Iūtappamādatthānānuyogo—
D. III.
Giver of livelihoodandbringerof andpatigivesimilar meaning;pati + 182
fame;Da +tu,der.;a +Hr +tu,der; a+ Vam+i +ssati,fut. 3. sg. Indulgingin gambling,a causefor
the verbalform ending with tu (Skt. unmindfulness;
jata +pamdda+
trn) takestheobjectfrom gen., here Jivita voropetvaimina maggena thana + anuyoga;anu + Yuj + a, der.
wefind an exception agaccha —Vin. II. 191
Having deprived(him)of life, you Jeguechi uccaram va passavamva
Jivitam parittam lahukam —
A. IV. come bythisway;vi +o +Ruh+e+ abhinisiditum —A. IV. 188
137 tv, caus.absol.;@gaccha,
imper.2. The onewho detestssittingon faeces
Life is limited and short Sg. or urine;abhi+ni +Sad+i +tum,
inf.
Jivitam me tata dehi —Vin. I. 347 Jivitavoropesi—M. ITI. 247;S. I.
My dear (son), spare me (give my 92;Vin.I. 88 Jeguechi bhavamGotamo—
Vin. IHI.
Deprived
oflife; Jiv + i + ta,pp.; vi + 3
imper.24.sg. 0+Ruh+e+s5+i+caus.pst.3%. A detesteris masterGotama;jiguccha
Sg. + i, der.
Jivitasamkharamadhitthaya —D.IL.
99;S. V.153 Jivitindriyamupacchindati Jeguechi hoti uccāram vā passavam
Hanging ontheenergyof life;adhi+ uparodheti
santatim
vikopeti—Vin. va khelam va vantamva nīharitum-
Stha +ya, absol. II. 73;IV. 124 A. IIL. 144;Vin. I. 303(nīhātum)
Cuts offthevitalforceof life,causes Hehatestoremovefaeces, urine,
Jivitassapi
siyaafifathattam
—M.IL toblockit andharmits continuity; salivaorvomit;ni(s)+Hr +i +tum,
110 JWita+indriya; upa + Chi(n)d + a + inf.
There
wouldbeachange
evenof(my) Ui,
pres.3".se.»upa+Rudh+e +ti,
life;jivitassa+api;As +ya (Skt. Caus.
pres.3. sg. vi +Kup +e +ti, Jeguecho sunakho patikkūlo —Vin.
Caus.
pres,3". sg. 1.219
Loathsomeis thedog,detestable
Vīvitahetupi
naaiihācarati
—A. IV. līvitukāmoamaritukāmo
270 äikhakāmo
dukkhapatikkūlo
—S.
Jettho bhavamGotamosettho
Doesnotmisbehave
evenforthesake II,99;
IV.172 bhavamGotamo — A. IV. 179
of life; jrvitahetu + api; adhi + @+ Desirousof'living, not dying, desirous The BlessedGotamais theeldestand
Car +a +ti,pres.3. sg. of pleasure,
notpain;
Äwinam,
inf:+ thebest

411
 Jettho
Jotimalikampi Jhanam

Jettho va kanittho va —A. IV. 176

Eldestor youngest

Jetavane Anāthapindikassaārāme
Karerikutikāyam —D. II. I
Jhanamanabhisambhunamana—D. tha,pres. 2”. pl.; pamada +As +tha,
In thelittlehutof KareriatJetayana,
URA
themonasteryof Anāthapindika
Being
unableto getat aihāna a+ Hi (Bhi) +a +ttha,pst. 2". pl.
(the
concentrated
mind);abhi +sam
+Bha+na? +mana,pr. p. Jhayitum ca vipassitum—Vin. I.
147
carrier(army);Ji +tva,absol.
Jhanamanabhihimsamano—A. IV. To meditateandto seepenetratively;
419
dotimālikampi karonti —M. I. 87
Without
makinganydamageto the
They also inflict thepunishmentof
meditation;
an +abhi +Hims +a+
mana,pr.p. Jhayi jhanarata tadanantaram
convictis wrappedup with cloths
soakedin oil andSetfire; Cy. I, 59 patisallīnā —D. II. 265
Ihānamnissāyaāsavānamkhayam The onewho is meditating,taking
vadāmi—A. IV. 422 delightin meditationandimmediately
|declare
thattheexhaustionof enteringintosolitude; jha (from
influxes
isbywayof meditation;
ni + Dhyai) +ya t ī, der.;ihāna +Ram +
Sri+ ya,absol.; Vad+a +mi,pres. ta,pp.;tam(tad)+anantaram;
pati
it sg, +sam + Li +ta,pp.

Jhinavimokkhasamadhisamapattinam Jhayi bhikkht apasādenti—A. HI.

samkilesam vodānam vutthānam- 355
A,III. 417-8 (They)displease
meditating
bhikkhus:
Pollution,purityandemergenceof a + pasdda + e +nti, denom.. pres.
musing, release,concentrationand 2
3”, pl.
atlainment;jhana +vimokkha+
samadhi +samapatti Jhayi samāpattikusalo—A. V. 162
Meditatorskilled in attainments;
sam
Jhapetva
thiipam
katva—Vin.IV. + @+Pad + ti, der.+kusalo
308
Having
cremated
andbuilt a tomb;Ksi
"dpe + tva, caus, absol.;

‘ll
 Nattaiihāpanno
Nānadassanam Nanadassanavisuddhi Natay yam

Nanadassanavisuddhi yavadeva iddhipātihāriyam dassetum— D. III. I

mupādāparinibbānatthā —M - . li. 150 12 I
I
Purification
by knowledgeandvision It is appropriatefor theonewho I Vik
isiustforthecompleteblowing out claimsto havea knowledgeto perform
Nattaiihāpannohoti yasampatto - will see,andhe will abandon:dakkhati withoutgrasping;yava +(d) +eva;an superhumanmiracleswith a similar i
M.I.318
" dakkhiti;pa +Ha +i +ssati,root claimantof knowledge;Arh +a +fi, I
He hasbecomeknownandrenowned: +upa+a+ Da +pari +ni +Va +
redup.fut. 3". sg.: na +etam;Vid+ ana,der. +attha pres. 3™.sg.; uttari + manussa+
Jna +ta,pp. +adhi +@ +Pad +ta,
Va + ti, pass. pres. 3". sg, dhamma;Drs +e + tum,caus. inf. I
pp.; pa +Ap +ta,pp.
Nānadassanāya eittam abhinīharati
Nassati va dakkhiti va sacchi va abhininnāmeti—D. I. 76 Nānāya dassanāyapattiyā I
Natticatutthena kammenaakuppena
karissatīti netam thānam viiiati - Mindisturnedtowards(theattainment sacchikiriyaya abhisamayāya—A.
M. II. 201 of)knowledge andvision; tanninnam IV. 384
24
It is impossiblethathe will know,he tapponam tappabbhāramkaroti, Cy. For knowing,seeing,reaching. E
Ordainedby theactofāatticatutthain
will seeor he will experience 220;abhi+ni (s) + Hr +a +ti, pres. experiencingandrealising;pa +Ap + i)
which motionis followedby three
pronouncements, anactwhich is 3”.sg.;abhi +ni +Nam +e + ti, ti, der.;sa +acchi + kiriva; abhi +
Nānaāeapana medassanamudapādi caus,pres. 3”. sg. sam+ava (fromI)
unobjectionable
anddoneaccording
to
—Vin. I. 11
the law; akuppena,thanarahena:
Knowledgeandvision arosefor me: Nānanti
tissoviiiā —Vin. III. 93 Nātakānam
nenti—A. IHI.94
appatikkositabbamupagatena,
u() +a+ Pad +i, pst. 3. sg. Knowledgemeansthreefold They leadhimto therelatives;Ni +a '
satthusāsanārahena, Cy. 243; Jia +
ape + ti, caus.der; catu + ttha,der.: knowledge;
fanam+iti +nti,pres.3”.pl. I
Nanadassanatorakkham
a+ Kup +ya, fut.pp.; thana +
paccāsimsati—Vin. II. 187 Nanabhagamattam
yeva Natam dittham viditam
araha; upa + sam +Pad +ta,pp. ä SE. I,
Protection
is ekpected
in respect
of pariyodapenti
—M. I. 234 sacchikatamphassitampannaya— i I
knowledgeandvision;pati +@+ They
cause
toclarifyjusta fractionof M. I. 475 y I NU
Natticatutthena kammenasammato
Samsta + ti, pres. 3. sg. knowledge;
pari +0 +Da +ape+
—Vin. IV. 55 Known, seen,understood,ekperienced I IN
Agreeduponby theformalactof nti,caus.pres,3". pl. andtouched
bywisdom;
Jia +ta,pp.; i
Nanadassanapatilabhaya samvattati Drs + ta,pp.; Vid + i +ta,pp.: al + " I )
fatticatuttha(=one motionthree
—A.II. 44;IIL 323 Nanavadaiiea
vadamāno acchi + Kr +ta,pp.; Sprs +ya +1 + .
I pronouncements); sam + Man +ta,
It leadstothegainingof knowledge bhāvanāvādahca
—A. V. 42 ia, PP.
PP.
andvision;pati +Labh+a, den:sam Whiletalkingaboutthetheoryof
+Vrt +a +ti, pres, 3". sg. knowledgeandthetheoryof
Nassativa dakkhati va sakkhim va Natamdittham
viditam A I MI
karissati —Vin. III. 105 cultivation;
Vad+a, der; Vad+a+ sacehikatamphusitampaūiāya —5.
Nanadassanamārādheti —M. I. 195 mana,
pr.p.
Will know,will seeor will eKperience; V. 221
(He)attains
knowledge andvision;ā ' Known, seen,understood,experienced
Jia +ssati,fut. 3% sg. Drs +ssati
Radh +e +ti, caus.pres.3".sg.
(Skt.draksyati),fut. 3” Sg.;Sa + Nanavadaiica
vadami
theravadaiica andtouchedby wisdom;Jia +ta,pp.; I I
akkhi(=sa +acchi) -M. I. 164 Drs + ta,pp. Vid + 1 +ta,pp.; sa + i I
Nanadassanamparisuddhataram I speak
ofknowledge
andcertainty; acchi + kata,pp.; Spré +i + ta, pp. i V li
assa—A. IV. 302
Nassati
vadakkhitivapajahissati dānāmīti
vadam,thirabhavavadam, | i
Knowledgeandvisionwouldbemore
vati netamthanam vijjati— M. I. Natayyamdatthayyampattayyanti
clear;āāna+dassana;
pari +Sudh
434 (na) vadāmi—
A. II. 48
+ta, +tara; As +ya (Skt.yat), opt.
It is impossible
that(he)will know,he Nānavādo
khopana
fidnavadena I donotsaythatit shouldbeknown, I
arahatiuttarimanussadhamma seenandreached; Jd +tayya,fut. IM N
 Natayyam
Thapaniyam Thanam

pp.; Drs + tayya,fut. pp.; pa +Ap + Nātisālohitā

—M. I. 383
fayya, Jul. pp..
Kinsmen and blood relations; sa +
lohita
Natayyamdatthayyam
sacchikatayyam—A. V. 36-7 thapetvāgamikam avasesehi
Nati upanissāyavihareyyam—Vin, Thapaniyampafiham— A. I. 197
Shouldbeknown,seenand
IH. 15 Thequestion
to be setaside(not to be ovādamgahetum—Vin. II. 265
I shouldlive dependingon (my) answered);
Stha +ape +antya,caus. To hold theinstruction-sessionby all
fut. pp.
relatives:upa +ni +Sri +ya, absol.; fut.pp. othersekceptfor the fool, sick andthe
vi +Hr +eyyam,opt. 1".Sg. goingaway;Stha +dpe +tva,absol.;
Natikaya dhovantiya anhatika
Thapetvaudakadantaponam—Vin. Grh +e +tum,inf.
dutiya hoti —Vin. III. 207
Natinam āveniyam parihāram IV.90
While therelativeis washing,the
dammi — Vin. I. 71 Exceptforwaterandthetoothbrush Thapetvasamayam—Vin. II. 213
onewho is nota relativestandsby;
I give a specialprivilegeto the Exceptfor thepropertime
Dhay + a +nta,pr.p. +T,der; du +
relatives;@veni+ iya or ika; Thapetvā
katakaāea
kumbha-
tiya, der.
pātekkamodissakamparihāram kārikaīea—Vin. II. 143 Thapetvā sāgāram —Vin. I. 279
dammi,Cy. V. 995; Da + mi.pres. 1*. Exceptfora scrubberanda large Exceptfor theone living underthe
NatikeviharatiGiāiakāvasathe
—S. Sg. earthencell; kumbhakdrikanti sameroof; sahāgāraseyyamattam
II. 74
Dhaniyasseva sabbamattikāmayakuti thapetvā,Cy. 1295
Abidesin Nātikaat theBrick- Hall; D.
Nato hoti yasassi wiccati,
Cy. 1215
II. 91 takesthetermMādike:Mādiketi
sagahatthapabbaiitānam
—A. III. 114 Thanafica kho panetamvijjati yam
ekasmimnatigamake, Cy. 543:
He is renownedandknownto the Thapetvā
gāmaīicagamipacaraiica Bhagavaevamvyākaroti —M. III.
Gifijaka +āvasatha;
householdsandtherenounced:Jaa + —Vin.
I. 109;III. 46 138
Giāiakāvasathetiitihakāmavye
fa,pp.; yasa+ssi,(Skt.yaSasvi)
der. Except
forthevillageandits It is alsoto be foundthattheBlessed
āvasathe,Cv. 543
neighbourhood;
gama + upacdra Oneexplains
inthisway; vi +@+Kr
Nayapatipannonayam aradhessati- +o +ti, pres.3". sg.
Nātimittāsuhaiiā
ca—A. IV.96
D. IHI. 121 Thapetyathullaccayam, thapetva
Relatives,friendsandthosewith good
One who hasenteredinto theright gihipatisamyuttam
—Vin.II. 87 Thānahea thānatoatthanafica
hearts;su +had?(Skt.Hrd) +ya, der.
pathwill makeita success;
pati+Pad Except
forgraveoffenceandthose atthanatoyathābhūtampaiānāti -
+ fa,pp.; @+ Radh + e +ssati,caus. related
to thelaity A. III. 417
Nativyasanenapi phuttha
He reallyunderstands thepossibleas
bhogavyasanenapi phuttha
rogavyasanenapiphutthā— Vin. IHI.
Thapetvā
thullavaiiam
thapetvā possible andimpossibleas impossible;
Nāyena viharissāmi—D. II. 286 gihipatisamyuttam
—M.II. 250 yathābhūtam, adv.;pa t Jan + na +
23
| shallliverighteously;
Cy,equates Except
forseriousfaultandthose ti, pres. 3"'.sg.
Afflicted with thelossof relativ
es,
Nayawithkārana,cause,739 Connected
withthelaity;thulla+
wealthandwith sickness:vyasanena+
api
Vajja;gihi +pati + sam + Yuj + ta, Thānabahulo vā assanisaiiabahulo-
Pp. S.IV.I96
Natiyyasanenava phuttho samano- He would be mostlystandingor
A. II, 188 Thapetvā
paharanim—Vin. II. 142 sitting;thana + bahula;nisajja +
Except
fortheweapon; bahula;As +y@(Skt.yat), opt.
Or beingafflictedwith thelossof
relatives;Spr¢ + ta,pp.; As +mdna, Paharanattham
katam,Cy, VI. 1215 TIA
pr. p.
Thapetvā
bālamthapetvāgilānam Thanam kho panetamvijjati yam -

417
Thanam Thanatthane Thānāya Thite

D. I. 18;M. I. 27;5. III. 168;IV. Thānaso patibhāti —M. I. 396 +Stha+ti,pres.3'".$g. (The greatocean) is of fiked nature
228; Ideacomesto themind accordingto anddoesnotgo beyondtheboundary;
Thisistobefoundthat;pana+etam; thecontext;pati + Bhd +ti, pres.34. Thānāya
eittamnamati —M. III. 112 na +ati +Vrt t a 2 ti, pres.3". $g.
2
Vid +ya + ti, pass.pres. 3™.
sg. Sg. The
mind
bends
forstanding
Thitassa afifathattam pannayati-
Thanam kho panetamvijjati, yam Thanaso patilabhāma—A. IV. 263 Thāneupakappati,no atthāne—A. A. 1.152
tvam kumārova samānokālam We obtainaccordingto thecontext; V.269 Changeof the standingconditionis
kareyyāsi—Vin. II. 190 pati +Labh +a + ma,pres. 1".pl. Itbecomesbeneficialat the right evident;afifiathd+tta,der.; pa +Jna
rd
This is to be foundthatyou, beingiust place,
notatthewrong place;thdneti +ya +ti, pass.pres.3”. sg.
young,woulddie;pana +etam; Thanaso viditam, atthi devāti—M. okase,
Cy. V. 74
kumaro+ eva;As + mana,pr. p.; Kr 11.212 Thité uccaram va passavamva
+eyyasi,opt. 2". sg. It is understood,accordingto the Thitakauddisantidhammagaravena karonti —Vin. IV. 205
context,thattherearedeities;atthi, -Vin.II. 168 Whilestanding
(they)urinate
or
Thanamgatamhoti pattagatam indcl. OutofrespectfortheDhamma
(they) defecate;u(t) + Car +a, der.; pa +
āyatanasoparibhuttam —A. II. 67 recite
whilestanding;thita +ka, der.; Sru + a, der.
Reasonably used: Thanaso vedanapatippassam- u(t)+Drs +a + nti, pres. 3”. pl.
yuttapattatthānagatam,kāraneneva bheyyum— S. V. 381 Thitiyā asammosāyabhiyyobhāvāya
Paribhuttam,Cy. III. 99;pari + Bhuj Thepainswouldsubside
instantly; Thitako uddisati, theranam
+ta,pp. khanena vedanāpatippassambheyva, bhikkhūnam
gāravena—
Vin. II. 168 A. II. 74
Cy.1H.288;pati +pa +Sra(m)bh
+ Outof respectfor theelder bhikkhus For thestability,non-confusion,
Thanam tam cittam uddhaccaya eyyum,opt. 3. pl. (he)reciteswhile standing increase,augmentation and
samvatteyya—A. I. 256 accomplishment
ofcultivation;a +
Thereis a possibilitythatthatmind Thānaso hetuso—M. I. 70;A. II. Thitakovaanonamanto ubhohi sam+ Mrs +a, der.; bhiyyo,indcl.,
wouldturntowardsagitation 417 panitalehi
jannukaniparamasati- vipula + ya, der.; pari + pura + 1,
In terms of reason and cause M.II. 136 der.
Thānam tam cittam kosaiiāya While standing,
hetouches
(his)knees
samvatteyya—A. 1.256,258 Thānācāvetumvā pabbāietumva withbothpalms,withoutbending;an + Thite majjhantike kale maricika -
Thereisa possibility,
thatthatmind —M. II. 131 0+Nam+a+ nta,prp.; para +Mrs S. IHI.141
wouldturntowardsindolence;sam + Tocausetodepose
or banish;
Cyu+e a+ ti,pres,3”. sq. A mirage,atthemiddaytime;Stha+ i
Vrt + eyya,opt. 3’. sg. +tum,caus.inf.; pa + Vraj +e + + fa, pp.
tum,caus. inf. Thitakova
āsumbhi—Vin. IHI.233
Thānam bhahiati —Vin. IHI. 223
Put
down
whilestanding;
@+Sumbh
+
He breaksthepoint;āgatakāranam Thanacāveyya—Vin. III. 46 i, pst, 3%,Sg.
bhaiijati,Cy. 673; Bha(ni)j +a +ti, Shouldcauseto removefromthe
pres. 3. sg. place;Cyu --e -- eyya,caus.opt.3". Thitakova
imagāthābhāsitvā—M.
SZ. Ill, 154
Thānaso antaradhāpetiyūpasameti
Having
saidthesestanzaswhile
—S.V.321; Vin. IHI. 70 Thanatthanenasanthati—A.1.197 standing:
thitako + eva; Bhas +i +
Makesdisappearandsubsideinstantly; Hedoesnotstandona logicalground; va,absol.
thanaso,adv.;antara +Dha + dpe + kāranākārane
nasanthāti,Cy. II.
ti, caus.pres. 3". sg.; vi +upa +Sam 309; i.e. he holds his view Thitadhammo
velamnātivattati—A.
+e + tl, caus.pres.3. sg:
lV, 198;Vin. II. 237
 Damsam Tanca
Dākahea Takkapariyāhatam

Damsamakasava
Takkapariyahatam
samanoGotamo ya, der; manta +e +ti, denom.pres.
tatapasirimsapasamphassehi
dhammam deseti 3rd igg;
.

rissamāno—M. 1.85
Beinghurtby thecontactofgadflies,
mosquitoes,wind, heat,serpents:
damsa+ makasa+ vata +ātapa
+sirimsapa+samphassa;Ris + ya +
mana,pass.pr.p.
Dayhati sūlehi viiihamāno —M. II.
73
Beingprickedby stakes,he is burnt:
Dah +ya + ti, meta.pass.pres,3%.
sg.; Vyadh+ya + mana,pass.prp.
Dahamyevagacchati—A.V. 337
It moveson while burning;daham:
Vimamsanucaritamsayam
patibhanam —M. I. 68
Therecluse Gotamapreachesthe
dhamma touchedby reason,
accompanied by investigationandas
itcomes tothemind; Drs +e + i,
pres.3". sg.; takka +pari + @4
Han+ta, pp.; vīmamsā + anu +
Car+i+ ta,pp.; sayam,indcl.;
pati+Bha@
+ana, der.
Takkihotivimamsi—D. I. 16
Becomesa logiciananda rationalist;
taika--ī, der.;vīmamsā+f, der.
Taīiea kho etamabbohārikam—Vin.
II 91
That too doesnotcometo thelegal
status; Gpattipannapane vohāram na
gacchati, Gpattiya amgam na hoti,
Cy. 488; a + vohara + ika, der.
Taīica paiānāti, tato ca uttarim
paiānāti —D. I. 16
(The Tathāgata) knowsthattooand
beyondthattoo;pa +Jan +na
+ti, pres. 3”. sg.; uttarim,adv.
indel.

Dah+a +nta,prp., nom.SZ.

Tacam
tacatthikaharanti —A. IHI. Tafica panamebhiyyosomattayana
370 pakkhāyati—M. II. 32
Thosewho are in need of skin (bark) That too is notquiteclearto me;
taketheskin (bark) away; taca +attha bhiyvosomattāya, adv. indel.; pa +
+tka,der. Khya +ya + ti, pres. 3”. sg.

Taeasāramva
samphalam
—S. I. 70 Tafica panamhakamruccati ceva
khamati ca, tenacamhaattamana-
list asitsown fruit destroysthereed;
laca+sāram--iva;sam --phala M. II. 132,218
That(answer)too is aggreeableto us,
Taiiamtaiiam
paecayam paticca, we arepleasedwith that;Rue +ya +
taiiā
taiiāvedanā
uppaiianti —M.HI. ti, pres. 3". sg.; Ksam +a +ti, pres.
273 3”. sg. tena+ ca +amha:As +ma,
Suchandsuchfeelingsarisedepending meta.pres. 1".pl.
onsuchandsuchcondition;ta(t)+ja;
u(t)+Pad +ya + nti,pres. 3”. pl. Tafica rattim tafica divasavasesam-
S. IHI.121
kathammanteti Thatnightandtherestofthat day:
Tajjamtassāruppam
-M. IHI. 163 divasa + avasesam
Discussessuchmatters pertinent
to
thetalk;tari)3 gāruppam:sartipa+ Tafica vo hotu—D. 1. 142
 Tanifeva Tato
Tanhāva

Let it be for you: Ha (Bhii) +a +tu,
imper.3. sg.
Tanfeva attharitvataiiheva
parupanti —Vin. LV. 289
They spreadthesame(for sleeping)
andcover(thebody)with thesame:
fam +yeva; @+Str +i + 1a,
absol.;pa+ @+Vr+a +nti, meta.
pres. 3™.pl.
Taāhevetthapatibhātu —S. II. 36
May it (theanswer)cometo Your
mind, in this context;patibhatiti
upatthātu,Cv.ll. 57; tam + (y) + eva
+ ettha;tam is governedby the
prefix pati
Tanhakkhayādhimuttohoti —A. II.
376;Vin. I. 183
He is benton theekhaustionof
Cravingproducesa man;Jan +e +ti non-settlementof craving; vi +Rai i
caus.pres, 3™.sg. V. 135
a,der;ni +Rudh +a, der.; Tyaj +a,
Joy is a thorn(obstacle)to thethird
pati t ni t Sri + ta, pp.: Muc +
der.;
Tanhā iālinī saritā visatā visattikā jhana
i: der.:an --ālaya (from Lā)
—A. II. 212
Craving,which is a snare,a river,is UIA € Tato amutratato amutra—D. I. 184
Tanhāya nīyati loko —5. I. 39
spreadoverand attached:jala +ini: Here from there.herefrom there;
Theworldis ledby craving; Ni +ya +
sarita from Sru or Sr toflow, Skt. tato pathamajjhanato amutra
fi,pass.
pres.3”. sg
Sarit; vi +Sr +ta, pp.; vi +satta: dutiyaiihānetatopi amutra
Sak +ta + ika, der, tatiyaiihāne;Cy. 373
Tanhāya
vasamgacchanti—D. 11.77
They
aresubiectedto craving
Tanhadhipateyyenacetasa—M. HI, Tato ukkattho adando,omako
19;S. III. 103 adando— Vin. IV. 200
Tanhāsambhūtoyam
bhagini kāyo -
With theminddominatedby craving; Morethan thatis nota staff,lessthan
A,II, 145
tanha + adhipati + eyya,der. thatisnota staff;u(t)+Ars +ta,pp.
Sister,
thisbodyhascome into
existenceon craving;fanhā +sam +
Tato uttarim vayamanto—Vin. Il.
Tanhanirodha dukkhanirodho —A. bhiito+ayam
III. 416 221
Makingeffortfurtherthanthat;
The cessationof dukkhadependson Tanhasamkhayavimuttassa... : weKauki a. i g
thecessation
of craving uttarim, adv.; vi7ra Yam a nie
vattam
natthipannapanaya—
S. IV.
391 PF.P.

craving;tanha+ khaya:Ksi +a, der.

Tanha ponobhavika nandiraga- There
isnocycleof birthanddeathto
+adhi+Muc+ta,pp. sahagatatatra tatrabhinandini- Tato upādāyupādāyamayanicaanne
beproclaimed
for theone who is
Vin. I. 10 liberated
throughtheekhaustion
of ca bhanāma—A. IV. 164
Tanhakkhayayapatipannohoti, Havingtakenconstantlyfrom that
The cravingwhich is relatedto the craving;
Vrt+ta,pp.;pa +Jia +ape
lobhakkhayayapatipannohoti -
nextbirth,accompaniedbyinterest +ana,caus. der. (fromthewordofthe Buddha)we and
A. I. 64
andpassion andtakingdelightinthis all othersspeak;upa Tā ' Dé +ya,
andthat;puna + bhava + ika> Tanhasamkhayavimutta
—D.I. 283 absol.
ponabhavika>
ponobhavika,
der; Thosewhoareliberatedthrough
saha+Gam+ta,pp.;tatra+abhi+ complete
exhaustionof craving;sam Tato cuto idhūpapanno
—D. I. 73; S.
nandint +khaya;vi + Mue +ta,pp. V. 394,pannā
Tanham nissayatanha pahatabba-
Departedfrom therehe hasbeenborn
A. II. 145
Tanhamilaka dhamma—
A. IV. Taphāsallam
—M. II. 256 here:Cyu T ta,DP-: idha +
Cravingshouldbeabandoned by
400 The
dart
ofcraving upapanno;upa * Pad + ta, pp. acc. Is
relyingon craving;ni +Sri +ya,
The factorswhich originatefrom normallyusedwithupa+Pad
absol.;pa + Ha + tabba,Sut.pp.
craving Tanhāsibbati—A. ITI. 400
Craving
sews;Siv +ya +ti,pres.3™. Tato tatodasavaggambhikkhu-
Tanhaokkami—D. IIL. 85
Tanhaya asesaviraganirodhocago 62; v= b samghamsannipatapetva—Vin.I.
Cravingoccurred
in mind:0 (ava)+
patinissaggo
muttianalayo
—
Vin. I. 195 ;
Kram+i,pst.3".sg.
10 Tanhāhissa
dutiyā
—S.IV.37 Causingto assemblea chapterof ten
Completedetachment,cessation, Cravingis thesecondof this person; bhikkhusfromhereandthere;sam +
Tanhajaneti purisam —
S. 1.37
giving up, abandonment,
release, tanhd+hi +assa ni +Pat +Gpe +tva,caus.absol.
 Tato
Tato tatopabbāiito —A. IHI. 368
Beingbanishedfrom thisandthat
place;pa + Vraj + e + i + ta, caus.
PP.
Tato nidanam maranamva
nigaccheyyamaranamattamva
dukkham—
S. II. 110
For thatreasonhewould certainlydie
or experiencesa painsimilarto death:
ni +gaccha+eyya,opt.3”.sg.
Tato nidanam labhethapamujjam -
D.I. 7I
For thatreasonhewould gaindelight;
Labh+etha,mid.opt.3”.sg.pa+
Mud +ya, der.
Tato patinivattitvā —M. I. 421
Havingturnedbackfromthere:pati +
ni + Vrt + i + tva,absol.
Tato para paccantimaianapadā-
Vin. I. 197
Beyondthat,borderlands
Tatova patinivatti —Vin. IHI. 146
Turnedbackfromthatvarysame
spot;
'ato +eva;pati + ni + Vrt + i, pst.
3”. sg.
Tatova puna nivattitukāmo ahosi-
Vin. II. 156
Hewastempted toturnback
rightfromthere;mi+ Vrt+i +
tum,inf. +kamo
Tatosighataram ayusamkhara
khīyanti—S. II. 266
Energiesof lifeareekhaustedmore
quicklythanthat;sigha+tara,der;
Ksi +iva +nti,pass.pres.3°.pl.
Tattha
Tato sisam karitva, mam padato
karitvā—M. II. 124
Keepingtheheadtowards
himandthe
feet towards me: fo is abl. suffix; Kr +
i + tva, absol. 4 Stoodrightthere;tattha +eva; a +
Tattenapi telena osificanti—M. I.
87
They sprinkleboiledoil on thebody;
0 + Si(fJe +a + nti,pres. 3”. pl.
Tattenaayopattenakayam
sampalivetheyya—A. IV. 131
Wouldwrapup thebodywitha
red-hotiron plate; Tap+ta,Pp.;
sam +pari + Vest+ evya,opt.
Tae
Tattenaayosamkunā—A. IV, 131
With a red-hotiron stake
Tatthagahitamidhamukkam—Vin.
Il. 168
Whatis takenup thereis givenup
here;Grh +i +ta,pp.; idha,indel;
Muc+ta,pp.(Muc+ta >muk+ta>
mukka
Tatthacanimittamganhāhi—A.HI.
375
Focus(your) attentionon thattoo;
tattha,indci.;Grh -- nā +hi, imper.
Jad
. SZ.
Tattha tattha obandhitvacivaram
sibbetum
—Vin. II. 116
Tosewtherobeafterbindingithere
andthere;o -- Ba(n)dh + i +tva,
absol.;Siv +ya +e +tum,inf,
Tattha
tattha
yathābhūtaāāpam
—A.
V.37
Tatra
Tattheva
Tatra kam hetumpaccetha?—M. I.
Knowledge
of reality in different
309
contexts
Whatcausedo you find there?;pati +
Tatthevaatthasi—Vin. IV. 5 e (fromI) +tha,pres. 2”. pl.
Tatra ce tumhe assathakupita va
Stha+s +i, pst. 3”. sg.
anattamanāvā —D. 1.3
If you wouldbeangryor displeasedin
Tatthevaujjhitva pakkamanti —Vin.
thatcontext;
ce,cond.p.; As +yatha,
1,283
opt.2". pl.; Kup +i +ta,pp.
Leaving
(it)righttheretheygoaway;
Ujjh + i t twā,absol.
Tatra thito tadadhimuttotabbahula-
Tattheva
niechāresi—Vin. I. 278 vihārī aparihīno kāiam kurumāno -
Hevomitedrightthere;ni (s) + Car + A. 1,268
e+ +i, caus.pst. 3”. sg. Settledin there,indulgedin that,
abidingin that,mostlywith thatstate
Tatthevantaradhāyi
—M. I. 143; of mindanddyingwithoutfallingaway
5.1.1,104;Vin. I. 7, 21 from that; Stha + i +ta,pp.; tam(tad)
Disappeared
thenandthere;antara+ +adhi +Muc+
ta, pp.;tam(tad)+
Dha+ya +i, pst.3”. sg. bahula + vihara + f, der. ; a +pari +
Hā +ta,pp.; Kr (kuru)+mana,pr.p.
Tattheva
maranam
āgamissati
—M.
11.
60;Vin.III. 14 Tatra tatra sajjeyya,tatra tatra
Surely
hewill dierightthere;@+Gam ganheyya,tatra tatra bajjheyya,
+i+ ssati,fut. 3". sg. tatra tatra anayavyasanam apajjeyya
—§. 11.228
Tattheva
mucchitāpapatimsu—M. Hereandthere(it) would be
II, 64 obstructed, caught,trappedandwould
Being
unconscious
theyfelldown fall into disaster;Sad +ya +eyya,
night
there:March +a + i +ta,pp.: pass.opt. 3”. sg.; Grh +nd +eyya,
pa+Pat+imsu,pst.3”.pl. opt. 3%.sg.; Badh +ya +eyya,pass.
opt.3%.sg.; d +Pad +ya t eyya,
Tattheva
vassamvasi,tattha pass.opt. 3”. sg.
hemantam
tatthagimham —Vin.III.
41 Tatra tatrevasakkhibhabbatam
Hestayedtherains,winterand pāpunissasi,sati sati āyatane—M. I.
summerrightthere;Vas+i, pst.3”. 495
sg. You will reachthatstateof experience,
thenandthere,whenthereis a good
Tattheva
samsappati
—D.HI.19 ground;
sa +akkhi+bhabba+14,
Writhes
rightthere(ontheseat);sam der.;pa +Ap+(uinā+i +ssasi,fut.
+ Srp +ya + ti, pres. 3™.sg. 24. sg.; sati, loc. sg. of santa
 Tatra
Tathagatappavedite

Tatra tumhena anando na

proclaimed
bytheTathāgata to theTathagata’s
body;pati +Pad +
somanassamna cetasoubbillavi-
tattamkaraniyam —D. 1.3 Tathattāyaupakappessāmi—D,II.
You shouldnotbehappy,pleasedand Tathāgatam ārabbha —A. V. 329
64 Tathagatassahetamadhivacanam
elatedthere;in place oftumhehi, ConcerningtheTathagata;Tatha +
I will prepareit for suchness:upa + dhammakayoitipi, brahmakayo
tumhe is used here, sentence is
āgatoor Tathā --āgato or Tathā
kappa +e +ssami,denom.fut, I Sg. itipi dhammabhito itipi brahma-
Passive; upplavitattaor gato;eightdefinitions of Tatagata
aregivenin D. A. 1.59-68; arabbha, bhūtoitipi—D. III. 84
uppilāvitattais usedhere as Tathattaya cittam upasamharati-
indcl. Following aresynonymsfor the
M. I. 465 Tathagata:Dhammakayo (onewho has
+Ha, der.; Kr + aniva,fut.pp. He directs (his) mind to suchstate;
Tathāgatasāvakasamgho tesam a bodyof Truth)brahmakayo(onewho
tathd +tta,der.; upa +sam +Hr +a hasthebodysupreme),dhammabhūto
Tatra tumhehina aghato na aggamakkhāyati
—A. III. 36
+ti,pres.3". sg. (onewho hasbecometheTruth itself)
appaccayona cetasoanbhiraddhi Amongthem,thecommunityof the
Tathāgata's
disciplesis saidtobethe brahmabhūto (onewho hasbecome
karanīyā —D. I. 3
Tathattāyapatipaiianti —D. I. 175;A, supremehimself;hi +etam;iti + api
You shouldnotbeangry,dejectedand highest;
aggo '- ā -- Khvā --ya1ti,
I. 169 pass.
pres.3. sg.
displeasedthere;an + abhi + Radh +
Work for such purpose;pati +Pad + Tathāgateabhippasannā—D. II. 169
ti, der.
ya +nti,pres.3”.pl. Thosewho haveexcessivefaith in the
Tathāgatassa
arakkheyyāni —A. IV.
82 Tathagata;abhi +pa +Sad +ta,pp.
Tatra te kinti bhavissati?—S, IV. 61
Tathā kho panimassaāyasmato
What ideawill cometo your mind,in Things
nottobeguarded
bythe
kayasamacaro,tatha vacisamacaro Tathāgateekantagatoabhippasanno
thatcontext?;tatra,indel.:kinti, Tathagata;
a + Raks+ a +eyya,fut.
yathātamaluddhassa—M. II. 172 —§.V. 225
indel. pp.
The physicalbehaviourandtheverbal Absolutelyfaithfulin andextremely
behaviourof this venerableoneare pleased
withtheTathagata;
ekanta+
Tatra me evambhavissati—S. IV. 61 Tathāgatassa
dutthenacittena
suchasthoseof an unattached person;
In thatcontext,I will havethisidea lohitamuppādeyya—A. I. 27 gata
pana + imassa;yathatam,indel.; a+
(in my mind) Withanevil mind,hewould causethe
Lubh + ta,pp.
Tathagata
tobleed;Dus+ta,pp.+ Tathagatekamkha va vimati va —S.
Tatrapi na safifii assa,sai ca citta;u(t)+ Pad +e +eyya,caus. V. 161
Tathagatappaveditamdhamma-
panaassa—A, V, 318 opt,3, sq. Doubtor perplexityin theTathagata
vinayam agamma —D. I. 229; M. IL.
He wouldnothaveanideaeventhere,
181
butconscious:saAna+ I, der.; As + Tathāgatassa
dhammadhātu Tathāgatenasatosampaiānoayu-
Havingcometo (or understood)the
yā(Skt.yāt),opt.3. sg. Suppatividdhā
—D. II. 8 samkharo ossattho—D. II. 114
doctrine
anddisciplinewell
Thefundamental principleof Dhamma The vital principlehasbeendiscarded
proclaimedby theTathagata;
Tatruppattiyā samvattati—D. IHI. (truth)
hasbeenrealisedbythe by theTathāgata,
beingmindfuland
Tathagata
+paveditam:
pa +Vid+e Tathāgata;su + pati + Vyadh + ta, pp. aware;sato sampaiānoshould be
258
+i +ta,caus.pp.;2 +Gam+ya,
It leadstothebirthin there:tatra+ takenasadlv.;
o (ava)t Sri +ta.pp.
absol.;dhammavinayatakenasa Tathāgatassa
pacchima
vaca—D.II.
uppattiya;sam + Vrt + ta + ti, pres
single term meansBuddhist
3”. sg. 156 Tathagatenittham gato amataddaso
discipline
ThelastwordoftheTathagata amatamsacchikatvairiyati— A. III.
Tatrekacceevamāhamsu—D. I. 180 450
Tathagatappavedite
dhammayinaye Tathāgatassa
sarīrepatipaiiitabbam The onewho is conclusiveaboutthe
In thatcontextsomesaid thus;fatra +
~S. 1,231;A. IV. 275
ekacce;
a+ Ah +@+imsu,double —D.HI, 161 Tathāgata,
seesimmortality,
In thedoctrine
anddisciplinewell Shouldfollow theprocedurein regard experiences
immortality
andmoves
 Tathagate
Tathā Tadagge

on; amata+Dr§ +a, der; Ir +ya 4 Tathagata;sam +anu +esana;Kr +

ti, pres. 3. sg.
Tathāgateparinibbute —A. IHI. 340
WhentheTathāgata hadenteredinto
Parinibbana; pari +ni + Va or |Toh
ta,pp.; loc. absl.
Tathāgatevā Tathāgatasāsanevā -
S. V. 226
In referenceto theTathagataor the
teachingof theTathagata
Tathagatesagaravoahosi Sappatisso
—Vin. IV. 109-10
Became respectful
anddeferential
towardstheTathagata;
sa +garu +a,
der.
Tathagatesaddhampatilabhati —D.
I. 63;M. II. 33,patilabhim
GainsfaithintheTathagata:pati+
Labh+a +ti,pres.3”,sg.
tabba >kartabba>kaitabba >
katabba,pp.
Tathāgatoabhibhū anabhibhūto
afiiadatthudaso vasavattī— A. II, 24
Tathāgatais thecongueror,the
unconguered,thedefinteseerandthe
authority;an +abhi +Bha +ta,pp.;
anfiadatthu,indel., ekamsavacane
nipato,D. A. I. 111;vasa+ Vrt +7,
der.
Tathāgatotadupātivatto
—M. II. 235
Tathāgatahastranscended that:tam
(tad) + upa +ati + Vrt + ta,pp.
Tathatathaviharantamtathattaya
upanessati—S. V. 90
It will leadthepersonlivingin
suchandsucha waytoa state ofthat
nature;vi +Hr +a + nta,pr.p.;
tathd+ tta,der.;upa + Ni +a +
Tathapihoti afiiathapi hoti —M. I. Tathārūpam samādhimsamāpaili
520 yathā samāhitecitte devayāniyo
maggopāturahosi—D. 1.215
Ithappens
in thatway andalsoin
another
way;tathd,anfathd, indcl. He enteredintosuchsamadhithat
theway leadingto theworldof gods
Tathābhāsatu..yathāham appearedbeforehimwhenmindwas
āiāneyyam —5. I. II concentrated;
sam+@+Pad +ya +
i,
pst. 3%.sg.; sam +@ +Dha + i + ta,
Please
tellmein sucha way thatI
wouldunderstand clearly;Bhās ' a ' pp.; patu + ® +ahosi, pst. 3°. sg:
tu,imper.3. sg.; yatha +aham;
yathd,
tatha,indcl.; @ +Jan +na + TathāhamBhagavatādhammam
eyyam,
opt.I". sg. desitamāiānāmi yathā tadevidam
viāiiānam sandhāvatisamsarati
Tathārāpapaeeayā
—Vin. IV. 105 anannanti—M. I. 256
Forsuchreason I clearlyunderstandthedhamma
explainedby theTathagatain sucha
Tathārūpamāpattim āpanno hoti waythatit istheverysame
yathārūpāya
āpattiyā samgho ante consciousness,nothingelse, that
nisidāpeti
—A. III. 270 runsthrough
andtransmigrates;
fatha
Hehascommitted anoffenceof that + aham;@+Jan + na +mi,pres. 1".
kindforwhichtheSamgha makeshim Sg.;tam(tad) +eva + idam;sam +
sitattheend;fatha + riipa; @+ Pad Dhav +a +ti, pres. 3™.sg.; sam + Sr
* fa,pp.; ni +Sad +Gpe + ti, caus. +a +fi, pres.3”. Sg-;
; . 2 e
>an + annam

SSati,fut. 3". sg. pres, 3”. Sz.

Tathagatesaddha nivitthā mūlaiātā
Tathā hi Bhagavatosilapahhanam-
patitthita dalha asamhariya...
Tathātathāvihāramkappeti—A.III. Tathārūpam iddhābhisamkhāram A.IH. 31
Kenaciva lokasmim—D. III. 84
294 abhisamkhāsi yathā—D. I. 106;M. Such is Blessed One's moral virtues
Faithin theTathagatais settled,
(He) livesin suchandsuchaway; 1.253;
5. IV. 290;V. 270 and wisdom
rooted,established,firm and
kappa + e + ti, denom.pres. 3”. sg. Performedsuchexerciseof psychic
indestructible
by anybodyin theworld:
Poweras;iddhi +abhisamkhdara; Tathevatam hoti no aīāathā —D. Ill.
a+ sam +Hr +ya,fut.pp.
Tathādhammam
deseyyam
yatha... abhi+sam(MOKE ā-tsri 103;A. I. 170
—S.II. 187 double
pst.3 sg. It happensin thesameway,not
Tathagatesaddha nivittha hoti
May I preachtheDhammain such otherwise;no, neg.p.; aāhiathā,indcl.
mūlaiātā patitthitā —M. I. 320
a waythat;Drf --e +eyyam,
opt. Tathārūpam
samanam
vā
Faithin theTathagatais settled,rooted
I*. Sg. brāhmanam
vāiānayamaham
aiia Tathevapagganheyya—Vin. II. 184;
andestablished;saddha:Skt.srat +
payirūpāseyyam
-S. IV. 374 IV. 135 pi
Dha;ni + Vis+ta,pp.;miila+Jan +
Tathapatipannoca hoti, Seewhether
thereis a recluseor a Wouldhold it in thesameway;fatha +
fa,pp.; pa +tittha+ i + ta,Dp.
anudhammacārī—S. II. 108 brahmin
ofthatkind,withwhom eva;pa + Grh +na +eyya,meta.,
Tathāgate samannesanā
kātabba-
Thushehasentered intothepath, Should
I associate
today;Jan +nd opt. 3.EoSg.
Practising
according
totheDhamma; (na),cp.
suna,imper,2". sg.;yam+
M.1.317
pati+Pad+ta,pp.;anu+dhamma
+ ahan; aiia, indel.; pari t upa + As + Tadagge
sakyapanfayanti—D.1.93
An inguiryshouldbemadeonthe
Car + i, der, eyyam,
meta.opt. 1". sg. TheSakyans
areknownfromthatday;

429
 Tadajjhagamam
tam(tad) +agga;pa +Jita +ya +
nti,pass.pres. 3™.pl.
Tadajjhagamam— S. II. 171
ThatI realised;tam(tad)+adhi +a +
Gam +am,pst. I". sg.
Tadanantaramko iāneyya aāhiatra
Tathāgatena?—A. III. 350
Who wouldknow,besides Tathagata,
what’snext?; tam(tad)+anantaram;
Cy. takesthe termtadantaramto
meanthedifference,III. 375;
annatra, indcl. used here with instr
Ī i
Tadaniccamnirodhadhammam-—
M.
HI. 108
That is impermanentandof thenature
of cessation;tam(tad) +aniccam
Tadanucchavikamtadanulomikam
dhammimkatham katva —Vin. I. 45;
IV. 213
Havinggivena Dhammatalkfittingand
relevantto thatoccasion;tam(tad)+
anucchava+ ika, der.; tam (tad) +
anuloma+ ika, der.
Tadantaramjiveyyam yadantaram
assasitvāpassasāmi
—
A. III. 305
May
I live thatlong,duringwhich
I day;tadahu+u(t) + Pad +ta,pp.
breatheinandbreatheout:Jiv +
eyyam,
opt.I. sg.;yam(yad)+
antaram;
@+Svas+i +tva;absol.:
pa +Svas+a+ mi,pres. 1".sg,
Tadantaram
jiveyyam yadantaram
ekampindapatam
bhuijami—A.I.
304
May
I live thatlong,duringwhichI
takeonebowl of alms;Bhu(fijj +a+
mi,pres.1",sg.
Tadahupavaranaya Tanubhūto
Tadahuposathe
Tadantaraukkutikamnisiditum, +@ +Da + ana, der.
Tadahuposathe —Vin. I. 107
yāva pavāreti —Vin. I. 160 Onthatdayof Uposatha(a ceremony
To sitonthecalfof therightkneefor where thePātimokkhais recited); Tadupādāyaiāti —Vin. 1.93
a while until he makesothersinvite; uposatha —upavasatharelated to Concerningthatbirth is reckoned;tam
tam(tad)+antara,indcl.;ni +Sad+ fasting(upavasa) (tad)upa +4 +Da +ya, absol.
i t tum,inf.:yāva,indcl.;pa + Vr +e
E ti, caus.pres. 3". sg. Tadahuposathe pannarase—D. I. 47, Tadubhayamabhinivaiietvā—A. IHI.
II. 170;M. II. 79; S. I. 61, 190;II. 169
Tadapi phassapaccayā—
D. I. 42; S, 100 Causingto avoidboth; tam(tad)+
I. 33 Onthatfifteenth
dayof Uposatha ubhaya;abhi + ni + Vrj + e +tva,
Thattooisduetocontact;
tam(tad)+ caus. absol.
api Tadahuposathe
panparase
punnaya
punnamayarattiya —M. Tadubhayampaticcauppaiiati —M.
Tadamināpetampariyāyena vedi- IHI,15 I. 61
tabbam—
M. III. 146;S. I. 88;S.V.3 Inthefullmoonnight,onthat Arisesdependingon both;pati +I(t)
It shouldbeunderstoodin thisway fifteenth
dayof Uposatha;punna+ +ya, absol.;u(t) +Pad +ya + ti,
too; tam (tad) + imind + api + etam; ma pres. 3™.sg.
Vid + e + i + tabbam,caus,fut.Pp.
Tadahuposathe
bhikkhusamgha- Tadipiyam byanjanam—Vin. IV. 243
Tadamganibbānam - A. IV. 454 parivuto nisinno hoti —Vin. II. 236 The curry.proportionateto theboiled
Blowing out by thatmeans; Surrounded
by thecommunityof rice; tam(tad) t rūpa 1 iya, der.
bhikkhus
hehasbeensittingonthat
amgenanibbānam,Cy. IV. 207; tam dayofUposatha; tam(tad)+ahaor Tadevaso allino, tadevaso
(tad) +amga ahu(Skt.ahah)+uposatha; pari + aiihūpagato—A.V. 187
Vr+ta,pp.; ni + Sad + ta,pp. Heis just attachedto that,he hasjust
Tadassadetitannikameti tena ca cometo that;tam(tad) +eva;a +Li
vittim āpaiiati —A. 1.267; II. 126; Tadahuppanne
mūlacīvare
—Vin. HI. +ta,pp.; adhi + upa +gata,pp.
IV. 54, tam assādeti 104
He enioys it, loves it andbecomes Whenthefirstrobeis bornon that Tadevidamvinianam samdhavati
happywith it; assāda1 e + ti, denom. samsarati
anafiiam
—M. 1.258
Pfes.3'd,sg.;nikama+e +ti, denom. That verysameconsciousnessrunsthe
pres. 3”. sg.; @+ Pad +ya + ti, pres. Tada
pakkantova
ahosi,
napuna course,goesround, nothingelse;sam
3”. sg,
paceagafichi
—Vin. III. 147 (tad) +eva + idam;sam + Dhav +a
Then,
hewasgoneandgoneforever +ti,pres.3. sg.;sam+Sr +a +ti,
Tadahupatiggahitam
—Vin. I. 251 and
didnotcomebackagain;fadā, pres,3". sg.;an t aāāam
Accepted
onthatday;tam(tad)+ahu indcl,adv.;pa + Kram + ta,pp. +
(Skt.
Ahah);
pati+Grh+i +ta,pp. €va;puna, indcl.; pati + @ + gahcha Taddigunam taddigunam karissāmi
(=gaccha)
+i, pst.3", sg. —D.IHI.13
Tadahupavaranaya —
Vin. I. 161 I will do it double,I will do it double;
Onthatdayof Pavarana(aceremony Tadāhāro
tadupadano
—
S. II. 85 tam(tad) + digunam
whereinvitation
is madetopointout Withthatfoodandthatfuel; tam(tad)
thefaults) fāhāra;tam(tad)- upādāna:upa Tanubhiito viya bhikkhusamgho—
S.
431
 Tanūhi Tam
Tappatirūpīceva

V. 320; Vin. III. 69 On thatground,on thatcondition:fam Tamhā tamhāsattanikāyācuti —S.

slimmed;tanu t Bhā '- ta,pp.: viya,
indcl., —iva, usedfor comparisonor
supposition
Tanūhi tanutarālokasmim—M. I.
498
They arelessandlessin theworld:
tanu + tara: suffix usedwith abl.
Tantavayehicivaram vāyāpema-
Vin. III. 256
+ niddna; tam (tat) +paccaya
Tapam tapitabbantivadāmi—A, V.
191
I do say thatasceticismshouldbe
practised;Tap +i + tabba,fut. pp.;
Vad+a + mi,pres. I". sg.
Tapamsamadiyati—D. III. 42
Austerepracticeis observed:sam+@
+Da + tya + ti, pass.pres.3” sg.
Wedospeak
onthatground;Bhi(n)d
+
a+ma,pres. 1".pl. 11.3
Departurefromthisandthatgroupof
living beings;satta +nikaya; Cyu +
Tappatirūpīceva
kathāsanthāti—M.
ti, der.
II,253
Thetalk.suitablefor that(attitude),
Tamhāpi dhamsati—A. IV. 95
interests
him;tam(tat) +patirupt;
He falls awayfromthattoo; Dhvams
sam+Stha +ti, pres. 3”. sg.
+a+ ti, pres.3”. sg.
Tabbahulīkārāatthitvevassahoti -
M.IHI.25 Tamhi tamhi sattanikāyeiāti —S. II.
Forthereasonof constantpractice
? .."
Birth in thisandthatgroupof living
.

heunderstandsthatthereis; fam
Wecauseto weavetherobethrough Tapasamajjati mucchatipamadam (Skt.tad) +bahula+kara; atthi beings; Jan + fi, der.
weavers;Va +ya +dpe +ma,caus. āpaiiati —D. III. 42
i ; + tu + €va + assa
pres. 1".pl. By theausterepractice,he becomes Tamhi saddhamniveseti—M. II. 173
intoxicated,
infatuated
andunmindful: Tabbhagiyam
adhikaranam —Vin. Keepsfaithinhim;ni + Vis+e +i,
Tantakulakajata gulagunthikajata Mad +ya + ti. , pass.pres. 3”. sg.; - rd e
III, 168 caus.pres. 3”. Sg.
munjababbajabhita
—D. II. 55;S.II. Murch +ya + ti, pass.pres. 3", sg.;a Legal question
relatingtothat;tam
92,guligandhikaiāta,muāia pabbaiā + Pad +ya + ti, pass.pres. 3”. sg. (tad)+bhéga+iva,der. Tam atthamcintayitva,tam attham
bhūtā
mantayitvā—
D. II. 225
Beingentangledlike a ball of string, TapassibhavamGotamo—
A. IV. Tamatagge
mete bhikkhū Havingthought
outanddiscussed
that
confused likea nestof birdandbeing 175;Vin. III. 3 bhavissanti
—D. II. 101 matter;Ci(n)t +ava, i +twā,absol.;
likemuāiaandbabbaia grass;meaning VenerableGotamais anascetic;tapa+
Allthose
bhikkhus of mewill beat mant+aya + i + twā,absol.
of all thesephrasesis thatthe SSE,der. theendof ignorance;Cy.breaks
worldlings are in utter confusion;
thetermtamataggeas tama+ (t) + Tam apapunitva—A. IV. 190 E
tanta+ akulaka +jata; Tapodakandarayam—
Vin. III. 159 agge,at theend ofignorance, 548 Withoutreaching
that;a +pa +Ap
gulagunthikam
vuccatipesakāra- Tapoda
glen u+na+i+ ta, absol.
kaāiiya-suttam.Gulā nāmasakunikā.
Tamam
abhivihacca
—
A. I. 242
Tassākulāvakotipi
eke,Cy.II. 96 Tapodākuthitā sandati—Vin. III. Having
destroyed
darkness;
abhi+vi Tam icchami tam kamemi—D. I.
108 +Han(hat)+ya, absol. 193
Tantiyo samegunepatitthita —Vin.
Tapodaflows boiled;Kvath + i +ta, I wish her,I long for her:/s +ya +mi,
I. 182
pp.; Sya(n)d+ a + ti, pres. 3”. sg. Tampi
nissāya
naihāyati,ihāyatiea pres. I". sg.; Kāma t e t mi, denom.
The strings(of thelute)areon an
pana—A. V. 325 pres. I". sg.
equallevel;pa +tittha+i +ta,Pp.
Tapodenahayanti
—Vin. IV. 116 Hedoes
notmeditate
depending
TakebathinTapoda;
eventhough evenonthat,yet he meditates:
jhd Tam karaniyam tiretva—D. Il. 341
Tanteupanetva—Vin. III. 258
Tapodāis 'ā' ending thereis aform (from
Dhyai)+ya +ti,pres.3”.sg. Havingfinished
thatwork,(having
Settingit upontheloom:upa+Ni + in loc.as Tapode;
cp.Nātikāand decidedthematter);Kr +aniya,fut.
a +tva,absol.
Mātike,D. II. 91 Tamha
kaya
eavitvā
—D.IHI.31 pp.;Tr t e t tvā,caus.absol.
Tannidānā
tappaccayā
—M. ITI. 66; Havingdeparted
fromthatform
A.1.29 Tappaccayā
vācam
bhindāma
—M. I. ofexistence;
Cpu+a 2.i -. twā, Tamkimmajiiathabhikkhave
absol. rūpam niceamva aniceamvāti.? -
 Tam
Vin. I. 14
Bhikkhus,whatis youropinionasto
impermanent?;
Man +ya +tha,pres.
api
Tamkimmaīiaasi?—D. 1.60;S. I.
98
Whatdo you thinkof that,whatis
youropinion?; Man +ya+ si, pres.
Ind
- 5g.
7.
Tam kissa hetu? —D. I. 14;S. I. 71;
II. 265
For whatreason?;kissa is usedfor
askingreason,a prākrit form of
kasya;gen. sg.
Tam kutettha labbha? —D.IL. 118;
M. II. 129-30;S. I. 185;V. 163
How could it beobtainedin this
contekt?; kuto -- ettha;Labh -- wātt),
opt. 3. sg.
Tam khanamtam layamtam
muhuttamvitivatte—Vin. HI. 92
Whenthatinstant,thatsecond,that
moment,haspassedby; ace.is used
herein the loc. sense,as in thecase
oftamkhane(=tasmimkhane); vi +
ati + Vrt +ta,pp.
Tamkhanikam sancarittam
samāpailissati—Vin. III. 138
Will carrya messagerelatingto sexto
a womanhiredfor thetimebeing;tam
+khana+ ika, der.;sam +a + Pad +
ya +i +ssati,fut. 34.sg.
ki khopanaBhagavantam
evam
yano kittisaddo abbhuggato—M
II. 238 E
Tam
Taya
Tam
In referenceto thatBlessedOne,a You suggestme,in thiscontext,
1,165
goodreputationhasthusrisenup;fam anidea,in sucha waythatanidea
Thinking
thatteachinginsufficient;an
and Bhagavantamare governedby salam:indcl.; Kr +i t twā,absol. (for thetalk) would cometo my
theprefix abhi; abhi + u(t) 4 Gam
+ mind;pati +Bhd (s) +eyya,opt.
ta,pp. 3”, SQ.
Tampurisamdandāpesum—Vin. IV.
124
Tam cittam dahati, tam cittam Tam rattavasesamdhammiya
(They)causedto punishthatman;
adhitthati, tam cittam bhāveti—D. kathāya vītināmesum—D. II. 158
danda + dpe+s +um, denom.caus.
III. 258;M. ITI. 100;A, IV. 239 The remainingpartofthat night,they
pst.3. pl.
That ideahe fikes on, thatideahe spentwith talksbasedon theDhamma;
standson andthatideahecultivates: ratti + avasesam;vi + ati +Nam +e
Tampurisambandhapesum—Vin.
Dha + a + ti, pres. 3". sg.; adhi + IV.224 +s +um,caus.pst. 3%.pl.
Stha +a + ti, pres. 3™.sg.; Bhai+e+ (They)
causedto putthatmanin iail;
ti, caus.pres. 3. sg. Tam vacamappahayatam cittam
Ba(n)dh + Gpe +s + um, caus. pst.
appahayatam ditthim appati-
3”.pl.
Tam jano sambhavesi—Vin. II. 101 nissaiitvā—D. IHI. 13
Peopleadmiredhim;sam + Bhi +e + Withoutgivingupthatword,without
Tammeidamsakkhidittham—
D. IL.
S +i, caus.pst.3”.sg. 271 giving upthatmind,withoutgettingrid
of thatwrongview;a +pa +Ha +ya,
Ithas
been
seenbymewithmyown
Tam tadevassaabbhanumodati—M. absol.;a +pati + ni + Srj +i + tva,
eyes;
sa+akkhi+Drs +ta,pp.
II. 107 absol.
Reioicesover this andthatof Tamyevaanugamasi—Vin. I. 16
him (sheapprovesall thatis said Followed
itrightaway;fam+(y)+ Tam sunātha,sādhukammanasi-
by him); tam + tam(tad) + eva + eva;anu+Gam +@+s +i, double karotha, bhāsissāmi— D. II. 76
assa;abhi +anu + Mud +a + ti, pst.3. sg, Listento that,applythatwell on mind,
pres. 3. sg. I will tell you; Sru + na + tha,imper.
Tam
yevettha
patipucchissami
—D. 2". pl; manasi+karotha:Krto-
Tam taham, tata kumara, evam 1.60 tha, imper.2". pl; Bhās t i ssāmi,
vadami—M. II. 75 Onthismatter
| will askyoua question Tut I SE,
Therefore,
mydearson,I tellyouthis: tightaway;pati +Prch +ya +i +
tamis usedherefor abl. sense;te + ssami,
fut. 1. sg. Tayā ca mayāca svevaBhagavā
aham; Vad + a + mi, pres. I". sg. mahiddhikataro— S. I. 147
Tamyevetthapatibhatu—M. IL. That BlessedOne is indeedmore
Tamtenadassam
—Vin. III. 147 146 majesticthanyou andme;so +eva;
I shallnotgive it to you; Da +ssam, Inthiscontext,
mayit cometoyour maha+ iddhika +tara; thesuffix
mid.fut. 1",pl. mindrightaway(let mehearyou); fam tara is usedwith abl.or instr.for
*() +eva+ettha;pati +Bha +tu, comparison
Tamdevopatisedhetu —M. II. 100 imper.
3".se.>tamis governedby
MaytheLordstophim;pati+Sidh+ the
prefix
pati Taya pathamatarampakkanto—Vin.
e+ tu,caus.imper.3. sg. 1.30
Tamyevettha
patibhatu,yathamam I setoutearlierthanyou;pa +Kram +
Tamdhammam
analam
karitya
—M. patibhāseyya
—M. II. 31 ta, PP-
 Taya Tasmim
Tarayanti Tarunapabbajita

Tayā mayamvedissāma—M. II. 134 42 desid.fut.pp.

Wewill understandthroughyou; Vid +
e ti t ssāma,
fit. I". pi,
Tayā saddhim āhārūpahāro (natthi)
—Vin. III. 136
Thereis noanydealingwith you;
saddhim,indcl. usedwith instr.;
aharipahara, idiomatic expression
Taya saddhimvipaccatam—D. II.
266
May it cometo fruitionwith you; wi 3
Pac +ya + tam,mid. imper,3”. Sg.
Tayidam kim su, tayidam kathamsu
2—D. III. 134;M. I. 400; S. IV.228
Whatis that,how is that?:katham,
indci; su, indcl.
Tayidam bhoGotama tatheva—Vin.
IHI.2
VenerableGotama,thatis verytrue;
tatha + eva
Tayidam bho Gotama nacchannam,
tayidam nappatirūpam,yam mam
tvam gahapativādenasamudacarasi
—D. 1.91; M. I. 360
VenerableGotama,it is notnice, it is
notproperthatyou addressmeby the
termhouseholder:na + Cha(n)d + ta,
Pp.; sam + u(t) +G+ Car +a+si,
pres. 2”. sg.
TayidambhoGotamanasampanna-
meva— A. III. 223;Vin. III. 2
VenerableGotamait is indeednotnice;
tam(tad)+ idam;sam + Pad + ta,pp.
+ eva
TayidambhoGotamasameti—A. IV.
Tarunapabbaiitā
abhirūpā dassanīyā
VenerableGotama,thatbringsus pāsādikā
panditā vyattā medhāvinī
tT,samam+ e (I) +ti, pres. Tasmim adhikarane vinicchiyamane
egKi o =~
=o
dakkhāanalasātatrūpāyāya
wīmmamsāya
samannāgatāalam —Vin. II. 96
Whenthatlegalquestionis being
kātumalamsamvidhātum-Vin. IV.
Tayidam samkhatamolārikam —M. decided;vi +ni(s) + Ci +ya +mana,
211
II, 232 pass. PFD.
Theyoungfemalerenouncedwho is
That is conditionalandnaive;sam(8)+ extremelybeautiful,attractive,
Kr + ta,pp.; uldra +ika, der: Tasmimanuppattohoti —Vin. II.
pleasant,
intelligent,experienced,
wise,clever,industrious,endowed 304 :
Hasreachedthere;anu+pa +Ap +
with
theabilitytoplanandexamine,
Tayo kho me Avusoāsavā,kāmāsavo ta, pp.
capableof doingandorganising;pa
bhavāsavoaviiiāsavo —M. I. 55 Vraj+ i + ta,pp.; Dré + antya,fut.
Brothers,thereare threeinfluxes, pp.;pasada+ ika, der.; medha +avt Tasmim upanandhi—Vin. IV. 83
influx of sensedesire,influx of +ini,der.; tatra +upaya; alam, (He) harbouredgrudgeagainsthim; I
becomingandinflux ofignorance; indcl.;
Kr +tum,inf.; sam+vi +Dha upa+nandh(fromNah)
+i, pst.3”.
āvuso is usedhere in thepl. sense; +tum,inf. Sg.
G + Sru + a, der.
Tarunenakhirena bhojessama—Vin. Tasmimthaneparisuddho—D. II.
Tayo ca nissayeattha ca akaraniyani 1.243 46 ; I
acikkheyyatha—Vin. I. 274 Wewill makehim feedwith fresh Pureatthatpoint;pari +Sudh+ta,
You shouldexplainthreesupports milk;Bhuj + e +ssama,caus.fut. 1”. pp:
pl.
der.; a -- Kr -- anīya,fut. pp.: ā - Tasmim puggalevissasamāpaiii-
Khyā t eyyātha,intens.opt. 2'4,pl. Talaghatakamkaronti—Vin. IV. 260 tabbammaīiīanti —M. I. 95
(They)
beatprivate
partswithpalms Theythinkthatoneshouldkeeptrust
Taramānassabhāsatokāyopi inthatperson:ā Padtyati'
kilamaticittampiupahaīīati saropi Talasattikam
uggiranti—Vin. IV. tabba,fut.pp.; Man +ya + nti, pres.
upahaāīaatikanthopi āturīyati —M. 147 3'd,pl.
III. 234 Showthegesture
of attacking;
Of thepersonwhospeaksfast,(his) pahāradānākāramdassetvā,Cy. Tasmim puggalesammukhībhūte-
bodybecomes fatigued,
mindis 878;u(t) + Gur +a + ti, pres. 3”. sg. Vin. II. 240
disturbed,
voiceisdamagedandthe Whenthatpersonis metwith;sam+I
throat gets sick: tara (Skt. tvara) + i
Tasam
vathavaram
va—S.IV.351 mukha+bhiita,thelast vowel(a) of
mana,prp.; Klam+a +ti,pres.3”. Thefrailorthefirm thenouncombined
withtherootsKr
Sg.; upa + Han +ya + ti, pass.pres. and Bhū is changedinto ī
3". sg.; dtura + iya + ti, denom.pass. Tasmatiha
bhikkhave evam
pres.3”. sg. sikkhitabbam
—S. II.194,
267;
A. Tasmim yevabhaveparinibbāyati -
IV.87,Moggallāna A. TI.126
Tarayanti rattiyo —S. I. 62 Bhikkhus,
youshould,therefore,
train In thatveryexistenceheentersinto
Dayspass
quickly;
tvara+Ya+nti, yourselves
thuson this matter;fasmā Parinibbāna;pari t ni t Va +ya +0,
pres. 3'd, pl. I
+(t)+iha(=idha);Sak+i +tabba, pres, 3”. sg.
 Tasmim Taham
Tassa Tassa

Tasmimvissāsamāpaiieyya—5. IHI. While hewasengagedin playing;gen, masculine; vi + u(t) + Stha +s +1,

113
Hewouldkeeptrustinhim;@+Pad +
ya + eyya,opt. 3. sg.
Tassaajanantassathavikaya manim
pakkhipitva—Vin. III. 62
Havingputthegemintothebagwhen
he is unaware;a +Jan +nd + nta,pr.
D; pa + Ksip +-i + tva,absol.
Tassaicchami hātave— S. I. 175
I like to take(it) for him;Js +ya +mi,
pres. I*. sg.; Hr + tave:hartave>
hattave> hatave,inf.
Tassa etadahosi —M. I. 146
This ideacameto him;etam(etad)+
ahosi
Tassa evamassa —D.I. 45, HI. 83; M. I.
40,134;5. IV. 174
M.III. 158;S. I. 71;II. 255
absl.;pa + Si +ta,pp. pst. 3. sg.
Thisideaoccurredto me;etam(etad)
tat Hū(Bhā)+a +s +i,pst.3
Tassadajjehi— Vin. I. 217 Tassārattiyā accayena—M. II. 50,
sg.
You shouldgive him;Dajja (Skt. 63;III. 145;5. I. 49,151
dadyat),opt.3". sg.,takingdajjaas At theendof thatnight;afi +aya
Tassa
mayhamevam hoti —M. I. 17
the basedajjehi is formed by adding Thisideacomestomymind (from I)
e + hi, imper,2". sg.
Tassetam patikamkham—M. I. 25;
Tassam
parisāyam nisinno hoti —D.
Tassapāpiyyasikākammamkarotu- I,123;M. II. 55;S. 1.81 ITI. 110;A. ITI. 142
Vin. II. 85 Hehasbeensittingin thatcrowd;ni + This shouldbe expectedof him;fassa
Let theSamghacarryout legal + etam;pati +Kamks +ya, fut.pp.
Sad+ta,pp.
proceedingon his evil behaviour;
Iassa +papiya (s) + ika, der.;Kr +0 Tassetampātikamkham
Tassa
vatthussapatinissaggaya-
+tu,imper.3%.sg. samsidissativa uppilavissati va —A.
Vin.IV.294
Forgivingupof thatmatter;
pati +ni V. 202
Tassapāyamevarūpī panopanaviyā This is to beexpectedof him,that
+Srj +ta,pp.
na upeti —M. I. 480 he will eithersink down or floaton;
Evenforthatpersonthiskindof tassa+etam;pati + Kamks +ya,fut.
Tassa
vācāvatthurevassa
—S. IV. 15
bargainingis notapplicable;tassa+ Hiswordwouldindeedbegroundless; pp.;sam+Sad +i +ssati,fut.3°. I
api + ayam;pana + opana + viya; sg. u(t) +Plutar+ir* ssati, fut. 3”.
vacd+avatthu+ & + eva + assa,
upa+e (fromI) ti,pres.3. sg. opt.3. se. SE.

Thisideawouldoccurtohim;evam+
assa:As +ya (Skt.yat), opt. 3%.sg. Tahamtahamujjhitani— Vin. iil.
Tassapurisassaonoiesim—A. IV. Tassasutamhoti—S. III. 243
210 Ithasbeenheardbyhim;tassa,gen. 232 3
Tassaevam utthahatoghatato I causedto handoverto thatman;0 + usedin instr. sense; Sru + ta, pp. Discardedhereandthere;ujjh +a +i
vayamato—M. I. 86 Nudor Nij +e +s +im,caus.pst.I". + ta, PP.
Whileheisexerting,strivingand Sg. Tassā
devatāya
patissutvā
—S. 1.9
makingeffort;gen.abs!. Havingrepliedthatdeity;pati +Sru + Tahamtahamomadditvā—Vin. IV.
Tassabhavanti vattāro —M. I. 469 tva,absol. 191
Tassaka gati ko abhisamparāyo?- Therearecritics for him: Vac+tu, Pressingdown hereandthere
D. II. 91;M. I. 387;II. 146;III. 247, der. Tassāpabbaiitegabbhovutthāsi-
270 Vin.VI. 278 Taham tahamolokentā—Vin. IV.
Whatis his way,whatis his next 186
Tassabhikkhuno nikkhante Herchildwasbornwhenshe
birth?;Gam + ti, der.;abhi +sam + vissattho
niddamokkami—
Vin. L. renounced;tassāpabbaiite,this Looking abouthereandthere;o + Lok
para+aya(from1) 87 + e + nia, pr.p.
phraseis rather puzzling; if tassā is
When
thatbhikkhu
hadgoneout,(he) connected
topabbaiite,it is
Tassakālakiriyāya—D. III. 210;M. fell asleepwithconfidence;
ni(s)+ Tahamtahamnahāyanti—Vin. Il.
grammatically wrong, because time is
Il. 106
Kram+ta,pp.;vi+Svas
+ta,pp.i0 indicated
byusingloc. or gen.in 122
Sincehisdeath
+Kram+i,pst.3. sg. bothterms;
if tassāis connectedto Takebathhereandthere:taham-
8abbho,
thenpabbaiiteis tahim,indel.; Snā t ya + nti, meta.,
Tassakhiddāpasutassa
—D. II, 340
Tassamayhametadahosi
—D. I. 53; Srammatically
wrongbecauseit is pres. 3”. pl.
 Taham
Tahamtahampakkamimsu—Vin. II.
34
Wentto thisplaceor thatplace;pa +
Kram + imsu,pst. 3”. pl.
Tahamtahampadhavimsu—Vin. IV.
115
They ranhereandthere;pa + Dhav +
imsu,pst. 3. pl.
Tahamtahamvaccamkaronti —Vin.
Il. 141
Relieve themselves here and there
Tādisena muhuttena mūiāni
uddharāma bhesaiiānisamharāma-
Vin. I. 277
At sucha momentwe pull out roots
and collect herbs; u(t) + Dhr or Hr +
a + ma,pres. 1".pl.; sam + Hr +a +
ma,pres. 1".pl.
Tadiso ayam dhammoyattha
vind puriso na cirassevasakam
acariyakam sayamabhifna
sacchikatvāupasampaiia vihareyya
—M. I. 164
ThisDhamma issuchthatanintelligent
person,havingexperienced,
with
directknowledge,thelegacyof the
teacher
in a shortperiodof time,
wouldabidetherein;tadiso,Skt.
tādrsah;nacirasseva,indcl.;
abhinha:abhi +Jia, instr.sg.: sa +
acchi(=akkhi)+kauā,absol.;upa+
sam+Pad +ya,absol.;vi +Hr +
eyya,opt. 3. sg,
TadisohomiyadisaSariputta-
Moggallānāti —A. II. 164
MayI besuchasSāriputtaand
Moggallana;yddisa, tādisa,rel.
Talapattikaya
pron.;Hii (Bhi) +a +mi,imper.1".
sg.
Tāni katham karissatha? —Vin. II.
291
Whatwill you do to them?
Tani padavyafijananisadhukam
uggahetvā—D. II. 124
Havingtakenup (learnt)those
sentencesandphrasescorrectly;
sadhukam,adv.;u(t) + Grh + e +tva,
absol.
Tapetva gabbhampatesi—Vin. IIL.
84
Havingcausedto heatit up (she)made
the faetusdrop; Tap+ e +tva,caus.
absol.;Pat +e +s + i, caus.pst.3”,
Sg.
Tāyapi kho tvam .. iriyāya tāya
patipadāyatāya dukkarakārikāya
nāiihagamā—M. I. 172
Evenby thatmovement,thatpractice
andthatausterityyou did notrealise;
na +adhi+a +Gam+4G,
pst.2™.sg.
Tayamvelayam—S.1.5
At thattime
Tāyeva appāhāratāya—M. I 245.
Becauseof that little food;appa+
āhāra t tā, der.; appa has the
meaningof alittle or little
Talapattikaya chadetabbam
manhieyya—S, Il. 217
(He) would thinkof covering
(anelephant
ofseven
orseven
andhalf
ratana
high)witha tinypalmleaf;
Chad+e +tabba,caus.fut.pp.;Man
Tavadeva
Tālavantenapi
tya t eyva, opt. aM, SX.
Tālavantenapi
vidhūpanenapivātam
pariyesanti
—M. 1. 189
(They)seekair by means ofa fan or Tāvatakenabalatthena—M. II. 71
With thatmuchofa littlearmy
bellows;
vidhapanenati
aggivijanakena,
Cy. II. 229; pari +es
Tāvatakenevaattamanāassu—D. I.
(from
Is)+a +ati,pres.3”.pl.
207
Talavatthu
bhavanti—S. 1.69 Only with thatmuch,theywouldbe
happy;tavatakena+ eva;As +yu
Theybecomeextinct(likea palm
(Skt.yus), opt.3”. pl.
tree
whichismadegroundless i.e.
uprooted);
tala +avatthu
Tavatakenevaotthapahatamattena
lapitalapanamattena—M. 1. 164
Talomatthakacchinnoabhabbo
With thatmuchstrikingof lips and
punavirūlhiyā—Vin. I. 97
repeatingwhatis said(by theteacher);
Thepalmtree,cut from thetop, is
ottha +pa + Han + ta,pp.; Lap +i+
unfit
forgrowingupagain;Chid+ta,
pp.;a + bhabba (Skt. Bhavya); vi + ta,pp. ; Lap + e +ana,caus.der.
Ruh+ti, der.
Tāvatakenevatutthim āpaiieyyātha
Talacchiggalena
asanam —M. I. 271
atipatessanti
—S. V. 453 You shouldcometo satisfaction,
Theywillmakethearrowgothrough
a only with thatmuch;ā Pad t ya t
keyhole;ati +Pat +e +ssanti,caus. eyyatha,opt. 2”. pl.
Sut.
3. pl.
Tavatakenevapatakam pari-
Talacchiddam
amgajatam hareyyum—D.IHI. 115
pavesentassa
—Vin. II]. 118 With thatmuch,ofcourse, theywould
When
hewascausingtoput(his)male carrybanners
(demonstrate);
sign
through
thekey-hole;
fala+ tāvatakena+eva; pari t Hr sta
a? e
chidda(=talacchiggala);pa + Vis + evyum, opi. 2. . SE.
€ +nta, caus. pr.p.
Tāvatikā visatthi —S. IHI. 133
Tāvakālikam deti —Vin. IV. 286 That muchof trust;fāvatikā
Givestemporarily;tava + kala vissatthititattakovissaso,Cy.
+ika,der.;Da +e +ti,pres. 318;vi + Svas +ti, der.
34 sg,
Tāvadevaavassatam—D. I. 248-9
Tavakalikam
haritum—Vin.II. 174 Justnowarrived;ava +Sr +ta,pp.
Totakeawaytemporarily;
Hr +a +i
+tum,inf, Tavadevaādāya bhikkhusamgham
 Tavadeva
upasamkamitvā—Vin. II. 273
Havingtaken(her)andgoneat onceto
thecommunityof bhikkhus;fava(Skt.
tavat) +(d) +eva;ā +Da +ya,
absol.;upa +sam + Kram + i + tva,
absol.
Tavadevachaya metabba— Vin. I.
95
Shadowshouldbe measuredinstantly;
Ma + e + tabba,fut. pp.
Tāvadevadassanāyaupasam-
kamitum iechati —D. I. 107
Wishesto go thereandsee(the
Buddha)atonce;Js +ya +ti, pres.3”
sg.
Tavadeva soratasoratohoti nivata-
nivāto upasantaupasanto—A. IHI.
393
For thetimebeing(only for that
long) hebecomes
sogentle,so
humbleandso calm:su +Ram + ta,
pp. * a, der.; ni + Va + ta,pp.;
upa + Sam+ ta,pp.
Tāvadevasoratasoratohoti yāva na
amanāpāvaeanapathāphusanti—M.
1.126
One becomesextremelygentleuntil
one is nottouchedby unpleasant
remarks;vacana+patha, waysof
speaking;
Spr +a +nti,pres.3”4.
pl.
Tava pathamampatikarohi —A, IV.
193
First of all you getyourselfabsolved;
pati + Kr + 0 + hi, imper,24. Sk.
Tava bahukiccassa,bahukarani-
yassa—D. 11.270
Tāham Tāham Titthatu
For theonewho hasthatmuchof work 116 Tikkhattum pāninā ākotesi—D. III.
to be done;tava, indcl. usedasemph. addressedyou, Ananda; fam(= tuvam) 8
p.; kicca and karaniya botharefut, +aham; G +manta + e +s + im, Knockedat threetimeswith thepalm;
pp. denom.
pst. 1".sg. ā t Kut te ts ti, caus.pst. 3'".sg.
Tava bahumsuvannamkuto? —Vin. Tahamevamvadami —Vin. II. 230 Tikkham maranasatimbhāventi
I. 209 [tellhimthus;Vad +a4 mi, pres. 1". āsavānamkhayaya—A. III. 306; IV.
From where(did you get)thatmuchof 5g. 319
gold? (They) cultivatemindfulnesson death
Tāhamdhammamsutvā—M. II. keenlyfor theexhaustionof influxes;
Tava bahum hirafiiam pariccaiati- 143 tikkham(Skt. tiksna),adv.
Vin. II. 159 I,havinglistenedto thatDhamma;fam
Donatesthatmuchof gold;pari + +aham, ta +aham,taham;Sru + Ticivarena acchadesi —Vin. III. 11
Tyaj+ a + ti, pres. 3”. sg. tvd,absol. Offered three robes; d + Chad +e +s
+i, caus.pst. 3™.sg.
Tāvamahantāniphalāni—A. IHI.369 Tāhamvakkhāmi—Vin.I. 151
That muchbig fruits Ishallspeakto them;rā +aham; Vae Ticīvarena avippavāsamsamman-
+ssami(Skt. syami), fut. I". sg., used neyya—Vin. I. 109
Tava mahantapuāiā ahesum—Vin. alsoaspres.,taking vakkhaas the Wouldagreeupona boundarywhere
IHI. 16 base bhikkhusarenotallowedto keep
The bundleswerethatmuchbig;a + themselvesawayfrom threerobes;a
Hit (Bhii) + a +s + um,pst. 3%pl. Tikicchaka
virecanamdenti—A. V. + vi +pa + Vas+a, der.;sam + Man
(ahosum>ahesum) 218 +ya + eyya,opt.3™.sg.
Physiciansadminister a purge;
Ta vutta ta vakkhanti —Vin. I. 151 likicchaka,desid. of Cit: vi + Ric + e Ticivarena yapetum—Vin. I. 288
Beingspoken,theywill speaktothem; * ana,caus.der.;Da + e + nti, pres. To keepthemselvesgoingwith three
Vae+ta,pp.; Vae+ssanti(Skt.syanti), 3”,pl, robes;Ya +dpe + tum,caus.inf.
pres. meaning Tikotiparisuddham Titthatu Ambattho manayo,tumhe
macchamamsam, aditthamasutam mayasaddhim asmimvacane
Ta samghonakificiAha—
Vin. IV. aparisamkitam—
Vin. I. 238;II. mantavho—D. 1.94
241 197;II. 172 LeavealoneAmbattha,theyoungman,
TheSamghadoesnotsayanything
to Fishandmeat,purein threeends: you conversewith meon thismatter;
them;
rā,acc.pl.;
a +Ah+a,pst.3”. unseen,unheard
andunsuspected; fi + saddhim,indcl. used with instr;
sg.;thisis alsousedfor thepres. koti+pari +Sudh+ta,pp.;a +Drs manta+ vho,imper.mid. 2”. pl.
meaning
* a,pp.;a+ Sru +ta,pp.;a +pari
*Sank+i +ta,pp. Titthatu tāva suttam—5. IV. 170
Tāsu tāsu disāsu tesu tesu
Leaveoff sleeping;Svap+ fa, pp..
janapadesu
—
Vin. I. 21 Tikkhattum
codanāyaanāpatti- usedas a noun ; sottantinipajjitva
In thosedistricts,in thosecountries Vin.
IHI.
223 niddā okkamanam,Cv.lll. 5
There
isnooffence
byurging
three
TahamAnanda
āmantesim
—D.II. limes;
ti +khattum,
der. Titthatu nāgo—M. I. 143
 Titthatu Tinaggāni Tinaghasodakam Tinani

Let thenagabe there;theword nāga
is used in Pali to denote the meaning
ofa cobra, dragon, elephant,and the
arahant
Titthatu Bhagavakappam titthatu
Sugatokappam—Vin. II. 289
May theBlessedOne staya full span
of life, maytheWell Gone One stay
a full spanof life; tittha+ tu, imper.
and
Is SP;
Titthatu bhavamGotamo, tunhi
bhavamGotamohotu—
D. I. 122
Let thevenerableGotamastayaway,
let thevenerableGotamabe silent
Titthatesā bhantekathā yāya
mayametarahi kathāya sannisinnā
—D)E793 Mi tie?
Leavealone,venerablesir, thetalk
whichwe havebeenengagedin atthe
moment;titthatu+esa; etarahi,
indcl.; sam +ni +Sad + ta,Pp.
Titthatha tumhe—D. I. 122
Dependingon fuel ofgrass and
wood; tina +kattha +upādāna;
pati +I(t) +ya, absol.
Tinakatthodakam sannicitam—A,
IV. 108
Storedup grass,wood andwater;fina
+kattha + udaka
Tinakalāpam okāsehi— S. IV. 290
Spreadover thebundleof grass;
okāsehītivippakiri, Cy. Il. 93; tina+
kalapa; okasa + e + hi, denom.
imper.2”. sg.
Tinakutiyo karitva vassam
upagacchimsu—Vin. III. 41
Making grasshuts(they)observed
rainy retreat;Kr + i + tv, absol.;upa
+gaccha +imsu,pst. 3™.pl.
Tinakutiyo bhinditva —Vin. III. 41
Havingdemolishedthehutsmadeof
grass;Bhi(n)d + i + tvd,absol.
Tinakhettam gantvā—
Vin. IHI.64
Tinaghāsodakam anuppavecchati-
M.IHI,133
Willsupplyhimwith grass-fodder
andwater;tinaghdsa +udaka; anu
+pa + Vif +e +ssati, caus. fut.
3”,sg.
Tinacunnam paripatati —Vin. Il. 120
Themixtureof grassandlimedrops;
pari+Pat +a +ti, pres. 3". sg.
Tinacunnehipipamsucunnehipi
okirīyanti—Vin. 1.203
Strewnoverwithgrasspowderand
dust;0 + Kir+ fya + nti, pass. pres.
at,pl.
Tinandupakam
gahetvā
—Vin. I.
208;ITI.249
Havingtaken
a rollofgrass;tina+
andupaka;
Grh +e + tva, absol.
Tinapurisake va mattikapunije va
yoggam
karitvā—A. IV.423
Having
aimed
ateffigiesmadeof grass
orataheap
ofclay; Yuj +ya,fut.pp.
Tinam tinatthikena pariyesitabbam
—Vin. II. 297
Grassshouldbesoughtby thosewho
are in needofgrass; tina +attha +
ika, der.;pari +es (fromIs) + i +
tabba,fut.pp.
Tinavatthārakenadeseyyam—M. II.
250
I shouldconfesstheoffencein terms
of tinavatthāraka
(coveringwith grass):
Dr§ +e +eyyam, opt. I". sg.
Tinavatthārakenavāpasametum-
Vin. II. 86
To settle (the legal matter) by the
methodofspreading grassover it; fina
+ava +Str + aka,der.; vi + upa +
Sam + e + tum, inf.
Tinasantharakampannapetvanisidi
—M. III. 238;Vin. TV.109
Havingcausedto preparethematof
grass(he) satdown;pa +Jna +ape +
tva,caus.absol.;ni +Sad +i, pst.
. Sg.
ra "e

You keepsilence Havinggoneto a meadow;Gam +tv,

absol. Tinamca kattham ca patisametva- Tinasantharakasayanasanam (te)
Tittha bhagini, aham karissami - Vin.III. 41 khāyissati —A. IV. 231
Vin. III. 131 Tinagahanamvanagahanam Having piledupgrassandwood(at You will feelyour lodgingof grass
Stopsister,I will do:(realmeaning
is rukkhagahanamnadividuggam saferplace);pati + Sam +e +tva, mai; tina +santharaka+sayana +
implied)
pabbatavisamam pavisitvā—D. Ul. caus.absol, asana
73
Tinakatthapannakasatamekato
Havingentered intoplaces
of difficult Tinamcakatthameasamkaddhitvā Tinahāriyo katthahāriyo —Vin. IHI.
ussāreyya—Vin. III. 177
accesssuchasgrassylands,forests, -Vin. III. 41 41
Wouldcauseto raiseup grass,
thickjungles,islands
surrounded by Having
gathered
grassandwood;sam Women,gatheringgrass,gathering
wood,leavesandrubbishtogether;
rivers,andmountain clefts;pa +Vis+ +kaddha(fromKrs) +a +i+ tvé, fire-wood;Hr +a +f, der.
u(t) +Sr +e +eyya,caus.opt.
i + tva, absol. absol. I
3”. se.
Tināni ihāpesi uttarāsamgamna
Tinaggānichindanti—A. IV. 435 Tinam
iānātha
—M. II. 53 ihāpesi,S. IV. 290
Tipakatihūpādānampaticea—M. II.
Browsegrasstops;tina + agga; (He) causedto burnthegrass,not the
203
Chi(n)d +a +nti,pres.3”,pl: upperrobe;jhd (from Ksi) +dpe +s
Tinā
+i, caus.pst.3”.sg.;uttara+
āsamga
Tina bhiyyo na manhati—D. IIL. 185
He doesnotcarefor it atall (he does
notthinkofit morethana bladeof
grass);bhiyyo,indcl.; Man +ya + ti,
pres.3”.sg.
Tinena va pannenava paticchadetva
—Vin. Il. 212
Causingto cover(them)with grassor
leaves:
pati+Chad+e +tva,caus.
absol.
Tinodakasamkhaye
—M. I. 152
At thetimewhenthewaterandgrass
haverun short;tina + udaka+
samkhaya
Tinnam kho panabhikkhave
sannipatagabbhasaavakkanti hoti -
M. I. 265
Bhikkhus,theembryo’scominginto
the wombtakesplacedueto the
occurrencetogetherof threefactors;
sam + ni + Pat + a, der; ava + Kram
+ti,der.
Tinnam pahoti—Vin. II. 169
Enoughforthree;pa +Hii (Bhi) +a
+ti,pres.3. sg.
Tinnamsanifojananam
parikkhayā
ragadosamohanamtanutta
sakadagami
hoti,sakidevaimam
lokam āgantvādukkhassantam
karoti—D. I. 156
Because of theekhaustion
of three
fetters
andattenuation
of lusthatred
anddelusion, hebecomes once
Tinno
returner:heputsanendto Dukkha
after coming to this world only once;
sam +yojana; pari + Ksi + a, der;
saki (d) t eva; ā t Gam 1 tvā,absol.;
dukkhassa+ antam
Tinnam sannojananamparikkhaya
sotapannohoti avinipatadhammo
niyatosambodhiparayano
—D.I. 156
Becauseof the exhaustionof three
fettershe becomesstream-entrantwho
doesnotfall intopurgatories
andis
definitelydriftingtowards
enlightenment; sota + @+ Pad +ta,
pp.; a + vi + nit Pat +a, der.+
dhamma
Tinnamsammukhībhāvā
—
A. I. 150
Owing to the presenceof three
factors;sammukha+ bhava
Tinnā metthakamkhā vigatā
katham-kathā
—
D. II. 276
My doubton this matteris over,
inquisitivenessis goneaway;Tr +
ta,pp.; vi + Gam + ta,pp.
Tinno paragatothaletitthati
brahmano—S. IV. 174;A. IL 5
The brahmana,who hascrossed
andgonetotheothershore,stands
ontheland;Tr +ta,pp.;param+
gata;tittha+ti,pres.3”.sg.
HerebrāhmanameansanArahani
Tinnolokevisattikam
—M. I. 175;
A. IV. 432
Onewhohascrossed
(theocean
of)
cravingin theworld; Tr +fa,PP:
visattika: anothernamefor
craving
Tinhāni
Tinhānisatthānigahetvā—A. I. 160
Havingtakensharpweapons(intothe
hands);
tinha(Skt.tiksna); Grh +e +
tvd,absol.
Tinhayasattiyateladhotaya—A. IV.
130
Witha sharpdaggerwashed
| (sharpened
) withoil; Dhdy+ta,pp.
Tinhenagovikantanenagavim
vikanteyya—M. III. 274
Wouldcutopena cow with a sharp
butcher’s
knife; vi + Krnt +eyya,opt.
3” sg.
Tittakattāyakatukattāya asātattāya
$amvattati —A. V. 213
lt leadstobitterness,pungencyand
unpalatability;tittaka+ tta,der.;sam
+Vrt+a +ti,pres.3”.sg.
Tittakāiābuāmakaechinno
vātātapenasamputito hoti
$ammilāto —M. I. 246
Longgreen
bittergourd,cutraw,has
shriveled
andwitheredawaydueto
Windandheat;tittaka+alabu;amaka
* Chid+ta,pp; vata+atapa;sam +
Pula+i +ta,pp.;sam+Mla +ta,
Pp.
Tittiriyam nama brahmacariyam -
Vin.II. 162
Thehighestwayof lifenamedtittiriya
(that
which
belongs
tothepartridge); Breaksthetriplebar;rathassa
littira I" iva, der.
MA kāmesuvītarāgo—
A. IHI.
I Tindukakandarayam—Vin. III. 159
Afounder
of'areligious
sectwhois
Tindukakandarāyam
free from sense-desires;vi + J + ta,
pp. + raga
Titthiyadhajo na dharetabbo—Vin.
1.306; II. 22
Shouldnotcauseto weartheuniform
of otherreligious sects;dhaia is used
herein thesenseof uniform; Dhr t e
+ tabba,caus.fut. pp.
Titthiyapakkantako patijanati —Vin.
I. 121
He acknowledges thathe is onewho
hasshiftedto anotherreligioussect;
pa + Kram + ta,pp. + ka, der.;pati +
Jan + na + ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Titthiyaseyyamgacchati—Vin. IV.
101,166
Goes to thelodgingof theother
religioussects; Si +a +ya, der.
Titthiya apasakkanti—Vin. IV. 70
The membersof theotherreligious
sectsgo away;fittha + iya, der.;
apa +Svask+a +nti,pres.
3%pl;
Titthiyā evamassuvacanīyā—
D. III.
130
The membersof theotherreligious
sectsshouldbeaddressed
thus;As +
yu (Skt.yus),opt.3“.pl.; Vae+aniya,
Tidandam bhahiati —A. IV. 191
purato
tayodandaka,Cy. IV. 104;Bhanj + a
+ti,pres.3™.sg.
In theglenof Tinduka(a kind oftree)
Tiparivattam
Tiparivattam dvadasakaramyatha-
bhitam nanadassanam—Vin. I. 11
Knowledgeandvision in reality
with threecirclesandtwelvemodes;
ti +pari + Vrt +ta; dvadasa+
akara; yatha + bhiita; āna +
dassana
Tiporisam uccattena—D. II. 181
In height,threemen'sheightput
together;ti +purisa + a, der.
Tippo upakkamotippam padhanam
—M. If. 218
Sharpexertionandsharpstriving;
tippa = tibba, Skt. tivra
Tibbam hirottappam
paccupatthitam—A.II. 78; IV. 151
A sharpsenseof moralshameandfear
is present;hiri + ottappa
Tibba bhayasannapaccupatthita-
A. IL.241;IV. 52
A sharpsenseof fearis present;pati +
upa +Stha +i + ta,pp.
Timandalam paticchadentena
parimandalam nivāsetvākāya-
bandhanambandhitvāsagunam
katvā samghātiyopārupitvā
ganthikam patimuiicitva —Vin. I.
46; II. 213
Havingputon the(inner)robeall
roundcausingto coverthetriangle
(navelandtwo knees),havingtiedthe
waistband,
havingputon thetwo robes
together,having locked the knot ;
pati + Chad +e + nta,caus.prp.;
ni + Vas+e +tvd,caus.absol.;
Ba(n)dh+ i +tva,absol.;pa + @+
Vr +i + tvd,meta.absol.;pati +
Tiriyam
Mu(rijc +i +tva, absol.
Timbarūsake bhāiiyamāne—Vin.
III. 59
WhenTimbarūsakafruitsarebeing
distributed;Bhaj + e +iva +mana,
CaUs.Pass. pr.p.
Tiracchanakatham anuyutta
viharanti —D. 1.7; A.V. 128
Indulgedin meantalks(animaltalks),
theyabide;anu +Yuj +ta,pp.
Tiracchanakathapavattaniko—A.
III. 256
Thatwhichhelpscontinue
mean
talk;
pa +Vrt +ana+ika,der.
Tiracchānayonim upapanno—A. IV.
226
Gone to therealmof animals;upa'
Pad +ta,pp.
Tiracchānayonivedaniyamkammam
—A. III. 415
An action,theresultof whichshould
be experiencedin therealmofanimals
Tiracchānaviiiam pariyāpunanti-
Vin. IL. 139;IV. 305
They learnmeanscience;pari +Ap +
und+nti,pres.3. pl.
Tiracehānaviiiāya micchāiīvena
iīvikamkappenti—D.l.9
Earntheirlivingbywrongmeans
of
livelihood,by meansciences;kappa+
e +nti,denom.
pres.3”.pl.
Tiriyam sattantara—Vin. III. 149
Acrossseven(span)inside;satfa+
antara
Tirītakam Tīram
Tiritakamdharenti —Vin. II. 267 From distant or different countries and
(They)causeto weara dressmadeof states
bark;Dhr +e +nti, caus.pres
Tirita
3”,pl. Tilakakkena attho hoti —Vin. I. 205
There is a needof sesamepaste:
Tirokaranimukkhipitva olokenti - kakka, Skt. Kalka
Vin.If. 152
Raising thecurtain(they)look in; u(t) Tilamuggamāsakāparannam
tigp tid tvā, absol.; o 4 Lok -€ sannicitam—A. IV. 108
+nti,pres.3”.pl. Storedup sesame,greengram,bean
andothercereals;tila +mugga+
masaka +aparanna; sam + ni + Ci
1.276;IIL. 16 +ta,pp.
Havingputa curtainaround;tiro +Kr
+ana + iva ,der. Tisso vijja anuppatta,katam
Buddhassasasanam— S. I. 196
Tirokucchigatampassati—D. II. 13 | haveattainedthreefoldknowledge,
(Mother)seesthebabyin thewomb; Buddha’sinstructionwasputinto
tirokucchigatanti
antokucchigatam, practice;
anu +pa +Ap +ta,pp.
Cy.436
Tisso vijja sacchakasi—M. III. 269;
Vin. II. 183
IV.55 Experiencedthreefoldknowledge:sa
Outside
rampart
or wall;tiro,indcl. +acchi (=akkhi) +ak@si:a+ Kr +@
+s + i, doublepst. 3”. sg.
Tirokudde
chaddentī—Vin. IV. 265
Throwing
it awayovertherampart; Tiradassim sakunamgahetva
chadda+e +nti, pr. p. nāvāyasamuddamaiihogāhanti—D.
1.222;A. III. 368
Tirogāmakā āiīvakasāvakā —
Vin. Havingtakena birdwhoshowsthe
II, 135 shore,theyembarkon a seavoyageby
TheĀiīvakadisciples
of a distant a boat;Dr§ +ya +f, der.; Grh +e +
Village;
tiro +gama+ka,der; a + Ivā, absol.;adhi +0 + Gah +a +nti,
Jiv +aka,der; Sru +aka, der. pres.3”.pl.
Tirogāmo
cagantabbo
—Vin.III. Tīramevānudhāvati—A. V. 232
135 Runs only to theshore;tiram +eva;
(She)
shouldhavetogotoa distant anu +Dhav +a +ti, pres. 3'. sg.
Sut.pp. Tīram vāheti, thalam ussāreti -
Vin. Il. 237
Tirorattha
tiroianapadā—
D. I. 116 Causesto carry it to theshore,causes
Tisu Tunhibhito Tuphībhūtova Tuyham

to driveit ontotheground;Vah+e +
ti, caus.pres.3". sg.; u(t)+Sr+ e + ti,
caus.pres.3™.sg.
Tīsudhammesu
samannesati
—M. II.
171
Makesa searchon threethings;sam +
anu+es(fromIs) +a +ti,pres.3”.
sg.
Tīhi thānehi pavāretabbam,
ditthenasutenaparisamkāya—A.
IV. 277
An invitationshouldbemadeon three
points:seen,heardandsuspected; pa
+ Vr +e + tabba,caus.fut. pp.; Drs
+ ta,pp.; Sru + ta,pp.; pari + samka
Tīhithānehimamsamparibhoganti
vadāmi,adittham,asutam,
aparisamkitam—M. II. 369
I declare
thatmeatcanbeusedon
three grounds: unseen, unheard, and
unsuspected; pari +Bhuj +ya,fut.
pp.; a + Dr§ +ta,pp.; a + Sru + ta,
pp.; a +pari +Sank+ i + ta,Pp.
Tucchakam
mayabhanitammusa
mayabhanitam,abhitam maya
bhanitam—Vin. III. 164
Utteredby meanemptyword,a lie, an
untruth;Bhan + i + ta,pp.
Tucchakumbhivanammaiiiie
orodheyyama
—D. II. 38
We wouldcauseto roll him over like
anemptypot;kumbhi
+ iva;o (ava)+
Rudh+e +eyyama;caus.opt.1".pl.
Tucchammusavilapim—Vin. II. 91
I uttered
anemptyword,a lie:vi +Lap
+im,pst. 1".sg.
Tunhī ahosi—D. I. 47; 5. I, 163;IV. bhita,pp; mamku+ bhiita; Pat + ta,
284 pp.+khandha;
adho,indcl. +
Became silent mukha;
pa +jhadya+ nta,pr.p.; a +
pati+Bhaé +ana,der.;ni +Sad+i,
Tunhī nisīdanti —Vin. I. 102 pst.3".sg.
(They) sit down silent;ni +Sad+a+
nti, pres. 3. pl.; tunhi,ady. Tunhībhūtovapatinivattitvā —Vin. I.
216
Tunhibhavena samghamviheseti- Havingcomebackwith strictsilence
A. IV. 194 (without sayinga singleword); funhī
He makesinconvenienceto the +bhiito+eva;pati +ni +Vrt+a+t
Samghaby beingsilent;vi +Hims+e i t Iā, absol.
+ ti, caus.pres. 3”. sg.
Tunhībhūto
samkasāyati
—5. I. 202;
Tunhībhūtam tunhībhūtam Il, 277
bhikkhusamgham anuviloketvā—
D. Beingsilenthewhilesawaytime;
1.50;M. I. 339;II. 21;S. V. 163 samkasdyatiti..
kalam ativatteti,Cy.
Havingsurveyedthecommunityof 1.296
Bhikkhuswho hadbeenextremely
silent ; tunhi + bhitta; anu + vi + Lok Tunhībhūto samghamviheseti—Vin.
+e+ na, absol. IV.36
BeingsilenthevexestheSamgha;
vi +
Tunhībhūtā ekamantamnisīdimsu-
Hims+e +ti, caus.pres. 3™.sg.
M. II. 55
(They) beingsilent,satdownatone
side;ekamantam,
acc.for loc.;ni + Tunnavāyassaetadahosi—Vin. II.
Sad+ imsu,opt.3. pl. 159
Thisideacameto thetailor; Tud +ta,
Tunhībhitenauddissathatabbam
- Pp + Va +a, der.;etam(etad) +a +
Vin. III. 221 Hit(Bhi)+a +s +i,pst.3. sg.
Being silent(he) shouldstayfor it;
tunhī,indcl.; u(t) +Drs +ya, absol.; Tumham yevassa tenaantarāyo—D.
Stha + tabba,fut. pp- 1.3
Thedanger bythatwouldonlybefor
Tunhibhitomamkubhitopattak- you;fumham +(y) +eva+As +ya
khandhoadhomukho pajjhayanto (Skt.
yat),opt.3”.sg.
appatibhano
nisidi—D. II. 53;M.L
132;5. I. 124;A. I. 186 Tumhakam avusobhattage
kim
Being silent,embarrassed,
with thosi,tumhikamkimahosi?—Vin.
drooping shoulders
andwithdown IIL. 160
castface,asif musingandwithan Brothers,
whatwasthere
foryouatthe
refectory,
whatwastherefor you?
emptymind,hesatdown;tunhi+
Tumhākam dassanakāmo—D. II. 40
(He)likestoseeyou
Tumhākam patirūpam—M. I. 463
Suitablefor you
Tumheceaīiamaīiiam na
upatthahissatha,atha ko carahi
upatthahissati?—Vin. I. 302
If you don’thelpeachother,who will
helpyou then?;ce,cond.p.; upa +
Sthā+i +ssatha,
fut. 2. pl.; carahi
(then),indel.
Tumhe ce na dassathaatha ko carahi
dassati?—Vin. III. 265
If you will notgive,whowill then
give?; Da + ssatha, fut. 2". pl.; Da +
ssati,fut, 3”.sg.
Tumhe nissayatumhesampassanta
idha viharāma—
Vin. III. 265
Weliveheredepending
onand
looking to you; ni +Sri +ya,
absol.; sam +passa + nta,pr:p.;
idha, indel.; yi +Hr +a +ma,
pres. 1*,pl.
Tumhe mayasaddhimmantavho—D.
1. 122
You conversewith me;manta+ vho,
imper.2™.pl.
Tumhevetamdukkatam
tumhevetamaparaddham—D. I.
222,Il. 115
This is indeedyourwrongdoing,this
is indeedwhatyoumissed;
tumham
+
(vy)+ eva + etam; du + Kr + ta, pp.;
apa+Radh+ta,pp.
Tuyham kassāma—
D. II. 288
 Tuyham
i". pi.
Tuyhampanagahapati,kīvaciram,
upāsakattamupayātassa— S. IV. 301
For you householder, how manyyears,
sinceyou havebecomea lay Buddhist;
upāsaka-- tta,der.; upa + Ya + ta,
pp.
Tuyham vacanamna karissami -
Vin.IIL. 86
I will notdo yourbidding
Tuyhevahotu —Vin. I. 272
May it be for yourself;tuyham+ eva;
Hu (Bhi) +a + tu, imper.3”. sg.
Turito gacchati sossāmīti—Vin. IV.
150
Thinking,"I will hear(whattheysay)",
hegoesfast;tara (Skt.tvara) + i + ta,
pp.; Sru +ssami,Fut. 1".sg.
Turiyatālitavāditena pubba-
kotthaka paccuttarati—A. III. 345
Comesout (of bathingplace)from
theEasterngatewith a band of music:
Tad +e +i +ta, caus.pp.;(caused
to be beaten);Vad+ e +i + ta, caus.
pp.; (causedto beplayed) pati + u(t)
+ Tr + a+ ti, pres.3". sg.
Turiyānipi vaiienti —D. II. 138
Musical instrumentstoo aresounded;
Vad+ya +e +nti,pass.pres,3'4pl.
Tulanāyaussāhobahukāro—M. II.
174
Effort is muchusefulforweighing;
u(I) t Sah -- a, der.;bahu-- Kr t a,
der,
Tejasa
Tula adatabba (dve) —Vin. ILL.226
Two measures are to be taken; fla,
scale;@ +Da +tabba,fut. pp.
Tulākūtakamsakūtamānakūtā
pativirato —
D. I. 5
Refrainedfrom cheatingpeoplewith
scale,metalandmeasure;pati +vi +
Ram + ta,pp.
Tusita kaya cavitva sato
sampajano matukucchim
okkami —D. II. 12
HavingdepartedfromtheTusita
heaven,he,beingmindfulandaware,
enteredinto themother’swomb;Cyu
+ i + tva,absol.;o (ava) +Kram+i,
pet: Be
Tūlam bhatthamvamāruto —
S. I.
127
As thewindcarriesa pieceof cotton
dropped(in theair); Bhrams+ta,pp.;
māruta —māluta
Tūlonaddham kārāpenti —
Vin. IV.
169
(They) causeto makecushions
with cotton;tila +0 +Nah +ta,
pp.;Kr +dpe+nti,caus.pres.3”.pl.
Tūlonaddhammaācampipīthampi-
Vin. II. 163
Bed andchaircushionedwithcotton
Tekatulāyayāguyāphāsuhoti—Vin.
1.210
It becomescomfortablewith porridge
of threepungent
ingredients
(sesame,
riceandgreengram)
Tejasa
tejampariyadiyeyyam
—Vin.
Tejodhatum
1.25
MayI overcome(his) powerby (my)
power;pari +a +Da +iva t eyyam,
opt. I". sg.
Tejodhatumsamapajjitva—Vin. II.
76
Havingenteredupon‘fire element’;
sam+G +Pad +ya +i +tva,absol.
Tetenapaīiiāyissanti —A. IV. 24
Theywill bewell knownby that;pa +
Jna +ya +i +ssanti,fut. 3”. pl.
Tenaādissābhaveyyātha—M. I. 12
Because
ofthat you would be targeted
(byothers)or you will be thesubject
ofcriticism;@+Dré +ya,fut.pp.;
Bhii+a+ eyyatha,opt. 2”. pl.
Tenakhanenatenamuhuttena—M.
1,210
At thatinstant,at that moment
Tena
khopanasamayena
—S. I. 78
Atthattime;instr.for loc.
Tenacavittimāpaiiati—M. II. 253
Findssatisfaction
throughhim;ā +
Pad +ya + ti, pres. 3. sg.
Tenaca vivitto hoti —A. I. 241
Heisdetached from that;vi + Vie +
la,pp.
Tena
easosāditabbo
—
Vin. II. 32
Itshould
causetobeaccepted
byhim;
Tenamgena
Svad +e +i +tabba,caus.fut.pp.
Tena Bhagavatajanata passata
arahatasammasambuddhena —
D. I.
2; M. II. 68; 5. IV. II1
By thatBlessedOne,theknower,
theseer,theworthyandthefully
EnlightenedOne;iānatā passatā
and arahatā,pr.p.; sam +Budh +
la, pp.
Tena bhikkhuna nippiliyamana-
Vin. I. 269
(She)beingpressedby thatbhikkhu;ni
+Pid + īya + māna, pass. pr.p
Tena muhuttamgaccha— M. III. 5;
S. HL. 108
Go by that(road)for a while;
muhuttam,adv.;gaccha,imper.2”.
Sg.
Tena milena (na) vutthapetabbam-
A. IV. 347
He shouldnotcauseto reinstate
otherson thatground;fammiilam
katvwāabbhānakammam kātumna
labhati,Cy. IV. 160; vi +u(t) +Stha
+ ape + tabba, caus. fut. pp.
Tenamgenaaparipūro hoti —S. IV.
247;A. IV. 359
Incompletein thataspect;fena +
amgena;
a +pari +Pr +a,pp.
Tenamgenagarayho—A. III. 391;
IV. 115
Censurablein thatrespect;Garh +ya,
meta.fut.pp.
Tenamgenapāsamso—A. III. 391;
IV. 115
Tena
He is praiseworhyin thatrespect:pa
+Sams +ya,fut. pp.
Tena lesena—Vin. III. 44
Underthatpretext(by thatnarrowgap)
Tena so tattha titthati —A. V. 269
He stays there on that (food)
Tena so tattha yāpeti —A. V. 269
He survivesthereon that(food): Yā 3
ape + ti, caus,pres. 3”. sg.
Tena so bhikkhu karetabbo—Vin.
IHI. 189
Thatbhikkhushouldcauseto bedealt
with accordingly;Kr +e +tabba,
caus.fut. pp.
TenahAnanda
vibhajassu
—A. I. 225
If thatis so,Ananda,
analyse
it;tena+
hi +Ananda;vi +Bhaj+a +ssu,
imper.2”. sg.
Tena hi bho mamapisunatha—D. I.
115
If so, sirs, listen to my words too:
mama ~+
api; Sru + na + tha, pres.
Ind
. pl.
Tenevaantaravassenatisso vijja
sacehākāsi—M. III. 269; S. IV. 63;
Vin. IL. 183
He experiencedthreefoldknowledge
withinthatyear;thereis a
discrepancy
between
M. III. andS.
IV.: M. Ill. says venerablePunna
attainedthreefoldknowledge
within
thatyear and enteredinto
Parinibbanaat a later time;S. IV
saysthat the venerablePunna
attainedthreefoldknowledgeand
Temasaccayena Temasam Tesam
entered into Parinibbāna within the theywent on a tour; (1 + masa + a+ ettha hoti? —A. 1.218
same year, tena + eva; antara + der.+accayena: ati +aya (from I) Are theyWell GoneOnesin theworld
vassa; sacchi (sa +akkhi) + akasi or not,whatis youropinionon this
Temāsam patisallīyitum (icchāmi) matter?;su + Gam +ta,pp.; ettha,
Tenevaabadhenakalam karoti—A. -Vin, III. 230 indcl.
III. 94 | wishtobe in solitudefor three
He dies ofthat ailmentitself;rena+ months; pati +sam +Li+ ya +i+ Te sattā dullabha lokasmim ye
eva tum,inf. cetasikenarogena muhuttampi
ārogyam patiiānanti, aīiiatra
Tenevadukkhappadhānena—
M. I. Telaficapaticcavattinca paticca khīnāsavehi—A. II. 143
243 telappadipojhayeyya —S. III. 126; Thosebeings,who claim freedom
By thatpainful strivingitself;dukkha IV.214 from mentaldiseaseevenfor a
+padhana Theoil lampwouldburndependingon moment,aredifficult to find in the
oilandwick;pati +I (t) +ya, absol.; world, exceptfor thekhīnāsavas
Tenevadhammarāgenataya tela+padipo;Ksi +ya + evya,opt. (thosewho haveekhaustedthe
dhammanandiyā—A. IV. 423 PENe! influxes); pati +Jan +na +niti,
With thatattractionto anddelightin pres. 3”. pl.
theDhamma;accordingto theusage Telapakemajjam pakkhipitum -
ofraga and nandi, nandi comesfirst Vin.1.205 Tesamahamaīiiatamo— M. I. 17
Toputintoxicantinto thecookingof I amoneof themor I amthehighest
Te pativiso thapito —Vin. I. 28 oil;tela+Pac +a, der.;pa +Ksip + of them;fesamamhieko, Cy. I. 114;
Yoursharehasbeenkept;Stha+dpe i+ tum,inf. ahīia +tama, der.
+i +ta, caus.pp.
Telamasificeyya,vattim upasam- TesampiBhagavantanameta-
Tepitavaapalokehi—Vin. I. 32 hareyya
—S. II. 86 paramāyevaupatthakaahesum,
First consultthemtoo; fe +api; tava, Would
pouroil andprovideawick;a + seyyathapimayhamAnando —D. IL.
indcl.;apa+Lok +e +hi, imper:
2". Sifije +evya,opt. 3. sg.; upa + sam 144
sg. +Hr +a +eyya,opt.3™.sg. To thoseBlessedOnes therewere
personalattendants
ofthis typejust as
Te mamjivita voropeyyum—
A. II. Telassa
kayamāhara—Vin. IV. 248 Ananda to me; etaparama + (y) + eva;
101 Bringmoneyfor oil: kayenāti seyvathāpi,indci.
They would depriveme
of life; vi +0 mūlena,
Cy.917;ā --Hr -- a, imper:
+Ruh +e +eyyum,caus.opt.3%.pl. AhSe. Tesampihoti samgati—Vin. I. 350
Thereis a congregation
evenamong
Temayapamutthadatum—Vin. Telenaattho—Vin. IV. 248 them;fesam +api; sam + Gam +fi,
I. 213 lam in needofoil der.
I haveforgotten
themtogive;pa +
Mrs +ta,pp.;Da +tum,inf. Telena
abbhaāiimsu —Vin. HI. 83 Tesamaggamakkhāyati—5. I. 86; S.
Anointed
withoil; abhi+Anj +imsu, ITI. 156(aggamhere meansthe best)
Pst.3. pl.
Temasaccayena
carikampakka- It is saidto bethebiggestamongthem;
mimsu—S. I. 199 aggam +@+Khya +ya +ti, pass.
At theendof thethreemonths
period pres. 3”. sg.
 Tesam
Tesameke patikkosanti —M. II. 230
Somerejecttheirview;pati +Krug+
a +nti,pres. 3”.
2
pl.
Tesamevamassa —S. II. 98
This thoughtwould cometo them:
evam+As +ya (Skt.yat),opt.3". sg.
Tesamkiāci attani appahīnamna
samanupassāmi—S. V. 177
I don'tseeanyof themun-abandoned
in myself;sam + anu +passa + mi,
pres. 1".sg.
Tesamte kara —A. IV. 134
Thoseactivitiesof them;Kr +ya>
karya > karra > kara, der., cp. siirya
> sura
Tesamna pihemi —M. I. 504
I do notenvythem;Sprh +e + mi,
pres. 1". sg. gen. withSprh
Tesampacchimako—M. II. 78
The lastof them
Tesampamokkho hoti —Vin. IV. 128
(He ) is theleaderof them:pamukha
+ya, der.
Tesambhantedarinam kicca —Vin.
II. 43
Venerable
sir,forthedealingof those
woods; Kr + icca (Sk. krtya)
Tesambhavatamsamana-
brāhmanānamajanatamapassatam
vedayitam, tanhāgatānam
paritasitavipphanditameya —
D. I. 40
It is a feeling,sceptical
agitation
and
writhingof thosevenerable recluses
andbrahmins whodonotknow,whodo
Tesu
notseeandwhoaredrivenbycraving;
Vid + aya +i + ta, caus.Pp.; pari +
tras +i + ta,pp.; vi + Spand +i +ta,
Pp.
Tesamyeva tena—D. I. 138
lt is up to them(leavethemwiththeir
evil, theyarethepeoplewho are
responsiblefor their action)
Tesamsampayogamanvaya
—M. IL
153
In consequenceoftheir mating;sam+
pa + Yuj + a, der; anu + aya
Tesamsammukhā na vyākāsim—D.
1.222
I didnotexplaininfrontof them;vi+
a+ Kr.+ @+s +im, doublepst. 1%.
Sg.
Tesamsamvāsamanvāya
—D. I. 97
Becauseof their living together
(copulation);
samvasam
+anvaya
Tesāhamasmi—M. II. 211
[am oneof themor I amamongthem;
tesam + aham + asmi
Tesudandamnikkhipāhi— A. 1.206
Layasideweaponsin regardtothem;
ni +Ksip +a +hi, imper.2”. sg.
Tesudhammesuanupayoanapayo
anissitoappatibaddho vippamutto
visamyuttovimariyadikatena
cetasa
viharati —M. III. 25
On thosematters,he abides
unattracted,
unrepelled,independent,
unbound,
totallyfree,detached
and
witha mindwhich hasbeenmade
unlimited;
an+upa+aya(from1);an
Tehi Tvam
+apa+aya; a +ni +Sri +ta,pp.; a Tyāssadhammāanupadavavatthitā
+pati+Badh+ta,pp.; vi +pa+ honti —M. III. 25
Muc+ta,pp.; vi +sam +Yuj +ta, Thosethingshavebeendetermined
pp.;vi+mariydda+kata,pp. by him,oneby one;te +assa;
anu +pada + vi +ava +Stha +
Tehiākiano na phāsum gamissāmi i +ta,pp.
-Vin.II. 299
Beingmixedwith themI shall notgo Tyāham upasamkamitvā—M. II. 121
withease;ā + Kir +ta,pp.; phasum, Havinggoneto them,I ; te +aham;
adv, upa + sam + Kram +i + tva,absol.
Tehi tegahapatiākārā, te limgā, te Tyahamvakkhami—
Vin. I. 150
nimittāyathātamgahapatissa—M. sI hall speakto them;fe -- aham;Vac
1.360 +ssami(Skt.syami),fut. 1".sg.;
Householder,
youhavethose taking vakkhaas thepres. base,this
appearances,
marksandsignsasofa is usedin thepres.sensetoo
householder;
yathdtam,indcl.
Tyāham vyākarissāmi—A. II. 37
Tehidhammehicittam pativapeti - I will egplainittoyou;wiHāt Kri i
M.1.435 +ssami,fut. I". sg.
Heturns(his)mindaway from those
Tvafca kho gahapatijanasi, ahanca
things;
pati + Vap+ e +ti, caus.pres.
San
see —.A. III. 296
Householder,you andI know;Jan +
Tehisaddhimsantitthatisallapati naa +si,; pres. 2™.Sg.
md e
sakaccham
samapajjati—
A. IV. 282
Stands
together,talkstogetherand Tvampi namabhanitabbam
enters
intodiscussionwith them;sam maīiasil —A. III. 194
It is surprisingthatyou think you are
+tittha+ti,pres.3. sg.;sam+Lap
+a ti,pres,3. sg.; sam +@+ Pad fit to beadvised!;Bhan + i + tabba,
fut. pp.
+ya+ti,pres,3™.sg.
Tehisaddhimsamvibhajissami
- Tvampi no Dona brahmano
Vin.II. 291
patiiānāsi? —A. HI. 223
Iwillshare
withthem;
sam+vi+ Dona,don'tyou claimthatyou area
brahmintoo?; no, interrp.; pati +Jan
Bhaj+i +ssami,
fut. I". sg.
+nd +si, pres. 2™.Sg.
Tyassa
ditthanugatim
apajjeyyum-
A. T.238 Tvam pana no hati, hatikamanam-
D. HI.249
Theywouldfollow thisone’sview; fe
+assa;
ditthi+anu+gati;@+Pad For us who aredesirousof relatives,
* ya+evyum,
opt,3”.pl. you aretherelative
Tvam Tvam Thaiiam

Tvam panano bhattu,bhattu-

kāmānam— D. II. 249
For us who aredesirousof husbands,
you arethehusband;Bhr + tu, der.
Thaiiūam pāyesi—M. III. 253;A. IV. Havingputit intothesatchelandhung
Tvam yeva Bhagavatoārocehi —D. 176;Vin. II. 255 on theshoulder;ā +Lagg +e +tva,
I. 151 Made himdrink breastmilk; thana+ caus. absol.
You inform the Blessed One yourself:
ya,der.;Pa +(y) +e +s +i, caus,
a +Rue + e + hi, caus.imper,2". sg. pst.3". sg. Thavikaya manim pakkhipitva -
Vin. Il. 62
Tvamyevetamarahasitvamyevetam Thatārūpameetosamādhimphusati Havingputthegemintothesatchel;
ganha—Vin.I. 30 -D.l.13 pa +Ksip + i +tvā,absol.
You aloneare fit for this,takeit (He)experiences
a concentrationof
yourself;tvam+(y) +eva+etam; mindofthatkind;Sprs +a +ti,pres. Thamam upadamseta—A. IV. 189
Arh + a +si, pres. 2”. sg.; Grh + nā, 3”.sg. The onewho shows(one’s)
meta.imper.2™. sg. prowess;upa +Drs (dams)+e
Thaddhohoti atimānī —D. II. 45; M. + tu, der.
1.96
Heisstubbornandarrogant Thamavadalhaparakkamo
anikkhittadhuro kusalesu
Thambheubbandhitvā—Vin. I. 276 dhammesu—M. I. 356; 5. V. 197
Having
hungupon a post,u(t) + The onewho is strong,energeticand
Ba(n)dh+ i + tva, absol. not renouncedtheresponsibilityin
wholesomethings;thama+ vantu,
Tharusmimpi
sikkhati—A. III. 327; der.; dalha (Skt.drdha) +para +
Vin.I, 10 Kram +.a, der; a+ ni + Ksip + ta,
Hetrainshimselfin theart of fighting pp.+dhura
withasword;sikkhati,desid.pres.3™.
Sg.of Sak Thāmasā parāmāssaabhinivissa
voharati —M. I. 257; III. 210; A. I.
Thalamussādeti—A. IV. 198 76.voharanti;Vin. II. 26
Makes
thempushontotheshore;ti(t) Havingtakenupobstinatelyand
+Sad+e +ti,caus.pres.3”.sg. obsessedwith (theview), he ekpresses
himself:tāāmasā,adv.;para + Mrs +
Thale
katoudakam
ottharati
—Vin. ya, absol.;abhi + ni + Vis +ya,
IV.206 absol.; vi t o (ava)t Hr t a t ti,
Thatwhichisdoneontheground, pres.3". sg.
pervades
thewater;o +Str +a +ti,
bres.34 Sg. Thālikesupisarāvakesupi
nikkhipanti—Vin. I. 203
Thavikāya
pakkhipitvā
amse Keepin big potsandcups;ni + Ksip +
ālaggetvā
—Vin. II. 217 a +nti,pres,3™.pl.

459
 Thalidhovanam
Thiipaiica Thipam

Thalidhovanam va sarāvadhovanam Whentherain is pouringdowninbig

[willbuildapagoda
andarrange
a Cy. 485; Bhuj +ta,pp.
va chaddeti—A. I. 161 drops;loc. absl.; thulla 4 Sprs +i +
Throwsawaythewaterleftoverby festival
fa, pp. + ka, der. ; Vrs +ya +nta,pr. Therakarana dhamma—A. II. 22
rinsingthebig potsor cups;chadda + Pp.
Thipambhinditvapakiresi—Vin. Factorswhich makeanelder
e + fi, pres.3”, sg.
IV.308
Thullam pasumvadhitva—Vin. I. Thera ca navaca majjhima ca —Vin.
Thalipakasatani bhattabhiharo Crushedthetombandlet theremains
237 1.103;IV. 142
abhiharīyati —Vin. II. 185 scatter;
Bhi(n)d '- i t tvā,absol.;pa
Havingkilled a big animal:Vadh+i+ Thosewhoareelders,newlyordained
Theofferingof fivehundred
bigpots +Kir+e+s +i, caus.pst.3. sg.
tva, absol. andof middlestanding;Therāti
of rice cookedin milk is brought;
Thūpīkatampindapātam—Vin. IV. dasavasseupādāyavuccanti,
thali + Pac +a, der. +satani: bhatia
Thusapindam datva panikaya maiihimātipancavasseupādāya
i t abhit Hr 2 a, der.;abhi-- Hr +a 190
patibahitva —Vin. II. 151 yāva navavassā vuccanti, navati
+Iya + ti, pass.pres. 3™.sg. Heaped
upalmsfood
Havinggivena lumpof husk(mixed ānapaāicavassāvuceanti;
M. A. Ī. p.
with clay) andspreadit withalittle 102
Thalipake bhikkhūnam vissaiietvā- Thiperodanti—Vin. IV. 308
palm (an instrumentusedby masons
i Vin.IIL. 15 Cryatthetomb;Rud + a + aii, pres.
for levelling theplaster?); Da +tva,
k Havingcausedto distributefood. SepL Theradhikam patimokkham—Vin.
absol.;pati +Bah +i +tva.,absol. I. 116 .
preparedin big pots,amongthe
bhikkhus;vi St yatet tuā, Theyyacittafica
paccupatthitam
hoti The recitalof Patimokkhais a
Thinam paticca chaya pannayati- responsibility
of theelders; E
caus. absol. -Vin.II. 54
A. II. 198 theradhikantitheradhinam,Cy. 1059
Stealing
mindalso is present; pati +
Shadowappearsdependingon thepost;
Thīnamiddhapariyutthitena cetasā upa+Stha+i +ta,pp.
pa +Jia+ ya + ti, pass.pres. 3'd.sg. Theranampatiyattam
passeyyam
-
viharati thīnamiddhaparetena—
A.
IHI.231 Theyyacitto
ihāpesi—Vin. III. 65 Vin. If. 16-17
Thūnūpanītāni honti yaāiiatthāya
(He) abides with a mind taken up and Withastealing
mind(he)causedto | shouldseethethingpreparedfor the
—D.I. 127;S. I. 76;A. IV. 41,honti setfire;Ksi +dpe +s + i, caus.pst. elders;pati + Yat +ta,pp.; passa +
affectedby slothandtorper;pari + (y)
is missing
+u() +Stha+ i + ta,pp.; para + 1 + 38se eyyam,
opt.I". sg.
Theyhavebeenbrought
tothe
ta,pp.
(sacrificial) post for sacrifice;thiina
Theyyasatthena
saddhim
gaechasi? Therānutherehi bhikkhūhi
+ upanitani:upa + Ni + ta,pp.; -Vin, IV. 131 āgametum-Vin. II. 212
Thunam seti—S. V. 148
yannia + atthdya
Lies down muttering;thunam,pr.p Doyougowitha caravanof thieves? To waitby eldersandnextto elders;
nom.sg.ofStan or Stu; Si + a + ti, thera + anuthera;4 + Gam +e +
Thūpakato omadditva(na)
pres.3. sg. Theyyasamvāsako
patiiānāti
—Vin. tum,inf.
pindapatoparibhufjitabbo—
Vin. IL. 1.121
214 Heacknowledgesthatheis abiding Thera rattahhi cirapabbajita
Thullakacchābādhohoti — Vin. I.
Almsfood,whichisheaped up,should withthebhikkhusillegally;sheyya+ bhāravāhino—A. IV. 24
202
not beeatenafterpressingit down;
Thereis a diseasecausedby a cluster Samvasa+ka,der.;pati +Jan +na The elderswho areexperienced,
thiipa+kata;0 +Mrd +ya +i+ +ti,pres.3”.sg, of longstandingintheOrderand
of boils in thearmpit;thulla (=thiila)
tv, absol.;pari +Bhu(fi)j+i+ whoshoulder theburdens
+kaccha+ ābādha
tabba,fut. pp. (responsibilities);
thira+a, der.;
Theyyāya
voratthapindobhutto-
Thullaphusitakedevevassante—S. Vin.II, 90 ratta+Jia +ti,der.;cira +pa
Thūpaīieamahaīeakarissāmi—D. + Vraj + i + ta,pp; bhara + Vah
II. 141;A. I,243 Thefoodgivenbythepeoplehasbeen
IL. 164 + 7,der.
€aten
byyoudeceitfully;
vo,indcl.,
 There
Dakkhineyyaggi
Dakam
There āgammauppannāni—
Vin. I
299 :
Born because
of the elders:@+ Gam
* ya,abol.;u(t)+Pad +ta,pp

Dakam
dakāsayāpavisanti—S. HI. Havingcarriedthebodyby the
Theroyam bhikkhu vadharo
85 extremesouthof thecity; Hr at i
manussamamsammanie khadati-
Water-dwellersenter the water; udaka +tva, absol.
Vin. IV. 89
This strongandfatbhikkhu,| think, 2 daka
Dakkhinena passenasihaseyyam
eatshumanflesh;therotithiro
Dakkhā
analasā kappesipade padam accadhayasato
ghanabaddho,vadharotithilo, Cy
susamvihitakammantā —M. I. 125 sampajanoutthanasanham
542;thero+ayam; Man + ya + e I
(Sheis)clever,industriousanda good manasikaritvā—D. II. 134;5. I. 27,
opt. I". sg.; Khad + a + ti, pres: 530d
organiser
of work; sw+ sam+ vi + without utthānasaāīiammanasi
Sg.
Dha+i +ta,pp.+ kammanta karitvā; 107
Helaydownonrightsidelikea lion,
Thero va pana balo ay
avyatto— ;
380 : S. IV., Dakkha ca hoti analasa keepingone foota bit up on theother,
sabbakiccesu—D. III. 190 beingmindful,well awareandbearing
Or anelder,foolish andinexperienced
Clever
andunsluggish
inall work;an+ in mindtheideaof gettingup; Kappa
alasa +e+s+ i, denom.pst. 3”. sg.; ati +
Thero hoti rattania ci
nu cirapabbaiito -
ā + Dha +ya, absol.; manasi+
A. II. 114 TA,
Dakkhinamanuppadassāmi—D. IHI. karitvā
He is anelderwho is experiencedand
of long standing 189
[willgivethegiftof merit;anu +pa Dakkhinena pādenapathamam
t Dā 1 ssāmi , fat. I". sg. pakkamati—M. II. 137
Thokarp āvusodehi, thokam āvuso
He stepsforwardfirst with the
dehi —Vin. I. 222; IV, 76
Dakkhinam
ādise—Vin. I. 229 right foot;pa +Kram +a +ti, pres.
Friend,give mealittle, give mea
Shoulddedicatetheoffering (transfer Eard So:
e
little; rāokam,indcl.: Dā 3 e thi
imper.24. sg. I themerits?);
@+Dré +e,opt.3”.sg.
Dakkhinena hatthenapatodam
Dakkhinamjanumandalam gahetvā—S. IV. 176
pathaviyamnihantva—D. II. 37; S. I. Takingthedrivingstickby theright
137,dakkhina; Vin. I. 5 hand
Stoopingthe right knee-cap on the
ground;
ni +Han +tvd,absol. Dakkhinena hatthenabhimkāram
Thokassaokāsass
: Sassanappahoti— Vi
gahetvā—D. III. 62;A. IV.210
Il. 159 ) Ie Dakkhināgirismimcārikamcarati Havingtakentheceremonial water
Not sufficientfora little space;na + SyLL.217 vesselby righthand;Grh +e +va,
pahoti:pa +Ha (Bhi) +a +ti pres Tours
intheregionof southern absol.
3 Sg. Mountain;
dakkhina+giri
Dakkhineyyaggi—A. IV. 45
Dakkhinena nagarassa Fireof thegift-worthy;
dakkhinam dakkhinā
haritvā
—D. II. 160 eyva,der.t aggi
 Dakkhineyyam
Dandasikkam Dattupaūiiattam Dantehidantamādhāya

Dakkhineyyamgavesati—A. IHI. 206 Dandakammam kātum- Vin. I, 84
Seeksfor gift-worthypersons;gava + Topunish;Kr +tum,inf,
es (fromIs) +a +ti, pres. 3”. sg,
Dandapanissadhammamdesenti-
Dakkhitaye aparajitasamgham—
D. Vin. IV. 200
Il. 254 ExplaintheDhamma toaperson
having
To seethegatheringof undefeated: a staffinthehand
dakkha+ i + taye,inf.; a +para +Ji
+ta,pp. Dandappaharapi galaggahapi
dissanti —D. I. 144
Dakkho puriso utthānasampanno- Beatingswith sticksandtakingsby
A.V. 84 throatare to be seen;danda +
Cleverandenergeticperson;u(t) + pahara; gala + gaha; Dré +ya +
Stha + ana,der.+sam + Pad + ta, ntl,pass.pres. 3. pl.
Pp.
Dandam olubbha —
M. I. 108;S. I.
Dajjeyyamamayam imam 118;III. 129
kumārikam-Vin. III. 135
Hangingon a stick; o (ava)3:La(m)bh
We would give thisgirl (inmarriage);
+ya, absol.; dandamnippiletva,Cy.
daiiā + eyyama,double opt. I". pl.
Il. 74; variantreadingis alubbha,
Cy.
Dattheyyamnāddasam— M. IHI. 131
I did notseewhatwasto beseen:
Dandavakarehi samanta
dattheyyantipassitabbayuttakam,Cy.
sappadesam
anuparivāresum
—M. I.
IV. 198;Dr§ + ta + epya,der: na +a
153
+Drs + am,pst. I" sg.
They surroundeda largeareawith
thetrapsmadeof wood;anu +
Daddhamno paccudāvattati—A. V.
pari + Vr+e+s + um, caus. pst.
337
28,
Whatis burntoutdoesnotturnup
again;Dah + ta,pp.; pati + u(t) +G+
Dandasatthakam
uppannam-
Vin.
Vrt+a+ ti,pres.3”.sg.
Il. 115
A smallknife with a woodenhandle
Dandakathinampidalakam salakam
wasavailable
vinandhanarajjum
vinandhanasuttakamVinandhitvā
Dandasammutim
datum—Vin.II.
131
0 sewtherobeafterbindingit to the
Togivesanction
fora walkingstick;
ina frame,splitbamboo,a thin
Da +tum,inf,
Doyouholda walkingstickwitha Daddaram patinadanti—A. IV. 171
string?;
Dhr +e +si, caus.imper:2". Givesbacka hollow sound:
5g. daddarantibabbarasaddam,Cy. 1V.
75; ; pati + Nad +a +nti,pres. 3”.
Dattupatiiattamyadidam dānam - pl.
D.I, 55
Almsgivingis thatwhich is Daddallamanaatthamsu—D. II. 258
proclaimed
bydullards;
pa +Jaa + They stoodshiningbrilliantly; a +
ape+ ta, pp. Stha + @+ imsu,doublepst. 3°. pl.
Datvāattamanohoti —A. IV. 244 Daddallamanaagafichum— S. I. 127
Hebecomes happyaftergiving; Da + With so muchsplendourtheycame;
tva,absol. daddallamāna:iā t dval +yat
māna, intens. pass. pr. p.; a+ gan
cha ( gaccha)+ um;pst. 3”. pl.
Datvāavaiānāti—A. III. 164
Givesandthen condemns; ava + Jan
+na+ti,pres.3. sg. Dantavidamsakamhasitam—
A. I.
261
Datvapi
nasareyyama
—
Vin. III. 43 Laughter,showingteeth;danta+ vi +
Wewouldnotrememberevenafter Drs +ya +ka, der.; Hrs + i + ta,pp.
giving;Da +tva +api; Smr + a+
eyyāma, opt. I"'. pl. Dantullahakamkhādanti—M. IHI.
167
Dadato
cittampasīdati—A. IV. 236 (They) chew(grasses)by cutting
Themindof thegiverbecomesclean; (them)with teeth;danta+ ullahaka;
pa+Sad+a+ ti,pres.3”.sg. dantehiullehitva luficitvati vuttam
hoti, Cy. IV. 213; Khad + a + nti,
Dadam
cittampasadeti—A. IV. 244 pres.3”.pl.
While giving (he) causes to clean the
Dantecopeti—M. III. 133
caus,pres.3. sg. Makes(his) tusksmove;Cup +e +4,
caus.pres.3™.sg.
Dadam
mittaniganthati—S. I. 215
Dantehidantamadhaya
jivhaya
m.andn.;Granth+a +ti,pres.3”. tālum āhaceacetasāeittam
sg. abhinigganhitabbam
abhinippīletabbam
Dade
appativānaeitto
—A. IHI.
41 abhisantāpetabbam—M. I. 120-1

indingrope,a bindingstring; Should withanunshrinking Havingfikedteethonteeth,having

giveaway
mind;
Da+e,rootredup.,
opt.3™. touchedthepalatewiththetongue,the
a, +i +mā,absol.:Siy +
Dandasikkam
dhāresi?—
Vin. II. S8.;appativdna,
contracted
form of mindshouldbecensuredstronglyby
inf. 131
dppativārana themind;pressedhardbythemind

465
 Dantehi Daliddo Daliddova Davena

andtormented
strictlybythemind;
"1
uparidantamthapetvā,Cy. II. 93;
dantehi+ dante+ a + Dha +ya,
i absol.; @+ Han(hat) +ya, absol.;
abhi + ni + Grh +nd@ + i + tabba,
meta.fut. pp.; abhi + ni + Pid + e +
tabba,caus:fut.pp.; abhi +sam +
Tap+ e + tabba,caus.fut. pp.
Dantehi mukhadhanam
I viddhamsitvā
—A. IV. 191
Havingchampedthebit with teeth;wi
+ Dhvams+ i + tva,absol.
Dandhammaranasatimbhāveti—A.
\ IHI.306;IV. 319
Cultivatesmindfulnesson death
sluggishly;dandham,adv.;Bhū 3-e -
ti, caus.pres.3. sg.
Dandhayitattamva vitthayitattam
va —D. I. 249; M. II. 206
Confusion or hesitation; dandha --
bhiimiyamva santharanti,Cy.300;
Lii +ya + imsu,pass.pst. 3”. pl.;
barihisa + atthdya
Damaka parivarenti —Vin. I. 211
Beggarsgatheraround;damakati
wighāsādā(thosewho eat whatis left
over,vighdsa +ada), Cy. V. 1093;
pari + Vr + e + nti, caus.pres.3”.pl.
Damathamupeyya— D. II. 174
Would come to be tamed:dama+tha
=dama;upa + e (fromI) eyya,opt.
3 se
Damaya sikkhati —S. IV. 176
Trains himself for restrainment;
sikkhati, desid. from Sak, pres. 3”. sg.
Damūpasamenasamannāgato—M.
ITI. 269
Endowed
withrestraint
andcalmness;
dama + upa + sama; sam + anu + @
+Gam+ta,pp.
Daliddova
samānoaddhavādam
vadeyya—A.V. 43
Beingindeeda poor he would boastof
prosperity;
daliddo +eva; As +
mana,
prip.;Vad+eyya,opt.3. sg.
Dalhadhammodhanuggahosikkhito
katahatthokatūpāsano—M. I. 82.
Strongarcher,trained,ekperienced
andskilledin archery;dhanu+gaha;
Sak+i +ta, desid,pp.; kata +
hattha;kata tupāsana
Dalhasamādānokusalesu
dhammesu,
avatthitasamādāno
—D.
II. 145
Onewhois havingstrictandfirm
observance
in wholesomethings;
kusalesudhammesūtidasakusala
kammapathesu; dalhasamādānoti
thiragahano;avatthitasamādānoti
niccalagahano,anivattitagahanoCy.
919;dalha: Drh + ta,pp.; ava +
Stha+i +ta,pp.
ubhojamgheshould be takenas a
compd.noun; Vest+ e + tva,absol.;
Ghrs + eyya, opt. 3”. sg.
Dalhe khile va thambheva
upanibandheyya— S. IV. 200
Would tie themdown to a strongpost
or a pillar; upa + ni + Ba(n)dh +
eyvya,opt. 3”. sg.
Dalhehi varattehi bandhanehi
baddha—
A. II. 33
Being boundby verystrongleather
straps;Badh +ta,pp.
Davadahedayhamane—Vin. II.
138
Whenthe jungle fire is in progress;
Dah +ya + mana,meta.pass.pr.p.
Davatthāyamoceti— Vin. III. 113
(He) causesto discharge(semen)for
fun;dava+atthadya;
Muc+e +ti,
caus.pres.3. sg.

+Stya +i+ ta,pp. + tta,der. Daliddassakho no tathā sotabbam Dalhāya

anduyāpaechābāham Daya bhananti,rava bhananti,—Vin.
mannanti—A. IV. 219 gālhabandhanam
baddho—D. I. 245 IV.4
Dandhosatuppādo—A. II. 185 Theydon’tthinkthattheyshouldlisten Onewhoisboundtightlywitha strong Speakforfun;Bhan+a +nti,pres.
; Slow is thearisingof memory;sati + in thatway to a poor;no, neg.p.; Sru chain,
putting
botharmsontheback; 3”.pl.
uppādo +tabba,fut. pp.; Man +ya + nti, Badh+ta,pp.;galha(Skt.gadha)+
pres. 3°. pl. bandhana Davā meetamvuttam, ravā me
Dabbā na evamnibbethenti—Vin.
etamvuttam —M. II. 249
II. 162 Daliddoappassako
appabhogo
—A.I. Dalhāya
raiiuyābandheyya
—S. IV. It wassaidbymeforfun;Vac+ta,pp.
The intelligentpeopledo not try to 251 198
evadelike this; dabbapandita,Cy. Theonewhoispoor,nobody
andofno Wouldtie themdown with a strong Davāyasilam paviiihimsu —Vin. HI.
ie]; ni + Vest+ e + nti,pres, 3”. pl. wealth;appa+sako rope;Ba(n)dh +eyya,opt. 3". sg. 82
(They)pelteda stonefor fun;pa +
Ibbālūyimsu barihisatthāya—D.
Daliddoassako
anālhiyo
—M. I. 450; Dalhāya
vālaraiiuyā
ubhoiamghe Vyadh+ya +imsu,pst.3%.pl.
11.207,lūyantu I1. 178;A. III. 352 vethetva
ghamseyya
—A.IV.129
s&s
werecut for spreading Poor,nobody,andonewho hasno Wouldtwistround
bothcalveswitha Davenasamannāgato—
Vin. II. 13
d; dabbatināniläyitvā handfulof rice for food;a +saka;an fopemadeof woolandcrush;jamgha Theonewhoishavingaiocular
grikkhipanti, +dlha + iya, der. isf, noiamghe
formintheacc.pl., behaviour
 Dasa Dassanāya
Dasaatthavasepaticca—Vin. III. 21 Dasahisaddehiavivittā—D. II. 147
Concerningtenbenefits;pati + I(t) + Not separatedfrom tenshouts;a +vi
+Vie +ta,pp:
Dasasuakusalesukammapathesu- Dasa vidatthi —Vin. IV. 171
A. V. 54 Fringesareone span
In thetenwaysof unwholesome
action;kama -- patha Dasāhanāgatam
kattikatemāsipunnamam-Vin. III.
Dasakathāvatthūni—A. V. 129 261
Ten topicsoftalk Ten daysbeforethe full moonof
aw. Kattika(Oct-Nov), which comesafter
Dasa pātimokkhatthapanā— A. V. 71 threemonthsof rainy season;dasat
Ten suspensionsof Pātimokkha aha t anāgata
Dasavatthūnidīpenti —Vin. II. 294 Dasahaparamamatirekacivaram
Causeto highlighttenpoints;Dip + e dharetum —Vin. I. 289
+nti, caus.pres. 3”. pl. To keepanextrarobe,maximumten
days:dasa + aha +parama;Dhr +e
Dasavassāninissayavatthum—Vin. + tum,caus. inf.
1.60,80
To livedepending
ontheteacher
for Dassanakamosilavatam— A. I. 150
ten years; ni + Sri + ya, absol.; Vas + The one who is desirous
of seeingthe
tum,inf. virtuous
Dasavassuddesikova Dassanampi
nabhijanami,kutopana
dvadasavassuddesikova —D. II. 330 evarūpam kathāsallāpam?—M. II.
Tenortwelveyearsof age;u(t)+Drs 208;A. II. 232
+ e + ika, der. I don'tremember eventhesightof
him,howcantherebea conversation
Dasayassenanissayamdatum—Vin. of thiskind?;Dr§ +ya +ana,der;
I. 60,80 na +abhi +Jan + na + mi,pres.1”.
To grantdependencyby onewho is of sg.;katha+sam+Lap +a, der.
tenyearsstanding;Da +tum,inf,
Dassanamsuvisuddhamahosi—
5.
Dasahi ca lokadhātūhi devatā, IV. 191
yebhuyyenasannipatitā—
D. II. Visionwasextremely
purified;
a+
253 Hii (Bhi) a + + i, pst. 3™.sg.
Mostly, thedeitiesfromthetenworld
systems
assembled
together; Dassanāya
idhūpasamkantā
—D.I.
yebhuyyena,indcl. adv.;sam + ni + 89
Pat +i +ta,pp. Wehavecomeheretosee(tomeet);
Dassanīyāni Dāthikam
upa+sam +Kram +ta,pp. Daharā mayamdaharabhūmiyam
thitā—A. I. 68
Dassanīyāni samveianīyānithānāni Wearetheyoungandstandingin the
—D.II. 140;A.II. 120 youngage;Stha + i + ta,pp.
Theplacesworthseeingandhaving
deepreligiousfeeling;Drs +anīya; Dahara va vuddhasilinovuddha va
+ antya, caus. vuddhasīlino—A. IV. 286
The youngonesmaturedor theold
onesalreadymatured;Vrdh +ta,pp +
Dassanūpacāram
aviiahitvā, sila + i, der.
savapūpacāram
aviiahitvā —Vin. II.
20 Daharo kumaro mando
Withoutleavingthevicinity of sight uttānaseyyako —M. I. 394; II. 24; A.
andvicinityof sound;dassana+ II. 6
upacara;savana +upacara; a + vi + A babyboytenderandlyingprone
Ha +i +tva,root redup.,absol.
Daharo cevaiātiyā, navo ca
Dassane sati samsaggo— A. III. 259 pabbaiiāya;5. I. 68
Whenthereis seeing(eachother) Youngby birthandnewto the
therearisesassociation;sam +Srj + renunciation;ca +eva
a,der,
Daharoyuvā mandanaiātiko—
D. I.
Daharatagge
—A. V. 300 80
Fromchildhoodonward;daharato+ A youngladfondof dressing
agge
Daharoyuvā susu kālakeso
Daharam
kumārammandam bhadrenayobbanenasamannāgato
uttānaseyyakam
chadditam—
D. II. pathamenavayasā—M. I. 82
340 The onewho is still young,extremely
Anabandoned littlebabyboylyingon black-haired,
endowed
withbeautiful
itsback;uftana+Si +eyya+ka,der. youthandis in theprimeof life; sw +
su;kala+kesa;sam+anu+@+
Daharasseva
daharāānītā—A. II. 61 Gam+ ta,pp.
(I)was
brought
atatender
agefora
Very
youngman;@+Ni +ta,pp. Daharo vuttasiro
solasavassuddesiko
iātiyā —M. II.
Daharati
nauihatabba,na 147
paribhotabba—S. I. 69 The young,shavenheaded,sixteen
Should
notbedespised
and yearsby birth; Vap+ ta,pp.+ sira;
insulted
thinkingthattheyareyoung: solasa + vassa+ uddesa+ ika, der.
"(0 <ava)+Jia +tabba, fut.pp.;
Pari+Bhii + a +tabba,fut. pp. Dathikam thapenti—Vin. Il. 134
Datukamaviyati Dāpetvā Damena Darubhandam

Causetokeepwhiskers; Stha+dpe+
nti,caus.pres.3. pl.
Dātukāmāviyāti thatabbam—Vin.
II. 216
Shouldstaythinkingthatsheis asif
iti; Stha + tabba,fut. pp.
Danaficadatum dhammajficasotum
bhikkhācapassitum—Vin. I. 139
To give alms,to listento theDhamma
andto seethebhikkhus;Da + tum,
inf; Sru + tum,inf; passa + I + tum,
inf.
Dananicayuddhaficasamanamahu-
S. 1.20
Theysaid,‘almsgivingandfightinga
battle are equal’; a + Ah + u, pst. 3”.
pl.; āha and āhu both are also used
in thepresentsense
11;IHI. 181
Cut off arethewaysof alms(supply
routes);upa + Chid + ta,pp.
Danam upakappati—A. Y. 270
Alms giving becomesbeneficialto;
upa+kappa+ti, pres.3”.sg.
Dānam datvā evamanuddisati—D.
If. 355
Havinggivenalms,praysthus;Da +
tvā,absol.; anu t Dr§ + a + ti, pres.
3289;
ssāma,fut. I". pl.; Vad+ a +nta,pr.
p.; kinti, indcl.; Vad+ eyyam,opt.
mid.I", pl.
Dānam patthapesi—D. II. 354
Institutedalmsgiving:pa +Stha+
ape+s +i, caus.pst.3™.sg.
Dana ca kho dhammapadamvya
seyyo
—S.1.22
Statementof Dhammais indeed
greaterthanthegiving ofalms;
nibbānasamkhāta
dhammapadam
Cy.
I. 62;dhammapadam
+eva
Dānāni dema, saddhāni karoma—A.
V. 269
We offer alms andperformfuneral
rites;
saddha
(Skt,Sraddha)
= Yat+ta,pp.
matakabhatta,M. Cy. II. 41]
Danepufifiaficapufiiamahica—M.
1.236
Meritandgreatresultin theactof
almsgiving; pufifiamahiti
vipākakkhandhānam yeva parivāro,
Cy.II. 283
Dāne vyāvato —
D. II. 354
Busywithalmsgiving;vi +@+Vror
Pr +ta,pp.
Dapeti,na deti—Vin. IV. 303
Shecauses(others)to give butshe
doesnotgiveherself;Da +dpe+ti,
caus. pres. 3, sg.; Da + e + ti, pres.
3%.sg.
Dapetvavaadapetvava uyyojeyya
- Darubhandammattikabhandam
Vin. IV. 93
Wouldsendhim away,aftercausingto
give him or not;Da + dpe +tvd,caus.
absol.;u(t) +Yuj + e +eyya,caus. Whenthechild wascaughtor being
opt.3". sg. caught,boundor beingbound,slainor
beingslain;Grh +i +ta,pp; Grh +
Damena
va baddho vaje va oruddho ya t māna,pass.pr.p.;Badh+ta,
—A.III. 393 pp.; Badh +ya +mana,pass.pr.p.;
(Thecow)tiedup with a ropeor pent Han +ta,pp.; Han +ya +mana,
I upintheenclosure;Badh + ta,pp.; o pass.pr.p.; loc. absl.
+Rudh+ ta,pp.
Dārake mahiuke patibhāneyyake
Dayakokarako samghupatthako- passitvā—Vin. I. 249
Ī Vin.1.139 Havingseenthechildrensweetand
(He)is a donor, a doer and an attendant knowledgeable;patibhānat eyya-
totheSamgha;Da +aka,der.;Kr + ka, der.
aka,der.;samgha+upa +Stha+
aka,der. Dārikā alamkatā malakita kilanti -
Vin. I. 208
Dayajjamniyyatam—M. 1.360 Littlegirls,adorned
andgarlanded,
Inheritance
hasbeenhandedover;i + play;alam + Kr +ta,pp.; mala
+Kr + ta,pp.; Krid +a + nti,pres.
TEEDE
Dayajjamniyyātehi—D. II. 331
Ī Hand
overtheinheritance;ni + Yat+e Dārukammiko gahapati—A. III. 391
+hi,caus.imper.2". sg.;ep. A householderliving by wood-selling;
niyyadehi dāruvikkayenapavattitāiīvo eko
upāsako,Cy. III. 400
Dāyaiiampatipaiiāmi—D.IHI.189
|willookaftertheheritage;
pati+ Darukkhandhampathavitveva
Pad+ya +mi,pres.I. sg. adhimucceyya
—A. IHI.340
(He) would considerthelog of wood
Dāyam
ālimpenti
—Vin.II.138;
IHI. asearth;pathavi+ tu +eva;adhi+
85 Mue +ya +eyya,opt. 3”. sg.
Setfireonagrove;ā +Li(m)p+e +
nti,pres.3. pl. Darudhitalikayakayasamsaggam
samAépajji
—Vin. III. 126
Darakasahayakahonti —Vin. IV. (He) committedtheoffenceof bodily
128 contact
withawoodendoll;sam+a +
Theboysarecompanions;saha+aya Pad+ya+ i,pst.3". sg.
(from
I togo) +ka,der.
Dārake
gahitevagayhamāne
vā patisāmetvā—Vin. Il. 211
baddhe
vābaiihamāne
vā,hate
vā Havingcausedtoputbackwooden
haāīiamāne
vā—A. IV.65 goodsandclaygoodsattheright
 Darum
Ditthafica Ditthadhammanibbānam Ditthadhammo

place;pati +Sam+e +tva,caus. Dāsakammakaraporisehi

absol.
Darum darutthikena
pariyesitabbam—Vin. II. 297
The woodshouldbesoughtby one
who is in needof wood:daru +
atthika;pari + es (fromIs) + i +
tabba,fut. pp.
Darena samyojenti—D. II. 189
Causeto yoketogetherwith a wife:
sam + Yuj + e +nti, caus.pres.
3 pil.
Dāresu cārittam āpaiieyya —S. V.
354
Wouldcommitadulterywith wives:ā
+Pad +ya +eyya,opt.3'd,sg.
Daliddiyam dukkham lokasmim
kamabhogino— A. III. 351
Povertyis woeful in theworld for a
personwho is enjoyingsense-desire:
dalidda +ya, der.
Daliddiyam vepullam agamāsi—D.
IHI.65
Povertywason theincrease:vipula+
ya, der; a+ Gam + &@+s5
+i. double
pst. 3”. sg.
Dāsakammakaraporisānamatthāya
hitāya sukhāya —A.IV. 244
For thewell-being,benefitand
happinessof servantsandwork- people
vaddhati
-
A. V. 137
Growsupwithservants
andwork-
people;Vrdh + a + ti, pres, 3%,Sg.
Dasidasapatiggahanapativirato -
D.1.5
Refrained
fromaccepting
slaves,
male
andfemale;pati + vi + Ram+ ta,pp.
Dāsidāsam pariyesati —M. II. 160
Seeksfor maleandfemaleslave;pari
+es(fromIs) +a +ti,pres,3".sg.
Dāsibhogenabhufjanti —Vin. II.
136
They keep(her)asa femaleservant
(or slave);Bhu(f)j + a + nti,pres.
3'd.pi.
Dāso kammakaro pubbutthāyī
pacchanipati kimkarapatissavi
manāpacārīpiyavādī mukhullokako
—D.I. 60
A slave,servant
whogetsupearly,lies
down late,obedient,behaving
pleasantly,
speaking
softlyandawaiting
(looking into the face)master's
orders;u(t) +Stha + i, der.; ni +Pat
+@,der.; pati + Sru + avi, der.; Car
+f, der.; Vad+ i, der.; mukha+
ullokako: u(t) + Lok + aka, der.
Digunā samghāti ekacciyo
uttarāsamgoekacciyo antaravāsako
—Vin. I. 289
Twolayerrobe,onelayerouterrobe,
one layerinnerrobe;di +guna;
ekacca + iya, der.
Ditthaiicasutaficasiiyissatica—A.
III. 209
Ithasbeenseen. heardandwill be happinessin thenext;ditthadhamma+
heard;Sru 3 ya +i +ssati, pass. fut. hita +atthaya
3rd. Ss
E.
Ditthadhammabhinna-
Ditthadhammanibbānam
vuttam vosanaparamippatta—M. II. 211
Bhagavatā nippariyāyena—A. IV. Thosewho havegoneto theend(of
454 theirreligiouspursuits)by special
Nibbānain this life hasbeenadvocated knowledgegainedin thisvery life;
bytheBlessedOne in uneguivocal ditthadhamma+ abhifina + vosdna+
terms;
ni T pariyāya paramt + patta ; pa + Ap + ta, pp.
DitthadhammasukhavihāramanuyuttāDitthadhammikampucchami—M.
A. IV.362-3 Il. 128
Engaged in abidingateasein thisvery I askyou somethingrelatedto this
life;anu+ Yuj + ta,pp. life; Prch +ya + mi,pres. I". sg.
DitthadhammasukhaviharamanuyuttoDitthadhammikānamāsavānam
viharassu—M.1. 331; Vin. I. 341 samvarāyasamparāyikānam
viharatu āsavānampatighātāya— D. III. 130;
Abidewitheasehereandnow: A. 1.99;Vin. IHI.21
ditthadhamma + sukha + viha@ra;anu To restrainthisworldly influxesandto
+Yuj+ta,pp.; vi+ Hr + a +ssu, destroyotherworldlyinfluxes;Drs +
imper.2". sg. ta,pp. +dhamma + ika,der.;a +Sru
+a, der.; sam + Vr + a, der.; sam +
Ditthadhammasukhavihārāya ceva para +aya(fromI) +ika,der.;pati
samvattati
satisampajannayaca —S.
+ Ghan + ta,pp.
V.326
Itleadstodwellingateasein thisvery Ditthadhammike atthe anusasitva-
lifeandmindfulnessandclear
Vin. I. 179
I comprehension;sam +Vrt+a +ti,
Having instructedon matters ,
pres.3".sg.;sati +sam+pa +Jan pertaining
tothisworld;anu+Sas+i
+ya, der. + tva,absol.
I
Ditthadhammasukhaviharaya Ditthadhammūpakkamahetu
—M. II.
$amvattati
—A. II. 44;III. 323 222 ki
Itleadstoabidingateasein thisvery Dueto theundertakingsof this life;
life ditthadhamma
+upakkama
Ditfhadhammahitatthāya Ditthadhammo
pattadhammo
samparayasukhaya ca —D. II. 240; A. viditadhammo pariyogalhadhammo
II, 354 tinnavicikicchovigatakathamkatho
Forthewell-being
in thislifeand vesarajjappatto
aparappaccayo
 Dittham
Ditthigatam
.-..
satthusāsane—D. I. 148;Vin. I. 12 In thethingsseen,heard,sensedand
(Being)onewho hasseenthetruth,
known
reachedthetruth,experiencedthe
truthplungedinto thetruth,crossed Ditthānugatim āpaiiati —M. I. 16
scepticaldoubt,gonebeyond Follows
inquisitiveness,freefrom fearand
who doesnotneedother’smediation
Ditthānugatim āpaiiamānā—D.IHI.
in ( thepracticeof) teacher’s 85
instruction;Drs +ta,pp.; pa +Ap + Following blindly; ditthi +anugatim;
ta,pp.; Vid + i +ta,pp.; pari +0 + ā t Pad +ya +mana,prop.
Gah + ta,pp.; Tr +ta,pp.; vi +Gam
T (a,pp.; visarada+ya, der.+pa + Dittha me bhanteBhagavatophasu,
Ap + ta, pp.: apara +paccaya;Sas + dittha me bhante Bhagavato
ana, der.
khamanīyam—D. II. 99
Venerable
Sir,I haveobserved
thatthe
Dittham nokappeti dttham nassarati BlessedOne wasatease,I have
dittham sammutthohoti —Vin. IV. 4
observedthatit wasendurableby the
He is notsureof whatis seen,hedoes
BlessedOne; Dy€ 3:ta,pp.; Ksam3:
notrememberwhatis seen,he is
aniya,fut. pass.p.
confusedasto whatis seen:na +0 +
Kip +ya + e + ti, pres,3. Sg.;na +
Ditthi ariyā niyyānikā —A. IHI. 132
Smr + a +ti, pres, 34.Sg.;sam + Mrs
The vision, nobleandeffective;ni +
T Ia, pp.
Ya + ana + ika, der.
Dittham sutam mutam vinhatam
Ditthigatamuppannamhoti—
Vin. I.
pattam pariyesitamanuvicaritam
142
manasa—A. II. 23-4
Therehasarisena wrongview;u(t)+
Whatis seen,heard,sensed,known,
Pad + ta,pp.; Hii (Bhi) +a +ti,pres.
reached,searchedandexaminedby
Sa Se,
mind;Sru+ ta,pp.; Man +ta, mata =
muta, pp.; vi + Jid + ta, Pp.; pa +Ap
Ditthigatamditthigahanam
* 14,pp.; pari +es (fromIs) +i +ta,
ditthikantaramditthivisikam
pp.; anu + vi + Car +i + ta,pp.
ditthivipphanditam
ditthisamyojanam—M. I. 8
Ditthasutaparisamkito hoti —Vin.
The wrongview,thicketof wrong
11.243
view,wildernessof wrongview,
He becomesonewho hasseen.heard
puppetshowof wrongview,twitching
andsuspected;
pari +SamkEE fa:
ofwrong
view,fetter
ofwrong
view
pp.
Ditthigatam dhammato vivecetum
Ditthasutamutavinnatabbesu
vivecāpetum
—Vin. I. 64
dhammesu—A, II. 25
To causeto removea wrongview
Ditthigata Ditthiragavinivesavinibandha
accordingto theDhamma;Dhammatoti (Skt.tīvra, tippa is a variant) +
dhammena, karanena,Cy. 990; vi + chanda
Vic+dpe +tum,caus. inf.
Ditthi bhita samkhata cetayita
Ditthigatavivecetu—D. I. 226 paticcasamuppanna—A. V. 187
Pleasekeep(him) apartfrom (this) The wrongview,existing,made
wrongview;ditthi +gata; vi + Vic + (by mind),thoughtout(by mind),and
e+ tu,caus.imper.3”. sg. dependentlyarisen;Drg§+ti, der.;
sam(s) +Kr +ta,pp.; Cit +aya+ i +
Ditthigatāvivecetukāmā—M. I. ta, caus.pp.; pati + I (t) +ya, absol.;
130 sam+u(t) + Pad +ta,pp.
Hopingto gethim outof thewrong
view;vi +Vic + e + tum,caus.inf. + Ditthim patinissatthoti janati -
kama Vin. IV. 140
Knows thathehasgivenup thewrong
Ditthitthānappahāyinam
—A. IHI. view;pati +ni +Srj +ta,pp.; Jan +
373
na + ti, pres. 3. sg.
Theonewhoabandons wrongviews;
ditthi+thana+pa +Ha +(y) +7,
Ditthiyā ditthisāmahhagatā
der. sabrahmacārīhi—D. II. 80
Sharingwith co-celibatesthesame
Ditthinirodha vicikiccha nūppaiiati
religiousviews;samdna+ya, der.
avyakatavatthusu —A. IV. 68
Duetothecessationof wrong views, Ditthiyā ditthisamannagato
theredoesnot arisescepticaldoubtas viharati—A.III. 132,289
totheunexplained
points;na +
Beingequalwithothersin termsof
uppajjati; a + vi + @ +Kr + ta, pp + vision,heabides
vatthu
Ditthiyāpi appatividdham hoti —A.
Ditthinissayanam
pahanaya III. 349
samatikkamāya—
D. HII. 141
It hasnotbeenpenetrated
evenby
Fortheabandonment
and
(theright)view;a +pati+ Vvadh+
transcendenceof the resorts of wrong fa, pp.
Views;
pa+Ha+ana,der.;sam+
ati +Kram + a, der.
Ditthiragavinivesavinibandha-
paligedhapariyutthanajjhosana-
Ditthipativedhe
tibbacchando
hoti-
hetusamanāsamanehi vivadanti-
A.IV. 15
A. 1.66
Theonewhohasa keeninterest
in Therecluses
disputewithrecluses
for
Penetrating
intorightview;
thereasonof attachment
to (their)
ditthipativedheti
maggadassane,
Cy. views,settling
downwiththeirviews,
IV.9;pati+Vyadh
+a,der.tibba boundby theirviews,desire,arisingof
 Ditthivisuddhi
desireandclingingtodesire;
ditthiraga + vinivesa + vinibandha,
paligedha, pariyutthāna, aiihosāna
+ hetu;vi + Vad+ a + nti,pres, 3”.
pl.
Ditthivisuddhi yavadeva
kamkhavitaranavisuddhattha—M.
1.149
Purificationof viewsis just for the
sakeof gainingof purificationby
dispellingdoubts;yava + (d) + eva:
kamkhā+ vitarana+ visuddhi+
attha
Ditthivyasanahetu— A. IHI. 147
Due to the lossof right vision
Ditthisampadam sacchikatum—A.
HI. 438
To experiencetheright vision:
ditthisampadantisotāpattimaggam,
Cy.II. 414
Ditthisampannopuggalo—A. I. 26
The personwith rightview:
maggaditthiyā sampanno Sotapanno
ariyasāvako;Cy. II. I
Ditthisamyoianasamyuttowassutavā
puthuiiano na parimuccati—M. I. 8
The unlearnedworldling,entangled
with thefettersof wrongview, is not
released:ditthi + samyojana+sam +
Yuj +ta,pp.; a + Sru + ta,pp. +
vantu,der.;puthu +jano; pari +
Muc+ya +ti,pass.pres.3”.Sg.
Ditthevadhamme Ditthevadhamme Dinnapubbam
Ditthe ditthamattatā, sute +dha, der.; vi + Pac +a, der. sg.) ; S. I. 15; V. 432
sutamattatā, mute mutamattatā, Having realised (the truth) by
viīiāte viāīiātamattatā —M. IHI. 29 Ditthevadhammenighatam himself,hereandnow,with the
Just seeingin whatis seen,just panhapemi—M. I. 430 specialknowledgeand enteredupon
hearingin whatis heard,
justfeeling
in I proclaim
(their) destruction,
here it, he abides;sayam,indel.; abhi +
Whatis felt,justunderstanding
inwhat andnow;ni +Ghan + ta,pp.; pa + Jia, instrsg. ; sa +acchi +Kr +
is understood Jia +ape + mi, caus.pres. 1”.sg. tvd,absol.;upa +sam +Pad +ya,
absol.
Dittheditthavāditā—A. IV. 307 Ditthevadhamme nicchato nibbuto
Declaringwhatis seenasseen sītibhūtoanupādā parinibbānam Ditthevadhammesahadhammika
paīīāpemi —A. V. 65 pasamsathana agacchanti—A. III. 4
Ditthena vā sutena vā parisamkāya Beinghungerless(desireless), Mattersofpraise relatedto the
vā —Vin. I. 159 extinguished
andcooled in this very Dhammacometo him in thisvery life;
In termsof seen,heardor suspected life,1proclaim
perfectextinction pasamsd+ a, der.
without
clinging;ni +chdta;ni + Vr
Ditthevadhammeaīiārādhanā - S. +fa,pp.; sita +Bhū -- ta,pp.; an + Ditthevāhambhikkhave dhamme
V. 69-70 upādā—anupādāya Tathāgatoananuveiiotivadāmi—M.
Accomplishmentofgnosis hereand I. 140
now;anita+aradhana;
a +Radh+ Ditthevadhamme
nicchāto nibbuto Bhikkhus,I saythattheTathagata
ana,der. sītibhūto
sukhapatisamvedī (one who has realised the truth) is not
a subjectof inference,hereandnow;
Ditthevadhammeaiiiia sati va II, 159 etthasattopi Tathagatotiadhippeto,
upādiseseanāgāmitā —
M. I. 62;5. Beinghungerless(desireless), uttamapuggalo
khīnāsavopi;
V. 129 extinguished
andcooled, heabides, ananuveliotiasamwiiiamānovā
Gnosishereandnowor thestateofa hereandnow,withthehighestform avindeyyova, Cy. Il. 117;ditthe +
non—returner
if theresidueof oflife,experiencing
happiness; eva+aham;an+anu+ Vid+e +ya,
defilementsstill remains;ā +Jad, sukha+pati +sam + Vid + e +7, caus.fut.pp.;Vad+a +mi,pres.1”.
caus.der.
technically used to denotethe 5g.
knowledge by whicharahanthood is
attained;sati: loc.sg.of
santafromAs Ditthevadhamme
nibbānam
- A. IV. Ditto cevabalavāca —D. III. 24
358
+nla, prip.; upa + @+ Da+ sesa;an Arrogant
andstrong;
Drp +ta,pp.
Nibbāna,
hereandnow;ditthe+eva+
+a+ gami + ta, der.
dhamme Dinnapubbamkatapubbam
Ditthevadhammedukkhassantakaro dhammikam balim no parihapenti -
hoti—M. I. 47 Ditthevadhamme
patisamvedesi
- D. II. 74
M. II. 104
He putsanendto thedukkha,hereand Do notcauseto fall awaytheright
Youexperience
hereandnow:pati +
now; dukkhassa+ anta + kara offeringsgivenbeforeandperformed
before;pubbe -- dinnam:Dā -- ta,
Ditthevadhamme dyidhavipaka- pp.:pari +Ha +ape+nti,caus.
M. II. 218 Ditthevadhamme
sayam
abhifiia pres. 3. pl.
(Therearefivethingswhichare) 'acchikatvā
upasampaiia
viharati-
resultedhereandnow in two ways;dvi M.I. 71; M. II. 61 (vihasi, pst. 3**. Dinnapubbamkatapubbam
477
Dinnam Divase
pitupitāmahehi—A. IV. 236 With thedivineeyewhich is pureand
Whatis givenandperformedby gonebeyondthehuman
(eye);manu(s)
fathersandforefathers;pitu + + aka, der.
pitamaha
Diyaddho māso sesogimhanam-
Dinnam yevapattamoharatu —Vin. Vin. IV. 117
Il. 110 Oneanda half monthof summer
Let thebowl bringdown,it is indeed remains;di + addha
givento him;ofava) +Hr +a +tu,
imper.32 '. sg. Divasamaddhakahapanam
nibbiseyya—A. V. 83
Dinnam hoti sunīhatam.—
A. I. 156 Hewould
earn a halfKahāpana
(a coppercoin) a day; nibbiseyyati
Da +ta,pp.; su +ni +®+ Hr +ta, uppddeyya,Gcineyya,Cy. V. 37; ni +
PP. Vi§+eyya,opt.3”.sg.
Dibba gabbha paripacenti—D. I. Divasamgocaram caritva —Vin. IIL.
229 147
Causeto ripendivinepotentialities; Havingroamed
thewholedayforfood;
Div +ya, der.;pari + Pac +e+ nti, Car + i + tvG,absal.
caus.pres. 3% pil.
Divasamcamkamenanisajjaya
Dibba maniie gandhasampavanti- cittam parisodheti —
A. II. 40
M. I. 212 Duringtheday timehecausesto
Asif divine scentscomewith the cleansethemindby walkingand
sitting;I. + Sudh + e +ti, caus.
nti,pres. 3. pl. pres.
3”. sg.
Dibbaya sotadhatuyavisuddhaya Divasasantatteayokapāle
atikkantamānusikāya—D. II. I hafifamane—A. IV. 70.
With thedivineearwhich is pureand Whentheironbowl,heatedupforthe
transcends thehumanear;vi +Sudh + wholeday,is beingbeatenup;divasa
ta,pp.; ati + Kram + ta,pp.; manu(s) +sam+Tap+ta,pp.;Han+ya +
+ika, der. mana, pass. pr.p.
Dibbenaādhipateyyena— A. III. 33 Divasedivase—S. V. 440
With divineauthority;adhipati+ Every day
eyya,der.
Divasedivase nibbisamāno—A. V.
Dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena 84
Earning
daybyday;ni+Vis+a+
māna, DF.p.
Divase Divaseyyam
Divasenikkhante rattiya night;pa + vi +Vic +a, der.;pati +
patitthitāya
—A. ITI. 306;A. IV. 320 sam +Li +ana,der.
iene Whenthedaytimeis goneandnight
timeis setin; ni(s) + Kram + ta,pp.; Diva bhandam passitvanimittam
pati +Sthad+i +ta,pp.; akasi rattim avaharissamiti —Vin.
III. 56
Divautthasi—M. I. 125 Havingseena goodduringtheday
Gotuplate;u(t) +Stha +@ +s +i, time,hemarkedit thinking I will steal
double
pst.3". sg. it in thenight,divā, indcl.; passa + i
+ tvd, absol.; ava + Hr+a+i+
Divaca ratto ca —S. I. 33 ssami,fut. I. sg
Dayandnight
Diva va yadiva rattim —
S. III. 143
Divā ceva ratti ca —D. II. 147 Duringthedaytimeor in thenight
Dayandnight time
Divācevarattim ca —D. II. 19 Divaviharagato hoti patisallino -
Dayandnight S. I. 146;A. IV. 262(divāvihāram
gato)
Divātaramutthāsi —M. I. 125 He hasgonefor siestaandbeenin
Gotupcomparatively
late;diva+ solitude;pati +sam + Li +ta,pp.
tara,der.;u(t) +Stha +s +i, pst. 3.
Sg. Divaviharam akasi —Vin. I. 28
Took a restduringtheday time;diva +
Divatimaiifiamana
—
D. II. 175;M. vi + Hr +a, der.
II. 174
Thinkingthatit wasdaytime;diva + Divaviharam nisidi —M. I. 108,
iti; Man +ya t māna, pr. p. 147;5. 1.130;III. 91
Satdown for siesta;acc.for dat.
Divādivassa
—S. I. 89
During
theearlyday-time
or right Divāvihāre nisīdi —D. II, 130
atnoon;divasassadiva, Sat in theabiding
of siesta; ni +Sad +
majjhantikasamayeti
attho, Cy. I. 159 i, pst.3”.sg.
Divapatisalliyantena
—Vin. IHI.39 Divāsahhiamadhitthaheyyāsi—A.
Bytheonewhois takingrestduring IV. 86
thedaytime:pati+sam+Li +ya+ You shouldfix yourmindon theidea
hia, pr.p.
of day-time;adhi +Stha + eyyasi,
opt.2”. sg.
Diva pavivekāya
rattim
Patisallanaya—S. V. 398
Divāseyyamupagato—D. II. 317: M.
Forretirement
byday,forsolitudeat II. 164
Disamgamika Disvanassa Dissanti Dīgharattam

Gone for sleepduringtheday time; Vin. III. 162 Having

diva +Si +eyya,der.; upa + Gam +
ta,pp.
Disamgamikāācariyupaiihāye na
apucchimsu—Vin. I. 119
Thosewhoweregoingabroad
didnot
ask for permissionfrom the teacher
andthepreceptor;disam +gama +
ika, der.; @+Prch +ya + imsu,pst.
>
3p.
Disakusalenabhavitabbam—
Vin. II.
217
One shouldbe skillful in directions;
Bhi +a + i + tabba,fut. pp.
seen(them)hebecame
happy: of breadth;@+ Yam+ta,pp ; vi +Str
Directionsare full of fear,ill, Dré+ Ivwāna,absol. t assa +ta,pp.
anddanger;sa + iti +ka; sa +
upaddava Dissanti
amgutthapadam —A. IV. Dighadasanicivarani dharenti -
127 Vin. Il. 267
Disāsuparittānamkaronti—D.III. Thethumbmarkis to be seen;Drs + (They) puton robeswith long fringes;
189 ya+nti,pass.pres.3". pl.; thereis Dhr +e +nti, caus.pres.3. pl.
Providesecurityandsafetyin all noagreement
betweenthe subject
directions;pari + tana; Kr +0 +nti, andthe verb Dighamaddhanamsandhavitam
pres.3’. pl. samsaritammamancevatumhakan
Dissanti
cevasuyyanti ca —M. I. 30; ca —D. II. 90;A. II. I
Disāsu vassamvutthā —D. II. 140; Vin.II. 13 Hasbeenrunroundandtravelled
Vin. IL. 88 Areseenandheard;Sru -- ya +nti, togetherfor a long periodof timeby
Thosewho hadobservedrainyretreat pass.pres.3'".pl. you andme;sam +Dhav + i + ta,pp.;
in differentpartsof thecountry;vi + sam +Sr + a+ i+ ta,pp.; mamam+
Vas+ ta,pp. Dissante
brāhmaniyo utuniyopi ca T eva

gabbhiniyopiviiāyamānāpi
Disa pakkhayanti —Vin. I. 79 Disvā ca panaiāneyyāsi—M. III. pāyamānāpi—M. II. 148 Dīghamguli—M. II. 136
Directionsbecomeclear;pa + Khya 238 Brahminwomenareseenin their The onewho haslong fingers;digha +
+ya +nti, pass.pres. 3”. pl. You would understandafterseeing period,
becoming
pregnant,
giving amguli + i, der.
(him); Drs +tva,absol.;Jan + birthtoandfeedingthebabies:
Disāpāmokkho veiio —Vin. I. 269 eyyasi,opt. 2™.sg. Dr§+ya +nte,pass.pres. 3”. pl.; Digharattampisajjhayakatamanta
Prominentphysicianin thedistrict; ulu +int; gabbha+ int; vi +Jan + nappatibhanti—A. III. 230
pamukha+ya, der. Disvā cittam pasīdi —D. II. 174 ya + mdna, pr.p.; P@ + ya + māna, Themantrasrehearsed
evenfora
Havingseenit hebecamehappy;pa + pr.p. longtimedonotcometothemindat
Disāpi me na pakkhayanti—D. II. Sad + i, pst. 3™.sg. once;digharattam,adv.;sa +
99; S. III. 106 Dissanteva
vāsiiateamgulipadāni- aiihāva + kata;pati + Bha + nti,
Even thedirectionsarenotclearto Disvāna oramattha, okāsamakāsi- A.IV.127 pres,3”.pl.
me;pa + Khyd +ya + nti,pres. 3”. M. II. 142 Thetraces
of fingersareto beseenon
pl. Havingseen(himcoming)(the thehandle
of thehatchet;Drs +ya + Digharattamanuseti—A. I. 283
followers)
keptthemselves
apart
and nle,pass.pres, 3™.pl.+ eva; amguli Rests(inthemind)fora longtime;
Disābhāgamna iānanti — Vin. II. gavehimtheway;o (ava)t Rama? +pada anu+Si +a+ ti,pres.3”.sg.
217 ttha,pst.3'd,sg. a ttKrtātsti,
Do not know thedirection;Jan + na doublepst.3". sg. Dīghacārikamanavatthacārikam Digharattam apparaiakkhaiātikā
-
+nti,pres. 3”. pl. anuyuttassa
viharato—A. IHI.257 D. 11.40
Disvanassaetadahosi—Vin. IIL. 12 Fortheonewhoisoccupiedwithlong Theyareof thenatureof less
Disa sabbāphutā ahu — D. II. 256 This ideacameto him afterseeing andunspecified
journey;anavattha= defilements
fora longtime
Everydirectionwaspervaded; Sphur + (the Buddha); etam (etad) + ahosi, avavatthita,
Cy. IIT, 330
ta,pp.; a +Hit (Bhii), (skt.abhātL)
pst. pst.3. sg. Dīgharattam avinipātam sanjanami
3ASO, Dighato
caāyatamtiriyahiea —D.IL.206
Disvānassa
eittam
pasīdi
—Vin.HI. vitthatam
—M. I. 176 I doknowfora longtimethatI didnot
Disā sabhayāsaītikā saupaddavā- 146 Longintermsof length,widein terms fall intopurgatory;sam+Jan + nā t
 Digharattam
mi,pres. 1".sg.
Dīgharattamahitāyadukkhāya —
S.
1.74;II. 229
For harmandpain for a long time
Dīgharattam nibbusitattā —
D. I. 17,
II. 29
As (he)hadlived therefor a long time;
ni + Vas+ i + ta + tta;der.
Digharattam paricarako —Vin. II.
183
Attendant
fora longtime:pari +Car
+ aka, der.
Dīgharattam bhotā Gotamena
sahakathī—M. I, 489
(I) havebeen
a discussantwith the
venerableGotama,for a long time;
Saha+ katha + i, der.
Digharattamvannavanto
sukhabahulā
—
S. III. 244
Thosewho areof long life, good
complekionandmuchhappiness;
digha + ayuka; vanna + vantu,der:
sukha +bahula
Digharattam samattamsamadinnam
—M. 1.387
Takenupandobservedfora longtime;
sam +4 +Da + ta,pp.; sam +a +
Dé +ta,pp
Digharattamsamapannoimam
kusalamdhammam—M. I. 318
(This venerable)hasentereduponthis
goodthingfor a long time:sam +@+
Pad +ta,pp.
Digharattamhitāya sukhāya—M. I.
Dukkhadhammanam
Dīghāpi Dighasibaddhehi
129;II. 251;IHI. 117 durabhiramam ekatte—M. I. 16
Dīghāsibaddhehi
purisehi
For well- beingandhappinessfora rakkhāpenti
—D. I. 105 To practiseseclusionis difficult, to
long time;digha +ratta find delightin solitudeis hard;du +
Thevaremadesafeby thosewho are
kara;pa +vi + Vic+a, der; du + ®
equipped
withlongswords;digha+
Dighaso dvadasavidatthiyo +abhi +Ram +a, der; eka +tta,
asi+Badh +ta,pp.; Raks +ape +
sugatavidatthiya—Vin. III. 149 nti,caus.pres.3”. pl. der. Magadhiform
In length,it is twelvespansby
sugatavidatthi;(which is eguavelent to Dighenaaddhuna —M. I. 82; S. II. Dukkhakkhayavedanakkhayo—M.
threespansof a mediumsize man,in 1.93
179
builder 's cubit it is one anda half); Feelingsaredissolveddueto the
Within(this)long periodof time:
sugatavidatthināma idāni instr.forloe.imeaning dissolution
of pain;dukkha+khaya:
majjhimassa purisassa tisso Ksi +a, der.; vedana+ khaya
vidatthivo, vaddhakthatthena Dīghena
addhunā,na ittaram —A. II.
diyaddhohatthohoti; Cy.567; 187 Dukkhanirodhagaminipatipada
dighaso = dighato ariyasaccambhavetabbam— Vin. I.
Fora longperiodoftime, not short
11
Dighaso dve vidatthiyo Dīghotāyamdhammapariyāyo—A. The nobletruthof theway leadingto
sugatavidatthiyā tiriyam IV.359 thecessationof Dukkhashouldbe
diyaddham—Vin. IV. 170 cultivated:Bhi + e +tabba,caus.fut.
Thisdiscourse
of youis long;te+
In lengthtwo spansandin breadth
one ayam PP.
anda halfspanaccording
tothe
Sugatavidatthi;this is themeasure
of Dīpāihāyanti—D. I. 50 Dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam
the sitting mat; di + addha Lamps arelighted;Kst +ya +nti, sacchikatabbam— Vin. I. 11
pres.3". pl. The nobletruthof thecessationof
Dighasonava vidatthiyo Dukkhashouldbeexperienced; sa +
sugatavidatthiya tiriyam cha Dukkarakārikāyaniiiaretha —M. I. acchi(=akkhi)+Kr + tabba,fut. pp.
93
vidatthiyo —Vin. IV. 173
In lengthninespansandinbreadth Eliminate
by rigorouspractice;ni + ® Dukkhanti bhikkhave
sixaccording totheSugatavidatthi; +Jir +e +tha,imper.2. pl. kāmānametamadhivacanam—A. IV.
289 :
this is the measureof the Buddha's
Bhikkhus,
Dukkhaisanother
namefor
robe Dukkarataram
va
sense-desires;
kāmānam t etam
durabhisambhavataram
va—D. II.
131;S. V. 454
Dīghassaaddhuno accayena—D.I.
Moredificultto do or moredifficult Dukkhadomanassam
17
Aftera longperiod
oftime; ati +aya toovercome; Du +®+abhi +sam + patisamvediyetha—STV; 198 .
(from1) Bhi +a+ tara; der. Wouldexperience
painandgrief:pari
+sam + Vid +aya + etha,caus.opt.
Dīghāpikhoteesāphareyya
—M.II. Dukkaramkaroti—A. I. 286;IV. 31 mid. 3™.sg.
33 Hedoeswhatisdifficulttodo;du +
Yourdefīnitionmightbetoobroad; Dukkhadhammanamapahatta—M.
digha +api; Sphar + eyya,opt.3". 1.447 i.
Dukkaram
pavivekam Remover
of painfulconditions;
apa+
 Dukkhadhammanam
Dukkhaya Duggahitatta
Dukkhāya
Har (fromHr) +tu,der.,nom,sg. andburning:sa + vi +Ghan 4 fa,pp.;
Sa ¥*upa +ayasa;sa +pari +Dah+ Exerts
himselffor painful way;pa + Producingpainandpleasure;dukkha+
Dukkhadhammanampurakkhato Dha+ti,pres.3. sg. udraya:u(t) +Dr +a, der.
a, der.
hoti—D. III. 183
He is confrontedwith painful Dukkhaya vedanayaphuttho samano Dukkhettedubbhūme
Dukkham seti parāiito —S. I, 83
conditions;pura (s) +Kr +ta,pp. -§. V. 178 I avihatakhānukantake— D. II. 353
Thevanguished
liesdowninpain;Si +
a +ti, pres. 3". sg. ; para +Ji +ta, Beingtouchedby (afflictedwith) In a badfield,on a badgroundin which
Pp. painfulfeeling;Sprs +ta,pp.; As + stumblingsandobstacleshavenotbeen
31 mana,pr.p. destroyed;du + khetta;du + bhiima;
(He) tolerateswhat is difficult to a + vi +Han +ta,pp.
Dukkhasamudayamariyasaccam
tolerate:du +Ksam + a, der.: Ksam + Dukkhasapekhassakalakiriya —A.
pahatabbam— Vin. I. 11
a +fi,pres.3. sg, III.205 Dukkhena kho sukham
The nobletruthof thearisingof
Dukkhashouldbeabandoned: sam+ Deathis painfulfor theonewho has adhigantabbam—M.I. 93; II. 93 .
Dukkham ariyasaccampariāheyyam unfulfilleddesires;sa + apekkha Happinessis to begainedthroughpain;
u(t) +aya (fromI) ; pa +Ha +tabba,
—Vin. I. 11 adhi + Gam +tabba,fut. pp.
Sut.pp.
The nobletruthof Dukkhashouldbe Dukkhitopibhattam na bhunjati-
fully known;pari +Jiaia+ evya,fut. ATV.139 Dukkhe loko patitthito —S. 1.40
Dukkhassanissaranam
—S.II. 5
Pp. Thegrievedtoo doesnoteatfood; The world (five aggregates)
1s I
EscapefromDukkha:ni (s) +SF+
ana, der, a dukkha
+e +i +ta,denom.
pp. establishedon Dukkha;pa + fittha+ i
Dukkham kho agāravo viharati +ta,pp.
appatisso
—A. II. 20 Dukkhidummanaassumukhi
Dukkhassantam
karoti—
S. V.376
The onewho is notrespectfuland rudamānā
—A. IV. 274; Vin. II. 253 Duggatadukkhita na sukham
Puts an end to Dukkha: dukkhassa +
deferentialabideswith pain ; a+ garu Shebeing
sad,displeased,
tearfuland labhami—Vin. III. 136
antam;Kr + 0 + ti, pres. 3”. sg.
+4, der.; a +pati + Sru + a, der. crying;assu+ mukhat ī, der.; Rud t I ampoor,1am miserable,I amgo
Dukkhassesonirodho roganam a t māna,pr.p. happy;du +gata; dukkha+ e E it
Dukkham domanassam ta, denom.pp.; Labh +a +mi,pres.
vūpasamoiarāmaranassa
patisamvedeti—M. III. 163;S. II. Dukkhidummano TE RE
atthamgamo—S. IHI. 229
68;V. 388 tatthevantaradhayi
—S. 1.104;Vin.
Thisis ceasing
of Dukkha,allaying
of
Experiencespainandgrief;pati +sam 1.21 Duggati pātikamkhā — A. I. 202
diseasesandendingof decayanddeath;
+ Vid+e +ti,caus.pres.3” Sg. Being
sadanddispleased
he A miserablestateof ekistenceis to
dukkhassa + eso;vi +upa+Sam+
disappeared
thenandthere;dukkha+ be expected.;
pati + Kamks +ya,
a, der.
Dukkhamnigacchati
—S. I. 85 i, der; du + mana;tattha,indel. + fut. pp.
Undergoessuffering;ni +gaccha + ti. eva;antara+Dha+(y) +i, pst.3”.
Dukkhātippākharākatukāvedanā
pres. 3”. sg. Sg, Duggahitaggāhī—D. II. 342
vediyati—A. I. 141;M. II. 216,
The one who takes (understands) in a
vediyeyya,kharā is missing
Dukkham va tam sukham va? —S, Dukkhī
dummano
paiihāyati
—D.II. wrongway;du + Grh +i +ta,pp.;
Experiencespainfulfeelings,sharp,
IIL. 67 22 Grh +f, der.
roughandbitter;tippa=tibba(Skt.
Is it miserableor pleasurable?
tivra);Vid+aya+ti. caus,pres.3.
SQ. Duggahītattā
dhammānam
—M. I.
3M 2, 133
Due to themisunderstanding of the
Dukkhāyaattānampadahati
—M. II.
Dukkhudrayam
sukhudrayam
—A. teachings;du + Grh +i + ta,pp. +
225
V.243 tta, der.

485
 Duggahitam Dunnivatthā
Dutthagahaniko Dutthullam

Duggahitamduggahitato
dharetabbam
—M. II. 239
Whatis mistakenis to be held in mind
as(something)mistaken:Dhr +e +
tabba, caus.fut. pp.
Duggahitenadūpadhāritena — Vin.
IV.275
By takingwrongly,considering
wrongly;du +upa+Dhr +
eti+ta
caus. pp.
Duggahitehi suttantehi
vyahiianapatirūpakehi—A. I. 69
With thediscoursesmisunderstood
andwronglyworded
Duggahotipaceukkaddhitabbam-
Vin. II. 99
Sayingthatitisa wrongtaking,it
shouldbewithdrawn:
duggahitasalākāyotivatvāpuna
gahetvāWāvatatiyamgahetabbā,Cy.
1198;du + Grh + a, der., Pati + u(t)
+kaddha + i + tabba,Jit. pp.
Duccaritam carati —M.I. 87; S. I. 71
Misbehaves;du + Car +j + ta,pp.
Duccintitacinti dubhasitabhasi
dukkatakammakārī—A. 1. 102
The onewho thinksbad,speaks
bad,andactsbad:dy +Cifnjt +i +
la, pp. +cint + 7,der: dy +Bhas +
i t ta,pp. +bhas +7.der.; du + Kr
* ta,pp.; kamma+kar (fromKr) +
i, der.
Duccola honti lukhacivara —Vin,
IIT.263
Theyarewithbadclothandshabby
robes; du + cola
Dujivho —A. III. 260 Dutthullam apattim paticchadeyya To givea second(a companion);du +
The onewho hastwo tongues;du + -Vin, IV. 127 fia: der.; Da +tum,inf.
Jivha Should causeto conceala serious
offence;4 Parajikas and 13 Dutiyikampi bhikkhunim uyyojeti -
Dujjanam etam taya gihina Samghadisesas, Vin. IV. 31; pati + Vin. IV. 270
kamabhogina—A. III, 391 i yyva,
2rd
caus.opt.3".
Chad+e +eyya,caus. Of
E
sg. (She)causesto sendawaythe I
It is difficult to understand
by bhikkhunīwho is (her)Huihuia too;
you who is a householderenjoying Dutthullahivacahi obhaseyya- u (t) + Yuj + e +ti, caus. pres. 3”. Sg
sense-desire:kama+4Bhuj + Vin.ITI. 128
Dudikkho ahosi —D. II. 183 to
i, der.
Would speakwith indecentwands; 8
methunadhammapatisamyutta vaca, Becamedifficult to see;du + dikkha
Dujjanam kho etamtaya old,Cy.; asaddhammavacanam (fromDr§, ep. dakkha)
annaditthikena afifiakhantikena vadeyya, Cy. 547; o (ava) +Bhas +a
afNarucikena afhatra yogena +eyya,opt. 3. sg. Duddadamdadāti—A. I. 286;IV. 31
aiiiatthacariyakena —D. I. 187;M. (He) offers what is difficult to give
11.43 Dutthoanapekhovirattarūpo mayi away:duddadam:du +Da +a, der.
lt isdifficulttounderstand
byyouwho -Vin. II. 16 rootredup.: Da +
ti, root redup.,
is holdinga differentview,different Theonewho is corrupted,hasno hope pres. 3”. Sg.
allegiance,differenttaste,different inmeandlookslike deviatedfromme 4 E .
Practiceandwho belongsto a different ;an+apekha;vi +Raj +ta,Pp." Duddasamidam thānam- Vin. 1.4-5
schoolof thought;
dujjanam:
du+ rūpa This pointis difficult to see;du +
Jan + n@ + hia, PU.D. hom. $g..; ditthi dasa(fromDrs)
+ ka, der; khanti +ka, der.;aāā Dutthodosenaabhibhūto
atra, der; afiiattha, der.: ācariya t pariyādinnacitto—A. I. 157,216 Dunnikkhittaficapadavyanjanam,
ka, der. Theonewho is hateful,overcomeby" atthoea dunnīto —A. I. 59 |
hate
andtakenuptotallybyhate;abhi The wordsandphrasesarewrongly
Duiiānam kho etamparassa +Bhi +ta,pp.;pari +@+Da +ta, expressed
xpressed¢
andthemeaningis wrongly
cetopariyāyamaiānantehi—
A. II. pp. + citta brought out; du + Ni +ta, pp.
393
: RAKEAi
Thisis difficulttounderstand
bythose Dutiyajjhanassavitakkavicara Dunnikkhittam patisāmeti— Vi
whohaveno knowledgeof the kantako —A. V. 135 IV. 124 =
movementsofother's mind;ceto Discursive
thought
andinvestigation Causesto keepin orderwhatis not
Parl + Ya + (y) +a, der. arethorn(obstacles)to thesecond laiddownproperly;
du+ni +Ksip+
jhana;dutiya +jhana ta,pp.; pati t Sam' e T ti, caus.
Dujjanam jivitam dujjanam pres. Bose:
maranam—Vin. III. 260 Dutiyam
gahetvānisīditabbam-
Life is difficulttounderstand,
death
is Vin.IV. 52 Dunnivatthā
duppārutā Ea
difficult to understand Should
sitdownwitha second;
Grh + sampannāpindāya caranti —Vin. I.
et hā,absol.;ni +Sad+i +tabba,
Dutthagahaniko
hoti—Vin.I. 206 Sut.
pp. a themselves
HavingdressedhemseVe =E
Heisonewithabadstomach;
Dus+ improperly,
covered(theirbodies)
ta,pp.+ gahani + ka Dutiyam
datum
—Vin.I.96 improperly,theygo on alms

487
 Duppafiiam
collectionwithoutdeportment;
du +
ni +Vas +ta,pp.; du +patātird
'a, meta.,pp.; an -- ākappa --sam 4
Pad + ta,pp.
Duppahiam pannhasampadaya
samādapetiniveseti patitthāpeti -
A.IV.364
Makestheunintelligentobserve,settle
downand establishon thewayof
wisdom;du +pafifia: sam +
* ape +ti, caus.pres. 3%.so.: gi 2
Vig + > Ē .
e + fl, caus.
y roc
OTES
Stha + ape +ti, caus.pres. 3”. sg.
Duppahho duppaīihoti āvuso
vuccati, kittāvatā nu kho āvuso
duppaāio hoti? —M. I. 292
Brother,it is said:anunwise,an
unwise.To whatextent.brother,one
becomesanunwise?:Vac+ya +ti.
pass.pres.3'".sg.:kittavata,indel
Duppatihohoti ialo elamūgo—A. II.
252;HI. 137
He is a fool, dullardandidiot;jala =
Skt.jada
Dupposamkatva attanamgame
gāmanikā viya — S. I. 6]
Making the self difficult to maintain,
like thewife of thevillageheadman:
yathaé gamegāmakūtā,Cy. I. I16; du
+Pus +a, der, ; viva,indcl,
Dubbacaiātiko hoti —Vin. III. 178
He is oneof badspeech,by nature:dy
* vaca jati + ika, der
Dubbacadovacassakaranehi
dhammehiSamannāgatāakkhamā
appadakkhinaggahianusāsanim—S.
11.204
(Those who are ) disobedient,
endowedwith theaualitiesof
, fortheirambition,
disobedience,intolerantandtakethe
advicein a wrongway;a +khama
(fromKsam); a +pa +dakkhina+
Grh + i, der.
Dubbaco hoti mammano
elagalavaco—Vin. II. 90
a+ Da (He)is of badspeech,
murmur,
and
impurewords
arä
2 Sg.,; Patt
,
+ subharatāya —A. IV. 280; Vin. II.
rc
Dubbannakaranamadatabbam-
Vin. IV. 120
A disfigurementshouldbetakenup;ā
+Da + tabba,fut. pp.
Dubbanno hoti duddasiko
okotimako bavhabadho kano va
kuni va khaiijo va pakkhahatova-
S. 1.94;A. I. 107;Vin. II. 90,kuni
Heis of badcomplexion, badlook,
bad form, bad health, a blind of
oneeye,a lame,a cripple,or a
paralysed;
du +vanna;du +dasa
F ika,der.;o +kotima+ka,der;
bahu +ābādha,meta.;pakkha +
Han + ta,pp.
Dubbalacivaramhi —Vin. IV. 59
I amone with a wornoutrobe;civard
+amhi:As +mi, meta.,pres. I". sg.
Dubbalacīvaromhi —Vin. III. 254
I amonewith a worn outrobe:du+
bala +civaro + amhi
Dubbharatayadupposataya
mahicchatayaasantutthiya
samganikayakosajjassaavannam
bhasitva —Vin, I. 45
Dubbharataya
Havingreproached themfor being
difficultto supportandmaintainand
discontentment,
attachment
to thegroup-life and
indolence,
du +bhara(fromBhr) +
td,der.;du +Pus + a +td, der.; a +
sam+Tus+ti, der; sam +gana+
ika,der.;kusīta(da) +ya, der.; Bhās
ti twā,absol.
Dubbharatāyasamvattati,no
259
It leadsto inconveniencein
supporting,not to convenience; sam +
Vrt +a + ti, pres, 3”. sg.
Dubbhikkhahotidvihitika
setatthikasalakavutta—Vin. III. 6
Therewasa faminein which foodwas
scarce,life wasdifficult to leadand
everybodylookedlike whitebonesand
foodwasrationed;du + bhikkha;du
+thitika:thitikamnamairiya, Cy.
174,accordingto the Cy. dvīhitikā
meansuncertainty in getting at food,
i. e. difficultyin living ; seta +
atthika,salaka + Vrt + ta, pp.
Dubbhikkhemanussāyena
subhikkham tenasamkamanti —A.
III, 104
Inthetimeof faminepeoplemigrate
(from one place to another) where
foodis available;sam +Kram +a +
nti,pres. 3™.pl.
Dubbhikkhe hatthimamsam
paribhufjanti —Vin. I. 219
Duringthetimeof famine(people)eat
elephantmeat;pari + Bhu(fi)j +a +
nti,pres. 3". pl.
489
Duruttanam
Dumapphalānīvapatanti mānavā-
M. II. 74
Peoplefall downiust like fruitsofa
tree;duma +phalani + iva; Pat + a
+nti,pres.3. pl.
Dumasikam va duvamgulamva -
Vin. II. 107
Two month'sgrowthor two
finger-
breadthlong;du +masa + ika, der;
du +amgula
Dummamkūnampuggalānam
niggahāyapesalānambhikkhūnam
phāsuvihārāya
—A. I. 99; Vin. II.
196;III. 21
For thecensureof theill-behaved
individualsandfor theeasy-abidingof
thewell-behavedbhikkhus;du +
mamku;ni + Grh + a, der.; phasu +
vi + Hr +a, der.
Durakkhātedhammavinaye—
A. I.
34
In thedoctrineanddisciplinewrongly
explained;du + ® +a +Khya + ta,
pp.
Durabhisambhavānihi brāhmana
arahāe vanapatthānipantāni
senāsanāni—M. I. 17
Brahmin,
iunglethickets
andlodgings
in theremoteiungles aredifficult
indeedto overcome;vanapatthanti
i
gāmantam atikkamitvā manussānam
anupacāratthānam, yattha na
) I
kasīvati, na vapīvati; pantānīti
pariyantāni
atidūrāni,Cy.I. 112;du I,WH
+® +abhi+sam+Bhi +a, der.
I ä I
Duruttānam durāgatānam NU
vacanapathānamadhivāsakaiātiko-
8)
 Durupasamkama
Dussānam Dussīlam Dūteyyapahinagamanānuyogā
7."
.—o
==
M. I. 10 Dullabho vuddhapabbaiito
assa—5. V. 71 Dussilo silavipannoyam yadeva
He is a kind of personwho tolerates
bahussuto—A. IHI. 78 parisam upasamkamati,avisarado
ill-spokenandunwelcomespeeches; Thecontainerof clotheswould be full
Veryrareis thelearnedwho has upasmkamati,mamkubhūto—D. II.
du +® +Vac(uc)+ta,pp.:du 3- (82- ofclothes;theroot Pr is usedwith
renouncedthefamily life in old age; 85
a +Gam+ta,pp.; vacana+patha; gen.;As +ya (Skt.yat), opt. 3”. sg.
bahu + Sru+ ta,pp. Whateverassembly,a personwho is
adhi + Vas+aka, der. +jati + ka,
Dussīlamitthim va purisam va immoralandgonewrongwith
der.
Dullabho vuddhapabbajito morality,attends,heattendsit being
adhipacce thapenti—A. II. 249
vinayadharo— A. III. 78 confusedandwith no courage;du +
DurupasamkamaTathagata Theycauseto establishanimmoral
Very rareis themasterofdiscipline sila; vi + Pad + ta,pp.; yam +yam
mādisena— D. II. 265 woman or a manin authority:adhi +
who hasrenouncedthefamilylife in (vad) + eva; upa + sam + Kram + a
Tathāgatas aredifficult to approachby pati +ya, der.; Stha +ape + nti,
old age + ti, pres. 3%.sg.; mamku+Bhi + ta,
a personlike me;du + ® + upa +sam caus.pres.3”. pl.
pp.
+ Kram + a, der.
Duvidhena vadāmi — D. II. 278
Dussilam silasampadayasamadapeti
I say in two ways; Vad+a +mi,pres. Dussutamassumha—M. I. 228; I.
Durūpo supāpiko dassanāya—A. II. niveseti
patitthāpeti—A. IV. 364
[Sse 185
203 Makestheimmoralpersonobserve,
settledownandestablishin morality; We hearda badnews;du +Sru + fa,
Theonewhoisdeformed
anduglyto
Duvidhena veditabbo— A. IV. 365 pp. a+ Sru + mha,pst. 1".pl.
see sam + @+ Da + ape + ti, caus. pres.
(He) is to be understoodin twoWays; 3”.sg.;ni +Vi +e +ti, caus.pres.
Vid + e +i + tabba,caus,fut. pp. Dūtam nālatthum—M. II. 126
Dullabhā dassanāyalokassa—M. III. 3”.sg.;pati +Stha+ape+ti, caus.
pres.3". sg. Did nothavea messenger;
na +a +
80
Dussaddhāpayāappasannāmanussā Labh+tthum,
pst.3%.pl.
Is rareto seefor theworld (by the
—Vin. III. 188 Dussīlopāpadhammo
—M. III. 256;
people); du + labha
It is extremelydifficult to make A. IL.81 Dūtam pāhesi— D. II. 164
believethepeoplewho arenotpleased Theonewhois morallybadandof evil Causedto senda messenger; pa + 4 +
Dullabha Bhagava yadidam tutthi -
; du + saddhā +Gpaya,caus.der; a nature;
du +sila Hi t e t- s + i, caus.pst. 3”. sg.
S. 1.48
+pa +Sad +ta,pp.
Satisfactionis difficult to obtain.Sir;
Dussilopapadhammo
asuci Dūtenapiupasampādetum
- Vin. II.
du + Labh +a, der; Tus + ti; der.
DussamādahamBhagavāyadidam Samkassarasamacaro 277
cittam —S. I. 48 paticchannakammanto assamano To make(a candidate)ordaineven
Dullabho vuddhapabbaiito
Mind is very difficult to concentrate, samanapatiinoabrahmacari througha messenger;diitena+
ākappasampanno—A. III. 78
Sir;du -- sa -- ā +Dha+a, der. brahmacaripatiinioantopiti api; upa +sam + Pad + e + tum,
Veryrareis theone with good
deportmentwho hasrenouncedthe avassuto kasambuiāto —A. I. 108 caus. inf.
Dussamharāni bhogāni, Theonewhois immoral, of evil
family life in old age; Vrdh +ta,pp.+
sambhatānipiduranurakkhiyāni - nature,
dirty,of suspiciousbehaviour, Dūteyyamgantumarahati—A. IV.
pa + Vraj + i +ta,pp.; dkappa +
Vin. III. 148-9 of secretdealing,nota recluse, 196;Vin. II. 201 h
sam +Pad +ta,pp.
To accumulatewealthis difficult, to claimingto be a recluse,unholy, He is worthyto go on a mission;dita
protectwhatis accumulated
alsois claiming to be holy, rotten internally, -- ewa, der.; Gam '- tum,inf.; Arh '
Dullabho vuddhapabbajito
difficult; du +sam +Hr + a, der.; fullof lust(oozing)andfilthy;samka a + ti, pres. 3™.sg.
dhammakathiko— A. IHI. 78
sam + Bhr +ta,pp.; anu +Raks + +sara+sam+G +Car +a, der.;
Veryrareis theDhamma-preacher
who hasrenouncedthefamily life in pati + Chad +ta,pp. + kammanta; Dūteyyapahinagamanānuyogā
old age pativirato—D. I. 5
Dussānamdussakarandakopūro Refrainedfrombeinga go-between:
 Duratopi
diita+eyya,der; anu+ Yuj+a,
der.;pati +vi +Ram+ta,pp.
Duratopi kho mayam āvuso
agaccheyyama,ayasmato
Sariputtassasantike etassa
bhasitassaatthamanhatum.sidhu
vatayasmantamyevaSariputtam
patibhatu etassabhasitassaattho -
M. I. 14;S. III. 3, bhante
Brother,we would comeevenfrom
afarto know themeaning of this
sayingfromthevenerableSāriputta.
Let themeaning of this statement
cometo thevenerableSāriputta
himself.It is indeedbetter:dirato +
api; @+gaccha + eyyama,opt. 1".
pl.; Bhas + i + ta,pp.; attham+ @+
Jna + tum,inf.; sadhuand vata,
indcl.; pati + Bha + tu, imper.3”.
sg.; Bhās t i t ta,pp.
Dūratopipassanti,
āsannāpina
dissanti—A. I. 148
They see(me)evenfrom afar,but
theyarenotseeneventhoughthey
arenearby;dsanna+ api; Drs +ya
+nti, pass.pres. 3”. pl.
Dūratova okkamitvā maggam
datum—Vin. I. 268
Togiveway afterstepping
asidefrom
afar;o +Kram + i + tva,absol.;Da +
tum,inf.
Dūratova namassanti—D. III. 199
They pay respectfrom afar;dārato
+ eva; nama(s) + ya + nti, pres.
3 DE
Dire apadissanti—Vin. ILL. 159
Far away(lodgings)arepointedout;
Devasikam
Deyyadhammo Deyyadhammo
apa + Dr§ +ya + nti, pass.pres.3". rd
Devadatta
aloneis to be understoodby
Bhuj+a, der.; Labh +eyya,opt. 3”.
pl. sg.;pati +sam(s) +Kr +a, der.; cira that(heldresponsible
forthat);Drs +
+Stha+i +ti +ka,der.;As +ya tabba, fut. pp.
Dūrepātī ca akkhanavedhica —A. (Skt.yat), opt. 3". sg.
IV. 423 Devapadadhammasamannagato
—S.
Theonewhoshootslongshotandisa V. 393
Deyyadhammo (na)hayissati—Vin.
skilled archer;dire + Pat + i, der; a Endowed withthequalityofdivine
1,272
+ khana + Vyadh+ i, der. track;deva+pada+dhamma
Whatisduetobegivenwill not
decrease;
Ha +ya + i +ssati,fut. 3”.
Dūsetumupakkami —Vin. IV. 316 sg. Devaputtamanvāvisitvā—S. 1.67
Approached (her) to rape; Dus + e + Havingpossessedthesonof god;anu
tum, caus,inf.; upa + Kram +i, pst. - ā t Vis+i +nā, absol.
Devagahadārūni
gi Se nagarapatisamkhārikāni—Vin. IHI.
Devaputtenasammukhā
43
Detha moghapurisassa sallapissasi?—A. IV. 65
Thetimbersof thewood-yard meant
ekādhippāyam - Vin. I. 301 fortherepairworkof thecity:aagara Will conversefaceto facewith a
Give one shareto thefool: god?;sam +Lap + i + ssasi,Sut.
+pati +sam(s)+ Kr + ika, der.
ekapuggalapativisam, Cy.1132;
nd
DOES.
ekam-- adhippāvam Devatā
ākāsepathavisaiāiniyo—D.
II. 139 Devabhūtosamāno —A. IHI.33
Dethāvuso
bhattam—Vin. IV. 98 Thedeities
whohaveearthlymindsin Beingbornasa god;Bhit+fa,pp.sAs
Friends,pleasegive us food;Da +e + thesky + mana, pr.p.
tha,imper.2". pl. +avuso,pl.
Devadattamārabbha bhikkhū Devamahattatava
Demi te gahapativeyyayikam—Vin. āmantesi—M. I. 192 manussamahattatava —M. IIL. 24
Il. 157 Concerning
Devadatta,
(theBuddha) Greatnessamonggodsor greatness
Householder,| give you a financial addressedthebhikkhūs;ārabbha, amonghumanbeings;deva+maha+
support;vi +aya (from1) + ika, der. indcl.;Gmanta+e +s + i, denom. atta + ta, der.
pst.3".sg.
Deyyadhammamantarayam Devamyevauddissaabhatam—D. I.
karissati —Vin. IV. 283 Devadattam
utthāpesi
—Vin. I. 200 142
Will makeharmto thethingsto be MadeDevadatta
awake;u(t) +Stha+ Brought only for the lord: uddissa,
given;Da +ya (eyya),fut. pp. + indcl.;@+Bhr +ta,pp.
dpe+s +i, caus.pst.3”.sg.
dhamma
Devadattam Rāiagahepakāsehi- Devalokavedaniyamkammam—A.
Deyyadhammoparibhogam va Vin.II. 189 II. 415
labheyya,patisamkharamva Youmakea publicannouncement
in The action,to beexperiencedin
labheyya,ciratthitiko va assa—Vin. Rajagaha
against
Devadatta;
pa+Kas thedivineworld;Vid+e +antya,
III. 266 +e+ hi, imper.2". sg. fut.pp-
The thingto beofferedwould be
enioyed,
wouldreceivespecial Devasikamniccabhikkham
dadāti-
treatment
or wouldlastlong;pari + M. II. 163
 Deva Dovariko I 4|
Devo Devo

Devasurasamgamosamupabbūlho- imper.2", pl.; sa +attham,sa + WH

divasa + ika, der.» Da + ti, root Theraintootouches
thegrounddrop
S. IV. 201;A.IV. 432 byafijanam;kevala +pari +Pr * ta, .
redup.
bydrop;ekam +ekam;phusa +aya
Thebattlebetween godsandAsuras +ti, denom.pres.3”. 8g. pp.; pari + Sudh +ta,pp.; pa +Kas . Hal
(enemiesof gods)wasputinarray; +e +tha,caus.imper.2”. pl.
Devadighayuka vannavanto
sam + upa +vi + Vah+ta,pp.
sukhabahula—A. IV. 240 Devoca kālena kālam
sammadharam anuppaveccheyya- Dehi matu jivitam —Vin. 1. 17
Deviya saddhim sayanagatohoti- D.I. 74 Sparemother’slife, Da +e +hi,
enormoushappiness;digha + ayuka
Vin. IV. 158 Fromtimeto time,therain too pours imper. 2". Sg.
(He) hadgoneto bedwith theaueen; downwell;paveseyya,Cy. 218;
Devanamindassapativedesi—S. I.
Sayana + gata samma, indcl.; anu +pa +Vi()s +e Dehi mepatena— Vin. HI. 240
234
+eyya,caus, opt. 2 . SZ.
2rd
Give it for my clothor give it to me
Deveadhiganhanti—A. IV. 396 for (this)clothor exchangeit with my
Surpassgods;adhi + Grh +nad+nii, Devoca thokathokam phusayati- cloth
3”.
ord
sg.
4
meta.pres.3”.pl. Vin.IV. 118
Raintooseemsto touchtheground Dehi mevinicchayam—
Vin. III. 66
Devanamjivitam upadaya
Deve ubbahati —D. I. 325 dropby drop;thokam+thokam,adv. Give me a decision
manussanamjivitam papakam -
Keepsthegodsaway;u(t) +Bah +a+
Vin.III. 73
ti, pres. 3”. sg. Devomaiiie —D. I. 60 Dehi satasahassena —D. II. 96
Inferior is humanlife ascompared
Likea god;maiifie,indel. Give (this)for onehundredthousand
with the life of gods;upa+a+Da+
Devepihīlenti—D. II. 275
ya, absol.
Despiseevengods;Hid + e +nti, Devovabhavissamidevafifatareva Donenaāvusosappinā attho —Vin.
pres. 3. pl. —M.I. 102 IV. 102 I
Devānambhāyamānā - S. V. 448
I willbecome
a godor oneamong Friend,we needa Donameasureof
Beingafraidof gods:Bhi +ya +
Deve vassantecivaram ovassati- gods ghee
mana, pr.p.
Vin. I. 121
The robebecomeswetwhenit is Desissāmivibhaiissāmi —S. II. 2 Domanassassanirodha uppajjati
Devanamsahavyatamupapajjati-
raining; Vrs + a + nta,pr.p.; o + Vrs I will explainandanalyse;Drs +e + pavivekāpīti —M. If. 235
M. III. 147
+ya + ti, pres. 3. sg. ssdmi,fut. 1. sg.; vi +Bhaj +i + With thecessationofdispleasure
(He) goesto thecompanionshipof
ssami,fut. 1. sg. therearisesraptureof seclusion;du +
gods;sahavya+ ta, der: upa + Pad
Deve vassantedevegalagalayante manas+ya, der.
+ ya +ti, pass. pres. 3°4.Sg.
viiiutāsu niccharantīsu asaniyā Desetha bhikkhave dhammam
phalantiyā —D. II. 131 adikalyanammajjhe kalyanam Dovacassakaranehidhammehi
Devapathamampatigganhanti,
Whenit wasraining,waterwas pariyosānakalyānamsāttham samannagato—M. L.95; Vin. IHI. 178
pacchāmanussā—
D. II. 14
flowingdown with thesound‘gala sabyaliianamkevalaparipunnam Endowedwith aualitieswhichmake
Gods receive (the Bodhisatta) first and
gala’,lightnings
wereflashing
and parisuddhambrahmacariyam onedisobedient;du + Vaca(s)+ya,
thenhumanbeings;pati +Grh +na +
thunderboltwascracking; Joc. abs!.; pakāsetha —
S. I. 105; Vin. 1.21 der.; Kr +aniya,fut. pp.; sam + anu
nti, meta.pres. 3”. pl.
galagalāyanta,onom.prip.; ni(s) + Bhikkhus,
ekplaintheDhamma
which + @+ Gam + ta, pp.
Car +a +nta +7,pr.p.; Phal +a+
Deva bhita apayimsyeva— A. IV. 432
nta +f, pr. p. middle,lovelyin theend,meaningful Dovariko...annatanam nivāretā
The gods,beingscared,fled right
andwell phrased, perfect in itself and ūātānampavesetā—5. IV. 194
away;Bhi +ta,pp.; apa + Ya +imsu,
Devo ca ekamekamphusāyati—
S. I. makeknownthehighest way
of life The door- keeperwho makesthe
pst. 3. pl. +eva
104 whichis pure;Drs +e +tha,caus. unknownprevent(from entering)and
 Devo
Dvattimsamahāpurisalakkhanehi
vee
theknown enter;duvara (Skt.dvara)
Love is bornof hatred
+ika,der.;a +Jia +ta,Pp.;ni + Vr
+e +tu, caus.der.; Jia + ta,Pp.; pa
Dosabhisannokayo —Vin. I. 279
+ Vis + @+ tu, caus.der.
A body filled with humour:dosa+
abhi +Sya(n)d +ta,Pp.
Devo dosojayati—A. II. 213
Hatredis bornofhatred: Jan +ya+
Dosina ratti—D. I. 47; M. 1.212
ii, pres. 3. sg.
Bright night;Sk¢.Jyotsna
Dosaienakammena—A. IHI, 339
Dosokantako—A. V. 135
By theactionbornof hatred:dosa +
Hatredis a thorn(obstacle)
ja
Doso mahāsāvaiiokhippaviragi —A.
Dosaniyesudhammesudoso udapadi
I. 200
—A.IHI.169
Hatredis muchblameworthyand
Hatredarosein mattersto be hated;
changingquickly; maha+sa + vaiia
dus +a + aniya,Sut.pp .;u (I) t a 3:
(from Vad+ya,fut. pp.); khippa+
Pad + i, pst. 3”. Sg.
virāga + T,der.
Dosampatitthati —Vin. III. 163
Dohalo hoti —Vin. I. 342
Acknowledgesthemalice(stands on
Thereis a doubledesire(a pregnant
malice);paticca titthati,patiiānāti,
woman’sdesire);du + hada +a,
Cy.593;pati +Stha+ti.pres.3%,
der.2
Sg.; dosamis governedby pati
Dvattikkhattummukheālopam
Dosassaappahīnattā—S. IV. 305
samparivattetvaaiihoharati —M. II.
Becauseof the non-abandonmentof
138
hatred;a +pa +Ha +ta,pp. + tta,
(He) turnsthemorselof food two
der.
threetimesin themouthandthen
swallows;dva (dvi) + ti +khattum,
Dosassa pahanayametta
der.; sam +pari + Vrt +e +tvd,
bhavetabba—A. III. 446
caus.absol.;adhi +0 + Hr +a + ti,
Love andfriendlinessshouldbe
pres. 3. sg.
cultivatedfor theeradicationof
hatred;Bhai+e +tabba,caus.fut. pp.
Dvattipattapiire patiggahetva—Vin.
IV. 80
Dosadosovasamudeti—A. IIT. 338
Havingaccepted
two-three
bowlfuls;
From hatredarisesonly hatred;doso
pati + Grh + e +tva,absol.
* eva; sam +u(t) + e (from 1) + ti,
pres. 3”. sg.
Dvattimsamahāpurisalakkhanehi
samannāgato
—D. I. 116
Dosapemamiāyati —A. II. 213
Endowedwith thirtytwo marksof a
Dvamgulaparamam
great
being;sam +anu +a +gata,
pp.
Dvamgulaparamam adatabbam-
Vin.IV. 262
Shouldbetakenat mostthetwo
finger-joints;dvisu amgulesudve
pabbaparamā, old Cy. 262; dvi +
amgula;@+Da +tabba,fut.pp.
Dvamgulāyachāyāya vitivattaya -
Vin.II. 300
Whentheshadowoftwo fīnger-
breadths
haspassed;
vi +ati + Vrt+
fa,pp.
Dvamgularaji hoti —Vin. III. 246
Thelineisof twofinger-breadths;
dvi
+amgula
Dvayenavūpakāsenasampādeti—D.
IHI.285;A. IV. 152
Hecausesto distracthimselfin two
ways; vi + apa +Krs + a, der; sam +
Pad +e + ti, caus.pres. 3. sg.
Dvādasanahutehi
Māgadhikehi
brāhmanagahapatikehi
parivuto-
Vin.I, 35
Surroundedby brahminsand
householdersof Magadhaamounting
to 12nahuta(myriads);Magadha+
ika,der.;pari +Vr +ta,pp.
Dyadasapurisohatthi, tipuriso asso,
catupuriso ratho, cattāropurisā
sarahatthā
patti—Vin. IV. 105
Elephanthastwelvemen,horse
threemen,chariotfour men,infantry
fourmenequippedwith arrows;
Cy. IV. 858 saysfour menare on
thebackofone elephant,
eight
497
Dvāram
menatfour legs asprotectors;
ohe on a horseback,two at the
legs as protectors;one is thedriver
ofa chariot, one is thesoldier, two
othersare on both wheelsas
protectors;for the infantrythereare
four personsfullyarmed;Pad +ti,
der.
Dvādasamāsiyosamvaccharo—A. I.
213
An year has twelve months; dyddasa +
masa + iya, der.
Dvādasayoianāniabhiniveso—A. IHI.
369 Whai
Shelterwastwelveyojanas;abhi + ni
+ Vié + a, der.
Dvādasavassāgihigatā khamā hoti
sītassaunhassa...—Vin. IV. 322
The marriedgirl of twelveyearsis
capableof enduringcold, warm...
Dvārabāhamālambitvā — D. II. 190
Hangingon thedoor-post;ā t Lamb '
i + tva, absol.
Dvāram thaketvā dvare nisidanti -
Vin. Il. 220
Havingshutthedoor,sit down in the
doorway;ni +Sad + a +nti,pres.3”.
pl.
Dvaram thakesi—Vin. HI. 58
Closedthedoor;Stak+e +s +i, pst.
39. Se.
Dvaram samvyaritvapatisalliyitum
—Vin. III. 39
To takerestafterclosing thedoor:
samt Vrt a tit twā,absol.;pati t
 Dvāravātapānam
Dvejjham Dve I ly
Dve

sam +Li +ya ti +tuminf.

Dvihatiham —S. V. 348
Dvetissorattiyo paribhunjitva
Two threedays;dvi +aha; ti +aha
catutthadivasedhovitva —Vin. IV.
211 303
Dvīhatīhassaaccayena—D. I. 190
Havingopenedupdoorsandwindow s; Havingused(therobe) for two three
After two-threedays;ati +aya
dvara + vatapana;vi + Vrtatid nights
andwashed(it) on the fourth
(fromI)
tvā, absol. day;catu + ttha, der.

Dve udakassadhārā —
D. II. 15 Dyedhammapaccasimsitabba-
Dvinnam katthānam samghattana
Two showers of water Vin.IV.315 .
-Samodhānā—S. IV.215
By thefriction oftwo sticks: Twothingsareto be expected;pati +
Dve ekamaiicetuvatteyyum—Vin. a+ Sams+i +tabba,fut. pp.
samghattana+samodhana
IV. 288
Two shouldlie down on onebed: Dvevadussanidayhimsu, yafica
Dvinnam katthānam
tuvalteyyuntinipajjeyyum,Cy, 932 sabbaabbhantarimamyafica
samghattasamodhānā - S. II. 97
Due to the friction ofthe two sticks bahiram—D. II. 164
Dve kho ahamatthavasam Onlytwoclothswereburnt,oneWas
together
Sampassamano
araniie theinnermostandtheotherwasthe
vanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni outer;dve+ eva; Dah +ya + imsu,
Dvinnam gatīnam annataram —
S.
patisevāmi, attano ea pass.
pst.3".pl.; abbhantara
+ ima,
IV. 168
ditthadhammasukhaviharam der.
Oneof the two ways
sampassamano,pacchimafica
janatam anukampamano—M. I. 23 Dvevassanichasudhammesu
Dvinnam phalanamanfataram
I resorttojunglethickets
and asikkhitasikkhamsikkhamanam -
pātikamkham—M. I. 62
restingplacesin theremotejungles Vin.IV.318
One of thetwo resultsis to be
for two reasons:contemplatingease Thefemaletraineewho hasnottrained
expected;pati + Kamks+ya; fut pp.
of life, hereandnow, for myself herselffor two yearsin six rules;a +
andbeingcompassionate
towards Sak+i +ta, desid.pp.
Dvinnam phalanam anfiataram
posterity;sam +passa t māna,
phalam pātikamkham —S. V. 129;A.
Prp.; pati +Sev +a + mi,pres. Dvevedana
vediyatikayikafica
IIL. 81
I“. sg.; dittha + dhamma+sukha cetasikafica—S. IV. 208
The oneoftwo resultsis to be
+ vihdra; anu +Kamp'- a -- māna, (He)experiencestwofold feeling;
expected
pr. Dp. physicalandmental;Vid + ava +i,
caus.pres.3”. sg.
Dvirattatirattam sahaseyyam
Dve gatiyo bhavanti,ananna—D. I.
Kappetum— Vin. IV. 16
88
To sleeptogethertwo-threenights;dvi
Therearetwoways,noanyother,an+
+ratti; ti + ratti
anna

Dvīhatīhapayātosattho—D. II.
Dveiiham āpaiiissati —A. IHI. 403
343
Will getat doublemeaning;dvidha+
The caravan, set out two-three days
ago; pa +Ya +ta,pp. 34. ga

499
 Dhaiabaddho
Dhajabaddhocoro —
Vin. I. 74
A gazetted
(aflag-hoisted)
thief:Joke
pakato, Cy. 997; dhaja + Badh + 1a,
Pp.
Dhajahatanama karamarānītā -
Vin. III. 140
Dhajahatameansa womanwho has
beenbroughtasa slave(aftera battle);
dhaja + @+ Hr + ta,pp.; karamara +
a +Ni + ta,pp.
Dhahiakarane vatthabbam—
Vin.
III. 201
You shouldremaininsidethefield
(wherethegrainsareproduced);Vas+
tabba.fut. pp.
Dhanifiarasissavuvahyamanassa—A.
IV. 170
Whentheheapof grain is winnowed:
vuvahyamay be a corruptform; it
maybe vi +vahyamana or yi +
vayhamānaor desid.pass. prp. from
Vah;Cy. takesit aspūyamāna:
pūyamānassātiucce thāne thapetvā
mahāvāteopuniyamānassa,IV. 74:
Vah+ya +mana,pass.prp.; Pit +
ya + mana, pass. pr.p.
Dhafifiassadhara opatitva—Vin. I.
240
Havingpoureddown theflows
of grain;o (ava) +Pat +i +tva,
absol.
Dhanhagaram sammajjapetva—Vin.
I. 240
Dhanam
Causingto sweepthehouseofgrain;
dhatiia + agara; sam + Mrj +ape+
va, caus. absol.
Dhanfani dalhani sdravantani-—
A,
IV. 170
The grains,strongandfull of essence
Dhanfanidubbalanipalapani—
A.
IV. 170
The grains,weakandemptyofessence
Dhatanamdhammanam
atthūpaparikkhī—A. II. 97
The onewho ekaminesthemeaning of
theDhammaheldin mind;Dhr +ta,
pp.; attha + upa +pari + Tks+ 7,
der.
Dhanakaranīyesamuppanne—
A. V.
43, 159
At thetimewhentherehasarisen
somethingtobedonewithmoney;
sam + u(t) + Pad + ta,pp.
Dhanadhaniienavaddhati—
A. V. 137
Growsupinwealthandgranary;
Vrdh
+a+ ti,pres,3. sg,
Dhanamārakkhena guttiyā
sampādeti—A. IV. 266
Keepsthewealthsecured
and
protected;sam + Pad +e +ti, caus.
pres. 3. sg.
Dhanamva dhaniiiamva rajatamva
jatariipam va —M. I. 360
Wealth,grain,silver,or gold
Dhaniya
Dhaniyapassitva—Vin. I. 76
Creditorsseeing(him); dhana + iya,
der.;passa+i +tva,absol.
Dhanukalapamkhattiyassa
sandhanam —M. IL. 180
Theruler’sown wealthis bow and
quiver
Dhanusatedhanusate—D. If. 178
IneveryhundredDhanu(bow,a
measure)
Dhanusmimpisikkhati —A. III. 327
Hetrainshimselfin archerytoo; Sak
t ($)t a t ti, desid,pres. 3"'.sg.
Dhanenakinitvā vāseti—Vin. III.
140
Having
bought
withmoneyhelets
(her)stay;Kri +nd +i + tva,absol.;
Vas+e +ti,caus.pres.3". sg.
Dhanenadhanakaranīyamkarissāmi
—D.II. 126
With the wealth, I will do what is to be
doneby wealth;Kr +anīya,fat. pp.
Dhanenasikkheyyāma —
D. II. 245
We woulddiscipline
himbywealth;
Sak--eyyāma,desid.opt.I''..pi.
Dhamathetampuggalam
niddhamathetampuggalam—A. IV.
169
Removethisperson,
sendoutthis
person;
Dhmd+a +tha,imper.2",
pl.+ etam
140
Thetalkon theDhammawas
Dhammacariya
interrupted;antardahositi antarika
ahosipaticchannā,Cy. 1214
Dhammakathāyaparibāhiro assa-
Vin. II. 140
(He) would becomealiento the
Dhammatalk;As +yā (Skt.yāt), opt.
3”. sg.
Dhammakathika.dhammam
sakacchissanti—Vin. Il. 75
The discussantsof theDhammawill
discusstheDhamma(khandha,
dyatana,dhdatuete.);sakacchaé +e +
i + ssanti;denom.fut. 3”. pl.
Dhammakathiko hoti
piyasamudaharo—A.V. 24
(He) is onewho is anexpounderof
Dhammaandhasa lovelywayof
speaking;
dhamma
+katha+ika,
der.; sam +u(t) +@ +Hr + a, der.
DhammagaruTathagato
dhammagāravo—A. III. 122
Tathagatais deferentialto theDhamma
Dhammacakkampavattetum—Vin.
1.8
To maketheWheelof Law proceed;
pa + Vrt +e +tum,caus,inf.
Dhammacakkhumudapadi—D. I.
148
Eye of wisdomarose;dhammesuva
cakkhum,dhammamayam va
cakkhum.Aāhesuthānesutinnam
maggānametamadhivacanam,idha
pana Sotdpattimaggasseva,Cy. 237;
u(t)+a+ Pad +i, pst.3”.sg.
Dhammacariyāsamacariyā—A. V.
 Dhammacetiyani Dhammanimantanāya Dhammanisantiya Dhammam

87 his mind is smitten and callous: Dhammanisantiyā tibbacchando— A, ati + Nam +e +ti, caus.pres, 3”. Sg.
Rightandbalancedbehaviour ā t Han +ta,pp. +citto;khila+ IV. 15
Theonewho is verykeenin listening Dhammapariyayopanhadhippayena
Dhammacetiyānibhāsitvā—M. II. totheDhamma;tibba +chanda bhasito—A. IV. 382
124 Dhammadesanatorakkham Themodeof teaching hasbeen
Havinguttered
wordsof respects
to paccasimsati
—Vin. I. 187 Dhammanetti samanumaijjitabba- explainedin accordancewith the
theDhamma;dhammassa Expectsprotection
fromthe preaching M. II. 247 question;pattha + adhippayena;
cittīkāravacanāni,Cy. III. 355; of theDhamma;pati + @+Sams+a+ Guidelineof theDhammashouldbe pucchitassapatihassasabhagena,
dhamma+ cetiyva, (fromCi); Bhas ti,pres.3. sg. takenintoconsideration:dhamma+ Cy.IV.174
+ i+ tva,absol. netti,(sequenceofthe conditions);
Dhammadesanāyaattamanāceva sam+anu +Mrj +ya +i +tabba, Dhammapurekkharayaanapatti-
Dhammataesabhikkhave —A. V. 2 honti, no ca kho paripunnasamkappa Vin. IV. 277
Bhikkhus,this is thenature
of things, —M. III. 276 There is no offencefor theonewho
dhammatāesāti dhammasabhāvo They aregladwith thediscourse,but Dhammapatisambhidappatto
—A. aimsat theDhamma(or thelaw):
esa,Cy. V. I theintention
hasnotbeenfulfilled;
no, II. 113 Pālim vācentiyā,Cy. 928
neg.p.; pari + Pr + ta,pp, + Theonewhohasgainedanalytical
Dhammatonatthi —D. I. 139 samkappa knowledge
of thetexts;dhamma+ Dhammamaccharini
— A. IHI. 139
Naturally,thereis no: na +As + fi, patisambhida+patta: pa +Ap + ta, She is envious of the Dhamma
pres. 3. sg.; natthi is also usedas an Dhammadhāranam
natthi—
A. V.126 Pp.
indci. Thereis no holdingof theDhamma;
na Dhammamayampāsādamāruyha-
+As +ti,pres.3”.sg.;natthiisalso Dhammapadani garahitabbam Vin. I. 5
Dhammattārūhati —Vin. II. 58 used as an indel. patikkositabbammafiieyya —A. II. Havingascendedthemansionmadeof
Valid, becauseit is legal;dhamma+ 31 Dhamma;dhamma+maya,der; a+
ita, der.+a; Ruh +a +ti, pres. 3”. Dhammadhāranāya
dhammasavanam Onewould think that (these) Ruh +ya, meta.absol.
Sg. bahukāram— M. II. 175 statements
of Dhammashouldbe
Listeningto theDhammais auite censuredandreproved; Dhammamcarati
Dhammadassane
niveseti—A. III. helpfulfor holding(remembering)
the dhammapadānīti dhammakotthasG, brāhmanagahapatikesunegamesu
263 Dhamma; bahu+Kr +a, der. Cy.II. 61; thereis no agreement cevaiānapadesuca —M. II. 74
Makes(him) settledown in seeingthe between adjectivesand substantive; He behavesrightly in referenceto the
Dhamma;catusaccadhammadassane, Dhammaniiihānakkhantiyā garaha + j + tabba, fut. pp.; pati + brahminsandhouseholders, living in
Cy: III. 332;ni + Vis + e +ti, caus. atthūpaparikkhā
bahukārā—
M. II. Krus+a +i +tabba,
fut.pp.;Man+ markettownsandcountryside;nigama
pres. 3”. sg. 175 24t eyya,pass.opt. 3. sg. + a, der.;janapada + a, der.
Ekamining
ofmeaning
isauite
helpful
Dhammadayadabhavatha,ma for deepunderstanding
of the Dhammapadāni
pi lapanti—A. II. Dhammamcarantoparaiiati —Vin.
amisadayada —M. I. 12 Dhamma; attha+upa+parikkha 186
III. 50
BeheirstotheDhamma, nottothe (frompari + Tks) They
mutter
eventhestatements
ofthe Administering
iusticeheisdefeated:
material
things;Bhi +a +tha,imper. Dhamma;
Laptta +nti,pres,3”.pl. dhammam carantotibhikkhusamghe
2”, pil.
Dhammanimantanaya
kayiramanaya vā rāiakule vā vinicehayamkaronto,
—Vin. III. 211 Dhammapariyattiya
divasam Cy.339;Car t a t nta,pr.p.;para +
Dhammadesakeāhatacitto khilaiāto atināmeti
—A. IHI.87
When
a justrequest
is beingmade;
~ Ji +ya +ti,pass.pres.3”.sg.
—A. III. 176 dhamma +nimantana;Kr +ya * (He)
spends
thedaybylearning
the
In referenceto theDhamma-preacher, Dhamma
byheart:
pari+Ap+ti,der; Dhammam
mana; meta. pass. pr.p. desitam
āiānāmi—
M.I.
 Dhammam Dhammam Dhammam Dhammam

91;S. 11.179 III. 102 108 arrival)of beings;cuti +upapdta+

I knowtheDhammataught(by the Teachesthedoctrineon manifold Teaches
thedoctrine
ontheknowledge nana; upa + Pat + a, der.
BlessedOne);Dré + e + i + fa, caus. psychicpowers ofotherpeople'sliberation
pp.; @+Jan + na@
+ mi.pres. 1. sg.
Dhammamdesetisassatavādesu—D.
Dhammamdesetiuttaruttarim Dhammam desetiparimandalehi III. 108
Dhammam desetianusasanavidhasu panitapanitam padabyanjanehi
appabaddhehi—M. Teachesthedoctrineon thetheories
—D.IHI.107 kanhasukkasappatibhāgam —D.HI. 1.213 of eternalism
Teaches
thedoctrineconcerningthe 102 Explains
theDhammawith perfect
modes
of instruction;Drs +e +fi, Teachesthedoctrine,moreexcellent phraseology
anda good flow of the Dhammamdesentokhipi —Vin. II.
caus.pres. 3". sg.; anu + Sas+ana, andfine,contrastingblackandwhite; language;
avicchinnadharamkatva 140
der. + vidha savipakkhamkatva,Cy.882;uttara+ nadisotamviyapavatteti,CyJI. 253; (The Buddha)sneezedwhilepreaching
uttarim;kanha+sukka+sa + pari+ mandala;pada + vyanjana;a theDhamma;Drs + e + nta,prp.;
Dhammamdesetiadikalyanam patibhāga +paor appa+ Badh + ta,pp. Ksip(orKsu)+i,pst.3. sg.
majjhe kalyanam
pariyosanakalyanamsattham Dhammam deseti kusalesu Dhammam
desetipuggalapafihattīsu Dhammamdesentonisinno hoti -
savyanjanamkevalaparipunnam dhammesu— D. HI. 102 —D.III. 105 Vin. If. 12
parisuddham brahmacariyam Teachesthedoctrineon wholesome Teaches thedoctrineon the Seatedhehasbeenpreaching;ni +Sad
pakāseti—D. I. 62 things;thirtyseven
factorsof classification
of individuals + fa, pp.
He teachestheDhammawhich is enlightenmentare namedin this
beautiful
inthebeginning,
beautiful
in sutta as kusaladhamma Dhammam
deseti Dhammampariyapunanti suttam
the middle, beautiful in the end. pubbenivasanussatinane
—D. II. geyyamveyyakaranamgatham
meaningful, wellphrasedandcomplete Dhammam desetigabbhāvakkantīsu 100 udanamitivuttakam jatakam
in itself;heproclaims
thehighest
way —D.III. 103 Teachesthedoctrineon theknowledge abbhutadhammamvedallam— M. I.
oflife which is pure;Dré + e + ti, Teachesthedoctrineon conceptions; of previousexistences:pubbe + 133;A. IL. 185,pariyapunati
caus. pres. 3. Sg.; pari + 0 + Sa + gabbha + ava + Kram + ti, der. nivasa+anut+Smr + ti + fidna LearnstheDhamma:discourses,
ana,der.;pari + Pr + ta,pp.; pari +
recitals, expositions, stanzas, solemn
Sudh + ta,pp.; pa+ Kas +e + ti, Dhammamdeseti Dhammam
deseti utterances,
reports,birth- stories,
pres.3”.sg. dassanasamāpattīsu
—D. III. 104 purisasīlasamācāre—
D. IHI. 106 marvels,analyses;pariyadpunantiti
Teachesthedoctrineon the Teachesthedoctrineon theethical ugganhanti,
Cy.Il. 106;pari+Ap
Dhammamdesetiādesanavidhāsu- attainments
of visionto Truth; behaviourof man;sam +@+ Car + +(u)na +nti,pres.3. pl.; su +
D. IHI.103 dassana
+sam+@+Pad +ti,der: a, der, Vae+ta,pp.;Gai +ya,fut.pp.;
Teaches thedoctrineconcerning
the
vi +Dal or Dr +ya,fut.pp.;
modesof pointingout (others'minds); Dhammam
desetipatipadasu
—D. Dhammam desetibhassasamacare- navamgavasena catusaccadhammam
ā t Dr€ t e t ana,caus.der.:-vidhā III. 106 D.IL. 106 parivāpunāti,Valahieti,
katheti,A.
Teachesthedoctrineon practices ai Teachesthedoctrineonhowtousethe Cy.III. 266;
Dhammam desetiāyatanapaūiattīsu
languageproperly;
Bhas+ya,fut.pp.
—D.III. 102 Dhammamdesetipadhānesu-D. i I ae +sam+@+ Car +a, der. Dhammam
vadantava bhavanti santo
Teachesthedoctrineon theconcepts III. 106 sgt —S.1.184
of sensedoors;Gyatana+pa +Jiia+ Teachesthedoctrineon right strivil Dhammam
deseti
sattānam Surely,goodpeoplearethose
ape + ti, der.
soaēmR i UI cutūpapātaāāne
—D.IHI.I whospeaktruth;Vad+a+nta, |
Dhammam
deseti ini ka E, Teaches
thedoctrine
ontheknowledge
Dhammamdesetiiddhividhāsu —D. parapuggalavimuttiāāne
—D of birthanddeath (departureand eeu āmpio up ere swētgite maa Ri
 Dhammam Dhammavinaye Dhammavinayo Dhammā

Dhammamva desessama, Dhammavitakkāvasissanti—

A. I,
Dhammavinayo ekaraso vimuttiraso — samdpanno,Cy. III. 337;sam + a@ +
savakanamva sikkhapadam 254
~Vin, If. 239 Pad +ta,pp.
pannapessama
—Vin. III. 89 Thereremainthethoughts
basedon
Thedoctrineanddisciplineis of one
Dhammawill beexplainedor a rule mentalphenomena;
taste,the taste of freedom Dhammasotasamapanno
will be promulgatedfor thedisciples; vipassanūpakkilesavitakkā,
Cy.II. Buddhanussatimbhaveti—A. V. 329
Drs + e + ssGma, caus. fut. 1. pl; 362;ava +Sis +ya +nti,pres,3” Dhammavinayo vivato virocati, no The one,who hasenteredintothe
pa +Jia + ape +ssama,caus,fut. pl.
paticchanno —A. I. 283 Dhamma-stream(five spiritual
I", pi.
Thedoctrineanddiscipline,openedup faculties?),cultivatesrecollectionon
Dhammavitakkehidivasam notclosed,shinesforth; vi + Vr + ta, theBuddha;buddha+anu +sati
Dhammamvitthārena paresam atinameti—A. IIL. 87 BD.;vi k Ruc +a + ti, pres. 3. sg.; (fromSmrt)
deseti—A. III. 87 (He)spendstheday-timewith pati +Chad +ta,pp.
ExplainstheDhammain detailto Dhamma-thoughts Dhammasotonibbahati—A. III. 350
others
Dhammasannattiya divasam The Dhamma-stream carries(him)out;
Dhammavinayampariyāpunitvā atināmeti —A. III. 87 vipassanāhānamnibbahati,
Dhammayogebhikkhū apasādenti- attanoharati —Vin. III. 90 (He)spendstheday by making ariyabhūmimsampāpeti,Cv. Ill. 375;
AIL. 355 Having learnt the Dhamma (he) carries others
understand
theDhamma; ni + Vah+a +ti,pres.3. sg.
(They) causeto discourageDhamma- it as if his own; Cy. takesharatias dhammasannattiyatidhammassa
practisingbhikkhus; (bhikkhus dahati: attanodahatiti ... āeariyam sanndpandya,
Cy. Ill. 265; sam + Jia Dhammassa
annataro—
S. I. 106
practising insight?); dhammeyogo anuddisitvā attanā +dpe+ti, caus.der.;ati +Nam + e Knowersof theDhamma;@+Jia +
anuyogoetesantidhammayoga, patividdhasayambhūhānādhi +ti,caus.pres. 3. sg. tu, der.; with thesuffix tu endingder.
dhammakathikānam etamnāmam; gatamdhammavinayam
pavedeti, objectis usedin thegen.
apasādentītighattenti,khipanti, Cy. Cy. 483-4;pari +Ap + (una +i Dhammasandosā
vinayasandoso
—A.
III. 379; a +pasida +e + nti, denom. +tva,absol.;Hr +a +ti,pres. HI. 106 Dhammassaca anudhammamna
pres.3”.pl. Sse. FromcorruptDhammacomescorrupt vyākaronti—
D. I. 161;S. II. 33
discipline Donotexplainwhatisrelevant
tothe
Dhammavadhammeparipirenti - Dhammavinayeabhiramanti—
Vin. Dhamma;vi +d+ Kr +o +nti,pres.
A.V. 4,313 IT.238 Dhammasavanassa
sotāvadhānam Ppl:
It is indeedtheDhammasthatmakethe Takedelightinthedoctrine
and bahukāram—
M. II. 175
Dhammas accomplish;pari +Pr +e + discipline;
abhi+Ram+a +nti,pres. Givingearisguitehelpfulfor Dhammassa svākkhātatā —S. IV. 300
nti, caus.pres. 3. pl. ar, pi listening
to theDhamma:sofa + Wellproclaimed natureof the
avadhāna Dhamma; su t ā i. Khyāt ta,pp.t
Dhammavādinoca pana Dhammavinaye
assāsam
alattha
—S. tā,der.
duppatimantiyā—M. II. 147 11.50 RI Dhammasudhammatam
paticea
—S.
Thosewho speaktrutharedifficult to
Hegotasense
of reliefinthedoctrine II.200 Dhamma
abhiiia
desita
—D.I.
be contended;du +pati +manta+ anddiscipline;
a +Labh+ttha,pst.-
iva, der.
Depending
onthebeauty
ofthe 119;
M.II. 245 A
mid. 3”. sg. {ein
Dhamma Thethingsexplained
withspecial
=i I
knowledge;abhinna,instr.sg.;Drs +
Dhammavicayasambojihamgo—A. V.
Dhammasotamsamāpanno—S.H.
eti
211
II. 139 HIM 43;A. II. 285 PE MIHA ; a
A constituentof enlightenment
named
Theonewho
seesthe valueof Theonewhohas
entered
intothe asi
investigationintotheDhammas;sam + ē
doctrineand discipline;: Dhamma-stream; WRITE
bodhi+amga
der.
 Dhamma
Dhammādesitāpaāūattā —D. I, 191,
IHI.133
Doctrineshavebeenpreachedand
proclaimed;Drs + e + i + ta, caus.
pp.; pa +Ja + Gpe+ ta, caus.pp.
Dhammānamnisāmakaiātiyo hoti
dhammanisantiyāvannavādī—
A. V.
168
He is. by nature,a listenerof the
Dhammaanda speakerin favourof
listening
totheDhamma:
ni +Sam+
aka, der.; ni + Sam+ti, der.
Dhammānudhammapatipatti
—A. II.
245
The practiceaccordingto theDhamma;
dhamma+ anudhamma+pati + Pad
+ti,der.
Dhammanudhammapatipanno
samicipatipannoanudhammacari-
D. II. 138;S. V. 380
The onewho hasbeenpractisingthe
Dhamma in its totality,practisingitin
rightwayandbehavingin accordance
with it; dhamma+ anudhamma+pati
+ Pad + ta, pp.; samici +patipanna;
anu + dhamma+ Car + 7,der.
Dhammapajfifiayadisva veditabbā-
S. IV. 139
The Dhammasareto beunderstood
afterseeing(them)with wisdom;Drs
+ tva,absol.; Vid + e + i +tabba,
Dhammapafifiaya mattaso
niiihānam khamanti—M. I. 479
Dhammasaresufficientlyunderstood
bywisdom;ni +jhdna;Ksam+a +
nti, pres. 3. pl.
Dhammāva
Dhammāpi mam na patibhanti—
D.
II. 99;S. III. 106
EventheDhammas donotcometomy
mind: satipatthānadhammā
mayham
pākatāna hontītidīpeti,
tantidhammāpana therassa
suppaguna,Cy.547;pati + Bha +nti,
pres. 3". sg.
Dhammapivo pahatabba,pageva
adhamma —M. I. 135
Eventherightthingsshouldbe
abandoned by you, thewrongthings
right at theearliest;(notonly the
wrongthings,butalso therightthings
areto beabandoned by you);
dhammātisamathavipassanā, Cy.Il.
109; pa + Ha + tabba,fut.pp.;
pageva(Skt.prak +eva),indcl.
Doctrineshavebeenheardmuch,
heldthemin mind,practised
bywords,
surveyedbymindandwellpenetrated
intothembyrightview;bahu+Sru+
ta,pp.;Dhr +ta,pp.;pari +Ci +ta,
pp.; anu +pekkha + i + ta,pp.; su
pati + Vyadh+ ta,pp.
DhammaVajjisufhassanti
—D.II. 75
Conditionswill existamongtheVajjis;
Stha+ssanti,fut.3'4.pl.
A.V. 4,313
It is indeedtheDhammas
thatmake
the
Dhammasflow down;abhi +Sya(n)d
te 4 nti,caus.pres.3. pl.
Dhammavimuttiya Dhammiyā
Dhammavimuttiya phassita honti - (necessary)protection;sam + vi +
A.II. 244 Dha(daha)+eyyama,
opt.1".pl.
TheDhammas
areexperiencedby
liberation;
Dhammati Dhammikamsamaggimna upeti -
catusaceadhammā, vimuttiyāphassitā Vin. IL.243
hontitiarahattaphalavimuttiya Doesnotcometothelegally
nanaphassena phuttha honti, Cy, III. constitutedassembly;dhammikam
217;phassa+e +i +ta, denom.pp. sāmaggim
na upetitikammam
kopetukāmatāyasamghakamme
Dhammasaraniya piyakarana kaviramānenevaāgacchatina
garukaranā—M. II. 250 chandamdeti...tenadukkatam
Memorable thingswhich bringabout āpaiiati, Cv.1288; upa - I- ti,
loveandrespects;Smr +aniya,fut. pres. 3”. sg.
pp.;Kr + ana,der.
Dhammikam sāmaggimpaccādiyati
Dhammasaraniya piyakarana —Vin. II. 243
garukaranasamgahayaavivadaya The decisiontakenup in thelegally
$āmaggiyāekībhāvāya samvattanti constitutedassemblyis challenged;
-M. II. 250;A. IHI.289 pati t ā t Da + tya+ ti, pass.pres.
Thethings whichareworthytobe SRLS
i
temembered,which createlove and
respects
andleadto mutualsupport, Dhammikenabalina
nondisputation,
concord andunity; abhisamkhatam— D. II. 180
Smr(sar)+e +aniva,fut.pp.;sam+ Collectedby righttaxation;abhi +
Vi tat ati, pres. 3”. pl. sam(s)+ Kr + ta,pp.
Dhammasussutasuggahita Dhammiyākathāya ovadi anusāsi-
$umanasikatā
sūpadhāritā Vin. I. 12s.
$uppatividdhā panhiaya —
S. III. 6 Advisedandinstructedwith a talk
The
Dhammas
have
been
wellheard, basedon theDhamma;0 + Vad+i,
Well
taken
up,wellpondered
over, pst. 3. sg.; anu +Sas + i, pst.
wellkeptin mindandwell realised 3h
ard
So:
bywisdom;sw +Sru + ta,pp.; su +
Grh+i +ta,Pp.; Su + manasi+ Dhammiyakathaya sandassesi
ata,pp.;su -- upa +Dhr+e+i +
samadapesisamuttejesi
'a,caus.
pp.;su +pati + Vvadh+
sampahamsesi
—M. I. 146;5. I. 112;
la, Pp.
III. 95
With theDhammatalk(He) made
Dhammikampissa the listenersee,observe,inspire,
rakkhāvaranaguttim
andhappy.;sam+Drs +e +s +i,
‘amvidaheyyama—D. I. 61
caus,pst.3. sg;sam+&@ +Da +dpe
Wewouldalsoarrange
forhimright
ts +i, caus.pst.3“.sg.;sam+u(t)
 Dhammiya
+Tj +e +s +i, caus,pst;3".sg.;
sam +pa +Hrs +e +s + i, caus.
pst. 3™.sg.
Dhammiyākathāya sannisinnā
honti—M. I. 161
They havebeensittingtogetherwith a
Dhammadiscussion;sam +ni +Sad +
ta,pp.
Dhammiva katha ariyo va
-
tunhibhavo—M. I. 161
A talkon theDhammaor noble
silence
Dhammuddesāudditthā —M. II. 68
Topicsof theDhammahavebeen
stated;dhamma+ uddesa;u(t) +Drs
+fa,pp.
Dhammuddhaccaviggahitam
manasam—A.II. 157
The mindwhichhasbeenarrested
by agitationconcerningtheDhamma;
samathavipassanādhammesu ..
uddhaccenaviggahitamsuggahitam,
Cy: II. 143;dhamma-- uddhacea+
vi + Grh + i +ta,pp.; manasais
mind or a conditionofmind, mana(s)
+a, der.
Dhammeaveccappasadena
samannagato
—S. IV. 304
Endowedwith rationalfaithin the
Dhamma;sam +anu -- ā + Gam + ta,
DD.
Dhammeneva
Dhamme
ca bhasitemamainiieva
anubandhitabbammafianti-—
A. IV,
299
And,whentheDhamma isexplained,
theythinkthattheyshouldfollowjust
me; mamam + yeva; anu + Ba(n) dh
+1 +tabba,fut. pp.
Dhammeca vinaye ca samgite—Vin.
II, 289
WhentheDhammaand theVinaya
wererehearsed;sam + Gai +ta,pp.
Dhammenabhikkham pariyesitva-
S. III. 239
Havingsoughtalmsin ajust way;pari
+es(fromIs) +i +tva,absol.
Dhammena bhogepariyesitvā —A.
V. 178
Havingsoughtwealthrighteously
Dhammenavinayenasatthusāsanena
katam—Vin. IV. 126
Done (settled) according to the
doctrine,
thedisciplineandthe
instruction
givenbytheteacher
Dhammenasamaggam
uposathakammam-Vin. I. 112
UnanimousUposathaceremony
performedaccordingto thelaw;
cattāro ekattha vasantāsabbeva
sannipatitvāPātimokkhamuddisanti,
tayoParisuddhiuposatham
karonti,
dveaiifiamaniam
Parisuddhiuposatham
karonti
dhammena samaggamnamaholi,
Cy. 1057
Dhammeneva
cakkam
payatteti
~A-
1.110;IHI.147
Dhammesu Dhāretha
(He)makesthewheel proceed Dhammorahadobrahmana
righteously;
pa + Vrt +e +ti, caus. sīlatittho—5. I. 183
pres,3”, sg. Brahmin,Dhammais a pond,
of which Sila (moralvirtue)is
Dhammesu
ācariyamutthi —D. II. the ford
100
Closed
fistof theteacher
in teachings Dhātiyāpamādamanvāya—A. III, 6
Owingtotheinadvertence
ofthe
Dhammesu vicikicchā —
S. III. 106 nurse;pamadam+anu + I +ya,
Doubtin theteachings absol.
Dhammesu
sammāvattitabbam—A. Dhātiyo upatthāpesi—D. II. 19
IV.347 Made nursesattendon; upa +Stha +
Shouldbehaveproperlyin (these) dpe +s + i, caus.pst. 3™.sg.
things:
sammd,adv.; Vrt + i +tabba,
Dhatinamdethaposetum—Vin. I.
269
Dhammoariyebhi vannito —Vin. IV., Give to the nurses to foster (him); Da
204 +e +tha,imper.2". pl.; Pus +e +
TheDhamma
hasbeenpraisedby the tum,caus.inf.
nobles;
vanna+e +i +ta,denom.
pp. Dhatuyanibbindati, pannaya cittam
virāieti—A. II. 164
Dhammo
opasamikoparinibbayiko He takesno interestin theelement
andkeeps theminddetachedby
IV,225 insight;ni + Vi(njd +a +ti, pres.3''.
TheDhamma whichistranquilizing, sg.; vi + Raj + e + ti, caus. pres. 32rd
cooling,
leading
toenlightenmentand Sg.
declared
bytheWell-GoneOne;upa
+Sam+ika, derSpat Vid+e+irt Dharanampariyapunati —Vin. IV.
fa,caus.pp. 305
Learnstheart of memorising
Dhammo
ca me..abhisamito,
maggo
€apatiladdho—S. V. 90 Dharasamphassamsadiyanta—Vin.
TheTruthis realisedandthePathis 11.280
gained
byme;abhi+sam+1+ta, Enioyingthetouchof thecurrent;
PP.;pati +Labh +ta,pp. Svad + aya + nta, caus.prip.
Dhammoca vinayo ea pariyatto - Dharethano tumhe bhikkhave
Vin.II, 285 panditavatthūni?—A. V. 230
Learnt
theDhammaandVinayaby Bhikkhus,doyouremember the
ri heart;
pari +Ap +ta,pp. groundsforcallingoneselfan
 Dharenti
2". pi.; no, interr.p.
Dhārenti antimamdeham
- S. II.
284
Hold thelastbody;Dhr + e +nti,
caus.pres.3''. pi,
Dhāvantam(pi hatthim) anupatitvā
ganhāmi—M. II. 99
I catchup evena runningelephant,
jumping over it; Dhav +a +nta,pr:
p.; anu + Pat + i + tva,absol.; Grh +
na + mi.pres, 1*.sg.
Dhāvantipi ādhāvantipi usselhentipi
appothentipinibbuiihanti pi —Vin.
MEU
(They) run backandforth,cheer,clap
andwrestle;Dhdv +a +nti,pres. 3”.
pl.; u(t) +selhenti,pres. 3. pl.; a +
Sphut + e +nti, caus.pres. 3. pl.; ni
+ Yudh+ya +nti,pres.3%.pl.
Dhiratthu kira jati nama, yatrahi
namajatassajara panhayissati—D.
Il. 22
Shame onthisthingwhatiscalled
birth,wheredecaywill manifestitself
for theone who is born:dhi + ® +
atthu:As +tu, imper.3". sg.; kira,
indcl.; nama,indcl. usedhere in the
senseofboth disgustand
astonishment;Jan + ta, pp.; pa +
Dhiratthu tam dhanalabham—Vin.
IV. 204
Shameon thegainingofthat wealth
Dhutagunesamadayavattati —Vin.
IIL. 15
Dhū makalikampi
Havingobserved punctilious
qualities
heleadsthelife;sam+@+Da +ya,
absol.; Vrt +a +ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Dhuta sallekhavuttino —Vin. I.
197;HE 172
Those who arepunctiliousandslashers
of defilements;Dha +ta,pp.; sam+
Likh + a, der. +vutti
Dhutta ahesumsonda pipasa—
D. Il.
172
Thereweregamblersaddictsandthe
thirsty:a +Ha (Bhi) +a (ho>he)+s
+um,pst. 3. pl.
Dhuram nikkhittamatte —Vin. IV.
128.,297
At theverymomentwhenthe
responsibilityis renounced;ni +Ksip
+ fla,pp. + matta
Dhuramnikkhipati—
Vin. III. 50
Gives up (his) responsibility;ni +
Ksip +a+ ti,pres.3. sg.
Dhuvanahānam
anuiānātu
—Vin. I.
196
Please sanction constant bathing:
dhuva -- nahāna (Skt.snāna);anu
Jain +na +tu,imper.3”.sg.
Dhuvaphalohoti—Vin. IV. 203
Bearsfruits all thetime
Dhuvasīloca hotithitasīloca—A.I.
231
He is of firm andunshakynature;
dhuva,indel.; Stha + i + ta,pp. >
sila
Dhūmakālikampipariyositam
Dhūmakālikam Dhovitvā
vihāramnavakammamdenti —Vin. +i + ta, denom.pp. +tta,der.;
ll, 172 timira + Gya +i +ta, denom. pp.; +
Doa repairwork to a dwellingplace tta, der.
whichhasbeencompletedandgivento
amonktill thesmokeof his funeral Dhotapadakamakkamitum—
Vin. II.
pyrelasts;dhimakalikanti idam 129
yavassacitakadhiimona panfayati To stepon to thesheetkeptfor the
tavaayam vihadroetassevāti evam dryingupof washedfeet;@+Kram +
dhūmakāle apaloketvā i +tum,inf.
katapariyositamvihāramdenti, Cy.
1245;pari +o (ava) +Sa + i +ta, Dhovitum vissaritva —Vin. IV. 261
pp.;Da + e +nti,pres. 3™.pl. Havingforgottento wash;Dhav +a +
i + tum,inf.; vi+ Smr + i + tva,
Dhimakalikamsamanenagotamena absol.
sivakanamsikkhapadam paffiattam
~Vin. II. 288 Dhovitvapatto saudako databbo-
Theruleoftrainingforthedisciples Vin. I. 46
hadbeenlaiddown by therecluse The bowl with watershouldbegiven
Gotama till thesmokeofthe funeral (to thepreceptor)afterwashingit; sa
pyrelasts
( till thetimeofhis death); +udako;Da + tabba,fut. pp.
dhūmakaālikanti yāva samanassa
Parinibbānacitakadhūmo paāhāvati
favakdloti, Cy. 1296;dhiima +kala
+tka,der.;pa +Jia +ape + ta,pp.
Dhūmaggimiva
pāvako—A. IV. 97
Asthefirecoveredwith smoke:
dhiimaggi+ iva
Dhūmam kātum-Vin. I. 205
Tofumigate;
Kr +tum,inf.
Dhūmāyatipi
paiialatipi—Vin. IV.
54
Heappears
assmoking andinflame;
dhiima
+aya +ti, denom.pres,3”.
88.+api;pa +Jval + a + ti + api,
Pres,3",sg
Dhūmāyitattam
timirāyitattam
- S.
I, 122;IHI.124
Smoky andmurkystate;dhitma+aya
 Na
Na akarane Tathagatasitam
pātukaronti —M. II. 45; A. IHI. 214
(akāranena)
The Tathāgatas
do notsmilewithout
reason;pātu +karonti
Na aeeogālhamna atihīnam —
A. IV.
282
Neithertoo high nor too low; ari t o
(ava) + Gah + ta,pp.; ati +Ha +ta,
pp.
Na afiiamaifiiiamvyabadhenti—D. I.
56
Do notobstructeachother;yi +@+
Badh + e + nti, caus.pres. 3". pl.
Na afifiassasutva evamvadami—A.
I. 142
I saythiswithouthearing(thewords)
of another;Sru +tva,absol.; Vad4 a
+mi,pres. 1”sg.
Na attanisamanupassāmi—A. IV.
67
| do notseein me; sam+anu +passa
+mi,pres. 1".sg.
Na attānampātukarissati—D. IHI.
115
Will notrevealhimself:patu +Kr +i
E ssati,fut. 3". sg.
Na adho oloketi —M. II. 137
He does not look down, adho, indcl.;
Oo
(ava) +Lok +e +ti, pres.34,sg.
Na apakkamParipacenti,api ca
Na
paripākam āgamenti panditā—D.
IT.332
The wise do not forcetheunripe
ripe,
buttheyawaitmaturity;a +Pac+ta,
pp.; pari + Pac +e + nti, caus,pres,
3”,pl.; pari +Pac.+a, der;&@+
Gam
+e +nti,pres.3 pl.
Na arahati imāya appamattaya
abhisaliitum—D. I. 91
lt is not properfor you to beirritated
at this trivial matter;Arh +a +ti,
pres. 3". sg.; abhi +Sad +ya +i+
tum,inf.
Na arahati ...dassanāya
upasamkamitum—D. I. 113
Is not worthy,to go andsee;upa+
sam +Kram + i +tum,inf.
Na arahāmi porānam kulavamsam
hāpetum—A. IV. 236
lt is notproperformetogiveup
ancientfamily line; na +Arh +a+
mi, pres, I", sg.; purana + a, der;
Ha +dpe +tum,caus.inf,
Naakappasampanno —A.III. 261
Theonewhois nottrained
in
deportment
Naāyatakeneva papāto—Vin.II. 237
Notabruptlyfallingdown;āvatakena
+ eva
Na iāianti,naviparinamanti
—D.I.
56
Donotshake,donotchange;
Raj(Inj)
Na
+a +nti,pres.3. pl.; vi +pari+
Nam+a +nti,pres. 3". pl,
Nauttānīkaronti—A. I. 73
Donotmakeit plain; uttāaa --karonti
Na uddhamoloketi —M. II. 137
Hedoesnot look up; wddham,indcl.
Naupalabbhati—D. II. 151
Nottobe found;wpa +Labh +ya +
ti, pass, 3”. sg.
Nauposathassaantarayo katabbo -
Vin,I. 126
Nodamage shouldbedoneto the
Uposatha ceremony
Naussahāmi,na visahāmi—Vin. III.
17
[amunable,I cannot:u(t) +Sah +a +
mi,pres.I", sg.; vi + Sah +a +mi,
pres.I", sg.
Naekavacikampi
bhanitabbam
mannati—A.I. 239
(He) thinksthatit is not worthsaying
4singleword;ekavacanampi
vattabbam na, maāhati,Cy. III. 215;
vācāt ika, der.; Bhan -- i t tabba,
fut.pp.: Man +ya +ti, pres: 3”. sg.
Nakatthaciuppajjati,nakuhiāei
uppaiati—M. III. 103
Heisnotbornanywhere;
katthaci,
indel.;
kuhifci,
indcl.;
u(t)+Pad+
va+ti,pass.pres.3. sg.,usedwith
loc,
Na kamma khīyanti, na kammānam
āntopaīiāyati —Vin. II. 181
Activitiesarenotexhausted,theend
Na
ofactivities is not to beseen;Ksi +
iya +nti,pass.pres. 3. pl.; pa +Jia
+ya +ti, pass.pres. 3. sg.
Na kallamassaveyyākaranāya—M.
11.215
It would notbe fittingto declare;
kallam +assa:As +ya(Skt.yat), opt.
3”. sg.
Na kassakiīici dhāreti —A. II. 69
He owesnothingto anybody;Dhr +e
+ti, caus.pres.3™.sg.
Na kāyam onāmeti—M. II. 137
He doesnotmakethebodybend
down;0 +Nam+ e + ti, caus.pres.
See
rad i
Na kifici atthamanubhoti—Vin. IHI.
222
It doesnotserveanypurpose(it is of
no use);anu + Bhii + a + ti, pres.3”.
Sg.
io
Na kifici avacāsi—Vin. III. 220
Don't sayanything:at lactātst
i, doublepst.2". sg.
Na kiāei kukkuccam, na koci
vippatisāro—S. IV. 46
No anyworry,no anyremorse;vi +
pati +Sr or Smr +a, der.
Na kinci nanakaranam
samanupassami—M. II. 86
I don't seeanydifference;sam + anu
+passa +mi,pres. 1".sg.
Na kifici passamipuratova
pacchato va—A. IV. 344
I seenothingin frontor behind;
 Na
purato, pacchato,adv.
Na kiāei maāīati, na kuhiāci
45
He doesnotconceiveanything,
anywhereandwith anybody;Man +ya
+ ti, pres.3. sg.
Na kifici loke upadiyati —M. III.
244;S.IV. 23
Nothingis graspedin theworld;
upa t ā T Da + iva + ti, pass.pres.
3. 82.
Na kira no bhavantokārenti,
dhammo no kāreti —M. III. 10
It is notthemembersbuttheDhamma
thatdealswith us; kira, indcl.; Kr + e
+nti, caus.pres. 3™.pl.
Na kuto ci bhayamsamanupassati,
yadidam silasamvarato—D. I. 69
He doesnot experiencefear from
anydirectionin regardto moral
restrainment;kutoci, indcl,
(Skt.kutascit)
Na kutoei bhogānam upaghāto
āgacchati—A. III. 173
From nowherecomesthedangerto
thewealth;upa +Ghan +ta,pp.
Na kulesu carittam apajjitabbam -
M. I. 470
Shouldnotvisit families;Cay +i 4
tta,der; @+Pad +ya +i +tabba,
fut.pp.
Na kenaci anubandhitabbo —S. III.
95
He shouldnotbe followedby
anyone;anu +Ba(n)dh +i +tabba,
Silt.pp.
Na kenaci pariyayenaiātarūpam
sāditabbam pariyesitabbam- Vin. I,
245
By anymeansgold shouldnotbe
acceptedandsoughtfor; Svad+¢ +i
+tabba,caus.fut. pp.; pari +es
(fromIs) + i + tabba,fut. pp.
Na kenaci loke viggayha titthati-
M. I. 108
Doesnot staycontendingwith
anybodyin theworld; vi + Grh +ya,
meta.absol.; tittha(fromStha) +ti,
pres. 3”. sg.
Na kehici chandodatabbo—Vin. I.
357
Consent should not be given (sent)by
anyones;Da +tabba,fut. pp.
Nakkhattapadani uggahetabbani
sakalani va ekadesaniva —Vin. II.
217
The positionofthe lunarmansions
shouldbe learnt,wholelyor partly;
u(t) +Grh +e +tabba,fut. pp.
Nakkhattapadāni na jananti—Vin.
II. 217
(They)donotknowtheposition
ofthe
lunarmansions;Jaén +nd +nti,pres.
2rd
a Dh
Nakkhattāni tārakarūpāni
ullokeyyāsi —A. IV. 86
Youshouldlookonconstellations;
u(f)
ELok -- eyyāsi,opt.2'4,s.
Nakkhamati samanupassitum
—D.II.
Nakhasikhāyam Na kho
67 Jan +nd +mi,pres. 1". sg.;passa +
It is notaggreeableto consider;na + mi,pres. I". sg.
Ksam+a +ti, pres. 3™.sg.; sam +
anu +passa +1 +tum, inf. Na kho Ananda arahati savako
sattharamanubandhitumyadidam
Nakhasikhayampamsum aropetva- suttam geyyam veyyakaranassa hetu
8.V. 466 —M. III. 115
Havingputa bit of soil on thetip of Ānanda,it is notproperfor a disciple
thenail;@ +Ruh +e +tvd,caus. to follow theteacherfor thereason
absol. ofdiscourses,chantingandexposition;
Arh +a +ti, pres. 3. sg.; anu +
Nakhulukhulukārakam pattam Ba(n)dh +i +tum,inf.; suttam
dhovati—M. II. 138 geyyamveyyākaranassahetu,
Hedoesnotwashthebowl makingthe unusualgrammaticalexpression,the
soundkhulukhulu;Dha@
+a +
ti, pres. termhetudoesnot agree with
GP E. suttam,geyyam
Nakhenabhesaiiamādāya—
Vin. I. Na kho idam orakam bhavissati
273 yathayimemanussasakkaccam
Havingtakenmedicineby thenail;@ + bhattamkaronti —Vin. IV. 75
Dā t ya, absol. Thiswill notbesomething
simpleas
thesepeoplegive alms respectfully;
Nakhenabhesajjamolumpetva- ora +ka, der.;yatha + ime;
Vin. I. 278 sakkaccam,indel.; Kr +6 + nti,pres.
Having
caused
topickupmedicine TARI
withthenail; nakhenabhesajjam
odahitva,
pakkhipitvati
attho,Cy. V. Na kho Upali bhikkhuni samgham
1117;
0 +Lu(m)p+e +tva,caus. bhindati—Vin. II. 204
absol. Upali, a bhikkhunidoesnotbreak
theSamgha;Bhi(n)d +a +ti, pres.
Nakhehigattāni vilikhitvā —Vin. II. UI Sg.
133
Havingscratchedthelimbswith (her) Na kho te etampatirāpam—M. I.
nails;vi +Likh +i + twa,absol. 123;5. II. 281,tetam
This is notproperfor you; nā, neg:p.;
Nakhoayyekiāei—M. I. 125 kho, indcl.
Nothing,
madam;ayve,voc.sg.of
ayyā Na kho te sandhiyatipurimena va
pacchimampacchimenava purimam
Nakhoaham
āvusonaiānāmina —M. I. 232
passāmi—A. V. 197 Your latter(statement)is not
Itis notthatI don't know, I don't see; consistentwith the former andthe
Na kho
formerwith thelatter;pura +ima,
der.;paccha+ima,der.;sam +Dha
+tya + ti, pass.pres. 3. sg.
Na kho te Sāriputta punapi
evarūpameittam uppādetabbam-
M. I. 459
Sāriputta,you shouldnotcauseto have
a thoughtof thiskind again;puna +
api; u(t) +Pad + e + tabba,caus.fitt.
pp.
Na khottha bhanteekamsena—A. I.
225
Venerablesir, it is not necessarilyso
here;na + kho +ettha
Na kho Dabbadabbaevam
nibbethenti- Vin. II. 79
Dabba,dabbas(intelligentones)donot
evadethequestionlike this;mi+ Vest
+e + nti,pres. 3”. pl.
Na kho nametambho, evam
bhavissati— D. I. 180
Sir,thiswill neverhappen
thus;nama
+etam
Na kho panahamabhijanami tesu
papakam cittam uppadeta—M. I. 79
I do notrememberthatI have
harbouredanill-will towardsthem:
pana +aham;abhi +Jan +na + mi,
pres. I". sg.; u(t) + Pad + e + tu,
caus.der.
Na kho panāhamkassacipāpam
cetemi— A. I. 192
I do notcontriveanevil to anybody;
Cet +e + mi,pres. 1".sg.
Nakhopanetam
Ananda
tam
Na kho
padesamsamanupassami...yattha
Tathagatoatthamamsariram
nikkhipeyya —D. II. 198-9
Ananda,I don’tseethatplacewhere
theTathagatalaysdown (his)eighth
body(laysdownhisbodyeighth
time);
pana + etam; sam +anu + passa +
mi,pres. I". sg.; ni +Ksip +eyya,
opt. 3". sg.
Na kho panetamevamdatthabbam-
M. 1.80, 249; II. 82
It shouldnotbe understoodthisway;
Drs + tabba,fut.pp.
Na kho me āvusovattati—Vin. I.
116
I amnot usedto,my dear;Vrt +a +ti,
pres. 3™.sg.
Na kho metampatirāpam yamme
pekkhamanassamanussabhito
kālam kareyya—D. II. 340
Thisis notproperformethata human
beingwoulddie, while I amlooking
on; me +etam;pekkha +mana,pr.
p.; kalam+Kr +eyya,opt.3”.sg.
Na kho metampatirūpam yoham
anāmantetvāupatthākeanpaloketvā
bhikkhusamgham parinibbāyeyyam
—D. II. 99
Thisis notfit formethatI should
enterinto Parinibbāna,without
addressingtheattendants
andtaking
leaveof thecommunityof bhikkhus;
a +manta+e +tvd,denom. absol.;
an +apa +Lok +e +tv, absol.;
pari + ni + Va +ya +eyyam,opt.
IWA,
Na khometampatirūpamyoham
Nakho
akinnoviharami —D. II. 30
Thisis notfit for methatI live a
hecticlife; yo +aham;a +Kir +ta,
pp.
Nakho metampatirūpam yoham
evarūpeadhikarane osakkeyyam-
Vin.II. 299
It is notfit for me thatI shouldrecede
insucha legalquestionasthis;o +
Svask+eyyam,opt. 1", sg.
Nakho metampatiripam yoham
pubbeappatisamviditosamanam
Gotamamdassanāya
upasamkameyyam— M. II. 141
It isnotfit for methatI shouldgo and
seetherecluseGotamawithoutgiving
priornotice;a +pati +sam + Vid + i
+ la, pp.; upa + sam + Kram + +i, pst. 3. Sg.
eyvam,
opt. I". sg.
Nakho metambhanteruecati —M.
1.381
Venerable
sir, | don’t like this;me +
etam;Ruc +ya +ti, pass.pres. 3”.
Sg,
NakhomesoBhagavāsammukhā
dittho,
apicasuto—D.II. 268
ThatBlessdOne hasnotbeenseenby
me,faceto face,butheard(of him):
Dr§ +ta,pp.;Sru +ta,pp.;
sammukhā,opp.parammukha
IV.265
Thevenerable
Anuruddhadoesnot
appreciate;
kho +avyo;Svad+aya+
li, caus. pres, 3", Sg.
Nakhvahametthasaddhaya
Nagaram
gacchami— S. V. 221
I do notgo by faithon thismatter;na
+kho +aham +ettha:indcl.
Na khvetthasukaram ekamsena
vyākātum—A. I. 120
It is noteasyto give a directansweron
this matter;na +kho +ettha;vi + ā
+ Kr +tuminf:(kartum>kattum>
kātum)
Nagaradvārethakite bahinagare
vasitvā—Vin. IV. 54
Havingstayedoutsidewhenthecity
gatewasclosed;Stak + i + ta,pp.; Vas
+i +twa,absol.
Nagaradvāreparipati —Vin. IV. 109
Fell downatthecity gate;pari +Pat
Ksip +ta,pp.
Nagaramhanippateyyam—
Vin. I.
342
May |flee fromthecity; ni + Pat +
eyyam,opt. I". sg.
Nagaram iddhaficevaphitanca
bahujanamakinnamanussam
vuddhivepullappattam—
S. Il. 106
A city,prosperous,
rich,well
populatedandreachedthehighestlimit
of growth;Rdh+ta,pp; Sphay+ta,
pp.; @+ Kir + ta,pp + manussa;
vuddhi + vipula +ya, der. +pa +Ap
+ fa, pp.
 Nagaram
Nagaramdalhuddapam
dalhapakaratoranam— S. IV. 194
City with strongramparts,walls and
arches;dalha + uddapa;dalha +
Pākāra + torana
Nagaram māpenti—
D. II. 86
Buildupa city;Ma +dpe+nti,caus.
pres. 3”. pl.
Nagarassasamanta—D. II. 83
All roundthecity; samanta,indcl.
Nagganahayeyya— Vin. IV. 278
Shouldtakebathnaked:Sna + 6) +
evya,opt. 3. sg.
Nagga pindaya caranti —Vin. I. 90
(They) go on almscollectionnaked
Naggiyam titthiyasamadanam-
Vin. I. 305
Nakednessis anobservance of the
heretics;nagga + iya, der.: tittha +
iva, der.
Na ca adduvenaadduvamāropetvā
nisīdati—M. II. 138
He doesnotsit keepingone kneeover
theother;@+Ruh +e +twa,caus.
absol.
Na ca adduvenaadduvamghattento
gacehati
—M. II. 137
He doesnot walk strikingone knee
with theother;ghatta + e +nta,
denom.pr.p.
Na ca odanamifijaasambhinna
kāyampavisati —M. II. 138
The rice kerneldoesnotgo to the
stomachunchewed:q +sam +Bhid
Naea Na ea Na cāpi
F ra,pp.; pa +Vi 1.at ti, pres,374
Hedoesnotwalk strikingoneankle surpassby thecurry;@ +Lup +a,
sg.
withtheother der.;ati +Nam +e +ti, caus.pres.
aaa
Na ca odanamifija mukhe avasittha
Naeadāni tato pacchā—D. II. 269
hoti —M. I. 138
Not now, after that; aa +ca +idani; Na ca mamakyaci katthaci
The rice kerneldoesnot remainin the
paccha,indcl. kiācanamnatthi —A. II. 177
mouth; ava + Sis + fa, pp.
I don'thaveanything,anywhere;kvaci,
Nacanamasadhammukkamsana katthaci, indcl.
Na ea kāyabalenagacchati—M. II.
bhavissati, paradhammavambhana,
137
ayatane ca dhammadesana—M. I. Na ca mam arati saheyya—M. I. 33
He doesnot moveon with physical
523;A. 1.218 Jealousywould notovercomeme;Sah
strength
It isstrangethatthereis no praising +eyya,opt.3. sg.
ofone’sown doctrineanddisparaging
Na ea kāyasmim cīvaramallinam,
thedoctrineof others,but the Na ea mamdhammādhikaranam
na ca kayasmimapakkattham—M.
preaching of thedoctrineat theright vihesesi
—M. II. 146;III. 270,
Il. 139
context; sa +dhamma+ ukkamsana: vihethesi;5. IV. 63
Therobeis notstucktothebodyand u(t)+Krs +ana,der;para +
Hedidnotcausetotroublemefor
not fallenaway from thebody;a +Li dhamma
+ vambhana:Vambh+ana,
thereasonof dhamma;dhamma+
+ fa, pp.; apa + Krs +ta,pp:
der. adhikarana,cp. yatvādhikaranamor
yatodhikaramam,S.1V. 104; vi +
Na ca kaye civaram accukkattham, Nacapanate āyasmantāiīranti -
Hims +e +s + i, caus.pst. 3". sg.;
nacaaccokkattham
—M. II. 139 Vin.I. 237 vi +Hid + e+ s + i, caus.pst.
The robehasnotgonetoohighandtoo Thosevenerables
do notdigestit 2rd +
Sane. gS
low on thebody;ati +u(t) + Krs +ta,
(they
findnogoodin their
Pp.; ati + o + Krs + ta,pp. Misrepresentation);
Jir +a + nti, Na ca meevarūpī dhammī kathā
pres. 3”. pl. sutapubbā—M. III. 261
Na eakiāci lokeupādiyati—S. II. I haveneverheardbeforea Dhamma
82 Naeapanassasulabharūpo talk ofthis kind; Sru + ta,pp +pubba
Nothingintheworldisgrasped; Samasamo pafiaya —A. I. 225
upa t ā t Da +iya + ti, pass.pres. Itisnoteasytofindanybody equal Na ea vipekkhamānogacchati—M.
3” sg. withhimin termsof insight;pana + Il. 137
assa He doesnotgo lookingaround;vi +
Na ca kevalam paripūram
pekkha +mana,pr.p.
brahmacariyam āvikatam Nacapāninā
hanukam
upādāya
uttānīkatam
—D. III. 121 nisidati —M. II. 138 Na ea hapetivacanam—Vin. II. 202
Theentiremeaning
of thehighest
way Hedoesnotsit,supporting
the Doesnotcauseto misstheword; Ha
oflifehasnotbeenfullyekposed
and jawwithpalm;upa+a4+Da +ya, +dpe + ti, caus.pres.3”. sg.
explained;dvi(s) +Kr + ta,pp.; absol.
ullana + kata
Na cāpi vittenaiaram vihanti —M.
Naeabyaiianena
ālopamatināmeti II. 73
Nacagopphakena
gopphakam —M. II, 138 And also,it doesnotstopold age
ghattento
gaechati
—M. II. 137 Hedoesnotmakethemorselof food by wealth;vi +Han +ti, pres. 33"'.
sg.
 Na caham
Najana Najjo Na tava

Na caham na patibalo yavadattham intelligence(grown up man);wiāāu3:

datum?—Vin. I. 222 janalapanattham
na karonti, sokasāyikānāma māyākārā,
ta, der.; pa + Ap + und + i, stg
AmI notcapableof givingasmuchas labhasakkarasilokanisamsattham kumbhathūnikānāmaghatakena
Sg.
theyneed?;yava+ (d) +attham;Da + naiti mamiano iānātūti —M. I. 468 kīlantā, Cy. 931
tum,inf. Nottocheatpeople,not to deceive
Na cetanayakaraniyam —A. V, 2
people,notto havegains,honourand Nattham na gavesanti—A. II. 249
Nothingis theretobedonebywill:Kr fameandnot to introduceoneselfto (They) do not make a search for
+aniya,fut. pp.
viiiati—D. II. 82ITI. 99; S. V. 159 others;jana + kuhana +attham;Jan whatis lost;Nas + ta,pp.; gava +
Therewasnot,therewill not beand +nd +tu,imper.3”.sg. es (fromIs) +a +nti,pres. 3”. pl.
Na cevaaiiiamaniiampatipucchanti,
thereis currentlynot to be found:aa
na pativicaranti —A. I. 72-3 Naiio maīiie vissandati—A. IV. 394 Na tam apapunitvaviriyassa
* ca + a+ Hit (Bhii)(Skt.abhiit),pst.
Theydonotguestion eachotheranddo Overflowsas if rivers;mafifie,indcl. santhānambhavissati—M. I. 481
3”. sg.; Bhi +at+it+ ssati,fut, 3”.
notmakeaninquiry;pati+Prch+ya usedto suggest;vi +Syand+ a + ti, Withoutreachingit therewill be no
sg; Vid +ya+ ti, pass.pres. 3”. sg.;
+nti,pres.3”.pl.; pati +vi +Car+ pres.3. sg. stopping
of endeavour;
a +pa +Ap +
etarahi, indcl. :
a +nti, pres. 3™.pl. (uinā t i t tva,absol.;sam +Stha +
Najjoyatha ana, der.
Na ciram āvuso, tīni vassāni—S. IV.
Na ceva sampayissanti,uttarifica macchaganasamghasevita —A. III.
402
vighātamāpaiiissanti—S. V. 109 52 Na tam parisam apasadeti—M. II.
Not too long, friend,only threeyears
Theywill notbeabletoanswer, further Justasriverswith a hoardof fish; 140
theywill cometo vexation;sam+pa maccha+gana +samgha+Sev + i He doesnotcauseto displeasethat
Na ciram kilisseyyum—D. III. 156
+a+ Ya +i+ ssanti,fut. 3”. pl; + ta, pp.; two words, gana and gathering;a +pa +Sad +e +ti, caus,
Should not be soiled for a
uttarim,adv; @+ Pad +ya+it+ samgha, occur together in this pres.3. sg.
long time:Kii? +ya +evyum,
ssanti,fut. 3".pl. phrase, both are collective nouns
Pass. opt. 3. pl.
Na tam parisam ussadeti—M. Il.
Na codanayataritabbam, puggalo Najjo yathavarivahava sagaram- 140
Na ciram sammasattāho—
Vin. Il.
upaparikkhitabbo —M. II. 241 A. II. 56; III. 53 He doesnotcauseto flatterthat
182
Oneshouldnotgobymereaccusation, lustasrivers,thecarriersof water,go gathering;u(t) +Sad + e + fi, caus.
Not too long, friend,it is just seven
thecharacter
of thepersonshouldalso totheocean;vari + vahā+ iva pres.3™.sg.
days;ciram, indel.; samma,indcl.:
beexamined;Tr +a +i +tabba,fut.
satta + aho
PD.:upat pari +Tks+i +tabba, fill. Natapubbakobhikkhu —Vin. IV. 197 Na tam yaceyassapiyam jigimse -
Pp. A bhikkhu
whohadformerly
beenan Vin. III. 147
Na eirasseva —D.II. 35; A. ITT. 119
actor Oneshouldnotbeghimwhose
Very soon;na, neg.P; Cirassa,indel.;
Naccakimevamvadanti— Vin. II. 10 friendlinessis ekpected:
Yāc' e,opt.
eva, emph.p
(They)saythustothedancing
girl;Vad Natānampi
natakānampi 3'd,sg.;Ji +e,desid.opt.3™.sg.
+a +nti,pres,3™.pl. lamghikānampi
sokaiihāyikānampi
Na cirassevaantaradhāyati—M. IHI.
158 kumbhathūnikānampi
—Vin. IV. Natāvatakena
tutthikaranīyā—A.
Naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā 285 III. 206
Disappearsin no time:antara +Dhā
pativirato —D. I. 5 Totheorganisers
of a play,actorsofa You mustnotbecomplacentwithiust
+ya +ti, pres. 3. sg.
Refrained
fromdancing
singing
music play,
tumblers,
magicperformers
and thatmuch;Tus+ti,der; Kr +aniya,
andshows( puppet
shows?);
nacca+ to players with small pots; nata nama fit. pp.
gita + vadita + vistikadassana yenātakam nātenti,natakānāmaya
haccanti,
lamghikānāmaye Na tava tam khiyati yava sa na
Najanakuhanattham
na vamsavarattādisu
lamghanakammamvutthati —Vin. I. 240
 Na tava
mage
It is notexhausteduntil shegetsup;
Ksi +ya +ti,pass.pres.3™.sg.;vi +
u(t) + Stha + ti, pres. 3". sg.
Na tava therenaudakam
patiggahetabbamyava na sabbe
bhuttāvino honti —Vin. II. 214
The watershouldnotbeaccepted
by theelderuntil all havefinished
themeal;pati+Grh +e.+tabba,
fut. pp.; vava, indel.; Bhuj +
tavi, pp.
302
And yet I do notexpress(my) view;
tava,indcl.; avi + Kr +0 + mi,pres.
oesSon
Na tavayamdhammapariyayo
patibhāsi —A. IV. 381
This modeof discourse did not come
(to my mind) until now; tava +ayam;
pati +Bha +s+ i, pst. 3”. sg.
Na tavaham imam sallam
aharissami, yava na tam purisam
janami, yenamhi viddho —M. I. 429
I shallnottakethisdartout until I
know themanby whomI wasshot
at; (ava is relativetoyava; @+ Hr
+i + ssami, fut. 1". sg. Jan + na
+ mi, pres. 1". sg.; yena +amhi:
As +mi, meta.pres. 1".sg.; Vyadh
+ fa, pp.
Na tavahampapima
Parinibbāyissāmi —D. II. 104
O Evil One, I will notenterinto
Parinibbānauntil; tava +aham;
Pari +ni+ Va +ya+i+ ssami,
fai. I", sg.
Natthi
Natiyā sati āgatigati hoti —S. II. 67
Thereis comingin andgoingoutwhen
thereis a bent(of mind);Nam+fi,
der.; āgati +gati
Na te Tathāgatassasamviiianti—M.
1.318
They arenotto be foundin the
Tathagata;sam + Vid +ya +nti,pass,
pres...3™.
pil.
Nattiteatobhayam—
M. II. 101
You don't havefearfromhere
Natthāvuso dāyakā natthi kārakā-
Vin. IV. 254
Sirs, thereare neitherdonorsnor
suppliers;natthi + Gvuso;natthi,
indcl., used withpl. sense.
Natthi attakare natthi parakare
natthi purisakare —D. I. 53
Thereis nothingtobedonebyself,
byothersandbya person;kare
(=karo),a Magadhiform; Kr +ya,
Sut.pp.; karya> karra > kara
Natthiattakaronatthiparakaro-
A. IHI.338
Thereis nothingtobedonebyoneself
or by others
Natthiattasamam pemam—5.1.6
Thereis nolovecomparable
tosell-
love
Natthi kifici uttarim karaniyam -
M. I. 271
Thereis nothingtobedoneany
further;
na+atthi,pres.3”.sg.;or
natthi, indcl.; uttarim, adv.; Kr +
aniya,fut. pp.
Natthi
Natthikifici brahmuno adittham -
D.I. 222
Thereisnothingunseen
bythe
Brahma;
a +Drs +ta,pp.
Natthicetamamhesu—D. I. 3
Thisis notin us;ca +etam
Natthitato nidanam papam—
D. I.
52
There is no demerit from that source
Natthitam safifojanam yena
safiojanena samyuttoCitto
gahapatipuna imam lokam
agaccheyya —5. IV. 301
Thereis no thatfetter,boundby which
thehouseholderCitta would come
backtothisworld again;sam+ Yuj +
ta,pp.; @ +gaccha + eyya,opt. 3”.
Sg.
Natthitayā saddhim āhārūpahāro -
Vin.ITI. 136
Wehaveno dealingwithyou; na +As
+tl; Ghartipahara,idiomatic
expression
Natthititti —A. I. 261
Thereis no satisfaction:Trp + ti, der.
Natthitumhetthakiāei—D. II. 331
Thereis nothingherefor you; fumham
+ettha;kim +ci, Skt. kificit
Natthituyhamduggati—Vin. IV. 7
Youhaveno miserablestateof life; du
+gati
Natthitebhikkhavematanatthi
pitayeteupatthaheyyum
—Vin.I.
302
Na tvam
Bhikkhus,you haveno mother,no
fatherwho wouldattendon you:na +
atthi; upa +Stha +eyyum,opt. 3°.
pl.
Natthidāni punabbhavo—S. I. 200;
V.432;A.II. I; IV. 105;Vin. I. Il
Now, thereis no morebecoming;
natthi + idāni; puna -- bhava
Natthi pannasamaabha — S. IL.6
Thereis no radiancecomparableto
wisdom
Natthi hetu,natthi paccayo—D. I.
53
There is no cause, no condition
Natthuto dinnam mukhato uggacchi
—Vin. I. 271
The medicinegiventhroughthenose
cameoutthroughthemouth;Dd +fa,
pp.;u(t)+gaccha
+i, pst.3”.sg.
Natthumadamsu—Vin. III. 83
Gavea medicaltreatment
throughthe
nose;a +Da + a + imsu,doublepst.
3”,pil.
Na tvamimamdhammavinayam
Ajanasi, ahamimam
dhammavinayamajanami, kim
tvam imamdhammayvinayam
Ajanissasi,miccha patipanno
tvamasi,ahamasmisamma
patipanno,sahitamme asahitamte,
pure vacaniyampacchaavaca,
pacchavacaniyampure avaca,
avicinnam te viparavattam, aropito
te vado, niggahitosi,cara
vādappamokkhāya,nibbethehiva
sacepahosi—
D. I. 8; M. IT.2,243-4;
 Natvam
S. HI. 12,the order of phrasesis a
bit different
You do notunderstandthisdoctrine
anddisciplineclearly,I do understand
thisdoctrineanddisciplineclearly,
will you understand this doctrineand
disciplineclearly?,you havefollowed
awrongway,I havefollowedtheright
way, I havestudiedyou havenot,you
saidlaterwhatwasto be saidearlier.
you saidearlywhatwasto be said
later,you havenotproperlypractised
butturnedback,you havebeen
challenged,you arerefuted,go and
learnto getyourselfreleasedfrom
contention;or disentangleyourself,if
possible.;this is called
viggahikakatha:contentioustalk:
pati + Pad + ta,pp.; sahita:sam +
Dha + i + ta,pp.; Vac+ aniya,fut.
pp.;a +Vac+a,pst.3. sg; a+ vi +
Car + ta,pp.; vi +para + Vrt + ta,
pp.; 4+ Ruh +e + i + ta, caus.pp.;
cara: imper.2". sg. ; vada +
pamokkha; ni (s) + Vist+ e + hi,
caus. imper.2". sg.; pa + Hai (Bhii) +
a +si,pres.2". sg.
Na tvam kassacidukkhassajanasi -
M. II. 56
You know nothing ofany pain;Jan +
na +si, pres. 2". sg.
Natvevatappaccayavacam
bhindāma—M. IHI. 157
Weneverspeakforthatreason;
na +
tu +eva; tam(tat) +pati + aya;
vacambhindati is an idiomatic
expressionfor talking
Nadani
And yet he hasnotdonehis dutybythe
parentsor repaidthem;pati +Kr +ta,
DP-
Natvevāham
Ānandakenaci
pariyāyena samghagatāya
dakkhinaya pātipuggalikam
dakkhinam mahapphalataram
vadāmi —M. III. 256
I neversayĀnanda,thattheoffering
madeto one particularpersonis
greaterin meritthantheofferingmade
to theSamgha;na + tu +eva +aham;
Vad+ a +mi,pres. I! sg.
Natvevaham
Gamanikenaci
pariyāyenaiātarūparaiatam
sāditabbam pariyesitabbanti
vadāmi—
Vin. II. 297
Villageheadman, I neversaythat
gold andsilver,in whateverway,
shouldbeappropriated
andsearched
for; Svad + e + i + tabba,caus.fit.
Pp.;pari +es(fromIs) +i +tabba,
Sut.pp.
Nadāniaiia ovādoiddhobhavissati,
tanfevadani udanam ayyo
Cūlapanthakopunappunam
bhanissati —Vin. IV. 54
Todaytheinstruction
will notbe
successful,
MasterCūlapanthaka will
repeat
nowtheverysameudāna, the
utterance;na ' idāni; idāni, indcl.;
tam +yeva +idéni; puna +puna;
Bhan + i + ssati,fut. 3. sg.
Nadanitetuphibhavassa
kalo—D.L.
95
Now,thisis notthetimeforyoutobe
silent; na + idani, indcl.
Nadani
Nadanitena ciram jivitabbam
bhavissati—D. II. 22
Now,heshouldnothaveto live long;
Jiv +i +tabba,fut.pp.
Nadimajjhogahetva nahatvaca
pivitvāca paceuttaritvā—D. II. 134
Havingplungedintotheriverand
comeoutof it afterbathingand
drinking; adhi + 0 (ava) + Gah + e
+tvd,caus.absol.; Sna + tvd,meta.
absol.;Pa or Pi +i + tv, absol.;pati
+u(t)+ Tr +i +tvd,absol.
Nadiyava sighasotayapavaheyya-
S.IL.88
Hewouldletit floatona river,
flowingdown swiftly; sigha +sota;
pa + Vah+e +evya,caus,opt. 3”.
Sg.
Io
Nadiyāsoteopilāpeyyāsi —M. II. 64
Youshouldlet it float in themidsteam
ofthe river;0 (ava) + Plu +ape +
eyyadsi,
caus.opt. 2". sg.
Nadiyasotenavuyhamanam
- S. IV.
179
Beingcarriedawaybytheflowofthe
river;Wah
+ya +mana,
pass.prp.
Nadighamayum
labhatedhanena-
M. II. 73
Onedoesnotgetlonglifebywealth;
Labh+a +te,pres.mid.3. sg.
Nadica sandati setaka supatittha
ramanīyā
—M. I. 167
A river,which is white,hasgoodfords
andattractive,
flowsdowntoo;Syand
ta ti, pres,3". sg.; su +pa+
tittha;Ram+ antya,fut.pp.
Na dullabha
Nadīpabbateyyūpamam iīvitam
manussānam—A. IV 137
The life of humanbeingsis iust like
a river flowing froma mountain;
pabbata + eyya,der.+upama
Nadi pabbateyyadiramgama
sighasotaharaharini— A. III. 64
Mountainstream,goingafar,flowing
downswiftly,andcarryingwhatis to
be carried;pabbata + eyya,der.; Hr
+ya,fut.pp.; hārya- hāra, like
siirya >siira; hara + int
Nadi pura udakassa, samatittika
kakapeyya— D. I. 244;Vin. I. 230,
samatitthika
The river is full of water,full to
thebrim,drinkableevenby the
crows; with theroot Pr, gen.is
usedfor instr.sense;kaka + Pa +
eyya,der..
Nadimukhekhipam uddeyya
(oddeyya)
—A.I. 33,287
Wouldthrowa fishingnetoverthe
mouthofa river;u(t) +Di +a +eyya,
opt. 3. sg.; monosyllabicroots
endingwith i, ī or u, ā are gunated
with theconiugationalsign, ī t a —e
(NT-- a t ti —neti)andū t a —o
(Bhat+ a + ti = bhoti)
Na dukkaram aradhetum—
Vin. III.
102
Notdifficulttosatisfy;@+Radh+e
+ tum,inf.
Na dullabha pacchapisavanaya-
M. II. 2
It is nottoo difficult to hearevenata
latertime;du + Labh
 Na nahayati
Na nu Nanu Na patisallekhita

Na nahayati,na vilimpati, na
bhattambhuāiati, na kammantam
payoleti—A. III. 57
(He) doesnottakebath,doesnot
anoint,doesnot takefood anddoesnot
do anywork; Sn@+ya + ti, meta.
pres.3". sg.; vi +Li(m)p +a +ti,
-) pa + Yuj +e + ti, caus.pres.
Na nāyam kevalo paripūro
bāladhammo?—M. I. 138
Isn'tit a sheerstupidity?;
na +nu +
ayam,;pari + Pr + a, der.
Na nibbidaya na virāgāya na
nirodhāya na upasamāyana
abhinfiayana sambodhayana
nibbānāya samvattati—D. I. 189;
M. III. 114 (samvattanti)
This doesnot leadto
disinterestedness,detachment,
cessation,calmness,higher
knowledge,realisationandnibbana:
ni +Vid + a, der.; vi + Raj +a, der;
ni + Rudh +a,der.;upa +Sam + a,
der.; abhi +Jia; sam +Budh + a,
der.;sam + Vrt+a +ti, pres. 3”. Sg.
Na nimittaggahi nanuvyanjanageahi
—D. I. 70; S.1V.104
The onewho doesnottaketheshape
andthefeatures(into mind):nimitta4
Grh +i, der.; na + anu 3 byahiana 3
gāhī
Nanu ayyo Udāyi vattabbo?—
Vin.
III, 135
MasterUdāyishouldhavebeen
informed, shouldn't have he? Vac +
tabba,fut. pp.
Nanu avocumha?-Vin. IV. 54
Didn't we say? ; aamu,interrp.;
a t lac t (u) +mha,root redup.,
pst. 1".pl.
Nanu āvuso ācikkhitabbam? —Vin.
IV. 84
Brother,it shouldbe informed,
shouldn'tit ? ; @ +Khya +i +tabba,
intens.fut. pp.
Nanu Avusotathevatam hoti? —Vin.
II. 22
Brother,it is iust thesame,isn't it?;
tathā,indel. +eva,emph.p.
Nanu Avusopatigacceva
acikkhitabbam?
—Vin. II. 166
; IV.
44
Brothers,it shouldbe informedin
advance,shouldn'tit?;patigacceva,
indel.
Nanuavusopucchitabbam? —Vin.
IV. 84
Brother,it shouldbeasked,
shouldn’tit?; Prch +ya +i +
tabba,fut.pp.
Na nu evam santetesam
samanabrāhmanānam
appātihīrakatam bhāsitam
sampajjati? —D. I. 193;M. I. 33,
(tassapurisassa)
This beingso, wouldn’tit bea
meaningless
talkof thoserecluses
andbrahmins?;na, neg.p.; nu,interr
p.; As +nta,pr.p.; a+ patit hira +
ka +ta,der.,hira is a contracted
form ofhariya from Hr +ya; Bhas+
i +ta,pp.;sam+Pad +ya +ti,pass:
pres. 3. sg.
Nanutvamavuso maya vutto? —Vin.
II. 200
Weren'tyou told by me,brother?;Vac
+ta,pp.
Na nu nama tinena va pannena va
paticchadetvaagantabbam?—Vin.
IHI.212
Causingyou to becovered with
grassor leaves,you shouldhave
come,isn’tthatso?; na nu nama,
indcl.expressingbewilderment;
pati +Chad +e +tvd,caus.absol.;
a +Gam+ tabba,fut. pp.
Na nu namavissatthenavivatena
dhammodesetabbo— Vin. IV. 21
Dhamma shouldbeexplainedwitha
clearvoiceandovertly,isn’tthatso!;
vissatthenati
suniggatenasaddena,
Cy.750;vi +Srj +ta,pp.; vit Vr +
ta,Pp. ; Dr§ +e +tabba,caus.fut.
pp.
Nanunāmasakam gharam
gantabbam? —Vin. III. 16
Youshouldhavetogotoyourown
house,shouldn'tyou?
NanuBhagavāpassitabbo?
—Vin.
IV. 104
YoushouldseetheBlessedOne,
shouldn’t
you?;
passa+i +tabba,
fut.pp.
Nanumamsammaiānāsi,andhe
mātāpitaro
posemīti?
—M.II. 48
Don'tyouknowme, friend,thatI take
careof (my) blind parents?;Pus + e +
mt,caus.pres, 1. sg. + iti
Nanesam
i
attamano
assa—
Vin. I. 7.
219
He wouldnotbehappyaboutthem;
As +ya (Skt.yat), opt.3™.sg.
Nandamatuyanivesane—A. IV. 64
In the residence of Nanda’s mother
Nandinirodhā dukkhanirodho —M.
III. 267
Dukkhaceasesto existdependingon
thecessationofdesire
Nandim samanvāneti—M. III. 188
Bringsdesireintoplayaccordingly;
tanhamsamanvanetianuppavatteti,
Cy. V.3; sam +anu +a +Ni+ a + ti,
pres. 3”. sg.
Nandi dukkhassamulam—M. I. 6
Desireis theroot of suffering
Nanvāhambhantehato ettāvatā?-
Vin. II. 292
Venerablesir,haven'tI been
destroyedby this much?;nanu
+aham;Han +ta,pp.; ettavata,
indel.
Na pakkamitabbamapi
panuiiamānena—A. IV. 367
The oneshouldnot leave(thatplace)
evenif he is beingchasedout;pa +
Kram +i +tabba,fut. pp.; pa +Nud
+ ya + mana, pass. prp.
Na patisallekhita hoti na
patisallanaramo
—A. II. 261
He is neitherpruninghimselfnor
takinginterestin meditation;pati +
sam+Likh +e +i +tu,caus.der.;
pati +sam +Li + ana,der. +a +
Ram +a, der.
 Na padakkhinam
Na padakkhinamganhanti—A. HI.
198
Do not takeup (understand)rightly:
Grh +na + nti,pres. 3™.
>
pl.
Na parassaāroceyya—D. I. 224
Would not informanother;ā -- Ruc 2-
e + eyya;caus. opt. 3". sg.
Na parimuccati jatiya
jaramaranena sokehi paridevehi
dukkhehi domanassehiupāyāsehi,
na parimuccati dukkhasmāti
vadāmi— M. I. 8; S. II. 24
death,sorrow,lamentation,pain,
displeasureandunrest,I saythathe is
+ya + ti, pass.pres. 3%.sg.; Vad +a
+mi,pres. I*. sg.
Na pariyapunanti —Vin. I. 121
Do not meetthe requirement;pari +
Ap +una +nti, pres. 3”. pl.
Na padakukkuceamāpaiiati —M. II.
138
He doesnotmovehis legsnervously
Na Punno dabbigāho—M. II. 157
You arenotevenfit to becalled
Punna,thespoonholder:dabhi +Grh
+a, der.
Na phasu hoti, atiyatum va
niyyatum va —A. I. 68
Not easyto go in or go out; atiyātunti
antonagarampavisitim, Cy. II. 142;
ati + Yā 2 tum, inf;; + Ya + tum,
inf.
Na Bhagavaussahati—Vin. I. 218
Na bhikkhuniya
Unable, Blessed One; u(t) +Sah +a4
ti, pres. 3™.
pred
sg,
Na Bhagavācelapattikam
akkamissati — M. II. 93
The BlessedOne will notwalkon
cloth;@+Kram +7 +ssati,Jugs
SE.
Na bhattam garahati —M. II. 139
He does not condemn the meal: Garh
+a+ fi,pres.3. sg.
Na bhaddakam maranamhoti,na
bhaddikā kālakiriyā —A. I. 261
There is no good death;marana
—kālakirivā
Nabham abbhussukkamāno—A.I.
242
Making thesky veryactive;abhi+
ussukka+ mana,pr.p.
Nabhamahaccathita—
A. IIT.240
Stood firm, touchingthesky; @+Han
(Hat) +ya, absol.
Na bhikkhave dhammavadikenaci
lokasmim vivadati —S. III. 138
Bhikkhus,theonewhospeaks
truth
doesnotdisputewith anybodyin the
world; dhamma + Vad+ ī, der; vi +
Vad +a +ti, pres. 3". sz
Na bhikkhuniya nisinnaparisaya
patimokkhamuddisitabbam
—Vin.
1.135
The Pātimokkhashouldnotberecited
in anassemblywherea bhikkhunīhas
beensitting;ni +Sad +ta,pp.
parisa; u(t) +Drs +i + tabba,fut.
Pp.
Namatakam
Namatakamdhārenti - Vin. Il. 267
(They) wear a felt; Dhr +e t nii,
caus.pres.3”. pl.
i
Na mattam janitva —Vin. II. 109;
IHI.214
Withoutknowingthelimit;Jan +n@+
i+ fva, absol.
Namayametadatthayachandam
adamha—Vin. IV. 151
—-
Wegaveour consentnot for this
purpose;
efam(etad) +attha;a+ Da
+mha,pst. 1°.pl.
Namassamano panijaliko
payirupaseyya—A. IV. 411
Hewouldkeepcompanywhile
honouring
withjoinedpalms;Namas+
ya+mana,pass.pr.p.;pa +anjali +
ka;pari + upa +As +eyya,meta.
opt. 3". sx.
Namittavāhoti—A. II. 257
Hebecomesa personwithnofriends.; Namgutthamcopeti—M. III. 133
mitta+vantu,der.
Namusāvādam āpaiieyya—D.I.
119
Hewouldnotbeguilty
oftelling lies;
a+ Pad +ya +eyya,opt.3”.sg
Nametamassapiyammanapam
- caritum —D. I. 63; M.II. 211;Vin. I.
S.V. 353
Itwouldnotbedearandpleasing
to
me;As +ya (Skt. yat), opt. 3™.sg.
Nayidam
Na mete vuttavādino—M. II. 126
They arenottruerepresentative
ofme;
Vac +ta,pp. + vdda +i, der.
Namo karohi nagassa—M. I. 143
Bow downto thesnake;Kr +0 +hi,
imper.2. sg.
Namo Bhagavatonamosattannam
sammasambuddhanam —Vin. II. 110
My salutationto theBlessedOne, my
salutationto thesevenBuddhas;namo,
indel. usedwith dat.
Namhi kenaeiupasamkamitabbo
aīihiatraekenapindapātanīhārakena
—D. II. 237
I shouldnotbeapproachedby anybody
exceptfor theonewho carriesaway
(my) alms; na + amhi: As + mi, meta.
pres.l". sg.; upa +sam +Kram + i
+tabba,fut. pp.; ni(s) + Hr + aka,
der.
He causesto shakethetail; Cup + e +
ti, caus.pres.3%.sg.
Nayidam sukaram agaram
aiihāvasatāekantaparipunnam
ekantaparisuddham
samkhalikhitam brahmacariyam
194
To practicethishighestway of life,
which is completein itself,absolutely
purelike a polishedconchshell,is
noteasytopractice
bya person
leadinga householdlife. na + (0) " I
idam;adhi + @+ Vas+ nta,pr. p.;
pari + Pr + ta,pp.; pari +Sudh +
ta,pp.; samkha+ Likh + i + ta,pp.;
ilII
531
HI
 Nayidha
Navakammam Navakammikam Na viya

Car + i +tum,inf, Nalakapāne viharati Palāsavane—A,

Repair;Da +e + nti,pres. 3”. pl. vāyitam—M. III. 253
V. 122
Nayidha pafifiayethamatati va A newpairof cloths,spunby herself
Abides at thegroveof Judas-treein
matucchati va matulaniti va Navakammikambhikkhunim —Vin. andwovenby herself,pariticularly
Nalakapana IV,211
acariyabhariyati ya garūnam for the BlessedOne; dussa+yuga,
A bhikkhuniin chargeofsupervising uddissa,indcl.; sāmam,indcl.; kanta,
dārāti vā —A. I. 51 Nalovaharitoluto—S. I. 5, 126
Therewouldappearin thisworld newbuildings;navakamma pp.of kantati;Va +ya +i +fa,pp.
Like a greenreedcut down:nalo + adhitthāyikam, Cv. 900
no distinctionsas to themother. iva, Lit + ta,pp.
mother’ssister,uncle’s wife, wife of Navam santhagaramacirakaritam -
Navakācevahonti apakatafihunoea M. I. 353
theteacheror wivesof honourable
Nava anupubbanirodha— A. IV. 409 —
Vin. II. 199
men;dara + iti; dara, m.; dara.Ē New assemblyhall,causedto be built
Nine gradualcessations (They)arenewlyordainedandnotthe recently;acira +karita: Kr +e +i+
regularmembers:a +pakata +Jia + ta, caus. PP.
Nayimam lokam punarāgamāsi—A.
Nava anupubbaviharasamapattiyo
- li, der.
IV. 104 A. IV. 448
Did notcometo thisworld again; Navā acirapabbaiitāadhunāgatā
Nine gradualabidingsandattainments; Navakacevahonti appapuāīā ca-
pat HātGami āts-ti imamdhammavinayam—M. I. 457;
anupubba+ vihara + samapatti Vin.II. 76;III. 160
doublepst.3'd.sg. S. V. 145
Theyarenewandunluckyaswell; Thosewho arenew,renouncedfamily
Navakataro namenava gottenava nava + ka, der.; ca + eva life not long agoandcometo this
Narassa dussati —S. I. 13
āvusovādenavā samudācaritabbo- ‘doctrineanddiscipline’recently;a +
Hatesa man;Dus+ya +ti,pres.3”.
D. II. 154 Navakohoti acirapabbajito cira +pa + Vraj + i +ta,pp.;
Sg.
A junior shouldbeaddressed
by name, ohiyyakovihārapālo —
S. I. 185 adhuna,indel. + &@ + Gam + ta.pp.
clanor bytheexpression
avuso (He) is a novice who has recently
Na labhati otaram na labhati
(friend) fenounced
andremainsin the Na vāecam payutambhane— A. I. 199
arammanam— S. II. 268
monasteryasa guard; acira +pa + Shouldnotutterwordsmikedwith
Doesnothaveanaccessandsupport;
Navakammam
adhitthahanti
—Vin. Vraj+i +ta,pp.;0 +Ha +iya +ka, truthanduntruth;
Labh + a + ti. pres. 3”. sg.
II. 159 der.;vihāra+pala saccālikapatisamvuttam, Cy. II. 314;
(They) arein chargeofbuilding ; pa t Yuor Yui t ta,pp.
Na labheyyavatthumva, vasamva -
something
new;adhi+Stha+a+ nii, Navatidamorakammaiiiie
D. IHI. 203.
pres. 3”. pl. bhavissati
—M. II, 47
He would notreceivea landor Na vāyamDūsī māro mattamannasi
Surely,it seemsto me thatthiswill —M. I. 337
a dwelling; Labh +eyya,opt.
Navakammamkaronti —Vin. II. 159 notbesomething
simple;vata+idam This Dūsī,theEvil One,did not
3”, sg.
Makenewbuildings understand (his) limit; aa +va +
Navattasampanno
—A. III. 261 ayam; mattam +a +Jia +s + i, pst.
Nalatikampi denti —Vin. II. 10
Navakammamgahetvasamghikam Theonewho is nottrainedin duties 3. Sg.
(They) raisewrinkleson the forehead;
patibāhanti—Vin. II. 173
Da +e +nti,pres. 37% pl.
Havingstartedrepairworkthey Navamamvā divasamdasamamva - Navavutamkambalamparuta —Vin.
reserve
(for themselves)
whatbelongs Vin.III. 243 Ill. 130
Na lobha alobho samudeti—A. III.
to theSamgha;Grh +e +tva,absol.; Coveredwitha blanketnewlywoven;
338
samgha+ika,der.;pati +Bah+a* der; dasa +ma, der. nava +Va +i +ta,pp:; pa t ā t Fr
The non-cravingdoesnotarisefrom
nti, pres, 3. pl.
craving;sam +u(t) +e(fromI) +ti, +ta, meta.,pp.
NavamdussayugamBhagavantam
,

pres:las,sg
Navakammam
denti—
Vin. II. 172 uddissa
sāmamkantamsāmam Na viya mane cakkhum bandhante
 Na virodhayissati
Na sāpattikena Na sukaram Nahapitapubbo

ianassadassanāya—M. II. 121 Doesnotcausetoraiseupthethigh;

They don't look like attractiveto the Theonewho is guilty of anoffence ThatDhammais noteasyto be
gambhireudakegacchantovivafrum
eyesofthe peopleto seethem:viya, shouldnotperformPavarana, explainedby theonewho is greedy...
na uhnāmeti,Cy. III. 387; u(t) +Nam
indcl.;Ba(n)dh+a +nta,pr.p.;Drs invitation;
sa +dpatti +ka, der.; pa hateful... deluded;su + Drs +ya, fut.
4.
e t ti, caus.pres. 3”. sg. +Vr +e +tabba,caus.fut.pp.
+ ya + ana, der. pp.; Lubh +ta,pp.; Dus +ta,pp.;
Muh + ta,pp.
Na sabbamsamadanamna
Na virodhayissati yadidam Nasukaramunchenapaggahena
samāditabbantivadāmi —A. V. 191
aggapadasmim—S. IV. 379 yapetum—A. IIL. 66 Nahanunaso orako yakkho —D. II.
I don't saythatall observances
should Noteasyto live by gleaning;Ya +ape
Will makeno contradictionin regard 206
not be observed;nwonegatives;sam
to thehigheststateor teaching; +tum,caus.inf. He is, indeed,nota simplespirit:
+ a@+Da +i +tabba, fut. pp.; usual
aggapadasmintidesanāya,Cy. IHI. naha,indcl.; niina, emph.p..
form is samādiyitabbam Na..sukaramparesamdhammam
114;vi + Rudh + aya + i + ssati.
desetum —A. IIL. 184 Nahanagarukamanussa
caus.fut. 3". sg.
Na sabbenabhikkhunīsamghena Noteasyto explaintheDhammato udakasuddhika—Vin. I. 196
ovādo gantabbo —Vin. II. 263 others;
Dr§ +e + tum,caus.inf.
Na vihesapekkhapucchimha—S. IHI Peopletakebathingseriously,they
The exhortationshouldnotbe
132 believethattheycanbepurifiedby
attendedby theentirecommunity Nasukaramsamkhatum—A. V. 172 water;Snd +ana,der.;Sudh + ti +
We did not ask(thosequestions)with
of bhikkhunis Noteasyto count;sam +Khya +tum, ka, der.
thehopeof harassing(you): vihes@+
inf,
apekkha;Prch +ya + i + mha,pst.
Na samparivattakampattam Nahanampatiyadetabbam—Vin. I.
2 pi
dhovati —M. II. 138 Nasukhenasukham adhigantabbam 47
He doesnotwashthebowl while ~M.11.93 Preparationshouldbemadefor taking
Navo acirapabbaiito adhunāgato-
turningit around;sam +pari + Vrt+ Happiness
could notbegainedwith bath;pati + Yat+ e + tabba,caus.fut.
S. I. 9
a + ka, der. muchease;adhi +Gam + tabba,
fut.
A novicewho hasrecentlyrenounced PP.
pp.
andcometo theorganisationrecently;
Na sasuram ādiyati —A. IV. 91 Nahāneussukkamakasi —Vin. I.
adhuna + agata; adhuna,adv. indel.
Doesnotcareforthefather-in—law; Nasussūsanti,na sotamodahanti,na 312
ā t Dā t ia 7 ti, pres. 3", sg. ahhacittam upatthapenti, Enticedthemin takingbath;a +Kr +
Navo appaāiāto —S. IV. 46
vokkammaca sāsanāvattanti—D. I. s +i, pst. 3". sg.(a +karsi > kassi>
The onewho is newandnotwell
Na sākiāci aparaiihati—Vin.II. 79 230-31;M. IHI. 117 kasi)
known;a +pa +Jad + ta,pp. or
Shedoesnotcommitanycrime;apa+ Theyarenoteagerto listen,theydo
appa +Jia + ta
Radh +ya +ti,pres,3”.sg. notgive ear, do not cause to focus Nahanepitthiparikammam— Vin. II.
theirmindon understanding,theykeep 22
Na sakkā hoti—D. III. 150
Na sapattikena uposathokātabbo- awayfromtheteacher'sinstruction: Rubbingthebackatbathing
Isunable;
theindcl.sakka
(fromSak),
Vin. I. 125 Susstisanti,
desid.from Sru, pres. 3”.
normally gives a verbal meaningand
Theonewhois guiltyof anoffence pl.;0 +Dha +a +nti, pres. 3™.pl.; Nahatvaca pivitva ca paccuttaritva
is used with an instr. e.g. maya
shouldnotperformUposatha,recital upa +Sthé nti, pres. 3™.pl.;
3 ape + —A.IHI.190
sakkā,tayā sakkā,tenasakkā; in this
of Patimokkha;
Kr +tabba,fut.pp. Vi ho (ava) +Kram4 ya, absol.; Vrt Havingbathed,drunkandcomeback
sentencesakkā is useddifferently;
Kr + tabba> kartabba> kattabba> tai nti, pres. Rr. pl.
(to theland);Snd + tva,absol.; Pa or
sakkāhoti soundslike sakkoti, the
kātabba Pi +i +tva,absol.;pati +u(t) +Tr +
verb
Nasodhammosudesiyoluddhena i +tvd, absol.
Na sāpattikenapavāretabbam
- Vin. 'eduffhena...mūihena—M. II. 172-
Na sattim unnāmeti—M. II. 137
I. 164 3 Nahapitapubbo—Vin. I. 248
 Nahayamana
The onewhowaspreviouslya barber;
Sna@+dpe + i + ta,pp. +pubbo;
pubbe nahāpito
Nahāyamānārukkhe kāyam
ugghamsenti—Vin. II. 105
(They) while takingbath,rub(their)
bodyon a tree;u(t) +Ghrs t e t aii,
caus.pres,3. pl.
Na hi Tathagatavitatham bhananti
—D.II. 73
The Tathāgatas(thosewho have
realisedthetruth)do notspeak
untruth;
Bhan+a +nti,pres.3'd.pi.
Nahi nūna so orako dhammavinayo
na sā oraka pabbaiiā yatthaVaso
pabbajito —Vin. I. 19
It is indeednota simpledoctrine
anddiscipline,nota simple
renunciationwhereYasabecamea
renounced;nahi, indcl.; nāna, emph.
p.; ora + ka; yattha, indcl; pa + Vraj
+ i + fa, pp.
Na hi nūna so orako dhammavinayo,
na sa orikā pabbajja —D. II. 30
That is, in deed,not so simpledoctrine
anddiscipline,thatis notso simple
renunciation;nina, emph.p.; ora +
ka, der.
Na hi no samgaramtena—M. IHI.
187
Wedon't haveanagreement
with him
Na hi Bhagavāevamvadeyya
—M. I.
130;IHI.207;S. IHI.110
Definitely,theBlessedOne would not
saythus;na, neg.p.; hi, emph.p.;Vad
+evya,opt. 3. sg.
Nahetam
Na hi metthaabhabbatāvuttā—A,I,
231
Unfitnessis notdeclared
bymeon
this point;me + ettha;a + bhabba+
ta,der.; Vae +ta,pp.
Na hi sakkā kulitthīhi kuladhītāhi
kulakumārīhi kulasunhāhi
kuladāsīhi ārāmam vā vihāramvā
gantum—Vin. III. 120
It is indeednot possibleby women,
daughters,girls, daughters—in —law,
femaleslavesin a familyto go tothe
monasteryor to thedwellingplace;
sakkā,indcl. used with instr.;kuia
itththi; Gam + tum,inf.
Na hi sadhu Bhagavato
abbhakkhānam—
M. I. 130;5.II.
110
To accusetheBlessedOneis indeed
notso good;abhi + @+Khya +ana,
der.
Na hi so socati yo niripadhi —S.
I.
108
One who hasno attachment
doesnot
sorrow,indeed:Suc+a +ti,pres.3”.
Sg.;ni +® +upadhi+ f, der
Na hetam..atthasamhitam,
nadibrahmacariyakam,na
nibbidāyana virāgāyananirodhāya
na upasamayana abhinnayana
sambodhayana nibbanaya
samvattati —D.I. 188-9;M. I. 431
It is indeednotbeneficial,
itdoesnot
agreewiththebasicsofthe highest
wayof life, it doesnot leadto
disinterestedness,
detachment,
cessation,
tranquillity,
higher
knowledge, realisation
andblowing
Na hoti
Nafifiassa
out; na + Ai + etam; attha + sam + Nāgassabhayā kiso ahosi—Vin. III.
Dha+i +ta,pp.; sam + Vrt +a +ti, 146
pres. 3’U Sg. Due to fearof thesnakehe became
emaciated;kisa (Skt.kréa)
Nahotiāghātona appaceayona
cetasoanabhiraddhi —M. I. 140 Naganamogayhauttarantanam
Thereis no grudge,bitternessand koficam karontanamsaddam
dissatisfaction
of mind;@ +Ghan 4 assosim—Vin. III. 109
fa;a +pati +aya (fromI); an +abhi I heardthesound of the elephants”
+Radh +ti, der. trumpetingwhile (theywere)crossing
(theriver)afterplunginginto it; 0 +
Nahoti ānandona somanassamna Gah +ya, absol.;a +Sru +s + im,
cetasoubbillāvitattam —M. I. 140 pst. I". sg.
Thereis no delight,noioy, no elation
ofmind;u(t) +Plu +i + ta,pp. + tta, Nagapalokitam apalokesi—M. I.
der.
337
Turnedbackandlookedat(him) like
Nākāmā
dātabbobhāgo—
Vin. I. anelephant,ndga + apalokita;apa +
299 Lok+e+s +i, pst. 3%sg.
Shouldgivea sharewithoutdissent;na
+akama;Da +tabba,fut. PP. Nago nagenasamgamessati—Vin.
II. 195
Nāgam
abhirūhitvā—D. 1.49;M. II.
The elephantwill meetwith another
112 elephant;samgama+e + ssati,
Havingmountedtheelephant;theterm denom.fut. 3". sg.
nagais usedin Pali to denote
Arahant,elephant,snake,greatness Nago vata bho nago—
A. III. 345
anda tree; ordaineeis also Great,indeed,is theelephant
addressedby the word naga whenhe
is going to be ordained: abhi + Ruh Nagovasandanagunanibhetva—D.
+i +tva,absol. 11.274
Havingbrokenthestrapandthecord,
Nāgassa
ogāham
otinnassa
—A. IV. like anelephant;ndgo + iva; Bhid +
435 tva, absol.
When
theelephant
hasplunged
intothe
Water;
0 + Gah +a, der; 0 + Tr + ta, Naceasannepadam nikkhipati —M.
pp. 11.137
He doesnotkeeppacetoo near;na +
Nagassagocarapasutassa—A. IV. ati +āsanna;ni +Ksip +a+ ti, pres.
435
3”, sg.
When
theelephant
isbrowsing;
pa+
Su + ta, Pp.
Nanfassa samanassava
 Nānupi
Nadhivaseti
brāhmanassavā sutvā vadāmi —M. complexion; na +ati; na +ati +
IH. 186
odata; ati +Kram +ta,pp.; manu(s)
...
I do notsayafterhearing(that)from
+a, der.;a+ pa +Ap+ ta,pp;
anotherrecluseor a brahmin:na +
Div +ya
aiiiassa; Sru + tva, absol.: Vad +a
+mi,pres. 1". sg.
Nātidūre nāccāsanneāsanassa
parivattati —M. II. 138
He turnsroundneithertoo farnortoo
1.249; 251, no kim
near the seat; na + ati + ditra; na +
Even alittle actiondoesnotappearto
ati +asanna;pari +Vrt +a +ti,
be resulted,whatto talkof many?;na
pres, 3”. Sg.
* anu +api; Khya +ya +ti, pass.
pres. 3". sg.; bahu+ (d) +eva
Nātidūre pādam uddharati
nāceāsannepādam nikkhipati —M.
Natikalena gamo pavisitabbo, na
II. 137
diva patikkamitabbam —M. I. 469
Hedoesnotlift upthefoottoofarand
One shouldnotenterthe\ illage too
placeit too close: u(t) +Dhr or Hr +
earlyin themorningandcomeback
a +ti, pres. 3. sg.;ni +Ksip +at
fromthevillagelatemid-day; il, pres. 3™.sg.
althoughthe textdoes not mention
atidiva, Cy. takesthe meaningof
Natisigham gacchati, nati sanikam
atidiva and explainsit, II. 184:pa t
gaechati—M.II. 137,139
Vis + i + tabba,fut.pp.; pati + Kram
He goesneithertoo fast,nor tooslow;
+ 1 +tabba,fut.pp.
na + ati
Naticiram thatabbam—Vin. II. 215
Nadikeviharatigiijhakavasathe
- differentbirths;nana +jati +a, der:
Shouldnotstaytoo long;na +ati +
D. Il. 91,200;M. 1.205
ciram; Stha + tabba,fut.pp.
Abides at thegabledhousein Nadika;
Nādikā is ā ending nounandyet we
Natithokam nātibahum—M. II. 138
Neithertoo little nor too much;
thokam,bahum,adlv.
Nādhivāsetipaiahativinodeti
vyantīkarotianabhāvam gameti-
Nātidīghā, nātirassā nātikisā
M. I. 11;S. IV. 77;A. V. 110
nātithūlā nātikālī nāccodātā
(He)doesnottolerate, abandons,
atikkantā manusamvannamappatta
drivesout,putsanendandmakesit
dibbam vannam—D. I. 175
non-existent;na +adhi + Vas+e+ th,
(The gemof woman)neithertoo
caus.pres. 3. sg.; pa + Ha +ti,pres.
tall nor too short,neithertoo slim
3”. sg.;vi +Nud+e +ti,caus.pres.
nor too fat,neithertoo blacknort
3”.sg.; vi +anta+Kr +0 +ti,pres.
00 white,surpassed human
3”.sg.;ana+bhdvam+Gam+e +
complexion,unreached divine
ti, caus,pres, 3THg
Nanattakaya Nanubandhitabbo
Nānattakāyāekattasaīihino—A. IV. Differentinclinationsare perfectly
40
realised;nana +adhimuttika--tā,
Thosewhoaredistinctin body, der.;su +pati + Vyadh+ta,pp.
singularin mind;eka +tta,der. +sani
ha +i, der. Nananama nanagottananajacca
nanakula pabbajita ekato ussarita -
Nānattakāyānānattasaīihino—A. Vin. III. 177
IV. 39 (You have)differentnames,different
Thosewhoaredistinctin body, clans,differentraces,you have
distinctin mind;ndnd +tta,der. renouncedfromdifferentfamiliesand
kaya beenraisedup together;u(t) +Sr +e
+i +ta,caus.pp.
Nanattasafifianam
amanasikara—A.
IV.40 Nanabhesajjehinippacitva—Vin. I.
Forthereason
of keeping
divers
271
thoughts
out of mind; a +manasikara
Havingcookedwith variousmedical
herbs;ni +Pac +i +tva,absol.
200 Nanabhesajjehiparibhavetva—Vin.
Differentroomsanddifferentinner 1.279
chambers; o +Vr +aka, der.
Havingseasoned witha varietyof
medicalherbs;pari +Bhū +e + tvā,
Nānāiaceānampurisānam
caus. absol.
purisasatam—M. II. 152
Onehundredpersonsbelongingto Nanaviharehi viharatam
kenassaviharena vihatabbam?-
A. V. 328
Nanaditthika nana khantika nana By thosewhoareabidingwith
rueikāsatthāro —S. IV. 348
differentabidingwhatshouldbethe
Teachers
ofdifferent views,different abidingto be followed?; kena +assa:
faiths
anddifferentpreferences;
ditthi As +ya (Skt.yat), fut.pp.; vi + Hr +
+ka,der.;khanti+ka, der.: ruci+ a +tabba: vihartabba>vihattabba>
ka,der.
vihatabba,fut. pp.
Nānādisā
nānāianapadāmānavakā
Nana hi no bhantekaya, ekam ca
ägacchanti
—D. I. 114
panamannecittam—M. III. 156
Youngmencome from different
Venerablesir, our bodiesaredifferent,
directionsanddifferentcountries;
butthemindis one,I feel.
manu +ava + ka, der.
Nānubandhitabbo —A. IV. 366
Nānādhimuttikatā
suppatividitā-
He shouldnotbe followed;na + anu
D.I.2 +Ba(n)dh+i +tabba,
fut.pp.
 Nānuvuhiati
Nanuyunjati ajjhattam
cetosamatham— A. III. 86
He doesnot practiseinnercalmness
of mind;na +anu + Yu(a)j+ a + ti,
;
pres. 3°ad Sg.
Napadanampannayati—D. III. 88
The enddoes notappear;pa +Jia +
ya 1 ti, pres. 3",
2
sg.
Nāparam itthattāya —D. I. 158
Thereis nothingmorefor this: na +
aparam; ittha + tta, der.
Nabhijanami kamasaiiiam
uppannapubbam—M. III. 125
I do notrememberthatanideaof
sense-desirehaseverarisenin me: in
Pali idiom, whenthereare two
clausesin a sentence,the
subordinateclause which standsas
the object of the verbabhijanamiin
the main clauseends with a
derivativenoun ending with the
suffix tu (Skt. trn),for example
nabhijanami
divasupita
Nābhiiānāmikiāei sikkhāpadam
saheiccavītikkamitā —A. IV. 66
I do notrememberthatI violatedany
rule intentionally;sam + Cit +ya,
absol.; vi + ati + Kram + i + tu, der.
Nābhiiānāmi cittassaannathattam-
A. IV. 65, 210
I do notrememberthechangeof mind;
na +abhi +Jan +na + mi,pres. I.
Sg.; afifiatha+ tta, der.
Nabhijanami sāmikam manasāpi
aticarittā (aticaritā?), kuto pana
kāyena?— A. IV. 66
Nāmarūpam
I do not rememberthatI wasunfaithful
to thehusbandevenin thought,how
could it be in body?;ati +Car +i+
tu,der.
Nabhijanami supinantenapi
methunam dhammam patisevitā,
pagevaiāgaro —Vin. II. 79; III. 162
I do not remembertheindulgenceof
sexualintercoursenotonly in a dream
butalso in keepingawake;supina+
antena+api; pati + Sev + i+ tu,
der.; pageva, indcl.
Namaiica saveti — M.II. 120, 144
Announces the name, Sru + e+ fi,
caus.pres. 3. sg.
Namanvayena agafichum—D. II. 261
(They) cameaccording
totheirnames;
nama + anvayena; @ + ganch (gacch)
+ um,pst. 3" pl.
Namam Buddhapatisamyuttam,
dhammapatisamyuttam,
samghapatisamyuttam—Vin. IV. 6
The nameconnectedwith theBuddha,
theDhammaand theSamgha;pati +
sam + Yuj + ta,pp.
Nāmarūpamhānāparamgaechati-
S. II. 104
(The consciousness)doesnotgo
beyondmindandform;na +aparam
Nāmarūpamhetunāmarūpam
paccayovinhanakkhandhassa
panhhapanaya —M. III. 17
Mindandformis thecauseand
conditionforthedeclarationof the
aggregateof consciousness;
pa +Jnd
+dpe+ana,caus.der.
Nāmarūpasamudayā Nāyam
Namartipasamudaya cittassa This Dhammais notfor theonewho is
samudayo—5. V. 184 discontent;a +sam + Tus +ta,pp.
Thecittaoriginatesdependingon mind
andform
Nayamdhammoasamahitassa—A.
IV. 229
Namarupassaavakkanti hoti—S. II. This Dhammais not for theonewho
66 hasno concentratedmind;a +sam +
Thedescentof mindandformtakes G + Dha +i +ta,pp.
place;ava +Kram + ti, der.; Hit
(Bhi)+ a+ ti, pres. 3. sg. Nayamdhammokusitassa—A. IV.
229
Nāmenaca āvusovādenaca This Dhammais not for thelazy
samudācaranti —M. I. 171;Vin. I. 9
Address by nameandby theword Nayamdhammoduppafifiassa—A.
friend;sam +u(t) +4 +Car +a + IV. 229
nti,pres,3”. pl. This Dhammais notfor theonewho is
unwise;du +pajifia
Nāmenamam Bhagavā ālapatīti
hatthoudaggo—Vin. II. 156 Nayam dhammopapaficaramassa
Beinghappyandelatedthinking,"the papancaratino—A. LV. 229
BlessedOneaddressesmeby the This Dhammais notfor theonewho is
name”;
@+Lap +a +ti,pres.3”.sg. so muchattachedto theego;papaāca
+iti; Hrs + ta,pp.; u(t) + agga + G@+Ram+a, der.;papanca +Ram
+ ti +7, der.
Nāyakohoti vināyako aggo
pamukhopāmokkho —Vin. I. 24 Nayamdhammomahicchassa—A.
(He)is theleader,supremeleader,the IV. 229
highest,theprominent,thechief: This Dhammais not for theambitious:
pamukha-- ya, der, mahd + iccha
Nāyam
kāyoādāyagamanīyo
—A. V. Nayamdhammomutthassatissa—A.
300 IV. 229
Oneshouldhavetogowithouttaking This Dhammais not for theabsent
thisbody;Gam +aniya,fut. pp. minded; Mrs +ta,pp. +sati
Nayamdhammapariyayo kismifci Nayam dhammosamganikaramassa
patifthite
—A. IV. 166 —A.IV. 229
Thismodeof teachingis not
This Dhammais not for theonewho is
established
anywhere:na +ayam fondof socialgrouping;
sam+gana
+ ika, der. +Grama
Nayam
dhammo
asantutthassa
—A.
IV, 229
Nayamdhammosusambudho
—S.

IV. 128
This Dhammais noteasilyintelligible
; Abides at thePāvārikamangogrovein
- susambudhois usedherefor metric
reason;su +sam +Budh +ya, fut.
pp.
Nayam labbha kifici katum —Vin. I.
348
Nothingcanbedoneagainstthis
person; Labh +ya,fut. pp.; Kr +tum,
inf.
Nāyyo so mam nippātesi—Vin. IV.
132
Master,hedid not makemego out; aa
nikkhāmesi,na mamgahetva
agamasi;Cy. 869; ni + Pat +e +s +
i, caus.pst. 3. sg.
Narahati ayam puriso orako hotum
—Vin. IV. 158
This personis not fit to bea simple
man;Hu (Bhi) +a +tum,inf.
Narahati ayam puriso papo hotum -
Vin. IV. 157
Thispersonis notfit tobeanevilman
Nārādhako hoti āāyam dhammam
kusalam—S.V. 19;A. I. 69
(He) doesnot becomeone who
satisfiesthewholesomeway: na +
aradhaka:a +Radh + aka, der.
Nalanda iddha ceva phita ca
bahuianāākinnamanussā—M. I. 377
Nālandāis rich,prosperous,
populace
andcrowded withpeople;Rdh+ta,
Pp.; Sphay +ta,pp.; @+ Kir + ta,pp.
Nalandayam
viharati
Pāvārikambavane
—D. I. 211,D. II.
Nāvābhirūhanasamaye Nāvāya Nāham
81,IHI.99
At thetimeof boardinga boat;ndva 4 Nasimsatilokamimamparaiica —A.
abhi +Ruh +a +ana, der. +samaya 11.49
Nālandā
He doesnotwish for thisworld and
Navayaujjavanikaya paccorohitva- theother;na +@+Sams+a +ti,
Nālam dārābharanāya -D. IHI, 183 Vin.I. 290 pres. 3”. sg.
Unfit for keeping a wife (for
Havingdisembarkedfrom the boat
maintaininga family);na +alam; goingupstream;pati +o + Ruh +a+ Nasentevanam kule na vāsenti—S.
dara +Bhr +ana,der. i+tva, absol. IV. 248
(They) definitelycauseto destroyher
Nalikayapi kannakitayo honti—Vin. NavayaSahajatim ujjavimsu —Vin. and makeno accomodation(for her)
II. 116 11.
301 in the family;gīvāyamgahetvā
(They)become
dirtyeveninsidethe Theyrushedto Sahajatiby a boat;u(t)+ ntharanti,Cy. Ill. 87; Nas +e +nti,
case;kanna (krsna) +kita (Skt.krta) Ju+a+ imsu,pst. 3. pl. caus.pres.3”. pl. +eva; Vas+ e +
Pp.
nti, caus.pres. 3™.pl.
Nāsakkhipativiiihitum —D. II. 103
Nalikodanam ganhati —Vin. IV. 243 Wasunableto realise;na +asakkhi, Nāssa imissāparisāya samasamo
It takesa nalika measureof boiled (Skt.aSaksit),pst. 3. sg.; pati + atthi vannena—D. I. 123
rice; nalika + odanam;nalika =two Vyadh+i +tum,inf, In terms of class (or complexion),
handfuls
thereis nonein thiscrowdwho is
Nāsakkhimsusakāya katikāya equalto thisperson;na +assa:As +
Nālikodanparamam
bhuāiāmi, santhatum—M. I. 171 ti, pres. 3™.sg.
tadūpiyaīica sūpeyyam—
D. II. 198 (They)wereunableto standon their
I eatonlyonenalikaof boiledriceand agreement;na + asakkhimsu(from Nassapattacivaram
thesoupor curryproportionatetoit; Sak); pst.3. pl.; sam+ Stha +tum, patiggahetabbam —Vin. I. 9
tam t rūpiyam: tadanurūpam;sūpa inf. The bowl andtherobeofthis person
+ eyya,der. shouldnotbe received;pati +Grh t e
Nasakkhi
safifiapetum
—D. I. 236; +fabba,fut. pp.
Naliyavapakenaanugharakam M. 1.474
anugharakam
āhinditvā—
Vin. I. Wasunableto make(him)convinee; Nāssassamanāpam
- A. III. 124:
249 sam+Jia +dpe +tum,caus.inf. Vin. II. 186
Havingwanderedfrom housetohouse It wouldnotbeagreeableto this
with thetubeand thecontainer;nāliyā Nāsakkhissam bhantepamādassam person;na + assa + assa;thesecond
ca āvapakenaca, āvapakonāma bhante—M. III. 170 assa is opt. 3". Sg.
yatthaladdhamladdhamavapanti, I wasunable,venerablesir, I was
forgetful:na + asakkhissam:a +
pakkhipanti;Cy. V. 1103;@+ Hind + Nahamakallako—Vin. III. 62
i + tv, absol. sakkha+ is + am, pst. 1". sg.; I amnotindisposed;na + aham;a +
pamādassam:pamdda + is (as)+ am, kalla (Skt.kalya) +ka, der.
Navampariyesanti—Vin. I. 230 Pst. 1°, sg., irregular forms
Search
foraboat;
pari+es(from
Is)+ Nāhamussahāmi
therassanāmam
a +nti,pres.3. pl. Nāsadā
vākaram
migo—M. II. 65 gahetum,garu me thero—Vin. I. 93
Thedeerdidnotgetintothetrap;na + | amunableto pronouncetheelder’s
Nāvābhirūhanasamaye—Vin. IV. 73 a+Sad+a,pst.3". sg. name,theelderis my teacher(or he is
 Naham
highly respectedby me);u(t) +Sah +
a+ mi,pres. I". sg.; Grh +e +tum,
inf.
Nāham kvaei kassaeikiācanam
tasmim—A. II. 177
I do notbelongto anybody,anywhere;
kvaci, indcl.; kihicana-- tā, der.
Nāham tam dukkatam passāmi-
Vin. II. 289
I don’tseeit a wrongdoing;du +Kr +
fa, pp.; passa +mi,pres.1". sg.
Naham taya upatthatabbo— Vin. I.
54
I shouldnotbeattendedby you; upa +
Stha + tabba,fut. pp.
Nāham devaiīvāmi —D. IHI. 65
Your maiesty,I haveno meansof
livelihood;Jiv +a + mi,pres. I". Sg.
Naham nisinno api ca kho thito -
Vin. III. 189
I havenotbeensittingbutstanding;
ni +Sad +ta,pp.; Stha +i + ta,pp.
Naham Bhagavatosaddhaya
gaechāmi,ahampetāniiānāmi —A.
IH. 39
I don't go by faithin theBlessedOne,
I know thesemyselftoo: aham+ api
+etam; Jan + nd + mi, pres. 1" sg.
Naham bhanteetam rodami, yam
mam Bhagavaevamaha—M. I. 389
Venerablesir, | do notcry becauseof
thefactthattheBlesedOne saidthis
aboutme; efam,acc.for abl.; Rud +a
+mi, pres. 1". sg.; evam + Gha: a+
Ah +a, pst. 3”. SQ.
Nikannikampi
Naham bhanteoliyami, na
samsīdāmi —M. IHI. 261
Venerablesir, I do notshrink,I donot
sink; 0 + Li +ya +mi,pres.I", 89;
sam +Sad + a + mi,pres. 1".sg.
Nāham bhanteBhagavatosabbam
ditthim iānāmi —A. V. 186
Venerablesir, I don't knowall theview
ofthe BlessedOne; Drs + ti, der.
Naham bhikkhave lokena vivadami,
loko ca mayā vivadati —S. III. 138
Bhikkhus,I do notdisputewiththe
world, buttheworld disputeswithme:
na +aham; vi + Vad+a +mi,pres.
I*. sg.
Nāham.. mutthassatissa
asampajanassa
ānāpānasatibhāvanamvadāmi—M.
IH. 84
I donotprescribethepractice
of
meditation
onbreathing inandoutfor
a personwhois forgetful
andunaware;
Mrs + ta,pp. +sati; a+ sam+pat
Nāham sakkomi bhavante—D.II.
246
I amunable,sirs;Sak +no +mi,pres.
I", sg.; bhavante seems to be a
Magadhi form of bhavantah
Nikacca kitavasseva—Vin. IIL. 90
As ifby a fraudofa gambler;
nikati+
a; kitavassa + iva
Nikannikampijappeti—Vin. IV.
270
Whispersin theear; nikannikanti
kannamilam, Cy. 927; ni +kannika;
Nikamalabhi
jappa(fromJalp) +e +ti, denom.
pres.3". sg.
Nikāmalābhīakicchalābhī
akasiralabhi—M. III. 98; S.II. 278;
V.316;A. 11.23
Onewhogainsat will andwithout
muchdifficulty; Labh +i, der.
Nikkhantimkareyyam—Vin. 1.88
I shouldgetoutof; ni (s) +Kram +ti,
der.;Kr +eyyam,opt. I. sg.
Nikkhantepathameyame—
Vin.
236
Whenthefirstwatchofthe nightis
gone;loc.absi.;ni (s) +Kram +
ta,
Pp.
Nikkhittacivarakayam ovassapenti
—Vin.I. 291
Havingputdown therobestheymake
thebodyexposeto therain; ni +Ksip
+ fa, pp.; 0 + vassa + dpe + nti, caus.
denom,
pres. 3". pl.
Nikkhittamanisuvanna
samana
sakyaputtiyā
apetaiātarūparaiatā-
S.IV.325;Vin. II. 294
Therecluses,sonsofthe Sakyan,
havegivenupgemsandrefinedgold
andkeptthemselves
awayfromgold
andsilver;Skaya+putta +iya,der;
a+I+ ta,pp.;jatariipa+rajata
NiganthesuNataputtiyesu
nibbinnarūpāvirattarūpā
pativānarūpā—M. II. 244
Asif theyweredisinterested
,
detachedanddisappointedtowards
Niganthas,
thesonsofNataputta;
ni +
Vid + ta, pp. + riipa; vi + Raj + ta,
Niceakappam
pp; pati + Vr +ana,der.
Niganthesupidane samadapeti—A.
IV. 186;Vin. I. 237
Makes(me)observegivingalmseven
to theNiganthas;sam --ā -- Dā 2 āpe
+ti, caus.pres. 3%.sg.
Niggayha niggayyahamvakkhami
pavayhapavayha,yo saro so
thassatiti—M. III. 118
Rebukingcontinuouslyandpressing
continuouslyI admonish(you) , with
II. thehopethatwhatevercoreis thereit
will remain;ni + Grh +ya, absol.;
Vac+ssami,(Sk. Vaksyami), fut. 1*.
sg., usedas pres. 1".sg., taking
vakkhaas thebase;pa + Vah+ya,
meta.absol.; Stha + ssati +iti,fut.
34so.
Nigrodharāiam ussāpesi—A. III.
371
Causedtheking banyantreeto lift up;
u (t) +Sri +ape +s + I, caus.pst. 3™.
Sg.
7
Nicayam samparayikam— S. I. 72
Building upofthe nextlife; ni + Ci +
a, der.; nicayam,pr.p. nom.sg.; sam
+para +aya(fromI) +ika,der.
Niccakappamniccakappam
viharāmi —M. I. 249
I abidealmostalways;nicca +kappa,
kappais usedto give thesenseof
almost,cp. kevalakappamJetavanam
obhāsetvā,Sn.46
Nieeakappammanasikātabbam—M.
III. 266;5. IV. 59,sādhukamis
added
 Niccapavaranampi
Nidanam Nippapaficaramassayam
To be rememberedalmostall times:
Nijjhattim upagacchanti—A, 1.76
niccakappam,adv.;manasi4 Kr+ Havingstoredup,eats;ni +Dhad+i 4 Nindābyārosaupārambhabhayā-
They come to a settlement
tabba,fut.pp. tva, absol. M. IIL. 78
For thereasonof fearof insult,anger
Niiihattim upenti —M. I. 320
Niccapavaranampisaditum —Vin. Nidanamuddisitva —Vin. I. 112 and attack;ninda + bydrosa +
They cometo asettlement:
IV. 102 Havingrecitedtheprovenance;
u(t) 4 upārambha+ bhaya
niiihatiīti Saffiattivevacanametam,
To acceptevena permanentoffer: Drs +i +tvā, absol.
Cy. I. 393; upa +e (fromI) 3:nti,
Svad +e +i + tum,caus.inf Ninnāmayetamtanukam— M. II.
pres. 3”. pl.
Nidananikammanamsamudayaya- 143
Niccabhattam pacchindi —Vin. IV. A. IHI.338 Putout this(tongue)a bit; ni + Nam+
Nitthametthagantabbam—
D. IL.
66 Sourcesfor theorigin of Kamma;sam aya, caus. imper. 2™, sg.+ etam
124;S. II. 186;A. II. 144
Stoppedtheregularmeal:pa+ +u(t)+aya (fromI)
The conclusionshouldbereached
at
Chi(n)d + i, pst. 3". sg. Ninne va yadi va thale —S. I. 233
thispoint;nittham+ettha:Gam+ Niddākilamathampativinodetvā - On a low groundor on aflat land;yadi,
tabba,fut. pp.
Niccam utrastamidam cittam, A.IV.344 vd, indel.
niccam ubbiggamidammano—S. I. Causingto dispelldrowsinessand
Nittham gaccheyya— M. I. 176 languid;
pati +vi +Nud +e +tva,
53 Nipajjissamiti kayam Avajjesi—Vin.
Would come to theconclusion; caus.absol.
This mind is alwaysterrified.always 11.286
gaccha +eyya,opt. 3. sg.
agitated:niccam,ady.;u(t) + tras + Causedthebodyto reclinethinkingI
fa,pp.; u(t) + Vij +ta,pp. Niddapetvalavapetabbam— Vin. II. shall lie down;ni + Pad +ya +i +
Nitthitacivaro Bhagava 180 ssami,fut. 1".sg.;a+ Vij +e +s +i,
temāsaecayenacārikam Havingcausedto weed,it shouldcause
Niccam va aniccam vā?—S. II. 249 caus.pst. 3. sg.
pakkamissati —A. V. 328 tobereaped;ni(s) +Da +dpe +tva,
ls it permanent
or impermanent?
The BlessedOne, whoserobeis caus.absol.;Lii +Gpe+ tabba,caus. Nipannamvā upanipaileyya—D.III.
finished,will start(his) preaching
tour Sut.pp.
Nieco dhuvo sassato 203
at theendofthe threemonthperiod;
aviparināmadhammoSassatisamam He would lie down closeto theone
ni(s) + Stha +i + ta,pp. +civara; Niddārāmatamanuyuttā —D. II. 78
tathevathassati—D. I. 21 who hadalreadybeenlyingdown;ni +
femasa + accaya (ati + aya from I); Indulgedin slothfulness;nidda +
Permanent,firm, eternal.subjectto no Pad +ta,pp.; upa +ni + Pad +ya+
pa +Kram +i +ssati,fut. 3”. sg. arama+ta, der.;anu + Yuj +
changeandwill remainthesamefor eyya,opt. 3”. Sg.
ta,pp.
ever;fathā -- eva; Sthā +ssati, fut.
Nitthubhitvāpakkāmi—Vin. III.
3”, sg. Nippattam akasi —Vin. IV..259
132 Niddhamaniyādhammā—A.V.220 (She) made (the swan) featherless: ni
Havingspittedouthewentoff;ni(s)+ Things
tobeblownoff:ni +
Nicchavim purisam vehāsam +patta;a+ Kr +@ t s t i, double
Stubh + i +twa, absol.; pa + Kram + dhamaniya
gacchantam—Vin. III. 106 pst. 3. sg.
i, pst.3. se.
Skinlessmangoingin thesky: ni +
chavi; vehdsam,acc.for loc. sense; Nidhānakusalo
hoti—A. IV. 339 Nippapanicapade
rato—A. III. 294
Nitthunantāpi vaccamkaronti - Hebecomescleverin savings
gaccha +nta,DID. Theonewhotakesdelightinthestep
Vin. II. 221
where proliferationof thoughtends:
They relievethemselveswhile Nidhimukham gavesanto—A. V.346
Niiihattibalā panditā —A. IV. 223 nippapahicapadeti nibbānapade,Cy.
Theintelligents
havethepowerof
groaning; ni(s) + Stan + nd + nta, Searching
fora hiddentreasure; Ill. 348; ni(s) +papahca --pada
pr. p. nidhimukham
gavesantotinidhim
conciliation;nj +Sha (fromDhyai) +
ti, der, Pariyesanto,
Cy. V.86;gava+esa Nippapahcārāmassāyamdhammo
Nidahitvābhuhiati—Vin. IV. 87 (fromIs) +nta,prp. nippapancaratino—A. TY. 229
 Nippurisehi
This Dhammais for theonewho hasno
Extremely
delighted
inNibbana,
he
delight in proliferationof thoughtor
got himselfrid ofexistence:
who is happywithNibbana:
sakkāvantitebhiimakavattam, Cy,Ill
nibbānapadeabhiratassa,Cy. IV.
348; nibbana +abhi +Ram +ta,
120;ni(s) +papafica +aramassa+
pp.;pa -tHā -ts +i, pst.3. sg,
ayain; rati +ī, der.
Nibbane ca santadassavi—A. II. 443
Nippurisehi turiyehi
The one who hasseenpeacein
paricarayamano—D. II. 21; M. I.
Nibbana;Drs +ya +avi, der.
504;A. I. 145;Vin. I. 15
Being entertainedby female
Nibbijja pakkāmi —S. IV. 178
orchestra;pari + Car + aya +
Having lost interesthewentaway;ni +
mana, caus. pr. p.
Vid +va, absol.;pa + Kram + i,pst.
34 se
Nibbaddhatelakam naliyasakam -
A. TIL.49
Nibbittharajabhato
—Vin. IV. 265
A kind of vegetablemixedwith rice
The worker,employedandpaidby
flour andcookedin ghee,sweetened
theking; ni + Vis +ta,Pp.; ep.
andscented;Cy, III. 253
nibbisam bhatakoyatha; raja +Bhr
+ fa, pp.
Nibbanaponajicame mānasam
bhavissati—A. IHI. 443
Nibbidabahulo bhava — S. I. 188
My mind will bepronetowards
Practisedisinterestedness
frequently;
Nibbāna;mana(i) -- a, dey:
ni +Vid +& + bahula;Bhat+a,
imper.2". sg.
Nibbānam saechikareyya—M. II.
242
Nibbidāya eittam santhāsi—Vin. I.
(He) would experienceNibbana;sa +
15
acchi +kareyya,opt. 3”. sg.
The mind stoodfirm in
disinterestedness;
sam+Stha+s +i,
Nibbānasannāpaccupatthita—A.
pst. 3. sg.
IH. 443
Presentis thesenseofNibbana; pati
Nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya
* upa +Stha + i +ta,pp.
patipanno—S. II. 48; A. I. 64
The onewho hasbeenfollowing
Nibbanasappayapatipadā—
S. IV.
theway for disinterestedness,
134
detachment andcessation;pati +
The way,conduciveto the attainment
Pad + ta,pp.
of Nibbana
Nibbidā virāgatthā —A. V. 313
Nibbanabhirato pahasi sakkayam -
Disinterestedness
is for detachment:
A. III. 295
virdga+attha:vi +Raj +a, der.
Nibbidaviragavipannassa
Nibbidaviragavipannassa
hatūpanisamhoti vimutti-
hanadassanam —A. IIT. 200
Forhimwho haslosttouchof
disinterestednessanddetachment,
thereis no groundfor knowledgeand
visionof liberation; vi +Pad +ta,
pp.;Han +ta,pp. +upanisa
Nibbindati,nibbindam virajjati,
viragavimuccati, vimuttasmim
Vimuttamitiīānam hoti: khīnā iāti,
vusitambrahmacariyam,katam
karanīyam,nāparam itthattāyāti
paiānāti—Vin. I. 14
Becomesdisinterested,being
disinterested
he is detached,dueto
detachment he is released,when
released,therearises(in him)a
knowledge: birth is exhausted,highest
wayoflife hasbeenlived,donewhat
wastobedone,he knowsthatthereis
nothingmoreto be done for this
purpose;ni + ® + Vi(n)d + a + ti.
pres.3".sg.;ni +®+ Vi(n)d+a+
nla,pr.p.; vi +Raj +ya +ti, pass.
pres.3". sg.; vi +Muc +ya + ti,
pass.pres.3". sg.; vi + Muc +ta,
pp.; Ksi + ta, pp.; vi + Vas +i + ta;
na +aparam;ittha + tta, der
Nibbinnarūpā
virattarūpā
pativānarūpā—
D. IHI. 118
(They)lookedlikedisinterested,
PPp.+
riipa (appearance);vi + Raj +
fa,pp.;pati + Vr +ana,der.
Nibbethentam
ativetheti—M. II.
248
Hepresses
veryhardtheperson
Nibbedhikam
whodeniesthecharge,ni +
vethentam,
prp.; ati + Vest +e
ti,; pres.
o
3.20 sg.
ue
Nibbedhabhāgiyāsaīinā —A. II. 167
Notionsbelongingto penetration,
ni + Vyadht at bhāga + iya, der.
Nibbedhāyasamvattanti—S.V. 88
Leadto penetration;sam + Vrt +a +
nti, pres. 3”. pl.
Nibbedhikapariyayo
dhammapariyayo—A. III. 410
The modeof teachingnamed
penetrative
way;pari +(vy)+ aya
(from I)
Nibbedhikam brahmacariyam
paiānāti āsavanirodham— A. III. 414
He realisesthehighestway oflife
which is penetrative
andleadingto the
cessationof influxes;nibbedha+ ika,
der.; ni + Rudh + a, der.
Nibbedhikam brahmacariyam
paiānāti kammanirodham—
A. IHI.
415
He realisesthehighestwayof life
which is penetrative
andleadingto the
cessationof Kamma
Nibbedhikam brahmacariyam
paiānāti kāmanirodham—A. IHI. 412
He realisesthehighestway of life
which is penetrative
andleadingto the
cessationof sense-desire
Nibbedhikam brahmacariyam
paiānātidukkhanirodham
—A. IHI.
417
He realisesthehighestway of life
 Nibbedhikam
Nimujjati Nimujjitukamata Niramisam

which is penetrative
andleadingto the
cessationof Dukkha
Nibbedhikam brahmacariyam
pajanati saiianirodham —
A. IIL.
414
He realisesthehighestway of life
which is penetrativeandleadingto the
Nimittametam na Ssamanupassami-- palayativa —Vin. IV. 112 from problems,free from defects,
M. I. 72 Goesdownin thewateror comesup freefromblackmarks,pureand
I don't seethis point;nimittam+etam fromthewateror floatson thewater; establishedthemselveson a solid
u(t)+Majj +ya +ti, pres. 3. sg.; ni ground;ni +® +abbuda;ni + ®+
Nimittamaggahesi
—Vin. IIL. 15 +Majj +ya +ti, pres. 3“. sg.; Plu + ādīnava;apa +Gam + ta, pp.; Sudh
Took theshapeinto themind a+ ti:plavati >palavati >pilavati, + ta, pp.; pati + Stha +i + ta, pp.
(=recognised);a+ Grh +e +s +i, pres.3”. sg.
pst.3". sg.
9 2rd o

Nirayam upapanno—S. I. 92; A. IV.

cessationof identification
Nimuiiitukāmatāassa?— D. II. 325 225
Nimittam asamanupassanto —A. IV. Wouldtherebe desirefor immersing The onewho hasgoneto purgatory;
Nibbhogo bhavamGotamo —A. IV. 83 E into?; ni +Maii +ya +i + tum,inf; upa +Pad +ta,pp.; nirayamis
174;Vin. TI. 2 Seeingno reasonor sign;a +sam+ As +yd (Skt.yat), opt. 3". sg. governedby upa
anu +passa + nta, prip.
ni + Bhuj +a, der.
Niyyatitakkarassa Nirayavedaniyamkammam— A. III.
Nimittam ganhahi —Vin. I. 183 brahmasahavyatāya —D. I. 236 415
Nimantitamhataya brahmana
Take it theobject(sign); Grh +nd+ lt leadsthedoer for his unionwith The action,to beexperiencedin
vassamvuttha —Vin. III. 10-11
hi, meta.imper.2". sg. Brahma; fam(tat) +kara; ni + Ya + purgatory
Invitedby you,brahmin,we had
ti,pres.3 sg.; sahavya(from
observedrainy retreat;ni + manta
Nimittam suggahitam hoti, sahdya)+ tā, der. Niraye uppanno—S. I. 93
+e+ i+ ta, denom.pp.; Vas+
sumanasikatam, sūpadhāritam Born in purgatory;u(t) + Pad +ta,pp.
ta,pp. suppatividdhampanfaya —
A. IV. 33 Niyyatitakkarassasamma
Thesigniswelltakenup,well dukkhakkhayāya—D. II. 80 Nirayena va brahmacariyenava
Nimantita va pavarita va —Vin. IV.
attendedto, well consideredandwell lt leadsthedoer for theperfect abhisapeyya—Vin. IV. 276
311
penetratedintobyinsight;sw+Grh+ destructionof his suffering;sammd, Shouldswearwith purgatoryor with
Invitedor satisfied;nimanta+e + i 4
i+ ta,pp.;su +upa+Dhr +e +i+ adv. thehighestway of life; abhisapeyyati
ta,denom.pp.; pa+ Vr+e+i+ ta,
fa,caus.pp.;su +pati + Vyadh
+ ta, sapathamkareyya,Cy. 928; abhi +
caus.pp.
Pp. Niyyāsimahaccarāiānubhāvena- Sap+eyya,opt.3”.sg.
M.II. 118
Nimantito svātanāyabhattam—M.
Nimittānidissanti—Vin. I. 343 Went outwithroyalmajesty;
mahata Niraye paccitvā—Vin. III. 105
1.236
Signsaretobeseen;Drs +ya +nli, rāiānubhāvena,
Cy. HI. 349; ni t Yā Beingboiledin thepurgatory;Pac +
(He) wasinvitedfor themeal
pass.pres,3”.pl. ESEE patia gi ya +i + tva,pass.absol.
tomorrow; thephrase svdtanaya
bhattamis generally used with the
Nimittānusārīviīiīiānamhoti—D. Niratthakena
samganhāti
—D. IHI. Nirāmagandhākarune vimuttā—A.
verb adhivāsetu,bhattenais used
III. 249; S. IV. 269; A. III. 292 180 IHI.373
with ni + manta
There is consciousnessfollowingthe Accordstreatmentwith thingsof no Thosewho are freefrom foul smell
sign;nimitta
+anu+Sr +i, der. value;ni + ® + attha +ka, der.; sam (defilementof anger)andintenton
Nimantehisvātanāyabhattena—S.
+Grh +nd + ti, pres. 3”. sg. compassion;ni + ® + dma+ gandha;
IV. 123
Nimittena ādisati —A. I. 170 kodhāmagandha;
karuneti
Invite(him) for themealtomorrow;
Pointsout byasign;āt Drta'h, Nirabbudo hi bhikkhusamgho karunaiihāne;vimutta— adhimutta;
ni + manta +e +hi, denom.imper.
pres.3'd;sg. nirādīnavoapagatakālako suddho Cv.III. 387
PacisAN Ssvdtandya,(Skt.svastana),
$ārepatitfhito—Vin. IHI. 10
indcl,
Nimujjativa ummujjativa Thecommunity of bhikkhusis free Nirāmisam sukham laddhā

551
 Niramisassa
Nisinnapubbam Nissamsayam

upekhamadhititthati—A. IIL. 354 Nillopampi haranti —M. I. 87
Havinggainednon-sensuous Plunderwealth:nis) +Lup +a, der.;
happiness,he establisheshimself Hr +a+ nti,pres.3",pl.
onequanimity;
ni + ®+dmisa;Labh
+tva, absol.;adhi +tittha + ti, pres. Nivasam kappesum—Vin. I. 312
3”. sg.; upekhamis governedby adhi They settleddown; kappa+e +5+
um,denom.pst. 3. pl.
Niramisassa sukhassa nirodha
uppajjati adukkhamasukhavedana- Nivittha va hoti payata va —Vin. IV.
M. II. 236 105
Due to thecessationof unworldly Settleddown or on themarch:ni + Vig
pleasure,therearisesneither + fa,pp.; pa + Ya +ta,pp.
—_
miserablenor pleasurablefeeling;
ni + ® + amisa; ni + Rudh + a, der. Nivesanammapesi—Vin. I. 272
Causedtobuilda house;Ma +ape+
Niruttikusälo —A. IHI. 201 s+i, caus.pst.3". sg.
Skillful in language
Nisajja pade pakkhālesi—M. II.
Niruttipatisambhidāppatto hoti -
139;III. 155;A. I. 277;Vin.l.9
A. IHI.113 Havingsatdown(he)causedtowash
He hasgot (reached)analytical
feet;ni +Sad +ya, absol.;pa +Ksal
knowledgeof language;pati +
+e+s +i, caus:pst.3",sg.
sambhida+patta: pa + Ap + ta,pp.
Nisailāya cittam namati—M. IHI.
Nirodham phusati —D. I. 184
112
Experiencescessation;Sprg +a + ti,
The mindbendstowardssitting:Nam
pres. 3”.
2r
sg.
+a ti,pres.3. sg.
Nilīno acchi—Vin. III. 35
Nisinnako bhikkhusamgham
(He) remainedconcealed:ni +Li +
ovadati—M. II. 45
ta, pp.; As +ya + 1,pst. 3. sg.
While sittinghe advisesthe
communityof bhikkhus;0 + Vad+a
Nillekham jantagharam kattukamo
+ti, pres, 3 sg.
—Vin. IL. 123
The onewho is desirousof making
Nisinnakova kalakato, svayam
a hot-bathhousewith uncarved
patisamiīvito —M. I. 333
toproof; ni(s) +lekha; Kr +tum +
(Thisrecluse)
passed
awaywhile
kāmo
seated,
buttheverysamepersonhas
comebacktolifeagain;ni +Sad+
Nillehitvā bhufijati —Vin. IV. 198
ta, pp. +ka, der.; kala +kata,pps
Licks andeats:ni(s) +Lih 4 etid
so +ayam;pati +sam+Jiv +1+
Ivā, caus. absol.
ta, pp.
Nisinnapubbamiminā bhikkhunā- Sittingmatis with fringes;sa +dasa
Vin.IV. 144
Hasbeensittingpreviouslyby this Nisīdanasanthatam—Vin. III. 232
bhikkhu;
ni +Sad+ta,pp. +pubba Sittingmatstrewn;nisidana+
santhata;ni +Sad + ana, der.; sam
Nisinnamvā upanisīdeyya—
D. III. +Str + ta,pp.
203
(He) would sit close to the one who Nisidanenavippavasanti—Vin. II.
hadalreadybeensitting 123
Keepthemselvesaway from thesitting
Nisinnava nipanna va vijayati —D. mat;vi +pa + Vas+ a +nti,pres. 3”.
II. 14 pl.
Givesbirthto a child while sittingor
lyingdown;ni +Sad + ta,pp.; ni + Nissaggiyenakayam amasati—Vin.
Pad +ta,pp.; vi +Jan +ya + ti, IV. 214
pres.3”. sg. Givesa gentletouchto thebodywith
somethingalien;@+ Mrs + a +fi,
Nisinnohamsake āsane—M. II. 113 pres.3. sg.
I havebeensittingon my own seat;
nisinno+ aham Nissailitvā āpatti desetabbā—Vin.
III. 196
Nisīdatipallamkamābhuiitvāuium After handingit over,offence
kāyampanidhāyaparimukham shouldbe confessed;ni +Srj +ya
satimupatthapetvā—D. I. 71;II. + i+ tvd,absol.;Drf t e t tabba,
291;M. 1.219;IHI.35 caus.ful. pp.
Sitsdown,makingthelegscrossed,
keepingthebodyerectandcausingthe Nissatā visaūiuttā vippamuttā
attention
fikedonthesublectof vimariyādikatena cetasāviharanti -
meditation;
ni +Sad + a +ti, pres. S. III. 31; A. V. 151(sg.)
3".sg.;@+Bhuj+i +tva,absol.; Goneout,separated and released,
pa +ni +Dha@+ya, absol; upa + (they)abidewithanunlimitedmind; ni
Stha+dpe + tva, caus.absol.; Cy. +Sr +ta,pp.;vi+ sam+ Yuj+ta,
explains
thetermparimukhathus: pp.; vi +pa + Muc + ta,pp.; vi +
kammatthana
bhimukhamsatim mariyada+kata,pp.
thapayitva,
mukhasamipe
vakatvati
attho
(keeping
satifocussed
onthe Nissatthacivaramdatabbam—Vin.
subjectof meditation,that means,
III. 196
keeping
satifocussednearthe Shouldbegiventherobewhichis
mouth),210 handed over;ni +Srj +ta,pp.;Da +
tabba,fut.pp.
Nisidanam
namasadasam
—Vin. HI.
232
 Nissayapatippassaddhiyo
Nissāya Nissaya Nice
siddham bhavissatiyatha mayam Nissaranam hetam āvuso ragassa
kotthake nisidapeyyama—Vin. III. Youshouldlive in dependence;
ni + mayanihatoparāiito, Cy. I. 170;
yadidam upekkhācetovimutti—D.
161 Sri +ya, absol.; Vas + tabba, Sut. pp. tvam+As +si, pres. 2™.sg.
III. 249;A. III. 292 (no āvuso)
Undoubtedlythe food is notyet ready Brothers,
eguanimity,
whichiscalled
aswe havebeenmadeto sit in the Nissāyanissāyaatikkamimsu —D. Nihitanihitafica janeyya —Vin. I.
emancipation
of heart,is indeed
an
store-room;
Sidh +ta,pp.; ni +Sad II, 130 284
escapefromlust
+ape + eyyama,caus. opt. 1%.pl., Wentoff in close proximity;nissaya, Wouldknowwhatis keptin andwhatis
used int thepst. sense adv.,ati +Kram + imsu,pst. 3. pl. not;nihita +anihita;ni +Dha +i +
Nissarapam hetam Avuso vicikiccha
ta, pp.
kathamkathāsallassayadidam
Nissayapatippassaddhiyo Nissayavacchami—Vin. I. 60
asmīti manasamugghato—D. IHI.
acariyamha—Vin. I. 62 I will abidedependingon (the Nicacittamyevaupatthapetva—A.
250;A. III. 292
Terminationof dependencyon the venerable);
Vas+ssami(Skt.syami), IV. 376
Brothers,the totaldestructionofthe
teacher;pati +pa +Srabh + ti. der. Makingthemindhumbleandsubdued:
conceitthatI am, is, indeed,anescape
upa + Sthā + ape + tva,caus.absol.
fromthedartof sceptical
doubtsand
Nissayam yacati —Vin. III. 231 Nissimamgantva uposatham
queries;Cy.takessallaassallāpa,
Asks for dependence;Yac +a +ti, karonti—Vin. I. 340 Nicatthaniyam uccatthanethapeti -
converse, 1036; asmi + iti; sam +
So
pres. 3™.Sg. Havinggoneoutofthe boundarythey Vin. IV. 159
u(t) +ghan (Han)+ta,pp.
performUposathaceremony;ni(s) + Causesto promotea personwho
Nissayā ācikkhitabbā —Vin. I. 96 sima;Gam + tvd,absol.; Kr + 0 + deservesto beplacedin a low-
Nissaranam hetam āvuso vihesāya
The supportsshouldbeexplained:ni + nti,pres,3™.pl. position;nica +thāna + iya, der.;
yadidamkarunācetovimutti
—D.IHI.
Sri+ a, der.: & + Khya + tabba, ucca t thana;Stha + dpe + nti, caus.
248;A. III. 291
intens. fut. pp. Nissenimkareyya pāsādassa pres.3™.pl.
Brothers,compassion,which is called
ārohanāya—
D. I. 194
emancipation
of heart is, indeed,an
Nissayodātabbo
—A. IHI. 271; IV. Would build a staircase to mount up Nicam asanamgahetva—M. III. 8
escapefrom harassment themansion;
Kr +eyya,opt.3. sg.
347;V. 73 Havingtakena low seat;Grh +e +
The periodof dependencyshouldbe tvā,absol.
Nissaranam hetam āvuso Nihatametamadhikaranam santam
granted;ni + Sri +a, der: Da +
vyāpādassayadidam vipasantamsuvūpasantam--Vin. II.
tabba,fut. pp. Nīce āsanenisīditvā —5. IV. 123
mettācetovimutti—D. III. 248;A. 98,307 Havingsatona low seat:ni +Sad +i
II. 291 This legalquestionis closed,settled
NissaranadassaviTathagato—M. II. + tva,absol.
Brothers,loveandfriendliness,
which andwell settled;Sam+ ta,pp.; vi +
231
is calledemancipation
of heart,is, upa + Sam + fa, pp.; Su + vilpasanta,
Tathagatais theonewho showsthe Nice kule paccajato hoti,
indeed, anescape
fromhatred pp.
way out; ni(s) + sarana; Dr§ +ya + candalakule va venakule va
avi, der. nesadakuleva rathakarakule va
Nissaranam hetam āvuso Nihatāsamgharāii,nihato pukkusakule va, dalidde
sabbanimittānamyadidam samghabhedo —Vin. 1.357
Nissaranam hetam āvuso aratiyā appannapanabhojanekasiravuttike
animittācetovimutti
—D. III. 249;A. Conflictof theSamgha hasbeen
yadidam muditācetovimutti—D. IHI. yattha kasirena ghasacchado
III. 292 settled,
thedivision of theSamghahas
249; A. IIL. 291( no āvuso) labbhati—S. 1.94;A. I. 107;I. 85,
Brothers,obiectlessness, whichis beensettled;ni + Han + ta,pp.
Brothers,appreciative
joy, which is nesadakuleva venakuleva
calledemancipation
of heart,is indeed
calledemancipationof heart.is indeed Bornina loweastefamily,a familyof
anescapefromall obiects Nihatotvamasiantaka—S.I. 103
anescapefromjealousy;hi +etam; outcastes,
weavers,hunters,chariot-
yadidam,indcl. Theend-maker(Mara) you are makers andscavengers,
whichispoor,
Nissāyatevatthabbam
—Vin. IL.8 destroyed;
ni +Han+ta,pp.;tvam of nofoodanddrink,wherelifeis very
 Nice
hardandfoodandclothingis obtained
withmuchdifficulty;theword
rathakāraappearsto meana
chariot-maker,but the Cy. says it
Iheanscammakāra,a leather-worker,
Il. 175;pati + a +Jan + ta,Pp.; appa
* anna +pana + bhojana;kasira +
vutti(Vrt + ti, der.)+ka, der.
Nice thane thapesi—Vin. I. 191
Causedto demoteto a lower rank:
Stha +dpe +s + i, caus.pst. 3”. Sg.
Nitattham suttantamneyyattho
suttantotidīpeti —A. I. 60
Interpretsa discourse,which hasthe
themeaningalreadybroughtout,asa
discourse,whichhasthemeaningyet
to be broughtout;Ni + fa,pp. +
attha;Ni +ya + attha,fut. pp.; Dip +
e t ti, caus.pres.3% sg.
Nivarana, andhakarana
acakkhukaranaannanakarana
paiinanirodhika vighatapakkhika
anibbanasamvattanika—S. V. 97
Hindrances:makersof blindness,
visionlessnessandignorance;
obstructorsof wisdom,partakers
of destructionandnot leadingto
Nibbana;ni + Vr + ana,der;Kr
+ana, der.;pafifia + ni + Rudh +
a + ika, der; vi + Ghan +ta +
pakkha + ika, der; sam + Vrt +
ana + ika, der.
Nīvaranehi āvuto nivuto ophuto
pariyonaddho—M. II. 203
Covered,hindered,pervadedand
envelopedby hindrances: @4 Vr +ta,
DP.: ni + Vr +ta,pp.; o +Sphur +ta,
PPp.;pari +o +Nah +ta,pp.
Nihara te pattacivaram—Vin. I, 54
Take your bowl and robe out; ai ($)
Hr t a, imper:2"d,sg.
Nekkhammamdatthu khemato—A,
III. 75
To seerenunciationaspeaceful;Drie
tum,inf,
Nekkhammasitāni somanassāni—S.
IV. 232
Sweetfeelingsassociatedwith
renunciation;Sri +ta,pp.
Nekkhammādhimuttohoti —A. HI.
376; Vin. I. 183
(He) is inclinedtowardsrenunciation;
ni(s) + Kram +ya, der. +adhi +Muc
+ ta, pp.
Nekkhamme anisamsam
adhigamma—A. IV. 440
Having realisedthebenefitof
renunciation;
adhi+Gam+ya,absol.
Nekkhammecittam pakkhandati
pasidatisantitthativimuccati—A,
III. 245;IV. 438
Mind leapsinto renunciation,becomes
pleased,steadfastandreleased;
pa +
Skandh+a +ti,pres.3". sg.;pa +
Sad +a + ti, pres. 3”. sg. ; sam+
tittha + ti, pres. 3’. sg.; vi +Muc +
Negamassasamayohoti-—Vin. HI.
220
Therewasa convention ofthe people
of themarkettown; nigama+ a, der;
sam + I + a, der.
Negamenaca katika kata hoti, yo
Netam
pacchaagacchatipannasam
bandhoti—Vin. III, 220
An agreementwasreachedby the
markettown-peoplethatonewho
comeslate,for him fifty is thefine:
nigama +a, der.
Netamthānam viiiati —S. III. 53;
Vin. II. 284
Thisis notto be found; Vid +ya +fi,
pass.pres. 3. sg.
Netammamanesohamasmina me so
attā—M. I. 421; Vin. I. 14
Thisis notmine,this I amnot,this is
notmysoul;na +eso +aham+ asmi
Netteiimhagatesati —A. II. 75
Whentheleaderis on thewrongtrack
(goeson a crookedway); Ni +tu,der.;
Jimhais theopp. of uju; loc. absl.
Nemittebrāhmane āmantāpetvā-
D.II. 16
Havingcausedto invitebrahmin
astrologers;
nimitta + a, der.; āmanta
+dpe +tva,caus.absol.
Neyyattham
suttantam
nitattho
suttantotidīpeti —A. I. 60
Interprets
a discourse,which hasthe
meaningyetto bebroughtout,asa
discourse,
which hasthemeaning
already
brought
out;M7+ya,
fut,pp.;
+attha;Ni +ta,pp.+attha;Dip +e
+ti,pres.3°4.
ard SZ.
Neyyam
panāvuso
dhammam
paāīācakkhunāpaiānāti—M. I. 293
Brother,
onerealisesneyya,the
meaning
tobebrought out,bytheeye
ofwisdom:Nr +ya,fut.pp.;pana+
Neva
āviso; pa +Jan +na +ti, pres. 3%,
sg.; Ihe verbspaiānāti andpassati,
generally, occur togetherto give the
meaningofdirect kaowledge
Nerayikā viya saggagaminam
pihayanti—S. I. 202
They areenvious,like theresidentsof
purgatory,of theonewho is goingto
heaven;niraya +ika, der.; Sprh +
aya + nti,pres.3”. pl.
Nevaatitamsesamanupassami,na
panetarahi—D. II. 222
Neverdo I seein thepastnordo at
present; atīta + amsa; sam + anu +
passa + mi,pres. I". sg.; pana +
etarahi
Neva attanapaticodesi,na ganassa
arocesi—Vin. IV. 216
Never shereprovedherselfnor
informedthecommunity;pati + Cud
thetys i, caus.pst. 3".
2rd
sg.; ā $ Ruc
tetys hi, caus.psi. 3"".sg.
Neva attabyābādhāyacetetina
parabyābādhāyacetetina
ubhayabyābādhāyaceteti—M. I. 89
Neverdoeshewill to obstruct
himself, othersandboth; Cet + e +fi,
pres.3". sg.
Neva abhinandati,nappatikkosati-
M. II. 24
Neverappreciates nor rejects;na +
eva;abhi +Nand +a +ti, pres. 3°.
sg.;pati + Krug + a + ti, pres. 3™.sg.
Nevaabhinanditabbamna
patikkositabbam
—
D. II. 124;M. IIL.
29;A.II. 168
 Neva
Shouldneverbeappreciated
nor
rejected;abhi +Nand +i + tabba,
fut.pp.; pati + Krus + a +i + tabba,
fut, pp.
Neva abhivadetabbona
paccufthatabbo—Vin. I. 9
He shouldneverbe worshipped,nor
shouldrise up from theseat; abhi +
Vad+ e +tabba,caus.fut. pp.; pati +
u(t) + Stha +tabba,fut. pp.
Neva abhisamkharoti
nabhisaficetayati—M. III. 244
Neveraccumulatesnor formshabits:
abhi + sam(s) + Kr + o + ti, pres.3™
sg.; an + abhi +sam + Cet + aya +
ti, pres. 3. sg.
Nevaasakkhi muficitum, na
patisamharitum —D. I. 96
Neverwashe ableto release(the
arrow) nor to takeit back;a +sakkhi,
pst. 3". sg.; Mu(fi)c + i +tum,
inf;
pati +sam + Hr + i + tum,inf,
Neva ālapeyyāmana sallapeyyama-
Vin. I. 157
We would neveraddressandconverse
(with him);@+ Lap + eyyama,opt.
I”. pl.; sam +Lap +eyyama,opt.
1°xpi;
Neva ussadetabbo, na apasadetabbo
—D. III. 128
Shouldneitherbe praisednor be
blamed;u(t) +Sad +e +tabba,caus.
fut.pp.; apa +Sad +e + tabba,caus.
fut.pp.
Nevaolokesi, na pi alapi —Vin. IV.
18
Never lookedat, nor talkedwith:0 +
Lok +e+s +i, pst.3%.sg; a+ Lap
ti pot a Se.
Neva kammantāpatibhanti,na
bhattam patibhāti —M. II. 107
Neitherthework cometo mind,
nor the food;pati + Bha +nti,pres.
3”, pil.
Neva kamattha,na davattha,na
ratattha, pajatthava brahmanassa
brāhmanī hoti —A. III. 226
The brahmanihasno ideaof sense
desire,no ideaof fun, no ideaof
havingsex,theonly ideashehasfor
thebrahminis to begetoffspring;
kama + attha; dava + attha;rati +
atthā;paiā + attha + eva
Neva khipitasaddo na ukkasitasaddo
na nigghoso—D. I. 50
Neitherthesoundofsneeze, northe
soundofcough, nor anynoise; Ksup
+i + fa, pp.; u(t) + Kas +i +ta,pp.
Neva charika pannayittha, na masi
—D.II. 164
Neitherashnor sootwasto beseen;
pa t Vhā t ya +i + ttha,pass.pst.
ard
J”, Sg.
Nevatesamjayo databbo—
Vin. IV.
I Nevasumanohoti na dummano,
Theyshouldneverbegiventhe
victory; Da + tabba,fut. pp.
Nevadanam alattha,na
paccakkhanam —M. II. 62
Neitherhereceived
almsnorrefusal;
a +Labh+ttha,pst.3”.sg.;patita
+ Khya + ana, der.
Neva
Nevavupakaseyyana
vūpakāsāpeyya—Vin. IV. 326
Shouldnevertakeherawaynorcause
totakeheraway; vupakaseyyati na
gahetvāgaccheyya,Cy. 941; vi +apa
+Kr§ +dpe +eyya,caus.opt. 3. sg.
Nevasakkhiti uggilitum neva
sakkhitiogilitum —M. I. 393; S. IV.
323(sakkhati)
Neverwill hebe ableto vomitnor to
swallow(it); na +eva + Sak + ssati
(Skt.syati),fut. 3. sg.; u(t) +Gr (GI)
+1+ tum,inf.; o + Gr +i + tum.,inf,
Nevasatimamkalam upeti — S. II.
133
Nevercomesto one hundredthpart
(in termsof value);sata T.ima,der:;
upa +I +ti, pres. 3. sg.
Nevasassumādiyati —A. IV. 91
Never (she) cares for the mother- in-
law;ā t Dā 3:iva + ti, pres.3".
2rä sg.
Nevasuttamāgatam hoti, no
suttavibhamgo
—Vin. II. 96
Neitherversedin therulesnor in the
analysis
thereof;thisphraserefersto
a Dhammakathika (ābhidhammika?),
Suttais usedhere in thesenseof
vinayarules; vi + Bhaj +a, der.
upekhakoviharati sato sampajano-
D. II. 250; A. IHI. 279; V. 30
Never is (he)happynorunhappy,
(but) This thingis notto be foundin me;
liveswitheguanimity,
mindfulness
and sam + Vid +ya + ti, pass.pres. 3".
awareness; su + mana;du +mana Sg.
Nevassacittam
pariyadiyanti—A.
II, 377
Neso
They nevergetholdof his mind;
pari + (y) +4 +Da +iva +nti,
pres. 3”. pl.
Nevassatam hoti antarayaya—M. I.
38
Thatwouldneverbeanimpediment to
this person;na +eva +assa:As +ya
(Skt.yat), opt.3’. sg.
Nesabhantekatha Bhagavato
dullabha bhavissati,pacchapi
savapāya— D. I. 179
This kindof talk, venerablesir, will
notbe hardto find for theBlessed
One to listenevenat a latertime:na +
esd; du + labha: Labh + a, base;
paccha +api; paccha,indel.; Sru +
ana, der.
Nesasabhayattha na santisanto—S.
I. 184
This is nota meetingwherethereare
no goodpeople;yattha,indcl.; As +
nti,pres. 3. pl.; Sam+ ta,pp.
Nesodhammonesovinayo netam
satthusāsanam—A. IV. 280; Vin. II.
259
This is nottheteaching,this is not
thediscipline,this is not the
instruction
of the Teacher;na +eso;
na + etam
Nesodhammomayi samviiiati —A.
III. 198
Nesosamano,samanakoeso—S. I.
207
 No
This is nota realrecluse,buta fake
one:na +eso; samana +ka, suffix ka
is addedhere to give a derogatory
sense
No kallopaīho —S. II. 13
It is nota goodquestion
No ea kalahakārako
—Vin. II. 201
Not a makerof quarrels;no, neg.p.
No ca kho yam tvam sandhaya
vadesi—Vin. III. 2
It is not(for thatsense)for which you
makethestatement;sandhāya,indci.;
Vad+ e +si, I pres.24. sg.
8 ti, caus,pres. 3. sg.
No cassa,no ca me siyā, na
bhavissati,na me bhavissati—M. II.
264; A.IV. 74
It mightnot be,it mightnot be mine,
it will notbe, it will notbe mine:no +
ca + assa:As +ya (Skt.yat), opt. 3”.
sg.; Siya : As +ya, opt. 374.Sg.
Nocassamno ca me siya, na
bhavissāmi na me bhavissati—S.
III. 205
I mightnotbe, it mightnotbe mine,I
shall not be, it shouldnotbe mine
No ee tam middham pahīyetha—A.
IV. 86
If thatdrowsinesswould not bedriven
out; pa +Ha + tya +etha,pass.opt.
mid. 3. sg.
No ce me tvam bhāsitassaattham
āiāneyyāsi,yathāsake tittheyyāsi -
M. IHI. 129
If youwouldn'tunderstandthe
meaningof my sayingthenyou
Nhāpetvā
shouldstandon your own: ce,eondpi;
ā t Vān t eyvāsi,opt. 2", sg.; tittha
(Stha) +evyasi,opt. 2”. sg.
No vata re kifici— M. I. 125
Nothing,you wretched;re is usedto
address somebodywith contempt,
indel.
No visahi—D. I. 118,11.5
Wasunable;vi +Sah + i, pst.3”. sg.
No hidam āvuso—
M. I. 147;II. 220;
A.IV. 382
It is notso, brother; no +hi +idam
No hetamayye— S. IV. 376
This is notso, venerablelady;no +hi
+etam, hi, emph.p.; ayye,voce.
sg.
ofayvā, generally used by thenuns
No hetambhante—D. I. 8; S. II. 99
This is notso , venerablesir: no +hi +
etam
Nhāpetvāvilimpetvābhoietvā
khadaniyamadamsu—
Vin. IV, 85
Havingcaused tobathe,
annoint,
and
feed,(they)gavethemsolidfood;
Sna +dpe + tva, caus.absol.;vi +
Li(m)p +e +tva,caus.absol.;Bhuj
+e + tvd,caus,absol.; Khad +
anīva,fut.pp.; a +Da +a@ + imsu,
doublepst, 3". pl.
Pakatannhoi Pakkamantāpi
Pakatannti abhisannanirodhassa - The onewith strongdelusion,by
D. I. 180 nature
(Blessed One ) is the real knower of
thecessationof higherconsciousness; Pakatiyā tibbarāgaiātiko —M. I.
pakata +Jnd +a, der.; abhi +sanna 308;A. II. 149
+ni +Rudh + a, der. The onewith stronglust,by nature
Pakatiya silavati Bodhisattamata-
D. II. 12
By nature,Bodhisatta'smotheris
morallyvirtuous
Pakāsanīyakammamkarotu —Vin.
Pakatattobhikkhu na āsādetabbo, Il. 189
antovā bahi vā —Vin. II. 22 Let (theSamgha)performtheformal
A regularbhikkhushouldnotbe actof publicannouncement;
pa +Kas
attacked,
insideor outside;@+Sad + +antya,fut. pp.+ kamma;Kr + 0 +
e +tabba,caus,fut. pp.; antoand tu, imper.3”. sg.
bahi,opposites,
indel.
Pakkantovaahosi,na puna
Pakatikathāsotum—Vin. II. 188 paccaganchi—A. I. 278
To hearnormalconversation:Sru + He wentoff forever,did notcome
tum,inf. backagain;pa +Kram +fa,pp.; pati
+@+gaicha (=gaccha)+ i, pst. 3%.
Pakati kho hesalokasmim —D. I. Sg.
168
Thisis, indeed,naturalin theworld;Ai Pakkamati na paccessanti—Vin. I.
r esa 25
Goesoff saying,“I will notcome
Pakatiyātibbadosaiātiko
—M. I. back”;pati +e (fromI) +ssam,fut.
308 1".sg.+ iti
Theonewithstronghatred,
by
nature;
tibba+dosa+jati +ka, Pakkamantāpiekatovapakkamanti
der.; tibba is sometimes used as —Vin. IV. 41
lippa, Skt. tīvra Evenwhentheyaregoingoff, theyjust
go together;pa +Kram + a +nta,pr.
Pakatiyātibbamohaiātiko
—
M. I. p.; ekato +eva;pa +Kram +a +nti,
308 pres, 3™.,pl.
 Pakkamantipi
Pakkamantipi vibbhamantipi
titthiyesupisamkamanti
—Vin. I. 54
Go off,disrobeandchange
overto
hereticalschools;pa + Kram +a +
nti,pres.3rd
3”.
pl.; vi +Bhram+a +
nti,pres. 3”. pl.; sam + Kram +a+
nti, pres. 3. pl.
Pakkamantoanapekkhopakkamati -
A. II. 258
While going off he leaves(the place)
withoutany(future)hope
Pakkamitabbamna vatthabbam-
M. I. 105
Shouldleave(thatplace)andstaynot.:
pa + Kram + i + tabba,fut. pp.; Vas+
tabba,fut. pp.
Pakko āmavannī-— A. II. 106
Ripe butlooks raw;Pac + ta,DD.;
vanna -- ī, der.
Pakkhagananamuggahetum—Vin. I.
117
To learntheway to countthedaysof
half month;u(t) +Grh +e +tum,inf.
Pakkhapaticchannamapattim —Vin.
II. 48
The transgressionconcealedfor a
fortnight
Pakkhamānattamcaritabbam —A.
IV. 277
Shouldundergofortnightpenance(in
whichthesaidbhikkhushouldbehave
respectfullyto otherbhikkhus);Cay 2
i +tabba,fut.pp.
Pakkham nissāyasamgham
bhindeyyum—Vin. II. 196
Paggāhikasālam
Onaccount of thefaction,theywould
splittheSamgha; ni +Sri +ya,
absol.; Bhi(n)d + evyum,opt.3”.pl.
Pakkham pariyesati ganam
bandhati—Vin. III. 173
Looks for a faction,formsa group;
pari +es(fromIs) +a +ti,pres,3”
sg.;Ba(n)dh +a +ti,pres.3”.sg.
Pagunamgandhambhanantam
opateti —Vin. TV. 15
While speaking a familiar text (he)
causes
todropor makea mistake;
gandha=gantha;Bhan + a + nta,pr.
p.; o +Pat +e +ti, caus.pres.3”.sg.
Pagevataramagaccheyya—
M. III.
145
Should comemuchmoreearly;
pageva (prak + eva) + tara
Pagevamanussitthiya—Vin. III. 28
Much more with a woman
Pagganhati purime pade —A. IV.
191
Tightensthe fore legs;pa + Grh +na
+ ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Paggāhanimittam manasikātabbam
—A.1.256
Shouldfocusattention
onthesignof
excertion ; paggahoti viriyassa
nāmam,
Cy.II. 364;pa +gaha(from
Grh) +nimitta
Paggāhikasālam vā pasāressati-
Vin. II. 291
Will opena tradecentre;pa +gaha+
ika, der. + sala; pa + Sr +e * ssali,
caus.fut. 3". sg.
Pacalayamano Paccantimesu
Pacalāyamānonisinno hoti —A. IV. way;manasi+akdsi:a +Kr +s +i,
85 bstua a;
Hehasbeensittingdrowsing;pa 3
cala t aya t māna,dehom.pr.p.; ni Paccatthikatopi daheyya—M. I.
+Sad +ta,pp. 511
Wouldconsiderasanenemy;pati +
Pacuratthatāyanandati—A, IV. 94 attha t ika, der.;Dhā t a +eyya,
Becomeshappyabouttheincreaseof opt. 3. sg.
wealth:pacura - atthatāya;Nand ta
+ti,pres,3”. sg. Paccatthikanaficaanabhijjhitam -
Vin. I. 287
Pacuratthoassa—A. IV. 94 Not particularlydesiredby the
Hewouldbewealthy;As +ya (Skt. enemies;pati +attha + ika, der.;
yat),opt.3". sg. an +abhi +jha (fromDhyai) + i +
ta,pp.
Paccattaiieva īānam hessati—M.
Il. 234 Paccanikatabbamamaninissam— D.
There will beknowledgewithin 11.352;M. I. 378
themselves; pati +attam+yeva;Ha I thoughtthat(Kassapa)shouldbe
(Bhi) + a +ssati: hossati>hessati, madeanopponent;paccanikam+
So katabbam;a + Man +ya + is + am,
or issam,pst. 1”.sg.
Paceattamyevafianam uppajjati -
A.IIT.24 Paccantamuccinatha—Vin. I. 73
Knowledgeariseswithin oneself;pati Restore
orderin theborderland;
r altam+(y) + eva paccantamuccinathati
paccantam
vaddhetha,core palāpetvā
Paecattamyeva parinibbāyati —S. corabhayenavutthitegame
11.
82;III. 54 āvasāpetvā
ārakkhamdatvā
Completely extinguishes
within kasikammādīnipavattāpethāti
oneself;
pari +ni + Va+ya +ti, vuttam hoti, Cy.V. 996; u(t) + Ci +
pres,3. sg. na +tha,imper.2™.pl.
Paccattamyeva satim Paccantimeva janapade
upatthapessanti
—D. I. 77 anusannatum-A. I. 68
Willcausetokeepupmindfulness Or togoandinspect
theborderlands;
Withinthemselves:upa +Stha + ape anu +sam + Y¥@
+ tum,inf:
+ssanti,
caus.fut, 3”.pl.
Paccantimesu
janapadesu
—M. I.
Paccattam
yonisomanasakasi
—M. 140;A. III. 130;Vin. I. 197
1.332
In theremoteareas(in theborder
Examined
within himselfin a right lands);pati + antima
 Paccantimesu
Paccupatthita Paceuppannam Paccha
Paccantimesujanapadesujato hoti, +i+ ta, absol.;pari +Sudh +e +
milakkhesu aviāīātāresu —D. IHI. (Bhufijati)hasbeenpresentand Paccekapadesugahetvā—M. II. 64
ssama, caus. fut. 1, pl.
264; A. IV. 226 (paccāiāto) worshipping with claspedhands:pati Holding(his) feetseparately;Grh +e
Born in theborderlandsamongthose +upa +Stha +i +ta,pp.; namas4 +tvd,absol.
Paecācikkhāmi, halanti vadāmi-
who areunculturedandunintelligent; M. I. 245
Jan +ta,pp.; a +vi +Jia + tu, der. Paccekaputthassa veyyakaranam-
| rejectandsay no;pati +@+Kinā
Paccuppannam addhanam- S. II. 27 Vin. I. 103
mi, intens.,pres. I". sg.; halam,indel.
Paccantokupito hoti —Vin. I. 73 Intheperiodof present The answerof the questionseparately
+iti
Therewasanunrestin theborderland: asked;pati +eka +Prch +ta,pp.:1
Kup + i + ta,pp. Paccuppannesu kiccesu vyasanam +@+karana
Paccasacivaramuppajjati—Vin. IIL.
dasseti—D. III. 186
204
Paccapadi Incaseof presentwork to bedone, Paccetipapam—
S. I. 13
Expectedrobe is available;pati +asa
dhammassacanudhammam
=NE hepointsout his difficulties Evil comes upon (him); pati + e (from
+clvara; u(t) + Pad + ya + fi, pres.
146;S. IV. 63 (misfortunes);Dr§ +ya + e +ti, i) +ti,pres.3. sg.
3”. sg. o
caus.pres. 3. sg.
RealisedtheDhammain its perfect
harmony;pati +a +Pad +i. pst. 34 Paccessampaccessanti—Vin. I. 256
Paccasimsamanopaccupatthito- Paccuppannesu
dhammesu
Sg. SayingI shallcomeback,| shall
M. II. 5 samhīrati
—M. III. 189 comeback;pati +e (fromI) +ssam,
Stood nearbyhoping;pati +a +Sams Inthethingspresenthe is dragged
Paccamsenavibhaiissāma—A. III.
* a + mana, pr. p.; pati + upa + Stha away;fanhāditthīhiākaddhīyati,Cy.
38
+i +ta, pp. V.4; sam+Hr + tya + ti; pass.pres.
We will divide (separately)according Paccorasmimpahareyya—A. IV. 130
to the needofeach: attanoattano
OFSe, Wouldstrikeon thechest;pati +
Paccuggantvapattacivaram
urasmim;pa + Hr + eyya,opt. 3™.sg.
patiggahetabbam— Vin. I. 46 Paccuyyasiyena Kasi —
S. I. 82
Havinggoneforward,thebowlandthe Marchedagainst,
uptoKasi;pati+
vi + Bhaj +i +ssama,fut. 1".pl. Paccorohamabhavantam,
robeshouldbe received;pati +u(t)+ u() +Ya+s +i, pst.3”.sg. paecorohāma
bhavantam
—A. V.234
Gam +tva,absol.;pati +Grh+e +
Paccaya samghātiyā nikkhepaya - Wecomedownto you again,we come
tabba,fut. pp.
Vin. I. 298 downtoyou again;pati +o +Ruh +a
253 +ma,pres. 1".pl.
Conditionsforthelayingasideofthe
Paccudavatto—S. I. 224 Weshoulduttera separate
stanza;
doublelayerrobe
Turned
back; pati +u(t) +a+ Vrt+ Bhas+eyydma, opt.I. pl. Pacchatogacchantapurato
ta, pp.
Paccavekkhanābahukārā hoti gacchantassa
dhammamdesenti-
kusalesudhammesu—A. V, 92
Paecekadussayugena
acchādesi
—A. Vin. IV. 205
Paccudavattati kho idam vihhanam V.347
Reviewingis muchhelpfulin While goingbehind(they)explainthe
nāmarūpamhā, nāparamgacchati- Made himdresswithseparate
pairof
wholesomethings;pati +ava + Iks + Dhamma
totheonegoingahead
D. II. 32;S. II. 104 cloths;
d+ Chad+e +5+i, caus.
ana, der.
Thisconciousness turnsbackfrom pst: 314,Sg. Pacchaliyamkhipanti—A. III. 76
nameandformanddoesnotgo to
Paccavekkhitvāpaceavekkhitvā Go behindandkick:pacchato
another;
pati +u(t)+a+ Vrttatt, Pāeeekadvārabāham
nissāya
—S.I.
pindapatamparisodhessama—M. gantvāpitthipādenapaharanti,
pres. 3. sg.; na +aparam 146
III. 297 Cy.Ill. 261
Reviewingrepeatedly
weshallmake
Paccupatthitahotipanjalika
thealmsfoodclean:pati +ava +Iks Pacchaupasampannenapure
namassamānā—
D. II. 270
upasampanno
vandiyo—Vin, I. 162
 Paccha
Theonewhohasbeenordained
earlier
shouldbe worshippedby theone later
ordained;pacchāandpure,opposites, Ata shadedpart(of Vulture’speak)
indel.;upa +sam+Pad +ta,pp.; (he) walks to andfro; Kram +a +ti,
Vand+ i+ ya,fut. pp.
Pacchaevam vadeyya—Vin. IV, 216
Lateron (she)would saythus;pacchā,
indcl.; Vad+eyya,opt. 3”. Sg.
Pacchatape nisinno hoti pitthim
otāpayamāno— S, V. 216
Hehasbeensittingin theafternoon
sunshine,makingthebackwarm:
paccha + Gtapa;0 + Tap+aya +
mana, caus. pr.p.
Pacchāpuresahhīcamkamam
adhittheyyāsi—A. IV. 87
Beingconsciousof backandforth.you
shouldgeton to themeditationalwalk:
adhi + Stha + eyydasi,
opt. 24. Sg.
Pacchabhattam pavārentiyo vikale
ahesum—Vin. II. 275
While inviting(holdinginviting
ceremony)afterthe mealtheywereat
a wrong time; pa + Vr +e-+ nti, caus.
pr.p.
Pacchabhattam
pindapātapatikkanto—D. I. 71; M.
II. 153
Returnedfrom alms collectionand
afterthemeal;pati +Kram +ta,pp.
Pacchabhattambhuttapātarāsassa
ayamācāro hoti —S. V. 73
After themealthis is thepracticeof
theonewhohashadthebreakfast;
pacchā t bhatta;Bhuj + ta,pp.+
Ppatat+® +asa
Pacchimam Pacchima
Pahia
Pacchayayamcamkamati—Vin. II, puratthabhimukhonisidi —D. II. 85: -A.V. 111
193 5.IV. 183 While abandoninghe keepshimself
Leaning
againstthewesternwall he away,withoutgrasping;pa +Ha +
satdownfacingtheeast;ni +Sri +ya, nta, root. redup. pr.p.; upa+ @+ Da
intens,pres. 3”.sg. absol.;purattha +abhimukha + iva +nta,prp.; vi + Ram +a + ti.
pres. 3. sg.
Pacehāvighātamāpaiianti —A. II, Paechimāianatā anuppavattesi—M.
359 II. 82 Paiānam na parāmasati—D. I. 16-7
Laterontheysuffer;@+Pad+ya+ Peopleof the latergenerationcarried While knowinghedoesnothold it
nti,pres,3”.pl. iton;anu+pa+ Vrt+e+s +i,
fast;pa +Jan +na + nta,pr. p.; para
Caus, pst. J.2rd Sg,
+Mrs +a +ti, pres.3”. sg.
Paccha vinayam pariyapunissasi-
Vin. IV. 144 Pacchimajanata (tesam) Paiānāthāvuso— Vin. IV. 131
You will learnVinaya(discipline) ditthānugatimāpaiiati —A. I. 71 Alright, friends;pa +Jan +na + tha,
later; pari +Ap +(u) na +i +ssasi, Peopleofthe futuregenerationfollow imper.2". pl. + dvuso
theirview;paccha +ima,der.;jana +
tā,der.;ditthi +anu +gati; 4 + Pad Paiānāsi tvam bhagini —Vin. II.
Pacchāvippatisārīahosi—S. I. 92 * ya +nti,pres. 3™pl. 133
Becameremorsefullater;vi +pati +
Sister,it is up to you;pa +Jan + na
Sr or Smr + t, der. Pacchimajanata ditthanugatim +si, pres. 2”. sg.
apajjati—Vin. II. 108
Pacchasamanena
hotabbam
—Vin. I. Theposterityfollows thewrongview; Paiāpatim etadavoca— Vin. III. 257
46 a+ Pad +ya +ti, pres. 3”. Sg. Said thisto thewife;paiā --pati;
Heshouldbea recluse
goingbehind; etam(etad)+a + Vac+a, root
pacchā,indel.; Hii (Bhi) +a +tabba, Pacchima
janatasalimamsodanam redup.,pst.3”.sg.
fut. pp. atimaniissati—Vin. II. 7
Theposterity
will disdainthemeal Pajjam abhisamkharitum— Vin. I.
Pacehimamianatam anukampamānō With riceandcurry(meat);sali +
205
—S.II.203 mamsa+ odana
To preparea medicinefor thecracked
Beingcompassionate
towards feet;pddanamsappayabhesajjam
Pacchimekale —A.V, 88
posterity;anu +Kamp +a +mana, pacitum,Cy. 1092;pada +ya; der.;
Inthelatterpartof life
pr.p. abhi +sam(s)+Kr +i + tum,inf.
Pajahati
vinodetivyantikaroti
Pacchimamjanatamapaloketi—M. Pajjotassevanibbanam—
S. I. 159;
ānabhāvam gameti— S. II. 153
IT.93 A. 1.236
Heconcerns
aboutposterity;
apa+ Abandons,causes
todriveaway,puts Justasblowingoutofa lamp;
a endtoit,makesit non-existent;
vi
Lok +e +ti, pres. 3”. sg. pajjotassa + iva
+Nud+e +ti, caus:pres.3".sg.;vi
+anta+karoti, ana + bhava;Gam +
Pacchimam
disam—
A. HI. 368 Pana ayatananiabhivadanti—M.
Westerndirection 6f ti,caus.pres.3”.sg. II. 232
Theyassert
onfivegrounds;
Pacchimambhittimnissaya Pajahanto
viramatis na upādiyanto āyatanāni—kāranāni, Cv. IV. 22
 Pahia
Pahea uttarāsamgasatānipādāsi -
Vin. II. 291
Offered five hundredupperrobes;pa
+a+ Da +s'+ i, pst. 3". sg.
Pancakamaguna ete itthiripasmim
dissare—A, III. 69
Thesefive objectsof sense-desireare
to beseenon a woman’sbody;Drs +
ya + re,pass.pst. 3™.pl., used
sometimesin thepresentsense
Pancakamagune gathita mucchita
alihopannāanādīnavadassāvī
anissaranapaūiīāparibhuhianti —D.
1.245
They enjoy objectsof sense-desire,
beingentangledwith, unconsciousof
andindulgedin them;withoutseeing
anyharm of them andwithouthaving
wisdomas to how to getrid ofthem:
Grath +i +ta,pp.; March + i + ta,
pp.; adhi +0 (ava) + Pad + ta,pp.;
Drs +ya + vi, der.; pari + Bhu(fi)j
+ a + nti, pres. 3%.pl.
Paīica cetasovinibandhā
asamucchinnā—M. I. 101
Five fettersof mindhavenotbeen
completely cut off; a + sam + u(t) +
Chid + ta,pp.
Pafica cetokhila appahina—M. I.
101
Five barriersof mindhavenotbeen
abandoned; ceto +khila; a +pa + Ha
+ fa, pp.
Paficadhanusatikampacchimam-
Vin. III. 263
Minimumhasfive hundredbows
(two hundredcubitsfromthevillage);
patica +dhanu +sata +ika, der:
paccha+ima,der.
Pancanikaye pucchi — Vin. II. 287
Ouestionedaboutfive collections:
Prch 1 ya 3 i, pat.3"l,sg.
Pafica nivarane cetasoupakkilese
panhayadubbalikarane —M. I. 181;
III. 36
Five hindrances,pollutingfactors
of mind,weakening
factors
of wisdom;
ni(s) + Vr + ana, der.; upa +kilesa:
Kli§ + a, der.; dubbala +karana
Paficanivaranepahineattani
samanupassatopamujjam jayati,
pamuditassapiti jayati, pitimanassa
kayo passambhati,passaddhakayo
sukham vedeti, sukhino cittam
samadhiyati—D. I. 73
When five hindrancesareremoved,
therearisesjoy fortheobserverwho
is lookingintohimself,fortheone
who is joyful therearisesrapture,
fortheoneof rapturous
mindbody
is tranquillized,theonewhohasa
tranquillized
bodyfeelsease,for
theonewhofeelseasemindis
concentrated; pa + Ha + ta, pp.;
pa + Mud + ya, der; Jan +ya
ti, pres. 3. sg.; pa + Sra(m)bh+
a+ ti, pres. 3". sg.; pa + Srabh +
ta,pp.; Vid+e +ti,pres,3”.Sg.
sam +@+ Dha + iva + ti,pass.
pres:3”.sg.
Paīicannam
upādānakkhandhānam
samgahosannipātosamavāyo—M. I.
190
Collection, conglomerationand
collocation
offiveaggregates
with
Pancannam
clinging;up +4+ Da +ana,der, +
khandha
Paīicannamorambhāgiyānam
sailioianānamparikkhayā
opapātikohoti, tattha parinibbāyī
anavattidhammotasmaloka —D. I.
156
Dueto theexhaustionof five fetters
which belongto thelowerpart,he is
born ( literallydropped)intothe
heavenly world andis perfectly
extinguished therewithoutreturning
fromthatworld; ora + bhaga+ iya,
der.;upa + Pat + ika, der.;sam + Yuj
+ e+ ana, caus. der.
Paficannambhikkhusatanamyo
pacchimako—D. II. 155
Thelastoutof five hundredbhikkhus
Paficannetamkamagunanam
adhivacanam —M. I. 155 matta is used
Thisisasynonymn forthefivefold
objectof sensepleasure;
paficannam Pancamattehibhikkhusatehi,
+etam
Paficabalikatta —A. IHI. 45
Theonewhoperformsfiveofferings:
offering made to relatives, guests,
departed
ones,kingandgods;Kr +
tu,der.
Paiicabijajatani:mūlabīiam,
khandhabīiam, phalubijam,
āggabīiam bīiabīiam—Vin. IV. 35
Therearefive kindsof seeds:root;
Stem,
shoot,budandseed
Paitcamattani
cittatthdnasatani
cintitaini
—A, V. 230
About
fivehundred
possibilities
of
Paficamasako
mind—arising havebeenthoughtout;
cittatthānasatānīticittuppādasatāni,
Cy. V. 72; Ci(n) t +i +ta,pp.
Paīicamattāni thālipākasatāni
bhattābhihāramabhiharimsu —M.
1.236
They broughtaboutfive hundred
potsofmilk rice for themeal;thali
+paka: Pac + a, der. +satani:
bhatta+abhiharam:abhi + Hr +
a, der.;abhi + Hr + a + imsu,pst.
Sx pil.
Pancamattani bhikkhusatani— M. I.
456
About five hundred bhikkhus
Paīicamattehibhikkhusatehi—D. I.
1
Withbhikkhus,aboutfive hundred;if
the number is not exact the word
sabbehevaarahantehi—S. I, 26
With thebhikkhusaboutfive hundred.
all areArahants
Pancamattehisakatasatehi—Vin. I.
224
With carts,aboutfive hundred
Pancamamdivasamkalam karissati
—Vin. I. 273
(He) will die on thefifth day;ace.for
loc.
Paīicamāsakopādo hoti —Vin. III.
45
Pada(1/4) is equalto five beans;
māsakais thesmallestin value
 Pancamgikassa
Pancamgikassaturiyassa kusalehi
susamannahatassa saddo—A. IV. 263
The sound
of the fivefold musical
instrumentwell playedby theskillful
musicians;pafica +amga +ika, der.;
su +sam +anu +a@+Han +ta,pp.
Pancamgikassasammasamadhissa
bhāvanā—A. IHI. 25
Cultivationof fivefold right
concentrationof mind ; pafica
amga + ika, der.
Pancamgikenaturiyena —S. I. 131
With fivefold musicalinstrument
Pancamgulikam datum —Vin. II.
123
To givea specialmarkwith five
fingers;patica +amgula + ika, der:
Da +tum,inf,
Paficavassaninissayavatthum -
Vin. I. 80
To abidedependingon (theteacher)
for five years;ni +Sri +ya, absol.;
Vas+tum,inf.
Pahcasatānamthavikam —Vin. IV.
161
A purseof five hundred
Paficasatanidando —Vin. I. 247
Fine is five hundred
Paficasudhammesupatitthaya—A.
V. 329
Havingestablishedhimselfon five
things;pati +Stha +ya, absol.
Paficasupadanakkhandhesu
aniccānupassīviharati —A, V. 109
Paficahi
Observingimpermanence
in five
aggregates
withclinging,heabides:
paficasu+ upaddna +khandhesu;
anicca +anu +passa + i, der.
Pancasupadanakkhandhesu
udayavayānupassīvihāsi —D. II, 35;
A. Il. 45 (viharati)
He lived observingarisingand
ceasing
offive aggregateswith grasping;
udaya +vaya +anu +passa +7,
der.; vi +Hr + s+ i: viharsi>
vihassi >vihasi
Paficasu sikkhapadesuthitanam—§.
V. 407
For thosewho havefoundedtheirlife
on five moralprecepts;Stha+ i +ta,
Pp.
Pancahiābādhehiphuttho—
Vin. I.
73
The oneafflictedwith five diseases;
Sprs +ta, pp.
Pancahiuttarasamgasatehi
Bhagavantam acchadesum
—A. III.
239
(They) causedto offer theBlessed
One five hundredupperrobes;utara
+@+samga;@+Chad+e +s+um,
caus.pst. 3”. pl.
sensedesire;pari +Ha +ya +ti,
pres. 3. sg.
Pancahi kamagunehi samappito
samamgībhūto paricāreti—D.IHI.
131;5. IV. 202
Paiicahi
Beingcommittedto andprovidedwith
five sensuous objects he causes to
enjoylife; sam +R (arp) +e +i +ta,
caus.pp.; sam +amga +bhūta;pari
+Car +e +ti, caus.pres. 3”. sg.
Pancahithanehi adhiganhati—A.
IHI.33
Heexcelsin five points;adhi +Grh 4
nd + ti, pres. 3. sg.
Pancahituriyasatehi samappito
samamgībhūtoparicāreti —M. I.
252
Beingentertained
by five hundred
musicalinstrumentshe causesto
enioylife
Paācahivatthūhi samādāyavattāma
—Vin. II. 197;IHI. 172
Weobserveandabideby thefive
Propositions;
sam +a +Da +ya,
absol.;Vrt +a +ma,pres.1".pl.
Pafcdhikamsamghaticaram
—Vin.
IV. 281
Changeof five robesfor five days:
patica+aha + ika, der:
wamghāticāra = cilvaranam
Parivattanam, Cy. 929; The word
samghātiseems to have been used
herein thesenseof robes in general
Paīcindriyānam samattā
Paripūrattā arahamhoti—S. V. 200 Claspingbothpalmstogetherhe stood
Duetotheevenness andcompletenessworshipping;namas+ya +mana,pr.
ofthe five (spiritual) facultiesone p.; a+ Stha +@ +s +i +doublepst.
becomes anArahant;pajica +
indrivanam;sama +tta, der.;pari +
Pr+a+ ta, der.
Paitcindriyani
adhimattāni
Panjaliko
patubhavanti—A. II. 149-50
Five (spiritual)facultiesmanifest
strongly;pafica +indriyani; patu +
bhavanti
Paāeindriyāni āyum paticca
titthanti—M. I. 295
Five facultiesexistdependingon
vitality;pati +I (t) +ya, absol.
Paīcindriyāni mudūni
pātubhavanti—A. II. 149-50
Five(spiritual) faculties
manifest
softly
Paheimevacanapathā—M. I. 126
Therearethesefive waysof speech:
pafica +ime; vacana+patha
Pancupadanakkhandha
ehandamūlakā—M. III. 16
Five aggregateswithclingingare
rootedin craving;chandamūlakāti
tanhamilaka,Cy. IV. 77; patica +
upadana + khandha
Panjalika aggimnamassanti—A. V.
234
Withclaspedpalmstheyworshipfire:
pa +anjali +ka, der.; namas+ya +
nti,pres. 3™.pl.
Panjaliko namassamanoatthasi —S.
I. 226
ge.
Panjaliko puthuddisa namassati-
D. ILL. 180
(He) worshipsdifferentdirections
 Panhattapaniatam
withfoldedpalms;puthu+disa:
nama(s)+va + ti, pres. 3™.sg.
Paāhattāpaāhatamca janeyya —Vin.
Il. 176
(He) would know whatis promulgated
andwhat is not;pa +Jaa +dpe + ta,
caus.pp.
Paāhatte āsanenisīdi —D. I. 2; S. I.
183; II. 280; IHI. 92
Paiiiaya
Pannaparibhavitam eittam—
S. V.
369
Themind,treated
byinsight;
pari +
Bhi +e +i + ta, caus.pp.
Pannapetva anto vāsetvāanto
samam pacitva Bhagavato
upanamesi—Vin. I. 210
Havingmadethepeopleaware,having
causedto keeptheminsideandhaving
cookedtheminsideby himself,
Panhaya
Panifiayissasi
Panhayaca nam pajanati—A. Ly. pariyīmamsamāpaiiati —S. V. IHI
453 (He) carefullyseeks,fully investigates
Realisesit by wisdom;pa +Jan +nai
andfully scrutinisesby insight;pa +
+ti, pres. 3redUse,
vi t Ci t mā' ti, pres. 3'd.sg.;pa +
vi +Car +a+ ti, pres.3”. sg.;pari
+Man(s)
402
Mindis well trainedby wisdom:su + Panfiayaphusitam~S. V. 221
pari +Ci +ta,pp.
Experiencedby insight;Spré +i + ta,
Pp.

Satdown on theseatalreadyprepared;
offered it to the BlessedOne;pa t
pa + Jia + ape + ta, caus. Pp.; ni+
Jnd + ape + tva, caus.absol.,ep:
Sad +i, pst. 3”. sg.
vinhapetva; Vas + e + tva, caus.
absol.; Pac + i +tva,absol.
Paāhiattenavuccamāno—Vin. IV.
113
Panna bhavita avijja pahiyati—A.I.
Beingadvisedin termsof what is laid
61
down; Vac+ya + māna,Pass.pr.p.
Ignoranceis dispelledwith thewisdom
cultivated;
pannabhavitd,instr.sg.;
Pafifavata no duppaiifiena—
A. II.
pa +Ha +tya+ti,pass.pres,3”.sg.
187
By a wise, not bya fool: panna +
Pahūāya ativiiiha passati—M. II.
vantu,der.
112;A. I. 265
Penetratesandseesbyinsight;
afi+
Pafifavato ayamdhammo—A. IV.
Vyadh+ya, absol.;passa +ti,pres.
229 2
2 Sg:
This Dhammais for thewise:
pahhavato t ayam
Paūiāya attham upaparikkheyya-
M. I. 114,134,upaparikkhanti
Pafifiaya ajalo anelamūgo—D. III.
Wouldekaminethemeaningby
265
wisdom; upa + pari + Tks + at eyya,
Wise,witty,notdeafanddumb
opt. 3. sg.
Pana naranam ratanam—S. I. 36
Paīiāya atthamnappaiānāti
—A.HI.
Wisdomis thegemfor men
88
(He) doesnot realizethemeaningby
Paīiāpabhedāya samvattati—A. I.
insight;na +pajandti
44
lt leadsto theopeningup
of insight;
Paūiāya anuggahessāmi
—A. I. 125
Pa +Bhid +a, der.; sam + Vrit+a
I shall help(him) in terms
of insight;
tii, pres.3, sg.
anu+Grah+e +ssami,
fut. 1%,
sg
Paūūiāyatiidappaeeayāaviiiāti —A.
MHIS
Paūiāya mattasoniiihānam
It is known
that ignoranceis dueto
khamanti—5. V. 377
theseconditions;pa +Jad +ya + (Dhammas)
arecomprehended by
li,pass.pres. 3”. sg.; idam +pacaya
wisdom,moderately;ni +jhana;
Ksam +a +nti,pres.3”. pl.
Paīīiāyatthamvipassati—A. IV. 3
Hepenetratesinto thetruthby
Panfhayavoditthā honti, vocaritā -
wisdom;saccadhammam passati,Cy, M. I. 478
IV.I; vi +passa+ti,pres.3”. Sg.
(Dhammas) havebeenseenand
thoroughlyinvestigated
by wisdom;vi
Pafifidyadisva disva pahatabba—A. +@+ Drs +ta,pp.; vito + Car +i
V.39
+fa,pp.
Shouldbeabandoned, seeing(them)
continuously
by insight;Drs+ tva,
Pannayasacchikaranīyo—A. II. 183
absol.;
pa +Ha +tabba,
fut.Pp.
Shouldbeexperiencedby wisdom;sa
+acchi + Kr +aniya,fut. pp.
Pandyadubbalīkaranī
—D. IHI.183
Thatwhichweakensintelligence; Pannayasamayekkhita—A. II. 243
dubbala1 karanī
The onewho reviewsby wisdom;sam
+ava +Iks +i +tu,der.
Paīiāyapativiiihapassati—A. IV.
361-2 Paūnāyissatisamghosakāya
Havingpenetrated
by wisdomhesees
katikāya—Vin. III. 231
It;pati +Vyadh4va, absol. The Samghawill beknownby itsown
agreement
Pandyapariyogāhamāno —A. IV.
145 Pannayissasisakena ditthigatena -
Being
scrutinised
bywisdom;
pari t o M. I. 132,258
* Gah+a +mana,pass.prp. You will identifyyourselfwith your
own hereticalview;pa +Jd +ya +i
PaiifayaPavieinatipavicarati +ssasi,fut. 2". sg.
 Panna lokasmim
Pana lokasmim pajjoto —S. I. 44
Wisdomis the light in theworld
Pannhava
dhanenaseyyo—M. II. 73
Wisdomis indeedhigherthanwealth:
panna + eva
Pannhavuddhiya
samvattanti—A. II.
245
They leadto thegrowthof wisdom;
panna + Vrdh +ti, der.
Pannaveyyatiyassaannathattam-
M. I. 83
Changein thequalityof wisdom:
panna + viyatta + iva, der. ; ania +
tha + tta, der.
Panhasamjinosi —Vin. II. 220
You havelost fifty; Ji + ta,pp.+ As +
Si, pres. 2". sg.
Pannasayaca rattim gacchati —Vin.
1.268
Goes for fifty in one night
Pahhindriyam adhimattam—A. I.
119
The facultyof wisdom is exceeding
Pafiiuttara sabbedhamma—A. IV.
339
Wisdomis thehighest
of all things;
pahhā + uttara
Paīiham abhisamkharonti —
M. I.
176;II. 122
Theyframequestions;abhi+sam(s)+
Kr +o +nti,pres.3” pl.
Paāhamputthāsamānā—D. I, 28
Beingaskedaguestion;
Prch +ta,
Paīho
pp.; AS +mana,pr. p.
Panham puttho na sampāyati—M, I,
472
Beingguestionedhe is unableto
answer;sam +pa + +ā t Ya +ti,
pres. 3. sg.
Panham puttho vissajjesi,tenaea
mamanni—A.IV. 386
Beingaskeda question,you answered
and did not becomearrogantonthat
account; ma manam vd dappam va
akasi, Cy. IV. 176; vi +Srj +ya+e+
Ss+ i, caus.pst. 3. sg.; mā is used
hereas a neg.p.; Man +ya +i, pst.
TN
Panhavyakaranenaasantuttho—S.
IV. 192
Being unsatisfiedwith theanswering
of the guestion;paāha -- vyākarana;
a+ sam +Tus +ta,pp.
Paīihassaveyyākaranenacittamna
ārādheyyam —D. I. 118
I mightnotmakehimhappyby
answering
thequestion;
@+Radh+
eyyvam
, opt. I". sg.
Paīhā āgacchanti—S. IV. 299
Questions arise
Panhadhippayenabhāsito—
A. IV.
382
Saidaccording
totheguestion
put;
Bhās - i t ta,pp.
Panho
Paīihothapanīyo—A. II. 46
Theauestionto be putaside
Paīho patipucchāvyākaranīyo—A.
Il. 46
Thequestionto beansweredby
counterquestion;pati +Preh +ya,
absol.:vi +@+ Kr +aniya,fut.pp.
Panhovibhajjavyakaraniyo—A. II.
46
Thequestionto beansweredby
analysis;vi +Bhaj +ya, absol.
Pataggimdatum parittam katum -
Vin. II. 138
Togivecounter-fireandmake
protection;pati + aggi; Da +tum,
inf.;Kr +tum,inf.
Patapilotikanam samghāti— S. II.
221
A doublelayerrobemade
of silk
Patamdatvā vāseti—Vin. III. 140
Wva,
absol.; Vas +e + ti, caus.pres.
3,se
ra .
Patakam
parihareyyum
—D.III.
115;
A. IV. 185;Vin. I. 236
Theywouldparadecarrying
banners:
pari3 Hr t at eyyumn,
opt.3", pi.
Patanidinnāhoti—Vin. IV. 46
Clothes-peghasbeengiven;ānidinnā
hoti,Cy.IV. 783;pata+ani;Da +
fa,pp,
Patikittho
akkhāyati—A. I, 286
Issaidtobethedirtiest:@+Khya+
Patigacceya
ya * ti, pass.pres. 3. sg.; pati +Klis
+ fa, pp.
Patikutito patisakki yava
Bhagavantamaddakkhi — Vin. II.
195
As longashesawtheBlessedOne
(solong)hewentbackwhilebowing
down;pati +Kut +i +ta,PD.;pati
+Svask +a + i, pst. 3%.sgo ad
Drs +i, (Skt.adraksit),pst. 3. sg.
Patikkamanamharitvā — Vin. II. 80
Havingcarried(it) on his return;pati
+Kram +ana,der; Hr + a + i +ta,
absol.
Patikkūle appatikkūlasaāhī
vihareyyam—S. V. 295
I shouldabidewith non-repulsive
sensein therepulsive;a +pati +kila
+sannd + i, der.
Patikkosana rihati —Vin. I. 321
Protestis valid;pati +Krs +a+ ana,
der.;Ruh + a + ti, pres. 3. sg.
Patikkhepo panhhayati —Vin. IV.
311
A refusalis to be seen;pati +Ksip +
a, der; pa +Jia +ya + ti, pass.
pres. 3”. sg.
Patigaccevaakkhātam—
D. II. 118;
S. V. 162;Vin. II. 284
Explainedin advance; patigacceva,
(Skt.pratikrtyaiva)indcl.; @+ Khya
+fa, pp.
Patigaccevaalim bandheyya—Vin.
11.256
Wouldbuild,in advance,
a dyke;
 Patigacceva Patiggahako Patighanimittam Patipatham

Ba(n) dh + eyya,opt. 3™.sg. uppajjeyya aka,der.;u(t) +Kut +e +ti, caus. 259

i
pres.3”. Sg. (He) commits an offence in (using) an
. Patigaccevatam kayira yam janna Patiganhatu, anukampamupadaya
- enclosedseat; @ +Pad +ya +ti,
hitamattano— S. I. 57 M. IIE. 253 Patighanimittamayoniso pres. 3. sg.
lt shouldbedone,first, which one Pleaseaccept,outof compassion;
pati manasikāro—A. I. 87
would know beneficialfor him;Kr + +Grh +na +tu, meta.imper,3".sg.; Applyingtheobjectof repulsionon Paticchanneokāsenikūte —Vin. IV.
ya (Skt.yat)> karya> kavyira,meta. upadaya, indcl. mind,
ina wrongway 211
opt.3™.sg.; Jan +ya (Skt.vat), opt.
AI In onecornerwhich is covered:
SOE, Patiganhama, kalena kappiyam- Patighasaiiānamatthamgamā—A. konasadisamkatvādassitegambhire,
Vin. IIT. 220 IV.40 Cy. 900
Patigaccevaniddā okkami—Vin. I. We accept,at propertime,(a robe) Duetothedisappearance
of repulsive
; 15 whichis acceptable;
pati +Grh+na thoughts;
patigha + sanna;attham+ Patinnaya karaniyam kammam-
+ ma, meta., pres. I“. pl.; kappa + gama Vin. I. 325
3IESP,
rä .

iva, der. A formalactto beconducted

Patigaccevanissaye ācikkhimsu -
Vin. I. 58
They explainedthe‘supports’rightat
thebeginning;a +Khya +imsu,
intens.pst. 3". pl.
Patigaccevapatibujjhitva —Vin. I.
15
Havinggot up early;pati + Budh +ya
+ i+ nā, absol.
Ī Patigaccevamayā īāto —
Vin. I. 275
It wasknown,in advance,by me; Jaa
i ; + fa, pp.
Patiganhathabhanteyavadattham-
Vin. I. 222;IV. 76
Venerablesirs, pleaseacceptasmuch
asyou want;pati +Grh +nā +tha,
imper.2". pl.; yava + (d) +attham
Patiganhantapatiganheyyum—A.
IV. 80
Wouldkeepon accepting;pati +
Grh +nd +nta,pr.p.; pati + Grh +
nd +eyyum,opt. 3”. pl.; continous
senseis expressed,
cp. uppajjamano
Patigantum na sakkomi,
vamkaghastovaambuio—D. II. 266
I amunableto go back, likea fishwho
swallowed
thehook;pati+Gam+
tum,inf.; Sak + no + mi,pres.I", sg.;
Ghas + ta,pp.
Patiggahetvānikkhipatha —Vin. IV.
99
Havingaccepted,keepit aside;pati+
Grh +e+ tvd,absol.;ni +Ksip +a+
tha,imper.2". pl.
Patiggahenitthubhitva—Vin.I. 271
Havingspittedoutwhatwasinside the
mouth;pati +Grh +a, der.;ni +
StubhorSthiv+i +tva,absol.
Patiggahakesuvippatisaram
pativinodetum
—D. I. 138
To dispell remorsein referenceto
thereceivers; vi +pati +Smr+a,
der.;pati + vi +Nud+e +tum,
caus. inf.
Patiggāhako
ukkoteti
—Vin.II. 102
Thereceiver
obiects;
patit Grh"
Paticeauppajjati —M. I. 85 accordingto theacknowledgement;
Arisesdependently pati +Jia
Paticcavinitakho me tumhe Patidesitani samadapitani
bhikkhavetatra tatra tesu tesu (upāsakasatāni)—A. III. 215
dhammesu —M. III. 19 Fivehundred
laydisciples
have
Bhikkhus,
youhavebeentrained
byme beencausedto declarelay
ondifferentissues,thenandthere,to disciplehoodandtakerefuge;
turntolook for causality;vi +Ni + ta, upāsakattam patidesitāni,
Pp.; tatra tatra, indel. saranesupatitthapitani,Cy. II.
306;pati + Drs +e+ i + ta, caus.
Paticcasamuppannakho panime pp.; Sam+@+Da + ape +i +ta,
yadidampancupadanakkhandha-
caus.pp.
M.1.191
These
fiveaggregates
withgrasping
Patinissaggopatinissajitabbo—A.
have
arisen,
dependently;
sam+ V. 191
“ppanna
or samam +uppanna;u(t) A thingto begivenupshouldbegiven
+Pad+ta,pp.;patica+upddana+ up;pati+ni(s)+Srj +ta,pp.cp.sam
khandha + Vij +ta =samvigga;pati +ni(s) +
Sj +i +tabba,fut. pp.
Paficehanne
āsane
alamkammaniye
-Vin, II. 187
Patinissajetamditthigatam—D. II.
Onaseatwhichisenclosed and
342
Suitable
fora sexualact:pati +Chad Give upthiswrongview;pati +ni (s)
“1, pp.;alam+kamma(n) +va,fut, +Srj + a, imper.2". sg; patinissaja
Pp. + etam
Paticchanne
āsaneāpaiiati—A. HI.
Patipathamāgacchanto—Vin. IV.
 Patipatham
175
Comingon theoppositeway;ā 3
gaccha t nta,pr.p.
Patipathamgaechantāaddasamsu-
Vin. II. 193
Going in oppositedirection(they)
saw;a + Dr§ +@+ imsu,doublepst.
2rd
3”. pl.
Patipadamyevaantaram karitvā -
M. III. 38
Puttingthepracticein between:
Patipadam-- (y) t eva; Ky 2 i t twā,
absol.
Patipadātānadassanavisuddhi
yāvadevaāānadassanavisuddhatthā
—M.I. 150
Cleansingofthe procedureof
knowledgeandvision isjust for the
cleansingof knowledgeandvision
Patipadāyana santhāti —A. I. 198
He doesnotabidebyprinciples;
Patipattiyamna titthati, Cy. II. 309
Patiparivattetyādaseyya—M. I.
133
It wouldturnbackandattack:
pati +pari +Vrt +e +tva,caus.
absol.; Dams or Das + eyya,opt.
o ke
Patipatim labhissama—
Vin. I. 238
We will gettheturn
Patipatiya nisīdāpetvā—Vin. IV.
91
Havingmadethemsitina gueue
Patipucchakathakho bhaginiyo
578
Patibala Patibalo Patibalo
bhavissati—M. IHI.271
Bhas+i +ta,pp.; du +Bhasita;a + Patibalo uppannamkukkuccam
Sisters,thetalkwill beintheformof
Jia +tum,inf. dhammatovinodetum - A. V. 72
guestionsandanswers;Patipuccha
+
The onewho is capableof causingto
katha
Patibaloatitanagatapaccuppanne dispell, accordingto thelaw,a worry
atthecintetum—D. I. 137 arisen(in mind);vi + Nud+e +tum,
Patipucchakaraniyamkammam-
Theonewho is competentenoughto caus. inf.
Vin. I. 325
thinkof matterspertainingto thepast,
A formalactto beconductedby
futureandpresent;ati + / +ta,pp.; 4 Patibalo uppannamditthigatam
askingquestions;pati + Prch +ya,
an +a +Gam +ta,pp. +pati +u(t) dhammatovivecetum—A. V. 72
absol.
+Pad +ta,pp; Ci(n) t+ e +tum,inf. The onewho is capableof causingto
dispell, accordingto thelaw,a wrong
Patipuecha-vyakaraniyampanham Patibaloattapaccatthike
viewarisen;vi + Vic +e +tum,caus.
—A.1.197 sannhapetum nijjhapetum inf.
Thequestion
tobeanswered
byasking pekkhetumpasādetum—A. V. 71
counterquestions;vi +@+Kr + Theonewho is capableof makinghis Patibalo gilanam upatthatum va
antya,fut. pp. opponents convince,understand,
see
upatthapetumva —A. V. 72
andwin over;sam +Jia +Gpe+ tum, The onewho is competentenoughto
Patippassaddhimyācanti— Vin. II. 7 caus,inf.; ni +Jha + ape +tum,
attendor causingto attendon a sick;
(They) ask for therevocation;
pati+ caus.inf.; pa + Iks +e +tum,caus,
upa + Stha + tum,inf.; upa +Stha +
pa +Sra(m)bh+ ti, der.; Yae+a inf.;pa +Sad +e +tum,caus.inf, ape +tum,caus.inf.
nti, pres. 3". pl.
Patibaloupayapetabbam Patibalo bhesajjamsamvidhatum-
Patippassambhanti
pūtikāni upayapetumapayapetabbam A.III. 144
bhavanti (bandhanāni)—
A. IV. 127 apayapetum thapetabbamthapetum The onewho is competentenoughto
Bindings becomelooseandrotten; =D 477 preparemedicament;sam + vi +Dha
pati +pa +Sra(m)bh+a +nti,pres. Theonewho is competentenoughto +tum,inf:
32rd pt (maketheking) undertakewhatis to
beundertaken,
dismisswhatis to be Patibalo yavadatthamdatum —Vin.
Patippassambhehi..
brahmadandam dismissed
andestablishwhatis to be IV. 81
—Vin. II. 292 established;
wpa+Ya +dpe +tabba, (I am)capableof givingasmuchas
Makethehighest
punishment
revoke; causfut. pp.; apa+ Ya + dpe + you want;ydva (d) +attha;Da +
pati +pa +Sra(m)bh +e +hi, caus. taba,caus.fut.
pp.;Stha +ape + tum,inf.
imper.2". sg. tabba,caus.fut. pp.
Patibalo hoti
Patibaddhacitto hoti —Vin. HI. 37 Patibalouppannamanabhiratim subhasitadubbhasitam
He is in love;pati +Ba(n)dh+ta,pp. vūpakāsetumvāvūpakāsāpetum va dutthulladutthullam ajanitum -
+ citta "AM. Vin. TV.22
Theonewhoiscapable
of drivingout (He) is capableof understanding what
Patibalāsubhāsitadubbhāsitassa Orcausing to drive out frustration is well said,whatis ill said;whatis
atthamannhatum
—A. I. 35 arisen;an +abhi +rati; vi +upa + decent,
whatis indecent;dutthulla+
Competentenoughtoknowthe Krs +e +tum,inf.; vi +upa (or apa) adutthulla;@ +Jan +n@+ i +tum,
meaning
of goodandbadspeech;
su* Krs +dpe 3 tum, caus.inf. inf.
579
at eae
 Patibuddhena
Pativattā Pativekkhi Patisamkha
Patibuddhenaca te khippamyeva Patibhānacittam vutthapetva—Vin,
paccutthatabbam—A. IV. 87 Thereis no protestor;pati +Vac +tu, Patisammodatikho mam Bhagava-
IV. 61
You shouldgetup all atoncewhenyou der. Vin. 1.197
Havingcausedto createanabstract
areawakened;pati + Budh + ta,pp.; BlessedOne talksto me in friendly
painting;attanopatibhdnenakata
khippam+y +eva;pati + u(t) + Stha Pativekkhitvam bhikkhu? —Vin. I. terms;pati +sam +Mud +a + ti,
cittam,Cy. 804; vi + u(t) +Stha+
+tabba,fut. pp. 218 pres. 3". sg.
ape + tva, absol.
Bhikkhu,did you makea review? ;
Patibhantu tam Cunda bojjhamga - pativekkhitivimamsi,patipucchiti Patisamkhānabalābahussutā—A.
Patibhanapatisambhidappatto~<A.
S. V. 81 vuttamhoti, Cy. 1094;pati +ava + IV. 223
IHI. 113 iks +i, pst. 24. sg.
Cunda,maytheconstituentsof Thinking is thepowerofthe learned
The onewho hasgainedanalytical
enlightenmentcometo your mind people;pati +sam + Khya +ana,
knowledgeof themeaning,thetext
i.e. recite;pati + Bhd + ntu, imper.
Pativisothapiyyati —Vin. III. 237 der.;bahu+Sru +ta,pp.
andthescienceof language;
pati + Theshareis setaside;Stha + ape +
3”. pl.; withpati + Bhd, acc. is used sambhida +patta; normallya long
fo give the dat. meaning;bodhi +
iya + ti, pass. caus. pres. 3”. sg. Patisamkhapi patikkhipanti —Vin.
vowel is shortened before a double
amga I. 213
consonant;
pa +Ap +ta,pp. Pativissakānamuiihāpesi —M. I. (They) refuseevenafterthinking:pati
125 +Ksip +a +nti,pres. 3. pl.
Patibhati mam Bhagava, patibhati
Patimuācitvā agamāsi—Vin. IV, Madetheneighboursheartheshout
mam Sugata—S. I. 81
339 out;pati + vissaka= vesmaka(those Patisamkhayavacambhaseyyum-
BlessedOne, an ideacomesto my
Havingworn(it) shewentaway; whoare living in the neighbouring M. II. 202
mind, Sugata,anideacomesto my
pati + Mu(fi)e + i +tva,absol.; houses); u(t) + Ksi + Gpe +s +i, (They) wouldspeakaftercareful
mind(I havesomethingto say);pati +
a+ Gam +G+ 5 + i, doublepst. caus.pst. 3’. sg. consideration;pati + sam + Kiyā
Bha + ti, pres. 3%.Sg,
34 E ya; absol.
Pativissakeetadavoca—Vin. IV. 81,
Patibhatu tam dhammi katha —
S.
Patiladdhāya bhiyyo bhāvāya 311 Patisamkhā yoniso āhāram āhāreti
IV. 184
vepullāya—D. III. 284 Saidthisto theneighbours;etam —M. 1.355; 5. IV. 104;A. I. 114;II.
MaytheideaofgivingaDhamma
talk
For theincreaseof whatis already (etad)+a + Vac+a, rootredup.,
pst. 40
cometo your mind(givea talkon the
gained;pati +Labh + ta,pp.; bhivyo, 39. Sg. Havingreflectedrightlyhetakes
Dhamma);dhamma+ 7,der
indcl.; vipula +ya, der. food;ahdra+e +ti, denom.
pres.
Pativissakepucchi —Vin. I. 208 STs.
Patibhatu tam sekho patipado —M.
Patilābhāyachandam
ianeti—
A. IV. Asked the neighbours; Preh +ya + i,
I. 354
364 pst. 34 SZ. Patisamkhāyoniso khamo hoti —A.
Let theprocedureof thetraineecome
Makesaneffortto gain;Jan +e +fi, III. 389
to your mind(speakaboutthetraining
pres.3. sg. Havingreflectedrightly he becomes
procedure);pati + Pad +a, der.
1.269 onewith tolerance;Ksam + a, der.
Pativattati,nasampasārīyati—A. Goesforthenightwithonehundred
Patibhanacittam karapenti, each
IV. 47 Patisamkha yoniso civaram
itthiripakam purisariipakam —Vin.
It shrinksbackandis notstretched
out, patisevati—M. I. 10
II. 151
pati +Vrt +a +ti,pres.3 sg.;sam Havingreflectedrightly hewearsthe
Theycauseto makeanabstract
+pa + Sr +e + iva + ti, pass.pres. robe;pati t sam t Khyā +ya, absol.;
Painting
whichcontains
maleand
37,sg, yoniso, adv.
femalefigure;Kr. +dpe +nti, caus.
pres. 3”. pl.
Pativattanatthi—Vin. IV. 231 Patisamkhā yoniso parivaiieti —A.
 Patisamkha
III. 389
Havingreflectedrightly he causesto
avoid;pari + Vrj + e + ti, caus.pres.
aeāo
Patisamkhā yoniso
390
Havingreflectedrightly hecultivates
mindfulness,a factorof
enlightenment;patisamkhati
patisanjanitva, paccavekkhitvati
attho,Cy. Il. 394; sati + sam +
bodhi + amgam
Patisallānā vutthito —
S. I. 77; V.
79-80;A. II. 51,196-7
Havinggot up from solitude;pati +
sam+Li + ta,pp.; vi + u(t) +Stha +
i + ta, pp.
Patisallanaramo hoti,
patisallanarato —M. I. 213
He takesdelightin solitude:Ram + ta,
pp.
Patisallāne tibbacchando—A. IV. 15
The onewho hasa strongwill in
solitude
Patisallāneyogamāpaiiatha —S. III.
15; IV. 80; V. 414
Engageinsolitude; ā -- Pad - ya --
tha,imper.2". pl.
Patisallina manobhāvanīyābhikkhāū
—A.V. 185
Respectable
bhikkhusare in solitude;
pati +sam + Li + ta,pp.
Patisallino Bhagavā
—D. I. 151; II.
270;A. V. 185
Patihaeea
The BlessedOne is in solitude
Patisallīno..yathābhūtam paiānāti
—S.III.I5; IV. 80;V. 414
The one who is in solitudeknowsthe
realityas it is; pa +Jan +na +ti,
pres. 3™.sg.
Patisāyanīyāni bhesaiiāni—Vin. IHI.
251
Medicaments
tobetasted;
Patisāyitabbāni, paribhuhiitabbāni,
Cy. 710;pati +Svad + aniya,fut.pp.
Patisunitva vissaritva —Vin. II.
249
Having promisedandforgotten; pati+
Sru + na + i+ twa,absol.; vi +Smr+
a +i + tva, absol.
Patisote nhāyantassa(bhikkhuno)-
Vin. III. 118
When(a bhikkhu)wastakingbath
againstthestream;Snd +ya +nta,
meta,pr.p.
Patissavam
na saceāpeti
—Vin.II.
19
Does not keepup thepromise;
pati + Sru + a, der ; sacca + ape +
ti, denom.caus.pres.3".sg.
Patissaveca āpatti dukkatassa-
Vin. I. 154
Therewould beanoffenceof wrong
doingingivinga promise
Patihacea
aāīiamārādheti
—S. V.69
Attainsgnosis,earlyin life;amasmim
yeva attabhāveārādheti, taiea khd
patikacca,asampatteyeva
maranakāle,Cy.III. 143;pati+Han
Pattho
(hat) +ya, absol. which may mean
striking against (death?), ie. during
lifetime;patikaccais moreakin to
patigacca (Skt. pratikrtya); @ +Radh
+e + ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Patthohoti civarakammam katum -
Vin.IV.60
Skilledin makingrobes;pa +Stha +
a,der.;Kr +tum,inf.
Patthohoti dhammim katham
katum—Vin. III. 210
Skilledin givinga Dhamma-talk;
patthotichekosamatthopatibalo,
Cy.665
Pathamamupagato—Vin. IV. 18
Hasarrivedfirst;pathamam,adv.;
upa+Gam +ta,pp.
Pathamamcittam uppannam,
vinhanampatubhiitam—Vin. I. 93
Thefirstmindhasarisen,first
consciousness
is manifested:u(t) +
Pad+ta,pp.;patu+bhitta
Pathamam
codetabba,
codetva
sāretabbā,sāretvā āpatti
ropetabbā,āpattim ropetvā
vyattenabhikkhunā patibalena
samghoīāpetabbo'—
Vin. II. 2
First (they) should be accused, having
accused
theyshouldbereminded,
having
remindedtheyshouldbe
charged
of offence,havingchargedof
offence
thecommunity shouldbe
informed
bythecompetent bhikkhu;
Cud+e +tabba,caus.fut.pp.:Smr
+e+tabba,caus,fut.pp.;Ruh+e +
tabba,caus. Sut.pp.; Jia + ape +
labba,caus.fut.pp.
Pathamabhisambuddho
Pathamampayirupasitva—Vin. IV.
290
Havingattendedon (her)first;pari +
upa +As + i +tv, meta. absol.
Pathamamparibhuttam—D. IIL. 208
Used first;pari +Bhuj +ta,pp.
Pathamambholeyyum— M. II. 154;
Vin. III. 187,bhojenti
Would feedfirst; Bhuj + e +evyum,
caus.opt.3. pl.
Pathamassajhanassasaddokantako
—A, V. 135
Noise is a thorn(obstacle)to the first
jhana
Pathama abhinibbidha ahosi
kukkutacchapakasseva
andakosamhā— A. IV. 177
(This) wasthefirstpenetrationjust
like thechick’s hatchingoutof the
egg-shell;abhi +ni + Vvadh+a,
der.; kukkuta+ chapakassa+ iva
Pathamāpattikamdhammam
Apannanissaraniyam—Vin. IV.
226
Hascommittedanoffenceof the first
instanceentailinga formalmeetingof
removal;pathama+Gpatti+ ika,
der; @+ Pad +ta,pp.; ni(s) + Sr +
aniya,fut. pp.
Pathamāpattikāyāvatatiyakā—Vin.
III. 186
Offenceat the first instanceand
ofTenceat thethird instance
Pathamābhisambuddho— S. I. 103
Recentlyaftertheenlightenment;
 Pathame
pathama+abhi +sam +Budh +ta.
Pp.
Pathamejhane cittam santhapehi,
pathamejhane cittam ekodikarohi,
pathamejhane cittam samadaha—
IV. 263
Make themind stop,one-pointed,
andconcentratein thefirstihāna:
sai + Stha +ape + hi, caus. imper.
2™ sg. eka + odi + Kr+o + hi,
imper.2™.sg.: sam + @+Dha + a,
imper.2". sg.
E saddhim+ vihadra+ika, der.
Pathavidhatuya nibbindati,
pathavidhatuya eittam virāieti —M.
1.422
Doesnot takeinterestin theelement
of earth,causesto distractmind from
theelementof earth:ni + Vi(njd + a+
ti, pres. 3". sg.>yi +Raj + e + ti,
caus.pres. 3". sg.
Pathavimandalamabhivijiya
aiihāvasati—D. I. 134
He settlesdown aftercongueringthe
entireearth;abhi + vi +Ji +ya,
absol.;adhi +@+ Vas+a+ ti, pres.
3”. sg.
Pathavim āmaseyyāsi—A. V. 263
Youshouldtouchtheground;ā +Mr€
T eyyāsi,opt. 24. sg.
Pathavim nissāyapathaviyam
patitthāya—S. V. 45
Havingresortedto theearth,having
establishedon theearth;ni +Sri +ya,
absol.;pat tittha +ya, asol.
Pathavim pathavito abhijanati —M.
1.4
(He)speciallyknowsearthfromthe
conventionalpointof view: abhi+
Jan +nd + ti, pres. 3” Sg.
Pathavim pathavito sanjanati—M.
S.
E
(He) identifiesearthfromthe
conventionalpointof view:sam+
Jan +nd +ti,pres,3%Sg.
Pathavimpathavitosafiiatvā
pathavim maāhati —M. I.I
Having identifiedearthfromthe
conventional
pointof view,he
conceives;sam +Jad +wa,
absol.; Man +ya + ti, pres.
3”, sg.
Fd: e
Pathavim parivattetum-Vin. HI. 7
To maketheearthupsidedown;pari +
Vrt+e +tum,caus.inf,
Pathaviyamlekhakhippamlujjati-
A. i. 283
Thelinedrawnontheearthiserased
quickly; Luj or Ruj +ya +ti,pass.
pres. 3". sg.
Pathavirasam
upādiyati—
A. 1.32;
V. 213
Essenceof theearthis extracted;
upa + a + D& + iya + ti, pass. pres.
suse:
Pathavimajiie udriyati—S.I. 113
Earth
issplitopen,
I feel;
u(t)+Dr+
tya+ti,pass.pres,3" sg.
Pathavisamenacetasaviharami—A.
IV. 375
I abidewith themindsimilartothe
earth
Panamita Panitena
Panāmitāna khamāpenti—Vin. I. +ya, fut.pp.;Kri +a> kaya,der.> ke
54 +tum,inf; vi +ketum
Beingdismissedtheydo notask for
forgiveness;
pa +Nam +e +i +ta, Panitabhojanani...sappi navanītam
caus. pp.; Ksam + ape + nti, caus. telam madhu phanitam maccho
pres.3. pl. mamsamkhīram dadhi— Vin. IV.
88
Panamito hoti saddhivihariko - Sumptuousfood : ghee,butter.oil.
Vin. I. 54 honey,molasses,fish, meat,milk and
TheSaddhiviharika (onewho is abiding curd
together) has beendismissed;
Panitam kayamupapanna—A. IV.
392
Pandmemitam —Vin. I. 54
Gone to a fine realm;upa + Pad+ ta,
I dismissyou;pa +Nam +e +mi,
DP.
caus.
pres,1".sg.; tam=tvam,acc.
Sg,
Panītam deti —A. IV. 244
To
Gives fine food
Panidhāyaarafifie na vatthabbam-
Vin. III. 101
Panītādhimuttiko ea hoti
Havinghada hiddenpurposein mind,
nibbānābhirato—A. IHI. 435
oneshouldnot live in theforest;pa + He becomesonewho is bentupon
ni +Dha+ya,absol.;Vas+tabba,
excellenceandinterestedin Nibbana;
Sut.pp.
panita +adhi + mutta:Muc+ ta,pp.
+ika,der; abhi +Ram+ta,pp.
Panidhāyapindāya na caritabbam-
Vin.III. 101
Panitani bhojanani bhunjitva
Having hada hiddenpurpose
inmind abhisannakayahonti bavhabadha-
oneshouldnotgoonalmscollection; Vin. II. 119
Car +i +tabba,fut. pp.
Havingeatensumptuousmeals,they
weresubjectedto manydiseases,their
Panidhaya bhavana —S. V. 156
bodieswerefull of humour; abhi +
Cultivationof mindafterfixing it Syand+ ta,pp. + kaya; bahu +
(onanotherobject) abadha,meta.
Panidhehi
gahapati—S. IV. 302 Panite kaye patitthitā —M. I. 331
Householder,
makea wish;pa +ni + Establishedin thefineabode;
Dha+e +hi, imper,2". Sg. brahmalokepatitthita,Cy. II. 415; pa
+tittha(fromStha) + i + ta,pp.
Papiyam
ketuiica
vikketuiica
—A.I.
116
Panitenakhadaniyenabhojaniyena
Tobuyandsellthearticle
oftrade;
Pan sahatthasantappesisampavāresi-
 Pandako
Panpakutīsu Pannaputam Pattacīvarapariyesanam

D. 1.109;M. III. 145;S. IV. 122 is used with instr.or abl. to compare
Causedto satisfyandcontent,with vitadhūmāpannamusalā—D. III. 94 Man +e +nta + i, caus.prp.
deliciousfood,softandhard, (They) meditate
in leaf-huts,without
Pandito vata bho, pandito vatabho
distributedwith herown hand: fire,withoutsmokeandwithoutwork Patim atimainiate—A. IV. 92
—A. V. 230
khādana'- iya, der.; bhoiana tiya, forpestle
andmortar;vi +/ +ta,pp. Ignoresthehusband;ati +Man +ya +
A wise manindeed,a wisemanindeed;
te,mid.pres.3”.sg.
vata,emph.p.
Pannaputambandhitya—Vin. III.
pst.3. sg.;sam+pa+ Vr+e+s5+
208 Patirūpam upatthakamalabhanto-
i, caus.pst. 3“. sg.; thesetwo verbs Pandito vyatto khettaifia kusalo- Havingmadea leaf-container;
panna A. 1.121
occur together A. IV. 419 +puta;Ba(n)dh+i +tva,absol. Not gettinga suitableattendant;
upa +
The wise, experienced,knower of the
Pandako patijanati —Vin. I. 121 Sthā +aka,der.;a + Labh + a + nta,
field andskillful; khetta+Jia +a, Pannepanneapatti —Vin. IV. 48
He admitsthathe is a eunuch:pati + pr.p.
der. Foreachandeveryleaf,thereis an
Jan + na + ti, pres. 3". Sg.
offence Patirupam va appatiripam va
Pandito vyatto medhāvī bahussuto ; (na iānāti.) —Vin. III. 209
Panditatara ca vyattatara ca
cittakathi kalyanapatibhanovuddho Panhisamphassamsadiyanta—Vin. Doesnotknow whetherit is suitable
bahussutataraca alamatthatara ca -
cevaarahā ca — A. III. 58 II. 280 or noi
Vin. IL. 1
He is wise, ekperienced,intelligent, Enjoyingthetouchofthe heel;Svad+
You will be moreerudite,more
learned,beautifulin speech,ready aya +nta, pr.p. Patodacehāyamdisvā samviiiati
experienced,more learned andmore
witted,anelderandanArahant;cifta+ samvegamāpaiiati —A. II. 114
useful;alam + attha + tara aeemans
katha + i, der.; Vrdh + ta,pp. Patapatimafiiie paccathikeyasasā- Havingseeingtheshadowof thewhip
D.I. 137 (thoroughbred)is agitated;patoda +
Panditapafifiattam
Pandupalaso tasmimsamaye I feel that he burns (his) enemies with chaya;Drs + tva,absol.;sam + Vij +
Sappurisapafiiattam—A. I. 151
ariyasāvako hoti —A. IV. 118 (his)glory;pa + Tap+a + ti, pres. ya + ti, pres.3". sg.; sam + Vij +a,
Proclaimedby thewise andthegood
Thenoblediscipleatthattimeisiust 3”.sg.;pati +attha+ika,der. der.;ad+Pad+ya +ti,pres.3” .sg.
people;pa +Jia + dpe + ta, caus.
likethewitheredleaf;theword
Pp.
Pandupalāsa is used in theBuddhist Patikubbaram hanti—A. IV. 191 Patodassaajjhoharanam—A. Y. 324
traditionto designate
a personwho Breaksthecarriage-pole;
bhindati, Application
of thewhip;
Pandita nipuna kataparappavādā
is goingto benovitiated Cy.IV. 104;Han +ti, pres. 3”. sg. aiihoharanasamkātampatanam,
vālavedhirūpā vobhindanta maiiiie
Cy. V.80; adhi + 0 + Hr +ana,der.
caranti panhfagatenaditthigatani -
Pandupalāso bandhanāpamutto Patikulamgacchati,ātakehi vinā
D. 1.26
abhabboharitattāya—Vin. I. 96;IHI. hoti—S. IV. 230 Pattakandolikaya patto ghamsiyati
(Somereclusesandbrahmins)who are
47 Goestothefamilyof thehusband
and —Vin. II. 114
intelligent,skillful,who havestudied
Thewitheredleafreleased
fromthe Separatesherselffrom therelatives Thebowlis rubbed
onthewickerstand
thetheories
of othersandlookedlike
hold is unfit for beinggreen;pa + (or theknown); vind,inde.usedwith forthebowls;Ghrs+iva +ti,pass.
hair-splitters,moveon as if smashing
Muc +ta,pp.;a +Bhit+ya,fut.pp. instr, pres.3™.sg.
wrongviewsby wisdom:vi +0 (ava)
harita + tta, der.
+Bhi(n)d +a + nta,pr. p.; maiifie,
Patino titikkhati —A. IV. 93 Pattacivarapariyesanampakkami -
indel.; bhindantaviya caranti, Cy.
Pannakutiyā vasati—D. II. 339 Forgives
thehusband;
desid
of Tij, M. III. 247
177
Livesina leaf-hut;Vas+a +fi,pres. pres,3". sg. Setoutforsearching
thebowlandthe
3022 robe; patta + civara + pari + esana,
Panditena
panditataro—A. 11.180
Patimānentī
(hitā—Vin. IV. 212 purposeis expressed
byacc.asin the
Wiserthanthewise: thesuffix tara
Pannakutīsuihāyanti,vitamgara (She)
stood
waiting
(forhim);pati+ caseof Buddham saranamgacchami;

587
 Pattacivaram
Pattodakam
pa +Kram +i, pst. 3. sg.
samghenakarotu—Vin. II. 126
Let thebowl turnup, makehim
Pattacivaram patiggahesi—M. III.
accessibleto theSamgha;u(t) +kubia
155
+tu, imper,3". sg.; sam +Bhuj +a,
Receivedthebowl and therobe:pati
der; Kr +0 +tu, imper.3”. sq.
+Grh +e +s +i, pst, 374Sg.
Pattam odanenapūresi —
S, I. 173
Hemadethebowlfill withrice:Prte
I. 456
+$ +i, caus.pst.3. sg.;withthe
Keepingbacktherobesandthebowls
root Pr gen. is normally used.pūrā
at rightplaces;pati +Sam +aya +
nānāvihitassadhahhiassa,M. I. 57
mana, caus. pr.p.
Pattam nikkuiiatu —Vin. II. 125
Pattacivarehibhato —Vin. III. 68
Let thebowl turnupsidedown:ni +
Hiredforbow]androbe:Bhr +ta,pp.
kubja + tu, imper,3° Sg.
Pattadhovanamantaragharena
Pattam pattatthikā haranti—
A, IHI.
chaddetabbam— Vin. II. 214
370
One shouldnotthrowthewater,with
Thosewho are in needof leavestake
whichthebowl is rinsed,insidethe
theleavesaway;patta +attha+ika,
house:chadda(fromChard) +e +
der.;Hr +a +nti,pres,34 pl.
tabba,fut. pp.
Pattamlikhapeyyam
—Vin. I. 110
Pattapariyapannam na ganhāti —A.
May I causeto carvea bowl;Likh +
IH. 137
ape +eyyam,caus.opt. I". sg.
Doesnottakewhatis containedin the
bowl;pari +@+Pad + ta,pp.; Grh +
Pattalujjanti—Vin. 1.297
na +ti, meta,pres.3”.sg.
The bowlsslip away;Ruj +ya +nti,
pres, 3”. pl.
Pattapariyapannam
patigsahetabbam—Vin. I. 46
Pattālhakenapi
kīlanti—Vin.I. 10
Shouldbereceived
according
tothe
Theyplaywitha toymeasureof
capacityofthe bowl: pati +Grh +e
leaves;patta +dlhakena;Krid +a+
+tabba,fut.pp.
nti, pres. 3”. pl.
Pattapūrā sakkhaliyo theyyacitto
Patte akira —Vin. III. 15
avahari—Vin. III. 59
Throw (it) into thebowl;@+kir +a,
Took awaya bowiful of'sweetmeats
imper, 2". sq,
witha stealingmind:ava +Hr +a +i,
pst. 3. sg.
Pattodakamchaddeti,natidiire
naccasanne,na ca vichaddayamano
—M. II. 139
Pattodakam
Hethrowsout thewaterin thebowl,
nottoofar away,not toocloseby,not
throwinghereandthere;patta +
udaka;chadda +e +ti, pres. 3”. sg.;
vi +chadda +aya +mana,pr-.p.
Pattodakampatiganhanto—M. II.
138
Whilereceiving waterfor washingthe
bowl; pati +Grh +n@+ nta,pr.p.
Pattodakampatiganhati, nati
thokamnatibahum—M. II. 138
Hereceiveswaterfor thebowl,
neithertoo little nor too much;aa +
ati +thokam;na +ati +bahum,adv.
Pattova pajjati va —A. IV. 362
Thepersonhasalreadyattainedor will
attain;
pa +Ap +ta,pp.;Pad +ya +
tl,pres.3”. sg.,Cy.IV. 168takesthe
termpacchati (fut. 3". sg.) and gives
themeaningas pāpunissati
Pathagamanam uppathagamanam-
D.1. 10
Goingon therightcourseandgoingon
a wrongcourse;u(t) +patha
Pathavyasamghatthero— Vin. II.
303
Thesenior-mostelderon earth;
samgha +thera
Padakkhinaggāhī
anusāsanim
—D.
III. 267
Theonewhotakesupinstruction
rightly;pa +dakkhina +Grh +i +
der,
Padakkhina
naccecagitecavadite
ca—Vin. I. 268
Padipe
Skilledin dancing,singingandmusic;
padakkhinaticheka,kusala, Cy. V.
1114
Padam namaekato patthapetva
ekato osapenti—Vin. IV. 15
Line meansthattheycauseto start
together and end together; gāthāpādo
adhippeto,Cy. 741;pa + Stha +ape
+tva,caus.absol.;0 +Sa + ape +
nti, caus.pres.3. pl.
Padarasanicitamhoti— Vin. IV. 46
Thereis anaccumulation
ofplanks;
sam +Ci +ta,pp.
Padasaddenasīsam vivari —S. I. 167
Uncoveredtheheadwith thesound
ofthe footstep;vi + Vr + a+i, pst.
SY 32:
Padasagantum—Vin. II. 276; IV.
339
To go on foot;padasa,analog.form;
Gam +tum,inf.
Padasāyevapavattesi—D. I. 107
He rolledhim overwith his foot;
padesā t eva;pat Witttets-ti,
pst. 3. sg.
Padasilamnikkhipitum —Vin. II.
121
To lay a steppingstone;ni +Ksip +i
+tuminf.
Padasodhammamvācenti—Vin. IV.
14
They teachtheDhammalineby line;
Vac+e+ nti,caus.pres.3™.
pl.
Padipe va kalavanneva
 Padutthamanasamkappo
Panunnapaccekasacco Pabbajitam
upanetabbam—Vin. LI. 252
talkingaboutstriving:padhanam
+ iti:
Panunnapaccekasacco—A. II. 41; V. Papaficasanna-
Vad+ a +mana,prp.; kinti, indel.:
makingsomethingblack:upa +Ni +a 30 samkhanirodhagamini patipada -
Vad +evyvama,
opt. 1".pl.
+ tabba, fut. PP. Theonewho hasrejectedthepartial D. II. 277
truth;pa +Nud +ta,pp.; pati +eka The way leadingto thecessationof
Padhanapahitattammam
Padutthamanasamkappo —A. I. 373 t sacca conceptualisation
(proliferationof
upatthahimsu—Vin. I. 8
The onewho hasa pollutedmind thought)
Attendedon mewho hadbeen Panthamgacchantassa—Vin. III.
practisingausterities:padhana+pa+ 234
Pade pade Apatti pacittiyassa—Vin, Papaficasanhnhasamkha
Dha +i + ta,pp. +atta; upa +Stha+ Fortheonegoing on theroad; samudacaranti—M. I. 109
IV.15
imsu,pst.3". pl. pantham,acc. sg. usedhere
for loc. The processof conceptualisation
Thereis anoffenceofexpiation, line
by line Sense takesplace;safiiGnamenava
Padhanampadahitabbam
—A.V. papahceāyevavuitā, samkhāti
191 Pannabharovisamyutto—A. III. 214 kotthasa;samudacarantiti
Pade padevisideyyasamkappanam
Strivingshouldbe made:pat Dhāta Theonewho haslaiddowntheburden pavattanti,Cy. Il. 75;papafica +
vasānuge— S. I. 7
+ 1 +tabba,fut.pp. anddetached;Pat or Pad + ta,pp.+ sahhā +samkha;sam + u(t) tāt
The one,who is enslavedby the
thoughtsof sense-desire,would sink bhara;vi +sam + Yuj + ta,pp. Car +a + nti,pres. 3rd. pl.
Padhānavemattam
—
M. II. 129
down on everystep;samkappananti
Distinctionin striving;vi +matta+a, Pannalomoparadavutto Papatika uppatitva Bhagavatopade
kamasamkappadinam, Cy. 1.36; vi +
der. migabhūtenacetasāviharāmi —Vin. ruhiram uppādesi—Vin. II. 193
Sad + eyya,opt. 34 5g.; vasa+
II. 184 A splinter,havingflungup,caused
anuga
Padhānassa tulanābahukārā—M. I abidewithhumility,dependence
on bleedingon thefoot of theBlessed
Il. 174 othersandwith a deermind(humble One; u(t) + Pat +i +tva, absol.;
Padena pariyāpunāti, akkharāva
Weighingis muchhelpfulforstriving: andinnocentmind);Pat +ta,pp. + ruhira < rudhira; u(t) + Pad +e+s
pariyāpunāti —Vin. IV. 305
tuletīti aniccādivasenatīreti, Cy:III. loma;para + da + Vrt +ta,pp.; vi + ;
TF i, caus. pst.
wd
2
e
".Sg.
Learnsby word, learnsby letter;
426 Hr +a +mi,pres.I". sg.
akkhara is used here in feminine
Papatikā nibbattitvā nibbāyeyya-
gender
Padhānāni durabhisambhavāni—A. Papajicanirodhecittam pakkhandati A. TV.70
I. 49 -A. TV.235 A bit maycomeoff andthencool
Padesam padesakārī ārādheti,
Strivings,hardto overcome;pa +Dha Themindturnstowardsthe down; ni + Vrt + a+ i-+ tva, absol.;
paripūram paripūrakārī — A. I.
+ana, der.;du + ® +abhi +sam+ elimination of conceptualisation; pa + ni: + Va
x
+ya +eyya,opt.3"".sg.
, We
232
Bhi + a, der. Skandh+a +ti, pres. 3™.sg.
Partialpractitionerattainspartly,full
Pabalha vedanavattanti
Practitionerfully; padesakari
Padhāniyamgāni — M. II. 128 Papaficamanuyutto
papancabhirato māranantikā—D. II. 127
puggalo ndma Sotdpanno,
Constituents
of striving;padhdna
+ mago—A. IIT, 294 Veryseverepains,leadingto death,
sakadāgāmīanāgāmīca;
iya,der.--amga Thefoolwhohasoccupied
with exist;pa ft bāiha,pp; Vrt t a t nti;
Paripūrakārī nāmaarahā, Cy. IT.
conceptualisationandtakenspecial pres.3”.pl.
349; ārādheti —wgmpādeti,Cy,; ā --
Padhūpento nisīdi —Vin. IV. 132 delighttherein;anu + Yuj + ta,pp.;
Radh +e +ti, caus.pres, 3". se.
Hesatdowngasping;
pajjhayanto abhi+Ram+ta,pp. Pabbajitamanupabbajanti—Vin. II.
attānamyeva paribhāsantonisīdi, 180
Padhānantivadamānamkinti
Cy. 869;pa + Dhii + dpe + nta, Papaīieamhitvāna—A. IHI.294 Renouncefamily life following the
vadeyyāma
- A. IV. 356
caus,pr.p.;ni +Sad+i,pst. Havingabandonedconceptualisation; onewho hasalreadyrenounced;anu +
WhatshouldI Sayto himwho is
Ha +i +tvana,absol. pa + Vraj +a + nti,pres. 3”. pl.
 Pabbajitam
Pabbajitam vilumpati —A. IV.
339
Plunderstherenounced; pa +Vraj +j
7 fa,pp.: vi -- Lu(m)p +a + ti. pres.
J.37 S$.eo
Pabbajitena ca pana matapitaro
uddassetabbā
—M. II. 60
The renouncedshouldvisit parents;
u(t) + Drs + e +tabba,caus.fut. pp.
Pabbajitenasamsattho
—A. V.82;
Vin. IV. 159
Closely associatedwith therenounced;
spaceinside,butsolid
sam +Srj + ta,pp.
Pabbajite patikamkhitabbani —M.
1.459
Things to be expectedofa renounced
Person;pati +Kamks + i + tabba,
Sut.pp.
Pabbajito Samāno —
D. I. 60; S.II.
220
Beinga renounced:As 4 mana,pr.p.
Pabbajja avanjha bhavissatisaphala
saudrayā—A. IV. 134
The renunciationwill notbe barren,
butbefruitfulandyeilding;vaāiha,
Skt. vandhya;sa +udraya
Pabbajjakammatthanam
appaphalamhoti —M. II. 197
Renouncedlife is of lessbenefit
Pabbaiiābhisamkhāro
patippassambhi— Vin. I. 194
Eagernessto renouncethefamily
life subsided:Pabbajja + abhi +
Sam/(s)+ Kr + a, der,* Pati + pa +
Sra(m)bh +i.PSt.3, se,
Pabbaiiāya
ceteti
—A.IV.118
Makesup mind for renunciation;
Cef+
e t tt,pres. 3”. sg.
Pabbata orohanto addasa—A.IH.
340;Vin. IHI. 105(addasam)
(He) saw while climbingdown
the
mountain;
o 3 Ruh +a +nta,pr.p.;4
E Dr?d a,pst.3. sg.
Pabbato acchiddo asusiro ekaghano
—A. IHI. 378
The rock which hasno holes,noempty
Pabbavāto hoti—Vin. I. 205
There was arthritis
Pabbāienti, upasampādenti,
bhikkubhāvāya —D. II. 152
Make themrenounceandordainfor
thestatusofa bhikkhu;
pa +Vraj+e
+nti,caus.pres.3”.pl.; upa+sam+
Pad +e +nti,caus.pres,3"pl.
Pabbharam sodhapeti lenam
kattukāmo—Vin. I. 206; HI. 248
Causestoclearthebendingofa rock
hopingtomakinga cave: Sudh+ape
+i, caus.pres.3”.sg.;kattum+
kāmo
Pabhassaramidam
bhikkhaveeittam
—A. 1.10
Bhikkhus,thismindis luminous;
pa+
bhassaram+ idam
Pamanamvaatikkimeyya—Vin.Ill.
149
Orwouldcause
togobeyond
theright
measure;ati + Kram +e +eyya,aus,
opt.3”. sq.
Pamanatikkantam
Pamanatikkantampatilabhitva
chinditvaparibhufijati —Vin. IV.
169
Havingreceivedoneexceedingthe
rightmeasure,(he) makesuseof it
aftercuttingit; pamdna +ati + Kram
+ta,pp.; pati +Labh +i +tvā,
absol.;Chi (n) d +i +tvd, absol.;
pari +Bhu (i) j +a +ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Pamanikakaretabba—Vin. III. 149
(A cell) should cause to be made with
rightmeasure;pamāna 1 ika, der; Kr
+e +tabba,caus.fut. pp.
Pamānikāpaminanti—A. III. 349
Assessorsmakeassessment; pa + Ma
or Mi +na +nti, pres. 3”. pl.
Pamādamanvāya —M. I. 395
Dueto unmindfulness; pamādam':
anu +aya (from I ), absol.
Pamādavatāyana kalyanamakasi -
M.III. 179
Youdidnotdogoodasif one,
unmindful;a +Kr +a +s +i, double
pst..2”.
o 2nd
sg.
Pamādādhikaranam- D. II. 85
For the reason of unmindfulness:
pamāda-- adhikarana
Pamukhe
gahetvābahinikkaddhati
—Vin. IV. 45
Havingcaughtattheverandah,throws
out(ofthebuilding);Grh +e +tva,
Pamukhe
nisidi—D. II. 135
Satdownin front;ni +Sad +i, pst.
3” sg.
593
Payirupāsanāya
Pamukhepāturahosi—A. IV. 85
Appearedin front:patu + ® +ahosi;
pst. 3. sg.
Pamkadhayamviharati Pamkadha
nama Kosalanam nigamo—A. I. 236
Abidesin Pamkadha,at themarket
townofthe Kosala,namedPamkadha
Pamsukūlakatogaruko hoti —Vin. I.
297
The robe,madeofthe clothgathered
fromdustheaps,is heavy;pamsukila
+ kata
Pamsukūlacīvaramkhāyissati—A.
IV. 230
You will feel(your)rag-robe;Kinā --
(vy)+i +ssati,fut. 3%.sg.
Pamsukilasannino uttaresum—Vin.
III. 63
(The bhikkhus),with theideathatthey
arecastoffs, took themto theshore;
pamsukiila+ sania + 7,der.; u(t)+
Tr +e +sum,caus.pst. 3. pl.
Pamsukenaokiranti —M. I. 79
They throwsoil on (me);0 (ava) +Kir
+at nti, pres.3™.
pl.
Pamsupisācakampina passāmi—M.
11.32
I don’tseeevena mud-goblin;pamsu
+pisdcaka,theyare said to be
presentfrequentlyin dirty places, Cy.
IH, 272
Payirupasanayaupasamkamanam
bahukāram— M. II. 176
Approachis muchhelpfulfor
attending
on:pari+upa+As+ana,
 Payoge
Paramanipaecākāram
meta.der.; upa +sam +Kram +ana,
para +pati +Badh +ta,pp,
der,
Parapariggahitafica hoti
Payogepayogedukkatam —Vin. III.
parapariggahitasaāihīca —Vin. HI,
151
54
A wrong-doing in every step;pa + Yuj
It is possessedby othersandknown
+a, der.
to bethepossession
of others:
pari+
Grh + i +ta,pp.; sata + %der.
Payopanampatiyattam —Vin. IV.
197
Paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto
Milk-drink hadbeenprepared;payo
M. Il. 159
(=pavas) +pana; pati + Yat + ta,Pp.
Following thepathof torturingothers:
Para + pari + tapana + anuyogam+
Payo piyatam, tava bhattassakalo
anu +yutta: Yuj + ta,pp.
bhavissati—M. II. 186
Pleasedrink milk, therewill be
Parapessāmāahumha—D. IE.273
ampletime for themeal:Pa + tya +
May we not be servantsof others:
fam, pass. imper. mid. 3”. Sg.,; tava,
para +pa + Is +ya,fut. pp.ca+ Ha
emph.p.
(Bhi) +mha,pst. 1. pl.
Parakāminī hoti —
D. II. 268
Parabyābādhāyapi samvattati—M.
(She) is in love with another
1. 115;IL. 114
It leadsalso to theharm
of others;
Paracittakusalo paracittapariyaya
para + vi + @+Badh +a, der.;sam
kusalo —A. V. 162
+Vrt +a+ ti,pres.3. sg.
Skilled in others’minds.skilled in the
movementsof others’minds
Paramatthavisuddhim
paāūāpenti-
A. V. 64
Parato ca ghoso yoniso ca
Proclaimthehighestpurity;
manasikaro—A. I. 87
ākiācahihāyatanasamāpatti
Instruction(received)from othersand
vipassanāpādakattā aggam;
the focusof mind in right direction
nevasahhānāsahiiā samāpatti
dighāyukattā,Cv. V. 27
Paradārampi gacchati —M. I. 87
Goes after others' wives too
Paramanipaecākāram
karoti- M.
It. 120
Paradārasevanā
—D. III. 184
Accordsthehighesthonour;
parama
Tokeepcompanywith others'wives
+nipacca + kara; ni +Pat +ya,
absol.
Parapatibaddhāmeiīvikā —A. V.
210
Paramanipaccākāram
pavattamāno
My livelihoodisdependent
onothers:
pavatteti—S. V. 233
Paramanihīnatam Param
Keepson paying utmost respect;pa + Paramayasatiya va gatiya va
Vrt+a +mana,pr.p.; pa +Vrt +e + dhitiyā vā samannāgatā—M. I. 82
ti, pres. 24 SZ. Endowedwith thehighestformof
attention, understandingor
Paramanihīnatampatto —
D. I. 99 retentiveness;uggahanasamatthatā
Fallenintothelowestgrade;
pa +Ap sati, dhārana
+fa,pp. upanibandhanasamatthatāgati,
saiihāyamkātumsamatthatādhiti,
Paramapāsāvinīnacce Cy. IT.52
-
paramapāsāvinīgīte —S. V. 170
Theonewho is ektremelycreativeor Paramenaca samafifiena
charmingin dancingandsinging; samannagato—A. III. 443
pasavanam pasavo,pavattatiti attho, Endowedwith thehighestqualityof
Cy.II. 228;parama +pasava+i + recluseship;samana+ya, der.
int,or pasa +avi + int
Paramenasatinepakkena
Paramamariyasaccamyadidam samannagato—A. III. 11
amosadhammam nibbanam—M. III. Endowedwith thehighestmindfulness
245 andwisdom;sati + nipaka +ya, der.
Nibbana,theDhammaof non
deception,
is thehighestnobletruth;
Paramo ariyo upasamoyadidam
ariya+sacca;a + Mrs +a, der. + ragadosamohanamupasamo—M.
dhamma
III. 246
Tranquillisation
of lusthatred
and
Paramassāsassa
sacchikiriyāya —5.
delusionis thehighestnoble
IV.255 tranquillisation
Fortherealisation
of supreme
relief;
barama -- assāsa; sa -- acchi + kiriyā
Paramo ariyo cago yadidam
sabbūpadhipatinissaggo —M. III.
Paramāariyāpaūīā yadidam
245
sabbadukkhakkhaye hānam—M. III.
The removalof all defiling factorsis
245 thehighestnoblegiving up;sabba+
Theknowledgeofthe ekhaustion
of all
upadhi+pati +ni + Srj + ta,pp.
Dukkhaisthehighestnoblewisdom;
sabba+dukkha +khaya Paramparabhojanepacittiyam -
Vin. IV. 77
Paramaya
vannapokkharatāya In eatingin succession,thereis an
samannāgato,
brahmavannī offenceof expiation;param +para
brahmavaccasi
—D.I. 114 (oneafter another)+ bhojana
Heisendowed withsupremebeauty,
heisof thehighestcomplexion
and
Param adhisilesampavatta—A. IIL.
highest
splendour 133
 Param
Parikkhayam
The onewho instigatesanotherin high
Paravisayam okkamitva—Vin, II.
morality;sam +pa + Vrt +tu, der:
182
Having enteredinto a territoryof
Param ujjhapesi —Vin. IV. 275
others;o -- Kram +i +twa,absol
Causedherselfto makeanoutcry
againstanother(—ordained
Parābhūtarūpo—D. IHI,19
bhikkhuni);
w(t)+Kst+ ape+s +i. As if onewhois ruined;
para +
caus.pst. 3. sg.
bhiita+ riipa
Param yojanasatam—A. I. 206
Paraya va para sammannitabba-
Beyondonehundredyojanas;
Vin. IT. 272
yojana is a measureofdistance,
Or one(bhikkhunī)shouldbeagreed
about 8 miles
uponby another;sam + Man+yati
+tabba,fut.pp.
Param va tathattāyasamādapenti-
M. I. 87
Parikappe na santhāti—A. I. 197
Make othersobservefor thesame
He doesnot stayon thegroundof
purpose;fhatā 3:tta,dey.:sam +@+
assumption;pari 1.Kip +ya,fut.pp.;
Da +ape+nti,caus.pres.3" pl.
sam +Stha+a +ti,pres.3. sg.
Param viya mattāya—D. I. 176
Parikammakatāya bhūmiyā
Asif to thegreatestextent:viva,
nitthubhanti —Vin. II. 175
indel.
(They) spit on thefloor perfectly
treated;
ni(s) +Stubh+a +nti,pres.
Param saiiiapeti— M. I, 402
SH il:
Causesto convincetheother:sam +
Jia +ape +ti, caus,pres. 3". sg.
Parikammamkatabbam— Vin. I. 47
Serviceshouldberendered;
Kr +
Paravādampana khumsenti
tabba,fut. pp.
vambhentiparibhavanti
opapakkhim karonti —A. I, 188
Parikammāni karonti —
S. I. 76
They scold,condemn,disparage
(They ) do preparatorywork
other'sview andmakeit unfit for the
side;Krug + e + nti,pres. 3ord TUI
Parikkhayamgacchati— D. HI. 184;
Vambh+ e +nti, pres. 3. pl.; pari +
Vin. I. 270;IV. 258,agamāsi
Bhi +a +nti,pres. 3”. pl.; upa +
Goestoexhaustion; pari +Ksi +@
pakkha + i, der.
der.
Paravittipakaranam gamagatamva
Parikkhayampariyādānam
arannagatamva —A, V, 283
gaccheyya—M.I. 453;S. II. 98,135;
Propertyof otherskeptin thevillage
A.V.173;
or forest;para + vitta +upakarana
(It)wouldgotoekhaustion
andend;
Pariiheyyam
pari t ā t Dā t ana, der.;gaccha +
Paricārako sampaiiati—D. I. 101
eyya,opt.3". sg. Turnoutto bea servant;
pari + Car +
aka,der.;sam +Pad +ya +ti, pres.
Parikkhāram nikkhipitvā —Vin. IV.
3”. sg,
252
Having
laiddownmaterial
reguisite;
wi Paricinno mesattha digharattam,
+Ksip + i t twā,absol. manāpenevano amanāpena— M. III.
264;5. IV. 57
Parikkhīnā pariyādinnā- S. II. 98 The teacherhasbeenservedby me
Exhaustedandfinished;pari + Ksi + for a longtimewith pleasure,not
fa,pp.;pari + ā +Da + ta,pp. withdispleasure;pari + Car +ta,
pp.
Parikkhepamatikkamentiya —Vin.
IV. 304 Paricinno mesatthā mettavatāya-
Fortheonewho causesto go beyong A. IHI.443
theenclosure;pari +Ksip +a, der.; The teacherhasbeenservedby me
ati+Kram +e +nta + i, prp. with love;mettd+ vantu;der.
Parikhā hoti gambhira ceva Pariccatto meāvuso kahāpano?-
vitthatā
ca—A. IV. 106 Vin. HI. 237
Moatis notonly deepbutalsowide; Friend,hastheKahāpanabeendonated
ca + eva to me?;pari + Tyaj+ta,pp.
Pariggahetvāuccārampi
passāvampinikkhāmema- Vin. I. Paricchitabba vyattayambhikkhuni
188 lajjiniti —Vin. IV. 330
Havingheldhimcarefully,we make Sheshouldbeexamined(by the
(him)
pass
urineandfaeces;
pa +Grh Samghato know)whetherthis
te +tv, absol.;ni(s) + Kram +e+ bhikkhuniis experienced
andmodest;
ma,caus.pres, 1%.pl. pari +Iks +i+ tabba
(parikkhitabba,
paricchitabba,
cp.
Pariggahetvapi
anetha
—Vin.I. 218 akkhiandacchi),fut. pp.; vyatta+
Bring(herhere)evenby holdingup ; ā avam;laiiā +i + int +iti
+Ni +a+ tha,imper.2". pl.
Paricchitva vutthanasammutimna
Pariggahetvā
vutthāpetvā
thitake
deti—Vin. IV. 331
muāicanti
—Vin. II. 165 Havingmadeaninquiry(theSamgha)
Holding
themuptightlyandmaking
doesnotgivetheapprovalfor
themstandup,(they)releasethem ordination;
pari+iks+i +tva,absol.
While
theywerestanding;
vi +u(t)+
, Da +e + ti, pres.3. sg.
Stha+dpe + tva, caus. absol.; Sthā
*i+ ta,pp.+ka;Mu(fide
+a +nti, Parinfieyyamtassativadami —M. I.
pres,3". pl. 4
 Pariffleyyam
I saythatit is to be understoodby him:
tassa,gen.for instr; Vad+ a + mi,
pres. I". sg.
Parififieyyam parijanati —A. III. 400
Fullyunderstand
whatistobefully
understood;pari +Jiid + eyya,der.;
pari +Jan +nd +ti,pres.3”.sg.
Paridayhateva kāyena paridayhati
cetasā—A. III. 95
Surelyhe is burntin everyrespect
physicallyandmentally;pari +Dah +
ya +ti,pass.pres.3". sg.+eva
Parito parito kutikāyam —
S. IV.
117
All aroundthehut
Parito parito camkamanti—
Vin. II.
194
(They ) walk to andfro on everyside;
parito, indel.; Kram + a + nti, intens.
Pres. 32r4,pl.
Parito parito ianapadesu—D. II. 200
In theneighbouringcountries
Parittake seseekato samkaddhitvā
—Vin. IV. 192
Having collectedsmall portionslefi
over;sam +kaddha(fromKrs) +i +
tv, absol.
Parittafica anovassikam—Vin. I.
169
Too small is theshelter(where
bhikkhuscanperforminvitation
ceremony
withoutbeingwet):an +0
+ vassa+ika, der.
Parittafiiievadhammim katham
Parittānakitikam Parittapi Paribhandam
katvā—Vin. IV. 50
uddhasudhanti vacchagomayena ca Paripakko vayomayham—D. II. 120
Havinggiveniusta brieftalkonthe
chārikāyaca saddhimmaddita My ageis fully ripe;pari +Pac +ta,
Dhamma;parittam +y +eva
mattikam,Cy. 1219 Pp.
Parittam udakavasesam
Parittapi vata adhimattapi vata - Paripanthepi titthanti —M. I. 87
udakadhane thapetva—M. I. 414
S. V. 49 Stayon highway(for robbery)
Making
alittle bitof waterremain
in A little and ekcessive winds
thecontainer;udaka+ava +Sis +a,
Paripākam āgamentipanditā — D.
der.;udaka+ā t Dhā+ana,der; Parittenavā vipulam vipulena vā II. 332
Stha + dpe + tva, caus.absol. parittam—Vin. III. 210; IV. 60 The wisewait for maturity;pari + Pac
A morevaluablefor a lessvaluable,a + a, der; G+ Gam + e +nti, caus.
Parittam uppajjati— Vin. IV. 99 lessvaluablefor a morevaluable pres. 3. pl.
A little is available;u(t) +Pad +ya+
ti,pres,3". sg. Paritto appātumo Paripunnam parisuddham
appadukkhavihārī—A. I. 249 brahmacariyamsantānessati—S. IV.
Parittam gopadeudakam—
A. III. A personwho is inferior,of 104
188 insignificant
characterandabiding Will continuethehighestway of
A littlewaterin thecow’sfootprint miserablyfor a little mistake;appa + life, pureandcompletein itself;pari
ātumo(—ātman) +Pr +ta,pp.; pari + Sudh + ta,DD.;
Parittampariyapunati—Vin.IV. sam + Tan+e +ssati,caus.fut. 3”.
305 Parittoayam nāyam mahanto—A. Sg.
Learnsparitta( chanting
for MELL
protection);parittanti yakkhaparitta- Thisis small,not big Paripūram tenamgena—M. I. 492
nāgamandalādibhedam,Cy: 937 It iscomplete
inthataspect;
fena+
Parinibbanadhammo—A. III. 409 amgena
Parittampātheyyam pādāsi
- Vin. I. Theonewho is boundfor parinibbana
270 Paripūram paripūrakārī ārādheti -
Gavealittle provisionfortheiourney: ParinibbuteBhagavati—D. II. 156; S. V. 201
palha -- eyya,der.; pa t ā t Dā' S. 1. 158 The onewhocultivatesfully attains
+ i, pst. 3. sg, WhentheBlessedOne hadentered fully;pari +Pr +a, der.; @+Radh +
intoparinibbāna,Joc. abs/. e t ti, caus. pres. 3™.sg.
Parittammamaiīvitam—D.II. 120
Paripakka vimuttiparipacaniya
My life is short Paribbajakasamapanno—Vin. IV. 92
dhammā—S. IV. 105 The onewho hasbecomea wandering
Parittam
sambalam
ādāya
—S.II." Thefactors,which shouldcause ascetic;sam +@ +Pad +ta,pp.
Havingtaken
alittle provision;
@+Da liberationto be matured,are
+ya, absol. ripened: pari + Pac +e + aniya, Paribhandam uklapam hoti —Vin.
11.220
Parittānakitikamuddhasudham- The floor or plaster(of thehot bath
Vin. II. 152 room)becomes
unclean;
Protecting screenandtheclaymixed paribhandantibahiiaggati ?, Cy.
withcalfdungandashes; 1286
 Paribhasitva
Paribhasitva niccabhattikam
pacchindimsu—Vin. IV. 272
Havingreproached, theystoppedthe
regularmeal;pari +Bhas +i + tva,
absol.: nicca + bhatta +i +ka, der.;
pa + Chi(n)d + imsu,pst. 3”. pl.
Paribhuāia vā vissaiiehi vā
yathāpaccayamvā karohi —Vin. IV.
122
Makeuseof it or give it awayor do as
you deemfit; pari + Bhu(ai)j+ a,
imper.2”.
imper.2". sg
Sg.
Te
Parimandalam nivasetabbam
nabhimandalamjanumandalam
paticchadentena—Vin. IV. 185
Shouldweartherobeall around
coveringtheareaof thenavelandthe
fut. pp.
Parimandalo ālopo katabbo —Vin.
Il, 214
Morsel of food shouldbe maderound
in shape;@+Lup +a, der: Kr+
tabba,fut. pp.
Parimasati parimaiiati —D. I. 17
Touches,rubs;pari +Mrs +a + ti,
pres. 3".; sg.; pari + Marj +a+ ti,
pres. 3”. sg.
Parimukham kārāpenti —Vin. II.
134
They causeto remove(or arrange)
hair on thechest;parimukhantiure
lomarajisamharanam,Cy. 121]
Parimutta pittivisayā —A. IV. 379
600
Pariyaya
Totally free from therealmof
forefathersor hungryghosts:pari +
Mue +ta,pp.; pitti + visaya,pittiis
related to Skt. pitr, variantis petti
Pariyattibahulo no dhammavihari-
A. HI. 86
The one who is mostlyoceupiedwith
learning(by heart), notwiththe
practice
of Dhamma;
pari +Ap +
ti
der.+ bahula
Pariyantakatam brahmacariyam-
M. II. 120
The highestway of life restricted
toa
specific periodof time;pari +anta+
kata
Pariyantam nadhigacchami— S. I.
59
I do not find anend;na +adhi+
gaccha + mi,pres. 1°. sg.
Pariyādinnarūpā kho ime
moghapurisā
—Vin. I. 349
Thesefoolish menseemto havebeen
overcome;pari 1.ā 1 Dā t Ia,pp."
rapa
Pariyadinnoassatejasatejo—Vin.I.
25
His powerhasbeenovercomeby(my)
power
Pariyāpunimsu pesikam kātum-
Vin. II. 109 :
(They) learnthow to slice;pari +Ap
+(u)na+imsu,pst.3”.pl.
Pariyaya desito..maya dhammo-
M. 1.398;S. IV. 225
Dhammahasbeenexplainedbyme
Pariyutthito Parivasam
accordingto thecontext;pari +(y) 4 Vin. II. 269
aya(fromI) +a, der.;Dr§ +e +i + They causeto turnthebowl upside
fa,caus.pp. downandshowthebottom of the
bowl;pari + Vrt +e +tva,caus,
Pariyutthitoayam purisoti —Vin. absol.;Dr§ +ya + e + nti, caus. pres.
IV. 94; 229 3M,ipl:
Thinking,‘thismanhasbeenaroused’:
rāgaparivutthitomethunādhippāyoti Parivasanti bhikkhubhavam
attho,Cy. 856;pari +u(t) +Stha +i ākamkhamānā —D. III. 80
+fa, pp. (They) undergoa periodof probation,
expectingfull memberships in the
Pariyesitvana labhati —Vin. IV. communityof bhikkhus;pari +Vas+
292 a +nti,pres.3”. pl.; @+Kamks+ a
Doesnotgetaftermakinga search; + mana, pr. p.
pari +es (Is) + i + tv, absol,;Labh
+a +ti, pres. 3”. sg. Parivasantobhattagge
asanapariyantenisidi —Vin. IV. 30
Pariyodhāyaattham bhanissanti- The onewho is undergoinga
A.I. 154 probationaryperiodsaton thelastseat
Theywill saysomethingmeaningful in therefectory;pari + Vas+ a +aita,
for (my)defence;pari + Yudh + prip.; pari +anta,ni +Sad + i, pst.
a,der.;Bhan +i +ssanti,fut. a sg:
3 pl.
Parivāretvāthitā—M. II. 70
Pariyositasamkappo
—
D. II. 224 Gatheredaround;pari + Vr +e +tva,
Theonewhosepurposeis caus.absol.;Stha+i +ta,pp.
accomplished;
pari +o (ava)t Sāti
+ta, pp. Parivaro ahariyyati —Vin. IV. 183
Somethingrelatedis brought;ā +Hr
Parilāhapaccayāmethunam t a t Ea +ti,pass.pres.3%.sg.
dhammam
patisevimsu
—D. IHI.88
For the reason of burning (with lust) Parivāsam adasi —Vin. IV. 127
theyindulgedin sekualintercourse: Gavea periodof probation;pari + Vas
Pari +daha; pati +Sev + imsu, pst. ta, der.; a t Dā t ā t $ +i, double
aks pst. 3. sg.
Parilāhasamayovassānassapathamo
Parivasam nikkhipitum —Vin. IL. 34
māso—Vin. IV. 119
Tosuspend
probation;
mi+Ksip+i +
Scorching
timeis thefirstmonthof tum,inf.
therains
Parivasamsamaditum—Vin. IL. 34
Parivattetvā
pattamūlam
dassenti-
To takeup probationagain;sam +
Tee
601
 Parivasam
a+ Da +i + tuminf; Samadivitumis
the usual term
Parivāsam sodhetum—
Vin.
Sudh +e +tum,caus, inf
Parivaso databbo —Vin. I. 69
A periodof probationshouldbegiven;
Da + tabba,fut. pp.
Parivimamsamano parivimamsati -
S. II. 81
Keepson inquiring:pari +
vīmamsamāna, PEP.; vimamsati,
desid.of Man,pres. 3. Sg.
Parivutthaparivasena bhikkhuna -
Vin. III. 186
By thebhikkhuwho hascompletedthe
probationaryperiod;pari + Vas+ ta,
Pp.; pari + Vas+ a, der.
Parivutthaparivaso bhikkhūnam
ārocesi—Vin. II. 40
The onewho hassuccessfully
completedtheperiodof probation
informedthebhikkhus;@+ Ruc +e 4
S ti, caus.pst. 3. sg.
Parivenam udrīyati —Vin. IV. 254
The cell is split into pieces;u(t) +Dr
F a t ti, pass.pres. 3. sg.
Parivenam cikkhallam hoti —Vin.
Il. 121,142
Enclosurebecomesswampy;
Parivenanti
vdcc'akutiparikkhepabbhantaram,
Cy.
1214
ParivenamSammailitvā—Vin. IV.
Parisatim Parisativannam Parissāvanānipi
52
Parisativannam bhasatha—Vin. IV. Parisuddhamanosamācāro
Havingsweptthecell; sam +Mrj +ua
285 Tathāgato—A. IV. 82
+i +tva, absol.
II. 34 Praisemein public;parisati, loc. sg. TheTathāgata
is totallycleanin mental
(=Skt.parsadi); Bhas +a +tha, behaviour
Parivenam susammattham—Vin,
pres,2”. pl.
II. 119
ParisuddhavacīsamācāroTathāgato
The cell or verandahwaswellswept;
Parisamoloketva puggalam —A. IV. 82
su +sam +Mrj + ta,pp.
tulayitvavinayam pucchitum —Vin. The Tathāgata
is totallycleanin verbal
I. 113 behaviour
Parivenavasika bhikkhuniyo —
Vin. Toaskquestionson Vinaya
IV. 252 (discipline),aftermakinga surveyof
Parisuddhāiīvo Tathāgato—A. IV.
Bhikkhunis residingin cells theassemblyand assessingtheperson
82
concerned; o + Lok +e + tva,absol.; The Tathāgatais totallycleanin
Parivesanam agamasi—
Vin. IV. tulā+aya +i +tva,denom.absol.;
livelihood; parisuddha -- āiīva
91 Prch +ya +i + tum,inf,
Wentto the feedingplace;pari + Vis
Parisuddhetthāyasmanto —Vin. III.
+ e +ana,der; a+ Gam+a+s+i, Parisasāraiiabhayam—A. IV. 364
109
doublepst.3 .sg. Fearof embarassmentin the
Herethevenerables arepure;
assemblies pari t suddhā -- ettha-- āvasmanto
Parivesanavattati—S. I. 172
A feedingis in progress;
Vrt+a +fi Parisāaechariyabbhutaiātā—M. II. Parisuddhena kāyasamācārena
=
tage
pres. 3. sg. 144 acchiddenaappatimamsena—A..V.
Thefollowersbecamedumbfounded; 79
Parisakkasāvo— A. II. 19 acchariya+abbhuta +iāta With thephysicalbehaviourclean,
Astringentto thecommunity; flawlessandfaultless;pari +
parisa t-kasāva,sometimes Parisāyavissaiiesi—Vin. I. 209 Sudh +ta,pp.; a +pati + Mrs
kasāvais coupledwithkasata Distributed
amongthefollowers;vi + +a (marsa>massa> mamsa),
(Stain); Cy. saysparisakacavaro, Sij +ya+e+s + i, caus.pst. 3”. sg. der.
(rubbish),III, 22
Parisāsuīiiā viyakhāyati—
S. V.164 Parissāvanamna sammati—Vin. I.
Parisagato samāno—
D. I. 125 Thecommunityseemsto meas if 119
Beingpresent
in theassembly
of €mpty;viya,indcl.; Khya +ya + ti, Straineris notsatisfactory;
pari +Sru
followers;As -- māna,pr. p: pres. 3". sg, +e +ana,caus.der; Sam +ya + ti,
pres.3™.sg.
Parisatim
evamvacam
bhāsati
—D. Parisāsu
sīhanādam
nadati—A. II. 9
III. 12; M. I. 227;A. I. 185 (He)makesa lion's roar in the Parissāvanānipi thavikāyopi
(He)saysthusintheassembly;
Bhds+ assemblies;
Nad+a +ti,pres.3”.sg. pūretvā vātapānesulagganti—Vin.
a + ti, pres. 3”, sg. 1.209;III. 250(laggeti)
Parisuddhakāyasamācāro Havingfilled thestrainersandthe
Parisatim
dhammam
deseti
—M.II. Tathāgato—A. IV. 82 bags,theyhang(them)on windows;
140 TheTathāgata
istotally
clean
in Py te t twā,caus.absol.;Lag t ya d
ExplainstheDhammain anassembly physicalbehaviour 2
nti,pres. 3WITI
 Parihānadhammo
Palighaparivattikampi
Parihānadhammo puggalo —A. V. Parena va paro sammannitabbo
-
103
Vin. I. 94
The personon decline
Or oneshouldbeagreeduponby
another;sam +Man +ya +i +tabba,
Parihānāya samvattati—A. IHI. 309
fut.pp.
lt leadsto down-fall
Paresampi sandhayaapatti
Parihāyati sabbasampattiyā—
D. IHI.
desetabba—Vin. I. 340
165
Offence should be confessedeven
Hefallsawayfromall gains;pari +
for the sakeofothers: sandhāya,
Ha +ya + ti, pres. 3™.
2rd
Sg.
indel.
Parihārapathepi kīlanti —Vin. II. Paresam pabhatam palumpanto
10 carati —A. I. 48
They playon diagramstoo:pari +Hr
He moveson plunderingothers'gifi;
* ya, fut.pp. +patha; Krid + a + nti,
pa + Lu(m)p +a +nta,pr.p
pres.3”.pl.
Parodi, assiini pavattesi—M. IIL.
Parūpakkamena .. jivita voropeyya
261
—Vin. II. 194
Cried,shedtears;
pa +Rud+a+i,
Wouldcausetodepriveof life by
pst. 3. sg.; pa+ Vrt+e+sti.
others’plot;para + upa + Kram +a,
caus,pst. 3". sg.
der.; vit+o+Ruh+e+ evya,caus.
opt. 3”. sg.
Paropaīihāsa —D. II. 93
More thanfifty
Parūpārambham vatteti— A. II. 181
Makesuseof abusivelanguage
Parosahassam—D. I. 89
towardsothers;paragarahamkatheti,
More thanone thousand
Cy. II. 166;para + uparambha,upa
+a+ Ra(m)bh +a, der.: Vrt + e+ ti,
Palandukeanāpatti—Vin. IV.239
caus.pres. 3". sg.
There is no offence in onion;pala+
anduka
Pare upalikkhanti —A. III. 96
The otherswound(him);
Palālapīthakampi
karonti—M.1.87
upalikkhantitivijjhanti, Cy. II. 269;
Theyinflictthepunishmentof
upa + Likh +ya +nti,pres, 3". pl.
palālapīthaka
is whichtheconviet
bodyismade
iustlikea bundle
of
Pare ca me na saddaheyyum— Vin.
strawbycrushingits bones,Cy.1159
II. 105
Otherswouldnot believein my
Palighaparivattikampi
karonti
—M.
words;samor sat +Dha + eyyum,
I. 87
opt,3. pl.
They inflict thepunishment
of
Palitani jatani
Pavarana
palighaparivattika
in whichthe pa +Vrt + ta,pp.; Jan +na +hi.
convictis fixed into theground by imper,2". sg.
insertingiron rods throughthe ears
andthentura him round; Cy. II. 59 Pavattinim dve vassaninanu-
bandhanti—Vin. IV. 325
Palitāniiātāni —S. II. 218 (They) do not follow thepreceptorfor
Greyhairsareborn;Jan +ta,pp.
two years; pavattinī is preceptor in
thebhikkhuniordination; in the
Palibuddhitvamuficimsu —Vin. IV.
bhikkhuordinationpreceptor is
131;161; 264
called upajjhayaor upajjha; na +
Havinggivena warning(they)released anu + Ba(n)dh +a + nti,pres. 3”. pl.
him;pari +Budh +ya, +i +twa,
absol.,palibuddhati,pres. 3" S$g.; Pavattinī nāmaupaiihā —Vin. IV.
Mu(fije+imsu,pst. 3. pl. 326
Pavattinimeansthepreceptor;there
Palissajamam kalyāni—D. II. 266
are two termsin the bhikkhuOrder
Embrace me,beautiful;part +Svaj +
a, imper.2". sg.
upaiiha; two termsin the bhikkhunī
Order: pavattini and upajjha;
Palujjantitenavappāyā
—S. II. 218
Pavatta + init
Youryoungfriendsaresetapart;nava
*paya;pa +Ruj +ya +nti, pass.
Pavayhapavayhakāranam karonti -
2
pres. 3". pl.
M. I. 442
Takeactionagainandagain;
Pallamkassavale bhinditva —Vin.
appamattakepidose niggahetvā
ll, 170 punappunamkārenti,Cv. II. 153;
Havingremovedthestuffingof the
pa + Vah +ya, meta.absol.
couch;
Bhi(n)d +i +tva,absol.
Payaranamthapetum—Vin. I. 170
Pallamkenakamati —
D. I. 78; nisida To withholdPavaranaceremony;Stha
~Vin.I. 179 +dpe +tum,caus.inf.
Moveswith legscrossed;Kram +a +
ti,pres.3". sg, Pavaranamdatum—Vin. I. 160
To givePavarana(makinganinvitation
Pavattamamsam
iānāhi—A. IV. 187; topointout
a fault,if any);Da +tum,
Vin.I, 217,237 inf.
Seewhether meatisavailable;
Pavattamamsanti
pakatiya pavattam Pavarana bhesajjapariyantaca
kappiyamamsam,mitlamgahetva rattipariyanta
ca—Vin. LV.103
dNtarāpane
pariyesāhīti adhippāvo, Theinvitation
is limitedtothe
Cy.IV. 102:pavattamamsanti medicineandthenights;pari +anta
Matasseva
mamsam,Vin. Cy. 1094;
 Pavāranāsamgaham
Paveliyamanena
Passafiieva
Pavaranasamgahamkatum —Vin. I. Pavivekaya pitiya nirodha
177 Pavesanam sadiyati, pavittham maniie, indcl.
uppaiiati nirāmisam sukham—M,
To makePavaranashort:Kr +tum, sidiyati, thitam sādiyati,
11.235
inf. uddharanamsādiyati —Vin. III. 29 Pasayhamaramabhibhuyya
From thecessationof ioy of
Entryis enioyed,enteredis enioyed, antakam—A. I. 150
seclusion,therearisesunworldly
Pavāsamgacchanto—Vin. IHI. 257 remained is enioyed,pullingup is Havingovercomedeath,having
happiness;ni +(r) +dmisa;u(t)+
Goingabroad;
pa + Vas+a, der; enjoyed;pa + Vis +e +ana,caus. vanquisedend-maker(death);abhi +
Pad +ya + ti, pres. 3™.sg.
gaccha +nta,prp. der.;pa +Vi§ +ta,pp.; Stha +i-+ ta, Bhii +ya, absol.
pp.;u(t) +Hr or Dhr +a +ana,der.;
Pavivekārāmassa Svad+ava +ti, caus.pres. 3. sg.
Pavivittassa viharato Pasayharatanamahasi—S. IV. 345
samganikārāmatā kantako—A, V.
nirāyattavuttino iccha uppajjati Carriedthevaluable,overpowering
134 Pasatenaayyesappina attho—Vin. I.
labhaya—A. IV. 293 (the enemy);a +Hr+@+ s +i:
Attachmentto a grouplife is a thom 271
Therearisesa strongdesirefor gain harsi >hassi >hasi, doublepst. 3”.
(obstacle)
totheonewhois interested Lady,I needa handfulof ghee 5g.
fortheonewhois livingin solitude
in solitude;samganika+drama ta,
with no striving;pa + vi + Vie +ta,
der. Pasatthapasattho—M. II. 209
pp.; ni + ®+ ayatta:a + Yat + ta, Pasakhejatam gandam—Vin. IV.
Praisedby thepraised;pa +Sams+ 316
Pp.* vutti;u() + Pad +ya + eyya,
Pavisa kira bhantesaceākamkhasi fa,pp. A boil arisenat thebottom:pasakheti
opt. 3", sg.
—M. 1.383 adho kaye... rukkhassasākhā viya
Enter,sir, if you like; sace,indcl. Pasannacittākālamkaronti — D. II. ubhoūrū pabhijjitvagata, Cy. 939;
Pavivittassāyamdhammo - A. IV.
giving a condition; ā + Kamks+a+ 141 Jan +ta,pp.
229
ti, pres. 3. se. (They)die with a pleasantmind;kalam
This Dhammais for theonewho is
+karonti Pasadabahulohoti bhikkhisu,
detached
Pavisanti vā nikkhamanti vā—D.II. theresucevanavesuca majjhimesu
83 Pasannānam ea ekaceānam ca—A. IV. 25
Pavivitto pāpakehi akusalehi
Go in or go out;ni(s) +Kram+a+ aāiathattāya—Vin. I. 45 He is themostpopularamongthe
dhammehi - S. II. 29
nti, pres. 3".pl. Tochange(the mindof) someof those bhikkhus:elders,newcomersandthe
Detachedfrom evil andunwholesome
Whoarealreadypleased;pa +Sad + mediocrities
things
Pavutthapatikā iārena gabbhinī ld,pp.; anfiatha + tta, der.
hoti—Vin. II. 268 Pasusamvāsamvuttha samana-
Pavivekadhimuttohoti—
A. IHI.376;
A womanwhosehusbandhasbeen Pasannā
pasannākāram
karonti—D. Vin. I. 159
Vin. I. 183
living far away(from home)is 1.175 Beingleda life togetherlike beasts;
Theonewhois intentuponsolitude;
pregnant
bya lover;pa +Vas+ta,pp. Thosewhoarepleased
express
their pasu+sam+vasa;Vas+ta,pp.;As
pa + viveka+ adhi + Muc + ta,pp.
+patikā pleasure;
pa +Sad+ta,pp.;pasanna + mana, pr.p.
- ākāram; Kr. +o +nti, pres. 3”. pl
Pavivekampitim upasampaiia—M.
Pavedhanti gacchati—Vin. IV. 175 Passakanhassamandiyam—
D. II.
11.235;A. IHI.207
Goesonquivering;
pa +Vvath
+a+ Pasayha
jivitavoropesi
—S.IV.344 261
HavingattainedtheJoy ofsolitude; pa
nla, pr.p. Deprived
(him
) of life byusingforce: See the stupidity of the Black (mara);
+ vi + Vie +a, der; upa +sam + Pad
pa + Sah +ya, meta. absol.; vi + 0 + passa, imper. 2. sg.; manda +(i) +
+ya, absol:
Paveliyamanena
mafiiekayena Ruh+e +5 +i, caus.pst.3“.sg. ya, der.
gacchanti—S. IV. 289
Pavivekamyevanissaya—A. III. 219
Resortingonlytosolitude
They go, asif witha shakybody;pa + Pasayha
maāieāgacchati
—M.II. 99 Passafifievavadami passamiti—S.
Vell+ya +mana,pass.prp. Hecomes
asif challenging
(me); II. 220
Passaddhakayasamkharo
While seeingmyselfI say,“I see”:
passam +y +eva
Passaddhakāyasamkhāropatilīnoti
vuccati—A. II. 41
The one,whosebodily habits
is calledthewithdrawn;pa +
Sra(m)bh+ ta,pp.; kaya + sam(s) +
Kr +a, der.;pati + Li + ta,pp.; Vac
+ya +ti,pass.pres.3”.sg.
Passaddhakayassasukhino cittam
samādhiyati
—M. III. 86
Mind is concentratedof a personwho
der.;sam + @+ Dha + iva + ti, pass.
pres. 34. sg.
Passaddhisambojjamgo—A. V. 211
Enlightenmentfactorof tranquillity;
pa t Sra(m)bh + ti, der.+ sambodhi
+amgo
Passaddhisukhattha —A.V. 313
Tranquillisationis for happiness
(ease);sukha + attha
Passaddhokayo asaraddho—M. I.
21;A. I. 148
Thebodyiscalmandnonviolent;a +
sam+Rabh+ta,pp.
Passamoghapurisa,yavafica te
idam aparaddham—D. ILL.3
Seefoolishman,howfaryouhave
Bonewrong;moghapurisa is the
wordusedbytheBuddhato rebuke
thosewhodo notunderstand the
teaching;apa+Radh+ta,pp.;
yavaricahasbeenusedherefor
emph.
Pahanaya
Passambhayamkāyasamkhāram-
M. I. 56
Causingtotanquillise
breathing
process;pa + Sra(m)bh+ ava +nta,
caus.der.;kāya +Sam(s)+Kr +a,
der.
Passamyevahapassamiti—M. II. 9
While seeinghimself,hesays" I see";
passam + (y) + eva + dha: passam,
pr.p.; a+ Ah + a, pst. 3”. sg.; this
verb is also usedfor thepresent
Passāvadonikāya(na) khelo
kātabbo—
Vin. II. 222
Oneshouldnotspitintothetrough
for
urine
Passenanipātetha—D. II. 336
Makehimlieononeside;ni +Pat+e
+ tha, caus.pres. 2". pl.
Pahatabbampahinam— M. II. 143
Whatshouldbeabandonedwas
abandoned;pa +Ha +tabba,pp.;pa
+ Ha + ta,pp.
Pahānāyachandam ianeti—A. IV.
363
Makesanefforttoremove; Jan +e +
ti,pres.3™.sg.
Pahānāyavāyamitabbam
—M. 1.98;
III, 294;A.III. 106
Shouldmakeanattempttoabandon;
pa
+Ha +ana,der; vi +@+Yam+i+
tabba,fut. pp.
Pahānāyasamvattati—S.V.88
Leadstotheabandonment;
pa +Ha+
ana,der.;sam+ Vrt+a +ti, pres.
a: 5
Pahaya
Pahomi
Pahāyagamanīyam—S. IV. 302 Pahūtamkhādanīyambhojaniyam
Shoulddepartleavingthatbehind;pa adaya—A. III. 30; Vin. I. 27
+Ha +ya, absol.; Gam +aniya.,fut. Havingtakenplentyofsoft andhard
pp. food;pahiita (Skt.prabhiita); Khad +
a +aniya,fut.pp.; Bhuj +a +aniya,
Pahāyamānusamdeham-—
S. I. Sut.pp.; @ +Da +ya, absol.
30
Havingabandoned
thehumanbody Pahūtamsāpateyyam— D. II. 180
(existence); manu(s) + a, der. Plentyof property;sa +pati +eyya,
der.
Paharamdadeyya—M. I. 123
Wouldgive a blow; Da +eyya,opt. Pahutahirafiiasuvannamohaya
3”. sg.,root redup. pabbajito, bhimigatafica
vehasagatafica—D. I. 115
Paharasamucitarodanti —Vin. IV. Havinggivenupabundant treasures.
147 hiddenin thegroundandkeptabove
Beingfrightenedwith blows,they theground,herenounced;o fava) +
cry; Cy. Suggeststwo meanings: Ha +ya, absol.
pahāraparicitāandpahāra bhītā,
878;sam+ u(t) + Ci + ta,pp.; Rud + Pahoti asmimvacanepatimantetum
a+ nti,pres. 3.
2
pl. —D. I. 93; M. II. 147
He is capableofputting counter
Pahāsisakkāyamsammādukkhassa argumentson this issue;pati +manta
antakiriyāya—A. III. 293 + e +tum,denom.inf.
Abandonedtheself for theperfect
elimination
of Dukkha;
pa +Ha +s + Pahoti.. vitthārena attham
i,pst.3". sg. vibhajitum —M. I. 110;A. V. 225
(He) is competentenoughto analyse
Pahinakatthāyapatiyattam—Vin. themeaning,in detail; vi +Bhaj +i +
IV.80 tum,inf.
pa +Hi +n@+ka, der; pati + Yat+ Pahomi ghātetāyamghātetum
Ia, pp. iāpetāyamiāpetum pabbāietāyam
pabbāietum—M. II. 122
Pahīnamānassa
nasantigantha—S. I amableto makehimexecutewho
I. 14 deservesexecution,fine him who
Therearenobindingsfortheonewho deservesfine,banishhimwho
hasabandoned
conceit:As + nti,pres. deservesbanishment; ghdteta@yam
MAPU ghātetuntighātetabbavuttakam
ghātetum,Cll.
v. 353;pa + Hū (Bhū)
Pahūtaiivho
—M.II. 137 t at mi,pres. I". sg.; ghāta(from
Theonewhohasalargetongue ghan) +e +taya,fut. pp.; Ji +āpe
609
Pakatikam
tdya,fut. pp.; pa + Vraj +e + taya;
fut. pp.
Pakatikam denti yatharaddham
kanajakam bilamgadutiyam—Vin.
Il. 77;III. 160
Give (them)half cookedbrokenrice
andsoursoup,just prepared;pakati +
ika, der.;yatha +@+Rabh +ta,pp.
Pakaro vasanalepanasampanno
—A.
IV. 107
The rampart,well plastered;vasana+
alepana + sampanna
Pātaligāme nagaram māpenti
Vajjinam patibahaya—Vin. I. 228
Theycausetobuilda cityatPatali
village for keepingtheVajjis out; Ma
+dpe + nti, caus.pres. 3”. pl.
87
Pātaliputtawherebundlesareopened
up (tradecentre)
Pātikāya nimuiiitvā —Vin. I. 180
Havingimmersedin thehalf-moon
stone;ni + Majj + i + tva,absol.
Patidesaniyadhamma—Vin. IV. 346
Rules concerningconfession;pati +
Dr§ + e+ aniya,fut. pp.
Patiyekkogamonivisi—Vin. I. 207;
III. 249
Establisheda separatevillage;pati +
eko; ni+ Vis + i, pst. 3. sg.
Patekkam uposathamkaronti —Vin.
1.134
They hold Uposathaceremony
610
Panina
separately;pati +eka +a, der, adv,
Panam atimapeti —S. IV. 319
Causesto damagelife; ati + Mi +dpe
+ti, caus.pres. 3.f sg.; common
usage is atipāteti
Panatipatam pahaya panatipata
pativirato —D. 1.4
Havingabandoned
killing,heis
refrainedfrom destroyinglife;pana+
atipata;pa +Ha +ya, absol.;pati+
vi + Ram + ta,pp.
Pānātipātassa vipāko (sabbalahuso)
appāyukasamvattaniko— A. IV. 247
Short life, in theleast,is theresultof
deprivingliving beingsof life;pana+
ati + Pat +a, der.; vi +Pac +a,der;
appa + G@yu +sam + Vrt +ana+ika,
der.
Pānātipātāveramaniyāsamanulilio
hoti—A.V. 306
He becomesonewho approves of
refrainingfrom killing; sam+anu+
MATI
Pānātipāto garahito,
pānātipātāveramanī pasatthā —
Vin.
1.193
Takinglifehasbeencensured and
refrainingfromtakinglifehasbeen
praised;Garh +i +ta,pp.; pat
Sams + ta, PP.
Pānikāyapatibāhitvā—Vin.II. 151
Carryingit backandforthwithlittle
palm;pati +Bah +i +tva,absol.
Pānināākotetha
leddunāākotetha
dandenaākotetha
satthena
akotetha
Pātamanusittho
—D.II. 336 Pāniyamotappati— Vin. II. 153
The drinkingwatervesselis heatedup:
beatwithstick,beatwith weapon;a + pana +iya,der.;o t Tap+ya+ ti,
kotetha(fromKut), imper.2”. pl. pass.pres.3. sg.
Pānināālambitvā āsane nisīdati - Paniyam paribhojaniyam
M. II. 138 upatthapetya—Vin, IV. 52
Hesitsdownon theseathanging Causingto providewaterfor drinking
(on it) with his hand; ā +Lamb + i + andwashing;pdna +iya, der.;pari +
tva,absol. bhojana+iva, der.; upa +Stha +
dpe +tva,caus.absol.
Pānināgattāni anomaiiāmi —M. I.
80,246;5. I. 82, anumaiianto Paniyam pucchitabbam,
I rubthelimbswith (my) palm;anu + paribhojaniyampucchitabbam-
Vin. II. 208
(He) shouldaskaboutthewaterfor
Pānināgattāni paripuīichanto - drinking andwashing;Preh +ya +i +
Vin.II. 14 tabba,fut. pp.
Wipingoff(his) limbswith thepalm;
pari +Profich + a +nta,prip. Pānesuanuddayāanukampāavihesā
—Vin. III. 42
Pāninātalamāhacea— D. II. 262 Kindness,compassion andnon-
Havingclappedhands;@+Han (hat): harassment towardsliving beings:anu
ya, absol. t davā
Pānināpathavimparāmasitvā
—D. Pānesuasaiihato—M. II. 99
11,288 The onewhois unrestrained
towards
Havingtouchedtheearthwith hand: living beings;a +sam +Yam+ ta,pp.
para+Mr§ +i +tva,absol.
Pānesupātavyatam(mā āpaiii)-
Pāninā
pitthimparipuiichanto
—D. Vin.III. 42
HL.8 Let (them)notdestroyliving beings;
Wipingoff the back with the hand Pat +tabba +ta, der.
Panina
pokkharanim
khanitva
- Panehi saramamgato—D. I. 116
Vin.1.28 Gone for refugeto theendof life
Havingmade
a pondwithpalm;Khan
fit nā, absol. Patamanusitthosayam visesam
adhigamissati—M. II. 96
Pānīyam
apāyi
—D.II. 129 Instructedin themorning,hewill gain
Drank
water:
a +Pa 4(y) +i, pst.3”. specificattainment
in theevening;
pāto +anusittho:anu + Sās(Sis) +
 Pātarāsam
ta,pp.; adhi +Gam + i +ssati,fut.
ge sp:
ra "o
174
(He) took breakfast;pata + ® + asa;
Patarasayaaharanti —D. III. 88
(They) bring (them) for breakfast: @+
Hr + a+ nti, pres. 3™.pl.
Patimokkhapariyapannesu
sikkhapadesu—Vin. III. 178
In referenceto thepreceptsincluded
in thePatimokkha;pari +@+ Pad +
ta,pp.
Pātimokkham assosum—Vin. I. 107
Listenedto therecitalof Patimokkha:
a+ Sru +s +um,pst.34 pl.
Patimokkhamuddisitum—Vin. I.
- 102
tum,inf.
Patimokkham thapetum—
Vin. II.
240
To causeto suspendtherecitalof
Patimokkha
(codeof rules);Stha+
dpe + tum,caus. inf:
Pātimokkhasamvarasamvuto
viharati ācāragocarasampanno
anumattesuvajjesu bhayadassavi
samādāyasikkhati sikkhāpadesu -
D. 1.63;M. I. 36;A. II. 14
Heabides, beingrestrained bythe
codeof rules,endowed withgood
behaviour,seeingfearevenintiny
faults;observingprecepts he trains
Pātubhūtā
Patheyyatthaya Pade
himselftherein;
sam+ Vr +ta,
Patheyyatthayapatiyattam—Vin. I]. 291
pp.; vit Hr +a +ti,pres,3".sg;
IV. 80 We will makefoot- wipers;pada +
sam + Pad +ta,pp.; Drs +ya +
puiichani(fromprohich)
avi,der.;sam+@+Da +ya,
pati +Yat +ta,pp.
absol.; sikkhati, desid.from Sak,
Padamgutthenasamkampesi—M. I.
pres, 3™.sg.
Patheyyamayyanamdinnam —Vin. 253
IV. 80 He madeit tremblewith a foot-finger;
Pātimokkhuddesakenasāvetabbam
Provisionsfor thejourney weregiven pada +amguttha;sam +Kamp +e +
—in. I. 115
tothevenerables;patha +eyya,der; S +1,caus.pst. 3. sg.
Shouldbeannounced
by thereciter
of
Da + ta,pp.
Pātimokkha;Sau-- e --tabba,caus.
Padam va padarahamva
Patheyyampariyesitum —Vin. I. atirekapadamva —Vin. I. 96
244 One fourth(ofa kahapana, a copper
Pātimokkheuddissamāne
—
Vin. IV. To find provisionsfor thejourney; coin) or equivalentto one fourthor
143 pari +y +es (fromIs) + i +tum,inf. morethanone fourth
When Pātimokkhais beingrecited
(taught);ācariyena antevāsikassa Padakhilava abadho —Vin. I. 188 Padani mukhena paricumbati,
uddissamāne,
Cy:876;loe.absl.u(l) Trouble with corns in the feet pāninā ea parisambāhati—M. II.
+ Dr§ +ya + mana,pass.prp. 144
Pādatalesu
cakkāniiātāni—M. II. He kisses(the BlessedOne's) feet
Pātimokkhethapiteparisāvutthāti 136 with lipsandgentlymassagesthem
—Vin. II. 244 Thewheelsymbolsappearedonthe with thepalm;pari + Cu(m)b+a +ti,
When Pātimokkharecitalis suspended solesof(his) feet;Jan + ta,pp. pres.3™. sg.; sam + Bah +a+ ti,
assembly
getsup(adjourns)
;Stha+ pres. 3”. sg.
dpe +i + ta, caus.pp.; vi +u(y)+ Pādatovivaritvā—D. II. 163
Stha+ti,pres.3". sg. Having opened
upfromthesideofthe Padapi phalita honti —Vin. IV. 74
feet;vi +Vr +a +i+ iā, absol. Even the feet are cracked: Phal +e ti
Patiyapi pattenapi udakam + ta, caus.pp.
atiharanti—Vin. II. 120 Padanakhasikhayava
(They) bring in waterwitha vessel
and mukhatundakena
vaandakosam Pada bhijjimsu —Vin. I. 182
abowl;ati+Hr +a +nti,pres.
3" padaletva sotthina The feetcracked;Bhid +ya + imsu,
pl. abhinibbhijjeyyum —M. I. 104;Vin. pass.pst. 3". pl.
II. 3 (abhinibbhiileyya)
Pātubhāvo dullabho lokasmim—A. Having piercedtheshellwiththepoint Padukaarohitva—S.IV. 123
III. 240 oftheclawsorbeak,theywouldhatch Havingputon shoes;pādukā,acc.pl;
Appearanceis veryrareinthe outsafely;pada+nakha+sikha; ā t Ruh t a t i t twā,absol.
world;patu+bhava;du+Labh mukha+tundaka; pa +Dr or Dal +
+ a, der. e +tva,caus.absol.;sotthind,adv.; Pādukā orohitvā —S. IV. 123
abhi + ni + Bhid + ya + eyyum, opt. Havingremovedshoes;paduka,abl.
Pātubhūtā
devadūtā
—M.11.
75 3. pi. Sg.
Divinemessengers
haveappeared;
Pādapuīichaniyokarissāma —Vin. Pāde dakkhitukāmo —
Vin. I. 179
pātu+Bhii +ta,pp.
 Pade
Paniyaiica Pānīyam Pāpam

Desiringto seethe feet;dakkhitum

Kept nearbythewater(for washing
+kāmo;dakkhatiis fut. 3. se., used Pānīyamva pipāsino —D. II. 265 Shouldmakeanattemptto find a rag
feet), the foot-stool and the mat(for
also as pres. 3". sg., taking dakkha as
le , Fa d o lustasdrinkingwaterfor thethirsty; thrownout ofthe shop;antardpanato
wiping feet);pada F udaka;upatui pipasd +ī, der.
the basedakkhitumis made patitapilotikacivare,Cy. V. 1128;pa
+Ksip + i, pst. 3", sg.
+dGpana+ika, der.
Papakamditthigatam uppannam-
Pade pakkhaletva āvasathāgāram
Pānāgāranissitam vā hoti —
Vin, II. M. I. 256; Vin. II. 25; IV. 134
pavisitvā—D. II. 85 Pāpaniko cakkhumā ca hoti
151 Bornis anevil andperniciousview; vidhūro ca nissayasampanno ea —A.
Havingcausedto washthefeetand
Is close to a tavern;pana +agara+ u(t)+Pad +ta,pp. I. 116
enteredtherestinghouse;pa + Ksal
ni +Sri + ta, pp.
The shopkeeperis intelligent,clever
+@+tva, caus.absol.; āvasatha3-
Pāpakāakusalā dhammā—5. II. 196 andreliable;cakkhu+mantu,der;
agaram;pa +Vi§ +i +tva, absol.
Panagaram thapenti—Vin. II. 267 Evil andunwholesomethings nissaya T Sampanna, pp.
They causeto setupa tavern:Stha+
Pade pakkhaletva vihāram pāvisi -
ape +nti, caus.pres. 3”. pl. Pāpakāakusalā mānasā,abhiiihāpi Pāpamittānuyogo—D. III. 182
S. I. 107
vyāpādāpisārambhāpi samvattanti Association
withevilfriends;
papa +
He, havingmadethefeetwash,entered
Paniyaghatam va —M. II. 262 mitta +anu + Yuj +a, der.
thedwellingplace
paribhojaniyaghatamva Unwholesome andevil mentalstates,
vaccaghatamva rittam tuecham- suchas,covetousness, ill wills and Papamitto papasahayo
Pāde pakkhāletvā santhagaram
Vin. I. 157 angers,ekist; mānasāticittasambhūtā, papasampavamko —
S. I. 83; A. IV.
pavisitva —S. IV. 183
The potofdrinking wateror thepotof Cy.1V.58 283
Havingmadethefeetwashandentered
rinsingwateror thepot
oftoilet The onewho hasevil friends,evil
theassemblyhall
water,emptyandvoid;Ric +fa,pp. Pāpakāditthigatāvivecetukāmā
- companions andthosewho haveevil
M. I. 256;5. III. 110,vivecetum propensities;saha +ava (fromI)
Pade padam accādhāya
—A. II. 245;
Pāniyathālakampatigaphanti —
Vin. Desiringto keephim awayfrom
IV. 87
IV. 198 theperniciousview; ditthi +gata; Papam kammamgarayham
Havingputonefoot,a bit up,on the
Receivethevesselofdrinkingwater; vit Vie +e + tum,caus.inf. + assaputam—A. II. 242
other;ati +@+ Dha +ya, absol.
pati +Grh+na+nti,pres.3”.pl. kāma An evil actioncensurable
andto be
stoned;assa(Skt.afman) t puta;
Pādesu sirasā nipatitvā —S. I. 178;
Pāniyasamkhampāniyasarāvakam- Pāpakena
manasā
anupekkhati
—A. Garh +ya, meta,fut. pp.
11.205;Vin. I. 4, 180 IIL. 302
Vin. II. 153
Havingfallendownat thefeetand
A conchshellusedfor drinkingwater, Helooksatthemwith anevil mind; Papam kammamgarayham
worshippedwith thehead:ni +Part+i anu +pa +Iks +a + ti, pres. 3™.sg.
a cup usedfor drinkingwater upavajjam—A. II. 242
+tvd,absol.
An evil actioncensurable
and
Pāniyenapipādedhovanti
—Vin. II. Pāpakesuthānesuokappeyyum—M. blameworthy;upa + Vad+ya, der.
Padodakamupatthapesi—M. III. I. 11
207
155
(They) wash(their)feetevenwith Papam kammamgarayham
drinking
water;
Dhav+a +nti,pres. okappeyyunti
saddaheyyum,
addha mosallam—A. II. 241
+Stha+dpe+5 +i, caus.sta ayvamāvasmā akāsi vā karissati vāti,
3”, pl. An evil actioncensurableandto be
Sg. Cy.l.81; 0 +kappa + e + eyyum, flogged:musala+ya, der.
Paniyaificapivissati,gattanica denom,
opt.3”.pl.
Padodakampadapitham
sītamkarissati—D. II. 129 Pāpam papenasukaram —
Vin. II.
padakathalikamupanikkhipi —Vin,
(TheBlessedOne)will drink waterand Pāpanike
ussāho
karanīyo
—Vin.1. 198
1.9 290
makethebodilypartscool NE Easyis evil by anevil person
 Papam Pamokkhesu Pāyantim Pārivattakam )

Papam phusati dutthacittam —Vin.
11.203
The evil affectstheonewho hasa
corruptmind;Sprs+a +ti,pres.3”.
sg.; Dus +ta,pp. + citta
iccha; vasam+ Gam +ta,pp.
Papicchoicchapakatoafifiam
vyākaroti —A. III. 119
Theonewhohasevildesireandhas
pativiruddho—A. III. 171 Pārāiiko vā hoti chinnaparipantho
I
The one who is an adversary to —A. IU. 252 I I
theleadingbhikkhus;pamokkhesu He becomeseithera defeatedwho has } I
bhikkhūsūtidigāpāmokkhesu cut off theway or obstacles(to the I
bhikkhūsu,Cy. III. 290; pa + spiritualdvelopment);themeaning i

desireby naturedeclaresgnosis; mukha+ a, der.; pati + vi +Rudh ofthis phraseis not clear; Cy III.
Pāpasamācārādissanti ceva icchāpakatotiicchāyaabhibhiito, +ta,pp. 327 omitsthe wordpārāiiko and
suyyantica —Vin. III. 184 Cy.II. 276;icchāpakatacanalsobe gives an unclear definition to the
Badbehaviouris indeedseenand explainedas a compoundnoun, Payantimvutthapenti —Vin. IV. 318 nexttermby saying lokuttara-
heard:Drs +ya + nti, pass.pres. meaningthe one who has icehāpakati Causeto ordaina womangivingsuck; paripanthassachinnattā; it is
3”. pl.; Sru +ya + nti, Pass.pres. (evil desire by nature) ; @ + Jaa; vi + Pa +aya + ntat+7, caus.pr.p. difficult to understandhow a
a'epl. a+ Kr +o + ti, pres.3™.sg. bhikkhuincurs a defeat,thegravest
Pāragūsabbadhammānam.e— M. II. offence,(if it is themeaningof
Pāpassakammassapavattiyā —A.V. Papicchohotimicchaditthi—M. IL 144;A. I. 162; II. 23 parajiko here)by accusingothers
86 246;A. III. 335 Theonewho hasmasteryoverall
Fortheexecution
of evilaction;pa + He isof evil desireandwrongview; things:pāra + Gam + ii, der. Pārāiiko hoti asamvāso—Vin. III.
Vrt + ti, der. micchā,indcl.t ditthiT-ī, der. 21
Pārato antamorato bhogam katvā - He becomesa defeatedand
Pāpiyoassa,naseyyo—M. II. 178 Vin.I. 47 unsuitablefor abidingtogether;
352 One would becomeworse,notbetter; Keepingtheendoutsideandthefold samvāsonamaekamkammam
He lays hold on evil desire;pa +ni + papa + iva, der.; As +ya (Skt.yat), inside;ora andpara, indcl.; Bhuj+ a, ekuddesosamasikkhātā,Vin.III. 28;
Dhā
- ti,pres.3”.sg. opt.3". sg. der, para +Ji + ika, der.; a +sam +
Vas+ a, der.
Papikaya ditthiya appatinissagge Pāpenapāpataro
—A. II. 222 Paramgacchantonhayati —Vin. IV.
ukkhitto—Vin. I. 98 More wretchedthanthewretched 119 Pārāpāram gantukāmā— D. II. 89
The onewhosemembershiphasbeen Takesbathwhile goingabroad;Snd + Desiringto crosstheriver;pāra +
suspended on notgiving upa wrong Pābhatamanuppadetu —
D. I. 135 apāra; gantum-- kāmā
view; a +pati + ni +Srj + ta,pp.: May(themaiesty)
givecapital
u(t) + Ksip + ta,pp. (incentive);anu :- pa - Dātetiu, Paramsamuddassa
—M. II. 72 Pāricariyam āgacchatha—
D. II.
imper.
3”.sg. Theothershoreof the sea 273
Papikaya sassuyapapakena You comefor theservice;
Sasurena
papakenasamikena Pāmamgam dhārenti—Vin.II. Pārāiikam
dhammam
aiihāpaiianto pāricarivam,ace. for dat.; ā -
(nasukhamlabhati)—Vin. HI. 137 106 —Vin. HI. 164 gaccha+
tha,pres.2™.pl.
Doesnotfindhappiness
withthe (They)wearchains;Dhr +e +nti,-
Theonewhoiscommitting
anoffence
evil mother-in-law,evil father-in-law involving
defeat;
adhi+@+Pad+ya Parimam tiram khemam
caus.pres,3”.pl.
andevilhusband;
Labh+a +ti,pres, ft +nta,pr.p. appatibhayam—S. IV. 174
3a sg. ,
Pamujjam
pitattham
—A. V.313 The othershoreis peacefulandfree
Pārāiikassa
dhammassa
aiihāpatti from terror;para + ima,der.
Delightis forjoy;pa +Mud+ya:
Pāpicchāpāpikānamicehānam hoti—Vin. II. 243
pāmuiiaor pāmoiia,der.;pīti + I
vasamgatā—S. I, 150 Thereisa transgression
of theoffence Parivattakam civaram na denti -
all ha i
Thosewhoareof evil desireand involving
defeat;
adhi+@+Pad+ti, Vin. IV. 59
subjectedto evil desires;papa + der. Do notgivea robein exchange;
pari +
Pāmokkhesu bhikkhūsu

616 a
 Parivattakam
Pāsādam Pāsādā Pitthito
Vrt + aka, der.; Da + e + nti, pres. Pavaram paruta —Vin. III. 130
Pāsādā orohitvā —5. I. 75 Cause to bend the ribs; Nam +e +nti,
34 pi Dressedwitha mantle;
pa +a +Vr+
Havingdescendedfromthemansion; caus.pres.3”, pl.
ta,pp. o t Ruh 1.a 1 i t tvd, absol.
Parivattakam patiggahetum—Vin.
Pasulantarikahi vitudenti —Vin. III.
III. 209 Pavarikassa ghare parikkharam Pāsādikamayam kulaputto irīyati - 105
To accepttheexchange:pati + Grh + nikkhipitva—Vin. IV, 250 M. III. 238 Attackthroughtheribs;vi + Tud+ e +
e + tum,inf. Having kepttherequisiteat Thisgentleman
behavesnicely; Jr + nti, pres. 3”. pl.; usualform is
cloak-sellershouse;pāvara + ika, vitudanti
Parivasikachandadanena—Vin. IV. der.;ni +Ksip +i +tva,absol.
335
Pasadikatyayam parisa —Vin. III. Pitakanipi ucchamgepipiresum -
Whenthe properlyconstituted Pāvārouppannohoti—Vin. I. 281 230 Vin. I. 225
Samgha,hasadjournedor by getting A mantlewasavailable;u(t)+Pad+ Pleasant
is this groupof you:pasada (They) madebasketsandlap-containers
theconsent
of thosewhokeep ta,pp. +ika,der.; te + ayam full; Pr +e+ s + um,caus.pst. 3. pl.
themselvesaway from thelegal
Pavussakenameghena Pasadikenabhikkhunisamgho Pitthasamghatassahatthapasam
336; Cy. IV.943-4 takesthe term abhippavattham—M. I. 306;S. V. sampadetu—Vin. II. 264 viiahitvā nisīdati —Vin. IV. 95
parivasiya and analysesit intofour 51,abhippavutthāni;
A. IV. 127, Letthecommunity of bhikkhunis
doin Sits downverycloseto thedoor-post
categories;
parivasat ika,der.; abhippavutthāni apleasing
way;sam+Pad+e +tu, and the lintle, abandoning the distance
parivāsa -- iya, der. Extremelywetwith heavyrain;pa + caus.imper.3. sg. of hand’sloop;fattha+pasa;vi +
Vrs +aka,der.;abhi+pa + Vrs+ta, Ha + i + tvd,root redup.,absol.;ni +
Pp. Pāsādikohoti abhikkantapatikkante Sad +a + ti, pres, 3™.sg.
1.124 -A.V.20I
To performUposathaceremonyby Pāsamsānithānāni— A. V. 130 Heischarming
in movingforeward Pitthitothitohoti—D. II. 73;M. I.
declaring
individual
purity;Kr +tum, Pointsworthyto.bepraised;
pa+ andbackward;abhi +Kram + ta,pp.; 501;S. I. 82
inf. Sams +ya, der. pati + Kram + ta,pp. Hasstoodbehind;Sthā -- i '. ta,pp.

Parisuddhim datum — Vin. I. 120
To declarepurity;Dé +tum,inf,
Pāligunthimā upāhanāyo dhārenti
—Vin. I. 186
(They) wearshoescoveringtheupper
partof the foot; pālim gunthitvākatā
uparipādamattameva paticchādeti,
Cy. 1084;Dhr + e + nti, caus.pres,
3”. pl.
Pavayamviharati Cundassa
kammāraputtassaambavane— D. II.
126,III. 207
Abidesin Pāvā,atthemango
groveof
Cunda,theblacksmith
Pāsāne lekha na khippam lujjati-
A. I. 283
The line (carved)on thestoneis not
erasedquickly;khippam,adv.; Lujer
Rui +ya +ti,pass,pres.3”.sg.
Pāsānehica leddūhica
ottharapetva—Vin. IV. 308
Havingcaused tostrewoverwith .
stones
andclods;0 +Str+dpe+#4,
caus. absol.
—IAI
Vin.I. 209;III. 250 ui
Determined,"let thepalacebegold";
adhi+Muc+ya +i,pst.3”.sg.
Pāsādesupihammiyesupi
chadanesupi
ārūihāaechanti—
Vin.
IL.195
(They)climbedthemansions,summer
housesandtheroofs andstaythere;ā
+Ruh+ta,pp.;As+ya +nti,pres.
pUPE
Pāsādoacirakārito hoti
anaiihāvuttho—M. II. 91
Themansionhasbeenbuilt recently
andnotyetoccupied;a + cira + Kr +
e+ i+ ta,caus.pp.;an+adhi+@+
Vas
+ta,pp.
Pāsukenāmenti—
Vin. II. 266
Pitthitopitthitoanubaddho
—D. I.
226
Walkedbehind;anu +Badh +ta,pp.
Pitthito pitthito anubandhi—S. IV.
105;Vin. I. 82
Walkedbehind(him):anu t Ba(nldh
E? psl,a" sg.
Pitthitopitthitoanubandhi,
sīsānulokī— M. I. 147
Walkedbehind(him),focusingeyes
onthehead;sisa+anu+Lok +ī, der:
Pitthito ratam pativatteti —A. IV.
191
 Pitthiparikammam
Pindaya Pindaya Pitu

Causesto movebackthecarriagewith
theback;pacchimabhagenaratham
pavattentoosakkati, Cy. IV. 104;pati
+ Vrt +e +ti, caus.pres. 3™.sg.
Pitthiparikammam katum
kukkuccāyanti —Vin. II. 106
(They) hesitateto give a treatmentto
theback(to rub theback);pitthi +
parikamma;kukkucca+ aya +nti,
denom.pres. 3”. pl.
Pitthi me āgilāyati, tamaham
āyamissāmi— D. III. 209; M. I. 354;
A. V. 123
My backaches,I shall stretchit: @+
Gla +ya + ti, pres. 3%.sg.; @ +Yam+
i +ssami,fut. I". sg.
Pitthiyam gahetvapanamesi—Vin.
III. 79
He causedto push,seizinghim by the
back;Grh +e + tva,absol.; in this
idiom theroot Grh, takesthe object
in loc.; pa + Nam +e +5 +i, caus.
pst. 3. sg.
Pitthivamsam atikkamitvā nisīdati
—Vin. IV. 95
Havinggonebeyondthemiddle
(backbone)ofthe (small) house,sits
down; maiihātikkamam,Cy. 856; ati
+Kram + i + tva,absol.
Pitthisandhovikampi khiddam —A,
V. 202
A sportinwhichbackiswashed:
pitthi+sam+Dhay+ika,der,
Pindanikkhepanamattenapi
navakammamdenti —Vin. II, 172
Make repairsevenby placinga ballof
clay (on thewall); pinda +ai+ Ksip
+e +ana,caus.der. +matta;Da +e
+nti,pres.3".pl.
Pindapātam ādāya agamamsu
- Vin,
IV. 311
Havingtakenthealmsputintothe
bowl theywentaway;a +Da +ya,
absol.; a + Gam + @+ imsu,double
Pst: 3? pk
Pindapatam bhuiijati vicitakalakam
anekastiipam
anekabyanfjanam —M. 1.
38
He eatsalmsfood,comprisingsorted
outandboiledrice,soupsandcurries
of variouskinds:pinda + Pat +a,
der.;Bhuhi+a +ti,pres.3 $9.7wi
+Ci +ta,pp. +kalaka(blackseeds);
an + eka
Pindapātenapariviseyya
—M. I. 369
Wouldfeedwithalmsfood;pari+Vis
+eyvya,
opt.3”. sg.
Pindayacaritvapatikkamanakale
- Keepsgoingbymorselof foodand
Vin. IV. 175
At thetimeof returning,after
wandering
foralms;pati+Kram+
ana, der.
Pindāya pāvisi pāsādikena
abhikkantenapatikkantena
ālokitena vilokitena sammihiitena
pasāritenaokkhittacakkhu
iriyapathasampanno —Vin. I. 39; I.
10
Entered(into Rajagaha)for alms
collectionwith a pleasantmoving
backandforth,pleasantlookingahead
andaround,
pleasant
stretching
and
folding,with castdown eyesand
deportment; pa +@+ Vis + i, pst. 3”.
sg.;pasdda +ika,der.;abhi +Kram
+fa,pp.; pati + Kram + ta,pp.; @+
Lok +i + ta,pp.; vi +Lok +i +ta,
pp;sam +Rnj +i +ta,pp.; pa +
Sr +e +i+ ta, caus.pp.; 0 (ava)
Ksip + ta,pp. +cakkhu;sam + Pad
+ta,pp.
Pindiyālopabhoianamkhāyissati -
A.IV.231
Itwillappear
asa morselof food:
pindi +(y)+ dGlopa+ bhojana;Khya
+ 1+ ssati,fut. 3. sg.
Pindiyālopena yāpeti,nantakānica
dhāreti—S. V. 342
keepswearing rags;Ya+pe +ti,
caus.pres.3”.sg.;Dhr +e +ti,caus.
pres.3”. sg.
Pindukkhepakam
bhunjati—
Vin.IV.
195
Eats,tossingup a lumpof food;pinda
+u() +Ksip +aka,der, adv.;
Bhu(a)j
+a +ti,pres.3™.
sg.
Pitaram iīvitā voropeyya—A. 1.27
He wouldcauseto deprivethefather
oflife; vi +o + Ruh + e + eyya,caus.
opt. 3. sg.
Pitaputtaka sesahonti —Vin. I. 78
Only thefatherandthelittlesonare
left out
Pitāmahamdahanti—D. I. 92
They regardhimastheforefather;
Dhā +a + nti,pres.3. pl.
Pita va puttam pattheti, putto va
pitaram pattheti—A. V. 82
The fatherwantsto kill theson
or thesonwantsto kill thefather;
patthetītimāretumicchati,
Cy.V.36
Pitu amke nisinno —D. II. 21
Hasbeensittingon thelapof the
father;
ni +Sad+ta,pp.
Pitucittam upatthapessati—Vin. I.
45
(He) will form his mindlike thechild
towardshisfather:upa+Stha+ape
+ssati,caus.fut. 3. sg.
Pituno dayajjo putto va bhagineyyo
va?—Vin. III. 66
Is it thesonor thenephewwho is
father'sheir? ; dāvāda+ya, der.;
bhagini+ eyya,der.
Pitupitaro —5. II. 179
Father'sfathers

Pipdacārikamvattam-Vin. II. 215 Pinde

pinde
āpatti
—Vin.IV.48 Pitu puttā piyā honti manāpā—D.
Dutiestobedischarged
inalmsround: Foreachandeverylump,thereis an 11.178
Pindāyathitam- 8. I. 172
Vrt + ta, pp.
Stoodforalms;Stha+i+ ta,pp» I
offence Sons(children)
aredearandpleasing
 Pittam
Piyārittam Piyo Pitiya
to the father;pitu, gen. sg.
Pipāsāya pīlito Kalam akasi —Vin,
Piyo ea manāpoca garu ca e +eyyam,opt. I".sg.
II. 118
Pittam va me kuppeyya —A. IV. 320 bhāvanīyoca —A. III. 262
My bileswould beconvulsed:Kup + Dear,lovely,deferentialandto be Pisunaya vacaya vipako mittehi
Ja ©eyya,pass. opt. 3. sg. esteemed;Bhii +e +aniya,caus. bhedanasamvattaniko —A. IV. 247
Pipasitosmi,
Ananda,
pivissāmi
-D.
Theresultof slandering
leadsto
II. 128
Pittam semhambhattam conflictwith friends;Bhid +e +ana,
Ānanda, I amthirsty,I shalldrink;
Pariyonaddhanti —A. IHI. 250; Vin. Piyo piyam vaseti—Vin. III. 140 caus.der.+sam + Vrt +ana,der. +
Pipāsā -te 1.i 3.ta, denom.pps;As +
II. 137,pariyonandhati Thedearmakesthedearstay;Vas+e ika, der.
mi,pres. 1". sg.; Pa +i +ssami,root
Bile andphlegmenvelopthefood: +ti,caus.pres,34.sg.
redup. fut. 1%. SZ.
pari + 0 + Nah + ta =pariyonaddha Pitakamatthamdussam
=parivonandha+nti, pres. 3". pl.? Pilotikaya paticchannam darakam pabhassittha—Vin. IV. 159
Piyadassanobahujanassa—D.Il.
wottharitvā—Vin. III. 79 The clothburnishedwith gold
168 Havingsaton a babecoveredwitha dropped;Mrj + ta,pp.; pa + Bhrams
Pittasamutthanaabadha —A, V. 110
In theeyesof manypeopleheis lovely tag;pati + Chad + ta,pp.; o +Str +i + i + ttha,pst. 3”. sg.
The ailmentsarising from bile;pitta +
Sam+ u(t) + Stha + ana, der. + tvd, absol.
Piyarūpamsātarūpam
- S. II. 108 Piti passaddhattha—A. V. 313
Dearandsweetvisualobject Pisācakantāramvā ācikkheyya - Joy is for tranquillityof mind ; pa +
Pittivisayam upapanno—A. IV. 226
Gone to the realmof forefathersor Vin. IV. 114 Sra(m)bh+ti, der. + attha
Piyarūpe rūpe adhimuccati Wouldtalk aboutthedesertof goblins;
hungryghosts;pitti <pitr; upa + Pad
appiyarūpe vyāpaiiati —S. IV. 119 a+ Khyd+eyya,intens.opt.3. sg. Pītipāmoiiena vihātabbam
T la, pp.
(He)is inclinedtowards
a formwhieh ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu
appears tobedearandrepulsedfrom Pisacepikanhati safijananti—D. I. dhammesu —M. III. 294; A. IV. 321
Pittivisayavedaniyamkammam—A.
theformwhichis notdear;adhi+ 93 The onewho is traininghimself,
III. 415
Muc +ya + ti, pass.pres. 3’. sg. Theyrecognise
goblinstooasthe dayandnight,in wholesomematters
The action,theresultof which should
blacks;Kanha+ iti; sam +Jan + na@
+ shouldabidein joy andgladness;
be experiencedin therealmof
Piyarūpe rūpe sāraiiati, appiyarūpe nti,pres.3”. pl. piti +pamojja:pa + Mud +ya,
forefathersor hungryghosts
rūpebyāpaiiati—M. I. 266 der.; vi + Hr + tabba:hartabba>
He is attached
totheformwhich Pisācepisācāti samiānanti —
D. I. hattabba>hatabba,fut. pp.;
Pipanti mafifie,ghasantimaniifie,
appears tobelovelyandrepulsed
from 93 ahorattam,adv.;anu + Sak +
vacasācevamanasāca —M. I, 32
theformwhichappears tobenotso Theyidentifygoblinsasgoblins;sam i, der.
Drink it, asit were,eatit, as it were,
lovely;sam+Raj +ya +ti,pass.pres. +Jan +nd +nti,pres.3”.pl.
by wordandby thought;Pa +nti, root
3”.sg; vi +@+Pad +ya +ti,pass. Pītimanassakāyopi passambhati,
redup.pres. 3 pl; Gras + a +nti,
oe 3”.
3rdpl.;Ī vacasa+ca
=
pres.3. sg. Pisunam
vacam
pahaya
pisunāya cittampi passambhati—M. III. 86
pres. +eva;
vācāyapativirato—D. I. 4 Bodyaswell asmindis calmeddown
Piyāahosimanāpā—S. I. 97 Havingabandoned slander,
heis of thepersonwhosemindis filled
Pipāsam pativineti —A. III. 250
Ouenchesthethirst:pati -- vi t Ni+a
(She)wasdearandpleasing
tothe restrained
fromslandering;
pa+Ha+ withjoy; piti +mana;kayo + api; pa
mind ya,absol.;pati +vi +Ram+ta,pp. +Sra(m)bh+ya + ti, pass.pres. 3”.
+ti, pres. 3”. sg.
sg.; cittam+ api
Piyārittambandhitvā—A. II. 201 Pisunāyavācāyamittehi
Pipāsam vinodeti —Vin. I. 221
Causes
todriveoutthirst;vi +Nud+
Having
fastened
theoarandtherudder; bhindeyyam—S. V. 355 Pītiyā ca virāgā upekhako ca
© ft, Caus.pres. 3". sg.
Piya t aritta;Ba(nldhHiswā, i I should
causethebreakwith viharati satosampaiāno,sukham ca
absol. friends
byslandering;
Bhi(n)d
+ kāyenapatisamvedeti,yam tam
 Pitisambojjhamgo
Puccha
Puīhiabhāgiyam
ariya acikkhanti upekhako satima
saddha;jivika +attha
sukhavihārīti tatiyalihānam PucchaVasava,mam paīiham,yam Venerable sir,mayI asksomething,if
upasampaiiaviharati —D. I. 37 kiīici manasicchasi—D. II. 275 theBlessedOne agreesto explainthe
Puggala santo samviliamānā
For thereasonofdetachmentfrom Vāsava,askmetheguestionwhatever question;puccheyyam,opt. I. sg. +
lokasmim —M. IHI. 209;A, I. 118
joy, he abides,beingequanimous, youwish in your mindto ask; Vasava, aham;kam+ci (d) +eva;vi +@+Kr
Individuals,
whoareexisting
andtobe
mindfulandconsciousand anothernamefor Sakka, theking of + ana, der.
foundin theworld: 4s +ata,pr.p.;
experienceseasewith thebody, gods;Prch Eya, imper.2'd.sg.;
sam +Vid +ya +mana,Pass.pup.
whateverthenoblesexplainas manasi+Is +ya +si, pres, 2%. 82. Pujjataro ca pāsamsataroca —M. I.
equanimous, mindfulandabidingat 13
Puggalikani bijani samghikāya
ease,attainingthatthirdihāna he Pucchassuyam kifici abhipatthitam More respectableandmore
bhūmiyā ropenti —Vin. I. 250
abides;pati +sam + Vid +e+ ti. —D.II. 240 commendable
Theycausetogrowtheseeds
of
caus.pres. 3™.sz: @+ KhyG +nti, Askwhateveris longedfor; Prch +ya
anindividualon a landofthe
+ssu,imper.2", sg. Pujja ca pasamsaca —D. HI. 72
community;puggala + ika, der.;
der.; sati + mantu,.der . vihara + 7 Respectableandcommendable:
samgha +ika, der.; Ruh +e +nti
der.; upa + sam + Pad +ya, absol.; PucchavusoSariputta, sutva Pūi +ya,fut. pp.; pa + Sams +a,
caus.pres, 3, pl.
vit+Hr+ a+ ti, pres. 374Sg. vedissāmi—S. IV. 58 der.
Ask,brotherSariputta,I will
Puggalike samghikasafii —Vin. IV,
Pitisambojjhamgo SAY 21 understand,
afterlisteningto you; Vid Puāiakitam tinam—Vin. III. 65
42 te tt i $ ssāmi, caus. pres. I", Ng.
Enlightenmentfactorofjoy; sam + The grassbundledup;puāia -- K; +ta,
The one who hastheideaof common
bodhi + amgo pp.
propertyin referenceto theproperty Pucchitonakuppati—A. IV. 196;
ofan individual;saffa + 7 der. Vin.Il. 202
Pitisahagata sannhamanasikara Puāiam kārāpetvāmaddāpetabbam
samudācaranti—A. IV. 416 Beingquestionedhe is notannoyed: —Vin. II. 180
Puggalenasamasamo
bhavissati—A, Prch+ya+ i +ta,pp.»Kup +ya +
Thethoughts,
accompanied
byioy, Causingto heapthemtogether,you
IIT. 166 ti,pass.pres. 3”. sg.
comeup in themind;piti +saha + shouldcausethemtobethreshed;
Kr
Hewill become
equalwiththeperson
gala, pp. sam +u(t) + @ + Car +a + +Gpe+tvd,caus.absol.; Mrd +ape
nti,pres. 3”, pl. Puechitvānābhivitaranti —Vin. I. + tabba,caus.fut. pp.
Puggaloajjhupekkhitabbo
—A. I. 134
127 Theydon'tgetoverafterquestioning:
Puggalaparoparaūūū—A. IV. I16 Punnatthikena saggatthikena(me)
Theindividual
shouldbetreated
with madditum
nasakkonti,Cy. 1066;
Knower of theindividualdifferences; kārāpitā —Vin. II. 147
indifference;
adhi+upa+Iks+i * na+abhi + vi + Tr +a +nti,pres. (These)werecausedto be built by me
para + apara + Jia + ii, der
tabba,fut. pp. 3, pf. for acauringmeritandbirthin heaven;
Puggalam tulayitva āpattiyā puiiiia + attha + ika, der.; Kr + ape
Puggalo
upaparikkhitabbo
—M. II. Puccheyyaaiifamaiifiehipadehi + 1+ ta, caus.pp.
codetum—Vin. I. 114
241 aiiiamaffehipariyayehi—S. II. 54
To accuseanindividualwith an
Thepersonconcerned
shouldbe Wouldask(me) in differentwords Punnaphalamupajivamano—5. I.
offence,aftermakinga survey;tula+
ekamined;
upa'-parit Ātsit andin different modes;affia + (m) + 222
aya + i + tvd,denom.absol.
tabba;fut .pp. ahha Livingontheresultof goodwork;upa
+Jiv +a +mana,pr.p.
198 Puceheyyāhambhantekaficideva
Individuals,whohaveno faithbuthave desam,
sacemeBhagavā
okāsam Punnabhagiyamva
a purposeofmaking a livelihood;a + karotipaāhassa
veyyākaranāya
—D. apunnabhagiyamva attabhavam-
I. 51;M.IHI.15;S.IHI.100;
IV.57 A. HT.411

bas i. C- I MUWGai
625 r— ——
-
 Puāiam
Puttadarassa Puttadārehi Puthu
A form of life meritoriousor Puttho ca na sampayeyya— §. IV, 15
demeritorious;bhāga3 iva, der. For thewell-being,benefitand Dulta t assāda: ā +Svad + a, der;
Being questioned(he) wouldnot
happiness
of wife andchildren ni +kdmaya +mana,pr.p.
also beableto answer:Prch t
Puīham karomīti apuīham karoti - fa, pp.; sam +pa +@+ Ya +eyya;
A. IV. 42 Puttadārehivaddhati —A. V. 137 Putta vatthu manussanam
—§. I. 37
opt. 3™.sg,
Thinking,“I earnmerit”,heearns Hegrowsup with wife andchildren Childrenaretheground(or treasure)
demerit (i.e.in thefamily); Vrdh +a +ti, for humanbeings
Puttho paīhābhinīto—A. II, 77
pres. 3, sg.
Being questionedandcross-examined:
Punfiam pasavati—S. I. 182 Putto pituno dayajjo —Vin. III. 66
Prch +ta,pp.; patiha +abhi+Nr+ Puttapaputtakā—M. II. 78
Producesmerit;pa +Su +a + ti, The son is father’sheir;dayada+ya,
ta, pp. Sonsandgrandsons;putta +paputta+ der.
pres. 37. so

ka
Puttho samānona sampāyi—M. I.
Punfasammata bahuianassa—M. I. Puttopi mataram na patilabhati -
239 Puttabhariyam pariyesati —M. II.
39 A. 1.178
Beingguestionedhewasunableto 160
It hasbeenrecognisedby manyasa The sontoodoesnot meetthe
answer; As +mana, Prp.; sam +pa Seeksfor wife andchildren;putta +
placefor merit;sam + Man + ta,DD.; mother;pati + Labh +a + fi, pres.
tā t Ya +i, pst.3. sg. bhariya;pari +es (fromIs)+ a + ti, 3”. sg.
gen. for instr.
pres.3™.sg.
Punnapattamna dadeyyam—
Vin. Putto va pitaram pattheti, pita va
Punnassa kiriyāya, kusalassa
IV. 161 Puttabhātukāpassissanti—Vin. III. puttam pattheti—Vin. IV. 159
ārādhanāya—M. II. 199
I shouldnotgivea reward
(of five 208 The sonwishes(to kill) thefather
To performmeritoriousdeedsand
percent); punnapattam ndma satato Sons and brothers will see or the father wishes (to kill) the son:
attainthegood
panca kahapana,Cy. IV. 881;Da + antarampassitvaghātetumicchati,
eyvam,rootredup.,opt.1".sg. Puttamatayaputta —M. I. 524 Cy. 880;pa +Arth + e +ti, pres. 37.
Pufifiassadhārā upayanti panditam
Sonsof a wretchedwoman;a phrase Sg.
—A. II. 56; IHI: 53
Punnamāya rattiyā —
D. II. 220 ofinsult, in makingit the nounsare
Torrentsof meritsflow towardsthe
On full moonnight;punna+ma not compounded Puthuiianā kāmesuvitaraga —Vin.
wise; upa +Ya +nti,pres. 3”. pl.
I. 295
Punnā udakassa—S.II. 134;V.460 Puttasambadhasayanam The worldlingswhosedesirefor sex is
Punfabhisanda kusalabhisanda
Filled with water;Pr +ta,pp. ajjhavasantena —A. IHI. 391 gone;jhanalabhino, Cy. 1129;puthu
sukhassāhārā—A. IHI. 51
By a personleadinga burdenedlife +jana; vi +1 +ta,pp. +raga
Thingsyieldingmeritandskill and
Puttakāranā
—D. III. 192 withchildren;adhi +@+ Vas+a+
food for happiness;abhi +Sya(n)d +
For the reasonof sonsor children nta,pr.p. Puthuiianena(te) nānākaranam-
a, der.; sukhassa +Ghara
M: 1.392
Puttassava vareyyamhoti, dhituya Differencebetweenyou andan
Putabaddha upahanayodharenti -
vavareyyamhoti— Vin. I. 140 ordinaryperson
Vin. I. 186
Thereisa marriage
(tochoosethe
They wearshoes(boots?)covering partner)for theson or for the Puthu titthakarānam
entirefoot from thecalf: daughter;Vr +e +ya, caus,fut. pp. aggamakkhāyati—D. I. 116
Yonaka-upāhamā., yāva ianghāto
Se Sex Heissaidtobethehighest
among
sabbapādam Paticchādeti, Cy. 1084; Puttassādam
nikamayamano
—A. manyreligiousleaders;tittha +kara;
puta +Badh +ta,pp.; Dhr +e + nti, II. 227
Puttadārassa
atthayahitaya aggo + @+Khva +ya + ti, pass.
caus.pres, 3. pl.
sukhāya —A. IV. 244 Longingfor thetasteofchildren; pres.3” .sg
 Puthuttam
Puppham
Puthuttam gaccheyya—M. I. 257 A largestone,brokenintotwo.
Would becomeenlarged:puthu +tta,
cannotbe rejoined;dve + dha,der:
der.;gacch +eyya,opt. 3” sg.
Bhid +ta,pp.; a+ pati +sandhi+
ka, der.
Puthu disā namassati—D. III. 180
Worshipsseparatedirections:puthu,
Punakammāya ukkotenti —Vin, IV.
indcl.; namas(namo) +ya +ti,
126
denom.pres. 3”. sg.
Make anout cry for re-opening(ofthe
case);uccālenti,Cy. 865; u(t) 4 Kut+
Puthu paccekasaccāni—A. V. 31
e +nti, caus.pres. 3”. pl.
Separateandpartialtruths:pati +eka
Puna ca param —M. I. 57; S. V. 344
Puthu paccekasaccani-nunnāni
And again;indel.
panunpāni eattāni vantāni muttāni
pahīnāni patinissatthāni —A. V. 31
Punapavāranampi sāditum—
Vin.
Separateandpartialtruthshavebeen
IV. 101
thrownaway,rejectedcompletely,
To entertaineventherequest(for
givenup,vomited,released.abandoned
medicine)again;Svad +e +i +tum,
andremoved;pati + eka +saccani:
inf.
Nud +ta,pp.; pa + nunnani; Tyaj +
ta,pp.; Vam+ ta,pp.; Muc + ta,pp.;
Punappunam chadapeti,
pa + Ha +ta,pp.; pati + ni +Srj +
punappunamlimpāpeti— Vin. IV.47
ta, pp.
Makesit thatch
andplaster
again
andagain;puna +puna; Chad
Puthupāniyam anujanami —Vin. IL.
+ape + ti, caus.pres. 3. sg.;
106
Li(m)p +dpe+ ti, caus.pres.
I allow (you) togiveanindividualhand
.
y
J2rd 82,
(to rub theback);puthu,indel., used
to give the meanings of numerous
Punappunamvimajjati—Vin. IL
(large) , separateand individual:
203
pani +iya, der., Cy. takesthe term
It issmoothed
againandagain;vi+
Pānika and says hatthaparikammam
Mrj +ya +ti, pass.pres. 3”. sg.
Cy. 1200;anu +Jan +na +mi, pres.
1, sg,
Puthu samanappavadanam
—A. I,
286
Among separatetheoriesof the
Puppham gahetvavihare
recluses;samana+pavdda
ekamantam
nikkhipitum—Vin.II.
123
Puthusilā dvedhā bhinnā
Tokeepflowers,
afterreceiving
them,
āppatisandhikā—Vin. IHI, 74
at onecornerof thedwellingplace;
Puppham
Pubbanupubbakanam
Grh re +tva,absol.;ni +Ksip +i + Grain or cerealsis produced;Jan +ya
tum,inf. t ti, pres.3™.sg.
Pupphampupphatthikā haranti—A. Pubbanhasamayamnivāsetvā
III, 370 pattacīvaramādāya—D. I. 109;M. I.
Those who are in need of flowers take 68, 160;III. 145;5. I. 76;A. III. 344;
thefloweraway Vin. 1.18
Havingdressedhimselfin themorning
Pupphamsāuppaiii —Vin. II. 18 andtakenthebowl andtherobe;pubba
Mensesstartedfor her;puppham+ +anha(Skt.ahna) +samaya;ni +
assā;akāralopenasaddhim Vas+e +tvd,caus.absol.;@+ Da +
samvyogalopo,
Cy. 213; uti) -- Pad 4
ya, absol.
ya + i, pst. 3”. sg.
Pubbantamārabbha— D. I. 13
Pupphabhikinnesusayanesusayanti
Concerningthepreviousend(past);
—Vin.II. 123
pubba +anta;@+ Rabh +ya,
(They)sleepon thebedsstrewnwith
absol.
flowers;puppha +abhi+Kir + ta,
pp.; Si +a +nti, pres. 3™.pl.
Pubbantamva patidhāvissati—
S. II.
26
Pubbakāisayo mantānamkattāro
Eitherhewill runbackto thepast;pari
mantānampavattāro— Vin. I. 245
+Dhav+ i +ssati,fut.3%.sg.
Theancientsages,composers
of the
hymns,
keepers
ofthe hymns;
in this
Pubbantamva patidhaveyyatha?-
idiomtheobject ofkattaro and
M. I. 265
pavattaro have been put in gen., ep.
Wouldyourun backto thepast?;pati
dhammassa
aāihātāro;Kr + tu, der;
+ Dhav + eyyatha,opt.2". pl.
pa + Vrt + tu, der.
Pubbapetanamatthayahitaya
sukhāya—A, IV. 244
25 For thewell-being,benefit,and
Renderspreliminaryservice;pubba + happiness
of thosealready
departed;
kara:Kr +a, der. (Skt.kaya) pubba +pa + I + ta,pp.
Pubbakotthake gattaniparisihcitvā Pubbarattapararattam—A. III. 70,
-A. IHI.345 300;Vin. III. 23
Havingwashedthelimbsatthebathing In thepastandfuture;pubba +ratta +
apara + ratta
ti4 hā, absol.
Pubbanupubbakanamkulānam
Pubbannam
vaaparannam
vajayati putta—Vin. I. 20
-Vin. III. 50 Sonsofthe leadingfamilies;pubha +
 Pubbaparakusalo
anupubba+ka,der. manapa +cari, der; piya +véadi,
der.
Pubbāparakusalo —A. IHI. 201
The onewhois skilled in orderly
Pubbūpagatambhikkhum
sequence;pubba +apara +kusala
anupakhaiia —Vin. IV, 43
Intrudinga bhikkhuwho hasarrived
Pubbaham.. ananussutesu
first; anupakhajjatianupavisitvā,old
dhammesuabhiiia-
Cy.43; pubbe+upagatam;
anu+
pa +Khad +ya, absol.
ILL9
I claimin thepastthatI havereached
Pubbe agāriyabhūto samāno—M. I,
thehighestpoint,by special
504;III. 33;S. V. 89,agārikabhūto
Beinga householder, indeed,
inthe
pubbe +aham;an +anu +Sru + ta,
past;agara +iva, der. +bhiito,pp.;
pp.; abhinfia +vosana +parami +
As + mana,pr.p.
pā Ap + ta, pp.; pati +Jan + nā +
mi,pres. 1". sg.
Pubbe ananussutesudhammesu—S.
11.7; IV. 233; V. 422; Vin. I. II
Pubbaham sambodha...obhasam hi
On mattersunheardbefore:an +amu
kho saīiiānāmi, no ea rūpāni
+ Sru + Ia, pp.
passāmi—A. IV. 302
BeforetheenlightenmentI recognised
Pubbeappatisamvidito
—A. III. 59;
theaura,butdid not seetheforms:
Vin. IV. 159
pubbe +aham;sam +Jan +na + mi,
Withoutgivinga prior notice;a +pati
Passa + mi, pres. 1".sg.
+sam +Vid + i +ta,pp.
Pubbeappavarito—Vin. III. 215
Withoutbeingrequested
before;a+
Pa t Vr t e ti t ta, caus.pp.
Pubbeassutapubba
—
M. I. 168
Unheardbefore;a +Sru +ta,pp. +
pubba
Pubbutthayi pacchanipati kimkara
Pubbekatamanussaram
—A. III. 43;
~patissavimanapacaripiyavādī —S.
IV. 245
III. II3
Recollecting
whatwasdoneinthe
Theonewhogetsupearly,takesrest
past;
pubbe+katam
+anu+Smr+
late,askswhatshouldbedone,behaves
nta,pr.p.
Pleasantly
andspeaksdearly;pubbe +
utihāvī,dey:;Pacehā -- nipātī, der.;
Pubbekatahetu—A, 1.173
kim +kara 4 pati +Sru + avi, der.:
Duetotheactiondoneinthepast.
Pubbe
Pubbe
Pubbegihisamarambha— Vin. IV. one, now another; idāni, indcl.
67
Initiatedalreadyby thehouseholders: Pubbenāparamvisesamiānanti -
bhikkhunivāparipācanato M. III. 80
pathamameva yam gihinam (They) realiseanotherdistinctionas
patiyāditambhattam,Cy. 809 comparedwith thepast;pubbena+
aparam
Pubbecahametarahi ca evam
vadami—
A. IV. 370
Pubbenivāsapatisamyuttādhammi
In thepastaswell asat present,I kathā—D. II. 1
declarethus;Vad +a +mi,pres. I.
A talkbasedonDhamma,regardingthe
sg. pastexistence:
pati +sam + Yuj +ta,
Pp.
Pubbecaham ..etarahica dukkham
cevapahhapemidukkhassaea
Pubbenivāsamanussarati—D. I. 19
nirodham—M. I. 140 Rememberspreviousexistence;anu +
In thepastaswell asat presentI Smr +a +ti, pres.3”. sg.
proclaimonly theDukkhaandthe
cessation
of theDukkha:ca + aham;
Pubbepi me bhummi gihibhiitassa
pa +Jia +dpe + mi, caus.pres. 1%.
ācinnā suihata —Vin. I. 304
sg.
My dear,evenin thepastI wasusedto
practise
voidness
whenI wasa layman
Pubbecāham etarahi ca
suāiatāvihārena bahulam viharāmi
Pubbe manussabhūtosamāno— S. I.
-M. HIHI.
104 229
Inthepastaswellasatpresent
I abide Beinga humanbeingin thepast;As +
mostlywiththewayof voidness; mana, pr.p.
suiiata +vihdra; bahulamadv.; vi
+Hr +a +mi,pres. 1%. Sg: Pubbe mamtvamevaficaevahiea
karosi —Vin. IV. 263
Pubbecahamdevateetarahica Previously,you did thisandthatto me:
yathadhammotathāthito—Vin. II. Kr +0 +si, pres.2™.sg, meaning
302 goes to thepast becauseof pubbe
Deity,
inthepastaswellasatpresent
I
have
stoodinaccordance
withthe Pubbe me bhantekumarassasato-
Dhamma; ca +aham;etarahi;yathā, Vin. I. 37
tathā,
relativepro.,indel. Previously,venerablesir,whenI wasa
youngman(prince);
As +nta,prp.
PubbeDevadattassa
annapakati
ahosi,
idaniannapakati—Vin.II. Pubbe me bhantegihībhūtassa
189
ācinnā mettā—Vin. II. 304
Previously,Devadatta'snaturewas
Venerablesir, I wasusedto practise
 Pubbeva
love and friendliness when I was a
layman;@ +Car +ta,pp.
Pubbeva tatha cittam bhavitam hoti
yam tam tathattāyaupaneti—M. I.
301; 5. IV. 294
The mindhadalreadybeentrainedin
sucha way thatit bringshim closerto
thatstate;Bhi +e +i +ta,pp.: tathā
t ia, der.; upa + Ni +a * ti, pres.
3”. Sg.
Pubbevayania —D. I. 138;A. IV. 42
Right beforethe sacrifice
Pubbevasambodha
anabhisambuddhassa
bodhisattassevasato etadahosi—M.
I. 17, 92; Uf.211;S. III. 27; IV. 6: A.
1.258
Right beforetheenlightenment, when
I wasanunenlightened Bodhisatta
(Buddha-to- be),this ideacameto me:
pubbe + eva; an +abhi +sam +
Budh + ta,pp.; sato: As +nta,
dative; anabhisambuddhassa
bodhisattassevasato: gen. absl.;
etam(etad)+a+ Hi (Bhi) +a+5 4
i, pst. 3. sg.
Pubbeva sambodha
anabhisambuddhobodhisattova
samano—A. IIT. 82
Right beforetheenlightenment,being
(myself)anunenlightened
Bodhisatta:
bodhi +Sak + to or bodhi +satto +
eva;As +mana,pr.p.
Pubbevahamayyeannasim —Vin.
IV. 216
Lady,I knew(aboutit) in advance;
pubbe+eva +aham;ā +Jia +s +
Puratopi
im, pst. I™.sg.
Pubbe saddhamagamāsi,anussavam
idāni vadesi —M. II. 170
Previouslyyou wenton faith;now you
speakof tradition;anu +Sru +a,
der.; Vad +e +si, pres, 2". sg,
Purakkhato bhikkhusamghassa
-D.
I. 50
Kept in front by thecommunityof
bhikkhus;pure + kata (Skt.puras+
krta)
Purato gacchantassa—Vin. IY. 205
To theonegoingahead
Purato gacchantoohiyyati
sossamiti —Vin. IV. 150
Theonegoingin frontis leftbehind
thinking,“I will listento(whatthey
say)”;gaccha+nta,prp.; o +Ha+
iva + ti, pass.pres. 3”. sg.
Purato ca pacchatoca
paticchadetva—Vin. I. 47
Having causedto coverfromboth
sides,frontandback;purato,
pacchato,
indel.;pati +Chad+e+
tvd, caus. absol.
Puratopipacchatopiākaddhantā
āhindanti —Vin. IV. 172
Pullingdownin frontandbehind
they
wander;@+kaddha(fromKrys) +la,
pr. p.; @ + Hind + a + nti, pres. 3
pl.
Purato
Purato pi pacchato pi olambenti -
Vin. IV. 170
(They)letthemhangin frontand
behind;o +Lamb +e +nti,pres,3”,
pl.
Purato purato gacchati—Vin. I. 38;
III. 160;A. IV. 435,gantvā
Goesjust in front
Purato va pacchatova —A. III. 344
In frontor behind
Puratthimatonagarassa—D. Il. 161
Fromtheeasternside of thecity
Puratthimamdisam nissāya—S. I.
144
Havingresortedto theeastern
direction;purattha + ima,der.
Puratthimam bhittim nissaya
paeehābhimukhānisīdimsu — D. II.
85
Leaningagainsttheeasternwall they
satdown facingthewest;pacchā-:
abhimukhā;ni +Sad + imsu,pst. 3”.
pl.
PuratthimesujanapadesuSavatthi
namanagaram—A. I. 66
In oneof the easterncountriesthereis
acitynamedSavatthi
Puranakulaputto
khinakolaniio- Puranarajorodha —Vin. IV. 261
Vin. I. 86 Formerconcubine
Formerly
a respectable
familymember orodha: o +Rudh +a, der.
whohasnowlosthissocialstatus;
Ksi
* ta,pp. + kula +(n) +ya, analog.
Purānaganakiyādhītā —Vin. IHI.
135
Purānavohāriko
The daughterof a formercourtesan
Puranagihisahayo—M. III. 124
A formerfriendin lay life; purana +
gihi +saha@ya:
saha+ aya (from1)
Purānaīica vedanampatihamkhāmi
—A. II. 40
I shalldestroytheold feeling(pain);
pati + Han + (k) +ssami(syami),fut.
1. sg.
Puranadutiyika bhikkhunisu
pabbajita—Vin. III. 205
Formerwife becamea renounced
amongthebhikkhunīs;pa : Vraj +i
+ta,pp.
Puranadutiyikaya dassanam
agamasi—Vin. III. 40
Wentto seethe formerwife; purana
+dutiya + i + ka, der.; dassanam,
acc.for dat.meaning;a +Gam + ā
s +i, doublepst. 3™.sg.
Puranadutiyikaya samagacchi-
Vin. I. 96
Met with the former wife
Puranam maggampurananjasam-
S. II. 105
An ancientpath,ancientway;purānam
+anjasam
of the king; raja +
Puranavohariko mahāmatto—Vin.
IIL. 45
Former chief minister ofjustice;
vohāra -t ika, der.
 Purānasanthatam
Purānasanthatamnāma sakim
III. 232
The old spreadmeansthatwhieh is
dressedonceandusedonce;sakim,
indel.; ni +Vas +ta,pp.; pa +a 4 Vr
+ fa, meta., pp.
Purananam kammanamtapasa
vyantibhava —M. I. 93
TE,
Due to theeliminationof previous
kammasby thepracticeofausterity; vi
+ anta + bhava
Pura te ..anayavyasanamāpailissanti
—Vin. II. 199
Beforetheywill fall into troubleand
misery; anaya -- vi'asana;ā +Pad +
ya +i +ssanti,
fat. 3'i.pi.
Pura mam so dhammo āgacchati-
A. II. 103
Before thatconditioncomesto me:
pura, indel.
Purayam kayo idheva vikirati
seyyathapibhusamutthi— S. IV. 40
Before this body scattersright here
likea handfulofchaff;pura,inde. +
ayam; vi + kir + a + ti, pres, 3”. sg.;
seyyathapi,indcl.indicating a simile;
bhusa + mutthi
Purāyam suttantopalujjati— Vin. I.
140-1
Beforethisdiscourseis lost:pura +
ayam;pa + Ruj +ya + ti, pass.pres.
3, so,
Purārunā nikkhamitvā —Vin. IV. 17
Havinggoneout beforedawn;pura +
arunā;ni (s) + Kram + i + tva,absol.
Purimena
Purimam kāyam abbhunnāmetvā
paechimamkāyam anuviloketi—
A,
II. 245
Havingraisedtheupperpartofthe
body,helooksroundthelower
part;
abhi +u (t) +Nam +e +ta, catis,
absol.; anu +vi +Lok +e +ti,pres.
and
37, §Z.
Purimā koti na paīiāyati aviiiāya-
A. V. 113
Beginningof ignorance
is nottobe
seen; pa +Jiid + ya + ti, pass. pres.
3™-Se:
Purimāni bhante divasāni,
purimatarani —D. I. 152,IIL. 2
Somedaysago,venerablesir
Purimasubhavannanibha
—M. I. 88
Former beautyandcomplexion;vanna
+nibha
Purimikāca napaniayati—Vin.I.
154
The first (observanceof rainyretreat)
is nottobeseen;purima+ika,der.
Purime upādāya vuccati—
Vin. HI.
92
lt is saidconcerning
theprevious
ones;upādāva,indcl.; Vae1.ya' ti,
pass.pres, 3". sg.
Purimeca padesamharitva
pacchime
capadesamharitva
~A.
IV. 192
Havingfoldedforelegsandhindlegs,
pure+ima,der.;paccha+ima,det:
sam+Hr +a+ i+ tva,absol.
Purimena attabhāvenauddassesi
- 4roofgable,decrepit,
Purisaguttim
A. IV. 66
Hemadehimselfmanifestin previous
formof life; u(t) +Dr§ +e +s +i,
caus.pst. 3™.sg.
Purisaguttimva kareyyum —Vin,
IHI.47
(They)wouldkeephimunderguard;
Gup +ti, der.; Kr +eyyum,opt.3”.
pl.
Purisatitthenahāyanti—Vin. II. 280
(They)takebathatthefordof men:
Sna@+ya + nti, meta.,pres.3”. pl.
Purisatthakaramdetha—Vin. III.
144
Giveanassistant;purisenakatabbam
hatthakammam, Cy. 561; Da +e +
tha,imper.2". pl.
Purisathāmenapurisaviriyena
purisaparakkamenapattabbam—A.
IV. 190
Thatwhichis to be reachedby manly
strength,
manlyeffortandmanly
power;purisa + thama;pa +Ap +
tabba,fut. pp.
Purisapuggalaparopariyafane
—A.
III. 349
Knowledgeofthe lowerandhigher
quality of a person; para + upari +
iya.der.;āāne,Māgadhīformfor
nom, Sg.
Purisamjinnamgopānasivamkam Purisūsabhovatayantivatva —Vin.
bhoggam
dandaparayanam
pavedhamānam gacehantamāturam
gatayobbanam
—D. II. 22
A person
whoisworn-out, bentlike
leaning
ona
Purisūsabho
stick,totteringwhile moving,sick
andold (whoseyouthhasgone);
Vyadh+a +mana,pr. p.; gaccha
+nta,pr. p.; Gam +ta,pp.
Purisayuttamhatthavattakam—Vin.
I. 192
Handcartdrivenby a male;purisa +
Yuj +ta,pp.
Purisalimgam pātubhūtam hoti -
Vin.IIL.35
Malesignhasmanifested
(therewasa
sexchange)
Purisassaparicariyam upeti —S. IV.
239
(A woman) goes to the service of a
man;pari + Car +i +ya, der.;upa +
I + ti, pres. 3. sg.
Purisassava itthimatim —Vin. III.
138
A woman's idea (is conveyed) to a man
Purisindriyananani vibhajeyya—A.
III. 404
Wouldanalysetheknowledgesof
distinctivefacultiesof persons:
indriyānam
tikkhamudubhāvaiānanahānāni,
Cy. IIT. 405;purisa + indriya +
āāna; vi t Bhaj +evya,opt.
SRS:
Ill. 39
Havingsaid,“thisis,indeed,
a
superman";purisa + usabho;vata,
emph.p. +ayam +iti; Vac+ tva,
absol.
 Purisesu
Pekkhitena
Purisesu mānasamuppajjati,
va —Vin. IT. 32
kāmagupūpasamhitam—D. II. 13
With a reclusegoing in frontor
A mind relatedto sense-desirearises
behind;pure,paccha,opp.,indel.
in referenceto men;manasais used
in thesenseof manas(mind): u (t)
Pūgassasamghabhattamhoti—Vin,
Pad +ya + i, pres, 3". sg;
IT. 109; TV. 30
kāmaguna3 upasamhitam,upa
A guild hasanalmsgivingtothe
sam +Dha +i +ta,pp.
Samgha
Puriso nama pattavisativasso—Vin.
Putimuttabhesajjam khayissati—A,
IV. 334
IV. 232
Man is one who hasreachedtheageof
It will appearasmedicine(made)of
twenty;pa +Ap + ta, pp.
foul cow-urine;pati +mutta+
Puriso purisattam nātivattati —A.
TAAE
?rd (oO
IV. 58
Mandoesnotpassovermanhood:
Pūram nānappakārassaasucino—D.
Purisa + tta,der.; na + ati + Vrt +
IT. 105;M. I. 57
a +ti, pres. 3. sg.
Filled with varioustypesofimpurities
Puriso purisatthikena
Pūramhiraāiīiasuvannassa
kumbhim
pariyesitabbo —Vin. II. 297
—D.II. 176
Petassa
Petassatanafica lenaficadipafica
saranancaparāyanaīica—A. I, 156
Protection,shelter,island,refugeand
supportfor thedeparted
Petanamkalakatanam dakkhinam
anupadassati—A. ITI. 43
(He)will makeofferingto thedead,
thedepartedones;pa +/ + ta,pp.;
anu +pa +Dé + ssati, fut. 3 sg., or
Drs +ya +ti, pass.pres.3”. sg.; ep.
dakkhinamādise,D. II. 88
Petānamīātisālohitānam
upakappatu—A. V. 269
Maythisbe beneficialto thedeparted
relativesandkin; Adti + salohita;upa
+Kip +ya +tu, imper.3”, sg.
Petehi īātisālohitehi vivittam
thanam—A. V. 270
A placeunoccupiedby departed
Pokkharani
Pemadosojayati—A. II. 213
Hatredoriginatesfrom love;Jan +ya
+ti, pres.3. sg.
Pemapemamjayati —A. II. 213
Love originatesfrom love
Pesakārehivāyāpeti—Vin. III. 256
Causesto weaveby weavers;Va +ya
+ape +ti, caus. pres. 3. sg.
Pesalānambhikkhūnam
phāsuvihārāya—A. I. 99
For thecomfortableabidingof the
pleasant
bhikkhus
Pesitapesitaficajaneyya —Vin. II.
177
(He) wouldknowwhatis sentand
whatis not;pa +Is +i +ta,pp.+
apesita;Jan + na +eyya,opt.
3”. Sg.
ra

A manshouldbesoughtby onewho is
A pot filled with gold relatives
andkin; vi +Vie +ta,pp.
in needofa man:purisa +attha +
Pesuiham upasamharanti—Vin. IV.
ika, der.;pari + es (fromIs) i+
Pūrā udakassa—M. III. 96 Petoadhivattho hoti— Vin. ILL.58 12
tabba,fut. pp.
Filled with water:gen.is usedwith Occupiedby a departedoneor a (They)bringslander;pisuna +ya,
the root Pr hungryghost; adhi + Vas+ta,pp. der.; upa +sam + Hr +a +nti,
Pure kalo atikkamati —Vin. IV. 98
pres.3™.pl.
Beforetheright timepasses;pure,
Pura nanavihitassadhafiiassa—M. Pettikampatipadesi—Vin. I. 349
indcl.; ati + Kram +a +ti, pres, 3”.
I11.90 Gavebackwhatbelongedto thefather; Pehīti vutto —A. IV. 190
$g.
Filledwitha widevariety
of grains; petti(pitr) +ika, der; pati +Pad +e Beingasked,'drink'; Pa +e +
Pr +a, der; nana + vi +Dha +i + rs +i, caus.pst. 3. sg. imper.2™.sg.; Vac+ta,pp.
Purebhattam kulāni payirupāsitvā
ta, pp.
—Vin. L 214
Pettikamsapateyyamvibhajimsu- Pokkharanī acchodakāsītodakā
Visiting familiesbeforethe meal;pari
Pūvagharampavisitvā—Vin.HI. Vin. IV. 223 sātodakāsetakā supatitthā
upa--Ās 3:i 3.iwā,meta.absol. (They)dividedthepropertyinherited
59 ramanīyā—5. 1.90
Havingentered
thehouseof ricecake; from the father: sa + pati +eyya, A lotuspondwithclean,cool,
Purebhattamvā pacchabhattamva
pa + Vis +i +tva,absol. der. pleasant
andwhitewaterandwith
~Vin. IIL. 53;TV.100
finefordsandlovelyappearance;
Before meal or after meal
Pekkhitenamihitenaca—
A. III. 69 Pettikethine thapito—D.II. 232 accha +udaka;sīta +udaka,sata
Withagazeand
smile;pa+/ks+i+ Caused
toplace
onpaternal
position; +udaka;su +pa +tittha;Ram +
Puresamanenava pacchasamanena
ta,pp.; Smi + ta, meta,pp: Stha+dpe +i +ta, caus,PP: anīva,fut. pp.
 Pokkharani
Porane Poranam Posavanikam

Pokkharanī caturassā ālibaddhā - ika >ponabhavika>

ponobhavika,
A. IH. 28 der.
A lotuspond,squarein shapeand
boundby embankment; catu + ® Pomkhanupomkham
aviradhitam
-
amsa;Gli + Badh +ta,pp. S. V. 453
The seguence of arrows is notmissed:
Pokkharanim ogahetva—M. I. 234 pomkha +anupomkha;a + vi +
Havingcausedto plungeinto the lotus Radh +i +ta,pp.
pond;o (ava) +Gah +e +tva,caus.
absol. Porānakena acinnakappena—Vin.I.
79
Pokkharanī According to theancientpractice;
a+
sevālapanakapariyonaddhā—A. IHI. Car +ta,pp.
187
A lotuspondenvelopedby moss Porānamassarantā —D. III. 81
andwaterplants:pari +o + Nah+ Forgetting
thepast;purdna+a,der;
ia, pp.
a+ Smr +a + nta,pr. p.
Potakam ianesi —Vin. II. 17 Porānam pokkharaphalakam—S.II.
Produced
a child(chick);Jan +e +s 267
+1 pst. 3%.sy: The old drum—head
Pothujjanikam iddhim Porānam mantapadamgītam
abhinipphadesi—Vin. I. 183 pavuttamsamihitam —D. I. 104,
Causedto generateanordinary 238;M. II. 169;Vin. I. 245
psychicpower;puthu +Jana + ika, Ancient mantras,recited,uttered
and
der.;abhi +ni(s) + Pad+e+s 4 i,
collected;Gai + i +ta,pp.;pa + Vae
caus.pst. 3. sg.
+fa,pp.; sam +(i) + Dha +i+ ta,
Pp:
Ponobhaviko jatisamsaro pahino -
M. 1. 139;A. IHI. 84; ponobbhaviko
Porānānam brāhmanānam
Got rid of recurringcycleof birth; jati
mariyādā —A. III. 227
+sam +Sr + a, der.;pa +Ha +ta,
Boundary
of the ancient
brahmins
pp.
The one who is firm on the ancient and
primitive
lineageofthe nobles;
Stha +
i+ ta, pp.
Porānammantapadamitihatiha
paramparayapitakasampadaya—M.
II. 169
Ancientmantrasthathavecomedown
byoraltransmissionandscriptural
collection;itiha +itiha; pitaka +
sampada
Poriyā vācāya vissatthāya
anelagalāyaatthassavihhapaniya-
5. 1.189
Withwords,polite,clearlyekpressed,
faultlessandenlightening;pura + 7,
der.;vi +Srj + ta,pp.; an +ela +
gala; vi +Jia +dpe +ana +i, caus.
der,
Porisiyamrukkham abhiruhitum -
Vin. VI. 138
Toclimba treeto theheightof a man;
porisiyantipurisappamānam,Cy.
1214;purisat iva, der.; abhi +Ruh
+i +tum,inf.
Posāvanikam
patiganhātu
—Vin. I.
272
Pleaseacceptthe fee for fostering;
Pus +dpe +ana + ika, caus.der;
Pati +Grh +n@+tu,meta.imper-
3”,sg.
TE. es

Porānāniinamūlānibyantīkareyya
Ponobhaviko bhavasamkhāro— A.
—M.1.275
V. 88
(He)wouldpayoff theloanalready
Synergiesproducingre-becoming;
taken; ina +miila;vi +anta+Kr*
bonobhavikoti
eyya,opt.3”. sg.
punabbhavanibbattako;
bhavasamkhārotibhavasamkharana
kammam,Cy. V. 41: puna +bhava +
 Phanakena
Phanakena keseosanhenti—Vin. II.
107
(They) smooththeirhair with a comb
likea snake’shood;0 +sanha+e +
nti,denom.pres.3”.pl.
Phanadasani civarani dharenti -
Vin. Il. 267
(They) causeto wearthe robeswith
caus.pres. 3. pl.
Pharusaya vacaya vipako
amanāpasaddasamvattaniko—A. IV.
248
Leadingto unpleasantsoundis the
resultof harshwords
Pharusāya vācāya samudācareyya-
8V.355
Wouldaddresswith harshwords:sam
huti +a +Car +eyya,opt. 3". sg.
Phalakaciram nivasetva—Vin. III.
34
Havingcausedto clad ina dressof
woodenstrips;ni + Vas+ e + tvé,
caus. absol.
Phalam phalatthikā haranti —A. IHI,
370
Thosewho arein needof fruits take
the fruit away; phala + attha + ika,
der.
Phalavemattatapuggalavemattata
hoti—S. V, 200
Distinctionof theindividualsdepend
Phassasamudayā
on thedistinctionof theresult:
puggala + vematta + ta, der.
Phalasacchikiriyāya pafipanno-
Vin. II. 240
The one who hasbeenproceeding for
theexperienceof fruit;pati +Pad+
ta, pp.
Phassanirodho kammanirodho- A.
II. 415
Cessationof Kammais cessation
of
contact
Phassanirodho bhikkhave
kāmanirodho — A. III. 411
Bhikkhus, cessationof sense-desire
is
cessationof contact;ni + Rudh+a,
der.
Phassanirodho vedanānirodho—A.
Ill. 412
Cessationof feelingis cessation
of
contact
Phassanirodho sannanirodho—A.
III. 413
Cessationof identificationis
cessationof contact
Phassasamudayāvedanānam
samudayo—S. V. 184
Feelingarisesdepending
onthe
arisingof contact
Phassayatananam
contact; sam + u(t) +ava (from I)
Phassāyatanānam
upādāya
—S. I.
113
Concerningthesik basesof contact;
phassat āvatana;upādāya,indel.
Phassenaitthī purisam bandhati-
A. IV. 197
Womanbindsmanby contact;Ba(n)dh
+a+ ti, pres. 3™.
rd
sg.
Phassokammānamnidānasambhavo
—A.IHI.415
Contactis thesourcefor theorigin of
Kamma
Phassohetu phassopaecayo
vedanākkhandhassapaīīiāpanāya -
M. HI. 17
Contactis thecauseandconditionfor
declaringtheaggregateof feeling
Phassohetu phassopaccayo
samkharakkhandhassa pahhapanaya
—M.III. 17
Contactis thecauseandconditionfor
declaringtheaggregate
of mental
formation;samkhāra -- khandha;pa
+Jia +Gpe+ana,caus.der.
Phanitassa
caputam—S. 1.175
Container of molasses
Phātikammatthāya parivattetum-
Vin.II. 174
Toexchange formakingit
advantageous;phatikammatthayati
vuddhikammatthaya, Cy. 1248;pari
+Vrt +e +tum,caus.inf.
Phāsumetasmimsamayehoti,
Phenuddehakam
antamasouccārapassāvakammāya -
A.IV.344
At thattimeit is convenientfor me,at
least,to answerthecallsof nature;
phāsu, indcl; antamaso,indel.
Phāsumhavutthāti patiiānanti -
Vin. I. 159
Theyacknowledge saying,“We lived
comfortably”;phdsum+amha; Vas+
ta,pp.* iti; pati +Jan + nā + nti,
pres,3”. pl.
Phāsuvihārāyasamvattanti—5. V.
76
They leadtoabidingcomfortably;sam
+ Vrt +a +nti,pres.3”. pl.
Phasuviharo adhigato—Vin. I. 177
Receiveda comfortableabiding;adhi
+Gam +ta,pp.
Phussaphussavyantīkaroti—A. I.
221
He experiencescontinuously(the
resultsof thepreviousKammas)and
putsanendto it ; Spré +ya, absol.; vi
+anta+Kr +o +ti, pres.3. sg.
Pheggumpinadhigaccheyya,kuto
saram? —M. I. 233;S. IHI.141
He wouldnotattaineventheaccessory
wood, how canheattaintheheartwood?;
pheggum (Skt.phalgu) +api; na +
adhi +gaccha + eyya,opt. 3™.sg.
Phenuddehakampaccati—M.IHI.
167;A. I. 141;IV. 134,
phenuddehakampaceamāno
He is cookeduntil formcomesup on
thebody:phena + u(t) +Dih +aka,
der.;Pac +ya +ti,pass,pres.3. sg.
 Bakkulo
Balipatiggahaki Balim Bahiddha

Thedeities,receivingofferings Bahiddhā nāsenti—A. IV. 169

Bakkulo majjhe bhikkhusamghassa
nisinnako parinibbāyi —M. IHI. 128
Bakkulaperfectlyextinguishedwhile
sittingin themidstof thebhikkhu
pari +ni + Va +ya+ i,pst.3, sg.
Battuddesakamsammannitum-
Vin. II. 176
To agreeuponanassignerof meals;
bhatta+ u(t) +Drs +aka, der: sam
+ Man +ya +i + tum,inf,
Badaramissenapeyya
paripurissanti —Vin. IV. 76
The drinkswill becompletewith
jujube mixture:Pa + eyva,der.
Badara patiyatta —Vin. IV. 76
Jujube fruitswereprepared;pati + Yat
+fa,pp.
Baddham ānāpesi(ganakam) —Vin.
II. 43
Orderedtheaccountantarrested:Badh
¥ la, pp.; 2+ Jia + ape +s + i, caus.
pst.3. sg.
Bandhantipi nam —A. IHI,352
They keephim in prisontoo:Ba(n)ldh
+a +nti,pres.3”.pl.+api
Balam gahetva—M. II. 60
Havingregainedstrength;Grh +e+
tvd, absol.
; balisa+ mamsa +ika, der.
Balam bhaveti upasamagamim
sambodhagāmim-M. II. 12
Developspowerleading
tocalmness
and enlightenment; Bhi +e +ti,caus.
pres. 3”. sg.; upa +sama+Gam+7,
der.; sam + Budh +a, der.
Balavanissito hoti —A. I. 154
He is in association
withthepowerful;
balavanta + nissita; ni(s) + Sri + ta,
pp.
Balavābalavam
patimantetha
—Vin.
If. 1
Argueagainststrongly;
sutthu
balavampativadatha,Cy.1155;
pati
+manta+ e + tha,denom.imper.
2™.
pl.
Keep(him ) out; bahiddha,indcl.;
Balimuddhareyya—D. I. 135 NaS +e +nti, caus.pres.3”. pl.
Would
collecttax;u(t) +Dhror Hr +
eyya,opt. 3” sg. Bahiddhapariyetthim apajjasi —D.
1.222;A. III. 416
Balisamamsikampikaronti —
M. I. You makea searchoutside;@+Pad +
87
Theyinflict thepunishmentof
balisamamsika too; in whichbodyis Bahiddhapi passavadonikaya
decomposed by hooks,Cy. II. 59; passavamkaronti —Vin. II. 221
(They) urinateevenoutsidethe
urinatingvessel;pa + Sru + a, der.
Baharamakotthake—Vin. II. 162
Outsidethestore-roomof the Bahiddhapi vaccadonikayavaceam
monastery;Veluvanavihdrassa karonti —Vin. II. 221
bahidvarakotthake,
Cy. III. 580
(They) relieve themselves even
outsidethevessel
Bahiāvasathepativasati— S. IV.
329 Bahiddha purisindriyam
Livesin a houseoutside;bahinagare manasikaroti
—A. IV. 57
kiāci sippam ugganhanto vasati, Outside,(she)appliesmindon
Cy:III. 108;pati +Vas +a+ ti, pres. masculinity;purisa + indriya
3M.se.
Bahiddhava kaye kayanupassi
Bahighattetvaabbhantaram viharati —D. II. 292; M. I. 56
mocehi—Vin. III. 36 Abideswith theobservationofthe
Cause todischarge
inside,after bodyoutsidethebody;bahiddha,
striking
outside;
ghattaor Ghrs +e indcl.; opp. ajjhattamor ajjhattika
+tvd,absol.; Muc +e +hi, caus.
imper,
i oy 2 " sg.
Ind «

Balaviriyamparihāyi—M. I. 152 32
Bandhanāgāranissitamvā hoti -
Power
andstrength
deteriorated;
pari Bahithitena
ukkasitabbam
—Vin. II. The mindscatteredoutside;vi + Ksip
Vin. III. 151
+Ha +ya +i, pst,3. sg. 222 +ta,pp.
Or it is close to a prison house
Theonewho hasstoodoutside(the
Balibaddamyufijitvaetadavoca
- Privy)shouldclearthethroat;
u(#)+ Bahiddhāsamyogamākamkhati -
Bandhanāni samchinditvā
Vin. IV. 5 Kas+i +tabba, fut. pp. A.IV.57
$ampadāletvā—A. II, 33
Havingyokedtheox (he)saidthis; Outside, (he) longs for involvement; ā
Havingcutandmadethebondssplit,
Yu(fi)j+ i +tva,absol.;etam(etad)
+ +Kamks +a +ti, pres, 3. sg.
sam + Chi(n)d + i + tva,absol.; sam
a+ Vac2.a,rootredup.
pst.3".89:
* pa +Dr or Dal +e + tv, caus.
Bahiddhasuparikammakata,anto
absol.
Balipatiggāhakā
devatā
—
A. III. 77 avisuddha—A. IT. 200
 Bahidvarakotthaka
Well finishedoutside,dirty inside;sx
+pari +kamma +kata; a +yi +
Sudh +ta, pp
Bahidvarakotthaka nikkhāmetvā -
A. IV. 206;Vin. IL. 237
Havingmadehimgo out throughthe
galeway outside;ni (s) +Kram +e 4
iva, caus. absol.
Bahidvarakotthake atthāsi —M. I.
161;A.IV. 358;Vin. II. 253
Stoodoutsidethedoor way; a +Stha
+S +4 pst. 3% sg.
Bahidvarakotthake thito hoti
Bhagavantamagamayamano—Vin.
11.128
He hasstoodoutsidethedoor way,
waitingfor the BlessedOne; a +Gam
aya + mana,pr.p.
Bahidvare nisidi —Vin. I. 241
Satoutsidethedoor: ni +Sad + i, pst.
2rd
Fins! Sg.
Bahinagarahcagantabbam—Vin.
II. 138
Shouldhaveto £0 outsidethecity;
Gam + tabba,Sut.pp.
Bahi mukhadvara nīharitvā (na)
alihoharitabbam —Vin. II. 132
One should not Swallow (food), after
takingit out from themouth;bahi,
indcl.; ni (s) + Hr +i +tuā,absol.;
adhi +0 +Hr + i + tabba,Sut.pp.
Bahukamhi
bahukamdenti—A. IV.
10
Whenthereis Plentytheygiveplenty;
Da +e +nti,Press/344pf:
Bahuāea
Bahufica Bahubhesajjo
Bahukā kho me paccayamaranassa
—A.IV. 320 Learnsmore,learnsquick; Grh +nā The onewho makesmanypeople
Therearemanyreasonsformydeath +ti,meta.pres.3. sg.;bahumand establishon thenobleway;the
lahum,adv. object of the verbalnoun ending
with thesuffix tu (Skt.trn) is used
Bahukara mātāpitaro puttānam-
Bahuficaphalakhadaniyamahosi- in thegen.,cp. dhammassaaniiataro;
A. I. 70
Vin. I. 212 pati +Stha +ape +(i) +tu,caus.
Parentsareofgreat help tothe
Therewasplentyof fruitsto eat; der.
children; bahu 4 Kr +a, der
phala +Khad +aniya,fut. pp.
Bahukiccā mayam bahukaraniya
- Bahunoianassaārodanā—A. III. 268
Bahudevauppalianti —A. II. 87 A placeof cryingfor manypeople;
S. IV. 379
Arise freguently ārodanātiārodanatthānam,Cy. III.
Weareverybusywith work,wehave
333; ā + Rud +a +ana,der.
so manythingsto do: bahu+Kr () +
Bahudevarattimaiihokāse
va, or Kr + icca,fut. pp.: K,r +aniya,
vītināmetvā—Vin. I. 196 Bahunojanassapiyo ahosi,manapo
fut.pp.
Havingspentmostofthe nightin the —D. II. 19
openair; adhi i okāsa (He ) waspleasant
anddearto many
Bahukicco bahukaraniyo
people
rajakaraniyena —M, III. 145
Bahudevarattim kāyagatāyasatiyā
Verybusywith royalservice
vītināmetvā—Vin. II. 286 Bahunnamācariyapācariyo—D. I.
Havingspentmostof thenightwith 114
Bahujanaparivaro
—A. IHI.14
mindfulness
gonewiththebody;bahu Teacherandgrandteacher
of many;
Theonewhohasmanyfollowers
+(d) +eva; vi + ati +Nam +e +tva, ācariva t pācarivo: pa t ācariyo
caus. absol.
Bahuianapubbamgamo
Bahuputtāhoti bahunattā—Vin. III.
bahujanapamokkho
—D. III. 169 Bahudevarattimdhammiyākathāya 187
Onewhoistheleader
ofmany
people Vītināmetvā—M. II. 124
The oneof manychildrenandmany
andchiefof manypeople:
pamukha
+ Havingspentmostof the nightwitha
grand-children
ya, der. Dhammatalk;dhamma+ ī der:
Bahu balakāyopativasati—A. IV.
Bahujanahitayabahujanasukhaya Bahudevarattim nisajjaya 107
lokanukampaya atthayahitaya vītināmesi—M. III. 238 A largebodyoftroops stays;pati +
sukhāya
devamanussānam
—D.II, Hespentmost of the nightbysitting; Vas+a +ti, pres.3%sg.
45; M.I. 21; 5. I. 105;II. 274;Vin.I. ni +Sad +ya; vi +ati +Nam+e+s
21 hi, caus.pst.3". sg. Bahu bhāsati—A. II. 23
For thebenefitof many,forthe Talkstoo much;Bhās 1.at ti, pres.
happiness
ofmany,
forthecompassion Bahuno
amhākamanatthassa
kārako 3 by
totheworld,forthegood,benefit
and —Vin. I. 343
happiness
of godsandhumans;bahu + A doerof manyharmto us;Kr +aka, Bahubhesajjohoti
der, bahubhesaiiasannicayo
—A. II. 258
Hebecomes
onewhois usingand
Bahuāea
ganhāti,
Iahuāca
ganhāti- Bahuno
janassaariyefaye amassingso muchof medicine;sam +
Vin. I. 270 patitthāpitā
—A. V.66 ni + Ci* a, der.
 Bahum
Bihi Bahavikkhepam
Bahum anuvitakkento nisinno hoti
Vin. IV. 254
—D.I. 119 Bahūnivassasatānibahūni Bhas +i+ ya, fut.pp.; Bhan +a +
(She) is learned,a reciter,courageous
He hasbeensitting(there)thinking vassasahassāni
bahūni nta,pr.p.
andskilled in givinga Dhamma
talk;
vassasatasahassāni
—5. II. 255
Bhan + ika, der.; pa +Stha
denom.
pr.p.; ni +Sad +ta,pp. Manyhundredyears,manythousand Bālo matugamo
—S. II. 216
yearsandmanyhundredthousand Womankind is foolish (does not think
Bahussutoca dhammakathikoca
Bahum apufiiam pasavati—M. I. years much); mātugāma is masculine
parisavacaro ca —A, IV, 315
371
The one who is learned,a speaker
of Bahūhibahutarā lokasmim—M. I. Bālo hoti avyatto āpattibahulo
Producesa lot of demerit:pa + Su +
Dhammaandfindshimself in the 498 anapadano—Vin. II. 4
a +ti, pres. 3”. sg.
assembly;parisa +avacara More and more in the world The onewho is foolish,incompetent,
full of offencesandof no character;
Bahussutotassatassevasutaiātassa Bahūhibhikkhūhi saddhim an t apadāno
II. 80
ID, 1137 gacchatha—Vin. II, 12
Whatis givenin abundancebecomes
Theone,learned
in different
branehes Go withmanybhikkhus;gaccha +tha, Bālhataram ussannamhoti —Vin. II.
moreandmore
of learning imper.2"“Epi. 270
Bahumpuāīiam pasutam—Vin. I. Hasbeenabundant moreexcessively;
Bahussuto hoti āgatāgamo Bārānasiyamviharati Isipatane balhataram,adv.;u(t) + Sad + ta,pp.
223
dhammadharovinayadharo migadāye— S. I. 105
Has producedenormousmerit;pa +
mātikādharo pandito viyatto Abidesat thedeer-parknamed Balha vedanavattanti maranantika
Su + ta,pp.
medhāvī laiiī kukkuceako Isipatana,
in Benares —D.IL.99
sikkhākāmo
—Vin. II. 8 i Severepainsarein progress,ending
Bahulam Samanupassasi—M. II. 160
Learned,a master
of the teaching,
a Bale avyattesaimapeti—D. I. 318 with death;Vrt +a +nti,pres.3. pl.;
Observefrequently:
bahulam,
adv,;
holderofthe doctrine,
a holder
ofthe Makesthestupidandtheincompetents marana + anta + ika, der.
sam + anu + passa + si, pres. 24. sg.
law, a holderofthe matrix,erudite, convince;sam +Jd +ape +ti, caus.
experienced,intelligent,modest, pres. 3”. sg. Bāhāpaggayhakandanti— Vin. I.
Bahu vata mekatam assa— A. IHI.
scrupulous,desirousof training; 237; II. 284
304
medhā+avi,der.;lajja +i, der; Baleca pandite ca kāyassabhedā Claspingbothhands,theycry; bāhā 3
Certainly,muchwould havebeendone
kukkueca+ka, der. ucchijjanti vinassantina honti pa + Grh +ya, meta.;Krand +a+
by me; vata,indcl.; Kr + ta,pp.; As +
parammaranā
—
D. I. 55;M. I. 515 nti,pres. 3”. pl.
va(Skt.syat),opt, 3°. SZ.
Bahussuto hoti sutadharo At thebreakof thebody,bothfools
sutasannicayo- andthewiseareannihilated, Bahaparamparayanesum—Vin. III.
Bahussuta agatagama
D. III. 267; M. I. 356; III. I1; A. II. completely
destroyed,
donotexist 126
dhammadharavinayadhara
22-3 beyonddeath;balecapanditecati (They)carried(him) fromarmto arm;
mātikādharā -D. Ii. 125; A. II. 147;
Learned,a holderof whatis learned balacapanditaca; Cy.Ill. 228; Nī--a t st um,pst. 3". pi.
Vin. I. 119,sg.
andaccumulatorof whatis heard;Srv
Learned, versed in the teaching, holder
+ta+sam+ni +Ci +a,der. u(t)+Chid +ya +nti,pass.pres.3”. Bāhāyamgahetvā—
D. I. 221; Vin.
ofthe doctrine,holderof thelaw, and
pl.; vi +Nas +ya +nti,pass.pres. II. 237;M. III. 131,bāhāya
holderofthe matrix;hahu +Sry + ta,
Bahūkhuddakepanesamghatam 3",pi.; param+marané Havingtaken(him)by hand:obiect
Dp.; āgata +dgama;Dhr + a, der.
apadenta—Vin. I. 137 ofthe root Grh is usedherein the
Causingdestruction toa largenumber Bālodubbhāsiyam
bhanam
—A. V. loc.
Bahussutahoti bhānikā visāradā
of littlecreatures;
sam+Ghan+ta, 171
patthādhammimkatham kātum-
pp.; @+ Pad +e +nta,catis.prep. Thefoolspeaking
badwords;du+ Bāhāvikkhepambhanati —A. IV.

647
EF EI
 Bahiram
193
He speakswith gesticulation;haha 4
vi +khepam:Ksip + a, der. adv.;
Bhan +a +ti, pres. 3”. sg,
Bāhiram amganti karitvā —A. I. 17
Making it anexternalfactor;amgam +
itt; Kr +i + td, absol.
Bāhiralomīunnī (na)dhāretabbā-
Vin. IT. 108
Shouldnot puton woolenclothe
which hasthewool protruded:
unnā '- ī, der; Dir +e +tabba.
fut.pp.
Bahirassa upadaya—A. II. 212
Concerningexternality
Bahirimena manena — Vin. III. 149
In terms of external measure; bāhira
+ ima, der.
Bahirena bahiram dakkhinato
nagarassa—D. II. 160
Totally outside,from thesouthernpart
ofthe city
Bāhum ākotesi —Vin. IV. 34
Struck the am;āt ku t-etsti
caus.pst. 3. sg.
Bāhum olambentā—Vin. IV. 188
Hangingon thearm:0 +Lamb +e +
nta,pr.p.
Bahum paggahetya—Vin. IV. 188
Holdingthearm fast;pa + Grh +@+
td, absol.
Bahulikaca hontisathalika
okkamanepubbamgamapaviveke
nikkhittadhurā—M. i, 14
They live in abundance.
arenot
seriousin theirpractice,take
leadership
in back-sliding
anddonot
takeresponsibilityin seclusion:
bahula +ika, der.: Sithila +ika,
der, ; 0 (ava) +Kram +ana,der.;
pubbam -- gama;ni 3 Ksip +ta,pp.
+dhura
Bahuliko padhānavibbhantoāvatto
bāhullāya—M. I. 171;Vin.1.9
Onewholivesinabundance,hasturned
backfrom strivingandreturned
to
luxury;padhdna + vi + Bram+ta,
PP.; a t Vrt +ta,pp.;bahula+ya,
der.
Bahulliko bahullaya ceteti—Vin.
II. 197
The one who leadsthelife of
abundanceandthinksfor luxury;
bahula +ya + ika, der; Cet +e+
ti,pres.3". sg.
Bahusaccamahattam
pattohoti-
Vin. IIL. 10
(The Samgha)hasreachedgreatness in
learning;bahu +sacca +a, der; pat
Ap * ta,Pp.
Bāhusaecenapi
akatamhoti—A.III.
349
Hehasdonenothingin terms of
learning;Cy.takestheterm
bahusacca tomeanviriya,effort,
Il.
375
Bimbisārassa sakkato garukato
mānitopūiito apacito—
D. I. 114
Honoured,respected,esteemed,
venerated
andrevered
byBimbisāra;
Bimbohanam
Man +e +i +ta, caus.pp; Pūi +e +
i+ ta,pp.; apa +Ci+ ta,pp.;
Bimbisdrassa, gen. for instr.
Bimbohanamkatum — Vin. I. 170
Tomakea pillow; bimba +ohana
(ava +Dha +ana, der); Kr +tum,
inf.
Bilam olaggeyyum—M. II. 178
They would allocate a share (of meat)
by force: o (ava) + Lag +ya +
eyyum,opt. 3”. pl.
Bilamgathālikampi karonti —M. I.
87
Theyinflict thepunishmentof
bilamgathalika; in whichconvict’s
skullis removedand a red hot iron
ball is put on the brain ( convict's
head is made a pot of rice-gruel),
Cy.II. 58
Bilambilāsayāpavisanti—5. III. 85
Hole-dwellersenterthehole;bila +
asaya:a +Sri +a, der; pa +Vi$+a
+nti,pres. 3. pl.
Bilasopativibhajitva —M. I. 58
Havingdissectedpartby part;pati +vi
+Bhaj +i +tva,absol.
Bijakam pi dehi—Vin. III. 18
Give even a seed (a child),
kulavamsabijakam
ekamputtam
dehi,Cy.212
Bīiagāmabhūtagāmaosadhitina-
vanappatayo
—A. IV. 100
Seed-group,
vegetation,
medicinal
herbsandlordsofthe forest;vana+
pati (Skt. vanspati)
649
Buddhapamukham
Bijagamabhitagamasamarambha-
manuyuttā—D. I. 5
Indulgedin destroyingtheseed-group
andtheplant-group;sam +a +
Ra(m)bh+a, der; anu + Yuj +ta,
pp.
Bīiatthāya moceti—Vin. IHI. 113
Causesto discharge(semen)for the
sakeofa child
Bīiabhattamanuppādetu— D. I. 135
Pleasegiveseedandfood:anu +pa +
a+ Da +e +tu, imper.3". sg.
Bije jayanti bije saijayanti —Vin.
IV. 35
Are bornin a seed;sam +Jan +ya +
nti, pres.3”. pl.
Buddhagatayasatiya nipajjitva -
Vin. II. 155
Havinglaindownwithmindfulness
directedtowardstheBuddha;ni + Pad
+ ya +i + Ivā, absol.
Buddhacakkhuna lokam volokesi-
Vin. I. 6
Surveyedtheworldwith Buddha-eye;
vitot+Lok+e+s +i, pst. 3". sg.
Buddhapamukham
bhikkhusamghampanitena
khādanīyenabhoianīyenasahatthā
santappesisampavāresi—M. II. 93
He causedto serveandsatisfywith
his own handthecommunityof
bhikkhusheadedby theBuddhawith
deliciousfoodhardandsoft;pa +
Ni +ta,pp.; Khad +aniya,fut. pp.:
Bhuj +a +aniya,fut. pp.; sa +
hattha +G, instr.; sam +Trp +ya
 Buddhapamukham
ret+s +i,caus.pst,3. sg. sam +
pa+Vr+e+
Buddhapamukham
395
Would cause to feed the community
of bhikkhusheadedby theBuddha;
Bhuj +e +eyya,caus. opt. 3”. sg.
> > I
Buddhavacanevijjamane—Vin. II.
17
WhentheBuddha’swordsareto be
found; Vid +ya +mana.DI:D.
Buddhānam sāsanamanuyuhiia-
Vin. I. 194
Practiseinstructionof theBuddhas;
Sas + ana, der.; anu + Yu(ni)j + a,
imper. 2"4.sg.
Buddhanussatim gacchantopi
bhaveyyasi,thitopi bhaveyyasi,
nisinnopi bhaveyyasi, sayānopi
bhāveyyāsi,kammantam
adhitthahantopi bhāveyyāsi,
puttasambādhasay anam
aiihāvasantopibhāveyyāsi—A. V.
333
You shouldcultivaterecollection
of'theBuddhawhileyou aregoing,
whileyou havebeenstandingand
sitting;while you aresleeping,
workingandliving your life with
childrenat home:Bha +e t eyyāsi,
opt.2". sg.; Stha + i+ ta, pp.;ni +
Sad + ta,pp.; Si+ a+ ana, der.;
adhi+Stha+nta,Prp.; adhi+@+
Vas +a +nta,DI:p.
Buddhā puāhassakovidā —A. Il. 44
EnlightenedOnesareskilled in merit
Buddhoti
Buddhe aveccappasadamattani
Samanupassato—5. V. 381
For theone who is seeingwithin
himselfthe faithin theBuddhaon
understanding;
sam +anu +passat
nia, DF.D.
Buddhe aveccappasādena
samannāgato— M. 1.37; S. IV. 304
Endowedwith faithin theBuddhaon
understanding;
ava -- 4i) +ya,absol,
+pasada;sam +anu +@ +Gam+
ta,pp.
Buddhe ekantagatohoti
abhippasanno—
S. V. 378
Theonewhoisabsolutely
faithful
to
theBuddhaandextremely
pleased;
ekanta+ Gam +ta,pp.; abhi +pat
Sad +ta,pp.
Buddhe parinibbute
chinnapapaiicechinnavatume
pariyadinnavatte
sabbadukkhavītivatte—D.11.8
WhentheBuddha,whohascutdown
all obsessions,closeddownall roads,
putanendto thecycleof birth,
transcended all afflictions,has
completelyextinguished; pari +ni +
Vr +ta,pp.; Chid+ta,pp.;vatuma
=Skt.vartman;pari +@+Da+ta,
Pp.; vi +ati + Vrt +ta,pp.
Buddhotādīpavuccati—M. II. 44
Buddhais calledtādī,tad?is a
technical term usedto designatethe
Buddhasandthearahants;
ta(d)+I
or tadi (tadrs) + I, der; pa + Vae+
ya +ti,pass.pres.3”.sg.
Buddhoti
Vin. II. 155
Householder, do you say,'Buddha'?;
buddho + iti; Vad +e +si, pres.2”.
sg
Buddhoti mam dhārehi —A. II. 39
UnderstandmeastheBuddha;buddho
+iti; Dhr +e +hi, caus.imper.2Ind
Sg
Buddho so Bhagava bodhaya
dhammamdeseti,danto so Bhagava
damathayadhammamdeseti,santo
so Bhagavasamathayadhammam
deseti,tinno so Bhagava taranaya
dhammamdeseti,parinibbuto so
Bhagavaparinibbanaya dhammam
deseti;M. 1.235
ThatenlightenedBlessedOne teaches
theDhammafor enlightenment, that
disciplinedBlessedOne teachesthe
Dhammafor discipline,thatpeaceful
BlessedOne teachestheDhammafor
peace,thatcrossedover BlessedOne
thatperfectly
blownoutBlessed
One
teachestheDhammafor perfect
blowingout;Budh +a, der.; Drs +e
* ti, caus. pres. 3%.s¢.; Dam + ta,
pp.;dama+tha; Sam+ta,pp.;
sama +tha; Tr + ta,pp.; pari + ni
+Va + ta,pp.; pari +ni +Va +
ana, der.
Buddhohavekappasatehi
dullabho
—D.II. 168
TheBuddhais indeedveryhardto
have,indel.; du +labha
Bumūsuviharāmi uttarakā nāma
Bumūnam
nigamo—D.IHI.6
Bodhāya
Abides in Bumu at the market town of
Bumu, namedUttarakā
Bojjhamgam bhāveti
vivekanissitam virāganissitam
nirodhanissitam
vossagsaparināmim—M. I. I1; II.
12; III. 88
Cultivatestheconstituentof
enlightenment which is supportedby
seclusion,detachment, cessationand
culminatingin relinquishment; Bha +
e + ti, caus.pres.3”. sg.; vi + Vie +
a, der.;ni +Sri +ta,pp.; vi +Raj +
a, der.; ni +Rudh +a, der.; vi +
ava +Srj +ta,pp. +pari +Nam +
i, der.
Bojjhamga mayasammadakkhata
bhavita bahulikaté abhiffiaya
sambodhayanibbanayasamvattanti
—5. V.8O
The constituentsof enlightenment,
perfectlyekplained,cultivatedand
freguentlypractisedby me,lead
to thegainingof directknowledge,
enlightenment andNibbāna;bodhi
+amga;samma+@ +Khya + ta,
pp.; Bhii +e + i +ta, caus.pp:;
bahula + kata; abhi +Jia; sam
+Budh +a, der; ni + Va +ana,
der.;sam + Vrt +a + nti,pres.
3”, pl.
Bodhāyasamvattantīti..tasmā
boiihamgāti vuccanti—5. V. 72
In thesensethattheyleadto the
enlightenment, theyarecalled
Boiihamgas:Budh -- a, der.;sam +
Vrt + a + nti, pres.3. pl. + iti; bodhi
+amgd+ iti; Vae+ya +nti,pass.
pres,3”.pl.
 Bodhijam
Bodhijam āānam uppaiiati —D. IHI.
134
The knowledge,bornat the
enlightenment, arises;u(t) +Pad 4 va
+fi, pres. 3". sg.
Bodhipakkhiyanam dhammanam
bhavananuyogamanuyutta
—Vin. III.
23
Thosewho haveappliedthemselvesin
thecultivationof enlightenment
factors;bhāvanā-- anuyogam-- anu
+ Yuj+ta,pp.
Bodhirukkhamile viharati
pathamabhisambuddho—Vin. I. I;
Abidesatthefootofthe Bodhitree,
recentlyaftertheenlightenment:
pathama+abhi +sam +Budh +ta,
Pp.
PPp.;pa +Dus +ta,pp.+ mana+
samkappa
Byāpannacitto bahulam viharāmi-
.
A.V. 93
I abidemostlywithanangrymind;
bahulam,ady,
Byapadapariyutthitena cetasa—S,
V.122
With themind arousedby anger;
pari
ha(0 --Stihā-- it ta,pp.
Byāmamatte kalebare saāāimhi
samanake— A. II. 48
In thefathom-longbodywith
consciousnessandmind:sasafne
sacittake,Cy. III. 88
Brahmacakkam
pavatteti
—A, II. 9
Brahmacariyam Brahmayaniyo
Thehighestway of life will be Longingfor highestwayof life has
successful,prosperous,wide- spread, subsided;brahmacariya+esand;
popular,ekpandedandwell proclaimed pati +pa +Srabh +ta,pp.
devāca manussāca atthi,sabbehi Brahmacari ca abrahmacari ca
sutthupakāsitam,Cv. 556; Sphāy t ubhosamasamagatika —A. IHI.
ta,pb.; vitihāra +ika, der; bahu 3 348
jana +ya; der.; puthu, indel. Celibateandnon-celibatebothareon
thesametrack:sana +sama+gati +
Brahmacariyamcari —M. II. 76
ka, der.
He ledthehighestwayof life; Car +a
+d;PSt.SSS Brahmacārī patiiānāti —A. IV. 54
He claimsthathe is a celibate;pati +
Brahmacariyamcinnena (kim)? - Jan +na + ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Vin. IV. 278
Whatis theuseof leadingthehighest Brahmadandamanapetu— Vin. II.
way
of life; Car +ta,pp. 290
Let theSamghaorderthehighest
Brahmacariyamvussati—A. IV. 7 punishment(socialboycott);a +Jia
Thehighestway of life is led;vi + Vas +Gpe + tu, imper. 3ri,sg.
2

Causesto setthehighestwheelin 2rd

+ya + ti, pass. pres. 3”. sg.
Bodhisattassaudakakiceam
motion;pa + Vrt +e +ti, caus.pres. Brahmabhitena attana viharati -
karonti, mātucca—
D. II. 15
Baeyt Brahmacariyamsantanessati—S. M. I. 342; I. 159
BathedtheBodhisattaandthemother;
IV. 104;A. ITI. 90, santānetum Abideswith thehighestmind
udaka+kicca; matu(gen.sg.) + ca
Brahmacariyapaficamani Willmakethehighest
wayoflife
sikkhāpadāni samādinnāni—
A. IV. continue;
sam+Tan+e +ssati,caus. Brahmampuīiam pasavati—A. V.
Byafijanambyafijanamattaya
210 fut. 34. sg. 76;Vin. II. 198
āhāreti —M. II. 138
Precepts,includingbrahmacariya Producesthehighestmerit;pa t Su t
He eatscurry simply ascurry,(without
(totalabstention
of sexuality)
asthe Brahmacariyassakevali—A. III. 214 a +ti, pres.3”. sg.
makinganyvaluejudgement);Ghara +
fifth, havebeenobserved;sam+a+ Perfectedhimselfin thehighestway
e +ti, denom.
pres,3”.sg.
Da +ta,pp. of life Brahmayaniyo maggopaturahosi -
D. I. 220
Byattena bhikkhuna Samgho
Brahmacariyamhā
cavittha- S.II. Brahmacariyassa Manifestedtheway to theworld of
īāpetabbo—M. II. 250
222 mātugāmopavieārokantako —A. V. Brahma;devayānivamaggoti vā
The communityshouldbe informedby
Droppedfromthehighest wayof life; 134 brahmayāniya maggoti vā
4competent
bhikkhu;Jiid +ape+
Cyu +a+ i +ttha,pst.3. sg. A woman'smovingaroundisathorn dhammasetiitiva ekacittakkhanika
tabba, caus. Sut pp.
(obstacle)
tothehighestwayof life: appanātivā sannitthānakacetanāti
Brahmacariyam iddham ceva mātugāmassasamīpacarita,
Cy, V. va mahaggatacittantiva abhiniia-
Byāpannaeittā
bhavissatiphitaficavittharikam 352;
mātugāma -- upavicāra fdnanti va sabbametamiddhividha-
padutthamanasamkappa
—M.l.18
Thosewhohaveangrymindand bahujafiiam
puthubhatam,
yava jidnasse'vandmam,Cy. 392;
devamanussehi
suppakāsitam
—D.II. brahmaydna+ iva, der.; pātu + ® +
Polutedthought;wi+@+Pad + ta,
106 ahosi
 Brahmalokasahavyataya
Brahmalokasahavyatayadhammam
deseti—A. IV. 104
ExplainstheDhammafor
accompanying Brahmasin theBrahma-
world; sahavya+ta, der: Dré +e 4
ti, caus.pres. 3'i, sg.
Brahmaloke antarahito
Bhagavatopurato pāturahosi —Vin.
1.5
Disappeared
intheBrahmaworld.
appeared
beforetheBlessedOne:
antara +Dha + i + ta, pp.; patu +
BR)+ ahosi
Brahmassaro —M. II. 137
The one who has an excellent yoice;
brahma + Sara
Brahmanam sahavyatāyamaggam-
D. I. 248; M. II. 194
The way to bewith Brahma;sa+ Hai +
ya + ta, der.(sahabhava)
Brahmuna sakaccheti, sallapati,
manteti—D. II. 237
Discusses,conversesandtalks with
Brahma;sdkaccha(saha +kathya) +
e + ti, denom.,pres. 34. Sg. ; Sam +
Lap +a + ti, pres. 374.Sg.; manta+
é +ti, denom.,pres. 3” SZ.
Brahmuno etam pubbanimittam
patubhavaya,yadidam āloko
samiāyati obhāso pātubhavati —D.
1.220, II. 209
For themanifestationof Brahma,
thisis theforegoingsign thata
lightis bornandaneffulgence
appears; yadidam,indcl.: sam +Jan
" Ya +ti, pres,34.sg» o +Bhas +
a, der,
Brāhmanā
Brahmuno ca ajjhesanamviditva-
I 263
D. II. 38
Having understoodthereguestof
Brahma;adhi +es (fromIs) +ana,
der.; Vid + i +tva,absol.
Brahmanagahapatika— D. II. 180;A,
IHI. 341
The brahminhouse-holders
or
brahminsandhouseholders
Brāhmanagahapatikenissāya
rāiānam vilumpati —M. II. 185
Resortingto thebrahminand
householders,he exploits(plunders)
theking; ni +Sri +ya, absol.;vi t
Lu(m)p +a + ti, pres.3”. sg.
Brahmanamahasala negamaceva
iānapadā ea —
D. I. 136
Therichbrahmins,
livinginmarket
townsandprovinces;nigama+a,
der.; ca + eva, indcl.;janapada+
a, der.
Brāhmanānam
vuddhānam
mahallakānam ācariyapācariyānam
bhāsamānānam - D. I. 104,247
Whentheelderlyandoldbrahmin
teachersandtheirteachers
were
talkingtogether;
Vrdh+ta,pp.;
ācariya +pacariya; Bhas +a+
mana,pr.p.; gen. absl.
Brāhmanā
nāma
itthiluddhā
- D. II.
245
Brahmins
aregenerallygreedy
for
women;ndma,indcl.;Lubh+ta,pp-
Brahmanapacchabhimaka
kamandalukasevalamalaka
aggiparicarakaudakorohaka
—
A. V.
Brahmana
Thebrahminsof thewestwhocarry
water-pots,
weargarlandsof moss,go
roundthefire andimmersein the
water;pari +Car +aka, der.;udaka
+ 0 +Ruh +aka, der.
Brahmanapannupavicara— A. III.
363
The brahminsarethoseseekingfor
knowledge;pafifia +upa + vi + Car
+a, der.
Brahmana brahmalokapariyosana-
A. IHI.363
Thebrahminsarethosewhoconsider
Brahma-world astheend;pari +o +
Sd + ana, der.
Brāhmanā brahmalokādhimuttā-
M. II. 194
Brahminsareinclinedto theworld of
Brahma;brahmaloka+adhi + Mue +
fa, pp.
Brāhmanābhogādhippāyā—A. III.
363
The brahmins are intent on wealth
Brāhmanāmantādhitthānā—A. III.
363
Thebrahminsaredependent
on
mantras
(magicalspells);manta+
adhi +Stha + ana, der.
Brāhmanāyaūiīābhinivesā— A. IHI.
363
Brahminsarethosewho areadheredto
sacrifice;yafifia +abhi +ni + Vis +
a, der.
Brāhmanāva
brahmunoputtā,orasā By beinga well-to-dobrahmin;
Brahmanena
mukhatoiātā brahmaiā
brahmanimmitābrahmadāyādā-
M. II. 148
Brahminsalonearethedearsonsof
Brahma,bornof mouth,bornof
Brahma,createdby Brahma,inheritors
of Brahma;brahmand+ eva;Jan +
ta,pp.; brahma+ja; ni + Ma +i+
ta,pp.; brahma+ dayadda
Brahmanavasetthovanno, hino
anno vanno—M. II. 148
Superiorclassis only thebrahmins,
otherclassesare inferior; brahmanda
Tr evd;
Brahmana sampurekkharonti —M.
11.169
Brahminshonour(him);sam +pure
(puras)+ karonti,pres. 3”. pl.
Brāhmanim yevaudakūpassattham
—A. III. 226
Only thebrahminwomangivenin
marriageby pouringwateron the
palms;udaka+upa +Srj +ta,pp.;
hattheudakampātetvādenti Cy. III.
309
Brahmanejinne vuddhe mahallake
addhagatevayoanuppatte—Vin. IIL.
2
The brahmins,who arewornout,
elderly,old, havegonethedistance
oflife andreachedgraduallyof age;
Jir +ta,pp.; Vrdh +ta,pp.; addha +
Gam+ta,pp.;anu+pa +Ap +ta,
Pp.
Brahmanena (sata) mahasalena-
M. I. 82
Brāhmanesu
Brahmano Bhagavata
mahāsāra — mahāsāla; As + nta,
pr.p.
Brahmanesu brahmanasammata-
D. II. 185;5. II. 15;V. 194
Bhagavataanagamivyakato—A. V.
Agreeduponamongthebrahminsasa
171
brahmin;sam + Man +ta,pp.
Hasbeendeclaredby theBlessedOne
as non-returner; an + Gd+Gam +f,
Brahmano jatiya —D. I. 3
der.;vi +G@
+Kr +ta,pp.
A brahminby birth
Bhagavatadhammamdesitam
āiānāmi—S. III. 110
I knowtheteachingekplainedby
theBlessedOne; Drs + e + i +ta,
caus.pp.; a + Jan + na +mi, pres.
1",sg.
Bhagavatāpaīihābhiputthena
byākatam—M.1.210
Beingguestionedby theBlessedOne,
it hasbeenexplainedby me;paha +
abhi+Prch +ta,pp.; vit @+Kr +
la,pp.
Bhagavatāpatikkhittanti
kukkuccayanta —Vin. IV. 56
Worrying
thatit is forbidden
bythe
BlessedOne:pati +Ksip +ta,pp.;
kukkucca + aya +nta, denom. pr. p.
Bhagavatapathamataramkalam
kareyyam
—A. IV. 216
I shoulddie beforetheBlessedOne:
Kr+ evvam, opt. I". sg.
Bhagavatābhiyyobhiāataro —S. V.
159
Theonewho hasmorespecial
knowledges
thantheBlessedOne;
bhiyyo,indcl. +abhififia +tara; the
suffixtara is used with abl. or instr.
for comparison
656
Bhagavati
Bhagayatabhiyyobhififataro,
yadidamsambodhiyam— D. II. 82,
III. 99
Theonewhohasmorespecial
knowledgesthantheBlessedOne in
referenceto theenlightenment:
yadidam,indcl.
Bhagavatāsaddhimsammodi—5. I.
68, 160
Exchangedfriendlygreetingwith the
BlessedOne; saddhim,indcl. used
withinstr.;sam + Mud +a + i, pst.
ard
TARI Sg.
o
Bhagavatasaddhimsammodi,
sammodaniyamkathamsaraniyam
vitisaretvaekamantamnisidi —D. I.
118;M. I. 16;S. I. 68;A. I. 55
Exchanged greetingswith theBlessed
Oneandsatdown at onesidefinishing
thecourteousandfriendlytalks,i.e.
preliminarytalk;sam +Mud +a +i,
pst. 3”. sg; sam +Mud +aniya, fut.
pp.; Smr +e +aniya, caus. fut. pp. or
sam +Ra(fi)j +aniya,fut. pp.; vi +
ati +Sr +e + twā,caus.absol.
Bhagavatāsamasamāsambodhiyam
—D.IHI.114
EaualwiththeBlessed
Onein
referenceto theenlightenment
Bhagavatiabhippasannā—D.I. 211
Extremelyfaithfulto theBlessedOne;
abhi +pa +Sad +ta,pp.
Bhagavatidhammanvayo—M. II.
 Bhagavati
124
Inferentialknowledgebasedon the
Dhammain referenceto the Blessed
One; dhamma+anu +aya (from 1)
Bhagavati no āvuso brahmacariyam
vussati? —M. I. 147
Friend,is thehighestwayof life led
underthe BlessedOne?: no, interr.p.
Bhagavati pasādo— S. V. 390
Faith in theBlessedOne
Bhagavati pemaāca gāravaīcea
hirifica ottappaiica sampassamano-
S. V. 89
Seeinglove, respects,moralshame
andmoral feartowardsthe Blessed
One; sam +passa + mana,prp.
Bhagavati brahmacariyam vussati -
A. IV. 384
The highestwayof life is led underthe
BlessedOne; vi + Vas+ya + ti, pass.
pres. 3”. sg.
Bhagavato attamanoabhiraddho -
M. I. 378
(I am)pleasedandsatisfiedwith the
BlessedOne; abhi +Radh + ta,pp.
Bhagavato adhivāsanamviditvā —S.
II. 92
Having understoodtheacceptance
of theBlessedOne; adhi +Vas+ e
+ana,caus.der.; Vid +i + tvé,
absol.
Bhagavatoavidūre —
S. I. 104; III.
116
In theVicinityof theBlessedOne: a+
vi +diira
Bhagavato
Bhagavato upatthakassa,Bhagavato
santikavacarassa—M. I. 212
Forthepersonal
attendant
tothe
BlessedOne, for theonemovingabout
nearthe BlessedOne; upa +Stha+
ka; santika +ava + cara
Bhagavato upandmesi—D. II. 133
Offered to the BlessedOne; upa+
Nam +e +s +i, caus.pst.3”.sg
Bhagavato etadahosi,yannūnāham
dhammam deseyyanti—D. II. 35
This ideacameto theBlessedOne:
may I preachtheDhamma;etam(etad)
+a+ Hi (Bhi) +a+s + i, pst.#4
Sg.;yannina, indcl., usedwithopt,+
aham;Drs +e +eyyam,
caus.opt.
I. sg.+ iti
Bhagavato onojesi—Vin. I. 39
Causedtoofferit totheBlessed
One;
o +Nud(?) +e+s +i, caus.pst.3”
Sg.
Bhagavatokālamārocāpesi
—M. II.
145
Hecausedto informtheBlessed
One
aboutthetime:@+Ruc +dpe+sFi,
caus.pst.3”. sg.
Bhagavato gelaiinena— D. II. 99
Due to thesicknessofthe Blessed
One; gildna +ya, der.
Bhagavatocivarakammam
karonti
—A. V. 328
Theymake
a robefortheBlessed
One
Bhagavato
(They)repliedtheBlessedOne;pati +
at+Sru+s+ um,pst. 3. pl.
Bhagavatopanhaveyyakaranam
sutvā—D. II. 207,276
Havinglistenedto theBlessedOne's
analysisof thequestion;Sru + tva,
absol.
Bhagavatopatissutvā—M. III. 278;
S.V. 321
HavingrepliedtheBlessedOne
Bhagavatopathamataramkalam
kareyya—S. IV. 301
Woulddie earlierthantheBlessed
One;pathama+ tara, thesuffix tara
is normallyused with abl. or instr.to
makea comparison;in this sentense
thesubjectgiven is aham,it doesnot
tallywiththe verbkareyya;Kr +
eyya,opt. 3. sg.
Bhagavatopādāsi —M. II. 117
Presentedto the BlessedOne;pa +a
E Dā'- st i, pst 314,
sg;
Bhagavato
pādesu
sirasānipatitvā
- used-S. I. 226; namas+ya + mana,
M. III. 246; S. 1.24; A. IV. 377
Havingboweddownwiththeheadat
thefeetof the BlessedOne; ni +Pat
+1 + tvā, absol.
Bhagavatopavacaneappasanna—D.
II. 195
Unfaithful
totheteaching
ofthe
Blessed
One;a +pa +Sad +ta,pp.
Bhagavato
pitthito
thitohoti
Bhagavantam viiayamāno—M. 1.83
StoodbehindtheBlessedOne,
While
fanning;
Stha+i +ta,pp.;
Bhagavato
Vij +aya +mana,pr.p.
Bhagavatopitucehāputto— S. II.
282
Son ofthe BlessedOne's father's
sister;pitucchā -- putta
Bhagavatoputto oraso mukhato
jato dhammajodhammanimmito
dhammadayadono amisadayado-
M. III. 29; S. II. 221, no
āmisadāyādo is missing
BlessedOne's son,who is bornof
chest,bornof mouth,bornof the
Dhamma, createdby theDhamma,an
heirto theDhamma,notanheirto the
materialthings;wra(s)+a, der; Jan
+ ta,pp.; dhamma+ja; dhamma+ ni
+ Ma or Mi + ta,pp.; dayada+ a,
der.
Bhagavatopurato atthasi, afijaliko
Bhagavantamnamassamano —Vin. I.
3
StoodbeforetheBlessedOne with
foldedpalms,payingrespect;a +Stha
+5 +i, pst. 3%.sg.; panijalikoalso is
Pass.pr.p.
Bhagavtaopurato thito,
Bhagavantamvijamano—D. II. 138
Stoodin frontof theBlessedOne,
while fanning; Stha +i +ta,pp. Vij +
a + mana, pr. p.
Bhagavatobhāsitamabhinanditvā
anumoditvā— D. II. 26; 5. III. 36
Havingreioicedandappreciated the
speechofthe BlessedOne; Bhas +i +
ta,pp. abhi +Nand + i +twā,absol.,
anu +Mud +a +i +tva,absol.
 Bhagavato
Bhagavatobhāsitam abhinandum-
M. 1.68;S. II. 2; V. 423;Vin. I. 14
Reioicedover the speechof the
BlessedOne;abhi+Nand+wm,pst.
3" pi
Bhagayato bhasitam sussiisanti,
sotam odahanti,ania cittam
upatthapenti—D. IHI. 53
(They) wish to listento thespeechof
theBlessedOne, give ear(to it) and
keepthemind focussedon gnosis;
sussāsanti,desid.from sunāti, pres.
3”, pl.; ava + Dha (daha) + nti. pres.
a M. II. 252
pres. 3”. pl.
Bhagavato mam santike etam
paīiham puccha—Vin. IHI. 105
Ask methisguestioninthepresence
of theBlessedOne; Prch +ya,imper.
2nd
Sg., this root needstwo oblects
Bhagavato mātucchā āpādikā
posikā khīrassa dāyikā —Vin. II.
254-5
Sisterof the BlessedOne’s mother
who is theprotector,thenurse,the
giver of milk; @ + Pad + ika, der:;
Pus +e +i+ ka, caus.der: Da +
aka (ikd), der.
Bhagavatomatucchaputto—§, II.
280
Son of theBlessedOne’s mother’s
sister
Bhagavatorakkhavaranaguttiya -
Vin. II. 194
rakkhā,āvarana and gutti are used
Synonymously
Bhapavato Bhagavato Bhagavantam
Bhagavatosaddhāyagacehāmi—A,
opp.param + mukha;Kr +tva, Bhagavantamanusamyāyitvā—M. I.
IV.8I
absol. 209
I goby faithin theBlessed
One
HavingfollowedtheBlessedOne: anu
Bhagavatosammukhasutam +sam+ Ya +(y) +i +tva,absol.
Bhagavato santike—S. I, 2; V, 108 sammukhapatiggahitam—A. V. 55
Near the BlessedOne Heardandacceptedin frontof the
Bhagavantamanussaramāno
—S. I.
BlessedOne; Sru +ta,pp.; pati + 50
Bhagavatosantikeaāīiam Grh +i +ta,pp. RememberingtheBlessedOne: au +
vyakareyyam—Vin. I. 183
Smr +a +mana,pr.p.
MayI declaregnosisbefore
the Bhagavatosammukhasutam
BlessedOne; vi +@+ Kr +evyam, sammukhapatiggahitam—M.III. Bhagavantamabhivādetvā—S. I. I
opt. 1". sg. 104;5. V. 406 HavingworshippedtheBlessedOne ;
Heardandacceptedin thepresenceof abhi + Vad+e + tva,caus.absol.
Bhagavatosantikeania vyakata - theBlessedOne; sam + mukha+a
Bhagavantamabhivādetvā
Expressed gnosisbeforetheBlessed Bhagavatosammukhibhavamna purakkhatvā—Vin. II. 128
One; ā 1 Jad, is a technicalterm adāsi—M. I. 438 HavingworshippedtheBlessedOne
used to give the meaningof Hedid not facethe BlessedOne, andkepthim in front;pura(s) (=pure)
arahanthood;vi +@+ Kr +ta,pp. (hedid notgo to seetheBuddha); +Kr +tva,absol.
at+Da+s + i, pst. 3. sg.
Bhagavatosantikeuggahetva
—A.V.
Bhagavantamabhivadetva,
112 Bhagavatosāsane—M. II. 121 bhikkhusamghassaafijalim
Having learntattheBlessedOne;ui) In thedispensationof theBlessedOne panametva—D. I. 50-1
+ Grh + e + tva,absol. HavingworshippedtheBlessedOne
Bhagavatosutvā bhikkhū and greetedthecommunityof
Bhagavato santike etassabhasitassa dhāressanti—D. II. 2; M. I. 433; S. bhikkhus;pa +Nam +e +tva,caus.
atthamāiānissāmi—M. II. 24;A. Il. 81;A. 1. 199 absol.
III. 35 Havingheard(thewords)ofthe
BlessedOne,thebhikkhuswill hold it
I shall know themeaning
of this saying Bhagavantamāgamayamāno—
M. II.
attheBlessedOne;@+Jan ftnāi in themind;Sru +tva,absol.;Dhr + 92
+ssami,fut. 1. sg. e +ssanti,caus.fut. 3”. pl. Waitingfor theBlessedOne;a + Gam
+ aya + mana, caus. pr.p.
Bhagavatosantikedūtampāhesi
- Bhagavantajicalacchami kalena
Vin. I. 207 kalamdassanāya—A. V. 335 Bhagavantamagamma—M. HI. 253
From time to time, I will be able to see
Causedto senda messenger
tothe Havingcometo theBlessedOne;@+
theBlessed
One;Labh(laph)+ssami
Blessed
One;pa+@+Hit+e+s+h Gam +va, absol.
caus,pst. 3". sg. (Skt.syāmi), fat. I". sg.
5
Bhagavantamāvusovādena
Bhagavatosammukha
parikatham samudacaritabbamamannissam-
katvā —D. II. 204 M. III. 247
Havingmadea remark
inthepresence I thoughtthattheBlessedOne should
of theBlessed
One;sam+mukha beaddressed by thewordāvuso
Bhagavantam
(friend): āvuso + Vad+a, der:
sam +u (t) +@+ Car +i + tabba,
fut.pp.; a + Man +ya + is + am,pst.
Ise
Bhagavantamuddissa pabbaiitāya
kāsāyavatthavasanāya— Vin. IV. 51
Witha bhikkhunīwho hasrenounced
thefamily life for thesakeof the
BlessedOne andwho is clad in brown-
redcloth; uddissa,indel.; pa + Vrj + i
+ ta,pp.
Bhagavantam etadavoca —
D. I. 51;
M. 1.16;S. I. 1;S. V. 83
Said this to the BlessedOne; etam
(etad)+a + Vac+ a, root redup.,pst..
3”. sg.; the root Vacneedstwo
objectsto completethe sentence
Bhagavantamonitapattapanim
viditva —Vin. I. 4
Having understoodthatthe Blessed
One hadtakenthehandoutof thebowl
(i.e. hadfinishedthemeal);0 +Ni +
ta,pp.; Vid +i +tva,absol.
Bhagavantamdassanampihanta -
Vin. III. 231
Longing for thesightofthe Blessed
One;Bhagavantamseemsto have
beenusedhere in gen. sense;Sprh 3
a +nta,pr.p.
Bhagavantamdassanāya—D. II. 263
To seethe BlessedOne
Bhagavantamdassanāya
bhikkhusamghaf ca —S. I. 26
To seetheBlessedOne andthe
communityof Bhikkhus:Dr§ +ya +
ana, der.
Bhagavantam
Bhagavantam
dhotahattham
onitapattapanim ekamantamnisidi
—Vin. I. 221
He satdown atoneside,whenthe
BlessedOne hadwashedhishandand
takenit out of thebowl: Dhav+a+
ta,pp.; 0 (ava >apa) +Ni +ta,pp;
ace.forloc.
Bhagavantamna dhamsemi—D.I,
211
I donotbringruintotheBlessed
One;
Dhvams+ e + mi,pres. 1",sg.
Bhagavantampakatiyā gaechantam
—M. II. 99
TheBlessedOnegoingwithanormal
pace;gaccha + nta,prp.
Bhagavantam paccuggantvā
—M.I.
206;III. 155
Having gone forwardto receivethe
BlessedOne;pati + u(t) +GamT hā,
absol.
Bhagavantam patipucchitva
mama
āroceyyātha
—
Vin. I. 207;IHI.248
You shouldinformmeafterconsulting
theBlessedOne;pati +Preh+yat+!
+ tvd,absol.; @ +Ruc +e +eyyātha,
caus.opt.2". pl.
Bhagavantam
(dakkhissasi)
pasadikam pasadaniyam
santindriyam santamanasam
uttamadamathasamathamanuppattam
Bhagavantam
dantamguttam yatindriyam nagam
—Vin. I. 195
(You will see) the Blessed One who is
pleasingandinspiring,who hasserene
facultiesandserenemind,who has
reached thehighestdisciplineand
calmness, andwho is restrained,
protected,controlled and sacred;
dakkhissasi,
fut. 2". sg.from thebase
dakkhawhich is itselfa future base;
pasdda+ika, der; Sam+ ta,pp. +
indriva;manas+a, der.; anu +pa +
Ap+ta,pp.;Dam+ta,pp.;Gup+
ta,pp.; naga has several meanings:
elephant,snake,Arahant,in Sri
LankaBuddhisttradition, the
candidatefor ordination is also
callednāga
Bhagavantamyevaārabbha satti
udapādi aho nūna Bhagavā, aho
nūnaSugatoyo imesam
dhammānamsukusalo —D. I. 180;
M. II. 31,pīti udapādi
Concerning onlytheBlessed
One
there arosereminiscencethus:Ah,
Surelyit is the BlessedOne,surelyit
istheWell Gone One who is well
skilledin thesematters;Bhagavantam
(vy)+eva;Grabbha,indcl.; u(t) +a +
Pad +i, pst. 3". sg.
Bhagavantamyeva patibhatuetassa
bhasitassa
attho—
S. II. 24;A. I.
199
Maythemeaningof thisstatement
be
evident
totheBlessedOnehimself:
Pati+Bha +tu,imper.3". sg.
Bhagavantam yevapurakkhatva-
M. I. 354;S. IV. 183
Keeping
onlytheBlessed
Onein
Bhagava
front;pura(s) +Kr +tva.absol.
Bhagavantamvijamano— D. II. 73
While fanningtheBlessedOne; Vij+
a + mana, pr.p.
BhagavantamhantvāBuddho
bhavissāmi
—Vin. II. 190
Havingkilled theBlessedOne I shall
becometheEnlightenedOne: Han +
tvā,absol.
Bhagavammūlakāno bhante
dhammā,Bhagavannettikā,
Bhagavampatisarapā—M. I, 310; S.
Il. 24;A. 1.199
Venerablesir, theBlessedOne is the
rootof our teachings,guideto our
teachingsandsupportfor our
teachings;Bhagavammūlakā,
Bhagavannettikā,and Bhagavam-
Patisaranā: in thesecompoundsthe
caseendingofthefirst memberis not
elided
Bhagavāacirapakkantesu
Pātaligāmiyesu upāsakesu,
sunnagarampavisi. —D. II. 86
Not longafterthedepartureof the
devoteesof Patalivillage,theBlessed
Oneretired;
pa +Kram+ta,pp.;
Pataligama+ iya, der.;pa + Vi§ +i
+pst. 3™.sg.
Bhagavāāgacchatītiāsanā
vutthahanti—Vin. IV. 173
(Bhikkhus)getup from theseats,
thinkingthattheBlessedOne is
coming;vi +u(t)+Stha+nti,pres.
373.
pi
Bhagavāetadavoca—5. I. 183
 Bhagava
TheBlessedOnesaidthis;etam:
(etad)
+a+ lac t a, root redup,pst. 3". sg.
Bhagavā kira Kusinārāyam
parinibbutoti..assosi —D. I. 164
Heardthenewsthatthe BlessedOne
hadperfectlyextinguishedat
Kusinara;kira, indcl. usedin
reporting;a +Sru +s +i, pst. 3”. sg.
Bhagavājanam janati, passam
passati,cakkhubhūto āānabhūto
dhammabhito brahmabhito vatta
pavattaatthassaninneta amatassa
data dhammassamiTathagato—A.
V. 226
The BlessedOne knowswhatshould
be known,seeswhatshouldbe seen,
he is theeye,theknowledge,the
Dhamma,thehighest,theadvocate,the
operator,thebringerof good, the
giver of immortality,theowner of the
Dhamma,theonewho hasrealisedthe
truth;Jan +ya, fut. pp.; pass +ya,
fut.pp.; Bhit +ta,pp.; Vac+ tu, der.;
pa +Vrt + tu, der.; ni + Ni + tu, der.:
Da + tu, der.; dhamma+ sami: tatha
t āgata or tathā -- āgata or tatha
gata
Bhagavāpubbanhasamayam
sunivattho hoti, pattacīvaram ādāya
Vesālim pindāya pavisitukāmo —M.
1231
In themorningtheBlessedOne has
well dressedwith thehopeofentering
into Vesali for almscollection, taking
thebowl andtherobe:thecommon
idiom is Bhagavapubbanhasamayam
nivasetya Pattacivaram ādāya
Vesālimpindāyapavisi (The Blessed
One having donned in the morning,
Bhaggesu Bhajjitva
Bhandāgārikam
taking the bowl and therobeentered
Bhesakalavane migadāye— M. I. 95 Recluse,
ekplain(recite)theDhamma:
into Vesali for alms collection): sy +
Abideson theCrocodile rock at the Bhan + a, imper.2". sg.; an impolite
ni +Vas+ta,pp.; @+Da +ya,
deerparkof Bhesakalāgrove,in the wayofmakinga request
absol.;pa + Vis +i + tum,inf, +
kingdomof Bhagga
kamo
Bhanitenapurisam bandhati—A. IV.
Bhajjitvava bhajjapetvava —Vin. 196
Bhagaya sattha (na) apadisitabbo -
IV. 264 Snaresa manby speech;Bhan +i +
Vin. IV. 139 Havingroastedor havingcausedto be ta,pp.; Ba(n)dh +a +ti, pres. 3”. sg.
The BlessedOne shouldnotbe roasted;Bhrj +ya +i +tva,absol.
pointedout as theteacher;apa+Dré
Bhandanaiātākalahaiātā
+ i + tabba,fut. pp. Bhanijanake,haritake, capalasune
vivadapannaafiiamafiiam
anapatti—Vin. IV. 259 mukhasattīhivitudantāviharanti -
Bhagava samparayike atthe Thereis no offencein bhaiijanaka, M. III. 152;S. IV.225
anusasissati—Vin. I. 179 haritaka
andcāpalasuna(threevarieties Theyabideengagingthemselves in
The BlessedOne will instructyouin of lasuna), bhavijanaka is red in quarrelling,brawling,disputing,and
matters
pertaining
tothenextlife; colourandhas two bulbs,haritakais attackingeachotherwith thespearsof
samparaya+ ika, der.; anu +Sas+i greenand has threebulbs; capa words;Jan + ta,pp.; vi + Vad+a,
+ssati, fut. 3. sg. lasunahas no bulb, only theplant, der. +G@+ Pad + ta,pp.; vit+ Tud+ a
Cy. 920 +nta,prp.; vi +Hr +a + nti,pres.
Bhagavā sīsato aggahesi,āyasmā
3”.pi.
Anandopadato
—Vin.I. 302 Bhafifamanesuna sussiisissanti—A.
The BlessedOne took himfromthe Ill. 107 Bhandantamna patibhandati—A.
headandthevenerable
Ananda from They will not wish to hear when (they) IHI. 371
thefoot;a +Grh +e +s +i,pst.3rd arebeingrecited;Bhan+ya +mana, (He) does not guarrel in return with
Sg.
r'g pass.pr.p.; Sru +i + ssanti, desid. theone who is guarrellingwith him;
fut, 3". pl. Bhand+a + nta,pr.p.; Bhand +a +
Bhaginipatiko hoti —Vin. I. 154 ti, pres.3™.sg.
He is sister’s husband Bhatapathamyacissami—Vin. IV.
265 Bhandamchedāpitamhoti —Vin. I.
Bhaginivadena samudacarati—M. | willbegforanemployment;
bhata 148
II. 64 (Skt.
bhrta)+patha;Yae+i +ssami, The wood(necessaryfor thebuilding)
(He)addresses(us) bytheword wasmadeready;Chid +ape +i +ta,
sister;bhagini+vāda;samt u(t)" caus.pass.pp.
a+ Car +ati, pres.3™.9g Bhanamānassa
antarantarā
kathā
Opāteti—A. III. 137 Bhandāgāramsammannitum—Vin.
BhaggesuviharatiSumsumāragire Causes
tointerrupt
thespeaker
by 1.284
Bhesakalavane
—
S. III. 1;A. II. 61 putting
forththispointorthatpoint; To agree upon a store house; sam +
Abides on theCrocodilerockatthe Bhan+a +mana,pr.p.; 0 +Pat +e Man +ya +i + tum,inf.
" Ni,caus.pres,3”, sg,
Bhesakala
grove,inthekingdom
of
Bhagga Bhandagarikamsammannitum-
BhanaSamanadhammam—
S. IV. Vin. II. 176
122 To agreeupona keeperof thestore
 Bhandikabaddhani
Bhattagge Bhattacchedam
Bhattabhihare
house;bhanda+agdra +ika,der. aggapindam—
M. II. 204
parivisati—Vin. ITI. 160 evydsi,opt. 2". sg.
Thebestseat,bestwaterandbest
food
Havingstayedat therefectorywith
Bhandikabaddhāni
titthanti—Vin. in the refectory;bhatia +agga,agga
wifeandchildren(he) serves;tittha + Bhattambhuttambyāpaiieyya—A.
III. 203 is the contractedform ol agāra
i t Ivā, a rare absol.,thatvāis III. 101;IV. 320
(They) remaintiedup in bundles:Badh (house); agga --āsana;agga+
commonlyused;pari +Vis +a +ti, The foodeatenmaygo wrong;Bhuj +
+ ta,pp.; tittha(fromStha) + nti, udaka;
pres. 3, sg. la, pp.; vit @+ Pad +ya +eyya,
pres. 3™.pl.
opt.3. sg.
Bhattaggeanumoditum
- Vin, II.
Bhattacchedamkarissati —Vin. I.
Bhandikambandhitva—Vin. I. 215 212 293 Bhattavissaggamkaronti —
Vin. II.
Havingtieddown (them)intoa bundle: To thankat theendofthe meal;bhatta (He)will make(him) losemeal; 153,302; III. 205
Ba(n)dh + i + tva@,
absol. + agga (= end);anu + Mud +a+it bhatta+cheda: Chid +a, der. (They) partakeof food;bhatta+ vi +
tum,inf.
Bhandike dehi —Vin. IV. 258 Sij + ta,pp.
Bhattaficassanacchadeyya—M. I.
Give garlic with morebulbs;bhandika Bhattaggeantaraghareāsanam 275;Vin. I. 137,bhattamassa Bhattavetanam pakappetu—D. I.
lasuna is a kind of lasuna which has pannapento—Vin. III. 79 naechādeti 135
morebulbs, Cy. 920; Da + e +hi, While preparingaseat attherefectory Hewouldhaveno appetitefor food; Let themealandthewagebearranged:
imper.2”. sg, inside thehouse bhattam+ca + assa;na +chanda+ pa + kappa+e + tu, denom.imper.
e +eyyva,
denom.opt. 3. sg.; na 3”. Sg.
Bhattakālepi arocetum —Vin. I. 117 Bhattaggeāsanamsamkāyantiyo- 'ucceyya,Cv.ll. 317
To informevenatthemealtime: Vin. II. 274
Bhattassanimittam na ugganhati-
bhattakale+ api; 4 + Ruc +e +tum, Being unsureof therefectorysea; Bhattapatipātiadhitthitā hoti - 5. V. 150
caus. inf.
samkā -- āya t nta 7 ī, denom.Dr.p. Vin.I. 57;II. 119;IV. 75 Doesnottakeup theexactpointof the
A seriesof almsgivingshasbeen food;u(t) + Grh +nd +ti, meta.pres.
Bhattakilamatho—A. III. 320 Bhattaggena eittarūpambhuhianti organised;adhi +Stha + i +ta,pp. 32rd
Sg.
Languidaftermeal —Vin. I. 222
At therefectory
theydonotenioy Bhattapatipātikhīyittha —Vin. I. 57 Bhatta pannanamitthiya—S. I. 42
Bhattaggam kolāhalam ahosi —Vin.
food as much as they wish; Bhu(ny+4 A seriesof almsgivingsis ekhausted; Husbandis thespecialmarkofa
Il. 165 +nti, pres. 3. pl. Ksi +iva +i +ttha,pass.pst.3'i,sg. woman; pa +Jia +ana,der.
Therefectory
became
a placeof
uproar;bhatta +agga
Bhattaggepiuccāsaddā
mahāsaddā Bhattampivetanampivaddhapetum Bhattabhiharam abhiharimsu -
viharanti —Vin. I. 44 —Vin. II. 194 Vin. III. 15
Bhattaggamsammajjitabbam—Vin. Tomakethequalityof foodandthe
Even in therefectory
theyremain (They)broughtmid-daymeal;bhatta
Il. 216 shoutingandmakingmuchnoise; salaryincrease:bhattam+api; +abhihara;abhi +Hr +a +imsu,
The refectoryshouldbeswept;sam + vetanam+api; Vrdh +dpe + tum,
bhattagge+api;ueca+sadda pst, 3”. pl.
Mrj +ya +i +tabba,
fut.pp. caus, inf.

Bhattaggebahusitthani Bhattābhihāreupasamkamitvā—M.
Bhattaggavattampannhapemi —Vin. Bhattam
upasamharanti
— S. I. 160
pakiriyimsu —Vin. I . 132 II. 126
11.213 Whilebringingfoodor servingfood;
Manyboiledricewerescattered
all Havingcometo mewhenthemealwas
I proclaimrefectoryduty;pa +Jia +
overtherefectory;
pa+kir+tat upa +sam +Hr +a +nta +f, pr. p. beingserved;upa +sam+Kram +i +
dpe + mi, caus. pres. I", sg,
imsu,pass.pst.3".pl. tvwā,absol.
Bhattamkareyyāsi—Vin. IV. 162
Bhattaggeaggasanamaggodakam Youshouldprepare
a meal;Kr +
Bhattagge
saputtadaro
titthitva Bhattābhihāre bhāsa —5. I. 82
 Bhattika
Utter(this) whenthemeal is being
served;bhatta+ abhi +Hr + a, der
Bhattika agacchanti—Vin. II. 77;
IIT. 161
Food seekerscome; bhatta +ika,
der.
Bhattiyagharam gacchati —Vin. IV.
101
Goes to the houseof thealms giver;
bhatta + iya, der.
Bhattucchandavasanuga—A. IV.
266
The onewho is following husband’s
will; bhattu + chanda + vasa+
anuga
Bhattena nimantetvā— S. II. 259:
Vin. III. 107
Having invitedfor a meal:ni +manta
+e+ tva, denom.absol.
Bhattenapatisamvidite
—Vin. IV.
183
When theannouncement
is made
regardingfood;pati +sam + Vid + i
+ ta,pp.
Bhattena parivisati —Vin. I. 240
Serveswith food;pari + Vis +a +ti,
pres. 3. sg.
Bhaddakampatibhānam
-A. II. 177
Ready-wit is ekcellent
Bhaddakamvata bho hatthiratanam,
sacedamathamupeyya— D. II. 174
The elephant-treasureis indeed
excellentif it would cometo be
tamed;upa +e (fromI) 3 eyya,opt.
Bhabbo
2" se.
Bhaddako te ummaggobhaddakam
patibhānam kalyānī paripucchā- 5,
V. 16;A. II. 177
Excellentis your approachtothe
question,excellentis your ready-
wittednessandexcellentis your
questioning;ummaggoti,patha-
ummaggo,
paāha-vīmamsanam,
pahha- gavesanantiattho,Cy.HI.
131
Bhaddikabhanteavattanimaya-
M. I. 383
Venerablesir, themagicof conversion
is excellent;
a + Vrt+ana+i, der.
Bhaddiye viharati Jatiyavane—
A.
IIT. 36;Vin. I. 189,242
AbidesatJatiya grove,in Bhaddiya
Bhadrani passati—Vin, I. 230
(He) seesall good things
Bhadrena yobbanenasamannagato,
pathamenavayasa—D. I. 115
Endowed withprimeyouth,withthe
firstpartof(his) age;sam+anu+@
+ Gam + ta,pp.
Bhabbo abhinibbhidaya, bhabbo
sambodhaya,bhabboanuttarassa
yogakkhemassa
adhigamāya
—M.I.
104
(He is) fit for breakingoutor
penetrationinto,fit for realisation,
fit
forattaininguniquestateof release
frombondage; Bhii+ya >bhav+ya?
bhabba,fut. pp.;abhi+ni +Bhidor
Vyadh;sam+Budh+a, der; yoga
+khema
Bhabbo
111.
422
Heis capableof ekperiencing
Arahanthood; araha 3-tta,der.;sa --
acchi -- kātum,inf,
Bhabboimasmimdhammavinaye-
A.IILS
He is capablein thisdoctrineand
discipline
Bhabbokāye kāyānupassī
viharitum—A. IHI. 450
Heis capableofabiding with
contemplationof bodyin thebody;
vi +Hr +i +tum,inf.
Bhayabhogapativirata
aranhnayatandni ajjhogahitva
viharimsu —M. I. 152
Refrainedfrom eatingwith fear(they)
enteredinto the forest-regionsand
livedthere;bhayenabhogato,Cy. II.
161;pati +vi +Ram+ta,pp.;adhi
+ 0+ Gah + i + tva, absol.
Bhayamchambhitattam
lomahamsamuppādetukāmo
- S. I.
104
Beingdesirousofcreating fear,
trembling
andhorripilation;
Skambh
ti +ta,pp. +tta,der.; loma+Hrs
+a (harsa>hassa>hdsa> hamsa);
u(t) +Pad +e +tum,caus.inf, +
kama
Bhayamtumhakanosiya— S. I. 220
Therewouldbenofearforyou:
tumhāka,niggahīta is elided: no,
neg.p.; As +ya (Skt.vat), opt.3“. sg. _ pres. 3. sg.
Bhayam va chambhitattam va
669
cae)
Bhayā
lomahamsovā na hessati—S. 1.220
Therewill notarisefear,trembling,or
horripilation;Hē (Bbā) -- a -- ssati -
hossati > hessati
Bhayamva sarajjam va okkamissati
-—M.1.72
Fearor timidity(or shyness)will
comeintothemind;sam + Raj +ya,
der.;o (ava) +Kram +i +ssati,fut.
3”. sg.
Bhayamverampasavati—A. HI.
205;IV. 406
Producesfearandhatred;pa +Su +a
+ ti, pres.3”. sg.
Bhayamsamvegamsantasam
āpaiianti—
A. II. 33
They becomescared,agitatedand
trembled;@+ Pad +ya +nti,pres.
Soph
Bhayam hoti atavisamkhepo—A. I.
178
Thereis a terrorcomingfrom the
forest (i.e a raid of bandits):
atavisamkopotiataviyāsamkopo,
ataviti cettha atavivāsino corā
veditabbā, Cv.lll. 284; Cy. takes the
termsamkhepoas samkoposam +
Kup +a, der.; if thetermis
samkhobho,which meanscommotion,
it is formedby sam +Ksubh +a,
der.
Bhayassakiccam karoti —D. HI. 186
Outof fear,hedoesthethingstobe
done;Ar (t) +ya, fut.pp.; Kr +o +ti,
Bhayā hi santo na karonti papam -
 Bharandu
Bhavā Bhavaya Bhagam
SEL21 Bhavantarūpānamkho adassanā
-
Indeed,for thereasonof fear,the Birthis dueto becoming,decay Abandonedis thesearchfor becoming:
M. II. 158
goodpeopledon’t do evil; Kr + 0 + anddeathare for theonewho has bhava+es (from Is) +ana,der.;pa
Forthereasonof notseeing
the
nti, pres. 3”.
>
pl. comeinto being;bhavoti + Ha +ta,pp.
venerableslike you; a Drd tyat
kammabhavo, jatiti vipakakkhandha,
ana,der.
bhutassatisattassa,Cy. I. 52; Bhat+ Bhasmantāāhutiyo —D. I. 55
Bharandu Kalamo Bhagavato
ta,pp. Oblations end in ashes: bhasma +
puranasabrahmacari—A. I. 277 Bhavantānam
yevavāhasā
—D.II.
Bharandu
Kalama,a co- celibateof anta; 4 + Hu + ti, der.
245 Hhavāyavā vibhavāyavā —M. III.
theBlessedOne, in thepast Becauseof your supportl(thanks
to 244 Bhasmāvabhavatiekacco—M. II.
thesupportgivenby you);a satirical For becomingor non-becoming:Bha
Bhariyam purato thapetva—Vin. I. 155
remark; vdhasa,adv.analog.form + a, der. Surely,somebecomesashes
276
(somearereducedto ashes);bāasmā
Causingthewife to standin front: Bhavantiupasamkamitāro
- M.II. Bhavissanti dhammassa r eva
Stha+ape+tva,caus.absol. 111 annataro —D. II. 37; M. 1. 168; III.
Therearethosewho approach;
wpa+ 261 Bhasmāvasalīhohi —M. II. 155
Bhariyā ca paramā sakhā—S. I. 37 sam + Kram +i +tu, der. Therewill be thosewho realisethe Be reducedto ashes,outcast;Ha (Bhi)
Wifeis thebestfriend(sakhā,one
Dhamma;Bhai + a +i + ssanti,fut. 3”. +a+ hi, imper.2™.sg
who eatstogether) Bhavapatilabhikani samyojanani- pl.; ā t Ina +tu, der.
A. IL. 133 Bhasmāhi udadhi maha—Vin. II.
Bhariyā saddhā, saddhā kulā anita Thefettersthatgiverisetobecoming; Bhavissantime vattāro —D. II. 342; 203
—M. II. 185 bhava +pati +Labh + ika, der;sam Vin. I, 185 Greatoceanis indeeddangerous;Cy.
Wife is faithfulandbroughtfrom a
Yuj + ana, der. There will be critcs for me; Vac + tu, takesbhasmāas bhesmāandsays
faithfulfamily;@+ Ni+ ta,pp. der. 'āhesmātibhayānako', 1277
Bhavamatthu
bhavantam
Jotipalam
Bhavanamkattukāmo — Vin. IV. 34 manavam—D. II. 231 BhavissantiVajji, bhavissantiVajji - Bhassamanuyuttassa viharato—A.
Desirousof makinga residence:Kr + A. III. 76
Let therebe successfor theyoung IIT. 393
tum,inf. + kama Vajjiswill be successful,Vajjiswill be
Jotipala, bhavam+atthu;Bhii +a, Ofthe onewho is engagedin talking;
der., opp. paradbhava;
As +tu,imper: successful Bhas +ya, fut. pp.; anu + Yuj + ta,
Bhavanirodho nibbānam—A. V. 9 ,
ar Sec PP.
Cessation
of becoming
is Nibbāna Bhavissami nu kho
Bhavassa
abhinipphattiyā
—D.II. anagatamaddhanam —M. I. 8 Bhassaramatamanuyutta—D. II. 78
283 ShallI be in future;nu, interr.p.;an + Indulgedin gossip;bhassa+arama +
V. 432 a+ Gam +ta,pp. +addhana
Forproducing
anewbirth;
ni(s)+Pad tā, der..
The guideto becoming(desire)is
+fi, der.
completelydestroyed;bhava +Ni 4 Bhavena rajjati, sambhavena rajjati Bhāgamdatvā paribhuhliitabbāni-
ti, der.> ne ti > netti; sam +u(t) + -A.IV.70
Bhavassa
abhinibbattiyā
—A. HI. Vin. 1.250
Han + ta,pp. Heis notattachedto the(present) Havinggivena portion,(therest)
400
existence,notattachedto the(future) shouldbe enioyed;bhāsamdatvāti
To producea newexistence;
abhi+m
Bhavantam
Gotamamuddissa—M. existence;Raj +ya +ti, pass.pres. dasamambhāgamdatvā,idam kira
+Vrt +ti, der:
1.16 J,fd SL, Vambudīpeporānakacārittam. Tasmā
Pointingatthevenerable
( iotama; dasakotthāsekatvā eko kotthāso
Bhavajati,bhitassa
jaramarapam—~
uddissa, indkl. Bhavesana
pahina—A. V.31
M. 1.6 ōhūmisāmikānam dātabbo,Cv. 1103;

-
1
 Bhagam
Da +twa, absol.; pari + Bhu(fi)j +i 4
tabba, fut. pp.
Bhagam detha —Vin. I. 282
Give (us) a portion; Da + e + tha,
pres.2". pl.
Bhajanagatamudakam va kancikam
va khiram va takkam va —Vin. IV.
112
Water,rice gruel, milk or buttermilk
in a vessel
Bhajanantarikaya passitva—Vin. IV.
272
Having seen(it) in themidstofthe
kitchen—-ware: bhdjana + antarika
Bhāiane ākiranto omasati —Vin. IV.
191
Toucheswhile puttinginto thevessel:
a+ kir + a +ma, pr.p.; o (ava) 3
Mrs +a + ti, pres. 37 Sg.
Bhajitabhajitaiica janeyya —Vin. II.
176
(He) would know whatwasdistributed
andwhatwasnot;Bhaj +e +i +ta,
caus.pp. +abhdjita;Jan +na
eyya, opt. 3%.sg.
Bhataro saudariyā —M. II. 154
Brothers,born of thesamemother
(who belongto thesamewomb): sa 4
udara + iya, der.
Bhātukā honti —Vin. II. 180
Are brothers; bhatu + ka, der.
Bhayasimam samana—S, I, 207
Recluse,areyou afraidof me;Bhi +a
+si, pres, 2”, sg
Bhāvanāmayam Bhavanaya Bhasitassa
Bhāyitabbam (na) etassasukhassa-
Bhāvanāyarato mano—S. I. 48 manussovāti —D. II. 109;A. IV. 307
M. III. 233 The mind is attachedto cultivation: While I amspeakingtheydo not
Shouldnotbescared
otfhis happiness: Ram +ta, pp.
recognisemeas to who is this person
Bhi +a +i +tabba,
fut. Pp.;withthe
speaking(to us),whetherhe is a god
root Bhi, gen. is used Bhāvitattā bahulīkatattā —D. II. 214 or a human;Bhās -- a +mana,pr. p.;
For the reason ofcultivation and
Bharatakanam sakkatagarukata constantpractice;bhdvita+ tta,der. a +ti, pres. 3”. sg.
mānitā pūiitā apacitā—§. IV. 117
(Theseare) well treated,honoured, Bhāvitamāsimsati —D. III. 49 Bhāsāyacittam namati—M. III. 113
esteemed,offeredandreveredby Wishesfor theworld of senses: Mind turnstowardstalking;Nam+a +
therulersbelongingto theBharata bhavitamnama tesamsafiiidya ti, pres. 3. sg.
clan; Bāāratakānaniikutimbikānam, paheakāmagunā,Cv.840; Cy. takes
kutimbikāhi,yasmārattham thetermāsimsatias asisatiand Bhasitam abhinanditvaanumoditva
bharanti, tasmābharatātivuccanti —M.III. 15;S. I. 146
Cy.ll. 397; sa(t) + Kr +ta,pp.; ad+Sams+ a +ti, pres.3”. sg. Havingreioicedandappreciated the
Man + e + i + ta, caus.pp.; Pj speech:Bhās 1 i 1 ta,pp.; abhi +
te +i +ta, caus.pp.;apa+Ci + Bhavitabahulikata yanikata Nand +i +tvā,absol.:anu + Mud +
ta, PP. vatthukataanutthita paricita a+i+ tva, absol.
susamāraddhā—D. II. 103;5. I. 116;
Bhāvanamanvāya
—D. III. 97 II. 264 Bhasitamabhinandum—M.I. 55; S.
Havinggonewithcultivation;
a+ Cultivated,
practised
freguently,
made 1.157
ava (fromI ), absol. ita vehicle,madeit a ground,gradually (They) rejoicedoverthetalk;abhi +
established,acquaintedwith,well Nand +um,pst. 3™.pl.
Bhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti undertaken; Bhai +e +i +ta,caus.
pp.; bahula +kata;yaéna+kata; Bhāsitamevamāiānāma —M. IHI.
—M. IHI. 81
vatthu+kata; anu +Stha + i + ta, 131
Indulgedin cultivation,theyabide;
bhāvanā -- ahu +yogam + anu + Mi pp.; pari + Ci + ta, pp.; su + sam + a Thuswe understandthesaying;a +
+ Rabh +ta, pp. Vān - nā - ma,pres. I". pi.
+fa, pp.
Bhāvetabbambhāvitam—M. II. 143 Bhasitamhassakamyeva.ndmakam
Bhāvanāpāripūrimgacchati—M.
III. 76;S. V.68;A. L.14 Whatwasto becultivatedwas yeva..rittakam yeva..tucchakam
cultivated: Bha +e +tabba, caus.fut. yevasampajjati—M. II. 201
Go to completionby cultivation;
Pp.; Bhi +e + i +ta, caus.pp. The sayingbecomesa matterof
bhāvanā --ā, instr.sg.; paripira +|,
laughing,somethingnominal,empty
der.
Bhāsatilapati niddisati —A. II. 24 andhollow;hassa(Hrs+ya) +ka,
Bhāvanāmayam ; Speaks,
talksandpointsout;Bhās+a der.; nāmakamyevati lamakamyeva,
+ti,pres.3". sg:; Lap +a +ti, pres. Cy.II. 447;Ric d ta,pp. t ka, der.;
pufifiakiriyavatthum
nabhisambhot ?rd : E : ma 20
~A.IV.241 3 .4.; ni t Dr§ +a+ ti, pres.3”. tuccha t ka, der.; sam +Pad +ya +
Isnotcapable
ofattaining
thebase
of
SZ. ti, pres.3", sg.
merit-making,
produced
bycultivation,
Bhāsamānam
ca mamnaiānanti,ko Bhasitassaattho vinnayati —Vin. II.
na +abhi +sam +Bhi +a +ti,pres:
nukho ayam bhāsati,devovā 95
Siegen
 Bhāsitassa
Bhikkhuniyo
Bhikkhuninam Bhikkhunovadakasammuti
Meaningof thesayingisclearly
pattam patieehādetvā
—Vin. II, 216
known; vi +Jd +ya + ti, pass. pres.
Havingcovered
thebowlwiththe upasampanna
—Vin. IV. 52 35
3”. sa
doublelayerrobe,whenthealmsis Bhikkhunismeanthosewho are Toioin with bhikkhunis;samgantum
given; Dā 1 ta,pp.; pati +Chad+e ordainedin bothSamgha(bhikkhuand samamgibhavitum,Cy. 274; sam +
Bhāsitassana rasīyanti —A. IV. 387 bhikkhunt);upa +sam +Pad +ta,pp. Kram +i +tum,inf.
+tvd, caus. absol.
The talk is notappreciated:rasa + īva
+nti, denom.pass.pres, 3". pl. Bhikkhunīnamanupakhaiia—Vin. II. Bhikkhunūpassayam
Bhikkhugatiko (bhatiko?) gilano
hoti—Vin. I. 148 88 upasamkamitvā—Vin. II. 259; IV. 55
Bhāsitā hoti na kattā —A. II. 102 Havingcreptinto thesideof Havinggoneto thenunnery;
An employee ofbhikkhusisill:
He is a speaker,not a doer:Bhas + j 4 bhikkhunis;anu + upa +Khad +ya, bhikkhunī + upassaya;theplace
bhikkhubhatiko,Cy. V. 1069
tu, der.; Kr + tu, der. absol. wherebhikkhuntsabide is called
Bhikkhudassanam hāpeti—A. IV.25 upassayabecausetheyare expected
Bhikkhaggena pativisam thapetvā Bhikkhuniparipacitam pindapatam to live in theneighbourhoodofthe
Causestoneglectvisitingbhikkhus;
bhāiesum— Vin. II. 294 ~Vin. IV. 66 bhikkhus;upa +sam +Kram + i +
Ha +ape +ti, caus.pres.3”.sg.
They causedto divide,after Alms-foodcausedto becookedby a tvd, absol.
apportioningthemin termsof the bhikkhuni;pari +Pac +e +i +ta,
Bhikkhuna udayabbayanupassina
numberof bhikkhus;bhikkhu + caus. Pp. Bhikkhunūpassayamnissāya
bhavitabbam—M. III. 114
aggena;Stha +dpe +tva, caus. rāiakulam gacchati—Vin. IV. 265
A bhikkhushouldbeonewhoobserves
absol.; Bhaj + e +5 ī un, caus. Bhikkhunīyevasamānā
—Vin. IV. Goesto theroyal familythroughthe
arisingandceasing;wdaya:u(t)+aya
absol. 216 nunnery;bhikkhuni+ upassaya: upa
(fromI) + vaya:vi +aya +anu+
Whilebeingindeeda bhikkhunt; + Sri+ a, der.
passa +i, der.
Bhikkham pariyesāmi—S. I. 181 bhikkhuni+ eva; As + mana,pr-.p.
Bhikkhuno etampātikamkham —S.
Bhikkhuniyo accāvadatha
- Vin. IV,
pres. re Sg. Bhikkhunisamghassa
udakasatika V. 442
224 datum—Vin. I. 292 This is to beexpectedofa bhikkhu;:
Scoldbhikkhunis;
atikkamitva
Bhikkhacariyam brahmanassa To givebathingclotheto the pati + Kamks +ya; fut.pp.
vadatha,akkosatha,Cy. 906;ati +@ communityof bhikkhunits;Da +tum,
sandhanam— M. II. 180
+Vad+a +tha,imper.
2".pl. inf.
The brahmin’sown wealthis begging; Bhikkhuno bahukatamhoti —M. I.
sam +dhana 190
Bhikkhuniyo obhāsanti—
Vin. II. Bhikkhunisamghassavihesika- Muchhasbeendoneby thebhikkhu:
262 Vin. IV. 239
Bhikkhadayikaya mukham na bahu +Kr +ta,pp.
Passa hint (atsex)(or sayvulger Theonewho makestroublesfor the
oloketabbam—Vin. II. 216
words)to bhikkhunis;
asaddhammena Orderof bhikkhunts;vihesa +ika,
The faceofthe almsgiving ladyshould Bhikkhunovadakamsammannitum
obhāsenti,Cy. 1292;obhāsate t
notbegazedat;bhikkha+Da + MURI
der. —Vin. IV. 50
nti, denom.pres. 3". pl. or o (ava)+
ikā (fromaka), der.;o --Lok 3 e+ To agreeuponaninstructorto
Bhas +a +nti,pres.3”.pl. Bhikkhunihisaddhimsampayojenti bhikkhunis;bhikkhunt+ovdda +ka,
tabba,fut. pp.
—Vin. II. 262 der.;sam +Man +ya +i +tum,inf:
Bhikkhuniyoovadantipariyāyena - Causeto havesexwith thebhikkhunis;
Bhikkhā diyyati —Vin. IV. 59
M. IIL. 270 bhikkhunīhisaddhimpurise Bhikkhunovadakasammuti
Alms is given;Da 4 iva +ti, pass.
Advisebhikkhunis
inturn;0 (ava)+ asaddhammena sampayojenti;Cy. sādiyitabbā—A. IV. 347
pres, 3. sg.
Vad+a +nti,pres,3”.pl. 1292 The appointment
to thepostof
bhikkhunī-instructoris to be
Bhikkhuniyonamaubhatosamghe Bhikkhunīhisamkamitum
—Vin. IHI. accepted;bhikkhunī --ovādaka 3
 Bhikkhu pakatatto
sammuti;Svad +aya + i + tabba,
caus.fut.pp.
Bhikkhu pakatatto
samanasamvasakosamanasimaya
thito samghambhindati —
Vin. II.
204
Staysin thesameboundary,splitsthe
Samgha;pakata(pa + Kr + ta,pp.) +
atta;sam+ Vas+aka,der.;Stha+i
+fa,pp.;Bhi(n)d+a +ti,pres.3”.
Sg.
No
Bhikkhupesuiiiie pacittiyam —Vin.
IV. 12
In slanderinga bhikkhuthereis an
offenceof expiation
Bhikkhumaiihagato—A. V. 122
Theonewhohasgonetotheassembly (I was)introducedintheSamgha;cp.
of bhikkhus attho ca vuttoattaca anupanito,
Bhikkhumgahetvābhikkhuniyā
vippatipadesum—Vin. III. 39
Getting hold of a bhikkhu (they) made
t mā,absol.;vi +pati +Pad +e+s
+um,caus.pst.3”.pl.
Bhikkhu visamyogādhippāyo—A.
III. 156
The bhikkhuintenton detachment:
vi +
sam +yoga + adhippaya
Bhikkhusamghato paccasimsitabba
—Vin. II. 255
Shouldbeekpectedfrom the
communityofbhikkhus; pari --ā 3:
Sams +i +tabba,fut. pp.
Bhikkhusamghaparivuto abbhokāse
676
Bhikkhussa Bhikkhussa Bhikkhū
nisinno hoti —M. I. 463; IHI. 15;S, varam te bhikkhu tinhena Bhikkhūnam akārako —
Vin. I. 301
V. 163,ajjhokase govikattanenakucchi parikanto, The onewhodoesnothelpbhikkhus;a
Beingsurrounded bythecommunity natyevaya rattandhakāratimisāya +Kr +aka,der.
ofbhikkhus,(He)hasbeensitting
in kucchihetupindaya carasa—M. I.
theopen-air;
pari +Vr +ta,pp.;abhi 449 Bhikkhūnambahunāianena
+okdsa;ni +Sad+ta,pp. Bhikkhu,shameon you,shameon visabhagoyadidam nekkhammam-
yourmother;it is betterfor you, A. IV. 438
Bhikkhusamgham ārabbha bhikkhu,thatyou havecutyour The renunciationof bhikkhusis
kincideva udaharati —D. I. 99 stomachwith a sharpbutcher’sknife incongruouswith manypeople; ni(s)
Speakssomething
concerning
the thanthatyou go on almscollection + Kram +ya, der.
communityofbhikkhus; arahbha, in thethickdarkness
of the night
indcl. ; kifici +(d) +eva;u (t) +a+ forthereasonof belly; @tumari Bhikkhūnam santikedūtam pāhesi
Hr +a +ti,pres.3".sg. and mātumāri seem to be —Vin. IV. 74
colloquial termsusedfor expressing Senta messengerto thebhikkhus:pa
Bhikkhusamgham pariharissami- anger;pari + Kr(n)t + ta,pp.; tātHitets 1i, caus.pst. 3"i.sg.
D. II. 100;Vin. II. 185 na + tu +eva; ratti +andhakara+
I will leadthecommunity
ofbhikkhus: timisā; carasā, seems to be an Bhikkhūnam
pari +Hr +a +i +ssGmi,fut.1"sg. analog.form sikkhasajivasamapanno—M. I. 179
Enteringuponthetrainingandthe
Bhikkhusamghe upanito—
§. II. 216 Bhikkhussa kālam kate samgho rulesof bhikkhus:ya bhikkhiinam
$āmipattacīvare—Vin. I. 303 adhisīlasamkhātāsikkhā, taāca;
A. Samghais theownerofthe bowland yatthacete sahaiīvanti, ekaiīvikā
III, 359;dsajjaupaniyavaeabhasita, therobeof a bhikkhuwhenhehas sabhāgavuttinohonti, tam
A.II. 37;aiihāyako
upanīto,
M.II. passedaway Bhagavatāpaāīiattasikkhāpada
154,the last word upanītais usedin samkhatamsajivanea,Cy. 11.205;
the brahmanicsense,i.e.a boy Bhikkhū akkosati paribhāsati —A. sikkha@
+sG@jiva+samapanna:sam +
IV. 345 a +Pad +ta,pp.
initiatedinto theclass; upa +Ni +
ta, pp.
ra +ti, pres. 3™.sg.; pari +Bhas + Bhikkhi parivisati —Vin. I. 222
a +ti, pres. 3. sg. Feedsbhikkhus;pari + Vis +a +fi,
Bhikkhusamghe
sabbanavako
- S.
IV. 284 pres. 3. sg.
Bhikkhūanupakhaiiana
Youngest
in thecommunity
of
nisiditabbam
—Vin. I. 47 Bhikkhu passamihatthapahatthe
bhikkhus;
sabba+navaka(of
all hets
Oneshouldnotsit encroachingthe udaggudaggeabhiratarūpe
the new comer)
bhikkhus;an +upa t Khād +ya, pīnitindriye appossukke
absol. pannalomeparadavutte
Bhikkhusikkhāyasikkhitabbam-
migabhūtenacetasāviharante-
Vin. II. 22
M. II. 121
Shouldtrainin thediscipline
ofthe
1.55;S. I. 5 I seethebhikkhuswhoarehappy.
bhikkhus;
Sak+i +tabba,
desid.
ful Addressedthebhikkhusby saying
cheerful,look delighted,with fresh
pp.
bhikkhus;
@+manta+e +s+i, faculties,notwithdrawing,humble,
denom.past. 3”. sg.; bhikkhavo +iti existingon whatis givenby othersand
Bhikkhussaātumāri,mātumāri;
677
 Bhikkhā
living with a deer-mind:Hrs +ta,pp.
T a +mana, pr. p.
+pahattha; udagga + udagega;abhi
+Ram +ta,pp. +rupa; Pri + nā + i
Bhikkhūhi saddhim samvāso—A,
* fa, pp. + indriya; appa +ussukka;
IV. 205
Pad + ta,pp. + loma;para + Da +
Co-ekistencewith thebhikkhus
Vrt + ta,pp.; miga + Bhii +ta,pp. ;
vi+ Hr +a+ nta,pr.p.
Bhikkhūhisaddhim
samvibhaiitabbam— Vin. IV. 80
Bhikkhi bhikkhahi bhedeti—A. IV.
It shouldbesharedwith bhikkhus;sam
345
+ vi + Bhaj +i +tabba,fut. pp.
Bhid + e + ti, caus.pres, 3”. sg.
Bhikkhihi (na)sampayoietabbam-
Vin. II. 5
Bhikkhū vā anabhineyya
Shouldnotcausebhikkhus
auarrel
vatthudesanāya— Vin. III. 149
with bhikkhus:annamafiiamyojetva
Or would not bringdown bhikkhusfor
kalaho na kātabbo, Cy. 1156;
markingthesite;an +abhi + Ni +a+
sam +pa + Yuj +e + tabba,caus.
fat
eyya,opt. 3. sg.
Pp.
Bhikkhāsu appasādabahuloviharati
Bhitā vissaramakāsi—
M. I. 448;
—A.IIL. 270
Vin. I. 87
He abidesmostlywith displeasure
Being frightened screamed: yi +
amongthebhikkhus
saram+a+ Kr +@+s+i,double
pst. 3”, sz,
Bhikkhūhi nevavattabbo, na
ovaditabbo,na anusāsitabbo—D. II.
Bhitti kannakitāhoti—Vin.I, 48
154
The wall hasbeenmadeblack(
dirty);
He shouldneverbe told. neverbe
kanha (Krsna)> kanna) +Kr +ta,
advised,neverbe instructedby the
pp.
bhikkhus;na + eva: Vad+ tabba,fut.
Pp.; 0 (ava) + Vad +i + tabba,fut.
Bhittikhilepi
nagadantakepi
—
Vin.
Pp.; anu +Sas + i + tabba,fut. pp.
II. 114
Onthepegfixedtothewalland
onthe
Bhikkhūhi bhikkhunīnam vinayam
elephant’stusk
vācetum—Vin. II. 261
To teachVinayato thebhikkhunisby
Bhittim apassenti—Vin. I. 175
bhikkhus;Vac+ @+tum,caus.inf,
Leanagainstthewall; apa +Sri +e+
Bhikkhūhi saddhim
nti, pres. 3”. pl.
Patisammodamana—M. 1.456
Bhinnattā bhikkhu hoti —
A. IV. 144
Exchangingfriendlygreetingswith
One becomesa bhikkhuforthereason
thebhikkhus:Pati +sam +Mud
of broken;Bhid +ta,pp. +tla,der.
Bhinna
Bhinna nigantha dvedhikajata
bhandanajatakalahajata
vivadapannaafamafiiam
mukhasattīhivitudantā viharanti -
D. III. 210
TheNiganthas( Jaina disciples),
whoaredisunitedanddividedintotwo,
livewithquarrellingdisputingand
attackingeachotherwithsharp
weapons
of mouth,i.e.withpiercing
words;Bhid + ta,pp.; Jan +ta,pp.;
vivdda+ Gpanna:@+Pad +ta,Pp.;
vi + Tud +a + nta,pr. p.; vi +Hr +a
+nti,pres. 3™.pl.
Bhinnenapattena vipphālitāya
samghātiyā—M. II. 104
Withthebowl brokenandtherobe
split;Bhid +ta,pp.; vi+ Phal +e +i
+ fa, caus. pp.
Bhinnenasisenalohitena galantena
—M. II. 104
Withtheheadbrokenandbleeding;
Gal +a t nia, pr.p.
Bhimkāram gahetvā—Vin. I. 39
Havingtakenthewater-vessel;
Grh +
e t tvā,absol.
Bhimkovapamkam
abhibhakkhayitvā
—Vin. II. 201
Liketheyoungelephant,
havingeaten
mud;bhimko+iva;abhi+Bhaks+
ya +i +tva, absol.
Bhimsanakamvanasandam—M. I.
79
A dreadful
jungle-thicket
Bhimsanakolomahamsano—D. II.
106
679
Bhiyyosomattaya
Dreadful
andhair-raising;
Hrs +a 4 .
ana, der.; harsa>hassa> hdsa > i I TN
hamsa I I
I
Bhimsāpiyamānārodanti —
Vin. IV. I
114
Beingmadescary,theycry;
bhimsa+Gpe +iya + mana,
caus.pass.pr.p.;Rud+a +niti,
pres. 3™.pl.
Bhiyyokamyatamupādāya- Vin. II.
214; IV. 192
Desiringfor gettingmore;kamya+
ta, der.
Bhiyyo pallomamapadimaraiiie
vihārāya —M. I. 17
I becameextremelycourageousto
live in theforest;bhiyyo,indel.;
Pallomam -- āpādim;palloma,
contractedform ofpatita loma or
pannaloma;a+Pad + im, caus.
pst. 1*. sg.
Bhiyyobhavayavepullaya
samvattati—S. V. 84; Vin. IV. 12
It leadsto increaseandexpansion;
vipula+ya, der; sam + Vrt +a + ti,
pres. 3". sg.
Bhiyyosomattayaattamana
pamuditāpītisomanassaiātā—D. II.
224
Excessivelydelighted,rejoiced,
happyandcontented;pa +Mud +
i +ta, pp.
Bhiyyosomattayaattamano
abhiraddho—Vin. I. 234
Excessivelyhappyandsatisfied:abhi
+Radh + ta, pp.
 Bhiyyosomattaya
There remainedSproutsandstalksof
124
lotus;ava +Sis + ta,pp.
Dischargespus exceedingly;
bhivyosomattaya,indcl.; Da +e +ti,
Bhisicchaviyo karissāma—Vin. II,
2
pres. 3”. sg.
291
We will makemattress-coverings;
Bhiyyosomattayapatibhantu —M.
bhisi +chavi
IH. 119
Let moreideascometo Your mind;
Bhisim onandhitum—
Vin. I. 150
Pati t Bhā t ntu, imper.3” pl.
To cover the mattress:0 + Nah +(ta)
+ i+ tum,inf.; cp.thusopitandulam
Bhiyyosomattaya viriyam
Pariyonandhi, D.III. 91; andhakārena
ārabhatha—M.III. 79
onaddhā, Dh. vs.146;naddhais
Make moreandmoreeffort: @+ Rabh
formedfrom +Nah + ta, it canalso
+ a+ tha, imper.2"4.pl.
becomenandha
Bhisakkam sallakattam
Bhita muttakarisam mocentayena
upatthapeyyum—M. I. 429: II. 216,
vātenavāpalāyanti—
S. II. 85
258
They, beingscared,fleethiswayor
Would producehim beforea physician
thatway,discharging
faeces
andurine;
and surgeon;upa +Stha +ape +
Bhi + ta,pp.; mutta+karisa;Mue+
eyyum,caus. opt. 3”. pl.
é + nia, caus.pr.p.; Palay +a +nti,
pres. 3™.pl.
Bhisakkoti Tathāgatassa
adhivacanam- A. IV. 340
Bhīto atthasi —Vin. IV. 157
The word physicianis anothernamefor
He stoodscared;a +Stha+a@+5 +h
theTathāgata
doublepst. 3. sg.
Bhisakko sallakattoti Tathāgatassa
Bhīto ubbiggo ussamkīutrasso-
adhivacanam—M. II. 260
Vin. I. 347
The wordsphysicianandsurgeonare
Scared,agitated,anxious,terrified;
synonymsfor theTathagata:adhi +
u(t) + Vij + ta, pp.; u(t) + Sank+7,
vacana
der; u(t) +tras +ta,pp.(utrasto>
ulrasso)
Bhisamulālam abbāhitvā —Vin. I.
201
Bhitosamviggolomahatthajato
-D.
Havingcausedto pull out lotussprouts
I. 50, 111.17
androots;@ +Vah(or Brh) +e +i+
Frightened
agitated
andhorripilated;
vd, caus.absol.
sam+ Vij +ta,pp.;loma+Hrs+14,
PP.
Bhisā ca mulālikāyo ea avasitthā -
Vin. 1.215
Bhīruttānagatena
attanā—A. IV.
Bhutta
Bhusika
432 Bhuttavi pavarito —Vin. IV. 82
Withthemind protectedfrom fear: The onewhohasfinishedthemealand
bhiru + uttana+gata refusedmore;pa + Vr +e +i +ta,
caus.pp.
Bhuttāme mānusakākāmā — M. II.
78
Bhuttavi mahassāsī—S. I. 81
I haveenioyedthehumansense
The onewhohasfinishedthemealand
pleasure;Bhuj + ta,pp.; manu(s)+ beenbreathingheavily:maha+a +
aka, der.
Svas 2 ī, der
Bhuttavina pavaritena anatirittam
Bhuttayi muhuttamtunhi nisidati -
bhojanambhuijitum —Vin. I. 300
M. II. 139
To eatfoodwhich is not leftoverby After lunch(he)sitsdown silently for
theonewho hasalreadyfinishedeating a while; muhuttam,adv.;ni +Sad +a
andsaidenough +ti,pres.3".sg.
Bhuttāvim onītapattapānim—M. Bhunahaccānikammāni
III. 145;S. IV. 122;V. 384 attamāranīyānica —A. IV. 98
Theonewho hasfinishedthemealand The actionsofkilling living beingsand
takenthehandoutofthe bowl;o (apa) theself; the Cy. takesthetermas
+Ni +ta,pp.+patta+pani,der. bhūtahaccāniand says hatavaddhini,
IV. 49; bhiinam+ Han (hat)+ya,fut.
Bhuttāvīanumodati—M. II. 139 pp. + kamma;Mr +e +aniya,caus.
Afterlunch(He) thanks;Bhuj +
tavi,pp.; anu + Mud +a+ ti, pres.
34. Sg.
Bhummattharanamkarissama -
Vin. II. 291
Bhuttāvīassampavārito paripunno We will makea floor covering;bhami
pariyosito suhito yāvadattho —M. I.
+ attharana:a +Str +ana
12
I would have eaten, refused more,
Bhusāvātavutthi—A. IV. 405; Vin.
beenfull, finished,beensatisfied,
I. 184
takenas much as I needed: As +yam Strongwind andrain;bhusd,indcl.;
(Skt.yam),
opt.I". sg.;pa+ Vr +e+i vata +vutthi: Vrs+ ti, der.
* fa, caus,pp.; pari + Pr + ta,pp.;
pari +0 (ava) +Sa +i +ta,pp.; suw+ Bhusāvātavutthiāgantvā—A. III.
Dha +i +ta, pp.; vava +(d) +attha
370
Havingcomestrongwindandrain;ā +
Bhuttavipattambhimiyam
Gam +tvd, absol.
nikkhipati —M. II. 139
Afterlunchhe keepsthebowl on the Bhusikā uddharāpetvā
floor;ni 4 Ksip +a+ ti, pres.3". sg.
opunapetabbam—Vin. I. 181
 Bhusena
Havingcausedto removethechaff you
shouldcausetowinnowit;uri) 3:Dhr
or Hr + ape + tva,caus.absol.; o 3
Pu +na +dpe +tabba,caus. fut.Dp.
Bhusenadandena... nisedhaye—S. I.
223
Shouldcauseto preventby severe
punishment;ni +Sidh +aya +e,
caus.opt. 3”. sg.
Bhūkutim akāsi —M. I. 125
Frownedat
Bhūtagāmapātavyatāyapacittiyam
—Vin. IV. 34
In destroyingplantlife, thereis an
offenceof expiation:bhūtagāma:
Patitthitaharita tinarukkhadinam
etamadhivacanam,Cy.761
Bhātapubbam
- D.II. 146;S. I. 61;
IV. 177
This is whathappenedin thepast;
pubbe -- bhātam
Bhūtam tacchamanafifiatha—M. Il.
170
Factual,trueandsteady;an +afiia +
tha, der.
Bhūtam bhūtato patiiānitabbam -
D.I. 3
A factshouldbeacknowledgedasa
fact; pati +Jan +na +i 4 tabba, fut.
pp.
Bhitavejjako bhikkhu yakkham
iīvitā voropesi—Vin. IHI. 84
An ekorcistbhikkhudepriveda demon
oflife; vi+ 0 +Ruh4
Or Siti, caus:
pst. 3". sg.
Bhiitena Bhūto Bhogaiānim
Bhitasmim pacittiyam—
Vin, IV,25
usedas pres. anoint,
bandage
or torelease;
Bhid +
In informingsomething
factual
(tothe
ape +eyva,caus.opt.3. sg.; Phal +
unordained),thereis anoffenceof
Bhūtoyevavanno bhāsito—Vin. II. dpe +eyya,caus,opt. 3’’. 8g.;Dhay
expiation
189 +ape +eyya, caus. opt. 3. sg.; a +
Spokenonly of theekistinggualities; Li(m)p +dpe + eyya,caus.opt.3".
Bhuta tacchadhammikaanavaiiā-
bhito +(y) +eva; Bhas + i +ta,pp. sg.; Ba(n)dh + dpe +eyya, caus. opt.
D. I. 228
3”. sg.; Mue +ape +eyya,caus.opt.
Factual, true,just and not censurable;
Bhimigatanicavehasagatafica Is $2
Bhii +ta,pp.; taccha(tathya); (suvannam)—5. I. 102
dhamma+ ika, der; ana + Vad+ya, (Thegold)buriedin thegroundand Bhedayaparakkamati—Vin. II. 204
Sut.pp. kepton theupperfloor; bhiaimi
+ Gam
Worksfor dissention;para + Kram +
+ ta,pp. a + ti, pres.3. sg.
Bhutanam va sattanamthitiya
sambhavesīnam
vāanuggahāya
—S. Bhūmim vilikhanti —Vin. II. 175 Bhesajjatthayamoceti—Vin. III.
IEI Scratch the floor; vi + Likh + a + nti, 112
For thesustenance of beingswhoare pres.34.pl. Causesto discharge(semen)for
alreadybornor for thesupport of medicalpurpose;bhesajja +atthaya;
thosewho areseekingto beborn ; Bhedanakampacittiyam—Vin. IV. Muc +e + ti, caus.pres.3. sg.
Stha +i + ti, der.; sam +bhava+ 167
esa (from Is) +7,der.; anu + Grh +a, Thereis anoffenceofexpiation Bhesajjamussannamhoti—Vin. IV.
der. involvingbreakingup 101
Medicinebecameabundant;
u(t) +
Bhūtābhūtassaupapattihoti—A. V. Bhedanadhammo Syad +ta,pp.
289 nikkhepanadhammo —S. I. 71
Thearrivalofa beingisfromabeing (Thisbody)is of the natureof Bhesajjamcetapetva—Vin. IV. 250
alreadyexisted;bhitasmasabhavato breakingandlayingdown;Bhid +e + Havinggotmedicinein exchange;Cit?
vijjamdnakammasattassanibbatto ana, caus. der. + dhamma; ni +Ksip +dpe +tva,caus.absol.
hoti,Cy. V. 76;Bhat+ta,pp.;upa+ t e t ana, caus.der:
Pad + ti, der. Bhesaliamna patisevitā—A. III. 143
Bhedasamvattanikam
vā The onewho doesnotmakeuseof
adhikaranam
samadaya
—Vin. III. medicine;pati +Sev + i + tu,der.
172
Thebirthofa beingcomes froma Havingtakenupa legalquestion Bhesajjani upagatani—Vin. I. 272
beingalready
existedorthebirthofa leadingto dissention;bheda +sam + Medicinesapplied;upa +Gam+ ta,
beingis due to theactiondone Vrt +ana +ika,der.;sam+@+Da PP.
previously; u(t) +Pat +ti, or u(t t ya, absol.
Pad +ti, der. Bhesajjenaalimpentassa—Vin. II.
Bhedapeyyava phalapeyyava 117
Bhūtena vakkhāmi, no abhitena~ dhovapeyyava ālimpāpeyyavā While hewasapplyingmedicine;a +
A. V.8I bandhapeyya va mocapeyya va - Li(m)p+e +nta,pr.p.
I speakwith facts,notwithoutfacts; Vin. IV. 316
, - . - a
Vac +ssdmi(syami),fut. I" Sg
: 7 e
Shouldcauseto break,split,wash; Bhogaiānimnigacchati—D. II. 85
683
 Bhoganagare
Bhoge
Bhoge Bhoto
Undergoeslossof wealth: ni +
Bhogānamādiyā —A, IHI,45
gaccha + ti, pres. 3”. sg, Bhogeva namguttheva ganheyya- Bhojanemattanha—D. II. 107;S.
Reasonsfortheacquisition
ofwealth;
ādivā —ādātabbakāranāni,Cy.Ill, M. I. 133 IV. 104;A. I. 113;II. 40
Bhoganagareviharati Anande (He) would take (the snake) by the The onewho is moderatein eating;
252; @ +Da +ya,Sut.pp.
cetiye—D. II. 123;A. II. 167 coil or by the tail; /oc.for the reason matta+Jia +i, der.
Abides
attheshrine
of Ānanda
inthe of Grh; Grh +n@ +eyya,meta.opt.
Bhoganamparipantho
—A, V.136
cityof Bhoga SSL:
die
Bhoianesuvodasamapajjati—D. II.
Dangerto thewealth
43
Bhogam adhigantum—A. I. 115 Bhogevinivethetva—Vin. I. 3 He becomesselectivein food ;
Bhogā parikkhayam gaeehanti
—M,
Makingthecoils unwound; vi +ni + dvedhamāpaiiati, dve bhāgekaroti,
MES;
Vistor Vest+ e + tvd,absol. Cy.837; @+Pad +ya + ti ; pres. 3”.
Wealthdwindlesaway;pari +Ksi +a,
Bhogam datva vaseti —Vin. IIT. 140 sg.
der.
Havinggiven(her)wealthcausesher Bhogesumahantampattani kulani -
to stay;Da + tva,absol.: Vas +@ +ti, A. IL. 249 Bhojjayagum patiyadenti—Vin. I.
Bhoga me uppajjantu
caus.pres.3". sg. The familiesrich in wealth;pa +Ap + 222
sahadhammena— A. II. 66
ta,pp. Causeto prepareeatableporridge;
Let mehavewealthby lawfulmeans;
Bhogam phatikattum —A. I. 115 Bhuj +ya, fut.pp.; pati + Yat+e +
u(t) +Pad +ya +ntu,imper,
3 pl.
To increasewealth:phati +Kr +tum Bhogehiabhihatthum pavareyyum nti, caus.pres. 3". pl.
—S.V. 53
Bhogā sannicayamyanti—
D. III. Theywould lurehimguiteoften
Bhogavatāyanandati —A. IV. 95 Bhojjayaguyadhata—Vin. I. 222
188
For thereasonof Possessingwealthhe withwealth;abhihatthum,indel., Satisfiedwith eatableporridge;Dha +
Wealth increases : Ya + nti, pres.
rejoices;bhoga + vanta + tā; der.; adv.;pa + Vr +e +eyyum,caus. ta,pp.
3”, pil. opt.3. pl.
Nand + at ti, pres. 3'd Sg.
Bhotā Gotamenathapito —M. III. 9
Bhogeca bhufijassupufiiani ca Bhogehiparikkhipitva —Vin. I. 3
Bhogavyasanenava phuttho samano Institutedby thevenerable
Gotama;
karohi —S. V. 53 Havingencircledwith thecoils;pari Stha +Gpe+ i + ta, caus.pp.
—A. II. 188
Enioy wealthanddo goodwork; +Ksip + i +tva,absol.
Being hit by the lossof wealth:Spr€ -
Bhu(R)i 3 a +ssu,imper,
2”.sg.; Bhoto Gotamassavuttavādino—D.
fa, pp.; As + mana, pr.p.
Kr +0 +hi, imper.2". sg. Bhojanamallam va sukkam va —A. I. 161
III. 188 Reportersof thevenerableGotama,
Bhoga ca bhufjitum pufifani ca
Bhogenapatisantharati—A. III. The food,raw or dry i.e. thosewho reportcorrectlywhat is
kātum —Vin. III. 17
129 saidby thevenerable Gotama;Vac+ta,
To enioythewealthandto do
Accordsa friendlytreatment
with Bhojanam
likham vapanitamva- pp.; Vad+ i, der.
meritoriousdeeds:Bhu(fi)j +i 4 tum,
wealth;pati +sam +Str +a +ti, A. IHI. 264; IV. 189
inf.; Kr +tum,>kar +tum > kat4
pres. 3”. Sg. The food,crudeor fine
tum >katum, inf; bhoga, usedhere
shouldhe madebhogeas it occurs in
Bhoge patthayamānena—5. 1.89 Bhoianamva
iighaechato
—D. II. 266
Vin.I. 182
By a personwishingforwealth;
pa+ Just as food for thehungry;bhojanam
Arth +aya +mana,pr.p. t i'a; iighacchāfrom Ghās,desid.
Bhoganamapāyamukhāni
- D. IHI.
181
Bhogepariyesati—S. IV. 333 Bhoianemattaūiīiunābhavitabbam-
Seeks wealth; pari +esa (fromi) ta M. I. 471
+ti, pres. 3. sg, (One)shouldbemoderate
ineating
 Makaradantakam
Makaradantakam chinditum —Vin.
If. 113
To cut a swordfishtooth: Chi(n)d +;
+tum,inf,
Makasavijani upannahoti —Vin. II.
130
Mosauito-fanwasavailable
Makasehiubbālhāhonti—Vin. II.
119
Troubledby mosquitoes;u(t) +Badh
T Ia, pp.
Makkatavīthīsu lepam oddenti —
S.
V. 148
Lay a trapofpitch in thetrailsof
monkeys;0 (ava) + Di? +e +nti.
pres. 3”. pl.
Makkhikahi purakkhato —A. I. 281
Swarmedby flies:pure (Skt.puras) +
Kr + ta,pp.
Makkhikahi Samparikinnam
passitvā—Vin. IV. 261
Having seenit infestedwith flies;sam
+pari +Kir + ta,pp.
Makkhī hoti palāsī —D. IHI. 45; M. I.
96;II. 246
Hypocriticalandunmerciful:makkha
+t, der.; paldsa +, der.
Magadhakhettamaccibaddham
palibaddhammariyadabaddham
simghatakabaddham~Vin. I. 287
The fieldof Magadhaboundby square
boundaries,longandbroad
boundaries,internalshortboundaries
andcross boundaries:
accibaddhanticaturassakedarak-
abaddham, palibaddhantiāvāmato
ca vitthāratoca
dighamarivadabaddham,
mariyādabaddhantiantarantarā
rassamariyādāya
mariyādabaddham,
singhātakabaddhanti
marivādāya
marivādam vinivijjhitva
gatatthānenasimghātakabaddham,
catukkasanthānantiattho,Cy. V.
1127;Badh + ta,pp.
Magadhānam giribbaiam āgato-
Vin. I. 43
Hascometothekingdom
of Magadha,
fenced(fortified) by mountains;
Magadha -- a, der.;giri t vaia;ā
Gam + ta,pp.
Magadhesu viharati Andhakavinde
—5. I. 154;A.III. 138
AbidesatAndhakavindain thekingdom
ofMagadha
i path,skilled in thepath;magga +Jnd
Magadhesu viharati
dakkhināgirismim Ekanālāyam
brāhmanagāme
—S. I. 172
Abidesat Ekanālā,a brahminvillage
nearthesouthernmountain, in the
kingdomof Magadha
Magadhesu viharati Pafcasalayam
brāhmanagāme—
S. I. 113
Abides at the brahmin village named
Paiicasalain thekingdomof Magadha
Magadhesu
Magadhesuviharati, pacinato
RajagahassaAmbasandanama
brahmanagamo,tassauttarato
VediyakepabbateIndasālaguhāyam
—D.II. 263
Abidesin thekingdomof Magadha,at
thecaveof Indasālain therockof
Vediyakawhich is situatedtowardsthe
northof Ambasandā,thebrahmin
village,in theeastof Rāiagaha
Magadhesuviharati Manimālake
cetiye,Manibhaddassayakkhassa
bhavane—S. I. 208
Abidesat theManimālakashrine,the
residenceof theyakkhaManibhadda,
in thekingdomof Magadha
Magadhesuviharati Mātulāyam -
D. III. 58
Abidesat Matula in thekingdomof
Magadha
Magavisanenapitthim
kandūvamāno— M. I. 343
Scratchingthebackwitha deer-horn;
kandiiva+mana,pr.p.
Maggahhūmaggavidūmaggakovido
—M.III. 8; S. I. 191
Knowerof thepath,experiencerofthe
+a,der; magga+Vid+u,der;
magga +kovida
Maggam āsevati bhāveti
bahulīkaroti—A. II. 157
Pursuesthepath,cultivates,and
Practisesfreguently;ā 1.Sey t a 1 ti,
pres. 3. sa.; Bhiti +a + e + ti, caus.
pres,3". sg; bahula +karoti: Kr +0
+ti, pres, 3". se.
Maggāmaggahānadassanavisuddhi
Maggamgacchantassa(bhikkhuno)
—Vin. III. 117
For a bhikkhugoingon theroad;
maggam, acc.sg. used in loc. sense;
gaccha + nta,prp.
Maggampatipajjeyyum—S. II. 98
(They)wouldembarkon ajourney:
pati + Pad +ya + eyyum,opt.3”. pl.
Maggampatibhayamyathā—
D. III.
186
Tustasa dangerous
road;yathā,indci.
Maggampidaheyya—M. I. 117
(He) wouldclosedown thetrack;api
+Dha +eyya,opt.3™.sg.
Maggamvisodheti—A. IV. 285
Makesthepathextremelyclean;vi +
Sudh +e + ti, caus.pres. 3™.
n
sg.
Magga okkamma—
D. II. 128;M. I.
45;S. V.348;Vin. I. 23
Havingsteppedasidetheroad;0 (ava)
+Kram +ya, absol.
Maggānugāca panetarahisāvakā
viharanti pacchāsamannāgatā —M.
I1I. 8; S. I. 191
The disciples,thefollowers, abideat
present,following thepath;magga+
anu +ga; pana +etarahi;paccha +
sam +anu +a+ Gam~+ ta,pp.
Maggamaggananadassanavisuddhi
yavadevapatipadananadassana
visuddhattha
—M. I. 150
Purificationby knowledgeandvision
ofthe rightandwrongpath is just for
thepurificationby knowledgeand
visionof theprocedure;magga+
 Maggāmagge
Maiiam
Maiihe
amagga+ Rdna + dassana+
A. IV. 364
visuddhi;yava + (d) + eva; visuddhi nti, root redup.,pres. 3". pl.
The stingyis madeobserve,settleand The middleway(nobleeightfoldpath)
+attha whichgivesaneye,knowledgeand
establishin generosity;sam+a +Da
Majjam maiifie taya pitam—Vin. IV. leadsto calmness,higherknowledge,
+dpe +ti, caus.pres,3". Sg.;ni +
Maggāmaggekathā udapādi —
D. I. 149 enlightenmentandNibbana;sam + Vrt
Vis +e +ti, caus.pres.374Sg.pa+
235 I supposeyou havedrunkintoxicant: +a +ti,pres.3". sg.
tittha +dpe + ti, caus,pres.3”.sg.
Therearosea discussionon theright Pa or Pt +ta,pp.
pathandthewrongpath:u(t) +@+Pad Maiihimāya dvārasālāya
Maccha khipamva odditam—
S, [.74
+i, pst.3. sg. Majjhantike kale —Vin. III. 202 ullikhāpeti—M. II. 61
Just likethefishentering
intothe
Duringmid-daytime He causesto combhis hairatthe
fishing netthrownover:khipam+iva;
Magge pariyutthimsu —Vin. I. 277; doorof the centralhall; u/likhapetiti
o t Di +ta,pp.
IV. 131 Majjhantike vitivatteyava kappakenakesepaccādhāpeti,Cy. LIT.
Rose up on (blocked)theroad:pari + atthamgatesuriye —Vin. IV. 273 295; u(t) +Likh +Gpe +ti, caus.
Macchikam macchabandham
u(t) + Stha +imsu,pst. 3° pl. Whenthenoontimehaspassed,until pres. 3”. sg.
? e ra te

(addasā) —A. IIL 301

thesunset;vi + ati + Vrt +ta,Pp.;
Saw
afishermancatching
ahaulof atthamgatesuriye, loc. absl.
Magge purisam thapesum—
S. V. Majjhimesujanapadesupaccajato-
fish; maccha+ ika, der; a +Drf tā,
348;A. IHI.168 A. IV. 226
pst. 3. sg. Maiihimam thambhamnissāya
(They)kepta manontheroad:Stha+ Born in themiddlecountries;pati + a
ape +s + um,caus.pst. 3 pl. puratthābhimukhonisīdi — D. II. 85; +Jan + ta,pp.
Maccheramalapariyutthitena cetasa M. I. 354; S. IV. 183
—S. IV. 240;A. 1.281 Leaningagainstthemiddlepillar(He)
Magge va patipadāyavā —M. II. 245 Majjhe gabbho,samantapariyagaro
Withthemindaroused bythetaint
of satdown, facingtheeast;ni +Sri +
On thepathor practice —Vin. III. 119
stinginess;macchera+mala+pari+ ya,absol.;purattha+abhimukha;
ni Innerchamber
is inthemiddle,
u(t) +Stha + i + ta,pp. +Sad +a +i, pst.3”.sg.
Maggo gantabbo hoti —A. IV. 332 thehouseis aroundit; majjhe
Thejourney is to be completed;Gam caturassamgabbhamkatvā bahi
Maccheramalam
pativinodenti—A. Majjhimassa purisassa asisaghatta - mandalamāiaparikkhepena kato,
t rabba,fut.pp.
III. 244 Vin. IV. 46 yathā sakkā hoti antoveva
They maketherust of stinginess Thatwhichdoesnottouchtheheadof avinjantehivicaritum,Cy. 532;
Maggo databbo —Vin. II. 221
remove;pati + vi +Nud +e +nti, a medium-sizedman pari + agaro
Shouldgive way;Da +tabba,fut. pp.
caus.pres.3™,pl.
Majjhimassapurisassaleddupatam Majjhena majjham nagarassa
Maggo sahiāyati —A. II. 157
Macche vadhitva vadhitva —Vin. IV. 40 haritvā —D. II. 160
The pathis ushered:sam +Jan +ya +
vikkinamanam
—A. III. 301 Stone-throw of a medium-sized Having carried iust throughthe
tl, pres. 3". sg.
Theonewhoiskillingandselling
fish person;Pat +a, der. middle of the city; Hr +a+i+
continuously;
Vadh+i +tva,absol.; tvā, absol.
Maccudheyyamsuduttaram —§. I.
vi +Kri +na@+mana,pr.p. Majjhimapatipada—A. I. 295
60
Middleway(fourbases
of Maiihe bhikkhusamghassathapetvā
The realmof deathis hardto cross:
Maccho nama udakacaro—Vin.IV. mindfulness) —Vin. II. 294
maccu +Dhd@E eyya,der; su +du +
88 Havingkept(it) in themidstofthe
Tr + a, der.
Fishis theonemovinginthewater Maiihimāpatipadāeakkhukaranī communityof bhikkhus;Stha +dpe +
āānakarapī
upasamāya abhiāiāya tva, caus. absol.
Maccharimcagasampadaya
Maiiampi
pivanti—Vin.l.
10. sambodhāyanibbānāyasamvattati-
Samadapetiniveseti patitthapeti -
S. V. 421; Vin. I. 10 Majjhe simghatakepasado—D. I. 83
(They)drinkintokicant
too;pi t Pā"
 Maheakam
In the middle of the cross road. there littlebed(withthehopeofgetting
up)
is a mansion
: Processesof thinkingdo notoperate;
sam +a+ Cup +a +i, pst.3” sey
thereare variantreadingsas,
Mancakamabbhantaram
samficosi,samadhosi,Samaiicopi
panhnapeyyam —Vin. IV. 18
May I prepare
alittle bedinside;abhi
Maficamvetum—Vin. II. 150
+ antara
To weavethebed;Va +e +tum,inf
Maācake uttānam nipaiiāpetvā -
Maāce pattam nikkhipanti—Vin.II,
Vin. 1.271
114
Havingmadeherlie down, faceup,on (They) keepthebowl on thebed;ni +
a little bed;ni +Pad +ya+ ape +
Ksip +a +nti,pres.3".pl.
tva, caus. absol.
Maāee maācam āropetvāpīthe
Maācake uttānā nipaiii —Vin. IHI.
pītham āropetvā—Vin. II. 211
132
Havingcausedto putonebedon
Lay down, faceup,on thelittle bed:ni another,
onechaironanother;
@+Ruh
+Pad +ya + i, pst. 3%.sg. t e t tvd,caus.absol.
Maācakena cepi mam
Maāicevaaiihesanti—S. V. 143
pariharissatha —M. I. 83
(They) requestmetoo;mam+ca+
Even if you carrymewith a stretcher: eva; adhi + es (fromIs) +a +nti,
ce +api; pari + Hr +a+ i +ssatha, pres.3. pl.
ard
cond. 2". pl.
Maāiarikamkaronti—Vin.Il. 9
Maficakena va pithakena va (They) makea wreath
samghamajjheanetva—Vin. I. 120
Havingbrought(him) to theassembly
Maīiunā bhanitena
—A. IIL.69
of theSamghaby astretcher or alittle With sweetwords;Bhan +i +ta,pp.
chair; samghamajjhe,object is given
herein theloc.; @ +Ni +tva,absol.
Maāiunāsarenagāyi—Vin.1.345
Sangwitha beautiful
voice;Gai+ya
Maācake nipaiiāpetvā, maīicake Ei, put, 2" sa.
sambandhitva—Vin. I. 274
Havingmadehimliedownonalittle Mafijetthavannani
dussani
bedandtiedhim down to it: mafica+
acchādetvā—M. II. 155
ka; ni +Pad +ya 4 dpe +tvd,caus.
Having
made
himdress
ina little
red
absol.;sam +Ba(n)dh +i +tva,
colour clothes;@+Chad +e +wā,
absol.
caus. absol.
Maficake samacopi—S. III. 120
Maīiāussavā
nappavattanti
—M.II.
Turnedthiswayandthatwayon the
246
Maāhussave
Matim
Thosewhohaveassembled andsat
manna+ ussava; pa +Vrt +a +nti, downtogetherat theservicehall,
pres.3”. pl. discuss
Abhidhamma
points;
sam+ni
+Sad +ta,pp.; sam +ni +Pat + i+
Manifiussavenappavattamanemuni ta,pp.; katha+e +nti, denom.pres.
santotivuccati —M. III. 239 SL,
Thesageis calledthepeaceful
whenthinkingprocessis inoperative; Mandalamālesannisinnānam
santo+ iti; Vac +ya +ti, pass.pres. sannipatitanamayamantarakatha
I Se: udapadi—S. IV. 281; V. 436
This discussiontookplaceamong
Maninā me attho — Vin. III. 146
thosewhohadassembled andsatdown
Iam in needof a gem togetherin theservicehall; ayam+
antard:indcl.;u(t) + a +Pad + i, pst.
Manissakanthe pilandhanam— Vin.
3” ge
II. 146
A iewelledornamenton thethroatof Mandalāni na acchupiyanti—Vin. II.
this;mani +assa 112
Circularrestsarenottouched:a +
Mandanavibhūsanatthānānuyogam-
Chup +iya +nti, pass.pres. 3”. pl.
anuyuttā—D. I. 7
Thosewhoareindulgedin adorning Mandalikam katum —Vin. II. 120
andembellishing;anu +Yuj +a, der.; To pile up low ground;nicavatthukam
anu +Yuj +ta,pp. cinitum,Cy. 1207
Mandanāvibhūsanāvannassaāhāro
—A.V. 136 Matakacivaramadhitthati—Vin. I.
Foodforcomplexion
is adornment, 308
embellishment Decidesit asa robeofthe dead:adhi
+Stha +ti, pres.3”.
d
sg.
Mandape
patiyadenti
—Vin. II. 162
Causeto preparepavilions;pati + Yat Matam teiīvitā seyyo—Vin. III. 72
te +nti, caus.pres. 3™.pl. Deathis betterfor you thanlife; seyyo
usedfor comparisonwith abl.
Mandalabaddham
salākabaddham
-
Vin. IV. 200
Matam yebhuyyenakhayitam—Vin.
Madein roundshapewith smallsticks; Ill. 29
Badh +ta, PP.
Thedeadbodymostlydecomposed;
Ksi + i + ta, pp.
Mandalamālesannisinnā
Sannipatitāabhidhammakatham
Matim akamsu—Vin. II. 190
kathenti—A. III. 392
Expressed
anopinion;a +Kr +@+
 Mattam
imsu,doublepst.3”. pl.
Mattam iānāti —A. IHI. 145
(He) knows thelimit; Jan +na + ti,
pres. 3”. sg.
Mattam na janati patiggahanaya-
M. I. 222
Doesnotknow the limit in receiving;
pati + Grh +ana, der.
Mattam mattam ca paniyam
piveyyasi—D. IIL. 8
You shoulddrinkjust a little drink: Pi
* eyyasi,root redup. opt. 2”. sg.
Mattam mattam ca bhattam
bhunjeyyasi—D. IHI. 8
You shouldeatiust a little food;
Bhu(hli t eyvāsi,opt. 2"i Sg.
Mattikaya mukham makkhetva -
Vin. I. 47
Havingappliedclay on theface:Mrks
+ e + tvd, caus. absol.
Matthake avatthāsi—Vin. III. 79;
IV. 46
Fell on the head: ava + Stha +s 4i,
pst. 3. sg.
Matthake asumbhitva —Vin. IV. 263
Lettingit fallonthehead;a +Sumbh
+i +mā,absol.
Matthalumgam pariyadiyissati -
Vin. I. 274
Brain will beoverpowered;pari +
ā +Da+ iya +i +ssati,pass.fut.
3! sg.
Madaniyemaiiati —A. IHI. 110
692
M adhugolakam Madhupindikam
Manasikaromāti
(He) is intokicatedon matters
of Madhupindikam adhigaccheyya- I". pl.; pa + nassama
intoxication;Mad +ya +ti,Pass. M. I. 114
pres. 3. se. (He) would obtaina honey-ball; Manam vilho ahosi—Vin. I. 109
madhupindikantimahantam Nearlydrowned;Vah+ ta,pp.
Madappamada pativirata, gulapūvam,baddhasattugulakam
vā,
khantisoraccenivitthā —A. IHI.46 Cy.Il. 78;adhi +gaecha t eyya,opt. Manasadhammamvififidyana
Refrainedfrom intoxicationand OTASE nimittaggahi hoti
unheedfulness,adheredto tolerance nānuvyahianaggāhī—D. I. 70; M. IHI.
andgentleness;mada+pamada; pati Madhumehoābādho ukkattho- 35; S. IV. 76
+ vi + Ram + ta,pp.; Ksam+ti,der Vin. IV. 7 Havingunderstood mental
+surata +ya, der, Diabetesis a seriousdisease:madhu+ phenomenon with themind,hedoes
Mih +a, der.; u(t) +Krs + ta,pp. notbecomeonewho takesthegeneral
Madamatto sikkham paccakkhaya appearance andtheparticularfeatures
hīnāyāvattati —
A. I. 147 Madhurakajato viya (me) kayo of theobjectintothemind; vi +Jaa +
The one,who is intoxicated,
turnsback disāpime na pakkhāyanti
tothelowlifeaftergivingupthe dhammāpimam na patibhanti—D. +anu + vyanjana+ Grh +tf,der.
11.99;S. ITI. 106;V. 153
courseoftraining; Mad +ta,pp.;pati
+a+ Khya +ya, absol.;hinaya+a My body,I feel,is iust like Manasapino aticarati, kuto pana
intoxicated,directionsarenotclearly
+Vrt +a+ ti,pres,3”.sg. kāyena?—D.II. 176;M. III. 175
visible,eventheDhammas do not (She) is not unfaithful even in thought,
Maddakucchismim migadaye
—
Vin. cometo my mind safjatagarubhavo, howcouldshebein body?;manasa+
IIT. 160 sahiātathaddhabhāvo, sūle api; ati + Car +a +ti, pres.3”. sg.
At thedeer-park
in Maddakucchi uttāsitasadiso,Cv. 547; viya, indcl.
Manasikaraniyedhamme—M. I. 7
Maddapetvapalalani Madhurabhattānigahetvā—Vin. II. Thingsto bereflectedon; manasi+
uddharapetabbani
—Vin. If. 180 175 Kr +aniya,fut.pp.
Havingtakensumptuousfoods;Grh +
Having causedto thresh,thestraw
shouldberemoved;
Mrd+ape+tvé, e t tvā, absol Manasikaritvābyākarohi —M. I.
caus. absol.; u(t) + Dhr or Hr +dpe 232
Madhusitthakena
sāretum—
Vin. II. Answer(me)aftercarefulreflection;
+tabba, caus. fut. pp.
116 manasi+ Kr +i +tva,absol.; vi + @
Madditva
gabbham
patesi
—Vin.Ill. To cause to move with beeswax:Srte +Kr +0 +hi, imper.2™.sg.
84 "tum, caus.inf: ; makkhetum,
Cy.
1206
(She)causedabortion
bycrushng Manasikarota no amanasikarota -
(thewomb);Mrd +ya +i +ta, pass. A. IL. 187
Manamvata bho anassama,manam By a personwho is attentive,not
absol.; Pat +e +s +i, caus.pst.ah
vatabho panassama—M. I. 177;II. inattentive;
Kr +o +tu,der.
ō
123
Wearenearlylost,sir,wearenearly Manasikaromati ekaggacitta
perished;an idiomatic expression avikkhittacitta avisahatacitta
fora narrowescape:manam,
adv., nisamema—Vin. I. 103
indcl,: a+ Nag + ya + ma, pres.
tum,inf.; Is Manasikaromameanswe become
693
 Manasikātumpi
attentivewith a mindone-pointed,
unscatteredandundisturbed:manasi+
karoma;eka +agga +citta: a + vi 4
Ksip +ta,pp. +citta; a +vi +Sah +
a +ta,pp.
caus. pres, 1". Sg.
Manasikatumpi na phasu hoti,
pagevagantum—A. I. 275
Not easyevento remember,much
moreto go; pageva,indci.
Manasikārasamudayādham mānam
samudayo—S. V. 184
Manussakantesy
Manussakhipam Manussehi
be of the same case
humanbeings;manussa+kanta Havingobtaineda gift of humanlife;
(pp.of kameti);sam +a +Da + Labh +tvana, absol.
Manāpadāyī labhatemanāpam-—A,
dpe +ana, caus. der.
III. 50
Manussalokavedaniyam kammam-
Theonewhogivesthedesirable
begets
Manussakhipammaiife —A. I. 33, A. II. 415
thedesirable;Da +(y) +&der; Labh
287 The action,to beekperiencedin the
+a +te,pres,mid,3”.sg.
He is, I feel,a humantrap;khipais humanworld; Vid +e +aniva,caus
fishing net Jut. pp.
Manāpamevabhāseyya—
Vin. IV,5
Shouldspeakonlywhatispleasing: Manussattampatilabheyyam—Vin. Manussaidha upacaranti,
Bhas+eyya,opt.3". sg. 1.87 apasakkatha—Vin. IV. 183
I wouldgeta humanlife; manussa+ Peoplemovearoundhere,go away;
Manapamanapamsamkhatam tta,der.;pati + Labh +eyyam,opt.
apa + Svask+a +tha,pres.2™.pl
olārikam paticcasamuppannam
- 1". sg
I 7

Dhammasoriginatedependingon
M. ITI. 299 Manussaujjhayanti khiyanti
attention;boiihamgadhammānam
Like anddislike areconditional, Manussadaliddoahosi manussa vipacenti—Vin. I. 43
samudayo,Cy. III. 229; manasi 3
grossanddependently
arisen;
manapa kapanomanussavarāko —S. I. 231 Peoplecriticise,voic
kara + sam +u (t) +ava (fromI)
+amandpa;sam (s) + Kr +ta,pp.; (He)wasa poor humanbeing, and condemn them: u(t)
paticca +sam + u(t) +Pad +ta,pp. miserableandwretched
Manasikārasambhavāsabbe
dhammā - A. IV. 339
Manapena abhivadenti—A. IV. 10 Manussadobhaggam upapailati—A.
All ‘things’originateon attention:
Payrespects
witha pleasant
mind; IV. 241
manasikara + sambhava
abhi +Vad+e +nti, caus.pres.3”. He reachesthemen
of bad luck: Manussa va mam upakkameyyum -
pl. manussesu sampattirahitam A. IV. 320
Manassakho brahmana sati
ulam,Cy. IV. 127 iS WOUK
patisaranam—S. V. 218
Manāpenaāsanamdenti—A. IV.10 upa
MA
+ Pad
pore)
+ ko
va
Brahmin,memoryis thesupportto
Offera seatwitha pleasant
mind;
Dat
mind;sati, Skt. smrti
e +nti, pres. 3". pl.
Manussabhūtassa bahukārā
Manapakayikanam devanam
Manāpenapaceutthenti
—A. IV.10 dhammā—A. II. 245
sahavyatamupapaiiati—A. IHI. 38 Things which are of great help to a
Rise up from theseatwitha pleasant
Goes to thecompanionshipof the humanbeine
mind; pati +u(t) +Stha + e+ nti,
gods of lovely form;manāpa '- kāya
pres.3. pl.
ika, der.; sahavya 3-tā, dey::upa Manussammahantambrahantam
Pad +ya +ti, pres. 3” $9.
Manufiiambhojanambhuttavissa
- kayupapannam jano disva —A. III.
D. II. 195 346
Manāpakāyikā nāma devatā—A. IV. Pex ple
:
For a personwho hasenioyeda
263
beautifulmeal;Bhui '- tāvī,PP.
DeitiesnamedManāpakāyika(those Uccupiec Dy the pcopic
who havelovely forms);ndma,indel. i
re
Manussakantesu sīlesu
usedhereto indicatea name,the Manussalābham
laddhāna—
A. IV.
samādapanāya—
M. III. 132
nounson bothside of namashould 2237
Manussehianuyatam
—S. II. 106
To make him follow the waysof

695
 Mane
Manosilikāya Manthena
Followedbypeople;anu+ ¥a +ta,
Manobhāvanīyebhikkhūdassanāya
Pp. 104 Mantānampatiggahetā—M. II.
payirupāsanāya—
D. II, 140
Mentalactivitiesarewell established: 134
To seeandattendon respectable
Mane sati manosahcetanāhetu —A. eittasamkhārā (vedanā, sahhā) The receiverof mantras;
pati +Grh +
bhikkhus;
pari+upa+As+ana,
TEEL sutthapita,Cy.887; pa + ni +Dha + e+ tu,der.
meta. der.
Whenthereis mind,depending
onthe i+ ta, pp.
Manta mantavacambhasati,
Manomayam kayam
Manosilikaya mukham lanchenti- nidhānavatimkālena— D. III. 106
abhinimminanaya
cittam i
Manesikāyapi kīlanti —Vin. II. 10 Vin. Il. 107 After carefulconsideration,he
abhinīharati, abhininnāmeti—D.I.
(They) play with thoughtreadingtoo; Makespecialmarkson thefacewith speakstreasure-worthywordsin an
77
mana+ esika; Krid + a + nti, pres. reddye;Lafich +e +nti, caus.pres. appropriatetime;mantavuccati
To create a mind-made body,(he)
2rd
3", pi. Spl. panna, mantaya pannaya, puna
directsthe mindandcausestoproject
mahtātiupaparikkhitvā,Cy. 892;
it; abhi + ni (s) +Hr +a +tipres.
Manokammantasandosavyāpatti
—A. Manosucaritambhāveyya—A. III. manta, a contractedform of mantvā,
3”. sg. abhi + ni +Nam+e +ti
V. 292 189 absol.;Bhas + a +ti, pres.3. sg.
caus. 2
DFES.) A'S. Sg.
Faultandtransgression
relatingto Shouldcultivategoodmental
mentalaction;mano+ kammanta+ behaviour;Bhā -- e -- eyya,caus.opt. Mantayabodhabbam—
D. II. 246;A.
Manomayam
kayamupapanno
- Vin. Sse IV. 136-7
sandosa+ vi + @+ Pad + ti, der
Il. 185 It shouldberealisedby wisdom:
The onewho hasreachedmind-made Mantatthikā manteadhīvitukāmā- pahiiāyaiānitabbam,A. Cy. IV. 66;
Mano nābhiramissati —A. IHI. 443
realm;mano+maya,der.;upa+Pad D. I. 114 Budh +tabba,fut. pp.
The mindwill find no specialinterest;
+ta,pp. Desiringfor mantrasandtheirstudy;
na +abhi + Ram + i 3-ssati,fut, 3”.
manta--attha -- ika, der:;adhi + 1 + Manta vacambhaseyyum—M. II.
SZ.
Manomayena
kāyena
- A. IV.235 ya+i+ tum,inf. +kama 202
With a mind-madebody They wouldmakea statement after
Mano patisaranam, mano ca nesam
Mantampariyapunati—Vin. IV. 203 carefulconsideration;mantāti
gocaravisayampaccanubhoti—M. I.
Manoviiifieyya dhamma—M. II. Learnsthemantraby heart;pari +Ap tulayitvā,pariganhitvā,Cv.ll. 447;
295
203 +(UW)
nd +ti, pres. 3.
2;
sg. Bhas +eyvum,opt,3. pl.
Mind is thesupportandmindenjoys
Things to beknownby mind;witā
their domain:Pati +sarana; pati +
+evya,fut.pp. Mantamvacessati—Vin. IV. 204 Mante vacesi —D. II. 236
anu +Bhii +a +ti, pres, 3”. Sg.
Will teach(causesto repeat)mantra; Taught mantras;Vac +e +s + i, caus.
Manovutthahissati —A. IHI.443 Vac+e +ssati,caus.fut. 3”. sg. pst. 3. sg.
Mano padūseyya—M. I. 120
(My) mindwill riseup(fromallforms
Wouldcauseto pollutethemind;
of'ekistence);v ui tāti' Mantānamkattāro mantānam Manthenaca madhupindikenaca
pa +Dus +e + eyya,caus,opt.
ssati,fut. 3. sq. pavattāro—M. II. 169 patimanetha—Vin. 1.4
3le:
Composersof hymnsandrecitersof Servehimwithchurnedflourandthe
Manosamkhāram
abhisamkharoti
- hymns;pa + Vac +tu, der; pavattaro flour-ball mixedwith honey;
Manobhāvanīyānambhikkhūnam
A. IL. 158 canalsobederived
frompa + Vrt + abaddhasattuna ca
sammukhāsutam—A. V. 55 B
Accumulatesmentalhabitsor tu,(keepersof hymns) sappimadhuphanitadthi yojetva
It hasbeenheardby mein the
energies; abhi +sam(s) +Kr +0* ii, baddhasattunā ca, Cy. V. 960;
presenceof respectablebhikkhus:
pres. 3.rä sg. Mantānam
dātā—M. II. 134 patimānethātiupatthahatha,Cy. V.
mano+ Bhi +e +aniva, caus. fut.
Thegiverof mantras(vedichymns); 960;pati + Man +e +tha,caus.
Pp.; Sru + ta, pp.
Manosamkhārā
panihitā
—D. IHI. Da +tu, der. pres. 2™.pl.

697
 Mandatta
Mamam Mam
Mandattā momūhattā— A. IHI. 219
Listen to me too; Sru +na +tha,
For thereasonofsluggishness and As if theywerelaughingatme;anu+ Havingunderstood
mythought;
a@ +
bres:284:pi
confusion(of mind); manda+ tta, o (ava) + Ghar +nta, intens. pr. p.

der. + ā; momūha, intens.of Muh

Mama bhattā,mamayānā- M, II,
Mamamyeva mukham olokentī Mamanukubbamkapanomarissati
123 nisinnā—M. II. 30
Thosewhoenioymyfoodanduse
my Directlylooking at my face,(the
Vin. I. 31 While followingme,hewill die asa
vehicles crowd)hadbeensitting; 0 + Lok+e destitute;mamam+anu +Kr +nta,
+nti, prp.; ni + Sad + ta, pp.
containingembers;abhi + ni + Ma
Mama bhikkhusamgham
nissajjatu
(Mi) +nā +i,pst.3. sg.
—Vin. II. 188 Mamamva karana afiilesamva Mamuddesikobhikkhusamgho— D.
Pleasehandoverthecommunity
of karana—Vin. I. 339 II. 100
Mandaravapupphehi santhata—D.
bhikkhustome;ni (s)+Sr +ya+tu, Becauseof me or becauseof others The communityof monksis hanging
II. 160
imper.3”. sq. on me;mam+u(t) +Dr§ +e + ika,
Strewnwith Mandārava(coral tree)
Mamavacanenaāmantehi—M. I. caus. der.
flowers;sam+Str +ta,pp.
srt Mamam khvayam moghapuriso 123:I. 121;SOIL SL2)I
uppandeti —Vin. I. 216 Callhimin my word Mamevaanubandhitabbam
Mamaiiiieva ajjhesanti—A. IV. 299
This foolishpersonmakes
funofme; maīianti —5. V. 143
Request
meandmeonly;mamam
+
kho +ayam;u(t) + Pand +e +ti MamavacanenaBhagavatopāde They thinkonly of measthepersonto
yeva; adhi + es(fromIs) + a + nti.
pres.3”4.sg. sirasāvandāhi— D. II. 72; M. II. 91, be followed;anu+Ba(n)dh+i +
pres. 3”. pl.
vanda tabba,fut. pp.
Mamamāroceyyāsi
—D. II, 73 Worship,with thehead,theBlessed
Mamaiifieva saddhim
You shouldinformeme;ā 3 Ruete' One’sfeetin my word (in my name); Mamevaārabbha—M. I. 249
patisammodati—Vin. II. 154
eyyāsi,caus. opt. 2"4,sg.; normally Vand
+a +hi, imper.2™.sg. Concerningonly me;ārabbha,indci.
Ekchangesgreetingsonly with me:
dat.(mama) is used with ā t Rue
saddhim,indel. normally used with
Mamavacanehiāmantehi—D. II. Mamevapatipucchitvā
instr, but here with gen.
Mamam dakkhinam ādiseyyāsi
—A. 143 patipucchitvā—M. I. 27
IV. 64 Addressin my words;a +manta+e + Ouestioningonly me,againandagain;
Mamatthaya pavarehi —Vin. I. 161 hi,denom.imper.2”. Sg.
Youshouldoffermemerit;a +Drs+ mam+eva;pati +Preh +ya + i+
Make theinvitationon my behalf;
eyydsi,opt.2". sg. Ivā, absol.
Mamasantikearahattapattim
Mamam yeva tattha uttarim vyākaroti—A. II. 157 Mamevasantikeāgacchasi—A. IHI.
Mamapaccassosum
—D. I. 157 Declares
in mypresence
the
patipuccheyyāsi
—M. II. 158 368
Gaveanswersto me;pati +a+ Sru 4 attainment
of Arahanthood;arahatta+
On thatmatter
youshould askme You comeonly to me;mama+eva;
s+ um,pst. 3’. pl.
further;mamam+ (y) +eva;pati* pa t Ap + ti, der.; vi +&+ Kr tot common usage is santikam
Prch +ya +eyyasi,opt.2™.sg: ti,pres.3". sg.
Mama pabbajja tava patibaddha-
Mamkum kattukamo—Vin. IV. 7
Vin. II. 181 Mama santike āneyyātha —S. I. 221 Desiring
tomakeembarrassed;
Kr +
Mamamyeva
patipucchanti
—D.II.
My renunciationis dependenton (that Youshouldbring(him ) to me;a +Ni
284 tum,inf. +kama
of ) yours;pati +Badh +ta,pp.
They ask mecounterquestion a +eyyéitha,
opt.2™.pl.
Mam kule paribhindi —A. IV. 87
Mamapi sunatha—M. II. 166;S. I. Mama
samkappamahiiaya
—A.IV.
Mamamyeva
mafifie
anojagghanta
- Setmeat variancein thefamily;pari +
17 235
D. I. 91 Bhi(n)d +
i, pst.3. sg.
 Mamgalatthāya
Mayam Mayhameva
Mamgalatthayayaciyamana—Vin. Mampathamataram uyyojetya-
II. 129 Vin. I. 30 Surelywe aretheunfortunate,
weare thepreviousteachersandgrand
Being requestedfor blessing; Havingmademegoearlier:
u(t)+hi thepeopleof littlemerit;mayam4 teachersweretalking;dcariya +
mamgala+atthéya; Yae +iva + E e t tvwā,
caus.absol. eva+amha:As +ma,meta.pres. 1". pacariya; Bhds +a t māna,pr.p.
mana,Pass. pr:p. pl.; a +lakkha +ika, der.
Mayapi etamsutam—A. IV. 41
Mam vippakaroti—
Vin. II, 133
Mamgalam etam —Vin. IV. 265 Mayamkho bhagini niccabhattika- This hasbeenheardby metoo;maya
Harassesme; vi +pa +Krt+o+ti
This is a goodomen Vin. II. 78 +api; Sru +ta,pp.
pres. 3”. sg.
Sister,we are(the monks)of regular
Mamgalam pacceti no kammam —A. meal;nicca +bhatta +ika, der. Maya putthana sampāyanti—D. II.
Mam savakam labhitva—A, IV,185
HI. 206 284
Havinghadme a disciple;Labh+i +
Believesinauspicious
signs,notin MayamBhagavatocitakam Beingquestionedby metheywere
tvd, absol.
action;pati +e(fromI) +ti, pres. 3,
QF
alimpessamatina sakkonti unabletoexplain;Prch +ta,pp.;
Sg.
'o ālimpetum— D. II. 163 sam +pa+a~+ Ya +nti, pres.
Mayamassupavāsamgantukāmā-
Theywereunableto setfire on the 3%.
pl.
A. IV.285 funeralpyreof theBlessedOne,
Mam gāthāhi aiihabhāsi —M. IHI.
We hopeto go abroad;gantum+kama
262 althoughtheysaidwe shallalightthe Mayi aveceappasannā, sabbete
He addressedme in verses:adhi + a+ pyre;a + Li(im)p -- e t ssāma, caus. sotāpannā—A. V. 120
Mayamassu
brahmananamadanani fut.1"pl.; Sak + no + nti, pres.3™.pl.
Bhas + i, pst. 374.sg. All of themwhohaverationalfaithin
dema,saddhani karoma—A. V,269
mearestreamentrants;ava + J (t) +
We,brahmins, givealmsandperform Mayamha naiānāma dānamdātum
Mamgulim itthim vehāsam ya, absol.;pa +Sad + ta,pp.; sota +
funeralrites(in whichfoodandgifts —Vin.II. 270
gacchantam—Vin. III. 107 a + Pad +ta,pp.
aregiven to thebrahmins);
mayam
+ Indeed,
wedonotknowhowtomakea
A womanwho is yellowishandgoing
assu; assu, indel. gift;ha,emph.p.; Jan +na +ma,
in thesky; vihd@yasa
+ a, der.,ya is Mayi dhammanvayona bhavissati-
—-
pres.I. pl.; Da +tum,inf: M. I. 69
elided
Mayametthakālamiānissāma
-M. In referenceto me,therewill be no
1.379; A. IV. 186;Vin. I. 237 MayakhoSarabhapaniiayati inferentialknowledgeof theDhamma;
Mam cepi etamattham
On this matter we will know theright Sakyaputtiyanamdhammo—
A. L. dhamma+anu +aya (fromI); Bhit +
puccheyyātha—A. V. 229
time(we know whattodo);mayam + 186 a+i+ssati, fut. 3”. sg.
Even if you wouldaskmeaboutthis;
ettha;Jan +na +i +ssama,fut.1”. TheDhamma
of theSakyan
sonsis
ce +api; etam+attham; Prch +ya
pl. knownbecauseof me:pa +Jia +ya Mayi paccāsimsati—D. II. 100;5. V.
+eyyatha,opt. 2”. pl.
+ti,pass.pres. 3™.sg. 153
Mayamevaarahāma—
M. II. 166 Expectsof me;pati +@+Sams +a +
Mamdīpā mamlena mamtana
It isonlywewhodeserve;
Arh+a* Mayaca na labbha ekikāya vatthum ti, pres. 3. sg.
mamsarapāviharanti —S. IV. 315
ma,pres. 1".pl. —Vin. II. 278
Theyabide,takingmeasanisland,
shelter,protectionandrefuge;
Metoocannotlivealone;/abbhd, Mayi brahmacariyamcaranti —
D. I.
Mayamevadhamsi,mayameva indcl,usedwith instr. like sakkā, 156
mamdipaete.are comp.
pagabbha—M. I. 236 bothare old forms of opt. 3™.sg. (They)leadthehighestwayoflife
Certainly,
wearethedeprived,
weare underme;Car +a +nti,pres.3”. pl.
Mam dhati amkena vahitvā—M. II.
the reckless Mayapikho etam sutam
97
pubbakānamācariyapāeariyānam Mayhamevadanamdatabbam—Vin.
Thenurse,havingcarriedmeon the
Mayamevamhā
alakkhikāmayam bhāsamānānam
-M. I. 509 1.234
hip; Vah +i +mā,absol.
appapunna—M. II. 5 Thishasbeen
heard
bymetoowhen Alms shouldbegivenonly to me;

701
 Mayham
mayham
+eva,eva,emph.p.; Da +
tabba,fut. pp.
Mayhamatthakaranenisinnassa-
M. II. 122
When I hadbeensittingin thecourt:
gen. absi.
Mayham bhattapaccāsam
itthannāmassadammi — Vin. IV. 78
My meal,thatI amwaiting for, I give
to so andso; pari -- āsam; ittham +
nama, Da + mi, pres. I". SZ.
Maranakale afifiam ārādheti —
S. V.
69
Attain gnosisduringthetimeof death:
a +Jia; a + Radh +e + ti, caus.
pres.3. sg.
Maranakale indriyani vippasidimsu
—A.III. 380
At thetimeofdeath, facultiesbecame
exceedinglyclear; yi +pa +Sad +
imsu.pst. 3”. pl.
Maranadhammā sattā—A. V. 216
Beingsofthe natureofdying
Maranadhammo maranam anatīto-
A. 1.140
Theonewhoissubjecttodeathand
notoverpasseddeath;an +ati +] +
fa,pp.
Maranadhammosamanona bhayati
—A. II. 176
Beingofthe natureof dying, he is
notafraid;As +mana,pr.p.; Bhi +
ya +ti, pres. 3, sg.
Maranabhayam—A. IV. 365
Fear of death
Maranamattam hetamdukkham, y0
annataram samkilitthamapattim
āpaiiati—M. II. 258
It is indeeda painsimilartodeath,
onecommitsa dirtyoffence;
sam+
Kli§+ ta,pp.; @+Pad +ya * ti,pres.
3 E
Maranam upenti—M. II. 73
Succumb
todeath;
upa+e(from
I)+
nti, pres. 3’. pl.
Maranampahātum - A. V.144
To forsakedeath;
pa +Ha +tum,inf
Maranam va nigaccheyya,
maranamattamva dukkham— M.I.
134,316;Vin. III. 89
Hewouldexperience death
or
sufferingsimilarto death;ni +gaccha
+eyya,opt.3. sg.
Maranam hetamariyassavinaye,
yo sikkham paccakkhaya
hinayavattati —M. HH.258;S, I. 271,
marananhetam
IntheAryandiscipline
itisindeed
death,thatoneturnsbacktothelower
lifeafterrelinquishing
thecourse
of
training;pati +a+Khya+ya,absol.;
hindya+a + Vrt+a+ ti,pres.3".
sg.
Maranasafifiaaiihattamsūpatihitā-
, named
A. II. 150;IHI. 83
A senseof death is well established
themind; adhi +atta;su +upa*
Stha +i +ta,pp.
Maranasatimbhavemi
—A. HI.304
702
Maranadhippaya
I cultivate mindfulness on death: Bha
+e + mi, caus. pres.1". sg.
82
that Withtheintentionof killing, (they)
madehimsweat;Svid +e +s +um,
caus.pst. 3. pl.
Maranenaparimuccanti —A. V. 216
(They) are released from death:
maranenais usedhere in theabl.
sense;pari + Muc +ya + nti, pass.
pres.3”. pl.
Maranenapite mayam akāmakā
vinābhavissāma—M. II. 57; Vin.
II. 13
Wewill departunwillinglyevenat
yourdeath;maranena+api; a+
kāma -- ka; vind, indel.
Mariyādamthapeyyāma—D. III. 92
Wewouldcauseto setup boundaries:
Sthā+dpe +evydma,caus.opt.1".
pl.
Marumbam
upakiritum—Vin. II.
121
Tospreada specialkind of sand;upa +
kirt id tum,inf,
Malatesuviharati Uruvelakappam
namaMalatanam nigamo—S. IV.
327
Abidesatthemarkettownof Malata,
Uruvelakappa,
inthekingdom
I
of Malata
in
Malamattam
apakaddhitum—
Vin.
IE, 133
Toremoveonly thedirt; apa +
703
- m——l
Mahaggatanti
kaddha(fromKrs) + i + tum,inf,
Mala malataram—A. IV. 195
Greaterstainthanall theotherstains;
mala +tara, suffixtara is usedwith
abl.or instr.for comparison
Mallakena nahāyanti—Vin. II. 106
Takebathwitha littlecup
Mallikesu viharati Uruvelakappam
nama Mallikanam nigamo— 5. V.
228
Abidesin Mallika,atthemarkettown
of Mallika,namedUruvelakappa;
Mallikesūti evamnāmakeianapade,
Cy.HI. 248
Mallesu viharati Anupiyam nāma
mallanamnigamo—D. III. 1
Abidesatthemarkettownof Mallas,
namedAnupiya,in thekingdomof
Mallas
Mallesu viharati Uruvelakappam
nama Mallanam nigamo—A. IV.
438
Abidesatthemarkettownof Mallas,
namedUruvelakappa, in thekingdom
of Mallas
Massumkappapenti,massum
vaddhāpenti—Vin. II. 134
Causeto trimthebeard,causeto
grow up thebeard;kattariyāmassum
chedāpenti,Cy. 1211;kappa +Gpe +
nti, caus.denom.pres. 3™.pl.; Vrdh
ko ; oe ni
t āpe t nti, caus.pres.3". pl.
Mahaggatantipharitva
adhimuccitvaviharati —M. III.
146
 Mahaggatena
Havingpervadedandinclinedon he
abides,thinkingthatit wasexalted:
Sphar + i + tva,absol.; adhi + Mue 3
ya + i + tva,absol.
Mahaggatenacetasavihareyyam,
abhibhuyya lokam adhitthaya
manasa—M. II. 262
MayI abide withanelevatedmind.
havingovercometheworld andmadea
firm standwith themind:maha+
gata; abhi +Bhii +ya, absol.; adhi +
Stha +ya, absol.
Mahaggham kambalam pārupitvā -
Vin. IV. 254
Havingworna veryexpensivewoollen
blanket;pa +@+ Vr+i4 (vd, meta.
absol.
Mahaccarajanubhavena —D. I. 49:
M. II. 83; A. III. 59
With royal maiesty;mahāca
rāiānubhāvenāti mahatā ea
rāiānubhāvena,mahaccātipiPāli,
mahatiyātiattho, Cv. I48
Mahatam bhūtānamāvāso—A.
200; Vin. II. 238
Residencefor greatbeings
Mahatarā bhikkhunī kālakatā hoti
—Vin. IV. 308
A seniorbhikkhunīhaspassedaway;
maha + tara, der.
Mahata bhikkhusamghenasaddhim,
addhatelasehibhikkhusatehi —
S. I.
192
telasa
Mahata bhikkhusamghenasaddhim
paficamattehibhikkhusatehi-D, I,
1 ascetics,
Witha largegroupofbhikkhus,
about
five hundred;saddhim,indcl.used
with instr.
Mahatā rāiānubhāvena—
M. II. 49
With royal maiesty
Mahatāsi vādasamghātena
patimukko āgato—M. I. 383
Youhavecomeback,entangled
witha
bundleof views;mahata+asi:As+
si, pres. 2". sg.; vada+samghdta;
pati + Mue + ta,pp.; ad+Gam+a,
PP.
Mahati mahabbhayesamuppanne...
kimassakaraniyam afnatra
dhammacariyayasamacariyaya
kusalakiriyāya puāāakiriyāya—5.1.
101
Whenagreat greatfearhasarisen,
what should have to be doneexceptfor
behaving
righteously
andjustly,
doing
goodandmeritorious
deeds;mahatt
IV.
mahabbhayesamuppanne,loc.absl.;
sam+u(t) +Pad +ta,pp.;kim+
assa: As +ya (Skt. yat); Kr + aniya,
fut. pp. ahiatra, indel.,usedwith
abl. or instr.
Mahatiya
caYakkhasenaya
mahatiya
caGandhabbasenāya
mahatiyā
ca
Kumbhandasenāya
mahatiyā
ca
Nagasenaya—D. III. 194 un
With a hugearmyof Demons,
Divine
musicians,KumbhandasandSnakes
Mahatiyāparibbāiakaparisāya
saddhim,timsamattehi
Mahatiyā
paribbajakasatehi—M. II. 23
Witha largenumber
of wandering
aboutthreehundred
Mahatiyāparisāya parivuto — S. I.
64,109;Vin. III. 12;A. IHI. 184
Surrounded by a largecrowd;pari 3
Vr +ta,pp.
Mahatoatthāyasamvattati—A. I. 5
It leadsto a greatbenefit;sam + Vrt +
a +ti, pres. 3™.sg.
Mahatotalākassapatigaccevaālim
bandheyya—A. IV. 279
Wouldbuild,in advance,a dyketoa
greatreservoir; patigacceva,adv.Skt.
pratikrtyaiva;Ba(n) dh +eyya,opt.
3”, sg.
Mahatorukkhassa titthato sāravato
-A.V.226
Ofa bigtreewhich is standingand
firm;sara +vantu,der.
Mahatoviya ianakāyassasaddo—D.
11.190
Asif the noiseof a multitudeof
people;viya,indcl.
Mahaddhano mahābhogo
paripunnakosakotthagaro
—A. HI.
151
Theonewho hasgreatwealthand
whosetreasuriesandgranariesare
completelyfull; wahā --dhana;
pari +Pr +ta, pp.; kosa +
kotthāgāra
Mahantam
kabalamkaroti—Vin. IV.
194
Makesa big morsel
Mahallako
Mahantamīātisamgham ohāya—D.
1. 115
Havingabandoneda largegroupof
kinsmen;0 (ava)+Ha +ya, absol.
Mahantamninnampallalam —Vin.
III. 147
A huge'bentdown'anda marshy
ground
Mahantambhogakkhandham
aiihāvasanto—A. ITI. 302
Living witha greatamountof wealth;
adhi +ā + Vas+ a+ nta,prp.
Mahantattamva vepullattamva
papunatibhogesu— A. I. 116
He attainsabundance
or increasein
wealth;mahanta+ tta,der.; vipula +
ya, der. + ttadoubleder.;pa +Ap +
;
(uinā + ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Mahantassaphalakamsondaya
upanibandhati—M. IHI. 133
Tiesa bigplankon thetrunk:upa -- ni
+Ba(n)dh +a +ti, pres.3'".sg.
Mahantamahantadisapamokkha
vejja —Vin. I. 270
Renownedandprominentphysiciansof
the district
Mahallako avusoviharo, tumhepi
vasatha,mayampivasissāma—Vin.
IV.44
Friends,dwellingplaceis large,
(therefore)you stay, we will staytoo;
Vas+a +tha,pres.2". pi.
Mahallako na nipajjatiti na seyyam
kappesi—Vin. I. 303
(He) did not sleep thinking that the
Mahallako
elderly(bhikkhu)doesnot lie down to
sleep;ni +Pad +ya+ti, pres.3”.sg.
+ iti; Kappa +e +s + i, denom.pst.
Ss
2rd
SR
Mahallako nama viharo sassamiko
vuccati —Vin. IV. 47
Mahallakais saidto bea dwelling
placewith anowner;sa +sami + ka,
der.;Vac+ya +ti,pass.pres.3”.sg.
2rd
Maha aggidaho vutthati —A. I. 178
A big fire breaksout; vi +u(t) +Stha
+a+ ti, pres. 3%.sg.
Maha udakavahakosafijayati —A. I.
178
A greatflood occurs;sam +Jan +ya
+ ti, pres. 3™.sg.
Maha udakavahakosamjayi —Vin. I.
32
A hugeflood occurred;maha+ udaka
+ Vah+aka, der; sam +Jan +ya +
Atpst at so:
Mahā kho panāyamlokasannivāso-
A. I. 148
Great is this world-community;sam +
ni + Vas+ a, der.
Maha ca meghouggato—Vin. I. 239,
169
A big rainycloudhasrisenup;u(t) +
Gam + ta,pp.
Mahacariyena saddhim
mantayamānāna iānimha āyasmā
Ānandoti —A. V. 198
Wedid notknow while talkingwith the
greatteacherthatit wasvenerable
Ānanda; mahā -- ācariya; mantaya +
Mahāpadesan Mahapurisalakkhanani Mahaviharam
māna, denom. pr.p.; Jan + na +
Mahapurisalakkhanani samannesi- ready;pati + upa +Stha + i + ta,pp.;
imha,pst. I", pl. D. I. 105;M. II. 135 As +ya (Skt.yat), opt.3". sg.
Ekaminedthecharacteristics
ofa
Mahāianakāyo sannipateyya
- 8,V. GreatBeing;sam +anu +e (fromI)+ Maha yanifiopaccupatthitohoti -
170 s hi, past,Ro Vin. 1.27
A largecrowdof peoplewouldgather A greatsacrificewasseton;pati +
together;sam +ni + Pat +eyya,
opt. Mahāpurisavihāro hesaSāriputta, upa +Stha +i +ta,pp.
aa se; yadidamsunnata—M. III. 294
Sāriputta,
whatiscalledvoidness
is, Mahāyo samānokasiramiīvikam
Mahāianikena parikkhārena—
Vin, indeed.theabidingof a GreatBeing; kappeti—A. IV. 283
IV.253 maha+purisa + viharo +hi + esa Beingoneof hugeincome,he lives
With the materialrequisitebelonging miserably;As +mana,pr.p.; kasiram,
to thepeople;mahdjana
+ika,der. Mahamattanamatthaya bhisiyo ady.;kappa+e + ti, denom.pres. 3”.
patiyadenti—Vin. II. 150 Sg.
Mahanage titthamanecetake Preparemattressesfor thechief
nimantesi?—Vin. IV. 66 ministers;pati + Yat+ e + nti, caus. Mahārāsiko bhavissati—D. I. 135
Whengreatelephantsareexisting
did pres.3. pi. Therewill bea greatrevenue
you invitedecoy-birds?;tittha+
mana,prip.; ni + manta+e+s +i, Mahamattehimati kata —Vin. IL. Mahāvanamaiihogāhetvā—M. I.
denom.pst.2”. sg. 19] 108;S. III. 91
Opinionhasbeenexpressedby the Havingenteredintothegreatforest;
Mahānāmarattavattikā
upāhanā- chief ministers;Man + ti, der.;Kr + adhi + o (ava) + Gah + e 1. twā,
Vin. I. 186 ta, pp. absol.
The shoeswhichhavewithered
—leaf
colour strips Mahameghoabhippavuttho—
D. II. Mahāvātevā opunāmi, sīghasotāya
343 vā nadiyāpavāhemi—D. II. 132;A.
Mahānāmosakkovattāhoti—
Vin. Poureddowna heavyrain;abhi +pa + II. 199( nadiyāvā sīghasotāya)
IV. 102 Vrs +ta,pp. I winnowawayin thegreatwindor
Mahanama,
theSakyan,
isthecritic; causeto putit intotheriver flowing
Mahāmeghosabbasassāni downswiftly;o (ava) +Pi +n@+mi,
Vac + tu, der.
sampādento—A. IV. 244 pres. I. sg.;pa + Vah+e +mi, caus.
The hugerain,supportingall crops; pres. 1".sg.
Maha pafifam mahapurisam
panhapema— A. IL. 35 sam+Pad +e +nta,caus.prp.
Mahavikatani datum —Vin. I. 206
Wedeclarehimtobeagreat
being
of
Mahayafiio upakkhato hoti —D. I. To givegreatmixtures(which
greatwisdom;pa +Jia +ape+ma,
127;A. IV. 41 comprisesfaeces,urine,ashes,
caus.pres.1".pl.
Greatsacrificewasnear;wpa(s)+Kr andclay);vi +Kr +ta,pp.; Da +
F ta, PP. tum,inf.
Mahayafifiopaccupatthitoassa—M. Mahāvihāram patisamkharonti -
11.204 Vin. II. 166;IV. 44
greatauthority
or source;
Dhr
A greatsacrificewould havebeen (They) repaira greatdwellingplace;
eyyatha,opt. 2". pl.
 Mahaviharo
pl.
Mahāvihāro udrīyati —Vin. VI. 174
Greatresidence
collapses;
u(t)+Dr 4
iva + ti, pass.pres, 3™.sg.
Mahasamanebrahmacariyam carati
—Vin. I. 36
Leadsthehighestway of life under
thegreatrecluse
Mahāsamayopavanasmim—D. II.
254
A greatcongregationin the forestor at
themountain-side;mahāsamayoti
mahāsamūho,Cv. 680
Mahāsamuddeabhiramanti —A. IV.
198
Takedelightin thegreatocean:abhi +
Ram +a + nti, pres. 3” pl.
Mahāsamuddo ussussativinassati
na bhavati—S. III. 149
The greatoceanis dried up.destroyed
anddoesnotexist:u(t) 4 Sus + ya +
ti, pass.pres. 3". sg; vi +Nag 3 va +
ti, pass.pres, 3. sg.; Bhai +a +ti
pres. 3. sg.
Mahāsupinā pāturahesum—A. III.
242
Greatdreamsmanifested: patu+ ® +
a t Hū (Bhū)-- a (ho- he)-- s --um,
pst. 3'4.pi,
Mahāhasitamhasanto— Vin. IV. 187
Laughingloudly;Hrs +i +ta,pp.;
Hrs +a +nta,pr.p.
Maha h’Upili attabhāvo—A.V. 202
Mā
Mā Mā
Upāli,huge,indeed,
isthe
ereature;
mahā -- hi t Upāli Don'tmakeyourselfunclean; (now) asa student;mā,prohibitivep.
katuviyantiuccittham,Cv. II. 378 usedwithpst. or imper.;Hā (Bhū) 7
Mahiechatāya samvattantino tvā,absol.; Vas+ i, pst. 3". sg.
appicchatāya—Vin, II. 258 Mā addasamva assosimva —A. III.
(They)leadtowanting
muchnotto 337 Ma ekenadve agamittha—Vin. I. 21
Letmenotseehim or hearhim;a + Don’tgo two(of you)on oneway;a +
wantinglittle;maha+iccha+ta,
der; appa + iccha +ta, der; appa,
Drs +am.pst. I". sg.; a +Sru +s + Gam+i +ttha,pst.2™.pl.
im,pst. 1".sg.
neg. p.
Mā evamavaca,māevamavaca—D.
Ma anussavenama paramparayama 1. 122
Mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā -D,
itikirāya mā pitakasampadānena Don’tsayso,don’tsayso;a + Vac+
I. 213
mātakkahetumā naya hetumā a, pst. 2™.sg.
Greatpowerandgreatmaiesty: mahā
ākāraparivitakkena mā
t iddhika -- tā, der.;mahā--
ditthiniiihānakkhantiyā mā Ma evammanasakattha—Vin. III. 8
anubhava + td, der.
bhavyarūpatāya mā samano no Don’tapplyon mindthus; manasi+ a
garūti —A. I. 189 + Kr + ttha,pst. 2, pl.
Mahiddhiyo kho panaevarūpānam
Don't (go) by tradition,lineage,
hatamanussinamimasmim hearsay,holy scripture,logic, method,
Ma kirayye pure kinci adasi—Vin.
dhammavinaye pasado —Vin.I. 159, form,agreementwith theview,
I. 271
247 possibility,respectfor theteacher; Lady,don’tgivemeanythingin
A greatthingisthefaithofwellknown anu +Sru +a, der.; iti + kira, indcl.; advance;
kira, indcl.;pure, indcl.; a +
peoplelikethisin thisdoctrine
and ditthi + nijjhaéna+ khanti; bhavya, Da +s + i, pst. 2™.sg.
discipline;maha+iddhi+iva,der;
Jia + ta,pp.; pa +Sad +a, der. Ma kunjara nagamasado—Vin. I.
Mā ayuddhaparāiitamparāiayi —M. 195
Mahilātitthenahāyitum
-Vin. II. 11.148 Elephant,don’tstriketheNaga(The
281 Let not losethebattlewithoutfighting Elephant);aāgam-- ā +Sad +o, pst.
Totakebathatwomen’s
ford;
mahilā it;para +Ji +a +i, pst.3. sg. 2", sa.
+tittha;Sna +ya +i +tuminf.
Mā ayyoevamavaca—Vin. III. 138 Ma khalumkajjhayitamjhayatha -
Mahesakkhahidevatahiapphuto- Sir,don’tsaythus;a + Vac+a, imper. A. V. 323
D. II. 139 2” Sg. Don't thinkof inferiorthought;jha@
Notpervadedbypowerful
deities;
a' (fromDhyai) +ya +tha, imper.2"
Sphur +ta, pp. Mā ayyoevamavacuttha—
Vin. II. pl.
296
Sirs,don’tsaylikethis;ayyois used
Mā afifiassakassaciarocesi
—Vin. Ma kho tumhe bhikkhave patibhati
IV. 127 herefor thepl. meaning;a + Vac + no patibhati noti yasmim va tasmim
: - tet (u) +ttha,pst.2™.pl. va bhikkhum ukkhipitabbam
Don’t tell anybodyelse;a +Ruete
si, caus, imper.2". sg. mannittha—Vin. I. 338
Mā ācariyo hutvā antevāsimvasi - Bhikkhus,don’tthinkof suspendinga
M. II. 39 bhikkhuon atrivial matterthinking*
Beinga teacherbefore,don't abide we feel it so, we feel it so’; pati +
 Magadhake
Bha+ti,pres.3. sg.;u(t)+Ksip +i
pst.2™
pl.
Māgadhake paricārake ārabbha -
D. II. 203
Magadha + a +ka, der.;pari + Car
+ aka, der.; ārabbha, indci.
Māghātoaiia —Vin. I. 217
Todayis thedayof no- slaughter;ma
+ghāta; aiia, indcl.
Ma ca kassaciarocehi —Vin. II. 99
Also, don’t tell anybody;@+ Ruc +e
+ hi, caus.imper.2". sg.
Mā ea kassacidassehi—Vin. II. 99
Also,don'tshowit toanybody;
Drs +
e +hi, caus. imper.2”. sg.
Ma ca vatatapecārittam anuyuhii -
M. II. 257
Don't makea move in thewind andin
thesun, vata +dtapa; Car +i +tta,
der.;anu + Yu(fi)j + i, pst. 34. Sg.
Mā cassabhāyittha —Vin. II. I
Don't be scaredof this person;ma +
ca +assa;Bhi +ya +i + ttha,pst.
2 Mata putte sarajjati, putto va pana
Ma tam kalo upaccagā—5. 1.8
May notthetimeSurpassyou; upa 3
ati +a +Gam+G,pst.3”.sg,
Mātaram iīvitā voropeyya—A. I. 27
Woulddeprivemotheroflife; vi +04
Ruh +e +eyya,caus.opt. 3. sg.
Mata ca utuni hoti —M. II. 157
Mātāpitunnam
Motheris in herperiodtoo
Mātāpitaro aiihāgāre pūiitā—
A. I,
132
Parentsarehonouredathome;adhi+
agāra; Pūi +i + ta,pp.
Mātāpitaro atthakāmāhitesino
anukampakā—A. III. 37
Parentsare well wishers,seekers
of
well-beingandcompassionate; hita+
esa (fromIs) + 7,der.
Mātāpitaro uddassetabbā
—M. II,
60
Parentsshouldbevisited;u (i) +Dré
+ e + tabba,fut. pp.
Matapitaro bhattunodenti-—A.IV.
265
Parentsgive to a husband;
Da +e +
nti, pres. 3”. pl.
Mātāpitaro hi dadamānekim
vadeyyama—Vin. I. 297
Whatshouldwesaywhenmother
and
fatherare indeedthereceivers;
dada
t māna,pass.pr.p.; Vad+eyyama,
opt.1".pl.
Matapitunnam atthayahitaya
sukhāyahoti—A. IV. 244
It is forthewell-being,
benefit
and
happinessof theparents
Mātāpitunnamadhivacanam
—A.I.
132
A synonymnfor parents
Matapitunnamassumukhanam
rudantanam—
D. I. 115
Whenmother
andfather
were
crymg
Matapitusu
withtearfulfaces;gen.absl.;Rud +a
t aia, PF.P.
Matapitusu pabbajjam alabhamano
—M. II. 57
Not receivingpermissionfrom the
parentsto renouncefamilylife; a +
Labh + a + mana,pr-p.
Matapitusu paricariyaya —A. I. 132
By renderingserviceto parents;pari
+ earivā
Mātāpitūhipi sāmikenapi
ananunhnhatamsikkhamanam—Vin.
IV. 334
The femaletraineewho hasnotbeen
consentedby themotherandfather
andthehusband;an +anu+Jia +
la, pp.
Mātāpiputtamnapatilabhati—A. I.
178
The mothertoo doesnotmeettheson;
pati + Labh +a+fi, pres.3”. sg.
Mata puttamva orasam—
D. III.
188;Vin. I. 230
Just as the mother towards her beloved
son; puttam +iva; ura(s) + a, der.
mātari—A. III. 68
The motheris so muchattachedto the
sonandthesonto themother;sam +
Raj +ya +ti,pass,pres.3™.sg.
Mata mittam sake ghare—
S. I. 37
In one’s own house, mother is the
friend
Matava puttam anurakkhatepatim
711
Matugamassa
—A.IV. 93
(She)protectsthehusband iust as
themotherprotectsherchild; mata+
iva; anu + Raks +a + te,pres. mid.
3”. sg.
Mata va hoti dhati va —Vin. IV. 318
She is either mother or the nurse
Mātito hi anuppanno— D. I. 97
Unborn(i.e. impure)from the
mother’ssideindeed;an +u(t) + Pad
+ ta,pp. matrin Skt. becomesmātu
or mati in P4li; similarlypitr
becomespitu or piti
Matukucchim okkami —M. III. 119
Enteredinto mother’swomb;mdtu+
kucchi;o (ava) +Kram + i, pst. 3”.
sg.
Matukucchismim pathamamcittam
uppannampathamamvinhanam
pātubhūtam— Vin. I. 93; III. 73
The firstmindhasarisenin mother's
womb,thefirst consciousness has
manifested in mother'swomb;w(t)+
Pad + ta,pp.; patu + Bhi + ta,pp.;
eitta and viihāna are usedhere
synonimously
Mātugāmassaamgaiātam
upaniiihāyi—Vin. III. 118
Lookedsharplyatthesexorganof a
woman;upa +ni +ihā (fromDhyai)
+ya +i,pst.3™.sg.
Mātugāmassaāvenikāni dukkhāni
—S.IV.239
Sufferingsrestrictedto womankind;
āvenikānītipātipuggalikāni,Cv. II.
86
 Matugamassa
Matucca Mā nam

Mātugāmassa Mātugāmena saddhimsahiiagghati

Mātucca pitucca —A, I. 61 Don't makeinconvenience
to them;
ucehādanaparimaddana samkilatisamkelayati
—A, [V,55 To themotherandto thefather;mātu, a+Kr+4@+s +i, doublepst. Ī
nahāpanasambāhanam
sādiyati —A.
Witha woman(he)laughstogether, pitu,dat.sg.+ ca
Qed Sg. 1
IV. 54
playstogether,
fondlestogether;
sam
Enjoysrubbing,
abrading,
bathing
and + Ghar + a +ti, intens.pres,3”.sd; Matucchaputto —Vin. IV. 173 Ma te Samghouttari upaparikkhi -
massagingof a woman;u(t) +Sad +e
+ ana, caus.der.;pari + Mrd + ana,
sam- Kīīd '- a1ti, pres,3'lsg.;sam The sonof mother’ssister S.II.216 MI
+kild + aya+ti,denom. pres,3 Let theSamghamakeno further |
der.; Sna +Gpe + ana, caus. der.i
Sg. Mātupi sadiso pitupi sadiso—M. II. inquiryconcerningyou; uttari,indcl. i
sam+Bah +ana,der.;Svad+aya +
153 upa +pari + Iks +a + i, pst. 3. sg. . .
ti, pres,3. sg.
Mātugāmena saddhim He is similarto themotherandalsoto
hasitalapitakilitani
anussarati
—
A, thefather;matu +api; pitu + api Mātvambrahmuno
vacanam 4 I
Matugamassauttarim chappaāca-
IV. 55 upātivattittho—M. I. 327 III
vacahi dhammam desentoāpaiiati -
Herecollectsthewayhelaughed, Mātu purato thapenti— D. II. 14 Don'tgo beyongthewordof brahma; I l
A. IHI.259
talkedandplayedwithawoman;
Ha Placein front of themother:Stha + upa + ati + Vrt +i + ttho,pst. mid. iH
The one,who is explainingthe 2”, SE:
i+ ta,pp.; Lap + i +ta,pp.;Krid+i dpe+nti,caus.pres.3”.pl.
Dhamma
toa womanin morethanfive
+ fa, pp.; anu + Smr +a +ti,pres.
six words,becomesguilty ofan Mā tvammaīihittho—M. I. 327
ERT Matubhato poso—A. IV. 97
offence;Dr§ + e + nta,prp.; @+ Pad Don’t think;Man +ya + i + ttho,pst.
A personfosteredby themother;
+ya + ti, pres. 3". sg. mātarābhatoposito, Cy. IV. 49; Bhr mid.2". sg.
Mātugāmenasahaseyyam
kapeyya-
Vin. IV. 19 + ta, pp.; posa, a contraction of
Matugama nama kicchalabha - Ma dighampassa,ma rassam—Vin.
Wouldsleeptogether
withawoman; purisa or purusa
Vin. III. 208 I. 344
saha + seyya;kappa+e +eyya,
Womenin generalget their Mātumattikam itthikāya Don’t see(think)far,don’tsee(think)
denom.opt.3”. sg.
necessitieswith so muchdifficulty: itthidhanam—Vin. III. 16 near; passa,imper.2”. sg.
thestemmātugāma(m.) is usedhere Mother'swealthinheritedfrom her
Mātugāmopatiechanno
vahati
—A.
in Ihe plural form motherasthedowry;mātu+matti+ Mānattāraho hoti —Vin. I. 49, 143
1.282
ka, der. He becomesonewho deserves
Womankind
proceeds
concealed,
not
Mātugāmena saddhim penance;manatta+ araha
exposed;mdtugamo,m.sg.;pati+
kāyasamsaggamsamāpailiissati- Mātumātaro —5. II. 178
Chad + ta,pp.; vahati,Vah+a* ti,
Vin. III. 120 Mother's mothers Manam nissayamano pahatabbo-
pres. 3. sg.; meaning is not clear,
Shouldcometo physicalcontactwith A. II. 145
paticchanno vahatiti paticchannova
a woman; kaya + sam + Srj +ta, pp.; Mā tumhenānāviharatha—
Vin. IV. Conceitis to be abandoned
relyingon
hutvāniyyāti, Cy, II. 379.
sam +@+ Pad +ya + i +ssati,fut. 240 conceit;ni +Sri +ya, absol.;pa +
3 ge Don'tliveseparately Ha + tabba,fut. pp.
Mātugāmopiasaddhammena
nimanteti —M. 1.448
Mātugāmena saddhim Mā te kamkhāhu —M. II. 143 Ma nam sitam va unham va tinam
Evena womaninvitesforanimmoral
dvayamdvayasamāpattim May therebe no doubtfor you; va rajo va ussavova badhayittha!-
act; ni +manta+e +ti,denom.
pres:
samāpailiati—A. IV. 54 kamkhā--ahu: a t-Hit (Bhi), D. II. 19
Soe,
He is engagedin copulationwith a (Skt. abhiit), pst. 3™.sg. May notcold, heat,grass,dustor dew
woman;saddhim,indcl. usedwith affecthiml; wā,indcl.disiunctive;
instr. dvayam +dvaya +Samapatti;
Mātugharam
agamāsi
—
Vin. HI.14 Badh +aya +i +ttha,caus.pst. 3”.
Wentto themother’shouse;a +Gam
sam + @ + P ad +ya +ti, pres, 3'4
> SZ, Sg.
+G+s +i, doublepst.3%.8g.
 Manavehipi
Mapamadam
Ma puggalesu Māyāsahadhammarūpam
Mānavehipi samāgacchanti,
Manusakehi kamehi dibba kama
katakammehipi akatakammehipi- IV. 174 352
abhikkantatara
capanitatara
ca-
M. I. 448 “Let nobodyknowaboutme”,he
M. I. 505
Theyevenmeetwithyoungsterswho Ma puggalesupamanika ahuvattha wishes;Jan +ya (Skt.yat), opt.3”.
Divine sense-desiresaremore
havecommitteda crimeandnot- —A. III. 350 sg.; Is +ya + ti, pres. 3. sg.
attractiveandfine thansense-desires
committeda crime: manavehiti Don't beiudgeson persons(don't
ofthe humanworld: diy +va-
corehi, Cv. III. 164;mānavehi -- api; makeiudgementson people);pamāna Ma mamte addasamsu,ahaficama
dibba; abhi + kanta4 tara;Panita+
fara; for comparison,thesuffixtara + ika; a+ Hii (Bhi) + a + ttha,pst. te addasam—M. I. 79
kata + kamma 2°. ipl. May theynotseeme,mayĪ notsee
is used with abl. or instr.
themtoo;a +Dr§ +a + imsu,double
Mānavo vuttasiro solasavassiko Ma brahmana ariyam tunhibhavam pst. 3". pl.; a + Dr$ + am,pst. 1".sg.
Manusakehi va kamehiavatteyya?
iātiyā—M. II. 168 pamādo—S. II. 273
—M. I. 505
A shavenheadedyoungman of sixteen Brāhmana,don't beunmindfulon the Māyam vidamseyya— S. IHI. 142
Would (he) cause(himself)toturn
yearsby birth; Vap+ ta,Pp. +sira; noblesilence;
pa +Mad+o,pst.2"". Wouldperforma magicalshow;vi +
backby humansense-desires? ;āt Wi
solasa + vassa + ika, der. sg.; ariyo tunhībhāvois definedhere Drs +eyya,opt.3. sg.
' e t eyya,caus.opt.
3'i,sg.
in termsofsecondjhana and the
Mānasambhūtoayam kāyo—A. II. venerableMaha Moggallana is Mayasmantoetam bhikkhum kinci

I
Mā no aputtakamsāpateyyam
145
This body hascome into existence
Licchavayo atiharāpesum-Vin. II,
addressed
bythewordbrahmana avacuttha—Vin. III. 175
Venerablesirs,don’tsayanythingto
I)
18
throughconceit;mang + sam + bhiito Ma Bhagavantamabbhacikkhi —
S. thisbhikkhu;theroot Vacneedstwo
May theLicchaviscausenottotake
+ ayam III. 110 objects;ma,prohibitivep. usedwith
over the heirlessproperty;a +putta+
Don’t accusetheBlessedOne.;abhi + pst. or imper.; mā + Gyasmanto; a +
ka,der.;sa +pati +eyya,der.;atit a+ Khya + i, intens.pst. 3”. sg Vac+u +ttha,pst. 2™.pl.
Mā nassīti aggahesi—Vin. IV. 161
Hr +Gpe+s +um,caus.pst.3”.pl.
Hetookitthinking,"mayit not
be lost”;Nas +ya +i, Pass.pst. Mā Bhavantoevamavacuttha,mā MayasmaChanno satthamaharesi-
Mā no vihethetha —M. II. 64,Vin. bhavantoevamavacuttha— D. I. 122 M. III. 264
3”, sg. a4 Grh+e+s +i, pst.
Ill. 17,vihethayittha Sirs,don’tsayso,don’tsayso Let thevenerable
Channamakeno use
a'e,SE.
Don't harassus; vi +Hid +e +tha, of aweapon,
(don'ttakethelife);
imper.2'4,pl, Mā bhāyi—D. I. 50 satthamāharati is idiomatically used
Mā nāgam ghattesi—M. I. 143
Don't strikethesnake:ghata teta Don’tpanic;Bhi +ya +i, pst.3".sg. to give themeaningof committing
Mā pacchāvippatisārino
ahuvattha suicide; ma +dyasma; 4+ Hr+e+s
+
i, denom.pst. 24 SZ.
—D.II. 147 Mā bhikkhū vyābāhimsu—Vin. VI. + i, caus. pst. 2™. sg.
Don’tberemorseful
afterwards;
a+ 140
Manusakam bhavam nibbattetvā-
Hii (Bhi) +a +ttha,pst.2. pl. Mayakatam hetambalalapanam-
A. IV. 380
Havingcausedto Producea human +Badh+imsu;pst.3”.pl., ‘d’is M. II. 261
existence; manu(s) +aka, der.; ni +
Mapathamam
jhanam
pamado
-S. elided This is createdby illusion,a prattleof
Vrt +e + tv, caus.absol. IV 263 fools;hi + etam
Don’tbeunmindful
inthe
firstjhana
; Ma mametampuccha—M. I. 387
Hg adhipateyyena—A. IHI. pa +Mad+0,pst.2". sg. Don’task methis; Preh +ya; imper. Māyāsahadhammarūpamviya
2™.sg.;therootPrchrequirestwo khāyati—A. I. 171
With human
authority; adhipati+ Māpamādam
āharimsu
—A. IV.381 objects It is feltto besomethinglike a magic;
eyya, der. Maytheynotbeunmindful;
pamadam viya,indci; Khyā -- ya +ti, pass.
dharimsiitipamddam
dpajjimsu,
CY: Ma mamjannatiicchati—A. II. pres. 3. sg.
 Mayidha
Mayidhapatikkami—Vin. I. 54
Don’t comebackhere;ma +(y)+
idha;pati +Kram+i, pst.3. sg.
Mayimam dhammapariyayamsutva
pamādamāharimsu—A. IV. 381
May theynot fall into unmindfulness
afterlisteningtothismodeof
teaching:Gharimsu= āpaiiimsu,
Cy.IV. 174;ma+imam;Sru +tva,
absol.
Māyimā vikāle ahesum—
Vin. II.
289
Maythese(ladies)notbepresent
at
impropertime;md + (y) + ima
Ma yoggani kilametha —D. II. 344
Don’t maketheoxenlanguid;
yogganiti balivadde,Cy. 812: Klam
+ e + tha, caus.imper.2”4.pl.; Yuj +
ya, fut. pp.; nt.pl.?
Mayyo imam kumārikam
dasibhogenabhuijittha —Vin. IHI.
136
Sirs, pleasedon't usethis little girl as
a slave;md + ayyo; ayyo is usedhere
in plural sense;Bhu(n)j + i + ttha,
pst.2”. pl.
Mārena pāpimatā anvāvitthā
bhavanti—S.L
14.
(They)havebeenpossessed
by
Māra, theevil one;anu +@+ Vig+ta,
Pp.
Māroyam pāpimāti viditvā —S. I.
67, 103
Havingunderstood
thatthiswasMāra,
Mavuso Mā vo Migavisānena
Malamvagandham
vavannakam
ya Brother, don't do anythingof this kind, Masacitam maiifie—A. IV. 333
āropessanti—
D. II. 142 thisis not permissible;ma +dvuso; As ifa loadof soakedbeans;
Will offergarland,
incense
or na +etam;Klp +ya +ti, pass.pres. tintamāsoviya, Cy. IV. 157
colouredthings;@+ Ruh +e +SSanti, Be ge:
caus.fut. 3".pl. Ma sapekhokalamakasi— D. II.
Ma vo amatampanassa— S. V. 184 194;A. III. 295
Malagandhavilepanadharana- Maynot immortalitybe lostto you; Don’tdiewith unfulfilledwish;sa +
mandanavibhūsanatthānā
pativirato pa + Nas +ya, imper.3”. sg. apekha
—D.l.5
Refrained
fromusinggarlands, Ma vo sakamvinassa—
Vin. III. Maso sesogimhanam—Vin. II. 252
perfumes,
ointments,
iewelleries
and 222 One monthof the summer remains
adorningwith various
kinds;pati +vi Maynotyourown (property)belost;
+ Ram +ta,pp. vi +Naf +ya, imper.2™. sg. Maham Nagita yasenasamagamam,
ma ca mayayaso—A. III. 31
Malani palisaiieyya —
S. II. 89 Masagataya
Asalhiya—Vin. I. 137 Nagita,let menotmeetwith
Onemonth
afterĀsālhi(fullmoon reputation,let notthereputationmeet
Would loosentheroots; pari +
Srj +ya +eyya,opt.3. sg.,orpari day ofluly) with me;sam+ a + Gam+ a, der.
+Svaj+ya +evya,(wouldtouch);
Mā saddamkari—S. I. 209 Mā hevantissuvacanīyā—D. I. 175
palisattheyyati
sodheyya (would
Don'tmakea noise;Kī; 1o t i, pst. Theyshouldbetold“ Don’tsayso”;
clean)Cy. II. 85
3, se: hevam+ iti +assu;As +yu (Skt.
yus),opt.3".pl.; Vae+aniya,
fut.pp.
Malavaccham ropentipi
ropapentipi —Vin. II. 9 Ma sanditthikam hitva kalikam
anudhāvi—
S. I. 9 Mā hevamavaca,mā hevamavaca-
(They)plantandcausetoplant
small
Don'trunafterthelife of future, D. II. 55
flowering trees; vaccha < vrksa,ep.
abandoning
thelifeof present;
sam+ Saynotthus,saynotthus
acchi < aksi; Ruh + e +nti,pres.3”.
Dr§+ta,pp. +ika,der.;Ha +i+
pl. +api; Ruh+ape+nti,caus,
tvd,absol.; kala +ika, der.;anu + Mā hevamĀnanda, mā hevam
pres. 3. pl.+ api
Dhāv+i, pst. 3". sg. Ānanda
—
S. 1.87;V.2
Don't(say)thusAnanda,don’t(say);
Male civaramnikkhipitva—Vin.Ill.
Ma samghassahayiti afifiassa ma + hi + evam
201
databbam —Vin. I. 173
Having
kepttherobeinaquadrangular
building; māloti ekakūtasamgahito
Itshouldbegiventoanother
thinking, Ma hevayammamaccayena
“MaynottheSamghaloseit”;Ha +ya vighātamāpaiii —S. V. 345
caturassapasado,Cy. 654
+ i, pst. 3%.sg. + iti; Da + tabba,fut. May this(householder)find thusno
Ma viharorajenaGhani —Vin.1.48
pp. difficulty(in life) with my departure;
md + hi + evam + ayam; mama +
Maynotthedwellingplacebeaffected
Masamyevanamsunisabhogena accayena;G +Pad +ya +i, pst. 3”.
by dust;u(t) +Han +ya +i,pass.
bhufijimsu—Vin. II. 136 Sg.
pst. 3, sg,
Onlyonemonththeytreatedheras
a daughter-in-law;
mdsam+eva; Migavisānena pitthim
Māvusoevarūpamakāsi,netam kandūvamāno—A. II. 207
Bhu(ii)j + imsu,pst. 3. pl.
kappati —Vin. IV. 83
 Miga
Scratchingthebackwith a deer-horn:
kandu + a + mana,denom.pr.p.
Migā kūtamva odditam
- S. I. 74
lust as thedeerenteringinto theset
trap;Adtam+iva;o +Di +ta,pp.
Micchattam agamma viradhana
hoti—A. V. 211
Havingcometothewrongcourse,
thereis a failure;@+Gam+ya,
absol.; vi + Radh + ana, der., opp.
ārādhanā
Micchaditthim paiahati —A. V. 235
Abandonswrongview;pa +Ha + ti,
pres. 3™.sg.; root redup.
Micchaditthiya paccorohati —A. V.
235
Comeoutof wrongview;pati +0 +
Ruh +a +ti, pres. 3™.sg.
Micchaditthiya pahanaya
sammāditthi bhāvetabbā—A. IHI.
447
To getrid of a wrongview,a right
view shouldbecultivated;samma,
indel.
Miccha assavacanam— D. III. 8
The statementwouldbe false:Inicchā,
indci.; As 3.yā (Skt.yāt), opt. 3. sg.
Micchajiva appativirata —Vin. I.
296
Those who arenotrefrainedfrom
wronglivelihood;miccha+ djtva; a +
pati +vi +Ram +ta,pp.
Micchajivena iīvikam kappenti —S.
III. 239; Vin. IV. 239
718
Miechāpanihitattā
Micchapanihitam Mihitamattam
Theylivebywronglivelihood:
kappa
Dueto wrong fixity ofthe view; 183
+e +nti,denom.
pres.3. pl.
miccha+pa +ni +Dha +i +ta,pp. Despisedby friendsandcolleagues;
+tta,der. pari + Bhit + ta,pp.
Micchaditthiko hoti antagahikaya
ditihiyāsamannāgato
—D.II, 45;A,
Micchapanihitam cittam —A. V. 87 Mittamaccesupativedenti—D. III.
II. 240
Themindwrongly fixed;micchd+pa 189
The onewho holdsa wrongview,an
+ni +Dha@+ i +ta,pp. (The teachers)introduce (the students)
extreme view; miccha + Dr§+ ti +ika,
in thecircleof his friendsand
der.; anta +gaha + ika, der.;sam+
Mittam kubbetha— Vin. II. 203 colleagues; pati + Vid + e +nti, caus.
anu +a + Gam +ta,pp. Shouldmakea friend;kubba(fromKr) pres. 3”. pl.
+etha,opt. mid. 2". sg.
Micchaditthiko hoti Mitta va amaccava nati va salohita
viparītadassano—
A. I. 33,268;IV. Mittavatāyanandati—A. IV. 95 vā —A. 1.222
226 He reioicesfor havingfriends; Friends,colleagues,relativesor blood
The onewho holdsa wrongview,a mitta+ vanta;Nand + a + fi, relations;sa + lohita
distortedview; micchaditthikoti pres.3. sg.
ayathavaditthiko,
Cy.H. 26;vi+pari Mitta suhada—D. II. 187
+1 + ta,pp. + dassana Mittavatāyasamudāearatha,mā Friendswith goodheart;Skt.suhrd
sapattavatāya—M. III. 118 (one with good heart)corresponds
Micchaditthiparamani bhikkhave Takemeasa friend,notasa foe;mitta with suhada
mahasavajjani—A. I. 33 + vatdya; sapatta + vataya
The greatfaults,in thehighestsense, Mittūpahāram upadamsesi—M. II.
areduetowrongviews Mittāni ganthati—D. III. 188 120
Makesfriends;abhiiiamānāthapeti, You accorda friendlytreatment;
mitta
Micchāpatipaiiati—
S. II. 151 Cy. 951; mittais usedhereas a +upahara;upa + Drs + e +si, pres.
Behaves wrongly;
pati+Padtyat neuternoun; Grath or Granth + a+ 2082:
ti,pres.3. sg. ti, pres. 3%.sg.
Mithilayam viharati
Miechāpatipaiiamāno
—A.1.90;II. Mittamaccanatisalohita —M.1. Makhādevambavane —
M. II. 74
4 149;II. 67; S. I. 162; IV. 302-3;A. Abidesat themangogroveof
Behaving
inawrongway;
pati+Pad+ IV.95 Makhādevain Mithilā
Friendscolleagueskinsmenandblood
relations;mitta +amacca+hati + Middham okkamati —A. IV. 85
Micchapatipattadhikaranahetu
- sālohita Becomessleepy;0 +Kram +a +ti,
pres. 3. sg.
M. II. 197;A. I. 69
Mittāmaeeānam atthāya hitāya
Becauseof thewrongway of practice;
sukhāyahoti —A. IV. 244 Missibhavamgatotaya —D. II. 267
micchā +patipatti + adhikarana*
It is for thewell-being,benefit Beingmixedwith you; missa +bhava
hetu; adhikarana and hetuare
andhappiness of friendsand
SVNORNVMOUS
colleagues Mihitamattam karoti —Vin. IV. 187
(He)justsmiles;Smi +ta,meta.pp.;
Mittāmaeeānam
paribhūto—D. II. Kr +0 +ti, pres.3 Sg.
ord
719
Midhante Mukhenapi Mucchati Muttakarane

Midhante pattam nikkhipanti —Vin.
Il. 113
Keep thebow] at theendofthe bench
in theverandah;
Glindakamidhakadinamante, Cy.
1203;midha + ante;ni(s) +Ksip + a
+ nti,pres. 3”. pi.
Mīlhasukhammiddhasukham
labhasakkarasilokasukham
sadiyeyya— A. III, 31
(He) would enjoy dirty pleasureof
materialbenefit,good treatmentand
flattery;Svad + aya + eyya,caus.opt.
3”.sg.;Mih +ta,milha;likeMuh +
ta, mitlha,Ruh + ta, ritlha; Mih + ta
becomesmiddhatoo, like Muh + ta,
muddha
Mukhadvārakam āhāram āvaranam
karonti —Vin. I. 84
Hinderthe food broughtto themouth;
mukha-- dvāra 3-ka, der.
Mukhadvāram āhāram āhareyya -
Vin. IV. 90
Shouldbring food to themouth;a +
Hr +eyya,opt. 3”. sg.
Mukhadvaram vivaranti —Vin. IV.
194
(They) openup themouth;vi + Vr +a
+nti, pres. 3. pl.
punchana+ colaka;@+Da +ya,
absol.
Mukhamālimpanti-Vin. II. 107,
266
Ānoint theface;ā 3:Li(im)p1 at mi,
bres.3'd.pi,
Mukhamummaddenti
—Vin.II, 266
Causeto rub theface;u(t) +Mrd+e
+nti,caus.pres.3”.pl.
Mukhameunnenti—Vin.II.266
Powdertheface;cunna+e +nti,
denom.pres, 3". pl.
Mukham lanfchenti—Vin. II. 266
Make special marks on the face;Lajich
+e+ nti,causpres.3”.pl.
Mukharagamkaronti—Vin.II. 107
Painttheface
Mukhādhānekāranamkāreti—M.
I. 446
Makeshim wearthebridle;mukha
+ journey);Mu(fiJc +i +tum,inf. + Despicableshavelingsandrecluses,
ādhāna;Kr +e +ti,caus.pres.3”.
Sg.
Mukhavaranam mane karonti—M.
I. 461
(They)seemtoputamuzzle
onthe
mouth;mukha+@+ Vr +ana,
der.
Mucchati kamayati gedhimapajjati
avattatibahullaya —M. III. 116
Heis infatuated,
overcome
bydesire,
succumbsto cravingandrevertsto
luxury;Mirch +ya +ti; pass.pres.
3”.sg.;kama+e +ti,denom.
pres.
3”. sg.; gedha andgedhi are usedto
denotethesamemeaning;G + Pad +
ya + ti, pass.pres. 3”. sg.; @+ Vrt +
a+ ti, pres. 3. sg.; bahula+ya, der.
Mucchito papati —Vin. I. 160
Being unconscious, (he) fell down;
March +ya +i +ta,pp.; pa +Pat +
ti,pst. 3". sg.
Mucchito papato—Vin. II. 126
Faintedandfell down;pa +Pat +G,
pst. 3". sg., thesuffix ‘a’ is changed
to 'o'
Muīieitukāmo (na) gaeehati—M. II.
139
(He) doesnotgo,desiringtomake
himselffree( from theburdenof the
kama menialandblackchildren,bornfrom
thefootof Brahma(bandhu);thesuffix
Mutthassati
asampajana—M. I. 20 ka is usedherein a derogatory
Thosewhoareunmindfulandunaware; sense;bandhu+pada + apacca
muttha + satt: Mrs + ta, pp. + Smr +
ti +f,der.; a+ sam +pa +Jan* a,
der.
t e t nti,denom.pres.3”. pl.
Mutthassatiasampajananiddam
okkamanti
—Vin. I. 294;III. 112
They,beingunmindfulandunaware,go
tosleep;o +Kram+a +nti,pres.
SL.
Mutthassatikalam kurumano —A.
II. 185
Dyingwitha confusedmind
(memory);Ar + mana,pr-p.
Mutthina amgajatampilentassa-
Vin. Ill. 118
Whenheis pressingsexorganwith the
fist; Pid + e + nta,pr.p.
Mutthihipi yujjhanti— Vin. I. 10
(They) fightwith fists;mutthihi+api;
Yudh+ya +nti,pres.3™.pl.
Mundaka samanakaibbha kinha
bandhupādāpaccā
—
D. I. 90; S. IV.
117
Munda bandhakiniyo—Vin. IV. 224
Shavenheadedstrumpets;wordsused

Mukhanimittam paccavekkhamano Mutthassatiasampajananagga

Mukhenaparicumbati
—M. II. 120
—A. IHI. 231 vikūiamānā kākacchamānā seyyam Muttakaranam paveseti—Vin. IV.
Kisses with lips;pari +cu(mb? +4
Reviewingthereflectionof the face: kappenti —Vin. IV. 15 261
+ti,pres.3”.sg.
pati +ava + Iks +a + mana,pr.p. Beingunmindful,unaware,naked, Makes(it) enterinto theurinating
mumbling
andtalkingtheysleep; organ(sexorgan); pa +Vis +e +fi,
Mukhenapi
nakham
chindanti
~Vin caus.pres.3™.sg.
Mukhapuīichanacolakamādāya - wikūiamānāti vippalapamānā, Cy:
11.133
Vin. I. 296 744;vi +kāia --māna,pr. p.: Kath t
Cut (their)nail with themouth
(teeth)
Havingtakenthenapkin;
mukha+ ya +mdna, intens, pass. pr.p., kappa Muttakarane pahāramdenti —Vin.
too; Chi(n)d +a + nti, pres. atiph
 Muttakarisam
Musa Muhuttam
IV. 261 ‘'r’ becomes ‘I’
Give a blow on theurinatingorgan;Da Musābhanati —5. IV. 343 Svas + e + tvd, caus. absol.

+ @+nti; pres. 3”. pl. Speaks

untruth;
Bhan+a +ti,pres.
Mudunācittenakammaiiiiena
—A, 2Wel $g,
e
Muhuttam agamehi—S. IV. 291
IV. 421 Waita moment;muhuttam. adv.;a +
Muttakarisam cajamana palayanti -
With a softandpliablemind: Musa mayā bhanitam-Vin. III. 164 Gam +e +hi, imper.2”. sg.
A. IL.33 kamma(n) +ya, der. An untruthhasbeenspokenby me;
Passingurineandfaeces,theyrun
Bhan +i +ta,pp. Muhuttam āvusoāgamethapindāya
away,mutta+ karisa; Tyaj +a 4
Muddhanam abhimantheyya—M,
I, carissāma—Vin. IV. 73
mana,prp.; Paldy +a +nti, pres.
243 Musavadampahayamusavada Friends,
waita moment,
wewill go
I pl: Would crush the head:abhi +Ma(n)th pativirato—D. I. 4 on almscollection;ā - Gam +e +
+eyya,opt.3”.sg. Havingabandoned tellinglies,he is tha,imper.2"".pl.; Car + i +ssāma,
Muttakarīse palipanno seti —Vin. I.
refrainedfrom telling lies;pa +Hā + fut. I*. pil.
301 Muddhānam ūhananti—M. I. ya,absol.;pati +vi +Ram +ta,pp.
Fallenontohis own urineand
243 Muhuttam idhevatava hohi —Vin.
excrementhe sleeps;pari + Pad +ta.
Strike thehead; u(t) +Han+a +nti Musavadassavipako Il. 254
pp.; Si+a+ ti, pres. 3. sg.
pres.3”.pl. abhūtabbhakkhāna Pleasestayrightherefor a moment,
samvattaniko—A.IIV. 247 until; idha + eva; tava,indcl.; Hit
Muttaharitakam payetum—Vin. I.
Muddhānammaīiāeāhacca
titthati Falseaccusationis theresultof (Bhū) + a +hi, imper.2™.sg.
206
—M. III. 139 tellinglies; abhitta +abhi +a +
To makehim drink myrobalantreated
I feel thathe, havingstepped
ontothe Khya +ana, der. Muhuttam unheotapetabbam—Vin.
with (cow) urine:
head,stands(standson thetop);@+ I. 46
gomuttaparibhavitamharītakam,
Han(hat) +ya, absol.;tittha+ti, Musāvādenaatthambhahiieyya—S. Shouldcauseit to dry in thesunfora
Cy. V. 1092;Pa +(y) +e 4 tumcaus. V. 354 moment;o + Tap+e +tabba,caus.
pres. 3’. sg,
inf.
By making a false statement(he) fut. pp.
Muddhāpi tassavipateyya—A.Ī. woulddamage(my) progress;Bhaiij +
Muda pamujjam jayetha —D. II. 214 eyya,opt. 3". sg. Muhuttam ekamantamhotha
222;IV. 1733Vin. IIL. 2
From atender joy therewould arisea yavayambhikkhu parisuddhim deti
Evenhisheadwouldsplitintopieces;
strongjoy; pa+ @ +Mud +ya, der.; MussatevaBhagavantamārabbha —Vin. I. 122
muddhā -- api; vi + Pat +eyya,opt.
Jan +ya +etha,opt.mid.34 sg. sati—5. V. 369 Pleasekeepasidefor a momentuntil
SSR
Themindfulnessconcerningthe this bhikkhu gives (declares his)
Muda modamānāure putte Blessed
Oneis indeedlost;Mrs +ya purity;Hi (Bhi) +a +tha,imper.2™
d
Musaticakkhūni—
D. II. 183
naccentāapārutagharā mahāe +ti,pass.pres.3”.sg. +eva; pl.; yava,indcl. +ayam;Da +e + ti,
Distractseyes;Mrs +a +ti,pres.
viharissanti —D. I. 135 ārabbha,indel. pres. 3". sg.
ST cise
The people,beinghappy,will live, as if
lettingthechildrendanceon their Muhuttam tava agametha,yavaham
chestandleavingthedoorsopen;Nrt Il. 200 gacchāmi—D. III. 20
" ya +@ +nla, pr. p.; apa+ a4 Vr + Fellasleep
justin a second; Waitjust a moment,till I go; @+ Gam
fa, meta. pp. muhuttakena, ady. +.eva; o+ Kram + +e+ tha, imper.2™.pl.; yadva+
i, pst. 3M, Ng. aham
Mudutalunahatthapado—M. II. 136
Musale ussite—Vin. IIL. 79
The one whose hands and feet are Muhuttamassāsetvā
—M. III. 131 Muhuttam nisidatha—M. I. 457
tenderandyoung;faruna= taluna,
When
thepestle
islifted
up;u()+51 Lettinghimtakerestfor a while;ā 3 Sit down, for a moment; ni +Sad
+fa, pp.

723
Muhuttika
+a+ tha,imper.2”. pl.
Muhuttikā bhavissasi—Vin. III.
139
You will be a wife for themoment;
muhutta+ ika, der.
I. 346
In one secondhe wentto sleep
Muhum muhum hadayam
vedhamanam— S. I. 110
Piercingtheheartoff andon;
muhummuhum,adv.; Vyadh+ a +
mana, pr.p.
Mugabbatam titthiyasamadanam-
Vin. I. 159 used here with instr,sense
Thevowof nottalking,anobservance
of the heretics;miiga (dumb)+ vata;
littha + iya, der.; sam +@+ Da +
ana, der.
Mulatthassa anāpatti—Vin. III. 75
There is no offencefor the initiator:
an + @ + Pad + ti, der.
Mūlam mūiatthikā haranti —A. IHI.
370
Those who are in needof rootcarry
awaytheroot;miila +attha + ika,
der.
Mulani uddhareyya,antamaso
usīranālamattānipi—
S. II. 88
Wouldpull up theroots,eventhetiny
3”, sg.
Mulayapatikassanarahohoti —Vin.
I. 143
Metamasado
Hebecomes onewhois fittobe
drawnbacktotheoriginalposition;
mildya + pati + kassana + araha
Milaya patikassitva—Vin. II. 48
Havingpulledbacktotheoriginal
position;pati + Krs +ya +i+ wa,
absol.
Mūlehi bhesaiiehi attho hoti—
Vin,
1.200
Therewasa needof medicine
prepared
with roots
Māūihenameetamkatam—M. II.
248;Vin. II. 81
Thiswasdonebyme,whowaswithan
insanemind;Muh+ta,pp.;‘me’
is
Miulho mohenaabhibhito
pariyādinnacitto —A. I. 157
The one who is deluded,overcome
by
delusionandgraspedbydelusion;
abhi
+Bhii +ta,pp.;pari +@+Da+ta,
pp.+ citta
Mūsāyampakkhipitvā
—A.I. 253
Having
putintothecrucible;
ni+Ksip
+i t mā,absol.
Me tadanussarantiyā
pāmuiiam
iāyissati —Vin. I. 294
WhenI amrecollecting onthat,
joy
will arisein mymind;tam(tad)+am
+Smr +a+ nta+7,pr.p.;pat Mud
+ya, der., heretheroot vowelisnot
gunated;Jan +ya +i +ssati,
full:
3".
sg.
Metam
Don'tattackthisperson,don'tattack
thisperson;
ma+etam+@+Sad+
0;pst.2. Sg.
Metamokasam santharapesi—Vin.
II. 159
Don’tmakethisspacespreadover;ma
+etam;sam +Str +dpe +s + i,
caus.pst. 3”. sg.
Mettacittampaccupatthitam
sabrahmacārīsuanāghātam—A. V.
80
Friendlymind, freefrom ill-will, has
beenestablishedtowardsco-celibates:
pati + upa + Stha +i + ta,pp.; an +
ā t ghāta
Mettacittammanasikaroti— A. I. II
Givesattentionto thethoughtof love
andfriendliness
Mettacittenavakkhāmi na
dosantarena—D. III. 237 (He) saidto my cousin(thesonof
I willspeakwitha friendlymind,not father’s sister); mithuna + a + ka,
bearing angerin theheart;Vac+ssami der.; the wordmithunasignifies a
(Skt.sydmi), fut. 1%.sg.; used as pres.
Mettacittovakkhami —Vin. II. 249
I shallspeakwith a friendlymind
Mettamkayakammam..
vacikammam...manokammam
III. 245;M. I. 206;A.IHI.132
A friendlyaction,physical,verbaland
mental,is presenttowardsco-
celibates;
wpa+Stha+i +ta,pp.
Mettatasmimpuggalebhavetabba
-A. IHI.185
Love and friendliness should be
Methunadhammā
cultivatedon thatperson
Mettāsahagatenacetasā—D. I. 250
Withthemindaccompanied by love
andfriendliness;saha+gata(gone
with), pp.
Mettūpahāramupadamsesi—A. V.
66
Showeda friendlyobeisance;
metta+
upahāra;upa E Dr$ (dams)t e ts t
i, pst. 3. sg.
Mettenacittenapharitum —A. II. 72
To pervadewitha friendlymind;Sphar
+ i+ tum,inf.
Mettenacittenaphareyya—Vin. II.
109
Wouldpervadewitha friendlymind;
Sphar +eyya,opt. 3™.sg.
Methunakassaācikkhi —Vin. III. 66
boyanda girl; 4 + Khya + i, intens.
pst. 3”.
ard
sg.
Methunadhammapatisamyutta vaca
—Vin. III. 128
The wordsrelatedto sexual
intercourse;pati +sam + Yuj +ta,
pp.
Methunadhammasamapattiya
cittam patiliyati— A. IV. 46
Mind is recoiledfrom indulgingin
sexualintercourse;mithuna+ a, der.;
pati + Li +ya + ti, pass. pres. 3". sg.
Methunadhammaappativirata-
 Methunam
Vin. II. 296
Thosewho arenot refrainedfrom
sexualintercourse;a +pati + vi +
Ram + ta,pp.
Methunam dhammam
Madeherfeelconjugalbliss;abhi+vi
+Jnad+dpe + s +i, caus.pst. 3". sg.
Methunam dhammam patiseveyya-
Vin. IHI.21
Should indulgein sexualintercourse:
pati + Sev + eyya,opt. 3”. sg.
Methunasambhūtoayam kayo —A.
If. 145
This body hascome into existence
throughcopulation;mithuna+ a, der.
+sam + Bhii+ ta,pp.
Methune setughatovutto
Bhagavatā—A. II. 146
Breakdown of the bridgeis said by
the BlessedOne in copulation;
setughāto:padaghāto,
paccayaghato,Cy. III, 137; setu +
ghata; Vac+ ta,pp.
Medhavini silavati sassudeva
patibbatā—S. I. 86
The onewho is intelligent,virtuous,
treatsmother-
in- lawasa deityandis
faithful; sassu -- deya;pati + vata
Me bhātaramjanatha —Vin. I. 33
Seewhethermy brotheris all right;
Jan +nd +tha,imper.2”. pl.
Mokkhacikāyapi
kīlanti—Vin. II. 10
They playwith somersaultstoo; Krid
F a t nti,pres. 3”. pl.
Modamānī Molibaddhāhi Moho
Mokkhasammatāhi bahuianassa- Proceededrejoicing; Mud + a + Shouldbechargedwith ignorance;
@+
M. 1.39 mana,pr. p.; abhi +Kram + um,pst. Ruh +e + tabba,caus.fut. pp.
(It) is heldby manyasa placeof 3”,pl.
release;
mokkha(Skt.moksa)
from Moho kantako—A.V. 135
Muc; sam + Man +ta,pp. Molibaddhahi paribbajikahi Delusionis a thorn(obstacle)
paricārenti —M. I. 305
Mokkhadhippayo paharamdeti, Causeto gratifysenseswith female Moho mahāsāvaiiodandhaviragi-
anapatti—Vin. IV. 146 wandering asceticswho havetheirhair A.1.200
Thereis nooffenceif oneattacks
for tiedintoa topknot;moli +Badh +ta, Delusionis muchto beblamedand
self defence;attanomokkham Dp.;pari + Car +e +nti, caus.pres. changingslowly
patthayamdano, Cy.877;mokkha+ Ta PI,
adhippayo;Da + e +ti, pres.3%,
sg.
Mohaienakammena—A. III. 339
Moghapurisā —M. I. 133 By theactionbornof delusion
Some stupid persons;thisexpression
is used to refer to thosewho Mohanakepācittiyam —Vin. IV. 144
misunderstoodthe teaching , In beingignorant(of rules)thereis an
offence
of expiation
Mogham vata no tapo,aphalam
brahmacariyam —M. I. 155 Mohanīyemuyhati —A. HI. 110
Ourasceticpractice
is empty. (He) is confused on delusive matter;
religious life is fruitless Muh + e +antva,caus.fut.pp.; Muh
+ya +ti, pres, 3%.sg.
Mogham
vatameutthanam,
aphalo
vatamevayamo—M. I. 86 Mohaniyesudhammesu—
A. II. 120
My excertion,
indeed, isinvain,
my In mattersof delusion
attempt,
indeed,is fruitless;
Muh+ 4,
der.; vata,indcl; u(t) +Stha+ana,
Mohassa
appahīnattā
—S. IV. 305
Becauseof the non-abandonmentof
der.; vi + @+ Yam+a, der.
delusion;
a +pa +Ha +ta,pp.+tta,
der.
Moghasuttakam
—Vin.II. 116
A piece
ofstring
withwhich
sewing
Mohassapahānāyapanna
line is marked;vaddhakinam
darisi
bhavetabba—A. III. 446
kālasuttenavivahaliddisuttena
Togetridof delusion,insightshould
sahiākaranam,Cy. 1206
becultivated;
Bha +e +tabba,caus.
Modanti saha bhūtehi —D. II.262
(They)reioice
withall
beings;
sala, Mohā mohova samudeti —A. IHI. 338
indcl. =saddhim,usedwithinst”: Fromdelusionarisesonly delusion
Modamānāabhikkāmum
-D. II. Moho āropetabbo—Vin. IV. 144
231
Yakarena
Yakarena ya bhakarena ya akkoso -
Vin. IV. 7
Insultby usingya or bha(maybeat
theendof thename);
yakārabhakāre
yojetvayo akkoso, Cy. 739
Yakkha vale amanusseossajanti—A.
I. 160
Thedemons letgocruelnon-humans;
o +Srj +a +nti,pres.3%.pl.
Yakkhenagahitohoti—S. I. 208
pp.
Yakkho āvisati —D. ITI. 204
The demonentersinto:@+ Vig+ a +
ti,pres.3. sg.
Yagghedevajaneyyasi!—D. I. 61
My Lord,wouldyouknow!;yaggheti
codanatthenipato, Cy. 169
Yagghebhanteiāneyyāsil —S. II.
106;Vin. I. 237
Would you know,mylord!; yagghe,
indcl. ofexclamation used with
opt.;thetermbhanteis generally
used in addressingthe Buddha
or his disciples,but hereit is used
to addressthe king and his
ministers;Jan + eyyasi,opt.
2”, sz.
Yagghebhavamiāneyyal —
S. I. 180;
IV. 118
Oh dear, would you know!; Jan + na +
eyya,opt.3, sg.
Yaūīiadeva Yattha
samkhamgacchati—M. I, 259 antarussavesu,ussavesūtiāsālhi
Y On whateverconditionarises pavāranānakkhattādisu
consciousness,
it is reckonedwith that mahussavesu;Cy. 631
particular
condition;
yam+yam+
Yagghe marisa iāneyyāsil—A.III,
eva;pati +aya (from1); pati + I (t) + Yano paccupatthitohoti—S. 1.75
370
Sacrificewasready;pati + upa + Stha
O mygoodness,
wouldyouknow
sirl Bra. Sg.
+i + ta,pp.
Yaggheyye janeyyasi!
—M. IL.62; Yaiiiadeva parisam upasamkamati- Yatonidanam—M. I. 109
Vin. IHI.15 A. III. 39 On accountof which
O mygoodness, madam,would
you Whatevergatheringheapproaches;
knowl; yagghe+ ayye upa+sam+Kram+a +ti,pres.3. Yato nivatamtate pavatam—Vin. II.
sg. 79;III. 162
Yaiatambhavamrāiāyaāīam—D.l. Therecomesa stormfrom wherecalm
137 Yaīihiadeva..bahulamanuvitakketi is ekpected(a placeof protection
Lethismaiesty thekingperform anuvicāreti,
tathātathānatihoti turnsouttobea placeof danger),
ni +
sacrifice;Yaj+a +tam,imper.
mid. cetaso—M. I. 115 vata;pa + vata;an idiomatic
a EO, Whateveronethinksof freguentlyand expression
investigates
freguently,therearises
Yaiitvāvāyāietvāvā—D.I. 143 accordingly,a bentof mind;anu+ vi Yatohambhantejato —Vin. II. 79;
Having
sacrificed
orhaving
caused
to +takka+e +ti, denom.
pres.3”.sg.; IHI. 162
sacrifice; Yaj + i + tvd,absol.;Yaj+e anu+ vi + Car + e + ti, caus.pres. Fromthetime,venerable
sir, I was
2
+ tvd, caus.absol. 3”, sg.; Nam +ti, der. born;vato +aham;Jan + ta,pp.
Yaficaattana
bhanitam
yaiica
maya Yaūiiamyaiāmapiyaiāpemapi—A. I. Yattakampathamamadasi,tattakam
bhanitam—Vin. II. 17 168 pacchāadasi—Vin. III. 258
Whatissaidbyyou,whatissaidby Weperformsacrificeandalso make Whateveramounthegavefirst,that
me;Bhan + i +ta,pp. othersperformsacrifice;Yaj+ a + much hegavelast;yattakaand
ma,pres. 1".pl.+ api; Yaj+ape + tattaka,relat.pro.;pacchda,
indcl.
Yaiica...ceteti
yaiicapakappeti, ma,caus,pres. 1. pl.
yafica anuseti,ārammapametam Yattha āvusovedayitamnatthi, api
hotiviāiānassafhitiyā—
S. II. 65 Yaiiiiassa
yajeta—D. I. 143 nu kho tatthaasmītisiyā? —D. II. 67
Whatone wills, whatonearranges, Superintendant
of thesacrifice,Yaj+ Friend,wherethereis nothingto feel,
whatminddeposits
, itbecomes
the e +tu,caus.der. wouldtherebeanythingto becalledI
object for theconsciousness
tostay; am;Vid +aya + i +ta, caus.pp.;
Cet+e +ti,pres.3".sg.;pa? kappa Yaiifiesu
chanesuussavesu
—Vin. IHI. asmi+iti:As +mi,pres. I". sg.; As +
187 ya(Skt.yat), opt. 3™.sg.
+e +ti,denom.
pres.3”.sg.;am*
In alms givings, marriage ceremonies
Si +a 3 ti,pres.3™.sg. arammanam
(whichareheld inside)andfestivals Yattha katthacipucchati—Vin. IV.
+etam;Stha+i +ti,der.
(whichareheldoutside);
vaāāesūti 344
dānappadānesu,chanesūti (She)asksauestionsconcerningany
Yafifiadevapaccayampaticca
āvāhavivāhamamgalādisu partof thetexts;yatthaandkatthaci,
uppaiiativiāīiānamtenateneva
728
Yattha
indel.; Prch +ya +ti, pres. 3™.sg.
Yattha natthi gati bhikkhiinam —A.
IV. 226
Where thereis no accessfor the
bhikkhus;Gam +ti, der
Yattha nemittanamcakkhu
nakkamati—A. III. 243
Wherefortune-teller'seye hasno
access;nemittatinimittapathaka,Cy.
III. 320; nimitta+a, der.:na+Kram
2rd
+ a+ ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Yattha passitabbotattha hantabbo-
Vin. I. 75
Therehe shouldbe ekecutedwherehe
is to be seen; passa + i + tabba, fut.
pp.; Han + tabba,
fut. pp.
Yattha yattha āvusosukham
upalabbhati —S. IV. 229
Friends,whereverhappinessis to be
found;upa+Labh +ya+ti, pass.
pres. 3”. sg.
Yattha yattha icchati tattha tattha
titthati—S. II. 271
Whereverit wishesto stand,there
it stands;Is +ya +ti, pres. 3” sg.;
tittha(fromStha) + ti, pres. 3ri.Sg.
Yattha yattha thassasiphasuyeva
thassasi—A. IV. 301
Whereveryou will stay,you will stay
therewith comfort;Stha +ssasi,Sut.
2”. 8g.;phasu + (y) +eva
Yattha yatthevapasseyyumtattha
tatthevasāni hareyyum—M. I. 366
Whenandwheretheywouldsee(him)
thenandtheretheywouldtakeaway
their things;sani harantitiattano
bhandakaniganhanti,Cy.III. 44;Hr
+eyyum,opt. 3’. pl.
Yattha sattoputhuiiano—D. II. 246
Wheretheworldlingisattached;
Saij
+ta, pp.; puthu,indcl. +jana
Yattha sampahārodissati—Vin.IV.
107
Wherefightingistobeseen;
Drs+ya
+ti, pass.pres. 3™.sg.
Yattha siya visatiganobhikkhuni-
samgho tattha sa bhikkhuni
abbhetabba—Vin. IV. 242
Thatbhikkhuni
shouldberehabilitated
attheassembly
wheretherewould
be
twentybhikkhunis;
abhi+e(from
I)
tabba,fut. pp.
Yatthasilamtatthapana, yattha
paīiā tattha sīlam —
D. I. 124
Whereis moralvirtue,thereis
wisdom: where is wisdom, thereis
moralvirtue;yatthaandtattha,
indcl.
Yatthicehakam
yadiechakam
yavadicchakamsamapajjatipi,
vutthatipi
—D.IL.71
He entersinto andcomesoutof
(vimokkha,release)wherever,
wheneverandto theextentthathe
chooses;yattha +icchakam;yada+
icchakam;
yava+(d)+iechakam;
, KEI
Fapi;vi --ui) -:Sthā'' ti,pres:
3"
Yatvadhikaranam
—D.I. 70;M.1.
180;5. IV. 104
For which reason;yato T
Yathabhutam
adhikaranam,the word adhikarana
is usedherefor the meaningof
reason
Yathabhutamnappaiānāti— D. I. 24,
215;5. III. 56, na paiānāti
Doesnotknow,as it hasreallybeen;
na +pa +Jain + nd + ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Yathabhiitamabbhannasim— S. V.
89
I realised(Dukkha)as it hasreally
been;abhi +a +Jnd +s + im,pst. I".
Sg.
Yathayidamcaram tittham—D. I. 90
As movingandstanding;caram,prp.;
tittham,pr.p.
Yathayidam
cittam—A. I. 5
As mind;yatha + (y) +idam
Yathayidam brahmacariyam
addhaniyamassaeiratthitikam —D.
If. 119;IHI.127;Vin. III. 9
As thishighestway oflife wouldlast
longandbe long lasting;yatha+
idam;addha(n) +iva,der.;cira +
Sthé+i +ti +ka, der.
Yathayidambhikkhave itthirūpam -
A.LIBI
As theformof a woman,bhikkhus
Yathayimebhikkhū sīlavanto
kalyanadhammā- Vin. III. 88
As thesebhikkhuswhoarevirtuous
andofgood nature;yathd +(y) +ime
YatharivaBhagavā—D. II. 224
JustastheBlessedOne;yatha +(r) +
iva
Yathākatham
Yathaafifopi bhikkhu bhitena
codetabbammafifieyya—Vin. Il. 250
In sucha wayasanotherbhikkhu
toowould thinkthata charge
shouldbemadeon a factualground;
aāho -- api; Cud +e +tabba,
caus.fut. pp.; Man +ya + eyya,
opt.3”,sg.
Yathaadhotathauddham,yatha
uddhamtathaadho— S. V. 263
As belowsoabove,asaboveso below;
adho,uddham,indcl.
Yathā arahatamvaco— 5. I. 200
Accordingtothewordof Arahants;
arahatam,gen.pl.of arahanta,
pr.p.
Yatha Uggahamanassa vacanam—M.
Il. 24
Accordingto thestatement
of
Uggahamāna
Yathākatenabhandenasattham
pāyāpetha—D. II. 345
Causetodrivethecaravanwith the
goodsastheyhavebeenplaced;pa +
Ya +dpe + tha,caus.imper.2”. pl.
Yathakathampanaimassabhasitassa
atthodatthabbo?—A. V. 197
How shouldthemeaningofthis saying
be understood?;
vathākatham--pana;
Bhas +i + ta,pp.; Drs +tabba,fut.
PP.
Yathākatham
panaatthamāiānāsi?
—S.II. 35
How do you understand
themeaning?;
yathākatham,indcl.; ā t Jan +na +
2nd
si, pres. 2™.‘sg.
 Yathakatham
Yathātam Yathātam Yathā te

Yathakatham panatumhe .. Yathātihāne thapetabbā

- Vin, I,48 gopakehi—M. III. 13 Yathatambhikkhaveavisayasmim-
assuttha?—S.I, 157 Theyshouldbekeptattheright
place; Because
ofthe guardiansand M. 1.85; 5. IV. 67; V. 109;A. IV. 50
How did you hear?;a +Sru +ttha, yathd +thana;Stha+dpe+tabba, protectors
likeyou;tuha 3-Dr€2.a, As it is, bhikkhus,notwithinthe
PSt. 2". pi, caus,fut. pp. der. domain

Yathākatham pana bhanteBhagavā Yathathitam yathāpanihitam

—M,I, Yathatamdurakkhāte dhamma- Yathātammārenapariyutthitacitto
abhiiānāti vāeam bhāsitā ? —M. II. 57 vinayeaniyyanikeanupasama- —D. II. 103;5. V. 259
127 As it hasbeenstanding
andfixed:
Sha samvattanikeasammasambuddhap- As if onewhowastakenoverby the
Venerablesir, how doesthe Blessed +i+ ta,pp.;yatha+pa +ni+Dha paveditebhinnathūpe appatisarane Evil One;pari +u(t) +Stha+ i + ta,
One rememberthathe is theone who + 1 +fa, pp. —D.III. 118;M. II. 244 pp.* citto
hasutteredtheword?: abhi +Jan + As if in thedoctrineanddiscipline
na + ti, pres. 3%,sg.; Bhas + i + tu, Yathatam aditthapubbamrūpam ill setforth,ineffectual,not leading Yathatamyuvayuvatim—Vin. III.
der. disvā—D. II. 240 tocalmnessof mind,proclaimedby 128
As if seeinga figureunseen
before; theunenlightened andunsupportive; Just asa youngman(talks)to a young
Yathakatham viya? —D. II. 320; Vin. pubbe+adittham=aditthapubbam; du +8)-- ā t Kāyā 1ta, pp.: a - ni woman;yathātam,indcl.
If. 93 a +Drs +ta,pp.;Dr&+tva,absol. t yāna +ika, der.; an + upa +
Like what?;viva,indcl. sama+sam+ Vrt +ana + ika, der.; Yathātamsutavatāariyasāvakena,
Yathatamanathaya —
Vin. IV.231 pa + Vid + e+ i+ ta, caus.pp.; sammadevasatthusāsanam
Yathā katham vyākamsu?—D. II. Asif (it happens)
toadestitute Bhid +ta,pp.+ thiipa; a +pati + āiānantena—M. I. 150
284 sarana;the word thipa is explained As ifa learned,nobledisciplewho
How did theyexplain?;yathakatham, Yathātam
Ānandena
vyākatam-8. bytheCy.to meansupport(patitthā), keepson understanding theteacher's
indel.; vi +@+Kr+ a+ imsu; Niganthanātaputtawasthesupport instructionaccurately;suta + vantu;
IV. 97; A. V. 229
doublepst. 3'd.pl. Jor the niganthas, he was dead, sammā+(d) +eva;4 +Jan +na@ +
As it hasbeenexpounded
byAnanda;
thereforethe disciples were nta,pr.p.
yathātam,indcl. usedfor
Yathākammamgamissāmi— M. II. supportless;thūpa also can be
comparison; vi t ā t Kr' Ia, pp.
71; S. I. 97, gamissanti interpretedto meantheobjectof Yathatamsuttenaasamgahitatta-
I will go accordingto theKamma veneration, niganthanataputta was Vin. IIL.8
Yathātamāpāyikonerayiko
—D.II.
thethiipa, the object ofveneration As theyhavenotbeenjoined together
6
Yathākāmakaranīyo pāpimato —S. for the disciples, now he is dead, by a string;a +sam +Grh +i +ta,
Asif one who is bornin a miserable
11.227; IV. 91 thiipa is broken, pp. * tla, der.
state;apa +aya +ika,der;ni+®*
He is liableto bedealtwith by the Evil
aya + ika, der.
One ashe pleases;yatha +kama + Kr Yathātamdevānamdevānubhāvena Yathate khameyya,tathanam
" anīya,fut. pp.; pāpimato,gen. for —D.11.270 vyākareyyāsi—D. I. 60; 5. I. 98; IV.
Yathātamappamattasa ātāpinō
instr. Asif it happened
bythepowerofgods: 312;A. 1.217
pahitattassa
viharato—
A. I. 164
deva +anubhavena So youshouldexplainasit wouldbe
As if ithappens
toaperson
whois
Yathā kumbhakāro āmake āmaka- agreeableto you; Ksam +a +eyya,
mindful, energetie
andabiding
with Yathātambhavantehiihāyīhi
mattike —M. III. 118 opt.3". sg.; vi +a+ Kr +eyyasi,
wellplacedmind;a +pa+Mad
+ Ui ihānasīiīhi —M. IHI. 13
As thepotterin treatingraw anddamp opt. ArEse.
pp.;@+Tap+7,der;pa +DhāHI? Becauseof themeditatorsand
clay
ta, pp. +atta; viharatofrom
those
whohavethedisposition
of Yatha te mannissanti tatha
viharanta, pr.p. meditation, like you; jha (from Dhyai)
Yathā iānim, yathā kalim —A. V. 324 karissanti —Vin. I. 42
As a loss,asa badluck tya +f, der.;jhéina +sila +i, der. Theywill do astheywill think
 Yatha tvam
Yatha tvam mafiasi—D. II. 329
As you think; Man +ya +si, pres. 2™.
Sg.
Yathadittham yathaviditam
bhimim paccavekkhantassa
—
Vin. I.
17
Whenhewasreviewingthestage,
asseenandunderstood;
yathd,indcl.
+ Dr8§+ta,pp.; yatha + Vid + i
ta,pp.; pati + ava +Iks +a +nta,
Pr.p.
Yathaditthiya ganhanti —Vin. II. 85
(They)takeaccording
totheirbelief:
Grh +na + nti,pres. 3”. pl.
Yathaditthi samattamsamadinnam
-—AEI2V.2D2
Whatis observedandtakenup
accordingto theview;sam +@+Da +
ta,pp.; sam +@+ Da + ta,pp.
Yatha diva tatha rattim , yatha
rattim tatha diva —S. V. 263; A. I.
236;IV. 86
As by daysoat night,asat nightso by
day;divā, indci.
Yathādhammamnihatādhikaranam
—Vin. IV. 126
The legalguestionsettledaccording
tothelaw;ni +Han+ta,pp. +
YathāninnamYatha no
karema —M. III. 10
Wecausetodealwithhimaccording
tothelawandinstruction;
yatha
+
Sas +ta,pp.; Kr +e +ma,caus,|
pl.
Yathadhammo karetabbo
—Vin.1.
135
Heshouldcausetobedealtwith
according
tothelaw;Kr +e +tabba,
caus.fut. pp.
Yatha dhammotathatitthahi—
Vin.
1.354;II. 302
Act accordingtotheLaw;tittha
+hi,
imper.2". sg.
Yatha dhammoyathaatthotatha
patipaiiitabbam —A. V. 222
Oneshouldfollowthewayaccording
to thetruthandthebenefit;pati+Pad
+ya + i +tabba,fut.pp.
Yathādhippāyamdeti- A. II. 82
Hegivesawayashehoped; yatha
+adhippaya;Da +e +ti,pres.
2rd
TS.
Yathādhotena pattena...gamam
pavisi,tathadhotena
pattenapatik-
kami —S. I. 114
As with thewashedbowlhe
entered
thevillagesowiththes
lowland;yathd +ninna;pa +Vrt +a
+mana, pr.p.
Yathā no Bhagavābyākaroti, tathā
namdhāressāma—M. 1.215
As theBlessedOne explainsto us,so
wewill hold it; Dar +e +ssama,
caus.fut. 1".pl.
Yatha no Bhagavavyakareyya,tatha
namdhareyyama— S. IV. 95;A. I.
119,III. 401, dharessama
As theBlessedOne wouldexplainto
usso we will hold it
Yathapaccayamva kareyya—
S. I.
91; IHI. 34; Vin. IV. 122, karohi
Or (he)woulddo whateverhelikes;
Kr +0 +eyya,opt.3. sg.
Yathāpaīiattam paāāāpetabbo-
Vin. I. 48
It shouldcauseto bearranged
asit had
alreadybeenarranged;pa +Jad +ta,
pp.; pa +Ina +Gpe +tabba,caus.
fut. Pp.
Yathapaiifiattam
sallakkhetva
—Vin.
1.48
Keepingin mindtheway asit had
already
beenarranged;
sam+lakkha+
e t tvā, denom. absol.
Yathabhatam
Thecake,alreadyprepared, was
exhausted; yatha +pati + Yat +ta,
pp.; pari +Ksi +a, der.;a+ Gam +
a +s + i, doublepst. 3. sg.
Yathāparisāyapātimokkham
uddisantisakāyasakāyaparisāya-
Vin. I. 104
RecitePātimokkhain theirown
groups,separately;u(t) +Drs +a +
nti,pres. 3”. pl.
Yatha pure ca pure ca —Vin. II.
182
As in earlydays
Yathapure tathapaccha—Vin. LI.
109
As before,so after;pure,paccha,
indcl.
Yathā pure tathā pacchā,yathā
paechātatha pure —S. V. 263;A. I.
236
As beforeso after,asafterso before
Yathā Bhagavāvyākaroti, tathā
namdhāreyyāsi—S. I. 9
As theBlessedOne explains,so you
shouldhold it (in mind);vi +@ +Kr +
evyasi, caus. opt.
. SE.g

adhikarana Yathāpaīhattesu sikkhāpadesu

amewashedbow!hecameback,
sikkhatha—Vin. II. 258 Yathābhatamnikkhitto evamniraye
(He camebackfromalmscollection
Yathadhammampatikaroti —A. I. Trainyourselvesin therulesas —M.1.71; 5.IV.319;A.1.8
withanemptybowl);dhota, pp.iP4
238 theyhavebeenpromulgated; So he is putin thepurgatoryiust as
+Vis +i,pst.34,sg.;pati+Kram
Takesa remedialmeasureaccording sikkhatha (from Sak), desid., theburdencarried(so far);
t i pst. 3, se:
to thelaw;pati +Kr +o3 li, pres. pres. 2”, pl. yathabhatamnikkhittotiyathā
3”, sg, Gharitvathapito,A. Cy. I. 56; vathā
Yathaninnam
pavattamanam
Yathāpatiyattampūvamparik- +G@bhata: & +Bhr + ta,pp.; ni +
udakam —5. V. 396 u
Yathadhammamyathasattham khayamagamāsi —Vin. IV. 79 Ksip +ta,pp.
Asthewater
flowing
down
along
Me
 Yathabhatam
Yathabhatam lasunamparikkhinam
—Vin. IV. 258
The garlic,astheywerebrought,was
exhausted;pathad + a@+Bhr +ta,pp.;
pari + Ksi + ta,pp.
Yathabhatamsuttam—Vin. III. 258
Thethread,
asitwasbrought
Yatha bhavantomafifianti tatha
karontu —Vin. I. 33
Do asyou think; Man +ya +nti, pres.
3”. pl.; Kr + o + ntu, imper.3™.pl.
Yathābhirantam viharitvā —M. I.
170;S. II. 218;Vin. I. 8
Havingstayed(there)ashe pleased:
yatha + abhi + Ram + nta,prip.; vi +
Hr + i +tva,absol.
Yathabhuccevanne payirudahasi -
D. II. 222
Broughtout truegualities:vathābhūta
t ya, der.; paritudtāt Hrtaa
$ + 1,meta.pst. 34. sg.
Yathabhuttamca bhuhiatha—D. II.
173;M. III. 173
Carry on your businessas before:
yatha+Bhuj +ta,pp.; Bhu(fi)j +a +
tha, imper. 2". pl.
Yathabhitafianadassanam
nibbidattham —A. V. 313
Knowledgeandvision ofreality is for
thegaining
of disinterestedness:
yathabhiita +ndna +dassana;ni +
R
+ Vid +&@+attha
Yathābhūtaāānadassanavipannassa
hatūpanisamhoti nibbidāvirāgo -
A. IIT. 200
Yathābhūtan
Disinterestedness
anddetachment
becomegroundlessfor theonewho
hasgonewronginknowledge
and
vision of reality;vi +Pad +ta,Pp.
Han +ta, pp. +upanigā
Yathabhitafanadassanesatihoti
nibbidāvirāgo—A. IV, 336-7
Disinterestedness
anddetachment
is
therewhenthereis knowledge
and
vision into thereality;vi +Raj+a,
der.
Yathābhūtam attānamāvikattā
Satthari vā viāāūsu vā sabrahma-
cārīsu —D. III. 237; M. II. 95;A. II,
65; V. 15
One who revealsoneself,truly,to
theteacheror to theintelligent
co-celibates;vi +Jia +i, der;
sa +brahma + Car + T,der.
Yathābhūtam adassanā—D.II. 91
For thereasonof notseeing
reality
Yathābhūtam (ariyasaccānam)
abhisambuddhattā—8. V.433
Due to therealisation(ofthe noble
truths)astheyhavereallybeen;
Budh +ta, pp. + tta, der.
hasreallybeen;āwi,indel.t Ki ' I,
der.
Yathābhūtam
okkhāyati
—S.IV.
144
Realitybecomes evident;0 +Khya*
ya )+ti,pass.
:
pres.3.
d
8g
J «©
Yathābhūtam
Yathābhātamiānam passamanta-
karo hoti —A. II. 164
Knowingandseeingthereality,as
itoughtto be,one putsanend(to
Dukkha);iäna, passam,nom.sg.
ofjananta and passanta,pr.p.
Yathābhūtamfanena panham
puitho—A. III. 419
Beingaskeda guestionby knowledge,
asit hasreallybeen;Prch +ta,pp.
Yathābhātampaiānāti passati—A.
IHI.233
Knowsandsees,asit hasreallybeen;
passa +ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Yathabhiitambhavetva—D. I. 101
Havingcultivatedasit oughtto be;
Bhū +e +tva,caus.absol.
Yathabhitam viditva anupada
vimokkho—M. II. 237
Liberationwithoutclinging,after
understanding
(ofsik bases
of contact)
absol.; an +upa +& +Da + @,instr.
sg.
7 D. II. 98; 5. V. 152,sandittham
Yathābhūtamsammappanhaya
datthabbam—Vin. I. 14
It shouldbeseen,asit hasreally
been,by rightknowledge;sammā3
parndya; Drs +tabba, fut. pp.
Yathabhitam sammappanhaya
passato —5. II. 17; III. 135
Fortheonewhois seeingthereality,
asit hasreallybeen,with perfect
Wisdom;
passa+nta,prp.
’
Yathāmanosamkhārā
panihitā—A.
737
Yathāyathā
1.172
As thementalenergiesor habitual
tendencies
aresetin; Cy. freats
manosamkhāra and cittasamkhāra
synonymously,
Il. 270;pa + ni + Dhā
ti (a,pp.
Yathā mambhanteBhagavāiānāti -
Vin. II. 79; III. 162
Venerablesir, as the Blessed One
knowsme;Jan +na +ti,pres.3™.sg.
Yatha mayamsukhita sajjita
sukhamedha—Vin. III. 137
As wehavebeenhappy,readyand
prosperous;
swkha+e +i +fa,
denom.pp.; Sri +e + i +ta, caus.
pp.; sukham+ edha(fromEdh)
Yatha mayasamamdittho, evam
tava dittho bhavissati—Vin. I. 241
Whatis seen by you will bethesame
as whatis seenby mepersonally;
sāmam,indcl.; Drs +ta,pp.
Yathamittamyathadittham
yathasambhattam vassamupetha-
Observerainyretreatas friends,as
thosewhohaveseeneachother,as
thosewho havebeenassociated with;
yatha +Drs +ta,pp.; yatha +sam +
Bhaj +ta,pp.; upa +I +tha,pres.
2", pi:
Yathāmetthakhāyati —A. V. 55
As | feelon thismatter;yatha +me +
ettha;Khya +ya + ti, pass.pres. 3
Sg.
Yatha yatha kho nirodham phusati -
D. I. 185
Yatha yatha
Accordingtothewayheexperiences
. SZ.
2 =
Yathā yathā khvāham Bhagavatā
dhammamdesitamāiānāmi —M. II.
55;Vin. I. 194
Accordingto theway I understand
the
Dhammaexplainedby the Blessed
One; kho + aham;@+Jan + na@ + mi,
pres. 1. sg.
Yatha yatha nam sanjanati tatha
tathā voharati —A. III. 413
As one identifiesit, so one usesit in
speech; nam,indcl. Cy. III. 408; sam
t Vān t nā1 ti, pres. 3'".sg.; vi t o
+ Hr +a + ti, pres. 3, sg.
Yathayam avasosanthaheyya—Vin.
Il. 11
As this residencecould sustain;yathā
+ ayam,; sam + Stha + eyya, opt. 3”.
Sg.
Yathayambhikkhuni aha —Vin. III.
162
As thisbhikkhuni
said;a +Ah +a;
pst. 3”. sg.; this is also usedfor the
present meaning
Yathayasmantamafnanti tatha
karontu —Vin. I. 175
Do as thevenerablesdeemfit; yatha +
ayasmanta;Man +ya 2rd
pl.; Kr +0 +ntu, imper.3. pl.
Yathayuttenasakatena
anuparigantum—Vin. III. 151
To go roundby a cartalreadyyoked;
yathā + Yuj +ta,pp.; anu +pari +
Gam +tum,inf.
738
Yathāvuddhan Yathavuddham Yatha so
Yathārāiā vakkhati,tathā to seniority;yatha + Vrdh +ta,pp.; Yathasantatamsamghikamlabham
karissama —Vin, II. 190
abhi + Vad +e +ana,caus.der.;pati parinamenti —Vin. IV. 154
As thekingwill say,sowewilldo;Vac +u(t) +Stha +ana,der; afijali + Causeto handoverthecommon
+ssati (Skt.syati),fut. 3. sg. kamma;sdmici + kamma propertyon thebasisof personal
aquaintance; yathdsantatamnama
Yathāvaiienāpi
kīlanti—Vin.II,10 Yathavuddham,yathagatikam—Vin. yathāmittatā;old. Cy. 154;samgha
(They) play with mimickingdeformity; 11.274 + ika, der.;pari +Nam +e + nti,
Krid +a +nti,pres.3”.pl. Accordingto theseniority,according caus.pres.3”.pl.
to theorderof coming
Yathavatathavā—D.I. 116 Yathāsukhammamdassanāya
This wayor thatway Yathāvo khameyya,tathānam upasamkamantu— Vin. III. 231
byākareyyātha—M. I. 94 Let themcometo seeme
Yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī So you shouldanswerasit wouldbe comfortably;yatha +sukha,adv.;
tathāvād?—D. II. 224;A. II. 24 agreeable to you; Ksam + eyya,opt. upa +sam +Kram +a + ntu,imper:
As he speaksso heacts,asheacts so 3”, sg.; vi + @+Kr +eyyatha,opt. API
hespeaks;yathā'- Vad1 ī,der.; Ind
pl.
tathā--Kr 3:ī, der. Yathāsutamyathāpariyattam
Yathasakampatibhanam—M. I. dhammam— D. II. 284;III. 241;M. I.
Yathāvimuttam cittam napacca- 213 221;III. 128:A. III. 21,361; IV. 86
vekkhati—
A. III. 116 As it comesto one’smindnaturally; The teachingasheardandlearnt;yatha
Doesnot reviewthemindasis pati + Bha +ana, der. +Sru +ta,pp.; yatha +pari +Ap +
released;
pati+ava+Iks+a+ti ta,pp.
pres. 3”. sg. Yathāsakāni ditthigatāni
vyākarontu —A. V. 186 Yathāsunatoanantarāāsavānam
Yathāvihāram
agamamsu
-A. IHI. Explainyourown views;vi +@ +Kr + khayohoti —A. III. 202
299 o +ntu, imper.
i 3. I pl. An ekhaustionof influkesoccurs
Theywenttotheirrespective immediately,whilehewas
residences;a +Gam +a +ims, Yathāsaketitthissāmi —M. III. 129 listening:anantarāāsavānamkhayo
I will standon my own (view);yatha+ hotīti anantarāyevaarahattam
doublepst.3’. pl.
saka;tittha(fromStha) +i +ssami,a uppajjati,Cy. II. 301;yatha +
rareform,fut. 1".sg., usualform is sunato from sunanta, pr.p.: anantarā,
Yathāvihārampavisimsu
—Vin.I.
thassāmi indcl.
291
Enteredintotheirrespective
dwelling
Yathāsaūihissa
te viharato —A. IV. Yatha so parisam sarenavinnapeti,
places;
pa +Vis+a +imsu, psta
85 na ca bahiddhaparisayaghoso
pl.
Whenyou areabidingwithwhatever niccharati —M. II. 140
thought;gen.absl. He speaksto thecrowdin sucha
Yathāvuddhamabhivādanam
way thatthevoicedoesnotgo
paccutthanam
afjalikammam
Yathāsattim
yathābalam
—D.I. 102 outsidetheaudience;vi +Jaa +
sāmīcikammam-Vin. II. 162
Accordingto(my)abilityand ape +ti, caus.pres.3. sg.;
Paying respects,gettingupat
the
according
to(my)power;satti, bahiddhā,indcl.; ni (§) +Car +a
sight,greetingwith foldedpalms,
(Skt.Sakti),rarely used +ti,pres.3”.sg.
adopting
therightattitude,
according
Yathaham Yadaniceam Yadapi Yadi

Yathāham dhammampasseyyam—
S.
IHI. 132
As I could see the Dhamma (truth);
yatha + aham; passa + eyvam, opt.
1", sg.
Yatheva mayamsapaiāpatikā
ahindama—
Vin. IV. 62
Just aswe walk with (our) wives;
yatha + eva; sa +pajapati + ka,
der; @+Hind +a+ ma,pres.
er pe
abhippasanno —D. II. 206
YathevamayaBhagavatosammukha Fromwhatever dayI became
sutam sammukha patiggahitam absolutely
faithfulanddevoted
tathevahamdharessami—Vin. II. BlessedOne;ekanta+gata;abhi+
290 pa +Sad+ta,pp.
As it hasbeenheardandacceptedby
me in thepresenceof theBlessed
One, so I will hold it.;yatha + eva;
Sru + ta,pp.; pati + Grh + i + ta,
pp.;sammukha,
adyv.;
tatha+eva+
aham;Dhr + e + ssami,caus.fut. 1",
Sg.
Yadaggeaham Bhagavantam
upanissayaviharissami, na ciram,
tīni vassani—D. I. 152
It is only threeyears,not long,thatI
amliving in associationwith the
BlessedOne;yam (vad) +agge; upa
+ ni + Sri +ya, absol.
Yadaggenataya arahattam
sacchikatam, tadaggenate
brahmadando patippassaddho
—Vin.
11.292
At whatever
moment arahanthood
has
beenexperiencedby you,fromthat
verymoment thehighest
punishment
hasbeenrevoked; sa+acchi+Kr+
ta,pp.;pati +pa +Sra(m)bh+ta,
Pp.
Yadagge Bhagavatiekantagato
tothe
Yadatitampahinamtam,appattam
caanāgatam —M. III. 187
Whatisgoneit ispast,whatisnotyet
comeit is future:yam(vad)+atitam:
ati +I +ta,pp.; pa+ Ha +ta,pp.4
+pa +Ap+ta,pp.;an+@+Gam+
ta, pp.
Yadatthiyambhātamtampajahami
—A. IV. 74
What is andwhathasbeenthat
I
abandon;As +ti, pres,3. sg. Bhi+
fa, pp.; pa + Ha +mi, rootredup.,
pres. 1". sg.
andclingingto; na +alam,indel.;
abhi +Nand +i + tum,inf; abhi +
Vad+ i + tuminf. ; adhi +0 (ava)+
Sad+i+ tum,inf.
201
Thattoo is unwholesomewhatis
calledgreed; yam (vad)+api; tam
(tad)+ api
Yada ca sa thita va assacuta va
nasitava avasatava —Vin. IV. 216
destroyed(expelled),or goneaway:
Stha+ i + ta,pp.; Cyu +ta,pp.; Nas
te+i-+ ta, caus.pp.; ava + Sr + ta,
pp.;As +ya (Skt.yat),opt.3”.sg.
Yadate sammadhanenadhana-
karanīyamassa—A. V. 159
At whatevertime,friend,you would
havesomethingto bedonewith
money;yadā, indcl.; samma,indcl.;
Kr +aniya,fut. pp.
Yadāhamsammachapo homi —Vin.
Il. 161
Friends,whenI wasquiteyoung;yada
+aham;samma,indcl., usedin
vocativesense;Hii (Bhi) +a +mi,
pres. 1“.sg.; yada indicatesthepst.
tenseofthe verb
Yadi kasiyayadi vanijjaya yadi
gorakkhenayadi issatthenayadi
rajaporisenayadi sippahfatarena -
M. I. 85; A. IV. 281
By agriculture,trade,cattlebreeding,
archery,royalserviceor by anyother
profession;raja +purisa + a, der.;
Sippa + afinatara
Yadi panatata PaficasikhaBhaga-
vantampathamampasideyyasi—D.
II. 265
Whatif, sonPaīicasikha(five crest).
you wereto pleasetheBlessedOne,
first;pa + Sad + eyyasi,opt. 2". sg.
Yadi panamarisa mayamtam
Bhagavantamdassanaya
upasamkameyyāma —
D. II. 263
What if we wereto go thereto seethat
BlessedOne; mārisā,a termusedby
divine beingsto addresseachother
in afriendly way; upa + sam + Kram
+ eyyama,opt. 1*.sg.
Yadi va kaccho,yadi va akaccho—A.
I. 197
Whetherhe is fit to beconversedwith
or not;Kath +ya,fut. pp.
Yadi va katapubbamyadi va akata-
pubbam—A. IT. 116
Whetherdoneor notdonein thepast;

Yadaggenaatthagarudhamma Yadaniccam
tamdukkham
-S.11.
53 Yadi evamsantehoti va katapubbam
patiggahītā,tadevasā upasampannā It is Dukkhawhatis impermanent,
yam" sanditthikamsamaffaphalam, no
—Vin. II. 257 (vad)+aniccam va?—D.I. 62 Yadi va saupaniso,yadi va
At whatever moment eightserious
That being so, is there or not the fruit anupaniso—A. 1.198
conditionswereaccepted(by her),
Yadaniccam
tamnalamabhi- of recluseship in thislife?;yadi, Whetherhe is attentiveor not
from thatvery momentshebecame
nanditum,nalamabhivaditup, indcl.;As -- nta,pr.p.; samt Dr
ordained;yadaggena,instr.for loc.;
nālamaiihositum
—M.II. 263 Yadi samghassapattakallam—Vin.
pati + Grh + i + ta,pp.; tada + eva;
Whatis impermenant
isunfitfor I. 94
upa +sam +Pad + ta,pp.
rejoicing
over,praising
inhigh
terms

740
 Yadeva
If thetimehascome(is suitable)for
theSamgha;
pa+Ap +ta,pp.+kala
+ya, der.
Yadeva kifici bhasitam —Vin. I1.17
Said this or that;yam (vad) +eva;
Bhas + i +ta,pp.
Yadeva tattha pitigatam cetaso
ubbillāvitattam — D. I. 37
Whateveris thererelatedto theioy
andelationof mind; Yam(vad) +eva;
tattha,indcl.: u (t) + Plu +e + i +ta,
caus.pp.+tta,der.
Yadeva tattha vitakkitam vicaritam
—D. 37
Whateveris reasonedout and
investigatedthere;vitakka+ e + i4
ta,denom.
pp.; vi +Car +e +i +ta,
caus.pp.
Yadeva tattha sukhamiti cetaso
abhogo—D. I. 37
Whateverfocussingof mind is there
on theideathatit is ease;@+Bhuj +
a, der.
Yadevatvam yaceyyasi,tadevate
pavāreti —A. I. 186
Whateveryou would ask for, he causes
to offer you only that; Yāe 3 eyvāsi,
opt.2™.sg.; pa+Vr+e+ ti, caus.
pres, 3". sg.
Yadeva mesamamnatam simam
dittham simam viditam tamevaham
vadami—M. III. 186
Whatever is understood, seen and
knownby mepersonally,only that|
Say;sdmam,indcl.; Jia +ta,pp.;
Drf +ta,pp.; Vid +i +ta,pp.; Vad
742
Yanniinaham Yannūnāham Yampidam
+a +mi,pres. I", sg,
breathingmeditation;appa +An + D. L. 119
aka, der.; jha (from Dhyai) +ya + MayI ask a guestion
Yadeva si vibbhantatadevasa
eyvam, opt. 1". sg.
abhikkhuni —Vin. I. 279
Yanniinahamparimoceyyam—A. I.
At whatevermomentsheturnedback
Yannūnāhamayyamvīmamseyyam- 170
(toherformerlife)fromthatvery M. I. 125 May I sethim free;pari + Muc +e +
momentshebecamea non-bhikkhuni: May I examinethelady; vi + Mrs +a eyyam.caus.opt. 1".sg.
yada +eva; vi + Bhram+ta;pp.; +eyyam,opt. 1. sg.
tadā + eva
Yanninaham bhanteafifiamjatim
Yannūnāhamkesamassumohāretvā kodhanāahosim— A. II. 204
Yannūnamayampi
yenaBhagavā kāsāyāni vatthāni acehādetvā Surely,venerable sir, | wasa womanof
tenupasamkameyyāma
-$. 1.26 agarasmaanagariyampabbajeyyam angerin onebirth;thisyanniinais
MaywegotherewheretheBlessed —D.I. 60 differentfrom others;a + Ha (Bhi) +
One is; tena+ upa +sam+Kram+ May
I goforthfromhomelifeto a+s+im, pst. 1".sg.
eyvāma,opt. I". pl. homelesslife, causingto shavemy
hairandbeardanddonwithbrownred YannūnāhamRāhulam uttarim
Yannūna mayamekamsattam cloth;o (ava) + Hr +e +tva,caus. āsavānamkhayevineyyam—S.IV.
sammanneyyāma
- D. III. 92 absol.;@ +Chad +e + tvd,caus. 105
Maywe
agree uponsomebody; absol.;pa + Vraj + eyyam,opt. 1. MayI train Rāhula,further,in the
yannūna, indcl. usedwithopt.to Sg. exhaustionof influxes;uttarim,adv.;
expresshope;sam + Man+ya t vi +Ni + a + eyyam,opt. 1".sg.
eyyama,
opt.1".pl. Yanniinahamgottampuccheyyam-
D. I. 92 Yamahamdhammamjanami, tam
Yannūnāhampi dhammam
sunpeyyam May I question (his) clan; Preh +ya + tvamdhammamiānāsi —M. I. 165
—Vin. III. 12 I eyyam, opt. 1". sg. WhateverDhammaI know,youknow
May I also listentotheDhamma;
Sru thatDhamma;Jan +nd t mi,pres. Ī".
+nd + eyyam,opt. 1”.sg. Yanniinaham..jivantamnam Sg.
ossajjeyyam—S. I. 84
Yanniinadham
afifenapariyayena May I releasehimalive;0 (ava)+Srj Yampaccayassa
uppajjati ajjhattam
Bhagavantam yaceyyam—A.IV.276 t ya t eyyam,opt.1". sg. sukhadukkham—A. II. 158
May
I requesttheBlessed
Onein For which reason there arises (in his
anotherway; Yac +a +eyyam,
opt.
Yannūnāham
tunhīassam—A.
HI. mind)a feelingof pleasureandpain;
I". sg.
194 yam +paccayad + assa;aiihattam,
May I besilent;As +yam (Skt.yam), adv.
opt. I". sg.
Yampidamdittham sutammutam
Yannūnāham dhammam deseyyam- vinhatam pattam pariyesitam
Vin. I. 7 manasa— S. III. 203
opt. 1". sg.
May I preach the Dhamma;Drs +e + Thatwhichis seen,heard,felt,known,
evyam, caus. opt. 1". sg. reachedandsearchedby themind;
Yannūnāham
appānakamyeva
Drs +ta,pp.; Sru +ta,pp.; Man +
jhanamjhayeyyam
—M. I. 243 Yanniiniham pafham puccheyyam-
fa, pp.; vi +Jia +ta, pp.; pa + Ap +
May I practise further thenon-
 Yampissa
fa,pp.; pari +es (fromIs) + i +ta,
pp.
a opt. 2". sg.; Vad+eyyasi,opt.
Yampissa hoti, ahanti va mamanti va
asmīti vā —S. IV. 198
Whatevernotionof I, mine,or I am,
occursto him;yam + api +assa;
aham+ iti +va; mamam +iti +va:
asmi + iti + va
Yam atitam niruddham vipari-
natam—S.III. 39
Whatis past,ceased,andchanged;ati
+1 + ta,pp.; ni + Rudh +ta,pp.; vi
+pari + Nam + ta, pp.
Yam atapojahati, tam chaya pharati
—M. II. 235
Whatsunlightleavesthatshadow
pervades;Ha + ti, root redup.pres.
3”. sg; Sphar + a + ti, pres. 3”. sg.
Yam icchasitam dandam panehi—S.
IT.100
Whateverpunishmentyou wish,
pronouncethat;/s +ya +si, pres. 24.
58.5pa + Ni + +a + hi, imper,24. SZ.
Yam icchissamatam karissima —D.
II. 162
Wewill do whatwe will wish: Js + ya
+i+ ssdma,fut. 1".pl.; Kr +i +
Yam iccheyyasi,tam dajjeyyasi -
Vin. I. 271
Thatyou shouldgivewhatyou would
wish; daiia (fromdajja, opt. 3". sg.)
* eyyasi,opt. 2". sg.
Yam iccheyyasitam vadeyyasi-
Vin. II. 292
Whatever
youwouldwish,that
you shouldsay;Jy +ya +evyasi,
2nd. Sg.
Yam karoti tenaupapajjati—M.1,
390;A. V. 289
What one does(here)onereaches
(thenextlife)according
tothat;
Kr+
o +ti,pres.3”.sg.;upa+Pad+ya
+ti,pres.3".sg.
Yam karomasebrahmuno,tadajja
tuyham kassama—D.II. 288
Whateverwe do to Brahmathatwe
will do to you today;karomase,
pres.
I“. pl., an archaicform; Kr +ssama,
fut. I". pl.
Yam kalam sarati, tam kalam
arocetum —Vin. I. 117
To informthattimewhathe
remembers; Smr + a + fi, pres.30.
sg.; @+ Rue 1.e t tum,cats.inf.
Yam kifici..abhisamkhatam
abhisaficetayitamtadaniccam
nirodhadhammam -M. III. 108
Whateverisspecially
formed and
produced
bywill,thatisimpermanent
andof thenatureof ceasing;
abhi+
sam(s) +Kr +ta,pp.;abhi+sam*
Cit +aya +i +ta,caus.pp.;tam
(tad)+aniccam;nirodha+
dhammam
Yamkifici bhitamsamkhatam
cetayitampaticcasamuppannam
tadaniccam—A. V. 187
Thatisimpermanent
whatever
is
existent,
made, thought
outand
dependent;Bhai+ta,pp.;sam(s)
+Kr
Yam
+fa,pp.; Cet +aya +i +ta,pp.;
paticca +sam +u(t) + Pad +ta,pp.;
tam(tad) +aniccam
Yam kifci ripam atitanagata-
paccuppannamajjhattamva
bahiddhava olarikam va
sukhumamva hinam va panitamva
yam dire va santike va —A. I. 284;
Vin. I. 14; S. Il. 252, (diire santike
va)
Whatevermaterialform,past,future
andpresent,internalor external,gross
or subtle,low or high, faror near;ati
+ 1+ ta, pp. + an + a + Gam + ta, pp.
+pati +u(t) +Pad + ta,pp;
ajjhattam, bahiddhd, indel.; Ha + ta,
pp.;pa + Ni + ta,pp.
Yam kifci vedayitamtam
dukkhasmim
—M. IIL. 208;S. I. 53
Whateveris felt is includedin the
Dukkha;Vid +aya +i +ta,caus.pp.;
thiskind ofloc. is explainedas a loc.
in thenom.sense:
paccattavacanatthe vā etam
bhummavacanam,
D. Cy.. I. 182
Yam kifici samudayadhammam
sabbamtam nirodhadhammam—D.
I. 148;M. III. 280; S. V. 423; Vin. I.
11
Whateveris ofthe natureof arising,
all thatis of thenatureofceasing; this
knowledgeis called the Dhamma-eye
(dhammacakkhu); sam +u(t) + aya
(from I); ni +Rudh +a, der.
Yam kifici sivakena pattabbam-
Vin. III. 158
Whateveris to bereachedby a
disciple;
pa +Ap +tabba,
fut.pp.
Yam
Yam kifici subhasitamsabbamtam
tassaBhagavatovacanam—A. IV.
164
Whatis well said,all thatis theword
of thatBlessedOne;su +Bhas +i +
la, pp.
Yam kho Cunda sattharakaraniyam
sāvakānamhitesināanukampakena
anukampamupādāyakatamvo tam
mayā—M. I. 46
Cunda,whatevershouldbedone,out
of compassion,by a teacherwho is
compassionateandseekingwell-being
of thedisciples,all thatwasdoneby
me for you;Kr +aniva,fut. pp.; upa
+@+Da+ ya,absol.;Kr +ta,pp.
Yam kho Tathagatoparisaya
dhammamdeseti,idamassahoti
sīhanādasmim-A. III. 122
WhateverDhammatheTathāgata
explainsin anassembly,this is his
lion’s roar
Yam ca rattim —D. II. 134
At whatevernight;acc.for loc.
Yam cittamtam mano,yam mano
tam cittam—Vin. III. 74
Whatis calledcitta,thatis mano;what
is calledmano,thatis citta;bothcitta
and mano are used here
synonimously
Yam chayajahati, tam atapopharati
—M. II. 235
Whatshadowleavesthatsunlight
pervades
Yamjanna janapadapadesam
—A. TV.
369
 Yam
Whateverregionofthe countryhe
would know;Jan +pā (Skt.yt), opt.
TO TEE
. Sg.
Yam iānāsi tam vadehi —M. IHI. 48
Say it thatyou know;Jan +nd+ si,
pres. 2™.sg.; Vad +e +hi, imper.2Ind
sg.
Yam fianamtam dassanam,yam
dassanamtam fanam — Vin. III. 91
Whatis knowledge,thatis vision: what
is vision, thatis knowledge.
Yam tumo karissati, tumova tena
pannayissati—A. III. 124; Vin. I.
186
Whatonewill do, one will be known
thereby;tuma,contractedform of
atuma(Skt.atman);tumo + eva: pa
Jia +ya + i + ssati,pass.fut. 3” Sg.
Yam te karaniyam tam karohi-—
S. I.
101,214;IV. 173
Do whatevercould bedoneby you; Kr
+aniya, fut.pp.; Kr +04 hi, imper.
2nc
- SZ.
Yam te sakka aifam maya katum
tyāham karissāmi —Vin. II. 182
WhatI amableto do for you, I will do
it for you; sakkā,indcl. used with
instr; Kr +tum,inf.; te +aham
whichhadbeenpreparedby you;pari
tal * ta, pp.; pari + Vis +a imper.
vamtvamsandhāyavadesi
W. ‘ 4
— A. IV.
Yam Yam Yam
173
titthati —D. I. 251; S. IV. 322 Yam Macchikasandamhapakkami,
For which you say;sandhaya,
indel.;
Whatever action was done with tathapakkantovaahosi,na puna
Vad +e +si, pres, 2”. sg.
paccāgacchi—5. IV. 288
doesnot restthere;pamdnakatam Whenhe left Macchikāsanda, he
Yam dukkham,tamnetammama,
kammamndmakamavacaram left forever,neverreturned:yam,
nesohamasmi,
namesoattā—A,V.
vuccati,Cy. 406; tatra +ava +Sis + usedherein loc. sense;pa +Kram
188
+i, pst. 3”. sg.;pa + Kram+ta,
WhatisDukkha,
thatisnotmine,
that
| ava +tittha +ti, pres. 3%.sg. pp.* eva; pati + @ +Gam +
i, pst.
amnot, thatis notmysoul;na+etan; 3. Wee!
na + eso +aham +asmi:As+mi, Yam bahulamyam bahulam
pres. 1". sg. viharati, tena tena niyyati —5. IV. Yam mamassadigharattamhitaya
317-8 sukhāya—D. I. 134
Yam deti tam paecāsimsati
—D,III. He is ledaccordingto theway he lives Whatwouldensuremy welfareand
258;A. IV. 239 frequently;bahulam,adv.;Ni +ya + happinessfor a longtime;mama+As
Whateveronegives,thatoneexpects ti, pass. pres. 3. sg. +ya (Skt.yat), opt.3. sg.
in return;Da +e+ ti,pres.3%sg.;
pati +a+ Sams+a +ti,pres.3” 5g. Yam bhatta aharissati,dhanamya Yam mamtvamavacāsi— D. III. 53
dhanfiamva rajatam va jataripam Whatyousaidto me;a + Vac +a+5
Yamnomayam.
..apucchimha
tam va—A. III. 38 +i, doublepst. 2”. sg.
no bhavamAnandona byākāsi—M. Whathusbandwill bring(home)
III. 15 whetherit be riches,grain,silveror Yam mayasandhayabhasitam—A.
Whatwasked,that
e venerable
Ānanda gold Il. 401
didnotexplaintous;a +Preh+ya For which it is saidby me;sandhaya,
+i +mha,pst.1".pl.; vit @*KF Yam bhavantehidittham yatha indcl.; Bhas +i +ta,pp.
samamdittham —D. II. 320
s +i: karsi> kassi> kasi,pst.aw
ve
&: What you have
seen is just like that Yam yadevagharampaviseyya— S.
whichI haveseen;Dr +ta,pp.; IV. 173
Yam pathamampucchitabbam, tap yathd, indel. Whateverhousehewouldenterinto;
pa + Vis + evya,opt. 3”. sg.
paccha pucchasi—
S. IV. 295
Yam bhavampādāpi na iccheyya
Youask last,whatshouldbeasked
'hupitum, kuto bhuliiitum —D. II. Yam yadevabhāsati,tam tadeva
first;Prch +ya +i +tabba,fut.pps
Sas anumodati—D. I. 189
pacchā,indcl.adv.;Prch +ya>Sh
Whichyou, sir, don’t like evento Whateverhesays,all thathe
pres. 2". sg.
touchwith your foot,muchlessto appreciates;
Yam(vad) +yam(vad)
eat;/s +ya +eyya,opt.3". sg.; eva; Bhās t ad ti, pres. 3. sg.; tam
Yam panassaito anuppavecehanti-
chup +i +tum,inf.; Bhu(i)j +i+ (tad) +tam(tad) +eva;anu Mud +
A. V.270
tum, inf. a +ti, pres. 3™.sg
Whatevertheywill supplytohimfrom
here;pana +assa, anu+pat Vis+
Yam bhitam tam nirodhadhammam Yam yadevamayamBhagavantam
ssanti,(Skt.syanti),fut.3”,pl.
—S. II. 48 apucchimha,tam tadevaBhagava
Whathascometo be is of thenature vyakasi M. II. 132
Yampamanakatam
kammam,
na(lp
of ceasingto be; BA ta, pp. Whatever(guestion)we putto the
tatravasissati,na tam tatraya-
747
 Yam
Yaso
BlessedOne,all thatBlessedOne Whomyoushouldthinkmore
explained;a + Prch +ya +i +mha, Yasoabhivaddhissati—D. I. 113 tabbam—A. IIL. 435
cultured;Man +ya +evyatha,
opt,
pst. I". pl; vit G+ Kr+a@+s +i, 284 pl. Reputation
will increase;
abhi +Vrdh At whatevertime the mind should be
doublepst.3”. sg. tati-t ssati,fut. 3. sg. spurred;pa +Grh +e +tabba,fut.
pp.
Yam hi kayira tam hi vade-§,I, 24
Yam yadevasatta dhatum abhi- Yasoappamādādhigato—A. IV. 95
Indeed,oneshouldsay,whatone
nivisanti , tam tadeva thamasa The reputation,gainedby diligence: Yasmimsamayecittam
would do; Kr +ya (Skt.yat),meta;
paramassaabhinivissavoharanti. appamada+adhi +Gam +ta,pp. sampahamsitabbam —A. III. 435
opt.3". sg.; Vad+e,opt.34§g.
idamevasaccammoghamafianti - At whatevertimethemindshouldbe
D. II. 282 Yasoladdha kho panamhakam gladdened;
sam+pa +Hrs +a+i+
Yavakaraneyavadūsījayetha,
Into which categoryofdisposition the bhoga—D. 1. 118 tabba,
fut.pp.
yavapalāpo,yavakārandavo
—A.IV,
beingsareclassified,they strongly Our wealthhasbeengainedthrough
169
reputation;Labh +ta,pp.; Bhuj +a, Yassaetādisīpaiā —D. II. 267
Theweed,theinfertile
andthechaff der.
" this is theonly truth,all theothers Whohasthiskindof offspring;
eta(t)
of barleywouldbebornin
afield of
are false"(or emptyof truth): Cy. +Drs 1.ī, der
barley;Jan +ya +etha,opt,mid,
3". Yasosamudagacchati—D. I. 116
takesthe termdhātu to mean
sg.;kārandava—kacavara, CyIK Reputationgoesup;sam +u(t) +a@
+ Yassakassacisaddhānatthi—5. II.
ajjhasaya (inclination), 737: abhi +
74 gaccha +ti, pres. 3. sg. 206
ni + Vi§ + a + nti, pres, 3%pl.; abhi
+ ni + Vis +ya, absol.; vi +o (ava) + For anyonewho hasno rationalfaith;
Yavasamyavasanti
ihāyati—
A. V. Yasohāyissati—D. I. 113 na +As2ti, pres. 3". sg.; natthiis
Hr + a + nti, pres.3”%.
pl.; mogham +
323 Reputationwill decrease;
Ha +ya +i also usedas an indci., e.g. nattisattā
annam
Keepspondering
onfodder
and +ssati, fut. 3". sg. opapātikā(thereare no beingsas
fodder;jha (fromDhyai)+ya +ti, dropdowns)
Yam laddham tena tutthabbam-
pressa KO
Vin. IV. 259
II. 83 Yassakho panamayi kamkhāvā
One shouldbe satisfiedwith whatone
Yasamparipācenti —A. II. 151 Whena personis existing;yuga does vimativa, so mam panhena,aham
hasgained;Labh +tabba,
fut. pp.; Tus
Maketheglorymature; pari$Paetē notseemtohaveanyspecial veyyakaranenasobhissami—D. I.
* tabba,fut.pp.
T ati,caus.pres.3'",pi. meaning,cp. pitamahayuga;Vrt +a 105
+mana, pr.p. Onewho hasdoubtor perplexityin me
Yam loke natthi tam maya dittham
Yasavatāyanandati—A. IV. 96 heshouldaskme,I will explain,(he
—S. V. 447 NU
Havingfameherejoices;
yasavanta Yasmimsamayecittam will beresplendentby askingquestion,
Whatdoesnotekist in theworld, that i ; «cg gid
+ta,der.;Nand+a +ti,pres.3”.5& ajjhupekkhitabbam—A. IIL. 435 I will beresplendent
by answeringthe
is seenby me;na +As +ti, pres. 34.
At whatevertimethemindshouldbe question);Subh +a +i +ssdmi,fut.
Sg.; Drf +ta,pp.
Yasasamvattanika
patipada
pati- neutralised;adhi +upa +Iks +i + I". sg.
pajjitabba —A. IHI.48 tabba, fut. pp.
Yam sukho bhavamtam sukhā
Thepathleading
toreputation
should Yassakho panassakamkha va vimati
mayam,yam dukkho bhavam,tam Yasmimsamayecittam niggahe- va so mampaīihenaaham
be followed;pati +Pad +ya +1
dukkha mayam—D. II. 233 ; tabbam—A. III. 435 veyyākaranena— A. II. 160
tabba,fut. pp.
Wearehappywhenyouarehappy,we At whatevertimethemindshouldbe If anybodywouldhavea doubtor
areunhappywhenyouareunhappy arrested;ni +Grh +e +tabba,caus. perplexityin mind,lethimaskme,|
fut. pp. will explain;pana +assa,opt.3™.sg.;
Yam Suvacatarammafifieyyatha—M. so mam paāhenāti so mam paāhena
11.239 Yasmimsamayecittam paggahe- upagacchatu; aham veyyākaranenāti
Kir +ta,pp.
 Yassa
ahamassa paāhaveyyākaranena
cittamārādhessāmi,Cy. HI. 149: so
an idiomatic expression
Yassatam paribhuttam samma
parindmam gaccheyya—D. II. 127
For whom that(meal)would properly
bedigestedwheneaten:pari + Bhuj
fa, pp.; samma,indel.; gaccha
eyya,opt. 3. sg.
Yassadāni icchasi, tassa arocehi —D.
II. 15
Now, you tell anybodyyou like:yassa
+ idani; Is +ya + si, pres. 2™.sg.°
+ Ruc +e+ hi, Caus.imper.24. sg.
Yassadanitvam kalam mafifiasi —D.
11.76; M. 1.251; IHI. 14,269; S. I.
234; IV. 379
For which you thinkof the time( it is
now timefor that);this sentenceis
idiomatically used to give
Permission to the suggestion; yassa
+ idani; Man 3ya + si,pres. 2™,sg,
Yassanakkhamati so bhaseyya—Vin.
I. 56
For whom it is disagreeable,he should
speak;na +Ksam +a E i, pres. 32rd
sg.; Bhās a eyya;opt 314.gi
Yassapassaāvusoettakenaettaka-
meva,tam passabahum,ko pana
vādo eva abhikkante—S. IV. 402
Friend,whatamount(of knowledge)
In sucha shortperiodoftime, that
too wouldbeso much,what
contention is there when this much
ISsurpassed;
yassa 4 api +assa: As
Yassi Yassāyasmato Yagum
i
ya (Skt.yāt), opt,34.Sg. tam+
For thereasonthatthefundamental vi +Muc +ti, der; samadhi
api +assa;abhikkanta
=atikkanta,
principleof theDhammahasbeen indriya
Cv.il. 115
clearly discerned;dhamma+dhatu;
su +pati + Vyadh+ta,pp.+ tta,der. Ya apattiyobhikkhinam
Yassa bhavissati so harissatiti~Vin,
bhikkhunīhi sadharana—Vin. III.
IV. 162
Yassayasmatoattho, so agacchatu- 35
Thinking,“Hewhoisentitled
willtake
Vin. I. 80 The offencesof bhikkhuswhichare
itaway”
Let himcome,for whom thereis a common with bhikkhunis
need; yassa āvasmato; ā +gaccha
Yassa me bhāsitassaatthamāiā-
+tu, imper.3. sg. Ya etissaakitti, mayhesaakitti -
neyyātha,tathā namdhāreyyātha-
Vin. IV. 216
M. I. 134 Yassāyasmatokhamati,.. so
Her disgraceis my disgrace;mayham
You shouldhold it in suchawaythat tunhassa,yassanakkhamatiso
T esa
you would understand themeaning
of bhāseyya—Vin. I. 95
myteaching; @+Jan +na+epyatha, For whatevervenerableit is agreeable, Yā kāci kunnadiyokussubbhā—A.
opt.2". pl.; Dhr +e +eyyatha,
caus, lethim be silent;for whomit is not IV. 100
opt. 2". pl. agreeablelet him speak;yassa+ Whatever rivulets and tarns; ku
dyasmato;Ksam +a +ti, pres.3” : h
nadt; ku + subbha or sobbha
Yassamyassamdisāyamviharati- sg.;tunhi +assa:As + yā + (Skt. Svabhra)
A. V.201 (Skt.yat),opt. 3%. sg.;na +khamati;
In whateverquarterheabides;
vi+Hr Bhas +eyya,opt. 3. sg Ya kacimasamkhatiyo,sabba ta
+a+ ti, pres. 3™,sg. rattim, appadiva —M. I. 448
Yassāyasmatokhamati,so salakam Whatevernicedishesareprepared,all
Yassayaso hayethabhogapitassa ganhātu—Vin. II. 199 thatare for thenight,not for theday;
hayeyyum
—D. I. 118 For whomit is agreeable,lethimtake sam (S) - Kr + tt, der.
Reputationof whomis on thedecline, thevotingstick.;Grh +nd@ +tu,
his wealthtoo wouldbeonthe meta.,imper.3. sg. Yagupi pita uggacchati,bhattampi
decline;Ha +(y)+etha,opt.mid.
3”. bhuttam uggacchati —Vin. I. 199
sg.; Ha + (y) +evyyum
opt.3”.sg. Yassussadā natthi—Vin. I. 3 Eventheporridge,whendrunk,comes
For whom there are no upsurges; up,eventhefood,wheneaten,comes
Yassavatassavakul —A.I. 168 yassa ussada:u(t) +Syad up (vomits);u(t)+ gacchati,}
From anyone’sfamily sg.; Bhuj+ ta, pp
Ya ariya panna tadassa
Yassa siyā āpatti so āvikareyya- panfindriyam —8. V. 223 Yagu pita khudham patihanati-
Vin. I. 103 Whateveris callednoblewisdom,that Vin. I. 221
For whom shouldtherebeanoffence, is his faculty of wisdom; fa +(d) + The porridge.whendrunk,destroys
heshouldreveal;As +ya(Skt
yao),E assa;paāhāt indriya hunger;
:
Pi +ta, pp net + Han 4 a
fl, pres 3 SE
opt. 3". sg.; avi +Kr +eyya,opt.3".
ye. Yā ariyā vimutti tadassa
samādhindriyam
—5. V. 223 Yagum alamevadatum
a
—Vin.
,
I. 2?
22
Whateveris callednobleliberation, It is quite appropriateto give porridge;
Yassādhammadhātuyā
suppati-
that is his faculty of concentration; alam +eva
viddhattā —D. 11.
751
 Yaguya
Yāguyā kilamanti —Vin. IV. 252
(They) run shortof porridge;Klam +a
+ nti,pres. 3™.pl.
Yaguyo pacanti, bhattani pacanti,
sūpānisampādenti, mamsāni
kottenti, katthāni phālenti —Vin. I.
239
Cook porridge,cook rice, causeto
preparesoups,cut meatandchop
wood;Pac +a +nti,pres. 3”. pl;
sam+Pad +e +nti,caus.pres.3”.
pl.; Kut +e + nti, caus.pres..3. pl:
Phal +e + nti, caus.pres. 3'd pl.
Yacako appiyo hoti , yacam
adadamappiyo— Vin. III. 148
The beggarandtheonewho doesnot
give to thebeggarbecomeunpopular;
a + Dā 3.nia, root redup.pr.p.
Ya ca cetana,ya ca patthana,yo ca
panidhi, ye ca samkhara —A. V. 212
Whateveris theintention,aspiration,
resolveandwhateverarethemental
formations
Yācanabahulā viāāattibahulā
viharanti —Vin. I. 72; III. 144
Abide with so muchbeggingand
hinting at; Yac + ana, der.; vi +Jia
dpe + ti, caus.der.
Ya cavuso appamanacetovimutti,
ya ca akificahiacetovimutti, ya ca
sufifiatacetovimutti,ya ca animitta
cetovimutti, ime dhamma nanattha
cevanānā byahianāca, udāhu
ekattha,byafijanamevananam?
-—M.1,297 ; chariot;pati --o (ava) +Ruh +a+
Brother,whatis calledliberationof
mindthroughimmeasurables,
Yadiso Yanesu
liberationof mindthrough
(from Drs); ta (tat) + disa Yani ca kappiyāni yāni ca
nothingness, liberation
ofmind
anavaliāni—Vin. I. 292
throughvoidness, liberation
ofmind
Yadiso Ramo tadiso tvam—M. I. Whatarepermissibleandwhatarenot
throughsignlessness, arethese
166 blameworthy;K/p +ya +iya,der.;
Dhammas differentinmeaningand
As is Rama,so areyou ana + Vad+ya, der.
differentin wordings oraretheyone
in meaninganddifferentonlyin
Yānakālo mahārāia —M. II. 132 Yani ca tāni porānāni inamūlāni,
wordings?;udéahu,
indcl.;eka+ Greatking, it is timeto takeleaveof tāni ca vyantīkareyya—D. I. 71
attha
Whatevermoneywasborrowed
Yānagatassadhammamdesenti- already,hewouldpaythemoff; ina +
Yacitovabahulamparibhuiijati, Vin. IV. 201 mulani;vi +anta +Kr +eyya,opt.
appam ayācito—
A. III. 33 ExplaintheDhammato theonewho is See:
Reguested
heenioysmore, in a vehicle;Drs + e +nti, caus.pres.
unreguested
less;yācito'- eva;Vāe' 3”. pl. Yanugghatenabalhataramaphasu
i + ta,pp: ahosi—Vin. I. 192;Il. 276
Yanagato samanopatodalatthim It becamemoreinconvenientowingto
Yācitvāsammannitabbā—Vin, Ill. abbhunnāmeyyam— D. I. 126 thejolting of thevehicle;yana +
150 Beingin thechariotshouldI makethe ugghātana;bālhataram,adv.; a +
Havingrequested
(them),
theyshould drivingstickraiseup; abhi+u (t)+ Ha (Bhi) -- a t s +i, pst. 3™.sg.
beagreedupon;Yac+i +tvd,absol.; Nam+e +evyam;caus.opt. I". sg.
sam +Man +ya +i +tabba,
fut.pp. Yanena yayantiitthiyuttenapi
Yanagato samano hattham apa- purisantarena,purisayuttenapi
nāmeyyam— D. I. 126
Yacissasimamdhanam ~
A. Y.159 itthantarena—Vin. I. 191;II. 276
Beingin thechariotshouldI make
Youwill begwealthfromme;theroof Travelbya vehicleyokedwitha
femaleanimalanddrivenby a male
Kācrequirestwoobjects;Yae+i+
t māna,pr. p.; apa +Nam +e + personandyokedwitha maleanimal
ssasi,fut. 2". sg.
eyyam, caus, opt. 1”. sg. anddrivenby a femaleperson;
itthiyuttenatidhenuvuttena,
Ya ta rattiyo abhinnata
Yanam namavayham-Vin. HI. 49 purisantarenāti purisasārathinā;
abhilakkhitā —M. 1.20
Yanameansa carrier:Vah+ya, meta. purisayuttenati gonayuttena,
Thosenights
which
arewellknown
and
+ Sut.pp. itthantarenātiitthisārathinā,Cy.
speciallymarked;
abhi+Jaa +ta,
1085; Ya + Ya +nti, root redup.
pp.;abhi+Laks+i +ta,pp.
Yanamporoseyyam
—M. I. 366 pres.3. pl.; itthi + Yuj +ta,pp.
A vehiclesuitablefor men;purisa
Yā tegati,sānogati—
D. II. 244
(Orpurusa ) +eyya,der. Yane va bhandeva ajanantassa
Whatever
isyourway,thatisourWay,
pakkhipitva—Vin. III. 234
Gam + ti, der.
Yanametampaccorohanam Havingputin a vehicleor in a bundle
dhāretu—D. I. 126 of theonewho is unaware(havingput
Yātrā ca me bhavissati—A.lI. 40
Pleaseregardthatasmy alightingthe in surreptitiously);
a +Jan +na +
Therewill becontinuance
of mylife
nta,prip.;pa +Ksip +i +twā,absol.
ana,der; Dhr +e + tu, caus.imper
Yādisā vā tādisāvā —A. HI. 5
2rd
3”, sg. Yānesu āropetvā—
D. I. 108
Like thisor that;ya (vat)+disa
753
Yapetayasma
Havingcausedtoputintovehicles;
@+
Ruh + e +ta, caus. absol.
Yapetayasma—S. IV. 57
Pleaselive long, venerable;Ya +dpe
+ fu, caus. imper. 3". sg.+ dyasma
Yāpentam mayamāyasmantam
Channam icehāma—M. III. 264
We wish thevenerableChanna
surviving;Ya +dpe+nta,caus.pr.p.;
Is +ya +ma,pres. 1".pl.
Ya bhotinam icchati, sakani fiati-
kulāni gacchatu,afifiam va
bhattāram pariyesatu — D. II. 249
Among you ladies,whoeverwishes,let
hergo to the familiesof her relatives
or seekanotherhusband;Js +ya + fi,
pres. 3. sg.; pari + es (from Is) +a +
Yamakalikam sattāhakālikam
yāvaiīvikam —Vin. IV. 83
The food, permissiblefor one watch,
sevendaysandfor thewhole life: kala
+ika, der.; satta +aha; yava +jiva
+ika, der.
Yame kappati, yamatikkantena
kappati —Vin. I. 251
Permissibleat theright watchof the
night,not permissiblewhentheright
watch of the nightis gone;Klp +ya +
ti, pres. 3. sg.; yama +ati + Kram 4
ta, pp.
Yayam katha abhisallekhika
cetovivaranasappaya—A. III. 117
Whatevertalk,whichslashes
defilementsandhelpsexposethe
mind;ya +ayam;abhi +sam + Likh
Yava Yava Yavajivam
+e +ika, caus.der.; ceto+yi +Vr+
Yava kathinassaubbharaya—Vin. I. IV. 367
a + ana, der. +sappaya
299 Should be followed even to the end of
Until theremovalof Kathina;ubbhāra life; anu + Ba(n)dh + i + tabba,fut.
Yayeva kho panatthaya =uddhara:u(t) +Hr or Dhr +a, der. PP:
agaccheyyathotamevaattham
sadhukam mansikareyyatho—D,I. Yava kayo pakatatto hoti, alam Yavajivamacelakoassam,na
90 yusapindapatena—Vin. I. 280 vatthamparidaheyyam—D. III. 9
For whateverpurposeyoucame Liquidfoodis suitable
untilthebody May I beonewhois naked,mayI wear
here,keepthatpurposewellinyour returns
tonormalcy; pakati+tta; no clothe; pari +Dhā -- eyyam,opt.
mind;yaya + eva;yayarefersto alam,indel.; yiisa +pindapata I", sg.
atthaya,yayais feminineandattha
is either masculine or neuter, Yava gabbho taruno ahositavac- Yāvaiīvamanatikkamanīyo—A. IV.
yassatthdya
is thetermmostly
used: chadesi—Vin. IV. 216 276;Vin. II. 255
agaccheyyātho andkareyyatho As longas theembryowastender,so Shouldnotbetransgressed till theend
both are takenby theCy.255asopt. long (she)madeit conceal;tava+ oflife; an +ati +Kram + aniya,fut.
24 pl, The idiomseemstobe chadesi:Chad + e +s + i, caus.pst. pp.
dialectal. RIKA
KIA
Yāvaiīvam āpānakotikam
Ya ratti va divasova āgacchati—A. Yavagambhirocayam brahmacariyam— M. II. 120
11.434;V. 123 paticcasamuppado The highestwayof life whichis life-
Whatevernightor daycomes gambhīrāvabhāsoea —S. II. 92 longandendingwith theend of life; ā
How deepis thisdependent +pana +koti + ka, der.
Yā rūpe nandi tadupādānam
- S.Ill. originationandhow deepit appearsto
14 be;paticca:
pari3-I (i) +ya,absol.+ Yavajivamarannakaassu—Vin. II.
It is clinging,whatiscalleddelight
in sam +uppddo;gambhira + 197;ITI. 171
material body;tam(tad)+upddana: avabhāso Let the(bhikkhus)be forestdwellers
upa + &@
+Da +ana,der. till theendof(their) life; arafifia +a
Yāva chinnika imā bhikkhuniyo +ka, der.;As +yu (Skt.yus),opt.3”.
Yavaadhammiko
ayamraja—Vin. dhuttikā ahirikāyo —Vin. IV. 61 pl.; sg.form is assa
IV. 204 Howdeceitful,
sly,andshamelss
are
Howunrighteous
isthisking!;
yava, thesebhikkhunis;chinna +i +kā, Yavajivam upatthatabbo—Vin. I. 50
der.;dhutta +i +ka, der.; a +hiri + He shouldbeattendedaslongas
indcl. used herefor emphasis
ka, der. thelifelasts;wpa+Stha+tabba,
fut.
Yāvaāsavānam
khayā—
M.I.210 pp.
Yāvaiānumandalāpaticehādesum-
Until theexhaustionofinfluxes;yav@
A. IHI.241 Yavajivam ussahokarantyo—Vin. I.
indcel.
(They)caused
tocoverthelegupto 58
theknee-cap;yava +janu + An attemptshouldbemadeaslongas
Yavaujuko..yavaasatho..
yava
mandala;pati +Chad +e +s +um, thelife lasts;Kr +aniva,fut. pp.
amayavicayamCittogahapati
-8.
Caus.pst.3”. pl.
IV. 298
Yāvaiīvam pamsukūlikāassu—Vin.
Howstraightforward,
honest
and
not
Yavajivampi
anubandhitabbo
—A. 11.197
deceitfulis thisCitta,thehouseholder
 Yavajivam
Yavatakam Yāvatako Yāvatā

Let the(bhikkhus)weartherobesof Yava iīvitamaranapariyādānā

-A. Yāvatakoahosi kathāsallāpo— D. I. While remembering, (he)would
ragtill theendof(their) life;pamsu+ IV. 189 107;M. I. 397; II. 24; III. 129;5. II. notrevealtheexistingoffence
kiila + ika, der. Until the life is overcomebydeath; 34;IV. 224; A. III. 401 whenthepronouncement is being
pari +@+Da +ana,der. To whatextentwastheconversation; madeup to threetimes;yavatativam,
Yavajivam paripunnam
katha +sam +Lap +a, der. adj.; anu + Sru+e+ iva + mana,
parisuddham brahmacariyam Yavaficidambhikkhaye
upamāpi
na caus.pass.pr.p.;Smr +a +mana,
caritum —Vin. III. 20 sukarā yāvadukkhā nirayāti—M. Yavatakova tavatakova pano—S. prp.; As +nta + T;4 + Pad +
ti,
Topractise
thehighestwayof life, III. 165 IV. 320 der.; na +Gvi+ Kr +o +eyya,
which is completein itselfand pure, Bhikkus, it is noteasyto findevena Livingbeingof whateverkind opt.3”. sg.
as longastheylive;pari + Pr + ta, similetoexplainhowpainful
arethe
pp.;pari +Sudh+ta,pp.; Car +i + purgatories;ydvaca +idam Yavatakvassakayo tavatakvassa Yāvatatiyamapasādito—A. I. 278
tum,inf.
vyamo,yavatakvassavyamo (I) havebeendisparaged
upto thethird
Yāvatakamākamkhati,
tāvatakam tavatakvassa kayo —D. II. 18; M. II. time;apa +Sad +e + i + ta,caus.
Yavajivam pindapatika assu—Vin. anussarati—D. IIL. 134 136 pp.
Il. 197 He remembersas far backashe To whatextentwashis body,to that
Let the(bhikkhus)dependon alms hopes:vāvatakam
andtāvatakam, extentwashis bothhands,fully Yāvatatiyamsamanubhāsitabbo -
collected,till theend of their life: indcl.; @+ Kamks. +a +ti,pres. stretched;to whatextentwashis both Vin. III. 173;IV. bhāsitabbā
pinda +pata +ika, der. hands,fully stretched,to thatextent
3”.sg.;anu+Smr+a+ ti,pres. He shouldbeadmonished upto the
rd
30 sp. washis body.;yavatako+assa; thirdtime;Samt anu t Bhās ti -
Yavajivam macchamamsamna tavatako + assa tabba,fut. pp.
khādeyyum— Vin. II. 197:III. 171
Yāvatakamicchasitāvatakam
Let themnoteatfish andmeatas long
ganhāhi—
Vin. III. 214
astheylive;Khad+eyyum,
opt.3”. Whatever
amount youliketotake, 115 Yāvatā candimasuriyāpariharanti,
pl. (You)press(me)uptothethirdtime; disa bhantivirocana—A. I. 227
takethatmuch;Grh +nd +hi,meta.
imper.2". sg. abhi +ni +Pid'+ e +si, pres.2™.sg. To theextentthemoonandthesunrun
Yāvaiīvam mātāpettibharo assam- theircourseandilluminateall
S. 1.228 Yāvatatiyakamdhammamāpannā directions;yavata,indcl.; pari + Hr
YavatakamkhoAnandatakkaya
May I be onewho fostersmotherand nissāranīyam
—Vin. IV. 236 +a+nti, pres.3”. pl.; Bhd +a+ nti,
pattabbam,
anuppattam
taya
—M.
fathertill the endof life: yavajivam, (She)hascommittedanoffence pres.3. pl.
III. 263; S. I. 56
ady.;mata +petti (Skt.pitr) +Bhr
Ananda,
youhavereached
that
extent
+ a, der.; As +yam (Skt.yam), opt. ydva +tatiya +ka, der; & + Pad + Yāvatāchannamphassāyatanānam
whichshould
bereached
bylogie;
TE ge, fa, pp.; ni (s) +Sr + e + aniya, caus. gati , tāvatāpapaīicassagati —A. II.
the term takka is usedas f.;pa +I
Ap +tabba,fut. pp.; anu+pa +Ap
Sut.pp. 161
Yāvaiīvam rukkhamūlikā assu—Vin. To whatextentis thesphereofsix
+ta,pp.
II. 197 Yāvatatiyampi
patikkosati—A. HI. basesofcontact,to thatextentis the
Let the(bhikkhus)live at theroot of 193 sphereof proliferationof thoughts;
Yāvatakam
yāvatakam
—D.HI.13
trees,till theend of their life: rukkha Even to the third time (he) reiects; yāvatā,tāvatā,indcl.;phassa t
To whateverextent
+mila + ika, der. pati +Krus +a +ti,pres.3”.sg. āvatana ; Gam +ti, der.

Yavatakamsaddhena
pattabbam-
Yavajivam saranīyāni—A. I. 106 Yāvatatiyamanusāviyamāne Yavata
M. II. 94
Tobe rememberedas long as thelife Saramanosantim apattim ditthitthanadhitthanapariyutthana
To whatextentitshouldbereached
by
lasts;Smr +aniya,fut.pp. navikareyya
—Vin. I. 103 samutthānasamugghāto —A. V. 198
the faithful; saddhd+ a, der.
 Yavata
To whatextentis thedestruction
of pointsof view, fixing ofview,
arisingofviewandcausingofview :
ditthi + Stha + ana, der.; adhi +
thana,pari + u(t) +thana,sam +
u(t) + thana; sam + u(t) + Ghan + ta,
Pp.
Yavata panaakamkheyya—
A. I. 228
To what extent (he) would expect; @ +
Kamks+eyya,opt.3™.sg.
Yavatayukam thatva —A. II. 126
Having lived full span
of life: yavata +
āvu 1 ka, der.; Sthā -- twā,absol.
Yavatā rupassa...viniianassa gati -
S. IV. 197
To whatextentis thesphereof
Gam + ti, der.
Yavata sania samapatti,tavata
anna pativedho—A. IV. 426
To whatextentexiststheattainment
with consciousness, to thatextent
existsthe penetrationinto gnosis:
vāyatā sacittakasamāpattināma
atthi, tavataolarika dhamme
sammasatoanndpativedhohoti:
nevasaiihānāsahhiāyatanam pana
sukhumattāSanndsamapattitina
vuccan,Cy. IV. 197-8:@ +Jia: pati
Vyadh +a, der.
Yavata silani, ariyakantani tesam
aggamakkhayati—A. III. 36
he moralvirtuespreferredby the
nobles, are said to be the highest
amongall moralvirtues:
ariyakantasilaniti inaggaphala
vampayuttakāni sīlāni, Cy. II. 245:
5;
758
aggam +a +Khya +ya +ti,Pass,
pres,3". sg,
Yavatika abhisamkharassa
gati—A,
I. 111
To whatextent
wasthe
velocity
Yavatika nāgassabhūmināgena
gantvā—D. I. 50
Having riddentheelephant,
asfaras
thegroundwassuitableforthe
elephant;Gam + tvd,absol.
Yāvatikā bhikkhū antosīmagatā-
Vin. I. 309
To whatextentthebhikkhusassembled
insidetheboundary;anto+sima+
gata
Yāvatikā yānassabhūmiyānena
gantvā yānā paccorohitvā—
M. II,
49
Havinggonebythevehicle
asfar
astheroadwassuitableforthe
vehicleandgotdownfrom
it; pati
+o (ava) +Ruh +a+i+ ta,
absol.
Yavatihamjanampaticchadeti,
tavatiham —Vin. IIL. 186
As manyasthosedaysthathecauses
to cover upknowingly;;yava+(0*
aham;Jan +nd +nta,prp.: pali?
Chad +e +ti, caus.pres.3”.58
tava +(t) +aham
YAvadatthafica khadeyya
ucchamgaiica
pireyya—M. I.366
He would eatasmuchasheneeds
and
causeto fill thelaptoo;Kāād' 090
opt. 3”
sg.:Pr +e +epya, caus.opt
78, SO
BE o,
Yavadattham Yavadeva
Yāvadatthamudarāvadehakam Wouldenjoyasmuchasheneeds;
bhuhiitvā—D. III. 238;M. I. 102;A. yava (Skt.yavat) + (d) +attam
II. 222
Havingeatenasmuchasheneeds,
Yāvadīgharattammahāpaīiāoca so
untilthestomach
goesoutof shape;
Bhagavāahosi—D. II. 230
udara +avadehaka,adv.;Bhu(fi)j +i How longthatBlessedOnewaswith
+ tvd, absol greatwisdom;yava +digha +rattam,
adv.;a+ Hi (Bhi) +a +s +i, pst.
Yavadatthamkatva —Vin. III. 37 3”. sg.
Havingdone( havinghadsexual
intercourse)
asmuchastheywanted: Yāvadevaākamkhāmi—S. IV. 298
Kr +tv, absol. To whateverextentI hope;yava + (d)
+eva;4 +Kamks+a + mi,pres. 1".
Yavadatthamkanditva roditva - Sg.
Vin.I. 345
Havingcriedandweptso much;Krand Yavadevaimassakayassathitiya
+i +tva,absol.; Rud +a+i+ ta, yāpanāya—M. I. 10,355; S. IV. 104,
absol. 176;A. II. 40
Just for thesakeof keepingup this
Yavadatthamdehi—Vin. I. 214 bodyandcausingit to move;Ya +dpe
Give as much as (he) needs;Da + e +
+ ana; caus. der.
hi, imper.2". sg.
Yavadevautuparissayavinodanam
Yāvadatthampāripūrim (labhanti) patisallanaramattham—M. I. 10
—Vin. I. 149 Just for thesakeof drivingout the
Theyreceiveasmuchastheyneedto troublesof weatherandenjoying
theirsatisfaction;paripara +ī, der.; solitude;utu +parissaya:pari +Sri
Labh +a +nti, pres.3”. pl. +a, der. +vinodana:vi +Nud +e +
ana, caus. der.; pati + sam + Li +
Yavadattham
phalanibhakkhitva
- ana,der. + Grama +attham
A. IIT. 369
Havingeatenasmuchfruitsas(he) Yavadevaupanikkhepanamattaya -
needed;
Bhaks+a +i +tva,absol. S. IL. 276
Just for thesakeof causingto keep
Yāvadatthambhufijantuca harantu aside(meaning:notso significant);
ca—Vin. III. 107 upa +ni +Ksip +e +ana,caus.der.
Eatandtakeawayasmuchas(they) + matta
need;Bhu(ii)7 +a+ ntu,imper.3”
pl; Hr +a +ntu, imper.3™.pl. Yavadevauppannanamveyya-
bādhikānamvedanānam
Yavadattham
madam4pajjeyya
—
S. patighātāya—M. Ii. 10
IV. 196 lust for thesakeof eliminating
59
 Yāvadeva
Yavapapo Yava bala Yaya supaiinattacime
disturbingfeelingsthathadarisen: Yavadevaviīiāpanatthāya
—M,I,
u(t) +Pad + ta,pp.; vi +& + Badh 4 Yaya bala ime paccantajamanussa- fathers;pitu pitā pitāmaho,
249
ika,der.;pati +Ghan+ta,pp. D. II. 338 pitāmahassayugampitāmahayugam,
Just for thesakeof makingothers
How foolisharethesepeoplebornin yuganti āyuppamānam vuccati,
understand;
vi +Jia +dpe+ana,
Yavadeva kukkuccaya vihesaya ruralareas;yāva is usedherefor abhilāpamattamevetam,
atthopana
caus. der. + attha
vilekhaya samvattanti.—Vin. IV. emphasis; paccanta +ja pitamahoyevapitamahayugam,Cy.
143 281
Yavadeva hirikopīnapatie-
They leadonly to worry,harassment Yava bahagahanapinama
chādanattham— M. I. 10
andscepticaldoubt: āgamessati—A. IV. 206; Vin. II. 237 Yāva sattamāmātāmahayugā—M.
lust for thesakeof covering
private
vicikicchāsamkhātāmano vilekha. lt is strangethathe will awaituntilhe II, 156
parts(which causesembarrassment is takenby hand;vāva usedwithabl.;
Cy: 876; sam + Vrt + a + nti, pres. Up totheseventhgenerationof grand
whenexposed),hiri +kopina+pati bāhā t gahanā- api ; nāma,indcl.,
3”. pl. mothers
+Chad +ana,der. +attham usedto expressamazement;4 + Gam
te ssati, fut. 3'di Sgi YāvasaddhāyamSuppiyā pasannā-
Yavadeva ca pana so kilamathassa
Yavadhamsi vayamlonakaraka- Vin. I. 217
darako yavamukharoyava- Yāva bhattassa kālo bhavissati —S. How faithfulanddevotedis this
II. 265;IV. 191
pagabbho— A. II. 182 1.155 Suppiyā;yavasaddhā+ayam; pa +
He wouldiust becometiredand
How dareis thisladofa salt-maker, Until the time for meal Sad +ta,pp.
disappointed;As +ya (Skt.yat), opt.
ord how garrulousandreckless;yavafor
J. SZ.
emphasisis Yāva bhikkhusabhāgatamiānāmi - Yava sandhisamalasamkatira—D. II.
Vin. I. 91 160
Yavadeva nanamattayapatissati-
Yavanahatthamgacchati
—Vin.1. Until I know theirlegitimacyas Downto thehouse,sewersand
mattāya—M. I. 56
198 bhikkhus; bhikkhu +sabhaga+ ta, garbageheaps;sandhi+ samala+
Tustfor thesakeof knowledgeand
Untilit doesnotgotothe(relevant) der.;Jan +na +mi,pres. I. sg. samkatira
recollection; Adna +matta;pati +
hand
Saul + matta
Yāva bhedanayadharetabbo—Vin. Yāva samandhakārāovaditvā
Yava pacchimasopanakalevara
—M. II. 247 uyyoiesi—Vin. IV. 54
11.92 It shouldbeuseduntilit breaks; Havinginstructeduntil it was
II. 251 yāvabhedanāyashould either be
Up tothelaststepofthe staircase completelydark,hesentthemoff; o +
Just for reachingtheworld of yāvabhedanā or yāvabhedanā 'yam; Vad + i +tva, absol.; u(t) + Yuj +e +
brahma;brahmaloka 4 upa +Pad Dhr +e +tabba,caus.fut. pp. s + i, caus.pst.3”. sg.
Yāvapāpamnapaceati —S.1.85
+ti, der,
Untiltheevilactionisnotmatured
enough; Ē
Pac+ya +ti,pass. "i
pres.
3". Yāvamaranakāiāpi
—D. II. 202 Yava samandhakaranahayimsu-
Yava devamanussehisuppakasitam Evenuntil thetimeof death Vin. IV. 117
SZ.
—D. II. 106,IHI. 122 Batheduntilcompletelydark;sam +
Until it is well proclaimedby godsand Yavalikhayamgharani—
Vin. I. 271 andhakdra;Sn@+(y) + imsu,meta.
Yava papo ayamDevadatto
men;su +pa +Kag +i 4 ta,pp.;a How wretched (stingy) is this pst. 3™.pl.
alakkhiko —Vin. II. 196
PED. takesyava 3 devaasyavad + housewife;/akha +avam;ghara +
Whata despicableandmiserable
eva, Cy. doesnot support PTS int Yāva supaīihattācimeBhagavatā
creature
is thisDevadatta;
a +lakkha
meaning cattārosatipatthānā—M. I. 340
+ika, der.
Yāvasattamāpitāmahayugā
—D. I. How nicelyproclaimedarethesefour
Yavadevamamatthāya—
A, I, 145 113;M. II. 156 basesof mindfulnessby theBlessed
Just for the sake of me; mama +attha One; yāva,indcl. usedto emphasize;
Up to theseventhgenerationofgrand

761
 Yava suppanfiattavime
Yavetado

su +pa +Jia +dpe +ta,caus.pp. 4 Howbeautifully

explained
isthe
ca + ime;sati +pa +Stha +ana, caranenava —Vin. IV. 204 property;Yu(njj +a +tha,imper.
Dhammaby me;sw +@+Khyé+ta,
der.
Whateverlivelihoodobtainedthrough 2 ph
PP.
destructionandmisconduct;Vrt +ti,
Yāva suppafifattavime
cattaro der. Yuttapatibhanoca muttapatibhano
Yāvassa atthampekkhāmi
- S. IV.
satipatthana, kusalassādhigamāya- ca—A. II. 135
291 Yāvetadohi pi —M. II. 47
D. II. 216 Readywittedandunwitted;Yuj+ta,
UntilI seethemeaning
ofthis;
yava
+ To thisextent,really?;ettha
How beautifullyproclaimedare these pp. +pati +Bha +ana,der.; Much +
assa;pa +Iks +a +mi;pres,1°.sg. dokārahikārapikārānipātā,
four basesof mindfulnessfor the ta +patibhana
yāvetaparamantiattho,Cy. III. 281
realisation of kusala (Good); su + pa
Yavassakayotitthatitavanam Yuddhampaccupatthitam—5. I. 98
+Jnd +āpe +ta, caus.pp. + eva 4
dakkhintidevamanusā
- D. I,46;A, Yā vedanāsunandi tadupādānam- A warwasimminent;
pati +upa +
ime; kusalassa + adhigama
IV. 77, thassati M. I. 266 Sthd+i +ta,pp.
Both godsandmenwill seehim
as lt is clinging,whatis calleddelightin
Yavasubhasitamidambhante
long as his bodyremains;
yava+ feelings Yutha apakkamma—Vin. I. 353
Bhagavata—S. I. 61; IV.
assa;tittha(fromStha)
+ ti,pres.
3". Havingisolatedhimselffromtheherd;
subhasitaficidam
sg.; Dr§ +ssanti,Skt.draksanti
> Yā sā surā asurātā asampattā apa + Kram +ya, absol.
How nicely this hasbeenexplained by
dakkhanti>dakkhinti,fut. 3”.pl. majjabhavam—Vin. II. 301
theBlessedOne, venerablesir: sy +
Whateverintoxicantwhichhasnotyet Ye annathajananti, micchatesam
Bhas +i +tam,pp. +idam
Yavassasaoja kayethassati,
tava na fermented andnotreachedthestateof hānam— M. III. 210
annham bhojanamchadessati-—A.
IIL. strongdrink;a +sam +pa +Ap +ta, Thosewhoknowotherwise,their
Yāva suriyassauggamanākākaccha-
396 Pp. knowledgeis false;aāā'athā,indci.;
mānā supimsu —A. III. 299
As longasthatnutritive
essence
will Jan + na@ -- nti; pres.3"'.pi; micchā,
They slept,muttering,until therise of Yuganaddhavattanti,samathoca
remainin thebody,solonghewill indcl.; opp.samma
the sun; kākasaddamkarontā dante
havenoappetite
foranother
food;
Siha vipassanaca —M. III. 289
khādantā,Cv. III, 350: u(t) + Quietudeandinsightarecombined
+ssati,fut. 3. sg.; Cha(n)d+e+ Ye avitakkeavicarese panitatare-
gamana;Kath +ya +māna; intens. together;yuga +Nah + ta,pp.; Vrt +
ssati,caus.fut. 3. sg.orchdta
+e* D. IL. 278
pr.p. a + nti,pres. 3. pl.; sama+ tha
ssati,denom. fut. 3”.sg. Whatis freefromreasonand
investigation,
thatis moreexcellent;
Yāva suriyuggamanāseyyam : , j Yugamattam
eapekkhati—M. II. all Māgadhīforms, Māgadhīe is
Yāvassa sīsamna nibbattati—
A. IV.
kappessanti— S. II. 268 137 replacedby o in Pāli
169
They will sleeptill therise ofthe sun; He casts (his) eyes on iust a yoke's
Till itsearisnotborn;ai +Vrttat
suriya + uggamana;kappa +e + length;
yuga +matta;pa +Iks +a4 Ye akifcahnhayatanasamyojane se
ti, pres. 3”. sg.
ssanti,denom.fut. 3". pl. ard
ii, pres, 3. se. vante—M. II. 255
Yavaham tesamuddassetva Thathasbeengivenupwhichhasbeen
Yāva so darako vifiutam pāpunāti Yuāiati Buddhasāsane —M. II. 104 connectedwith thebaseof
agacchami—D. II. 321
—Vin. II. 278 PutsintopracticeBuddha's nothingness;ve, samyojane,se, vante,
Till I comebackaftervisitingthem;
Until thatchild reachestheageof instruction;
Mai); --a1 ti,pres.3". all thesetermsare Magadhiforms,
(literally, this meanshavingmade
understanding: vi +Jia +i +ta, der: se. nom.sg.; Vam+ta,pp
myself shown to them); u()) * Drs +
Pa +Ap " (inā -- ti, pres, 374.SZ.
Yuīiiathāyasmanto
sakam-
Vin. II. Ye icchimsu,te akamsu—D. I. 141
+mi, pres. 1".sg.
Yava svakkhatomaya dhammo- 222 Whoeverwished,theydid work; /s +
Vin. IL. 199 Gentlemen,makeuseof yourown ya +imsu,pst.3™.pl.; a +Kr +@ +
Y4 vuttivinipatena
adhamma-
 Ye
Ye Yena
imsu,doublepst.3™.pl. husband,
whether
theybewoolor
Yete bhikkhū suttantikā—Vin. III. andsatdown;sam +ni +Sad +ta,
cotton; und + iti; kappasa+iti
Ye ussahantikasigorakkhe —D. I. 159 pp.; sam+ni +Pat + i +ta,pp.
135 Ye te bhattu garuno, matatiya
Those bhikkhus who are reciters of
Thosewho takeinterestin agriculture suttanta(discourse); suttanta +ika, Yenaandhavanamtenapakkami
pitati va samanabrāhmanāti ya-—
A,
andcattlebreeding;
u(t)+Sah+a + der.
II. 37
nti,pres.3”.pl. Whoeveraredeferentialtothe
Wherewastheblind foresttherehe
Ye te santavimokkha atikkamma wentfor siesta,yena andtenaare
husband,whethertheybemother,
Ye keciakusaladhammasabbete rūpe āruppā —M. 1.33 usedin theloc. sense,pa + Kram+i,
father,reclusesandbrahmins
adhobhavamgamaniya—M. I. 44 Thoseliberationswhich arepeaceful pst. 3. sg.; diva + vihara
Whateverareunwholesomethey andformless,transcendingtheworld
Ye te bhikkhū ihāyino —Vin. IHL159
shouldall go downward:adho,indel. of form;Sam + ta,pp.; ati +Kram + Yenakamampakkamati—
S. V. 149;
Those bhikkhuswhoaremeditators;
+ bhava + Gam +aniya,fut. pp. A. II. 92
Jha (fromDhyai)+(y)+i, der.
Goesoff ashelikes;pa +Kram + a +
Ye dibbā ye ca manusa—S. I. 105 ti, pres.3”. sg.
Ye keci kusalā dhammā sabbe te
Ye te bhikkhū tiracchānakathikā Those which are divine and human;Div
catusu ariyasaceesusamgaham
kāyadaddhibahulā
viharanti
—Vin, +ya; manu(s)+a, der. Yenakamampakkameyyam—M. I.
gacchanti—M. I. 184 II. 159
Whateverarewholesometheyall are 135 usgdib-.
Thosebhikkhuswhoarebeastly
talkers Ye dhammanalamariya I wouldsetout,asI wish;pa +Kram +
includedin the fourfold noble truth:
andbody-builders;
kāya--daddhi nālamariyasamkhātā— A. IV. 363 eyyam,opt. 1".sg.
sam+Grh +a, der.
(dalhi) + bahula TheDhammas whichareunsuitablefor
thenoblesandreckonedasunsuitable Yena kenacikammatthanena—A. V.
Ye keci Buddham saranam gatase-
Ye te bhikkhii thera rattanna for thenobles;arivabhavamkātum 83
D. II. 255
cirapabbajita samghapitaro asamatthā, ariyānam wā With whateverprofession
Thosewho hadgoneto theBuddhafor
samghaparināyakā
—D.II. 77 ananucchavikā,Cv. IV. 168
refuge;gata + se (Vedicgatāsah),
Thosebhikkhuswhoareelders,
of Yenakenacijetabba—Vin. IV. 1
double nominative and Māgadhī
long standing,who haverenounced Ye dhammapubbecetasa Anyhow,theyshouldbedefeated; Ji +
influence,archaicform
longtimeago,whoarefathers
ofthe samphutthapubba—A. III. 361 a +tabba,fut. pp.
Samgha andleaders
oftheSamgha; Thethingswhicharetouched
Ye keci mūlagandhā kālānusāriyam
ratta +Jia +a, der; cira +pat (experienced)
previouslyby themind; Yenakenacipariyāyena—
5. II. 51
tesamaggamakkhāyati—A. V. 22
Vraj+i +ta,pp.;samgha
+pari+ sam + Sprg§ + ta, pp. +pubba By whatevermeans
Kālānusāriya(a kind of root) is said to
Ni + aka, der.
bethebestamongfragrant
roots; Yenaatthenaāgacchi, Yenakenacivannena—S. I. 206
aggam +a + Khya +ya + ti, Pass.
Ye te bhikkhū dhammakathikā- tamevamanubrūhayeti —S. I. 178 In whateverform
pres. 3. sg.
Vin. III. 159 For which purpose(you) came,focus
Thosebhikkhuswhoarepreachers
of yourmindrightonthat;yenaatthena, Yenaparivesanātenupasamkami-
Ye keci sikkhākāmā
- D. II. 101
theDhamma;dhamma +katha+tka: used for dat. meaning; agacchi, pst. D. I. 109;Vin. I. 229
Whoeveraredesirousof undergoing
der. 2”. sg.;tam +eva +(m) + anu 3 Where was the distribution of food,
discipline Brh+aya, imper.2, sg. t iti thereheapproached;
pari + Vis +e +
Yetebhikkhūvinayadharā
-Vin. ana, caus.der.
Ye te bhattu abbhantara kammantā,
III. 159 Yenaatthenasannisinnāhonti
unnati va kappasati va —A. IHI. 37 Sannipatitā—D. II. 225
Thosebhikkhuswhoareholders Yena Pārileyyakamtadavasari—S.
Whatever the internal industries of the
(masters)of Vinaya Forwhatpurposetheyhavegathered ITI. 95

I 765
764 KT
 Yena
Yena Yebhuyyena
Wherewas Pārileyyaka(the forest) therearetwoor moreobjects,
each
III. 103 Ye pathavinissitapana te katham
object is encircledbyena, e.g.yena
To endureby whatevermeans;yenavā karissasi?—Vin, III. 7
+ 7,pst. 3™.sg. Bhagavā
yenaAnando
tena+ tenavā,adv.;adhi -- Vas+e +tum, Whatwill youdo to thoseliving
upasamkami,
upa+sam+Kram+i
YenaPavarikambavanam
yena
caus, inf. beingswhoaredependent on earth?;
pst. 3". se.
pathayi+ ni +Sri +ta,pp.
Bhagavā tenupasamkami—M. I. 371
Yenava tenavā palāyanti—S. III.
Wherewasthemango
grovenamed Yena me abhihareyyatha,
yamassa 85;A. I1. 33 Yepissasotabbammafifianti—Vin. I.
Pāvārikaandwherewas theBlessed patiripam maiifeyyatha
—M.I,236 Theyfleefromthiswayor thatway; 210
One, thereheapproached Bringthemtomewhateveryouthink Palāy +a +nti, pres. 3”. pl. Thosewhothinkthatheshouldbe
suitablefor him;abhi +Hr +a+ heard;ye + api +assa;Sru + tabba,
Yena Bhagavā tena abhidhāvi —
Vin.
eyyatha,
opt.2". pl.;yam+assa; YenaSappinikātīram, yena
II. 195 Man+ya +eyyatha, opt.2".pl, paribbajakaramo, yenaSarabho
HeranfasttowardstheBlessedOne:
paribbajako tenupasamkamatu—A. Yebhuyyasikayavipasametum—Vin.
abhit Dhāv+ i, pst.3”. sg. Yena me āyasmantoattamanā
honti, 1.185 II. 84
tam karomi-—A. II. 241 Pleaseapproachtherewhereis the To settleby thedecisionof the
Yena Bhagava tenanjalim bankofSappinikā,whereisthe
Becauseof which thevenerables
are majority;ve (vat)+bhitya(s)+ ika,
panāmetvā—M.III. 15; II. 45; S. V. monastery of wanderingmendicants,
pleasedwith me,I do it. der.;vi + upa +Sam+ e +tum,caus.
167;Vin. 1.5 andwhereis thewanderingmendicant inf.
Holding bothpalmstogether,towards Sarabha;upa +sam +Kram +a +tu,
Yena yena icchati, tenatena
theBlessedOne;tena+anjalim;pa gacchati—S. II. 271 imper.3’. sg. Yebhuyyenaakusalavitakka
+ Nam + e + tvā, caus. absol.
In whateverdirectionit wishes(togo). samudācaranti—A. IV. 356
in thatdirectionit goes YenaSāvatthi tadavasari—M. II. 60 Mostly theunwholesomethoughts
Yena Bhagavatena sisam katva WherewasSāvatthi,therehe begintoplayin themind:
nipātesum
—Vin. IV. 109 entered;tam(tad) +ava +Sr +i, yebhuyyena,adv.;sam + u(t) +@+
Yena yenevagacehatiphasuyeva
(They) madehim lie down, keepingthe peti amisp. Car +a +nti,pres.3™.pl.
gacchati —A. IV. 301
headtowardstheBlessedOne: Kr +
Wherever
hegoes,goesindeed
with
va, absol.; ni + Pat +e +s +um, Yenāhamtenaāialim panāmetvā- Yebhuyyenaappativiratapanatipata
ease; phdsu + (vy)+eva
caus.pst. 3. pl. M. I. 168 —D.III. 195
Causingto putbothpalmstogetherin Mostly,theyarenotrefrainedfrom
Yenayenevadetisapattabharova
Yena Bhagavatenupasamkami—D.
deti
—M.IHI.34 depriving
of life; a +pati + vi +Ram
I. 50; M. I. 16;S. I. I; A, I. 55 fena +anjalim; pa +Nam + e + tva, +ta,pp.; pana +ati +Pat + a, der.
Whereverit flies,fliesonlywithits
Wherethe BlessedOne was therehe caus. absol.
wings;yena +yena+eva;Dit at
approached; tena +upa +sam 4 Yebhuyyenakumārabhūtā—S. II.
ti, pres. 3". sg.; sa +patta+bharo*
Kram +i, pst. 3”. $2. Yenicchakam
yadiechakam
—M. I. 217
eva
124;S. IV. 176;A, IHI. 28 Thosewhoaremostlyyoung
Yena mandalamālotenupasamkami In whateverdirectionthathewishes;
Yenayenevapakkamati,
samādāyeva
KO vam(vad) t icehakam,adlv. Yebhuyyenachanna—Vin. IV. 17
pakkamati—D. I. 71; M. I. 180
Thereheapproached wherewasthe Mostlycovered;
Chad+ta,pp.
Wherever
hegoeshetakes
onlythese
sittinghall; mandalamāla Yenicehakam
sāreyya—M. III. 97
and go; pa +Kram + a + ti,pres.3".
hisīdanasālā,Cy.43: the object ofthe (He) would make (them) move, as he Yebhuyyenapetauttanasenti—A.
sg.; sam +4 +Da +ya, absol,+eva
verbof movementis encircled Wishes;vena +iechakam;Sr +e + Il. 244
idiomatically by ena and tena; if eyya,caus,opt. 3”. sg. Mostly thehungry-ghostssleep
Yena va tena va adhivasetum~Vin.
 Yebhuyyena
Yesabbanihīnam
on(their)back;Sf +a +nti,pres. YebhuyyenaSannipatita—§, [,26
a
pl. basepst. tensesuffix imsuis added world ofthirty threegods;yesam,
Mostlyassembled;
Sam+ni+Paiti
hereto makeit plural.; sammā, gen.for instr.; pubbeadittha =
T fa, pp.
Yebhuyyenabhayamsamvegam indcl.;su +sam + @+Dha +i +ta, aditthapubba; a +Drs + ta,pp.
Pp.
santāsamāpaiianti —S. III. 85
Ye lokamisasamyojanesepavutte
-
They experience,mostly, fear,anxiety Yo amhakamdullabho tam dehi-
M. II. 254
andagitation; @+ Pad +ya +nti, Ye sabbanihinamkayam Vin. III, 132
Thathasbeendroppedwhich hasbeen
pres.3”.pl. paripūrenti, te gandhabbakāyam Givethatwhichis hardto obtainby us;
connectedwiththeworldlythings;
se paripūrenti —D. II. 212 du +Labh +a, der.;Da + e +hi,
(—so);pavutte(—pavutto),
Māgadkī Thosewho fill thelowestgroup,they
Yebhuyyenabhikkhave satta imper,2”. sg.
hominativesingularforms;in the fill thegroupof Gandhabbas (heavenly
kamesupalalita —A. III. 5
simile used in thesamepassage
We musicians); pari +Pr +e + nti, caus.
Bhikkhus,livingbeings,ingeneral, Yogakkhemassa adhigamāya- S. II.
find the expression“pandupalaso pres.3. pil.
arecausedto be interestedin sense- 226
bandhanā pavutto", theyellow
leaf
desire:palālita— abhirata, Cy. III. To attainfreedomfrombondage;adhi
dropped
from itsstalk;can’titbe Ye sammukha,te passanti;ye + Gam+a, der.
223;pa +Lal +e +i +ta,caus.pp. pamutto?(released),Sinhalese tirokkha, te sunanti.—Vin. III, 185
charactersvu andmuaresimilarta Thosewho arepresent,theysee;those Yogakkhemassa pattiyā—A. II. 40
Yebhuyyenabhikkhuninam piyo
each other whoareabsent,theyhear;tiro To reachfreedomfrom bondage;pa +
hoti manapo— Vin. IV. 51
akkha;Sru +n@ +nti,pres.3%.pl. Ap +ti, der.
The one who is mostlydearand
Ye loke Iuddā lohitapāninokurāra
pleasingto thebhikkhunis
kammantā manussesupaccālātā- Yesamayyānamsūcigharenaattho Yogakkhemana dhamsati—Vin. II.
M.I. 93 ahamsūcigharena—
Vin. IV. 167 205
Yebhuyyena matugamo aticarini -
Thosewhoarefierce,withblood- It isuptometoprovidetheneedle (He) doesnotfall awayfromthestate
A. IIL. 261
stainedhands,ofcruel actions,
and casefor the venerableswhoarein whichis freefrombondage;Yuj +a,
Womankindis mostlyunfaithful;ati +
bornintheworldamong
human
beings: need der.+khema;Dhvams+ a + ti, pres.
Car +i, der. + ini
luddé, Skt. raudrah; lohita+pani* Sse
i, der.; kurtra, Skt.kriira + Yesamkesaāeiariyo atthamgiko
Yebhuyyena matugamo tibbarago - maggoāraddho—S. V. 23
kammanta;pati +a@ +Jan+ ta,pp. Yogo karanīyo —5. V. 434
A.III. 261
By anybody,thenobleeightfoldpath An exertionshouldbemade;Kr +
Mostly,womankindhasverysharp hasbeenaccomplished;yesam +
Yevomayadhammé abhinnaya aniya,fut.pp.
lust; mātugāimma,
mi,SZ.
desitā—D. II. 119;M. II. 238,245, kesam+ci, gen.for instr.; @ +Radh
abhinna T Ia, PP. Yo ciram jivati so vassasatamappam
Yebhuyyenayakkha appasannayeva vā bhiyyo—D. II. 4; S. II. 192;A. IV.
What weretheDhammas preached
to
Bhagavato—D. IHI. 195 Yesamkesafici ariyo atthamgiko 138
you by mewith specialknowledge;
Mostly, thedemonsarejust unfaithful maggoviraddho —5. V. 23 Whosoeverlives long,he livesone
Dr§ + e +i +ta, caus.pp.
to theBlessedOne; a +pa +Sad + Byanybody,
thenobleeightfold
pathis hundredyears,moreor less;ciram,
ta, pp. missed; vi +Radh +ta, pp. ady.indel.;Jiv +a +ti, pres. 3%.sg.;
Ye satimpaccalatthamsu
, samma
te
susamāhitā— S. I. 48 appamva bhiyyo,adv.
Yebhuyyenalomani hamsanti—M. I. YesamTavatimsa deva
Thosewhogainedmindfulness
79 aditthapubbā—D. II. 96 Yo chandoyo rago,ya nandi ya
personally,
theyhadperfectly
Hair— raisingsoccurmostly;Hrs +a By whomthegodsof Tāvatimsahave tanha,ye upadanacetaso
concentratedthemind;pati +4+
+nti: harsanti>hassanti>hamsanti, not yet been seen; Tāvatimsa, one of adhitthānābhinivesānusayā
—S. IHI.
Labh+ttha+imsu;
alattha
ispst
pres. 3. pl. the six heavenly abodes known as the 10
3”, sg., by takingit astheverbal
 Yoianasateupi
Yoniso Yoniso Yo hi
Whatiscalleddesire,passion,
delight, Yoni cassadraddhahotiāäsavānam
craving,grasping,determinationof Yoniso manasikārā yoniso parihāyi —A. I. 146
khayāya - 8. IV. 175;A. I. 113;IL.76
mind,obsessionandlatenttendencies sammappadhānāanuttarāvimutti Whateverpridewastherein (my)
Stepshavebeentaken
byhim
wisely
of mind;adhitthana+abhinivesa+ anuppattāanuttarā vimutti youth,thatI lostcompletely;
sabbaso,
for theexhaustionof influxes:
ca+
anusaya;abhi + ni + Vis + a, der:
sachikatā
—S. I. 105;Vin. I. 22 ady.;pari +Ha +ya +
i, pst. 3”. sg.
assa:gen.for instr;@+Rabh+ta, Becauseofthe wise applicationon
anu + Si + a, der. PP.
mindandrightstrivingtheunigue Yo vinhii so vibhavessati—Vin. I.
liberationhasgraduallybeenreached 345
Yojanasateupimayam suneyyama Yoniso upanenti,na kulāvam andexperienced;manasi+kara, Whoeveris intelligentenoughhewill
tam BhavantamGotamam, gamenti—Vin. II. 292 compd.withoutdroppingthecase take(this) intoconsideration;vi +Jfid
yojanasatampimayam gaccheyyama Use wisely,do nothoardorwaste:
na ending;sammā +padhdna;vi + Mue +i, der.; vi +Bhi +e +i +ssati;
—M. II. 162-3 kulāvamgamentitina kotthake +ti,der.;anu+pa +Ap +ta,pp.;sa caus.fut. 3. sg.
(If) we would hearthatvenerable gopent,Cy. 1297;upa+Ni+a +nti +acchi +kata,pp.
Gotamais evenwithin one hundred pres.3”.pl.; Gam+e +nti,caus, Yo vippatisari assa,so bhayeyya-
yojanas,we would go evenone pres.3. pl. I Yoniso vicine dhammam—A. IV. 3 Vin. IH. 103
hundred
yojanas;
Sru+na@
+eyyama, ShouldexaminetheDhammawisely;vi He wouldbescaredwho wouldbe
opt. 1”.pl.; gaccha + eyyama,opt.
Yonisoupaparikkheyya
-S. IIL.140 +Ci +na +e,opt.3". sg. remorseful;vi +pati +Smr 1 ī, der.;
AEPĪ.
Shouldexamine
wisely;upa+parit+| As +ya@(Skt.
yat), opt.3%.sg.; Bhi +
lks +a +eyya,
opt.34sg. Yo pacchaagacchatipanifiasam ya +eyya,opt.3™.sg.
Yoiehi sammasārathi bhaddāni bandho—Vin. III. 220
bhaddani yanani —D. I. 21 One who comeslate,fifty is thefine
Yonisopaīihampuechitum
—D,I. Yo hi gahapatiimamkayam
Dearcharioteer,makethe best (bond)pacchd,indel.
118 pariharanto muhuttampiarogyam
vehiclesready;samma,indcl. usedfor patijaneyya, kimannatrabalya—S.
To aska questionwisely;Prch+yat
e T hi, caus i +tum,inf. Yo passati,dinnam yevaharatu - IHI, I
imper.2'4.sg, Vin. II. 182-3 Whosoeverhouseholder,while
Yonisopaīihamvissallitam One who sees, let him take it away, as keepingup thisbody, shouldclaim
Yo deyyadhammoso na dinno, tafica if somethinggivenrightaway;passa+ goodhealth,at leastfor a moment,
nābbhanumoditā -A. I. 103
kho no asantamnopi adatukamyata ii, pres,3. sg.; Da +ta,pp.+ (y) + whatis it besidesfoolishness;pari +
Theonewhodoesnotappreciatethe
—Vin. III. II eva; Hr +a +tu, imper. 3. sg. Hr +a + nta,pr.p.; muhuttamapi,
question
wiselyanswered;vi+Si *
Whatwasto begiven,wasnotgiven; adv.; aroga +ya, der.; pati + Jan +
ya +i+ ta,pp.;na +abhi+am
thattoo happenedneitherbecauseit Yo mam upatthaheyyaso gilanam na + eyya,opt.3™.sg.
Mud + a +i +tu,der.
wasnotavailablenor becausewe did upatthaheyya—Vin. I. 302
not like to give it; Da 4 eyya,der, + Hewho wouldattendon meshould
Yonisomanasikaroti
—
S. II. 65;IV.
dhamma;Da +ta,Ppp.;a +As +nta, attendon thesick; upa +Stha +a +
142,karotha
pr.p.; a+ Da + tum,inf. +kamya 4 eyya, opt. 3”. sg.
Applies on mindwisely;yoni+80,
td, der.
ady.
Yo mayi manopadosotam pajahatha
Yoni kho tyāyam..mahatimparisam —M.II. 156
Yonisomanasikaraahupannhaya
Samgahetum—A. IV. 219 Whathatredyou havein yourmind
abhisamayo
—D.II. 31;8.II. 5
This is thesourcefor you to treata towardsme,removethat;pa +Ha +
Becauseof thewiseapplicationon
largecrowd ; yoni kho tyāyantiupāyo tha,root redup.imper.2".
24
pl.
mind,therewasrealisationthrough
kho te ayam,Cy. IV. Il5: ted ayam;
wisdom;ahu (Skt.abhit),pst.3%.
585
sam +Grah +e +tum,inf Yo yobbane yobbanamado so sabbaso
abhi +sam +aya (fromI)

771
 Rakkhatetam
RakkhatetambhanteBhagavā
vacam, rakkhatetam Sugato vacam
—D.III. 13
May(theBlessedOne)keepthisword,
may(the Well- Gone One) keepthis
word; Raks +a + tu, ūmper.33. sg.d
etam
E Or he is closeto thecarriage-road;
Rakkham iīvitamattano —S. I. 69
Protectingone’s own life; Raks +a4
nla,pr.p.;jivitam +attano
RakkhassetamMāgandiya vāecam-
M. I. 502
Māgandiya,keepthisword (—you have
to takeresponsibilityfor this
Statement);rakkhassu+ etam+Raks
" a t sSu, imper 24. sg.
Havinggonetothebleachers’
rdjakatittham
RakkhassetamMoggallanavacam—= + mā,absol.
A. III. 123
Moggallāna, keep this word
Rakkhavaranaguttim samvidahati -
A. IHI. 149
Arrangesprotectivemeasures;rakkha
+Gvarana r .gulti; sam + vi +Dha +
a +Ul,pres. 3", so.
Rakkhito gopitopi santo bhito
ubbiggo ussamkī utrasto viharāmi
—Vin. II. 184
EvenbeingProtectedandguardedI
abidewith fear.agitation,doubtand
alarm;Raks +;4 ta,pp.; Gup +e 4
" Ia, caus. pp.; As
" ata,pr.p.; Bhi 4
fa, pp.; u(t) 4
Vij +ta,pp.; u(t) 4
Samk +ī, der.;u (1)
+tras +ta, pp.
772
Rajanam Rajoharanam
Raianam uttarīyati —Vin. I. 286 Lustcameupon attractivethings;u(t)
R The dye is spilt over;u(t) +Tr +iva + +a+ Pad +i, pst. 3”. sg.
ti, pass. pres. 3". sg.
Rajam antaradhapeyyacikkhallam
Rakkheyyatasathāvare—M. 1, 15
Rajanam oropenta kumbhim pātukareyya—A. III. 394
Shouldprotect
theinfirmandthe
firm;
āvaiianti —Vin. I. 286 Wouldmakethedustdisappearandthe
Raks +a +eyya,opt,374S$g.;
tasa+
Whileapplyingthedyetheyupsetthe mudappear; antara+Dha +āpe +
thdvara
pot;o +Ruh + e +nta,caus.pr.p.; eyya,caus.opt.3. sg.; patu + Kr +
Vrj +ya +nti,pres. 3. pl. eyya,opt.3. sg.
Racchanissitamvā hoti—Vin,HI.
151
ni Rajanampacitabbamhoti —Vin. I. Rajojallam kaye na upalimpati—D.
+Sri +ta pp 50 11.18;M. II. 136,upalippati
Dye is to becooked;Pac +i +tabba, The dirtof sweatdoesnotstickon the
Racchampatipadetha
—Vin. II,194 fut. pp. body;upa + Li(m)p + a + ti,pres.3”.
RaS
— R= Sg.
Causehim to enterthecarriage-road;
Raianīyāni rūpasaddagandharasa
rathi +a, der.;pati +Pad+e+tha,
photthabbāni—Vin. IV. 160 Rajojallam kaye sannicitamhoti,
caus. imper,2". pl.
Attractiveforms,sounds,smells, papatikaiātam—M. I. 78
Raiakattharanamgantva
—Vin. IIL tastes,andtouchables;Spr$ + tabba; The dirtof sweathasaccumulated
45 i fut. pp. (on thebody)andbecomelike an
outerdry barkof a tree;raja (s) +
ford; Rajaniyerajjati, dusaniyedussati, jalla; sam + ni + Ci +ta,pp.;
gantva,Cy.298;Gam mohaniyemuyhati, kopaniye papatika+jata: Jan + ta,pp.
kuppati,madaniyemajjati —A. III.
Raiakabhandikam avaharityā—
Vin.
110 Raioiallam pavāhetvā—M. II. 151
(He) is attractedin thingsto be Havingcausedto washawaythedirt
III. 45 attracted,repulsedin thingsto be ofsweat;pa + Vah+e +twā,caus.
Havingstolenthebundle
of a bleacher, repulsed,infatuatedin thingsto be absol.
bhanda +ika, der. infatuated,irritatedin thingsto be
irritatedandintoxicatedin thingsto be Raiosūkamvanamukham
Rajatam namakahapano
intoxicated;Raj +aniya,fut. pp.; Raj anuddhamseyya —M. II. 257
lohamasako darumasako
+ya +ti, pass. pres. 3. sg.; Dus + Dustandawnofbarley (otherharmful
jatumasako
yevoharam
gacchanti- aniya,fut. pp.; Dus +ya +ti, pass. things)woulddamagethesurfaceof
Vin. III, 238 pres.3". sg.; Muh +a +aniya,fut. thewound;rajo +siika, rajostikanti
Silver meanskahāpana
(copper
coin), pp.;Muh+ya +ti, meta.pass.pres. raio ca vīhisūkādica sūkam,Cy.IV.
bronzemasaka
(thatofa bean-weight). 3”. sg.; Kup +a +aniya,fut. pp.; 55; anu +Dhvams +eyya,opt. 3”.
woodenmasaka,lacquermāsaka
and Kup +ya +ti, pass. pres. 3”. sg.; ye
WE.
thosewhichareusedinbusiness Mad +aniya,fut. pp.; Mad +ya +ti,
transactions Pass. pres. 3™.sg, Raioharanamkarissāma— Vin. II.
291
Raianīyesudhammesurāgo udapādi We will make(it) a dust-remover;
Raianadonikam
- Vin. I. 286
The trough for colouring —A. IHI. 169 rajo (rajas) +Hr + ana,der.
 Rajoharanasamena
Rajoharanasamenacetasa
viharāmi —A. IV. 376
I abidewitha mindeaualtoadust-
remover,rajo +harana + sama
Raiiam anusāsati—S. I. 86
ti, pres. 37. sg.
Rajjam kāresi —M. II. 76; Vin. II.
181,kāreti
+ya, der.; Kr +e+ +i. caus.pst.
3”, sg.
Rajjam patipaiia —M. II. 75
Governthecountry;pati +Pad + ya,
imper,2". sg.
Rajjasukham Samanussaranto—Vin.
II. 183
Rememberingthehappinessin
kingship;sam +anu +Smr +a+ nta,
PF.D.
Raiie samanusāsitvā—M. II. 75
A restfor lotsof gems;
Havinginstructed(him) in governance;
gandnam + dlayam
sam +anu +Sas +i+ tva,absol
Raīiho atthāyahitāya sukhāva —A.
IV. 244 I +e+i +ta, denom.pp.
Forthewell-being,benefitand
happinessofthe king
Rafifio amgantevasamkham
gacchati —M. III. 133.; A. I. 244
He is reckonedasa partofthe king:
amgam + iti +eva
Rafifio nāgassagīvāya
upanibandhati—M. IHI. 132
Tie down on the neck of the roval
Rattaāāumahatiam Rattandhakāratimisāyam
—-
elephant;upa +nj4 Ba(njdh+a+ti
IL. 9 M. I. 105;A. IV. 366
pres, 3. sq.
(The Samgha)hasbecomegreatin At anytimeofthe nightor theday
termsof seniority;ratta +Jiid +i,
Rano Pajjotassaāsamkamāno-M
der.;maha +tta, der.;pa +Ap +ta, Rattim aiihokāse ekacīvaro nisidi -
III. 7
pp. Vin. I. 288
Being suspiciousof thekingPaiiota;ā
Duringthenighthesatin theopen-air
+ Samk + a +mana,pr.p.
Rattandhakāratimisāyam —D. II. with onerobe;adhi +okdsa;ni +Sad
175;M. II. 34; S. I. 104 + 1 sh 3S. 8S
Raho pativedesi—M. II. 118 In thethickdarknessof thenight;ratti
Causedtoinformtheking;pati+Vid +andhakadra+timisa(Skt.tamisra) Rattim abbhokaseviharami, diva
tetys ti, caus.pst.
3%.9g. vanasande—M. I. 79
Rattandhakāratimisāyampāyāsi- I abide(abided)in theopen-air at
Rafifio bhattavetanaharo
—
Vin, II]. M. III. 174 nightandin thejunglethicketduring
222 Setout in thethickdarknessof the thedaytime;rattim,acc.for loc.;
The one who is depending
onthe night;pa +Ya +s + i, pst.3™.sg. abhi + okasa
king’s foodandwage:bhatta+vetana
t āhāro Rattandhakareappadipe—Vin. IV. Rattim kalamkarontassa
268 antarāyāya—A. III. 307
Ratthā vā nagarāvā pabbāieyyum- In thethickdarknessofthe nightwith For thedangerof theonedyingin the
D. I. 98 no lamp;a +padipa night
(They) would causeto banish
(them)
from thecountryor fromthecity;pa Rattanafica dussānammilātam Rattim tikkhattum paccutthāya—A.
+Vraj+e +eyyum,
caus.
opt.
3".pl. kayirati —D. II. 25 V. 234
Palanguinis madeofdyed cloths; Havinggotupthreetimesin thenighi;
Ratanagananamalayam
—
A. II.55 milatantisivikam,Cy. 456; Kr +ya + ti +khattum,der.;pati + u(t) + Stha
ratana
+ ti, meta.pass.pres. 3. sg. +ya, absol.
Rattindivamatandito—
S. I. 53;A. Rattim va diva va —Vin. III. 53
Ratanam nassati—Vin. IV. 159 IV. 245 In thenightor in thedaytime,adv.
Beingactiveday andnight;a +tanda
A gemis lost;Nag +ya +ti,pass.
Rattim vimanetvaidani
pres. 3”. sg,
khamāpenti—Vin. II. 260
Rattindivā panhayimsu—D. II. 81 Havingcauseddisrespectin the
Ratanamvaratanasammatam
va-
Dayandnightbecameknown;ratti + nightnowmakethemforgive;
Vin. IV. 161
diva;pa +Jha +ya +imsu,pst. 3. vi +Man +e +tva,caus.absol.;
A valuableor whatis accepted
as
pl. Ksam +ape +nti, caus.pres.
valuable;
sam+Man+ta,pp.
3”, pl.
Rattindivā vītipatanti —A. V. 88
Ratiyāacchissanti—Vin.IHI.159
Dayandnightpass;vi +ati +Pat +a Ratti vibhayissati—D. H. 148;Vin.
Theywill livewithpleasure;
As+ ya*
t nti,pres. 3™.pl. I. 168
i + ssanti, fut. 3". pl.
Dawnwill break;vi +Bha +(y) +i +
Rattibhagamva divasabhagamva - ssati, fut. 3. sg.
 Rattiyā
Rattiya ca divasassaca afifladeva
uppajjati, ahham niruiihati —S. Ii.
95
For thenightandtheday one (mind)
Is born, one (mind) ceases:afiiia
(Skt.anyat) + (d) +eva; u(t) + Pad
T ya +ti, pass.pres, 3% Sg.; ni +
Rudh +ya + ti. Pass.pres. 3. sg.
Rattiya nikkhantaya, divase patihite
—A.III. 307
When thenightis goneandday is set
in;ai (S)+Kram+ta,PPp.;
pati +Dhā
titia, pp.
Rattiyā pacecūsasamayam
paccutthāya—D. I. 2; M. THT.192;
S. 1.8, 209;A. V. 196;Vin. I. 78
239; IHI.156
Havinggot upatdawnof thenight;
Pati + usa(s) + Samaya; pati +u(t) +
Sthd +ya, absol.
Rattiya pacclisasamayamSuriye
ugsacchante—A. III. 408
At dawnwhenthesunis rising:y (t) +
gacchanta,pr.Pp.
Rattiya pacchimamyamam —S. IV.
105;A. II. 40;Vin. kau
In thelastwatehof thenight
Rattiyā pathamamyāmam—S. IV.
105; A. II. 40; Vin. I. I
In thefirstwatchof thenight
Rattiyā maiihimam yamam- S. IV.
105;A. II. 40; Vin. I. 2
In themiddlewatchofthe night
Rattiya ya divasassavā samayā
Samayamupādāya—S. iv. 318
Rattiya sudamtikkhattum
utthasi
pabhātantimaīāamāno —Vin,
155
He got up threetimesin thenight
thinkingthatit wasearlymorning;
yj)
+Stha+s +i, pst.34 sg.;pabhātan
i + iti; Man +ya +mana,pass,pep.
Rattiyāsudamtikkhattum ubbijji-
S. I. 228
Wasagitatedthreetimesinthenight;
sudam,indel.;ti +kKhattum,der.;
u(t)
+ Vij +ya +i, pass.pst.3”.sg.
Rattūparatāviratāvikālabhoinā- :
Vin. I. 245 ) simghātakam - S. I. 212
Abstained fromeating inthenight
and
atimproper time;ratti+upa+Ram+ |
fa,pp.; vi + Ram +ta,pp.
Ratto ragena abhibhāūto
Pariyadinnacitto —A. I. 156-7
The one who is lustful,overpowered
andcaughtbylust;Raj +ta,pp.;abhi
+Bhi +ta,pp.;pari +@+Da+ta,
Pp. + citta
Rathamabhiruhi—Vin.I. 348
Gotontothechariot;
abhi+Ruh+i,
Pst. 3°. se
Rathampesesi—Vin.I. 346
Sentthechariot;
pa +Is +e+8+i,
Pst. 3, sg.
Rathammuīicassu,
kilantosmi-
Vin. I. 346
Stopthechariot,| amtired:Muf)e'.
Rathasmimpi
pp:; AS +mi,pres. 1. sg.
Rathasmimpisikkhati —A. III. 327
He trains himself in charioteering;
sikkhati,desid.from Sak,pres.3. sg.
Rathassānīvayāyato— D. III. 192
|
lust aslinchpinto themovingvehicle;
rathassa+Gni +iva; Ya +ya +nta,
I
pr.p.
Rathikaya purisavyafiijanam
chadditam—Vin. II. 269
A malesignhasbeenthrownaway
on a carriage-road;ratha + ika, der.;
chadda(fromChard) + i + ta,pp.
Rathikaya rathikam simghatakena
From street to street and cross-road
to cross- road;rathikātiracchā,
simghātakanticatukkam,Cy. I. 315
Rathiyāya antaravāsako
pabhassittha—Vin. II. 135
The innerrobedroppedon the
carriage-road;ratha + iva, der.;
antara +Vas +aka, der.;pa +
ee
Se
Bhra(m)§+ya +i.+ ttha,mid.pst.
2 se.
) Rathiyāya chattapānimgaechantam
—Vin. IV. 158
A persongoingon theroadwithan
umbrellain thehand
Rathiyāyanantakamdisvā—A. IHI.
187
Havingseena ragin thestreet
(carriage-way); Drs +tva, absol.
Rathiyāyapi byūhepi simghātakepi
777
—Vin. IV. 270; Vin. II. 260.vyūhepi
On a carriage-road,in a cul-de-sacand
at a cross-road;rathiyānāmaracchā
vuccati,byāhaimnāmayeneva
pavisantitenevanikkhamanti,
simghātakonāmacaccaramvuccati,
old. Cy. 271
Rathiyāya rathiyam simghātakena
simghātakam —5. III. 240;Vin. I.
237
From streetto streetandfrom cross-
road to cross-road
Rathīsamaiihomaddati—A. IV. 191
Tramplesdownthechariotpole;ratha
+ isa; adhi + 0 + Mrd + a + ti, pres.
a
3”. eg
SZ.
Ramaniyovata bho bhimibhago -
M. I. 167
The pieceof land,indeed,is attractive;
Ram+ aniya,fut. pp.
Ramgaiāteupasamhareyya—M. I.
36
Woulddip in thedye;upa +sam +Hr
+eyya,opt.3”. sg.
Ramgamajjhampisamghatim
pattharitva—Vin. 11.10
Havingspreadthedoublelayerrobe
on thestageof dancing;
ramgamajjham, acc.for loc; pa
+Str +i + tva,absol.
Rasaggasaggī—M. II. 136
One who possessessupreme nerves
of tasting;rasa +gasa +agga +i,
der.
Rasatanhāyacittam anusandati—A.
 Rasatanhaya
Ragarattj
Rāgavinayāya Rāgo
IV. 49
Rahokarotikarapam~A. IV,172
The mind flows with thecraying for +dakkhinti)fut. 3”. pl. —A.1.100
He works in secrecy;raho,indel.;
Kp
+ana, der. For theabandonment of passiontwo
Sg.
'e
Ragavinayayadhammodesito, thingsareto becultivated:
madanimmadanāyapipāsavinayāya concentrationandinsight
Rahogatassapatisallinassaevam
Rasatanhaya eittam patilīyati —A. ālayasamugghātāya
cetasoparivitakko udapadi—§,|,
IV. 49 vattupacchedayatanhakkhayaya Rāgānuddhamsitenacittena—M. II.
71; HI.273;Vin. 1.4
The mind is turnedbackfrom the viragaya nirodhaya nibbanaya 256
When (he was
) in solitudeanideathus
craving for taste;pati +Li +ya + ti, dhammodesito—Vin. III. 20 Withthemindinfestedwith passion:
arose in (his) mind;raho+gata;pati
Pass. press 2
a". Sg, The Dhammahasbeenexplainedfor raga +anu + Dhvams+ i +ta,pp.
+sam+Li +ta,pp.;u(t)+a+
Pad+
drivingoutpassion,calmingdown
i, pst. 3”. se.
Rasapatisamvedi
aharamahareti, intoxication,quenchingthirst, Raganuddhastenacittena—M. I.
no ca rasarāgapatisamvedī—M. II. destroyingattachment, cuttingoff of 462;A. IL. 126
Rahogato uttarimanussadhammam
138 connectionto theexistence, With themindinfestedwith passion;
ullapati —Vin. III. 101
He takesfood eKperiencingthe taste. exhaustionofcraving andfor raga +anu +Dhvams+ta; pp.
Being alone,claimssuperhuman
butnot experiencingthe lust for the detachment, cessationandextinction;
qualities;
u(t)+Lap3.a ti,pre.3 vi +Nt +a, der.; Dr§ +e +i +ta,
laste;pati + sam + Vid +e +E,caus. Ragayapicittam namati,dosayapi
SE.
der.; ahara + e + ti; denom.pres. 3 pp.; sam + u(t) + Ghan +ta,pp.; cittam namati, mohayapicittam
Sg. vatta+ upa + Chid +a, der.; Ksi + namati— Vin. II. 91
Rahogatopatisallīno—M. I. 104 a, der.; Raj +a, der.;ni + Rudh +a, The mindbendstowardslust,bends
He is in solitude der.; ni + Va + ana, der. towardshatredandbendstowards
Rasarase—Vin. IV. 190
Exceptfor soup, in all the other delusion;Nam +a + ti, pres.3. sg.
Rahonisaiiāya āpaiiati—A. II. 259 Ragaviraga cetovimutti,
forms ofcurry includingfish and
Onecommitsanoffence bysittingin avijjaviraga panhavimutti—A. I. 61 Ragupakkilittham cittam na
meat,Cy. 892
isolation;a +Pad+ya +ti,pres. Mind- liberationthroughnon- vimuccati—A. 1.61
$2. attachment to passion,insight- The mindpollutedby lustis not
liberation throughdetachment from liberated; raga + upa +Klis +ta,
250
Ragaggina
dosaggina
mohaggina ignorance;vi +Raj +a, der; vi + pp.; vi+ Muc +ya + ti, pass.pres.
adittam—Vin. I. 34 Muc +ti, der. ō
2rd
: sg.
vi + Sudh + ya + nti, pass.pres, 3.
Blazedwith lust,hatredanddelusion;
pl.
raga +aggi; a4+Dip +ta,pp. Rāgassaappahīnattā—S. IV. 305 Ragenabaddhamatthuve—D. II.
Dueto thenon-abandonmentof 262
Rahadamviya vippasannam—D. I.
Ragadosamohakkhaya
sanibbuto
- passion;a +pa +Ha +ta,pp +tta, Let (theentirecircle of gods,Cy,
50
D. II. 136 der. 693)beboundindeedby lust:
lust asa pool of water,ektremely
Becauseof theexhaustion
oflust, baddham+atthu,Badh +ta,pp.; As
clean;rahada<hrada(Skt.),meta.:
hatredanddelusion
heisextinguished; Rāgassa pahānāya asubhā +tu, imper.3". sg., ve,emph.p.
Viya,indcl. usedto indicate
bhāvetabbā —A. III. 446
similarity; vi +pa +Sad + ta,pp Raj +a, der; Dus+a +der;Muh
a, der.; ni + Vr +ta,pp. To getrid of passion,thethoughtof Ragoappasavajjodandhaviragi—A.
impurityshouldbecultivated;Bhit +e 1.200
Rāgarattānadakkinti—Vin.1.5 + tabba, caus. fut. pp. Lust is lessblameworthyandchanging
Thosewhoarecoloured bypassionI slowly
Now the Lord is in secret discussion:
will notsee;rāga+Raj+(a,pps
De Ragassapahanayadve dhamma
raho + aya
aya +ti,
+ ti.denom.
de pres, 34 Sg. bhāvetabbāsamathoca vipassanaca Rāgo kantako —A. V. 135
+ssanti (Skt. draksyanti> dakkhant!

778 A
 Rago
Rajagahe
Lust is a thorn (obstacle)
Make themgo to theroyaltreasury;
pa +Midt e t si, caus.pres.
3 Rajagaheyathabhirantamviharitva Rajagaheviharati Tapodārāme—S.
Ragocittamanuddhamseti
—A. II. —D.11.81 1.8
3”:pl,
d

126;III. 95 Havingabidedin Rajagaha,

ashe Abidesatthemonastery
of Tapodā,in
Lust graduallydestroysthemind: anu wished;yathad+abhirantam;abhi Rāiagaha
Rajakosam vilumpati—A. IV.339
+Dhvams+ e +ti, pres. 3” sg. +Ram +ta,pp.; vi+ Hr +i +tva,
Heplunders
theroyaltreasury;
vi+
absol. Rāiagaheviharati Moranivāpe
Lu(m)p + a + ti, pres. 3. sg. :
Rago me catto, doso me catto moho paribbajakarame—A. I. 291; V. 326
me catto vanto mutto pahino Rāiagaheviharati Indakūte pabbate Abidesatthemonastery of wandering
Rāiagahamhāniyyāsi—
D. I, 49 '
patinissattho ukkhetito —S. 1.206 mendicantsin Moranivapa(feeding
SetoutfromRajagaha;
ni +Ya+9+i
samukkhetitoti bhanantassa—
Vin. Abideson theIndakūtamountainin groundof peacock),in Rajagaha
pst. 3”. sg:
IV.27 Rāiagaha
For thepersonwho says,"Lust is Rajagaheviharati Latthivanuyyane
Rajagaham upanissāyaviharanti- Rāiagahe viharati Isigilismim
givenup by me,hatredis givenup by Supatitthecetiye—Vin. I. 35
D. II. 76 pabbate—M. III. 68
me,delusionis givenup by me, AbidesattheshrinenamedSupatittha
Abide in theoutskirtsof'Rāiagaha Abideson Isigili mountainin Rāiagaha
vomited,released,abandoned. in thePalmgrovegarden,in Rajagaha
renounced,spittedout, completely
Rāiagaham kho mahāgocaram I Rāiagaheviharati Giiihakūte Rajagaheviharati Sappinikatire -
spittedout”; Tyaj+ ta,pp.; Vam+ ta,
pahūtasenāsanam
- Vin. II. 285 pabbate—
D. II. 72; M. I. 192;S. I. S. 1.153
Pp.; Muc + ta,pp.; pa + Ha +ta.Pp.;
Rāiagahahasa greatresortand 109 Abideson thebankof theriver
Pati +ni +Srj + ta,pp.; u(t) + Khet
plentyof lodgings;
pahiita=Skt. ) Abidesat theVulture'speakin Sappinika,in Rajagaha
+i+ ta,pp.; sam +u(t) +Khet +i +
prabhita Rāiagaha
fa,pp.;Bhan+a +nta,pr.p.
Rāiagahe viharāmi Isigili passe
Rajagahamvassavasam
osata
—M. Rajagaheviharati Gijjhakite kālasilāyam—D. II. 116
Rāiakattāro —
D. II. 233
1.2 I pabbateSūkarakhatāyam— M. I. I abideon theBlack Rock attheslope
The king-makers
Havearrivedin Rāiagaha for 497; S. V. 233 of theMount Isigili
i
observingrainy retreat;vassāyāsall, Abidesatthecavedugbyswines,
Rāiakaranīyesu yutto —A. III. 156
dat. meaning is conveyed by ate. . on theVulture’speak,in Rajagaha; Rāiagaheviharāmi Corapapāte—D.
Employedin royal service;Yuj +ta,
0 (ava) +Sr+ ta.pp. sttkara +Khan + ta,pp.; khatāyam, II. 116
pp.
f.. it refers to guhā, f. (cave) I abideatRobber'sCliff in Rāiagaha;
Rajagaha Patiyalokamgantukamo cora +papata
Rajakiccam parihapesi —Vin. I. 72
—Vin. IV. 79 I Rajagaheviharati Jivakambavane-
(He) causedto leaveroyal duties S. IV. 143
Desiringto go fromRāiagaha
to { Rajagaheviharami Tapodayam—D.
unattended; pari +Ha +dpe +s +i, Abidesatthemango
grove
of Jivaka,in
Patiyāloka(to thewest); I Il. 116
caus.pst. 3. sg, Rajagaha;Jivaka +ambavana
suriyālokassa patimukham i I abideatTapodain Rajagaha
pacchimadisam,Cy. 868
Rajakulani asippenaupajivitum na Rajagahe viharati Jivakassa Rajagahe viharami Nigrodharame
sukarāni —
Vin. I. 260 komārabhaccassaambavane—D. I.
Rajagahapabbajitorathikaya —D.II. 116
Royal familiesarenoteasyto depend 47; M. I. 368
gacchati—Vin. III. 36 I abideattheBanyanGrovein Rāiagaha
uponby onewho hasno learning;upa Abidesatthemango
groveoflīvaka,
tv ia tum, inf,
Theonewhohasrenounced family
the fosteredone fromchildhood,in Rāiagaheviharāmi
life fromRajagahagoesonthe
Rāiagaha;kumāra --a, der.+bhacca Maddakucchismim migadāye—
D.
Rajakosam Pavesenti—A, TV,95
carriage-road;
Raja+gaha
(Skt. brtya) II. 116;S. 1.27
(Skt.grha); pa + Vraj +i +ta,PP
 Rajagahe
I abideat theDeer Park of
Maddakucchiin Rāiagaha
Rāiagahe viharāmi Vebhārapasse
Sattapanniguhāyam- D. II. 116
I abideat theSattapannicave,on
theslopeof Mount Vebhārain
Rāiagaha
Rāiagahe viharāmi Veluvane
Kalandakanivāpe— D. II. 116;S. I.
52
I abideattheBamboo
Grove,the
feedinggroundof squirrels,in
Rajagaha
Rajagahe viharami Sitavane
Sappasondikapabbhare—D. II. 116;
S. IV. 40
I abideattheSappasondika
cavein the
Cold Forestin Rāiagaha
Rāiante pure abbhudāhāsi —M. II.
127
Talkedin theroyal harem:
abbhudāhāsītikathesi, Cy. III. 356;
raja +ante(antah)+pura; abhi+
ul) +a+ Hr +s +i, pst. 374sg.
Rajabhata core aggahesum—Vin. I.
88
Thosewho were in theroyal service
caughtthethieves;raja +Bhr +ta,
Rajavatthunissitam va hoti —Vin.
IHI. 151
Or it is closeto theking's property;
raja +vatthu +ni +Sri 4 ta, pp.
Rāiā khattiyo muddhavasitto—D
III. 61;M. II. 121;A. IHI,299
782
Rajaraho Rajava Rittampi
Theannointed
king;muddha
+
for theroyal serviceand reckonedasa Rāiūnam anuvattitum—Vin. I. 138
ava +Sic +ta,pp.
partof theking; raja +araho;raja + To complywith thekings;anu +Vrt+
Bhuj +ya, der.; amgam+iti + eva; i +tum,inf.
Rajagaram va cittagdramva
sam +Khya
---dassanayagaccheyya —Vin.IV,
Rāhumukhampikaronti —M. I. 87
298 Rāiāva hoti raīiīiam, brahmāva
They inflict thepunishmentof
Shouldgotoseethepleasure house brāhmanānamdevatāva
Rahumukhain whicha lampis lighted
ofthe kingor thepicture
gallery; gahapatikanam— D. II. 250 insidethemouthof theconvictand
rāiāgāranti raho kīlanagharam, He is, indeed,theking for thekings, themouthis torn with iron hooks;
cittāgārantikīlanacittasālam,
Cy.
brahmāfor thebrahminsanddeityfor Cy.II.59
934; raja +agara thehouseholders;raja + eva; brahmā
-- eva; devatā + eva Rincati kusalamthanam—M. I. 403
Rajanampime vaiicenti,kim Excludeswholesomeaspect
panaīihiemanussel—Vin. II. 44 Rāiā vā ...nimantito svātanāya
Thesepeoplecheateventheking, saddhimbalakāyena—Vin. II. 155 Rincati patisallānam—A. HI. 86
much moretheotherpeople;Vac +e Or theking hasbeeninvitedfor the (He) abandons solitude
+nti, pres.3”.pl. mealtomorrowwith thearmy;ni +
manta+ e + i +ta, denom.pp.; Rincanti avasam—A. IHI. 368
Rajanam nissaya svatana= Skt. svastana;saddhim, (They) leavetheresidence;Ri(ālc -- a
indcl. used with instr.
brāhmanagahapatikevilumpati- + nti,pres.3”. pl.
M. II. 185
Having resortedto theking,he Rāiā vā rāiabhoggovā —Vin. III. Rincanti uddesamparipuccham-
221 Vin. I. 190;III. 235
plundersbrahminsandhouseholders;
ni + Sri +ya, absol.; vi + Lu(m)p+a The king or theoneemployedby the (They) misslearningthetektand
king;raja +Bhuj +ya,fut. pp. discerningthemeaning
+ti, pres. 3. sg.
Raja hoti cakkavatti, dhammiko Riīcanti pesalābhikkhū, nivasanti
Rāiāpimesam abhippasanno
—Vin.
dhammarāiā cāturanto viiitāvī pāpabhikkhū—Vin. II. 11
III. 43
Eventhekingisverymuchpleased janapadatthavariyappatto Goodbhikkhusleave,evil bhikkhus
sattaratanasamannāgato
—D. I. 88; stayon; ni + Vas+a + nti,pres.3”.
withthesepeople;rāiāT api+
A. IV. 89, ahosim pl.
imesam; abhi+pa +Sad+ta,pp.
He becomestheuniversalmonarch,
righteous,king of righteousness, Rittakaāhevakhāyeyya,
Raja MagadhoAjatasattu
conguerorofthe four cornersof the tucchakaīiieva khāyeyya,asārakahūī
Vedehiputto—
D. I. 47
world,firmlyestablished
inthe evakhāyeyya—S. III. 140
Aiātasattu,
sonof Vedehi,
kingof
He would feelit empty,hollow and
Magadha;Magadha+a, der.;
Vedehi
treasures:cakka + vatti tī, der.; coreless;Ric +ta,pp; rittakam +(y)
+putta
dhamma + ika, der.; catu t ®& +eva; Khyd +ya +eyya,opt. 3™.sg.
anta +a, der.; vi +Ji +tavi, pp.;
Rajarahohoti,rajabhoggo,
ranno Rittampi pattamsisenikkujjeyyum
janapada +thavara +iya, der.;
amgantveva
samkham
gaechati
- —D. III. 203
pat Ap +ta, pp.; sam +anu +@ +
1.446
Gam + ta, pp. Theywouldputanemptybowl upside
Becomes
suitable
fortheking,suitable
783
 Rittam
down on the head;ni +kujja
(Skt.kubja) +evyyum,opt. 3”. pl.
Rittamtucchammusā—M. II. 170
Empty,hollow,andfalse
Rukkhamilani, pasadikani
pasadaniyaniappasaddani
appanigghosanivijanavatani
manussarahaseyyakani
patisallānasāruppāni —M. II. 118
The rootsoftrees thatare pleasant
andlovely,guiet,freeof noises
and freeof people,suitablefor
men's secretactivitiesandsuitable
for solitude;pasāda-- ika, der:;
pasGda + aniya,fut. pp.; manussa
+ rahas + eyya + ka, der; pati +
sam + Li + ta + Sartipa + ya, der.
Rukkhamūlasenāsanamkhāyissati
—A.IV. 231
It appearsasa lodgingunderatree:
rukkha + mula +sendsana; Khya +
(Y) +i +ssati,fut. 3”. sg.
Rukkhamūle divāvihāram nisidi -
M.I.501 I Runnamidambhikkhave
Satdown undera treeforsiesta;
divāviharam, acc. for dative; ni +
Sad +i, pst. 3. sg.
Rukkham apassayanipanno hoti -
Vin.III. 38
Leaningagainsta tree,he hasbeen
lying down;apa +a +Sri + va,
absol.;ni +Pad + ta, pp.
Rukkhasusirevassamupagacchanti
—Vin. 1.152
Theyobserverainyretreatin a hollow
tree
784
Rumhaniyam Ruhiram Roge
Rukkha chijjimsu yūpatthāya
-D, I,
growingupandstrong;Ruh +(m) + Materialformsdesirable,lovely,
141
anīya, fut. pp.; oja + vantu, der. pleasing, dear,fomentingsense-
Treeswerecutforthesacrificial
post;
pleasure
andattractive;
/s +fa,pp.;
Chid +ya + imsu,pass,3%.pl.;yiipa
Ruhiram uppādesi—Vin. II. 193 Kam + ta,pp.; kama +upa +sam +
+atthaya
Caused to draw the blood out; ruhira Dha +i +ta,pp.; Ra(n)j +aniya,
rudhira; u(t) +Pad +e+s +i,
Rukkhā rukkham samkamanti
- caus.pst. 3™.sg.
Vin. IL. 138 Rupanamparifiiam panhnapemi —A.
Move from onetreetoanother:
sain+ Rupadhatukho gahapativiinanassa V. 65
Kram +a +nti,pres.3’.pl. oko —S. III. 9 I proclaimtheabandonment of
Householder,theelementof material theworld of form;pariffanti
Rukkhe adhivatthadevata—Vin.IV, formis theabodeof consciousness samatikkamam, Cy. V.27
34
The deitywho hadbeenresiding
in the Rūpam attato samanupassati, Rupiyapatiggahakamthapetva-
tree;adhi + Vas+ta,pp. rūpavantamvā attānamattanivā Vin. LIL.238
rūpam—8. III. 3 Exceptfor theonewho hasaccepted
RukkhesatakamAlaggetva
—Vin, He seesmaterialformassoul,soul silver;Stha+ dpe + tva,caus.absol.
III. 63 hasa materialformandmaterialform
is in soul;sam + anu +passa +ti,
Havingcausedto hangtheclothona Rūpenaitthī purisam bandhati—A.
tree;d + Lag +ya +e +va, caus. pres.3. sg. IV. 196
absol. Womanbindsa manby physicalform
Rūpam sikkheyya—Vin.l. 77; IV.
Rukkho sakhapalasavipanno
—A. 129 Rūpenavā nimittenavā saāhānam
Wouldlearntheartof sculpture katvā—Vin. IV. 163
IIT. 200
Thetreewithoutbranches
andleaves; Havingmadea specialmarkby the
vi +Pad+ ta,pp.;sampannatsopp. Rupasafiianam samatikkamma—A. shapeor by a sign
IV. 40
ariyassa Havingtranscendedthenotionof Rogaiāti nipatati—A. IV. 279
form; sam +ati +Kram +ya, absol. Befalls disease of different kind; ni +
vinayeyadidamgitam— A. I. 261
Bhikkhus,whatiscalledsingingis Pat -ta -t ti, pres.3". sg.
Rūpasmimnibbindati —S. II. 95
cryinginthenoblediscipline;
Rud +
Takes no interest in form; ai t Wi(n)d Rogavyasanena va phutthosamano-
ta, pp.; runnam + idam
t a t ti, pres. 3'MERI A. IL. 188
Beingafflictedwith thetroubleof
Rupam iīrati maccānam
Rūpassaviparinamanfathabhava - sickness;Sprs +ta,pp.; As +mana,
nāmagottam
naiīrati —
S. 1.43
S. III. 107 pr.p-
Physical form of themortalsis
Duetochange anddifference
ofthe
subject
todecay,
notthename
and
form;viparināma-- aāhathā3 Rogānamāyatanam—D. III. 182
lineage;
Jir +a +ti,pres.3 88
bhāva--ā A source for diseases
Rūpāitthākantāmanāpāpiyarūpā Roge hi sati bhesajjamkaraniyam
kāmūpasamhitāraianīyā —5. IV. 36 hoti —M. I. 506
785
 Ronnabala
Medicine is to be administered when
thereis, indeed.a disease;roge hi
sati, loc. absl.
Ronnabalā dārakā —A. IV. 223
Crying is children's power;Rud +ta
Pp. runna > ronna
Ronnena itthi purisam bandhati —A.
IV. 197
Womanbindsmanby crying: Ba(n) dh
"a tt,pres. 37.
> sg.
Rodati na vadhati —Vin. IV. 27)
Cries but does not beat; Vadh +
pres. 3. se
e.
Rodanti atthasi —Vin. IV. 79
Shestoodcrying;Rud + a+ nta +z
DY.D.; a+ Stha +5 +i. Pst. 3
pry
Romanthitva romanthitvā
alihoharati —Vin. II. 132
swallows: romantha +e +] 4
denom. absol. ; adhi
Oe Hr
ti, pres, 374 Sg.
Rosantamna Patirosati— A. III. 371
(He) does not hate in return the one
who hateshim:Rus +a+ nta Prp.;
Pati + Rus+ a+ 1. Pres, 3. sg.
Lakkhanani
Lakkhanāni samannesi—M. II. 143
Examinedthemajormarks;sam +anu
+es (fromIs) +i, pst. 3. sg.
Lakkhanahatokatadandakammo-
Vin. I. 76
Theonewho is markedandpunished;
lakkhana+ G +Han +ta,pp.
Lakkhanesu kamkhati, vicikicchati,
a+ ti,
nādhimuccati,na sampasīdati—
D. I.
106
In respectof bodily markshe is in
doubt, perplexity,notsureandnot
sg.
satisfied;
Kamks+a +ti,pres,3”.
Sg.; vi + tikiechati,desid.,fromthe
rootCit, pres. 3. sg.; na +adhi +
Muc +ya +ti,pass.pres.3. sg.;na
+sam +pa +Sad +a +ti,pres.3™.
Se.
Ivā,
tat
Lacchati maro otaram lacchati
māro ārammanam —S. V. 147
The Evil One will haveanaccess,the
EvilOnewill getasupport; Labh+
ssati(Skt.syati),fut.3’. sg.
Lacchasiparatthāpi —M. II. 71
You will get(it) in thenextworldtoo;
Labh +ssa (sya) +si,fut. 2™.sg;
parattha,indel. + api
Lacchasipassitum—Vin. I. 343
Youwill gettheopportunity
tosee
Lajjidhammo okkami —
Vin. II. 53
Moral shame occurred (to me);
0 (ava)+Kram+i, pst.3™.sg.
787
Laddhapi
Latukikapi kho Ambattha sakunika
sakekulavake kamalapini hoti —D.
1.91
Eventhetiny Latukika(quail)bird,
Ambattha,speaksfreelyatherhome
(nest);Kama+ lapini: Lap +t+ ini
Laddhamladdhamnikkhipati —A. I.
87
The onewhostoreswhateverhasbeen
receivedby him;Labh +ta,pp.; ni +
Ksip +a +ti,pres.3™.sg.
Laddhamladdhamvissajjeti—A. I.
87
Theonewhosquanders whateverhas
beenreceivedby him;vi +Srj +ya +
e + ti, caus. pres. 3. sg.
Laddha ca na kappanti—A.I. 181
Thosethingsreceivedarenotsuitable;
Labh +ta,pp.; Klp +ya +nti,pass.
pres. 3pl.
Laddhana vittim na dadantimoha-
M. II. 72
Havingobtainedwealth,theydo not
distributeit for thereasonof
confusion; Labh + tvdna, absol.;
Dé + nti, theroot redup.;Muh +a,
der.
Laddhapi vinipatessati—Vin. LV.
155
Evenafterreceiving(it) hewill cause
it to bedestroyed;Labh +tva,absol.
+api; vi +ni +Pat +e +ssati, caus.
fut, 3". sg.
 Lapitalāpanam
Lavapetva Lahusa
Lapitalāpanam-A. I. 165
ekaggatam —8. V. 198 body; La(m)gh +e +ti, caus. pres. 3”.
Making somebodyrepeatwhat is offence;pari +Nam +e +eyya,
Gets concentrationandone- sg.
already
spelled;Lap +i +ta,pp.; Lap caus.,opt.3. sg.
pointednessof mind
e + ana, caus. der
Lavāpetvāubbāhāpetabbam—
Vin. Lahuko ca hoti parikkharo —Vin.
Labhāmi paccattamsamatham,
Labbhamānāyasamaggiya—Vin. I. 11.180 III. 54
labhamipaccattam
nibbutim
- M,|,
97 Havingcausedto reap,it shouldcause Light is thearticle
323 to becarriedaway;Li +dpe +tva,
Whena unanimousdecision is
| gainconcentration
within
myself caus.absol.;u(t) + Vah+ape + Lahucittakatapanfayissati—Vin. I.
obtainable;Labh +ya +mana,pass.
| gainpeacewithinmyself:
Labh
+ tabba,caus.fut.pp.
pr.p.; loc. abs. 80
a +mi,pres. 1".sg.;pati +attam;
Therewill appeara lightmindedness;
ni +Vr +ti, der. Lasikaya civarani kaye lagganti- lahu +citta +ka + ta, der.;pa +Jna
Labbha yobbanenakama —A. UL 5
Sense-desiresareavailablein youth; Vin. I. 202 +(y) +i +ssati,fut. 3%.sg.
Labhitvā odahissāmi -Vin. IHI, The robes stick to the body becauseof
Labh +ya, fut. pp.
212 thesynovicfluid; Lag +ya +nti; Lahuparivattamkho cittam—Vin. I.
Having
otained
I willkeep
itin;Labh pres.3. pl. 150
Labhatamesajanatadassanāya
—D.
+ i + tv, absol.; 0 + Dha +i+ Mind is changingswiftly; /ahu+pari
I. 151 TEIS asunam khāyitamhoti—Vin. II.
ssami,fut. 1".sg. Lasunamkhayitam + Vrt +ta,pp.
May all thiscrowd gettheopportunity
140
to see(the BlessedOne); Labh + q 4 Labhetha otāram labhetha Garlic hasbeeneaten;Khad +i +ta, Lahupavuranamnamayam kifci
tam,imper.mid. 3”. sg.
ārammanam
- 5. IV. 185 pp.—khāvita unhakalepavuranam—Vin. LV.256
Wouldgetanaccess
andsupport;
Labh Light blanketmeansthatwhichis
Labhatiatthayedam,labhati
+etha,opt. mid.3”. se
kō Lasunamnāma Māgadhakam usedin hottime;pa +@+ Vr +ana,
dhammavedam,labhati
vuccati—Vin. IV. 259 der.
dhammūpasamhitampāmuiiam-
; a pāmuiiam,adhigacehe Garlicmeanswhatis grownin
M. 1.37,325 tahhetha pāmaHANI E, Magadha;Magadha'- a -- ka, der.,
somanassam —D. I. 71-3 Lahum lahumsannipatitva—Vin. I.
He gainsknowledgeofthe meaning,
Hewouldhavejoy,attain happiness; Vac +ya + ti, pass. pres. 3™.sg. 175
knowledge of the text(Dhamma)and
Labh +etha,opt.mid.3". sg.;pat Havingassembled asquicklyas
joy connectedwith Dhamma;Labh +a
Mud +ya, der; adhi +gaecha 6, Lasunenapavarito hoti—Vin. IV. possible;sam +ni +Pat +i +tva,
+ Ui,pres. 3. sg >attha + veda;
opt.3. sg. 258 absol.
dhamma +veda;dhamma+ upa +
An invitationwasextendedforgarlic;
sam +Dha +i + ta,Pp.; pa + Mud + + Vr +e+ i +ta, caus. pp.
Labheyyāham
bhante
Bhagavato A I Lahum lahumsannipatetva—Vin.
santikepabbajjamlabheyyam IV. 231
upasampadam —M.L.391;IL.56: Lahukatarikamvedanam—M. II. 70 Havingcausedto assemble(thenuns)
Labhati bhojanassayavadattham Comparativelylesspain;/ahuka+ veryquickly;lahumlahum,adyv.;
sam
S. I. 161
pāripūrim —A. IV. 332 tara +ika, der. +ni + Pat +e +tva,caus.absol.
Venerablesir, mayI receive
Obtainsasmuchfood as(he) needed;
renunciationandordinationunder
the
Lahukamāpattim —A. IV. 140 LahusāSakyaiāti, rabhasāSakyaiāti
ī, der. BlessedOne;labheyyam +aham;
Light offence;opp. is garukam —D. 1.90-1
Labhati vattāram—S. IV. 198
Labh +eyyam, opt.1".sg.
Sakyansareirresponsible,Sakyansare
Meets witha critic; Vac +tu, der
Lahukāya
vaparinameyya
—Vin.I. braggers:Iahusā:appakeneva
Lamgheti
purimam
kayam
-A. IV: 49, 144 tussanti vd russanti va; rabhasati
Labhati samadhim labhati cittassa 19] Ri Mae
Wouldmakeit turnintoa lighter bahubhānino,Cv. 256
Causesto tossup forepart
ofthe

789
 Labhaggamahattam
Labhaggamahattampatto hoti -
Vin. III. 10
greatnessin termsof gains; maha +
tta,der.; pa +Ap +ta, pp.
Lābhamlacchanti—Vin. III. 15
(The bhikkhus)will getnecessary
reguisite;Labh -- a, der; Labh 2
ssanti(Skt.syanti),
fut. 3, pl.
Labhasakkarasilokapatilabhaya
~ mahārāia yassate kuleevarūpo
A. II. 143
To gain profit, good treatmentand
fame;pati + Labh +a, der
Labhasakkarasilokam
abhinibbatteti
—D. III. 43; M. I. 192
He causesto producegain, good
treatmentandreputation;Iabha 3
sakkara+siloka; abhi + ni + Vrt +e
T ti, Caus.pres. 3”. sg.
Labhasakkarasilokam
nikāmayamāno—A. IHI. 377; Vin. I.
183-4
Longing for gain,goodtreatmentand
fame;ni +kamaya +mana,prp.
Labhini Lābhī Licchaviyo
Gainandgoodtreatmentwould
The one (female) who gets internal Lābhenaattamanohoti sumano—S.
arise;u(t) +Pad+ya +evva,
opt,
tranquility;/abha +i+ int; adhi + 11.198
3”, sg.
atta Withthegain,hebecomeshappyand
pleased
Lābhasakkāroparihāyissati
-Vin, Labhi ajjhattam cetosamathassa —A.
1.27 I]. 92; IV. 360
Labhena labham nijigimsita —D.
Gain andgoodtreatment
willgo The onewho possessesinternal
III. 107
down;pari +Ha +(y)+i +ssati, calmnessof mind; Labh + i, der.; The onewhois desirousof winning
fut. 3". sg. adhi +atta moregains;ni +Ji +tu,desid.der.
Lābhā temahārāiasuladdham
te Labhi adhipanna- Labhehi appativibhattabhogi
dhammavipassanāya —A. II. 92; IV. sādhāranabhogī— A. III. 289
putto uppanno—D.II. 16 360 The onewhosharesgainscommonly
It is a gainforyou,great
king,itis The onewho possessesinsightinto withoutdividingthemindividually;a +
wellgainedbyyou,great king,that
in theDhammasrelatedto higher pati + vi +Bhaj +ta,pp.+ Bhuj +i,
yourfamilyasonwasbornofthis wisdom; der.
kind;/abhaseemstohavebeen used samkhārapariggāhakawipassanaāh
as an indel.; su + Labh+ta,pp.; dnassa,Cy. IIT. 116 Lāmakāni bhattāni bhikkhūnam
u(t)+Pad +ta,pp. denti—Vin. II. 175
Labhi annassapānassavatthassa Theygivefoodof poorqualityto the
yānassamālāgandhavilepanassa bhikkhus:Da +e +nti,pres.3. pl.
Labhavatanosuladdham vatano
seyyāvasathapadīpeyyassa —M. III.
yesamvatanoevarūpābhikkhū
vassamupagatā —Vin. III, 88 169;5. I. 94 Lamakani senasanani,lamakani
He becomesa receiverof food,drink, bhattānipāpunanti—Vin. II. 76
It is indeeda gainforus,it isindeed
clothe,vehicle,garland,perfumeand Inferiorlodgingsandinferior foods
wellgainedbyusthatthebhikkhus
cosmetic,bed,lodgingandlight;māiā cometothem:
pa +Ap +(u)nd@
+nti,
ofthis calibrehaveobserved rainy
+gandha +vilepana;seyya + pres.3”. pl.
retreat for us
avasatha+padipeyya:padipa +

Labhavatamesuladdham
vata
me eyya, der. Lāsentiyāpinaccanti—Vin. II. 10
Lābhasakkārasiloke cittam Theydancewitha womanwhois
yoham evam svakkhate
patilīyati—A.IV. 51 Lābhī cīvarapindapātasenāsana- alsoamusingherself;Las +e +nti,
dhammavinaye
pabbajito
- S$.
1.119 ä
Mind is turnedbackin mattersof gain, gilanapaccayabhesajjaparikkharanam caus.pr.p.;Nrt +ya +nti, pres.3”.
lr ; - + 2rū

It is indeeda gain for me,it is

good treatmentand flattery: pati +Li -—S.II. 210 pl.
indeed
wellgained
bymethat
Ihave
* ya + ti, pass.pres, 3". Sg. Receiverof robe,alms,lodgingand
renounced familylifethusinthe
medicalfacilities;civara +pindapata Licchaviyo parajesi —Vin. III. 108
doctrineanddisciplinewell
Labhasakkaro abhivaddhissati - + sendsana + gilanapaccaya + DefeatedtheLicchavis;if theterm
proclaimed;vata,emph.p.; SuT
Vin. I. 27 bhesajja +parikkhara Licchavi is masculineendingwith
Labh +ta,pp.; yo +aham;su* ā
Gain andgoodtreatment will grow up; shorti, its acc.pl. shouldbe
+Khyd+ta,pp.;pat Vraj+14
abhi +Vrdh + i4 SSati,fut. 3”. sg. Labhi ditthevadhamme Licchavayo, if it is endingwith long
la, pp.
sukhavihadranam —S. V. 150 i, thenits ace.pl.shouldbe
Labhasakkarouppajjeyya—Vin. II. Theonewhogetseasyabidinginthis Liechavino;para +Ji+e+s + i, pst.
Lābhinīaiihattamcetosamathassl
" )
184 presentlife; ditthe +eva +dhamme 3”. Sg.
A. III. 297
 Luddo
Luddo lohitapani hatapahate
nivittho adyapannopānabhūtesu -
M.II. 97
The cruelmanwhosehandsare
Smearedwith blood, who is obsessed
withhuntingandmerciless
towardsall
living beings;rudda (Skt.raudra) >
ludda; Han + ta,pp. +pa +Han +
fa,pp.;ni + Vis +ta,pp.;a+ daya +
a +Pad +ta,pp.
Luddha dhanam sannicayamkaronti
MAHI?)
The greedyhoardwealth:Lubh + ta,
Pp.; Sam + ni + Ci + a, der.
Lūkhaācepi...dānam deti panitam
va—A. IV. 392
Evenif (he) gives almscoarseor fine:
ce +api; Da + e + ti, pres. 34 sg.; pa
+Ni + ta,pp.
Likhappasanna hi āvuso manussā-
Vin. II. 197;HI. 171
Brothers,peopleare pleasedindeed
with austerepractices:lākha 3:Ppa+
Sad + ta,pp.
Lūkhāni bhojananinacchadenti
Pagevasenesikani—Vin. I. 200
Not only thecoarsefood butalso the
soft or oily food do notdigest;
nacchadentitinajiranti, Cy. V. 1089;
na +Cha(n)d + e + nti, caus.pres.
3”. pl.; sineha (from Snih) 4 ika,
der.; senesikanitisiniddhāni, Cy. V.
1089
Lukho lukhapapurano -S.1. 176
Theone who looks miserableand
Wearsa coarse blanket: litkha (Skt.
ruksa);pa+a@+Vr 4 ana
Lesakappena Lokayatam
(pavurana>papurana),der
paintingwith thesexorgan;/epacittam viharati —A. IV. 430
namacittakammaripam,Cy. 278 Havingcometo theworld's end(he)
Lutamtinam..avahari-—
Vin, II, (i
abidesattheendof theworld:a +
Stole thegrassalreadycut;La +ta,
pp.;ava +Hr +a+ i,pst,3! sg,
Lesakappenasenasanampatibahanti Gam +ya, absol.
—
Vin. II. 166
I
Withholda lodgingfor aninsignificant Lokassapikho etamsaccasammatam
Lekhafica me paribhogam
reason;appakena —S. IV. 230
bhavissati —Vin. IT. 110
sīsābādhādimattena,Cy. 1222;pati This hasbeenacceptedastrueevenby
The chipswill be formyuse;Likh+a,
+Bah+a +nti,pres.3”.pl. thepeople; /okassa,gen.for instr;
der.; pari +Bhuj + a, der.
sacca+sam + Man + ta,pp.
Lokacittesucittam patiliyati— A.
Lekhamchindati—Vin.IHI.76 IV. 50
Lokassasamaiicavisamaficaāatvā-
Scribesa line (letter);Chi(nld a: Mind is turnedbackin referenceto
A. V. 107
ti,pres.3". sg. worldlythoughts;pati +Li +ya +ti, Havingunderstoodgoodandbad of the
pass.pres. 3™.sg. world;sucaritaduccaritāni,Cy. V.42;
Lekhampariyāpunāti
—Vin.IV,305 Jia + tva,absol.
(They) learntheartofwriting;pari+ Lokacintāya pasuto—M. I. 323
Ap +(u)nd
+ ti,pres.3”.sg. Engagedin worldly thought;pa +Su + Lokassasamudayafica
la, pp. atthamgamahca Natva—A. V. 107
Lekhamsikkheyya
—Vin, I. 77;IV. Havingunderstood theoriginandthe
128 Lokantarikā aghā asamvutā dissolusion
of theworld; nibbattinca
Would learntheartof writing;Sak+ andhakārāandhakāratimisā— D. II. bhedanca,Cy. V. 42
eyya,desid. opt. 3. sg. 12
Interimworld,opened,uncovered, Lokassasambhavahcavibhavahica
Lekhayasamvanneti —Vin.III. 74 gloomyandmurky;aghāti hatva—A. V. 107
Praisesin a letter;sam+vanna +e? hiccavivatā,Cy. 433; tinnamtinnam Havingunderstood
theoriginandthe
ti, denom.pres, 3™.sg. eakkavālānamantarā ekeka destructionof theworld; vaddhifica
lokantarikahoti, Cy. 433; loka + vināsahca,Cy. V. 42
antara +ika, der; a +sam + Vr +ta,
Lenamkattukamo —
Vin. I. 206
Dp.: tinisā(— tamiSrā)
Desiringtomakeacave;Kr +fun* Lokāmisādhimuttoassa—M. II. 253
Wouldbeattachedto thematerial
kāma
Lokapariyāpannoanissatolokamha things;Joka +Gmisa+adhi + Muc +
—A. IV. 430 ta,pp.; As +ya (Skt.ya), opt.3. sg.
Lepagatenahatthenasākham
Hasremainedinsidetheworld,not
ganheyya—A. II. 165
goneoutof theworld;pari +@+Pad Lokayatampariyapunanti—Vin. II.
Would
holdabranch
withthehand
+ta,pp.; a +ni(s) +Sr +ta,pp. 139
smeared
withstickysubstance;
/epa
*
Learn worldly science (pure logic);
gata; Grh +nd +eyya,meta,opt3".
Lokam anuparivattanti—A. IV. 156 lokāyatamnāmasabbamucchittham,
SQ.
Operateaccordingto theworld;anu + sabbamanucchittham,setokāko,
pari +Vrt +a +nti,pres.3™.pl. kālo bako,imināca imināca
Lepacittassa
nimittam
amgajatem
kāranenātievamādi
chupi—Vin. IIL. 36
Lokassaantamagammalokassaante niratthakakāranapatisamvuttam
Touchedthesexualsignof a plaster
793
 Lokayatam
Lohitam Lohitam Lohitena

titthiyasattham,Cy. 1214; loka4 There was a need of medicinemade

āvata;pari + Ap + (uinā + nti, pres. To cause to release blood: Muc +e +
with salt
3”.pl. tum, caus. inf.

Lobhakkhaya
Lokāyatam vācenti —Vin. II. 139 Lohitam hetam bhikkhave ariyassa
kammanidānasamkhayo
- A.V,262
Teachworldly science;Vac +e +nti, vinaye,yadidam mātuthaūīam—M.
Exhaustionofthe ground
ofaction
caus.pres.3. pl. I, 266
depends
ontheexhaustion
oflust:
In thedisciplineofthe noble,
kamma+niddna+sam+khaya
Lokayate saradassavi—Vin. II. 139 Bhikkhus,it is truly thebloodwhichis
(fromKsi)
Seeingessence
in thewordlyscience: calledmother’smilk; hi +etam;
yadidam,indcl.; mātu +thafifia:
sara +Drs +vi, der. Lobhālobhovasamudeti
—
A. HI. thana+ya, der.
338
Loke jato loke samvaddho lokam From cravingarisesonlycraving; Lohitena phutam —
Vin. I. 182
abhibhuyya viharati, anupalitte
lobho +eva;sam +u(t)+e()+
ti Smearedwith blood;Sphur +ta,pp.
lokena —A. II. 39 pres. 3”. sg.
Born in theworld, grown up in the
world, havingovercometheworld, he
Lobho kammanidānasambhavo
-A,
abideswithoutbeingcontaminatedby
V. 262
theworld; Jan +ta,pp.; sam + Vrdh
Lustis thecauseandorigin
ofaction
* ta,pp.; abhi + Bhi +ya, absol.: an
+ upa + Lip +ta,pp.
Lomenatvammuttosi — Vin,IIL 43
Youareescaped
bya hair-breadth;
Mie
Lonakārakadārako—A. II. 182
+ta,pp.+As +si,pres.2".sg.
Saltmakingvillageboy(aderogatory
sense);lonakaragamadarako,Cy. II.
Lohatumbam katthatumbam
167
phalatumbam —
Vin. I. 205
A container
made
of bronze,
wood
and
Lonasakkharikāya chinditum —Vin.
fruit
1.205
To cut with a smallsalt-granule;
Lohapattadharo
dittho
—Vin.HI.
Chi(n)d +i +tum,inf,
169
(I ) haveseena (bhikkhu)holding
a
Lonasovirakam payetha—Vin. III.
bronze bowl; Drs + ta,pp.
86
Makehimdrink‘medicine
ofall
Lohabhānakam
lohavarako
—Vin.
tastes’;lonasovirakamnama
11.170 :
sabbarasabhisamkhatam ekam
Bronzebox,bronze
jar;bhdnakott
bhesajjam,Cy. 478; Pa +(y)te + GO
aranjaro vuccati,varakotighato;
tha,caus,pres, 24. pl.
1237

Lonehi bhesajjehiattho hoti —Vin. : I.

I. 202
Lohitammocetum
- Vin. I.205;
I
110

795
794
 Vakk P
akkhanti Vaccamaggens
Vaccam Vattam

nisīdenti—Vin. III. 29 Dr + dvi, der.

V Makehersitonmalesekorgan
throughanus;abhi +ni +Sad +e + Vajjam namphuseyya—Vin. II. 197;
Vakkhantisahadhammena—Vin.lll. Flawsandfaultsof verbal
actions;
vaci nti,caus.pres. 3”. pl. III. 171
178 +Kammanta +sandosa +vydpatti:
Ni He wouldexperiencesomething
Vaceamkatvā na icchati Acametum blameworthy
(He wouldbeguilty);
Will speakaccording
totheLaw: Vac+ +ad+Pad +ti,der.
—
Vin. II. 221 Vad+ya;fut. pp.; Spré + eyya,opt.
ssanti (Skt.syanti),fut. 3". pl.; saha,
Doesnotwish to washafterrelieving 3 $2,
indci. used with insty:;taking vakkha Vacīsamkhāram abhisamkharoti-
himself;Js +ya +ti, pres.3. sg.; @+
as the verbal basethis is also used as A. II. 158
Cam+e + tum,caus.inf. Vajjavaassam—S. III. 94
thepres. Accumulates
vocalhabits
orenergies;
I wouldbecomeguilty; vajja + vantu,
abhi+sam(s)+Kr +0 +nti,pres. Vaccamsandharentomucchito der.;As +yam(Skt.yam),opt. 1".sg.
Vaggenasamghena
kammamkātum— 3' pi.
papati—Vin. If. 212
—Vin. II. 301
Holding the call of nature (he) fainted Vaiiī abhiyātukāmohoti — D. II. 72
To do a formalactwith thedivided Vacīsucaritambhāveyya—A,HI.
andfell down;sam +Dhr +e +nta, (He) is desirousof invadingVajji; abhi
Samgha;Kr +tum,inf. 189
caus.pr.p.; Murch + i + ta,pp.; pa + + Ya +tum+kāmo
Cultivategoodvocalbehaviour;
Bhi+ Pat +i, pst. 34. sg.
Vacanakaro hoti ovādapatikaro— M. e +eyya,caus.opt.3”. sg.
Vajjinam patibahaya—D.II. 86
IIT. 133 Vaccitoāgamesi—Vin. II. 212 To repelVajjis;pati +Bah +a, der.
He obeystheorderandcarriesout Vaco nisamma—
D. II. 274 Beingpressedby thecall of naturehe
instruction Having
considered
thewords waited;siihātavacco, vaccapllitoti Vajjisu viharati Ukkacelayam,
carefully; ni +Sam+ya, absol. attho,Cy. 1283;vacca+ e +i +fa, Gamgāyanadiyātīre —5. V. 163;
Vacanapathamanum va thilam va denom.pp.; @+ Gam+ e+ s +i, pst. M.1.225
~M.II, 251 Vaccakuti
ūhatā
hoti—Vin.II.222 heelys Abidesat Ukkacelāon thebankof the
A wayofspeaking,
subtle
orgross Theprivyissoiled;
u(t)+Han+a, riverGamgā,in thekingdom of Vaiiī
Pp. Vaccenapilita —Vin. IV. 229
Vacanamakatam bhavissati—Vin. Troubledby nature’scall; Pid +i +ta, Vaiiīsu viharati Kotigāme —
S. V.
IV.113 Vaccakutiyā
seyyam
kappesi
—Vin. Pp. 431
Theword(advice)would nothavebeen IV. 16 AbidesatthevillagenamedKoti, in
carried out Slept in the privy; Si +ya, der; kappa Vajamgatasappimaharitum—
Vin. thekingdomof Vajji
+e +s +i, denom.
pst.3”.sg: IV. 102
Vacanamanadhivasento—S. I. 147 (People)havegoneto thecow-pento Vaiiīsu viharati Bhandagāme—A. II.
Withoutagreeingwith theword; an + Vaccakutivattam—Vin, I. 222 bringghee;@ +Hr +a +i + tum,inf. I
adhi +Vas+e +nta,caus.prp. Thedutyto befollowed
intheprivy AbidesatthevillagenamedBhanda,in
Vajevassamupagantum—Vin. I. 152 thekingdomof Vajji
Vacaniyomhiāyasmantehi—M. I. 95 Vaccapādukāyathitenaubbhuli Toobserve
rainyretreat
inacow-pen;
Ishould
beadvised
bythe
venerables:
tabbam
—Vin.
Il.222 upa +Gam +tum,inf. Vatamsakamkaronti—Vin. I. 9
Vac +aniyo, fut. pp. +As +mi, meta. Shouldbend down slowly while (They) make headdress; Kr + 0 + nti,
pres.I". sq. standing
ontheprivyshoes;
u()* Vajjabhayadassavino
etampati- pres. 3. pl.

oi Bhuj +i +tabba,fut. pp. kamkham—A, I. 49

fkammantasandosavyāpatti
-A Thisis tobeexpected
ofa person
who Vattamtesamnatthi pannapanaya-
V. 2d TE E i- is scared of a fault; vaia t bhaya + M. I. 141
292 Vaccamaggena
amgajatam
abhi

796
 Vattam
For themthereis no cycle of birth to
proclaim;Vrt +ta,pp.
Vattam va caturassam va chinditva
—Vin. IIT. 232
Havingcutouta (piece)circularor
Square;Vrt + ta,pp.; catu + ® +
amsa; Chi(n)d +i +tva, absol.
Vaddhimpayoienti—Vin. II. 267
They causeto engagein making
money; vaddhimeansinterest;pa +
Yuj + e +nti, caus.pres. 3™.pl.
296;A. II. 54
They let thedreadfulcemeteries
grow up (—They continuetheir life):
punappunam
kalevaranikkhipamānabhūmim
vaddhenti,Cy. 1298: katasinti
attabhāvam,A. Cv.lll. 92; Vydh3-e
Ytmii,caus.pres. 3. pl. .
Vanam ālimpeyya,yavadeva
ropanatthāya— S. IV. 177
Apply medicineon thewound for the
sakeofhealing it;yava (Skt.yāvai) 3
(d) +eva; Ruh +e + ana, caus. der.
Vanijjam payojenti—Vin. II. 267
(They) engagein trade:pat Nuited
nu, caus.pres. 3". pl.
Vanijja payutta yathādhippāyāhonti
—A. IL. 81
Businessenterprisesorganised
becomesuccesssfulas theyare
expected;
pa +Yuj +ta,DD.:yathā +
adhippāya
Vano assaviassa—M. 11.257
Vannasamvattanika Vatthabbam
The woundwouldSuppurate; @+
Vannasamvattanikapatipada givento thatperson,instruction
Sru +avi, der.; As +ya (Skt.vat),
patipaiiitabbā
—A. IHI.48 shouldnotbegivento thatperson,and
opt. 3”. sg.
Thepathleadingto goodcomplekion thatpersonshouldnotbetrusted;Vad
shouldbe followed;sam + Vrt +ana +tabba,fut. pp.; Man +ya +nti,
Vano kandūvati—Vin. 1,203
+ika, der.;pati +Pad +ya +i + pres.3%.pl.; na +anu +Sas +i +
The woundbecomesitchy;kandu
+a
tabba,fut.pp. tabba,fut.pp.; @+Pad +ya + i +
+ti, denom.
pres.3”.sg.
tabba,fut. pp.
Vannāyapakkhāyathitā—Vin. II.
Vanokilijjittha—Vin.I. 205 175 Vattamaparipūrentona silam
The woundfestered:
Klid +ya +i+ (They)havebeenstandingfor hisclass paripūrati —Vin. II. 235
ttha,pst. mid. 3”. sg, andfaction;Stha +i + ta,pp. The onewhodoesnotdischargeduties
doesnotaccomplishmoralvirtues;Vrt
Vanona rūhati—Vin.I. 206 Vannarahassavannambhasita—A. + ta,pp.; a +pari +Pr + e +nta,
The woundis nothealed;Ru ta'i II. 100 caus. prp.; pari + Pr + a +
ti, pres.
pres: 3". sg. Theonewho praisesanotherwho FH"
>Se:
deservespraise;Bhds +i +tu,der.
Vannambhanamanam pasamsati- Vattamnikkhipami—Vin. I. 34
D. IHI. 187 Vannebhaiiiamane—S. I. 64 I withhold(theprobationary) duty;
(He)commends anyone
speaking Whenhe is beingpraised;Bhan+ya ni + Ksip + a + mi, pres. 1”. sg.
good(of you);Bhan+a +mana, t māna,pass.pr.p.; loe.absl.
pr: p.; pa + Sams+a + ti,pres. Vattampaninapessami —Vin. II. 31,
3 gi Vattakatemukhe—Vin. III. 37 207
In themouthopenedupwide;vi +@+ I shallproclaimtheduties
Vannambhāsatibhātam
taceham Da +ta,pp +Kr +ta,pp. (or proceduresto be followed);pa +
Jia +Gpe+ ssGmi,caus.fut. 1”.sg.
kālena—A. IHI.424
Vattantibhaginiyo attha garu-
(He)accords
apraise
factual,
true
and
dhamma?—Vin. IV. 54 Vattasampannairiyapatha-
timely; taccha(Skt.tathya)
Sisters,
aretheeightgraveconditions sampanna—Vin. IV. 245
Dutifulandendowedwith deportment
Vannam
vadamāno
vadeyya—D.l.4 in progress?; Vattantiti Ggacchanti,
(He) would keepon speaking
good; pagunā vācuggatātiattho,Cy. 792;
Vrt +a +nti,pres. 3”. pl. Vattevattantimosareti—Vin. IV.
Vad--a --māna,pi:p.; Vadt 090,
232
opt. 3". sq.
Vattabbamanusasitabbammannanti Causesto admit(to theSamgha)
—A. V. 26; IL. 113 theonewho hasbeencarryingout
Vannavanto
hontipinitindriya Theythinkthatheshouldbeadvised duties;o +Sr +e +ti, caus.pres.
pasannamukhavanna vippasanna
and instructed 3™.Sg.
chavivanna—Vin. IIL. 88
(They)areof goodcomplexion, Vattabbam(naceya)mannantinaca Vatthabbamna pakkamitabbam-
satisfiedsenses,
pleasant
face
and
anusāsitabbammafnanti, na ca M. I. 106
extremelypleasantskincolour;
Pri +
tasmim puggale vissasam He shouldnotleave,butlive there;Vas
nd +i +ta,pp. +indriya;pa* Sad +tabba,fut.pp.; pa +Kram +i +
apajjitabbammannanti—M. I. 95
+ta,pp. +mukhavanna;
vi+ (They)thinkthatadviceshouldnotbe tabba,fut.pp.
Ppasanna
 Vatthim
Vadeyyama Vadeyyasi

Vatthim gahetvapassavam matter.; vi +ni (s) + Ci +na +ewa,

karontassa—Vin. IHI. 117 Krs) + evydsi,opt. 2". sg. It wasjust a slaughterthatexistsin
opt. 3'4,sg.
thecommunityof Niganthas,the
Sexorgan;Grh + e +tva, absol.; pa + Vadeyyasiyena attho —Vin. IV. 158 sonsof Nata;mafirie,indcl.; Vrt +
Vatthussa
vūpasamāya
- Vin, I,357
Sru +a, der.;Kr +0 +nta,pr. p. You shouldtell mewhatyou need:Vad a +fi, pres.3. sg.
For settlingthecase:vi +upa+Sam
+eyyasi,opt. 2". sg.
+a, der.
Vatthim sodheti—A. III. 259; Vin. I. VadhohesoKesi ariyassavinaye—A.
221 VadehiGotama — Vin. I. 82 If. 113
Vatthūni parigaphanti—
Vin, I, 228
Makes the bladder cleanse: Sudh + e +
Speakon, Gotama;theBuddha Kesi, thisis, indeed,deathin the
Occupythesites;pari +Grh+na+ addressesthefather by clan name;
2
Ii, caus. pres. 3”. sg. disciplineof thenoble;Ai +eso
nti,pres.3”.pl. Vad+e +hi, imper.2”. sg.
Vatthum avicinitvā, amūlā mūlam Vanantamyevapacārayāmi—A. I.
Vadanhniivitamaccharo—
A. IV.285 Vadhakacittoidhūpasamkanto— Vin.
gantvā—Vin. I. 358 182
The one who is bountiful,bereft
of II. 192
Withoutmakingan investigationinto I makemyselfmoveto theforest
stinginess;vadam+Jia +ii,der:vi You havecomeherewith theintention
thecase,withoutgoing to the root itself;vanantam+(y) +eva;pa +
+1+ta,pp. +maecharo ofkilling; idha, indcl. +upa +sam + Car +aya +mi, caus.pres. 1".sg.
cause(ofit); a+ vi+ Ci+na+i4
Kram +ta,pp.
tva, absol.
Vadatu, ayya,bhikkhusamgho
-Vin. Vanabhamgena itthi purisam
II. 276 Vadhayaoniyanti—Vin. I. 88 bandhati— A. IV. 197
Vatthum āroceti no āpattim —Vin.
Sirs, let theOrderof bhikkhus
speak; Theyareledawayfor execution; Womanbindsa manwithwhatis
IV. 32
ayya=5kt. ārya; Vad+a +tu,imper. 0 (avaor apa) +Ni +ya +nti, broughtfromtheforest;vanato
Informs thesubiect,not theoffence pass.pres. 3’. pl.
SO ae: bhanjitvaāhatenapupphaphalādinā
pannākārena,Cy. IV. 106; vana --
Vatthum itthakāhi citam ahosi —D.
Vadabhantepaccayena —A.II. 81 Vadhuyānibbuyhamānāya—D.III. Bhanij+a, der.; Ba(n)dh +a + ti,
II, 181
Venerable
sir,tell(me)interms of 89 pres.3”. sg.
Ground- floor was built with bricks; Ci Whenthebridewasbeingcarried
requisites(pleasetell mewhatyou
+ta,pp. away; ni + Vah +ya +mana,pass.
need);pavareti,nimanteti,Cy.Ill. Vanamaiihogāhetvā—5. I. 129;III.
110; Vad +a, imper.2". sg. pr. p. 235,IV. 105
Vatthum desetabbamanarambham
Havingenteredintotheforest;adhi 3
saparikkamanam—Vin. III. 149 Vadhenava bandhanenavajaniya va
Vadeyyatha
bhante
yenaattho
—Vin. o +Gah +e +tva,absol.
The site,which is danger-freeand garahayava pabbajanayavā —D.I.
Il. 132
with a neighbourhoodshouldbe 135
Venerable
sir,youshould
tellme
what Vanamvanasayapavisanti—S. HI.
demarcated; Drs +e +tabba,caus. By puttingto death,puttinginjail, 85
you need;Vad +eyydtha,
opt.2m.
pl.
fut.pp.; an +d+ Ra(m)bh +a, der; deprivation,censuringor by banishing; The forest-dwellers enterinto the
Sa +pari + Kram +ana, der. pa +Vraj +e +ana,caus.der. forest; vana + dGsaya:a +Sri +a,
Vadeyyatha
vanovavadeyyatha
-Ā.
IV. 211 der; pa +Vis +a +nti,pres,3. pl.
Vatthum na patinissaiati —Vin. III. Vadhopayutto—Vin. II. 194
Whetheryou wouldsayornol
173 Killing hasbeencontrived;pa +Yuj+ Vanasandam aiihogāhetvā—M. I.
fa, pp. 501
Vadeyyāma
khotamgahapati,
sace
tuit ri tat ti, pres. 3. sg. Having entered into theiungle thicket
tvam nātikaddheyyāsi—Vin.HL 17
Vadhoyevamafiie Niganthesu
Householder,if youdon’tpushme100
Vatthum viniechineyya—Vin. II, 244 Nātaputtiyesu
vattati—D. IHI.117; Vananibbanamagatam
—A. III. 346
much,I wouldtellyou;Vad+eyydma,
(The Samgha)woulddecidethe M. II. 244 The one who has come to non-forest
opt.I, pl.:na+ati +kaddha
(frem
 Vanena
Varam Vaseyyama
fromtheforest;kilesavanato means
familyor house;inthe
nibbanamkilesavanarahitam Varam te tinhena govikattanena 1.36
Vammikasuttaofthe MN.I 144
kucchi parikanto natvevaya HavingtakenNibbānaastheobiect
vammika
is compared
withthe
rattandhakāratimisāyamkucchi- (of meditation);vi + ava +Srj +ta,
371;ni +vanam+agatam materialbody;ca +upa+Ci +iva+
hetupindāya carasā—M. I. 449 pp., the same term occurs as
ti,pass.pres.3”.sg. h It is betterfor you to cut openthe vossaggarammana
Vanenavanamgahanenagahanam
bellywith a sharpknife ofthe butcher
ninnena ninnam thalena thalam Vamkakenāpi kīlanti—Vin,II, I0 thanto roamin thethickdarknessfor Vasantapiekatovavasanti—Vin. IV.
papatāmi—M. I. 79 (They)playalsowithatoyplough; thereasonof belly to collectalms: 41
I shiftfromforestto forest,thicketto vamkakantigāmadārakānam tinha =Skt. tiksna;go + vi +Krnt + Evenwhentheyareliving,theyjust
thicket,valley to valley andfrom land
kīlanaka- khuddaka-namgalam,
D. ana,der.;pari + Krnt + ta,pp.; na + live together
( They keepon living
to land; vanenavanantivanato
Cy. 86; vamkakena+api;Krid+a tu + eva;carasa,analog.form together); cp. uppajjamana
vanam,papatamitigacchami, Cy. II. +nti, pres. 3. pl. uppajjanti;ekato+ eva; Vas+a +
46; pa + Pat + a + mi, pres. 1%Sg.
nti,pres.3™.pl.
Vayaficassānupassati
—A. III, 378; 166;IV. 42
Vantarnno paccāvamati—A. V. 337 Vin. I. 184 (They) block thebestsleepingplaces; Vasitano gadhamkatta—A. II. 107
Doesnottakein againwhatis already
Observesits changetoo;vayam
+ca pathamataramgantvāpattaeīvaram The one who does not make a hole but
leftout(doesnoteatwhatis vomited): +assa +anu+passati,
pres.3”.sg. atiharitvā rumbhitvātitthanti,Cy. livesthere;Vas+i +tu,der; Kr +tu,
Vam+ ta,pp.; pati+ @+ Vam+a 4 780;pari (=pali) + Rudhor Badh + der.
ti,pres.3™.sg. Vayo āyam pariyādāyathassati—A. ya + nti,pres. 3%.pl.
IV. 283 Vasippattoparamippattoariyasmim
Vandāmiayyā —Vin. II. 78; IHI. 162 Vallikam dharenti —Vin. I. 106 silasmim—M. III. 28
Expenditurewill exceedtheincome;
I respect(to you) sirs; Vand+ a + mi, (They)wearearornaments; Dhr +e + Theonewhohasgainedmasteryand
pari +@+Da +ya,absol.;
Stha
+
pres. 1". 8g.; ayyd, voc. pl. nti, caus.pres. 3. pl. perfectionin noblemoralvirtue;vast
ssa +ti,fut. 3". sg.
+pa + Ap + + ta, pp.; parami +
Vapakassatevasatthārā —A. III. 393 Valavamgadrabhena
Vayham
rathosakatam
sandamānikā patta
Hekeeps
himself awayfromthe sampayoleyyum—M. II. 153
sivikā pātamkī —Vin. IV. 339
teacher;vi +apa +Krs +ya +ti; Theywouldmakea marematewitha Vasivitakkapariyayapathesu
—M. I.
Carriage,wagon,cart,chariot,
Pass. pres. 3. sg.+ eva
palanquin,sedanchair;Vah+ya,mela. maledonkey;
sam+pa +Yuj+e + 122
eyyum,caus.opt. 3"",pl. The onewhohasa masteryoverthe
Vapakassatigarutthaniyehi processes
of thinking:vitakka1
Varattachijjeram—D. IIL.27
sabrahmacārīhi—A. III, 393 Valavārathamāruyha —D. I. 106 pariyaya + patha
Strapswould break;Chid +ya+
He keepshimselfaway from the Havingmountedthechariotdrawnby
eram,opt.mid.3’. pl.
deferentialco-celibates:garu t thāna mares;d +Ruh +ya, absol. Vaseyyāmaekarattamāvasathāgāre
t iya, dey. —Vin. IV. 17
Varattehibandhitvagoyugehi
Vavatthānamdassetvānipaiianti- May we stayforonenightin the
āviiiheyyāma—
D. III. 26-7
Vappampuīichitvā —Vin. 1.345 Vin. IV. 289 restinghouse;Vas+eyyama,opt. 1”.
Havingtieddownwithstraps,
We”
Havingwipedofftears; vappa(Skt. They lie downkeepinga dividingline pl.; āvasatha t agāra
woulddraghimbytwooxen; 4 tui
bāspa);Prohich t i 3 tvd,absol. betweenthetwo; majjhekasdvamva
(from Vyadh) + eyydama,
opt.I, pl.
kattarayatthimvā antamaso Vaseyyāmaekarattim agyāgāre-
, . =. Fy, 22
Vammikocupacīyati—D. IHI. 188 kāvabandhanampi thapetva; Cy. 932 Vin. I. 24
Varabhandamadaya—
Vin. IV.RE. May we stayforonenightin thefire
Ant-hill growsup; vammikagenerally
Having
taken
thevaluables;
4+Da Vavassaggārammanam
karitvā —A.
meansant-hill, but in this contextit house: aggi t agāra
va, absol.
 Vassam
Vassamukkaddhitukamo —Vin. I.
138
Desiringto postponethe observance
of rainy retreat;u(t) +Kaddha(from
Krs) +i +tum,inf. + kama
Vassamupagacchāmi - D. II. 98
I will observerainy retreat
Vassamvaseyya—Vin. IV. 313
Shouldobservetherainyretreat;Vas+
evya,opt. 3. sg.
Vassamvuttho —S. V. 405
The onewhohadobservedtherainy
retreat;Vas+ ta,pp.
VassasataparinibbuteBhagavati -
Vin. IT.294
One hundredyearsafterthe
parinibbana
of the BlessedOne; /oc.
absl.
Vassasatassa vassasatassa accayena -
S. V. 456
After everyhundredyears;continuity
's expectedby the repetition; ati +
aya (fromI)
Vassasatayukovassasatajivi—S. V.
440
The one who hasthespanof life
for one hundredyearsandliving
his life for one hundredyears:,
Yassa +sata +dyuka:ayu +ka,
der.; vassa +Sala +jivi: jiva +7,
der,
Vassānamtemāsampatibāhitum-
Vin. Il. 167
Tokeepawaythreemonths
of rains;
Patt ++ Bah
27 +j 4 tum, caus. inf,
Vassikasatikam Vātapānā
Vassānampacehimemāse,sarada-
153 Whether(they)wouldcarryit or not;
samayeviddhe vigatavalāhake
deye
(He) has promised the observanceof Vah-- a t ntu, imper.3'',pl.; mā,
-MiEal?
rainy retreat;pati + Sru +ta, Pp.+cp. prohibitive p.
In thelastmonthofthe rains,
during
patissava
thetimeofautumn,when theskyis
clearandcloudless;viddheti Vakaciram nivasetva—Vin. HI. 34
Vassikasatikamatikkamitva sibbesi Havingcausedtoputon a bark-
ubbiddhe;devetiākāse,Cy.1.377;
—Vin. IL. 289 garment;ni +Vas+e + tvG,caus.
Vvadh+ta,pp. .
Havingsteppedon to thebathing absol.
Vassanevassamupagantum -Vin,I,
ati +Kram +i + tva,absol.;Siv +ya Vācam bhindati —M. I. 301; Vin. I.
137
Te ts h pst Sse 157,bhindeyya
To observerainyretreat
intherainy
Speaks(breakstheword);Bhi(n)d +a
season
Vassikasatikaanufinata—Vin. IV. + ti, pre. 3™.sg.
172
Vassāvāsamallīyissantisamkāpa-
The bathingclothehasbeenapproved; Vaca bhinna hoti —Vin. III. 266
yissanti —Vin. I. 138 anu +Jia + ta,pp. It is alreadysaid;vācambhindatiis an
Will stick to therainsandmake idiomaticexpressionfor speaking;
preparatonfor residencein therains; Vassikatesamaggamakkhayati—A. Bhid +ta,pp.
a+ Li+ ya+i+ ssanti,
fut,3%.
pl; M222
sam +KIp +aya +i +ssanti,caus. Jasmineis saidto be thebestamong Vācāyavācāyaāpatti —Vin. III. 164
fut.3". pl. them;aggā + a4+ Khya +ya + ti, For eachandeverywordthereis an
pass.pres. 3™.sg. offence; ā + Pad + ti, der.
Vassavasam upagantukamo hoti-A.
V. 334 Vassūpanāyikamsambhāvetum- Vācāvikkhepamāpaiiati,
Is desirousof observing
rainyretreat; Vin. I. 253 amarāvikkhepame— D. I. 24; M. I.
vassa + vasa; upa + gantum+kamo To undertaketheobservance of rainy 521
retreat; sam -- Bhū -- e + tum,caus. He engagesin verbalwriggling,in eel
Vassāvāsampatisunitvāvisam- inf. wriggling;vaca+ vi + Ksip +a, der.;
vādessati
—Vin. I. 153 a +Pad +ya + ti, pres.3. sg.
Havingpromisedtheobservance
of Vassūpanāyikā,purimikā
rainy retreat,(he) will makeit pacchimikā— Vin. I. 137 Vāniiūpamā mannepatibhanti—M.
contradict;
parti+Sru+na+i +hā, Observanceof rainy retreat,thefirst 11.232
absol.; vi +sam +Vad+e +ssanti andthelast;vassa+ upa +naya + I feelthattheyareiust like merchants;
caus. fut, 3”. pl. ika, der. vāniia +upama;mafiie, indcl.; pati
+ Bhd +nti,pres. 3”. pl.
Vassāvāsikam
dassāmi
- Vin. HI. Vassūpanāyikāyapunnāyapunna-
260 māya rattiyā —D. II. 207 Vanijova atītattho—A. IV. 228
On a full moonnight,atthe As a merchant who haslosthis
I will give a robefor therainyretreat,
commencement ofthe rainyretreat; wealth;vanijo +iva; ati +I +ta,
vassavasa+ika, der; Da +ssdmi,
vassa+upa +Ni +a +ika, der. pp. +attha
fut. I". sg.
Vahantu vā mā vā —A. IV. 189 Vatapanathaketabba—Vin. I. 48
Vassavaso
patissuto
hoti—
Vin.I.
805
 Vatapane
Windowsshouldbe shutdown; stak 34
e +tabba,fut. pp.
Vatapane vivaranto.. vatapane
thakento—
Vin. IHI. 119
While openingthewindows, closing
thewindows; vi + Vr +a +nta,pr.p.;
Stak + e + nta,prp.
113
Havingturnedbackby thewhirling
wind; 4 + Vrt + i +tva,absol.
Vatamandalika samghātiyo
ukkhipimsu—Vin. IV. 345;II. 136.
vātamandalikāya
A whirling wind blew up (her) robes;
u(t) + Ksip + imsu,pst. 3” pl.
Vātam anulometi—A. IHI. 250; Vin.
r 221
It agreeswith thewind: anuloma+e+
ti, denom.
pres.3”. sg.
Vatasamutthanaabadha —A. V. 110
Ailmentscausedby wind
Vatatapena Samputito hoti
sammilato—M. I. 80
Shrunkandwitheredbecause
of the
wind andthesun;Samputa+i +ta,
Pp. sam + Mla + ta,pp.
Vatatapevisoseyya—
S. II, 88
Hewouldmakeitdryupinthewind
and thesun:vata +Gtapa;vi +Sus +
€ T €)ya, caus.opt. 3'd.sg.
Vātātapo vā snehagatampariya-
diyeyya—A, IHI. 394
Windor heatof thesun would
Vādam Vārunim
overcome
(woulddryup)the
IV. 323,āropehi +Grh +e +tva,absol.;vi +Str + e
moisture; vata + ditapa;sneha+
We will challenge (him); a + Ruh +e +tvd, caus. absol.
gala; pari +@+Da +iya+eyya,
+ssama; caus. fut. 1”, pl.
opt. 3". sg.
Vāmenahatthenapaiāpatimgahetvā
Vādam nipātesi— D. I. 91 —A. IV. 210
Vātābādho hoti—Vin, I, 205 Chargedwith; ni +Pat+e+s +i, Takingthewife withthelefthand
Has rheumatism;vata+abadho caus.pst. 3”. sg.
Vamenahatthenabhimkaram
Vatenanasamīrati—Vin.I, 185 Vādena vādamāsāditabbam gahetvadakkhinenahatthena
Doesnotshakeduetowind:sam+Ir amannimha—M. I. 236 cakkaratanamabbhukkiri—
D. II.
+a +ti,pres.3”.sg. We thoughtto attack(your)argument 172
with(my) argument;a +Sad +e + Havingtakenthegoldenwatervessel
Vatoekamantam
apavahati
—A,IV. by thelefthand,hesprinkledwater
170 +mha,pst. I". pl. withhis righthandoverthegem-
The wind carries(them)tooneside wheel;Grh +e +tva,absol.;abhi +
Vadenavadamsamāraddho— M. I. u(t) +Kir +i, pst. 3. sg.
Vātocīvaramkāyamhā
apavahati- 250
M. II. 139 Whenhewastargeted(by me)in my Vamena hatthenarasmiyogahetva
argument;sam i ā t Rabh ' ta,pass. dakkhinenahatthenapatodam
The wind takestherobeawayfromthe
body;apa+Vah+a +ti,pres.
3. sg. DP. gahetvā—M. I. 124,III. 97; S. IV.
176;A.III. 28
Vādo tamhi na rūhati —Vin. II. 203 Takingthereinsby thelefthandand
Vātovasedatam —D. II. 265
Accusation has no effect on him; Ruā thedrivingstickby theright
As a coolbreeze
tothose whoare
+a+ ti, pres. 3”. sg.
sweating;Svid+e +nta,caus.prp.;
vato + iva
Vāmena hatthenasamghātim
Vapitam te bhagini? —Vin. II. 131 uccaretvadakkhinena hatthena
Sister,haveyou causedto sow (or pattampanametva—Vin. II. 216
Vadakkhitto hoti —Vin. IV.1
mow)?;thishassomehiddenmeaning Havingcausedto raiseup double
Entangledinadisputation;
vada
+
connectedwith seruality;Ho teti layerrobewith thelefthandand
Ksip +ta,pp.
+fa, caus. PP. extendthebowl with theright
hand;u(t) + Car +e +tva,caus.
Vādamāropetvā
apakkantā—
M.II.
Vāmam muīica dakkhinam ganhahi absol.;pa +Nam +e + tva,caus.
3
—S. IHI. 108 absol.
Havingchallenged,
(they)
went
away;
Leavethe leftandtaketheright;
apa +Kram +ta,pp.
Mu(fi)e +a, imper,2". sg.; Grh +nd, Vāyamitvāna chupi— Vin. III. 127
meta. imper. 2".
Jad
sg. Havingmadeanattempthedid not
Vādamāropetvā
..samkami
- Vin.
I touch;vi +@ +Yam+i+ tva,absol.;
60
Vāmena pādenaniggahetvā Chup + i, pst. 3%.sg.
Having
challenged
..shifted;
a+Ru
e +tva,caus.absol.;sam+Kram*' III. 187 Varunim cittamohinim—A. HI. 213
Pst. 3% Sg.
Holding (it) fast with the left foot and Strongdrink thatmakesmind
makingit spreadoutwith theright;ni confused;Muh +a +int, der.
Vādam
āropessāma
- M. II.1235:
 Vareyanipi
Vāreyānipivattāpeti—Vin. IHI.
135
Makesarrangements formarriage;Vr
T e f ya, caus.der.; Vrt +ape +ti,
caus.pres,3". sg.
Valakambalam nivāsetvā—Vin. III.
34
Havingcausedto puton a blanketmade
of horse-hair
Valaggakotinittuddanamattopi
padeso—
D. II. 139;A. IHI.403
A placeevento theextentof inserting
a tip of hair, i.e.so packed;ni + Tud +
ana, der.
Valaggamattampapassaabbha-
mattamvakhāyati —S. I. 205
To him,iusta hair-tipofevil, appears
asa cloud: vala + agga + matta;
abbha + matiam+ iva; Khya + ya +
fi, pass.pres. 3". sg.
Valayakkham viharam pahesi —Vin.
III. 84
Causedto send(a monk)to anabode
inhabitedby a fiercedemon;pa + Hi
Te +S +i, caus.pst. 3". sg.
Valasunakhacandobalibaddo
cikkhallo okaso ~ Vin. IV. 312
Fiercedogs,wild bulls. muddyplace
Valikam doniyā ākiritvā —M. IHI.
140
HavingStrewedsandover thetrough:
a +Kir +i t.iā, absol
Valanam amanussanamāvāso—A
ITI. 268
A residence
ofofyverycruel non-humans
Sidence
Vālehiubbālhāhonti—Vin,1.149
(They)areextremely
troubled
bythe
wild beasts;
u(t)+Badh+td,pp.
Valehisamagaccheyyam
sihena
va
vyagghenava dipina va acchena
va
taracehenavā —A. IHI, 101
I shouldencounter with
dangerous
animals,a lion,a tiger,aleapord,
a inf.
bearor a hyena: Sam+a +gaccha+
eyvam,opt.I". pi.
Vasamupagaiichi—D.I, 173
Settleddown; upa +gaftcha(gaccha)
Ei pet: 28. e
Vāsam upeti caturamginiyasenaya
—.MiHEU
Takesabodewith thearmyof four
divisions;upa+I +ti,pres.3%sg,
catu +® +amga+ int
Vāsamkappeti—D. II. 88;S.IV.
219, kappenti
Lives; Vas +a, der; kappa+e+ti,
denom. pres. 3". sg.
Vāsitakenapiīiākena nhāyanti-
Vin. IV. 341
(They) takebathwithscented
ground
sesame;Vas+e +i +ta,caus.pp.
Snd +ya +nti,meta.
pres.3”.pl.
Vāsitikāyamattikāyanahāyanti
-
Vin. II, 280
(They) takebathwithscented
clay:
Snd +ya +nti,meta.
pres.3”.pl.
Vāsetumanujanami
—
Vin. IL.120
I approveto makethemscented;
Vas*
e +tum,caus.inf; anu +Jan +na+
mi, pres. 1".sg.
Vasehi
Vasehi bhesajjehiattho hoti —Vin. I.
200
Thereis a needof medicineprepared
with fat
Vikannam uddharitum —Vin. I. 297
To cutoff theunevencorner;vi +
kanna;u(t) +Dhr or Hr +i +tum,
Vikappaniipagapacchimam —Vin. III.
196
The lastis theone fit for assignment;
vikappana + upaga + pacchima
&
Vikappam Apajjissati—Vin. III. 215
Will proposealteration;@+ Pad +ya
+i + ssati,fut, 3, sg.
Vikappetvaganhahi—Vin. IV. 78
Havingassignedit (to another)take
it; vi +kappa+ e + tva,denom.
absol.; Grh +nd +hi, meta. imper.
Ind
Sg.
ro
Vikalake tosetvākusapātamkātum
—Vin. I. 285
To drawa lotteryfor theinsufficients
(vikalaka);etthacīvarawikalakam
puggalavikalakanti dve vikalakā, Cy.
1125; Tus te ditvd, caus. absol.;
kusa +pāta: Pat +a, der.; Kr ā
tum:kartum>kattum >katum,inf.
Vikāram sallakkhetvā—
Vin. I. 271
Havingtakenintoconsideration
the
Symptoms
of the disease;sam 3
lakkha + e +tva, denom. absol.
182
Vikkāyikam
time;vikāia t visikhā +cariya +
anuyogo
Vikāle āgacchanti—Vin. III. 159
(They)comeat impropertime
Vikale gamampaviseyya—Vin. IV.
165
Shouldgo to thevillageatanimproper
time;pa + Vis +eyya,opt.3”. sg.
Vikalepi bhunjanti—Vin. I. 10
(They)eatevenatimpropertime;vi +
kale +api; Bhu(ā)i T a + nti,pres.
37 pi
Vikāle maīie tayā bhuttam—Vin.
IV. 149
I supposeyou haveeatenat improper
time;Bhuj +ta,pp.
Vikale sisamnhayitva—Vin. IV. 117
Havingtakena full bathatimproper
time;Snd +ya + i +tva,absol.
Vikalo namaatthamgatesuriye
yavaarunuggamana—Vin. IV. 274
Impropertimemeanswhenthesun is
set,till theriseof thedawn(in the
nextmorning);aruna +u(t) +
gamana
Vikalo nama majjhantike vitivatte
yavaarunuggama—Vin. IV. 86, 166
Impropertimemeanswhenthenoon
timeis gone, untill theriseof dawn(in
thenextmorning);majjhanta+ika,
der; vi +ati +Vrt +ta,pp.; vava,
indcl., usedwithabl.
Vikkāyikam bhandamkatum—Vin.
Ill. 244
 Vikkhittacitto
To makegoods for sale: yi +kava:
Kri +a,der.+ ika, der.
Vikkhittacitto dhammam sunāti
anekaggacitto—A. IHI, 174
He listensto theDhammawith a
scatteredmind,not with a mind one-
Pointed;vi +Ksip +ta,pp.+citta:
Sru + nd +ti, pres, 34 Sg.
Vigatathinamiddho bhikkhu-
If. 200
Communityof bhikkhusis free from
thina + middha
Vigayha parikammam kārāpenti -
Vin. II. 106
Havingplungedinto thewater(they)
causeto rub eachother'sbody:
aāhamahhiassasarīrena sarīram
ghamsanti,Cy.1200: vi 3-Grh +va,
meta,absol.; Kr + ape +nti, caus,
pres. 3”. pl.
Vigatamalamaccherenacetasa
agaram ajjhavasati, muttacāgo
payatapani vossagaratoyacayogo
danasamvibhagarato~A, I. 150; Tv,
266,f.
With a mind free from the rustof
Stinginess,he dwells at homeasa
person who is generous,with clean
hands,delightedin givig away,
suitableto ask for anddelightedin
sharing; vi +Gam+la,pp.;adhi
a+ Vas+a+ ti pres. 3. sg.
agaram iS governedby theprefix
adhi; Muc +ta,PP.+ cago;pa+
Yam + ta, PP.* pani + 7,der: yi 4
9 (ava) +Srj +ta,Pp. +Ram +ta,
Vighāsādānan
Vighase Vijjantarikaya
DP.: vāca t Yuj +a, der: dana+
Sam+vi +Bhaj+a,der.+yaips over; Da +e +hi, imper.2”. sg. root cause (of the matter); Gam +tva,
Ram +ta,pp. absol.
Vighasesamvaddho—D. III. 24
Vigatalomahamsovivekāvatto Grown up on theleftover food;sam + Vicetosminamaham—
S. V. 447
Vrdh +ta,pp.
antaragharenisinno
—M. II, 138 AmI outof mind!;vi +ceto+asmi;
Withoutbeingscared
andimmersedin nama+aham;namais usedherein
Vicakkhukammiayaagato—S. I. 118
solitude,hehasbeensitting
inside
the thesenseofbewilderment
He hascomefor makingyou blind(to
house;vi +Gam+ta,pp.;loma (Skt
roma)Hrs +a: harsa>hassa >hasa deceiveyou) Viceyyadeti—A. IV. 244
Givesawayaftercareful
>hamsa,der.;vi +Vie+a,der:@+
Vrt +ta, Pp.
Vicayasodesito..dhammo—5. III. consideration;vi + Ci +ya, absol.;
96 DaTENA
+e+Itiyy;ti, pres.3.
TEETETERAsg.
The Dhammahasbeenekplained
VigarahiBuddhoBhagavā
—Vin.I,
selectively;āānenaparicchinditvā, Viceyyaviceyyaatthepanayati
45; III. 20
Cy.Il. 306; vi + Ci t a t so,adv.; nayena—D. Il. 21
The Buddha,theBlessedOne,
Drs +e +i +ta, pp. (He) understands,aftercareful
rebuked;
vi +Garh+a +i,pst.3%
consideration,themattersin
Sg.
———..——- Vicikiccha pariyutthitena cetasa- accordancewith thelaw:pandayatiti
S. V. 123 Janati passati nayati va pavattetiti
Viggahikakathamanuyutta—D. 1.8
With themindarousedby sceptical attho,Cy. 454; vi + Ci +ya, absol.;
Engagedinacontentious
talk;vi+
doubt panayati,( pa +Jia +ya + ti?) pres.
Grh +ika,der.+katha;anu+Mi
34.sg.
la, pp. Vieitrāni paīihapatibhānāni
sotukāmo—D. II. 352 Vijatetvava santharitabbam—Vin.
Viggāhikāya kathayasati—A.IV. Desiringto listento thewonderful II. 232
87 ideascomingto (his) mindin dealing Or havingcausedto dis-entangle,
it
When thereis a contentious
talk;/oe. with questions;sotum,inf. +kāmo shouldbespread;vi +Jat +e +tva,
abs. caus,absol.;sam +Str +a+ i+
Vicināhi āvusoti vattabbo—Vin. IV. tabba,fut.pp.
Vighātamāpaiianti—Vin.I. 185 163
Meetwithdisaster;
ā --Padya ' “Investigate,brother”,heshouldbe Vijitasamgamotamevasamgama-
nti,pres.3".pl. told; vi +Ci +nd +hi, imper.2”. sg.; sīsamaiihāvasati—A. I. 106
Vae +tabba,fut. pp. Havingwonthebattlehedwellsatthe
Vighāsādānam
gulamdatvā
- Vin.I. samebattlefront;vi +Ji + ta,pp. +
225 Vicinitvā acikkha —Vin. IV. 226 samgamo;adhi +@+ Vas +a + ti,
Having
givenmolasses
tothose
who Make a search and inform (me); vi + pres. 3”. sg.; samgāmasīsam is
eatwhat is leftover;vit Ghas+4, Ci +nd +i +tva,absol.;@+Khya, governedby theprefix adhi
der. +ada; Dé +tva,absol. intens.imper.2". sg.
Viiiantarikāya rūpāni passeyya—A.
Vighāsādānam
pūvam
dehi-Vin. Vieinitvā mūlāmūlam gantvā—Vin. I. 124
IV. 91 1.357 Would see visual objects through the
Give caketo thosewhoeatwhatIsleft Havinginvestigated
andgoneintothe lightof a lightning:vijju +antarika
811
 Vijjante
Vijjante te ca dhamma mayi —M. III.
164
Thosethingsareto be found in me;
Vid +ya +nte,pass.pres.mid,3”.pl.
EI Vijjamaneparakkame—A, III. 213
When thereis capabilityto override
others;Joc. absl.; para + kama(from
if
Kram)
i Vijja uppatatamsettha—S. I. 42
Wisdomis thebestofall thingsthat
i V. 46
arecomingup; u(t) + Pat +a+ nta,
pr.p.
hou Vijjacaranasampannoso settho
devamanuse—M. I. 358 E
He,whohasknowledge
andconduct
a combinedtogether,is supreme
amonggodsandmen;wiiā + carana
* sam + Pad + ta,pp.; deva + ;
manus+ a, der.
: Vijjaya caranena—A. V. 327
With knowledgeandconduct
Vijjavimuttiphalasacchikiriyaya
Samvattanti—S. V. 95
F +ssatha,cond,3. sg.;samTu
(They) leadto ekperiencewisdom,
; liberation
andfruits:vijja +vimutti+
+ nti, pres, 37%pl.
Viiihityā Sīsamchinditvā sūle
patipātiyā thapesi—Vin. IV. 124
Havingshotat (thecrows),cut (their)
heads,hecausedto fix themin a row
t
ape +§ +i, caus.pst, 374Sg.
7, > " 2 ;
Vinfiatti
/inne i ca
e: manussanam
ā amanāpā-
Vinnanasotam Vitakkabahulo
Vin. I. 312
Vinihanasotampajanati ubhayato Vinfitinamgarayho—M. I. 403
Beggingis unpleasant
tothepeople:
vj
abbocchinnam,idhaloke patitthitah Censurableby theintelligents;Garh +
+Jid +ape * ti, caus,der.
'a paraloke patitthitaīica—D. III.
105
Viniiattimupadayavuccati
- Vin, He understands thestreamof
Viiitinam pāsamso—M. I. 404
III. 246 conciousnesswhich is notcut off
Commendable by theintelligents;pa
lt is so called,concerningintimation; from bothsidesandestablishedin this
+Sams+ya.fut. pp.; gen.for instr.
upa +@+Da +ya,absol.;Vae
+ya
worldandin theotherworld:a + vi
+i, pass.pres,3".sg. (bi) +o (ava) t Chid + ta,pp.; pati + Viīiiū patibalo—Vin. IV.214
Stha +i +ta,pp. Intelligentandcompetent
Vinfianakasinamekosamjanati—A,
Vinnhanassa nirodhena ... vimokkho Vinhi puriso asathoamayavi
Oneidentifies
thedevice
of hoti cetaso—A. I. 236 uiuiātiko —D. II. 55
consciousness:kasinugghatimakase With thecessationof consciousness A person,intelligent,notcrafty,not
pavattavinianam,
Cy.V.20;vi+Jia
thereis liberationof mind;ni + deceptivebutstraightforward; a+
+ ana, der; sam +Jan +na+ ti, Rudh +a, der.; vi +mokkha maya+avi, der.; uju +jati +ka, der.
Pres 3 Se (Skt.moksa)
Vinna puriso iti patisamcikkhati -
Vinfianaiica
hiAnanda
mātu- Vinnata ca vinnapetaca —A. IV. M. I. 403
kucchimnaokkamissatha,
apinu 196;Vin. I]. 201 An intelligentpersonreflectsthus;
kho nāmarūpammātu- A knower and the one who makes pati + sam + Khya+ti, intens.pres.
kuechismimsamuceissatha?
—D.
II. others know; vi + Jia + tu, der.; vi + 3”. sg.
63 Jia +Gpe+ tu, caus.der.
Vinh puriso na cirassevapanna-
Wouldtherebethegrowth
ofname
Vinnate viifatavadita —A. IV. 307 yatthamāiāneyya—M. I. 480
andform in mother'swomb,hadthere
beennodescent
ofconsciousness
into Maintainingwhathasbeenknownas An intelligentpersonwouldauickly
known;vi +Jia +ta,pp. understand themeaning(of it) by
mother’swomb?; o (ava)+Kram+i
wisdom;nacirasseva,indel.; paāāāya
(I) "
Viānāpetvābhuhianti—Vin. I. 44 t attham; ā t Jan + na + eyya, opt.
Ci +ssatha,cond.3". sg.apiandmi,
Havingbegged(they)eat;vi +Jna@+ je
. SZ.
interr. p.
dpe +tvd,caus.absol.;Bhu(fi)j +a+
nti,pres, 3”. pl. Vinnū manussa—A. V. 167
Viāiānamanidassanam
anantam
Intelligentpeople;vi +Jia t ā,der.
sabbatopabham—D.I. 223
Vininitvava vinhapetvava —Vin. IV.
Consciousnessis undemonstrable,
infiniteandradiantin everyaspect;
@ . 264
Havingaskedfor or havingcausedto
Viānū sabrahmacārī—A. V. 169
Intelligentco-celibates
+ anta
ask for; vi +Jfid +i +tvd,absol.
Vitakkabahulo no dhammavihārī-
Viāāānam
ettha
sitam
ettha
pali- Vinnhutampapuni —Vin. I. 269 A. II. 87
baddham—D.I. 76;M. II. 17 He reachedtheageof intelligence The onewho hasmorethoughts,not
Consciousness
isdormant
andbound (grew up); vi +Jd +ti + td, der.; pa therightwayofliving; dhamma+vi +
here;Si or Sri +ta,pp.;pati>
Badh +Ap +(u)nd+i,pst.3. sg. Hr +a +i, der.
+ fa, pp.

813
812
 Vitakkavieārānam
Vitakkavieārānam vūpasamā
alihattam sampasādanamcetaso
akodibhāvamavitakkamavicāram
samādhiiam pītisukham dutiyai-
37
Due to thesubsidingof reasoningand
which is free from reasoningand
investigation,endowedwithioy and
easeborn of the concentrationof
mind; vi + takka; vi + Car +a, der;
vi + upa +Sam + a. der.; adhi +
atta; eka + 0 (ava) +Dha = ekodhi,
thisform is sometimestransformed
into ekodi or ekoti: dutiya +jhana:
upa +sam + Pad +ya, absol.
-.
Vitakkavicarapi vūpasamanti—A, I.
43
Thoughts
andinvestigation
subside
(00; vitakka +vicara + api; vi + upa
+Sam +a+ nti.Pres. 3”. pl.
Vitakkavippharasaddamsutvā —D.
III. 104;A.I.171
Havingheardthepervadingsoundof
thoughts;vitakkavippharavasena
uppannamvippalapantanam
Sultapamatiadinamsaddamsulvā, A.
Cy.II. 269;vi
+Sphur or Sphar +a,
der.; Sru F Ivā, absol.
Vitakkasamkhārasapthānam
—M. I.
121
Stoppingof thoughtformation;
vitakka +wamkhāra+santhāna
Vitakkasahagatā saāhlāmanasikārā
samudācaranti—s. 11.273
Vitthāritā Vidhāsamatikkantam
Identificationandattention(memory)
accompaniedbydiscursive
thoughts +Stya +ya +nti,pres. 3”. pl. gacchanti—M. III. 25, 124;A. II. 45;
begintoplayinthemind; IV. 32-3
samudācarantīti
Pavattanti,
Cy,I Vitthāritā katabba—Vin. III. 33 Beingawaretheyarise,beingaware
233; Sam + u(t) +@+ Car+@ +nti Shouldbeexplainedin detail;vi +Str theysustainandbeingawaretheygo to
pres.3”,pl. te ti 1 ta, caus.pp.; Kr +tabba, theend;viditāpākatāhutvā
uppajjanti...titthanti...nirujjhanti,
Vitakkāyacittamnamati—M.
II, Cy.IV. 88; Vid + i + ta,pp.; u(t) +
114 Vittharena atthamvibhajeyya—S. Pad +ya + nti,pres.3“. pl.; upa +
Mindbendstowardsthinking;
Nam+a IV. 93 Stha +a +nti,pres, 3. pl.; abhi +
Wouldanalysethemeaningin detail;wi
+tt,pres.3”.sg. attham+gacchanti
+Bhaj +eyya,opt.3™.sg.
Videssohoti atiyacanaya—Vin. III.
Vitakketvā vicāretvāvacam
Vitthārena paresamvāceti—A. IHI. 147
bhindati—S. IV. 293
362 Onebecomesanobjectof hateby
Havingmadereflection and
Teachesothers in detail; Vac + e + fi, askingfor too much;vi +dvis +ya,
investigation
onebreaks intowords
caus.pres. 3”. sg. Jit. pp.
(speaks);vitakka+e +tva,denom.
absol.; vi + Car +e +tv, caus.
Vittharena patimokkham uddisitum Videhesuyena Bhagavatena
absol.; Bhi(n)d +a +ti,pres,3 sg.
—Vin. I. 112 cārikam pakkāmi —M. II. 134-5
To recitePatimokkhain detail;u(t) + WheretheBlessedOne wasin the
Vitakko papaficasannasamkha-
Drs +i +tum,inf: kingdomof Videhatherehetoured
nidāno—
D. II. 277
Reasoning
is based
onproliferation
of KI Vittharenapi dhammamdeseyyam- Viddhe vigatavalāhakedeve—D. II.
concepts;papaāca t sahihāt A. I. 133 183
samkhā + niddna I wouldpreachtheDhammain detail Whentherainycloudsweredriven
too; Drs+ e + eyyamopt. 1".sg. out,i.e. whenthesky becameclear;
Vitacchitamgaram
visibbeti—
Vin. loc. absol.; Vvadh+ta,pp.
IV. 116
Warmshimselfupwithraked
out 241;A. III. 22, 87,362 I Viddho samano codito sarathina -
embers;vi +taccha+e +i+ ta, Rehearsesin detail;sa +ajjhaya;Kr A. TV. 190
denom.pp. +o +ti, pres. 3™.sg.
Vyadh+ta,pp.; Cud +e +i + ta,
Vitacchentivibhāienti
—Vin.III. Vitthārena (na) sutam hoti —Vin. caus.pp.
105 IV. 145
ngā
(They)tearit piecebypiece,
cause
fo Not heardin detail;vi +Str +a, der.; Viddho savisenasoka sallena—A.
partake
itpiecebypiece;
vi+taccha Sru +ta, pp. IHI.54
+e +nti,denom.
pres.3”.pli vit Shotatby poisonedarrowof sorrow;
Bhaj +e + nti, caus.pres.3”.pl. Vitthārena svāgatāni—A. IV. 279 Vyadh+ta,pp.
Studied extensively; sw +dgatani
i
Vidhāsamatikkantamsantam
Viditā uppaiianti, viditā suvimuttammānasam —A. IV. 53
upatthahanti,viditā abbhattham The mind,whichhastranscended
 Vidhūtikam
Vinaye Vineyya
conceit,is sereneandfully
training;upa 3.e (from1)+tipres.
liberated;vidha +sam +ati + ard (questions)aboutSuttantaor Vin. Il. 132
J, Oe
Kram +ta,pp.; Sam +ta,pp.; su Abhidhamma;Kr +dpe +tvd, caus. To usethebow!withouta case;pari +
+ vi + Muc +ta,pp.; mana(s)+ absol.; Prch
; +ya
: +ti, I pres.3. sg.
: Hr +i +tum,inf.
Vinayamvācetum
- Vin, II, 261
a, der.
FoteachVinaya(discipline);
Vac+e+
Vinaye cheko hoti asamhiro—Vin. Vinicchayakathayavattamanaya-
tum,caus. inf.
Vidhūtikam karonti —Vin. II. 9 II. 96 Vin. IV. 152-3
(They) makea wreath Skilled in Vinayaandfirm(cannotbe Whenthematteris beingdecided;/oc
Vinayamviniechissanti—Vin,II,45;
distracted);a +sam +Hr +ya: harya absl.vi +nicchaya+ katha; Vrt +a
III. 159 > hara (hariya)> hira,fut. pp.; ep. +mana, pr.p.
Vidhiipanaiica talavantaiica Adaya -
(They)will decideupon
disciplinary pātihīra andpātihāriya
Vin. II. 130
matters Vinicchayamna denti—Vin. II. 263
Havingtakena fananda palmleaf
whisk; @+ Da +ya, absol. Vinaye thito hoti asamhīro—A. IV. Do notgivea decision;Da +e +nti,
Vinayamvivannema—Vin,IV,143 141 pres. 3™.pl.
Letuscondemndiscipline;
vivanna+ Hassetin disciplineandcannotbe
Vidhūpanena pahāram adāsi —Vin. -
e +ma,denom.pres. 1".pl. distracted Vinidhaya ditthim vinidhaya
IV. 263
khantimvinidhaya rucim vinidhaya
Gavea blow with thefan:yi +Dhii +
Vinayam vissajjetum—Vin.I. 113 Vinaye pakataīīiuno bhavissanti- bhavamanusaveti—Vin. II. 205; III.
ape + ana, caus. der.7a+ Da + a +5
To answerthequestions
pertaining
to Vin. IV. 143 93
+ i, doublepst. 3. sg.
discipline;vi +Srj +ya +e +tum, They will becomeekpertsin discipline Withoutputtingasidethewrongview,
caus. inf, agreement with it, affectionwith it and
Vinayakatham katheti —Vin. II. 168;
Vinā āyogenana phāsuhoti—Vin. beingwith it, makesthelegal
IV. 142
Vinayasandosadhammasandoso
—A. II. 135 pronouncement; vi +ni +Dha +ya,
Gives a talk on discipline;katha + e +
II. 106 It is notconvenient(for him) absol.,cp. nidhāyadandambhūtesu,
ti, denom.pres. 3". Sg.
Fromcorruptdiscipline
comes without a bandage; vind, indcl. used Dh.405;anu + Sru +e + ti, caus,
corruptDhamma with instr. pres. 3”. SQ.
Vinayadharapaficamenaganena-
Vin. I. 197 Vinipatamgaccheyya—S. V. 376
Vinayatisare
dukkatam
—
Vin.Il. Vina dandenaahinditum—Vin. II.
ith a
Wi 2
groupof"five
five includinga
inn )
Vinaya
i
132 Could go to purgatory;vi +ni +Pat +
306
master To walk withoutthestick;@+Hind + a, der.;gaccha+ eyya,opt. 3™.sg.
Wrong
doing
ingoing
beyond
the
limit
of Vinaya; vinaya+ati +Sr +a,det; i +tum,inf.
Vinayadharam paripucchami —Vin. Vinipātāyasamvattati—M. III. 117
du +Kr +ta,pp.
IV. 141 Vina santhatana phasu—Vin. IIL. Leadsto thestateof misery;sam +
I consulta Vinayamaster 228 Vrt +a +ti, pres.3”. Sg:
Vinayāyasikkhe—S.I. 117
It is inconvenientwithouta spread
Shouldtrain(yourself)
todrive
aways —-
Vinayapariyattiya vannam bhasati - Vinivethetvāvinimocetvāyena-
Vin. IV. 142
vi+Ni +a,der;Sak+a+e,desid
Vina sappina arogamkatum —Vin. kāmampakkamati—A. II. 92
opt. 3". sg.
Praisesthelearningof Vinayaby I. 276 Causingto disentangle
andfree
heart;vinaya4 pari +Ap 'ti, der.‘ To curewithout(using)ghee;Kr + himself,hegoesoff ashe likes; vi 3
Bhās +a +ti. pres. 3”. sq.
Vinayeokāsamkārāpetvā
tum:kar+ tum>kat +tum>ka + ni +Vist +e +tva,caus.absol.;vi +

I
suttantam
vāabhidhammam
vā ni + Muc +e +tva,caus.absol.
tum,inf.
Vinayam na upeti—A. II. 112 pucchati —Vin. IV. 344
Does not come to the standard
Havingmadehimpermit
(toask
Vinasikkayapattampariharitum- Vineyyamaccheramalam—A. IV.
sheasks
questions)concerningVinaya, 245
817
 Vineyya
Having removedtherustofstinginess
Vineyya hadayedaram —Vin. II. 156
Havingremovedpain in theheart:
vi +Ni +ya, absol.; dara is
sometimesused as daratha: similar
expressions,
sama-samatha,
dama-damatha
Vipaccatayavoharo —Vin. IT. 88
Using a harshlanguagefor challenging
others;vi + Vac +ya + td, der.;
cp. vipaceti in the context of
ujjhayati khiyati: cittadukkhattham
voharo, pharusavacanantiattho
Cy. 1104
Vipajjamanam appaphalamhoti— M.
II. 197
Thatwhich goeswrong bringsabouta
littlebenefit
Viparināmaīihathābhāvā uppaiianti
sokaparidevadukkha-
domanassupāyāsā
—
D. I. 36;5. III. 3
Becauseof thechangeandinconstancv
therearisesorrow. lamentation,
affliction, displeasureandunrest;
viparināma 3 aāhathābhāva;u(t)
Pad +ya +nti, pres. 3™.pl.;
domanassa:du + mana(s) + ya, der.
" upāyāsā: upa +āyāsa I
Viparītato dahanti—D. IHI. 34
They considerin a wrongway ; Dha +
a * nti, pres. 3. pl.
Viparitasafifiampaccalattha—M. I.
507
Theygota wrong impression:yi 4
Pari +1+ ta,PP. pati +a+ Labh 4
ttha,pst. mid. 3r4sg.
Vippatisaro
Vipallāsampisattāpatilabheyyum-
Vippatisāro pativinetabbo
—D. II. The Blessed One maintains the
Vin. II. 7
135 methodofanalysis. notthedirect
The living beingswouldgeteven
Remorseshouldbe removed;pati + method
confusion;pati +Labh+evyum, opt.
vi +Ni +a +tabba,fut.pp.
anga
Vibhaiia vyākaranīyopaīiho
Vippasannanikho te avuso ekamsenavyakato—M. III. 208
Vipassanāpubbamgamam
samathan
indriyāni, parisuddho chavivanno The questionto beexplainedby an
bhāveti—A. II. 157 pariyodato—Vin. I. 40 analysis,wasexplainedby a direct
(He) cultivatesquietudepreceded Friend,your facultiesareverybright,
answer;vi +Bhaj +ya, absol.;vi +a
byinsight;Bhi +e +ti,caus.
pres. yourcomplexionis cleanandclear;vi +Kr +aniya,fut.pp.;vi +@+Kr +
2rd
eSE +pa +Sad + ta,pp.; pari +Sudh+ fa, pp.
la, pp.; pari + odata;parisuddha
Vipassana
bhavitapana bhaviyati
- andpariyodata occur together Vimuttacitto viharati —A. III. 152
A. IL.61 He abideswith a liberated mind: vi +
Due to thecultivationofinsight, Vippasannenacetasā—
S. I. 57 Muc +ta,pp. +citta
wisdom is cultivated;Bha+e+pat Witha clearmind
ti, caus.pass.pres.3”. sg, Vimuttasmimvimuttamiti āhānam
Vibbhantassaparivāso na rūhati- hoti, khīnā iāti vusitam brahma-
Vipassissa
namatthu
-D. II. 195 Vin.II. 60 cariyam katamkaranīyam nāparam
I bowdowntotheBuddha,
Vipassī; The probationaryperiodis notvalid itthattāyātipaiānāti —M. I. 38
namo +atthu;namo,indel.usedwith fora personwho hasturnedback Whenliberated,therearisesa
dat.;As +tu,imper.
3. sg. (disrobed);vi + Bhram? +ta,pp.; knowledgethatmindis liberated,
Ruh +a + ti, pres.3. sg. hefully understands thatbirthis
Vippakate āgacchati—Vin. IHI.155 over,livedis thehighestwayof life,
Vibhaiatāyasmāagarukaritvā—M.
When unfinished(he)comes;vi+pa donewhatwasto bedone,thereis
+Kr +ta,pp. I. 111;III. 195;S. IV. 95;A.227 nothingmoreto bedonefor this
Venerable,pleaseexplain(this) purpose;vi + Muc +ta,pp.; Ksi +ta
without
makingitaheavy
burden;
vi + pp.; Vas+i +ta,pp.; Kr +ta,pp.;
Vippatisaripajjhayi—Vin.III. 19
Bhaj +a+ tu, imper.3. sg. + Kr +aniya,fut.pp.; na + aparam;
Being remorsefulhe fell intoa
āyasmā; a d garu + karitva, absol. ittha +tta,der.;pa +Jan +na + ti,
pensivemood;vi +pati+Smr+t
pres. 3”. sg
der; pa +jha (Dhyai)+(y)+4,
pst
Vibhaiiavādoahametthamānava,
3”, sg.
nāhametthaekamsavādo—M. II.
197 339
Vippatisāroupadahātabbo
- Vin. Il.
Youngman,I follow theanalytical All Dnammashave liberation as the
250
methodon this matter,not thedirect core
Remorse
shouldbecreated;
upat
method; vibhajja: vi +Bhaj +ya,
Dha +a+tabba,fut. pp.
absol.+vada;na +aham +ettha; Vimuttisukhapatisamvedi— S. I.
eka +amsa +vada 196;Vin. L. 1-3
Vippatisāro
nakaranīyo—D.
I.138 Experiencingthehappinessof
(You)should
notberemorseful;
vi* Vibhajjavado Bhagava,na so liberation;vimutti+sukha +pati +
pati +Smr +a, der.;Kr +anīya,
fit sam + vedi: Vid +e + i, caus. der.
Bhagavāekamsavādo—A. V. 190
pp.
819
 Vimutto
Vimutto upadhisamkhaye—A. II, 24
Released
attheekhaustion
of
defilements;
upadhisamkhayasamkhātenibbāne;
Cy. IIL, 34; vi +Muc +ta,Pp.
Virajam vitamalamdhamma-
cakkhum udapadi: yam kifici
samudayadhammamsabbamtam
nirodhadhammanti. —M. I. 501;
IIT. 280;S. V.423;Vin. L. 11
TheDhamma- eye,whichis freefrom
dustandrust,arose,viz. whateveris of
thenature
oforigination,all thatis of
thenatureofcessation : vi 4 raja; vi
+1 + ta,pp.+ mala; u(t) +a +Pad +
i, pst.34.sg.
Virajjhamana tasathāvaresu—S. IV.
117
Doing harm to thefrails andthe
firms; vi +Radh +ya+ māna,
pass. pr.p.
Virato methunādhammā- S. I. 60
Refrainedfrom sexualintercourse;
vi +Ram +ta,pp.; mithuna + a,
der.
Virattacitto vedeti, taīica nāiihosa
titthati—S. IV. 75
The onewho hasa detachedmind,
experiencesandstayswithoutclinging
to it; Vi + Raj +ta,bp.* citta; Vid +e
T ti, Caus,pres, 37- $2.; na +adhi +o
S@ +ya, absol.
Seem to have no interest
In menow; viratta +rupa +idani +
ime
-
Viriyasamatam Vivadanti
Viramathāyasmanto mama vacaniya
realised;ā +Rabh +a +ti, pres.3”. Virecanampatum—Vin. 1.206,279
—Minor. 178
sg.; a+pa +Ap +ta,pp.; an +adhi To drinka purgative;Pa +tum,inf.
Pleaserefrain,venerables,
from
+ Gam + ta,pp.; a+ sa +acchi+Kr
givingadvicetome;vi+Ram +at
+fa,pp. Vilapam vilapitammafine—M. I.
tha,imper.2". pl.
234
Viriyasamatamadhitthaha—A. HI. It isjust like a brabblerepeated;vi +
Virāgāya dhammedesite—Vin,
Ill,
375; Vin. I. 183 Lap + i +ta,pp.
19
Makethestrivingeven(withother
WhentheDhamma
hasbeen
explained
faculties);sama+ ta, der.;adhi + Vilikhitamattenapi—Vin. III. 245
for detachment
: Drs +e+it+ta,
Stha +a, imper. 2". sg. Evenwitha littlecrack;vi + Likh + i
caus.pp.
+ fa, pp + mattena + api
Viriyasambojjhamgo—A. V. 211
Virago tesamaggamakkhāyati—A. Vilutto vilumpati —5. I. 85
Theenlightenmentfactorofstriving;
II. 35 sam +bodhi +amgo (He,)beingplundered, breaksdown;
Detachment
issaidtobethehighest vilumpakovilumpissati,Cv. I. 155; vi
amongthem;vi +Raj+a,der; Viriyassa na santhanambhavissati- t Lup - ta,pp.: vi t Lu(mip Ta' ti,
aggo+a +Khya+ya +fi,pass. A. I. 50; IV. 190 pres.3. sg.
pres. 3”. sg. Therewill be no haltof ekertion
Vilumpitva vilumpitva khadanti -
Virago vimuttiianadassanattho
- Viriyārambhe tibbacchando—A. IV. A. HL.76
A. V. 313 15 Havingplundered continuouslythey
Detachmentis for knowledge and Theonewho hasa strongwill to start eat;vi +Lu(m)p+ i + tva,absol.
vision of liberation;vimnutti
+nana + effort; viriya +ārambha;tibba +
dassana + attha chanda Vivatako salakagaho—Vin. H. 99
Openvoting;vi + Vr + ta,pp. +ka,
Virādhanā hoti no ārādhanā—A.
V. Viriyena dukkham acceti—5. I. 214 der.; Grh + a, der
211 OnesurpassesDukkhaby effort;ati 3
There is failure,no success;
vi+Radh e (from I) +ti, pres. 3”. sg. Vivatenacetasāapariyonaddhena-
+ ana, der. S. V.263; A. II. 45; IV. 86
Viriyena (tam abadham)patip- Withanopenandunenveloped mind;vi
+Vr +ta,pp.; a+ pari t o + Nah+
Viritto nahayissati
—Vin.I. 279 panāmetvā— D. II. 99
Purged,hewill takebath;vi+Rie* Havingcausedto turnbackthat ta,pp.
ta,pp.; Snā +(y) +i +ssati,meta. sicknesswith effort;pati +pa +Nam
Vivattamāneloke— D. I. 17
fut. 34. sg. t e +tva, caus, absol.
Whentheworld is evolvingor
expanding;vi +Vrt +a +mana,pr.p
Viriyam ārabhati, appattassa Virūparūpena Bhagavato
pattiyaanadhigatassa
adhigamaya sammukhībhāvam āgaceheyya —D.
IHI. 14 Vivadantidhammotiva adhammoti
asacchikatassa
sacehikiriyāya
—D:
He would come in a different form to va vinayotiva avinayotivā —M. II.
III. 255; A. I. 243
see the the Blessed One; sam + 247
Makesaneffortto reachwhathasnot
mukha +bhava; a + gace ha + eyva, (They)disputeon theissueth
yet reached,attainwhathasnot
yet
opt. 3". sa the doctrine or īt IS not the doctrine ,
attained
andrealise
whathasnotyet
 Vivari
it is thedisciplineor it is notthe
discipline;vi + Vad +aa nti, pres.
ora
TAI
Vivari Bhagavā dvāram
- D.
The BlessedOne openedthedoor: yj
+ Vr+a+i: pst. 3. sg.
Vivareyya kummaggam—M. I, 117
He would openthepathto danger;vi +
Vr + eyya, opt. 3%.sg.>ku + magga
Vivādamūlassapahānāyavāyam-
eyyātha—M. II. 246
Should striveto driy€ out theroot of
disputes;vi + Vad+ a, der; vi+ a+
Yam +eyyatha,opt. 24. pl.
Vivadam janeyyum ajjhajive va
adhipatimokkhe ya —M. II. 245
They would createa disputeon higher
living andhighermorality;ajjhdjiveri
ajtvaheryāiīvakāranā, Cy. IV, 38:
Parivāre paāhattāni
chasikkhāpadānithapetva sesani
sabbasikkhāpadāniadhi-
Pātimokkhamnāma, Cy. IV. 38; Jan +
eyyum,opt. 3. pl.: adhi 4 āiīva
Vivādena pannayissama—Vin. I.
349
Wewill beknownbythedispute;
pa d
ING +ya +j4 ssadma,
pass.fut,[* pl
Viviccathayye~Vin. IV, 239
Venerable,
Bcl yourselfawav:
viviccathatiying hotha, Cy. 915;
Viviccatha3 ayye; vi + Vie t ya +
tha, imper,2ndpl. ) Vividhā
Vividhi Vivekajena Visam
-
vivekaiampitisukham pathamai-
Vivekajenapitisukhenaapphutam- Visamagatāyaparisāyasamappatto
ihānamupasampajja viharati-D,
|
D. 1.73 viharati —A. III. 285;V. 239
37; M. ITI.36;A. II. 128
Unpervaded byioy andease, Amongthelawlesspeopleheabides
Having detachedfromSense
desires
I. 89 bornof detachment; vi + Vic +a, calm;sama+pa +Ap+ ta,pp.
andunwholesomethings,heenters
der. +ja; a +Spur or Sphar +
intoandabidesinthe
firstihāna
whia
ta, pp. Visamanissitohoti —A. I. 153
hasreasoning
andinvestigation,
joyand
Resortedto dangerousplaces;vi +
easebornof aloofness:viveka
+ja; Vivekaninnam cittam hoti viveka-
sama;ni + Sri +ta,pp.
piti + sukha;pathama+Shana; uga ponamvivekapabbharam —S. IV.
t sam +Pad +ya, absol.;vi+Hp+ 295;A. IV. 224
Visamaparihāraiāābādhā—A. V.
a+ ti, pres. 3. sg. The mindis bent,proneandinclined 110
towardsdetachment;viveka+ninna: Ailmentscausedby carelessness
Vivittam katvapi databbam
—Vin.| Nam +ta,pp.?
356 Visamamcandimasuriyā
(Lodging) shouldbegiveneven Vivekanissitam virāganissitam parivattanti—A. I]. 74-5
makingit separate:
Da +tabba,
fut nirodhanissitam vossagga- The sunandthemoondo nottakethe
Pp. parināmim —S. I. 88; V.2 propercourse;pari +Vrt +a +nti,
Resortedto detachment,dispassion, pres. 3. pl.
Vivittamsenāsanam
bhaiati, cessationandturningintototal
araūhiamrukkhamālam
pabbatam relinquishment; ni + Sri + ta, PP. ; Visamekathinampattharanti—Vin.
kandaram giriguhamsusānam vi +Raj + a, der; ni +Rudh +a, Il. 116
vanapatthamabbhokāsam der.; vi + 0 (ava) +Srj +ta,pp.: (They)spreadKathinaon uneven
palālapuāiam —D.I. 71;M.IIL3 pari +Nam +a+ t, der. ground;pa +Str + a + nti,pres.3”.
Resortstoa secludedresidence: pl.
a forest,a footofa tree,a rock,
a Vivekamanubrūhayamāno—M. III.
valley,a rock-cave,a cemetery,a 116 Visamketenagacchanti—Vin. IV.
forestiungle,a heapofstraw; Developingdetachment;
anu+Brh + 132
kandaram:kamvuccati udakam, aya +mana, caus. pr.p. Theygochangingthetimeandtheday;
tenadaritam,Cy.209;Bhaj+a* kālavisamketenadivasavisamketena;
Visakkiyenadūtena—
Vin. IHI. 74 Cy. 868
tt,pres.3™.sg.;abhi+okasam;
palāla +puiija By anablemessenger;
vi +Sak +ya
Visamyuttamsakkayena—D. III.
Visajja pallalani —Vin. I. 230 240
Vividhākammakaranā
karīyanti-
Detachedfromtheself; vi +sam +
M. 1.87; IHI. 186
absol. Vui + ta, pp.
Various
punishments
areinflicted,
Ay
+iva +nti,pass.pres.3”.pl.
Visaiiiutto (vedanam)vediyati—
S. Visamyogayadhammedesite—Vin.
11.82;III. 126 III. 19
pānā
samghātam
āpaiiawti Withoutbeingattached,he WhentheDhammahasbeenexplained
—D. I. 141;A. I. 42
experiencesthefeeling;vi +sam + for detachment
Variouslivingbeings
cometobe Ä Yuj +ta,pp.; Vid +aya +ti, caus.
slaughtered;
sam'- Ghan
1 Ia,Bay
8 pres. 2
?
SZ. Visam va khadeyyum,satthamva
+Pad +ya +nti,pres.3”.pl.
 Visamvadanapurekkharassa
ahareyyum, ubbandhitva va kalam
kareyyum,papatevapapateyyum
- Beingconfident
D. II. 330
(They) would eatpoison,cut their
throat,hangthemselves
anddieor fall
into the precipice;Khdd + eyyum,
opt. 3”. pl.; a+ Hr +eyvum,opt. 3°.
¥ eyyum,opt. 3. pl.; pa +Pat 4
evyum,opt. 3". pl.
Visamvadanapurekkharassavaca
Vissattho Vissaritva Viharapacchayaya
Visūkadassanamanuyuttā
-D.1.6
hewentintosleep;o mindful,heabides,abandoninggreed
Engagedinshows;visiika+dassanam
(ava) +Kram +i, pst. 3”. sg. andaversionin theworld;@+ Tap+7,
+anu +Yuj +ta,pp.
der.;sam +pa +Jan +na +a, der.;
Vissaritva agamasi—Vin. IV. 161 Sati +mantu,der.; vi +Nt +ya,
Visena paribhavetva—D. II, 348
Havingforgottenhewentaway;vi + absol.;abhi +jha (fromDhyai);du +
Having treatedwithPoison;
pari+
Smr +a + i +tva,absol.;a +Gam+ mana(s)+ya, der.
Bhi +e +tva,caus.absol,
a+s +i, doublepst.3”.sg.
Vihara yathasukham—M. III. 237
Visena samsattho—
M. I. 316;S,Ii,
Vissaro me bhavissati—Vin. IV. Abide atease;vihara,imper.2". sg.;
110 212,229 yathāsukham,adv.
Mixed with poison;sam+Sri' Ia, I wouldhaveto scream;viriipome
Pp.

gira byappatho vacibhedo vacasika saro bhavissati, vippakārasaddo Viharemuaiiunho aggisālamhi-

bhavissati,Cy. 901; vi + sara Vin. I. 25
viinatti anariyavohara —Vin. IV. 2
Visesakamkaronti —Vin. II. 267 (Skt.svara) May westaytonightin thefire-hall;vi
The word, utterance,way ofspeaking,
Decorate
(their)cheeks; +Hr +e +mu(Skt.mah>mo >mu),
speech,hintingby words, ignoble
gandappadesevicitrasanthanam Vissaro me bhavissati —Vin. IV. 339 opt. 1".pl.; ajja +junho(tonight);
usageof theone who intentsupon
visesakam
karonti,Cy.1293 I will forget;vi + Smr +a, der. Cy. takesaggisālamhias
contradicting;vi +sam + Vad+ ana,
aggisaranamhi,V. 971
der. +pure (Skt.puras) +Kr +a,
Visesabhagiya
sania—A, II. 167 Vissasamganhanti—Vin. III. 197
der.
The senseof distinction; bhdga+iva, Takeon trust Viharaggenagahetum— Vin. II. 167
der. To assignin accordance
with the
Visānesupi ganhanti — Vin. I. 191
Vissāsāganhati—Vin. I. 308 dwellingplaces;Grh +e +tum,caus.
Take by hornstoo; objectis usedin
Vissajjitavissajjitam
najanati-<A. Takes on trust; vi + Svas + a, der; inf.
loc. with the root Grh, cp. bahayam
III. 275 Grh +nd +ti, meta.pres.3™.sg.
gahetvā,gīvāya gahetvā: Grh +nd +
Doesnot know whatis distributed Viharacivaramva uttarattharanam
nti, meta.pres. 3”. pl. Vissāsentoparibhuāiati —Vin. IV. va bhummattharanamva
andwhatis not; vissajjita+
avissajjita; vi +Srj +ya +1+ta, 122 bhisicchaviva —Vin. III. 212
Visibbetva va visibbapetva va - Causinghim to trust,heappropriates: The robekeptatthedwellingplace,
Pass. pp.
Vin. IV. 280 vi +Svas +e +nta,caus.prp. bed-cover, carpetfor thefloor or case
Havingsewedor causedto sew; vi + for themattress;vihdracivaramnama
Vissatthakammanto
—
D. IHI.185
Siv + e + tva,absol.; vi +Sip +ape Vissāsesati otāro —A. III. 67, 259 manussā āvāsam kāretvā cattāropi
Theonewhohasabandoned
work;i"
+Ivā, caus. absol. When there is trust, there is access; o paceayāamhākamyāvasantakā
Sri 1 ta, pp.
' Tr + a, der. paribhogamgacchantiti tictvaram
Visuddham attānamsamanu- saiietvāattanākārāpite āvāse
Vissattheneva
vivatena
gahetabbo-
passāmi—
A. I. 192 Vihaīihaatisakenacittena—D. I. 119 thapenti, etam vihāracīvaram nāma,
Vin. II. 99
I seemyselfperfectly clean:sam He is troubledby his own mind;wi3 Cy. 666;bhiimi +ya, der. +
It shouldbetakenopenly
onsheer
anu +passa +mi, pres. 11. sq. Han +ya +ti, pass.pres.3”. sg. attharana;bhisi +chavi
trust.;vissatthena
+eva;vi* Svas*
ta,pp.; vi +Vr +ta,pp.»Grh+e*
Visuddho paramaya visuddhiya - Viharatiātāpīsampaiāno
satimā Viharapacchayayaasanam
tabba,fit. pp.
Vin. 1. 105 vineyyaloke abhiiihādomanassam- pannapehi—D. I. 152
Purified
uri fie withthehighest
H i purification: M. 1.56;S. V. 9 Preparea seat(for me)at thebackof
vi +Sudh 4 ta,pp. Beingenegetic, wellawareand theliving guarteror at theshadeof the
Vihārapekkhikāyo
residence;
pa +Jia +dpe +hi, caus.
imper.2", sg.
Viharapekkhikayo —
S. I. 185;Vin.
IL. 39
As visitorstothedwellingplaces;
vihara+pekkhika:pa + Iks +ika,
der.
Viharam upagacchami—Vin. II. 303
I gotothedwellingplace;
upagacchāmiis similar to
upasamkamāmi
Vihāramkappeti—A. III. 293-95
Abides; kappa + e +ti, denom.pres.
rd
3°. se.
Vihāram chādetvāotarati —Vin. III.
82
Havingcausedto thatchthedwelling
place(he) comesdown; Chad +e +
tva, caus. absol.
Vihāram pavisitvā sūcighatikam
datvā—S. IV. 290
Having enteredtheroomandlocked
thedoor; pa + Vif + i + tva,absol.:
Dā t tvā, absol.
Vihāram pekkhitum- Vin. III. 119
To seethedwelling place;pa +Iks +i
+tum, inf.
Vihāravatthum bhanteiānāhi —Vin.
IHI.155
Venerablesir, pleaseseewhetherthere
is a sitefora dwellingplace;Jan +na
+hi, imper.2”. sg.
Viharavatthum sodhento—Vin. IHI.
155
Vihārā Vihara Vina
Clearinga siteforadwelling
place;
Thedwellingplacesaretangledover Thedwellingplacewitha closeddoor;
Sudh + e +nta,caus.pr.p. withgrass sam+ Vr+ta,pp.+dvara
Vihārasamāpattīnam
labhi—A.IIL. Vihethiyamaneajjhupekkhasi—Vin.
Vihara va viharassa upacarava
398 nikkaddhati—Vin. IV. 45 II. 162
Theonewhohasgained attainments Throwsoutfromthedwellingplace You toleratewhen(weare)being
andabidings;
Labh+7,der. or fromtheneighbourhood
of the harassed;vi +Hid +iva +mana,
dwellingplace;ni +kaddha pass.pr.p.;adhi+upa+ks +a +
Viharassamahe—Vin. IV.287 (fromKrs) +ti, pres. 3”. sg. si, pres.2™.sg.
Duringtheopening
ceremonyofthe
dwellingplace Vihāre kārāpesi, parivenāni VihesavesaAnandaTathagatassa-
kārāpesi,kotthake .., upatthāna- D. II. 93
Vihara analindaka honti,apatis- sālāyo..,aggisālāyo..,kappiya- Ānanda,
it isindeed
a troubleforthe
sarana—Vin. II. 153 kutiyo..,vaccakutiyo..,camkame.., Tathagata;
vihesa+eva +esā
Dwellingplaces
havenoverandahs,
no camkamanasalayo.., udapane..,
protection;an +ālindaka;a ' pati' udapanasalayo..,jantaghare.., Vīnam assāvesi—D. II. 265
Sr +ana,der. jantagharasalayo..,pokkharaniyo Playedtheiute;assāvesiliterally
mandapekārāpesi,Vin. II. 159 means‘madelistento thevīnā';
Vihara aparikkhitta honti—
Vin. Il. Hecausedto build dwellingplaces, a+ Sru+e+s +i, caus.pst. 3'".sg.
153 cells,gateways,attendance halls,fire
Thedwellingplacesarenotenclosed; halls,storerooms,toilets, Vīnāya tantiyoaccāyatā—A. IHI.
a +pari + Ksip + ta,pp. meditationalwalks,hallsfor the 375;Vin. I. 182
meditationalwalks,wells,hallsover Strings
ofthe lutearetootight;ati +
Vihārāālakamandā honti—
Vin. II. thewells, placesof hotbath;hallsover āvatā:ā + Yam1 ta,PP.
152 theplacesof hotbath,lotuspondsand
Dwellingplacesbecome
open pavilions;Kr +dpe +s +i, caus.pst. Vīnāya tantiyoatisithilā —A. IHI.
(no privacy);ekamgana,
{7d ke
wire Sg. 375;Vin. I. 182
manussābhikinnā,
Cy. 1219 Strings
of the lutearetoo loose;ati +
Vihārenavihāramparivenena sithila
Vihara ussadiyimsu—Vin.II. 167 parivenamupasamkamitva—Vin. I.
216;III. 69 Vinaya tantiyo..samegune
Dwellingplaceswereleftover;
Havinggonefromdwellingplaceto patitthitā—A. IHI.375;Vin. I. 182
atirekani
ahesum,
Cy.1223;
u(t)+
Syad +iva +imsu, pst. se pl.
dwelling
place,
fromcelltocell;upa Stringsofthe luteareon equalsetting;
+sam +Kram +i +tvd,absol. pati +Stha +1 +ta,pp.
Vihārāokinnavikinnā
—Vin. II.
Vihārepariganhanti,
seyyāyo Vīnāya tantissarekusalo—Vin. I.
250
pariganhanti—Vin. II. 160 182
Dwelling
places
have
been
infested
Seizedwellingplaces,
seizebeds;pari Skillful in thestring-soundof Vina
with; o +Kir +ta,pp.; vi +Kirt Ia,
+Grh +na +nti,pres.3”. pl. (lute); tanti +sara
pp.
Vihārosamvutadvāro
—M. II. 119; Vīnāvadati—S. IV. 197
Vin. 1.248 Lutespeaks(emitssound);
 Vina
Vad+a +ti,pres.3”.sg.
Vina saravati va hoti kammania -
A.TH.375
(Thelute)becomes
tunefulor ready;
Sara + vantu,+ i, der. ; kammat(n)+
ya, der.
Vitaccikam viya khayi—D. II. 133
It appeared
likesomething
of lost
shine;Khyd +ya + i, pst. 3% Sg.
Vitivatte samajje —Vin. II. 150
When the festival (social) is over: vi +
ati + Vrt + ta, pp.; samaja +ya, der.
Vitepi civare bahu suttam ava-
sittham - Vin. III. 256
Plentyofthreads was left over even
whentherobehadbeenwoven: Va +j
+ ta,pp. + api; ava + Sis + ta, pp.
Vithikusalo gocarakusalo akilanto
pindaya carissati —Vin. I. 292
Being familiarwith theroadsandthe
placesofalms he will moveon
withoutbeingweary;a + Klam +ta,
PP. :
Vīsatikhāriko Kosalako tilavāho -
A. V.173
Kosalan cartload of sesame seeds of
twentykhari measures:tila +Vah 4 a,
der.
Visatimattam kārāpenti —Vin. II.
133
Visativasso va hoti atirekavīsati
Vutthāpehā Vutthapeyyati Vuddhim
vasso—A. IV. 280
nā +eyya,meta.opt. 3". sg. Khyd +eyya,intens.opt.3%.sg.; vi 3
He is ofthe ageof twenty
ormore
a +Kr +eyya,opt.3”. sg.; vada +
Vutthapeyyatiupasampadeyya - anu + Pat +a, der.;Garh +ya, meta.
Visamvassasatika
jatiya—§,1,97 Vin. IV. 317
Shewasonehundredandtwenty years Vutthapeyya means,shouldcauseto
from birth; vassasata+ika,der ordain;upa +sam+Pad +e +eyya, Vutto nippariyayena—A. IV. 451
caus.opt. 3”. sg. Saidabsolutely;Vac+ta,pp.; ni +
Visam vassasatikoupasampadaya
- pariyāya
Vin. Il. 303 Vutthitayaparisaya —Vin. IV. 336
(He) is onehundredandtwenty
years Whenthelegallyconstitutedassembly Vautto vaiiemi—Vin. III. 61
fromordination;
sata+ika,der. is adjourned;vi +u(t) +Stha +i +ta, Beingtold(by you) I tell them;Vad+
pp. ya + e + mi, pres. 1". sg.; ep. vadami,
Vutthāti tamhāābādhā-A. I, 12I; vademi
III. 94 VuttamidamayyeBhagavata
Recovers from that ailment;vi +u() mahāpaīihesu—A. V. 54 Vuttova namvadeyya—M. I. 502
+Stha +ti,pres.3. sg. Venerable,this wassaidby theBlessed Shouldtellhimonlywhatyou have
Onein “The greatquestions”,mahanta beentold; Vac+ta,pp.+eva; Vad+
Vutthānassa
āgametabbam
-Vin.I. atthapariggahakesupanhesu,Cy.V. eyya, opt. 3%.sg.
25; vuttam:Vae+ ta,pp. + idam
50
Vuddhanambhikkhūnampāde
Recovery
of this person
should
be
VuttamidamBhagavataParayane vanditvā—Vin. III. 150
expected;vi + wtthanam +assa; @+
Gam + e + tabba,fut. pp. Mettapanhe
—A. III. 399 Havingworshippedthefeetofthe
This hasbeensaidby theBlessedOne elderbhikkhus;Vand+i +tva,absol.
in thequestionof Mettain the
Vutthapanasammutimdatum-Vin.
Pārāyana Vuddhāvuddhabhūmiyamthitā—A.
IV. 330
i. 68
Togivetheapproval
forgranting
VuttavādīcevaBhagavatoassa,na Theelderswhohadbeenstandingin
ordination;vi +u(t) +Stha+ape*
ana,caus.der.;Da +tum,inf: ea Bhagavantamabhutena theold age(eldersof longstanding)
abbhācikkheyya, dhammassa
canudhammamvyakareyya,na ca Vuddhimanvayaindriyanam
Vutthāpetvā
thitakemuāeanti
-Vin.
koei sahadhammikovādānupāto paripakamanvaya—M. I. 266;A. V.
II. 165
gārayhamthānamāgaecheyya—S. 203
Havinghelpedtostand
up,they
release
11,33 Havinggrownup,havingcometo the
themwho hadbeenstanding;
Stha+1
He wouldbecomeonewho maintains maturityof faculties;anu +aya (from
+ta,pp. +ka,der.; Mu(ije+a~
nti,pres,3”.pl.
justwhatissaidbytheBlessed
One, I), absol.;pari +Pac +a, der.
accusenotthe BlessedOne with false
accusations,
explainwhatis in Vuddhim virūlhim vepullam
Vutthapetvadve vassanineva
compliance with the Dhamma,and no āpaiieyya—S. HI. 55
anugganheyya—Vin. IV. 325
anyview put forthaccordingto the Wouldreachincrease,growthand
Having
caused
togiveordination
(she) abundance; Vrdh +ti, der.;vi +Ruh +
Dhammawould cometo becensured;
wouldneversupport
(her)fortwo
Vac+ta,pp. +Vad +i, der; As +ya ta,pp.; vipula +ya, der; @ +Pad +
years;vi +u(t) +Stha+ape* MŌ, ya +eyya, opt. 3. sg.
+ (Skt. vat), opt. 3”. sg.; abhi +@4
caus. absol.; na +eva; aut Grh
-
 Vuddhiyeva
Vuddhiyeva patikamkha, no
parihāni —D. II. 73; S. II. 207
Progressis to be ekpected,not the
decline; vuddhi + eva; pati +
Kamks+ya, fut, pp.
Vuddhi hesāmahāraia ariyassa
vinaye, yo accayamaccayatodisvā
yathādhammam patikaroti, āyatim
samvaramāpaiiati —D. I. 85
It is, greatking, a progress,indeed.
in thedisciplineofthe Aryans,that
anyone, afterseeinga transgression
as
a transgression,
takesa remedial
measureaccordingto the law and
restrainshimselfin future:ariya:
Buddha,Arahantsete; ati + ava
(fromI) ; Dr§ + tva,absol.;pati +
Kr + o+ ti, pres. 3. sg.- @+ Pad +
ya +ti, pres. 3. sg.
Vuddhi hoti kusalesudhammesu,no
thiti, no hāni —A. V. 96
Thereis growthin wholesomethings,
no halt,no waning:Stha + i +ti, der.
Vuddho cevaarahā ca —M. II. 83
He is a seniorandanArahantaswell;
ca tr eva
Vuyhamānomahoghena— M. II. 105
Beingcarriedby a torrent;Vah+ ya4
mana,pass.pr.p.; maha +ogha
Vusitabrahmacariyo—A. ID.6
The onewho haslivedthehighest
way oflife; Vay +7 +fa, pp 4
brahmacariya
Vejjam vicinatha—Vin. I. 277
Find outthephysician;vi +Ci +na +
tha, imper.24 pl.
Vedanam Venayiko
Vejjanamabahumaya - Vin,|,17)
Vedanampatihamkhami— S. IV. 104 —A. IV. 339
Physicians
aregenerally
verycunning
I shallstrikeagainstpain;pati +Han All Dhammas (all things)flow together
+ssami(Skt.syami),fut. 1".sg.; into feelings;sam +o +Sr +ana
Veiiikāyavaiamghapesanikena
vā
commonlyused form is hanissāmi
—Vin. III. 185
Vedayitamsukhamva dukkhamva
By givinga medical
treatment
or
Vedanāaniccāsamkhatā adukkhamasukhamva — S. IV. 16
bybeinga messengeronfoot
paticcasamuppanna khayadhammā Thatwhichis felt,pleasant,
painfulor
(for the laymen);vejjikdyavati
vayadhammāvirāgadhammā neitherpleasant
nor painful;Vid +aya
vejjakammavidhi;jamghapesaniyanti nirodhadhamma—D. II. 66 +| +ta, caus. pp.
gihinam diitakammam;vejja+i+ Feelingis impermanent,conditioned,
ka; der; jamgha +pesana+i+ causallyproduced,liableto dissolve, Veditabbametambhikkhave
ka, der.
to perish,to detach,andto cease bhikkhuna—A. IV. 47
Bhikkhus,thisshouldbe understood
Vejjehipaccakkhato
—Vin. I.273 Vedanacittam na pariyadaya by a bhikkhu;Vid+e + i+tabbam,
Being rejectedby physicians;
pati+a titthanti—S. V. 302 caus.fut. pp. +etam
+KhyG+ta,pass.pp. The feelingsdo notgetholdof mind;
tittha +nti, pres. 3. pl. Vediyamanassa idam dukkhanti
Vetthitasisassa
dhammam
desenti- pannapemi— A. I. 176
Vin. IV. 202 Vedanadhatukho gahapati I proclaimthatthisis Dukkhafor the
onewho is beingaffectedby feeling;
Explain theDhamma
totheonewho vinhanassaoko — S. III. 9
hashadhis headmuffledup;Vest+i+ Householder,theelementof feelingis Vid + aya +mana,pr. pass.p.
the abode of consciousness
ta, pp. + sisa
Vediyāmahamavuso—Vin. IV. 127
Vedananampariffiiam pannhapemi
- I understand,
brother;vediyami+
Vethanam omuficeyyam—D. I. 126
A. V. 65 aham;Vid +aya + mi, caus.pres. 1”.
| wouldremove
theturban;ofava)*
Mu(Me +eyyam, opt.1".sg. I proclaimtheovercomeof feelings; Sg.
parihhanti samatikkamam,Cy. V. 27
Vedhamissakenayapeti—S. V. 153
Venimullikhitum
- A. IHI,295
Tocombthematted wool;u(t)+Likh Vedanānirodhagaminīpatipadā —A. Keepsgoingwithquivering:Kvath+
III. 412 a, der.+missaka;Ya + ape +ti, caus.
+i +tum,inf.
os. 3% Sg.
pres.3. eo
The pathleadingto thecessationof
feeling;TheNoble EightfoldPath
Vedanakkhaya sabbam dukkham
Vedhavyāyapatipannosamano
niiiinnambhavissati —M. 1.93
Vedanasafa cetanaphassomanasi- Gotamo— Vin. I. 43
Duetotheexhaustion of feelingsall
karo idam vuccati namam- S. II. 3 RecluseGotamais on his way to make
thesufferingwill beover;vedana
*
Feeling,cognitiveprocess,will, womenwidows;vidhavā--va, der.
khava; ni +Jir +ta,pp.
contact,fixed thought(memory),this
is whatis called“nama”,nonmaterial Venayikoappannattiko—A. Y. 190
Vedanatto
patiiānāti—
Vin. I. 121
things;Vac +ya +ti, pass.pres.3. The onewho is to bedisciplinedby
Heacknowlegesthathehasbeen othersandwho doesnotproclaim
sg
afflictedwith pain;vedand
* Rd+
anythingor who is destructiveand
ta,pp. pati +Jan +nd+ti,pres: unruly; venayikoti sayam avinito
2rd
Vedanāsamosaranā
sabbedhammā
3 'o
42.
831
 Venayiko
Veluvatam Vokinnasukhadukkhapatipadam
annehi vinetabbo,Cy. V. 63; vi 4
Veyyavaccakaram
sanhapetya
-Vip,
nava (from Ni) + ika, der: a +pa + undisturbedby voice,isolatedfrom Abidesatthegabledhall in thegreat
III. 221
Jna +ti + ka, der. people,fit for privacyandsuitablefor forest,in Vesāli
Havingcaused
toconvince
the
retreat; appa + sadda; vi +jana +
attendant;
sam +Jia +dpe+tv,
vata;raha + seyya +a +ka, der; Vesāliyāniyyimsu— D. II. 96
caus. absol.
A pati + sam +Li + ta, pp. + sariipa + (They)setout fromVesāli;ai + Ya +
VenerableGotamaisa destroyer; ya, der. imsu,pst. 3”. pl.
Veyyavaccamkareyyam—
Vin, Ill,
vinasetiti vuttamhoti, Cy, 135
158 Veluvatamkantakivatamprikham - Vesalimupanissayaviharanti —D.
I would doa service:Kr +0+evyam, Vin. I. 154
Vepullattam papunati bhogesu—A. Ii. 119
opt. 1".sg. Enclosureof bamboo,thorn,anda Abide in theneighbourhoodof Vesali;
I. 116
moat;Vr +ta,pp.?; cp. vati(fence) upa +ni +Sri +ya, absol.
Attainsabundancein wealth:pa+ Ap
Verahiiāyamviharati
+ (uj)na + ti, pres. 3. sg.
Nalerupueimandamūle
- Vin, III I Vevanniyamhiaiihūpagato—A. V. Vesimvutthāpenti—Vin. II. 267
Abides at thefootof themargosa
tree 210 Causetoputupa brothelhouse;vi +
Vepullamahattampatto hoti— Vin.
of Naleru in Verahiā I havecometo thestateof no u(t) + Stha + Gpe + nti, caus. pres.
IHI.10
complexionor no class;vi +vanna SDL
Veram appeyyam
- Vin. I. 347 +ya, der. +amhi;adhi + upa +gata
vipula +ya, der. + maha + tta, der.:
MayI apply(my)anger
( May
I take Vehāsamabbhugganchum - S. I. 24
pa + Ap + ta, pp.
revenge);
R t e t epyam,caus.
opt Vesaliyamviharati Ambapalivane- Jumpedintothesky;abhi +u(t) +
TAKE D. II. 94;5. V. 141 2rd
ga(ni)ch+um,pst. 3”. pl.
VebhārapasseSattapanniguhayam-
Abidesat themangogroveof
Vin. IIT. 159 Ambapāliin Vesāli Vehāsamabbhuggantvā— D. II. 211;
Velaggeālaggetvā
- Vin.II. Il0
At theSattapanni(a kind oftree) cave Vin. I. 32
Havingmadeithangupatthe topof
on theslopeof Vebhara(mountainy Vesāliyam viharati Gotamake Havingjumpedintothesky;abhi +
bamboo;velw+agga;a +Lag+ya*
this is theplace wherethe first cetiye—Vin. I. 288 u (t) + Gam +tva,absol.
e +tva, caus.absol.
Buddhist council was held Abidesat theshrinenamedGotamaka,
in Vesāli Vehāsamthitā —5. I. 8
Vemattatamvadāmi —M. II. 211
Veluparamparāya
bandhitvā
-Vin.
Il. 110 Stayingin thesky:acc.is usedhere
I procalimethedivergence;vi +matta Vesāliyamviharati bahinagare for loc. meaning; Stha +i +ta, pp.
Having tied it toa seriesofbamboo;
ta +ta, der; Vad+a +mi. pres. 1", avarapurevanasande—M. I. 68
Ba(n) dh +i +tvG,absol.
Sg.
ro
Abides in Vesäāli,
at theforestoutside Vehāsampakkami —A. I. 187
thecity, towardssouth;avarapureti Wentintothesky (wentthroughthe
Veyyakaranatorakkham pacca-
Velupesikahi
nimmajjatha
—D.Il.
purassa avare,pacchimadisayanti air); pa +Kram +i, pst. 3. sg.
324
simsati—Vin. II. 187 attho,Cy. II. 21
Clean(him ) withsplitbamboo;
nit
Expectsprotectionin termsof Vehasethatva—A. V. 171
exposition;pati + Mrj+ya +tha,imper.
2™.pl. Vesāliyamviharati Beluvagāmake- Havingstayedin thesky;Stha+tvd,
a+ Sams +a +ti,
pres. 3", SZ. S. V. 152 absol.
Veluvanam
ramaniyanceva
Abidesat thesmallBeluvavillage,in
appasaddafiea
appanigghosafich Vesāll Vokinnasukhadukkhapatipadam
Veyyavaccakaramniddisi —Vin. II.
220
vijanavataiica
manussarāhaseyyakal agamma—M. II. 36
Pointed
ej >
out (recommended) an
eapatisallānasāruppaāiea
—M.HI. Vesāliyamviharati mahāvane Havingcometo thepathof
13 pleasureandpain,mixedtogether;
attendant;
nj +Dr§ +i, pst. 3”. sg kūtāgārasālāyam-D. I. 150
The BambooGroveisattractive,
quiet,
 Vokinno
Vyagghapajja Vyābhamg?īhi
a + Gam +ya, absol. Havingmadethebowlempty
ofwater
Vyagghapaliā—A. II. 194 explanation;vyakarana+araham
andmadeit dry in thesun:yi+odala:
Vokinno papakehi akusalehi Thosewho areliving on a tigers’track;
udaka --a, der:;Kr -- tā, absol;os
dhammehi—8. II . 29; A. I, 148, I vad +iya, der. Vyagameatta—D. II. 67
Tap+ e +tva,caus.absol.
viharati My soulhasgoneaway;vi +4 +Gam
Mixed with evil andunwholesome Vyanjanamevananam— S. II. 61 +G,pst.3”. sg.
Vobhindanta
maiiiiecaranti Only thephraseologyis different:
things;vi + o +Kir +ta,pp.
pannhagatena
ditthigatani—M.I,
vyanjanam+eva Vyadhitopibhattamna bhuiijati—A.
176;II. 122 IV. 139
Vokkamatipurimavohārā Theymovearound,
asif,demolishing Vyattenabhikkhunā patibalena The one who has been sick does not
pacchimayohara—A. II. 188 thewrong views(of
others) by(their) samghonapetabbo—Vin. I. 56,95 eatfood;vyadhi+ e + i + ta, denom.
(Thisperson)deviates
fromthe sharpintelligence;
vi +0 (ava)
+ The Samghashouldbeinformedby an PP.
formerwayofspeakingandthatof the Bhi(n)d + a +nta,pr.p.;mae, experienced andcompetentbhikkhu;vi
latter;vi + 0 (ava) + Kram +a+ fi,
ond
indcl.; Car +a +nti,pres,3”.sg, +Afij + ta,pp.; Jia +Gpe+ tabba, Vyādhidhammomhivyādhim anatīto
TE
pres. JY
KoeSZ.
caus.fut.pp. —A. I. 139
Vosāsamānarūpā thitāhoti—
Vin. ä I amof thenatureof beingsick,I have
Vokkamanti tattheva paripati —Vin.
IV. 177 ; Vyatto kimkaranīyesu—A. II. 116 notoverpassed
sickness;
vyadhi+
IV. 175
Shewasthereasifgivinginstructions; Experiencedin thingsto bedone;vi dhammo+amhi:As +mi, meta.pres.
While going away(she)fell down
vi +o + Sas +a +mana,prp.+ripa Anj + ta, pp. I". sg.; an + ati +1+ ta,pp.
right there;vi+ 0+ Kram +a 2:ata
+ £ pr.p.; tattha + eva; pari + Pat +
Voharatiaparāmasam-M. HI.235 Vyatthiipasevi
—A. III. 136 Vyapannacittopadutthamana-
i, pst. 3". sg.
Uses(thelanguage)
without
adhering Theonewho associates with samkappo—A. V. 284
to;a +para +Mrs+a +nta,prp. ) separatists;viyatthupaseviti Theonewhohasa hatefulmind,whose
Vokkamma ca tamhadhamma viyatthani bhinnakulani mindandthoughtsarepolluted:vi +a
vattati —D. III. 119 ghatanatthāvaupasevati,Cy. Ll. +Pad + ta,pp. + citta;pa + Dus +
Vohāramattena
sovohareyya
-$.1.
Havingdeviatedfrom thatdoctrinehe 280; vyattha( Skt. vyasta)+ ta,pp.+ mana+samkappa
14
proceeds;Vrt +a +ti,pres,3”. sg. upasevi, der; vi + As +ta, pp + upa
He would usethelanguageonlyfor i
communicationpurpose;vitotHr I +Sev + T,der. Vyapadapariyutthitenacetasa
Vokkamma ca satthusāsanāvattanti +eyya,opt.3”.sg. viharati vyapadaparetena —A. IHI.
—D. I. 230; M. HI. 117 Vyākatamyathāsakampatibhānam 231
ae
e
They proceed,deviatingthemselves —A.I. 119;III. 401 Abideswitha mindarousedand
Vohāravepakkāham
bhikkhave
from teacher’sinstruction:vi tod Expressed
ourviewaswehavefelt; affectedby anger;pari +u(t) +Stha +
saāiiā vadāmi—A. III. 413
Kram +ya, absol.: Vrt +a+ nii, yatha +sakam;pati +Bha +ana, i +ta,pp.; para +I +ta,pp.
Bhikkhus,I declare
thatspeech
isthe
pres. 3”. pl.
resultof awareness:
kathāsamkhāto
der,

Vyābhamgīhihaneyyum—S. IV. 201

hi vohārosahhāyavipākonāiMā,
Cy
Vokkammāpi therānam Vyakatamvyakatatodatthabbam- Theywouldstrikewithcarryingpoles;
III. 407;vohāra+vipaka
+ya,det
bhikkhūnam purato purato S. II. 51 Han +eyyum,opt.3™.pl.
+aham;sam+Jiia; Vad+a+mi
gacchanti
—Vin. II, 213 Whatis expressedshouldbe
pres. I". sg. I
Evenavoidingelderbhikkhustheygo acknowledgedasexpressed;vi +a +
aheadof them;Purato purato, Ma Kr +ta, pp.; Dr§ +tabba,fut. pp.
Vohārikemahāmatte
pueehi
-Vit.
I. 74; II. 158,IV. 223,pucchimst
Vodakamkatvā otāpetvā—
Vin. II. Vyakaranarahamvaco—Vin. I. 359
Referredtothechiefministers
of
113 The onewhospeakswordsworthyof
 Saudakam
Sakaddamam Sakam

samanatto—A. IV. 364 Sakamcittam nikkhipitvā —M. I.

S Oncereturneris equalto once 206;III. 156
returner;samdna +atta Keeping(my)own mindaside;ni +
Saudakam pattam patisāmenti - Ksip +i +tva,absol.
Sakatasatam
atibaddham
Vin. II. 113 Sakaddamamsamkhaditva
pavattessati—Vin. IV, 5
Causeto keepthebowl backat the ajjhoharanti —Vin. II. 201 Sakamdhammamgarahanto—D.III.
(He)will makeproceed
(draw)
one
right placewith water:sa +udaka; Havingeatenwith mud,(they) 95
hundredcartstiedtogether;
ati+
pati + Sam +e +nti, caus,pres, 3”. swallow;sa +kaddama;sam+ Khad Condemningone’sown doctrine;
Badh +ta,pp.; pa + Virt+e +ssati,
pl. +i+ tva,absol.;adhi +o +Hr+a+ Garh + a + nta, pr. p.
caus.fut. 3, sg.
nti, pres. 3™.pl.
Saupādāno na parinibbāyati —M. Sakampatibhanamudahu
Sakatasatthassapitthito—D,IL 130
II. 265 Sakaparisamubbejeta—A. II. 109 Bhagavatovacanam?—A. IV. 163
Behind thecaravan:sakata+sattha;
Theonewhohasclingingdoesnot The onewho causesagitationin his Is it whatcomesto yourmindor is it
pitthi +to, suffixto is usedtogive
enterinto Parinibbana:sq + upa t ā owngroup;u(t) +Vij +e +tu,caus. thewordof theBlessedOne?;udāhu,
ablative sense
Da + ana,der; pari +ni+ Va +ya der. indci.
T ti, pres. 3'3.sg.
Sakatasattho
sakatasahassam—D.
ll.
Sakabalenamukhenabyāharanti- Sakam parisamsanthapesi—D. I.
343 Vin. IV. 195
Saupāhanāpi aramam pavisanti - 179;III. 39; M. II. 2
A caravan
comprises
onethousand Talk with mouthfull of morsels;vi +@
heme Vin. II. 207 (He) madehis own disciplesorderly;
carts +Hr + a+ nti,pres.3”. pl. sam+Stha +Gpe+s + i, caus.pst.
They enterthemonasterywith the
shoes on; sa + upahand + api; pa + 3. se.
Sakatesuāropetvā—
Vin. I. 220 Sakamutthinava so Gamgayasotam
ViS+a +nti,pres,34 pl.
Having causedto loadintothecarts; avaretabbam maiieyya, yo Sakam mukhanimittam
da+Ruh +e +tva,caus.absol. vitakkavicare nirodhetabbam paecavekkhamāno —D. I. 80; S. V.
Sakataparivattakam karitvā
acchanti—Vin. I. 238 manneyya—S. [V. 298 121
Sakatesu āropetvānibbāhāpetā- He who would thinkofstopping the Reviewingtheimageof his own face;
(They) will stayarrangingthecarts
M. II. 64 thoughts and investigations (ofthe pati +ava + Iks +a + mana,pr. p.
in ä circle; Ās --ssggri(Si. syanl),
Havingcausedto loadintothecarts mind)mightthinkthattheflow of
fut. 3. pl., appearsaspres.
andcarryaway Gamgāshouldbestoppedby hisown Sakamyevavādamdipenti,jotenti -
37 pī
fist;ā +Vr +e +tabba,caus.fut. A. I. 188
Sakatehihirafifiamnibbahapetya
- pp.; ni + Rudh +e + tabba, caus.fut. Theypraiseandhighlighttheirown
Sakatamukhāni atthapesi—D. II.
Vin. II. 159 Pp. viewonly; Dip+ e +nti, caus.pres.
235
Havingcaused totakethegoldcoins 3”.pl.; Dyut+e +nti,caus.pres.3”.
Put up entrancesto thecarts;ā 3-Sthā
out bycarts;ni +Vah+dpe+Wa, Sakammanāhaāīati —M. II. 74 pl.
"ape s ti, caus.pst, 3rd SZ,
caus. absol. Is killed by his own action;Han +ya
+ti,pass.pres.3”.sg. Sakamyevavādamnibbethehi—M.
Sakatam sakatatthikena
Sakannajappako
salakagaho
hoti- 1.230
pariyesitabbam—Vin. II. 297
Vin. 1.99 I Sakam āeariyakamuggahetvā—D. Causeto untwistyourown theory;ni
A cartshouldbesoughtby one who is
Itisthetaking
ofvote,whispering II. 104 + Vist + e + hi, caus. imper. 2™.sg.
in needofa cart: sakata +attha4
theear;sa +kanna+jappaka Havinglearnttheteachingof his
ika, der.;pari +es (fromIs) +i 4
ownschool;u(t) +Grh +e +td, Sakamsakamovarakampavisimsu
tabba,fut. pp. CO
absol, —M. I. 253
Sakadāgāmīsakadāgāmissa
 Sakam
Sakideva Sakim Sakeneva
Theyentered
intotheirownrooms:pa
Sakāni gharāni patiharāma-D,ii,
+Vis + imsu,pst. 3. pi. dakkhati>dakkhiti,fut. 3”. sg. mana, pass. pr.p; sam +pa+ a+ Ya
180
+i +ssanti,fut. 3”. pl.
Wetakebacktoourownhomes;
pati
Sakam sakam gocaravisayam Sakim nimuggo nimuggovahoti—
A.
+Hr +a+ ma,pres,1".pl.
avificheyyum—
S. IV. 199 IV. II Sakenakāyenaattīyantiharāyanti
Wouldpull in thedirectionof their Once imersed is imersed forever; ni + ligucchanti—Vin. III. 68
Sakāyakatikāyaasanthahanta—
Vin, Majj + ta,pp.; nimuggo+ eva
own feedingground;gocara + visaya; (They)aretroubledby,ashamedof,
1.9 anddisgustedwiththeirownbody:
a + vi +Afich + evyum,opt. 3™.pl.
Not followingtheirownagreemeni; Sakim pakkhassa,catuddaseva atta + tya + nti, denom. pass. pres.
a+ sam +Stha +nta,pr.p. pannaraseva —Vin. I. 104 3”. pl.; hiri +ya + nti, denom.pass.
Sakalikaggitveva samkham gacchati
Once in fortnight,eitheron the pres.3. pl.; Gup + (s) +ya +nti,
—M. II. 181
Sakaya niruttiya Buddhayacanam fourteenthor on the fifteenth;sakim, desid.pass.pres. 3™.pl.
It is called splinter-fire;sakalika +
dūsenti—Vin. II. 139 indcl., catu +dasa +a ,der.;patica +
aggi
TheymaketheBuddha's words
spoil dasa Sakenabhagenauttaritukamo-
byusingtheirowndialects:
saka Vin. I. 285
Sakalikamsakalikamakāsi— D. II.
nirutti ndmasammasambuddhena Sakim sakim —D. II. 188 The onewho is desirousofcrossing
341
vuttappakāroMāgadhikovohāro,
Cy. Alternativelyor accordingto theturn; ( goingabroadwitha caravan)withhis
Cutintolittlepieces:@ +Kr+a@+s+
1214;Dus+e +nti,caus.
pres.
3% ady. own share;satthamlabhitva
i, double
pst. 3%.sg.
pl. disāpakkamitukāmoti attho, Cy.
Sakim sakim ummuijjanto—S. V. 1124;u(t) + Tr + i +tum,inf. +kāmo
Sakalikāya khato hoti —S. I. 110
Sakāya niruttiyā Buddhayacanam 455
Woundedbya splinter;Ksan +ta,pp. Sakenamuttakarisenakilati—A. V.
pariyāpunitum—
Vin. II. 139 Comingup on andoff; u(t) +Maj +a
To learntheBuddha’swordsbyone’s +nta,pr.p. 203
Sakavannampatisamharitva —Vin. (Thebaby)playswith itsown faeces
owndialect;
pari+Ap+(una+i+
II. 185 Sakunasamghassa saddenaubbalho andurine;Krid +a +ti, pres.3™.sg.
tum,inf.
Havingshrunkbackhis own form;pati —Vin. ITI. 148
+ sam +Hr +i +tva,absol. Beingtroubledby thenoiseofthe Sakenavannenapātubhavassu—Vin.
Sakayapatifiayaabbhaiifiamsu?-
D. II. 150;M. I. 198 flock of birds;u(t) +Badh +ta,pp. MELE
Sakavadamthapessati,paravadena Pleasemanifestyouselfin yourown
Did theyrealiseaccordingtotheir
pavaressati—D. III. 40 Sake ācariyake evamhoti —M. II. form;pātu +® + Bhi +a +ssu,
ownclaim 7;abhit a t .fā tā"
(He) will withholdhis own theoryand 32 imper.mid.2”. sg.
imsu,doublepst.3'".pl.
invite for discussionofothers’ theory: This occurs in our own school
saka +vada;Stha +ape +ssati, Sakenivesanepanitamkhadaniyam
caus. fut. 3". sg.- pat Vrted Sakeiātivāde samanuyuliiiyamānā bhoianīyampatiyādāpetvā—D. 1.
ssati,
caus. fut. 3'i. sg.; cp. bhattena samanubhāsiyamānā 108
nimanteti samanugāhiyamānāna Havingcausedto makedeliciousfood,
sampāyissanti—M. II. 157 hardandsoft,athis own house;Kāād
Sakasāvātitthāyatanamsamkantā- They, beingauestioned,cross +aniva,fut. pp.; Bhuj +e +aniya,
Vin.
II.279 examinedanddealtwithon theirown caus.fut,pp.; pati + Yat +dpe + tva,
Sakidevasabbamfiassati,
sabbam caus. absol.
(A bhikkhunī who ) has shifted to theory,wereunableto answer;sam +
dakkhiti —M. II. 127
anotherreligiousorderwith robes: anu + Yu(fi)j +tva +mana, pass, pr.
He will know all atonce,hewillsee Sakenevathālipākenaparivisi —M.
tittha +āyatana:sam +Kram +ta, Pp. sam +anu +Bhas +tya +mana,
all at once; Jad +ssati,fut. 3M,SB
Pp. Pass. prp.; sam +anu +Gah +tya + III. 139;S. V. 384
Dr§ +ssati(Skt.draksati)>
 Sakkaeeam
Sakkā Sakkayafineva Sakkesu

He served(him) with his own milk

!a, pp.; garu + kata,pp.; Man +e +i
tice; sakena +eva; thali + Pac +a thesamemeaning,sakkomiis a verb, Sakkuneyyaattānamsotthimkātum
+ta, caus.pp.; Piij +e +i +ta,caus
der; pari + Vis+i, pst.3” Sg. sakkāis an indcl.; Jia +tum,inf. —A. V. 347
PP.; apa + Ci +ta,pp.
Hewouldbeableto keephimselfsafe;
Sakkaccam upanijjhayimsu —Vin. I Sakkayaninevaanuparidhayanti, Sak +(u)na+eyya,opt.3“. sg.;su +
Sakkatva garukatva upanissaya atthi
269 anuparivattanti—M. II. 232
vihareyyam - 8. I. 139 (They)keeprunningroundandturning
ObservedSeriously;upa + ni + jha
I shouldabideclosely. honouringand roundtheirown body;sa +kKdyam + Sakkuneyyaupanīhātum—A. V. 43
(fromDhyai) + (y) + imsu,pst.3™.pl.
respecting;upa + ni +Sri +ya, yeva;anu +pari +Dhav +a + nti, Wouldbeabletobringforth;upa +ni
absol.; vi + Hr +eyyam,opt.1 RIRE pres.3. pl.; anu +pari + Vrt +a + +Hr +tum:hartum> hattum>
Sakkaccam dhammam deseti—S. IV.
nti,pres. 3”. pl. hatum,inf.
314
Sakkaroti garukaroti mānetipūieti
ExplainstheDhammaproperly;
—M. I. 235 Sakkayaditthi thamagata Sakkesuviharati Kapilavatthusmim
sakkaccam,adl.; Drs +e + ti, caus
Esteems,respects,causesto venerates appativinita orambhagiyam Nigrodharame—M. I. 91;Vin. II.
pres.3”. sg.
andpayhomage;sa(i) Kr+o+ ti, samyojanam—M. I. 433 253
pres. 3™.sg.; Man + e + ti, caus.pres. Belief in self, which is firmly rooted Abidesatthebanyan grovein
Sakkaccampayirupāseyya—D. IHI.
3”.sg.:Piij +e +ti, caus.pres,#% andnot removed,is a lowerfetter;sa Kapilavatthu,
in thekingdomof the
188
SZ. +kaya +ditthi; thama +gata;a + Sakyans
(He) would keepclose contact
pati +vi +Ni +ta,pp.; oram +
respectfully;pari +upa +As +eyya
Sakka ettakenapidhammoannatum bhaga+ iya, der.;sam + Yuj +e+ Sakkesuviharati Kapilavatthusmim
meta.opt. 3. sg. ci
—Vin. IV. 21 ana, caus. der. mahāvane
—D.II. 253;S.I. 26
Even with thismuch,weareableto Abidesatthegreatforestin
Sakkaceam paribhuhiati avikiranto
understandtheDhamma;dhammo Sakkayanirodhammanasikaroti—A. Kapilavatthuin thekingdomof the
—A. IV. 188
aāhātum,grammaticallynot correct, II. 165 Sākyans:cp. Kurūsuviharati
He enioysproperlywithoutthrowing
can it be a colloquial usage
of the Focusesattentionon thecessationof Kammāssadammamnāma
it hereandthere;a + vi +Kir +a+
language?; @ + Jia + tum, inf. self;manasi+Kr +0 +ti,pres.3”. Kurūnamnigamo— D. Il. 290;
Ata, pr.p.
SZ. in orderto singleout oneparticular
Sakkā divasāvasesenagantum—M. placeorfact from thegeneral
Sakkaccam paribhuhiati
11.119 Sakkayanirodhe cittam body,locativeplural is used,cp.
avihaīiiamāno - A. IV. 189
Abletogoduringtherest
of theday nappakkhandati—A. II. 165 also,kāmesumicchācārā
He enioysproperlywithoutbeing
Theminddoesnotleapuponthe yeramanī(to refrainfrom sexual
troubled;pari +Bhu(fli taa ii, misconduct )
Sakkābhogeeabhuhiitum,puāāni cessationof self; na +pa +Skand+
pres. 3". 8g.; a+ vi +Han + ya +
ca kātum —M. II. 63; Vin. I. 182 a+ fi, pres, 3”. sg.
mana,pass. pr.p.
lt is possibletoenioywealthandmake Sakkesuviharati Khomadussam
merits ; sakkā, indcl.usedwithinsttr. Sakkāyapariyāpannā
—A. II. 33 namaSakyānamnigame —S. I. 184
Sakkaccam vācetā—D. III. 156 Abidesat Khomadussa, themarket
or inf.i.e. tena sakka, bhuiijitum Included in the category of self; sa +
One who teachesproperly;Vac +e + townof the Sākyans,in thekingdomof
sakka,;
Bhu(ii)j+i +tum,inf; Kr + kaya +pari +a +Pad +ta,pp.
tu, caus. der, theSākyans
tum: kar +tu,kat + tum,katum,inf.
Sakkārokāpurisamhanti—Vin. IL.
Sakkato hoti garukato mānito SakkesuviharatiDevadahamnāma
Sakkamayaīātum- D. I. 187 188
pūiito apacito—S. II. 119
lt is possiblefor me to understand; Hospitalityruinsa meanperson;sa(
He IS estcemed,respected,venerated,
paidhomage,andrevered:sa(t) +Kr +4
ahamsakkomiandmayāsakkāare
"2 2rd .
two different expressions to convey Dres. 2", SZ

841
Sakkesu Sakya-puttiyo Sakyā Sacā

Sakyans
named intheSakyan of theSakyans
Devadaha Willyouclaimthatyouarea sonof pa t ā t Vr t i 3 iā, meta.absol.
kingdom theSakyan?; Sakya +putta +iya,
Sakkharikayapi madhusitthakenapi der.;pati +Jan +nd +i +ssasi,
fut. Saggamupeti
— 5. 1.91
SakkesuviharatiMetalipam nama nasikalomam gahapenti—Vin. II. 29:82. Goestoheaven;saggam +upeti:upa
Sakyanam nigamo—M. II. 118 134 +1+ti,pres.3%.sg.
Abides at themarkettownof the Causeto takeout hair in thenostrils Sakyākho pana VāsetthaPasenadi
SākyansnamedMetalūpa,in the witha littlepieceofcrystalandwitha Saggasamvattanika
patipada
kingdomof theSākyans little piece of beeswax;sakkhara+ 83 patipajjitabba
—A. IIL.48
ika, der.; Grh +ape + nti, caus.pres, TheSākyans
are,Vāsettha,
vassals
of Oneshould followthepathleading
to
Sakkesu viharati Vedhahnā nāma Singl PasenadiKosala; anu + Yuj +ta,pp.; heaven;
sagga+sam+Vrt+ana+
Sakyānam ambavane— D. III. 117 Bhi +a +nti,pres.3. pl. ika,der.;pati +Pad +ya +i +
Abidesatthemangogrovenamed Sakkhasi cakkayugamkatum? —A.L tabba,
fut.pp.
Vedhanīāin thekingdomof the 111 Sakyānam
pubbapuriso
—D. I. 93
Sākyans Can you makea pairof wheels?;Sak+ Thepioneerof theSākyans Saggāteāraddhā—Vin. I. 223
ssasi(Skt.syasi),fut. 2”. sg.;Kr + Youhave
satisfied
heavenly
abodes;
Sakkesu viharati Sakkaram nāma tum,inf. Sakhī sakhāramva cirassamāgatam a +Radh+ta,pp.
Sakyānamnigamo—
S. V. 2 —A. IV. 93
Abides at themarkettown of the Sakkhasipanatvamtīsusikkhāsu Like a femalefriendwho hasseen Sacajjatvamtambhikkhumjivita
SākyansnamedSakkarain thekingdom sikkhitum? —A. I. 230 (her)malefriend come(home)afteravoropeyyasi, bahuficatvam
of theSākyans Canyoutrainyourself
in threefold longtime;sakharam+iva;cirassam, apuāāaam pasaveyyāsi—Vin. IV.34
discipline?; sometimestheform indcl.;G@
+Gam + ta,pp. If youweretodeprivethatbhikkhu
Sakkesu viharati Sakyānam nigame sakkhasioccurs as sagghasi,Sn. 834 of lifetoday,youwouldhaveproduced
—5.1.87 Sagahatthayaparisaya a lotof demerit;
sace+ajja,sace,
Abidesatthemarkettownof the Sakkhidittho—D. I. 238 patimokkham uddisati —Vin. I. 115 cond.p.;pa+Su+a +eyyasi,
opt.
Sākyans,in thekingdomof the Seenfaceto face;sa +akkhi+dittha: (Devadatta)
recitesPatimokkhain an 2” sg.
Sakyans Dr§ + ta, pp. assemblycomprisinglaymen;u(t) +
Dr§ +a +ti, pres. 3. sg. Sacassahotiavisayham—M. I. 207;
es
=
Sakkesu viharati Samagamake Sakkhibhabbatam
papunati,sati III. 157;Vin.I. 157 ~
—

pokkharaniyāyam —A. III. 309 sati āyatane—M. III. 96; A. I. 255. Sagunam dātabbā If it isunmanageable
katvāsamghātiyo byhim;sace+
Abides at Pokkaraniyā,thelittle He becomescompetentenoughto —Vin. I. 46 assa;a +vi +Sah+ya, meta.fut. pp.
villageof Sāmagāma,
inthekingdom experiencein differentcontexts;Bhii Havingputtogether,therobes(double -
wees
of the $ākyans;Pokkharaniyāis the + ya, fut. pp. +ta, der.; pa + Ap tE layerandsinglelayer)shouldbegiven; Sacdcamayamgayheyyama
name of a vihāra, Cy. III. 353 (u)na +ti,pres.3”.sg.;sati:As + sagunamkatvāti dve cīvarāni ekato mayampievamevahaāheyyāma-
nta, loc. sg. katvā,sabbampihi cīvaram Vin. I. 88
samghatitattäsamghātītivuccati,Cy. If wewouldhavebeencaptured,we
243 Sakkhisāvako ahosi—D. II. 153 78;Kr +tva,absol.;Da +tabba, wouldhavealsobeenkilledlike this;
Abidesat Sāmagāmain thekingdom Hewasanimmediate
disciple(whohas
of theSakyans seentheBuddhawith his owneyes); vuttam,
tassasacemayanti
sa +akkhi +savaka:Sru +aka,der. Sagunam
katvasamghatiyo avamevattho,
Cy.1023;Grh+ya
SakkesuviharatiSilavatiyam—
S. I. pārupitvā —Vin. II. 213 +eyyama,meta.pass.opt. tapi)
117 Having
puttherobes
(double
layer
and Han +ya +eyydma,pass.opt.
Abidesat Silavatiin thekingdom singlelayer)together
andwornthem; I" pl.
6
 Sacayam
Sacetaso Sace te Sace me

Sacayam..raja pitaram dhammikam Saceakamkhati, bhufijati— M. L.

dhammarāiānam jivita na
voropessatha,imasmim yeva āsane
Virajamvitamalam
dhammacakkhumuppaiiissatha—D.
1.86
Hadthiskingkillednotthefather,
whowasrighteous andthekingof
righteousness,
therewould have
arisen (in him) on this very seat the
eyeof Truth which is free from dust
andrust;sace + ayam; vi + 0 + Ruh
+ e +ssatha,caus.cond. mid. 3”.
Sg.;u(t)+Pad +ya +i +ssatha,
cond.,mid.3. sg.;sace(indcl.)
is used to indicate a condition
Sacittapariyāyakusalo —A. V. 92
Skilled in theway of one’sown mind:
Sa + citta +parivāya
Sacivarani bhattani akamsu —Vin. I.
299
Offeredfoodwithrobes;a +Kr +a +
imsu,doublepst. 3°. pl.
Saceanumafifieyyamanuiāneyyāsi,
patikkositabbam ca patikkoseyyasi
—M. II. 158
If you would agreeon whatshouldbe
agreedandrejectwhatshouldbe
rejected;anu +Man +ya + eyya,
der.; anuāheyya(anu +Jia + eyya)
is theusualform; anu +Jan +na +
evyasi,opt. 2". sg.; pati + Krug +a
+i +tabba,fut.pp.
Saceākamkhasi, nisīda —M. II.
158
Sit down,if you like; ā 3 Kamks +a +
si,pres. 2". sg.; ni +Sad +a, imper.
284 sg
207
He eatsif he likes; Bhu(fi)j + a +ti,
pres. 3™.sg.
Sacekho tvam..saccepatitthāya
manteyyasi,siya no ettha
kathāsallapo—M. I. 376
If you converse(with me)grounding
yourselfon truth,therewould beour
discussionon this matter;pati +Stha
+va, absol.; manta +eyydasi, denom.
opt. 2". sg.; As +ya(Skt.yat), opt.
3”. sg.; ettha,indel.; katha +sam +
Lap + a, der.
Saceceteyyum—A. IV. 259
If theywould will; Cet + evyum,opt.
3” pk
Sace ie saceam vadasi, adāsī bhavasi
—M. II. 62
You becomefree(from slavery),if
you tell thetruth; Vad+a +si, pres.
2”. sg.;Bhit +a +si,pres.2". sg.;
Sacetam Bhagavata bhasitam,
evametam—M. II. 107
It is so,if it is saidbytheBlessed
One; Bhās 1 i t ta,pp.; evam+etam
Sacetaya katam, katanti vadehi-
Vin. IT.79;IL. 162
If it wasdoneby you, saythatit was
donebyyou;Kr +fa,pp.; Vad+e +
hi, imper.2". sg.
Sacetaso
bhikkhudabbaiātiko
—A. I.
254
Thoughtfulbhikkhuof intelligent
nature;dabba +jati + ika, der.
Sacete agaru, bhāsassu—
D. I. 51;II.
284;M. II. 199
If it is nota burdentoyou(if you
don’tmind),pleasetell; Bhas+a +
ssu,imper.mid. 2". sg.
Sacete aparipūram bhavissati,aham
paripūressāmi—A. I. 186
If your(knowledge)be incomplete,
|
will makeit complete;pari +Pr +e
t ssāmi,caus.fut. 1".sg.
Sacete Kassapa agaru vaseyyama
ekarattamagyagare— Vin. I. 24
lfit is nota burdento you, Kassapa,
mayI abideonenightin thefire-house ayyois usedas voce.
;a t garu; Vas + eyyāma, opt. I". pl.; pp.; @+Da +iva +i +ssama,pass.
aggi t agāra
Sacete pacchimamsaccampurimam
te micchā —S. IV. 299
If your last(statement)is true,then
thefirst is false;miecha,indcl.
Sacete paripūram bhavissati,aham
anumodissāmi—A. I. 186
If your(knowledge)becomplete,I
willappreciate;
aiu t Mudttati'
ssāmi,fut. I". sg.
SaeeteBhaggavaagaru,viharāma
II. 129
āvesane ekarattim—M. III. 237
Ifit isnota burdenforyou,Bhaggava, isgood,if youwouldunderstand
It
may| abideone nightin thehouse;vi
+Hr + a +ma, imper.I". pl.; a Vis
te + ana, caus. der.
Sacenavattantayyāti
bhapanti,
osāretabbā—Vin. IV.52
If theysay,‘Sirs,theyarenotin
progress’,theyshouldbereminded;
osāretabbāti
pāli vattabbo,
Cy.792:
vattanti+ayya+iti; o +Smr +e +
tabba,caus.fut.pp.
SacemamBhagayaanujaneyya —A.
IV. 355
lf theBlessedOnewouldpermitm;e
sace,cond.p.; anu + Jan + nā t
eyya,opt.3”. sg.
Sacemayamayyovikkitam
bhandampunaādiyissāma,kada
amhākambhandamvikkāyissati?-
Vin.IV.248
If | weretotakebackwhatis already
sold,whenourgoodwill besoldout?:
; vi +Kri +ta,
fut.1*,pl.; kadā,indcl.;vi t Kri +ya
-- i t-ssati,pass.fut.3”.sg.
Sace..muhuttamnisideyya...
mahataatthenasamyuttoagamissa
—M. I. 342
If heweretositherefora while,he
couldhavegonewithmuchbenefit;
muhuttam, adv.;ni +Sad +eyya,opt.
3”,sg.;sam+ Yuj+ta,pp.; a+ Gam
zs do
+j +ssa,cond.3”. sg. akaaka
casa
re
etl
aaka
did
ka
Sacemetvambhāsitassaattham
āiāneyyāsi,iccetamkusalam—M.
the
meaning
of mysaying;@+Jan +nā +
eyyasi,
opt.2. sg.;iti +etam
eT
pres.
ssāmi,caus.pres.1".sg.
I Woe st €

845
 Sace
Sace me vacanamkareyyasi—M. II.
64
If you do what I say;Ar+ 0 +epyasi,
opt. 2", sg.
Saceso anuiānāti, vaseyyātha—Vin.
IV.18
Youshouldstay,if heconsents;
anu +
Jan + na + ti, pres. 34 Sg.; Vas+
eyyatha,opt.24.pl.
Sace so deso uklapo hoti
--.Sammajjitabbo—Vin. I. 46
That placeshouldbe sweptif it is
dirty;sam+Mrj +ya +i +tabba,
fut. pp.
Saceso samantatiram passati, tatha
gatakova hoti —D. I. 222
If it seestheshorearound.surely, it
Saccatothetatoanupalabbhiyamane
—S. IV. 384; A. L 174
When it is not to be foundtruly and
firmly; an + upa +Labh 4 (i) + ya +
mana, pass. Prp.
Saccato thetato ditthi uppaiiati —M.
1.8
A wrongview arises.trulyandfirmly;
ōhūtatoca thirato ca, Cy. 1. 70
Saccamkira? — S. II. 121,278;A. I.
174
Is it trueto say?;kira, indcl. usedto
indicate hearsay
Saccamkira tvam ...bhikkhunīhi
saddhim samsatthoviharasi? —M, I.
123
Saccanurakkhanam Saficicca
Is it trueto say thatyou abide,
Saceānurakkhanampekkhāma—M. adv.;pa + Hi + e + tabba, caus.fut.
mixing with bhikkhunīs?;sam+
II. 171 pp.
Srj + ta, pp.
Weseethe protectionoftruth; sacea
+anu +Raks +ana,der; pa + Iks + Sajjhayakiriyabahusaccassa aharo
a+ ma,pres. I". pl. —A. V. 136
Repetitionis thefoodfor good
ls it trueto saythatthemaster
Sacceca akuppe ca patitthatabbam memory;sa +ajjhaya +kiriya; bahu
—Vin. If. 251 + sati (from smrti)+ a, der.
+ Kram +i+ ssati,fut, 3”. sg.
(He) shouldestablishhimselfon truth
andstayfirm or withoutanger;kopo Saiihāyabahulono dhammavihārī
-
Saccam Nigrodha, bhāsitā te esā
na katabbo,Cy. 1290;a +Kup +ya, A. III. 87
vācā?—D. III. 53
der. He is onewithfreguentrehearsal,
not
ls it true,Nigrodha,thatthisspeech
abidingwiththeDhamma; sajjhaya,
Saeeocassa
saddhoca —
D. III. 106 Skt.svadhyaya
Pp.; gen.(te)for instr.
Oneshouldbecomea man of truth
andfaith;sacco +ca + assa:As +ya Saiihāyabahuloviharati—S. I. 202
(Skt.yat), opt. 3”. sg.; saddha+a, He abideswithfreguent
rehearsal
S. I. 42
der.
The truth indeed is tastier of(all)
Saiihāyenadivasamatināmeti—A.
tastes;have,emph.p.
Sacchavinimilani ahesum—A. III. II. 87
371 Spendsthewholedayby rehearsal;
ati
Saccavadino honti, saccapatinna- +Nam+e +ti,caus.pres.3”.sg.
Therootswereenveloped
withskin;
M. II. 99;Vin. II. 182 sa +chavini; a + Hii (Bhi) +a +8 +
(These)aretruthspeakersand um,pst. 3. pl.; sg. form is ahosi,o Sahcarittamsamapajjeyya
—Vin.
claimantsof truth;sacca +vada+i, III. 137
becomese in thepl.
der.; sacca +pati +Jia Wouldactasa go-between;
sam+Car
Sacchikiriyaya
padaheyyam
—M. I. +4+tta,der; sam+@+Pad +ya +
Saccavadisaccasandhotheto 164 eyya,opt.3". $g.
paccayikoavisamvadako
lokassa- MayI strive for therealisation;
pa +
M. I. 179 Dha +a + eyyam,opt. 1".sg. Saficiceaaphasumkarissati—Vin.
The one who speakstruth,is reliable, IV. 290
firm, trustworthyanddoesnot Sacchikiriyāhetu—
D. I. 156 Makesinconvenience
purposely;sam
contradictto theworld; sacca + vada For thereasonof experienceor +Cit +ya, absol.
E , der.; theta(Skt.sthita);paccaya realisation
hika,der.;a +visam+ Vad+aka, SaficiecaAvasamatikkamanti—Vin.
der.
Saiiānidhanūniādāya—A.HI. 75 1.138 ti
Havingtakenthebowswith stringsset Purposelyleavetheresidence;
ati
; "oe rd
Saceānupattiyāpadhānam Kram +a +nti,pres.3”.pl.
in; sajiyani aropitadhanini,Cy.III.
bahukāram — M. II. 174
261;a +Da +ya, absol.
Striving is muchhelpful for arrivingat Saficiccadire apadisanti—Vin. II.
thetruth,stepby step;sacca +anu+ 76
Sajjukampāhetabbo—Vin. I. 127
pa +Ap +ti, der. Shouldbesentforthwith;
sajju+ka, Theypointoutdistantplaces
 Sahcicea
Sanhanam Sainānam Salihogāya
purposely;apa +Drs +a + nti, pass.
+Krnt +evya,opt.3", sg,
pres. 3. pl. Saūiānamvemattatā—A, III. 413 nirodha;sam+@+Pad +ya +eyya,
Diversityof awareness;vi +matta+ opt.3”.sg. +api; vi +u(t)+Stha+
Safijaye paribbajake
Sahiciecana āroceti —Vin. I. 121 (a, der. eyya,opt.3". sg. +api
brahmaeariyam caranti —Vin, I. 39
Does not inform intentionally;@+ Leada celibatelifeunderSahiiaya,
Ruc +e +ti, caus.pres. 3%
2 Sg. Sana nanusenti—M. I. 108 Sanhavedayitanirodhasamapattiya
thewanderer;Car +a +nti.pres.
Cognitiveprocessdoesnotsettle sania cavedanaca kantako—A. V.
Senki
Saficicea pano jivita na down;accordingly;na +anu+Si +a 135
voropetabbo—Vin. I. 97 +nti,pres. 3™.pl. Consciousness
andfeelingarethorns
Sahiānitvā ganhantu—Vin. IV. 120
A living beingshouldnotbedeprived (obstacles)
to theattainmentofthe
Pleaseidentifyandtake:sam +Jén +
Sannhanirodhagamini
patipada—A. cessationof consciousness
and
na + i+ tvd,absol.; Grh +na +ntu,
+tabba,caus.fut. pp. Ill. 413 feeling;sania + vedayita:Vid +aya
meta,imper,3™.pl.
Thepathleadingto thecessationof + i +ta,caus.pp.+ nirodha+
consciousness samapatti
Saficicca manussaviggahamjivita
Sanfattim upagacchanti—A. I, 76
voropeyya—Vin. III. 71
Takesteptoconciliation;
sam+Jia + Safaparicitam cittam —A. V. 107 Sannasamapatti
pattabba—
S. I.
Havingpre-meditated (he) would ti; der; upa +gaccha + nti, pres, 3”.
Themindaccustomedto thoughts; 151
causeto deprivea humanbeing(form) pl. pari +Ci + ta,pp. Shouldbereached bytheattainment
oflife ; vi + Gah +a, der; vit+o+
of self consciousness;
sakasanna-
Ruh + e + eyya,caus. opt. 3™.sg.
Safifiattim upenti—M. I. 320 Sanhnhapetum
nasakkhi —M. I. 397; samapattiyo namahutvapattabba,
Cometoanunderstanding;
sam+Jia S. IV. 224 Cy.I. 135;pa +Ap +tabba,
Sahcicca vikāle āgacchanti—Vin.
+ti; upa +e (fromI) +nti,pres.3”. (He)wasunableto makethem fut. pp.
II. 159
pl. convince;sam +Jnd +ape +tum,
Purposely(they)comeat improper
caus.inf.; na +a +Sak+s +i, pst. Sania hi bhopurisassaatta—D. 1.
time
Sania kho Potthapadapathamam 3rd. sg. 180 ;
uppajjati, pacchaāānam—D.I. 185 Gentleman,consciousnessis the soul
Saficetanikam sukkavisatthim
Potthapāda,awarenessarisesfirst, Safa rogosahhāgandosaūhā of man
ekahapaticchannam —Vin. II.. 40
knowledgelater;sam +Jad; pacchd, sallam—M. II. 230
Intentionalemissionof semen
indcl. Identificationis a disease,a tumour Safi samanojagaro—D. Il. 131 Ä
concealedby oneday:eka +aha +
anda dart Beingconscious
andawake;sanind+1,
pati + Chad + ta,pp.
Saāihācikāyakutim kārayamānena- der.;As+mana,
pr.P.
Vin. III. 149 Sanhavedayitanirodham
Saficetanikasukkavisatthi —Vin. IHI.
By a personwhoiscausingtomakea upasampaiiaviharati —D.II. 112 Sahhuppada
ca panaāānuppādo
112
cell by begsing;sam 3yācika; Kī t Havingattainedcessationof hoti—D.I. 185
Intentionalemissionof semen;sam +
aya +mana,caus.pr.p. consciousness
andfeeling,heabides; Knowledge arisesasa resultof
Cet + ana +ika, der.;sukka + yi +
upa +sam +Pad + ya, absol. identification;
sania +uppada;
Srj +ti, der.
Sanhadhatuvifihanassa
oko—S. IL. fiana+uppada:u(t) +Pad +a, der.
10 Sahhavedayitanirodhamsamā-
Safichindeyyasamkanteyya
The basicelementof cognitionis the pajjeyyapivutthaheyyapi—
A. HI.
samparikanteyya—M. III. 275
abodeof consciousness 192 gāya—Vin. Il. 258
He would cut,slice andslash:sam +
(He)wouldenterintothecessation Theyleadtobondage,nottorelease;
Chi(n)d +eyya,opt. 3. sg; sam 4
Safiianamaggam—A. IHI.202 of consciousnessandfeelingand sam+Yuj+a,der;sam+Vrt+a+
Krnt +eyya,opt. 3”. sg.; sam +pari
The highestamongconsciousness come out of it; saiiāā-: vedayita * nti,pres,3”. pl.

849
 Sanfojanam
Satatakārī Satatam

Sanfojanam anum thūliam—A. IHI. pubbabhāsino— Vin. II. II

347 Satatamsamitam — 8. IV. 178 II. 284
Soft, friendly,easyto conversewith,
Fetters,subtleandgross(tiny andbig): Continuously;adv. Beingmindfulandawaretheyendure;
startingwitha smile;sayers
of ‘come,
sam +yojanam Smr+ta,pp.; sam+pa +Jan +a,
you are welcome’,notsupercilious,
Satatamsamitamabbokinnam—A, der.;adhi+ Vas+e + nti,caus.pres.
plain-faced,initiators
ofconversation;
Saffojananam parikkhaya —A, I. IV, 145 3, pil.
sukha t sambhāsā;mihita:Smi 3 ia,
233 Uninterrupted
continuously;a + vi +
meta.pp. +pubbam +gama;e(from
o t Kir +ta, pp Sati antarfye—Vin. I. 112
Dueto theexhaustion
of fetters:
pari 1) +hi, imper.2". sg. +su +dgata+
+ Ksi + a, der. Whenthereisa danger; loc.absl.;
vada + i, der.; a +bhakutika;uttana Satatavihārāadhigatā—A. II. 198 sati,loc.sg.of santa
+mukha;pubba +Bhas + 7.der. Attainedthestatesof constantabiding;
Sanfojanani pahiyanti—A. II. 157
satata-- vihāra; adhi + Gam +ta, Sati uttarimkaranīye—M. 1.271;
Fettersareabandoned; pa +Ha +iva Sanhāhi vācāhi upavhayantā—D.II,
+ nti, pass.pres. 3”. pl. pp. II. 195,uttari
259
Whenthereis somethingmoreto be
Entreatingwith gentlewords;upa+a Satapadiva mam daseyya—A. IV. done;uttarim,adv.
Satthim vihare pariyosapetva -
+Hit +ya +nta, meta.pr. p. 320
Vin. II. 147
Ora centipedecould biteme;Dams+ Sati udapādi—D. I. 180
Causing to completesixty residences:
Sanhenapi vinemi pharusenapi eyya,opt. 3”. se. Memorycameup;u(t)+a +Pad +i,
from nineteen to eighty nine,
vinemi sanhapharusenapivinemi- pst.3™.sg.
Pali numbersare feminineand Sg.,
A. II. 112 Satam
satasahassanam
hirafifiassa
-
that is why satthimvihāre;pari t o
I train(him)softly,roughlyandin A.IV.7 Sati upatthapetabba
—D. II. 141
't Sā 1.āpe 1.twā,caus.absol.
bothways; vi +Ni +a +mi,pres. Onehundredof hundredthousand
gold Shouldcausemindfulness
to be
I", sg. present;upa+Stha+ ape+tabba,
Satho hoti māyāvī— D. IHI. 45; M.
Satadhipateyyasabbedhamma—
A. caus.fut. pp.
1.96;II. 246;A. IHI.335
Sanhena vakkhami —Vin. II. 249 IV. 339
He is crafty anddeceitful
I shall speakin softterms;Vac+ All theDhammascomeunder Sati kappiyakarake
ssami(Skt.syami),
fut. 1°".
sg.,used mindfulness;
sati +adhipati+eyya, patiggahapetum —Vin. I. 206
Sandāsenauddharitvā —M. II. 75
also as pres. der, Whenthereis somebody to makeit
Havingpulledout by pincers:u(t) +
preparefor himtoaccept;Aappa+
Dhr or Hr +a +i + tva,absol.
Sanhena vakkhāmi, no pharusena- Satanusari
viiiianamhoti—D.I. iva,der,+Kr +aka,der.;pati + Grh
A.V.8I1 134.;M. I. 246, ahosi +dpe+tum,caus.inf.
Sanhamattikamdatva —Vin. II. 151
I shallspeaksoftly,notharshly Thereis consciousnessfollowing
Havingappliedsoftclay; Da +tva,
memory;satānusārīti Sati karaniyeamasati—Vin. IV. 111
absol.
Sanhenāyasmācudito no pharusena bubbenivāsānussatisampayuttam, Touchesin caseof necessity;/oc.
—A.III. 197 Cy. 914: Sati + anu + Sr RE, der. absl.:Kr +aniva,fut. pp.; @+Mrs +
Sanhavācoianavati —A. IV. 172
The venerableis accusedsoftly,not a+ ti,pres.3™.sg.
The one who speakssoftly in the
roughly;sanhena'- āyasmā;
Cudt i Satārakkhenacetasāsamannāgatā
-
gatheringof people;iana 3 vanta,loc.
+fa, pp. A. IHI. 138; V. 30, samannāgato Sati karaniyeuyyojeti—Vin. IV. 94
$ 7
&*
Thosewhoareendowedwitha mind Hecausesto sendwhenthereis
Satatakārī hoti satatavuttīsilesu- guarded
bymindfulness;
sati+ something tobedone;u(t) + Yuj+e +
Sanha sakhila sukhasambhasa
A. V.210 ārakkha
oe ra
ti, caus.pres.3™.Sg.
mihitapubbamgamaehisvāgata-
Constantin thepracticeof morality;
vādino abbhākutikā uttānamukhā
Satāsampaiānā
adhivāsenti
—Vin.
 Sati
Sativepullappattassa Satisampajannaya Sato

Havinggone,whenthereis something kenasamannāgato

, eirakatampi disciplinarymeasureon memorytoa namo,dat.is usuallyused,hereloc.;
tobedone eirabhāsitampi saritā, anussaritā person
whosemindfulness
is namo,indcl.;Kr +0 +hi, imper.24.
M. I. 356 improved;
sati +vipula +ya, der.+ Sg.
Sati karaniye porisiyam rukkham Heis mindfulandendowed withthe pa + Ap + ta, pp.; Da + e + tu, imper.
abhiruhitum —Vin. II. 138 highestformofattentionand ar se, Satenapisahassenapi
pahinanti-
To climb a treeto theheightof a man intelligence,
he remembers and Vin.IV.18
in caseof necessity;purisa + iva, recollectswhatwasdoneor spoken of, Satisampajannhaya samvattati—A. Send(messages)tomeevenwithone
der.;abhi +Ruh +i+ tum,inf, in the long past;sati +nipaka+ya, I1.44; III. 325 hundredandonethousand;
pa +Hi +
der.; cira +kata, cira + bhasita,pp.; It leadsto mindfulnessandawareness; na +nti,pres.3™.pl.
Satidovāriko ariyasāvako —A. IV. Smr+a+ i+ tu,der; anu+Smrta sati +sam +pa +Jan +ya, der.;
Ill +i + tu, der, sam +Vrt +a +ti, pres.3“. sg. Satenayasahassena
va parivuto-
Thenobledisciplewhohas
Vin.HL.89
mindfulnessas thedoor keeper;sari + Sati mussati—D. I. 19 Satisampajaniiesati hoti Surroundedbyonehundredor one
dvāra '- ika; der. Memory is lost; Mrs +ya +ti,pass. hirottappam—A. IV. 336 thousand;
pari + Vr +ta,pp.
pres.3. sg. Moralshameandfearis therewhen
Sati na upatthāti —M. I. 104 mindfulnessandawarenessis present; Satobhikkhuparibbaie—5. I. 13
Mindfulnessis not present;upa 3 Satimupatthāpehi,
māvippalapi
- hiri +ottappa TheBhikkhu,
being
mindful,
should
Stha + ti, pres. 3”.
2rd
sg. S. IV. 303 movearound;
pari+Vraj+e,opl.3".
Bemindful, don'tmutter;
upa1 5thā Satisambojjhamgo—A. V. 211 Sg. -..
Satinepakke tibbacchando—
A. IV. Mindfulness,thelimb of
a
+ Gpe +hi, caus. imper,2". sg,;mā,
15 prohibitive p. used withpst. or enlightenment;sati +sam +bodhi+ Satobhikkhuvihareyyasampajano,
The onewho hasa strongwill in imper.; vi +pa +Lap + i, pst. 3”, sg. amga ayamvo amhākamanusāsanī —D.
attentionandintelligence;tibha + II. 94
chanda Satisammosāuppaiianti —5. IV. 190 A bhikkhushouldlivewith
Satimuppādeti—
A. III. 263
Makes(others)mindful:u(t) +Pad+ Arisedueto theconfusionof mind mindfulnessandawareness,thisis our
Sati paceayeparibhunjati —Vin. IV. instruction
toyou;anu+Sas +ana +
e + fi, caus.pres. 3". sg.
83; I. 201,paäribhuliitum Satisammosā
nisīdantā
—Vin. II. E der.
Eatswhenthereis a reason:Joc. absl.; 114
Satim patilabhimsu —D. II. 272.
pari +Bhu(fi)j +a +ti, pres. 3”. sg. Sitting
downforgetfully;
ni +Sad+a Satovaassasati,satopassasati—M.
Re-gainedmindfulness;pati +Labh+
imsu,pst. 3™.pl. r nta,pr.p. 1.56
Sati paccupatthita hoti yavadeva Beingcontinuously mindfulhe
hanamattayapatissatimattaya—D. Satisammosapakireyya —A. I. 131 breathesin andbreathes out;sato+
Satiyāpaceāsāya—Vin. III. 203
II.292;
M.L5
.6 Whenthereis expectation;/oc.absl; Wouldscatterduetothelossof eva:theemphatic particleevais
Mindfulnessis present,iust for the memory;sati +sam+Mrs +a,der.; commonto bothterms;@+Svas+a
pati +asa
sakeof mereknowledgeandmere pa +Kir
ro
-- eyva,opt. 3"".
sg.
TÄ e +ti,pres.3”. Sg.
recollection;
pati +upa+Stha +i 3
Satiyasacchikaraniyo
—A. IL 183
la, pp.; yava +(d) +eva;pati +sati Satujjubhiitesunamokarohi —
S. I. Satosattassaucchedamvināsam
To beexperienced
bymindfulness;
sa
170 vibhavampaūiāpenti—D. I. 34;
+acchi +Kr +aniya,fut. pp.
Satimāsampaiāno —S. I. 12 Bow down to those who are straight M. I. 140;II. 228
The onewho is mindfulandwell aware foreward;sa tvamujubhiitesu Proclaimannihilation,
destructionand
Sativepullappattassasativinayam
non-existence
ofthe existingbeing:
detu —Vin. If. 79
Satimā hoti paramenasatinepak- 1.238; sa +tu +uju + bhūtesu; with As +nta,pr.p.;ud+Chid+a,der.;
Let theSamghaimposethe

853
 Sato

Satta Sattaratanam Sattahakalikam

vi +NaS +a, der.> yj 4 Bhi
pa+Jia +ape+nti, Caus.pres, 3".
pl.
Sato sampajano adhivasesi,
avihaāiiamāno
—
D. II. 99, 128
Being mindfulandwell aware,he
endured(thepain)withoutbeing
afflicted;adhi + Vas+e+s + i, caus.
PSt. 3". sg.; a + vi +Han +ya +
mana, pass. pr. Pp.
Sato sampajanoayusamkharam
ossali —S. V. 262
Being mindful andwell aware(He)
gaveuptheforceof life:9 +
pst.3”. sg.
Sattatālampi mahāsamuddeudakam
santhāti—A. IV. 191
The waterin the greatoceanremains
seventalashigh
Sattatalam vehāsamabbhuggantvā
+
mana, bhavarāga,avid ; sam+hi
+ana, der.
Sattannamsattahakaraniyena
pahite
gantum —Vin. I. 139
Togowiththedecision
thatthe
businessshouldbecarriedoutwithin
sevendaysandcomeback,whena
messageis sentby seven(people):
(bhikkhu, bhikkhunī,sikkhamana,
sāmanera, samaneri, upasaka,
upasika); satta +aha +karaniya;
pa
+Hi +ta,pp.:Gam+tum,inf.
Sattapadavītihārenagaechati—D.
AI
II. 15
Goes sevenstrides:satta+pada+yi
+ati + Hr + a, der.
Satta bojjhamgeyathābhūtam
bhāvetvā—D. II. 83
Havingcultivatedsevenlimbsof
enlightenmentproperly(asthey
Sattaratanamva nagam E
addhattharatanamva talapattikaya
chādetabbammaīiieyya —5. II. 222 Endowedwithseventruequalities;
Onewouldthinkofcoveringsevenor sam +anu+a +Gam+ta,pp.
sevenandhalf ratanashigh
elephant
Sattānamavihethakaiātiko—D. IHI.
witha pieceof palm leaf;ratanais I
166 i
equalto one and half feet;addha
A kindof personwhodoesnotharass
attha +ratana; Chad + e +tabba,
ilivingbeings:a +pi + Hid +aka,der.
+jatika
em
ilesāya—
Sattānamsamkilesāya — D. I. 53
Sattavassāniāgametu—D. II. 246
Let(Govinda)waitsevenyears;ā 7 For thepollutionof living beings
Gam +e +tu, imper.3™.sg. eee iānāti—Mi L
Sattānamhitāhitamiānāti —M
SattavassāniBhagavantamanu- 340 Sas ;
baddhā hoti , vinayam He knowswhatis beneficialanc
pariyāpunantī—Vin. II. 261 E harmfulfor living beings;hita +
a i "e 7% so
ShehadbeenfollowingtheBlessed ahita;Jan +nd +ti, pres.3”. S§
One for sevenyears,learning — sankattLNA
Vinaya(discipline);au +Badh. Sattahakaraniyenagacchati— Vi
IV. 297 Ki nih
t ta, pp ; pari + Ap + una +nti,
Goeswith the‘decisionof seven
Prep.

ought to be); bodhi +amga; davs’:bhikkhusand bhikkhuntsare

—D. IHI. 27
Havingiumpedup Seventālasinto the yathabhiitam,adv.;Bhit +e + Sattavassiko sīsābādho hoti —Vin.
generally
ka ex] ected not to go oul oj

iva, caus. absol. 1.270

Sky; sattatala may mean here seven
rainy retreat, but, for certain
spans(Spanis equal to 12 amgulas Thereis a sevenyearsold headache;
re
cle sons: theycango out with the
or 9 inches, S.E.D. 963); abhi +u(t)
Sattabbhantarā
naviiahitabbā
- Vin. Satta vassa ik
ika, 7;
der.; SISA
€ *
;
TIU a Ae
decisionthattheywould be back
E Gam'- twā,absol. III. 201 ābādha
ime.This is
withinsevendaystime.This is whe
what
lt shouldnotbeabandoneduptothe
distanceofseven abbhantaras;
satta+ i —Vin.
Satta sītāyo gaeehanti 'i I. 240
Sattannamanusayanampahānāya-
abbhantara; abbhantara = 28 cubits, Seven furrows go (with one
A. IV. 9 Sattāhakālakato —M. I. 169; Vin. I.
Cy. 654; vi +Ha +i + tabba,root ploughshare)
For theabandonment
ofseven 7. kalam kato
redup.fut. pp.
dormantdispositions:any i
Hasdiedseven aysago; satta+aha
daysago;sat
Sava: i
Sattahatthikafica īkam-
anikam—Vin.
Vin I.
Si +a, der. + kala + kata
Satta bhikkhusatani anūnāni 185 ae
anadhikāniahesum—
Vin. II. 307 Alsoa troopof sevenelephan
? sle £ Ss

Sattannamsafiiojandnam pahanaya
Thereweresevenhundred
bhikkhus, 127
-A. IV. 7
no moreno less;an +fina;an + Sattahi pakarehii parikkhitta
ikkhittā —D.
D II.
For theabandonmentof sevenfetters;
adhika; a+ Hii (Bhi) +a +s + um, 170 alee
Seven fetters are given here as aha +kala +ika, der.;pa t Hi te
Encircled by seven ramparts;pa
pst. 3”. pl.; sg.form is ahosi,0 tabba,caus.fut. pp.
anunaya,patigha, ditthi, wicikicchā, Ksip +ta, pp.
becomes e in the pl.

855
 Sattahajate
Sattāhaiāte bodhisatte—D. II. 14
Sevendaysafterthebirthof
Bodhisatta;satta +aha +jata; bodhi
+Satta( Saktaor sattva)
Sattahaparamamsannidhikarakam
paribhunjitabbam —Vin. I. 209: III.
sannidhikaram
Oneshouldkeepanduseit,
maximumsevendays;satta+aha
+paramam;sam + ni + Dha + i +
Kr + aka, der.
Sattaham ekapallamkena nisidi -
Vin. I. I
Satdown for sevendayswith one
posture(with
legscrossed);eka+pari
+amka
Sattāham kappati —Vin. I. 251
Allowable for sevendays;Klip +ya +
ti, pass.pres. 3. sg.
Sattāhamsatthantarakappo— D. IHI,
Sattussadamsatinakatthodakam
73
sadhafinam rajabhoggamranna
For sevendays,thereis an interim
Pasenadina Kosalena dinnam
periodof weapons;sattha+ antara 3
rajadayam brahmadeyyam
kappa
(Ukkatthamajjhavasati)
Sattesu
Sattahassaaccayena—Vin. I. 2
At theendof sevendays;ati +ava
(fromI)
Sattipaāiaram karitvā
dhanupākāram parikkhipitvā —D.
Il. 164
Havingmadea spear-cage and
encircledit with a rampartof bows:
sattihatthehi purisehi
parikkhipāpetvā,Cy. 605; Kr t it
tva, absol.; pari + Ksip + i + tvā,
absol.
Sattum dapesi —Vin. IV. 79
Causedtogive(him)a sweetened
flour-ball;Da +dpe+s +i, caus.pst.
Se. ē
Sattuyāpūretum— Vin. II. 116
To causeto fill withsweetened flour-
ball; Pr + e +tum,caus,inf.
—D.I.87
Sattesu
Outof compassionfor theliving
beingstoo;kKarund+ya +tā,der.;
pati+I (t) +ya,absol.
Sattesuvippatipaiianti —5. I. 73
Dosomethingwrong to thefellow
beings;vi +pati + Pad +ya +nti,
pres.3™.pl.
Sattesuhāyamānesusaddhamme
antaradhāyamāne—S. II. 224
Whenliving beingsaredeteriorating
andSaddhamma
isdisappearing;
Ha+
ya t māna, pr. p.; antara + Dha +ya
+mana,
pr.p.;loc.absl.
Satthakammam
karoti—Vin. I. 215
Makesa surgery
Satthakamnamatakam - Vin. II. 115 101
Asmallknifeanda pieceof felt (He)castsdoubtabouttheteacher,
Satthakāvā me vātā kuppeyyum-
A.IV. 320
Theweapon-like
windinmybody
wouldbe turbulent;amgamamgani
kantantītisatthakā,Cy. IV. 156;Kup
+ya +eyyum,
opt.3”.pl.
Sattha
Satthamāhareyyam —S.I. 121;IV.
57, āharissāmi
I shouldcommitsuicide;@+Hr +a +
eyyam,opt.I". sg.
Satthampāyāpesi—
D. II. 343
Made
thecaravan
move
on;pa+Ya+
ape+s* i, caus.pst.3%.sg.
Satthariagaravoviharatiappatisso
D. III. 244;M. II. 245;5. V. 234;
A. III. 247,viharanti
Beingdisrespectful andundeferential
towardstheteacher, heabides;a +
garu + a, der.; a +pati + Sru + a,
der.
Satthari kamkhativicikicchati
nadhimuccatinasampasidati —M. I.
hesitates
andis notfaithfulto the
teacher
andunhappy withtheteacher;
Kamks+a +ti,pres.3”.sg.; vi +
Cit+ (sa)+ti, desid.pres.3”. sg.;
na +adhi+Muc +ya +ti,pres.3”.
sg.;sam+ pa +Sad+a +ti,pres.
3 KI s'g.

Residesin Ukkattha
whichiscrowded
Sattaham sannivattokatabbo —Vin.
with people,full of grass,wood,water
1. 139 Satthagamanīyemaggesāsanka- Satthahārakam
pariyesanti—
S. IV.
andgrain,a royallandgivenby sammatesappatibhaye
—Vin.IV.63 62;V. 320
Shouldbebackwithinsevendays;
Pasenadi,theking of Kosala,a royal Ontheroadbelieved
tobeunsafe, Searchfora killer;sattha+Hr +aka,
satta +aha; sam + ni +Vrt +ta,pp.;
giftandthehighestdonation;
satta+ dreadful
andpassable
byacaravan; der.;pari +es(fromIs)+a +nti,
Kr +tabba,fut.pp.
ussadam;kattha +udakam;raja + pres.3”.pl.
Sattha
+Gam +aniya,fut.pp. sa >
Bhu(n)j +ya, fut.pp.; Da +ta,pp.
Sattahavaddalika sitavataduddini - Sanka
+sam+Man+ta,pp.;sa+
Da + (y) +a, der.; brahma+Da + Satthdca meparicinnomettavataya
Vin. I.3 Pati+bhaya
eyya,der.; adhi +d+ Vas +a+ ti, —A, IIL, 443
A continuousrain for sevendays,bad
pres.3". sg.; Ukkattham
is governed Satthapānissa
dhammam
desenti
- I haveservedtheTeacher
withlove;
daysbecauseofcold wind: sattaham
by theprefix adhi Vin. IV. 200 mettāvatāvātimettavultaya
avicchinnavutthikā,sītavātena
ExplaintheDhammato a person pāricariyāya,sattahi sakhā
disitadivasatta sītavātaduddin?,
Sattesuca kāruīiiatampaticca—D. having
aweapon
inthehand;
sattha Tathāgatammettavataparicarantt,
Cy. 958 ; satta +aha +vaddalika
11.38; M. I. 169;S. I. 138 +pani

857
 Sattha
Satthu Satthusasanam Saddhammassa
415,pari +Car +ta,pp. By thedisciplewholookslikethe
Satthusasanam
atidhavitabbam brahmins,
gods,andmen;
sa+samana
teacher;
satthu+kappa;Sru+aka,
Satthātamāmanteti—M. I. 123 maīihieyya
—M. III. 19;S. II. 103 +brahmana+ iya,der.
der.
The teachercalls you; fam = tuvam, (He)would think thatteacher’s
acc.$g.;ā t manta1 e + ti, denom. instructionshouldbeoverpassed; Saddakantaka khopanajhana vutta
Satthuca meparinibbanam
Pres. 33. sg. satthu+sGsana;ati Dhāv +i Bhagavatā— A. V. 133
bhavissati,yo mamamanukampako
+tabba,fut. pp.; oltyitabbais the Noisesarethornsto theihānas,said
—D. II. 143
Satthā me bhante Bhagavā, opp. by theBlessedOne;Vac+ta,pp.
Therewill alsobeParinibbana
ofmy
sāvakohamasmi —S. II. 220 teacherwho is compassionate
towards
VenerableSir, BlessedOne is my Satthusāsanesikkhāya aparipūra- Saddamanussāvesi
—
D. II. 205;S.V.
me
teacher,I ama disciple;sāvako + kārī— M. I. 438 423sāvesum
aham + asmi Onewho doesnot accomplishthe Causedtorepeatthevoice;saddam+
Satthucevasamvannito,
sambhavito course of trainingin thedispensation anu+Sru +e +s +i, caus.pst.3”.
ca vinhiinam sabrahmacārīnam—M.
Sattharam upanissayaviharati, of theteacher;a +pari +para: Pr + Sg.
1.110;5. II. 133;A. V. 225 a, der. +kart: Kr +a +f, der.
anfiataram va garutthaniyam
(He) hasbeenpraisedby theTeacher,
sabrahmacarim
—A. III. 393;IV. Saddhammatthitiya
andesteemedby the intelligent Satthenavanamukhamparikanteyya vinayanuggahaya —Vin. III. 21
151 co-celibates;
satthu+ca +eva;
He abidesin close associationwith the
~—
M. II. 216 For theestablishmentof the
satthu,gen.for instr.;sam+vanna (He)wouldslashthesurface
of the trueDhamma, tosupportthe
teacheror anyotherrespectableco-
+i+ fa,denom. pp.; sam+Bhi +e woundwith a weapon;pari +Kr(n)t+ discipline;vinaya+anu+ Grh
celibate;upa + ni + Sri+ ya, absol.;
+ i + ta, caus.pp.; vifiiiinam,gen. a+ eyya,opt. 3”. sg. +a, der.
garu +thana + iya, der.
for instr.
Satthevatthabbam
—Vin. III. 201 Saddhammam
sotukamo—A. I. 150
Satthārā anuggahītosāvako—S. II.
Satthupavivittassa
viharato—M.I, Shouldabideinsidethecaravan;Vas+ Theonewhoisdesirous
oflistening
274
14 tabba,
fut. pp. tothetrueDhamma;
sotum,inf. +
The disciple,supportedby theteacher;
While theteacheris abidingin kamo
anu +Grh + i + ta,pp.; Sru +aka,
solitude,gen.absl.;pa t vi t Vie+ Satthe
vassam
upagantum
—Vin. I.
der.
ta, pp. 152 Saddhammasavanam
nappamailati-
Toobserve
rainyretreat
inacaravan; A. IV. 25 | -

Sattha va dhammam deseti,

Satthu sāvikāya ca atthenaattho upa+Gam:+ tum,inf. He is notunheedful
oflistening to the
anfiataro va garutthaniyo
vyahiianenavyahianam trueDhamma; na +pa +Mad +ya +
sabrahmacari— D. III. 24] i e
samsandissatisamessatina Sada sato —S. I. 24; A. IV. 228 ti,pass.pres.3'".Sg.
Either theteacheror anotherco-
virodhayissati,yadidam Beingalwaysmindful;sada,indel.
celibateholdinga respectable
aggapadasmim —S. IV. 379 Saddhammassa
na vodāyati—A. V.
position,explainstheDhamma:Drs +
In regardtothehighest
state,the Sadutiyikaayya—Vin. IV. 318 169
e t ti, caus. pres. 3". sg.; garu --
exposition of theteacherandthe The venerable has a second; sa + The trueDhammais not clear to him;
thana + iya, der.
femaledisciplewill coincide,tally dutiva +ka, der. saddhammo +assa;vi +0 +Da +ya
andwill notcontradict,
in letter +ti,pres.3”. sg.
Satthā vā vihāyissati —Vin. I. 292
andspirit; sam +Syand+a+i Sadevakeloke samarake
He will misstheCaravan;vi +Ha + (y)
+ssati,fut. 3. sg.; sama+e + sabrahmakesassamanabrāhmaniyā Saddhammassa sammosaya
+i +ssati,fut. 3. sg.
ssati,denom.fut. 3". s@.;virodha paiāyasadevamanussāya—S. I. 160 antaradhānāya s amvattanti—S. II.
+aya +i + ssati, denom.fut. Intheworldofgods,Māras, Brahmas 224;A. I. 17-samvattati
Satthukappenasāvakena—M. I. 150
ORE, andin thecommunityof recluses, Leadto theconfusionand

859
 Saddhamma
Saddha Saddhāpadānam
Saddhim
disappearance
of the trueDhamma;
Those who haverenouncedhome-life
patitthitā—M. I. 478 Saddhayavaddhati,bhogenahayati
andgoneto homeless
lifeduetofaith Faithis setin, rootedandestablished:
ana,der; sam +Vrt +a +nti,pres. —Vin.IV. 178
on understanding:
saddhd,abl.8.) an
a'i pi ni +Mid--ta,pp. Increases
in faith,decreases
in wealth:
* agara +iva, der; pa + Vraj+i+
Vrdh+a +ti,pres.3”.sg.;Ha +ya
ta,pp. Saddhāpadānam
- A. V. 338
Saddhammāvutthāti asaddhamme +ti,pres.3. sg.
patitthāti—A. IHI.268 Characteristicof faith;apadānesu-
Saddhadutiyapurisassahoti—S. I, lakkhanesu,Cy. V. 82; saddha4
He getsaway from thetrueDhamma Saddhāyasamannāgato hoti—M.
38 apadānam
andsettlesdown in untrue Dhamma; IHI,99
Fora personfaithis thesecond
vit u(t) + Stha + ti, pres. 3™.sg; Endowedwithsaddhā
(faithon
(partner);dutiyati ..dutiyika,Cy.I Saddhāparibhāvitameittam—S. V.
Pati +Stha+ti,pres.3. sg. understanding)
94; du -- tiya, der: 369
Themind,perfectlytreatedby faith; Saddhāyikopaccayiko—M. II. 71;S.
Saddhādeyyamna vinipātetabbam- saddha+pari +Bhii +e +i +ta,
A. V. 169 I. 101
Vin. I. 297 caus.pp. Faithfulandtrustworthy;
saddha+(y)
Or he becomesone who over-
Whatisgivenbyfaithshouldnotbe +ika,der.;pati +aya(fromI) + ika,
estimatesoneself in referenceto the
wasted;vi +ni + Pat +e +tabba, Saddhāmattakenavahati der.
trueDhammas;adhi -- māna 3 ika,
caus.fut. pp. pemamattakena—
M. I. 444
der.
Proceeds with mere faith, mere Saddhāyeva payirupāsanti—M. II.
Saddhādeyyambhuhiasi—Vin. IHI. affection;saddhā 170
Saddhammo na ciratthitiko hoti -
111 Vah+a +ti,pres.3".sg. Attendon(this)bymerefaith;
S. V. 172;A. IV. 84
Youeatwhatisgivenbyfaith;Da+ pari +upa+As +a +nti,meta.
The trueDhammadoesnot lastlong;
eyva,der.;Bhu(ii)j +a +si,pres.2%. Saddhāmattamhoti pemamattam
- pres.3”.pl.
cira + Stha + i + ti + ka, der.
$g. S. V. 377
There is mere faith, mere affection Saddhindriyamadhimattam—A. I.
Saddhādeyyamvinipāteti—A. HI. 118
kusalam bhāveti —A, IV. 353
139-40 Saddhāmūlaiātāpatitthitā—A. I. Thefacultyof faithis predominant;
Resortingto faith(he) abandonsbad
Wastes
whatisgivenbyfaith 162 saddha+ indriya
Thefaithis rootedandestablished:
redup.pres.3.
> s¢.- Bhit +e +ti,
Saddhadeyyamviharam paribhui mila +Jan +ta, pp.; pati +Stha +i Saddhim abhavissa —S. IV. 401
caus.pres. 3. sg.
iati —A. IV. 134 F fa, pp. It wouldhavebeenequalwith;
Makes useof theresidencegivenby saddhim, indel. used with instr; a +
Saddhassakulaputtassa—D.II. 140 LAR
Joa mes
faith Saddhāyagacchāmi
- S. IV. 298 Bhii +a+ i+ ssa,cond.3™.sg.
For a faithful family member
I goby faith(I maintainon faith):
Saddhādeyyāni bhoianāni bhuāiitvā gaccha+mi,pres.1".sg.
Saddhassagharamesino—A. III. 354
—D:LS i
For a personwho is faithfuland
Havingenioyedthefoodgivenbyfaith Saddhaya
fanamevapanitataram
-
leadinga family life: gharam +es
S. IV. 298
(fromIs)+ 7,der.
Saddhāni karoma —
A. V. 269 Itisindeed
knowledge
whichis Saddhimorodhena—Vin. I. 290
We performfuneralritesfor thedead; Superior
to faith;Adnam+eva; With the harem;0 +Rudh +a, der.
Saddha agarasmaanagariyam
saddha = Skt. Sraddha thesuffixtara indicates
pabbaiitā —M. I. 16;S. IV. 337;
comparison,
usedwithabl.or Saddhimeaturamginiyāsenāya—D.
pabbajito
Saddhā nivitthā hoti mūlaiātā instr. II. 172

860 861
 Saddhim
Saddho
Santam
With thearmy of four divisions: cat;
trustworthy
+ ® +amga +ini Saddhohoti, saddahatiTathagatassa Causestobreakcontinuity;sam+ Tan
bodhim—M. I. 356;II. 128;5. V. +ti, der.; vikopetitiviyojeti,Cy. 438;
Saddheyyavacasānāmaāgataphalā
Saddhim bhikkhusamghena—M. I. 196;A. II. 66 vi +Kup +e+ ti, caus.pres.3”. sg.
abhisametāvinī viūiātasāsanā—Vin.
236 Heis faithful,believesin the
IH. 189
Withagroupof bhikkhus enlightenment
of theTathāgata; SantappitotayabhaginiBhagava
‘By one of reliablewords’means
the
saddha+a, der.;samor sat (Skt. mamsena —Vin. III. 208
onewhohasattained
thefruits,
Saddhim bhikkhusahassena—S. IV. Srat) +Dha +a +ti, pres.3. sg. Sister,theBlessedOnehasbeenfed
realisedthetruthand understood
the
19 byyouwithmeat;sam+Trp +e +i+
teaching;saddha +eyya,der.+ vaca
With one thousandbhikkhus Sadhūtipatisunitvā—Vin. IV. 301 ta, caus. Pp.
(Ss)+ a, instr.; nama,indel.usedfor
Havingrepliedsayingall right;pati +
definition; 4 +Gam +ta,pp. +
Saddhivihārikam ādāya — Vin. I. 59 Sru +na@+ i + tva,absol, Santamhākam sikkhāpadāni
Phala; abhi +sam +e (fromI) +tavi
With theSaddhivihārika(oneabiding gihīgatāni,gihīpi no iānanti idam
+int, der.; vi +Jia +ta,pp. + Sanaceamkārāpenti — Vin. II. 267
together);
@+Da +ya (havingtaken) vo samananam sakyaputtiyanam
sasana: Sas +ana, der.
absol. Causeto performdancing;Kr +Gpe+ kappati,idamvo na kappatīti—Vin.
nti,caus.pres. 3”. pl. II. 288
Saddhe va thalipake va yaiiie va Our rulesoftraining havegoneto
Saddhiviharikena upaiihāyamhi
pahune va —M. II. 154 Sanathaviharatha, ma anatha—A. thelaypeople,evenourlaypeople
sammāvattitabbam—Vin. I. 46
At thefuneralfeast,banquet,
sacrificial V. 23 know,thisis permissible to the
The oneabidingtogetherwith the
feastandatthefeastforguests; Abidewith a support,notwithouta recluses,sonsofthe Sakyan,thisis
Preceptorshouldbehaveproperly;
brahmanic ceremonies support;sa +natha; ma,prohibitive notpermissible; santi+amhakam;
samma,indcl.; Vrt + i +tabba,fut.
p., usedwith pst. or imper. gihi +api;Jan +na +nti,pres.3”.
PP.
Saddho ca hoti upasamkamitāca- pl.; Sakyaputta + iva, der.;Klp +ya
A. IV. 337 Sanikamnillokema — D. II. 333 +
<
pres.
2rd
9. Sg.
Saddhivihāriko samgahetabbo
He is faithfulanda visitor;upa +sam Welook into it slowly; sanikam,
anuggahetabbouddesena
+Kram +i +tu, der. indel.; ni Santamassana parigūhanti—A. IV.
paripucchaya ovadena anusasaniya
10
—Vin. II. 228
Saddho dayako danapati, SanidānamsamanoGotamo Theydo notconcealtohimwhatis
The onewho is abidingwith the
anavatadvarosamanabrahmana- dhammam
desetinoanidānam
—M. available;
As +nta,prp.; pari +Guh
preceptorshould be treatedproperly
kapanaddhikavanibbakayacakanam 1.9 +a+nti, pres.3”. pl.
andassistedin termsof recitation,
opanabhito —D. I. 137 RecluseGotamateachestheDhamma
questioning,adviceandinstruction;
(He) is faithful,generous,
and witha foundation,notwithouta Santamcetovimuttimupasampajja
sam +Grh +e +tabba,fut.pp.; anu
a lordof generosity; hekeeps foundation; sa 3 viharati—A. II. 165
+Grh +e t tabba,fit. pp.
his doors open for thepoor, caus. pres. 3'", sg. Havingattained release
of mindwhich
wayfarers,
paupersandbeggars; is serene,heabides;Sam +fa,pp.;
Saddhenakulaputtenapattabbam-
hehasbecomea springforthe Santatakārīsantatavuttīsīlesu—A.
D. II. 112
needy;Dd +aka,der.;an +dvata V. 158
To beattainedby a faithfulfamily
+dvara: G +Vr +ta,pp.; The one who is continuously Santambhikkhumāpuceha—Vin.
member;
pa +Ap +tabba,fut.Pp.
samana +bradhmana+kapana+ Practisingmorality;sam +Tan
+ ta, IV. 307
addhika + vanibbakat yācaka; Pp. + kara + f der; santata + Vrt + Havingconsulted
thebhikkhuavailable
Saddheyyavacasāupāsikā—Vin. III.
opdna udapāna:uda =ua =O ti -- tf, der atthemoment;@+Prch +ya, absoi
188
+pdna, well of drinking water;
A femalelay disciplewhoseword is
Bhii +ta, pp. Santatimyikopeti —Vin. IL. 73 Santamyevaādīnavamacikkhati-

863
 Santam
Vin. IV. 312
Explainsexistingdefectsonly:a +
Khya + ti, intens.pres. 3”. SQ.
Santam va atthiti āassati —A. V. 36
What is ekistinghe will know thatit
exists;As + fi, pres. 3”. Sg.; Jia
ssati,fut. 3". sg.
Santaruttaraparamam saditabbam -
Vin. IIT. 214
At most,innerandouterrobeshould
be accepted;sa +antara + uttara +
parama; Svad + e + i +tabba, caus.
Sut.pp.
Santaruttarena gamam pindaya
pavisi —Vin. I, 298
Wearinginnerandouterrobeonly, he
enteredthevillage for alms:
Santaruttara: antaravadsaka and
uttarāsamga;pa -- Vis +i, pata”
Sg.
g
Santaruttarenaianapadacārikam
pakkamanti —Vin. III. 198
(They) setout on a tour in thecountry
with innerandouterrobes:pa +Kram
hig E mii,pres. 3”. pl.
Santikāyapi kīlanti —Vin. II. 10
Play with santika;santikanti
santikakīlā kīlanam, ekaiihamthapitā
sāriyo vā sakkharāyovā acālentā
nakhenevaapanentica upanentica,
sacetatthakaci calati parāiayo hoti,
D. Cy. 85; Krid +a +nti, pres. 3’.
pl.
Santike dūtam pāhesi—Vin. I. 92
Causedto senda messengerto;
santike,loc. for acc.:pat Hite-ts
Santuttho Santettha
Sandamana
+i, caus.pst.3. sg.
Santetthaekaccedevata Santhatasammutim
yācati—
Vin. III.
samkilitthābhā —M. III. 151 228
Santikho panamesabrahmacari
Here,thereare somedeitiesof Asks fortheapprovalof a spread;Yāc
iānam passamviharanti —A, I. 149
defiledradiance;santi +ettha;sam+ ta t ti, pres.3". sg.
I haveco-celibates
whoabideknowing
Klig +ta, pp. +abha
andseeing;iānam Passam,pr.p.
+ Santhatāniuiihitvā —Vin. III. 231
nom. sg.
Santepatirūpe gāhakedātabbam- Havingthrownawaythespreads; Ujjh
Vin. I. 307 +i +tva,absol.
Santindriyā bhavissāma
It shouldbegiven,whenthereis a
santamānasā —A. I. 65
suitablereceiver;santepatiriipe Santharampannapehi—A. |. 277
We shall be with serenefacultiesand gahake, loc. absl.; As + nta, prp.;
Makethespreadready;pa +Jaa +
sereneminds;Sam +ta,pp. + Grh +aka,der.;Da +tabba,
fut. a . ae
ape +hi, caus.imper.2
indriva; mana(s)+a, der.
pp
Santharitvakatamavayimam—Vin.
Santim pappuyyacetaso—A. I. 138; Santeyevaattani kusaledhammena III. 224
Vin. II. 156 icchati parehi āāyamāne
—A. IV. Thatwhichis unwoven andmadeafter
Having reachedpeaceof mind;pa + 218 spreadingout;sam+Sir +i +tva,
Ap + nu +va, absol. Whenthereare wholesomethings absol.;Kr +ta,pp.; a + Va +ya +
withinhimself,hedoesnotwish ima, der.
Santutthassāyamdhammo—A.IV. themto be known by others;sante
229 +(y) +eva; Is +ya +ti, pres. Santharepatiyadenti—Vin. Il. 162
This Dhammais for theonewhois 3”. sg.;Jia +ya +māna,pass. Preparemats;pati + Yat+e +nfi,
contented;sam +tutthassa:Tus+
pr.p. caus.pres.3”.pl.
ta-- pp. H avam
Santoceva panito ea asecanakoca- Santhāgāram
5 aga acirakāritam
acirakaritam—D.III.
Santutthim vannemi—Vin. I. 282 Vin. III. 70 207
| praisecontentment;vanna+e +mi, Serene,excellentandunmixed;pa + Theassembly hall,causedtobebuilt
denom.pres. I". sg. Ni + ia, pp. ad Sic - e t ma t ka, recently;
a +cira +Kr +e +i +fa,
caus, der caus. pp.
Santuttho hoti itarītarena —A, II.
27 Santosamvijjamana
lokasmim
—M.
He is satisfiedwith thisandthat 1.24,341; Vin. III. 89
Existingandtobefoundintheworld;
Santutthohoti kāyaparihārikena As +nta,pr.p.; sam +Vid +ya +
cīvarena
kucchiparihārikena
pinda- mana, pass PY.D
pātena—D. I. 71;M. I. 180;III. 34, fa, pp.
hoti missing Santohamasminibbutohamasmi
(He is) satisfiedwith therobe anupādānohamasmi —M. II. 237 Sandamānāparamgantva—S. V.
protectingbody,andthefood I amcalmed,I amcooledandI haveno 396
protectingstomach;kdya + Havinggonebeyondwhileflowing
clinging;ni +Vr +ta,pp.; an +upa
pariharika: pari +Hr +a +ika, +@ + Da
r
+ ana, der.; As
A + pres.
mi, pre down:Syand+a +mana,pr.p.; Gam
+tva, absol.
der.; kucehi +parihdrika, der.
 Sandittha
Sannahatha
Sannicayam Sannivutthapubbaficeva
Sandissati saddhāpadānesu—A.V.
I. 157 Sannicayam karonti —Vin. IT. 135; 161
337
Bhikkhuswho were friendsand
Will bemanifested
in the III. 242 Bhikkhus,therearetwothingsto be
associates;sam +Dr§ + ta, pp.; sam (They)hoardup;sam +ni +Ci +a, donebythosewhohaveassembled:
characteristicsof faith:
+ Bhaj + ta,pp. der.;Kr +o +nti, pres. 3. pl. talkingsomethingtrue(meaningful)or
saddhāpadānesūti
saddhālakkhanesu,Cy. V. 82; sam observingnoblesilence;sam+ni +
Sanditthikam dānaphalam—A. IHI. Sannidhikatamāmisam ussannam- Pat +i +ta,pp.; Kr +aniya,fut,pp.;
+Dr§ +ya +ti,pass,pres,3" 5g.;
39 Vin.II. 270 dhamma+ i, der.
saddha +apadanesu
The fruit of alms-giving which should Abundant werethedainties
hoarded
up;
beexperiencedhereandnow: sam + u(t)+Syad+ta,pp. Sannipatitvāanutthunimsu
—D. IHI.
Sandhanam
pafiapenti—M. II. 180
Dr§ +ta,pp. +ika,der. 86
They makeit knownthatit is hisown
Sannidhikarakam upakkamimsu Haviggatheredtogether
they
property;pa +Jitd +dpe +nti,caus.
Sanditthikam nibbānanti .. vuccati paribhunjitum —D. III. 90 deliberated;
sam+ni +Pat +i +tva,
pres.3. pl.
—A.I. 158 Theybeganto hoardandeat;upa + absol.;anu +Stan+imsu,pst.3”. pl.
It is saidthatNibbanais tobe Kram + imsu,pst. 3”. pl.; pari +
Sandhavitam samsaritammamaā-
experiencedhereandnow: Vac+ya Bhu(ni)j+i +tum,inf. Sannipatitvaukkhipati—Vin. I. 239
ceva tumhākaāea—S. V. 431
+ ti, pass. pres. 3™. sg. Havinggatheredtogethersuspends;
Hasrun throughandroamedthrough 2
Sannidhikārakam bhoianam u(t) +Ksip +a +ti,pres.3”. sg.
by you andme;sam +Dhav +a +i+
Sanditthikam nibbanam —A. IV. bhunjasi?—Vin. IV. 86
la, pp.; sam +Sr +a+ i+ ta,pp:
453 Do you eatfood storedup?;sam+ Sannipatitvāyassayamvattatitam
Nibbanais to be experiencedin this nidhi + Kr +aka, der. ajjhesama—M. III.10
Sandhāvitvā samsaritvā
life Havingassembled, wemakea request
dukkhassantam
karoti—A. IV.381 Sannidhikadrakekame of himwhohasa mastery
overthat;
Havingrunthroughandroamed
Sanditthika dhanafijani —D. III. paribhunjitum —A. IV. 370 valtatīti pagunam hutvā āgacchati,
through
(he)putsanendtoDukkha; To hoardmaterialthingsandenjoy
182 Cy. 72;Vrt +a +ti,pres.3”. sg.;
dukkhassa +antam
Visible loss of wealth:sam +Dr§ +ti them adhi +es(fromIs) +a +ma,pres.I".
+ ka, der.; dhanam +jani Sg.
Sandhimpichindati,nillopampi Sannidhikaraparibhogamanuyutta -
harati, ekāgārikampi karoti, D.I. 6 Sannipātamagamāsi—Vin. II. 286
Sanditthiko dhammo—A. I. 157
paripanthepititthati,paradārampi Engagedin storingandappropriating Wenttotheassembly;
REID
sam+ni+ Pat
Dhammais to beexperiencedhereand
gacchati —M. I. 87; A. I. 153, the thingsof necessities;sam +nidhi + +a,der;a+Gam+a+s +i,
now
last is missing doublepst.3”. sg.
Kr +a, der.; pari + Bhuj +a, der.;
Breaksintohouses,
plunders,
burgles, anu + Yuj +ta, pp.
Sanditthiparāmāsī hoti ādhānagāhī
ambushes,goesto others’wivestoo; Sannipatikaabadha—A. V. 110
duppatinissaggi— D. III. 45; M. I.
Chi(n)d +a +ti, pres. 3”. sg.; Hr +a Sannidhipekho
dānamdeti—
A. IV. Ailmentscausedby theconfluence
43, 96; II. 246;A. IHI. 335
+ti, pres. 3. sg.; eka + agara + ika, 60 (ofbile, phlegm,andwind); sam+ni
He is one,holdinghis own views
der, Givesalmswith thehope
of storing: +Pat +ika, der.
fast,holdinghis viewsadamantly
andnotgiving themupeasily;sam sam +nidhi +apekha;Da +e +ti,
Sannahathabhikkhave pattacivaram pres. 3”. sg. Sannivutthapubbaficevasallapita-
+ditthi; Dr§+ ti 4Pardmdsa +i,
~ Vin. I. 291 pubbaāeasākacchāeasamāpailita-
der.; Gdhana +Grh +i, der. ;
Bhikkhus,puton(your)robeandbowl; Sannipatitinam vo bhikkhave pubbā—M. IHI. 152
du +pati +ni 4 Srj +ta,pp.
sam+Nah +a +tha,pres.2".pl.; dvayamkaraniyam,dhammiva Haslivedtogether
, talkedtogetherand
der.
regular verb is sannayhati kathā,ariyovātunhībhāvo
—
M. I.

867
 Sannisinnagabbha
Sappabhāsam Sappatihariyam Sappuriso
thepast;sam +ni +Vas+ta,pp. tobeunfriendly;a@
+drubha(from
pubba; sam + Lap + i +ta, pp.; sam Sappatihariyam samanoGotamo Sappāyemattamnaiānāti—A. II.
Druh)
+a + Pad +ya +i +ta,pp. dhammamdeseti, no appatihariyam 143
-M. II. 9 Hedoesnotknowtherightmeasure
Sapadanam pindapato paribhuaji- RecluseGotamacausesto explainthe
Sannisinnagabbha bhikkhunisu (limit)of thesuitable
tabbo —Vin. IV. 191 Dhammarationally,notirrationally;
pabbaiitāhoti—Vin. II. 278
Almsfood shouldbeeatenin an sakāranantiattho, Cy. III. 241; sa + Sappitelenakayamabbhanjitva-
A pregnantwomanhasenteredinto
orderly manner(with a limit):tattha pati +Hr +e + iya, caus.der.;Dr§ + M. I. 343;A. II. 207
thebhikkhuniOrder;sam+ni +Sad tattha odhim akatva anupatipatiya; ; caus.pres.
+3.Qhsg.
e +ti, Havinganointed thebodywithghee
+ ta, pp. + gabbha; pa + Vraj + i +
Cy. 893
andoil; sappināca telenaca, Cy.III.
fa, Pp.
Sappanakamudakam paribhunjati- 12;abhi$ Ahi t i t tvwā,absol;
Sapadanampindaya caramano- Vin. IV. 125
Sannisinnanam Sannipatitanam
M. II. 61;S. I. 166;Vin. L.208 Makesuseof watercontainingliving Sappināodanammadditvā— Vin. IV.
ayamantarākathā udapādi —S. IV.
Going on almscollectionwitha limit beings;sa +pana +ka, der. 91
325 or from houseto housein succession; Havingmixedricewithghee;Mrd +a
This conversationaroseamongthose
sa t apadānam, apadanam vuccati Sappayakiriya arogyassaaharo—A. +i +tva,absol.
who hadassembledandsattogether;
paricchedo, Vin. Cy. 1148;Car +a+ V. 136
sam + ni +Sad + ta,pp.; sam +ni4
mana, pr.p. Suitableactionis thefood for good Sappinamayesammamsam
Pat +i +ta,pp.; u(t) +a +Pad 4i,
77d e
health;aroga +ya, der. kappatitesamsappi—Vin. HI. 251
pst. ears Sg.
Saputtadāro upatitthitva parivisati Gheemeans gheeof thosewhosemeat
—Vin. II. 77 Sappāyamupanāmeti—
A. III. 144 is permissible;
Kip +ya +ti,pass.
Sapattake citte paccupatthite—
D. I.
Havingstoodnearbywithhiswifeand (He)causestoprovidewiththe pres.3™.sg.
228
children he servesfood;sa +putta+ Suitable;upa +Nam + e +ti, caus.
When thehostile mind is present;pati
dara;upa +tittha+i +tvā,absol.a pres. 3. sg. Sappiva telamva valikayaasittam
F upa + Stha +i + ta,pp.
rare form; pari + Vis +a+ ti, pres. —A.1.278 )
haa
apa
ata
taanga
koaa
Sappāyānibhesajjani —A. I. 120 Gheeor oil sprinkledon thesand;a +
Sapattim amgarakatahena okiri -
Suitablemedicine Sic +ta,pp.
Vin. TIL. 107
Saputto sabhariyo saparisosamacco
(She) poureda pot of embersover the Sappāyānibhoianāni —A. I. 120 Sappurisasamsevo
—A. II. 245;V.
—D.I. 116,II. 148 ————-
co-wife; sapatti(Skt.sapatnī,a 114 I
Withchildren,wife,followers
and Suitablefood
womanwho shares the same Association
withgoodpeople;sam +
friends; sa + amacca a.
husband);0 +Kir +i, pst. 3. sg, Sev + a, der.
Sappāyāsappāyam
naiānāti—A. IHI.
Sappatikammāpatti—A. 1.21 144
Sapatto sapattassa pacuratthāya na Sappurisokuleiāyamāno—A. IV.
The offencethatcanbe redressed;
sa (He)doesnotknowwhatissuitable
nandati—A. IV. 96 andwhatis not; sappdya+ 244 ERAI,
+patikamma +dpatti
The rival doesnot reloiceover his asappāyam A goodperson,beingbornin a family:
rival's abundance
of wealth:Pacura Jan + ya + mana, pass. PF.D.
Sappabhasam cittam bhaveti —S. V
+atthaya;Nand +a +ti,pres.3. Sappāyāsappāyesu
hīnappanītesu
263; A. II. 45; IV. 86 bhāveyyāsi
g
SR.
He cultivatesa radiantmind; kaphasukkasappatibhāgesu
sappabhāsantidibbacakkhu- dhammesu—A. IV.33
Sapathaficaakamsuadrūbhāya- Inthethingssuitable
andunsuitable,
āānobhāsena
sahobhāsam,
Cy.Ill.
Vin. I. 347 lowandhigh,blackandwhite;sa+ goodperson;Jan +nd +eyya,opt.
84; sa +pa +Bhās -- ä, der.; Bhū'
They also promised(to eachother)not Patibhaga (with counterpart) 3”, sg.
e +ti, caus.pres.3. sg.

869
 Saphala
Saphalā saudrayā —D. II. 251
Fruitfulandyielding;sa 3Phala;sa
udraya: u(t) + ®4 aya (from 1)
Sabbakanhānicīvarānidhārenti-
Vin. IL. 267
(They) weartotallyblackrobes;Dhr +
e +nll, caus.pres.3. pl.
Sabbakammakkhayampatto—A. II.
24
The one who hasreachedtheendofall
Kammas;sabba +kamma+Khaya;
pa +Ap +ta,Pp.
Sabbakammanamakiriyam
pannapeti—A. II. 232
He proclaimsbarrennessofall
Kammas;pa +Jia +dpe + ti, caus.
pres. 2 se
Sabbakammesukammappatto—Vin.
1.319
Entitled in all ecclesiaticalacts;
kamma--pa 3Ap + ta,pp.
Sabbakammehijivitam kappeyya-
A. III. 229
(He) keepshimselfup by doingall
sortsof work; in thecommonidiom it
is jivikam kappeyya
Sabbakamehisantappetva—D. II.
185
Having madethemSatisfywith
everythingtheyliked:sam +Trp +ya
" e t iā, caus.pass.absol.
Sabbakāyenaavaloketi —M. II. 137
He looks (at Something), turning the
whole body(towardsit); ava +Lok 4
e +ti, pres. 3 sg
Sabbatthakam
Sabbakālam patibahanti—Vin. II.
173
Keep othersout all thetime;pati +
Bah +a +nti,pres,374pl.
Sabbakiccāni nikkhipitvā —Vin. II.
154
Havingputasideall work;nj 4 Ksip
i+ Iwā,absol.
Sabbagandhānam
eitakamkaritvā-
D. II. 142
Havingbuilt a funeralpyrewithall
kindsof fragrantwood; Ci +ta,pp.+
ka, der.
SabbagandhodakenaBhagavato
citakamnibbāpesum —D. II. 164
TheycausedtoextinguishBlessed
One’sfuneralpyrewithallkindsof
scentedwater;ni +Va +dpe+5+
um,caus.pst. 3’. pl.
Sabbanhū sabbadassāyīaparisesam
īānadassanam patiiānāti, carato
ca me titthato suttassaca
jagarassacasatatamsamitam
īānadassanam paccupa(thitanti
—M.
1.93
All knowerandall seerclaims
knowledgeandvision in their
entiretysaying,knowledge
andvision
standby all thetimefor mewhileI
waswalking,standing,
sleepingand
keepingawake;sabbam+Jiid +i
der.;sabba +dassa+avi,der.;pati
+Jain +nd +ti,pres.3™.sg.;
satataim,samitam,adv.;pati t upa'
Stha +i +ta,pp.
Sabbatthakam
mahamattam
—
Vin. I.
207; III. 249
Sabbatthamena
Chief ministerattendingon all matters Duetothenon-application
(prime minister?); sabba +attha +
ka, der.
Sabbatthāmenagacchanto
—M. II.
99
Goingwithfull strength;
sabba+
thama;gaccha + nta,pr.p.
Sabbadarathakilamathaparilaham
patippassambheyya—A. IIL. 238
Hewouldcalmdownall fatigue,
languid and excessive heat(ofthe
body); sabba +daratha+kilamatha
+parilaha; pati +pa +Sra(m)bh+
eyya,opt. 3”. sg.
Sabbadukkhappahānāya —5. I. 132
To driveawayall afflictions;sabba+
dukkha +pa +Ha +ana,der.
Sabbadhammamilapariyayam—M.
I.1
Rootcauseof all things;neyyatthatta
cassasuttassa,na catubhiimakapi
sabhāvadhammā sabbadhammāti
veditabbā.Sakkāyaparivāpannā
bana tebhūmakādhamma va
anavasesatoveditabbā,Cy. I. 18;
sabba +dhamma+miila +pari +(y)
+aya (fromI)
Sabbadhammesuanodhimkaritva
444
To causeto establishthenotionof no
soulonall phenomena
without
any
reservation;an +odhi (limit);upa *
Stha +dpe +tum, caus. inf.
Sabbanimittānam
amanasikārā
—S.
IV. 269
871
Sabbamafiitanantyeva
ofall signs
onmind
Sabbanimittānam amanasikārā
ekaecānam vedanānamnirodhā—S.
V. 154
Duetothenon-applicationofall signs
on mindandthecessationof certain
feelings;Vid+e +ana,caus.der.;ni
+Rudh+a, der.
Sabbanimittani
annatopassati—S.
IV. 50
Heseesallsignsdifferently;
passa+ II
Sabbapaccantimesu ianapadesu -
Vin. I. 197;IV. 119
In veryremoteregionsor in all border
lands
Sabbapathamam yevaāgantvā—D.
IHI. 18
Havingcomefirst;ā t Gam1 Ivā,
absol.
Sabbapānabhūtahitānukampī
viharati—M. 1.179
Abideswithcompassion towardsall
formsof livingbeings;sabba+pana
+bhita +hita +anukampa+7, der.
Sabbapāsandikabhattam kātum-
Vin. IV. 74
To givea mealtoall sectarians;
pasanda+ika,der.; Kr +tum,inf.
Sabbaphāliphullāsala—M. 1.212
Salatreesarefully blossomed;
sabba
+phaliphulla
Sabbamannitanantveva
 Sabbamaharamgarattani
Sabbam Sabbam Sabbasamkharehi
samatikkamamunisantotivuccati-
not in anyotherway; fatha+eva;
M. III. 246 Sabbamsamghikam senasanam Sabbalokeeaatammayobhavissāmi
ahhathā, indcl.
Sageis calleda saintforthe bhāiesum- Vin. II. 171 —A.IHI.444
reasonof transcendingall formsof (They)causedto apportiontheentire I shallnotbeidenticalwithanythingin
Sabbam tam pubbekatahetu—M. II,
conceptualisation;sabba + lodgingbelongingto theSamgha; theworld; tammaya meanscraving
215
mannitanam+ tu +eva: Man + samgha-- ika, der.; Bhai te ts - andwrongview,Cy.III. 415
All thatisduetowhatisdoneinthe
ya +i+ ta,pp.; sam +ati + Kram um,caus.pst. 3". pl.
past;pubbe+kata+hetu
+ a, der; Vae+ya+ ti, pass.pres. Sabbavedayitāni anabhinanditāni
3rd TE
> «+SZ. Sabbamsāpateyyamca te hotu- sītibhavissanti —5. II. 83;A. II. 198
Sabbam dukkhamnijjinnam
Vin.I. 274 All thatis feltandnotdelightedin will
bhavissati —M. II. 214
Sabbamaharamgarattanicivarani Lettheentirepropertybeyours;sa + becomecool;sabba+ Vid +aya +
All afflictions will beexhausted:
ni +
dharenti—Vin. I. 306 pati + eyya,der. i +ta,caus.pp.; an +abhi+Nand+
Jir +ta,pp.; Bhū taa i +ssati,fut.
They causeto weartherobesdyed i +ta,pp.; siti(fromsita)+
Se SE
only with safflower;Raj +ta,pp:; Sabbamhattham mukhepakkhipati bhavissanti,fut. 3’. pl.
Dhr + e + nti, caus.pres. 3". pl. —Vin. IV. 195
Sabbam phalarasamthapetva
Theyputentirehandintothemouth; Sabbasantharimsanthagaram
dhaffiaphalarasam
—Vin. 1.246 pa +Ksip +a +nti,pres.3”. pl.
Sabbamahorattim Buddho tapati santharāpetvā,
asananipannhapetva,
All fruitjuice exceptthe juice of
teiasā—S. II. 284 udakamanikam patitthapetva,
grain;Sthd+ape+tva,absol. Sabbarattiyamsannisidama—M. telappadīpam
āropetvā—D. III. 208;
Wholeday andwhole night,the
Buddhashinesforthby power;sabbam II. 157 5. IV. 183,santharitvā
Sabbam bhikkhave ādittam—Vin. I. Wesit, in thewhole night;sam+ni + Havingcausedtheentireassembly hall
+aho + rattim; Tap+ a + ti, pres. 37.
34 Sad +a +ma,pres. 1".pl. tobecarpeted,havingcausedto
Sg.; teja(s) + G, instr. Sg.
Bhikkhus, all are in flames; @+ Dip + preparetheseats,havingcausedto
ta, pp. Sabbarattiyoca telappadipojhayati keepthevesselof waterandto lit the
Sabbam idam ca parigatam —Vin.
IV. 204 =Vine1a oil lamp;sam+Str +dpe+tva,caus.
Sabbambhikkhavedesissāmi —S. Oil lampburnsall night;Ks +ya +#, absol.; pa +Jd + ape + tvd, caus.
All this is mixed together:samkaram
IV. 15 pres 3™.‘sg. absol.;pa +tittha+ape +tva,caus.
gato, nimmariyādo,Cy. 896
Bhikkhus,I shallexplaintoyouthe absol.;@+Ruh +e +tva,caus.
whole; Drs +e +i +ssami,caus.fut. Sabbalahuso—A. IV. 247 absol.
Sabbamgapaccamgamahinindriyam Ī id SZ.
In theleast
—M. III. 121
Sabbasamkhāresu
aniccanupasst
-
With all themaiorandminor partsand
Sabbamrūpamcattāri Sabbalokāca me manovutthahissati A. II. 150;II. 83
withoutdeficiencyin faculties:a3 Hā
mahabhitani, catunnafica —A. III. 443 Theonewhoobservesimpermanence
+ fa, pp. + indriya
mahabhitanamupadayaripam —M. My mindwill riseupfromtheentire in all conditionedthings;anicca+anu
I. 220 world;vi +u(t) +Stha +i +ssati,fut. +passa + 1,der.
Sabbam cetasoSamannāharitvā—A.
All materialform:fourgreatelements a'i sp
ILL. 402
andthederivedformof thefourgreat Sabbasamkhāresu anodhimkaritvā
Having focusedmind fully; sam +anu
elements;
upa+4 +Da +ya (absol.) Sabbalokeanabhiratasanii—A. II. —A.III. 443
+a+ Hr +i +ta, absol, .
+rupa 150; IHI. 83 Withoutmakinganyreservation in
Theone who is notparticularly regardtoall conditioned
things;an +
Sabbam tam tathevahoti no
Sabbamvissaiietha—M. II. 65 interestedin thewholeworld; odhi
annatha~A, III. 123;Vin. 11.186
Finishall; vi +Srj +ya +e +tha, an +abhi +Ram +ta, pp.+ sanna
All thathappensin thesameway,
caus.imper. 2". pl. tī der.

873
 Sabbasamgahapada
katam
jiguechati—
A. V. 111
Heistroubledwith,ashamed of and
disgusted
withall conditioned
things:
atta + tva + ti, denom. Pass. pres. 3”.
sg.; Hri +iva +ti, pass.pres, 3”. sg.;
Gup +ssa + (Skt.sya) +ti, desid fut.
3”. sg., usedas pres.
Sabbasamgahapadakatam
sappātihīrakatam —D. HI. 121-2
Madeall inclusiveandsubstantiated:
sa
+pati +Hr +a, der.+kata
Sabbasāmukkamsikampanham
puttho —A. V. 194
Beingaskeda question
of the highest
nature;sabbapucchanam
ultamapuccham,Cy. V. 64; sabba +
samam+ u(t) +Krs +a+ ika, der.
Sabbasetenavalabhirathena—M. II.
208
By all whitechariotdrawnby white
mares
Sabbasetokākasīso munjakeso
iddhima vehāsamgamo —D. II. 174
The one who is all white,witha black
head,with muāiagrasslike hair,
powerfulandflying throughthesky
SabbasetoSattappatittho—D. II. 174
The onewhois all white,hauing seven
parts(of thebody) touchedtheground
(sevenparts are four legs, trunk, tail
and sex organ); satta4 Patittha
Sabbasoajaddhukam patiiāneyyam-
M. I. 245
I shouldclaimthatI am fasting
completely; a +jaddhy (from Jaks)
ka, der.
Sabbaso Sabba
Sabbe
Sabbaso aharupacchedaya
hoti —A. III. 72 Pad +ti, der.;sota +dpatti;sam +
patipalieyyam —M. I. 245
Is abandoned altogetheror reduced; apatti
I shouldengagein stoppingfood
pa +Ha +tya +ti, pass. pres.
completely;
āhāra-- upa3:Chid+a,
HM oe
Fe Se Sabbayammaiifiesamghositikato-
der.;pati +Pad +ya +eyyam,opt.
Vin.IV. 197
PG gg:
Sabbāāsattiyo chetvā—Vin. II. 156 It seemsto methattheentirebodyof
Havingcut off all attachments;
a+ theSamgha hasbeenmadecool;sabbo
Sabbasokāmasamyoianānam
Sa(n)j +ti, der.; ched(fromChid) + +ayam;sita +kata
anadhitthānā —M. II. 235
tvā,absol.
For thereasonof totalnon -
Sabbāvatokāyassa— D. I. 73
applicationof the fettersofsense-
Sabbā ca disā viloketi, asabhifica Of the wholebody
desire;an + adhi +Stha +ana,der
vāecam bhāsati —D. II. 15
Looks aroundall directionsandmakes Sabbavantam bhikkhusamgham -
Sabbaso rāgānusayampahāya
a bold statement;vi + Lok +e +ti, Vin. II. 236
patighānusayam pativinodetvā
pres.3. sg.; Bhas +a +ti, pres.3". Theentirecommunity of bhikkhus;
asmīti ditthimānānusayam
Sg. sabba + vantu
samūhanitvā—M. I. 47
Havingabandoned completelythe
Sabbani tani tadanvayānibhavanti- Sabbasamvo subhasitam
latenttendencyto lust,havingdriven
A. III. 365 pariyayena—S.I. 17
outlatenttendency
torepulsion
and
All of themtakethesamecourse;fam All yourexplanations
aregood,
havingdestroyedthelatenttendency
(tad)+anu +aya (1) relatively;
sw+Bhas+i +ta,pp.
towrongviewandtheconceit
thatI
am; rāga --anu +saya: Si +a, der;
Sabbani tani nunnani cattani Sabbasavasamvarapariyayam —M. I.
pa +Ha +ya, absol.;pati +vi +Nud vantani muttani pahinani 6
t e t tvā, caus,absol.;As +mi +iti; patinissatthāni
—A. II. 41 Thewaytorestrainall influxes;sabba
sam +u(t) or ava +Han +i +tai,
Theyall arethrownaway,givenup, +a+ Sru +a, der. +sam+ Vr +a,
absol.
Vomitted,
dropped,abandonedand der.+pari +I +a, der.
drivenout;Nud +ta,pp.;Tai +ta,
Sabbasoriipasafiianam Sabbipadanaparifiiiampannapenti
pp.; Vam3 ta,pp.; Mue +ta,pp.;pa
samatikkama patighasaiiianam +Ha +ta,pp.; pati + ni +Srj +ta, —M. I. 66
atthamgamananattasafihanam pp. Theyproclaimtheabandonment
amansikara —M. I. 41 ofall clingings;parinnanti
For thereasonoftranscendingthe Sabbānevasuviditāni —
D. I. 249 samatikkamam, Cy.II, 12;sabba+
notionof form,puttinganendtothe All are well understood; su + Vid +i upat ā t Dā t ana,der.+pari +
notionofstriking againstformand r fa, pp. Jina
forgetting
thenotionofdiversityof
form, all in all ; sabbaso,adv.;rāpa Sabbapi
dpattiyo
hina,apica Sabbekamaaniecādukkhā
+sam+Jnd; sam +ati +Kram+a, sotapatti
samapatti
ukkattha
—Vin. viparināmadhammā
—A.II. 177
der.;pati +ghan; attham +Gam + IV.7 All sense-desires
areimpermanent,
a, der.; a +manasi+Kr +a, der. All apattis(offences)
arelow,but painful
andsubject
tochange
+
sotāpatti
(stream entrance)and
Sabbasovā pahīyati, tanuvā pana samāpatti
(attainment)
arehigh;ā '
875
 Sabbena
~M.L. 251;S. IV. 50
All ‘things’are notworth for being
obsessedwith; na +alam, indcl
abhi +ni + Vis +a, der; nivesa.
abhinivesa are technical terms in
Buddhist Psychology
Sabbenasabbam—A. IV. 104
All inall;aay,
Sabbenasabbamsabbathasabbam-
D. II. 57;M. I. 364;IHI.8; S.IV.
167,402;V. 202;A. IHI.407
All in all andin eyery respect;sabba +
tha, der.
Sabbepana avaiihā —A. II. 176
All living beingsshouldnot be killed;
a+ Vadh+ya, fut.pp.
Sabbe bhava aniceadukkha
viparināmadhammā—A. II. 177
All forms ofexistences are
impermanent, painfulandsubjectto
change;vi +pari +Nam 4 a, der, +
dhamma
Sabbevasamaggābhuhiissāma —M.
1.448
We all will eattogether;sabbe +eva:
Bhu(f)i +i +ssama,fut. 1".pl.
Sabbe vohara susamucchinna—M.
1.360
All designationsarecompletely
cut off; su +sam +u(t) 4 Chid +
fa, pp.
Sabbe satta āhāratthitikā —S, mi.
273; A. V. 50
All beingssustainon food;āhāra3
thitika: Stha +i +ti 3 ka, der,
Sabbeheya Sabbeheva
Sabhagatam
Sabbe sattā samkhāratthitikā —p.
aiifiatara+ afifiiatarehi Kr) +e +tha,opt.mid.3”. sg.
IH.21I1
All beingssustainon samkhara(habit-
Sabbehevaekajjham sannipatitva Sabrahmacārīnam appiyoca
patterns, karmic energies,or whatis
uposathokātabbo —
Vin. I, 108 amanapo caagaruca abhavaniyoca
accumulated
)
Uposathaceremonyshouldbeheldby —A.IV.I
everybody,gatheringtogetheratone He is notdear,pleasing,
deferential
to
Sabbesam vo subhasitam
particularplace;sabbehi+eva;sam theco-celibatesandnotesteemed (by
pariyāyena —M. I. 219;A, IHI.401
+ni +Pat +i +tva,absol.;Kr + them);a +Bhii +e +aniya,caus.fut.
All your explanationsaregood,
tabba,fut. pp. pp.
relatively;su +Bhas + i +ta.PD.;
Pari + I +a, der.
Sabbehevasamaggehi Sabrahmacarinam patisantharako
sammodamanehiavivadamanehi hoti—A. V. 168
Sabbesamsamakamsampādehi-
sikkhitabbam —M. II. 239 Hebecomes onewhoaccordsfriendly
Vin. II. 214
Youall, beingunited,friendlyandnon- treatment
totheco-celibates;
pati +
Give everybodyequally;sam+pa+ a
disputants,
shouldtrainyourselves; santhara + ka, der.
+ Da +e +hi, imper.2”4Sg.
sabbehi+eva; sam + Mud +a +
mana,prp.; a +vi +Vad +a+ Sabrahmacarisukupito hoti
Sabbesudhammesuatammayomuni
mana,pr.p.; Sak + i+ tabba,desid. anattamano
āhatacittokhilaiāto-
—A.I. 150
fut.pp. M. I. 101;A. IHI.249
The sageis theonewho is not
In regard
totheco-celibates
heis
identicalwitheverythingsorwho Sabbehevasamsaggam - A. IV. 87 angry.displeased;
resentful
and
hasno cravingfor everything; Mixing togetherwith everybody;sam
callous;Kup +i +ta,pp.; @+Han +
tanhāsamkhātāyatammavatāya
+ Srj +a, der. ta,pp.+citta;khila +Jan + ta,pp.
abhavenaatammayo,Cy. TI. 245;
ta(Skt.tat) +maya,der. Sabbo ca tena loko niyyissati, Sabrahmacarisu
sagaravena
upaddho va tibhago va? —A. V. 194 bhavitabbam,
sappatissena
—M. I.
Sabbesubhiitesu nidhayadandam- Will thewhole world or halfor one 469
M. II. 99 thirdbe led by that?; Ni +ya +i + Oneshouldberespectful and
Havinggivenuppunishment onall SSati,pass.fut. 3". sg. reverential
towardstheco- celibates;
living beings:ni +Dha+ ya, absol. Bhi +a +i +tabba,fut. pp.
Sabbo loko etadabbhanujanati?-
Sabbehevaukkutikamnisinnehi M. II. 178 Sabrahmacārīhisamvibhaiissati-
pavaretum —Vin. I. 160 Doesthewhole world agreeon this?; M. II. I17
To hold thePavāranāceremonyby etam(etad) +abhi +anu +Jan +na (Venerable Ānanda)will sharewithco-
everybody
sittingontherightcalf;pa +ti, pres. 3. sg. celibates:
sam +vi +Bhaj +i +ssati,
Vr +e +tum,caus.inf, fut. 3. sg.
Sabbhireva samasethasabbhi
Sabbeheva upakkilesehi kubbethasanthavam— S. I. 17 Sabhatto
samāno
—
Vin. IV.98
Samannāgato,ko pana vādo Oneshouldassociatewith good Havinga meal(alreadyarranged);
As +
aūhiataraāiatarehi?
—D. IHI.45 people,acquaintwithgoodpeople; māna, PF.D.
(He)is endowedwithall defilements, Sabbhi +® +eva; sam +As + et
whatto sayofthem at random?; tha,opt. mid. 3. sg.; kubba(from
877
 Sabhagatassa
(They) talk aboutsimilarities:sabhāga
t rā, der.; kathā -- e - ati, denom.
>
pres. 3”. pl.
Sabhagatassavacanamna rāhati -
D. IHI.183
His word hasno weightin the
assembly;sabha +gata; Ruh + a + ti,
Pres:
-
3".
2rd
sV€7
Sabhāgānambhikkhūnam -Vin. IHI.
159
Forthebhikkhuswhoareeguals
Sabhāgāyissanti, samassāsissanti-
D. UL.73
They will expressbrotherlyfeeling
andconsolethemselves:sabhāga 3:
dya +i +ssanti,denom.
fut. 3".pl.;
sam+ @ +Svasa, der.+e +i 4
ssanti; denom.fut. 3. pl.
Sabhagehi puggalehi saddhim
samvasati—A. III. 269
He lives togetherwith personsof
equalqualities;saddhim,indcl. used
with instr; sam + Vas+ a +ti, pres.
Samaggatthabhaginiyo? —Vin. IV.
3”. sg.
52
Samanabrahmanakapanaddhika-
Samaggamhayya Samaggam
vanibbakayacakanam
limgabvattinayena
sabhāvuttā,Cy.
Samaggamsamghambhinditvakim sam+Mud+a +mana,
pr.p.;a +vi
652; Vas+tabba,fut.pp.
sopasavati?—Vin. II. 204 +Vad+a +mana,pr.p.;khira +
Whatdoesheproduce afterbreaking udaka+bhiita;sam +passa +nta,
Sabhāvapātukammāya
- Vin, I. 87
theSamghaunited?;Bhi(n)d+i +tva, PF.D.
To revealthenature
absol.;pa +Su +a+ ti, pres.3”. sg.
Samaggehi
sannipatitabbam
—M. II.
Sabhoiane kule —Vin. IV. 94
Samaggānamsammodamānānam 247
In a familywherea married
couple
is avivadamānānamsikkhatam Shouldassemble
in concord;sam+ni
enjoying life together;sahaubhohi annataro—D. III. 128 +Pat +i +tabba;fut. pp.
Vanehītisabhoianam,tasmim Oneofthosewhoareunited,
sabhojane,athavasabhojaneti rejoicing,notdisputingand Samajjabhicaranam —D. III. 182
sabhoge, Cy. 856 undergoingtraining;sam+Mud + Visitingfestivegathering;
samajja+
a +mana,pr.p; a + vi + Vad+a+ abhi +Car + ana,der.
Samakam dapeti —Vin. IV. 178 mana,pr.p.; altina+ tara
Causestogiveequally;Da +dpe+ti, Samannaantarahita—5. II. 191
caus.pres, 3. sg. Samaggārāmosamaggarato Designationdisappeared;
sam+ā +
samagganandīsamaggakaranim Jia; antara+Dha +i + ta,pp.;
Samakārī
— D. HI. 107 vācambhāsitā hoti —M. I. 179
Onewhois leading
a balanced
life; He is theone who enioysunity, Samannāudapādi—
D. II. 20;M. I.
samakārītisamacārī,Cy. 893 reioicesover unity,takesdelightin 334;III. 68;5.II. 190
unityandspeakswordspromoting Therearosea designation;
u(t) +a +
Samako databbo bhago—
Vin. I. unity; samagga + Grama; samagga Pad +i, pst.3. sg.
299 +Kr +ana +i, der; Bhas +i+ tu,
An equalshareshouldbegiven;Da + der. Samancamano nisidati—Vin. IV.
tabba,fut. pp. 171
Samaggasannipatanti,samaggā Sitsdownpullingit out;sam+Ane +
vutthahanti,samagga a +mana,prp.; ni +Sad +a +ti,
Vajjikaraniyani karonti—D. II. 74 pres. TR SS:

Sisters,areyou all united?Or have Assembleunited,adjournunited,

Sabhānissitam vā hoti —Vin. IHI.
you all come?;samaggatthati sabba deliberate matters of Vajji united;sam Samana ca saceābhavissati,
151
āgamanatthāti attho, Cy. 792; +ni +Pat +a +nti,pres.3™.pl; vi patina ca bhuta—M. I. 271
It is close to the assembly; ni +Sri +
according to the textsamaggattha +u(t) + Stha +nti, pres. 3. pl.; Kr + Designation wil betrue,claimwill be
ta, pp.
means ‘areyou in concordas it is oO+nti, pres. 3™.
rdpl. factual;pati +Jna; Bhi +ta,pp.
contrastedthere against vaggattha;
Sabhāyam nisīditvā —Vin. IV. 164 AA TE
on the basis of Cy.interpretation Samaggāsammodamānā Samanacīvaram deti—Vin. IV. 285
Havingsatin anassembly
samaggattha should be analysed as avivadamānākhīrodakībhūtā Givestherobeof recluses;Da +e +
i
sam +dgata +attha; samagga+ aiamaāiiam piyacakkhūhi ti,pres.3™.Sg.
Sabhāyevā vatthabbam —Vin. II.
attha:As +tha,pres.2". pl. sampassantaviharama —M. III. 156
200
Or (he) shouldlive in thehall;
Samaggamhayya—Vin. I. 54 Without
disputing,
mixingtogether
sabhāyevā dvāramūlevāti ettha
Sir, we are united;samagga+amha+ like milk andwater,lookingateach
sabhāyantilimgabyattato
ayya otherwithfriendlyeyes,weabide;

879
 Samanabrāhmanānam
people,travellers,
paupers
and
beggars; Samana +
brahmana
kapana +addhika +vanibbaka +
yacaka; addha + ika, der: Yac +
aka, der.
Samanabrāhmanānamatthāya
hitāya sukhāya —A. IV. 244
For thewell-being,benefitand
happinessof reclusesandbrahmins
Samanabrahmanesuuddhaggikam
dakkhinam patitthapeti
sovaggikam sukhavipakam
sassasamvattanikam—A. IHI. 46
He causesto instituteofferings in the
communityof brahminsandrecluses.
theofferingsPointingupward,giving
happyresultsandleadingto heaven:
uddha +agga + ika, der.: pati +
Stha +ape +ti, caus.pres; 3”. se;
suvagga + ika, der: sagga + sam +
Vrt +ana + ika, der
Samanasāmīeipatipadampatipanno
—M. I. 281
One who hasenteredinto theright
courseof the recluses:samana
sdmici +patipada;pati +Pad +ta,
PP
Samanaseyyārūpammanne—M, I.
502
It seemslike a recluse’sbed; samana
+S€yya +riipa
SamanassaGotamassa
mundagahapatikassa—Vin. IV. 91
Ofthe recluseGotama,theshaven
headedhouseholder:munda +
gahapati +ka, der.; ‘ka’ gives
derogatory sense
Samane
Samanaakificahiabhinivesa
—A.
II. 363
Reclusesadhereto nothingness
Samanakhantisoraccādhippāyā -
A. IIT.363
Reclusesaimattoleranceand
gentleness;Ksam+ti, der;surata
+
va, der.
Samana nibbanapariyosana—A. II,
363
ReclusestakeNibbana
asthe
goal;
pari +o +Sa +ana,der.
Samanā paūīiiūpavicārā—A. IHI,363
Reclusesinvestigateintowisdom;
panna +upa +vi +Car +a,der.
Samana Sakyaputtiyatveva
samkham gacchanti—A. IV. 202
The are reckonedas recluses,thesons
of the Sākyan;Sakya +putta +iva,
der.+ tu +eva
Samanasiladhitthana
—A. IIL.363
The reclusesarebentuponmoral
virtues;sila +adhi +Stha+ana,der.
Samanuddesam
nasetu—
Vin. IV.
139
Let (the Samgha)destroy(expel)the
novice;samana+uddesa;Nas+e+
tu,caus.imper.3”.sg.
SamaneGotameabhippasannā
—D.
I. 116
Extremelypleased
withtherecluse
Gotama; abhi +pa +Sad +ta,pp:
SamaneGotame evarūpam
paramanipaccākāramkaroti- 5. I.
Samane
178
In referenceto therecluseGotama,he
makesa prostrationofthis kind;evam
+ripam; parama +nipacca -- kāram
SamaneGotame brahmacariyam
cari —M. II. 39
He ledthehighestwayof life under
therecluseGotama;Car + i, pst.3%
Sg
Samanenabhavitabbamavyavatena
—Vin. III. 136
A recluseshouldbeonewithno
commitment;Bhā --a +i +tabba,
fut.pp.; a+ vi+ a+ Pr or Vr +ta,
pp.
Samanesusamanasammata —D. Il.
185;S. V. 194
Recognisedasa reclusein the
communityof recluses;sam +Man +
ta,pp.
Samanoassasumano—Vin. III. 137
A recluseshouldbeonewitha clean
mind;
As +ya(Skt.
yat),opt.3. sg.
SamanoGotamo taruno ceva
tarunaparibbāiako ca —D. I. 114
RecluseGotamais younganda young
wanderer;
ca +eva;pari +Vraj.+
aka, der.
190
Almsfood full to the brim
Samatittikākākapeyyā
—S. II. 134
Full to thebrim,drinkableeven
by crows: sama +titta +ika
(fully satisfied)or sama+tittha+
881
Samatho
ika (full tothebrim),der.; kaka +
Pa +eyya,der
Samatimsaya virecanamdatva-
Vin. I. 279
Havinggivena purgative
forthirty
timesaltogether;
Da +tva,absol.
Samatena ianapadampasāsati—D.
III. 64
Hegovernsthecountryaccording
to hiswhimsandfancies;sa +Man
+fa, pp.; pa + Sas +a +ti, pres
ane,
Samattāparisāya—A. I. 75
Dueto thedecencyof theassembly:
sama + tta, der.
Samattāsamādinnā—A. I. 189
Takenupandobserved;
sam +@+Da
+ta,pp.;sam+@+Da +ta,pp.
Samathapubbamgamam vipassanam
bhāveti—A. II. 157
Cultivatesinsightprecededby
quietudeof mind;Bhit + e +ti,caus.
pres.3”. sg
Samathavipassanam yuganaddham
bhāveti—A. II. 157 na
Cultivates
quietudeof mindandinsight
combinedtogether;yuga +Nah +ta,
pp.
cultivated
andpassionis drivenout;
Bhai+e +i+ ta,caus.pp.; Bhii +e+
iva + ti, caus. pass. pres. 3™.Sg.; pa
' Ha +iva +
ti, pass.pres.3”. sg.
 Samadhiggayha
Samantapasadiko
Samantapaso Samanta
Samadhiggayhatitihati —M. II. 25
Samantatodupattam bhavissati-
Surpasses;
sam +adhi 3 Grh +ya,
Vin. I. 290 SamantapāsoMārassa —A, III, 68 Theshadespreads all round;Sphar+a
meta. absol.
There will bedoubleclothall round; Completesnareof Māra +ti,pres.34.sg.
du +patta
Samanuggahiyamanova Samantāanupariyāyapatham Samantanisseniyaanuparigantum
asamanuggahiyamanova —Vin. III.
Samantatodvadasayoianāni
- D, II, anukkamamāno—5. V, 160 —Vin. IHI. 151
90
Whilegoing roundtheroadwhich To goroundeverywhere witha ladder:
139
Being questionedor not; kim te encircles(the city); anu +pari +aya
Around twelveyojanas;yojanamaybe nisseniyam thatvagehamchadentehi
dittham,kinti ditthanti adina nayena
a distanceat which newoxenare
(from I) + patha; anu +Kram +a + na sakkāhotisamantānisseniyā
anuvijjivamano vimamsivamano māna,pr.p.
yoked to the cart (roughly8 miles)or āviiihitum,Cy.570; anu+pari +
upaparikkhiyamāno,Cy. 593;
sam Gam+tum,inf.
a distancemeasuredby theyoke;it
©anu +Gah + i +yx Samantāāvāsāsaiiukam pāhetabbo
i + mana, Pass. comprises 4 gāvutas, again a
pr.p. —Vin.I. 116 Samantānuparigacchanto
—A. IHI.
distanceconnectedwith oxen
(One)shouldbe causedto go 403
Samanufiiiesatthā ahosi—D. IHI. immediately
to theneighbouring Whilegoingaround;samantā+anu+
271; S. I. 46; IV. 188;A. I. 225
Samantatovacasattitodakena
residence;
samantā,
indcl.;samantā pari t gacchanta,
pr.p.
Approvedby theteacher;sam +any + sanjambharimakamsu—D. I, 189;
āvāsātisamantamāvāsam,Cy. 1060;
Jina + a, der. S. II. 282,samantāvācāya
saiiukam,
indcl.,saiiukantitadaheva, Samantāparibbāiikāyo..
sannitodakena; A. I. 187
Cy. 1060;pa +Hi +e +tabba,caus. etadavocum—Vin. IV. 91
SamanupassamanoSamanupassati- Fromall sides,theyteased (him)with
fut. pp. Neighbouringfemalewanderers
said
D. II. 66 Sharpspearsof words: vaca+satti+
this;samantā
is usedhereasanadi.;
todaka: Tud + aka, der: sam +
Keepson observing;sam +anu + Samantaudakam ussaretva—Vin. I. etam (etad) + a + Vac + um, root
iambhari; a -- Krtāt imsu, double
Passa + mana, pr. Pp. 32 redup.
pst.3”.pl.
pst. 3”. pl.
Having caused the removal of water
he 262
Samanubhatthosamghena—Vin. IV. around;samantd,iA TAA
ndcl.;SIA
u(t) +SrKeha
+ Samantaparivaretha—D. II. 26
136 Samantatosamaiicasi—Vin. IV, 171
+ tvd, caus. absol. Causetosurround(them)fromevery
Youpullitall round;sam+Afie+a+ direction;pariityīrteti
+ Vr +e+ tha,caus
"aus.
Si, pres. 2". sg,
Samantaudakukkhepa ee 11IE
—Vin.I. 2". pl.
Fromthethrowingupof wateraround;
Samanuyuiijanti, samanugahanti, Samantapāsādikampuggalam Samantābhikkhū(mā)udakena
udaka +u(t) +Ksip +a, der.
Samanubhasanti
—M, |. 130;IHI. āgammacittampasTdati
—A. IHI.190 inci
osificimsu 'in. I II. 214 KERE
—Vin.
179;A. I. 140,Sg. Having metwitha person,pleasing
in a
Samantaca gocaragamo—M. I. 167 Maynottheneighbouring
M. I.1 bhikkhusbe
r j
(They) questionhim,presshim andask €veryrespect,mind becomespleased; The village to depend on is nearby; wet:o +Si(fiJc +imsu,pst.3”.pl.
for reason:laddhim vadehiti pasāda '- ika, der.; ā I Gam+ya, Samanta, aay.
absol.;pa +Sad +a +ti, pres.3”. TTT HA eas
Pucchamana Samanuyunjanti ndma, SamantāVesāliyā—S. V. 152
laddhim Patitthapenta SZ. AroundVesāli
Samantacatuddisa anuviloketva-
Samanugahantinama, kāranam D. IHI.23 I
Pucchanta samanubhāsanti Samantapāsādikoca hoti Making an observation around Ti I Samantasattabbhantara —Vin. I.
nāma, sabbākāraparipūro
ca—A. IV.315
Cv.di.103;sam +anu + ;
quarters;catu 77
+ disd@;anu j +
+vit LOK Sevenabbhantaras
all KAI ti
M(litad
nti, pres. 3". pl; sam +anu +Gah He is pleasant and perfect in every abbhantarais egualto 28 cubits,
F e +twā,absol.
a +nti, pres. 374pl.; sam +anu + respect; samanta + pasdda +ika, ekamabbhantaram , I
Bhas +a +nti Pres, 3. pl. der.; sabba +akara +paripūra:pari ā ehāyā
Samantā chāvā i—
pharati Vin.
—VinHI. atthavisatihatthappamdnam hoti,
+ Pr + a, der. 202 majjhe thitassa samanta

883
 Samanta
honti, sace dve samghā visum
vinavakammani Karonti, dvinnam
sattabbhantaranamantare afifiam
ekam Sattabbhantaram
upacaratthayathapetabbam,Cy.
1052
—Vin. III. 202
One neighbourhoodis aroundseven
abbhantaras(28 X 7 cubits);ekam
abbhantaramatthavisati hattham
hoti, Cy. 654; satta +abbhantara;
eka +upacara
Samanta Sayatthim anuvilokesi -
Vin. II. 158
Madea suryey aroundSāvatthi:22; +
vit+Lok+e+s5 4 i, pst. 3% 5g.
Samantahasamanathitā —Vin. III.
38
Stoodlaughing,nearby:Hrs 4 a+
mana,pr.p.; Stha + i. 4 ta,pp.
Samannāgamanahetu
—A. V. 266
For thereasonofpursuing; sam +any
F ā t Gam +ana, der
Samannesamanoevamjanati— M. |
318
Making a search (he) comes to know
thus;sam +any +esa (fromIs)
mana, pr.p
Samamjivikam kappeti —A. IV. 282
He leadsa balancedlife; kappa +
e
li, denom.pres, 374sg,
He letsthewaterin andoutat
appropriatetime;abhi +Ni +a +ft,
Samampādam bhūmiyam
pres. 3. sg.; apa +Ni +a +ti,pres:
nikkhipati, Samamuddharati,
SS
Samayena
samam sabbavantehipadatalehi
bhūmim phusati —D. III, 146
He places foot on the ground evenly,
lifts it up evenlyandtouchesthe
groundwiththeentiresolesofthe
feetevenly:ni 4 Ksip+at ti pres,
3”. sz. ud 4 Dhr or Her tat ti
3”. 8g.;Spr6 +a+ Hi,pres.3”,sg.
Samam suvibhattamvibhajati-—D,
II. 166
Divides fairly andequally:sw+vi+
Bhaj +ta,pp.; vi +Bhaj +a +ti,
pres. 3. sg.
Samayappavadaketindukācīre
ekasālake Mallikāya ārāme
pativasati—D. I, 178;M. II. 22
Hestaysatthelittlehallinthepark of
Mallikā,(situated)
in themidst of
tindukatrees,wherethereligiousand
philosophicaldebatesareheld.:
Sgmayat pa --Vad--aka,der:;
pati
Vas + a + ti, pres. 3”. sg,
Samayavimokkham
ārādheti
—M.I.
196
Attains a temporaryrelease;@+Radh
re +ti, caus,pres,3". sg.
Samayedāyaiiam niyyādenti—
D. IHI,
189
At righttime,(they)causetohand
over
theinheritance;ni +Yat+e +nti,
caus.pres.3”. pl.
Samayenaudakamabhinetipi
apanetipi—A. I. 229
Samādapetabbā
Samayena
Samayena
samayam—A. III. 350 physicallyverballyandmentally;sama
From time to time
+yisama;Car +a +nti,pres.3”.pl
Samavepākiniyāgahaniyā ¥
Samayodaniupasamkamitum
samannagato natisitayanaccunhaya
pātimokkhuddesāya—D. II. 49
ativivaaīifiehi manussehi—D. II. 177
Now,this is the right timeto go there.
pres, Hehas a stomachwhichis neithertoo
fortherecitalof Pātimokkha(codeol
hotnortoocoldandwhichmakesthe
conduct):samayo+ idani; upa +sam
+Kram + i + tum, inf.; patimokkha =
fooddigestevenly,morethanany
other men
uddesdya: u(t) +Drs +a, der.
Samavepakiniyagahaniyasamanna-
Samayodibbe kame pariyesitum-
gatonatisitayanaccunhaya
M. II. 75
ivine pleasures: pari majjhimayapadhānakkhamāya —M.
It istimetoseekdivinepleasures; pa
II. 128 WHE
+(y) +es (from Is) + 1 + tum, inf.
He hada stomachwhichis neither
too cold nor too warm, medium and
Samayoteappatividito
—M. I. i
suitableforstrivingandin whichfood
Contextwas not properlyunderstoo
is evenlydigested;
E
sama+vi
3 +
Pac
2 .
byyou;a +pati+ Vid+i +fa,pp.
+ a, der. + ini; na +ati +Sita; na
ati + unha;padhana+Ksam+4,
Samavattakkhandho —M. II. 136
One who has equally round shoulders
der.
pā 5
Samasamam thapest—M. I. 16 TA
Causedtoplaceon aneaualposition;
Theonewhoissearching
for
Stha+Gpe+s + i, caus.pst. 3”, sg.
complete
truth;samavaya
' Sacca"
esano;Cy: takesthe termsathesano Samasamoyadidam
333
or satthesano,
if that is thecorreel dhammadesanaya —M. I.
termthenit
t meansthe onewhohas
Eaual in termsof theteachingolA,
given up questcompletely;when we I.
Dhamma; yadidam,¢ onjunctive inde
takethis term with thepreceding
term in the text, Ä
Samasūpopindapāto—Vin. IV. 190
panunnapaccekasacco (the one who
The soupproportionate
to the
hadgiven up partial truth),
almsfood;bhattassa
saccesanoseemsto be more Cy.
eatutthabhāgappamāno supo,
appropriate;
892
ee sammā vissattha sabba
esanoti attho, Cv. III. 80
Samadapetabbanivesetabba
patitfhāpetabbā—S. V. 145;A. L.
: e i kāvena
Samavisamamcaranti kāyei
E a A 291 222
vacaya manasa —M. Ill. 29
They should be madeobserve, settle
Theybehaveevenlyandunevenly,
885
 Samādapesi
Samādhinimittan
Samadhindriyam Samadhim
down andestablish;sam +@ +Da 4
Samādhi, nacābhinatonacapanato
ape + tabba,caus.fut. Pp.; ni +Vis + suppatividdhampaīiāya —D. II. mind;Bhi +e +eyyasi,caus.opt.
na sasamkharaniggayhavaritayato
e +tabba,caus.fut. Pp.; pati +Stha 242;A. ILL. 23 2nd.so.
vimuttatta thito thitatta santusito
ape +tabba,caus.fut. pp. Thesignof concentrationis well
santusitattā no paritassati—A. lV,
takenup,well attended,well Samadhimupekhasahagatampi
428
Samadapesi nivesesi patitthapesi - consideredandwell penetrated by bhaveyyasi—A. IV. 300
Concentrationof mind,whichis
D. I. 206 wisdom;su +Grh + i +ta,pp.; sut You shouldcultivateconcentration
of
neitherbentforeward,norbent
Madepeopleobserve,settledown and manasi + Kr +ta, pp.; su +upa + mind,accompanied evenbyequanimity
backward,causedto restrain
Dhr +e +i +ta, caus. pp.; su +pati
defilementsnot byself effort, firmas
+Vyadh+ta,pp. Samadhimnippitikampibhaveyyasi
it is liberated,contentedasit is firm,
caus.pst. 3. sg.; pati +Stha +ape —A. IV. 300
not trembledas it is contented
;
TS +4 caus.pst. 34, sg. Samādhindriyamadhimattam—A. I. You shouldcultivateevenjoyless
Sappayogena kilese nigganhitva
119 concentration
of mind;ni +piti +ka,
vāretvāthito, Cy. IV. 199;na t eat
Samadanamkatam hoti —
Vin. II. The facultyof concentrationis der.
abhi +Nam +ta,pp.; na +ca +apa Predominant; samādhi t indriya
268
T hata,pp.; sa +samkhara+ni + Samadhimbhavetivivekanissitam
A vow hasbeentakenup;sam +@+
Grh +ya + Vr+e+i+ ta+vantu, Samādhipamukhā sabbedhammā- virāganissitamnirodhanissitam
Da +ana, der; Kr +ta, pp.
caus. der.; vi + Mue +ta,pp. * tta, A. IV. 339 vossaggaparināmim—5. IV. 368
der.; Stha + i+ ta, pp.; sam + Tus+i Samādhi is prominent
inallDhammas: Cultivatesconcentration
of mind
Samadayapaggayhatittheyya —Vin.
Y fa, pp.,pari +tras +ya +ti,pass. sabbedhammātipaneakkhandhā,
Cy. whichis associatedwithseclusion,
II. 172
pres. 3". sg.
... ord .
IV. 158 detachment,cessationandmaturingin
Shouldstandholding fast:sam +@+
Da +ya, absol.;pa +Grh +ya, release;
ni +Sri + ta,pp.
Samādhinimittam
adhitthāti
—A.I. Samādhibhāvanānamsacchikiriyā
meta.absol.; tittha +eyyva,
opt. 3”.
116 hetu—D. I. 155 Samadhimbhayethaappamanam
Sg.
Fikes mind on thesignof For thereasonofcultivation and nipakapatissata—A. III. 24
concentration;samādhipi experiencing
of theconcentration
of Beingwiseandmindful,cultivate
Samadaya sikkhati sikkhapadesu -
samadhinimittam, mind;sa +acchi +kiriya tiniiritedconcentration
of mind;Bhi
A. 1.231 pnd
samadhārammanampi +e +tha,caus.pres.2”. pl.
He observesandtrainshimself in
samādhinimittam,
Cy.II. 188adhi+ Samadhimaggo,asamadhi
Precepts;sikkhati, desid. from Sak
Stha +ti, pres. 3'd,sg. kummaggo—A. III. 420 Samādhimbhikkhavebhāvetha—S.
Concentrationof mindis theway,non ITI. 13;V. 414
Samadhi anhaphalo —A. TV.428
Samādhinimittam anurakkhati- concentrationof mindis a wrong Bhikkhus, cultivate concentrationol
Concentrationof mind hasgnosis
as theresult:Sam +4 +Dha@+j:
A. II. 17 Way;ku +maggo mind
Protectsthesignof concentration;
a+ Ina
anu +Raks +a +ti, pres,3", sg. Samadhimhavutthahitva
—Vin.I. 2 Samadhimsatovasamapajjami,
Having
gotup(comeout)fromthe satovavutthahami—A. III. 24
Samadhi aparisuddho ~Vin. III. 109
Samādhinimittam
manasikātabbam concentration
of mind;vi +u(f) + BeingstrictlymindfulI shallenterthe
Concentrationof mind,not pure;
—A: L256 Sthd+a +i +tva,absol. concentrationof mindandcomeout
a +pari +Sudh 4 ta,pp.
Thesignof concentration
should
be ofit; sato+eva;sam+a +Rae +ya
appliedonmind avitakkampiavicārampi k mi,pres.I". sg.; vi t u(U
Samādhim Stha +
Samādhikusalo hoti —A, IV. 34
bhāveyyāsi—A. IV. 300 a +mi,pres.1".sg.
He becomes skillful in concentration
Samadhinimittam
suggahitam
hoti Youshouldcultivate
eventhoughtless
of mind
Samādhimsappītikampibhāveyyāsi
Sumanasikatam
sūpadhāritam

887
 Samadhim
Samānavassikam Samānasukhadukkho
Samuddam
—A.IV. 300
311
Youshouldcultivate
evenaioyful To hold Pavāranā(invitingceremony) 229
Theonewhoisskilledinmakingthe
concentrationof mind; sa +pitika together
bythosewhohaveegual ThisDhamma is fortheonewhose
concentration
ready;samādhicittam
rains;etthabahūpisamānavassikā mindis concentrated;
samahitassa
+
hāsetumkallam kātumsakkotīti
Samadhim savitakkampi ekatopavaretumlabhanti,Cy. 1077 ayam
attho, Cy. Ill. 354; kalla (Skt.
kalva)
'- rā, der.
You shouldcultivateconcentrationof Samānasukhadukkho—D.III. 187 Samāhito...yathābhūtampaiānāti-
mindwith thoughtsandinvestigation Onewhohasthesamepleasure
and S.HI. 13;V.414
Samādhissagocarakusalo—A, IHI
pain Theonewhosemindis concentrated
311
Samādhimsātasahagatampi knowstherealityasit is:
The one who is skilled in thedomain
bhāveyyāsi—A. IV. 300 Samāpailatipivutthātipi—
D. II. 71; yathabhitam,ady.; pa +Jan +nā +
of concentration A.IV.421
You shouldcultivateconcentrationof ti,pres.3”. sg.
mindaccompanied evenby happy (He)entersinto andgetsout;sam+
Samadhissathitikusalo—A. HI.311 +Pad +ya + ti, pres.3™.sg.+api; vi
feeling; sata+saha+gata Samudayaiica atthagamaiica
The onewho is skilledin keepingup +u(t) +Stha + ti, pres.3“. sg.+api assadaficaadinavanicanissaranafica
concentration;Sthd +i +ti, der.
Samadhi yathābhāta- yathābhūtam nappaiānāti—5. III.
Samapajjitvavutthahitva 174;II, 176,na paiānanti
nanadassanattho—A. V. 313
Samādhissa
vutthānakusalo
—A.II. samakkhātabbāni—A. IV. 426 (He)doesnotknowreallythecoming
Concentrationof mind is for the
311 Theyshouldbe praisedafterentering up,goingdown,taste,defectand
gainingof knowledgeandvision. asit
The one who is skilled in gettingup intoandemergingtherefrom; escape; sam+u(t)+aya(fromI);
is; yathabhiita +fānadassana 34
from concentration; vi +u(t) +Stha+ samakkhātabbānītiācikkhitabbāni, attam+gama;ni(s) +Sr +ana,
attho
ana, der. thometabbānivannetabbāni,Cy. IV. der.;yathabhitam,adyv.;na +pa +
198 Jan +na +ti,pres.3™.sg.
Samādhisampadamārādheti —M. I.
Samādhissasamāpattikusalo—A.
195
III. 311;IV. 34 Samahitam
cittamekaggam
—M. I. Samudayasanjati—D. I. 227
He accomplishestheattainmentof
The one who is skilled in entering
into 21;A. 1. 148 Produceandtherevenue;sam+u(t)+
samadhi,concentrationofmind; @ +
concentration;sam+a + Pad +ti, Mindhasbecomeonepointedand aya(fromI); sam+Jan +ti, der.
Radh + e +ti, caus. pres. 3. sg. ise
le
rrr
am
der. concentrated;
sam+@+Dha+i +ta,
pp.; eka + agga Samuddapariyantam
pathavim—
D.
SamadhisambojjhamgoHAVV.2I1I ——
Samānacchandākalyānādhippāyā
- II. 174 .
Enlightenmentfactorof
Vin. I. 78;IV. 129 Samahitam
va cittam Theearthendingwiththeocean;pari
concentration;sam +bodhi 4 amgo
Those who havethesamemindsor anurakkhissati—A. IV. 344 + anta
egualinclinations
andgoodintentions; Or hewill protectthemind
Samādhissaabhinīhārakusalo —A.
samāna -- chanda;kalyāna concentrated;
anu +Raks +i +ssati, Samuddamaiihogāhanti—D. I. 222;
II. 311; IV. 34
adhippāya fut. 3". sg. A. IHI.368 Ii -

The one who is skilled in bringing

Plungeintotheocean;adhi +o(ava) ~
forth concentrationofmind: upari
Samānattatā
cadhammesu—D.II. Samāhitassaāānam no asamāhitassa +Gah +a +nti,pres.3”. pl.
upari samāpattisamāpaiianatthāva
192 -A.1I. 219
Pathamaiihānādisamādhim AK + ko
Impartialityon all dealings;samdna Knowledgeis for theonewith Samuddamvisakumbhena
uppādetumsakkonto,Cy. II. 354-5;
atta + td, der. concentratedmind, not for the one padūsitum—Vin. I. 203
abhi +ni(s) +Hr +a, der.
withoutconcentratedmind To maketheoceanpollutewitha pot
Samānavassikampavāretum
- Vin. of poison;pa +Dus +e +i +tum,
Samādhissa kallitākusalo —A. III.
1. 168 Samāhitassāyam
dhammo
—A.IV. caus. inf.
 Samūlam
Sampajjamanam Sampannakolakam Samphappalāpassa

tf, der,
63 —M. II. 197 To destroytheinfluxesrelatedtothe
It bringsaboutgreatresultswhenit nextlife;d +Sru +a, der.;pati +
Sampaiānamusābhāsati—Vin.IV,1
meta. absol succeeds; sam +Pad +ya t māna, Ghan+ta,pp.
He tells lies with full awareness;
Bhas
Pass PEP.
r a+ ti, pres, 374. so.
Samūlambhavamudabbahi—M. I. Samparivattakam samparivattakam
330 Sampannakolakamsūkaramamsam rajitabbam—Vin. I. 50
Sampaiānamusāvādo
kimhoti?
Uprootedbecoming;sa3
mūlani;
—A.III. 49 It shouldbedyed,turningit overand
dukkatam hoti —
Vin. I. 104
u() +a+ Brh + 1,pst. 3”. sg.
; 2rd . Pork,cookedwithiuiube; overagain;sam+pari + Vrt +aka,
Tellinglieswithfullawareness,
what
madhurarasehibadarehisaddhim der.;Rai +i +tabba,fut. pp.
is it? It is anoffenceof wrongdoing;
Sametayasmasamghena—Vin. III. iīrakādisambhārehiyoietvāpakkam
in the Pācittiva it is said,
172 ekasamvaceharikasūkaramamsam; Sampasade satietarahiva ānaāiam
sampaiānamusāvādepacittiyam
Venerablesir, pleasebe compatible Cy.IIL,253 samapajjati, pahaya va
Vin.IV. 2
withtheSamgha:
samery adhimuccati—M. II. 262
Samagacchatuekaladdhiko hotu, Sampannamva sappi,sampannam
ya Whenthereis rightfaith,heattains
Sampaiānopatissato —D. II. 286; navanitam—D. IIL. 85 unshaky stateatpresent or heis
Cy. 608; sam +eff) +tu, imper,3”
S. III. 143;A. I. 27 Nice gheeor nice butter inclinedonwisdom;sampasāde sati,
Sg.or samam+ety
Being fully awareandmindful:pati loc.absl:etarahi,idcl.; ant Rij +a,
Smr +ti, der. Sampannamsalikkhettam—A. I. 241 der.;sam+@+Pad +ya + ti,pres.
Sameti eittam cittena —Vin. I. 353
—..
The mindagreeswith mind;samam+4 Nicepaddyfield;sam + Pad +ta,pp. 3”. sg.;adhi+Muc +ya +ti,pass.
Sampajano va kayasamkharam pres.3”. sg.
eti (from 1)
abhisamkharoti —A. II. 158 Sampannasila.. viharatha,sampanna
(He) beingfully awareaccumulates Patimokkha—M. I. 36 Sampassam atthamattano —S. 1.70
Samodhanapariyasam detu —Vin.
physicalhabits;
sam+pa +Jan +a, Abideby moralvirtuesand Seeingo ne’s o wnwell-being; sam+
Il. 48 a4
der.; abhi + sam(s) +Kri otii Patimokkha(codeof conduct);pati + passa + nta, pr.p. nom. Sg.; attham +
Let theSamghagive all inclusive
pres. 3. sq. mokkha attano
probationary period;pari + Vas4
a,
der.; Da +e +tu, imper.3". sg.
Sampajano va manosamkharam Samparāyahitāya
samparāya Sampucchitum āgacchanti—D. I.
abhisamkharoti—A. II. 158 sukhāya—A. IV. 281 116
Samodhānamgacchanti— S. I. 86; A.
1.231, gacchati
(He)beingfullyawareaceumulates For thebenefitandhappiness
in the Comeforconsultation;
sam+Prch +
mentalhabits nextlife;sam+para +aya(from
I) va +i +tum,inf.
Are included:sam + o (ava) +Dha +
ana, der.
Sampaiāno vā vacīsamkhāram Samparāyikampucchāmi—
M. II. Samphappalapam pahayasamphap-
abhisamkharoti —A. II. 158 128 palāpāpativirato—D. I. 4-5
Samgameca nandi carati —Vin. III.
(He) beingfully awareacumulates I askyou somethingrelatedto thenext Havingabandoned talkingnonsense,
he
108 -
vocalhabits life; Prch +ya +mi,pres. I". sg. is refrainedfromtalkingnonsense;
pa AA
Moves on withjoy in thebattlefield:
+Ha +ya,absol.;pati +vi +Ram+
Na(n)d +i, der.
Sampaiiatipi vipaiiatipi —A. V.218 Samparayikam maranabhayam - ta, PP.
Succeeds
andfails;sam+Pad+ya+ S.V. 386
Sampaiānakāri hoti —D. 1.70; M. I.
Fearofdeathrelated
tothenextbirth Samphappalāpassa vipākoanādeyya-
57 ti, pres. 3. sg. +api; vi +Pad +yat
ti +api vacasamvattaniko—A. IV. 248
(He) becomesactivewith full
Samparāyikānam āsavānam Theresultof nonsensicaltalk is thatit
awareness; sam 4 pajdna +kāiī:
Sampaliamānam
mahapphalam
hoti patighātāya
—D. IHI.130;A. 1.99 leadstodistrustin speech:an +a +
 Samphassam

Sambuddho Sammatenapi
Da +ya (eyva),
fut.pp. +vaca
breadthsto theCoveredarea;dyj+
amgula waytopollution,renounced
lifeis
Samphassam sādiyantī—Vin. IV. 261
ghara+dvdsa; gen.
freeandindependent;
Causingtoenjoythecontact:
Svad+
Sambādheāvasathe vasam raja (rajo) +patha; abhi + okasa
ava + nit, pr.p.
upagacchim —
M. II. 124 Sambhinnamariyādo
hoti —A. III.
I happenedtostayinaninconvenient Sambuddho
iti maīāno —
D. II. 287 228
Sambadhonamaubhoupakacchaka
dwellingplace:upa+gaccha+im, Thinkingthathe is theEnlightened He becomesone who has broken the
muttakaramam - Vin, IV. 260
pst. I, sg. One;sam + Budh +ta,pp.; Man +ya boundary;
sam+Bhid +ta,pp. +
Coveredareameans botharmpitsand
+ ana, pr.p. mariyādā
theprivatepart(urinating
organ);
sambādheti Paticchannokāse,Cy: Sambadheokāsādhigamo
Sambuddhotapatamsettho—S. I. 47 Sambhuhiantipisamvasantipisahāpi
920 anubuddho— A, Ii. 314;IV.426
Sambuddhais supremeamongthe I seyyamkappenti—Vin. IV. 137
An opportunityforthepractice
of
shiningbodies;tapatam,gen.pl. of Eattogether,
livetogether
andSED
SambahulāāvāsāSamānasīmā mindfulnesshasbeenrealisedinthe
tapanta, pr.p. together;
sam+Bhu(nijj+a +nti,
nānuposatham
kātum.—
Vin. II. 300 world of senses;sambadheti
patica-
pres.3. pl. +api;sam+ Vas+at
To hold Uposathaceremonyseparately kāmaguna
sambādhe,
Cy.III. 355;
Sambodhapakkhikanam nti,pres.3%.pl. +api; saha +T,
withinacommonboundary
where okāsā vuccantiehaanussatitthanani,
dhammanamka upanisa kappa+e + nti, denom.pres.3”. pl.
thereare severalresidences;nang + Cy.; anu + Budh +ta,pp.
bhāvanāya?—
A. IV. 351
uposatha Whatis thegroundforthecultivation Sambhunātikathinuddhāram—Vin.
Sambadheokāsādhigamo vutto 1.256 :
of enlightenmentfactors?; sam+
Sambahulā samvidahitva—Vin, [1]. Bhagavatāpariyāyena-A. IV.449 I Is capableof removingKathina;sam
bodha+pakkha+ika,der.
53 Theattainment
of theopportunity
in Bhi +na + ti, pres.3”. sg.;
A groupdof people,havingorganised the world of senseshasbeensaidby conjugationalsign ofthe root Bhū is
Sambodhipathānusārino—D. II.
themselves:
Sam’+ vi +Dha-+i +ta, theBlessedOne, relatively;Vac+ta, ‘a’. but here ‘na’ is used
275 ;
absol. Pp.; okasa + adhigama
Thosewhoarefollowingthepatho
enlightenment; sam + bodhi + patha Sambhejjaudakam— S. V. 461
Sambahulāhi Sākiyānīhi saddhim - Sambadhelomamsamharāpenti- +anu +Sr + i, der. Mixedwater(attheconfluence);sam
A. IV.274 Vin. II. 134 +Bhid +ya, der.
With severalSākyanladies;saddhim, Causeto removethehairatthe
Sambhatamanurakkhati—
A. IIL. 38;
indcl. used with instr. coveredarea;sam +Badh +a, der.; IV. 285 af Sambhedamloko gamissati—D. II.
sam+Hr +dpe+nti,caus,pres.3”. Keepssafewhatisbrought
home;
nae 72: A. I. 51,āgamissati MAU
Sambahulehibhikkhūhisaddhim- pl. +Bhr + ta,pp.; anu +Raks+a titi, The worldwill moveintopromiscuity;
S. I. 121 Qrd
pres. 3”. sg. sam+Bhid+a, der.(breaking
down
Sambādho gharāvāsoraiopatho- of moral norms)
With severalbhikkhus
D. I. 63 Sambhārasamyuttā—Vin. IV. HO :
Householdlife is troublesome
and Mixed with variousingredients;
sam Sammaggatoakkhayati—M. I. 66 .
Sambahulehi
manavakehi
saddhim-
a way to pollution;rajo (rajas)+ Bhr +a, der; sam + Yuj +ta,pp. He is saidto bea Well- Gone;samma
D. 1.89
Patha +gato;@+Khya +ya +ti, pass.
With severalyoungmen
Sambhavitoca vinihtinam pres.3”. sg.

Sambādhassasamantādvamgulā - Sambādhogharāvāso raiāpatho, sabrahmacārīnam— M. III. 194;A.

abbhokāsopabbaiiā—M. II. 211;5. V.225 Sammatenapibhikkhuniyo na
Vin. I. 216
V. 350 Highly respectedby thewiseco- ovaditabba
—A. IV. 347;Vin. Il, 22
(In the area,) around two finger-
Household
life is troublesome
anda celibates;sam + Bhai +e +i-+ ta, Bhikkhunisshouldnotbe instructedby

893
 Sammatena
Sammiaditthiko Sammaditthim Sammāpassam
onewhoisevenagreedupon;sam +
+Muc +ya +ti,pass.pres,3",9g
Man +ta,pp.; 0+ Vad +
i ttabba, undistorted
vision; a +vi +pari +]
+ IV. 283
Sut. pp. fa,pp. Wouldhekeepsayingrightly?;au,
Sammadevavirūheyya—M. I, 306
interr.p.; Vad+a +māna,br.p.; Vad
Would grow up properly;vi +Ru, ta
Sammatena
vinayampucchitum- Sammāditthimaparipūretvā +eyya,opt.3”. sg.
F eyya,opt. 3™.sg,
Vin. I. 113 sammāsamādhimparipūressatīti
To askaboutVinayaby onewho is netamthānam viiiati —A. IHI. 15 Sammipatipajjamano—A. II. 4
Sammadeva
samacare
—8.I, 70 lt is impossiblethatonewill
agreedupon; sam+ Man + ia, Pp.; Theonewhois behaving
rightly;pati
Should behaveproperly;sam+@+ accomplishtheright concentrationof
Prch +ya +i 4 tum,inf. +Pad +ya +mana,pr.p.
Car +e,opt.3". sg. mindwithoutaccomplishingtheright
Sammattaniyamamanokkamamano view;a +pari + Pr +e +tva,absol.; Sammāpatipattādhikaranahetu —M.
Sammannukho vadamanovadeyya? Vid +ya +ti, pass.pres.3”. sg. II. 197
—A.III. 441
—M. I. 451 For thereasonofright practice;
Notenteringintotherightcourse;
Would he keepon sayingcorrectly); Sammāditthiyāupasampadāya —M. adhikaranaandhetuare usedhere
sSammatta
(Skt. samyaktva):an + 0 +
samma+ nu +kho; nu.interrp.;Vad III. 72 together
Kram +a +mana.prp.
ra + mana, pr.p. To attainrightvision;upa +sam+
Sammattamāgammaārādhanā hoti Pad +a Sammāpatipatti saggsānamāhāro -
Sammā āiīvena iīvikam kappeti—M. A. V. 136
—.K?V.21I2
II. 26 Sammāditthī hoti, uiugatāssaditthi, Rightpracticeis thecausefor
Coming to the right coursethereis
Findsa livelihoodbyrightmeans: dhammeaveccappasādena heavenlyexistences;pati +Pad +ti;
Satisfaction;samma+ tta. der.; ā +4
sammā, indcl.; kappa+e +ti, samannāgato,
āgatoimam a+ Hr +a, der.
Gam +ya,absol.; @ +Rādh --ana,
denom.pres. 3”. sg. saddhammam—M. I. 46
der.
(He)becomes onewithrightview,his Sammapanihitattaditthiya—S. V.
Sammā upeti kammāya
- S. V.92; viewisstraightforward,
heisendowed il
Sammatthābhisamecea=A. ¥,.50
A. 1.254 withfaithin theDhammaon As theviewis rightlyestablished;
pa +
Havingrealisedthemeaningrightly:
It becomes
fit forworkmanship;
upa+ understanding
andhasrealised
thistrue ni +Dha +i +ta,pp.+tta,der.
samma +attha + abhi + sam ¢ e I)
I +ti, pres. 3. sg. Dhamma; sammd+ditthi+i, der.;
(t) +ya, absol.
uju +gata+assa+ditthi;ava+1 (0) Sammāpanihitamcittam—A. V. 87
Sammaditthikassa
micchaditthi +ya,absol.+pasada;a +Gam+ta, Wellestablished
mind;pa +ni +Dhā
Sammadeyaafiiam vyākaroti —A.
virittā hoti —A. V. 218 Pp. +i +fa,pp.
II. 119
Wrongview is purgedawayfortheone
Rightly declaresgnosis:samma+(d)
whohasrightvision;vi +Rie+ta,pp. Sammādukkhakkhayāya
—S.II. 24 Sammāparināmamgaceeheyya —
S.
eva
For theeliminationof Dukkha I. 168;A. III. 30;Vin. I. 275,
Sammāditthikāhothasammā- perfectly gacchati
Sammadevaanupavatteti —M. III. Woulddigestsproperly;pari + Nam
dassanenasamannāgatā—A.HII,
29; A.1.23
138 Sammānibbānādhimutto
assa—M. -a, der.
Makes (the wheel) turn rightly, after
Be with rightviewandrightvision; 11.255
me;anu +pa+ Vrt +e +gi caus Sammāparihareyya—M. I. 124
samma+Drs +ti +ika, der, Hit Hewouldbeperfectly
inclined
to
pres. 3™. sq.
Nibbana;adhi +Mue +ta,pp.; AS + Wouldkeepupwell;pari +Hr +
(Bhi) +a +tha, imper.2". pl.
va (Skt. vat) eyya,opt.3. sg.
Sammadeva āsavehis imuccati —D.
Il. 81
Sammāditthiko aviparītadassano -
Samma nu kho so vadamano
Is liberatedperfectlyfrom influxes: vi A. I, 33, III. 115
The onewho has a rightviewand
vadeyya?—M. II. 201;S. II. 130;

895
 Samma byākaramāno
Sammi samadhi Sammā samugghāto Sammukhībhūtā
The one who is seeingrightly
Sammā vyākaramānoevam
becomesdisinterested:ni +Vi(njd 4 Sammāsamugghātohoti —
D. I. Sammukhapatipucchitum—D. II.
; >)
vyākareyya —
M. HI, 179
a+ Ul, pres. 3”. sg. 135 155
He would thuskeepon explaining
Destroyedperfectly;sam +u(t) + To askin return,faceto face;pari
rightly; vi +@ +Kr +a+ mana,
Sammā byākaramāno byākareyya - Ghan +ta,pp Prch t ya ti
Pr.p.; vi +@+Kr +evya;opt,34
M. 1. 149
Sg,
Would keepon explainingrightly; vi + Sammāsambuddhassa te patiiānato
a+ Kr+a+ mana, Pr.p.; continuous —A. 1.186
Sammāsatimdhammapadam
senseis expressedin Pali by a pr. p. Of you who claimsperfect
paecakkhāya—A, II. 30
with an opt., e.g. uppaiiamāno enlightenment;pati +Jan +nd +nta, Vadt eyvāma,
opt. I". pi.
Havinggivenup rightmindfulness,
a
uppaiieyya (is being born) pr.p
point of theDhamma:pati +& +Khya
SammukhāmetamBhagavatosutam
+ya, absol. Sammasambuddhova no va iti sammukhapatiggahitam —D. II.
Samma brahmacari patijanamano
—A. IV. 54 vinnanaya—M. I. 317 115;5. HI. 134;A. ILL.49
Sammāsamādhimhi
satihoti To know whether(he is a ) perfectly Thishasbeenheardandaccepted by
Claiminghimself
a perfectcelibate:
yathābhūtaiānadassanam—A.IV. EnlightenedOne or not;vi +Jna + meīn thepresence ofthe Blessed
pati +Jan + nā -- māna,prp.
336 ana, del
F .
One;me+etam;Sru +ta,pp.;pati +
Whenthereis rightconcentration
of Grh +i +ta,pp
Sammā bhikkhusamgho patipādito
mind,thereis knowledge
andvision Sammasambodhim
-Māiaao
into the reality as it is;yathabhita+ abhisambuddhotipaccannasim- Sammukhayevaanupavajjata
Community of bhikkhus hasbeen
hānadassana Vin. I. II vyākatā—S. IV. 59
trainedproperly;pati +Pad + e 4
I claimedthatI hadrealisedperfect Faultlessness
hasbeendeclaredright
fa, Caus. PP.
Sammā samādhiyatiāsavānam enlightenment, myself;abhi + sam+ in (your)presence:
sam+mukha+
khayāya —
S. V. 92;A. III. 16 Budh +ta,pp.; patit+a+ Jna +s + (y)+ eva;an +upa+ Vad+ya + ta,
Sammā mānābhisamayāantamakāsi
(Themind)is wellconcentrated
for im, pst. I". sg. der.; vi + a + Kr T ia, PP.
dukkhassa—S. IV. 205;A. I. 134
theeliminationof influxes;sam+4 +
(He) putanendto Dukkhaby removing = E TENI
Dha +iya +ti,pass.pres.3, sg;a Sammukhāvaassumha—S. V. 302
conceit perfectly;mana +
+Sru+ a, der.;Ksi +a,der. 44 Weheardrightin thepresence;
abhisamaya TP + mb ner
Tobeusedproperly
andwithease; sammukha +eva;a +Sru+ mha,pst
Sammāsamādhivipannassa pari +Hr +tabba: hartabba Irapl
Samma vatteyyalomam pateyya
hatupanisam hoti yathābhūta- hattabba> hatabba, fut. pp.
nettharam vatteyya—Vin. I. 49
nanadassanam
—A. III. 200 Sammukhāvinayapatirūpakena -
He would behaveproperly,causeto be
Knowledgeandvisionintoreality,
asIt Sammihiite pasārite—D. I. 70; M. I. Vin. II. 74
humbleandproceedin sucha way that By anapparent settlingof a legal
is, becomes
groundlessfortheone 57
theSamghareinstateshim in the
whohasmissedrightconcentration
of When folded in and stretchedout; sam questionin thepresence
Order; Vrt " eyya,opt. 3. se,; Pat
mind;vi +Pad +ta,pp.;hata+ +Rij +i+ ta, pp.; par Sr+et it
€ T eyya,caus. opt. 3. se. Sammukhāssa
vannambhāsati—D.
upanisa fa, caus pp

III. 180 MANI

Sammāvadamānovadeyya—M. I.
21; S.I. 68; A, 11.88; Vin. II.
He would keepon sayingrightly; Vad
" a * mana,pr. p.; Vad 4 eyya,opt.
KA 3.7 COHIIHOLNS Sense
Praisesto his face(praisesin his
Sammā samadhi sa upaniso Sammukhakaraniyamkammam-
2 presence);sammukhā
: ae RR goa
+ assa,Bhās
säparikkhāro —S. Y. 21 Vin. 1.325
a + ti, pres. ge sg.
Right concentrationof mindhasa A formal act, to be carried out in the
foundation
andsupportive
factors;
sa presence;sammukha+Kr +aniya,
1s expressed
Jut. pp Sammukhībhūtāna patikkosanti-
upa +nisa, from ni +Sri

897

Vin. 1.319;II. 103
Those who arepresentdo not protest;
sammukha-- bhūta;pati +Krug +a
+nti,pres,3%.pl.
Sammukhībhūtena samghena
bhāietum—Vin. I. 290
To makeit divide by theSamgha
present;Bhaj +e + tum,caus. inf.
Sammukhe pāturahosi —
D. IT. 206;
S. V. 294
Appearedin front(of him):patu+ ®+
a+ Hii (Bhi) +a+s+i. pst. 3. sg.
Sammutiya kappiyabhūmiyā —Vin.
1.239
TI
On thegroundallocatedfor storing
provisions; the word sammuliyā
seems to have been used for the word
sammataya;sam +Man + ti, der
Sammusavācam bhāseyyum—M. II.
202
(They) would speakaccordingto the
convention;Cy takessammusāas
Sammuceaand sayssammuccati
sammutiyalokavoharenaCy. HI.
447; Bhas +eyyum,opt, 3. pl.
Sammūlho kālam karoti —D. II. 85;
A. V. 169
Being confused,he dies:sam +Muh
* la, pp.; kdlam(death) +Kr od
ti, pres. 3rä, Sg,
Sammodaniyamakāsi —Vin. IHI, 144
Madea reconciliation:fam
saāhiāpetvā puna gehagamaniyam
akāsi, Cy. 561: sam +Mud +ana
iva, der.; a 4 Kr +4 +5 +i double
Pst. 3, sg.
Samkappavitakki
Samkappavitakka
Samketam
Sammodaniyamkathamsaraniyam
Samkappavitakkaphassasamudaya
vVitisāretvā—M. II. 141;5. I, 68, Samkāramvā vighāsamvā —Vin.
—A.IV. 385
160;IV. 93;Vin. 1.2 IV. 265
Thoughtsoriginatefromcontact:sam Rubbishor leftoverfood
Havinghada friendlyanddelightful
+ udaya: u(t) +aya (from I)
chat;sam +Mud+ anūya, ful. pp.;
Samkāramvicinitvāekamantam
Smr -- anīya, or sam +Raāi t anīva,
Samkappavitakka chaddetabbam - Vin. II. 209
fut.pp.; vi +ati +Sr +e +Wa,caus,
vedanāsamosaranā—A.IV. 385 Garbageshouldbecollectedand
absol.
Thoughtsplungeinto feelings;sam+ thrownatoneside;vi +Ci +na +i +
o +Sr +ana, der: tva,absol.;chadda+e +tabba,fut.
Sammohavepakkamva..dukkham
pp.
vadami pariyetthivepakkamva-A.
Samkappavitakkasatadhipateyya
Ill. 416
—A.IV. 385 Samkinnaparikho —A. III. 84
I declaretheDukkharesultingin
Thoughtshavememory
asthelord; Theonewhohasdestroyed themoat:
confusion or search:wipāka- ya,
sati + adhipati + eyya,der. samkiritvāvināsetvā
thito,Cy. II.
der.; pari -- ()) t es (om Is) + ti
264
der. Samkappavitakkasamadhipamukha
—A.IV. 385 Samkilitthamāpattimāpaiiissanti-
Samkapparāgo purisassakamo-S.
Thoughtshaveconcentration
of mind A. IHI.109;V.169āpaiiati
I. 22;A.IIL 411 astheprominent
Will commita foultransgression;
sam
The sense-desireof manis attachment
+Kli§ +ta,pp.; 2+ Pad +ya +i+
to thoughts;samkapparagoti Samkappānamvasānugo
- S. I. 7 ssanti,fut.. 3. pl.
samkappavasena uppannarago;Cy. The one who has been aslave to (his)
Ll, 407 thoughts,vasam+ anu +ga
Samkiyopapakesuthānesu—
D. III.
183
Samkappavitakkā dhātūsunānattam Samkampatisampakampati
He is liabletobesuspected
at
gacchanti—A. IV. 385 sampavedhati—D. I. 15
notoriousplaces;Sank+ya, fut.pp.
Thoughtsvaryin thesphere
ofbasic Trembles,shuddersandquakes;sam+
elements;samkappavitakkati Kamp +a +ti, pres. 3”. sg.;sam+ Samkuddhoasayamvasi — D. I. 262
samkappabhiita
vitakka
, Cy.IV,175 pa +kampati;sam+pa +Vyath+a Onewhois furiousandhaslostself
2
+ti,pres. 3". sg. control;sam+ Krudh +ta,pp.; a +
Samkappavitakka savam+ vast
nāmarūpārammanā
- A. IV.385 Samkārakūte
chaddehi—
Vin. I.
Thoughtshavemindandmatter
asthe 269 Samketahea kātum,atra
oblects; aāma 3 ripa + drammana Throw it awayon a garbage
heap: | patiharissāmīti—Vin. II. 265
chadda(Chard)+e +hi,imper:
2". To marka placesayingI will return
Samkappavitakkapannuttara Sk. here;pati t Hr t i t ssāmi,fut. I".
vimuttisaraamatogadha
—A. IV. Sg.
385
Samkārakūtevapotthakam—A. I.
Thoughtshavewisdomasthesuperior, 247 Samketamkatvavisamvadeti—Vin.
liberationastheessence
and Like a fibre-clothona garbageheap; IV.1 I
immortalityas theplunge;pafifid+ samkārakūte-t iva; potthakoti Havingdecidedtheplaceof debate,
uttara; amata +ogadha vākamayavattham, Cv. II. 359 hecontradicts
(causesto change
899
 Samketam
Samkhaya Samkhaya
Samkhārāvasesasamāpatti
theword);Kr +ta, absol.;vi +sam
Samkhalikhitam brahmacariyam-
+Vad+e +ti, caus.pres,3” Sg. +fi, caus.pres.3",sg.
M. I. 240 M. II. 223
Highestway oflife whichis clean(asa For thereasonof meditatingon
Samketam vitindmeyya—Vin. III.
polishedconchshell);Likh+i +ta, Samkhāyaloke carati
—S. I, 182 conditionedthingstherearises
46 PP.
He movesin theworld intelligently detachment;samkhāra+padhāna;vi
Would causeto go beyondthemarked +Raj +a, der.
place;atikkameti,
Cy.303 Samkhāyekamadhivāseti—A. IV.
Samkhasevalapanakamekato
354 Samkharaca viharo ca evam
ussāreyya—Vin. III, 177
Samkhamundikampi karonti —M. Causesto endureoneafter bhāvitāevambahulikata
Would causeto moveup waterplants
I. 87 consideration;sam +Khya+ya, tatruppattiyasamvattanti—
M. II.
andmossall together;w/t)+Sr+e+
They inflict thepunishmentof absol. +ekam;adhi + Vas+e +ti, 100
evya,caus. opt. 3". sg.
samkhamundikain which theconvict caus.pres. 3”. sg. Thehabitpatterns andthewayof
is skinned from the upper lip upward living,thuscultivated
andfrequently
Samkhaditva aiihoharāmi —A. IHI,
and his hair is tied to a pole andpull Samkhāyekampatisevati—
A. IV. practised,
leadhimtobebornthere;
304
themup,afterwardhis head is rubbed 354 Bhi +e + i +ta,caus.pp.; bahula+
| chewandthenswallow;sam+Khad
with gravel until it becomes Causesto makeuseof one after kata; tatra + uppattiya; sam + Vri+
+i +tvd,absol.; adhi +0 +Hr +a+
somethinglike a conch shell.: Cy. II. consideration;pati +Sev +a +fi, a +nti,pres.3™.pl.
mi, pres. 1. sg.
58 pres. 3™.sg.
Samkhārānamādīnavamokāram
Samkhāpi anubandhitabbo—A,IV.
Samkham upalāsetvā
—D. II, 337 Samkhayekamparivajjeti—A. IV. samkilesamnibbāneānisamsam
367 354
Havingcausedtheconchshell to give pakāsesi
—D. II. 42
Havingconsidered
carefully
heshould Causestoavoidoneafter
sound;upa +Las +e +tva,caus. Heproclaimed disadvantage,
vanityand
be followed; sāmaāāatthassa consideration;pari + Vrj +e+ ti,
absol. corruptionof conditionedthingsand
bhāvanāpāripūri āgamanam iānitvā, caus.pres. 3. sg. theadvantage of Nibbana;pa + Kas +
Cy: IV. 169; sam '- Kāwā 1.api; anuT
Samkham gacchati—D. I. 200: M. II. e +s +i, caus.pst.3”. sg.
Ba(n)dh +i +tabba,fut. pp. Samkhāyekam vinodeti—A. IV.354
89;S. IV. 79
Goes to be reckoned as; sam 1 Kinā
Causesto reiectoneafter Samkhārānamyevaaniccatam
Samkhapiapucchapakkamitabbam consideration;vi +Nud +e +fi, caus. sandhāyabhāsitam—5. IV. 216
—A. IV. 366 pres. 3”, gg: It is said,concerningindeedthe
Samkham nopeti vedagū—S. IV. 206
Shouldconsultanddepart
aftercareful impermanent natureof conditioned
The one who hasgoneto theclimak of
consideration;
@ +Prch +ya,absol.; Samkhāradhātu kho gahapati things;sandhdaya, indcl.;Bhas + i +
knowledgedoesnot cometo be
pa +Kram +i +tabba,fut. pp. vinanassa oko —S. III. 10 ta,pp.
reckoned;na +upa +] +tj. pres, 3
Householder,theelementof
Sg.; veda +Gam +Gi,der
Samkhāya kulāni upasamkamati, volitionalactivityis theabode
of Samkhārāpatippassambhanti
—D.
samkhāya nisīdati, samkhāya consciousness;cp. okampahaya II 215
Samkhampi na upenti, upanidhampi
dhammam bhāsati, samkhāya aniketasart, Sn. 844 Activitiescalmdown;pati +pa +
na upenti, kalabhagampina upenti
uccārapassāvam
sandhāreti
—A.II. Sra(m)bh+a +nti,pres.3. pl.
—S, V: 457
143 Samkharadhatu
vinhanassa
oko—S.
They do notcomeevento be
Havingwellthought
out,he IH. 10
reckoned,theydo notcomeeven
approachesfamilies,sitsdown The elementof volitionalactivityis
closerto it andtheydo notamount
(there),preachestheDhammaand the abode of consciousness
evento a fractionof it: upa +e (from
causesto hold nature’scall;sam+
!) +nti,pres, 34 pl.
Khya + ya, absol.; sam +Dhr + é@ Samkhārappadhānā virāgo hoti -

901
 Samkhāresūpasantesu
Samganikaramatam Samganikārāmatā
Samgehi |
avasitthataya,Cy. IT. 135 ; wamkhāra
Samkhittenapaīicupādānakkhandhā I
+avasesa;pa + Ap +tabba,Jit. pp. Thosewho areengagedin thepleasure Samgahaya avivadayasamaggiya ;
dukkhā— Vin. I. 10
of beingin socialgroups;anu + Yuj+ ekībhāvāyasamvattati—A. IHI.289
In short,fiveaggregates
withgrasping
Samkhāresūpasantesu
nibbutoti Ia, pp. lt leadsto co-operation,non-
areDukkha;pafica +upa +@+Da +
pavucecati
—A. III. 347 disputation,concord and togetherness;
ana, der. +khandha
When accumulatedenergiesare Samganikārāmatā—A, III. 173 sam+ Vrt+a +ti,pres.3”. sg. I
To takedelightin grouplife;sam+
exhaustedhe is called ‘the Samkhittena patimokkham gana +ika, der. + Grama + ta, der. Samgāmam otaritum —A. III, 89 |
extinguished’;samkhāresūpasantesu,
uddisitum —Vin. I. 112
To gotothebattle;0 + Tr +a+i+ I
To recitePatimokkha(thecodeof Samgatibhāvahetu—M. II. 222
T Ia, pp.; pa + Vac +ya + ti, pass. tum,inf. M
rules)in brief:u(t)+Dr§ +i +tum, Dueto theconfluence;sam +Gam +
pres. 3". sg. PUIHI
inf. ti, der Samgāmasīsam aiihāvasati—A. III. M
90
Samkhittavitthārenapi dhammam
Samkhittena bhāsitassavitthārena Samgammasamāgamma - S. IV. Hestaysatthebattlefront;adhi+a +
deseyya—A. I. 133
attham—D. II. 281;S. I. 11;S.II.47 302; V. 375; A. IV. 342 Vas+a+ ti,pres.3". sg. M
WouldexplaintheDhammain brief as
Detailedmeaning
of the talkgivenin Havingassembled; sam+Gam+ya,
well as in detail;Dr§ + e + eyya,caus.
brief;vi +Str +a, der. absol.; sam+ ā +Gam +ya, absol. Samgāmento pabhaggohoti—Vin.
opt. 3™.sg.
III. 108
Samkhittenavuttā,vitthārena Samgammasamāgammaatthena He haslostthebattlein fighting:
Samkhittena attham vakkhami -
avibhattā —M. II. 161 atthamvyahiianenavyahianam samgama+e +nta,denom.pr.p.;
Vin. I. 40
Saidbriefly,notanalysed
indetail;Vac samgāyitabbamna vivaditabbam- pa +Bha(h)i+ta,pp.
I shall give themeaningin brief;sam +
+ ta,pp.; a +vi + Bhaj +ta,pp. D. HI. 127
Ksip +ta,pp.; Vac+ssami(Skt.
Havingcometogether,youshould Samgāmosamūpabbūlhoahosi—D.
syami),fut. 1". sg. this is also used
Samkhiyadhammo udapadi— D. I. 2 rehearsemeaningwith meaning, II. 285;5. I. 98,V. 447,
aspres. 1". sg.
Therecameupa subject
of talk; phrase
withphrase,
butshould
not samupabbulho; agss
encanta
—-

samkhivāvuccatikatha, Cy.43;sam disputeoverthem;sam +Gai +e + Warwasimminent: sam+upa + Vah

Samkhittena uddesam uddisitvā
+Khyad+dhamma;u(t) +a +Pad + tabba,caus.fut.pp.;vi +Vad+i + +ta,pp.
vitthārena attham avibhaiitvā —M.
2.pst 3 tabba, fut. pp.
1.110;S.IV. 94
Samgītāniantalikkhevattanti—D.
Havingmadeabrief statementwithout
Samganikāpavaddhano
—A.III. 256 Samgamma
samāgamma
evam II. 138
analysingthemeaningin detail:u(t) 4
(The fīre is an) increaserof grouping; Samassaseyyum —M. I. 306 Music is in progressin theair; Vrt +a
Dr$ +i +tva,absol.: a + vi 4 Bhaj + Havingcometogethertheywould +nti,pres.3. pl.
sam +gana +ika, der; pa + Vrdh+
i+ tvG,absol. console(him) thus;sam +@+Svas+
ana, der.
eyyum,
opt.3”.pl.
2
Samegiti acikkhitabba—Vin. 1.95 .
Samkhittenaovadenaovadatu —M. Thetext,assigned tohim,shouldbe i
Samganikāya samvattatino
III. 267 Samgamma samāgamma
rosenti- informed:idamevasabbam(timeof
pavivekāya—A. IV. 280; Vin. II. 258,
Pleaseadmonish(me) in brief: o + A. V.121 ordination,lengthofthe seasonand |
pl.
Vad +a+ tu, imper,3". sg. theportionof theday)ekatokatva,
It leadstoa grouplife,nottosolitude; —.-
sam + Vrt +a + ti, pres. 3”, sae vi + caus.pres, 3™.
Ind
pl. Cy, 1034;@+Khya +i +tabba,
Samkhittenadhammamdesetu—A. intens.fut. pp.
Vice+ a, der.
IV. 280; Vin. II. 258 Samgaram
akamsu—
Vin. I. 247
PleaseexplaintheDhammain brief: Reachedanagreement;
sam +Gr+a, Samgehiacchadesum
—S. I. 81
Drs +e +tu, imper,3”. sg.
Samganikārāmatam
anuyuttā
—D.
II. 78 der. Theymade
himdresswith(upper)

903
 Samghagato
samgehi; &+Chad +e+ 5 +um.,
caus.pst,3°. pl.
Samghagato—A. IV. 153
Gone to theSamgha(=beingin the
Samgha)
Samghatouddisatha—M. IIL. 256
a + tha. imper.2”. pl.
Samghabhattamkatum —
Vin. I.
175
Tooffera mealtotheSamgha
Samghabhedamkarissāma, cakka-
bhedam—
Vin. II. 196:II. 171
We will breaktheSamgha,thecircle:
samghaandcakkaseemto havebeen
used hereSynonimously;Bhid -- a,
der. . Samgha;
Samghabhedenanandati —A. II, 239
He rejoicesover the dissensionof the
community;samgha + Bhid +a, der.;
Na(njd+a +ti,pres.3. sg.
Samghamajjhampiakaddhitva
vattabbo—Vin. III, 173
HavingbroughtbeforetheSamgha,
evenby force,he shouldbe
admonished:@ +kaddha(fromKrs) +
i +va, absol.; Vac4 tabba,fut. pp.
Samghamajjheadhikaranesu
voyuhiati —A. II, 239
Involvesin disputesin themidstofthe
Samgha;vi +9 +Yu(i)j +a +ti, pres.
OM sa:
Samghamajjheapattiya anuyuhiiya-
Samghamha
māno— Vin. IV. 35
Samghamhāvapakāsitum—A. IHI.
Beingauestioned inthemidst
ofthe 3”. 8g.;Vae+aniva,fut. pp.
146
Samghaforanoffence: any4 Vu(ilit
To withdrawfromtheSamgha;vi 4 Samghamīāpesi —Vin. II. 285
iva + mana, Pass. pr. Pp.
apa +Krs +ya + i +tum,inf, InformedtheSamgha(—motionis put
beforetheSamgha); Jia +dpe+5 +
Samghamaiihe udaharitabbam-
Samghamapaloketumbhandu- i, Caus.pst.3, sg.
Vin. I. 170;I. 240-1
kammaya— Vin. I. 77
It shouldbeannounced inthemidst
of
To seekpermissionfromtheSamgha Samghambhindeyya—M. III. 65;
theSamgha;u(t) +@+Hrtatit
forshavingthehead;apa+Lok +e + A.1.27
tabba,
fut. pp.
tum, inf. (He)wouldbreaktheunityof the
Samgha;Bhi(n)d+eyya,opt.3. sg.
Samghamajjhe osatohoti—M. I,
Samghamārabbha davamkarissati
469
—Vin. IV. 197 Samghamvaganamva pigam va
Hasarrivedin theSamgha;0 (ava)+
Sr +ta, pp.
(He) will makefun concerningthe
Samgha;ārabbha,indcl.
senimva—Vin. IV. 226 N
TheSamgha
ora groupor a guildor a
company
Samghamajjhe thitakovaima Samghamuddissadānamdassanti-
gathayo abhasi —Vin. I. 349 M. HI. 256
Samghamsamaggam bhetvāna—A.
He utteredtheseverseswhilestanding They will give almsin thenameof the
V. 76
in themidst
of the Samgha;
thitako
+ Samgha;Dā 3ssanti, fat. 3". pi. Havingcauseddissension
in theunited
eva;
7° a i+Bhas
? ae +i,
ui pst.
: 3”.
ordsg.
e
Bhid+e +tvana;caus.
Samgham uddissa vihāro kārāpito absol.
Samghamaiihe bāhāvikkhepam —Vin. I. 139
bhanati —A. IV. 193 Causedto build a dwellingplacefor Samghasammuti (na kaci)
Speakswithgesticulation
inthe the sakeof theSamgha;uddissa, saditabba—A. IV. 347
assemblyof theSamgha;bahd+vi + indcl. Any agreementreachedby the
Ksip +a, der; Bhan +a +ti,pres. community shouldnotbeentertained;
3” sg Samghamupasamkamitvāekamsam Svad+¢ +i +tabba,caus.fut.pp.
uttarāsamgamkaritvā bhikkhūnam
Samghamajjhe
vaganamajjhe
va pādevanditvā ukkutikam nisīditvā Samghasamaggimkaroma—Vin. I.
ekapuggaleva pakaseyya—Vin. I. ahialim paggahetvāevamassa 357
103 vacanīyo—Vin. I. 57 Wemakea reconciliation
of the
Should makeit known
in themidstof Havingapproached
theSamgha, Samgha;
Kr +0 +ma,pres.1”.pl.
theSamgha,
orGroupor inthe arrangedtherobeon oneshoulder,
presenceofa single individual;pa + worshipped
thefeetof thebhikkhus, Samghasutthutaya
Kas +eyya,opt. 3™.sg. andsatontherightcalf,andputboth samghaphāsutāya —A. 1.99;Vin. II.
palms together, he should have to say 21
Samghamajjhe vanisinnam, ekam thus;wpa +sam +Kram +i +Iwā, Forthesmoothrunningof theSamgha,
vā rahonisinnam—S.V.315 absol.; Kī -- i t twā,absol.; Vand +i fortheconvenienceofthe Samgha;
Sittingin themidstof theSamgha or +tvd, absol.; ni +Sad +i +tva, sutthu+ta,der.;phasu +ta,der.
sittingalonein privacy;ni +Sad+ta, absol.;
pa +Grh +e +tva,absol.;
pp.; raho, indel. evam +assa: As +ya (Skt. yat), opt. Samghassa
katikavattam
905
 Samghassa
Samghātiyā Samghādisesena
Samghe
acikkhitabbam, imam kalam
keepingthedoublelayerrobevery
pavisitabbam imam kalam broken( loosened);Ruj +ya +nti,
tightbetween
theknees;
pari+Ay+ puggala+ika,der.;Ruh +e + nti.
nikkhamitabbam — Vin. II. 210 pass. pres, 3” . pl. caus.pres.3”.pl.
ta, pp. +ika
Should inform theagreementof the
Samgha:(you) shouldenterat this Samghādisesenakāreti — Vin.II. 83 Samghikavihara nikkaddhanti-
Samghatimpi ottharitya
time,go out at this time:@ +Khya +i The Samghatakeslegalmeasures in Vin.I. 166
antaraghare nisidanti—Vin, IL, 213
accordancewith a formalmeetingof Throwoutofthe residencebelonging
Havingspreadthedoublelayerrobe
ace.for loc. meaning;pa + Vig +j + theSamgha;samgha+adi +sesa;Kr totheSamgha; ni(s) +kaddha(from
(ontheground)theysitinsidethe
tabba,fut.pp.; ni(s) + Kram +i + he1 ti, caus. pres. 3”. sg. Krs) +nti,pres.3”. pl.
house;0 +Str +i +tva,absol.:ni+
tabba,fut. pp.
Sad +a +nti,pres.3” pl.
Samghani nama ya kaci katūpagā- Samghinoganinoganacariyafata
Samghassakatikasapthānam—Vin. Vin. IV. 340 yasassinotitthakarasadhusammata
Samghatiya paticchadetva—
Vin. I,
II. 76;IIL. 160 Samghānimeanssomethingappliedon bahujanassa —5. I. 68
193;11.268
Convention oftheSamgha thewaist;kati +upaga Thosewhoaregroupleaders, group
Causingto cover it with thedouble
teachers,
wellknown,famous,ford-
layer robe;pati +Chad +e +ta,
Samghassaveyyāvaceamkareyyam Samghāsamghīganībhūtā—D.I. makers,highlyesteemed bymany
caus. absol.
—Vin. II. 74 112;M. II. 164 people
I shoulddo a serviceto theSamgha;vi In groups;formedthemselves
into
Samghatiyo parupitva —Vin. I. 46
+a + Vrt +ya, der. groups;samghi+samghi;gana +i, Samghicevagani ca ganācariyoca
Having puton thetwo robes;pa +a+
der, +bhiita,pp. natoyasassititthakaro
Vr +i +tvd,meta.absol.
Samghassa(mā) hayiti afifiassa sadhusammato bahujanassa,
databbam— Vin. II. 173 Samghikam nama samghassa rattaīhū cirapabbaiitoaddhagato
Samghātiraienaokinnā—D. II. 130 dinnam pariccattam— Vin. III. 266
It shouldbegiven to anotherthinking, vayoanuppatto— D. I. 47
Thedoublelayerrobewascovered Samghikameansthatwhichis given (He) is a groupleader,a groupteacher,
may it not bea loss to theSamgha;Ha
with dust;0 (ava) +Kir +ta,pp: anddonatedto theSamgha;samgha+ wellknownandillustriousperson,
T 0, +&pst. 3. se. + iti; Da +
tabba,fut.pp. ika, der.; Da +ta,pp.; pari +Tyaj+ creatorof a newschoolofthought,
Samghatanikam fa, pp. recognised by manypeopleas good, a
annatitthiyapubbassa manof experience andlongstanding
in
Samghatikannopi adhitthatabbo -
anaradhaniyasmim
—Vin. I, 70 Samghikam labham parinatam- therenounced life,a personwhohas
Vin. II. 119
This is sufficient for thefailureofa Vin. III. 265 gonehisdistance of life andcomeof
Even a cornerofthe doublelayer robe
formermember
of a secttosatisfy
the Thingsofferedto theSamgha;
pari + age; samgha+ i, der.;gana +i, der.;
shouldbe determined:adhj +Stha
Samgha;idamlimgam,idam Nam +ta, Pp. gona +A@carivo;Jia +ta,pp.; tittha
tabba,fut. pp.
lakkhanam,idam acalam,idam +kara;sadhu+sam+ Man +ta,
balam, idam pamānantivuttamhoti, Samghikam senāsanamvissaiienti pp.; bahujanassa,gen.for instr.;
Samghātipattacīvaradhārane—D. I.
Cy. 993 —Vin. II. 170 ratta+Jna +ti, der.;cira +pa +
70; M. I. 57
In makinguseof thedoublelayer Causetodisposeofthe lodging Vraj+i +ta,pp.; addha+Gam+ta,
robe,thesingle layerrobeandthe belonging
totheSamgha; vi +Srj +ya pp.;anu+pa +Ap +ta,pp.
bowl; Dhr +e +ana,caus.der. te ati, caus.pres.3".pi.
2rd

Samgheagāravoviharati appatisso
Samghātipallattikāya nisidimsu - Samghikāni
bīiānipuggalikāya —M. II. 245
Samghātiyāpattāluiianti—Vin.II. bhūmiyāropenti— Vin. I. 250 Heabideswithdisrespect
anddistrust
Vin. II. 78; III. 162,pallatthikāya
135 They causeto sow theseedsbelonging towardsthecommunity;a +garu +a,
(They) satdown with legscrossed
Bindings of the double layer robeare totheSamgha
ona private
land; der.

907
 Samghe
Samgheadhammiyamāneasammo-
dikāya vattamānāya—
Vin. I, 341
When theSamghais performing
illegal actsandthereprevails
unfriendliness;adhammivamāneti
adhammikānikiceāni kurumāne;
asammodikāvavattamānāvāti
sammodana
kathāyaavattamānāva,
pr.p.; Vit +a+ mana,Pr.p.
Samgheaveccappasadena
Samannāgatā—S. IV. 304
Endowedwith rationalfaith in the
community;
ava +I (t) +ya, absol.-
sam +anu + a +Gam +
ta, pp.
Samgheganeetadayocum—
D. II.
165
They saidthis to thepeopleof
differentgroups;in thepolitical sense
SamghaandGanaareusedto indicate
peopleofthe tribal communities;
étam(etad) +a + Vac +um,root
redup.,pst. 34.pl
SamgheGotami dehi —M. III. 253
Gotami,give it to theSamgha;Da +e
+hi, imper.2"4,sg.
Samghete dinne ahaficevapujito
bhavissami,Samghoca —M. III. 253
Whenit is givenby you to the
Samgha,I myselfand theSamgha
would havebeenoffered:Da 4 fa,
Pp.; aham +ca 4 eva; Pijj
Ia, pp.
Samghete viharato phasu
bhavissati—A. V, 209
While living in theSamgha,it will be
convenientfor you
Samghena
Samghedānam samādapeti—M, II.
163
He makesmegive a gift to the
Samgha;sam+@+Da +āpe' ti,
caus.3™,sg.
Samghe dinnam —8. 1.233
What is given in thecommunity;
Dé +
fa,pp.; in thecommon
idiomdative
case is used to indicatethereceiver
Samghenaasammatamvutthapenti
—Vin. IV. 320
Causeto ordaintheoneunapproved
by
theSamgha;a + sam+ Man +fa,Pp.;
vi +u(t) +Stha+dpe+nti,caus.
prése3” ph
Samghenakatika kata —Vin. I. 153
An agreementhasbeenreachedbythe
Samgha:Kr +ta,pp.
Samghenapabbāianīyakammakatā
- Pad +ya +i, pst. 3”. sg.
Vin. II 14,
Beinginflictedthepunishment
of
banishment bytheSamgha;pa +Vraj
e +aniva,caus.fut.pp.; Kr +ta,
Pp
Samghena paricchitabba byattayam
bhikkhuni lajjiniti —Vin. IV. 330
She should be examined by theSamgha
(to know)whetherthisbhikkhunt
is
experienced
andmodest;
pari +/ks+
i +tabba,fut.pp.; lajja +t+ ini,det.
Samghenavaganenavapuggalena
va (na vissajjetabbam)—
Vin. II. 170
Shouldnotbedisposed
ofby the
Samghaor by a groupor byan
individual; vi +Srj +ya +e +tabba;
caus. fut. pp.
Samghe nimantite
Samgho
Samghenimantite—A. IV, 215
Samghopattamukkuiieyya—A.
WhentheSamgha
is invited:
ni + IV. 345
manta+e +i +ta, denom.pp. TheSamgha turnsthebowlup;u(t) +
kujja +eyya,denom.opt,3”. sg.
Samghepavaretum— Vin. I. 162
To hold Pavarana( to makea request Samghopattamnikkujjeyya—A.
fromtheSamghato pointoutwhether IV. 344
theyhaveseen,heardor suspected TheSamgha wouldturnthebowl
of his wrong-doing)in theassembly upsidedown;a punishment meted
of Samgha;pa + Vr +e +tum,caus. outbytheSamghaon an unfaithful
inf. laity;ni +kujja +eyya,denom.opt.
3”. Sg.
Samghepātubhavanti—M. I. 445
Appearin thecommunity;pātu Samghobhinno—A. V. 73
(Skt.pradur) +bhavanti TheSamghais splitup;Bhid +ta,pp.
Samghevivādamianeti— D. III. 246
Samghoviharati sathero
Createsa disputein theSamgha; Jan + sapamokkho —
D. If. 124
e t ti,caus.pres. 3". sg.
Samgha abideswitheldersandleaders;
sa E thero,sa +pamokkho:pa +
Samghevivādo uppaiii —M. II. 245 mukha + a, der.
Disputecameup in theSamgha;u (i) +
Samghoveyajatammukham—Vin.
I. 246
Samgho ukkhittam osareti—Vin. I. TheSamghais indeedprominent for
340 thosemakingofferings;yajatam:Yaj
The Samghacausesto reinstate
the +a+ nta,pr.p.,dat.pl.
onewho hasbeensuspended; u(t) +
Ksip +ta, pp.; o +Sr +e +ti, caus. Samghosamaggosammodamano
pres, 3. sg. avivadamano ekuddesophasu
viharati—A. III. 67;Vin. IHI. 172
Samgho
tampatimaneti
—Vin.IIL. (samaggois missing) ie
79 TheSamgha, beingunited,rejoicing
he Samgha
awaitsyou;pati+Man+ withoneanother, not-disputing,having
;
e + fl, Caus. pres.
2rd
3”.
7
Sz. onerecital
(ofPatimokkha)
abides
at
ease!sam +Mud +a +mana,prip.;a
Samghopatisāranīyakammam +yi + Vad+a +mana,prp.; eka +
patippassambheyya —A. IV. 346 uddesa
TheSamghashouldally the
punishmentof Patisaraniya;
pati +Sr
+e +aniva,caus.fut. pp.; pati >pa
+Sra(m)bh +eyya, opt. 3”. Sg. toofar; sa +ati +Sr +a, der.
909
 Samgho
Samsattho
Samvāsc Samviggo
-
Samgho sami pattacivare—Vin, I.
Takes stepsfor restrainment;
pati+
303 Samvidhayaekamnavam
Pad +ya +ti. pres. 3. sg. pannattampana sikkhāpadam
Samgha
is theownerofthe bowland abhirūhanti—Vin. IV. 64
sabbehipilaiiīpuggalehi samam
the robe Having organisedthemselves(they)
sikkhitabbabhavatosamasikkhata
Samvarītipavuccati—D. III. 196 boarda boat;sam +vi +Dha +ya,
nama,Cy. 260; eka +uddesa;
Samyamāyasikkhati —S. IV. 176 It is called night; samvari(Skt. absol.:abhi +Ruh +a +nti,pres.
samasikkhā + ta, der.
Trains himself for the restrainment:
Sarvari) +iti; pa +Vac+ yqtii 34,
pl.
) .. I
sikkhati (Skt. Siksate) Īrom Sak Pa&ss. ;pres. 3%. so
g
Samviggolomahatthajato—S. I. 50,
desid pres. 3” so Samvibhajethano rajjena—D.IL.
169
Samvasamanyāya vissāsamanvāva
- 233 .
Touched
bya deepfeeling
and
Samyutto methunenasamyogena- A. II. 78 (He)shoulddividethekingdomand
horripilated;sam +Vij +ta,ppsloma
A.IV.54 : Having hadcloseassociation
and
+Hrs + ta,pp. +Jan +ta,pp:
sharewithus;sam+vi +Bhaj+etha,
Indulgedin sexualintercourse:sam + intimacy;anu +1 +ya, absol- yj + opt.mid. 3 sg.
Svas + a, der +anvaya
4 * ta,pp.; mithuna + a. der Samvijjatisamvegam
āpaiiati—M.
Samvissandanti mannegamissati-
1.186;
A. II. 114
Samyogavisamyogamdhamma- Samvāsamkappesi—Vin.II. 17 M. II. 117 P
Agitatesandexperiences
a deep
Pariyāyam- A. IV. 37 Lived together(ashusbandandwife); It will goasif overflowingthebanks:
feeling;sam+ Vij +ya +Ul,pres.a
sam + Vas +a, der: kappa+e+5 + sam+ vi +Syand+a +nta +1,PrP.
A modeofteachingdealingwith sg.;
5" sam
i, denom. pst. 374Sg. Gam +i + ssati, fut. 3. sg.
attachment
anddetachment:sam+ Hui +ti, pres. 3™.Sg.
ta, der.; pariti--a de:
Samvāsena avaiānāti—A. HI. 164 Samvegamāpādi—S. I. 200;A. 1.
Samviiianti
tedhammā
mayi,
ahanc
aes . a .. a a

Ī = :
Despisesfor livingtogether:
ava 280 HAKE
Samvattamāneloke —D. I. 17 tesu dhammesu sandissāml —S;V. sam+
Jan + nad+fi, pres. 3™.sg, Heexperienced
a deepfeeling:
When theworld is contracting:sam + 177
Vij + a, der; a+ Pad + i, pst. 3”. Sg.
Vrt +a +mana,BF.P. ā Thosethingsareto be foundin me,
Samvasenasilam veditabbam—A. I amto be seentoo in thosethings;
IL. 187 Samvelliyamkatisuttakam—Vin. Il.
Samvattanikam viihānam assa sam +Vid +ya +nti,pass.pres.
Moral virtueshouldbe understood
by 271
ānaūiūpagam —M. II. 262 34,pl.; sam+Drs +ya +mi,
Loin- clothanda hip-string;sam
Ekisting consciousnesswould be livingtogether;
Vid+e +i +tabba, pass. fut. I. sg.
yelliva(somethingcurly)
drifting towardsunshakystate caus. fut. pp.

(catutthaiihāna):Cytakes Samvijjante kho gahapatiāsanani,

Samvoharenasoceyyamveditabbam
v'amvattanika as samvattatikaand Samvasonama ekam kammam saceākamkhasi,nisida—M. 1.
—A. II. 187
equatessamvattati with nibbattati, ekuddesosamasikkhata
—Vin.III. 359
Purityshouldbeunderstood by
LV.61; sam + Vrt +ana+ ika, der; 28 Householder,there
conversation;
suci f eyya,der.
ananja +upaga Abidingtogether
means
conducting sit down, if you like;sam +Vid +ya
formalact together,reciting +nte,mid.pres.3". pl; ni +Sad +a,
Samsaggesati vissaso—A. III. 67,
Patimokkhatogether,undergoingsame imper.2". sg.
Samvaram āpaiiati —D. I. 70; S. IV. 259
training together;catubbidhampi ation there
104 When there is close assoct
samghakammam simdparicchinnehi Samvidahitva= agamamsu
; —Vin.
'in. I HI. +a, der.; vi +
Restrai imself; ā Pad 4ya +ti,
trainshimself;@+ arisestrust;sam +Sy
Pakatattehi bhikkhūhiekato 64 :
pres. 3. sq. §vas +a, der.
kattabbattā
ekamkammam
nāma, Having organised themselve,(they
tatha pahicavidhopi went: sam--
” vi t Dhā
ga TiNEE
t Iwā, RA
Ti
Samvarāya Patipaiiati —D. I. 70; S. Samsattho viharati ananulomikena
patimokkhuddesoekato absol.: a + Gam + @ + imsu, double
IV. 104 gihisamsaggena
—A. IHI. 258
pst. 3 ipl:
uddisitabbattāekuddesonama,
911
 Samsattho
Samharaty Samharitva
Sarakuttim
Being mixedwith lay peoplein
Moveablescreenor a screenwhich
disagreeable
way,heabides:
sam Samharitva nikkhipi —Vin. IV. 61, kam+u(t)+Dré +eyyam,opt.1".
canbeopenedup;wamsaranakitiko
+Srj +ta,pp.; an +anu 4 loma + 246 Sg.
nama cakkalayuttokitiko,
ika,der. Foldedupandkeptsafe;sam+Hr +i
Cy. 1220
+tvd,absol.; ni +Ksip +i, pst,374 Sayamabhififiayasacchikatva
Samsattho viharati kāmehi, —D. II. sg. pavedeti—D. I. 12;M. I. 401,
Samsarananissitam
vāhoti—Vin.
214 pavedenti
II. 151
Being miked with sensedesires Samharitva samharitva maggam Herealiseshimselfwithspecial
It is close to a public road:anibbhijja-
patipajjanti—M. If. 99 knowledge andmakesit known;
gamanivogatapaccagatamaggo, Cy,
Samsattho viharati sagahattha- (People)go on theroadin groups;sam sayam,indcl.;abhiāhā,instr:sg.;
570; sam +Sr +ana,der: ni(s)+Sri
pabbaiitehi—A. IHI.258 Huri +tva,absol.;pati +Pad + sa +acchi(=akkhi)+katvé,
+fa,pp. va +nti, pres, 3. pl.
Being mikedwith laity andclergy,he absol.;pa + Vid+e + ti, caus.
abides;sa +gaha + Stha +a. der. pres.3”. sg.
Samsādeti no vissaiieti —A. I. 170, Sayanāyacittam namati—M. III,
288;IV. 398 113
Samsandati tantissaro gitena Sayamabhinnasacchikatva
Causesit to sink down,doesnotcause (His) mindbendstowardssleeping;
gitassaro tantissarena—D. II. 267 upasampalia viharanti—5. IV. 234
to solveit;sam+Sad+e+ ti,caus. Nam +a +ti, pres.3. sg. Realisingandattaining
to(thetruth)
pres. 3”. sg.; vit Sri +yatertti by themselves
withspecial
thesong,soundof thesongagrees
caus, pres. 3™.sg. Sayanigharenisaiiam kappesi—Vin. knowledge,theyabide:upa+sam
with thatofthe string;fanti + sara;
IV. 94 +Pad +ya,absol.;vi +Hr +a+
gita + sara
Samsāramāpaiiaparamparāya—M. Satdown in thebedroom; nti,pres.3%.
pl.
Il. 73 Sayanigharetisayaniyaghare,Cy.
Samsandatinibbanajica patipada ca
Havingentered
intothecycle(ofbirth 856; sayana +ghara; kappa+e +s Sayamabhinnasacchikatva
=D. TF,223
anddeath)successively;samsaram+ +1,denom.
pst.3. sg. vipākampavedemi—M. II. 199
Nibbanaandtheway to it agreeswith
a +Pad +ya, absol.; samsara:sam Afterexperiencing (it) myselfwith
eachother;the term nibbānahica
t Sr ta, der. Sayamevacitako pajjali—D. IL. 164 specialknowledge, I makeothers
Patipadā ca seemsto have takeaas
Funeralpyrecaughtfire itself;sayam knowthe result; pa +Vid+e +mi,
one unit
Samsitam dighamaddhanamtasu (indcl.)+eva;pa +Jval +i, pst.3”. caus.pres.1".sg.
tāsyevaiātisu —D. II, 91; 5. V.432 sg,
Samsandantisamenti—S. V. 460
Wandered a longperiod
of timein
Flow togetherandmergetogether;
variousbirths;sam+Sr +i +ta,pp. Sayamabhikkamantosayam
sam +Syand +a +pii, pres. 3". pl.;
tāsu + eva patikkamanto evam vakkhati —A. eyya,opt. go
sama(m)+ e (fromI) +ntl, pres. 3°.
II. 338
pil.
Samsidativisidatinasanthambhati (He) saysthuswhile movinghimself Sayāmaham
sabbabhūtānukampī-
—A,.IIL. 89 S. 1.110
Samsappajatika tiracchānayoni —A.
Sinks down, losescourageandis Prp.; pati +Kram +a+ nta,pep. Beingcompassionate towardsall
V. 289 I
unabletokeepfirm;sam+Sad+a+ Vae+ssati(Skt.syati),fut.3”.sg. beings,I sleep;St +a +mi,pres.1".
Beingsofanimalorigin,whoare Sg. +aham;sabba+bhiita+
ti, pres, 3”. sa.; vi +sidati; sam+ used as pres.
crawlingby nature:sam +Srp +ya +
thambha +ti, pres. 3”. sg. anukampa+i, der.
iātika
Sayamabhiāliāyakamuddiseyyam?
Samharatu dussāni—M. II. 93 —Vin. 1.8 Sarakuttimnikamayamanassa
Samsaranakitikam
Fold up cloths;sam +Hr +a+ tu, Realisingthetruthmyself,whom samadhissa bhamgohoti —A. HI.
ugghatanakitikam—Vin. II. 153
imper, 3. sg, shouldI pointout(asmyteacher)’; 251;Vin. II. 108

913
 Sarajena
Thereoccursa breakof
concentrationfor the one who is
desiringfortheharmony
of sound:
Sara t Kip' ti, der.; ni4 kāmaya
+ mana, pr.p.
Sarajena vatena okinna —Vin. IV.
118
Infestedwith dustywind; sa 4 raja; o
+Kir + ta,pp.
Saratayasmaevarūpam garukam
āpattim āpaiiitā? —M. IL. 247; ep.
Vin. II. 80
Doesthevenerableremember"I have
committeda seriousoffence ofthis
kind" ?; sarati 3ayasmd;
a +Pad +4
ya +i + tu, der.
Saradasamayeviddhe vigata-
valāhakedeve —S. I. 65:IHI. 156;V.
44;A. I. 242,withoutdeve
During thetimeof autumn,whenthe
sky is clearandtheclouds aregone;
Vyadh+ ta,Pp.; vi +gata, pp.
Sarabhaiifiapariyosane—Vin. I.
196
At theendof the recitalwith
intonation: sarabhahhantisarena
bhananam,sarabhahhekira
'aramgavattadodhakavatta
galitavattādīni dvattimsavattāni
atthi, tesuyam icchati tamkatum
labhati, sabbesampadabyahianānam
avināsetvā vikaramakatva Samana
sdruppena caturassenanayena
Pavattanamyeva lakkhanam,Vin,
1202; sara +Bhan
r va, der.
+o +S@ +ana
Sarabhaniie kukkuccāyanti —Vin.
Sarasi Sarasi
Sarīrāni
IT. 108
Sarasitvam Dabba evarūpamkattā? I", sg.;yathā,indcl.
They hesitateto recitewith
—Vin.II. 79; III. 162
intonation;kukkucca 4 aya +nti,
Dabba,do you rememberthatyou Sarāmisammasarāmisamma—A.
denom.pres.3”.pil.
havedone (something)of this kind?; II, 187
Smr +a + si, pres. 2". sg; Kr + tu, My dearfriend,I remember,
I
Saramānoti iānamāno sahiiānamāno
der.;in a compound
sentence,
the remember; samma,indcl.,usedfor
—Vin. I. 103
subjectof the subordinateclause friendlyaddress
Saramāno meansknowing,
shouldnecessarily be a noun
recognising;Jan + na + mana,pr.p.;
endingwith the suffix tu (katta),if Saritakepikannakitāyohonti—Vin.
sam +Jan +na@+mana,PF.D.
theverbofthe principleclause II. 116
conveysthe meaningrelatedto Eveninsidethestonepowderthey
Saramānovaevamvadeti—Vin,II.
memory(sarasi); cp. abhiiānāsi tvam becomerusty;saritakanti
82
divasupita? pāsānacunnampi vuccati,Cy. 1206
Whileremembering hesaysthus;
Smr
* @+mano, prip. +eva;Vad+e+
Sarasitvam maharaja pathama- Saritasāritamhoti—Vin. II. 84
ti, pres. 3".sg,
bhisittoevarūpam vācam Hasremembered andcausedtobe
bhāsitam?—Vin. ITI. 43 remembered; sayamsaritamvā
Saram katvana bheravam—D.II.
Greatking, do you remember thatyou aāhiehisāritamvā, Cv.ll92; Smr + i
262 havesaida word of this kind,recently
+ta;Smr+e +i +ta,caus.pp.
Makinga dreadful
sound;
Kr +tvana, afterbeingconsecrated?; pathama+
absol.; bhiru + a, der
abhi +Sic +ta,pp.: bhasitamshould Saritvaturito Adhavitva—Vin. IV.
be bhāsitā 161
Sarasamkappā
samudācaranti
—M. Havingrememberedandrunback
I. 453 Sarasimogāhetvā—
Vin. II. 201 quickly;Smr+i +tva,absol.;tvara
Memories and thoughts beset(him); Havingcausedtoplungeintothelake; +i +Ia,pp.;ā +Dhav+i +tva,
saranti dhāvaniīti sarā, Skt.saras; o +Gah +e +tvd,caus. absol.
samkappentīti samkappā, absol.
Padadvayenāpi vitakkāyevavuitā, Sariramsivathikayachadditam-
Cy.Ill. 169-70;Smr +a,der; Sarāgāyasamvattanti novirāgāya
- M. I. 88
sam +u(t) +ā + Car +a +nti,pres. A. IV. 280;Vin. II. 258 Thebodydiscarded
in thecemetery;
3”. pl It leadsto attachment,
notto chadda(fromChard)+i +ta,pp.
detachment;
sam+Vrt+a +ti,pres.
Sarasaram karissāmi, bharabharam 31d.
sg Sarīrassaihāyamānassa
—D. II. 164
karissāmi —M. I. 128 Whenthebodyis beingburnt;gen.
I shall makea (soundlike)sarasara
and Sarāiikāyaparisāya—Vin.II. 188 absl.;Kst+ya +mana,
pr.p.
bharabhara;sarasara,bharabhara, Inanassemblywherekingispresent;
onom., Sa +raja+ ika, der. Sarīrānambhāgam—D.II. 166
A shareof bones;Bhaj +a der:
+ Pari
Sarasitamvacanam?
—D. II. 234 Sarāmi
khoahamāvuso
yathā
Do you remember that word supinena—Vin. II. 81
(that promise)? ; Smr + a + Si,pres. Friends,
| remember
(it)asif in There remainbones;Sarīrāniti
Ind
2", sg. adream;Smr +a +mi,pres. dhātusarīrāni, avasissanllll
915
 Sariraneva
Sallikhitagatto Sallekham Sasamkhāraniggayhavāritavato
avasitthanibhavissanti,Cy. II. 80;
Salākahatthenapi
kīlanti—Vin,II.
Sallekhamyeva nissaya—A, III. 219 abhisamkharoti—A. II. 231
10
Sarīrāneva avasissimsu—D. II. 164 Resortingstrictly to theslashingof Heaccumulatestroublesome physical
(They
) playtakingpiecesofsticks
Thereremainedonly thebones: defilingfactors;sam+Likh+a,der. habits;
abhi+sam(s)+Kr +0 +ti,
into thehand; Krid +a +nti.pres.
sarīrāni " eva; ava t Sis +ya 4 pres.3”.sg.
3”. pi. Sallekhenaviharāmi — M. I, 40
at a later timeby a new word dhātu, I abidewith slashingdefilements Savyapajjham
manosamkharam
Salakaya va pattikaya va
relic abhisamkharoti
—A. I. 122;II, 231
upanibandhitva opuāiitvā Sallenaviddho assa—M. II. 216 (He)accumulates
troublesome mental
uddisitum —Vin. II. 176 Hewouldhavebeenshotatwitha dart:
Sarūpāhi gāthāhi abhitthavi —S.I. habits
To allot, afterbindingandgrouping Wadh - ta,pp.; As --yā(Skt.yāt),
189;A. IIT. 239,sarūpāya
themwitha slipof woodoragirdle; opl. 3'". sg. Savyapajjham
lokamupapajjati—A.
Praisedwith similar stanzas:abhi +
Cy. takesthe termopuhiitvāas
Stu + a +i, pst. 3. se. II. 231
omuhcitvā (releasing);Cy. 1261; Savacanīyamkaroti —Vin. II. 6 (He)goestoa troublesome
world;
patia +ika; upa +ni + Ba(n)dh+ Makesotherslistento him;aham upa+Pad +ya +ti,pres.3™.sg.
Sare sāraiiati —Vin. II. 108
i +tv, absol.; 0 +pufija +i + ta dyasmantamimasmim vatthusmim
(He himself)is attractedby thesound;
(o + Mu(fije + i +tva),absol.;u(t)+ savacanīyam karomi, imamhā āvasā Savyapajjham
vacisamkharam
sam +Raj +ya +ti, pass.presi:3”
Drs +i +tum,inf, ekapadampi māpatikkami,yāvana abhisamkharoti
—A. I. 122;II. 231
Ye

ca tamadhikaranamviipasantam (He)accumulates
troublesome vocal
Salakayo vannavannayokatva- hotiti, Cy. 1156;sa + Vae+anīya, habits
Sarena bhāsati —A. IV. 63
Vin. IL. 99 fut.pp.
Havingmadethevoting-sticks Savyāpaiiham
vedanam
vediyati—A.
pre: 3. sg.
colouredanduncoloured; Savanenapiakatam hoti —A. III. 349 1.122;I. 231
ahhamahham
visabhāgā
kātabbā, Hehasnotdoneevenin listening; (He)experiences
a troublesome
Sarena vifihapeti —D. I. 211
Cy. 1198 Savanena +api; a +Kr + ta, pp. feeling;Vid+aya +ti, caus.pres.
Makesit known with intonation:vi 4
Sg.
Jnd +dpe +ti, caus.pres. 3”. sg.
Sallapitumarahati—D. 1.90 Savantiyomahasamuddamappenti
He is aptto conversewith;sam+Lap —Vin.II. 238 Savyapajjhaphassaphusanti—A.
SalākagāhāpakamSämmanneyya-
+i +tuminf; Arh +a +ti,pres.3”. Thestreams
runintothegreatocean; 122;II. 231
Vin. II. 84
SP. R +dpe +nti,caus.pres.3™.
pl. Painfulexperiences
affecthim;sa
Shouldagreeupona distributorof
vi +2+ Badh+ya,fut. pp.; Sprs
voting -sticks;salaka + Grh +dpe + . F ye 9
Sallam abbahi —M. II. 216 Savarabhayam
ahosi—Vin.I. 112 +nti,pres.3”.pl.
aka, caus. der.; sam +Man +ya +
2;
Pulledoutthedart;@ +Brh+ i,pst. Therewasa fearfromtheaborigines;
e€yya, opt, 3” Sg.
3”. sg. atavimanussanam, Cy. 1057; savara Savyāpaiihāya pajayaavyapajiho
(Skt.) Sabara (barbarian) viharati—A. V. 329
Salakam gahesi—Vin. II. 199
SallamBhagavata
abbalham
—
D. Il. Heabidesin a troublingassembly
Causedtotakethevoting-stick;Grh
283 Savitakkosavicaro samadhi—
S. IV. withoutbeingtroubled
rée+s +1,caus. pst, 34 SY.
Darthasbeenremoved
bytheBlessed 360
One; ä +Brh +ta,pp. Concentration of mindwithdiscursive Sasakkamnakarapīyam- M. 1.415
Salakam nikkhipāmi —Vin. II.
thoughtsandinvestigations; sa +vi+ Definitely(you)shouldnotdo;
306
Sallikhitagatto —
S. I. 82 takka; sa + vi + Car + a, der: sasakkam, indcl.adv.
I putdown thevoting-stick:wi 3 Ksip
Beingwithaslimbody;sam+Likh+
"a+ mi,pres. 1", sg
i+ la, pp. + gatta Savyāpaiiham kāyasamkhāram

917
 Sasamkharaparinibbayi
Sahaiātiyā Sahaiīvinī
Sahadhammiko
I. 254 fa,pp; As +ya(Skt.yat),opt,3 5g.
Thatwhich hasbeenattainedby Sahajati;
sam+Bhai+e +s +um, Shewasinfatuated
rightatthesight;
preventing
defilements
withself- caus,pst. 3.rd pl. pati +Badh+ta,pp. +citta
Sasīsamparupitva—D, I, 246;M.II,
effort; sasamkhārenasappavogena
16;S. I. 167;Vin. IV. 189
kilese nigganhitvā vāretvā vārito, Sahajivini nama saddhiviharini- Sahadassanena
Bhagavato—Vin. I.
Havingcovered (thebody)uptothe
Cy. Hl.363; sa + samkhara +ni 3 Vin.IV. 291;326 218
head;pa +@ +Vr +i +tvé,meta,
Grh +ya,absol.+ Vr +e +i +ta, Sahajivinimeansonewhoabides Withthemeresightofthe Blessed
absol.
Caus. pp. + vantu
together;saddhim +vihara +ini One

Sassakāle —Vin. IV. 264 Sahatiussādanam—

A. III, 89
Sasamkharaparinibbayi hoti —A. Sahadassaneneva
eittampasīdi—A.
During thetimeofharvest Overcomes
theuproar;
IV. 73 IV.209
He becomesone, completelycool, by
uccasaddamahdasaddam,
Cy.II. 267 Mindbecame pleased
rightatthesight;
Sassaghatam
maiiiiecarasi—§.II. saha+dassanena + eva;pa +Sad +
self-effort; sa + samkhara +pari +
218 Sahatidhajaggam— A. III. 89
nibbāyī i, pst.3™.sg.
I feel,you behavedestroyingthe Overcomesthe flag; dhajanam
harvest aggam,Cy. III. 267; Sah +a +ti, Sahadhammikam namapafiattam
Sasamkhārasamāpattipattabbam
pres.3. sg. sikkhapadam
—Vin. III. 178
āyatanam—M. II. 232
Sassatamlokaiica attanafica Sahadhammika
meanspromulgated
The stateto be reachedby the
pannapenti —D. I. 13 Sahatirajaggam—
A. III. 89 rules
attainmentbasedon mentalactivity;
(They) makeit known that theworld Overcomestheheapof dust:
Cy. takessasamkharaas samkhāra,
andthesoul areeternal;pa +Jad + raiakkhandham,
Cy.III. 267 Sahadhammikam
vadapariharam-
1V;21; sa t samkhāra + samāpatti
ape + nti, pres. 3”, pl. M. II. 218
+patiabba: pa +Ap + tabba, fut.
Sahatisampahāram—A.
HI. 90 Sectarianwayof thedefensing
of
pp.
Sassatoatta ca loko ca, vafijho Overcomes the attack thesis;pari +Hr +a, der.
kūtatthoesikatthāyitthito
—D.I. 14
Sasamkharavasesasamapatti-
Soulandtheworldareeternal, Sahatthā santappesi
sampavāresi
- Sahadhammikam
vuccamano
—Vin.
pattabbamāyatanam—M. II. 232
barren(doesnotproduceanything M. II. 146 1.69;III. 178
The stateto be reachedby the
new), stoodon thepeak( thereis Causedto serveandsatisfy(them) Beingspokenaccording
totherule;
attainmentbasedon theresidueof
nothingabovethem)andfirmasapillar withhis own hand;sa +hattha+G, Vac+ya +mana,pass.prp.
mentalactivity; sgmkhārānamye
firmly fixed on theground; kata+ instr.sg.;sam +Trp + ya+et+s +i,
avasesābhāvanāvasenasabbam
ttha; esika +thayi +thito caus.pst. 3". sg.; sam + pat+ Vr +e Sahadhammiko niggaho—A. I. 174
sukhumabhāvampatta samkhara 2rd
78 T i, Caus. pst. 2". sg. N
Censurein accordance
withthe
fesampavattiyd etampattabbanti
Sahaarunuggamana
—
Vin, III. 199 Dhamma; ni +Grh +a, der.
attho,Cy. IV. 2]
At thesametimewith therisingof Sahatthā hāretabbāni, asante
dawn; aruna +u(t) +gamana hārake —Vin. III. 233 Sahadhammiko panhoāgacchati-
Sasitthakam pattadhovanam—Vin.
D. I. 94
IV. 199
Sahacittuppādā
—
A. III. 123 byhimself(with hisownhand)when Therecomesa reasonable
question
Rinsing thebowl with boiled rice (lefi
Alongwiththeemergenceof the thereareno carriers;Hr +e +tabba, (aquestion
related
tothewalter
over)
thought;saha +citta +uppada underdiscussion);sahadhammikoti
= Io
+aka, der: sahetuko,
sakarano,Cy.263
Sasīsakonimuggoassa—A, III. 403
He would have immersed (in a
Sahadassanena
patibaddhacitta Sahadhammikovadanuvado
Cesspool)up to thehead:nj 4 Majj +
ahosi—Vin. IV. 18 gārayhamthanamāgaccheyya
—D.

919
 Sahadhammena
Sahisā Sahasā
Sākiyadāsakā
I. 161;S.II. 33
indel. used with instr, : Subh +at ti
Doctrinal thesis would come to the Sahasavutthasi —Vin. I. 347;IIL. 38;
pres. 3”. sg. Evenwithhimself;saha3 api
point of censure;Garh +Va, meta. IV. 158
fut. pp. Gotup hastily;vi +u(t) +Stha +5+7. Sahāyakā
sahapamsukīlitā
—A. II.
Sahavyatam upapaiiati—M. I,388;
pst. 3. sg. 186
S. III. 243
Sahadhammenapaticodessati—A. Thefriendswhohaveplayedwithsoil
Comestothecompanionship;
IV. 83 Sahassatthavikamgahetya—Vin. I. (atchildhood);
saha+pamsu+Krid
Sahavyata= sghāyatā,der.;upa+
Will accuse(me) backona reasonable 240 +1+ta,pp.
Pad +ya +ti, pres, 3”. sg.
ground:pati + Cud +e4 SSati,caus. Havingtakena pursecontainingone
fut. 3. sg. thousand;
sahassa+ thavika;Grh +e Sahāyoahosipiyasahāyo —M. II. 46
Saha sabbehi āātibhi—A. 1.294
+ tvd, absol. Therewasa friend,a dearfriend;saha
With all relatives: saha, indcl. used
Sahadhammenapativacanam +aya(framI), onewhogoeswith
with instr.
karissāmi —D. I. 122 Sahassassevavatthūni pariganhanti
I (myself) reply themaccordingto my —D.II. 87 Sahitāsamaggā— D. II. 166
Sahasaajjhappatta aggahesi
—
S, V.
belief;pati +vacana (They)occupythelandin thousands; Coheredandunited;sam+Dha+i +
146
Cy.has sahassasahassevawhich ta,pp.
Suddenlypounced
onandseized: seemsto be moreappropriate,
Sahanandi
sahasokisukhitesu
sahasa,indel. adv.;adhi +@+Pat+
sukhito dukkhitesu dukkhito —
S. 540;pari + Grh +n@+nti,pres. Sahetukā dhammikā kammantā —M.
ia,pp.;a+ Grh+e+s +i, pst3 ose
IV. 180 II. 189
87
The one who is ioyful together. Reasonable
andrighteous
work
Sorrowfultogether,happywhen
Sahasāantepurampāvisi—Vin.I. 46 Sakacchayapannaveditabba—A. II.
theyarehappyandsadwhenthey
190 Onethousand
worldsystemtrembled; 187
aresad;sukha +e+ i+ ta denom.
Enteredtheharemat once;anfé a+ Kamp+i +ttha,mid.pst.3. sg. Wisdomis tobeunderstood
by
pp.; dukkha T ia, denom.
(Magadhi form of ‘antah’)+pura; discussion;
saha+Kath +ya +G,
PP
pa t āt Vis +i, pst. 3%.sg. Sahassilokadhatumsarena der.;Vid+e +i +tabba,causfut.
Sahaparinibbānā—D. I: 157)6:1. vifihapesi—A, I. 227 Pp.
Sahasaappatisamkhaya Hemadeone thousandworldsystem
158
pakkhandeyya—A. V. 203 hearhis voice; vi +Jia+ ape +s +i, Sākāramsauddesam
anussaritum-
Along with theParinibbāna;saha 2
Hewouldplunge(intothewater)
at caus.pst. 3'ä,sg.
d M. II. 32
Pari + nibbānag
oncewithoutmuchconsideration;
a+ To recollect in detail; sa + akdra; sa

Saha bhikkhihi Kathinudharo —Vin. pati +sam +Khya +aya, instr; pa Sahassena
abbhutamkarohi—Vin. + p(t) +Dré + a, der; anu +Smr +i

I. 256
+Skandh+eyya,opt.3”.sg. IV.5 +tum,inf.
The removalofthe Kathinawith Make a bet with one thousand;Ar +0

bhikkhus;kathina +uddharo Sahasāappatisamkhā

vacabhasita- +hi, imper,2"">SR. Sakaramsauddesam pubbenivasam
M. 1. 94; S. II. 219 anussarati—D. I. 13;M. I. 182,248;
Saha vatthuiihācārā —Vin. IV. 237 We havemadea swift statement Sahassenaparāiito paiihāyi —Vin. A. I, 164;II. 418
Alongwith themisbehaviour:vatthy 4 withoutmuchconsideration;
a +pati IV.5 Heremembers previousexistencein
adhi t ācāra sam+Khya +4, instr.;Bhas+1+ Defeated
byonethousand
hemused; detail;pubbe+nivdsa;anu +Smy+
, o e
ta, DP. Parad +Ji+fa, pp.; pa +jha (from a +fi, pres. 3”. Sg.

Sahavatthehi sobhati —M. II. 64 Dhyai) +(y) +i, pst. 3”. Sg.
Looks beautiful with clothes: saha, Sahasābhananti—
Vin. IV.4
Speak swiftly Sahāpiattanā—A.V. 171

921
 Sakiyamano
Sanipasibbake Sataccakiriyaya
Sādhukhvassa
Slavesof theSakyansbecame shouldbe soughtin branches
and
rebellious;pativiruddhahonti,Cy. Sātaceakiriyāyasampādeti—A. IHI venerable;
sādhu:-aham;Bhā -- a :-
leaves;pari +es (fromIs) +i +tabba,
887; ava +Rudh +ta, pp. 432 eyyam,
opt.I". sg.
jut. pp.; Man +ya +eyya,opt,3%Sg,
Causesto attainby constantpractice;
Sākiyamāno nimmānīyissati —Vin. satata+ya, der; sam +Pad +e +ti, Sādhikam
Sakhabhamgenakayam arf

II. 183 CaUS, PFS. J. SB. diyaddhasikkhāpadasatam

Arroganceofthe Sakyanswill be
humbled;ni +mana +
pass.fut.3”pp.
Sākiyā nāma mānassino—Vin.
183
Sākyansarearrogant;mōna 3
Sāketā Sāvatthim addhanamagga
patipanna—Vin. I. 88
Enteredinto a long distancejourney
fromSāketatoSāvatthi;
pati +Pad +
ta, pp.
parimadditva—A. IV. 436
Havingwipedthebodywitha branch
brokenup;sakha+bhamga
<bhagna;pari + Mrd +i +tva,
absol.
II.
Sa gaddulabaddho—M. II. 232
The dog tieddown bya leatherstrap;
gaddula + Badh + ta,pp.
Saca khoekāyevaiāti —Vin.III,
109
Thattoois onlyonebirth;eka+(y)+
eva
—A.I,
230
Satattayamadhurattayaasecanaka- Onehundred andfiftyruleswithsome
ttāyasamvattati—A. V. 213
addition; sa +adhika;di +addha+
lt leadsto a tasty,sweetanddelicious sikkhapada+sata
State;sata +tta, der.; madhura+tta,
der.;a +secanaka:Sic +e +ana + Sādhukamaiihupekkhitāhoti—M.
ka,caus.der. +tta,der. ITI, 85;5. V. 324
Hebecomes onewholookson well;
Sātirekānipaīicasatāni— D. II. 93 sādhukam, adv.;adhi+ upa +Iks + i
Morethanfive hundred:sa +atireka + tu, der.
Satisarohoti—Vin. I. 55 Sādhukamanurakkha—D.IHI.35
Hebecomesone who hasgonebeyond Keepit well;anu+Raks+a, imper:
limit;sa +ati +Sr +a, der. 2", so.

Sāketeviharati Aāianavane
Satakapattadharo
dittho—Vin.IIL. Sāttham savyafijanam—D.I. 62;M. Sādhukamuggahetvā —D. II. 73
migadāye —S. I. 54; V. 73
169 1.179;5. I. 105 Having learnt
itwell;u(t)+Grh+e +
Abidesin Sāketaat thedeerpark in
Theoneholdingaclaybowl(orthe Withmeaning andproperphraseology:tva, absol.
Afijanagrove
bowlmade
of cloth) is seen; Sa +attha; sa+ vyahiana
sātakapattoti..mattikāpatto,Cv.602; Sādhukamsafiiapetabbo
—D. II.
Sākete viharati Kālakārāme —A. II.
Drt 2 ta, pp. Sādiyantipakatattānam 128
24
bhikkhūnamabhivādanam Heshould
bemade
convince
well;sam
Abides in Sāketa,at themonastery
Satakam nikkhipitva maficake paccutthanamafjalikammam +Jia +Gpe+tabba,caus.fut. pp
namedKalaka
uttānā nipaiii —Vin. III. 132 sdmicikammam—Vin. II. 31
Havingputasidetheclothlaydown Accept regular bhikkhus’ worship, Sadhukhopanatathārūpānam
SaketeviharatiTikandakivane—A.
faceuponthebed;ni +Ksip +i+ 1G, arahatamdassanam hoti—D. I. 225;
III. 169 M. II. 83,133
absol. ava + nti, caus. pres. ze pl; abhi +
Abides in Sāketa,at thegrovenamed
Vad+ana,der: pati +u(t) +Stha + It is goodtoseetheworthyonesoi
Tikandakī
Satakam va vetthanamvā dhovati- ana, der. thatkind
Vin. FV.301
Sākhā onatā —Vin. I. 20
Washes theclothor theturban Sādurasam
ā asecanakam
—A.III. 237
2? Sadhukhvassa
yamcasitakovato
The branch has bent down; o +Nam +
Unmixed
sweettaste;
a +Sic +e+ vāveyya,
abbhasamvilāpo
assa,devo
ta, Pp.
Sānipasibbake
kārāpetvā
—Vin.II. aa +ka, caus. der. eaekamekamphusāyeyya—5. IV.
17 289 :
Sākhāpalāse saram pariyesitabbam
Havingcausedto makegunnysacks; Sādhāham
bhante
ayyassa
paiāpati It is eood, ifa cool wind would blow,
mafifieyya—A.V, 226
sāna '- ī, der.; Kr +Gpe +tva,caus. bhaveyyam
—Vin. IV. 18
He would think that the essence
absol. Wellsir. I would be thewifeof the

923
 Sadhu
Sadhu
Samafiiattham
Va +ya + eyya,opt. 3%.sg.; abbha + obtain;mātugāma:mase.sg.;Labh3 (itwouldbegood,if thevenerable Sāpateyyassa
kāranā —S. I. 92
sam+vildpa;As +ya (Skt.yat),opt. evva,opt.3'd,sg. couldexplainthemeaningofthis Forthereasonof property;
sa +pati
3™.sg.; Spré +aya + eyya,denom.
statement);
vata,indel.;pati +Bhā +eyya,der.
opt.3'3.sg. Sādhubhedānuvattakā
puna +tu,imper.3”. sg.
upasampalieyyum-Vin. II, 201
Sapattikenapatimokkhamna
Sādhu dhammacariyā, sādhu lt is better,if thefollowers
ofthe Sadhuviramahi —Vin. IV. 225 sotabbam —Vin. II. 240
samacariyā, sādhu kusalakiriyā, dissenters wouldbeordained again; Pleaserefrain;vi + Ram +a+ hi, Patimokkha recitalshouldnot
sādhu puāīakiriyā, sādhu avihimsā, bheda+anu+ Vrt +aka,der;upa+ imper.2”. sg. beheardbyonewhoisguiltyof
sādhu bhūtānukampatā—D. II. 29 sam+Pad +ya +eyyum, pass.opt. offence;sa +apatti+ka; Sru +
Right behaviouris good, impartial 3” pi. Sadhu sadhu bhikkhave— A, V. 229 tabba,fut. pp.
behaviouris good,virtuousactionis
Bhikkhus,it is good,it is good
good,meritorious
deedis good,non Sadhu mayampi etissakathaya Sapattikovayenakamam
pakkamati
violence is good, compassiontowards bhāginoassāmasavanāya - M. I, Sādhūtioramati—Vin. III. 75 —A.IV.194
livingbeingsis good 252 Desist
sayingall right;sādhu3 iti; Beingguiltyofoffence hegoesoff
lt isgoodthatwetoowouldhave the 0+ Ram +a +ti, pres. 3". sg. whereverhelikes;sa t āpattiko+
Sadhu nekkhammamsadhu chanceto listento this talk;bhdga+7,
snes eva;yenakāmam, indcl.adv.;pa +
paviveko —A. IV. 439 der.; As 1-ssāma,opt. I". pl. Sana pativijani —Vin. IL. 130 Kram+a+ ti,pres.3”.sg.
Renunciationis good, detachmentis Shedidnotunderstand;
pati+vi+
good Sādhu me bhanteayyocivaram Sapanadoniya va
sibbetu—Vin. IV. 61 sūkaradoniyāvā raiakadoniyā
Sadhu no avuso jivita voropehi - Venerable
sir,pleasesewarobe Sānuggahāvācā bhāsitā—M. II. vā—M. II. 152
Vin. IIL. 68 for me; Siv +ya +e + tu,imper. 161 Fromthedrinkingtroughof dogsor
Friend,pleasedepriveus of life: vi +0 Bee Supportive
wordshavebeenuttered; fromthetroughof pigsor fromthe
+ Ruh + e +hi, imper.2™,sg. sa t anuggaha; Bhās t i t ta, pp. troughof washermen;
sa +pana+
Sadhu me bhanteBhagava doni
Sadhu bhanteayyo maficeva Sānueariyo
vicaranto—D.IHI.HI
samkhittenadhammam desetu
—S.
paticchatu sabbafica sapateyyam- Touring
withthefollowers;
sa +anu Sāpekhassa
kālakiriyā—D. II. 194;
IHI.35
Vin. IV. 18 VenerableSir,maytheBlessed
One A. IHI.295
Venerablesir, maythevenerable pr.p. Thedeathof theonewhohas
explaintometheDhamma, inbrief;
acceptmeandall my property;mam + unfulfilled
wish;sa +apekha:
apa+
sam +Ksip +ta,pp.; Dr§ +e+ tu,
ca + eva; pati + Is +ya + tu, imper. Sanuvadocudito bhikkhiti alam Iks
caus. imper.3. sg.
72rd .58.;
9
$3 t5 pati; t eyya,der.
o RO
vacanaya —Vin. I. 173
Sādhurūpamnaaside—A. III. 373 It issuitableto say thattheaccused Sāpekhodānamdeti—A. IV. 60
Sādhu bhanteBhagavāanuiāneyya- bhikkhuis blameworthy;
sa + Givesalmswithanulteriormotive;
Shouldnotattacka goodperson;
a+
Vin. IL. 257 anuvdda; Cud + i + ta, pp.’ alam, sa + apekho
Sad +e,opt.3”.sg.
Venerablesir, it is good if the Blessed indcl,
One approves;sadhu,indel.; anu + Samanfattham
brahmannattham
-
Sadhu vatayasmantamyeva
Jan +nd +eyya, opt. 3”. sg. Sapateyyamdhammikena balinā S.II. 177
Sariputtampatibhatuetassa
bhasitassa attho—M. I. 14;S.IIL.3 abhisamkhatam—D.I. 142 Forthepurposeof recluseship,
Sadhu bhantelabheyya mātugāmo- Property,
accumulated
byright purposeof brahmanhood;
samana
It isgood,indeed;if themeaning
Vin. II. 253 täkation; sa 3 pati + eyya, der.; abhi +ya,der,+attha;brahman+ya,
of thisstatement
cometothemind
Venerablesir, maythewomenkind " sam(s) +Kr +ta,pp. der. +attha
of thevenerableSariputta;

925
 Samannattho
Samam Sämam
Sāmukkamsikā
Samaffattho bhayana paripirim absol.; Bhu(ā)i t id tum,inf, (He)shouldgo (there)himselfor he | wasbrought
youngfortheveryyoung
gacchati —A. IV. 366
shouldcausea messenger to besent husband;
daharassa
+eva;@+Ni +
Thepurposeof recluseship becomes Sāmam ceikkhallammadditvā (there);sāimam,indcl.; pa +Hi +e + ta, pp.
fulfilledbycultivation;
pari +Pr +a itthakāyocinitvā—Vin. II. 159 tabba, caus. fut. pp.
+7, der. Havingkneadedthemudhimself
and
Sāmikānamgāvoniyyādehi—S. IV.
madethebricks;sāmam,indcl.; Mid Samamva dhammam bhasitum 181
Sāmaāihevaīassati, sāmam dakkhiti +va +i + tvd,absol.;Ci +na +i+ paramva ajjhesitum —Vin. I. 113 Handoverthecowstotheowners;ni +
—M. II. 44 Ivā, absol. Topreach
theDhamma
himself
or to Yat(Yad)+e +hi, caus.imper.2”. sg.
Will knowbyhimself,will seeby
inviteanother;Bhds +i +tum,inf ;
himself;samam +yeva; Dr§ +ssati Samam civaram datva—
Vin. III. adhi +es (fromIs) +i +tum,inf, Samikeanapuccha pakkami—Vin.
(Skt.draksyati);or dakkha+ti,pres. 254 IV. 271
3{ra
HE
r
Havinggivena robeby himself;Da+ SamamvA pare va —A. II. 158 Wentawaywithoutconsulting
the
Ivā, absol. Thepersonhimselfor others owners;an+@+Prch +ya, absol.;
Samanakam parikkharam
pa +Kram+i,pst.3”.sg.
upanamenti—Vin. II. 302 Samam civaram vikappetva—Vin. Sāmamsenāsanamsamsāmetyā
—S.
Offerrequisites
suitablefor the IV. 121 III. 95 Sāmikenapimayamevamvuttāna
recluses;samana + aka, der.; upa + Havingassignedtherobehimself;vi+ Makingthelodgingplacecleanand iccheyyama—Vin. III. 128
Nam + e + nti,caus.pres. 3”. pl. kappa +e +tva, denom.absol. tidyby himself;sam +Sam+e +twā, Wewouldnotlikeit,whenwearetold
caus. absol. thusevenbyourhusbands; samikena
Sāmaneram ākotenti —
Vin. II. 138 Sāmam īātam sāmamdittham +api; Vac+ta,pp.; Is +ya +
Beatthenovice;@+ Kut +e +nii, samam viditam maya—
S. Y. 390;A. Samayikampivimuttim na labhati- eyyāma,opt.I". pi.
caus.pres. 3”. pl. I. 142 A. III. 349
Known by myself,seenby myself
and Doesnotobtainevena temporary Samikenasahabhanditva—Vin. HI.
Samanereapalalenti —Vin. I. 85 experiencedby myself;Jad +ta,pp.; release;samaya +ika, der; Labh +a 144;IV. 132
Causeto lure thenovices;apa +Lal + Dr§ +ta,pp.; Vid +i +ta,pp. +
HDres.
i .2
3"
{ra
3, Havingquarrelled
withthehusband;
e t nti, caus.pres, 3”. pl. sahaindel.usedwithinstr.;Bhand+
Samam yeva fassati, samam Sāmikamacchinditvāahūiassa i + tva,absol.
Sāmanero upatthāpetabbo—A. IV. dakkhiti —D. I. 165;M. I. 512 dātukāmā—M. II. 109
347; V. 72; Vin. I. 62 hassasi, dakkhisi (Therelatives),
havingseparated
her Samikoaggahesi—Vin. IV. 326
A noviceshouldbe madeto wait upon He will know himself,hewill see fromthe.husbandby force,arewilling Husband
caught(her);a +Grh +e+s
him; upa +Stha +dpe +tabba,caus. himself:Jia +ssati, fut. 3, sg.;Drs togivehertoanother
person;
@+ + i, pst. 3" Sg.
fut.pp. +ssati, fut. 3". se.; dakkhati= Ci(n)d +i +tva,absol.;Da +tum,
dakkhiti inf. +kama
Samampi kho etam veditabbam—S.
IV. 230 Sāmamyevadhammam
abhihiiāya
- Sāmikam
abhibhuyya
vattati—S.IV.
This shouldbe understoodby the M.I. 211 246 course;
pati +Pad +ta,pp.
personhimself; Vid +e +i +tabba, Keepsthehusbandundercontrol;abhi
Having realisedthetruthby himself,
caus. fut., pp. +Bhai 4ya, absol.; Vrt +a +ti, pres. Samukkamsika dhammadesana-
sāmain--(y)+eva;abhi +Jna +ya,
>
absol. is Oo. Vin. 1.16
Sāmam gahetvāparibhufjitum - A discourseon theDhamma
Vin. IL. 133 Samikassa daharasseva dahara anita discovered
byhimself;sdmam+u()
Samam va gantabbamduto va
Takeit himselfand eat:Grh +e +tā, —A. IV. 66 + Krs +ika, der.
pāhetabbo—
Vin. III. 222
 Samuddikaya
Sarajjamanariipo Sāraliam
Sāraddho

Samuddikaya navaya Sāyapātam -D. II. 188;5. I, 182 sdrajja + mana, pass. pr.p.l rūpa;in love;apa+Tks+a + vantu,der.;
vettabandhanabaddhaya Morning andevening etam(etad) +a +Vae +a, rootredup. pati +Badh+ta,pp. +citta
chammāsāni udake pariyenāya —S.
pst.3”. sg.
V. 51;A. IV. 127,pariyādāya Sāyapātarāsāya—D. IHI. 89
Saratto
avifiji—Vin.II. 127
Ofthe seafaringboat,boundby the For supperandbreakfast;saya+pāta Sāraiiamokkanto hoti —A. IHI. 183 Beinginfatuated
hepulled:a +vi+
canesandgoing roundthewaterfor sik E) t As t a, der. (He)hasbecomeembarrassed: sarada Aric+i,pst.34.sg.
months;vetta+ bandhana +Badh + +ya, der; 0 +Kram +ta,pp.
Ia, Pp.; cha + masani;pari +e (from Sayamanusittho pato visesam Sārattosamcālesi—Vin. III. 126
I) + ana, der. adhigamissati
—M. II. 96 Sāratopaccāgaecchāma
—M. II. 114 Beinginfatuated
(he)madeit shake;
Being instructedin theevening(he) Weunderstandit as theessence;
sāra sam+Cal +e +§ +i, caus.pst,3.
Sāmuddikāvāniiā—A. III. 368 will gain thespecificattainment
in + to; pati + @ + gaccha + ma, pres. Sg.
Seafaringmerchants;samudda +ika, the morning; sāvam '- anu 1 Sas +ta, I". pl.
der. Pp.
Sāratthikosāragavesīsārapariy-
Sārattacittovedeti—S. IV. 73 esanam caramano—S. III. 141;
Sāmganova
samāno—M. I. 24 Sayam patam upatthanamgacchati Theone,who hasanattracted mind, IV. 167
Being with defilement,indeed:sa + —8. I. 242;Vin. II. 185 experiences; sam +Raj +ta,pp. Theonewhois in need of a heart-
amgano +eva; As + mana, pr.p. Morning andeveninghegoestoattend * citta; Vid +e +ti, caus.pres.3”. wood,seekinga heart-woodand
on; sāyam,pātam, indcl. 8g. roamingin search
of a heart-wood;
Sayaficevabhufijama, pato ca, diva sāra +attha+ika,der.;sara +
ca vikale —M. I. 448, 474 Sāyam sāyamāsāyapāto pātarāsāya gavesa+i, der.;sdra +pari +
We eatin theevening,morning,noon bhikkham pariyesanti—A. III. 222 160 esana; Car + a + mana,prp.
andat odd hours;sdyam +ca +eva; (They) seekfood in theeveningfor Thosewho areattractedto the
Bhu(ii)j +a + ma,pres. I". sg. theeveningmeal,in themorningfor valuables
(jewelsandearrings);sam Sārathīvanettānigahetvā—D. II.
the morningmeal; sāyam,pāto, +tRaj +ta + Raj + ta, pp. 254
Sayanhasamayampatisallana indcl.; pari +es (fromIs) +a +nti, Havingtakenthereins,likea
vutthito—D. II. 9; M. I. 92, 161;S. I. pres. 3™.pl. Sarattassasamyuttassa charioteer;
sārathit iva;Grht e t
17; HI.37,275 $ammūlhassaassādānupassino tva,absol.
Havinggot up from solitudein the Sayatatiyakam udakam oroheyyasi Viharatoayatimpancupadanak-
evening:sāyanhasamayam,
acc.for —A. V. 263 khandhā upacayam gacchanti—M. Sāradikenaābādhenaphutthānam
loc.; sāya --anha (Skt.ahna) 3 You should immersein thewaterthree III. 287 —Vin.I. 199
samaya; pati + sam +Li +ana, der. ; times a day; sāya 1 tativaka; o(ava) + Fiveaggregates withclinging arebeing Ofthosewhoareafflictedby the
vi +u(t) +Sthé +i +ta,pp Ruh +eyyasi,opt.
,
2”.
nd
sg.
e builtup in futurefor a personwho disease
of autumn;
saradakāle
abidesattracted,mixed,infatuated
and uppannena pittābādhena,
tasmimhi
Sayanhasamayamsuriye ogacchante Sāragandhānam Iohitacandanam whocontemplateson gratification; kāle vassodakenāpi
tementi,
—A. IHI. 407 aggamakkhāyati—A. V. 22 sam +Yuj +ta,pp.; sam +Muh +ta, kaddamampi
maddanti,
antarantara
In theeveningwhenthesun is setting Red sandlewoodis saidto bethe Db.; assāda anu +passa +i, der; ātapopikharohoti,tenatesam I
down; o +gaccha +nta,pnp. āyatim,adv.;paāca t upādāna-' pittamkotthabbhantaragatam
hoti,
highestamongfragrantheartwoods;
khandha: upa t Ci t a, der. Cy. 1089;sarada+ika, der.;Sprs +
a +Khya +ya+ ti,pass.pres.3”.8&
Sayanhasamayepatisallana vutthito ta,pp.
- D. II. 47 Sārattoapekkhavāpatibaddhacitto
Havinggot up from solitudein the —Vin. III. 128 Saraddhokayoappatippassaddho
-
evening Theonewho is attracted,
hopefuland M. I. 242-3
Sarambhajam Salindam Sālim
Sāvakehi
Bodywasagitated,
nottranquillised; 0 (ava)+Kram+i, pst.3”.sg.
Desiringto build a mansionwitha White-clothedlaydisciples;odata+
sam+Rabh+ta,pp.;a +pati +pa
verandah.on thefoundationof Vas+ana,der.
+Srabh+ta,pp. Saraniya (dhammā) piyakaranā
elephant’s
claws;hatthinam
garukarapā samgahāyaavivādāya
hatthikumbhepatitthitam,Cy. VI. Sāvakānam samasamagatiyo assam
Sarambhajamjayapekkho vacam samaggiya ekibhavaya samvattanti
1236;sa +Glindam;Kr +e +tum, abhisamparāyam —A.IV. 104
bhāsati—D. III. 106 —A.V. 89;cp.D. III. 245
caus.inf. +kama I shouldbeofegual birthtothe
Expectingvictory,hespeakswords, Memorableor lovelythingswhich
bornof anger;
sam+Ra(m)bh+a, disciplesin thenextlife;gatiya=
would makeone dearandrespectable tat
Salim ahasi sakideva gatika,der.;As +yam(Skt.yam),
der. +ja; jaya + apekkho andwhichwouldleadtocongregation, sāyapātarāsāya— D. III. 89 opt.I" sg.
non- disputation,concordandunity;
In onesingle turn,he carriedricefor
Sārambham anārambham Smr -- anīva,or sam -- Ra(ā)i +
dinnerandbreakfast;a +Hr +5 +i, Savaka sampajjanti
—D.II. 284;
saparikkamanamaparikkamanam aniya,fut. pp.; sam + Vrt +a +nti, pst.3. sg.:aharsi> ahassi>ahasi; M. I. 176
janitum —Vin. III. 150 pres.3". pl. saki(Skt.sakrt)+(d) +eva (They)become
disciples;
sam+Pad
To know whetherit is dangerous,
+ya +nti,pres.3”.pl.
whetherit is not dangerous,whetherit Sariputtam ajjhesi— Vin. II. 200 Salinam odanam vicitakalakam
hasa neighbourhood,whetherit does Requested
Sariputta;
adhi+es(from anekasūpamanekabyahāianam—D. I. Sayakahontigihī odātavasanā =
nl
aa
maa
th
ta
Kaaa
nothavea neighbourhood; Is) + i, pst. 3". sg. 105;M. II. 8; A. III. 49,sālinam kāmabhogī— D. III. 125
saupaddavamanupaddavam,
odano Therearelaydisciples,
wearingwhite
saupacāramanupacāram,Cv. 569; Sāriputtamārabbha
- S. I. 65 Sortedoutandboiledriceof Sāliwith clothesandenioyingsensepleasure; =
Sa +pari +Kram+ana,der.;Jan + ConcerningSariputta;
arabbha, indcl. varioussoupsandvariouscurries;vi + kama+Bhuj+a +7,der.
na + i + tum,inf.
Ci +ta,pp. +kalaka(blackspecks);
Sāriputteabhippasanno
—
5. I. 56 an + eka Savake
abbhatite
kalakate
Sarambham yajifiam —A. II. 42 Extremelypleasedwith Sariputta,
abhi upapattīsuvyākaroti—M. I. 464
A bloody sacrifice;sa + @+ Ra(m)bh +pa +Sad+ta,pp. Saloke(na)titthatabbam —Vin.VI. Whena disciple isdeadandgone whia
nua
Maaka
+ a, der.
267 tothepast,hepredicts himtobein
Sārīrikā vedanādukkhā tippā Shouldnotstayin thelight;dvāram oneof theexistences;abhi+ati +
Saraga safifiujjanti safiioga sam- kharākatukāasātāamanāpā —S. I. vivaritvāupaddhakāyam dassento 1+ ta,pp.;vit @+Kr +o +ti,
kilissanti—S. III. 69 27 titihanti,Cy. 1293;sa +āloka; tittha pres.3”, sg.; upapattisu
vyakaroti
Becauseof affectiontheyare bound Physicalfeelings,painful,sharp, +tabba,fut. pp., a rareform is similarin expression
to Kurtisu
together, becauseofbinding together pungent,bitter,unpalatableand viharati
(oneisselected
outof
theyare polluted;sam +raga: Raj + displeasing;
sarīra 1.ika,der.;a Sāvakattam
upagaccheyya
—M. I. many)
a, der.;sam + Yuj +ya + nti, pass. Svad?+ta,pp. 375
pres. 3% pl.; sam +yoga: Yuj +a,
(He)wouldbecome adisciple;sāvaka Sāvakesuanusāsanībahulā
der.; sam + Kli§ +ya + nti, pass. Sāreyyapi paccāsāreyyapi—M. I. t Ita, der.; upa +gaccha+eyya,opt. pavattati—M. I. 228
pres.3”.pl. 124;S. IV. 176;A. III. 28 3. se: Mostly,theinstruction
continues
Would makethemmoveforwardand amongthedisciples;
anu+Sds+ana
Sarago udapādi, parilāho backward;
Sr +e +eyya,caus.opt.
3". +7,der;pa+Vrt+a +ti,pres.3”.
Sāvakamlabhitvā—
Vin. I. 236
kāyasmimokkami — D. IHI. 88 sg. +api; patit @+ Sr +e +eyyat Sg.
Receiving(me as)a disciple;Sru +
Affection arose,burningsensation api aka, der.; Labh +i +tva, absol.
(with sexualdesire)enteredinto the
body;sam +rago; u(t) +a +Pad +i.
Sālindam pāsādam kāretukāmā Savaka gihī odātavasanā —M. II.
pst. 3”. sg; pari +Dah +a, der;
hatthinakhakam
- Vin. II. 169 244
 Savajjam
Sāsane
Savajjam pajahati anavajjam bhaveti
AbidesatSalalahutin Savatthi;
salala
—A.IV. 109
+ agaraka; in theJetavana
Abandonswrongandcausesto
monasterythere werefour famous
cultivate right;sa + Vad+ya,fut.
kutis, namely,Karerikuti, Salalakuti,
Pp.; pa + Ha + ti, root redup. pres.
Kosambakutiand Gandhakuti;Cy. II.
3”.SZ.;ana+vajja;Bhii +e +ti,
407
caus.pres.3". sg.
Sāvatthiyā niyyāti divādivassa-
Sāvaiio ca hoti sānuvaiio ca
M. 1.175;II. 23,112,208,nikkhami
viiūnam —A. I. 105,154
Setsout from Sāvatthiin themiddleof
He becomesblameworthyand
theday or in theearlypartof theday;
censurableby thewise: sa +ay +
ni + Ya +ti,pres.3".sg.
Vad+ya, fut. pp.
Savavarentisūkaram- 5. I. 176
Savatthim osaranti, Bhagavantam
(They) chase(me out)iust asthedog
dassanaya
—M. III. 79
chasestheswine out:s@+ iva; Vr +e
To seethe BlessedOne. theyenter
+ati,caus.pres.
3. pi.
into Savatthi;0 (ava) +Sr +a + nti,
pres.3. pl,
Sāvasesāpatti—A. 1.21
Rectifiable transgression;sāvasesat
Savatthiyam pativasati —S. I, 170
apatti
Lives in Sāvatthi
Savittichandasomukham—
Vin. I.
Sāvatthiyam pativasanti, kenacideva
246
karanīyena —M. I. 290
Entranceto the Vedic mantrasis
(They) live in Sāvatthifor some
Savitti; chandaso,(Skt.chandasah)
business;pati + Vas+ q +nti, pres.
gen. sg.
34.pī:
Sāsanakarohotiovādapatikaro
- viiīāpeti, gahito hoti upaiihāyo-
Sāvatthiyam viharati Jetavane
M. 1.234
Anāthapindikassa ārāme —S. I. 1
He becomesone who carriesout
Abides in Sāvatthi, at Jetavana, the
instructionandrespondsto advice;
monasteryof Anathapindika
Sasana +kara; ovada +pati +
kara
Savatthiyam viharati Pubbārāme
Migāramātupāsāde —D. IHI. 80; S. I.
Sāsanamāiānimsu —A. IV. 104
27
Understood
theteaching;
a +Jan +
Abides at Pubbārāma,themansionof
nd +imsu,pst. 3. pl.
Migāra's mother,in Sāvatthi
Sāsanerato —A. IV. 235
Sāvatthiyam viharati Salalāpārake
Theonewhois delighted
in the
—D. II.270
teaching;Ram +ta,pp.
Sasapakuttena
Sikkham
Sasapakuttenaphositum—
Vin. I,
Sikkāyapakkhipitvā—Vin. II, 110
205 Havingputit inacase:pa+ Ksip+i+
Tosprinklewithmustard
powder: Iwā,absol.
sāsapakuddenātisāsapapitthena,Cy.
1092;Sprs +e +i + tum,caus,inf.
Sikkāyapattamuttitvādande
ālaggetvā—Vin. II. 131
Sasapamattihi
pilakahisabbo Havingtieddownthebowiwitha
kayophuto —A. V. 170 stringandmakingit hangonthe
Entirebodywascoveredwithmustard walking
stick;uttitva,
absol.;
a +Lag
sizedboils; Sphur + ta,pp. t e t hā; caus.absol.
Sasavasaupadhika iddhi noariyati Sikkhamānam vutthāpeyya—Vin.
vuccati—D. III. 112 IV. 335
Thepsychicpowermikedwith Shouldcausetoordain
a trainee:
yi +
influkesanddefilementsis notcalled u(t)+Stha+dpe+eyya,caus.opt.
noble;sa +dsava;sa +upadhi+ka, a $a.
der.;Vac+ya +ti, pass.pres.3”.sg,
Sikkhamānena aīīātabbam
Sāhāram (me) dassatha —
D. II. 96 paripucchitabbam paripanhi-
If yougive me totally,or if yougive tabbam—Vin. IV. 141
mewith income;Cy. eguatessāhāra
Theonewhois undergoing training
withsa-ianapada,political divisions, shouldknow,inquireandquestion;
545;Dd +ssatha,cond.2".pl.
usuallythetermsikkhamana is used
in thefemininegendertodesignate
Sāhūtivā lahūtivāopāyikantivā
thefemalenovicewhois undergoing
patirūpanti vā pāsādikena
trainingfor twoyearsfor the
sampadehiti va kayenavinnhapeti, ordination;sikkhama@nenati
vacayaviiiapeti kayenavacaya sikkhitukamena, Old Cy. 142;a +
Jia +tabba, fut.pp.;pari +Preh +
Vin.I. 45
ya +i +tabba, fut.pp.;pari +pafiha
Thepreceptor is chosen
if the
+i +tabba, fut. pp.
candidate is madeunderstand, bya
physical gesture, verbal gestureand Sikkhamapaccakkhaya
dubbalyam
physical-verbal
gesture,themeaning anāvikatvā
—Vin.III. 23
ofthe expression
‘Good’,or ‘Sure’,or Withoutforsakingthecourseof
‘Appropriate’,
or ‘Proper’or ‘Doit training,
withoutrevealingweakness;
a
Well’;sāhu(=sadhu)+ iti; lahu+iti; +pati+@+Khya+ ya,absol.;
an+
Opayikam+iti, patiriipam +iti; avi +Kr + tva, absol.
Pasdda+ika,der.;sam+ Pad+@+
hi,caus.imper.2”. sg.;vi +Jia +
ape +ti, caus. pres. 3 sa,; Grh +i
r la, pp.
 Sikkham
Sikkhā Sikkhāsamādāne
thecourseof training;pati +a + Sippisambukampi
Ledis thehighestwayoflife, of
Khya + ta,pp.+ ka, der.: pati +Jan Sikkhasamadanetibbacchando—
A.
whichtrainingis thebenefit,
wisdom madhusitthakaniy
'āsādīsuyena
+na +ti, pres. 3. sg. IV. 15
is the highest,freedomis theessence kenacicikkalena, Cy. 1201;o 3-
andmindfulnessis theauthority; Theonewho hasa strongwillin taking
Sanha +e+ nti, denom.pres.3. pl.
Sikkham paecakkhāya hīnāyāvattati up the course of training; tibba +
Vas +ya +ti, Pass.pres. 3. sg.
—M. 1.460;A. II. 4 chanda
panna +uttaram; sati +adhipati+ Sitthanigilitvavuddhatarassa
Havinggiven up thecourseof training
eyya, der. asanam databbam —Vin. II. 165
he turnsbackto the lower life; pati + Sikkhasammutimdatum—Vin. IV.
Havingswallowed thefood(inthe
a +Khya +ya, absol.: hīnāva -- 319
Sikkhapadapatisamyuttaya mouth), theseatshouldbeofferedto
āvattati, hīna here meanslay life; Togivetheapproval
fortraining;
Da+
dhammiya kathāya —A. I. 236 thesenior;sittha:Skt.sikta:Gri +a
a+ Vrt +a+ ti, pres, 374Sg. tum, inf.
With theDhammatalk concerningthe +1+tva,absol.;Dé +tabba, Sut.pp.
rulesof training:pati +sam + Ma
Sikkham E I hīnāyāvatto Sikkhāsāiīvasamāpanno
- Vin. III.
la, pp. Sitthāvakārakambhuhiati—Vin. TV.
—D.
III. 5; S.II. 50;IV. 103 23 196
Havinggivenupthecourseof training Onewho hasentereduponthecourse
Sikkhāpadam pannattam,pati- Eats,whilescattering
boiledrice:
he hasturnedbackto the lower life; oftrainingandthemodeof life
mokkhamuddittham—M. III, 10 sitiha+avakaraka
+ Vrt + ta,pp. governedby therules;yamBhagavata
Rule oftraining is enacted,codeof
paniiatiam sikkhapadametam Sithilamganheyya —M. III. 160
rules is setout;pa +Jia + ape +ta,
Sikkham samadiyitukama —Vin. I. sajtvamnama, old Cy. 24; sikkhā--
caus.pp.; u(t) +Drs + ta,pp. Should holdloosely;
sithilam,
adv.;
147 Sdjiva+sam -- ā +Pad +ta,Dp. galhais theopp.;Grh +na +eyya,
Desiring to observethecourseof
Sikkhapadani samādiyati —D. I. 146 met.opt.3. sg.
training;sam +@+Da +iva + i + Sikkhita katahatthakatupāsanā—5.
Observesmoral precepts;vinaya
tum,inf. + kama Il, 266
rules are also designatedas Sithilohi paribbāiobhiyyoākirate
Thosewho arewell trained, raiam—5.
I. 50
sikkhdpada;sam +@ +Da + iva +ti,
Sikkha eka sania uppajjanti, sikkha experienced
andskilled in archery;
Pass. pres. 3.
>
sg, Therenounced life,looselytaken,
eka sanna niruiihanti — D. I. 181 Sak+i +ta,desid.pp.skata+ givesrisetomoredefilements;
By trainingsomethoughts
arise,by hattha;kata +upāsana
Sikkhapade (na) sikkhissami —Vin. paribbāiotisithilagahitāpabbaiiā,
trainingsomethoughtsceaseto ekist:
IV. 141 Cy.. 107;pari t Vrai'- a, der.;
sikkha +ā, instr.sg.;u(t) +Pad 4ya Sikkhitohotianavayo —A. IHI.152
I do not train myselfin (this) ruleof bhiyyo,indcl.;@+Kir +a +te,mid.
+nti,pres. 3%.pl. ni + Rudh +ya + (He)is fully trained;
ana+vaya
training;Sak +i +ssami,desid.fut. pres,3”.sg.
nti, pres. 3”. pl.
I”, gg.
Sitampātukaroti—A. V.81 Sinātoantarenasinānena—M. 1.39
Sikkhā karanīyā —Vin, IV. 185 Smiles;Smi +ta,pp.
Sikkhayaaparipūrakārī—
S. V.378 Onewhohasbathed withinnerbathing;
Should train;Kr +aniya, fut.pp.
The one who doesnotaccomplishthe ōnāt ta,pp.
courseoftraining;pari +para + Sitampātvākāsi—M. II. 45;S. I.
Sikkhadubbalyam āpādi —S. V. 375 24;II. 254
kara + T,der.
Becamefrail in training;dubbala + Smiled;patu +akasi: a+ kar (from
ya, der; & +Pad+ j. PSt:3". so.
Sikkha va na dinnā hoti, dinnā va Kr) +s +i> akassi>akasi,pst.3”.
Sg,
Sikkhanisamsam brahmacariy:
fam
sikkhakupita—Vin. IV. 320
Either the training has not been given
Vussati, paūiiuttaram vimuttisāram Sitthatelakenakeseosanhenti—Vin.
satādhipateyyam—A. 11.244
or thetraininggivenisdisrupted;
Da +
II, 107 Sippisambukampi
sakkhara-
fa, pp.; Kup +i +ta,pp.
Soften the hair with beeswaxoil; kathalampimacchagumbampi
 Sibbinim
Siya Siya

carantampi titihantampi—A. I. o
Siya affathattam siyā viparināmo-
Movingandunmoving
oyster-shell, garavenana puccheyyatha,
M. 1.457;5. III. 91 Therewouldbeou;discussion
onthis
pebble,gravelanda shoalof fish: Car sahāyakopi
bhikkhavesahāyakassa
Therewould bea change,a complete point;sam+lapa
" a 2 nia, PY.D.;titiha -- nta,pr.p ārocetu—D. II. 155
change;
As +pa (Skt.yat),opt.3%. Itis possible,
bhikkhus,
thatyouwould
Sg.; afifiatha + tta. der.: yi +pari + Siyapanavuso aūiiopipariyāyo?-
Sibbinim vināmetvā —Vin. I. 274 notaskquestionsbecauseofthe
Nam + a, der. M. I. 47;A. III. 133,siyāpana
Making the suture
ofthe skull set respect
totheteacher,
(then)leta
bhante
apart,vi +Nam +e +tva, caus.absol. friendspell out (thequestion)toa
Brother,wouldtherebeanyotherway
Siyā āpatti, siya vitikkamo —M. II, friendof him; Prch +ya 4 eyyātha.
too?;pana + avuso; afifio + api; pari
241 opt.2". pl.; @ +Ruc +e +tu,caus.
Sibbinim sampatipādetvā, +I +a; der.
There would be anoffence,there imper.3™.se.
sīsacchavim sibbetvā —Vin. I. 274
would bea transgression;
@+Pad +ti,
Having fixed thesutureofthe skull, Siyapitebhavanam
yathāpure
—A.
der.; vi +ati +Kram +a, der. Siyacassauttarim avasittham,
havingsewedtheskin ofthe head;sam II. 370
darabharanaya—D. I. 71 Therewouldbeyourresidence
as
+pati + Pad +e + tva, caus. absol.-
Siyā kamkha siya vimati —S. IV. Therewouldbesomething
leftover
Stv + e + ta, absol. before;
yathāpure,
adv.
327 forthemaintenance of thefamily;ca
Therewould bedoubtandperplexity +assa;uttarim,adv.;ava +Sis +ta,
Simgālassavassamānassa—S. II. Siyāpimūladāyakā
bhikkhū
of mind pp.; dara (wife or wives)+Bhr +
230 punakammāyaukkoteyyum-
Vin. II.
ana, der. 303
Siya kukkuccam, siya vippatisāro-
Vas+ya + mana,pass.pr.p. It is,also,possible
thatthebhikkhus
M. I. 437 Siyāeittassaafinathattam—M. I. whocontributed tothisissue
There would be worry andremorse 334
Simginā lonam pariharitum —Vin. originallywouldraiseobjectionto
Therewould bea changeof mind takeit upagain;siya+api;u(t)+
IT.300
Siyā kocideva paccayo—Vin. IV.
To usesalt,carryingit in a horn;pari Kut +e +eyyum, caus.opt.
106 Siyānu kho aīiīio maggobodhāya?
t Hrtatit tum,inf. 3” pl.
Should therebe somereason:koci -M. 1.246
(Skt.kaScit)+(d) +eva Wouldtherebeanyotherwayfor
Simgivannam yugam mattam Siya..rafifieevamassa —
D. I. 135
realisation?;nu, interr.p. It isprobablethatthisideawould
dhāranīyam -D. II. 133
Siyā...koci vippatisāram cometotheking;evam+assa:As +
A pair of shawls,goldencolour. soft
upadaheyya—D. II. 135 Siyanu kho tesam...kificinana- ya (Skt.yat),opt.3”.sg.
andto be usedon specialoccasions:
It is probablethatsomebodywould karanam, acciyavaaccim,vannena
yugammattam: sanhasātaka
createa remorse;upa +hā tat vavannam,abhayavaabham?- Siyavisesosiyananakaranam —M.
yugalam; dhāranīyam: chanadivase
eyvya,
opt. 3”.
2;
sg. M. II. 130 IL. 128
dhāretvā sesakāle nikkhipati, Cy.
570 Wouldtherebeanydifference of Therewouldbedistinction,
there
SiyakhopanAnanda
tumhakam them,in termsof flame,colouror wouldbedifference
evamassa—T).II. 154; M. I. 271 lustre?
Siyamsu dve bhikkhū abhidhamme
It isprobable,
Ananda,
thatthisidea Siyahi bho..jalantamaggik-
nānāvādā—M. II. 239
wouldcometoyou;in thissentense iva
Siyānu kho i ra am?
pabbalitassakammam: khandham āsaiiapurisassa
Therewouldbetwo bhikkhuswho hold
two verbs (siya and assa)of thesame —Vin. IV. 82, 150 sotthibhāvo
—M. I. 236 a
differentviewson extendedDhamma:
meaningare used to indicate )
Could i be a work ofpthe renounced?
it seq? Havingattacked
a blazingmassof fire,
siyamsūtibhaveyyum,Cy. IV. 29:
probability there
wouldbesafety
foraperson;
siyamsu,opt. 3rä,pl., commonform is
siyum Siyanoetthakathasallapo
—M. II.
Siya kho pana bhikkhave satthu- 158;A. II. 197 absol.; su +atthi +bhava

937
 Sirasa
Sighasigham Sighasigham
Sīmantarikam
Sirasametamabhivadanam
Sighasigham opunāpetvā—A, I, 242
dhāretu—D. I. 126 Sighasighamsamgharapetya—
A, I.
Havingcausedto winnow it awayvery Sītunnakāyacīvaramraianti—Vin.
Pleaseacceptthatas my highest 241
veryguickly;o +Pit +na +dpe+ 1.286
worship(worshipwithmyhead); Having
causedtocollectit veryvery (They)dyerobesin thecolddye
tva, caus. absol.
Dhr +e +tu, caus. imper.3". sg. quickly;sam +Hr +dpe +tva,caus. water,sītunnakā
is takenbytheCy.
absol. assītūdakāandsayssītūdakāti
Sighasigham kottapetva—A. I, 242
Sirasmim palitāni iātāni —M. II. 75 apakkarajanamvuccati,1126+Raj +
Havingcausedtothrashit veryvery
Grey hairsweregrown on thehead: Sītakālepāvuranam- Vin. IV. 255
quickly;Kut +dpe +twa,caus. a +nti,pres.3”.pl.
Jan + ta, pp. Blanket
in thecoldweather;
pa +a +
absol.
Vr +ana, der.
Siteunhānigattāni,unhesītāni—D.
Silampaviiihi —Vin. II. 193 II. 175
Sighasigham thusani uddharāpetvā
Pusheddowna stone;pa +Vvadh+ Sitammam ahosi—Vin. I. 288 Limbs
of the bodyarewarmatthe
—A.I. 242
ya + 1,pst..3™. sg. I feltcold;a +Ha (Bhi) +a +5 +i, coldclimate
andcoldatthewarm
Having causedto removethehusks
pst,3. sg. climate
veryveryguickly
Silammufici—
Vin. IHI.81
Releaseda stone;Mu(fij)e+ 7,psh 3st Sitavanesappasondikapabbhare
- Sītenapiunhenapikilamanti—Vin.
Sighasigham palalani uddhara-
oO
SZ. Vin.III. 159 II, 120
petvā—A. I. 242
Attheslopeof SnakePoolintheCold (They)aretroubled
bycoldandheat;
Havingcausedtopulloffthe stalks
Silayam pisitva —Vin. IIL. 6 Forest Klam+a +nti,pres.3%.
pl.
very very quickly; u(t) +Dhr or Hr +
Having groundona stone;pis or
ape + tva, caus. absol.
pims+ i + tva, absol. Sitassapurakkhato unhassa Sitenavaunhenavapilito—Vin.IV.
purakkhato—M. I. 85 43
Sighasighampufijam karapetva—A.
Silāya silāya āpatti —Vin. IV. 48 Facingcold andheat;pura(s)+Kr + Beingoppressed
bycoldor heat:Pid
1.242 fa, pp.
For eachandeverystone,thereis an +1+ta,pp.
Havingcausedto bundleit up very
offence
veryquickly;Kr +Gpe+twā,caus.
Sitalukasitabhiruka —Vin. 1.288 Sitocanesam
vatoupavāyatu
—A.
absol.
Silāyūpo solasakukkuko —A, IV. Thosewho arecold by nature, IV.46
404 thosewho are scaredof cold weather; Maythecoolbreeze
blowforthem;
Sighasigham bhusikam
The stonepillar, sixteencubits long; sttalukati
sitapakatika;
Cy.1128 upa+ Va+ya +tu,imper.3”.sg.
uddharāpetvā —A. I. 242
yāpo, thambho,Cy.; kukkuko,hattho,
Having causedto removethechaff
Cy. IV. 192 Sitalolimpayetum—Vin. 1,206 Sitodakapatikkhittounhodaka-
veryvery quickly;u(t) +Hr or Dhr+
Tomake(him)drinkstirredmud patisevi—M. I. 376
ape +tvd, caus. absol. turnedupbytheploughshare;
sītā+
Sighasighamatiharāpetvā—
A. I. Theonewhohasrefused coldwater
242 āloli; Pāt yted tum,caus.inf. anduseswarmwater;sīta+udaka;
Sighasigham
maddapetva
—
A. I. 242
Havingcausedtotakeit homevery pati +Ksip+ta,pp.:pati Sev+7,
Havingcausedto crushit veryvery
very quickly; sigham +Sigham;ati + Sītāsuhemantikāsurattīsu der.
quickly; Mrd +dpe +tvd,caus.
Hr +Gpe +tva, caus.absol. āntaratthakāsu himapātasamaye-
absol.
Vin.I. 31 Simantarikam
thapetva simam
Sighasighamubbahāpetvā—A. I. 242 During thecoldwinternights, sammannitum—Vin. I. 111
Sighasighamvapāpetvā —A. I. 241
Havingcausedto carryit awayvery Particularly
theinterimperiodof Toagree
uponaboundary keeping
A
Havingcausedto sow theseedsvery
veryquickly; u(t) +Vah 4ape +tvé, ‘Eight
Days’insnowfalling
time;
hima emptyspacebetween
two
boundaries;
veryquickly;Vap+dpe+tva,caus.
caus. absol. tanta +ika, der; hima +Pat +a,
absol.
der, +wamaya + tva,caus.absol.

939
 Simam
Silavato Silavato
Silani
Simam bandheyyammariyadam
Are you awareofthe moralvirtueand
thapeyyam— Vin. I. 288 Silavatopanna, paiifiayatosilam- Silavisuddhiyavadeva
citta-
wisdom?
MayI put a limitandseta boundary; D.I. 124 visuddhatthā
—M. I, 149
Ba(n) dh + eyyam,opt. I". sg.; Stha Wisdomis for the morallyvirtuous, Purification
of moralvirtuesIsjust
Silaparidhota pana, panna-
+ape +eyyam,caus. opt. 1, Sg. moralvirtuesare for thewise;sila + forthesakeofpurificationof mind
paridhotam sīlam —D. I. 124
vantu;panna + vantu, der. (concentration);
yava(Skt.yavat)+
Wisdom,cleansedby morality:
Simam Sammanneyyasamana- (d)+eva,indel.
morality,cleansed
bywisdom:sila +
samvāsamekūposatham- Vin, I. Silavantepabbaiite uddissa—D. I,
pari +Dhav+ta,pp.
106 144 Silavyasanahetu
—A. III. 147
A boundaryof co-abidingandof one Concerningthe renouncedpersons Duetothelossof moralvalues
Silaparibhavitam eittam —
S. V. 369
Uposatha shouldagreeupon;sam 3 withmoralvirtues;uddissa,indel.
Themind,treated
bymoralVirtues;
Man +ya + eyya,opt. 3. se.; eka + Sīlasampadam ārādheti—M. I. 193
sila +pari +Bhū+ e4 i + ta, caus.
uposatha(recital of Patimokkha) Silavantehikalyanadhammehi Hecauses toaccomplisha setof
pp.
sadharanabhogi—D. II. 80 moralvirtues;
@+Radh+e +ti,caus.
Simaya simam sambhindanti —Vin. Theonesharingone’sposessionwith pres.3”.sg.
Silaparibhavitosamadhi,
I. 111 others
whoaremorallyvirtuous
andof
samadhiparibhavita panna, panna-
(They) breakup oneboundarywith goodnature;sādhārana --bhogi: Silasampadayasamadapeti, niveseti,
paribhavitameittam—D. II. 81
another;sam + Bhi(n)d + a + nti. Bhuj +a +7,der. patitthāpeti
—A. I. 62
Concentrationof mind, treatedby
pres. 3™.pl. Causestoobserve,settledownand
morality;wisdom, treatedby
Silavakalyanadhammo —M. I. 193; establish
inasetof moralvirtues;
sam
concentrationof mind; themind,
Sīmāyasīmānaaiihottharitabbā- II. 256;A. II. 81 +@+Da +ape+ti,caus.pres.3”.
treatedby wisdom
Vin. I. III Aperson, morallyvirtuous
andofgood sg.;ni +Vis+e +ti,caus.pres.3”.
One boundaryshouldnot beoverrun nature Sg.;pat tittha +Gpe+ ti, caus.pres.
Silabbataparamasam sarato
by another;ajjhottharantiti..anto 3” $a.
paccāgaechanto—A. III. 377; Vin. I.
katva simam bandhanti,Cy. V, 1056; Silavahoti, na ca silamayo—M. II.
184 27
adhi +0 +Str + i + tabba.fut.pp. Sīlasāmaāiiagato
viharati
Strongly believingin wrongreligious
Hepossessesmoral virtues,does sabrahmacārīhi—
M. II. 251;A. HI.
belief andpracticesas essence:
Silato rakkham paccasimsati—Vin. notidentifyhimself with moral 132
sārabhāvenaiānanto, Cy. 1082;
11.186 Virtues;sila + vantu, der; sila + Heabides,sharing
thesamemoral
sila + vata +pardmasa: para +
Expectsprotectionin respectof moral maya,der. valueswithco-celibates;
sila +
Mrs + a. der.;pati +@+gaecha+
Virtue;pati +a 4 Sams+a +ti,pres. sāmahiia:samāna+ya,der.+gata
nia, pr.p.
SYASE Slavipattiyāna anuddhamsetabbo
-
Vin. II. 22 Silaniakhandaniacchiddani
Silam yāva iarā sādhu —
S. I. 36
Silapafifianam ca pana lokasmim Oneshouldnot be condemnedin asabalāniakammāsānibhulissāni
Moralvirtuesaregooduntiloldage:
aggamakkhāyati— D. I, 124 termsof moral failure;anu viāāuppasatthāni
aparamatthani
vāva, indcl.
Morality andwisdomaresaidto be the Dhvams+e +tabba,fut.pp. samādhisamvattanikāni
—D. II. 80
highestin theworld: sila +pahhāna; Moralvirtues,
unbroken,
faultless,
Silavato cetopanidhi ijjhati,
pahāhāna(pa -- hāna) is usedhere in Silavipannassa
hatūpaniso
hoti unstained,
unspotted,
free,
praisedby
vītarāgattā —A. IV. 241
thesenseof paid; aggam +a4 $ämmā
samādhi—
A. IHI. 200 thewise,untarnished
andleading
tothe
The aspirationofthe virtuousis
Khya +ya +ti, pass.pres. 3. sg. Thegroundforrightconcentration
of
fulfilled, as he is not attracted;Rdh +
mindis lost for theonewho haslost
ya +ti. pass. pres. 3". sg.; vi + I +ta,
Silapafifianam
janasi?
~M.II.210 moralvalues;vi +Pad +ta,pp.; Han
pp. +raga +tta, der.
ld,pp. +upanisa
 Silani
Sisam Sisam
Sīhanādam
Silani aparipiiretva sammaditthim Having goneto thecemetery;Gam+
twa,caus. absol.; ni +Lal +e 4 tvā,
paripūressatīti netam thānam ivā, absol. Sīsābhitāpohoti—Vin. I.204
oho. caus. absol.;: vi 4 u(t) + Stha +
viliati —A. IILI5 Thereisa headache;
sīsa+abhi+
ape + tva, caus. absol.
This is not to be foundthatwithout Sīveyyakam dussayugam—Vin. I, tapa:Tap+a, der
accomplishingthe moral virtuesone
278 Sisamogunthitva —S. IV, 122
will accomplish
therightvision;a + A pairofcloth madein Sivicountry; Sīsepatimufica
—Vin. III. 249
pari +Pr + e+ tva, caus. absol.: na
Having
coveredthehead;0 +guntha
Siveyyakamnama Uttarakurasu Fasten(this)onthehead;pati +
orkuntha +i +tuā,absol.
* etam;Vid +ya +ti,pass.pres.3”. Stvatthikamavamamgalavattham, Mufiije+a, imper.2". sg.
Sg. ...Siviratthekusalaitthiyotīhi Sisamolambenta —Vin, IV. 188
Sisepavisitvāmukhatonikkhamanti
amsūhisuttamkantanti,tena Bending(their)head;0 +Lamb+e +
Silena va vatena va tapenava —Vin.III. 106
Suttena vayitavatthametantipi Hia, pr. Pp.
brahmacariyena va devo va Havingentered
intothehead(they)
vadanti,Cy. 1117— 18; Sivi +eyya
bhavissāmi, devahiiataro vā —M. I. come
outfromthemouth;
pa+Vis+
+ka,der. Sīsamcopeti—M. III. 133
102;5. IV. 180 i t tā, absol.;ni(s)+Kram+a +
Hecausesto shakethehead:Cup +e
I shall becomea god or one among nti,pres.3%pl.
Sisacchavim upphaletva—Vin. I. +ti, caus.pres. 3”. sg.
divine beingsby thepracticeof
274
moral virtues,by vow, by asceticism, Sīsepahāramadāsi
—M. I. 125
Causingtocutopentheskinofthe Sisam nahata, ahatani vatthani
or by highestway of life: deva +aff Gaveablowonthehead; a +Da+a +
head;u(t) +Phal +e + tva,caus. nivatthā—D. II. 160
atara 5 +i, double
pst.3”.sg.
absol. Bathedfully andclad in fresh
clothes;
Snd+ta, meta.,pp.; a +Han +ta, Sīsepicīvaramkaritvāārāmam
Sile sati hotisammasamadhi—A.
Sisacchinnoabhabbotena pp.;ni + Vas +ta,pp.
IV. 336 pavisanti—Vin. II. 207
sarirabandhanenajivitum —
Vin. L.
Therightconcentration
of mind Keepingtherobeevenonthehead
96 Sisam
nahayitva—Vin. I. 240
occurswhen thereis morality theyenterthemonastery; sise+api;
The one whoseheadis cut off is unfit Havingtakena full bath;Sn@+yati Kr +i +tvG,absol.;pa + Vis+a +
for livingwiththatbody-structure; +tva,absol.
Sīlesvevassaparipūrakārī, ajjhattam nti,pres.3™.
pl.
stsa+Chid +ta,pp.;Jiv +i+ tum,
cetosamathamanuyutto
inf. SisamnahayissamitiTapodam
anirakatajjhano vipassanaya Sisevaaropetvakhandhevaucca-
gantva—Vin. IV. 116 retvā—M. I. 135
Samannagatobriheta sunna-
Sisam okampetva ummaggam HavinggonetoTapodā thinking,
'I
garanam —M. I. 33 Causingtoputontheheadormoveon
gahetvapakkami—Vin. I. 8 shall
takea full bath’;Sn +yatit
One shouldaccomplishmoralVirtues, totheshoulder;
@+Ruh+dpe+tv,
Havingnoddedtheheadandtakena ssdmi,
fut. I". sg, +iti; Gam+tva,
practiseinternalcalmnessof mind, not caus,absol.;u(t) + Car +e + tva,
side track,he wentoff; o +Kamp+¢ absol.
neglectmeditation,be endowedwith caus.absol.
+tva, caus. absol.; Grh t e t twā,
insight,resortto solitary places:
absol.; pa +Kram +i, pst. 3". sg. Sisam
vobhindi—M. I. 125,336
silesu + eva + assa:As 4ya (Skt. Sisevagahetva
khandhevagahetva
Broke
thehead:vi +0 (ava)+Bhi(njd —A.IV.132
yal), opt. 3”. sg.; adhi +atta: ceto +
Sisam okampetvajivham hi pst,34. sg,
samatham+anu + Yuj + ta,pp.; a 4 Havingtakenbytheheadorbythe
nillaletva tivisikham nalatikam
nird + Kr + ta,pp.; +jhana.; sam + shoulder
(orbytheneck? );withthe
nalate vutthapetva—M. I. 109;S. I. Sīānulokikā gacchati —Vin. IV.
anu +@ +Gam +ta,pp.; Brh +e+ rootGrh,objectis usedherein the
118 308 loc.;
Grh +e+nā,absol.
tu, der.
Havingnoddedthehead,pokedthe Goes
behind,
focusing
eyesonthe
tongue,andraisedthreewrinkleson head
(oftheonegoingahead);
sīsa
Sivathikam gantvā—
Vin. III. 36
theforehead;
0 (ava)+Kamp+e + aMulokika
 Sīhapubbaddhakāyo
Sukhadhammanam
Sukhamidam
Sukhinī
—D.IHI.24 keeps;sukkhakhiranti astipabyan-
Saying I will makea lion's roar,he Sukhamidam āvuso nibbānam—A, IV.175;
A, HI.431
Janamodanam;Cy.838;Cy.takes
IV. 414 Heabidess
withsomuchof easeand
the textual term kiira as khiira; Sus +
anuglynoise;Nad4 Friend, bliss is this Nibbāna happiness;
sukha+somanassa +
ka +dpe +tva, caus. absol.;ni +
S.T it bahula
Ksip +a +ti,pres.3”.sg.
Sukhamedhati—5, I. 217
Sīhapubbaddhakāyo
—
M. II. 136 Becomeshappy;sukham+Edh +a + Sukhassa
eapahānādukkhassaea
Sukkhataram maiiiie pataranti-—D.
fi, pres. 3”. sg,
Theonewhohashisupperhalfof the I. 248 pahānāpubbevasomanassa-
bodyjust like thatofa lion; stha + As if theycrossover to a more
domanassānam
atthamgamā
pubba + addha + kaya Sukhamadhigaccheyya-M. I. 94 adukkham asukhamupekkhāsati-
dryland;pa +Tr +a +nti,pres,
2;
Wouldexperiencehappiness;
adhi+ pārisuddhimcatutthaiihānam
SF pik:
Sīhavatā.. adhivāseti, gaccha+eyya,opt. 3”. sg. upasampaiia
viharati—D.I. 37-8
avihanfiiamano—S. 1.28 Forthereason
of abandonmentof ease
Sukkham kattham kolapam—M. IIL.
Sukhamviharati —A. I, 96 andpainandending alreadyof pleasure
Beinga lion,heendures(pain). 95
withoutbeinghurt; sīhavata- Abideshappily;sukham,adv.;vi +Hr anddispleasure,
heentersintoand
Dry andsaplesswood >
+a+ ti, pres. 3”. sg. abidesinthefourth
ihānawhichis
sthabhavena,Cy. 1.80; ; adhi +Vas
te +ti, caus.pres. 3”. sg: a+ vi + equanimous,mindfulandpure;pa +
Sukkhe tinadāye aggi mutto—A. V.
Han +ya + māna,pass.PID. Sukham
samādhattham—A.
V.313 Hā -- ana,der.;catuttha+jhana;
337 Happinessis for theconcentration
of upa+sam+Pad+ya,absol.;vi
The fire seton a dry grassyland;Muc
mind;samadhi +attham Hr +a+ti, pres.3”.sg.
Sīhābhikkhūparipātenti—Vin. I. +fa,pp.
220
Sukhavihāritaro āyasmatā Sukhassadhigamaya—D.I. 214
The lions attackthebhikkhus:pari +
Sukhafica iīveyya na ea kilameyya-
Pat + e +nti, caus.pres. 3”. pl. Gotamena —M. I. 94 Fortheattainment
of happiness;
Vin. I. 77;IV. 128 Heis leading
a happierlifethanthe sukhassa+adhi+Gam+a, der.
Would live happilyandnotbeweary; venerable
Gotama;thesuffixtarais
Sukatakammakārakā—D. IHI. 191
Jiv + eyya,opt. 3". sg.; Klam +eyya, usedwith instr. or abl. for
Doersofgood deeds:su + Kr +ta, Sukhassetam adhivacanam yadidam
opt.3. sg. comparison
Pp. puiinam—A. IV. 88-9
Pufifa(merit)is another
name
Sukhatthaya moceti—Vin. III. 112
Sukaram sadhuna sadhum—Vin. II. Sukhasamvattanikā
patipadā
—A. forsukha(happiness);swkhassa
+
Causesto emitforpleasure;
sukha+ II. 48
198 etam
atthaya; Muc +e +ti, caus.pres.3’. Thepathleadingto happiness;
sukha+
Easyis goodby thegood SZ.
Sam+ Vrt +ana + ika, der. Sukhatesamana chaya—Vin. I. 82
Sukkapakkhevacandima—D. IIL. Recluse,
yourshadowissoothing
Sukhadukkham patisamvedenti—D.
182 Sukhasilasukhasamacara
I. 53 subhojananibhufjitva nivatesu
Just as themoon in thebrighthalf of Sukhāvirāgatāloke—Vin. I. 3
Causeto ekperience happinessand
themonth;sukka +pakkhe +iva Sayanesu
sayanti—Vin. I, 57 Happyisnon-attraction
intheworld;
pain; pati +sam+Vid +e +nti,caus. Pleasant
in nature,
pleasantin vi+Raj+a +td,der.
pres. 3”.
2rd
pl. behaviour.hauing eaten nice meals
Sukkhakūram aramam haritva
sukkhāpetvā
nikkhipati—Vin. IV. (they)
sleeponbedsundisturbed by Sukhāsamghassa
sāmaggi
- Vin. Il.
Sukhadhammānam
upahattā
—M. I. thewind;Bhu(ii)j 4 i +twā,absol.; ST 205 yf ay
86 Happyistheunityof thecommunity
447
Havingbroughtboiled rice to the ta+ nti,pres,3”.pl.
Bringerofgood things;upa+Hr +
monasteryandmadeit dry up, he
tu, der.
Sukhasomanassabahulo
viharati—
S.

945
 Sukhumacchavi Sutthu
Suggahitam Suggahitani
Sheis happy,nottired:sukha+ini;
Sugatavidatthi adatabba—Vin.III, Reflectson voidness;
manasi+
a t Klam + ta,pp.+ kaya Youshouldholdrightlytaken
up
232 karoti:Kr +0 +ti,pres.38 7
(learnt)
asrightly takenup(learnt);
Oneand
half cubitsof length
should
Sukhumacchavī— M. II. 136 sut+u(t)+Grh+i+ ta,PP-i i 'ati— M. IHI.
be taken;sugatavidatthinamaidāni Suālatāvakkanti phavati— M.I
The one who has a fine skin: swkhuma Dhr +e +tabba,caus.fut -PP-
majjhimassapurisassa tisso 109
+ chavi + 7,der.
widatthiyo,vaddhakīhatthena is descent into voidness;
There amine
cavaggikani
Suggahitaniatthakavaggika
diyaddho hattho hoti, Cy. 567; sunhata+ avakkanti:ava Kro
Sukhumacchikena jalena parittam E āni sūpadhāritāni
sumanasikatānisūpadhārit -
ā t Da +tabba,fut. pp. ti,der.
udakadahamotthareyya— D. I. 45 Vin. 1.196-7 TR,
te
Welltakenup,wellapplied min
onKo HAI 'iharāmi
Onewouldthrowa netof fīnemesh āvihā
Sunnatavi
suāatāvihārenabahulam
I viha
Sugatāpadānesuiīvamāno sugatāti-
overa tinypoolof water:sukhuma4 andwell rememberedtheMA, I
rittāni bhuāiiamāno
- D. IHI. 24
the"Chapter
of Eights’;atthaa ca
; > . 2 7 ca +

acchi(=akkhi);udaka + daha (Skt. | abi

abide
pare stlyinpractising
mostly isingvoidnesS:
Livingundertheheroicdeeds
ofthe
hrada); 0 (ava) + Str +a+ eyya, vagga
55 + ika; der.; su + manast
kaa a !
bahulam,adv.
WellGoneOne(depending onthe +fa,pp.; su +upa* Dhr+ ¢
opt. 3. sg.
Buddha'spersonality),
eating
whatis ta, caus. pp. aittophasso
Sunfato phassoanin
left over by the Well GoneOne; S.IV.295
Sukhumasahagataupakkilesā —A. I. appanihitophasso-
Sugata +apadana;Jiv +a +mana, tiness,signlessness
254 Impressionof ka ger Dha +i
pr.p. Sugata +atiritta: ati + Ric + pariyāputā—D. IHI.203
Defilementsofsubtle form; upa +
s beenwelllearnt, well
andnon-fixity;4 * P4~ *
ta,pp. It would havebeenWe d:su +Grh +i
kilesa + ta,PP-
;
taken up and weallstudie I
a a 1, E enava attaniyena
Sugatim brahmalokam upapaiiati- +ta, pp.; sam + a Da + ta, PH
Sukhumo raio pativātamva khitto - Suūiamidamati
A. III. 225 pari +Ap +(u) + #4,PP- 263;S. IV. 296
S. 1.13,164 vā—M.1- 207;II.
He goesto theworld of brahmas,
a I or whatbelongs
Justasfinedustthrownagainstthe This isemptyof sou AU ler.
happyexistence:commonly,sugatim Vin. IL. 99
wind; pativatam(opp. is anuvata)+ Suggahotisavetabbam- to thesoul;atta(n)+ta.
aking uP
is coupledwithsaggamlokam; It shouldbeannounced
that
iva; Ksip +ta, pp. a Sru re
i ami —A. V. 88
upa + Pad +ya + ti, pres. 3. sg. wasright;su+Grh +4 der. snācāre abhiramami
+tabba,caus. fut.PP: TEI stin
1 solitude;A
I takespecialinterest
Sukheti pīneti —S. I. 90
Sugatimsaggamlokamuppajjati - sulwi
āīa t+agāra;
as abhij +
+ ReRam
+ )
Makes(himself)happyandcontent: : r 244
5. 1.94;IV. 271,upapaiianti;
M. I. Sucim deti —A. IV. 24 AURI pres.I", sg.
sukha+e +ti, denom.pres..3 sa:
73,upapaiieya Gives (food) clean: Dā tē
Prī --pā --e 3.ti, pres. 3. sg.
Goes to theheavenlyworldof happy St ose.
ekistence;lokam is governedby the abhiramanti
Sukhena abhisannaparisannā —A.
prefix upa; upa +Pad +ya +ti, pres. Sucirasseva —
S. I. 193 Househo ldet > I ati aPatas
4 atas k
take delightE

III. 202 i ‘time;su *

FY er After a very long periodof ume, in solitude
Thosewhoareoverflowed
with cirassam + eva iaūhe
happiness;abhi+ Syand +ta,pp; ui
Sunnaparappavada samanehian
Sugatiyevatuyhampātikamkhā- am—D.l- 120
pari +Syand +ta, pp. uui sganhantan —p. II. 151;M. 1.64
Vin. IV. 7 >» : yf tho yht se ty f
TA TA who are holdingthe
Among those , stem ns€
yStc oug1 €are ©cmP yo
A happystateof existenceis to be
Sugatacivarappamanamcivaram a a
sacrificialladle;pa +
+G!Grn ot ses, para *+p P¢
recluses, /
yada
expectedby you;su +gati +(y) +
dhareti —Vin. IV. 173 meta. pr. P-
eva; pati +Kamks +ya,fut. pp. syissati— Vin.|.
(Nanda)wearsa robeequalto the Sutthuayy, āharīyissatl Vir
a ult ..

measureofthe Sugata;Dhr +e +ti, i i— M. HI.

Suāliatam manasikaroti 217
caus.pres. 3”. sg. Suggahitamsuggahitato
dhare- 112
tabbam—M. II. 240
947
 Sutthu
Suttanta
Suta Sutena
Verywell,sir,it will bebrought:
Sutam kho pana metamvuddhanam +Ap +(u) +na+ ti,pres.3”.Sg;
sutthu,indcl.; ā Hrtlatid
mahallakanam acariyapacariyanam du +ni +Ksip +ta,pp.;pada+
SSatl,pass. fut. 3%.sg. ta,pp.; sam +Mrs +a, der.
bhasamananam—D.,Il. 149 byahiana
Thishasbeenheardby mewhenthe
Sutthu bhane Upali akasi yampi na Sutenaaccavadante—S. II. 204
teachersandgrandteachers,
Seniorand Suttantampariyāpunissanti,"E
nivatto —Vin. I. 183 Criticisingin termsof learning;
old, are talking;acariva +pacariya; purāyamsuttantopaluiiati —Vin. I.
DearUpāli, you did well, thatyou did sutapariyattim nissāyaativiya
Bhas +a +mana,Prp.,;gen.absl. + 140-1 Kī
not return;bhane(fromBhan to yadam
karonte,Cy.II. 173;att
Will learntheSuttantabyheart MAE
speak),indcl. a friendly wordof a+ Vad+ a +nta,prp.
Sutam metampubbakanam it is lost;pura +ayam;pā " Rui t ya
address; ni + Vrt + ta, pp.
acariyapacariyanam +ti, pass.pres.34 sg:
Sutenasavetabbam
—Vin.I. MA,
bhasamananam—S. IV. 306
Sutthum ca upadhāreti —Vin. I. 270 Shouldbe madehearthat theyhave
This is heardby mewhenthe
previous Suttantamsamgayissanti
—Vin. HI.
Also, remembers\ ery well; sutthum, heard(the restbefore);Sru +€ +
teachersandgrandteacherswere 159 i Tu
ady.; upa +Dhr + e +ti. caus.pres. tabba,caus.fut. pp-
talking (They)will rehearse
Suttanta;sam
I”. Sz.
Gai + a+i+ ssanti,fut. 3”.pl.
Sutesutavāditā—A. IV. 307 :
Sutammetambhante—Vin.I. 234
Sunatha sadhukam manasikarotha Speaking
of whatisheard asheard;
Venerablesir, thishasbeenheardby Suttantarikayovisamāhonti —Vin.
bhāsissāmi
—
D. II. 76;M. I. 46; S. suta + vadi +ta, der.
me II. 116
TE
'ā ediso Thespacesbetween
thethreads
Listen,applywell on Your mind, I will SutoyevakhomesoBhagava
ed Ir. ra + ika,
becomeuneven;Suid * antara
Sutavato ariyasāvakassa
—S. II. 78 A Si ukha
speak; Sru + na 4 tha, imper.2". pl.: ca edisocati, na ca maya samm
der.
For thelearned
disciple;Sru+ta,pp. dittho —Vin. I. 195
sadhukam,
adv.;manasi+ Kr +
od + vantu,der.
tha, imper. 2' . pl.; Bhas I kā e only heard,thatBlessedOne a kavikata kaveyya TAA,
ti t sgāmi, waslike thisandlike that,betmeee
ful. TE sg.
MAA
eittakkharācittavyahianā
: bāhirakā
Sutācassadhammāna sammosam seen him face to face; 7 + Drs + 4,
sāvakabhāsita —A. 1.72 I
gacchanti—A. III. 361 der.; Drs +ta,pp. poets,
Sunisabhogenabhufijimsu —Vin. II. Thediscourses madeby the E
The Dhammaslearntby himarenot I, compiledwith beautifu
136 poetica
forgotten;sufd +ca +assa Suttakechinnevippakirīyimsu
- h
Treated
(her)asa daughter-in-law; lettersandphrascs,ee ternal,and
Vin. IV. 339 i +kata,
Bhu(h)j +imsu,pst, 3. pl. utte redby thedisciples;kav"I
SutātedevāTāvatimsā?
—M. II. Whenthelittle strirngwasbroken.they pp: kavi +eyya,der.; cut Mi
131 ;
scatteredall over;Chid +ta,PP. vi
a + 1 +bhasita:Bhas +!
Sunoma manasikaroma—Vin. I. 103 akkhara, savake
Haveyou heardofthe godsin pa +Kir +iva + imsu,pass.pst.7 + ta, pp-
We listenandkeepin mind: Sru +no
Tāvatimsa(heaven of thirty three pl.
+ma,pres. 1".pl.; manasi4 Krtod
gods) ?; Sru +ta,Pp. SuttantaTathagatabhasita I
ma,pres, 1".pl. 'i 03
Suttakenasibbetum
—Vin. ra KO ira gam
gambhiraE phirattha
TA lokuttara
. 267; A.
Sutanam dhammanam To sew it with a little thread;Stv +! suīiatāpatisaāiutta —S. HI
Sutaparibhāvitam cittam —S. V. 369 +e + tum,inf.
dhārakaiātiko —A. IV. 221 1.72; III. 107 RR
The mindcausedto be treatedby
Theonewhois ofthenature
of The discourses,deliveredby the
learning;pari +Bhai +e +i+ ta, Suttantampariyapupant! sbi
holdingin mindtheDhammas
already Tathāgata, deep,deepin meaning,
Caus.pp dunnikkhittehi padavyanjane 'endentalanddealingwitha
heard;Dhr +aka,der. ransc
II. 147 a :emptiness;pālivasena gambhīrā,
T.
ith i arly
Sutam kho pana metam—D. I. 128 Memorise a Suttantawith imprope! Sallasuttasadisā,atthavase
Sutāsammosam
gacchanti
—A.V. ac AS; ari

This hasbeenheardby me;me +eftam arrangedstatements

andphrases;
F
103
949
Suttantika Suttāgato Suttāvamkā
Sunikhatatta

gambhirā, mahāvedallasuttasadisā, Suttabhikkhumhivippatipaiiati Sutta(discipline)andcomesforrecital Suddhantaparivasam

detu—Vin,I.
sattasuiam dhammamattameva Vin. ITI. 33 everyhalf-month;
sutta+dgata; 59
pakāsakā saāhāsamkhātasamvutta- Commitsa sexualactonamonk pari +@+ Pad +ta,pp.; anu+ Let(theSamgha)
givetheprobation
of
sadisā, Cy. Il. 146 Tathagata+ whohasbeensleeping;Svap+ta, addhamāsa complete
purification;
suddha
+anta
bhasita;gambhira+attha;loka + pp.; vi +pati + Pad +ya +ti,pres. +parivasa:pari + Vas+a, der.;Da
uttara; sunfia + ta, der. +pati + sam FOSS: Suttāvamkā honti— Vin, II. 116 +e+tu,imper.
3”.sg.
+ Yuj + ta,pp. Threads
arenotona straight
line
Suttamkantanti—Vin. IV. 299 Suddhamattānampariharati—A. I.
Suttantikā.. suttantam Spin yarn;Kr(n)t + a +nti,pres,3”. Sutteotāretabbāni, vinaye 49, 149;II. 122;IV. 109
samgāyissanti—Vin. II. 75 pl. sandassetabbāni —
D. II, 124; A. II. Leads
aclean
life;Sudh
+ta,pp.;
Thosewho hold Suttantaswill rehearse 168 pari +Hr +a+ ti,pres.3”.sg.
Suttanta Suttam dhārayitvā —Vin. III. 257 Shouldmakethemaccessible to the
Havingprepared
thethread; suttaandcomparedwiththevinaya; Sunakehipikhādāpenti—M. I. 87
Suttantikehi suttam samgāyantehi, dhārayitvāti tūletvā o (ava) t Tr. t e t tabba,caus.fat. Theycausedogstobite;Khad+dpe
vinayadharehi vinayam vinicchi- phalaparicchedamkatva, Cy. 727; pp; sam +Drs + e +tabba,caus, +nti,caus,3”,pl.
nantehi, dhammakathikehi Dhr +aya +i +tva,caus.absol. fut.pp.
dhammam sākacchantehi—
Vin. I. Sunahata
suvilitta
169 Suttamviihadpesum
- Vin. III. 256 Suttenasamgahitani
—Vin.III. 9 kappitakesamassu
pancahi
By theSuttantikas
whoarerehearsing Asked for thread;vi +Jid +dpe+s Joinedtogetherby a thread;sam+ kāmagunehisamappitā
theSutta,by theVinayamasterswho +um,caus,pst.3. pl. Grh + i +ta,pp. samamgībhātāparicārenti—M. II.
aresolving thedisciplinaryproblems, 120
by theDhamma-exponents who are Suttam hi kho (tassa) agatamhoti, Suttesu
jagara—S.1.3 Wellbathed,
wellanointed,
trimmed
discussingtheDhamma;sam + Gai + nosuttavibhamgo —
Vin. II. 97 Thosewho areawakeamongtheones hairandbeard,theyfullyenioylife
a + nta,pr.p.; vi + ni(s) + Ci + nd + Thetextofthe rulesisquitefamiliar whohavebeensleeping;Svap+ta, withfivefoldobiectof sensepleasure:
nta,pr.p.; saha + Kath +ya + nta, pp. su +Snd+ta,pp.;su +vi +Lip +ta,
to him, not thecommentary;matika
222 āgatā, vinayo na paguno, Cy. 1197; pp.;kappa+e +i + ta,denom.pp.;
a +Gam + ta,pp. Sutvānaariyānasubhāsitāni
—D. II. sam + R+e +1+ ta, caus.pp.; sam
Suttanteokāsam kārāpetvā 273 +amga+bhiita,pp.;pari +Car +e
vinayam vā abhidhammamvā Havingheardthegoodteachings
of +nti,caus,
pres.3”.
pl.
Suttalikhamkatum— Vin. I. 297
pucchati —Vin. IV. 344 To repairtherobewiththread;
thenobles;
Sru +tvana,
absol.;
Havingaskedfor permission(to ask ariva@nam
+su +Bhas +i +ta,pp: Sunahatosuvilitto
suttenevaaggalam katum,Cy. 1129;
auestion)concerningSuttantas(she) kappitakesamassu
Kr + tum,inf.: kartum>kattum>
asks(guestions)aboutVinayaor Sutvāna vadanti—Vin. IHI. 173 odātavatthavasano—A. IV. 94
kātum
Abhidhamma;Kr +āpe 3-tvā,caus. Havingheard(he)doesnotspeak; Theonewhohasbathed, anointed,
absol.; Prch +ya + ti, pres, 3. sg. vadantior vadati?, latterseemsto be trimmedhairandbeardandcladin
more appropriate according to the whitecloth;odātat vattha+ Vas+
Suttante va gathayo va context ana,der.
commentary
abhidhammamya pariyapunassu-
Vin. IV. 144 Sutvānassaetadahosi—Vin. II. 299 Sunikhātattāsilāyūpassa
—A. IV.
Suttāgato suttapariyāpanno
MemoriseSuttantas,
Gāthāsor This ideacameto himafterlistening 405 ; I
anvaddhamāsam
uddesam
āgaeehati As thestonepillaris well fixed;su +
Abhidhamma;
pari+Ap+und+ssu, —Vin. IV. 144
to them;sutvana +assa;etam(etad)
imper.2". sg. +ahosi,pst.3™.sg. ni +Khan+ta,pp.
(This)hascomeandincluded
inthe
 Sunisedham
Suposatāya Suppanihitam
Sunisedham nisedhetha, mūia-
samgho,ujupatipannoBhagayato
ghaecamkarotha,sīsamassa savakasamghonayapatipanno
pleasantness,diminution of gathering
Su+sam+Tus +a, der
ehindatha—
D. III. 67 andstartingofeffort; su 4bosa 1 tā,
Bhagavato savakasamghosamici-
Stop completely,root out the life and der.;appa +iccha; sam + Tus+ta,
patipanno Bhagavato sāvakasamgho Subhāsitadubbhāsitam
āiānitum-
cut this man’shead;ni +Sidh +e + pp.; sam + Likh +a, der; Dhu + ta,
—D.II. 93;5. I. 220,S. V.343 Vin.III. 128
tha,caus.imper.2". pl.; miila 4 pp.; pasdda + ika, der: apa +Ci +a,
Thecommunity of disciplesofthe Tounderstand
whatiswellsaidand
Ghan+ya, der.;Chi(n)d+a +tha, der.;viriva +4 +Ra(m)bh+a, der.;
BlessedOne hasenteredthegood whatisill said;
su+Bhas2.i 3ta,
imper,2”. pl. Bhas +i +tvā, absol.
path,straight
path,methodical
pathand Pp.;du+bhasita; @+Jan +na+i +
right path;sw +pati +Pad +ta,pp.; tum,inf.
Sunkatthānam atikkamitvā Suppanihitam me manasam
Samghānussatiis cultivatedby
aggahesi
—Vin. III. 62 saceānambodhāya — M. I, 323
reflecting on thesequalities ofthe Subhasitam
subhasitato
He took it afterpassingthecustoms: Wellfiked is my mind for the
Samgha nābbhanumodati
—D.I, 143
ati +Kram+i +tva,absol.;a +Grh realisationoftruths; sw +pa +ni +
Hedoesnotappreciate
wellsaidas
tetstipst 3" sg Dhā- i t ta, pp.; manasamis used
Suparikammakataya bhūmiyā wellsaid;su+Bhas+i +ta,DD.:na,
here in the sense of mind
nikkhittāni—A. I. 135 neg.p. +abhi+anu+Mud+ a +ti.
Sundarīnandā Sālhena gabbhinī hoti pres.3”,sg.
Laid down on thegroundwell
—Vin. IV. 216 Suppatitthitapādo—M. II. 136
prepared;su +pari +kamma+kata:
Sundarinandabecomes
pregnant
by Theonewho haswell setfeet:su +pa Subhāsitena
attamanā
abhiraddhā-
ni +Ksip +ta,pp.
Salha +tittha(fromStha) +i +ta,pp. M. II. 116
Supinantena asuci muccati—Vin. I. Pleased
andsatisfied
withgood
Sundaro ayyaya tanutaro —Vin. IV. Suppadhamsiyanicorehi speech;
abhi+Radh+ta,pp.
294; III. 112
345 kumbhatthenakehi—A. IV. 278
Semenis emittedin a dream;Muc +
Beautiful is thevenerable’slittle body Easilydestroyable
byrobbers
andpot- Subhikkhahotisusassa
thieves;sw +pa +Dhyvams
+i +ya, sulabhapinda
—Vin.I. 238
Sundaro āvuso pindapato —
Vin. IV. (Vesāli)washavingplentyof food,
Supinantena khaggena paripatesi-
83 crops,andalmsfoodeasilyobtainable
Vin. I. 347
The food collectedis Verynice, Subbattitam
ubbattetha
—D.II. 324
In (my)dreamhecaused toattack
(me) Rub(him) well: sw+ Vrt +i +ta,pp.;
brother Sumuttāmayamtena
witha sword;pari +Patt+e+s +i,
ul) + Vrt +e + tha, caus. imper:2", mahāsamanena —
Vin. II. 284-5
caus.pst. 3”. sg. pl.
Supahihattānibbānagāminī Wearewellridofthat greatrecluse;
patipadā—A. IV. 83 su +Muc+ta,pp.
Supinevaladdhampurisassavittam Subhanimittassa manasikārā rago
ThepathleadingtoNibbānahasbeen
—S. IV. 117 eittamanuddhamsessati —M. 1.26
well proclaimed;sx +pat Jia +dpe Sumbhakapattadharo dittho—Vin.
Just like thewealthreceivedina
T fa, caus.pp. Forthereasonof focusing mindona III. 169 I
dream; supine +iva; Labh + ta, pp. beautifulobiect,passion willmakethe A holderofa originalclaypotis seen;
Supaticchannena
antaraghare mind destroy gradually; anu +Dhvams sumbhakapattotipakatimattika patto,
Suposataya appicchassa santutthassa
gantabbam— Vin. II. 213; IV. 186 re +ssati, caus. fut. 3", sg. Cy.602;Dhr+a,der;Dr§+ta,pp.
sallekhassadhutassa pāsādikassa
Shouldgo insidethehousewith a well
apacayassaviriyarambhassavannam Subharosusantoso
jivita-
coveredbody;sw 4pati +Chad +ta,
bhasitva —Vin. I. 45
Pp.; Gam +tabba,fut. Pp. pParikkhāresu
—A. IHI, 120
Having praisedfor easysupport,less Theonewhoiseasytomaintainand
wants,contentment,slashingof tontent
withmaterial
reguisites
Supatipanno Bhagavatosāvaka-
defilements,punctiliousness,
Necessaryfor life: su 4 Bhr +a, der.; Setaka
 Sumkam
Sumkam pariharissāma -Vin.
131
Wewill evadetax;pari +Hr +a +i+
ssama,fut. 1°.pl.
Suramerayapanassavipako
ummattakasamvattaniko—A. IV.
248
Leadingto insanityis the resultof
drinkingintoxicants;
vi +Pac +a,
der.;u(t) + Mad +ta,pp. +ka,der:;
sam+ Vrt +ana+ika,der.
Suramerayapana appativirata -
Vin. II. 295
Those who are not refrainedfrom
drinking fermentedtoddyandspirits;a
T pati t vi + Ram + ta,pp.
Surāmerayapāne pacittiyam —Vin.
IV. 110
In drinking fermentedtoddyand
spirits, thereis an offenceof
expiation;sura + meraya+ Pā 3
ana, der.
Suramerayamajjapamadatthana-
nuyogo— D. III. 182
Addiction to intokicatingdrinks which
causeunmindfulness;sura + meraya
+majja +pamdda + thāna + anu +
yoga
Suriyam oloketvā etadahosi—M. I.
393
After looking at thesun,this idea
cameto (his) mind;o (ava) +Lok +e
+tvd,absol.; etam(Skt.etad) +a +
Hit (Bhi) +a +s +i, pst, 3°. Sg.
Suriyamāgu purakkhatvā -D. II.
259
Suvannapadukayo Suvannapādukāhi
Susana
IV. Keeping thesun infront theycame;ā
Suvannapādukāhi
orohitvā—Vin.I.
+ Gam + u, pst. 3™.pl.; pure (puras> V.29
15
puro >pure, Magadhiform) +Kr + Theonewithwellliberated
mindand
Havinggot down from(takenoff) the
Iwā,absol. Wisdom;
su +yj +Muc+ta,pp.
goldenfootwear;0 +Ryh +atit
Ivā, absol.
Suriyassa uggamanakāle
—Vin. I. Suvisodhitamvisodheyya —M. I.
342 124
Suvannamālāyakāranā — Vin. 1,208
At thetimeofthe rising ofthe sun; Hewouldmakeit eleanthoroughly;
For thereasonof a goldenwreath
u(t) + gamana Su+vi +Sudh+e+ i+ ta,caus.
Pp.; vi +Sudh+e@+evya,caus.
Suvanpavanno.. so bhavamGotamo
Suriyassa udayato etam pubbam- opt.3. sg.
—M. II. 136
gamam etam pubbanimittam ThatvenerableGotamaisof golden
yadidam arunaggam—S. V.29 Susakkatam
sakkatasakkatehi
—
D.
colour
Dawn is theprecursoranda II. 167
Wellhonouredbythosewhoare
foregoingsign ofthe rising sun; Suvannā parihīnā —Vin. IV. 259
honouredbythehonoured;
sa/t)+
ud +aya (from I) + nta,prip.; Deprivedof gold;Pari +Ha +ta,pp.
Kr +ta,pp.
aruna + ugga: u(t) + ga
Suvacenabhavitabbamkalyana-
Susamvutena antaraghare
Suriyova obhasayamantalikkham- mittena —M. I. 470
gantabbam —
Vin. IV. 186
Vin. I. 2 Shouldbea goodfriendwithgood
Onewhois wellrestrainedshouldgo
Illuminating
atmosphere
likethesun; speech; Bhii +a +i +tabba,Sut.pp.
insidethehouse;sw+sam+ Vr +ta,
suriyo t iva; o + Bhas + aya +nta,
Pp.
caus. pr.p. Suvacokhamo padakkhinaggahi
anusāsanim
—A. V.26 Susānanissitam vā hoti—Vin. IHI.
Surusurukārakamkhīrampivanti- The one who is obedient,agreeableand
151
Vin. IV. 197 receivesinstructionsrightly;pa +
It is closetoa cemetery;ni +Sri +ta,
(They) drink milk, while makinga dakkhina+Grh +7,der.
pp.
sound suruandsuru;surusuru,
ono.; PT +a +nti, root redup. Suvacohoti sovacassatam
āpaiiati- Susānamokkamimsupamsukūlāya
pres. 3”. pl. M. I. 126 —Vin. 1.282
Hebecomes oneof goodspeech
and Enteredintothecemeteryfor
Suvannanikkham adhigaccheyya—
A. gentle character; sy +vacafs) +va, collectingrags;0 +Kram+imsu,pst.
IV. 120 der. +ta, der; @+ Pad +ya +ti, 3 pl.
Wouldfinda goldcoin;nikkhais 2
pres. 3. sg.
sometimesto befound as nekkha,e.g. Susanava samkarakutava
nekkhamiambonadasseva,Dh. 230; Suvikkhālitam vikkhāletvā—
Vin. I. papanikava nantakāniuccinitvā
adhi; --gaccha --
; Ä e
eyya,opt. 3'".sg. 215 samghātimkaritvādhārenti—M.
Havingcaused
towashverywell;vi+ IL.7
Ksal +e t i ta,caus.pp.;vi +Ksal Fromcemetery
or rubbish-heap
or
F e t tvā, caus. absol. shopstheycollectrags,make
them
intoa doublelayerrobeandwear;
Suvimuttacittosuvimuttapanno
—A. pa +dpana+ika,der.;u(t) +Ci
 Susane
Sūnam
+ na + i+ ta, absol.; Kr +i +
Sussitvāmarissati—Vin. III. 77
tva, absol.; Dhr +e+ nti, caus.
Havingsighed,hewill die;Svas+ya
pres, 34 pl.
ti nā, absol.; Mr +a+ i+ ssati,
Sut. 3", sg.
Susane viharati —Vin. IV. 89
Abides in thecemetery
Sussutam suggahītam
Sumanasikatamsūpadhāritam —M.
Susikkhito anavayo sake ācariyake
II. 104
kumbhakārakamme
Well heard,well takenup (learnt),
pariyodatasippo —Vin. III. 41
wellappliedandretained
inthemind;
Theonewelltrained,fullyqualifiedin
su + Sru +ta,Pp.; Su + Grh +i +ta,
theart of potteryin one’s own school,
Pp.; Su + manasi +kata,pp.; su +
andcleansedof learning:su +Sak +;
upa + Dhr +e +i 4 fa, Caus,pp.
Tra, intens.pp.; ana +vaya(vi +I):
Pari + 0 +Da (to clean)+ta.pp. +
Sussūsā paripuccha pafiiiaya āhāro
sippa
—A. V. 136
The food for wisdom is attentiveness
Susirakattham jotim samadahitva
andenguiry
visibbesum —Vin. IV. 115
They kindled fire with hollow wood
Sussūsālabhatepaūham—S. I. 214
andwarmedthemselvesup; vi +Sya +
One begetswisdom by beingattentive;
e+ s +um,pst. 3". pl.
sussisa, desid. of Sru; Labh + at
le, mid.pres. 3”. sg.
Susukkadātho —
M. mi.137
The onewho haspurewhiteteeth:su +
Sussūsā setthā bhariyānam- S. I. 6
sukka
The bestamongwives is theonewho
is attentive
Susu yatha sakkharadhotapani -
Vin. III. 147
Sūcighatikamdatvā—A. IV. 206:
Just asa child who hasa swordin
Vin. II. 237
(his) handsharpenedon thestone:
Having locked(thedoor); Da +tva,
pāsāne dhotanisitakhaggahattho,
absol.
Cy. 566
Sūciyo ea unhīsafica —D. II. 179
Susū kālakesā bhadrena yobbanena
Crossbars
ofrailing andfigurehead
samannāgatāpathamenavayasā
anikīlitāvino kāmesu —s. I. 117
Sūnagharampavisitvā—Vin. III. 59
Thosewhoareyoung,havingblack
Havingentered
theslaughter-house;
hair,endowedwith primeofyouth,
pa +Vi§ +i +twa,absol.
spendingthe firstpartoflife andhave
not dallied with sensedesires;a +ni
Sūnam thapenti—
Vin. II. 267
+Krid +i +tāvī,pp.
Theycausetosetupa butcher's
shop;
Sūnehi
Setthapuriso
faithful,shouldbeasked;sam+Man
Cy.1293
¥ ta,pp.;Prch +ya +j +tabba,
fut.
pp.
Sūnehi pādehi rajokinnena gattena
~A. IV. 275;Vin. I. 253
Sekhasammutim
datum~Vin. IY.
Withswollenfeetandadustybody;
179
raia +okinna: 0 + Kir +ta,Pp-
Togivethetitleoftrainee;Da +tum,
ing.
Soupandcurry
Sekhānaiica
patipadānam
khinasavanajica
vusitavatam
—D.II.
Sūpasampākemamsasampāke
223
telasampākeāmalakaphānite
Of thetrainees
whohaveentered
in
anapatti—Vin. IV. 110
tothepathandofthekhīnāsavas
Thereis no offence(of having
(thosewhohaveekhausted influxes)
alcohol) in thecookingofa soup,a
whohavelivedtheirwaylife;
meatbroth,a concoction
ofoil andin
patipadānam is eithera misprintor
thetreacleof emblicmyrobalan
a corruptform, it cannotbecoupled
withsekhānam because it is notan
Supasampake,mamasasampake,
adjective,
patipadanam is preferable
telasampāke,sālave, uttaribhamge
; Cy.takesthetermpatipannānam,
anapatti —Vin. IV. 259
adj.ofpatipajjati,652;Khsi +ta,
There is no offence(of eatinggarlic)
pp. +asava; Vas+i +ta,pp.+
inthecookingof a soup,a meatbroth,
vantu
a concoctionof oil, in salad,andin
dainties;
sam+Pae +a,der Sekhoappattamanasoanuttaram
yogakkhemam patthayamano—M.
Sile patipatiyathapesi—Vin.IV.
1.4;5.V.326;A. IV.362,pl.
124
A traineewhohasnotyetreachedthe
Causedto fix (them),in a row,ona
higheststateof mindandbeenaspiring
stake;Stha +dpe +s+i, caus.pst.
for thesupreme freedomfrom
J I sg. bondage;mānasantirāgopi, cittampi,
arahattampi,Cy.1.40; a+ pa +Ap
Sekhavesarajjakaranadhamma-
+ta,pp.; manas+a, der.(condition
A. IHI.127 of mind);pa +Arth+aya +māna,
Thethingswhichmakethetrainees
pr.p.
confident; sekha -- vesāraiia:
visdrada+ya, der. +karana
Sekhosakaranīyo—D. II. 143
A trainee
whohasmorethingstobe
Sekhasammatānikulāni
done;sa +Kr +aniya,fut.pp.
pucchitabbāni —Vin. II. 208
The families,whichareagreeduponas

957
 Settham
Senasanagahapakam
Senāsanesu
(He ) is said to be the highest person;
abhi +u(t) + Ya +ta,pp.; As +mana,
a +Khya+ya +ti,pass.pres,3" Sg. Senāsanagāhāpakamsammannitum
2
pr.p. ~Vin.I, 211
—Vin. II. 167
Thelodgingshouldbeshiftedto
Settham dado setthamupeti thanam To agreeuponanassignerof lodgings;
Senam uyyojetva antaramaggato thevillage;ati +Hr +i +tabba,
—A TIE S51 Grh +dpe +aka, caus.der: sam +
nivattāpeti —A. V. 82 fut. pp.
The one who gives thebestgoesto the Man +ya +i tum, inf.
Having orderedthearmyto march
bestplace:settham+ upa +I +ti, Senasanam capaiiiiapeyyam
forward he causesit to turnbackfrom Senasanacarikamahindanto—Vin.
pres. 3”. sg, bhattanicauddiseyyam —Vin. II. 75;
thehalf way; u(t) +Yuj +e +tva, 1. 182; III. 21, āhindantā
caus. absol.; ni +Vrt 4 āpe 1 ti,
III. 158,bhattafica
Setamhi chatte anuhīramāne —D. II. While walking roundthelodgings;@+
I shouldprepare
lodgingsandassign
caus.pres.3". sg. Hind +a +nta,pr.p.
15 meals;pa +Jia +dpe+eyyam,
While thewhitecanopyis beingheld caus.opt.1".sg.;u(t)+Drs +eyyam,
Senam sannaddhamvammikam Senāsanamaguttamhoti —Vin, II.
(over him): Joe. absi.; anu +Dhr + opt.I". sg.
subhummiyam thitam passitum 211
iva + mana, pass. pr-p.; this term can
—Vin. I. 342 Lodging is unprotected:
a + Gup +ta,
also be madefrom the root Hr, anu + Senāsanam
patibāhitabbam
—
Vin. I.
To seethearmy ready,fully armedand pp.
Hr + iva + māna,Pass.pr. p., similar 356
standingon a goodground:sam +Nah
to pātihāriva —pātihīra, contracted Lodgingshouldbewithheld;
pati+
" fa,pp.; vamma+ika,der: su + Senasanamanapucchapakkamanti
form; Cy. eguatesanuhīramāna with Bah+i +tabba,
fut. pp.
bhummi;Sthd +i +ta, Pp.; passa +i =Vin St,211
anudhāriyamāna 438
+ tum,inf. Withoutinforminganybodyatthe Senāsanam paribhufjamano—A. II.
lodgingtheygo out:an +a +Preh + 55
Setughāto gīte —A. I. 261
Senam sannayhitva—D. II. 175; ya, absol.;pa + Kram +a +nti,pres.
Collapseofthe bridgein singing Usingthelodging;
pari +Bhu(ii)j+a
M.III. 174;S. I. 82 Spl.
(purpose is lost) + mana,pr.p.
Having setthearmy in array;sam+
Nah +ya + i +tva, meta.absol. Senāsanamuparipuāiam karitvā-
Setughāto nacce—A. 1.261 Senāsanam
samsametva
—M. I. 146,
Vin. If. 211 457;II. 61;IHI.153;A. I. 237
Collapseofthe bridgein dancing
Senamsamkaddhitvā
—
Vin. IHI.108 Havingpiledup lodgingon thetop; Havingmadethelodgingcleanand
(purposeof recluse life is lost in
Having collectedthearmy;sam + Kr + i +tvd, absol. tidy;sam+Sam+e t ta, caus.
dancing); cp. methune setughāto;
kaddha (from Krs) + i +tva,absol. absol..
setu +Han(ghan) +ta,pp.
Senāsanam ūhadantipiummihanti
Senāya abbhuyyato hoti —Vin. IV. pi—Vin. IV. 129 Senasanavattam
pannhapessami
-
Sedakammam-Vin. I. 205
104 Soilthelodgingwithdefecation
and Vin.II. 218
A medicaltreatmentof makingthe
(He) marchedforwardwith thearmy; urine;&@ +hata (from Han) +nti,? I willproclaim
theduties
tobe
patientsweat;Svid +a, der, +kamma
abhi +u(t) +Ya +ta,pp. pres. 3. pl., (cp. upanaddhior discharged
atthelodgings
upanandhifrom Nah +i) +api; u(t) +
SedagatenagattenaSayanti—Vin.
Senaya samagacchi— Vin. I. 348 Mih +a +nti, pres, 3%.pl.+ api Senāsanā otaritabbam—
Vin. II. 217
IV. 117
Met with thearmy;sam +d + Shouldsetoutfromthelodging:sena
They sleepwith thebodysoakedwith
gaccha +i, pst. 3. sg. Senāsanamovatthamhoti —Vin. IV.
, re J
(Skt.Savana)+Gsana;0 + Tr +i +
sweat;Si +a +4nti, pres. 3. pl. Ta
ee
39 tabba,fut, pp.
Senava patisenayaruddhahoti- Thelodgingwasexposed
torain;0 +
Senam abbhuyyātosamāno—M. II.
Vin. IV. 107 Vrs +ta,pp. Senāsanesu
sāpekhābhavissanti-
124
(If) thearmyis stopped
bytheenemy; D.IL.77
While thearmywason themarch;
Rudh +ta,pp. Senāsanam
gāmamatiharitabbam Will behopefulin lodgings
 Semhasamutthana
Seyyathāpi Seyyathāpi
Semhasamutthanaabadha —A. V.
as a not mole;pari +Sudh 4 ta,
110 kamsabhandavanija,Cy, 121] Seyyathapitalapakkamsampati
PP.; pati +ava +ik: +a + mana,
Ailments causedby phlegm;semha +
pr.p.; Jan +na 4 eyya,opt. bandhanā muttam—A.1,181
Seyyathāpigapakamahāmattā—Vin. lustasthepalm-tree
fruitreleased
a sec
der.
II. 130 fromthestalkrightnow;sampati,
Seyyathāpi indagopako — Vin, III.
Justaschiefministersforaccounting indcl.; Muc+ta,pp.
Seyyathapahametarahi—S. II. 58
42
lust as I at present:Seyvathapi+ Seyyathapi Gamga-Mahiyaya—Vin. Seyyathapitinaggeussavabindu
-
Just asa redcolour insectcomingout
aham; etarahi, indcl. 1. 191 A. IV.137
ofthe earthafterrain
lust asat the festivalofGamgā
Tustasadewdropatthetipofa grass;
Seyyathapi aggi, sucimpi dahati andMahi; Gamga Mahikīlikā,
Seyyathapi ukkhittasike vadhake- tina t agga; ussāva t bindu
asueimpidahati —A. IHI, 220 Cy. 1085
A. III. 443
lust as fire burnscleanandunclean
Just as anexecutionerwith drawn Seyyathāpititthiyā—Vin. I, 153
things;Dah + a + ti. pres. 3”. sg. Seyyathāpigavaghatanam— Vin. I. Justasthosewhobelongtoother
sword; asike and vadhake seem to be
182 religioussects;tittha+iya,der.
Magadhi nom. Sg.forms
Seyyathapi assatari attavadhaya Just as theslaughterhouse
of cattle:
gabbham ganhāti parābhavāya- vatthagāvo haāhanii, Cy. 1081
Seyyathapi .. udakarahado ubbhide- Seyyathāpidīghalomikāelakā
Vin. IT. 188
dako —D. I. 74 kantakagahanam paviseyya —S. II.
Just as she-muleconceiyes to her Seyyathāpi gihiniyo 228
Just as a pool ofspring water:
deathanddestruction:Grh t nā kāmabhoginiyo — Vin. IV. 260 Justasa long-haired
she-goat Mould
rahada, Skt. hrada; u(t) +bhida +
+ ti, meta.pres. 374SgZ.;
para + lust as femalehouseholdersenioying enterintoa thornythicket;digha+
udaka
bhava sense-desires;giha (=grha) + int loma+ika,der.;kantaka+gahana;

Seyyathapi ubhato mukha mūtoli - pa +Vis+evya,opt.3™.sg.

Seyyathapi āgantukāgāram -—21V. Seyyathapi gihi kamabhogino-
M. I. tn57
219 Vin. I. 185 Seyyathapidipicchapo—Vin. I. 193
lust asa sackwith anopeningon both
Just as a guest house: agantuka + Just as householdersenjoyingsense- Justasa tigercub;dipi +chāpa
sides
agara

I. Seyyathāpidevehisaddhim
Seyyathāpi etarahi —M. I. 80);S. III.
Seyyathāpi.. itthī vā puriso vā Seyyathāpigono kitthādo —A. IHI. —Vin. I. 229 TI
mantetvā
87
daharo vā yuvā mandanaiātiko 3 A. Asif consultingthedevas;manta+«
Just as at present;etarahi,indel.
ādāse vā parisuddhe pariyodate Just
Ia as theox eatingcornor paddy + tva,denom.
tva,denom.
¢absol.
bsol
accheva udapattesakam field; Krs +ta, pp. +ada TE 8 'ā
Seyyathāpi kadalī attavadhāya
mukhanimittam paccavekkhamāno ä i Seyyathapi
nalavanam
va
phalam deti parābhavāya —Vin. II. Sevvathānio dhamukham —
Vin. I. I r E HEI
sakanikam vā sakanikanti iāneyya, Seyyathāpi go Just as a jungleof
saravanam reedsor
vā—D.III. 75 rushes
188
akanikam vā akanikanti iāneyya, 215
Just asa plantaintreebearsfruit to
evameva— D. I, 80 stas
lust the
asthemouthof aniguana
8 I naloattavadhāya
Seyyathāpi EKE
its deathanddestruction;Da +e +
Just aS a Woman Ora man ora lad
ti, pres. 3’. sg. A A,
or a youthwho, by nature.likes Seyyathāpichavadāhakā—
Vin. I. phalamdetiparabhavaya
—Vin. II.
beautifying,while reviewingown 152; II. 138 188 kat a
facein a cleanandbrightmirror or
Seyyathapikamsapattharika
—Vin.
lust as sewho burn corpses Tustasa reedbearsfruit to its death
in a cleany ater-potunderstands 11.135
A I , anddestruction
mole, if any, asa mole, not mole Just as dealersof bronzewear,
kamsapattharikāti weygathāpltsys SITE Seyyathapinamaahicchattako!
—D.
lust asby you

961
 Seyyathapi
III. 87
Just as a mushroom!;nama,indel.
indicating amazement
Seyyathapi nama alhakathalika -
A. IHI.369
lustasa pot,containing
a measure
of
alhaka (=four Patthas,pattha means
handful)
Seyyathapi nama ossakkantiyā va
ussukkeyya,parammukhim ya
ālimgeyya — D. I. 230
Just asa personwould enthusea
Womanwho is going awayfrom him.
or would embracea womanwho has
turnedherfaceāway;o (ava)t Svask
fatata 3 ī, pr-p.; ussukka + eyya,
denom.opt. 3°74 S§.; a + Limg + eyya,
opt. 3. sg.
Seyyathapi nama Kimkinikasaddo -
Vin. III. 42
Justasa soundlikekimkini;kimkini,
Oho.
Seyyathāpi nāma Gamgodakam
Yamunodakena Samsandati,sameti-
D. II. 223
dustas thewaterof Gangesmikes
togetherandflows down with thatof
Yamunā;Gamga + udakam; Yamuna
+ udakam;sam + Syand +a + ti,
pres.3”.sg.;sama(m)+e (from1) +
ii, pres. 3", sg.
Seyyathapi nama gavi tarunavaccha
—Vin. I. 247
Just asa cow with a youngcalf
Seyyathapi nama talo matthakac-
chinno abhabbo puna virūlhiyā -
Seyyathāpi
Vin. ILL.92
Just a palmtree,cutoff fromthetop,
is unfitfor re-growth;
matthaka+
Chid + ta, pp.; abhabba:a --Bha +
ba,fut. pp.;puna,indcl.:vi +Ruh+
ti, dey.
Seyyathāpi nāma purānam
bandhanam
ehinditvānavam
bandhanamkareyya—D. 1.231
Just asone would makea newbond
afterbreakingthroughtheold one:
Chi(n)d + i +wa, absol.; Kr +eyya,
opt.3”. se.
Seyyathapi nama balava puriso
Samminjitam va baham pasareyya,
pasāritam vā bāham Sammihieyya
evameva—Vin. I. 5
Just as a Strongmanwould stretchout
a handfoldedor fold up a hand
stretchedout, evenso: sam +Rij +i
T la, pp.; pa + Sr +e+ evya,caus.
opt. 3. sg.: pa +Sr+e+itta,
caus.pp.: sam +Riij+ eyya,opt.34
58. with seyyathapinama,opt. is
used
Seyyathapi nama bijanam
tarupānam udakam alabhantānam
siyaafifiathattamsiyaviparinamo
-
S. III. 91
Just as therewould bea changeof
young seedswhentheyarenot
receivingwater;a + Labh +a +nta,
Pr.p.; As +y@(Skt.yat);afiiatha,
indel.+tta,der.;vi +pati +Sr +a,
der.
Seyyathapi nama maniko hutva
uddekanikoassa—M. II. 39
lustasone,beinga watervessel
Seyyathāpi Seyyathāpi
before,wouldbecome
aladle Just asa foolishneedlemerchant
afterward;this idiomaticexpression wouldthinkof sellinga needleto a
is similar to cātiyā udaāicanabhāvap- needlemaker;vanija+ka,der.;vi +
patto viya, Dh, A.; the same meaning Krt +e +tabba,fut.pp.; Man +ya +
is conveyedby thefollowing eyya,opt.3. sg.
expression:ma acariyo hutva
antevadsim vasi,M. IT, 39; Hii (Bhi) + Seyyathapipakkhi sakuno—D. I. 71
tvd,absol.; As +ya (Skt.yat), opt.#7. Just asa bird;pakkha+i, der.
Sg.
Seyyathapipisacillika —Vin. I. 152;
Seyyathapinama vacchassa II. 115
tarunassamataramapassantassa Just astree-goblins;
pisdcaeva
siya annathattam siya viparinamo- pisacillika,Cy. 1072
S. III. 91
Just as,therewouldbea changeofa Seyyathāpipubbe—M. I. 234
youngcalf, whenheis notseeingthe Just asbefore
mother; a + passa + nta, prp.; As +
va (Skt.yat), opt.3. sg.; vi +pari + Seyyathāpipubbeagārikabhūto—D.
Nam + a, der. II.133;
A.IV.370;
Vin.
I.17
Tustasonewhowasa householder
Seyyathapinamasakamkhettam previously;agara+ika,der.+Bhi+
ta,pp.
ohaya param khettam
niddayitabbammanneyya—D. I. 231
Just as onewouldthink
of cutting off Seyyathapipuranasikottho—Vin.
other’sfield,leaving
hisownbehind IV. 171
uncut;o +Ha +ya, absol.;ni +Da + Just asa formerleatherworker;
: Ī -.. >
ya + i + tabba,fut. pp.; Man +ya + purānacammakāroti attho,Cy. 884
eyya,opt. 3”. sg.
Seyyathapipuriso vanam ;
Seyyathapinamasuddhamvattham ālimpeyya,yāvadevaropanatthāya-
apagatakālakamsammadeva S. IV. 177 ia
Tustasa personappliesmedicineon
rajanampatiganheyya—Vin. I. 16i
thewound
forthesake
ofgetting
it
Just asa cleancloth, freefromstains,
healed:@+Li(m)p +evya,opt.3”.
i - +(d) + sg.; yava+(d) +eva,indcl.;Ruh +e
apa + Gam + ta, pp.; samma
+ana,caus.der. +atthaya
eva, ; pati +Grh + na@+eyya, meta.
opt. 3™.sg.
Seyyathāpi.. puriso addhānamagga-
Seyyathāpināma sūcivāniiako patipanno—D. 1.79
Tustasaperson
embarked
ona long-
sūcikārassa santike sūeim E
vikketabbammaniieyya—S. II. 215- distanceiourney;seyyathāpi:se )
6 (=tam,Magadhiform ofso) +yatha
963
 U Seyyathāpi
Seyyathapi Seyyathapi
hi T api,indcl.illustratinga simile:
Just as, brahmin,eightor tenor twelve
hatthamdhopeyya,padenava immersing
inthewater;
uppala+ini;
kl eggsofa hen,whichare
properly api +ekaccdni;Jan +ta,pp.; sam+
MIHI pp.
brooded,properlywarmedupand
pādamdhopeyya— D. I. 124

IA Seyyathapipuriso asimkosiya
properlytreatedby thehen:tani +
Just as,venerableGotama,onewould
rinsehandwith handor footwithfoot;
Vrdh+ta,pp.; udaka+anu+Gam+
ta,pp.; anto+ni +Majj +ta,pp.;
assu’ As +yu (Skt.yus), opt.3™.pl; Pus +i +ini, der.
UI pavāheyya—
D. I. 77
adhi +Si+a+i+ta PP.; pari +
Dhāv +a +eyya,opt. 3”. sg.
lustas a personwould draw out the
Svid +e + i + ta, caus.PP.; pari + Seyyathapimaharajakumbhakaro
Seyyathapimakkata —
Vin. II. 138
ies eyya,caus.opt.3. sg.
Bhi +e + i + ta, caus.pp.
Justasmonkeys ya kumbhakarantevasi
va
suparikammakataya
mattikaya
Seyyathapi brahmana brahmana- yamyadevabhajanavikatim
I Seyyathapi -Puriso ahim karanda Seyyathāpi mani veluriyo subho
i ". bhoiane—Vin. I, 44 ākamkheyya tamtadevakareyya,
uddhareyya
—D. I. 77 iātimā atthamso suparikammakato
Just as brahminsat themealtime abhinipphādeyya —D. I. 78
lust asa persontakesa snakeout of acchovippasannosabbākāra-
sampanno—D. I. 76 tĀ Just as,greatking,a potteror his
thebox or out of theSlough;u(t) +Hr
Seyyathapi bhagini puriso hatthim Tustasa gemof Veluriya,beautiful, apprentice wouldexpecttomake |
or Dhr t a t eyya,opi. 3". sg.
datvakacchesajieyya—Vin. III. 208 original,octagonal,
wellpolished, whatever varietyof potswiththeclay
Sister, just asa man.havinggivenaway clear,transparent,
excellentin MANE wellprepared,
allthathemakes
and
Seyyathāpi.. puriso odātena
theelephant,would hesitatetogivethe respect;attha + amsa,;Su +pari produces;
su +parikamma+Ioa
vatthena sasīsampārupitvā nisinno
girth (havinggiven away thebig or kamma+ kata; vi +pa +Sad +ta, pp.:vam(vad)+yam+Mi pa +
assa—
D. I. 76
more valuable thing, hesitatetogive pp.; sabba + Gkara + sam + Pad +
Kamks+a +eyva,opt.3”. sg.; tam
Just asa person,havingcoveredthe
a small or less valuablething);Da + ta, pp.
(tad)+tam+eva;abhi+ni(s) +Pad
bodywith a whitecloth up to thehead rd e
va, absol.;Sad+ya +eyya,opt.3. +e +eyya,caus.opt.3”. sg.
would havesatdown:patātiīrti
+ tva, meta.absol.; ni + Sad + ta,
ro
SZ. Seyyathapi mallamutthikagama-
Pp.;As +ya(Skt.yat),opt.3. sg. poddavā
—Vin.
II.105 MI Seyyathapimaharajapabbata-
samkhepeudakarahadoaccho
Seyyathāpi bhanteambamputtho Just as fightersandvillageyon NGIA
vippasannoanāvilo—D. Lo M
labujam vyakareyya,labujam va mallamutthikāti
mutthikamalla;
.
Seyyathapi .. puriso muāiamhā Justas,greatking,a poolof waterin a
putthoambamvyakareyya —
D. I. 53 gāmaputavātichavirāgamandanā-
īsikam pavāheyya —D. I. 77 mountain glen,clean,translucent
and
Justas,venerable
sir,onewouldtalk nuyutta nagarikamanussa,
Just asa person..would causeto pull unstirred:vi +pa +Sad +ta,pp.; an
aboutlabuja(bread-fruit)whenheis gamapotakatipi
patho,Cy.1199
out a reedfrom the sheathofa Muhia + avila
askedaboutmango or wouldtalkabout
Brass;pa t Kah-- e t- eyya,caus.opt.
mango whenheisaskedaboutlabuja; Seyyathapi maharaja HE PI
34.
5g
rā

Prch +ta,pp.; vi +@+Kr + eyya, vā paduminiyamvā pupdarīkiniya1

Seyyathapimaharajapuriso iti
ādāvakammantepayoleyya—D. I.
opt. 3”, sg. va, appekaccaniuppalan!v8 TE
Seyyathapi puriso sakamha gama 71
padumānivāpundarīkāni
va uda
anflam gamam gaccheya—D. I. 81 Justas,reioreatking,a
- MImanhaving
ravingtakena
Seyyathapi bhantesovannaviggaho iātāni udakesamvaddhāni KI,
Justasa personwouldgo fromhis loanwouldinvestit in business
udakānuggatāniantonimuggapo Teo ol pa +
manussaviggaham atirocati—
D. II. ises: aa + Da + ya, absol.;
snterprises, ae 5
own
village to anothervillage enterp
210,226 — D.1.75 denne 34. Ind
Yuj +e+ evya,caus.opt.-
Justas, venerable
sir,agoldenfigure a, a greatking,ina pondof meee
Seyyathāpi brāhmana kukkutiyā
Surpassesa humanfigureinshine; lily, red-lotus,orwhite-lotus;some
andani attha va dasa va dvādasa Seyyathapimahāraiapuriso R
manussa+ viggaha;ati +Rue +a + of thewaterlilies, red-lotuses or
va tānassukukkutiyā sammā bandhanāgārebaddhoassa—D. I.
white- lotusesarebornin theEa I
ti, pres. 3. se, Just as, greatking, a manwho would
adhisayitāni sammā pariseditani grownup in thewater,accompaniedDy
havebeenputinjail; Badh +ta,pp.;
sammaparibhavitani —Vin. IHI. 3 thewaterandfosteringafter
Seyyathāpi
bhoGotama
hatthena
va
965
 Seyyathapi
Seyyasukham So
—- Seyyapekkhaka
As +ya (Skt.yat),opt.3”. sg.
amu+pari +Dhāv --a 3.ti, pres, 34,
withouta hollow,solidandcompact
i 9 . ar 3 a

58.5Gnu +pari + Vrt+ @ 4 ti, pres, passasukhantiyathāsampari-

Seyyathapi maharaja majjhe +chiddo
3 sg. valtakamsavantassa
simghatake pasado —D. 1.83
dakkhinapassavāmapassānam
Just as,greatking, a mansionin the Sevanacittam
upatthite—Vin. IHI.29
Seyyathapi sa bhikkhay e sīvathikā sukham,middhasukhanti
middle of a cross-road Whenthethoughtof sexual KT
vālānam āmanussānamāvāso—A, niddāsukham,Cy. II. 69; anu 3
Yuj +ta, pp. indulgencehadarisen;upa 1Bike I
Seyyathapi migaluddaka —Vin, I.
III. 269
+ta op - theruleofloc. absl.is not
Bhikkhus,iustasthatcemetery
isan i - lu Whao
ki,
152 appliedhere
abodeofvery cruel non-humans Seyyapekkhakagacchanti
— Vin
Just as hunters

Seyyathāpi sāradam badara pandu a

(They) ing pl:
go to seethesleeping places;
a
Seyyathapi mūgasūkarā — Vin. I.
—A.I. 181 seyyā
a --pekkhakā:pa t Iks
iks t+a
a t ka,
d water-
102
der.
lust as yellow jujube fruit in the
Just asdumb Pigs; migasitkarati
autumn:sarada + a, der
thullasarīrasūkarā (at pigs), Cy. V.
Seyyo ayogulo bhutto TU
e "J I e 9
1034
Seyyathava pana akkham abbhan- aggisikhūpamo— Vin. IH
Sevitabbobhajitabbopayiru- aa,
—
o)
—————.
ana

ieyya yāvadevabhārassa nittharana- It

risis |betterthataniron
i ball,heatedup
ball,
ame
o f fire, 1S pāsitabbo—A. IV.32
tthāya—S. IV. 177 andsimilar to theflameoffir
11.137 Heshouldbeassociatedwith,
lust as a personlubricatestheaxel for eaten;sevyo,indcl. usedfor Tai . ou + i

Just as shavenheadedportersof the ie andattended

accompanied on;Set
;
comparison;Bhuj j + ta,pp-»
: " Tap
£P' Ia, —.
ete
——
thesakeofcarrying theloadacross: ;+ 7+ tabba,
king; rafifio kuhifici gacchato +tabba, fut.PP-: Bhaj+ e7 .
pp.: aggi + sikha +upama
abhi +Anj + eyya,opt. 3". sg.;yava fut.pp.ipari t upa " As +i + tal
bhandavāhā manussa,Cy, 12]3
+ (d) + eva; ni +Str +ana, der. meta.fut.pp.
i āpivo—S.Kiia
Seyyohoti,napapiy® I. 76
Seyyathapi Radha. kumārakā vā REI FE
Seyyam āvuso Rāhuia janahi —Vin. It becomesbeneficial,not ha
kumāriyo vā pamsvāgārakehi Sesakamupaneti—Vin. IV.
papa +iya,der. pose;
kīlanti—S. III. 190 IV. 16 Isetheremainder
Us A forotherp
c 2
er pur
Dear Rahula,find a sleepingplace; He
ya Jatthavadinnotam¢
: ;
etapetva,
Just as, Radha,little boysor girlsplay ī akāmamgamō
Serī sayamvasīyenakamamg - hayaupaneti,
Jan +na +hi, imper.2”. sg, sesakamannassatt
with little toy- housesmadeof soil: M. I. 506 a +ti, pres.
Cv. 918; upa + Ni +
pamsu +agara +ka, der.: Krid +a The one who is independent,masterof
Seyyam kappesi—Vin. II. 303 3"SE
r nti, pres, 3. pl. himselfandmovingaccordingtohisI
Slept;kappate-s i, denom.pst.
wish; sa + Īr --ī, der.;sayam —Vin. IV. 181
Misa Sesakambhuijati KA Ik
Seyyathāpi velu attavadhāyaphalam yena tk
+ ¢ der;yene m +gar ma, der.
+kaman
+T,der.; Sats what
Eatswhatis1sleftover;Bhu(n)
deti parabhavaya —Vin, [I. 188
Seyyam santharitva —Vin, IV 274 pres.3”, sg.
Just as bambootreebearsfruit to its Selamayepatte iaagavato
deathanddestruction:para +bhava Havingspreadthesleepingmat;Sz+
anāmesum—Vin. ORAA
upanāmesun I issaiietha—S.E IV. 289 > +
Sesakamvissalietha
eyya,der.;sam+Str +i +tva,absol. +ya +€
(They) offered four b TA Giveawaytherest;W ) ri
: : ~t* ī ~ Y,

Seyyathapi sa gaddulabaddho : to the Blessed One;

stone, >>SEAI, 3 a 2 pi.
tha,caus.imper:2 -Ē
Seyyasukhampassasukham
tameva an uparidhāvati, mava,der.;upa
E
+Nam
i I +ernrs 71,

ānuparivattati—M. II, 232 middhasukham

anuyuttoviharati- o arā
caus.pst. 3”. }
MĀ E 'issāmi
So atta :so loko so peccaKora
Ae
M. I. 102
Just asa dog, tied to a postby iccodhuvosassatoavipariy
nice
Abidesenioyingthepleasureof i asusiro : 204
a leatherstrap,keepson running Selo pabbato acchiddoasus dhammo-S. IIL. 20
round it; gaddula +Badh 4 fa, pp.; lyingdown,lollingandsleeping; ekaghano—Vin. I. 184 Te l €um
iT the soul . I am the VVO rl d, after
seyyasukhantimancapithasukham, 4 rockymountainwithouta
967
 So
goingtothenextbirthI will be
Permanent,constant,eternalandof
unchanging
nature:
Decca:pa --I (i)3
ya, absol.
III. 49
He grows upwardanddoesnottum
backtothelowerlevel;abhi +Hr +a
+ ti, pres, 37%Sg.; hinaya + @+ Vrt +
a * ti,pres.3. sg.
So ārakāva Samghamhā,samgho ca
tena —A. IV. 201
Heis farawayfromtheSamgha
and
theSamghafrom him;Graka,indel. 4
eva, ārakā is used with ab].
So evamassavaeanīyo—M. II. 239
He shouldbeadvisedthus:evam +
assa; Vac+ aniya,Fut.pp.
So evamassaveditabbo—M. I. 173
He shouldbe understoodthus; Vid +¢
+ 1+ tabba,caus.Sut.pp.
Sokapariddavānam Samatikkamaya
dukkhadomanassanam
atthamgamayanayassaadhigamaya
nibbanassa sacchikiriyāya
ma ya) —M. I.
For thetranscendenceof sorrow and
lamentation,eliminationofaffliction
anddispleasure,realisationofthe right Theone,whogivesa residence,gives
way andfor theexperienceof Nibbana:
Sam +ali +Kram + a, der ‘ attham +-
Gam + a, der; adhi + Gam + a. der.;
Sa + acchi(=akkhi) +kiriyā
So karoti, so patisamvediyati —s. Il.
76
It is thesamePersonwho does(the
Soeāmaham So tasmim
action), and €xperiences (the result);
Pati +sam +Vid +e +'i, Caus.
pres, paralysed;du +vanna,v =b;du +I, So tatthafiayo—S.V. 169
ats SZ. dasa;bahu --ābādha,meta.;pakkha It is thewaythere
+Han +ta,pp.
So tatthevamatameyya —M. IHI.
SokasabhayeJivite maranasabhaye
159 :
iīvite—A.V.83 Soeāmahambhusam—5.I. 12 I
egi , 4
I grieveexcessively;socadmi +aham: It woulddiethere;matam+eyya,
In thelife withfearofgrief, withfear
Suc +a +mi, pres. I". sg.; bhusam, unusual expression; e (from f) +
ofdeath:soka +Sabhaya
adv. indcl. eyya,opt.3”.sg.
So kuhimgamibhavissati?—M. |, 8
Socicca paridevicea cuto ca Sotabbaficassamaniianti —D.I. 175
What coursewill he take?:kuhim,
saddhammā- A. IV. 294 Theythinkthathisteaching should
indcl. + Gam +%.der
He wassad,he lamented
andpone beheard (is worthlisteningto);Ve
sotabbam ' ca t assa;Man t ya
Sokhummena samannagato—A, I], theone fallen fromthetrueDga;
nti,pres.3”. pl.
Sue +a+ i, pst. 3". sg. t ca; por +
Tī
Div +a +i, pst. 3%.sg. +ca; Cyu +
Endowedwith subtlety;sukhuma+ So tamdatthukamo—Vin.I. MAA E
ta, DP.
ya, der.
He, beingdesirousof seeingIt; Drs
tum,inf. +kama
Soceyyani i rocemii —A. V'.MATI
263
Socatikilamatiparidevati
I prefer (their) ways of purificcation:
for i s of i.
urattālim kandati sammoham So tayadujjano,afinaditthikena
suci + eyya, der; Rue + e + mi, pres.
āpaiiati —M. I. 86 aiifiakhantikena RA To
I", sg,
He sorrows,grieves,laments,cries aūūiatrayogenaaāhathācariyaKe
beatingthechestandbecomes 87
Sondam ussapetvapahattha-
confused;Suc+a +ti,pres.3".sg; ToaKEIRA to understand by 7
kannavaloyena Bhagavatena
Klam+a +ti.pres.3”.sg.:pari + whohasa differentview,PUAA
Div + a +th pres. 3". sg.; Krand
abhidhavi—
Vin.
11.195 allegiance,
different o : aoe
He, havingliftedupthe I os
a+ ti pres. 3 sa; sam +Muh practice
anddifferent
teacTAUI
straightto theBlessedOneWi E :
T a, der.;ā t Pad 4ya +ti,pres. iāna; aāhatra, indcl. used HU ‘ Ti
up earsand tail:u(f) +Sri ieMi Mi
2 te or abl.; annathd,indcl. +Ti iyaka;
tva, caus.absol.;pa +Hrs E a, >
ahiiesam ācariyānam santike
kanna + vala; abhi + Dhav+1, pst.
So ca sabbadado hoti, yo dadāti vasantena,
Cy.Ill. 198
S| So
upassayam —S. I. 32
-— Vin.
IL 195 a—M 3 203
Sotavinneyyasaddā—M.
Sondam oropetvā—Vin. : ae
everything;Da +ti, root redup.,
pres. The sounds,to beunderstooc
Havingcausedto putdownthe sota+ vi+Jha +
throughtheear;sofa +Vi
3”. sg. upa +Sri +a, der. € »+ Ruh + e + tva, caus. absol.
eyya,der.
3. -
So ca hotidubbannoduddaso Sondipanicimaniamgānii T. i—Vi .118
So tasmimupanandhi —Vin. WiKō,
okotimakobavhabadho kanova kapāle samodahitvā—, n.
HHeharboured
harbo grudgeagainst
a ANA
him;i;
kunī vākhaīiiovāpakkhahato
vā- : s limbs:
Insertingthelim Athe fourlegs
AI
+ naddhaor nandha(fromNah)
M. III. 169 andtheneckasthefifth,in 1tsTe sa: i (ū
cp.āhadanti ta
tthad¢ (ā t ha
?, pst. 3".sg.;CPp.
Hetooisugly,unsightly,
disfigured, i + - i t iwā,
shell;sam +o +Dha+avtit*
(from Han) + nti)
alwayssick,blind,crippled,
lame
or absol.
969
ae
 Sota
Svākkhāte
Sopanakalimgaram

so +idani +ayam; vi +Ksip +ta, Itlooks

beautiful
allthetime;
Subh+
1ie r
pp. + riipa
a +ti,pres.3“. sg.;sabbakalam,
acc.
for loc.
Sote otārehī —Vin. IIL 17
Sopanakalimgaram nissayaatthasi
Make inom
Tem sink down m the Sean: Somanassampaham duvidhena
a ke —Vin. II. 128
-. TP -
ee-a (Git —_ 2iner ws
i”. o
3E. Stoodat thestaircase; vadāmi—D. II. 278
Evenmentalease| explainin two
sopanakalevaraM. Il. 92;ni +Sri +
ya,absol.; a +Stha +s + i, pst.3°. ways;somanassam +api * aham;Vad
c
SZ.
ta +mi,pres.I". sg.

So mamassakilamathosamamassa
= 1 + Gré + Io Sopi niinassatadisovayo samapassa
r
Dir +. E = ta 2A vihesā—M. I. 168;IIL. 128;Vin. L 5
M, Claus. Ger x Gotamassapahāveyyattiyam
It wouldbea fatigueforme,it ould
“=, ise + e
ma. - iāneyya —M. I. 175
or E -—io bea vexationfor me;mama~assa
KEE amu 2 > .. heat a Indeed,he shouldbeof thesame
od?We— IA
. FI
calibrewho would knowrecluse
Soyevatepatovaro—Vin. IIL 241
Gotama’s
qualityof wisdom,
so7 api;
?rd Thatveryclothof yoursIs more
SoZ, P2EDOssīninātadhsmmo
vinip2 ni alg nūna, emph. p. T assa, opt 3 - 5g.;
valuable:so + fy) + eva
sambodhīparāysans —-S.V. 193343 fadiso + eva; panna + viyatia +ya >
sottn sīnānim ādāya —M. H. 46 rast
iva, J
der.: =
Jan + na- + eyya, ciopt. 3".
7
i hī one nā
E One mo has rūri Soratohoti sukhasamvāso —Ā. HI.
ī18WIHRBE
Takena
hark—scralrihs
A-SITEIChermd; hath- g
To

nomde— a —Āe 349

me -"-no oā e
Theonewhois 2entleandeasyto live
Sobbhe nīkhanāhi —D.1. 127
with;surata>a. der.:sukha+sam~
Setrhi
tehotu
—MiII 183 Buryinadeep
pit;sobbha
(Skt Vas ra, der.
MeZY mui
MOUOewellandhappy-
VO) We = ki aw+anki Iāhra)
ni + Khan + a7 hi, imper.

So loko so atta,so pecca

bhavissāmi,niccodhuvosassato
Sobbhevānarakevāpapātevā aviparināmadhammo, sassatisamam
Netthinā avysyema—D. L 72
papata—Vin.IHI.74 tathevathassāmi—M. 1.136
Mayyoufallintoadeep
pit.ā I amtheworld,I amthesoul,thatI will
purgatoryor a precipice;pa cometo beafterdeparture, permanent,
Setthina paccāgaccheyya—A. IV. imper. 2". sg
constant,eternal,andof unchanging
418 i nature,andreemainthesameforever,
“ Sg7
Would come back safely: pati + @ + Sobhatidamāyasmato
Kosiyassa, tatha +eva:Stha +ssami,fut. 5
= adhānam natthi —A. v. 126
Setāvadhā
>
gsaccha + evya, opt. #* sg. yathātampubbekatapuāhassa
—M.
HETEIS no attention to hear- so;
I. 253
ava+
a Dhd
a ++,ana, der; natthi-kea
na + Solasakahapanagghanakam —Vin.
So tthimattānam
imatta karoti;
—A. III. 45 This is goodfor theve IV. 255
AS Tftl, pres. 3% ge -
(He) keepshimselfwell: sotthim+ just as for theonewho hasalready A thingof thevalue
of sixteen
15 an indci.
as TE MATI Sg.; this is also aval
used
s; sobhati +
attanam;Kr +o +ti,pres.3”. sg done meritoriousdeed kahapana(coppercoin);solasa*
conjunctive;
idam;yathātam,indcl. kahāpanat agghanaka
Sotāvadhānass E kata +pufifia
Sapayirupāsanā Sodānāyam vikkhittarūpo — Vin.
bahukārā—
M. II. 176 Nei
II. 154 Svākkhātedhammavinayepabbaiitā
"To sit by" is guiteuseful
Y 15 gui for giving Sobhati
sabbakālam
—D. IHI.202
Now, he seemsto be ratherperplexed;
971
 Svakkhato
Svedāni Haninantu Hatthapallatthikaya
samana —
S, I. 217; Vin. I. 162
assigned;
u(t) +Drs +ta,Pp.
Being renouncedpersonsin this

Svatanaya bhattam saddhim

pa +Vraj +i +ta,pp.; As +mana,
bhikkhusamghena —M. 11.50
pr.p.
Meal for tomorrowwith the
Hanhantuyannatthaya—A. IV. 42 Hatthatopattamgahetvā—Vin. II.
communityof bhikkhus:svatana
Svākkhāto Bhagavatā Dhammo, Maytheybe slaughteredfor the lll
(Skt. svastana), indel.
sanditthikoakāliko ehipassiko sacrifice;Han +ya+ ntu,pass Havingtakenthebowlfromthehand:
opanayiko paccattam veditabbo imper. 3. pl.; yafiia +atthaya Grh +e +tva,absol.
Svatanaya bhattena nimanteti—M.
viīhiūhi—D. II. 93;S. I. 220:V. 343
1.369
By theBlessedOne theDhammahas Hata dissanti vilutta dissanti Hatthatthare
nisīdatu
—M. II. 66
Invites for themealtomorrow:ni +
beenwell explained,which is ākotitā dissanti —Vin. III. 263 Pleasesitdownontheelephant-
manta +e +ti, denom.pres,3”. Sg.
verifiableby experience,going beyond (People)are seenkilled, plundered spread;hatthi+atthare;ni +Sad+a
time,inviting to comeandsee; andattacked;Han +ta,pp; Drs +ya t tu,imper.3". sg.
Svadhitthitam adhitthāti —A. IV,
effectiveandto be realisedby the wise +nti,pass.pres. 3. pl.; vit Lup +
418
within themselves:su +@4 Khya + ta,pp.; @ + Kut + e +i + ta, caus. pp. Hatthaniddhunakam
bhuhiati—Vin.
Fixes well on it; sw +adhi +Stha +i
fa, pp.; Sam +dittha + ika, der: a + IV. 196 k
" ta,pp.; adhi +Stha +ti,pres.3”
kala +ika, der.; ehi. imper.2"7.sg. + Hatāvasesakābhavissanti—D. I. 135 Eats,whileshaking
thehand;ni +Dha
Ari SE
passa, imper.2" sg.+ ika, der: upa Therewill be someleftunpunished; + na +aka, der.adv.
T Nava(from Ni) +ika, der: pati + hata +ava +Sis -- aka, der.; Bhū t a
Svāyam patisahiiīvito—M. I. 333
atta; Vid+e+j+ tabba, caus. fut. +i + ssanti, fut. 3%.pl Hatthanillehakam
bhunjanti—Vin.
That very samepersonhascomeback
DP-;vi t Jia +ii, der.: IV. 198 ae
to life again; so +ayam;pati +sam+
Dhammānussati is cultivated by Hatūpanisohoti sammasamadhi- Eat,whilelickingthehand;ni +Lih +
Jiv +i +ta,pp.
rellecting on these qualities of the A. III. 19 aka, der. adv.
Dhamma Rightconcentrationof mindbecomes
Svaham bhante tatha karissami Hatthapajjotikampi
karonti—M. I.
supportless;Han +ta,pp. + upanisā,
yathā mam mātāpitaro 87
Svakkhato maya dhammo uttano comperh
anuiānissanti —M. II. 56 Theyinflictthepunishmentoi
Vivato pakasito chinnapilotiko —M.
Venerablesir, I will do (it) in sucha hatthapaiiotika,
in whichbothhands
1. 141 Hatthakukkuceam(na) āpaiiati —M.
way thatmy parentswill giveme are wrapped upwithragssoakedin
The Dhammahasbeenwell explained, Il. 138
permission; so +aham;yatha and oil andset fire, Cy. Il. 59
openlyandclearlydeclaredby me;u(t) Hedoesnot movehis handnervously
tatha, indcl.; anu +Jan +nad+i+
Tan +a, der.; yi + Vr+ h
la, pp.; pa >
ssanti, fut. 3" pl.
+ Ka§ +j " ta,pp.; Chid +ta,pp. Hatthakoccham
kottapenti
—Vin.II.
266
Svedāni tvam kālena upasam-
SvāgatamāyasmatoĀnandassa—M. Causeto massage( or to tattoo?)the
kamissasi—Vin. II. 155 a, der.
I. 212 backofthe hand:hatthakocchanti
Now, you will go thereearly pitthihattham,Cy. 1293;Kut +ape ©
Welcometo thevenerableAnanda:
su +a+ Gam +ta, pp.
tomorrow;sve+ iddni;upa +sam+ nti,caus.pres. 3™.pl. Hatthapallatthikaya va hī
Kram +i +ssasi, fut. 24. Sg. dussapallatthikaya va antaraghare
Svatanayabhattam uddittham —Vin. Hatthagāham
vā venigāham
vā- nisīdati—Vin. IV. 189 E
III. 161 Vin. ITI. 120 i Sitsinsidethehousewithioined
hands ormakiingtherobetightunder
A
The meal for tomorrow has been Holdingthehandor holdingthebral toi she “OS g
of hair: Grh + a, der.
thetwoknee-joints Whenlegs are

73
 Hatthapāsam
Hatthigivaya Hatthinago Hatthi
crossed;pari +As +ta,pp. +i+
Hatthavikārena dutiyam āmantetvā
ka,der. D. I. 103 Hatthipadesamodhanamgacchanti
hatthavilamghakenaupalthāpema-
One who hassaton theneckofan —M. I. 184;S. V. 231;A. IIL. 364
M. 1.207;IHI. 157
Hatthapāsam okkantamatte —Vin. elephant,on thebackofa horseor Includein thefoot-printofan
Havingcalleda secondbygivinga
IV. 221 stood on the chariot cover (floor); ni elephant;
sam+0 (ava) +Dha +ana,
signalwithhand,wecausetokeep
it
Rightatthetimeof reaching
the +Sad +ta,pp.; upa +thara(from der.
downbyioininghandstogether;
distanceof thehand-loop; o + Kram Str); Stha +i +ta,pp.
hattha t vikāra; āmani 3:e 1.hā,
+fa;pp. Hatthibhandeetadavoca— Vin. II.
denom.absol.;hattha+vilamghaka;
Hatthinago akinno viharati 194
up +Stha +ape +ma,caus.
pres.
Hatthapasa va na Vijahitabbam - hatthīhi hatthinīhi hatthikalabhehi Saidthisto themahouts;
etam(etad)+
pl.
Vin. III. 200 hatthicchāpakehi— Vin. I. 352 a + Vac+ a, rootredup.,pst.3”. sg.
Or it shouldnotbekeptawayfromthe The leader-elephantis besetwith
Hatthavilamghakena Hatthiyānānikappāpehi— D. I. 49
hand-loop; hattha+pasa;vi +Ha + elephants,she-elephants,elephant
upasamkameyyum - M. IHI. 130 calvesandelephantsucklings: Makereadyelephant carriages;
kappa
tabba,rootredup.,Fut.pp.
They would go withjoined hands;
upa hatthināgotītimahāhatthī,Cy. 1152; + dpe +hi, denom.caus.imper.2™.
T sgm t Kram --eyyum,opt.3”.pl. a + Kir +ta,pp. SE.
Hatthapase thito abhiharati —Vin,
IV. 82
Hatthanafica padanaiicasarassaca Hatthinago sattaratanova Hatthisammadam —A. V. 83
One who hasstoodnearbybrings food:
nimittamaggahesi—M. II, 62 addhattharatanova —A. V. 202 Disturbance
madebyelephants;
Cy.
abhi +Hr + a+ ti. pres. 3, sg.
(She)recognised
thedistinctive The leader-elephant
of sevenor seven equatessammadaor sammadda with
characteristicsof( his ) hands,fēet andhalfcubitshigh sambādha, V.37
Hatthapāse titthati —Vin. IV. 269
and(his) voice;a+ Grh +e ++i
Stands
nearby
Pst 2": gi Hatthinikam niyyadetva—Vin. I. Hatthisammaddam
278 assasammaddam rathasammaddam-
Hatthappattam susanam mafifie -
Hatthabharanam
dharenti-—
Vin. IL. Havingcausedto handovertheshe- Vin. IV. 160
Vin. I. 15
106 elephant;hatthini +ka; ni + ®+ Yat Disturbancecausedby elephants,
Like a cemeteryat hand:hatta +pa+
They wearhand-ornaments:
Dhrtet +e +tva, caus. absol. horsesandchariots;sammaddam =
Ap + ta, pp.
nti,caus.pres.3”.pl. sambadham, Cy. 880
Hatthiniyo kāyam
Hatthaphanakena keseosanhenti - Hatthismimpikatāvi assasmimpi
Hattharuyhe amkusagayhesippe- upanighamsantiyogacchanti—Vin.
Vin. II. 107 katāvi rathasmimpikatāvi
M. II. 94 1.352
Smoothhairwiththehand-comb; dhanusmimpikatāvi tharusmimpi
In theartof ridingelephants
and She-elephants
moveawayrubbingthe
Phanakenati dantamayādisuyena katāvi—M. II. 69
wieldingthegoad;hatthi+@+Ruh+ bodyveryhard;upa+ni +Ghrs+a
kenaci, hatthaphanakenati +nta +7,f. pr.p. Theonewhois anexpertin elephant-
va, meta,fut. pp.;amkusa+Grh+
hatthenevaPhanakakiccam karontā riding,horse-riding,
chariot-driving.
ya, meta,fut.pp..
amgulīhi osanhenti, Cy. 1200-1: Hatthipadam tesam archery,andin swordsmanship; Kr +
o t sanha te d nti, denom.pres. aggamakkhayati,yadidam tāvī, PP:
Hatthigavassapatiggahana
3”. pl. mahantattena—M. I. 184
pativirato—D. I. 5
Foot-printof anelephantis saidto be Hatthismimpisikkhati —A. III. 32
Refrainedfromaccepting
elephants,
Hatthampi pādampi kīlāpentā - thehighest
amongthem,intermsof He trainshimselfin theartof riding
cows, and horses
. s
; I

Vin. IV. 186 greatness;d +Khyd +ya +fi, pass. elephants;sikkhati,desid.from Sak
Making thehandandthefootplay; pres,3". sg.; yadidam,indcl.;
Krid +dpe +nta,pr.p. Mahanta+ tta, der Hatthi pariyutthati—Vin. II. 138
 Handa
Handa Handa

Hatthehi ca padehi ca vVayamamano lan +a +ma, imper.

Let us kill him; He
—M. L. 135; S. IV. 174 I r

Le
‘ KEI n eame
3 : hands and feet
Handa. ko nu kho ime
Handabrahmanatiadasi—Vin. IV.
brāhmanisayo gatā? —M. II. 155
I. 76: Ti. 13 161
Where ā i hrahmn soc Gone
M I TI Ve taa KE cso Ola sages gone,
ī . Te. GG aa € =
: : i é g e
se
Hegaveit saying,“Hereit 1s,
am > -

tlaithens
Hamāera epakkamitvā
na atecirn
HandacadanimayambheGotama
Handabhaginiimamcivaram—Vin.
bo nimi
kapparamapadive
Suit Hatthe nam RIHI
eacchāma,bahukiccā mayambahu
'
mecehi— Vin. Il
ge. III ava
‘<= sevemakbs
MS gm + = — Vin.
' HiL12
i
IV. 61
karanīvā— D. I. 85, IL 76; M. III. 14;
Oh sister.
— THIS -
=- K
a kau
Ī
ree

tā > Ke — E
et ates I +2 2acda\im Mine 22n3v2
tiīaitinena vipātetvā cīvarsm
acthati — Vii 2
HandabhaneUpalinivattassu
—Vin.
si bbenti — Vin_ IL 115 II. 182
© DtHBes 35 E Ki E E KE E KAAKU,
DearfriendUpali,turnback, OM"
Handa te āvuso samghātim —Vin.
chi mit ret e+ St OE
fit. 241
end. here is your cuuc™

Handabhanteupahanayo
—Vin. L.
Hananti
vabandhanti
vapabbajenti Handa te sappim, telam medehi -
186
= yathapaccayam va karenti — A.
Vin. IV. 248
Hatthe nikkhipitvā pakkamitabbam Venerablesir. theseare the san
IL. 208 Har
Ficte is your ive me oil; Da * €
—Vin. IV. 163-4 ‘ (for you)
TANGI nm,
bind him,
banish
riaving
=put
pu -
ne and
han iha g o dhammamca
; . atever hey lke Handamayamāvus
c ustec a -
Handadānāhamtividhena a— Vin. IL
ners EE E 5 © Circumstances + vinayam ca samgāyām
pe Ls es U ied e e2-5 ace
D Batnidh +at samādhim bhāvemi—M. ITI. 162 285
on of
May I practiseconcentrati Let us, friends, rehearsetheDhamma
MAE RIPI Hrai t e t mii,
Su patto dh oto hotii-
Hatthesu dhotesu
mind in threefoldway; handa ' idani
pres. andtheVinava; sam 7 Gai +a +ma,
- aham; Bhā t e T mi, caus pres.1*.pl
When
Ah
hands
ue
Ī
are washed.
Cd, bow]
DOW! IS I"osg
washed:Dhdy +a +ta, pr
ndakuto nu tvam
Hand: amāāgacchasi
i Handa mayamBuddhavacanam
divādivassa? —S. I. 89 Handanamabhisapama
—M. II. 155 chandasoaropema—Vin. II. 139
latthesu
E : a.
patiganhanti
ati
—Vin. I. 4 Let us cursehim;abhi +Sap +a*
From where do you come? or right Letusputthewordsofthe Buddha
Receive into the hands:>Pall
pati +Grinl
at noon; nu, interr. p.; handati ma, imper.I". pi i
into i form; )ā 3 Ruh+
metric ht €et ma,
e
na + ntl, pres. 3. pl
vavasāyatthenipāto, Cy. I. 159 ceaus.imper.
I". PĪ-
Handa nam nema—Vin. I. 76
Hatthesu pindaya caranti —Vin. | Let us takehim to; Ni +a " ma, Handa vata pho gacchama—D. HI.
Handa kuto nu tvamTapassi
90; III. 245 Ie imper.I". pl. 16
āgacchasi, divādivassa? —M. I. 373
TheyYmove
n about collec
out collecting alms into Let's go
Tapassi,
wheredoyoucomefrom?
Handa nam hanama—M. I. 333
or right at noon; divasassāpidiva,
977
76
 Handāham
Handaham atirekaya —A. III. 215
MayI (strive) for somethingmore;
handa + aham
Handāham nipaiiissāmi —A. IV. 332
Pi
Well, I will lie down; ni + Pad +ya 4
A Kusa- grass; pa +Str + i + tv@,absol.
i+ ssami,fut. 1". sg. .
i.) Fa
Harantimafifiemanovanāni
samadhim alabhamānassa
ī IE
bhikkhuno—M. I. 16
The forests,I think,takeaway the
mindofa bhikkhuwhois notgetting
.
H concentration;Hr +a +nti, pres. Pa
j pl.; mafiie,indcl.;mano,acc.sg
sg.;
Labh+a+ mana,prp.
j +ya, fut. pp.+ sesa; Grh +e +tv@
ITATI
i i
Haritakapannikam pakinanti —Vin.
HEI Il. 267
i:
They buygreenleaves:
RI, haritakaticevapakkafica pakinanti,
pakinnakāpanampasāritanti vuttam
i j
hoti, Cy. 1293-4;pa +Kri +na + nti:
pres. 3. pl.
Na
4
i Haritani tinani sammaddanta—Vin.
I. 137;IV. 296
Tramplingdown greengrass;Mrd +ya
t Ata, pr.p.
Harite uccaram pi passavampi
khelam pi karonti —Vin. IV. 205
(They) urinate,defecateandspit on the
green
Harite chaddeyya—Vin. IV. 266
Would throwaway on thegreen
Haritena gomayenapathavim
opuīiiāpetvā —
Vin. III. 16
Having causedto smearthe floor with
freshcow-dung:o --puāia 3 dpe +
tva, caus. denom. absol.
Haritehi kusehi pattharitva —A,V.
234
Havingstrewnwithgreen(fresh)
Halamdānipakāsitum-M. I. 168;
Vin. I. 5
Now, it is of no useto proclaimit;
halam,indcl.+idāni,indel.;pa +
Kas + i +tum,inf.
Havyasesam
gahetvā
- S. I, 167
a d Having takentheoblationleftover;Hi
absol.
Hasaniyasmimvatthusmim
mihitamattamkaroti—Vin. IV. 187
In a matterto be laughedat,hejust
smiles;Hrs +aniya,fut.pp.;Smi+
fa,meta.pp.
Hasamanakamafifieaiiam
vyākaronti —A. III. 359; Vin. I. 185
They declaregnosisasif theyare
makingajoke;Hrs +a +mana ka,
der.; 4 +Jia; vi +G+ Kr +0 +nti,
pres, 32; o pl.
Hasitenapurisambandhati—
A. IV.
196
Binds a manwith laughter;Hrs +i +
la, pp.
Hānāyaparetinovisesāya —A.IHI.
349
Proceedstothelowerlevel,nottothe
higher;pari t e(fromI) +ti,pres.ny,
se.
Hāniyeva pātikamkhā
Hāniyeva pātikamkhā kusalesu Hiraīiīiam ādāyaagamamsu
—Vin. I.
dhammesu— S. II. 206 270
Only decline is to beekpectedin Takinggoldtheywentoff,a +Da +
wholesomethings;hani +eva;pati +
doublepst. 3”. pl.
Kamks +ya, fut.pp.
Hapeti vacanam—A. IV. 196 Hirafihasuvannamkataficeva
akatafica—M. II. 71
Causesto misstheword;Ha +dpe +
Gold andbullionfinishedand
ti, caus.pres. 3. Sg.
unfinished;katam+ca +eva
Hasadhippayo kayenakayam
Hiraūīasuvannassapūrāpetvā-
amasati —Vin. IV. 111
With the intentionof making Vin.III. 17
Havingcausedto fill (them)Withgold:
somebodylaugh,rubsthebodywith
Pr + Gpe + tva, caus. absol.
thebody:hasa:Hrs +a, der. +
adhippaya;
4 +Mrs +a +fi,pres.
>) Hirafifassa pufijamkarapetva—M.
Te,. 8.
II. 63
Hitānukampī viharissāmi,
Havingcausedtomakea bundle
of gold;Kr +Gpe+ tvā,caus.
mettacittona dosantaro—M. I. 123
I shallabidewithcompassion,
well
absol.
beingandlovingkindness,keepingno
Hiriparikho ariyasāvako—A. IV.
hatredin between;hita +anukampa+
109
i, der.; metta + citto; dosa +antaro
The noblediscipleguardedby moral
shame:hiri t parikhā
Hitva jayaparajayam—S. I. 83
Havingabandoned victoryanddefeat; i 2
Hirīyati kāyaducearitena
—A. IHI. 2
Ha +i+ tva, absol.
He is ashamedof badphysical
Hitva mamattam—D. II. 241
3”, sg.
Havinggivenuptheideaof mine;
mama +tta, der.
Hirottappe satihoti
indriyasamvaro—A. LV.336
Hitva manusamdeham—S. 1.35
There is a guard of senseswhen
Havingabandoned
humanbody;
there is moral shameand fear; hiri +
manu(s) +a, der.
ottappa;hirottappesati, loc. absl.
Himavantapassearannakutikayam- TI i ,
Hinapurisoakkhayatt—M. I. 24
S. 1.61 I
He is saidto bethepersonof low
In a foresthuton theslopeof the
quality;@+Khya +ya +ti,pass.
Himalaya;himavanta+passa,
rd
pres. 3: g,
ice
arahhia +kutika
 Hinam e
Huveyyapavusoti
Hīnamkāyamupapannā—
A. IV. 390
Hinadhimuttiko ca hoti cadhammā—A. III. 440
Born (reached)in a lower realm;upa Huveyyapāvusotivatvā—M. Lin
sakkāyābhirato ca —A. TIL.435 Thecausewasclearlyseenandthe
+Pad + ta,pp.; ace. is used with upa Having
said,“it mayalsobeso”friend;
He is benton lower Statesand + thingsoriginatedfromthecause;su +
T Pad Ha (Bhii) +eyya,opt. 3”. 5g.>apt
delightedparticularly
in theself: - tvā,absol. Drs +ta,pp.; sam+u() +Pad +ta,
avuso; Vad or Vac
adhi +mutti +ka, der.; abhi +Ram pp.
Hinamnamakammam: +ta,pp.
kotthakakammam Hetthato bhūmim vilikhati, uparito
Hetumpaticcasambhuta .
pupphaehaddakakammam—Vin. IV. bhittim hanti —Vin. Il. 175
Hina nama jati: candalajati, hetubhamganirujjhare— S. I. 134
6 Fromthebottomit scratchesthe ee
PO
e
vepaiāti nesādaiāti, rathakāraiāti, Thosewhichhavecomeinto EN
The so calledlow work: thework asa floor,fromthetopit damages
the
pukkusaiāti —Vin. IV. 6 existence,dependingon a cause,cease
Storekeeper,thework asa scavenger: wall: vi +Likh +a + Ui,pres. 3". sg.;
The so called low birth:birthasan to existatthebreakof thecause;pal!
kottha + ka, der: Puppha + Chard + Han +ti, pres. 3”. 5g. ū + ta, wide
iua
awha
at

outcast,birth asa basketweaver,birth +1(t) + ya,absol.;sam+Bh

aka, der. a”.
asa hunter,birth asa cartmaker,birth pp.; ni T Rudh+ya +re,pres:
7 asa scavenger;Ha +ta,pp. HetthaMigaramatupasade —S. V.
pl.?
Hinam nama limgam: atidigham 270
of
atirassam atikanham accodatam - Onthegroundfloorofthe mansion
Hīnāyāvattitvā — Vin. I. 17, 182
Heturūpamāha,saheturūpamāha-
Vin. IV. 7 Migara’s mother (Visakha)
Having turnedbackto thelowerlife M. II. 127 ä
The so called low appearance: too tall. Saidsomething
whichlooks
(having disrobed);hindya +avattitva;
too short,too dark, too white;ati + Hettha padatalesu—D. II. 17 reasonable
Cds andwith a reasonable
ā t Vrt + i + tva,absol. On the soles
iliral
cs m
odata ground
: Hīnenaukkattham
vadeti-—
Vin.IV.
Hinam nama sippam: 7 ike kale —Vin. IV. 115
ā itvā— Vin.I I.48
va paramasitva—Vin. TE ah ae
nalakārasippam kumbhakārasippam At the time of snow (winter): hima +
Speaksto ‘a high’ in a low term Having touched andekamine€
pesakārasippamcammakārasippam a s chair: parā anta + ika, der.
nahāpitasippam
—
Vin. IV.7 Hīnenakhumsesihīnenavambhesi- under the bed or under the chair: £
+Mrs +i+ (va, absol.
34
The so called low craft: basket Vin. II. 18 Hemavannoasobhatha—D.II.
>
I
I; sd
maker'scraft,potter'scraft,weaver’s Scoldedanddespised
in termsof Being of golden colour he KA
Hetthavivate TA ipaticchanne e: tiful:. ;
: a 3 Subh kai 1a),
craft, leatherworker’s craft, barber’s meanbirth; Krus +e +§ +i, pst. beautiful; + a+ tha (tthe
vaccamkatum —Vin. 1.2 I pst. 3S Sk.
craft
3'd 5g.; Vambh +4eta-i, pst. 34 sg. , 'esata
Torelievethemselves ata P place
is open
wherethebottomis openand andthetop =— Vin. I.324
Hinam va papītam vā —S. II. 252 Hoti āpattidatthabbā—VTi I, :
is covered;vi +Vr +fa,Pp-*upari,
Hīnena hīnam vadeti—
Vin. IV. 7 There is an offence to be seen;a
Low orhigh: pa +Ni +ta,pp. Kr +
Speaksto ‘a low’ina lowterm;Vad
+ indcl.; pati +Chad +ta,PP» Pad+
ad * ti,; der;
<P Drs
L +tabba,fut. PP.
e+ ti, pres. 3™.,
sg. tum,inf.
Hinadhimuttika
hīnādhimuttikehi samsandanti Hoti kho sosamayoya aha ta
i aresi—Vin.
Hīnenāpi akkosena khumsenti Hetthā hutvā silam uccaresl ekaiihamsannipataniiE, e
Samenti—S. II. 154
vambhenti—Vin. IV. 4 In. 81 Thereis thattimeatWhich E . ki
Those who havelow inclinations d to lift upa
(They) cause to scold and despiseeven Being below,hecause deitiesgettogetheratone
piss a i
get togetherandtally together; ap. upari; Hū
by low andabusivelanguage stone;hettha,indcl. of
7 .. ; tert e
; m tat?atat nti,pres.3°.P&
hina +adhi +Muc +ti +ka, der: (Bhii) +tva,absol.;u(t)t €€
sam+Syand +a +nti pres. 3”, ; ; ard
+ i, caus, pSt. 9”. S§-
eg
pl.; Hupeyyaāvuso—Vin. 1.8 Hoti ceva kaci satamatta
sama(m)+e (fromI) 4 ntl, pres.
It maybe,friend;Ha (Bhi) +eyva, assadamatta
yadidam
3” pl. $f anna
Hetu ca sudittho hetusamupp
opt. 3”. sg.
981
980 eeez
 Hotu

vanamukhanam
kandiivanahetu
—M.
I. 508
Due to thescratchingof theopenings
of the wound there arises just a
soothingeffect, a bit of enjoyment;
Sata +matta;Svad +ta, pp. +matta;

hetu

Hotu no ettha kathāsallāpo —M. II.

159
May therebe a discussionbetweenus
on this matter:katha +sam +Lap +
a, der.

Hotu bhane — Vin. IV. 157

Let him be there,dear(nevermind,
dear);Ha (Bhi) +a +tu, imper.3”.
sg.

Hoteva kamkhā, hoti vicikicchā -

A. I. 189
Certainly,we havedoubtand
hesitation;hoti +eva